JP2019010310A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of maintaining game interest.SOLUTION: A Pachinko machine 1 includes start pockets capable of receiving a game ball shot into a game area 5a. When a game ball enters a start pocket, determination processing for winning is performed. Then, variation display corresponding to the determination processing result is started, and a winning game is played when a winning pattern is displayed in the variation display. In this respect, in the Pachinko machine 1, a plurality of operation performance processes set to be in different modes depending on operation reception periods within an effective period can be executed.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 60

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine (generally also referred to as a “pachinko machine”) or a spinning-type gaming machine (generally also referred to as a “pachislot machine”).

  Conventionally, as can be seen, for example, in Patent Document 1, there is known a gaming machine in which a game lottery for the progress of a game is performed when a game ball enters a starting port.

  In this type of gaming machine, it is determined whether or not there is a game ball entering the start port. When there is a ball entering the starting port, a game lottery for the progress of the game is performed. As a result, when the jackpot is won, a large number of game balls are paid out to the player by playing the jackpot game, and after the jackpot game, the game state is controlled to be advantageous to the player.

  In addition, when a game lottery related to the progress of the game is performed, an effect of variably displaying a plurality of symbols on the liquid crystal screen is performed. In such an effect, an operation opportunity (such as operating an operation button) may be given to the player until the predetermined effective period elapses. I am trying to maintain my interest.

JP 2012-061263 A

  However, in such a gaming machine, if an operation opportunity is given and it is missed, the operation effect cannot be enjoyed, and there is a concern that the gaming interest will be lowered.

  The present invention has been made in view of such circumstances, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing a decrease in gaming interest.

Means 1: determination means for performing determination;
Privilege granting means for granting a privilege to a player based on a predetermined result obtained by the determination by the determination unit;
A reception effect generating means capable of generating a reception effect to which an operation opportunity is given and capable of executing a post-operation effect when the reception is received in the reception effect;
A pre-permission related display means for performing a pre-permission operation related display that suggests that the stage reception is allowed upon occurrence of the reception effect,
The reception effect includes at least a first reception effect and a second reception effect having different contents as the post-operation effect, the pre-permission operation-related display performed when the first reception effect is generated, The length of time from when the pre-permission operation-related display is started to when the stage reception is permitted is different from the pre-permission operation-related display performed when the second reception effect is generated. Gaming machine.

  According to the above configuration, when the reception effect is generated, the pre-permission operation-related display that suggests that the production reception is permitted is performed, so that it is possible to suppress overlooking that the operation opportunity has been given. It becomes like this.

  Moreover, in the above-described configuration, the pre-permissible operation related display performed when the first reception effect is generated and the pre-permission operation related display performed when the second reception effect is generated, after the pre-permission operation related display is started. Since the length of time until the stage reception is allowed is different, the stage performance in the period until the stage reception is allowed is improved, and this is also applied to the game entertainment. It can be suitably maintained.

  According to the present invention, it is possible to suppress a decrease in gaming interest.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine which is one embodiment of the present invention. It is a right view of a pachinko machine. It is a left view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the front right. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from back. It is the perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front in the state where the door frame was opened from the main body frame and the main body frame was opened from the outer frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the pachinko machine into the door frame, the game board, the main body frame, and the outer frame, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the pachinko machine into the door frame, the game board, the main body frame, and the outer frame, and was seen from the back. It is a front view of the outer frame in a pachinko machine. It is a right view of an outer frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the outer frame from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the outer frame from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the outer frame and was seen from the front. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the site | part of the outer frame side upper hinge member in an outer frame from the lower side, omitting the left frame member, (b) is the exploded perspective view which decomposes | disassembles and shows (a). is there. (A) is a perspective view which expands and shows the state by which the main body frame side upper hinge member of the main body frame is removed with respect to the outer frame side upper hinge member of an outer frame, (b) is an outer upper hinge member. It is a perspective view which expands and shows the state by which the main body side upper hinge member is attached to. It is explanatory drawing which shows the effect | action of the lock member in an outer frame. It is a front view of the door frame in a pachinko machine. It is a right view of a door frame. It is a left view of a door frame. It is a rear view of a door frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from back. It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the AA line in FIG. It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the BB line in FIG. It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the CC line | wire in FIG. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame for every main member and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame for every main member and was seen from back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame base unit in a door frame from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame base unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame base unit for every main member, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame base unit for every main member, and was seen from back. (A) is a front view of the rendering operation unit in the door frame, and (b) is a right side view of the rendering operation unit. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the production operation unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the production operation unit from the back. FIG. 11 is an explanatory view of the effect operation unit as viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends. It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the DD line | wire in Fig.34 (a). It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the EE line | wire in FIG.34 (b). (A) is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the FF line | wire in FIG.34 (b), (b) is an enlarged view of the A section in (a). It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the production operation unit for every main member, and was seen from the front. FIG. 10 is an exploded perspective view of the production operation unit as seen from the rear after being disassembled for each main member. (A) is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the operation button and was seen from the front, (b) was the exploded perspective view which disassembled the operation button and was seen from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the decoration board unit of the production operation unit, and was seen from the front. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state which pressed the operation button in sectional drawing of the production operation unit of FIG. (A) is a view of the production operation unit as viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends, and shows a part of the operation button that is notched and hidden by the first button decoration portion or the button frame of the operation button. It is explanatory drawing shown, (b) is explanatory drawing which shows the site | part which is going to hide by the 1st button decoration part of an operation button, a button frame, etc. in sectional drawing of an effect operation unit. (A) is explanatory drawing shown in the perspective view which looked at the external appearance of the production | presentation operation unit from the front, (b) is explanatory drawing which looked at the external appearance of the production | presentation operation unit from the direction where the central axis of an operation button is extended. . (A) is a front view of the door frame left side unit in the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit viewed from the front, and (c) is a view of the door frame left side unit from the back. FIG. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame left side unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame left side unit and was seen from the back. It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the LL line | wire in Fig.47 (a). (A) is a front view of the door frame right side unit in the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit viewed from the front, and (c) is a view of the door frame right side unit from the rear. FIG. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame right side unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame right side unit and was seen from the back. It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the MM line | wire in Fig.51 (a). (A) is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the NN line | wire in Fig.51 (a), (b) is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the OO line in Fig.51 (a). (A) is the front view of the door frame top unit in a door frame, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame top unit from the front, (c) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame top unit from the back It is. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame top unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame top unit and was seen from back. It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the PP line in FIG. It is a front view of a game board. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the game board for every main structure and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the game board for every main structure, and was seen from back. It is a front view of the game board except a front unit and a back unit. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the game board of FIG. 63 and was seen from before. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the game board of FIG. 63 and was seen from the back. It is explanatory drawing which expands and shows the site | part of a function display unit from the front in the state which attached the game board to the pachinko machine. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the game panel of the form different from FIG. 63 from the front with the front structural member, the board | substrate holder, and the main control unit. FIG. 68 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 67 viewed from behind. It is a block diagram of a main control board, a payout control board, and a peripheral control board. FIG. 70 is a block diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 69. It is the schematic of the various detection signals input / output to lending device connection terminal boards, such as a game ball which relays the electrical connection of the payout control board which comprises a main board, CR unit, and a frequency display board. FIG. 70 is a block diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 69. It is a block diagram which shows the outline of peripheral control MPU. It is a block diagram around VDP with a built-in sound source in the liquid crystal and the sound control unit. It is a block diagram which shows the power supply system of a pachinko machine. FIG. 76 is a block diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 75. It is a circuit diagram which shows the circuit of a main control board. It is a circuit diagram which shows a power failure monitoring circuit. It is a circuit diagram which shows the interface circuit for communication between the board | substrates of a main control board and a peripheral control board. It is a circuit diagram which shows the circuit etc. of a payout control part. It is a circuit diagram which shows the payout control input circuit. FIG. 82 is a circuit diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 81. It is a circuit diagram which shows a payout motor drive circuit. It is a circuit diagram which shows CR unit input / output circuit. It is an input / output diagram showing various input / output signals to / from the main control board and various output signals to the external terminal board. It is a figure which shows the arrangement | sequence of the output terminal of an external terminal board. It is a circuit diagram which shows the liquid crystal module circuit which draws the display area of an upper plate side liquid crystal display device. It is a table which shows an example of the various commands transmitted to the payout control board from the main control board. It is a table which shows an example of the various commands transmitted to a peripheral control board from a main control board. 90 is a table showing a continuation of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board in FIG. 89. It is a table which shows an example of the various commands from the payout control board which a main control board receives. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the main control side power-on process. FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing a continuation of main-control-side power-on processing in FIG. 92. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the main control side timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a peripheral control part power-on process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the peripheral control part V blank interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a peripheral control part 1ms timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a peripheral control part command reception interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a peripheral control part power failure warning signal interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a LOCKN signal log | history creation process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a connection malfunction determination process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a connection recovery process. It is a timing chart explaining the timing which outputs a connection confirmation signal with respect to the INIT terminal of the transmitter IC for upper plate side liquid crystals. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about a special symbol and a special electric accessory control process (step S114). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about a 1st starting port passage process (step S5232). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about a 2nd starting port passage process (step S5234). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about a 1st special symbol process process (step S5238). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about a 1st special symbol normal process (step S5280). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about jackpot determination processing (step S5305). (A) is a figure which shows a jackpot determination table, (B), (C) is a figure which shows a symbol determination table. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about a 1st special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S5281). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about a 1st fluctuation pattern setting process (step S5282). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about a 1st special symbol fluctuation | variation process (step S5283). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about a 1st special symbol stop process (step S5284). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about a normal symbol and a normal electric accessory control process (step S116). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about a gate part passage process (step S5402). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about normal symbol normal processing (step S5403). It is a figure which shows the determination table T1 of the effect pattern (variation effect) referred by the said effect symbol variation start process when it is in a normal game state. It is a figure which shows an example of the sound control by a fixed channel system as a comparison object with respect to this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the sound definition table for implement | achieving sound control by a fixed channel system. The relationship between the gaming state, the playback sound, and the playback channel is shown. It is a timing chart which shows an example of a production time chart. It is a figure which shows an example of the sound control by the automatic channel system as this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the sound definition table for implement | achieving sound control by an automatic channel system. It is a figure which shows the relationship between a game state, a reproduction sound, and a priority. It is a timing chart which shows an example of a production time chart. It is a figure which shows an example of the work information for automatic channel control stored in the work area for AUTO group channel control provided in the periphery control RAM. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the search process of an empty channel at the time of performing sound control when only one AUTO group is defined in an automatic channel system. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific content of an empty channel search process. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific content of an empty channel search process. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific content of an empty channel search process. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific content of an empty channel search process. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific content of an empty channel search process. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific content of an empty channel search process. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific content of an empty channel search process. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific content of an empty channel search process. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific content of an empty channel search process. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific content of an empty channel search process. It is a figure which shows an example of the variation pattern of the sound control by each channel system or those combination. It is a figure which shows an example of the structure table | surface of the reproduction channel in the sound source control in this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of an empty channel search process in the case of performing control which outputs the sound of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the conditions which select the channel which replaces sound output (stops sound reproduction) when the channel is not empty at the time of output of new sound in the present embodiment. It is a timing chart which shows the example of an effect for explaining sound control of this embodiment, (A) shows the timing at which sound effects are reproduced, and (B) shows the channel from which each sound effect is outputted. It is a figure which shows an example of the priority order of the sound effect in the production example of this embodiment. It is a timing chart which shows an example of the volume change of the sound effect in the first half fluctuation | variation of this embodiment, (A) shows the output timing of effect sound effect, (B) shows the volume change of each effect sound effect. It is a figure which shows the example of a screen structure of the effect in the modification of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the structure table | surface of the reproduction channel in the sound source control in the modification of this embodiment. It is a timing chart which shows an example of the volume change of the effect sound in the fluctuation | variation second half of the modification of this embodiment, (A) shows the output timing of effect sound, (B) shows the volume change of each effect sound. It is a figure which shows an example of the volume control table classified by channel group which shows the priority of the volume (sound volume) control for every group in this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the group volume control process which performs sound control corresponding to the group to which the output sound of this embodiment belongs. It is a timing chart for demonstrating the procedure which controls the volume in this embodiment along a time series, (A) shows the execution timing of an effect, (B) shows the volume of each effect. It is a figure which shows an example of the volume control table classified by sound effect which shows volume (volume) control for every total reproduction time (output time) of the sound in this embodiment. It is the first half part of the flowchart which shows the procedure of the volume control process which performs sound control based on the parameter set for every sound effect of this embodiment. It is the latter half part of the flowchart which shows the procedure of the volume control process which performs sound control based on the parameter set for every sound effect of this embodiment. It is a timing chart for demonstrating the procedure which controls the volume in this embodiment along a time series, (A) shows the execution timing of an effect, (B) shows the volume of each effect. It is a figure which shows an example of a sound definition table. It is a figure which shows the conditions (cancellation conditions) by which alerting | reporting is complete | finished according to the kind of alerting | reporting sound illustrated in FIG. 155 other than alerting | reporting content, alerting | reporting aspect, alerting | reporting time. (A) is an example of processing when an output condition (abnormality detection) of another notification sound belonging to the first notification group is satisfied when one notification sound belonging to the first notification group is being reproduced. FIG. (B) shows an example of processing when an output condition (state detection) of another notification sound belonging to the second notification group is satisfied when one notification sound belonging to the second notification group is being reproduced. FIG. (C) is an example of processing when an output condition (state detection) of another notification sound belonging to the third notification group is satisfied when one notification sound belonging to the third notification group is being reproduced. FIG. (A) is a figure which shows the example about the process when the output conditions (state detection) of the alerting sound which belongs to the 2nd alerting | reporting group are satisfy | filled when the alerting | reporting sound which belongs to the 1st alerting | reporting group is reproduced | regenerated. It is. (B) is a figure which shows an example about the process when the output condition (state detection) of the alerting sound which belongs to the 3rd alerting | reporting group is satisfied when the alerting sound which belongs to the 2nd alerting | reporting group is reproduced | regenerated. It is. (C) is a figure which shows an example about the process when the output condition (state detection) of the alerting sound which belongs to the 1st alerting group is satisfied when the alerting sound which belongs to the 2nd alerting | reporting group is reproduced | regenerated. It is. (D) is a figure which shows an example about the process when the output conditions (state detection) of the alerting sound which belongs to the 2nd alerting | reporting group are satisfy | filled when the alerting | reporting sound which belongs to the 3rd alerting | reporting group is reproduced | regenerated. It is. It is a time chart which shows the example as an aspect which alert | reports the state of a game machine. It is a time chart which shows the example as an aspect which alert | reports the state of a game machine. It is a time chart which shows the example as an aspect which alert | reports the state of a game machine. It is a time chart which shows the example as an aspect which alert | reports the state of a game machine. It is a time chart which shows the example as an aspect which alert | reports the state of a game machine. It is a time chart which shows the example as an aspect which alert | reports the state of a game machine. It is a figure explaining according to the information state of the pachinko machine 1 about the contents of information processing under production progress. It is a figure explaining the content about the process regarding volume adjustment. It is a figure explaining the content about the process regarding volume adjustment. It is a figure explaining the content about the process regarding volume adjustment. It is a time chart which shows an example about a channel reservation process. It is a time chart which shows an example about a channel reservation process. It is a time chart which shows an example about a channel reservation process. It is a time chart which shows an example about a channel reservation process. It is a time chart which shows an example about a channel reservation process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the procedure about the process concerning the setting of a channel restriction level. It is a figure which shows an example about the restriction content defined according to a channel restriction level. It is a figure which shows another example about the content of restrictions defined according to a channel restriction level. It is a time chart which shows an example of the allocation condition of each channel when a channel special release process is performed. It is a time chart which shows an example of the allocation condition of each channel when an operation sound output process under suppression is performed. It is a time chart which shows an example of the allocation condition of each channel when the process relevant to channel allocation cancellation operation is performed. Examples of the channel assignment status and the status of the movable ornament when the movable ornament is detected in the process of operating the movable ornament according to the variation pattern (effect pattern) according to the big hit determination It is a time chart which shows. The allocation status of each channel when a movable body abnormality is detected not within the process of operating the movable decorative body according to the variation pattern (effect pattern) according to the big hit judgment, It is a time chart which shows an example about the condition by the side of a decoration body. It is a time chart which shows those examples about the allocation situation of each channel when a movable body abnormality occurs simultaneously in a plurality of movable decoration bodies at the specific timing in the period when pattern change is performed, and the situation on the movable decoration body side. . In the time chart which shows an example about the allocation situation of each channel when a movable body abnormality occurs in a plurality of movable decoration bodies at two different timings in the period in which symbol variation is performed, and the situation on the movable decoration body side is there. It is a time chart which shows the example about the control content for implement | achieving an automatic multiple times operation function (automatic continuous hitting function). It is a time chart which shows the example about the display content when operation is performed in multiple times. It is a time chart which shows the example about the control content for implement | achieving an automatic multiple times operation function (automatic continuous hitting function). It is a time chart which shows the example of production using the automatic multiple times operation function (automatic continuous hitting function). It is a time chart which shows the example of production using the automatic multiple times operation function (automatic continuous hitting function). It is a front view of the game machine provided with the sword production operation unit. It is a right view of a gaming machine provided with a sword effect operation unit. It is a figure which shows an example of the selection table of the production pattern in the production mode which can perform a sword production, (A) shows an example of the selection table which selects the presence or absence of the sword preparation transition production according to the classification of a fluctuation pattern, (B ) An example of a selection table for selecting presence / absence of a sword book effect. It is a state transition diagram explaining the sword decoration operation | movement of a sword decoration body in case an aura member is provided in a sword part (blade part) itself, (A) A sword state, (B) 1st sword state, (C) 2nd Indicates the extracted state. It is a longitudinal section explaining operation of an aura member. It is a state transition diagram explaining the sword decoration operation | movement of a sword ornament in case an aura member is provided in a sheath part, (A) Sword state, (B) 1st sword state, (C) 2nd sword state. It is a longitudinal section explaining operation of an aura member. It is an effect transition diagram of a sword effect. It is an effect transition diagram of a sword effect. It is an effect transition diagram of a sword effect. It is an effect transition diagram of a sword effect. It is an effect transition diagram of a sword effect. It is a timing chart which shows the relationship between the state change timing of a sword ornament, and the operation effective period which concerns on an operation means. It is an example of the production transition diagram of the extraction effect of the modification 1. It is an example of the production transition diagram of the extraction effect of the modification 1. It is an example of the production transition diagram of the extraction effect of the modification 1. It is a timing chart which shows the relationship between the state change timing of the sword ornament of the modification 1, and the operation timing of an operation means. It is an example of the production transition diagram of the extraction effect of the modification 2. It is an example of the production transition diagram of the extraction effect of the modification 2. It is an example of the production transition diagram of the extraction effect of the modification 2. It is an example of the production transition diagram of the extraction effect of the modification 2. It is an example of the production transition diagram of the extraction effect of the modification 2. It is a figure explaining the screen transition of the production | presentation display apparatus in a princess reach production, and the operation | movement transition of a sword ornament. It is a figure explaining the screen transition of the production | presentation display apparatus in a princess reach production, and the operation | movement transition of a sword ornament. It is a figure explaining the screen transition of the production | presentation display apparatus in a princess reach production, and the operation | movement transition of a sword ornament. It is a figure explaining the screen transition of the production | presentation display apparatus in the reach production including the operation production of the operation button used in many ways, the state transition of an operation button, and the operation | movement transition of a sword ornament. It is a figure explaining the screen transition of the production | presentation display apparatus in the reach production including the operation production of the operation button used in many ways, the state transition of an operation button, and the operation | movement transition of a sword ornament. It is a figure explaining the screen transition of the production | presentation display apparatus in the reach production including the operation production of the operation button used in many ways, the state transition of an operation button, and the operation | movement transition of a sword ornament. It is a figure explaining the screen transition of the production | presentation display apparatus in reach production, the state transition of an operation button, and the operation | movement transition of a sword ornament. It is a figure explaining the screen transition of the production | presentation display apparatus in reach production, the state transition of an operation button, and the operation | movement transition of a sword ornament. It is a figure explaining the screen transition of the production | presentation display apparatus in reach production, the state transition of an operation button, and the operation | movement transition of a sword ornament. It is a figure explaining the screen transition of the production | presentation display apparatus in reach production, the state transition of an operation button, and the operation | movement transition of a sword ornament. It is a figure explaining the screen transition of the production | presentation display apparatus in reach production, the state transition of an operation button, and the operation | movement transition of a sword ornament. It is a figure explaining the form of the sword ornament used for pseudo-continuous production. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect transition of the pseudo | simulation continuous effect common to all the effect patterns. It is a figure which shows the example of a transition of the production | presentation of whether the operation opportunity of a sword ornament is provided while the pseudo | simulation continuous variation (revariation) is performed. It is a figure which shows the example of a transition of the production | presentation of whether the operation opportunity of a sword ornament is provided while the pseudo | simulation continuous variation (revariation) is performed. It is a figure which shows the example of a transition of the production | presentation of whether the operation opportunity of a sword ornament is provided while the pseudo | simulation continuous variation (revariation) is performed. It is a figure which shows the example of a transition of the post-operation effect of the sword ornament (the fall effect of the specific decoration member SDY (a glimpse)) during the pseudo continuous variation (revariation) common to all the effect patterns. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect transition used as the characteristic of the pseudo sword LV1 weak production pattern and the pseudo sword LV1 strong production pattern. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect transition used as the characteristic of the pseudo sword LV1 weak production pattern and the pseudo sword LV1 strong production pattern. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect transition used as the characteristic of a pseudo resurrection LV1 effect pattern. It is a figure explaining the kind of production pattern which can be selected based on a fluctuation pattern. It is an operation execution timing chart of the sword decorative body and the specific decorative member SDY (a spear object) in the pseudo continuous effect, and shows a sword LV1 weak effect pattern (sword LV1 strong effect pattern). It is an operation execution timing chart of the sword decorative body and the specific decorative member SDY (a spear character) in the pseudo-continuous effect, and shows a sword LV2 weak effect pattern (sword LV2 strong effect pattern). It is an operation execution timing chart of the sword decorative body and the specific decorative member SDY (a spear character) in the pseudo continuous effect, and shows a sword LV3 weak effect pattern (sword LV3 strong effect pattern). It is an operation execution timing chart of the sword decorative body and the specific decorative member SDY (a spear character) in the pseudo-continuous effect, and shows a pseudo sword LV1 weak effect pattern (pseudo sword LV1 strong effect pattern). It is an operation execution timing chart of the sword decorative body and the specific decorative member SDY (a saddle accessory) in the pseudo-continuous effect, and shows a pseudo revival sword LV1 effect pattern. When it is determined that either the operation button or the sword decoration is activated during the reach production by the lottery by the peripheral control board based on the fluctuation production (reach production) of the fluctuation pattern drawn by the main control board. It is a figure which shows the example of a transition of reach production in which the pre-operation suggestion production of a 1st suggestion pattern is performed. When it is determined that either the operation button or the sword decoration is activated during the reach production by the lottery by the peripheral control board based on the fluctuation production (reach production) of the fluctuation pattern drawn by the main control board. It is a figure which shows the example of a transition of reach production in which the pre-operation suggestion production of a 1st suggestion pattern is performed. Like the first suggestion pattern described above, when it is determined that either the operation button or the sword ornament is enabled during the reach effect, the pre-operation suggestion effect of the second suggestion pattern is executed. It is a figure which shows the example of a transition. Despite the second suggestion pattern being performed as a pre-operation suggestion effect, the sword ornament is not activated and the operation button is activated once, then the sword ornament is activated It is a figure shown about the suggestion effect before operation of a pattern. It is a figure which shows the 1st effect aspect regarding a specific operation related effect. It is a figure which shows the 1st effect aspect regarding a specific operation related effect. It is a figure which shows the 2nd production aspect regarding a specific operation related production. It is a figure which shows the 2nd production aspect regarding a specific operation related production. It is a figure which shows the 2nd production aspect regarding a specific operation related production. It is a figure which shows the 2nd production aspect regarding a specific operation related production. It is a figure which shows the 3rd effect aspect regarding a specific operation related effect. It is a figure which shows the 3rd effect aspect regarding a specific operation related effect. It is a figure which shows the 3rd effect aspect regarding a specific operation related effect. It is a figure which shows the 3rd effect aspect regarding a specific operation related effect. It is a figure which shows another example of a specific operation related effect. It is a figure explaining the example about an effect when "the specific operation related effect" is set as the effect object of a timer effect. It is a time chart explaining an example of the contents of production for every production about a production when a plurality of types (prediction production A, B1, B2, C) are prepared as a production of indication. It is a figure which shows those production examples about the production content when the precursor production which is not a specific operation relevant production is performed, and the production content when the precursor production as a specific operation related production is performed. It is a figure which shows another example of the content of the effect when a specific operation related effect is performed as a precursor effect. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect by which the button image BTG is displayed in the aspect (specific effect aspect) to which the princess character was added. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect in the case of the operation error between the 1st operation mode and the 2nd operation mode on the player side in the effect pattern in which a specific operation related effect is performed. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect in the case of the operation error between the 1st operation mode and the 2nd operation mode on the player side in the effect pattern in which a specific operation related effect is performed. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect when displaying the sword decoration image SYG in a special mode. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect when a 1st sign production is performed. It is a time chart which shows the example of an effect when the 1st sign production is performed. It is a figure which shows the specific example of the production | presentation in which expectation is shown by an automatic production | presentation function. It is a figure which shows the specific example of the production | presentation in which expectation is shown by an automatic production | presentation function. It is a figure which shows the specific example of the production | presentation in which expectation is shown by an automatic production | presentation function. It is a figure for demonstrating operation unification control when it exists in an automatic button production | presentation state. It is a figure for demonstrating operation unification control when it exists in an automatic button production | presentation state. It is a figure for demonstrating operation unification control when it exists in an automatic button production | presentation state. It is a figure for demonstrating the stable side automatic production | presentation process in being in an automatic button production | presentation state. It is a figure for demonstrating the stable side automatic production | presentation process in being in an automatic button production | presentation state. It is a figure for demonstrating the stable side automatic production | presentation process in being in an automatic button production | presentation state. It is a figure for demonstrating the production | presentation reception process according to the display classification when it exists in an automatic button production | presentation state. It is a figure for demonstrating the production | presentation reception process according to the display classification when it exists in an automatic button production | presentation state. It is a figure for demonstrating the production | presentation reception process according to the display classification when it exists in an automatic button production | presentation state. It is a figure for demonstrating the production | presentation reception process according to the display classification when it exists in an automatic button production | presentation state. It is a figure for demonstrating the production | presentation reception process according to the display classification when it exists in an automatic button production | presentation state. (A) is a time chart which shows the example of an effect when it is operated several times in the mode of single operation when not controlled to the automatic button effect state, and (b) is controlled to the automatic button effect state. It is a time chart which shows the example of an effect when it is operated by the aspect of a long press when not done. (A) is a time chart showing an example of an effect when the automatic effect function functions in the automatic button effect state, and (b) is a long press while the automatic effect function is functioning in the automatic button effect state. It is a time chart which shows the example of production when operation is started in the mode. When the automatic button effect state is controlled and the number of holds is in the effect state of three, the symbol variation is started with “a first effect pattern in which a specific effect acceptance period in which an instruction display prompting an operation appears” can be set, It is a time chart which shows the example of a process when operation (cancellation operation) for canceling | releases an automatic button effect state and operation for setting (setting operation) is performed within the execution period of this symbol fluctuation. When the automatic button effect state is controlled and the number of holds is in the effect state of three, the “second effect pattern in which the instruction display prompting the operation to appear and the specific effect acceptance period in which the instruction display prompts cannot be set” is set. The time chart which shows the example of a process when a fluctuation | variation is started and the operation (cancellation operation) for canceling | releases an automatic button effect state and the operation (setting operation) for a setting are performed within the execution period of this symbol fluctuation | variation is there. When the automatic button effect state is not controlled, the symbol variation is started in the “third effect pattern in which a specific effect acceptance period (specific effective period) in which an instruction prompting an operation appears can be set” is set, and the symbol change execution period It is a time chart which shows the example of a process when operation for setting to an automatic button effect state is performed in the inside. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect when production progress is carried out with the 3rd production pattern. It is a figure which shows the modification about the prohibition period concerning "the specific process regarding effects, such as effect setting." It is a figure which shows the modification about the prohibition period concerning "the specific process regarding effects, such as effect setting." It is a time chart which shows an example about the effect process regarding a special effect reception period. It is a time chart which shows the example concerning production progress when starting the production after operation, maintaining the "image which suggests the type of operation object" as a display state. FIG. 290 is a diagram illustrating an effect display example that appears in the effect display device 1600 when an effect pattern in which an effect is developed in the aspect illustrated in FIG. 285 is executed. FIG. 290 is a diagram illustrating an effect display example that appears in the effect display device 1600 when an effect pattern in which an effect is developed in the aspect illustrated in FIG. 285 is executed. It is a figure which shows the example when displaying a haze image as a moving image by displaying a some haze image sequentially, when the specific reception effect generate | occur | produces. It is a figure which shows the example about the production | presentation which appears when operation by a player is not in time before the timing which production | generation reception automatically occurs. It is a figure which shows the example about the production | presentation which appears when operation by a player is not in time before the timing which production | generation reception automatically occurs. It is a figure which shows the example about the production | presentation which appears when operation by a player is not in time before the timing which production | generation reception automatically occurs. It is a figure which shows the example about the 1st reception effect and the 2nd reception effect from which the time until an effect reception automatically generate | occur | produces after the period when an effect reception is accept | permitted occurs. It is a figure which shows the example about the 1st reception effect and the 2nd reception effect from which the time until an effect reception automatically generate | occur | produces after the period when an effect reception is accept | permitted occurs. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect suggested whether the reception effect in which an "automatic effect function" is validated generate | occur | produces with the aspect of a sign effect. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect suggested whether the reception effect in which an "automatic effect function" is validated generate | occur | produces with the aspect of a sign effect. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect suggested whether the reception effect in which an "automatic effect function" is validated generate | occur | produces with the aspect of a sign effect. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect which makes it possible to recognize that "automatic effect function" is validated only in the reception effect among the sign effect and the reception effect. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect which makes it possible to recognize that "automatic effect function" is validated only in the reception effect among the sign effect and the reception effect. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect which makes it possible to recognize that "automatic effect function" is validated only in the reception effect among the sign effect and the reception effect. It is a figure for demonstrating novel directivity using an automatic directing function. It is a time chart which shows an example of the allocation condition of a channel. It is a time chart which shows an example of the allocation condition of a channel. It is a time chart which shows an example of the allocation condition of a channel. It is a time chart which shows the processing content when operating a movable decoration body when specific conditions are satisfied. FIG. 350 is a time chart showing a modification of the example shown in FIG. 304. FIG. It is a time chart which shows the processing content when the timing tm1 when a new symbol fluctuation | variation starts comes in the condition where a specific movable decoration body is in an abnormal state. It is a time chart which shows the processing content when the timing tm11 at which a special production pattern is started in a situation where a specific movable decorative body is in an abnormal state. It is a time chart which shows the example about the process until a sword ornament 5001 returns to an original position. It is a time chart which shows the example about the restriction | limiting with respect to the volume setting and brightness | luminance setting when generating a penalty with respect to operation with respect to the sword part 5010. FIG. It is a time chart which shows the example about the light emission aspect of the lamp for production | presentation in the abnormality alerting | reporting period according to specific abnormality detection. It is a functional block diagram explaining the structure and outline | summary of the function for performing presentation control in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the module structure in the periphery control part of the gaming machine of this embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the basic concept of effect control in the gaming machine of this embodiment. It is a figure explaining a structure until it acquires data required for presentation control of the gaming machine of this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the liquid crystal drawing effect of the step-up notice of this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the flow at the time of execution of the scheduler data of this embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the function of the sound module of this embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the function of the lamp module of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the function of the sequence control in presentation control of the gaming machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the function of the lamp | ramp and the sound in presentation control of the gaming machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of functions, such as a sound and a motor, in presentation control of the gaming machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the scheduler definition of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of operation | movement of the accessory controlled using the scheduler data of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the execution timing of the notice effect performed in a series of change display from the change start of the special symbol in this embodiment to a stop, and shows an example of the scheduler and scheduler data used. It is a figure explaining the content of the scheduler data "SCH_LMP_YKK_STP" which performs lighting / flashing control of the lamp in the step-up notice of the present embodiment. It is a figure explaining the content of the scheduler data "SCH_LMP_YKK_CUT" which controls the lamp | ramp in the button cut-in notification of this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA1" which controls the whole flow in the star object notice of this embodiment, and a left star object. It is a figure explaining the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA2" which controls the right star role in the star role notice of this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA3" which controls the middle star role in the star role notice of this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the content of the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_LGO" which performs the motor control in the logo object fall notification of this embodiment. It is drawing explaining the scheduler data executed at the time of power-on of the gaming machine of the present embodiment. It is a figure explaining the structure for processing a command and scheduler data in the peripheral control board of the game machine of this embodiment, and the relationship of these structures. It is a figure explaining the process of performing scheduler data at the time of power activation of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the notice effect in a series of fluctuation | variation display until it stops from the fluctuation | variation start of the special symbol in this embodiment, (A) performs the effect performed from a fluctuation | variation start to completion | finish, and the said effect | production. FIG. 7B is a diagram for explaining the position of the winning combination in the winning combination fall notice. It is a figure explaining the content of button 鉈 combination first half fall notice scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA1” that performs motor control in the first half drop notice of the 鉈 combination that is the first half of the combination drop notice of the present embodiment. It is a figure explaining the first half of the late combination fall notice scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA2” for performing the motor control in the late fall notice of the late combination that is the latter half of the advance notice of the fall of the present embodiment. It is a figure explaining the second half of the late combination fall notice scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA2” for performing the motor control in the late fall notice of the late combination that is the latter half of the advance notice of the fall of the present embodiment. It is a figure explaining the liquid crystal effect block data combination number table (LCD_CTL_BLOCKDATA_NO) according to change pattern which stores the combination of the liquid crystal effect block data corresponding to the change pattern command in this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the liquid crystal symbol block data combination number table (ZUG_CTL_BLOCKDATA_NO) classified by variation pattern which stores the combination of the liquid crystal symbol block data corresponding to the variation pattern command in this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the sub effect block data combination number table (SCH_CTL_BLOCKDATA_NO) classified by variation pattern which stores the combination of the sub effect block data corresponding to the variation pattern command in this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the outline | summary of presentation control of the first half fluctuation | variation (normal fluctuation | variation 12 second) of fluctuation pattern "10H03H" in this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the sub effect block data control start process of this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the sub effect block data control starting process of this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the sub effect block data control update process of this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the procedure which performs a notice effect in the change display corresponding to change pattern "10H03H" of this embodiment, (A) is the timing which performs a notice effect, execution time of the notice effect, and (B). The scheduler data driven by each scheduler to execute the notice effect is shown. It is a figure explaining the relationship between the liquid crystal effect block data classified by variation pattern of this embodiment and the liquid crystal design block data classified by variation pattern. It is a figure which shows the image which produces the data file for drawing for the step-up notice for liquid crystal display of this embodiment by the step-up production unit (step-up 1 production-4 productions) with the image composition / motion creation graphic tool. It is a figure explaining the structure of the effect block data of the step-up notice of this embodiment, (A) shows the structure of step-up notice liquid crystal effect block data, (B) shows the structure of the step-up notice sub effect block data. Show. It is a figure which shows an example of the scheduler function for liquid crystal effects of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the parameter for scheduler functions for liquid crystal effects in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the parameter for scheduler functions for liquid crystal effects in this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the structure of the production switch in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of a structure of effect SW group of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the production SW starting command table of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the step-up notice in this embodiment, (A) shows the step in which a step-up notice effect is performed, (B) shows an example of the screen displayed on a liquid crystal display device in each step. . It is a figure explaining the execution procedure of the step-up notice using effect SW in this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the execution procedure of the step-up notice using effect SW in this embodiment, (A) is the liquid crystal effect scheduler data for performing step-up notice 1, (B) is the step-up notice 1 liquid crystal effect. A drawing image using scheduler data is shown. It is a figure explaining master SW defined on liquid crystal effect scheduler data for every drawing division in this embodiment, and effect SW corresponding to replacement data replaced with the master data. It is a figure explaining the control procedure by the production | presentation switch of this embodiment, and the evaluation procedure which sets production | presentation SW to ON is shown especially. It is a figure explaining an example of the function defined in the production SW command analysis module of this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the detail of the structure of the effect SW information table of this embodiment, (A) is an example of the program code which defines an effect SW information table, (B) is a bit assignment of effect SW control information, (C). Is a diagram showing an example of a production SW group It is a figure which shows an example of the program code which defines the production SW number corresponding to the production SW in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the program data code which defines the effect SW flag and effect SW information table of this embodiment, (A) shows an effect SW flag, (B) shows an effect SW information table. It is a figure which shows an example of the program data which defines the effect SW replacement table information and the effect SW replacement table included in the effect SW information table of this embodiment, (A) is the effect SW replacement table information, and (B) is the effect SW. Indicates a replacement table. It is a figure which shows an example of the program data which defines the layer information table of this embodiment, (A) is a list | wrist which stores the address which stores each layer information table, (B) is the content of a layer information table (for background) Indicates. It is a figure which shows an example of the program data which defines the layer information table of this embodiment, (A) is the content of the layer information table (first notice 1), (B) is the content of the layer information table (first notice 2). Show. It is a figure which shows an example of the program data which defines the liquid crystal layer table and liquid crystal effect common block in this embodiment, (A) is the liquid crystal layer table of step-up notice effect, (B) shows the structure of a liquid crystal effect common block. . It is a figure which shows an example of the program data which defines the liquid crystal effect block (LCD_YKK_STEPUP_SU1-4) of each step of the step-up notice of this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the outline | summary of the button mini character effect of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the program data which defines the liquid crystal layer table corresponding to the button mini character effect in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the program data which defines the individual common block of the button mini character effect in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the program data which defines the liquid crystal effect block data for performing the button mini character effect in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the drawing division which can be judged within the callback function at the time of callback execution by effect SW of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the drawing result of an individual layer at the time of notice effect execution of this embodiment, and the drawing result of all the layers. It is a figure explaining an example of the common block over several periods of this embodiment, (A) is a display of a symbol and the execution timing of a notice effect, (B) is the structure of the liquid crystal notice effect block by a common block, (C) Indicates a configuration of a liquid crystal notice effect block by common blocks extending over a plurality of periods. It is a figure explaining the conventional structure which writes an image in a frame buffer by writing the image written in each layer, respectively. It is a figure explaining the procedure which writes in a frame buffer after converting the image file stored in the off-screen buffer in this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the procedure which memorize | stores the display list command group in this embodiment temporarily in peripheral control RAM, and transfers to sound source built-in VDP. It is a figure explaining the procedure which transfers the display list command group in this embodiment to VDP with built-in sound source, without memorize | storing in peripheral control RAM. It is a figure which shows the example of a display when changing a state between a non-game state and a game execution state. It is a figure which shows a display example when the expectation effect that a princess character is largely displayed as a background image is performed during execution of a specific effect pattern. FIG. 378 is a diagram showing a display example when a help image is displayed in a state where the expected effect shown in FIG. 378 is performed. It is a figure which shows the example of a display when character image PG is displayed so that a display position may be changed by operation by a player. It is a time chart for demonstrating the example about the process when generating a production | presentation limitation period in a non-game state. It is a time chart for demonstrating the example about the process when a production | presentation limitation period is terminated at an early stage. It is a time chart which shows the example about the process concerning a special period (opening exclusive period). It is a time chart which shows the example about the process when a game is started when it is set to the opening special period (special period). It is a time chart which shows the example about the 1st operation reception production. It is a time chart which shows the example about the 2nd operation reception production. It is a time chart which shows the example about special operation reception production. It is a time chart which shows the mode of the channel allocation of the sound data containing a reception allowable sound. It is a time chart which shows the mode of the channel allocation of the sound data containing a reception allowable sound. It is a time chart which shows the example about the content of production when a low expectation suppression reception production is performed in an automatic reception mode. It is a time chart which shows the example about the content of production when a high expectation suppression reception production is performed in an automatic reception mode. It is a time chart which shows the example about the content of production when a high expectation suppression reception production is performed in an automatic reception mode. It is a time chart which shows the example about a modification when a high expectation suppression reception effect is performed in an automatic reception mode. It is a time chart which shows the example of the production in which the 1st permissible sound is outputted in the specific mode at the time of the occurrence of “non-suppression operation reception production (here, non-suppression / non-automatic reception production)”. It is a time chart which shows the example of an effect in the case where a "weak suppression mode" and a "strong suppression mode" occur sequentially in the production according to the high expectation variation pattern. It is a time chart which shows the example of an effect in the case where a "weak suppression mode" and a "strong suppression mode" occur sequentially in the production according to the high expectation variation pattern. It is a time chart which shows the example of an effect in the case where a "weak suppression mode" and a "strong suppression mode" occur sequentially in the production according to the high expectation variation pattern. It is a time chart which shows the example of an effect which appears in "when the sword ornament 5001 is selected as an operation target" in the suppression / automatic reception effect (suppressed movement reception effect). It is a time chart which shows the production content which appears when the fluctuation pattern 1 is selected by fluctuation pattern determination. It is a time chart which shows the production content which appears when the fluctuation pattern 2 is selected by fluctuation pattern determination. It is a time chart which shows the production content which appears when the fluctuation pattern 3 is selected by fluctuation pattern determination. It is a time chart which shows the content of the effect which appears when the "internal reception effect" produces | generates while the effect sound of "BGM reproduction" is made into the "non-suppression mode".

[1. Overall structure of pachinko machine]
A pachinko machine 1 according to an embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. First, with reference to FIG. 1 thru | or FIG. 10, the whole structure of the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment is demonstrated. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. 2 is a right side view of the pachinko machine, FIG. 3 is a left side view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 4 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. 5 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the right front, FIG. 6 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the left front, and FIG. 7 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the rear. FIG. 8 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the front with the door frame opened from the main frame and the main frame opened from the outer frame. FIG. 9 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine as seen from the front after disassembling the door frame, game board, main body frame, and outer frame. FIG. 10 shows the pachinko machine as a door frame, game board, main body frame, and outer frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled and was seen from the back.

  A pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment includes a frame-shaped outer frame 2 installed in an island facility (not shown) of a game hall, a door frame 3 that closes the front surface of the outer frame 2 so that it can be opened and closed, and a door frame 3. A main body frame 4 that is supported so as to be opened and closed, and is attached to the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable, and is detachably attached to the main body frame 4 from the front side, and is visible from the player side through the door frame 3. And a game board 5 having a game area 5a into which a game ball is driven.

  As shown in FIGS. 9 and 10, the outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 includes an upper frame member 10 and a lower frame member 20 that are separated from each other in the vertical direction and extend to the left and right, and the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member. 20 includes a left frame member 30 and a right frame member 40 which are connected to each other at both ends and extend vertically. The upper frame member 10, the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40 are formed to have the same width in the front-rear direction. The upper and lower lengths of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are longer than the left and right lengths of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20.

  The outer frame 2 is attached to the left end of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 by connecting the lower ends of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 to the front side of the lower frame member 20 and the left end portion of the upper frame member 10 when viewed from the front. An outer frame side upper hinge member 60, and an outer frame side lower hinge member 70 attached to the upper left end portion of the curtain plate member 50 and the left frame member 30. The main frame 4 and the door frame 3 are attached to be openable and closable by an outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and an outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2.

  The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 has a frame-shaped door frame base unit 100 having a through-hole 111 penetrating front and rear in a quadrilateral shape whose front view extends vertically, and a through-hole of the door frame base unit 100 A handle unit 300 that is attached to the lower right corner of the front surface below 111 and can be operated by a player to drive a game ball into the game area 5 a of the game board 5, and a through-hole 111 of the door frame base unit 100. The player is provided with a tray unit 320 attached to the lower portion of the front side below the player and the game state that is attached to the center of the tray unit 320 and changes when the game ball is driven into the game area 5a. A stage operation unit 400 capable of presenting a participatory stage, and attached to the upper left side of the front side of the door frame base unit 100 on the left side of the through-hole 111 above the plate unit 320. Door frame left side unit 530, door frame right side unit 550 attached to the front right side of the door frame base unit 100 on the right side of the through-hole 111 above the plate unit 320, and the door frame left side unit 530. And a door frame top unit 570 attached to the upper part of the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 above the through-hole 111 above the right side unit 550 of the door frame.

  The main body frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 includes a frame-shaped main body frame base 600 that can be partially inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and can support the outer periphery of the game board 5, and the main body frame base 600. Attached to both the upper and lower ends on the left side of the front view and rotatably attached to the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2, and the door frame side upper hinge member 140 and the door frame of the door frame 3 respectively. The main body frame side upper hinge member 620 and the main body frame side lower hinge member 640 to which the lower side hinge member 150 is rotatably attached, the reinforcing frame 660 attached to the left side surface of the main body frame base 600 when viewed from the front, and the main body frame base 600 The ball launcher 680 for driving a game ball into the game area 5a of the game board 5, and the outer frame 2 and the main body frame are attached to the right side surface of the main body frame base 600 when viewed from the front. 4, And a locking unit 700 that locks between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 and an inverted L-shape that is attached to the rear side along the front side and the left side of the main body frame base 600 and pays out a game ball to the player side. -Shaped payout unit 800, board unit 900 attached to the lower rear portion of main body frame base 600, and rear of game board 5 attached to main body frame base 600 and attached to the rear side of main body frame base 600 so as to be openable and closable. And a back cover 980 covering the side.

  The payout unit 800 of the main body frame 4 has an inverted L-shaped payout unit base 801 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600, and is attached to the upper part of the payout unit base 801 and extends to the left and right open upward. A ball tank 802 that stores a game ball supplied from an island facility (not shown) in a box shape, and is attached to the payout unit base 801 below the ball tank 802. The game ball in the ball tank 802 is moved to the left in a front view. A tank rail 803 that extends to the left and right to guide, a ball guide unit 820 that is attached to the rear surface of the upper left portion of the payout unit base 801 and guides a game ball from the tank rail 803 downward in a meandering manner, and a ball guide unit 820 A game ball that is detachably attached from the payout unit base 801 and guided by the ball guiding unit 820. Based on instructions from the payout control board 951 housed in the payout control board box 950, the payout device 830 pays out one by one, and the game balls attached to the rear surface of the payout unit base 801 and paid out by the payout device 830 downward. An upper full ball path unit 850 that guides and discharges a game ball from either the normal discharge port 850d or the full discharge port 850e according to the storage state of the game ball in the upper plate 321 in the tray unit 320, and a payout unit A normal guiding path 861 that is attached to the lower end of the base 801 and that guides the game ball released from the normal discharge port 850d of the upper full ball path unit 850 forward and guides it from the front end to the through ball path 273 of the door frame 3 and the full guide path 861. The game ball released from the tongue outlet 850e is guided forward and guided from the front end to the full ball receiver 274 of the door frame 3. A lower full sphere path unit 860 having a RuMitsurutan taxiway 862, and a.

  The board unit 900 of the main body frame 4 includes a board unit base 910 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 and a lower part for low sound inside attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 on the left side of the board unit base 910 when viewed from the front. A speaker unit 920 having a speaker 921, a power supply board box 930 that is attached to the rear right side of the board unit base 910 and accommodates a power supply board therein, and is attached to the rear side of the speaker unit 920. An interface control board box 940 in which an interface control board is accommodated, and a payout control board 951 that is mounted across the power supply board box 930 and the interface control board box 940 and controls the payout of game balls are accommodated therein. A payout control board box 950 There.

  As shown in FIGS. 9 and 10, the game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 defines the outer periphery of the game area 5 a into which the game ball is to be shot and moves the game ball launched from the ball launcher 680 to the upper part of the game area 5 a. A front component member 1000 having an outer rail 1001 and an inner rail 1002 that are guided to the front, and a flat gaming panel 1100 that is attached to the rear side of the front component member 1000 and defines the rear end of the game area 5a. Yes.

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the player rotates the handle 302 in a state where the game ball is stored in the upper plate 321, the ball launcher 680 causes the game ball to have strength according to the rotation angle of the handle 302. The game board 5 is driven into the game area 5a. When the game balls that have been thrown into the game area 5a are received in the winning opening, a predetermined number of gaming balls are paid out to the upper plate 321 by the payout device 830 in accordance with the received winning opening. Since the player's interest can be enhanced by paying out this game ball, the game ball in the upper plate 321 can be driven into the game area 5a, and the game can be enjoyed by the player.

[2. Overall structure of outer frame]
The outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 11 to 16. FIG. 11 is a front view of the outer frame in the pachinko machine, and FIG. 12 is a right side view of the outer frame. FIG. 13 is a perspective view of the outer frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 14 is a perspective view of the outer frame as viewed from the rear. FIG. 15 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame as seen from the front. FIG. 16A is a perspective view of a portion of the outer frame side upper hinge member in the outer frame, viewed from the lower side with the left frame member omitted, and FIG. 16B is an exploded perspective view of FIG. FIG. The outer frame 2 is attached to an island facility (not shown) where the pachinko machine 1 such as a game hall is installed.

  As shown in the figure, the outer frame 2 is connected to both ends of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20 which are separated from each other in the vertical direction and extend to the left and right, and the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20. The left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are provided. The upper frame member 10, the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40 are formed to have the same width in the front-rear direction. The upper and lower lengths of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are longer than the left and right lengths of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20. The outer frame 2 is assembled so that the left and right end surfaces of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20 and the side surfaces of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 facing outward in the left-right direction are the same surface. It has been.

  The outer frame 2 includes an outer frame side upper hinge member 60 attached to the left end portion of the upper frame member 10 when viewed from the front, a lock member 66 attached to the lower surface of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60, An outer frame side lower hinge member 70 attached to the upper left end of the curtain plate member 50 and the left frame member 30 is provided. With the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2, the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 can be attached so as to be opened and closed.

  The outer frame 2 connects the lower ends of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 and is attached to the front side of the lower frame member 20 and is attached to the rear side of the curtain plate member 50. A curtain plate reinforcing member 80 whose both ends are attached to the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 respectively, a flat plate-like left sliding member 81 attached to the left side of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 from the left and right center, and a curtain A plate-like right sliding member 82 attached at a position near the right end on the upper surface of the plate member 50. The curtain plate reinforcing member 80 is formed of a solid member (for example, wood, plywood, etc.), and is attached to the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40.

  Further, the outer frame 2 includes an upper frame member 10 and a left frame member 30, an upper frame member 10 and a right frame member 40, a lower frame member 20 and a left frame member 30, and a lower frame member 20 and a right frame member 40, respectively. A connecting member 85 is provided. The outer frame 2 is attached to the inner side (left side) of the right frame member 40 and includes an upper hook member 90 and a lower hook member 91 to which an outer frame hook 703 of a locking unit 700 described later is locked. Have.

[2-1. Upper frame member]
The upper frame member 10 of the outer frame 2 is formed of a solid (solid) material (for example, wood, plywood, etc.) having a predetermined thickness. The upper frame member 10 includes an engagement notch portion 11 penetrating vertically in the center in the front-rear direction at both left and right ends and recessed toward the center in the left-right direction. In the engagement notch portion 11, an upper left fixing member 87 of the upper left connecting member 85A and an upper right connecting member 85B, which will be described later, of the connecting member 85 are attached. Moreover, the upper frame member 10 is provided with the mounting step part 12 which became depressed rather than the general surface in the upper surface and front surface of a left end part by front view. An outer frame side upper hinge member 60 is attached to the attachment step portion 12.

[2-2. Lower frame member]
The lower frame member 20 of the outer frame 2 is formed of a solid (solid) material (for example, wood, plywood, etc.) having a predetermined thickness. The lower frame member 20 is formed such that the left and right lengths and the upper and lower thicknesses are the same as the left and right lengths and the upper and lower thicknesses of the upper frame member 10, and the front and rear width is the upper frame member 10. It is formed longer than the width before and after. The lower frame member 20 includes an engagement notch portion 21 penetrating vertically and recessed toward the center in the left-right direction at a position closer to the rear side than the center in the front-rear direction at both left and right ends. In the engagement notch portion 21, a lower left connecting member 85C and a lower lateral fixing portion 88 of the connecting member 85, which will be described later, are attached.

  In addition, the lower frame member 20 includes front end notch portions 22 that are recessed rearward from the front surfaces at both left and right ends. In the lower frame member 20, the width in the front-rear direction from the rear end of the front end notch 22 to the rear surface of the lower frame member 20 is formed to the same size as the width in the front-rear direction of the upper frame member 10. When the lower frame member 20 is assembled to the outer frame 2, a portion between the left and right front end cutout portions 22 is inserted into the curtain plate member 50.

[2-3. Left frame member and right frame member]
The left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 of the outer frame 2 extend vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape, and are formed of a metal extruded shape such as an aluminum alloy. The left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are formed in symmetrical shapes in plan view. When the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are assembled as the outer frame 2, the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are recessed inwardly from the rearward position to the vicinity of the rear end with respect to the center in the front-rear direction. The concave portions 31 and 41 and the protruding portions 32 and 42 that bulge from the side surface on the opposite side of the concave portions 31 and 41 and are formed in a hollow shape are provided. The left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are enhanced in strength and rigidity by the protrusions 32 and 42. In addition, in the protrusions 32 and 42, a lower horizontal fixing portion 88 on the rear side of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B, which will be described later, of the connecting member 85 is inserted and attached.

  The left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 have a plurality of grooves extending vertically on the surface. With the plurality of grooves, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed or transported in an island facility such as a game hall, the pachinko machine 1 can be easily held by the operator, and the pachinko machine 1 can be easily held. The design of the appearance of the machine 1 can be improved.

[2-4. Curtain plate member]
The curtain plate member 50 of the outer frame 2 is formed in a box shape with the rear side opened. The curtain plate member 50 is formed in a U-shape with a rear extension 51 extending rearward in the vicinity of the left end in front view on the upper surface and a size allowing a game ball to pass from the left end of the rear extension 51. A left discharge hole 52 that is notched and penetrates up and down, and a right discharge hole 53 that penetrates up and down in a size that allows a game ball to pass on the right side of the left discharge hole 52 in the rear extension 51; A standing wall portion 54 that extends upward from the rear end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 including the rear end of the rearward extending portion 51, and a front surface that bulges forward from the vicinity of the upper end of the standing wall portion 54. And a return portion 55 that is inclined so as to go backward as it goes to.

  The curtain plate member 50 is configured so that the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is placed on the upper surface on the front side of the rear extension 51 and the upper surface of the rear extension 51. A horizontal portion 71 described later is attached. Further, the left discharge hole 52 of the curtain plate member 50 is formed at a position coincident with a discharge hole 74 described later of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 in a state assembled to the outer frame 2. Further, the right discharge hole 53 is formed at a position on the right side of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 in a state assembled to the outer frame 2. The right discharge hole 53 is formed larger than the left discharge hole 52.

  Further, the curtain plate member 50 is inclined such that the upper surface on the right side of the rear extension 51 is lower on the front end side. Further, the curtain plate member 50 has a left mounting portion 56 for mounting the left sliding member 81 on the right side of the rear extending portion 51 on the upper surface, and a right mounting for mounting the right sliding member 82 near the right end on the upper surface. Part 57. The lower surface of the main body frame 4 is placed on the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 via the left sliding member 81 and the right sliding member 82.

  As shown in the figure, the curtain plate member 50 has a shallow relief decoration on the front surface. Further, although not shown, the curtain plate member 50 has a box-shaped interior partitioned into a lattice by a plurality of ribs, thereby enhancing strength and rigidity. The curtain plate member 50 is formed so that the front half of the curtain plate reinforcing member 80 can be accommodated therein.

[2-5. Outer frame side upper hinge member]
As shown in the drawing, the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 is a flat plate extending horizontally and having a rectangular outer shape, and a flat plate extending forward from the front end of the upper fixing portion 61. The front extension 62, the bearing groove 63 extending to the left and right center of the front extension 62 as it goes forward from the right end of the front extension 62, and the top fixing part 61 in plan view. A flat horizontal fixing portion 64 extending downward from the left side, and a horizontal fixing portion extending downward from an end side of the front extending portion 62 from the left end to the portion where the bearing groove 63 is opened around the front end. A flat drooping portion 65 that is continuous with the portion 64 (see FIG. 16B and the like).

  In the outer frame side upper hinge member 60, the upper fixing portion 61 is placed on the upper surface of the mounting step portion 12 of the upper frame member 10 in a state where the outer frame 2 is assembled, and is fixed by a screw (not shown). Yes. Further, the front extension 62 extends forward from the front end of the upper frame member 10. Further, the lateral fixing portion 64 is fixed to the left frame member 30 with screws while being inserted into the recess 31 on the outer side surface of the left frame member 30 from above.

  The outer frame side upper hinge member 60 inserts the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 into the bearing groove 63, thereby cooperating with the outer frame side lower hinge member 70. It can be supported so that it can be opened and closed. The outer frame side upper hinge member 60 is formed by bending a metal plate by press molding.

[2-6. Lock member]
As shown in FIG. 16, the lock member 66 of the outer frame 2 includes a band plate-like lock main body 66 a extending in the front-rear direction with a predetermined width on the left and right sides, and an operation portion protruding rightward from the rear end of the lock main body 66 a. 66b, an elastically deformable rod-like elastic portion 66c extending leftward from the rear end of the lock main body 66a and extending obliquely left frontward, and a mounting hole penetrating vertically near the rear end of the lock main body 66a 66d. The lock member 66 is made of synthetic resin. The lock member 66 is rotatably attached to the lower surface of the front extension portion 62 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 by an attachment screw 67.

  The lock member 66 is attached at a position where the rear end of the lock main body 66a is behind the bearing groove 63 in the front extending portion 62 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 through the attachment hole 66d. When the lock member 66 is attached to the outer frame side upper hinge member 60, the lock main body 66a can block the bearing groove 63 in a plan view, and the right side surface near the front end has the outer frame side upper hinge member. 60 extends forward so as to be able to come into contact with a portion extending to the opening of the bearing groove 63 in the hanging portion 65 (see FIG. 18).

  The tip of the elastic portion 66c extending leftward from the rear end of the lock body 66a is in contact with the inner peripheral surface of the hanging portion 65 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60. The lock member 66 is urged by the urging force of the elastic portion 66c in a direction in which the front end rotates leftward about the attachment hole 66d. Therefore, in a normal state, the right side surface of the lock member 66 near the front end of the lock body 66a is in contact with the hanging portion 65 (see FIG. 18). In this state, a space that can accommodate a body frame upper hinge pin 622 (to be described later) of the body frame side upper hinge member 620 is formed in a portion of the bearing groove 63 on the front side of the lock body 66a.

  The lock member 66 can rotate the lock body 66a against the urging force of the elastic portion 66c by operating the operation portion 66b. Then, by operating the operation portion 66b, the lock main body 66a is rotated in a direction in which the front end thereof moves to the left, whereby the lock main body 66a can be retracted from the bearing groove 63 in a plan view. Can pass through. As a result, the main body frame hinge pin 622 can be inserted into the bearing groove 63, or the main body frame hinge pin 622 can be removed from the bearing groove 63.

[2-7. Outer frame side lower hinge member]
As shown in the figure, the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2 stands upward from a horizontally extending flat plate portion 71 and a rear side of the left side of the horizontal portion 71 from the center in the front-rear direction. A rising plate-like rising portion 72, an outer frame lower hinge pin 73 projecting upward from the vicinity of the front end of the horizontal portion 71, and passing through the horizontal portion 71 up and down so that only one game ball can pass therethrough. And a discharge hole 74 having a size. The outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is formed by bending a metal plate by press molding.

  The horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is formed in a trapezoidal shape with the left side as the bottom in plan view. The outer frame lower hinge pin 73 has a cylindrical shape, and is formed in a truncated cone shape whose upper end is narrower than the center in the vertical direction. The outer frame lower hinge pin 73 is attached to the left side position in the vicinity of the front end of the horizontal portion 71. The discharge hole 74 is formed in the horizontal portion 71 so as to be in contact with a central portion in the front-rear direction of the rising portion 72 and extend in an inverted U shape from the left side of the horizontal portion 71 to the right. The discharge hole 74 is formed in substantially the same size as the left discharge hole 52 of the curtain plate member 50.

  In the state where the outer frame 2 is assembled, the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 has the horizontal portion 71 placed on the upper surface near the left end of the curtain plate member 50 and the rear extension portion 51. Is fixed to the curtain plate reinforcing member 80 by screws (not shown) penetrating the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50. Further, in a state where the outer frame 2 is assembled, the rising portion 72 is attached to a portion of the inner side surface of the left frame member 30 on the front side of the protruding portion 32 with a screw (not shown). The outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is formed by inserting the outer frame lower hinge pin 73 into a main body frame lower hinge hole (not shown) in the main body frame side lower hinge member 640 of the main body frame 4. The main body frame 4 can be attached so as to be openable and closable in cooperation with the hinge member 60.

  Further, in a state where the outer frame 2 is assembled, the discharge hole 74 coincides with the left discharge hole 52 of the curtain plate member 50. Thereby, the game ball on the horizontal portion 71 can be dropped (discharged) to the rear side of the curtain plate member 50 through the discharge hole 74 and the left discharge hole 52. More specifically, when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the game balls that have dropped between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 are closed as the main body frame 4 is closed. Is gradually narrowed, so that the gap is rolled to the rear side with a wide interval, and the discharge hole 74 can be discharged. At this time, the discharge hole 74 is formed at a position that is substantially the same as the rear end of the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 in a state assembled to the pachinko machine 1. The game ball dropped between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 can be easily prevented from rolling to the rear side of the main body frame 4 by being discharged from the discharge hole 74, and the outer frame side It is possible to make it difficult for the game ball to stay on the lower hinge member 70.

[2-8. Connecting member]
The connecting member 85 of the outer frame 2 includes an upper left connecting member 85A that connects the upper frame member 10 and the left frame member 30, an upper right connecting member 85B that connects the upper frame member 10 and the right frame member 40, and a lower frame member. There are a lower left connecting member 85C that connects 20 and the left frame member 30, and a lower right connecting member 85D that connects the lower frame member 20 and the right frame member 40.

  The connecting member 85 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-like horizontal fixing portion 86, a flat plate-like upper horizontal fixing portion 87 extending upward from either one of the left and right sides of the horizontal fixing portion 86, and a horizontal fixing portion. And a flat lower lateral fixing portion 88 extending downward from the same side as the portion where the upper lateral fixing portion 87 extends. The connecting member 85 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

  In the upper left connecting member 85 </ b> A and the upper right connecting member 85 </ b> B, the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 extends upward from the center of the horizontal fixing portion 86 in the front-rear direction, and the lower horizontal fixing portions 88 are formed from both front and rear sides of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87. It extends downward. That is, the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B are provided with two lower lateral fixing portions 88 that are separated from each other in the front-rear direction. The horizontal fixing portions 86 of the upper left connecting member 85 </ b> A and the upper right connecting member 85 </ b> B are fixed to the upper frame member 10 in contact with the lower surface of the upper frame member 10. Further, the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B is inserted into the engagement notch portion 21 of the upper frame member 10 and is fixed to the left and right ends of the upper frame member 10. In addition, the lower horizontal fixing portions 88 on the front side of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B are fixed to the inner side surfaces on the front side of the protruding portions 32 and 42 of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40, respectively. Further, the lower horizontal fixing portion 88 on the rear side of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B is inserted into the protruding portions 32 and 42 of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 and is screwed from the outer side surface. Thus, the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are respectively fixed.

  In the lower left connecting member 85 </ b> C and the lower right connecting member 85 </ b> D, the rear end of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 protrudes rearward from the rear end of the horizontal fixing portion 86 and is more than the horizontal fixing portion 86 of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87. A lower lateral fixing portion 88 extends below the horizontal fixing portion 86 from the lower end of the portion protruding rearward. The lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D further include a bent portion 89 that protrudes from the rear end of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 to the same side as the horizontal fixing portion 86. The horizontal fixing portions 86 of the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D are fixed in contact with the upper surface of the lower frame member 20. Further, the upper horizontal fixing portions 87 of the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D are fixed to inner side surfaces on the front side of the protruding portions 32 and 42 of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40, respectively. Further, the lower horizontal fixing portions 88 of the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D are inserted into the engagement notches 21 of the lower frame member 20 and fixed to the end surfaces in the left and right direction of the lower frame member 20, respectively. The

[2-9. Lock mechanism for upper hinge member on outer frame side]
Next, in the outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, a locking mechanism for the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 of the main body frame 4 by the lock member 66 in the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 will be described with reference to FIGS. The description will be given with reference. FIG. 17A is an enlarged perspective view showing a state in which the main body frame side upper hinge member of the main body frame is removed with respect to the outer frame side upper hinge member of the outer frame, and FIG. It is a perspective view which expands and shows the state by which the main body side upper hinge member is attached to the hinge member. FIG. 18 is an explanatory view showing the action of the lock member in the outer frame.

  When the lock member 66 in the outer frame 2 is attached to the front extension portion 62 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 (normal state), the tip of the elastic portion 66 c is in contact with the inner peripheral surface of the hanging portion 65. In addition, the lock body 66a is configured to close a part of the bearing groove 63 bent in a square shape, and the distal end portion of the lock body 66a does not close the deepest part of the bearing groove 63. In the deepest portion of the bearing groove 63, a space is formed in which the body frame upper hinge pin 622 of the body frame side upper hinge member 620 of the body frame 4 can be inserted.

  The support mechanism of the body frame upper hinge pin 622 using the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the lock member 66 in this embodiment is such that the body frame upper hinge pin 622 is inserted into the deepest portion of the bearing groove 63 and the front end of the lock body 66a. The right side surface of the lock body 66 is in close contact with the right hanging portion 65 (in this state, there is a slight gap between the right side surface at the front end of the lock body 66a and the right hanging portion 65 so that it is in contact with the right hanging surface 65). In the normal shaft support state, the center of the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame located at the deepest portion of the bent bearing groove 63 and the front end surface of the lock main body 66a are opposed to each other in an oblique direction. It is in a state.

  In this normal shaft support state, the main body frame hinge pin 622 supporting the heavy main body frame 4 is in contact with the front end portion of the bearing groove 63. A load from 622 to the front end surface of the lock body 66a is hardly applied. That is, no load is applied to the elastic portion 66c of the lock member 66. Since the front end surface of the lock body 66a is formed in an arc shape, the lock member 66 smoothly rotates when the operation portion 66b is rotated to rotate the lock member 66. Yes. In the drawing, the center of the arc of the front end surface of the lock body 66a is the center of the mounting hole 66d (the rotation center of the lock member 66).

  Therefore, when the acting force F is applied in a direction in which the hinge pin 622 on the body frame is removed along the inclination of the bearing groove 63 formed in a square shape, the acting force is applied to the arcuate front end surface of the lock body 66a. F is a component force F1 (normal direction of the arc of the front end surface of the lock main body 66a) acting on a contact portion between the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame and the arc-shaped front end surface, and the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame and the bearing groove 63. The component force F1 is directed to the center of the mounting hole 66d (mounting screw 67) (the rotation center of the lock member 66) when divided into the component force F2 acting on the contact portion with the inner surface of the one side. The moment of rotating the front end of the lock main body 66 a of the lock member 66 in the direction away from the right hanging portion 65 does not act, and the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame is connected to the front end of the lock main body 66 a of the lock member 66 and the bearing groove 63. Inside Clamped state is maintained between the.

  For this reason, even in a normal shaft support state or a state where the acting force of the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame is applied to the lock member 66, the elastic portion 66c of the lock member 66 is not constantly loaded, and is integrally formed of synthetic resin. It is possible to prevent plastic deformation caused by creep of the elastic portion 66c, and to prevent the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame from coming off from the bearing groove 63 over a long period of time. Even if an excessive force is applied and the front end portion of the lock main body 66a of the lock member 66 is rotated in the direction of moving to the right, the right side surface of the front end of the lock main body 66a contacts the drooping portion 65 and beyond. Since it does not rotate, the lock member 66 is prevented from protruding outside the front extension 62.

  Even if the shape of the front end surface of the lock body 66a is not an arc, the position where the rotational moment does not occur due to the action of the component force F1 described above or the front end portion of the lock member 66 faces the outside of the front extension portion 62. By positioning the rotation center of the lock member 66 (the axis fixed by the mounting screw 67) at a position where the rotational moment to rotate is generated, a load is not applied to the elastic portion 66c of the lock member 66 at all times. Even if the lock member 66 rotates, the right side surface of the front end of the lock body 66 a only abuts on the hanging portion 65, so that the lock member 66 does not protrude outside the front extension portion 62.

  When the main body frame hinge pin 622 of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 is supported by the bearing groove 63 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60, the main body frame is inserted into the bearing groove 63 from the open side of the bearing groove 63. The hinge pin 622 is inserted. When the hinge pin 622 on the body frame is inserted into the bearing groove 63, the hinge pin 622 on the body frame comes into contact with the right side surface of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66, and the front end of the lock body 66a is against the urging force of the elastic portion 66c. The lock member 66 rotates about the mounting screw 67 so as to move to the left. As a result, the lock main body 66 a that has closed the bearing groove 63 is retracted, the bearing groove 63 is opened, and the main body frame hinge pin 622 can be moved to the deepest portion (front end) of the bearing groove 63.

  When the body frame hinge pin 622 is moved to the deepest part of the bearing groove 63, the contact between the body frame hinge pin 622 and the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 is released, and the lock body 66a is urged by the urging force of the elastic portion 66c. The lock member 66 rotates so that the front end of the lock member moves to the right, and the lock member 66 returns to the normal state. As a result, the hinge pin 622 on the body frame is accommodated in a space in front of the front end of the lock body 66 a in the bearing groove 63, and the hinge pin 622 on the body frame is rotatable at the deepest portion of the bearing groove 63. The state is held (locked) in the state.

  When the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame is removed from the bearing groove 63, the lock member 66 is rotated so that the front end of the lock main body 66a moves to the left by operating the operation portion 66b of the lock member 66. The lock body 66a is retracted from the bearing groove 63 against the urging force of 66c. As a result, the deepest part of the bearing groove 63 and the opening communicate with each other, and the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame can be removed from the bearing groove 63.

[2-10. Crime prevention mechanism and ball biting prevention mechanism at the outer frame side lower hinge member]
In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the ball engagement prevention for preventing the game ball from being sandwiched between the crime prevention mechanism and the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 at the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2. The mechanism will be described.

  When the outer frame 2 is assembled, an outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is attached to the left end portion in front view on the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50. The horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is mounted in a state of being placed near the left end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 and the upper surface of the rear extending portion 51. The curtain plate member 50 includes a standing wall portion 54 that rises upward from the rear end of the upper surface. As a result, even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire enters the rear side of the main body frame 4 (pachinko machine 1) through the gap between the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 and the main body frame side lower hinge member 640. Since the tip of the unauthorized tool comes into contact with the standing wall 54 extending upward from the rear end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50, it is possible to prevent the unauthorized tool from being inserted further to the rear side. It is possible to prevent an illegal act from being performed via the outer frame side lower hinge member 70.

  Moreover, since the return part 55 extended ahead is provided in the upper end of the standing wall part 54, when the unauthorized tool contact | abutted to the standing wall part 54 bends upwards, the front-end | tip of an unauthorized tool by the return part 55 Can be folded further forward, so that unauthorized tools can be prevented from entering the rear side of the main body frame 4, and an illegal act is performed through the portion of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70. Can be surely prevented.

  By the way, when the upright wall portion 54 extending upward is provided at the rear end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50, the game ball is placed on the outer frame side while the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2. When falling on the lower hinge member 70 (horizontal portion 71), the game ball on the horizontal portion 71 is not discharged backward from the rear end of the horizontal portion 71 due to the presence of the standing wall portion 54, so the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 There is a risk of being caught between. On the other hand, in this embodiment, the discharge hole 74 and the left discharge hole 52 through which the game ball can pass through the horizontal part 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 and the rearward extension part 51 of the curtain plate member 50. And the right discharge hole 53, the game ball on the horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 can be discharged downward from the discharge hole 74 and the like. It is possible to reduce the game ball being caught between the two.

  Therefore, when the game ball is sandwiched between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4, the periphery of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is damaged, or the main body frame 4 is not closed in a normal state. It is possible to prevent a gap from being formed between the main body frame 4 and illegal acts using the gap.

[3. Overall structure of door frame]
The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 19 is a front view of the door frame in the pachinko machine, FIG. 20 is a right side view of the door frame, FIG. 21 is a left side view of the door frame, and FIG. 22 is a rear view of the door frame. 23 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the right front, FIG. 24 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the left front, and FIG. 25 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the rear. 26 is a sectional view taken along line AA in FIG. 19, FIG. 27 is a sectional view taken along line BB in FIG. 19, and FIG. 28 is a sectional view taken along line CC in FIG. FIG. FIG. 29 is an exploded perspective view in which the door frame is disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 30 is an exploded perspective view in which the door frame is disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear.

  As shown in FIGS. 29 and 30, the door frame 3 is attached to the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 and the square frame-shaped door frame base unit 100 whose front view extends vertically. Handle unit 300, a pan unit 320 attached to the lower front portion of the door frame base unit 100, a rendering operation unit 400 attached to the center of the plate unit 320, and a door frame base unit above the plate unit 320. Door frame left side unit 530 attached to the front left part of the door 100, door frame right side unit 550 attached to the front right part of the door frame base unit 100 above the dish unit 320, and the door frame left side The door frame top attached to the upper part of the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 above the unit 530 and the door frame right side unit 550. Is provided with a knit 570, a.

  The door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3, which will be described in detail later, is a plate-shaped door frame base 110 having a through-hole 111 penetrating in the front and rear in a rectangular shape (rectangular shape) whose front view extends vertically. A frame-shaped reinforcing unit 130 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110, and attached to both upper and lower ends of the reinforcing unit 130 on the left end side when viewed from the front, and attached to the main body frame 4 so as to be capable of hinge rotation. A door frame side upper hinge member 140 and a door frame side lower hinge member 150; a glass unit 190 which is attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 and closes the through hole 111; and a security cover 200 which covers the lower rear surface of the glass unit 190; The door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2 that are attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 so as to protrude forward through the door frame base 110. An opening / closing cylinder unit 210 for locking the space, a ball feed unit 250 for sending a game ball to the ball launcher 680 attached to the lower rear surface of the door frame base 110, and a ball attached to the lower rear surface of the door frame base 110 A foul cover unit 270 that receives a game ball that has been launched by the launching device 680 and has not reached the game area 5a and that discharges it to the lower plate 322.

  Although the handle unit 300 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail later, the game ball stored in the upper plate 321 is changed according to the rotation angle of the handle 302 by the player rotating the rotatable handle 302. It can be driven into the game area 5a of the game board 5 with high strength.

  As will be described in detail later, the tray unit 320 of the door frame 3 is attached to a lower portion of the through-hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 in the door frame base unit 100, and the front surface bulges forward. The effect operation unit 400 is attached to the front end in the center in the left-right direction. The tray unit 320 stores an upper plate 321 for storing game balls to be driven into the game area 5a, and game balls supplied from the upper plate 321 and the foul cover unit 270. Within the range of the lower tray 322 that can be stored, the upper tray ball removal button 327 for removing the game balls stored in the upper tray 321 to the lower tray 322, and the balance of cash or prepaid card that has been put into the ball lending machine A ball lending button 328 for lending a game ball to the player, a return button 329 for returning cash or a prepaid card obtained by subtracting the amount of the game ball lending from the ball lending machine, and cash inserted into the ball lending machine , A ball rental return display unit 330 for displaying the remaining number of prepaid cards, etc., an effect selection left button 331 and an effect selection right button 332 that can be accepted by the player when the effect is presented, and a lower plate Game balls in 22 and lower tray ball vent button 333 for discharging downwardly the dish unit 320, and a.

  The effect operation unit 400 of the door frame 3 is attached to the front portion of the dish unit 320 at the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, and can be pressed by the player and presents an effect image to the player. It is something that can be done. As will be described in detail later, the effect operation unit 400 has a large operation button 410 that can be operated by the player, and a door frame side effect that can be viewed from the player side in the operation button 410 and can display an effect image. Display device 460.

  The door frame left side unit 530 of the door frame 3, which will be described in detail later, is attached to the upper left side of the door frame base unit 100 on the left side of the front side of the door frame base unit 100 on the left side of the front side of the plate unit 320. The left outer side of the game area 5a) is decorated. The door frame left side unit 530 includes a left unit decorative lens member (not shown) that can be decorated with light emission.

  The door frame right side unit 550 of the door frame 3, which will be described in detail later, is attached to the upper right side of the door frame base unit 100 on the right side of the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the plate unit 320. The right outer side of the game area 5a) is decorated. The door frame right side unit 550 protrudes more forward than the door frame left side unit 530, and is provided at the front end with a right unit left decorative member 554 and a right unit right decorative member 557 provided on both left and right sides. The right unit decorative lens member 561 is provided. The door frame right side unit 550 can decorate the right unit left decorative member 554, the right unit right decorative member 557, and the right unit decorative lens member 561 with light emission.

  The door frame top unit 570 of the door frame 3 is attached to the upper side of the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the door frame left side unit 530 and the door frame right side unit 550. The upper part of the frame 3 is decorated. The door frame top unit 570, which will be described in detail later, has a pair of upper speakers 573 spaced left and right, a top middle decorative member 576 protruding forward in the center of the front surface, and both left and right sides of the top middle decorative member 576. A top left decorative lens member 579 and a top right decorative lens member 580 are provided. The door frame top unit 570 can light-decorate the top middle decorative member 576, the top left decorative lens member 579, and the top right decorative lens member 580.

[3-1. Overall configuration of door frame base unit]
The door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. FIG. 31A is a perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 31B is a perspective view of the door frame base unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 32 is an exploded perspective view of the main part of the door frame base unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 33 is an exploded perspective view of the main part of the door frame base unit as seen from the rear. is there.

  The door frame base unit 100 is attached to the main body frame 4 so as to be openable / closable (rotatable by hinges) so that the left side when viewed from the front closes the front surface of the main body frame 4. The door frame base unit 100 has a handle unit 300 at the lower front corner, a dish unit 320 to which the rendering operation unit 400 is attached at the lower front surface of the through hole 111, and a door frame left side unit 530 at the left outer front surface of the through hole 111. The door frame right side unit 550 is attached to the right outer front surface of the through hole 111, and the door frame top unit 570 is attached to the upper outer front surface of the through hole 111, respectively.

  As shown in FIGS. 32 and 33, the door frame base unit 100 includes a plate-like door frame base 110 having a through-hole 111 penetrating in the front and rear in a rectangular shape whose front view extends vertically. The frame-shaped reinforcement unit 130 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110 and the upper and lower ends of the reinforcement unit 130 on the left end side when viewed from the front are projected forward from the door frame base 110 and The door frame side upper hinge member 140 and the door frame side lower hinge member 150 that are rotatably attached to the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 and the main body frame side lower hinge member 640, and the front surface of the through-hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110. A door frame left side decorative board 160 mounted on the left side and mounted with a plurality of LEDs on the front surface, and a glass unit 19 rotatably mounted on the rear side of the door frame base 110. The glass unit mounting member 170 for mounting the detachably, and a.

  The door frame base unit 100 is attached to the lower right corner in front view on the front surface of the door frame base 110 and is attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 and a cylindrical handle attachment member 180 for attaching the handle unit 300. A glass unit 190 that closes the through-hole 111, a security cover 200 that covers the lower rear portion of the glass unit 190, and an opening / closing cylinder unit that is attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 so as to penetrate the door frame base 110 and protrude forward. 210, a ball feeding unit 250 attached to the lower rear surface of the door frame base 110, and a foul cover unit 270 attached to the lower rear surface of the door frame base 110.

  Further, although not shown, the door frame base unit 100 includes various decorative boards provided in the door frame 3, a ball feeding solenoid 255, a handle rotation detection sensor 307, a handle touch sensor 310, a single button operation sensor 312, Ball rental button 328, return button 329, ball rental return display section 330, effect selection left button 331, effect selection right button 332, vibration motor 424, press detection sensor 440, door frame side effect display device 460 (liquid crystal display device 461) , Etc., and a door main body relay board for relaying the connection between the main body frame 4 and the door frame relay board 911 of the board unit 900.

[3-1a. Door frame base]
The door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The door frame base 110 is formed in a quadrangle (rectangular shape) whose outer shape in front view extends vertically. The door frame base 110 penetrates back and forth, and includes a through-opening 111 formed in a substantially quadrilateral shape whose inner peripheral shape in a front view extends vertically. In the through-hole 111, the upper side and the left and right sides forming the inner periphery are close to the outer periphery of the door frame base 110, respectively, and the lower side forming the inner periphery is up and down from the lower end of the door frame base 110. It is located at a height of about 1/3 of the direction. Therefore, the door frame base 110 is entirely formed in a frame shape by the through-hole 111 penetrating in the front-rear direction. The door frame base 110 is integrally formed of synthetic resin.

  The door frame base 110 is formed in the front lower right corner of the front surface, and has a handle mounting seat surface 112 that is inclined so that the left end protrudes slightly forward from the right end side, the handle mounting seat surface 112, and the through-hole 111. Between the cylinder mounting portion 113 and the cylinder mounting portion 113 to which the cylinder mounting metal plate 213 of the opening / closing cylinder unit 210 is mounted, and is opened through the cylinder mounting portion 113 in the front-rear direction. Is inserted through the cylinder insertion hole 114 through which the cylinder lock 211 is inserted, and the cylinder insertion hole 114 and the handle mounting seat surface 112 on the left side when viewed from the front, and forward through the entrance 251a and the ball outlet 251b of the ball feed unit 250. And a ball feed opening 115 for facing the surface.

  Further, the door frame base 110 penetrates forward and rearward at the same height as the handle mounting seat surface 112 to the left of the center of the door frame base 110 in the left-right direction, and faces the ball outlet 276 of the foul cover unit 270 forward. The lower plate passing opening 116 and the door frame base 110 near the left end when viewed from the front are adjacent to the lower side of the through hole 111 so as to be adjacent to the lower side of the door frame base 110 and face the through ball passage 273 of the foul cover unit 270 forward. A dish passage opening 117, a glass unit mounting portion 118 into which the glass frame 191 of the glass unit 190 is inserted and recessed from the rear surface along the inner periphery of the through-hole 111, and both left and right sides of the door frame base 110 And a speaker insertion port 119 through which the rear end of the upper speaker 573 of the door frame top unit 570 is inserted.

[3-1b. Reinforcement unit]
The reinforcing unit 130 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. The reinforcing unit 130 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110 to reinforce the door frame base 110 and increase the strength and rigidity of the door frame base 110 (door frame 3). The reinforcing unit 130 includes left and right upper reinforcing metal plates 131 attached along the upper side of the rear surface of the door frame base 110 and left and right middle reinforcing members attached to the lower side of the through hole 111 on the rear surface of the door frame base 110. A sheet metal 132, a left reinforcing sheet metal 133 extending vertically and attached along the front left side of the rear surface of the door frame base 110, and a right reinforcement extending vertically and attached along the right side of the door frame base 110 viewed from the front. A sheet metal 134 and a locking engagement portion 135 attached to the rear surface of the right reinforcing sheet metal 134 and to which the door frame collar 702 of the locking unit 700 is engaged are provided.

  In the reinforcing unit 130, the left and right ends of the upper reinforcing sheet metal 131 are connected and fixed to the upper ends of the left reinforcing sheet metal 133 and the right reinforcing sheet metal 134 with screws, and the left end of the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 is connected to the left reinforcing sheet metal 133 with screws. It is fixed. The right end of the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 is connected and fixed to the right reinforcing sheet metal 134 via a cylinder mounting sheet metal 213 of the opening / closing cylinder unit 210 described later. Therefore, the reinforcing unit 130 is formed in a frame shape by the upper reinforcing sheet metal 131, the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132, the left reinforcing sheet metal 133, the right reinforcing sheet metal 134, and the like.

  The upper reinforcing sheet metal 131, the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132, the left reinforcing sheet metal 133, the right reinforcing sheet metal 134, and the locking engagement portion 135 of the reinforcing unit 130 are formed by appropriately bending metal plates. The middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 is formed with a notch portion 132a penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the upper plate passage opening 117 of the door frame base 110.

  Although the detailed illustration is omitted, each of the upper reinforcing sheet metal 131, the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132, the left reinforcing sheet metal 133, and the right reinforcing sheet metal 134 has a portion bent in the front-rear direction. This part increases the strength and rigidity, and prevents the entry of unauthorized tools such as a piano wire or a flat-blade screwdriver from the outside.

[3-1c. Door frame side upper hinge member]
The door frame side upper hinge member 140 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. The door frame-side upper hinge member 140 is attached to the door frame base 110 and has a pair of protruding pieces 141a that are spaced apart from each other in the vertical direction, and a pair of protrusions of the door frame upper hinge shaft bracket 141. A cylindrical door frame upper hinge pin 142 inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 623 of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 and a pair of projecting pieces 141a in the door frame upper hinge pin 142 that penetrates the piece 141a. A disc-shaped eaves member 143 attached at a position between the eaves member 143, the eaves member 143 and the lower protruding piece 141a of the pair of protruding pieces 141a, and a hinge pin 142 on the door frame , And a lock spring 144 that biases the hinge pin 142 on the door frame upward.

  Although not shown, the door frame upper hinge shaft bracket 141 has a flat mounting piece that connects the rear ends of the pair of protruding pieces 141a, and the shape in a side view is opened forward. It is formed in a letter shape. The door frame upper hinge shaft bracket 141 has a mounting piece connecting a pair of protruding pieces 141a attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 with screws.

  The door frame upper hinge pin 142 is rotatably inserted into a door frame upper hinge hole 623 of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 at a portion (upper end) protruding above the upper protruding piece 141a. Further, although not shown, the door frame upper hinge pin 142 is bent in a horizontal direction at a portion protruding downward from the lower protruding piece 141a. The bent portion abuts the lower surface of the lower protruding piece 141a, thereby restricting the upward movement of the hinge pin 142 on the door frame.

  The eaves member 143 is an E-ring, and is inserted and held in a groove formed on the outer periphery of the door frame upper hinge pin 142. The lock spring 144 is a coil spring through which the door frame upper hinge pin 142 can be inserted, and has an upper end in contact with the flange member 143 and a lower end in contact with the lower protruding piece 141a. The lock spring 144 is interposed between the flange member 143 and the lower protruding piece 141a in a compressed state, and biases the door frame upper hinge pin 142 upward via the flange member 143. .

  The door frame side upper hinge member 140 is in a state in which the door frame upper hinge pin 142 is urged upward by the lock spring 144, and the horizontally bent portion of the lower end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 projects downward. By contacting the lower surface of the piece 141a, further upward movement is restricted. In this state, the upper end of the hinge pin 142 on the door frame protrudes a predetermined amount above the upper surface of the upper protruding piece 141a.

  The door frame side upper hinge member 140 has a portion bent horizontally at the lower end of the hinge pin 142 on the door frame and pulls the portion downward against the urging force of the lock spring 144. The upper hinge pin 142 can be moved generally downward, and the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 can be immersed below the upper surface of the upper protruding piece 141a. Therefore, the door frame side upper hinge member 140 inserts the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 into the door frame upper hinge hole 623 of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 from below or pulls it downward. Can do. As a result, the upper left end of the door frame 3 is inserted into the upper hinge hole 623 for the door frame of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 by inserting the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 of the door frame side upper hinge member 140. The main body frame 4 can be supported so as to be capable of hinge rotation.

  Further, the door frame side upper hinge member 140 has a portion of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 that is supported by the pair of protruding pieces 141a of the door frame upper hinge shaft bracket 141. The lower hinge pin 152 is supported coaxially. Thus, the door frame 3 upper hinge member 140 and the door frame side lower hinge member 150 can rotate the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 in a favorable state.

[3-1d. Door frame side lower hinge member]
The door frame side lower hinge member 150 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 and 32. The door frame side lower hinge member 150 is attached to the door frame base 110 and includes a door frame lower hinge shaft bracket 151 having a flat plate-like extension piece 151a extending forward, and a door frame lower hinge shaft bracket. A columnar door frame lower hinge pin 152 (see FIGS. 21 and 22) protruding downward from the vicinity of the front end of the extending piece 151a.

  The door frame lower hinge shaft bracket 151 has a flat plate-like attachment piece (not shown) extending upward from the rear end of a flat plate-like extension piece 151a extending horizontally, and has an overall shape in a side view. Is formed in a substantially L-shape. The door frame lower hinge shaft bracket 151 has a mounting piece (not shown) attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 with screws.

  The door frame lower hinge pin 152 is formed in a truncated cone shape whose lower end is narrowed toward the lower side. The door frame lower hinge pin 152 is rotatably inserted into the door frame hinge hole 644 of the main body frame side lower hinge member 640 in the main body frame 4 described later. The door frame lower hinge pin 152 is arranged coaxially with the door frame upper hinge pin 142 of the door frame side upper hinge member 140.

  The door frame side lower hinge member 150 is capable of hinge-rotating the door frame 3 with respect to the body frame 4 by inserting the door frame lower hinge pin 152 into the door frame hinge hole 644 of the body frame side lower hinge member 640. Can be supported.

[3-1e. Door frame left side decorative board]
The door frame left side decorative board 160 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. The door frame left side decorative board 160 is attached to the front side of the through hole 111 on the front side of the door frame base 110. The door frame left side decorative board 160 extends up and down from the height of the position below the speaker insertion port 119 on the left side when viewed from the front in the door frame base 110 to the height near the center of the through hole 111 in the vertical direction. The frame left side upper decorative board 161 and the door frame left side lower decorative board extending up and down from the height of the lower position of the door frame left side upper decorative board 161 to substantially the same height as the lower end of the upper plate passage opening 117. A substrate 162.

  The door frame left side upper decorative substrate 161 and the door frame left side lower decorative substrate 162 of the door frame left side decorative substrate 160 include a plurality of LEDs 161a and 162a that can irradiate light forward. These LEDs 161a and 162a are full-color LEDs.

  The door frame left side decorative board 160 is positioned behind the door frame left side unit 530, which will be described later, in a state where the door frame 3 is assembled, and includes a plurality of LEDs 161a and 162a provided (mounted) on the front surface. By appropriately emitting light, the left unit decorative lens member of the door frame left side unit 530 can be decorated with light emission.

[3-1f. Glass unit mounting member]
The glass unit mounting member 170 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIG. The glass unit attachment member 170 is rotatably attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110, and is for attaching the glass unit 190 in a detachable manner. The glass unit mounting member 170 is a disc-shaped base portion 171 that is rotatably attached to an axis extending in the front-rear direction on the rear side of the door frame base 110, and protrudes in a bar shape from the base portion 171 in a direction perpendicular to the rotation axis. Projecting portion 172.

  The glass unit attachment member 170 is rotatably attached to a portion below the pair of speaker insertion openings 119 on the rear surface of the door frame base 110 and outside the glass unit attachment portion 118.

  When the glass unit mounting member 170 is rotated so that the protruding portion 172 protrudes upward from the base portion 171, the protruding portion 172 is more outward than the glass unit mounting portion 118 of the door frame base 110 in the rear view. The glass unit 190 can be inserted into the glass unit mounting portion 118 of the door frame base 110, or the glass unit 190 can be removed from the glass unit mounting portion 118.

  When the glass unit 190 is rotated so that the protrusion 172 protrudes downward from the base 171 in a state where the glass unit 190 is inserted into the glass unit attachment 118 of the door frame base 110, the protrusion 172 becomes glass. The unit 190 comes into contact with the rear side of the mounting piece 191a, and the rearward movement of the upper portion of the glass unit 190 is restricted, so that the glass unit 190 can be attached to the door frame base 110.

  In the glass unit mounting member 170, the protruding portion 172 protrudes from a disk-shaped base 171 that is rotatably mounted on the door frame base 110. . From this, in a state where the glass unit mounting member 170 can freely rotate, the protruding portion 172 is stabilized in a state of protruding downward from the base portion 171. Further, in the glass unit mounting member 170, the rearward movement of the glass unit 190 is regulated by the projecting portion 172 when the projecting portion 172 projects downward from the base portion 171. Even if vibration or the like acts on the member 170, the whole does not rotate so that the protruding portion 172 protrudes upward from the base portion 171, and the restriction of the backward movement of the glass unit 190 is naturally released. Absent.

  When removing the glass unit 190 from the door frame base 110, the glass unit mounting member 170 is rotated so that the protruding portion 172 protrudes upward from the base portion 171, and the protruding portion 172 is attached to the mounting piece 191a of the glass unit 190. By moving the glass unit 190 to the outside, the upper side of the glass unit 190 can be moved rearward, and the glass unit 190 can be removed from the door frame base 110.

[3-1 g. Handle mounting member]
The handle mounting member 180 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. The handle attachment member 180 is for attaching the handle unit 300 to the front surface of the door frame base 110. As shown in FIGS. 32 and 33, the handle mounting member 180 includes a cylindrical tube portion 181 extending in the front-rear direction, and outward from the rear end of the tube portion 181 in a direction perpendicular to the axis of the tube portion 181. An annular flange portion 182 that extends, and a plurality of the flange portions 182 that protrude into the cylindrical portion 181 and extend over the entire length in the axial direction of the cylindrical portion 181 and are arranged at unequal intervals with respect to the circumferential direction of the cylindrical portion 181 ( In this example, three ridges 183, and a plurality of reinforcing ribs 184 that connect the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical portion 181 and the front surface of the flange portion 182 and are arranged in the circumferential direction of the cylindrical portion 181 are provided. .

  The handle attachment member 180 is attached to the handle attachment seat surface 112 with screws in a state where the rear surface of the flange portion 182 is in contact with the front surface of the handle attachment seat surface 112 in the door frame base 110.

  The cylindrical portion 181 has an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the base portion 301 a of the handle base 301 in the handle unit 300. One of the three protrusions 183 is provided on the upper side in the cylindrical portion 181, and the remaining two are provided on the lower side in the cylindrical portion 181. These three protrusions 183 are formed at positions corresponding to the three groove portions 301 c in the handle base 301. Therefore, the handle attachment member 180 can insert the base portion 301a of the handle base 301 into the cylindrical portion 181 only when the three protrusions 183 and the three groove portions 301c of the handle base 301 are aligned. The rotational position of the handle base 301 (handle unit 300) can be restricted with respect to the door frame base 110.

  The handle mounting member 180 is attached to the inclined handle mounting seat surface 112 of the door frame base 110 because the axis of the cylinder 181 extends perpendicularly to the rear surface of the flange 182. Thus, the handle unit 300 can be attached to the door frame base 110 in a tilted state.

[3-1h. Glass unit]
The glass unit 190 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The glass unit 190 closes the through-hole 111 of the door frame base 110 so that the rear can be visually recognized from the front. The glass unit 190 has a frame-shaped glass frame 191 that is larger than the inner peripheral shape of the through-hole 111 of the door frame base 110 and can be attached to the glass unit attachment portion 118, and the outer periphery of the glass frame 191 is closed. Two transparent glass plates 192 attached to 191. The two glass plates 192 are attached to the front end side and the rear end side of the glass frame 191, respectively, and are spaced apart from each other so that a space is formed between them (see FIG. 26 and the like).

  The glass frame 191 has a pair of mounting pieces 191a extending in a flat plate shape from a position below the upper left and right upper corners when viewed from the front, and a band extending downward from the lower end and extending along the lower side. A plate-like locking piece 191b. The mounting piece 191 a of the glass frame 191 can be brought into contact with the protruding portion 172 of the glass unit mounting member 170. The locking piece 191b can be inserted into a space between the door frame base 110 and the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 of the reinforcing unit 130 (see FIG. 26).

  The glass unit 190 is formed by inserting a locking piece 191b of the glass frame 191 from the rear side of the door frame base 110 into the gap between the door frame base 110 and the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 of the reinforcing unit 130 from above. The front end of the glass frame 191 is brought into contact with the rear surface of the glass unit mounting portion 118 of the door frame base 110, the glass unit mounting member 170 is rotated, and the protruding portion 172 of the glass unit mounting member 170 is attached to the mounting piece 191a of the glass frame 191. It is attached to the door frame base 110 by contacting the rear surface.

  When removing the glass unit 190 from the door frame base 110, the glass unit 190 can be removed by a procedure reverse to the above. Thereby, the glass unit 190 can be attached to and detached from the door frame base 110.

[3-1i. Security cover]
The security cover 200 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The security cover 200 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110 so as to cover the lower rear portion of the glass unit 190, and is formed of a transparent synthetic resin. The security cover 200 is arranged with a flat plate-shaped main body portion 201 having an outer periphery formed in a predetermined shape, a flat plate-shaped rear protrusion piece 202 that protrudes rearward along the outer peripheral edge of the main body portion 201, and is separated from the left and right. And a pair of locking pieces 203 that protrude forward from the main body 201 and can be locked to the rear side of the door frame base 110.

  The main body 201 of the security cover 200 is formed such that the lower end protrudes below the lower end of the glass unit 190 in a state of being attached to the door frame base 110. Further, the main body 201 is formed in a shape along the lower end of the game area 5 a in the game board 5 in a state where the upper end is assembled to the pachinko machine 1. More specifically, the upper end of the main body 201 is formed in a shape along a part of an inner rail 1002 of the front constituent member 1000 to be described later, a part of the out guiding part 1003, a part of the lower right rail 1004, and the right rail 1005. The pachinko machine 1 is assembled so as not to protrude into the game area 5a.

  The rear protrusion 202 is formed over substantially the entire circumference of the outer peripheral edge of the main body 201. Accordingly, the security cover 200 is formed in a shallow box shape opened rearward by the main body 201 and the rear protrusion piece 202, and has high strength and rigidity. Further, as shown in FIG. 33, the rear protruding piece 202 also protrudes rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body 201 different from the outer peripheral edge of the main body 201. The rear projecting piece 202 projecting rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body 201 is formed so as to be along a part of the outer rail 1001 in the front component member 1000 of the game board 5 in a state assembled to the pachinko machine 1. ing.

  The rear projecting piece 202 is not formed in a portion located between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 in the game board 5 in a state assembled to the pachinko machine 1. Thereby, a game ball (game ball launched by the ball launching device 680) passing between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 does not come into contact with the rear protruding piece 202 of the crime prevention cover 200, and the game area 5a There is no hindrance to the game ball.

  The pair of locking pieces 203 are elastically locked to the rear side of the door frame base 110. Thereby, the security cover 200 can be easily attached to and detached from the door frame base 110.

  When the security cover 200 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, the front surface of the main body 201 is in contact with the rear surface of the glass unit 190 (the rear end of the glass frame 191) and protrudes backward from the lower side of the main body 201. The removed rear protrusion 202 is in a state of being inserted into a security recess 1008 of the front component 1000 described later. Further, the security cover 200 is in a state in which the rear protruding piece 202 protruding rearward from the lower side of the main body 201 protrudes rearward from the front surface of the front structural member 1000 so as to contact the lower surface of the front structural member 1000. . Accordingly, the space between the security cover 200 and the game board 5 (the front component member 1000) is complicatedly bent by the rear protrusion piece 202 of the security cover 200 and the security recess portion 1008 of the front component member 1000. Even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire enters the game area 5a through the space between the security cover 200 and the front structural member 1000 from below the front of the board 5, it will be blocked by the rear protrusion 202 and the security recess 1008. The unauthorized tool can be prevented from entering the game area 5a.

[3-1j. Opening and closing cylinder unit]
The opening / closing cylinder unit 210 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. The opening / closing cylinder unit 210 is attached from the rear side to a cylinder mounting portion 113 at a position between the through-hole 111 and the handle mounting seat surface 112 near the right end of the door frame base 110 in a front view, and cooperates with a locking unit 700 described later. It is used to open and close the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 and to open and close the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4.

  The open / close cylinder unit 210 includes a cylindrical cylinder lock 211 having a key hole 211a on the front surface and extending in the front-rear direction, and is attached to the rear end of the cylinder lock 211 and rotates the key inserted into the key hole 211a. A rotation transmission member 212 for transmitting to 700 key cylinders 710 and a cylinder mounting plate 213 for mounting the cylinder lock 211 to the door frame base 110 (reinforcing unit 130) are provided.

  The cylinder lock 211 can rotate a key by inserting a corresponding key (not shown) into the key hole 211a. If the key is a corresponding key, the cylinder lock 211 can be rotated clockwise or counterclockwise. Can also be rotated by a predetermined angle in this direction.

  The rotation transmitting member 212 is formed in a cylindrical shape with an open rear side (specifically, a conical cylinder shape whose diameter increases toward the rear side), and is directed forward from the rear end to a position facing the center axis. It has a pair of cutout portions 212a cut out. The rotation transmitting member 212 is formed such that the key cylinder 710 of the locking unit 700 in the main body frame 4 is inserted from behind, and the protrusion of the key cylinder 710 of the locking unit 700 is inserted into the pair of notches 212a. Thus, the rotation of the rotation transmitting member 212 (the key inserted into the key hole 211a of the cylinder lock 211) can be transmitted to the key cylinder 710 of the locking unit 700 to rotate the key cylinder 710.

  The cylinder mounting sheet metal 213 is formed by bending a single metal plate, and is formed in a convex shape whose shape in plan view protrudes forward. More specifically, the cylinder mounting sheet metal 213 includes a rectangular and flat front plate portion 213a extending vertically when viewed from the front, and a pair of side plate portions 213b extending rearward from the left and right sides of the front plate portion 213a. And a pair of mounting plate portions 213c extending in a flat plate shape in a direction away from the rear sides of each of the pair of side plate portions 213b. In the front plate portion 213a of the cylinder mounting metal plate 213, the cylinder lock 211 penetrates from the rear at a substantially central position in the vertical direction, and the rear end of the cylinder lock 211 is attached to the rear surface of the front plate portion 213a. The pair of mounting plate portions 213 c of the cylinder mounting plate 213 includes a mounting plate portion 213 c on the left side when viewed from the front and is attached to the right end portion of the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 of the reinforcing unit 130, and a mounting plate portion 213 c on the right side when viewed from the front. Attached to the right reinforcing sheet metal 134. Accordingly, the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 and the right reinforcing sheet metal 134 are connected by the cylinder mounting sheet metal 213.

  When the open / close cylinder unit 210 is assembled to the door frame base unit 100, the front end of the cylinder lock 211 protruding forward from the front plate portion 213a of the cylinder mounting sheet metal 213 has a cylinder insertion hole from the rear side of the door frame base 110. 114 and protrudes forward of the door frame base 110, and the front plate portion 213 a and the pair of side plate portions 213 b of the cylinder mounting plate 213 are accommodated in a box-shaped cylinder mounting portion 113 that is opened rearward. ing.

[3-4. Overall structure of production operation unit]
The overall configuration of the rendering operation unit 400 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 34A is a front view of the effect operation unit in the door frame, and FIG. 34B is a right side view of the effect operation unit. FIG. 35A is a perspective view of the effect operation unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 35B is a perspective view of the effect operation unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 36 is an explanatory view of the rendering operation unit as seen from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends. FIG. 37 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line DD in FIG. 34 (a), and FIG. 38 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line EE in FIG. 34 (b). 39A is a cross-sectional view taken along line FF in FIG. 34B, and FIG. 39B is an enlarged view of a portion A in FIG. FIG. 40 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit as seen from the front after being disassembled for each main member, and FIG. 41 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit as seen from the rear after being disassembled as the main member. The production operation unit 400 is attached to the front part in the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front of the dish unit 320, and can be pressed by the player and can also provide a production image to the player. It is.

  The production operation unit 400 has a circular outer shape and a transparent central portion excluding the outer periphery, and an operation button 410 that can be pressed by the player. The production operation unit of the dish unit cover 326 surrounds the outer periphery of the operation button 410. A frame-shaped frame unit 415 attached to the attachment portion 326a, a decorative board unit 420 disposed behind the operation button 410 and capable of emitting and decorating the outer peripheral edge of the operation button 410 and the frame unit 415; The base unit 430 is attached to the rear side of the unit 415, and the operation button 410 and the decorative board unit 420 are attached to the front surface. The base unit 430 is attached to the base unit 430 so as to be visible from the player side through the operation button 410. A door frame side effect display device 460 capable of displaying an image; Eteiru.

[3-4a. Manual operation button]
The operation button 410 of the effect operation unit 400 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. FIG. 42A is an exploded perspective view of the operation button as seen from the front, and FIG. 42B is an exploded perspective view of the operation button as seen from the back. The operation button 410 is formed in a circular shape whose outer shape is slightly smaller in diameter than the height in the vertical direction of the dish unit 320, and the center side excluding the outer peripheral edge is formed to be transparent. The operation button 410 has a transparent button lens 411 formed in a curved surface shape (a shape of a part of a spherical surface) so that the outer periphery is circular and the center side bulges forward, and on the front side of the outer periphery of the button lens 411. An annular button frame 412 is attached, and a cylindrical button base 413 is attached to the rear side of the button frame 412 so as to sandwich the outer periphery of the button lens 411. The button frame 412 and the button base 413 are formed of members that are difficult to transmit light.

  The button lens 411 is formed with a substantially constant thickness as a whole. Further, the button lens 411 is formed in a smooth curved surface with no irregularities on the surface side. The button lens 411 extends in a predetermined length from the back surface to the center side (inner side) at a position on the inner peripheral side of the button frame 412 in a W-shaped cross section, and is arranged in the circumferential direction. One button decoration part 411a and a line extending within a predetermined angular range in the circumferential direction while extending on the axis toward the center side in a state of being recessed in a circular arc shape from the back surface at a position on the outer peripheral side than the first button decoration part 411a And a plurality of (six) second button decoration portions 411b.

  As shown in the figure, the first button decoration portion 411a of the button lens 411 extends from the inner periphery of the button frame 412 to the center side in a state assembled to the operation button 410. Longer than the center.

  Each of the plurality of second button decoration portions 411b of the button lens 411 extends in an arc shape on the same circumference, and three are formed on each of the left and right sides. These second button decoration portions 411 b are formed so as to face the frame opening 412 a of the button frame 412, and protrude forward so that the front side is substantially flush with the front surface of the button frame 412.

  The button lens 411 exhibits a lens effect in which light is refracted by the concave and convex portions having a W-shaped cross section or a circular arc shape formed on the back surface in the first button decorative portion 411a and the second button decorative portion 411b. Therefore, the rear side is not clearly visible.

  The button frame 412 is formed in an annular shape, and includes a plurality of (six) frame openings 412 a penetrating in the front-rear direction and extending in a circular shape with a predetermined length in the circumferential direction. Six frame openings 412a are provided on each of the left and right sides, and correspond to the six second button decoration portions 411b of the button lens 411. The button frame 412 includes a plating layer having a metallic luster on the surface.

  The button base 413 includes a substantially cylindrical main body 413a that extends short in the front-rear direction, an annular flange 413b that protrudes outward from the front end of the main body 413a, and a main body 413a from the rear side of the flange 413b. A plurality of (four) guide bosses 413c projecting rearward along the outer circumference of the main body 413a at substantially equal intervals in the circumferential direction, and along the outer circumference of the main body 413a from the rear side of the flange 413b. A plurality of (three) detection pieces 413d that protrude rearward in a band shape and penetrate the flange portion 413b in the front-rear direction outside the main body portion 413a and have a predetermined length along the outer periphery. A plurality of (six) base openings 413e extending in the circumferential direction, and extending in a cylindrical shape from the front end of the main body 413a to the front, the front end being the inner surface of the button lens 411 And a, an inner extending portion 413f are narrowed inward (central side) along.

  The outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411 and the button frame 412 are attached to the outer peripheral surface of the inner extending portion 413f and the front surface of the flange portion 413b in the button base 413. The four guide boss portions 413c are respectively disposed at portions corresponding to the four corners of the upper, lower, left, and right with respect to the circumferential direction of the main body portion 413a. These four guide boss portions 413c are slidably inserted into the holding holes 431b of the unit base 431 in the base unit 430, respectively. The three detection pieces 413d are arranged at substantially equal intervals in the circumferential direction so as to be arranged two on the upper side and one on the lower side with respect to the circumferential direction of the main body 413a. These three detection pieces 413d are detected by the press detection sensor 440 of the base unit 430 when the operation button 410 is pressed.

  The six base openings 413 e are provided on each of the left and right sides, and correspond to the second button decoration part 411 b of the button lens 411 and the frame opening 412 a of the button frame 412. In the portion of the base opening 413e in the button base 413, a part of the main body 413a and the inner extension 413f is recessed inward from the outer peripheral side. The inner extension portion 413f has an inner diameter of the front end that is narrowed inward substantially equal to the inner diameter of the button frame 412.

  The operation button 410 has a front surface that bulges forward in a curved surface shape (a shape of a part of a substantially spherical surface) and is formed to be transparent, and the door frame side effect display device 460 disposed on the rear side. Can be viewed from the front. The operation button 410 has four guide boss portions 413 c slidably inserted into the holding holes 431 b of the unit base 431 in the base unit 430, and the operation button springs 438 inserted into the holding holes of the unit base 431 at 431 b. It is urged forward by. The operation button 410 is further prevented from moving forward by the urging force of the operation button spring 438 of the base unit 430, and the front side of the outer peripheral edge abuts on the frame unit 415. As a result, the rear end moves backward until it comes into contact with the front surface of the base unit 430. When the operation button 410 is pressed and moved backward, at least one of the three detection pieces 413d is detected by the press detection sensor 440 of the base unit 430. The operation button 410 is operated by the detection of the detection piece 413d by the press detection sensor 440.

  The operation button 410 is a first button decoration formed over the entire circumference so as to extend from the inner peripheral end of the button frame 412 to the center side in the transparent button lens 411 in a state where the production operation unit 400 is assembled. By the portion 411a, the gap between the inner peripheral surface of the button base 413 and the operation button inner decoration member 432 of the base unit 430 can be made difficult to see from the player side.

  Further, the operation button 410 has a cylindrical button base 413 whose front end opening is closed by a button lens 411 and a button frame 412, and the operation button 410 is attached to the outer periphery of the button lens 411 by the button frame 412. With respect to the outer diameter of 410, a transparent portion whose rear side is visible is formed so as to be constricted inward from the outer periphery. The presence of the button frame 412 also makes it difficult for the player to see the gap between the inner peripheral surface of the button base 413 and the operation button interior decoration member 432 of the base unit 430.

  In addition, when the operation button 410 is assembled to the effect operation unit 400, the rear end of the cylindrical button base 413 (main body 413 a) passes through the inner peripheral side of the decoration board unit 420 and is more than the front surface of the decoration board unit 420. It will be in the state of protruding backward. As a result, the light emitted forward from the first LEDs 422a and 423a and the second LEDs 422b and 423b mounted on the operation button left outer decorative substrate 422 and the operation button right outer decorative substrate 423 of the decorative substrate unit 420 is displayed. It is possible to prevent leakage from the outside of the base 413 to the inside, and the operation button left inner decoration board 433, the operation button right inner decoration board 434, the operation button upper inner decoration board 435, and the operation button lower inside of the base unit 430. It is possible to prevent light emitted forward from the LED mounted on the decorative substrate 436 from leaking from the inside to the outside of the button base 413. Accordingly, the first LED 422a, 423a and the second LED 422b, 423b of the decoration board unit 420 and the operation button left inner decoration board 433, the operation button right inner decoration board 434, the operation button upper inner decoration board 435, and the operation button of the base unit 430. The LEDs mounted on the lower inner decorative board 436 can prevent the portions other than the light emitting decoration target from being decorated with light emission, and can perform the light emission decoration with good appearance.

[3-4b. Frame unit]
The frame unit 415 of the effect operation unit 400 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. The frame unit 415 is attached from the front side to the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a of the dish unit cover 326 in the dish unit 320 so as to surround the outer periphery from the front side of the operation button 410, and decorates the outside of the operation button 410. The frame unit 415 has an outer shape that matches the front end side of the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a.

  The frame unit 415 includes a frame-shaped frame body 416 having a circular central opening 416a attached to the rendering operation unit attachment part 326a of the dish unit cover 326 in the dish unit 320, and the frame main body 416 on the left and right sides of the central opening 416a. A pair of translucent frame side lenses 417 attached from the rear side, and a translucent frame top lens 418 attached from the front side to the frame body 416 above the central opening 416a. Yes.

  The frame body 416 has a circular central opening 416a that is smaller in diameter than the outer diameter of the operation button 410 and penetrates in the front-rear direction, and penetrates in the front-rear direction on both the left and right sides of the central opening 416a. A plurality of (six) outer peripheral openings 416b extending in a circular arc shape along the peripheral edge of the central opening 416b, and a notch 416c notched with a predetermined width on the upper front surface of the central opening 416a. It is equipped with. The central opening 416a is formed to have substantially the same diameter as the outer diameter of the frame opening 412a of the button frame 412 of the operation button 410. Thereby, the front end side of the flange part 413b of the button base 413 in the operation button 410 can contact | abut on the outer peripheral rear side of the frame opening part 412a.

  Six outer peripheral openings 416b are provided in three each on the left and right outer sides of the central opening 416a, and are closed by a frame side lens 417 from the rear side. The notch 416c penetrates also in the front-rear direction, and the frame top lens 418 is fitted from the front side.

  The frame main body 416 includes a substantially cylindrical inner cylindrical portion 416d extending rearward from a position slightly outside the peripheral edge of the central opening 416a. The inner cylindrical portion 416d extends rearward from a position between the central opening 416a and the outer peripheral opening 416b, and a portion corresponding to the notch 416c is cut away. The inner cylinder portion 416d has the first LED 422a and 423a and the second LED 422b and 423b on the operation button left outer decoration board 422 and the operation button right outer decoration board 423 of the decoration board unit 420 in a state where the effect operation unit 400 is assembled. Between the first LEDs 422a and 423a and the second LEDs 422b and 423b (see FIG. 38).

  Furthermore, the frame main body 416 extends outward at the upper left and right sides of the outer periphery, and includes a pair of attachment portions 416e attached to the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a of the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320. The frame main body 416 (the production operation unit 400) is attached to the production operation unit attachment portion 326a of the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320 at the left and right sides of the pair of attachment portions 416e and the cutout portion 416c.

  The frame body 416 is substantially entirely metal except for a portion having the same width as the notch 416c on the side opposite to the notch 416c side (the side on which the frame top lens 418 is attached) with the central opening 416a in between. A glossy plating layer is formed.

  The frame side lens 417 closes the outer peripheral openings 416b formed on the left and right sides of the frame main body 416 from the rear side. The front side of the frame side lens 417 is formed on a smooth surface without irregularities, and a plurality of irregularities along the periphery of the central opening 416a is formed on the rear side (see FIGS. 39 and 46). The light is refracted by the plurality of irregularities so that the rear side of the frame side lens 417 cannot be seen.

  The frame top lens 418 has a substantially quadrangular outer shape so as to be fitted into the notch 416c of the frame body 416 from the front side. The frame top lens 418 has a smooth front surface. The frame top lens 418 has a plurality of projections and recesses extending in a zigzag shape along the periphery of the central opening 416a on the rear surface side, and is arranged in a plurality of rows in the radial direction of the central opening 416a (see FIGS. 37 and 46). reference). The light is refracted by the plurality of irregularities so that the rear side of the frame top lens 418 cannot be seen.

  The frame unit 415 is a state in which the production operation unit 400 is assembled, and a pair of frame side lenses 417 are arranged on the operation button left outer decorative substrate 422 and the operation button right outer decorative substrate 423 of the decorative substrate unit 420, respectively. The frame top lens 418 is positioned in front of the frame top lens decoration substrate 437 of the base unit 430, and each of the second LEDs 422b, 423b and the like mounted thereon can be decorated with light emission. .

[3-4c. Decorative board unit]
The decorative board unit 420 of the effect operation unit 400 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 43 is an exploded perspective view of the decorative board unit of the effect operation unit as seen from the front. The decorative board unit 420 is attached to the front surface of the base unit 430 below the frame unit 415, and can light-decorate the second button decoration part 411b of the operation button 410 and the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415. The operation unit 400 can be given vibration.

  The decorative substrate unit 420 includes a C-shaped substrate base 421 whose upper side is open, an operation button left outer decorative substrate 422 and an operation button right outer decorative substrate 423 attached to the front surfaces of the left and right sides of the substrate base 421, respectively. A vibration motor 424 attached to the lower front portion of the substrate base 421, and a motor cover 425 attached to the front surface of the substrate base 421 so as to cover the front side of the vibration motor 424.

  The substrate base 421 is formed so that the inner peripheral side is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the cylindrical main body 413 a in the button base 413 of the operation button 410, and the outer peripheral side is larger than the outer diameter of the flange portion 413 b in the button base 413. In addition, it is formed smaller than the outer diameter of the frame unit 415.

  The operation button left outer decorative substrate 422 extends in an arc shape along the front surface of the substrate base 421. The operation button left outer decorative board 422 has a plurality of first LEDs 422a mounted on the front side along the inner circumference of the board base 421, and a radially outer side of the plurality of first LEDs 422a on the inner circumference of the board base 421. And a plurality of second LEDs 422b mounted along. The operation button right outer decorative substrate 423 extends in an arc shape along the front surface of the substrate base 421. The operation button right outer decorative board 423 is provided on the front side with a plurality of first LEDs 423a mounted along the inner circumference of the board base 421, and on the inner circumference of the board base 421 at a radially outer side than the plurality of first LEDs 423a. And a plurality of second LEDs 423b mounted along. The operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423 are white on both front and rear sides.

  The vibration motor 424 has an eccentric weight 424a attached to the rotation shaft, and can generate vibration by rotating the weight 424a.

  When the decorative board unit 420 is assembled to the effect operation unit 400, the rear end side of the cylindrical main body 413 a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 is inserted inside the board base 421. Further, in the decorative board unit 420, the first LEDs 422a and 423a in the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423 are located behind the second button decorative portion 411b of the operation button 410, respectively. The second LEDs 422b and 423b are located behind the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415. Further, in the assembled state in the production operation unit 400, a frame is provided between the first LEDs 422a and 423a of the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423 and the second LEDs 422b and 423b, respectively. The inner cylinder part 416d of the unit 415 is located (see FIG. 38).

  Therefore, the decoration board unit 420 emits and decorates only the second button decoration portion 411b of the operation button 410 by the light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a on the operation button left outer decoration board 422 and the operation button right outer decoration board 423. In addition, only the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 can be illuminated and decorated by the light from the respective second LEDs 422b and 423b.

  In addition, the decorative substrate unit 420 can generate vibration by rotating the weight 424a of the vibration motor 424, and can vibrate the effect operation unit 400 as a whole.

[3-4f. Effect of production operation unit]
The effects of the effect operation unit 400 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 44 to 46 and the like. FIG. 44 is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which the operation button is pressed in the cross-sectional view of the effect operation unit of FIG. FIG. 45 (a) is a view of the rendering operation unit as viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends, and a part of the operation button is cut away so as to be hidden by the first button decoration portion of the operation button, the button frame, or the like. It is explanatory drawing which shows a site | part, (b) is explanatory drawing which shows the site | part which is going to hide by the 1st button decoration part of an operation button, a button frame, etc. in sectional drawing of a production | presentation operation unit. 46 (a) is an explanatory view showing the appearance of the rendering operation unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 46 (b) is an explanatory view of the appearance of the rendering operation unit as viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends. It is.

  The effect operation unit 400 according to the present embodiment can show the effect image to the player in accordance with the game state that is changed by the game ball being shot into the game area 5a of the game board 5, and the player can perform the operation. It is possible to entertain and entertain the player in the presentation presented to the player by operating the button 410.

  The production operation unit 400 has an overall height that is substantially the same as the height of the lower portion of the through-hole 111 of the door frame base 110 in the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3. In addition, the production operation unit 400 has a full width slightly larger than 1/3 of the full width of the door frame 3. The production operation unit 400 is arranged at the center in the left-right direction below the game area 5a (the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110) in the front view.

  In the rendering operation unit 400, the upper part of the frame body 416 of the frame unit 415 is attached to the rendering operation unit mounting portion 326 a of the dish unit cover 326 in the dish unit 320. When the rendering operation unit 400 is attached to the tray unit 320, the bottom surface of the leg portion 442a of the relay board cover 442 serving as the bottom surface is spaced from the top surface of the bottom plate portion 326i of the tray unit cover 326 of the tray unit 320. Is formed. That is, only the upper part of the production operation unit 400 is attached to the dish unit 320 and is attached in a suspended state.

  Further, in the rendering operation unit 400, the front surface of the frame unit 415 (the surface formed by the inner periphery of the front end of the central opening 416a of the frame body 416) is parallel to the inclined surface of the front end opening of the rendering operation unit attachment portion 326a. As installed. As a result, the production operation unit 400 is configured such that the central axis CL of the transparent operation button 410 bulging forward in a curved surface shape (substantially spherical shape) is at an angle of 63 degrees with respect to the vertical line. It is inclined to move upward as it goes forward. Accordingly, when a player sits in front of the pachinko machine 1 in order to play a game using the pachinko machine 1, the head of the player is arranged above the plate unit 320 (the production operation unit 400). Since the game board 5 is located in front of the center of the game area 5a, the center axis CL of the operation button 410 passes near the head of the player. Therefore, when the player drops his / her line of sight from the game area 5a to the effect operation unit 400 (operation button 410), the operation button 410 is as close as possible to the front view (projection view from a direction parallel to the central axis CL). Thus, the operation button 410 and the door frame side effect display device 460 in the operation button 410 can be visually recognized in a good state.

  In the effect operation unit 400, the four guide boss portions 413c of the operation button 410 are slidably inserted into the four holding holes 431b of the base unit 430, and are urged forward by the operation button spring 438. In the normal operation state (the state where the operation button 410 is not pressed), the effect operation unit 400 causes the front end of the flange portion 413b of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 to be attached to the frame unit 415 by the urging force of the operation button spring 438. The frame body 416 is in contact with a portion near the central opening 416a on the rear surface.

  In the normal operation state, the rendering operation unit 400 protrudes forward from the central opening 416a of the frame body 416 in the frame unit 415 from the vicinity of the inner periphery of the button frame 412 of the operation button 410 to the center side (center axis line CL side). Yes. In other words, in the transparent button lens 411 that bulges forward in a curved surface shape (substantially spherical shape) in the operation button 410, a portion protruding forward from the inner periphery (inner side) of the button frame 412 is formed. The frame unit 415 protrudes forward from the central opening 416a of the frame body 416 (see FIG. 37 and the like).

  Incidentally, in the present embodiment, the diameter of the central opening 416a of the frame main body 416 in the frame unit 415 is about 15 cm, and the button lens 411 (the front end) with respect to the central axis CL direction of the operation button 410 is the frame unit. It protrudes about 4 cm forward from the front surface of 415.

  When the player presses the operation button 410 of the effect operation unit 400 in a normal state, the operation button 410 moves backward along the central axis CL against the urging force of the operation button spring 438. Then, when the rear end of the operation button 410 comes into contact with the front surface of the unit base 431 of the base unit 430, the backward movement is restricted and the backward movement of the operation button 410 is stopped. When the player presses the operation button 410, the button lens 411 bulging forward in a curved surface shape (substantially spherical shape) is pressed.

  The operation button 410 is formed to have a very large outer diameter compared to the operation buttons for presentation provided in the conventional pachinko machine, so that the periphery of the button lens 411 near the periphery is pressed. There is a high possibility of being. More specifically, the operation buttons for effects in the conventional pachinko machine are attached so that the center axis extends substantially parallel to the vertical line, whereas the operation buttons 410 of the effect operation unit 400 of the present embodiment. Is attached with the central axis CL inclined with respect to the vertical line, so that when the player presses the operation button 410 from above as in the conventional pachinko machine, as shown by the white arrow in FIG. The part away from the central axis CL of the operation button 410 is pressed.

  By the way, the operation buttons for performance in the conventional pachinko machine are formed with a flat surface on which the player presses, so when the operation button is enlarged with the flat part being pressed When pressing the part off the center of the operation button, the surface to be pressed is tilted so that the pressed part is retracted first, and the operation button cannot be receded straight, There is a possibility that the pressing operation cannot be performed.

  On the other hand, the operation button 410 of the effect operation unit 400 of this embodiment has a curved surface shape (a part of a substantially spherical surface) in which a portion (button lens 411) pressed by the player bulges forward. Therefore, when a pressing operation is performed at a position away from the center of the operation button 410, the force is distributed over the entire operation button 410, and the operation button 410 becomes difficult to tilt, and the operation button 410 moves rearward straightly. Can do. Therefore, no matter which position on the front side of the operation button 410 is pressed, the operation button 410 can be smoothly retracted without tilting, so that the pressing operation can be reliably detected and the operation button 410 is pressed. The operation to operate can be fully enjoyed.

  In addition, the production operation unit 400 has the vibration motor 424 attached to the lower part of the front surface of the substrate base 421 in the decorative board unit 420, and as described above, only the upper part is a dish so that the production operation unit 400 can be suspended. Since the vibration is generated by rotating the weight 424a by the vibration motor 424, the vibration is generated at a part farthest from the attached part because it is attached to the production operation unit attaching part 326a of the unit cover 326. The entire production operation unit 400 can be vibrated greatly (strongly), and the vibration can be transmitted to the player who is touching the production operation unit 400. In addition, since the vibration motor 424 is disposed immediately below the position where the player is relatively easy to press (the position of the white arrow in FIG. 44), the player who presses the operation button 410 is operated. Strong vibrations can be transmitted, and the player can be surprised and entertained.

  Further, the production operation unit 400 is attached to the dish unit cover 326 in a suspended state, and the lower surface of the leg portion 442a of the relay board cover 442 forming the lower surface and the bottom plate of the dish unit cover 326. Since a gap is formed between the upper surface of the portion 326i and the lower surface of the leg portion 442a comes into contact with the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i when the operation button 410 is strongly pressed or hit, the frame The impact can be absorbed by the mounting portion 416e of the unit 415, the rendering operation unit mounting portion 326a of the dish unit cover 326, etc. being bent downward. Further, after the lower surface of the leg portion 442a contacts the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i, the downward movement of the rendering operation unit 400 is restricted, and the mounting portion 416e of the frame unit 415 and the rendering operation unit mounting of the dish unit cover 326 are restricted. It is possible to prevent an excessive force from acting on the portion 326a and the like, and it is possible to prevent the rendering operation unit 400 and the like from being damaged. Therefore, even when the operation button 410 is pressed or hit with a strong force when an effect of pressing the operation button 410 of the effect operation unit 400 is presented to the player, the operation button 410 or the effect operation unit Since 400 and the like are not damaged, it is possible to avoid interruption of the game due to the damage, to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player, and to increase the burden on the game hall side by making it difficult to break. Can be suppressed.

  As described above, the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 to be pressed by the player is formed in a curved surface shape projecting forward (a part of the shape of a substantially spherical surface), and thus a flat plate shape. Compared to the case, the strength and rigidity are high, and even if it is strongly struck, the impact can be distributed to the entire button lens 411 and is not easily damaged.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 46, the production operation unit 400 includes a button lens 411, a frame side lens 417, a frame top lens 418, and an operation button interior decoration member 432 made of transparent members. Decorations such as first button decoration part 411a, second button decoration part 411b, first button decoration part 432f, and second button decoration part 432g formed on the back side are on the front side (player side) ). In addition, in the part where the uneven decoration is formed, the light is refracted in a complicated manner because the plate thickness is changed, so that the rear side is difficult to see through the part where the uneven decoration is formed. .

  The effect operation unit 400 includes the first button decoration portion 411a extending from the inner periphery of the button frame 412 to the center side of the button lens 411 of the operation button 410, and thus the uneven decoration of the first button decoration portion 411a. Thus, it is possible to make it difficult to see the rear at the outer peripheral portion of the portion that is inside the button lens 411. Behind the portion where the first button decoration portion 411a is formed (backward in the direction of the central axis CL), the inner peripheral surface of the body portion 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 and the peripheral wall portion of the operation button inner decoration member 432 A gap between the outer peripheral surface of the operation button 432a is positioned, and the outer periphery of the operation button inner decorative member 432 is moved from the front side (player side) by the first button decoration portion 411a positioned in front of the gap. It can be difficult to see. Thereby, even if the operation button 410 that can be pressed is provided with the operation button decoration member 432 whose position is fixed, the appearance of the operation button 410 can be prevented from deteriorating. The player can be prevented from feeling uncomfortable, and the operation button decoration member 432 can be disposed in the transparent operation button 410 without any problem, and the appearance of the operation button 410 can be improved.

  More specifically, the effect operation unit 400 includes the first button decoration portion 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b, and the button frame 412 of the button lens 411 in the operation button 410. The unit base 431 and the decorative board unit 420 on the rear side (back side) on the outer side are formed so as not to be seen from the player side through the transparent button lens 411. Specifically, in FIG. 45, the cross hatched portion surrounded by the alternate long and short dash line is hidden from the player side. As described above, since the operation button 410 includes the first button decoration portion 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b, the button frame 412, and the like, the outside and the back side of the operation button inner decoration member 432 are hidden from view. Therefore, the appearance of the operation button 410 and, consequently, the production operation unit 400 can be improved.

  Further, in the effect operation unit 400, the first button decoration portion 411a of the button lens 411 in the operation button 410 extends toward the central axis CL of the operation button 410 and is arranged in the circumferential direction. Thus, the second button interior decoration portion 432g formed on the front plate portion 432b of the operation button interior decoration member 432 disposed on the inner rear side of the operation button 410 extends in an odd octagonal shape centering on the central axis CL. As shown in FIG. 46, the uneven line of the first button decorative part 411a and the uneven line of the second button internal decorative part 432g intersect each other as shown in FIG. The decoration can be shown to the player.

  In addition, since the first button decoration part 411a and the second button decoration part 432g are separated from each other in the front-rear direction (the direction in which the central axis line CL extends), the effect operation unit 400 is separated from the first button decoration part 411a. By the second button interior decoration portion 432g, a three-dimensional geometric pattern with depth can be shown to the player, and the decoration including the inside of the operation button 410 can be enjoyed.

  Furthermore, in the production operation unit 400, since the first button decoration part 411a and the second button decoration part 432g are separated in the front-rear direction, if the position of the player's eyes moves, the unevenness of the first button decoration part 411a Since the degree of overlap between the line and the concavo-convex line of the second button interior decoration portion 432g changes, a moving decoration can be shown to the player, and the player can be entertained.

  In this way, the effect operation unit 400 provides the player with a three-dimensional decoration with movement by the first button decoration portion 411a of the operation button 410 and the second button decoration portion 432g of the operation button decoration member 432. Since it can be shown, a player's interest can be attracted strongly and it can be set as the pachinko machine 1 with high appeal power.

  Further, the production operation unit 400 is within the operation button 410 (inside the button frame 412) and behind the operation button inner decoration member 432, the operation button left inner decoration board 433, the operation button right inner decoration board 434, and the operation button. The upper inner decoration board 435 and the operation button lower inner decoration board 436 are arranged, and by emitting a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front face thereof, the operation button inner decoration member 432 in the operation button 410 emits light. Can be decorated. That is, the operation button 410 can be illuminated and decorated by the operation button left inner decoration board 433, the operation button right inner decoration board 434, the operation button upper inner decoration board 435, and the operation button lower inner decoration board 436. The LEDs mounted on the front surfaces of the operation button left inner decoration board 433, the operation button right inner decoration board 434, the operation button upper inner decoration board 435, and the operation button lower inner decoration board 436 are as shown in FIG. When viewed from the direction in which the central axis CL extends, the operation button 410 is disposed inside the cylindrical main body 413a of the button base 413, so that light from them does not leak outside the main body 413a. Only the inside of the operation button 410 can be appropriately decorated with light emission.

  In addition, the rendering operation unit 400 has the operation button left outer decorative substrate 422 in the decorative substrate unit 420 behind the second button decorative portion 411b facing the frame opening 412a of the button frame 412 located near the outer periphery of the operation button 410. The first LED 422a and the first LED 423a of the operation button right outer decoration board 423 are arranged, and the six second button decoration portions 411b of the operation button 410 are decorated with light emission by causing the first LEDs 422a and 423a to emit light. Can do. As shown in FIG. 38, the first LED 422a of the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the first LED 423a of the operation button right outer decorative board 423 include a cylindrical main body 413a in the button base 413 of the operation button 410 and a frame unit. 415 is located between the cylindrical inner cylinder portion 416d of the frame main body 416, and the light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a does not leak to the inside of the main body portion 413a or the outer side of the inner cylinder portion 416d. Only the second button decoration portion 411b of the button 410 can be appropriately decorated for light emission.

  Further, the rendering operation unit 400 has the second LED 422b of the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board behind the frame side lens 417 facing the six outer peripheral openings 416b of the frame body 416 in the frame unit 415. 423 2nd LED423b is arrange | positioned, The frame side lens 417 can be light-decorated by making these 2nd LED422b and 423b light-emit. The second LED 422b of the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the second LED 423b of the operation button right outer decorative board 423 are disposed between the cylindrical inner cylinder 416d of the frame main body 416 of the frame unit 415 and the outer periphery of the frame main body 416. The light from the second LEDs 422b and 423b does not leak to the inside of the inner cylindrical portion 416d or the outside of the frame main body 416, and only the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 can be appropriately decorated to emit light. .

  In addition, in the rendering operation unit 400, a frame top lens decoration substrate 437 in the base unit 430 is disposed behind the frame top lens 418 of the frame unit 415, and a plurality of elements are mounted on the front surface of the frame top lens decoration substrate 437. By emitting the LED, the frame top lens 418 can be decorated. A flat light-shielding wall 431c projects forward from the lower side of the base unit 430 where the frame top lens decorative substrate 437 of the unit base 431 is attached to the vicinity of the rear of the lower end of the frame top lens 418. The light from the LED on the top lens decoration substrate 437 does not leak to the operation button 410 or the frame side lens 417 side, and only the frame top lens 418 of the frame unit 415 can be decorated with good light emission.

[3-5. Door frame left side unit]
The door frame left side unit 530 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50. 47A is a front view of the door frame left side unit in the door frame, FIG. 47B is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 47C is the rear view of the door frame left side unit. It is the perspective view seen from. FIG. 48 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 49 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit as seen from the back. 50 is a cross-sectional view taken along line LL in FIG. The door frame left side unit 530 covers the front side of the door frame left side upper decorative substrate 161 and the door frame left side lower decorative substrate 162 (door frame left side decorative substrate 160) on the upper side of the dish unit 320. It is attached to the front left part on the left side of the through hole 111 in 100. The door frame left side unit 530 is for decorating the left side of the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110 when viewed from the front.

  The door frame left side unit 530 includes a band plate-like left unit base 531 extending vertically and attached to the front side of the through-hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 in the door frame base unit 100, and a left unit base 531 A transparent strip-shaped left unit diffusing lens member 532 attached to the front surface and a translucent material disposed in front of the left unit diffusing lens member 532 and having a polyhedral decoration at the front end. A left unit decorative lens member (not shown) and a left unit decorative lens member mounted on the front upper part of the left unit base 531 from the front side of the left unit decorative lens member, projecting forward in a cylindrical frame shape and extending vertically The decorative base 534 is attached to the lower part of the front surface of the left unit base 531 from the front side of the left unit decorative lens member. The left unit lower decorative base 535 that protrudes forward in a frame shape shorter than the decorative base 534 and the front end side of the left unit decorative lens member from the front side of the left unit upper decorative base 534 and the left unit lower decorative base 535 are covered. A transparent left unit decorative cover 536 attached to the front side of the left unit base 531 and a plurality of decorative members 537 attached to the front side of the left unit decorative cover 536 are provided.

  The left unit base 531 of the door frame left side unit 530 is formed in a shallow box shape with the rear side opened, and has a plurality of openings 531a penetrating front and rear in the front surface. As illustrated, the plurality of openings 531a include a circular hole and a quadrangular hole extending vertically. In the left unit base 531, the LEDs 161a and 162a mounted on the front surface of the door frame left side decorative board 160 (the door frame left side upper decorative board 161 and the door frame left side lower decorative board 162) are provided from a plurality of openings 531a. It is attached to the front left side of the door frame base 110 so as to face forward. Each opening 531a of the left unit base 531 is formed so that each LED 161a, 162a of the door frame left side decorative board 160 is positioned at a substantially vertical center when assembled in the door frame 3. The left unit base 531 is formed of an opaque member.

  Further, the left unit base 531 has a left reflective upright wall portion 538 (see FIGS. 5 and 23) that is erected from the glass plate 192 disposed so as to close the through-hole 111 toward the near side. ing. In the left reflecting vertical wall portion 538, an inner side surface that is formed to be flat and faces the through-hole 111 is provided as a reflecting surface that can reflect light. This reflective surface can be provided by providing the inner side surface of the left reflecting vertical wall portion 538 from a reflective material such as metal or resin, or by attaching a reflective seal to the inner side surface. Is possible. As will be described later, the left reflective upright wall portion 538 is formed by the left unit base 531 and serves as a portion that bears a part (left side portion) of the reflective upright wall portion 33 described above.

  The left unit diffusion lens member 532 is formed of a transparent member, and is divided into an upper diffusion lens member 532A and a lower diffusion lens member 532B. The left unit diffuser lens member 532 includes a circular lens portion 532a having a circular shape in front view corresponding to the circular opening 531a in the left unit base 531, and a square having a rectangular shape in front view corresponding to the rectangular opening 531a. A lens portion 532b. The door frame left side unit 530 is assembled to the door frame 3 so that the respective LEDs 161a and 162a of the door frame left side decorative board 160 are positioned immediately after the center of the circular lens portion 532a and the square lens portion 532b. Is formed.

  The circular lens portion 532a of the left unit diffusing lens member 532 is formed in a convex lens shape with smooth front and rear surfaces. By this circular lens portion 532a, the light from the LEDs 161a and 162a disposed on the rear side can be irradiated forward in the form of dots. With the light irradiated forward from the circular lens portion 532a, the circular decorative portion of the left unit decorative lens member can be illuminated and decorated.

  The rectangular lens portion 532b of the left unit diffusing lens member 532 includes a central diffusing reflection portion 532c that is recessed backward in a conical shape at the center of the front surface, and a front diffusing lens portion 532d that is formed outside the central diffusing reflection portion 532c on the front surface. An input lens portion 532e that bulges backward in a curved surface shape at the center of the rear surface (immediately after the central diffuse reflection portion 532c), and forward as the distance from the input lens portion 532e increases as a whole outside the input lens portion 532e on the rear surface. And a front reflecting portion 532f that is inclined so as to move.

  The front diffusing lens portion 532d of the rectangular lens portion 532b is formed by a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves that are divided in the circumferential direction by lines extending radially around the central diffusive reflecting portion 532c. More specifically, the front diffusing lens portion 532d has a cross-sectional shape when cut along the radial direction, and the groove portion is recessed backward in an arc shape, and the mountain portion between the grooves is forward. It swells in an arc shape, and the front surface is formed in a smooth wave shape. The front diffusing lens portion 532d is formed so that the groove portions and the mountain portions are alternately positioned in the circumferential direction with the radially extending lines divided in the circumferential direction as a boundary.

  The front reflecting portion 532f of the rectangular lens portion 532b is formed by a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves that are divided in the circumferential direction by lines extending radially around the input lens portion 532e. The plurality of grooves are recessed in a V shape from the rear to the front, and the deepest part is formed in an arc shape. The front reflecting portion 532f is formed in a saw-like shape in which the cross-sectional shape when cut along the radial direction is formed in a triangular shape in which a peak portion between the grooves is pointed backward. The front reflecting portion 532f is formed such that the groove and the mountain portion move forward as the distance from the center increases. Further, the front reflecting portion 532f is formed so that the groove portions and the mountain portions are alternately positioned in the circumferential direction, with the radially extending lines divided in the circumferential direction as a boundary. The radially extending lines divided in the circumferential direction coincide with the radially extending dividing lines in the front diffusion lens portion 532d.

  When the rectangular lens portion 532b is assembled to the door frame 3, the LEDs 161a and 162a corresponding to the door frame left side decorative board 160 are positioned immediately after the input lens portion 532e.

  In the rectangular lens unit 532b, light emitted forward from the LEDs 161a and 162a is input from the input lens unit 532e into the rectangular lens unit 532b. Since the input lens portion 532e bulges back in a curved surface (convex lens shape), the light spreading forward from the LEDs 161a and 162a is refracted so as to travel in parallel forward, and the input light Almost all can be led to the conical central diffuse reflection portion 532c. The light guided to the central diffuse reflection portion 532c is parallel to the front surface of the door frame left side decorative substrate 160 in a direction perpendicular to the front and rear axes by the inclined conical surface of the central diffuse reflection portion 532c. In other words, the light beam is reflected so as to diffuse in the direction of the light and travels in the rectangular lens portion 532b from the center side toward the outside along the front surface thereof. The light reflected by the central diffuse reflection part 532c travels from the center side to the outside (in the direction away from the center line of the central diffuse reflection part 532c) over the entire thickness of the rectangular lens part 532b in the front-rear direction.

  When the light reflected from the center side toward the outside substantially parallel to the front surface of the door frame left side decorative board 160 reaches the saw-like front reflection part 532f, the front side of the front reflection part 532f moves forward. Reflect to the side. At this time, since the front reflecting portion 532f is inclined so that the rear surface moves forward as it moves away from the central diffuse reflecting portion 532c, the thickness in the front-rear direction of the rectangular lens portion 532b decreases as it moves away from the center. (See FIG. 50). As a result, the light reflected toward the outside over the entire thickness of the rectangular lens portion 532b in the central diffuse reflection portion 532c is sequentially forwarded by the front reflection portion 532f as it goes outward from the center side. Can be reflected.

  The light reflected forward by the front reflecting portion 532f is irradiated forward from the rectangular lens portion 532b through the front diffusion lens portion 532d. At this time, since the front diffusion lens portion 532d has a wavy cross section, the light reflected forward by the front reflection portion 532f can be diffused in various directions, and the square lens portion 532b. It is possible to irradiate the front (the rear surface of the left unit decorative lens member) with light substantially uniformly from the front surface.

  In the front lens unit 532d and the front reflection unit 532f, the rectangular lens unit 532b is formed by dividing a plurality of concentric circular grooves by a plurality of radially extending lines, and then a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves with the dividing lines as a boundary. Since the concentric arc-shaped grooves are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction by shifting in the radial direction, the light irradiated forward from the front surface of the square lens portion 532b has the density of the concentric striped pattern. It is possible to avoid becoming light and to irradiate light with more uniform light and shade forward. As a result, the multi-sided decorative part in front of the rectangular lens part 532b in the left unit decorative lens member can be illuminated and decorated substantially uniformly.

  A left unit decorative lens member (not shown) is formed along the front surface of the left unit decorative cover 536. The left unit decorative lens member is positioned in front of the circular decorative portion formed at the front position of the circular lens portion 532 a of the left unit diffusion lens member 532 and the square lens portion 532 b of the left unit diffusion lens member 532. And a multi-sided decoration part formed on the part. The circular decorative portion is formed in a shape including a plurality of triangular ribs in the circumferential direction on the outer periphery of a cylindrical portion whose front surface is short and extends forward and backward. The polyhedral decorative part has a plurality of quadrangular pyramid-shaped portions arranged in the vertical direction on the front surface of the rectangular parallelepiped extending vertically, and a plurality of triangular polyhedrons arranged in the vertical direction on the left and right sides of the rectangular parallelepiped portion. It is formed in such a shape. The circular decorative portion and the multi-surface decorative portion are formed in the same shape as the circular decorative portion 561a and the multi-surface decorative portion 561b of the right unit decorative lens member 561 in the door frame right side unit 550.

  The left unit decorative lens member can be viewed from the front side (player side) through the transparent left unit decorative cover 536. The left unit decorative lens member has a multi-sided decorative portion forward from the rectangular lens portion 532b of the left unit diffusing lens member 532 by light irradiated from the circular lens portion 532a of the left unit diffusing lens member 532 to the front of the circular decorative portion. Each light is illuminated and decorated.

  The left unit upper decoration base 534 is a quadrangular shape whose front view extends vertically, and is formed in a rectangular tube shape extending forward and backward. The left unit upper decorative base 534 is inclined so that a portion constituting the lower surface on the outer periphery protrudes downward from the front end side toward the rear end side, and a lower portion of the portion penetrates back and forth. The left unit upper decoration base 534 is formed of a light-impermeable member.

  The left unit lower decoration base 535 is formed in a U shape whose front view is opened upward. The left unit lower decoration base 535 is inclined to the rear end so that the upper side from the center in the vertical direction at the front end moves rearward as it goes upward. The left unit lower decoration base 535 is formed of a light-impermeable member.

  The left unit decorative cover 536 extends up and down over the entire height of the door frame left side unit 530. The left unit decoration cover 536 is bent so that the middle part in the vertical direction is recessed backward, and the lower part is bent backward along the front end of the left unit upper decoration base 534, The upper part of the unit-shaped decorative base 535 is bent back so that the upper part is bent backward, and the lower end of the upper character-like part is connected to the upper end of the lower character-like part. And a linear portion.

  The left unit decoration cover 536 has upper and lower ends attached to the front surface of the left unit upper decoration base 534 and the front surface of the left unit lower decoration base 535, respectively. The left unit decorative cover 536 is formed of a transparent member, and the left unit decorative lens member disposed on the rear side can be viewed from the front side.

  The decoration member 537 extends short up and down, and is attached to the front surface of the left unit decoration cover 536 at a predetermined interval in the vertical direction. The decorative member 537 is formed of an opaque member.

[3-6. Door frame right side unit]
The door frame right side unit 550 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 51A is a front view of the door frame right side unit in the door frame, FIG. 51B is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 51C is the rear view of the door frame right side unit. It is the perspective view seen from. 52 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 53 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit as seen from the back. 54 is a cross-sectional view taken along line MM in FIG. 55A is a cross-sectional view taken along line NN in FIG. 51A, and FIG. 55B is a cross-sectional view taken along line OO in FIG. The door frame right side unit 550 is attached to the right side of the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 above the plate unit 320.

  The door frame right side unit 550 includes a box-shaped right unit base 551 extending vertically and attached to the right side of the through-hole 111 in front of the door frame base 110 in the door frame base unit 100, and a front surface of the right unit base 551. The door frame right side decorative board 552 is attached to the front side of the right side of the right side of the right unit base 551 on the front side of the door frame right side decorative board 552 and extends in the vertical and front-rear directions. A transparent flat plate-shaped right unit left diffusing lens member 553, a sheet-like right unit left decorative member 554 attached to the left side surface of the right unit left diffusing lens member 553, and a right unit left decorative member A transparent flat plate-like right unit left cover attached to the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 so as to cover the left side of 554 Includes a over 555, the.

  Further, the door frame right side unit 550 includes a right diffuser and a right unit left diffusing lens from the front center of the front of the right unit base 551 on the front side of the door frame right side decorative board 552 and on the right side of the right unit left diffusing lens member 553. A transparent flat plate-like right unit right diffusing lens member 556 attached to the member 553 and extending in the vertical direction and the front-rear direction, and attached to the right side of the right unit right diffusing lens member 556 and decorated. A sheet-like right unit right decorative member 557, and a transparent flat plate-like right unit right cover 558 attached to the right unit right diffusing lens member 556 so as to cover the right side of the right unit right decorative member 557. Yes.

  Furthermore, the door frame right side unit 550 is disposed between the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusing lens member 556, and extends in the vertical direction and the front-rear direction in which the front and right sides are opened. A box-shaped light-impermeable right unit left light-shielding member 559 and a light-opaque light attached to the left side of the right unit right light-diffusing lens member 556 so as to close the open right side of the right unit left light-shielding member 559. And a flat right unit right light-shielding member 560.

  The door frame right side unit 550 is attached to the front ends of the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusing lens member 556, and has a translucent right having a polyhedral decoration at the front end. The unit decorative lens member 561 is attached to the front surface of the right unit base 551 so as to cover the left and right sides of the right unit decorative lens member 561 and the front end sides of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. A frame-shaped right unit decoration base 562 penetrating front and rear, a transparent right unit cover 563 attached to the front side of the right unit decoration base 562 so as to close a front end opening of the right unit decoration base 562, and a right unit cover And a plurality of decorative members 564 attached to the front side of 563. Although illustration is omitted, the door frame right side unit 550 is attached so as to vertically penetrate the right unit base 551, and the door body relay board of the door frame base unit 100 and the door frame of the door frame top unit 570. A connection cable for connecting the top unit relay board 589 is provided.

  The right unit base 551 of the door frame right side unit 550 is a quadrangular shape whose front view is elongated vertically, and is formed in a box shape in which the center portion in the front-rear direction is closed, extending in a rectangular tube shape short in the front-rear direction. Has been. The right unit base 551 is formed of an opaque member.

  Further, the right unit base 551 has a right reflecting vertical wall 568 (see FIGS. 6 and 24) erected from the glass plate 192 disposed so as to close the through-hole 111 toward the near side. ing. In the right reflecting vertical wall portion 568, an inner side surface that is flat and faces the through-hole 111 is provided as a reflecting surface that can reflect light. In addition, this reflective surface is provided with a reflective material such as metal or resin, as well as the inner side surface of the right reflective vertical wall portion 568, as well as the inner side surface of the left reflective vertical wall portion 538. It can also be provided by attaching a seal for use. As will be described later, the right reflection standing wall portion 568 is formed by the right unit base 551 and serves as a portion that bears a part (right side portion) of the reflection standing wall portion 33 described above.

  The door frame right side decorative substrate 552 is formed in a strip shape extending vertically. The door frame right side decorative board 552 is mounted on the left side of the front left-right center of the plurality of left LEDs 552a, on the front side of the right LED 552b mounted on the right side of the left-right direction center, and mounted on the front side of the left-right center. A plurality of middle LEDs 552c. The left LED 552a of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 is for illuminating the right unit left decorative member 554 via the right unit left diffusing lens member 553. Further, the right LED 552b is for illuminating the right unit right decorative member 557 via the right unit right diffusing lens member 556. The middle LED 552c is for decorating the right unit decorative lens member 561 with light emission.

  The door frame right side decorative substrate 552 is formed with white on both front and rear sides. The door frame right side decorative substrate 552 is divided into an upper door frame right side upper decorative substrate 552A and a lower door frame right side lower decorative substrate 552B. Although illustration is omitted, the door frame right side lower decorative board 552B is connected to the door body relay board of the door frame base unit 100, and the door frame right side upper decorative board 552A is the door frame right side lower decorative board 552B. It is connected to the.

  The right unit left diffusing lens member 553 includes a flat plate-like main body portion 553a extending in the vertical direction and the front-rear direction, a rear wall portion 553b protruding in a flat plate shape from the rear side of the main body portion 553a to the right in front view, and A right unit left decorative member on the left side of the main body 553a when viewed from the front side of the main body 553a, and a plurality of cutouts 553c that are cut in a square shape from the right end of the rear wall 553b to the left when viewed from the front. A receiving recess 553d that is shallowly recessed to receive 554, a plurality of input lens portions 553e that protrude rearward from the rear end surface of the main body portion 553a, and a right side surface in front view of the main body portion 553a. And a plurality of side reflecting portions 553f arranged in the vertical direction so that the input lens portion 553e is in the center in the vertical direction.

  The main body portion 553a of the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 has a shape in a side view in which the upper corner of the front end of the quadrangle that extends vertically is obliquely cut out in a C-chamfered shape and the lower side is directed upward as it goes forward It is formed in the shape which inclines so that it may move to. Further, as shown in FIG. 55, the main body 553a is moved to the right from the rear end side toward the front, as shown in FIG. Slightly inclined. The front end of the main body 553a protrudes more forward than the front end of the door frame left side unit 530 in a state assembled to the door frame 3.

  The rear wall 553b is assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, and the right end of the rear wall 553b extends to the center of the right unit base 551 in the left-right direction. The left end of the rear wall portion 556b of the right unit right diffusing lens member 556 is in contact with the right end of the rear wall portion 553b.

  A plurality of notches 553c are formed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction, and a part thereof corresponds to the LED 552c in the door frame right side decorative board 552. In the state assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, the middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decorative board 552 faces forward from the plurality of notches 553c, and the right unit decorative lens member 561 emits light well by the plurality of middle LEDs 552c. Can be decorated.

  The housing recess 553d has a flat bottom surface, and the outer peripheral shape substantially matches the outer shape of the right unit left decorative member 554. Thereby, the right unit left decorative member 554 can be accommodated.

  The plurality of input lens portions 553e protrude rearward from the rear end surface of the main body portion 553a in the vertical direction at a predetermined interval. More specifically, the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 is formed substantially at the center in the vertical direction when the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 is divided into six equal parts in the vertical direction. Although not shown in detail, the input lens portion 553e is recessed toward the front so as to be curved in a spherical shape from a rectangular parallelepiped portion in which a vertically extending quadrangle protrudes rearward and the rear surface of the rectangular parallelepiped portion. A region. These input lens portions 553e are respectively positioned immediately before the left LED 552a of the door frame right side decorative board 552 in a state assembled to the door frame right side unit 550. Thereby, the light from the left LED 552a can be input so as to be diffused widely in the main body 553a.

  A plurality (six) of side reflecting portions 553f are provided in the vertical direction. Each side reflecting portion 553f is formed by a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves that are divided in the circumferential direction by a radially extending line centering on the input lens portion 553e. The plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves are such that, in each groove, the surface near the input lens portion 553e is inclined with respect to the surface of the main body portion 553a, and the surface far from the input lens portion 553e is the main body portion. It extends perpendicularly to the surface of 553a, and the deepest part is formed in an arc shape. The side reflecting portion 553f is formed in a sharp triangular shape such that the cross-sectional shape when cut in the radial direction centering on the input lens portion 553e is such that the mountain portion between the grooves faces the center side. The whole is formed in a saw shape. Further, the side reflecting portion 553f is formed such that the groove portions and the mountain portions are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction with a radial line dividing a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves in the circumferential direction as a boundary. ing.

  In the right unit left diffusing lens member 553, the light emitted forward from the left LED 552a of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 enters the main body 553a of the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 from the rear surface of the input lens portion 553e. Incident. Since the rear end of the input lens portion 553e is recessed in a curved shape toward the front, it is refracted so that light from the left LED 552a spreads by the curved surface, and each input lens portion 553e is within the main body portion 553a. Will diffuse radially forward from the center.

  Since the main body portion 553a is slightly inclined with respect to a line extending vertically from the front surface of the door frame right side decorative board 552 so that the entire body portion 553a moves to the right as viewed from the front, the door frame The light irradiated from the left LED 552a mounted on the front surface of the right side decorative board 552 and incident on the main body 553a from the input lens portion 553e hits the flat left surface in the main body 553a. However, the direct light from the left LED 552a is not emitted from the left surface of the main body portion 553a to the outside due to the incident angle with respect to the left surface of the main body portion 553a, and is reflected to the side reflecting portion 553f side by the inner surface of the left surface. It becomes.

  Then, the light incident forward from the input lens portion 553e into the main body portion 553a is reflected leftward when viewed from the front by hitting the saw-like side surface reflection portion 553f, and outward from the left surface of the main body portion 553a. It will be irradiated. Light is also emitted outward (rightward in front view) from the right surface (side surface reflection portion 553f) of the main body 553a, but the right unit left light-shielding member 559 disposed on the right side of the main body 553a is white. Since it is a member, the left surface of the right unit left light shielding member 559 is brightly illuminated, and the indirect light reflected by the right unit left light shielding member 559 is irradiated to the left side through the main body 553a. . Therefore, from the left surface of the main body portion 553a, the light reflected leftward by the side surface reflection portion 553f in the main body portion 553a and the left surface of the right unit left light-shielding member 559 are irradiated to the right from the side surface reflection portion 553f. Since the light that has been reflected and passed through the main body portion 553a is irradiated leftward, the right unit left decorative member 554 attached to the left side of the main body portion 553a can be decorated with light emission with good brightness. it can.

  Further, in the side reflecting portion 553f, the concentric circular grooves are divided by a plurality of radially extending lines, and then the concentric arc-shaped grooves are shifted in the radial direction with the dividing line as a boundary. Are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction, so that the light emitted from the left surface of the main body portion 553a to the outside (left) is prevented from becoming light having the density of a concentric striped pattern. It is possible to irradiate light with more uniform light to the left. Thus, the right unit left decorative member 554 accommodated in the accommodation recess 553d on the left surface of the main body 553a can be decorated with light emission substantially uniformly.

  Since the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 is formed of a transparent member, side reflection is formed on the opposite side from the left side (the side on which the housing recess 553d is formed) of the main body 553a. A pattern composed of a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves of the portion 553f and a radially extending line can be visually recognized. Therefore, when a transparent portion is formed in the right unit left decorative member 554, the pattern of the side reflecting portion 553f of the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 can be visually recognized through the transparent portion, and the transparent in the right unit left decorative member 554 is visible. This part can be decorated by the side reflection part 553f.

  The right unit left decoration member 554 is formed in a thin sheet shape, and the decoration such as the manufacturer logo of the pachinko machine 1 or the logo in accordance with the concept of presentation presented to the player on the game board 5 is translucent. It is given to have. The right unit left cover 555 protects the outer surface of the right unit left decorative member 554 in a state assembled to the door frame right side unit 550.

  The right unit right diffusing lens member 556 is formed substantially symmetrically with the right unit left diffusing lens member 553, and has the same configuration. More specifically, the right unit right diffusing lens member 556 includes a flat plate-like main body portion 556a extending in the vertical direction and the front-rear direction, and a rear wall that protrudes in a flat plate shape from the rear side of the main body portion 556a to the left in the front view. A portion 556b, a plurality of cutout portions 556c that are cut out in a square shape from the left end side in front view of the rear wall portion 556b to the right, and are formed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction; An accommodation recess 556d that is shallowly recessed to accommodate the unit right decoration member 557, a plurality of input lens portions 556e that protrude rearward from the rear end surface of the main body portion 556a, and a front view of the main body portion 556a. And a plurality of side surface reflecting portions 556f arranged in the vertical direction so that each input lens portion 556e is in the center in the vertical direction on the left side.

  The main body portion 556a of the right unit right diffusing lens member 556 has a shape in a side view in which the upper corner of the front end of the quadrangle that extends vertically is obliquely cut out in a chamfered shape, and the lower side is directed upward as it goes forward The outer shape of the main unit 553a of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 is substantially the same. Further, as shown in FIG. 55, the main body 556a is moved to the left from the front end as it moves forward from the rear end side, and the whole body portion 556a is entirely perpendicular to the front vertical line of the door frame right side decorative board 552. Slightly inclined. The front end of the main body 556a projects forward more largely than the front end of the door frame left side unit 530 in a state assembled to the door frame 3.

  The rear wall 556b is assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, and the left end of the rear wall 556b extends to the center of the right unit base 551 in the left-right direction. The right end of the rear wall portion 553b of the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 contacts the left end of the rear wall portion 556b.

  A plurality of notches 556 c are formed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction, and a part thereof corresponds to the LED 552 c in the door frame right side decorative board 552. The plurality of notches 556c are formed at positions corresponding to the plurality of notches 553c of the right unit left diffusing lens member 553. Therefore, in the state assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, a rectangular opening that penetrates forward and backward through the notch 553c of the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 and the notch 556c of the right unit right diffusing lens member 556. The middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 faces forward from the opening, and the right unit decorative lens member 561 can be favorably decorated with light emission by the plurality of middle LEDs 552c.

  The housing recess 556d has a flat bottom surface, and the outer shape substantially matches the outer shape of the right unit right decorative member 557. Thereby, the right unit right decorative member 557 can be accommodated.

  The plurality of input lens portions 556e protrude rearward from the rear end surface of the main body portion 556a at a predetermined interval in the vertical direction. Specifically, the right unit right diffusing lens member 556 is formed substantially at the center in the vertical direction when the right unit right diffusing lens member 556 is divided into six equal parts in the vertical direction. Although not shown in detail, the input lens portion 556e is recessed toward the front so as to be curved in a spherical shape from a rectangular parallelepiped portion in which a vertically extending quadrangle protrudes backward and a rear surface of the rectangular parallelepiped portion. A region. These input lens portions 556e are positioned immediately before the right LED 552b of the door frame right side decorative board 552 in a state assembled to the door frame right side unit 550. Thereby, the light from the right LED 552b can be input so as to be diffused widely in the main body 556a.

  A plurality (six) of side reflecting portions 556f are provided in the vertical direction. Each of the side surface reflecting portions 556f is formed by a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves that are divided in the circumferential direction by lines extending radially around the input lens portion 556e. The plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves are such that, in each groove, the surface near the input lens portion 556e is inclined with respect to the surface of the main body portion 556a, and the surface far from the input lens portion 556e is the main body portion. It extends perpendicularly to the surface of 556a, and the deepest part is formed in an arc shape. The side reflecting portion 556f is formed in a sharp triangular shape such that the cross-sectional shape when cut in the radial direction centering on the input lens portion 556e is such that the peak portion between the grooves faces the center side. The whole is formed in a saw shape. Further, the side reflecting portion 556f is formed so that the groove portions and the mountain portions are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction with a radial line dividing the plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves in the circumferential direction as a boundary. ing.

  In the right unit right diffusing lens member 556, the light irradiated forward from the right LED 552b of the door frame right side decorative board 552 enters the main body 556a of the right unit right diffusing lens member 556 from the rear surface of the input lens portion 556e. Incident. Since the rear end of the input lens portion 556e is recessed in a curved shape toward the front, it is refracted so that the light from the right LED 552b spreads by the curved surface, and each input lens portion 556e in the main body portion 556a. Will diffuse radially forward from the center.

  The main body portion 556a is slightly inclined with respect to a line extending vertically from the front surface of the door frame right side decorative board 552 so that the entire body portion 556a moves to the left as viewed from the front as it goes forward. The light irradiated from the right LED 552b mounted on the front surface of the right side decorative board 552 and incident on the main body 556a from the input lens portion 556e hits the flat right surface in the main body 556a. However, the direct light from the right LED 552b is not emitted from the left surface of the main body 556a to the outside because of the incident angle with respect to the right surface of the main body 556a, but is reflected to the side reflecting portion 556f side by the inner surface of the right surface. It becomes.

  Then, the light incident forward from the input lens portion 556e into the main body portion 556a is reflected rightward when viewed from the front by hitting the saw-like side surface reflection portion 556f, and outward from the right surface of the main body portion 556a. It will be irradiated. Light is also emitted outward (leftward in front view) from the right surface (side surface reflection portion 556f) of the main body 556a, but the right unit right light shielding member 560 disposed on the left side of the main body 556a is white. Therefore, the right surface of the right unit right light shielding member 560 is brightly illuminated, and the indirect light reflected by the right unit right light shielding member 560 is irradiated to the right side through the main body 556a. . Therefore, from the right surface of the main body portion 556a, the light reflected to the right by the side surface reflection portion 556f in the main body portion 556a and the right side of the right unit right light shielding member 560 are irradiated to the left from the side surface reflection portion 556f. Since the light that has been reflected and passed through the main body portion 556a is irradiated to the right, the right unit right decorative member 557 attached to the right side of the main body portion 556a can be illuminated and decorated with good brightness. it can.

  Further, in the side reflecting portion 556f, the concentric circular grooves are divided by a plurality of radially extending lines, and then the concentric arc-shaped grooves are shifted in the radial direction with the dividing line as a boundary. Are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction, so that the light radiated outward from the right surface of the main body portion 556a (right) is prevented from becoming light having the density of a concentric striped pattern. It is possible to irradiate light with more uniform light to the right. Thereby, the right unit right decoration member 557 housed in the housing recess 556d on the right surface of the main body 556a can be illuminated and decorated substantially uniformly.

  Since the right unit right diffusing lens member 556 is formed of a transparent member, the side reflection formed on the opposite side from the right side of the main body 556a in the front view (the side where the housing recess 556d is formed). A pattern composed of a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves of the part 556f and a radially extending line can be visually recognized. Therefore, when a transparent portion is formed in the right unit right decorative member 557, the pattern of the side reflecting portion 556f of the right unit right diffusing lens member 556 can be visually recognized through the transparent portion, and the transparent in the right unit right decorative member 557 is transparent. This part can be decorated by the side reflection part 556f.

  The right unit right decoration member 557 is formed in a thin sheet shape, and the decoration such as the manufacturer logo of the pachinko machine 1 and the logo in accordance with the concept of presentation presented to the player on the game board 5 is translucent. It is given to have. The right unit right cover 558 protects the outer surface of the right unit right decorative member 557 when assembled to the door frame right side unit 550. The right unit right decorative member 557 and the right unit right cover 558 are formed substantially symmetrically with the right unit left decorative member 554 and the right unit left cover 555. Further, the decoration applied to the right unit left decorative member 554 and the right unit right decorative member 557 may be the same decoration or different decorations.

  The right unit left light-shielding member 559 is formed in substantially the same shape as the side view of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 in side view. The right unit left light shielding member 559 is formed in a shallow box shape with the front and right sides open. The right unit left light-shielding member 559 includes a flat plate-like main body portion 559a extending in the vertical direction and the front-rear direction, a rear wall portion 559b protruding in a flat plate shape from the rear side of the main body portion 559a to the right in front view, The wall portion 559b is cut out to the left from the right end side in front view in a square shape, and a plurality of cutout portions 559c are formed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction, and the body portion 559a extends from the right surface to the right and is rearward. A plurality of flat plate-like reinforcing portions 559d extending from the wall portion 559b to the front end of the main body portion 559a.

  The main body 559a of the right unit left shading member 559 has a shape in a side view in which the upper corner of the front end of the quadrangle extending vertically is cut obliquely in a chamfered shape, and the lower side is directed upward as it goes forward. The outer shape of the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusing lens member 556 is substantially the same shape as the main body portions 553a and 556a.

  The rear wall 559b is assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, and the left end of the rear wall 559b extends to the right side from the substantially horizontal center of the right unit base 551. The left surface of the right unit right light shielding member 560 is in contact with the right end of the rear wall portion 559b.

  A plurality of notches 559c are formed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction, and a part thereof corresponds to the LED 552c in the door frame right side decorative board 552. The plurality of notches 559c are formed at positions corresponding to the notches 553c and 556c of the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusing lens member 556. Therefore, in the state assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, the middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 faces forward from the plurality of notches 559c, and the right unit decorative lens member 561 emits light well by the plurality of middle LEDs 552c. Can be decorated.

  The plurality of reinforcing portions 559d are provided as a set of a pair of reinforcing portions 559d that are substantially the same height as the left and right widths and spaced apart in the vertical direction, and are separated by a predetermined distance in the vertical direction. Each set of reinforcing portions 559 d is formed at a position behind the decorative member 564 attached to the right unit cover 563. The plurality of reinforcing portions 559d increase the overall strength and rigidity of the door frame right side unit 550.

  The right unit right light shielding member 560 has a shape in a side view such that the upper corner of the front end side of the quadrangle extending vertically is obliquely cut out in a chamfered shape, and the lower side moves upward as it goes forward. It is formed in an inclined shape, and is formed in substantially the same shape as the main body portion 559 a in the right unit left light shielding member 559. The right unit right light-shielding member 560 closes the right-side opening opened to the right of the right unit left light-shielding member 559 formed in a shallow box shape in a state assembled to the door frame right side unit 550.

  The right unit left light shielding member 559 and the right unit right light shielding member 560 are each formed of a white member. As shown in FIG. 55, the right unit left light-shielding member 559 and the right unit right light-shielding member 560 are assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, and the main body 559a and the right unit right light-shielding member 560 are connected to the right unit. The left diffuser lens member 553 and the right unit right diffuser lens member 556 are disposed so as to be close to the main body portions 553a and 556a. As a result, the main body 559a of the right unit left light shielding member 559 and the right unit right light shielding member 560 are separated from each other in the left-right direction, forming a space extending in the up-down direction and the front-rear direction with a predetermined width in the left-right direction. . Through the space formed between the main body 559a of the right unit left light shielding member 559 and the right unit right light shielding member 560, light emitted forward from the LED 552c in the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 is transmitted to the right unit decoration. Irradiate the rear side of the lens member 561.

  Further, the right unit left light shielding member 559 and the right unit right light shielding member 560 are formed of a light-impermeable member, and irradiate forward from the left LED 552a, the middle LED 552c, and the right LED 552b on the door frame right side decorative board 552, respectively. The right unit left decorative member 554, the right unit right decorative member 557, and the right unit decorative lens member 561 corresponding to the left LED 552a, the right LED 552b, and the right unit decorative member 561, respectively. Only the middle LED 552c can be decorated.

  Further, the right unit left light shielding member 559 and the right unit right light shielding member 560 are arranged on the rear side of each divided space because the internal space is divided into four in the vertical direction by three sets of reinforcing portions 559d. The middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 can prevent light from interfering with each other, and a portion located in front of each space of the right unit decorative lens member 561 , Each can be independently illuminated. That is, on the front end side of the door frame right side unit 550, it can be divided into a plurality of (four) regions in the vertical direction and each can be decorated with light emission independently.

  The right unit decorative lens member 561 is formed in a shape along the front end shape of the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusing lens member 556. The right unit decorative lens member 561 includes a circular decorative portion 561a that is formed in a circular shape when viewed from the front, and a polyhedral decorative portion 561b that extends vertically and has a plurality of polyhedrons. The circular decorative portion 561a is formed in a shape in which a plurality of triangular ribs are provided in the circumferential direction on the outer periphery of a cylindrical portion whose front surface is short and extends shortly before and after. The polyhedral decorative portion 561b has a plurality of quadrangular pyramidal portions arranged in the vertical direction on the front surface of the rectangular parallelepiped extending vertically, and a plurality of triangular polyhedrons arranged in the vertical direction on the left and right sides of the rectangular parallelepiped portion. It is formed in the shape as provided.

  More specifically, the right unit decorative lens member 561 includes a plurality of circular decorative portions 561a and a multi-surface decorative portion 561b divided into four by three sets of reinforcing portions 559d in the right unit left light shielding member 559. In the three parts from the top in the part located in the front, one multi-face decoration part 561b is arranged on each of the upper and lower sides of the circular decoration part 561a arranged in the center in the vertical direction, and in the lowermost part, the multi-face decoration Only the portion 561b is formed.

  The right unit decorative lens member 561 is attached to the front end of the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusing lens member 556. The right unit decorative lens member 561 can be viewed from the front side (player side) through the transparent right unit cover 563. The right unit decorative lens member 561 is decorated with light emission by the LED 552c in the door frame right side decorative board 552 arranged on the rear side.

  The right unit decoration base 562 is formed in a cylindrical frame shape penetrating in the front-rear direction. The right unit decoration base 562 is formed in a shape along the shape of the front end and the upper end of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. The right unit decorative base 562 is formed so as to be able to cover both the left and right outer sides near the front end of the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusing lens member 556 and the left and right sides of the right unit decorative lens member 561. When assembled in the door frame right side unit 550, the front end of the right unit decorative lens member 561 slightly protrudes forward from the front end of the right unit decorative base 562. The right unit decoration base 562 is formed of an opaque member.

  The right unit cover 563 is formed so that the front end opening of the right unit decoration base 562 can be closed. The right unit cover 563 is formed of a transparent member, and the right unit decorative lens member 561 disposed on the rear side can be viewed from the front side.

  The decorative member 564 extends short in the vertical direction, and is attached to the front surface of the right unit cover 563 at a predetermined interval in the vertical direction. The decorative member 564 is formed of an opaque member. The three decorative members 564 divide the right unit cover 563 (the right unit decorative lens member 561) into four parts in the vertical direction.

  The door frame right side unit 550, when assembled to the door frame 3, projects in a large plate shape forward than the door frame left side unit 530, and projects slightly forward from the front end of the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320. Yes. The door frame right side unit 550 includes a right unit left decorative member 554 and a right unit right decorative member 557 provided on the left and right sides of the protruding left side, and a right unit decorative lens member 561 provided on the front end, respectively. And can be decorated with light emission.

  Since the door frame right side unit 550 is plate-like and protrudes greatly forward, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in an island facility of the game hall, the door frame right side unit 550 is adjacent to the right side of the pachinko machine. An effect like a partition can be exhibited. As a result, a player who plays with the pachinko machine 1 can have an illusion that he / she is playing in a private room, and the game can be played in a relaxed atmosphere without hesitation of other players around. Can do.

  Moreover, since the door frame right side unit 550 protrudes greatly forward, even if the pachinko machine 1 is not located in front of the pachinko machine 1 in the game hall installed with the pachinko machine 1 side by side, The pachinko machine 1 can be conspicuous in a game hall in which a large number of pachinko machines are arranged. Therefore, when the right unit left decorative member 554 and the right unit right decorative member 557 on the left and right sides of the door frame right side unit 550 are light-decorated, the book can be viewed from a distance even if it is not located near the front of the pachinko machine 1. The presence of the pachinko machine 1 can be notified, and the pachinko machine 1 having high appeal to the player can be obtained.

  Further, in the door frame right side unit 550, when a defect such as ball clogging or an error occurs in the pachinko machine 1, the right unit left decorative member 554, the right unit right decorative member 557, and the right unit decorative lens on both the left and right sides. By causing the member 561 and the like to be decorated with light emission in a unique manner, it is possible to immediately notify and recognize the occurrence of the malfunction to the staff of the game hall, and to respond quickly to the malfunction. Therefore, the interruption of the game of the player can be solved at an early stage, and the player can be frustrated and the decrease in the interest in the game can be suppressed.

[3-7. Door frame top unit]
The door frame top unit 570 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 56 to 59 and the like. 56A is a front view of the door frame top unit in the door frame, FIG. 56B is a perspective view of the door frame top unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 56C is a view of the door frame top unit from the rear. It is a perspective view. FIG. 57 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 58 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit as seen from the back. 59 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line PP in FIG. The door frame top unit 570 is attached to the upper side of the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 above the door frame left side unit 530 and the door frame right side unit 550.

  The door frame top unit 570 is attached to the left and right sides of the center base 571 and the center base 571 attached to the center in the left-right direction above the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100. A pair of side bases 572 attached to the front surface of the door frame base 110, a pair of upper speakers 573 respectively attached to the front surfaces of the pair of side bases 572, and the center in the left-right direction project forward. A pair of openings 574a penetrating front and rear at a front position of the pair of upper speakers 573 in a box shape with the rear open, and from a position closer to the center in the left-right direction than the pair of openings 574a to the vicinity of the center A plurality of (three each on the left and right) slips extending in each direction and penetrating in the front-rear direction and spaced apart from each other. The unit main body 271 that has 574b and is attached to the front side of the central base 571 and the pair of side bases 572 and the front side of the pair of upper speakers 573, respectively, and closes the pair of openings 574a. And a speaker cover 575 made of punching metal attached to the rear side of the unit main body 271.

  Here, although illustration is omitted, each of the pair of side bases 572 (the left side base 572a and the right side base 572b) has an internal space opened only toward the side where the opening window is provided. In the inner space, the above-mentioned outer-peripheral light-emitting part 34 (left outer-periphery light-emitting part 34a, right-outer outer-periphery light-emitting part 34b) provided to emit light from the outer periphery into the outer periphery of the opening window, and from the outer periphery of the opening window The outer-periphery light detector 35 (the left-hand outer light detector 35a and the right-hand outer light detector 35b) that detects the light outside the outer periphery is provided.

  Further, the door frame top unit 570 is attached to the front surface at the center in the left-right direction of the unit main body 271 and is attached to the rear side of the top middle decorative member 576 and the top middle decorative member 576. A door frame top middle decorative board 577 having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front face thereof, and a plurality of slits 574b respectively attached to the front face of the unit main body 271, and the left and right ends of the top middle decorative member 576 being closed. A plurality of transparent flat plate-like light guide members 578 extending from the vicinity to the vicinity of both left and right ends of the unit main body 271 across the opening 574a, and a top middle decorative member 576 on the front surface of the unit main body 271. The top left decorative lens member 579 and the top left decorative lens member 579 that are respectively attached to the left and right sides and respectively cover the front surfaces of a plurality of (three) light guide members 578 The top right decorative lens member 580, the top left decorative lens member 579, and the top right decorative lens member 580 are respectively attached to the front surface of the unit main body 271 from the front side thereof, and the openings 574a from both the left and right sides of the top middle decorative member 576. And a top middle left decorative member 581 and a top middle right decorative member 582 that extend to the vicinity of the center side end portion.

  Further, the door frame top unit 570 is attached to the inside of the left and right side surfaces of the unit main body 271, and LEDs are respectively mounted at portions facing the left and right outer ends of the plurality (three) light guide members 578. The door frame top left decorative substrate 583 and the door frame top right decorative substrate 584, and a plurality of (three) slits 574b formed on the left and right sides of the center in the left-right direction on the rear side of the unit main body 271 pass therethrough. A pair of board bases 585 attached to the respective parts, and doors which are attached to the front surfaces of the pair of board bases 585 and have a plurality of LEDs 586a and 587a mounted at positions behind the slits 574b of the unit main body 271. Frame top middle left decorative board 586, door frame top middle right decorative board 587, door frame top middle left decorative board 586 and And a, a pair of light blocking members 588 which are respectively attached to the rear side of the unit body 271 at the front side of the door frame top right in decorative substrate 587.

  Further, the door frame top unit 570 is attached to the central base 571 so as to cover the door frame top unit relay board 589 attached to the front surface of the central base 571 in the unit main body 271 and the front surface of the door frame top unit relay board 589. The relay board cover 590 attached, the upper cover 591 attached to the unit body 271 so as to close the upper opening 574c of the unit body 271, and the unit so as to close the lower opening 574d of the unit body 271. A lower cover 592 attached to the main body 271.

  The center base 571 of the door frame top unit 570 is formed in a quadrangular shape whose front view extends to the left and right. The central base 571 is formed in a box shape opened rearward, and has a plurality of irregularities on the front surface. The pair of side bases 572 are attached to the left and right ends of the central base 571, respectively. The pair of upper speakers 573 are attached to the front surfaces of the side bases 572, respectively. The pair of upper speakers 573 are attached to the door frame top unit 570 in an oblique manner so that the front surfaces of the upper speakers 573 move rearward on the side close to the center in the left-right direction of the door frame top unit 570. The pair of upper speakers 573 are full-range cone type speakers capable of outputting sound in a wide frequency band.

  The unit main body 271 is formed in such a shape that the lower part in the vicinity of the left and right ends of a quadrangle extending left and right bulges downward when viewed from the front. In other words, the unit main body 271 is formed in such a shape that the shape of the front view is cut out of a quadrangle extending left and right by a trapezoid that is narrowed upward from the lower end side. The unit main body 271 has a rectangular shape in plan view extending from the left and right and a half of the width (length in the left-right direction) about the center in the left-right direction on the front end side of the quadrangle. The trapezoid protruding forward and the quadrangle protruding short forward with the front end side of the trapezoid as a long side are formed in a combined shape. Accordingly, the unit main body 271 is a line in which both sides of a portion projecting forward at the center in the left-right direction on the front face connect the left-right end portion of the unit main body 271 and the left-right end portion of the front end of the front-projecting portion. It is located behind (it is depressed).

  In the unit main body 271, openings 574 a penetrating in the front-rear direction are formed at positions on the front surface from the both ends in the left-right direction to positions outside the portions protruding forward. Further, the unit main body 271 has a plurality of slits extending in the vertical direction at a predetermined height in the left and right directions and penetrating in the front-rear direction, in a portion extending obliquely forward from the front portion of the trapezoidal portion. 574b is formed. The plurality of slits 574b extend from the vicinity of the front end of the portion extending obliquely forward to the front surface of the unit main body 271 to the vicinity of the opening 574a. The plurality of slits 574b are formed on the both sides of the center of the unit main body 271 in the left-right direction so as to be spaced apart from each other by three.

  The unit main body 271 has an upper opening 574c that is cut out squarely from the rear end to the front at the center in the left-right direction on the upper surface, and a lower opening 574d that is cut out from the rear end to the front in the left-right direction on the lower surface. It is equipped with. The upper opening 574c of the unit main body 271 is closed by the upper cover 591. The lower opening 574d is closed by the lower cover 592.

  Further, the unit main body 271 includes a top left decorative portion 574e and a top right decorative portion 574f extending vertically at both left and right ends. The top left decorative portion 574e has a front surface formed at a position substantially the same as the front surface of the portion where the opening 574a is formed. The top right decorative portion 574f is formed such that the front surface thereof is positioned forward of the front surface of the portion where the opening 574a is formed. The unit main body 271 is formed of an opaque member.

  The top middle decorative member 576 is attached to the front end of a portion protruding forward at the center in the left-right direction on the front surface of the unit main body 271. The top middle decorative member 576 has a front pentagonal shape that is bent so that the central part of the lower side of the substantially square is positioned downward, and extends outward from the upper ends of the left and right sides of the pentagon. It is formed in a shape such as a combination of a substantially right triangle connecting the tip of the side and the lower ends of the left and right sides of the side pentagon. The top middle decorative member 576 is inclined such that the front pentagonal portion moves rearward as it goes downward. The top middle decorative member 576 is formed in a three-dimensional shape as a whole and has translucency.

  The front middle decorative board 577 of the door frame is rearward of the top middle decorative member 576 in a state in which the front surface is inclined so as to move backward as it goes downward along the front surface of the deformed pentagonal portion of the top middle decorative member 576. Mounted on the side. The door frame top middle decorative board 577 has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and the top middle decorative member 576 can be decorated with light emission by emitting these LEDs.

  The light guide member 578 is formed of a transparent member. The light guide member 578 is formed in a shape along the shape on the left and right sides of the front end of the portion protruding forward on the front surface of the unit main body 271. When the side close to both ends in the left-right direction of the unit main body 271 is described as the end side, and the side close to the center as the center side, the light guide member 578 is a straight part that extends straight from side to side toward the center side. 578a, and an arc portion 578b extending in an arc shape having a large radius so as to move forward from the end portion on the center side of the straight portion 578a toward the center side. The light guide member 578 has a depth in the front-rear direction smaller than the height in the vertical direction at the straight portion 578a, and a depth in the front-rear direction larger than the height in the vertical direction at the arc portion 578b. The light guide member 578 is formed such that the vertical portion 578a has a constant height in the vertical direction, and the arc portion 578b is formed so that the height in the vertical direction decreases toward the center. In the state where the light guide member 578 is assembled to the door frame top unit 570, the straight portion 578a is positioned immediately before the opening 574a of the unit main body 271, and the arc portion 578b closes the slit 574b of the unit main body 271 from the front. Yes.

  The light guide member 578 includes a diffuse reflection portion 578c formed of a saw-like unevenness formed on the rear surface of the straight portion 578a, a diffusion input portion 578d formed of a plurality of unevenness formed on the rear surface side of the arc portion 578b, It has.

  In the state where the light guide member 578 is assembled to the door frame top unit 570, the outer ends of the left and right directions face the LEDs 583a and 584a of the door frame top left decorative substrate 583 or the door frame top right decorative substrate 584. At the same time, the diffusion input portion 578d faces the LEDs 586a and 587a of the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 or the door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587. When light from the LEDs 583a and 584a of the door frame top left decorative substrate 584 or the door frame top right decorative substrate 584 is incident on the light guide member 578 from the ends on both outer sides in the left-right direction, the light enters the direct portion 578a. The inside of the straight portion 578a is sequentially reflected forward from the end portion by the diffuse reflection portion 578c formed on the rear surface of the straight portion 578a, and light is irradiated forward from the entire front surface of the straight portion 578a. A top left decorative lens member 579 or a top right decorative lens member 580 is disposed in front of the light guide member 578, and a portion that is in front of the straight part 578a is decorated with light emission.

  The light guide member 578 receives light from the LEDs 586a and 587a of the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 or the door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 from the diffusion input portion 578d formed on the rear surface of the arc portion 578b. Then, the light is diffused widely into the arc portion 578b by the unevenness of the diffusion input portion 578d, and the light is irradiated forward from the entire front surface of the arc portion 578b. Thereby, the part located in front of the circular arc part 578b in the top left decorative lens member 579 or the top right decorative lens member 580 can be decorated with light emission.

  As described above, the light guide member 578 includes the LEDs 583a and 586a of the door frame top left decorative substrate 583 and the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586, or the door frame top right decorative substrate 584 and the door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587. The light from the LEDs 584a and 587a can be guided, and the top left decorative lens member 579 or the top right decorative lens member 580 arranged in front can be illuminated and decorated in a good (uniform) state.

  The top left decorative lens member 579 is attached to the front surface of the unit body 271 so as to cover the front of the three light guide members 578 arranged on the left side of the front surface of the unit body 271 in the left-right direction. The top left decorative lens member 579 has three decorative lens portions 579a that accommodate the three light guide members 578 independently from the front. The decorative lens portion 579a of the top left decorative lens member 579 is formed in a shape that follows the light guide member 578, and covers the front surface and the upper and lower surfaces of the light guide member 578. On the front surface of each decorative lens portion 579a, projections and depressions of a square frustum projecting forward are arranged in a row on the left and right.

  The top left decorative lens member 579 extends from the left end of the top middle decorative member 576 in the door frame top unit 570 to the right end of the top left decorative portion 574e of the unit body 271. That is, the top left decorative lens member 579 decorates substantially the entire left side of the top middle decorative member 576 in the door frame top unit 570. The top left decorative lens member 579 is illuminated and decorated by the LEDs 583a and 586a of the door frame top left decorative substrate 583 and the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 via the three light guide members 578.

  The top right decorative lens member 580 is attached to the front surface of the unit main body 271 so as to cover the front of the three light guide members 578 disposed on the right side of the front surface of the unit main body 271 in the left-right direction. The top right decorative lens member 580 has three decorative lens portions 580a that accommodate the three light guide members 578 independently from the front. The decorative lens portion 580a of the top right decorative lens member 580 is formed in a shape that follows the light guide member 578, and covers the front surface and upper and lower surfaces of the light guide member 578. On the front surface of each decorative lens portion 580a, projections and depressions of a square frustum projecting forward are arranged in a row on the left and right.

  The top right decorative lens member 580 extends from the right end of the top middle decorative member 576 in the door frame top unit 570 to the left end of the top right decorative portion 574f of the unit body 271. That is, the top right decorative lens member 580 decorates substantially the entire right side of the top middle decorative member 576 in the door frame top unit 570. The top right decorative lens member 580 is illuminated and decorated by the LEDs 584a and 587a of the door frame top right decorative substrate 584 and the door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 via the three light guide members 578.

  The top middle left decorative member 581 is attached to the front surface of the unit main body 271 from the front of the top left decorative lens member 579 between the left opening 574a on the front surface of the unit main body 271 and the top middle decorative member 576. The top middle left decorative member 581 is mounted so as to fill the space between the three decorative lens portions 579a of the top left decorative lens member 579 in the assembled state in the door frame top unit 570, and the front center side is the top left side. The decorative lens member 579 projects forward from the front surface. The top middle left decorative member 581 is formed of an opaque member.

  The top middle right decorative member 582 is attached to the front surface of the unit main body 271 from the front of the top right decorative lens member 580 between the right opening 574a on the front surface of the unit main body 271 and the top middle decorative member 576. The top middle right decorative member 582 is mounted so as to fill the space between the three decorative lens portions 580a of the top right decorative lens member 580 in a state assembled to the door frame top unit 570, and the center of the front side is closer to the top right. The decorative lens member 580 protrudes forward from the front surface. The top middle right decorative member 582 is formed of an opaque member.

  The door frame top left decorative substrate 583 is attached to the inside of the left side surface (top left decorative portion 574e) in the unit main body 271 with the surface on which the LED 583a is mounted facing rightward. On the door frame top left decorative substrate 583, an LED 583a is mounted at a position facing the left end surfaces of the three light guide members 578 attached to the left front surface of the unit body 271 in the left-right direction center (see FIG. 59). ). The three LEDs 583a can each emit light independently. A portion of the top left decorative lens member 579 positioned in front of the left opening 574a of the unit main body 271 via the straight portions 578a of the three light guide members 578 by the LED 583a of the door frame top left decorative substrate 583. Can be decorated with luminescence.

  The door frame top right decorative board 584 is attached to the inside of the right side surface (top right decorative portion 574f) in the unit main body 271 with the surface on which the LED 584a is mounted facing leftward. On the door frame top right decorative board 584, an LED 584a is mounted at a position facing the right end face of the three light guide members 578 attached to the right front surface of the unit body 271 in the left-right direction center (see FIG. 59). ). The three LEDs 584a can each emit light independently. A portion of the top right decorative lens member 580 positioned in front of the right opening 574a of the top right decorative lens member 580 via the straight portions 578a of the three light guide members 578 is set by the LED 584a of the door frame top right decorative substrate 584. Can be decorated with luminescence.

  The pair of substrate bases 585 are attached to the rear side of the unit body 271 where the plurality of slits 574b are formed. The pair of substrate bases 585 are formed substantially symmetrical to each other. The substrate base 585 includes a substantially square side wall having sides extending in the vertical and front and back directions, a rear wall having a rectangular shape in front view extending rightward and leftward from the rear side of the side wall, and a front end of the upper side of the side wall. The upper wall of a substantially right triangle connecting the upper side of the side wall and the rear wall with the line connecting the upper side of the side wall as the hypotenuse, and the lower side of the side wall and the rear wall on the opposite side of the upper wall And a bottom wall of a right triangle, and is formed in a triangular prismatic box shape in which the upper and lower hypotenuses are open. The substrate base 585 is attached to the unit main body 271 so that the opened part is closed by the unit main body 271. The substrate base 585 is attached with the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 or the door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 so that the opened part is closed.

  The door frame top center left decorative substrate 586 is attached to the substrate base 585 so as to close a box-shaped open portion from the front in the substrate base 585 attached to the rear side on the left side of the left and right center of the unit main body 271. It is done. The door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 is attached to the front surface of the substrate base 585 so that the front surface moves forward as it moves toward the center side in the left-right direction of the unit body 271. Inclined state. As a result, the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 is a surface of a portion where the front side of the door frame top unit 570 is formed with three slits 574b on the left side of the unit body 271 in the left-right direction center. It becomes a state substantially parallel to.

  The door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 has a plurality of LEDs 586 a mounted at positions corresponding to the three slits 574 b of the unit main body 271. As a result, the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 is in a state in which the plurality of LEDs 586a face forward from the three slits 574b on the left side of the center of the unit body 271 in a state assembled to the door frame top unit 570. The door frame top middle left decorative board 586 emits a plurality of LEDs 586a to emit and decorate a portion near the top middle decorative member 576 of the top left decorative lens member 579 via the arc portion 578b of the light guide member 578. be able to.

  The door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 is attached to the substrate base 585 so as to close a box-shaped open portion from the front in the substrate base 585 attached to the rear side on the right side of the left and right center of the unit main body 271. It is done. The door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 is attached to the front surface of the substrate base 585, so that the front surface moves forward as it moves toward the center in the left-right direction of the unit main body 271. Inclined state. As a result, the door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 is assembled to the door frame top unit 570, and the front surface thereof is the surface of the portion where the three slits 574b on the right side from the center in the left-right direction of the unit body 271 are formed. It becomes a state substantially parallel to.

  The door frame top middle right decorative board 587 has a plurality of LEDs 587 a mounted at positions corresponding to the three slits 574 b of the unit main body 271. As a result, the door frame top middle right decorative board 587 is in a state in which the plurality of LEDs 587a face forward from the three slits 574b on the right side of the center of the unit main body 271 in a state assembled to the door frame top unit 570. The door frame top middle right decorative board 587 emits a plurality of LEDs 587a to emit light and decorate a portion near the top middle decorative member 576 of the top right decorative lens member 580 via the arc portion 578b of the light guide member 578. be able to.

  The pair of light shielding members 588 are attached to the rear side of the front surface of the unit main body 271 at a position between the door frame top middle left decorative board 586 and the door frame top middle right decorative board 587 and the unit main body 271. The pair of light shielding members 588 are formed so as to be substantially bilaterally symmetrical with each other by an opaque member. The light shielding member 588 is provided between the upper and lower sides of the plurality of LEDs 586a and 587a on the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 and the door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 arranged in correspondence with the three slits 574b in the unit main body 271. Partitioning. By this light shielding member 588, light can be guided forward by the light guide member 578 only by the LEDs 586a and 587a located immediately after the respective light guide members 578, and the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative member can be guided. The decorative lens portions 579a and 580a of the lens member 580 can be illuminated and decorated satisfactorily.

  The door frame top unit relay board 589 is attached to the front surface of the central base 571. The door frame top unit relay substrate 589 includes a pair of upper speakers 573, a door frame top middle decorative substrate 577, a door frame top left decorative substrate 583, a door frame top right decorative substrate 584, a door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586, and a door. The connection between the frame top middle right decorative board 587 and the door body relay board of the door frame base unit 100 is relayed. The door frame top unit relay board 589 is connected to the door body relay board via a connection cable (not shown) provided in the door frame right side unit 550. The front side of the door frame top unit relay board 589 is covered with a relay board cover 590.

  The door frame top unit 570 includes a top middle decorative member 576 that protrudes forward at the center in the left-right direction, and is curved so that the front surfaces on both the left and right sides of the top middle decorative member 576 are curled backward. Therefore, it is possible to make the player have an illusion that only the top middle decorative member 576 protrudes greatly forward, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the pachinko machine 1.

  Further, the door frame top unit 570 includes a top left decorative lens member 579 and a top right decorative lens member 580 that decorate the left and right sides of the top middle decorative member 576 disposed at the center, and the left and right sides of the top middle decorative member 576. It is formed so as to extend from both sides to a top left decorative portion 574e and a top right decorative portion 574f formed at the left and right ends of the unit main body 271. Thereby, the front upper part of the door frame 3 can be entirely decorated by the door frame top unit 570.

  At this time, in the door frame top unit 570, the front surface is protected by a speaker cover 575 made of punching metal behind each of the left and right ends near the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580. The speaker cover 575 faces the front from between the three decorative lens portions 579a and 580a that are separated from each other above and below the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580. The player can listen to the sound output from the left and right upper speakers 573 in a good state, and can enjoy high-quality stereo sound.

  Further, the door frame top unit 570 includes a door frame top left decorative substrate 583 and a door frame top right decorative by a plurality of light guide members 578 provided on the rear side of the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580. Light from the substrate 584, the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586, and the door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 can be guided to the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580, and the top left decorative lens member The entire front surface of 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580 can be decorated with good light emission. Therefore, the door frame top unit 570 can decorate the entire front surface of the upper part of the door frame 3 including the front of the left and right upper speakers 573 with light emission.

[3-8. Effect of door frame]
The effects of the door frame 3 will be described. The door frame 3 in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment has the through-holes 111 penetrating through the door frame base 110 in the door frame base unit 100 in the front and rear directions and in the vertical and horizontal directions as compared with the conventional pachinko machine. The vertical height of the plate unit 320 and the door frame top unit 570 is reduced in accordance with the enlargement of the through-hole 111, and the horizontal width of the door frame left side unit 530 and the door frame right side unit 550 Is made smaller. Thereby, the front surface of the game board 5 (game area 5a) attached to the main body frame 4 can be seen as widely as possible from the player (front) through the through-hole 111 (glass unit 190). This corresponds to the game board 5 having a wide game area 5a.

  The door frame 3 has a production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) having a large hemispherical operation button 410 at the center in the left-right direction of the dish unit 320 bulging forward on the lower side of the through-hole 111. The front surface of the lower half (the lower side of the upper plate 321) on both the left and right sides of the production operation unit 400 (the front surface of the front plate lower decorative portion 326c) is recessed so as to bend backward (the plate unit). 320, a shape curved in a concave shape so that the front surfaces on both the left and right sides of the rendering operation unit 400 are positioned rearward than a straight line connecting the front ends of the left and right ends of 320 and the front ends of the left and right ends of the rendering operation unit 400. ing. As a result, the production operation unit 400 attached to the front surface at the center in the left-right direction of the plate unit 320 appears to protrude greatly forward, so that the production operation unit 400 is highlighted and shown to the player. It is possible to pay attention to the production operation unit 400.

  The door frame 3 tilts the presentation operation unit 400 disposed on the front surface of the dish unit 320 below the through-hole 111 so that the large hemispherical transparent operation button 410 faces obliquely upward and forward. Therefore, when the player sits in front of the pachinko machine 1, the operation button 410 faces the player's head (face), and the player drops his line of sight and moves the rendering operation unit 400. When viewed, the operation button 410 can be seen in a state substantially close to the front, the large and round operation button 410 can be visually recognized strongly, and an expectation can be enhanced for the effect using the operation button 410. At the same time, the effect image displayed on the door frame side effect display device 460 arranged in the transparent operation button 410 can be visually recognized in a good state, and the effect image can be sufficiently enjoyed. Maseru can be.

  Further, the door frame 3 includes an operation button 410 having a diameter substantially the same as the overall height of the plate unit 320 and bulging forward, so that when the operation button 410 is operated, the hand frame can be moved by a short distance. Any part of the operation button 410 can be touched, and “fast pressing” of the operation button 410 can be performed relatively easily. In addition, since the operation button 410, which has a large diameter and bulges forward, is mounted in an inclined state, it can be pressed from above like the operation buttons of a conventional pachinko machine, and can be operated to the left or right. The operation button 410 can be operated satisfactorily or from the front, and the operation buttons 410 having good operability can be more enjoyed.

  In addition, the door frame 3 is mounted with the stage operation unit 400 in a suspended state by the dish unit 320 and includes a vibration motor 424 that generates vibration at the lower part of the stage operation unit 400. When vibration is generated by rotating the vibration motor 424 in accordance with the state, strong vibration can be transmitted to the player's hand touching the upper part of the operation button 410, and the player can be surprised by the operation button. The production using 410 can be further enjoyed.

  Furthermore, since the door frame 3 is provided with a large operation button 410 (production operation unit 400) over the entire height of the plate unit 320 in the center of the front surface of the plate unit 320, the upper plate 321 is compared with a conventional pachinko machine. Because the lower plate 322 underneath is inconspicuous, it can make it easier for players who are familiar with conventional pachinko machines to recognize that they are clearly different, and appeal to the players strongly. A powerful pachinko machine 1 can be obtained.

  Further, the door frame 3 is formed so that the lower plate 322 wraps around the rear side of the production operation unit 400 with respect to the lower plate opening 326d that is opened on the left side of the production operation unit 400 on the front surface of the plate unit 320. Therefore, the volume of the lower plate 322 can be increased with respect to the size of the lower plate opening 326d, and a sufficient number of game balls can be secured in the lower plate 322. In addition, since the rear part of the lower plate 322 wraps around to the rear side of the production operation unit 400, when the player puts his left hand into the lower plate 322 or puts his / her finger on the lower plate opening 326d. Since it becomes difficult for the fingertips to touch the wall behind the lower plate 322, it is possible to make it difficult to give the player a sense of incongruity, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game and to increase the size of the lower plate opening 326d. Compared to this, it can be recognized by tactile sense that the volume of the lower plate 322 is larger.

  Further, the door frame 3 has a lower tray ball supply port 323c through which game balls from the upper plate 321 are discharged to the lower plate 322, and a bottom for pulling out the game balls of the lower plate 322 into a dollar box or the like below the plate unit 320. The countersunk hole 322a is arranged linearly in the front-rear direction, and is arranged on the right outside of the lower dish opening 326d in the front view (on the right side of the left end of the frame unit 415 of the rendering operation unit 400). That is, the lower tray ball supply port 323c and the lower tray ball removal hole 322a are connected to the rendering operation unit 400, the rendering operation unit mounting portion 326a (the right outer side of the lower tray opening 326d) in the tray unit cover 326, and the front end of the lower tray cover 340. Since the lower dish ball supply port 323c and the lower dish ball removal hole 322a are not visible from the player side, the appearance of the dish unit 320 (pachinko machine 1) can be refreshed. The appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved.

  Further, the door frame 3 has a lower plate ball hole 322a opened in the lower plate 322 because the lower plate ball hole 322a is disposed in front of the lower plate ball supply port 323c (directly in front). Then, as soon as the game ball released from the upper plate 321 or the like to the lower plate 322 enters the lower plate 322, it is discharged from the lower plate ball removal hole 322a to a lower dollar box or the like. At this time, since the player cannot see the lower tray ball supply port 323c and the lower tray ball removal hole 322a, the flow of the game balls discharged from the upper tray 321 and the like through the lower tray 322 to the dollar box is also included. I can't see it. Accordingly, the player can have an illusion that the game ball on the upper plate 321 or the game ball discharged from the payout device 830 in a state where the upper plate 321 is full is directly discharged to the dollar box. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the game ball to feel the annoyance passing through the lower plate 322, and to reduce the interest by dedicating the player to the game (gaming operation of the game ball, production image, etc.). it can.

  In addition, the door frame 3 has a lower plate ball removal hole 322a disposed at the front left side of the lower plate ball supply port 323c in the lower plate 322, and the lower plate 322 standing on the right side of the lower plate ball removal hole 322a. Since the raised wall portion is obliquely curved so as to face the direction of the lower dish ball removal hole 322a, the game balls supplied from the lower dish ball supply port 323c to the lower dish 322 are directly It can be guided to the punching hole 322a, or can be indirectly guided to the lower dish ball punching hole 322a by being reflected on the right wall. As a result, in a state where the lower dish ball removal hole 322a remains open, the game ball supplied from the lower dish ball supply port 323c to the lower dish 322 is an area on the left side of the lower dish ball removal hole 322a in the lower dish 322. Since it can be discharged downward from the lower tray ball removal hole 322a without entering the lower tray first region A1, the lower side of the lower plate 322 is displayed without showing the player the game balls circulating in the lower tray 322. The game ball can be discharged downward (dollar box), and the same effects as described above can be achieved.

  Further, the door frame 3 includes a lower plate opening 326d of the plate unit cover 326 facing the front of the lower plate 322 between the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a (the effect operation unit 400) and the lower speaker opening 326e. Therefore, even if the player puts his hand on the lower plate opening 326d or puts his hand on the lower plate 322, the front of the lower speaker port 326e is not blocked by the player's hand. The sound from the lower speaker 921 in the substrate unit 900 can be output well forward, and the sound of the pachinko machine 1 can be enjoyed. Further, when the player puts his hand in the lower plate 322 or approaches the lower plate 322, the player can feel the vibration caused by the heavy bass from the lower speaker 921 output forward from the lower speaker port 326e tactilely, It is possible to entertain the player and suppress the decrease in interest.

  Moreover, since the door frame 3 is provided with the door frame right side unit 550 which is plate-like and protrudes forward from the right side of the through-hole 111, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in the island facility of the game hall, the door Since the frame right side unit 550 can exert an effect such as a partition between the pachinko machine adjacent to the right side, the player who plays with the pachinko machine 1 can play in a private room. The game can be played in a relaxed atmosphere without bothering other players around you.

  Furthermore, the door frame 3 can be light-decorated on the front end and both left and right sides of the door frame right side unit 550 that is plate-like and protrudes greatly forward, so that the game hall installed with the pachinko machines 1 arranged side by side Even if the pachinko machine 1 is not located in front of the pachinko machine 1, the presence of the pachinko machine 1 can be informed from a distance such as from the side along the island facility, and the pachinko machine has a high appeal to the player. Machine 1 can be used.

  Further, the door frame 3 includes a top middle decorative member 576 that protrudes forward at the center in the left-right direction in the door frame top unit 570 on the upper side of the through-hole 111, and the front surfaces on both the left and right sides of the top middle decorative member 576, A shape that is recessed so as to squeeze backward (the top middle decorative member in the door frame top unit 570 rather than the straight line connecting the front ends of the left and right ends of the door frame top unit 570 and the front ends of the left and right ends of the top middle decorative member 576 576 is formed in a concavely curved shape so that the front surfaces of the left and right sides of 576 are located rearward. As a result, only the top middle decorative member 576 of the door frame top unit 570 appears to protrude greatly forward, so that the player can make the top middle decorative member 576 stand out and emphasized. The medium decorative member 576 can be strongly noted.

  By the way, a pair of upper speakers spaced apart from each other are provided on the upper part of the door frame in the conventional pachinko machine, and the two upper speakers are conspicuous. On the other hand, the door frame 3 according to the present embodiment has a pair of upper portions whose front surfaces are protected by speaker covers 575 made of punching metal at both left and right ends in the door frame top unit 570 attached to the upper side of the through-hole 111. In addition to the speaker 573, a top left decorative lens member 579 and a top right decorative lens member 580 extending from the left and right sides of the center top middle decorative member 576 to the left and right ends through the front of the speaker cover 575 are provided. The entire front surface of the left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580 can be decorated with light emission. Thereby, since the front upper part of the door frame 3 can be decorated as a whole, the pair of upper speakers 573 become inconspicuous in the upper part of the door frame 3, and the decoration clearly different from the conventional pachinko machine is given. The pachinko machine 1 can be recognized by the player at a glance, and the player can enjoy a high-quality stereo sound by the pair of upper speakers 573. it can.

  As described above, the door frame 3 of the present embodiment includes the effect operation unit 400 attached to the dish unit 320 and the top middle decorative member 576 of the door frame top unit 570 on the lower side and the upper side of the through-hole 111. , Because it protrudes forward in the center in the left and right direction, it can show the player a unified decoration up and down so that the virtual line passing through the center in the left and right direction is conspicuous, and by the decoration of sophisticated feeling The pachinko machine 1 can be made more conspicuous than other pachinko machines and has a high appealing power.

  Further, the door frame 3 projects the top middle decorative member 576 and the effect operation unit 400 of the door frame top unit 570 disposed vertically at the center in the left-right direction, and thus the top middle decorative member 576. When the lighting operation unit 400 is decorated with light emission, the player can show a light emission line that extends vertically at the center in the left-right direction on the front surface of the door frame 3, and the player's line of sight is arranged in the center in the left-right direction. It can be guided to the operation button 410 or the like of the effect operation unit 400.

[5. Overall configuration of game board]
Next, the overall configuration of the game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. FIG. 60 is a front view of the game board. FIG. 61 is an exploded perspective view of the game board as viewed from the front after being disassembled for each main configuration, and FIG. 62 is an exploded perspective view of the game board as viewed from the rear after being disassembled for each main structure. 63 is a front view of the game board excluding the front unit and the back unit, FIG. 64 is an exploded perspective view of the game board of FIG. 63 as seen from the front, and FIG. 65 is a perspective view of the game board of FIG. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled and was seen from the back. FIG. 66 is an explanatory view showing, in an enlarged manner, a part of the function display unit from the front in a state where the game board is attached to the pachinko machine.

  The game board 5 has a game area 5a in which a game ball is driven when the player operates the handle 302 of the handle unit 300. In addition, the game board 5 has a front component member 1000 that defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a and has an outer shape that is substantially rectangular when viewed from the front, and is attached to the rear side of the front component member 1000. A board-like gaming panel 1100 to be partitioned, a substrate holder 1200 attached to the lower rear portion of the gaming panel 1100, and a game ball attached to the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200 by driving a game ball into the gaming area 5a. A main control unit 1300 having a main control board 1310 for controlling the game content. A plurality of obstacle nails that come into contact with the game ball are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement (not shown) in a portion that is in the game area 5a on the front surface of the game panel 1100.

  In addition, the game board 5 displays a game status based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, and a function display unit 1400 that is attached to the lower left corner of the front component member 1000 so as to be visible to the player side, and a game panel A peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of 1100, a game board side effect display device 1600 arranged in the center of the game area 5a in front view and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, and the front surface of the game panel 1100 A front unit 2000 attached to the game panel 1100 and a back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100 are further provided. A game board side effect display device 1600 is attached to the rear surface of the back unit 3000, and a peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear surface of the game board side effect display device 1600.

  The gaming panel 1100 is formed so that the outer periphery is slightly larger than the inner periphery of the frame-shaped front component member 1000 and holds the outer periphery of the transparent flat panel panel 1110 and the panel plate 1110. And a frame-like panel holder 1120 to which the rear unit 3000 is attached on the rear surface.

  The front unit 2000 has a plurality of general winning ports 2001 that are always open so as to be able to receive game balls that have been thrown into the game area 5a, and the plurality of general winning ports 2001 are games at different positions in the game area 5a. A first start opening 2002 that is always open to accept a ball, a gate portion 2003 that is attached to a predetermined position in the game area 5a to detect the passage of the game ball, and the game ball passes through the gate portion 2003. A second start opening 2004 that allows game balls to be accepted according to the result of the normal lottery drawn, and a first special lottery drawn by receiving game balls into the first start opening 2002 or the second start opening 2004 And a special winning opening 2005 that allows game balls to be received either in accordance with the lottery result or the second special lottery result.

  In addition, the front unit 2000 is attached immediately above the out port 1126 at the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a, and includes a start port unit 2100 having a first start port 2002 and a prize winning port 2005, and a start port unit. A side unit 2200 that is attached along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the front view 2100 and has a plurality of general winning ports 2001, and a side unit that is attached to the upper left end of the side unit bottom 2200 in front view. A top 2300 and a frame-shaped center accessory 2500 having a gate portion 2003 and a second starting port 2004, which are attached to the approximate center in the game area 5a.

  The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 and the back box 3010 which is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 and has a square opening 3010a on the rear wall. And a lock mechanism 3020 for detachably attaching the board-side effect display device 1600.

  Further, the back unit 3000 includes a back left middle decoration unit 3050 attached at the front end in the back box 3010 upward from the center in the vertical direction on the left side when viewed from the front, and a back side below the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. A back-under-back movable production unit 3100 attached near the rear wall of the box 3010, a back-upper left-movement production unit 3200 attached to the left side in front view above the opening 3010a in the back box 3010, and a back box The rear left movable effect unit 3300 attached to the left side of the opening 3010a in the front view in 3010, and the back top attached from the center in the left-right direction to the right end in the front view above the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. Movable effect unit 3400 and lower rear movable effect unit 3100 below opening 3010a in back box 3010 A subplantar before moving direction unit 3500 attached to the front, and a.

[5-1. Previous component]
Next, the front component member 1000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. The front component member 1000 has a substantially square outer shape when viewed from the front, and has an inner shape penetrating in a front-rear direction in a substantially circular shape. The outer periphery of the game area 5a is defined by the inner periphery of the inner shape. The front component member 1000 includes an outer rail 1001 that extends in an arc shape from the lower left side to the left side from the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, and extends to the upper right side through the center upper end in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. An inner rail 1002 that is arranged substantially along the outer rail 1001 inside the front component member 1000 and extends in an arc shape from the center lower part in the left-right direction in front view to the upper left part in the front view, and a game on the right side in front view of the lower end of the inner rail 1002 An out guiding portion 1003 that is formed at the lowest position of the region 5a and is inclined so as to become lower toward the rear.

  Further, the front component member 1000 includes a lower right rail 1004 and a lower right rail 1004 that are linearly inclined so that the right end side is slightly higher from the right end of the out guide portion 1003 in front view to the right side of the front component member 1000. The right rail 1005 extending from the right end of the front component member 1000 to the lower side of the upper end of the outer rail 1001 along the right side of the front component member 1000, and the upper portion being curved inward of the front component member 1000, and the upper end of the right rail 1005 and the outer rail 1001 is connected to the upper end of 1001, and a stop portion 1006 with which a game ball rolling along the outer rail 1001 contacts is provided.

  Further, the front component member 1000 is pivotally supported on the upper end of the inner rail 1002, and has a closed position and a front-view clock extending upward from the upper end of the inner rail 1002 so as to close the space between the front rail and the outer rail 1001. A backflow prevention member that is rotated by a spring (not shown) so as to be able to rotate only between the open position where the outer rail 1001 is opened by rotating in the rotating direction and to return to the closed position side. 1007.

  Further, the front component member 1000 includes an outer side of the vicinity of the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 that extend substantially vertically from the lower end, a lower side of the out guiding part 1003 and the lower right rail 1004, and an outer side of the right rail 1005. Each part includes a security recess 1008 that is recessed rearward from the front end. When the gaming board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the security recess 1008 has a rear protruding piece 202 that protrudes rearward of the security cover 200 in the door frame 3. It will be inserted. Accordingly, the space between the security cover 200 and the game board 5 (the front component member 1000) is complicatedly bent by the rear protrusion piece 202 of the security cover 200 and the security recess portion 1008 of the front component member 1000. Even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire enters the game area 5a through the space between the security cover 200 and the front structural member 1000 from below the front of the board 5, it will be blocked by the rear protrusion 202 and the security recess 1008. The unauthorized tool can be prevented from entering the game area 5a.

  The front component member 1000 includes a plurality of positioning protrusions 1009 that protrude rearward from the rear end of the inner rail 1002. These positioning protrusions 1009 are inserted into inner rail fixing holes 1116 formed in the panel plate 1110 of the gaming panel 1100, whereby the inner rail 1002 can be positioned and fixed on the front surface of the panel plate 1110.

  Further, the front component member 1000 includes a plurality of mounting bosses 1010 protruding rearward from the rear surface. The plurality of mounting bosses 1010 can be positioned between the panel holder 1120 (game panel 1100) by being inserted into the mounting holes 1128 of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100.

  Further, the front component member 1000 includes a notch 1011 that is notched upward from the lower end in the lower left corner when viewed from the front. The notch 1011 coincides with the notch 1127 of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, the notch 1011 and 1127 pass through the lower full ball path. The front end openings of the normal guide path 861 and the full tank guide path 862 of the unit 860 face forward.

[5-2. Game panel]
Next, the gaming panel 1100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 61 and 62, FIGS. 64 and 65, and the like. The gaming panel 1100 has a flat panel panel 1110 having an outer periphery formed slightly larger than the inner periphery of the frame-shaped front component member 1000 and formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and holds the outer periphery of the panel board 1110. And a frame-like panel holder 1120 attached to the rear side of the front component member 1000 and attached to the rear unit 3000 on the rear surface.

  The panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 is formed of a synthetic resin plate such as acrylic resin, polycarbonate resin, polyarylate resin, or methacrylic resin, or an inorganic plate such as glass or metal. The panel plate 1110 is thinner than the panel holder 1120 (game panel 1150), and is the minimum necessary thickness that can be sufficiently retained even if the obstruction nail is installed on the front surface or the front unit 2000 is attached. (8 to 10 mm). In this example, panel plate 1110 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin plate.

  The panel board 1110 is formed with an out recess 1111 that is recessed upward from the lower end at the lowest position in the game area 5a. Further, the panel plate 1110 is formed with a plurality of openings 1112 penetrating in the front-rear direction for attaching the front unit 2000.

  The panel plate 1110 includes a plurality of fitting holes 1113 that are arranged in the vicinity of the outer periphery and penetrate in the front-rear direction, and a long hole 1114 that is disposed in the vicinity of the outer periphery of the lower left portion and extends in the front-rear direction and extends in the up-down direction. It is equipped with. The fitting hole 1113 and the long hole 1114 are disposed outside the game area 5a and are positioned with the panel holder 1120. Moreover, the panel board 1110 is provided with the step-shaped engagement step part 1115 which the front side became depressed in the both ends of an upper side, and the both ends of a lower side, respectively. These engagement step portions 1115 are cut out to substantially half the thickness of the panel plate 1110, and are arranged outside the game area 5a, like the fitting holes 1113 and the long holes 1114. This is for engaging and fixing the panel plate 1110 to the panel holder 1120.

  The panel plate 1110 has a plurality of inner rail fixing holes 1116 at predetermined positions. The inner rail 1002 can be fixed at a predetermined position by fitting and fixing the positioning protrusion 1009 protruding from the rear side of the inner rail 1002 into the inner rail fixing hole 1116.

  The panel holder 1120 of the gaming panel 1100 has a size that includes the panel plate 1110 and has a substantially rectangular outer shape, and is thicker than the panel plate 1110 (about 20 mm in this example). Panel holder 1120 is formed of a synthetic resin (for example, a thermoplastic synthetic resin). The panel holder 1120 includes a holding step 1121 that holds the panel plate 1110 in a detachable manner and is recessed from the front side toward the rear side, and is substantially the same size as the game area 5a inside the holding step 1121 in the front-rear direction. And a through-hole 1122 that penetrates through.

  The holding step 1121 of the panel holder 1120 has a depth from the front surface substantially the same as the thickness of the panel plate 1110, and the front surface of the panel plate 1110 held in the holding step 1121 is It is almost flush with the front surface. The holding step 1121 is formed such that the front inner peripheral surface thereof has a predetermined clearance with respect to the outer peripheral surface of the panel plate 1110. With this clearance, even if the panel plate 1110 expands and contracts relatively due to temperature changes and changes over time, the expansion and contraction can be absorbed.

  Further, the panel holder 1120 is disposed at a position corresponding to the fitting hole 1113 and the long hole 1114 formed in the panel plate 1110 held by the holding step portion 1121, and moves forward from the front surface of the holding step portion 1121. A plurality of protruding pins 1123 that extend and can be fitted and inserted into the fitting holes 1113 and the long holes 1114 of the panel plate 1110 are provided. By fitting and inserting these protruding pins 1123 into the fitting holes 1113 and the long holes 1114 of the panel plate 1110, the panel holder 1120 and the panel plate 1110 can be positioned relative to each other.

  Further, the panel holder 1120 includes an engaging claw 1124 and an engaging piece 1125 that engage with the engaging step portion 1115 at a position corresponding to the engaging step portion 1115 of the panel plate 1110. More specifically, the engaging claw 1124 is disposed on the upper portion of the holding step portion 1121 of the panel holder 1120, corresponds to the upper engaging step portion 1115 of the panel plate 1110, and moves forward from the front surface of the holding step portion 1121. It protrudes toward the front and is elastically engaged with the engaging step 1115. The engaging claw 1124 has a size that does not protrude from the front surface of the panel holder 1120.

  The engaging piece 1125 of the panel holder 1120 is disposed below the holding step 1121 of the panel holder 1120 and corresponds to the lower engaging step 1115 of the panel plate 1110. The engagement piece 1125 is formed on the upper side along the front surface of the panel holder 1120 in a state where a gap of a size that allows the engagement step portion 1115 of the panel plate 1110 to be inserted is formed between the engagement piece 1125 and the front surface of the holding step portion 1121. A predetermined amount extends toward the center side. By engaging the engagement step portion 1115 of the panel plate 1110 with the engagement claws 1124 and the engagement pieces 1125, the panel plate 1110 is detachably held with respect to the panel holder 1120.

  Further, the panel holder 1120 includes an out port 1126 penetrating in the front-rear direction at the lowest position in the game area 5a. In the panel holder 1120, the lower rear side of the out port 1126 has the same width as the out port 1126 and is recessed forward to the lower end.

  Further, the panel holder 1120 includes a notch 1127 that is notched upward from the lower end in the lower left corner when viewed from the front. The notch 1127 coincides with the notch 1011 of the front component member 1000, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, the notch 1011 and 1127 penetrate through the notch 1011 and 1127. The front end openings of the normal guiding path 861 and the full tank guiding path 862 face forward.

  Further, the panel holder 1120 includes a plurality of mounting holes 1128 penetrating in the front-rear direction at positions corresponding to the plurality of mounting bosses 1010 in the front component member 1000. By inserting the mounting boss 1010 of the front component member 1000 into the plurality of mounting holes 1128, the panel holder 1120 can be mounted on the rear side of the front component member 1000, and between the front component member 1000, the panel holder 1120 (game panel 1100) can be positioned.

  Further, the panel holder 1120 includes a square insertion hole 1129 penetrating in the front-rear direction above the notch 1127. The insertion hole 1129 is inserted through the rear end of the function display unit 1400.

  When the gaming panel 1100 is attached to the rear side of the front component member 1000, the out port 1126 of the panel holder 1120 is opened to the rear side of the out guide part 1003 of the front component member 1000. Thereby, the game ball that has flowed down to the lower end of the game area 5a is guided to the rear out port 1126 by the out guiding unit 1003, and is discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the out port 1126.

[5-2a. Second embodiment of game panel]
Next, a gaming panel 1150 according to an embodiment different from the gaming panel 1100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 67 is an exploded perspective view of a gaming panel having a form different from that in FIG. 63 as seen from the front together with the front component member, the substrate holder, and the main control unit. FIG. 68 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 67 viewed from behind. This game panel 1150 is formed of a wood board material such as a veneer plywood having a predetermined thickness (for example, 18 mm to 21 mm). The gaming panel 1150 is formed to have the same thickness as the panel holder 1120 of the gaming panel 1100 described above.

  The gaming panel 1150 has an outer shape that is substantially the same as the outer shape of the front component member 1000. The game panel 1150 includes an out-port 1151 that penetrates in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the out-guiding portion 1003 of the front component member 1000 at a lower portion substantially in the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. In the gaming panel 1150, the lower rear side of the out port 1151 has the same width as the out port 1151 and is recessed forward to the lower end.

  Further, the game panel 1150 penetrates horizontally in the front-rear direction on the left side when viewed from the front at the lower end and is opened downward. And a square insertion hole 1153 into which the rear end of the function display unit 1400 is inserted.

  In addition, the game panel 1150 includes a plurality of inner rails penetrating in the front and rear directions in which the positioning projections 1009 can be fitted at positions corresponding to the plurality of positioning projections 1009 projecting rearward from the inner rails 1002 of the front component member 1000. A fixing hole 1154 is provided. In addition, the game panel 1150 includes a plurality of mounting holes 1155 penetrating front and rear at positions corresponding to the plurality of mounting bosses 1010 in the front component member 1000. By inserting the mounting boss 1010 of the front component member 1000 into the plurality of mounting holes 1155, the game panel 1150 can be mounted on the rear side of the front component member 1000, and the game panel can be connected to the front component member 1000. 1150 can be positioned.

  Further, although not shown, the gaming panel 1150 is provided with a plurality of openings penetrating forward and backward for attaching the front unit 2000, similarly to the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110 in the gaming panel 1100 described above. ing.

  The gaming panel 1150 is attached to the rear side of the front component member 1000, and the out port 1151 is opened to the rear side of the out guide part 1003 of the front component member 1000. Thereby, the game ball flowing down to the lower end of the game area 5a is guided to the rear out port 1151 by the out guiding part 1003, and is discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1150 through the out port 1151.

[5-3. Substrate holder]
Next, the substrate holder 1200 will be described with reference mainly to FIGS. The substrate holder 1200 is formed in a horizontally long box shape that is open at the top and front, and is inclined so that the bottom surface becomes lower toward the center in the left-right direction. The board holder 1200 can cover the lower part of the back unit 3000 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 from the lower side in a state assembled to the game board 5. Thereby, it is possible to receive all the game balls discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the out port 1126 and the game balls discharged downward from the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000, and formed on the bottom surface. The discharged discharge part 1201 can be discharged downward.

[5-4. Main control board unit]
Next, the main control unit 1300 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. The main control unit 1300 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200. The main control unit 1300 includes a main control board 1310 for controlling game contents, game ball payout, and the like, and a main control board box 1320 that houses the main control board 1310 and is attached to the board holder 1200. .

  The main control board box 1320 includes a plurality of sealing mechanisms. When the main control board box 1320 is closed using one sealing mechanism, the sealing mechanism is then destroyed to open the main control board box 1320. The main control board box 1320 can be opened and closed. Therefore, by observing the trace of opening and closing, it is possible to discover unauthorized opening and closing of the main control board box 1320, and the deterrent against unauthorized actions on the main control board 1310 is enhanced.

  Note that the various board boxes 930, 950, 1320, 1520, and 3042 including the main control board box 1320 are all provided as transparent members so that visual confirmation from the outside is possible. Yes. That is, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the surface of the payout control board 951 in the payout control board box 950 and the main control board 1310 in the main control board box 1320 are inferior in fraud suppression performance. Since a mounting area is provided, it is important to secure such transparency in order to obtain various functions and effects related to fraud countermeasures described later.

[5-5. Function display unit]
Next, the function display unit 1400 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. As shown in the figure, the function display unit 1400 is attached to the lower left corner of the front component member 1000 outside the game area 5a. The function display unit 1400 can be viewed from the front (player side) through the through-hole 111 of the door frame 3 in a state where the game board 5 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1 (see FIG. 66). The function display unit 1400 displays a gaming state (game situation), a normal lottery result, a special lottery result, and the like using a plurality of LEDs based on a control signal from the main control board 1310.

  As shown in FIG. 66, the function display unit 1400 has a status indicator 1401 composed of one LED for displaying a gaming state, and four LEDs for displaying a normal lottery result drawn by passing a game ball with respect to the gate unit 2003. The normal symbol display 1402 made up of, the normal hold display 1408 made up of two LEDs for displaying the number of holds relating to the passage of the game ball with respect to the gate 2003, and the game ball received at the first starting port 2002 are selected by lottery. The first special symbol display 1403 composed of eight LEDs for displaying the first special lottery result, and the first special reservation composed of two LEDs for displaying the number of suspensions relating to the acceptance of the game balls to the first starting port 2002 Number indicator 1404 and eight LEDs for displaying the result of the second special lottery drawn by receiving the game ball to the second starting port 2004 A second special symbol display 1405, a second special hold number display 1406 composed of two LEDs for displaying the number of holds for receiving a game ball in the second start port 2004, and a first special lottery result or second It is mainly provided with a round indicator 1407 composed of three LEDs for displaying the number of repetitions (rounds) of the open / close pattern of the big prize opening 2005 when the special lottery result is “big hit” or the like.

  In this function display unit 1400, the number of symbols, symbols, etc. can be displayed by appropriately turning on, turning off, and blinking the LEDs provided.

[5-6. Peripheral control unit]
Next, the peripheral control unit 1500 will be described with reference to FIG. Peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear side of game board side effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of back box 3010 of back unit 3000. Peripheral control unit 1500 includes a peripheral control board 1510 that controls the presentation presented to the player based on a control signal from main control board 1310, and a peripheral control board box 1520 that houses peripheral control board 1510. ing. Although not shown, the peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control unit for controlling a light emission effect, a sound effect, a movable effect, and the like, and an effect display control unit for controlling the effect image. .

[5-7. Game board side effect display device]
Next, the game board side effect display device 1600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 61 to 62. The game board side effect display device 1600 is disposed in the center of the game area 5a in a front view, and is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 via a back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. More specifically, the game board side effect display device 1600 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the substantially center of the rear wall of the back box 3010. The game board side effect display device 1600 can be viewed from the front side (player side) through the frame of the frame-shaped center accessory 2500 in a state where the game board 5 is assembled. This game board side effect display device 1600 is a full-color liquid crystal display device using a white LED as a backlight, and can display still images and moving images.

  The game board side effect display device 1600 includes two left fixed pieces 1601 projecting outward from the left side surface in front view and a right fixed piece 1602 projecting outward from the right side surface in front view. This game board side effect display device 1600 has two fixed grooves opened on the left inner peripheral surface in front view in a frame-like liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b of a back box 3010 described later with the liquid crystal screen facing forward. 3010c, after inserting the two left fixing pieces 1601 obliquely from the back of the back box 3010, the right fixing piece 1602 side is moved forward, and the right fixing piece 1602 is inserted into the opening of the lock mechanism 3020 to lock The mechanism 3020 is attached to the back box 3010 by sliding it downward.

[5-8. Table unit]
Next, the table unit 2000 will be described with reference to FIGS. The front unit 2000 of the gaming board 5 is attached to the panel plate 1110 of the gaming panel 1100 from the front, the front end projects forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110, and the rear end penetrates the opening 1112. Projecting rearward from the rear surface of the panel plate 1110.

  The front unit 2000 of the present embodiment is capable of receiving game balls that have been struck into the game area 5a, and the plurality of general prize openings 2001 that are always open, and the plurality of general prize openings 2001 are within the game area 5a. A first start port 2002 that is always open to accept game balls at different positions, a gate portion 2003 that is attached to a predetermined position in the game area 5a and detects the passage of the game balls, and the game balls are gated The second start opening 2004 that allows game balls to be received according to the result of the normal lottery drawn by passing the section 2003, and the lottery by receiving the game balls to the first start opening 2002 or the second start opening 2004 And a special winning opening 2005 that enables the reception of game balls in accordance with the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result.

  The plurality of general winning ports 2001 are arranged at the lower part in the game area 5a. The first start port 2002 is arranged right above the out port 1126 at the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a. The gate portion 2003 is disposed substantially directly below the stop portion 1006 at the upper right in front view in the game area 5a. The second start port 2004 is disposed right below the gate portion 2003 from the front view. The big winning opening 2005 is arranged between the first start opening 2002 and the out opening 1126.

  In addition, the front unit 2000 is attached immediately above the out port 1126 at the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a, and includes a start port unit 2100 having a first start port 2002 and a prize winning port 2005, and a start port unit. A side unit 2200 that is attached along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the front view 2100 and has a plurality of general winning ports 2001, and a side unit that is attached to the upper left end of the side unit bottom 2200 in front view. The upper 2300 and a frame-shaped center accessory 2500 having a gate portion 2003 and a second starting port 2004, which are attached to the approximate center in the game area 5a.

  In the game area 5a, the start port unit 2100 is disposed immediately above the out port 1126 in the vicinity of the lower end at the center in the left-right direction, and is attached to the panel plate 1110 from the front. In the starting port unit 2100, the first starting port 2002 opens upward with a size that can receive only one game ball at a time, and the big winning port 2005 has a plurality of game balls at a time ( For example, 4 to 6 pieces) are extended to the left and right in a size that can be received, and can be opened and closed according to the gaming state.

  The lower side unit 2200 extends in an arc shape along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the start port unit 2100 in the game area 5a, and is attached to the panel plate 1110 from the front. The lower side unit 2200 has a plurality of general winning ports 2001 capable of receiving game balls at all times.

  In the gaming area 5a, the upper side unit 2300 is attached to the panel board 1110 from the front, slightly upward from the center in the vertical direction at the upper left of the lower side unit 2200 when viewed from the front. The upper side unit 2300 is attached to the front surface of the panel board 1110, and the left end of the shelf is close to the inner rail 1002, and the game ball flowing down along the inner rail 1002 is moved to the right (the game area 5a). To the center in the left-right direction).

  In the game area 5a, the center accessory 2500 is arranged above the start port unit 2100 and the lower side unit 2200, and slightly above the center of the front view, on the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. Installed. The center accessory 2500 is formed in a frame shape, and visually recognizes the effect units provided in the game board side effect display device 1600 and the rear unit 3000 disposed behind the game panel 1100 through the frame from the front. be able to. The center accessory 2500 includes a gate portion 2003 and a second start port 2004.

  The frame-shaped center accessory 2500 has the entire circumference excluding the lower side protruding forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, and the game ball that has been driven into the game area 5a is within the frame. It cannot be invaded.

  The center accessory 2500 has a warp inlet 2520 in which a game ball in the game area 5a is open so that the game ball in the game area 5a can enter, and a game ball that has entered the warp inlet 2520 can be discharged on the outer peripheral surface on the left side when viewed from the front. A warp outlet 2522 that is open, and a stage 2530 that releases the game ball released from the warp outlet 2522 in the left-right direction and then releases the game ball into the game area 5a. The start opening unit 2100 is arranged immediately below the stage 2530. When a game ball is released downward from the center of the stage 2530, the game ball is received at the first start opening 2002 with a very high probability.

[5-9. Back unit]
Next, the back unit 3000 in the game board 5 will be described with reference to FIGS. The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100. In addition, a game board side effect display device 1600 and a peripheral control unit 1500 are attached to the rear side of the back unit 3000.

  The back unit 3000 includes a back box 3010 that is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 and is open at the front and has a square opening 3010a on the rear wall, and a lower side of the opening 3010a on the rear surface of the back box 3010. And a box-shaped effect drive board box 3042 that is rotatably mounted around an axis extending in the left-right direction and accommodates the effect drive board.

  The back unit 3000 includes a back left middle decoration unit 3050 attached at the front end in the back box 3010 from the center in the vertical direction on the left side when viewed from the front, and a back side below the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. A back-under-back movable production unit 3100 attached near the rear wall of the box 3010, a back-upper left-movement production unit 3200 attached to the left side in front view above the opening 3010a in the back box 3010, and a back box The rear left movable effect unit 3300 attached to the left side of the opening 3010a in the front view in 3010, and the back top attached from the center in the left-right direction to the right end in the front view above the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. Movable effect unit 3400 and lower rear movable effect unit 3100 below opening 3010a in back box 3010 A subplantar before moving direction unit 3500 attached to the front, and a.

  The back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 has a box-like shape in which the front is open and has an opening 3010a that penetrates the rear wall squarely, and a flat frame shape that protrudes backward from the periphery of the opening 3010a. A liquid crystal attachment portion 3010b, and two fixed grooves 3010c into which the left fixed piece 1601 of the game board side effect display device 1600 is inserted outwardly from the inside of the frame on the left side in the back view of the liquid crystal attachment portion 3010b. And a notch 3010d to which the lock mechanism 3020 is attached by being notched from the rear end to the rear wall of the back box 3010 at the center in the vertical direction of the right side of the liquid crystal attaching part 3010b.

  The opening 3010a is formed to have approximately the same size as the display screen of the game board side effect display device 1600. Further, the liquid crystal attachment portion 3010b is formed in a size that allows the game board side effect display device 1600 to be fitted in the frame. The back box 3010 has a lock mechanism 3020 attached to the rear left side of the notch 3010d on the rear surface so as to be slidable up and down.

  The back box 3010 includes a flat plate-shaped fixed piece 3010e extending outward from the front end. The fixed piece 3010e is attached to the panel holder 1120 with the front surface in contact with the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 of the gaming panel 1100. The back box 3010 is formed with bosses, mounting holes, and the like at appropriate positions for mounting the movable effect units and the like.

  The back unit 3000 is appropriately used using a rear-behind movable effect unit 3100, a rear-upper left movable effect unit 3200, a rear-left movable effect unit 3300, a rear-upper movable effect unit 3400, a lower-bottom front movable effect unit 3500, and the like. It is possible to perform a light emitting effect, a movable effect, a display effect, and the like, and it is possible to entertain the player by various effects, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player in the game.

[6. Game contents]
Next, game contents by the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the game balls stored in the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320 are moved by the player rotating the handle 302 of the handle unit 300 disposed in the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 3. The game board 5 is driven into the upper portion of the game area 5a through the space between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002, and the game with the game ball is started. The game ball that has been driven into the upper part of the game area 5a flows down either the left side or the right side of the center accessory 2500 depending on the strength of the game. The strength of the game ball can be adjusted according to the amount of rotation of the handle 302. The game ball can be driven more strongly as it is rotated in the clockwise direction, and a maximum of 100 game balls per minute, that is, A game ball can be shot at intervals of 0.6 seconds.

  In the game area 5a, a plurality of obstacle nails (not shown) with a predetermined gauge arrangement at appropriate positions are implanted on the front surface of the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110). By abutting, the flow-down speed of the game ball is suppressed, and various movements are given to the game ball so that the movement can be enjoyed. Further, in the game area 5a, in addition to the obstacle nail, a windmill (not shown) that rotates when the game ball abuts is provided at an appropriate position.

  When the game ball that is thrown into the upper portion of the center accessory 2500 enters the left side of the front view of the outermost surface of the center accessory 2500 from the highest position, it abuts against a plurality of obstacle nails (not shown) The area on the left side of the center actor 2500 will flow down. Then, when a game ball flowing down the left region of the center accessory 2500 enters the warp inlet 2520 that is open to the outer peripheral surface of the center accessory 2500, the game ball is supplied from the warp outlet 2522 to the stage 2530.

  The game ball supplied to the stage 2530 rolls on the stage 2530, moves back and forth, and is released forward. When a game ball is released from the center of the stage 2530 into the game area 5a, the game ball is positioned directly above the first start port 2002, and therefore is received at the first start port 2002 with a high probability. When a game ball is received in the first starting port 2002, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 321 from the payout device 830 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. .

  When the game ball rolling on the stage 2530 is released into the game area 5a from other than the center, it flows down toward the start port unit 2100. The game ball released from the stage 2530 of the center accessory 2500 into the game area 5a may be received by the first start opening 2002 of the start opening unit 2100, the open big winning opening 2005, or the like.

  By the way, when the game ball that has flowed down to the left side of the center accessory 2500 does not enter the warp entrance 2520, it is drawn toward the center in the left-right direction by the upper side unit 2300, and the general winning opening 2001 or the first of the side unit lower 2200 There is a possibility that it will be received in the starting port 2002 or the like. When a game ball is received in the general winning opening 2001, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 321 from the payout device 830 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. .

  On the other hand, when the game ball that is driven into the upper portion of the center accessory 2500 in the game area 5a enters the right side of the highest part of the outer peripheral surface of the center accessory 2500 (so-called right hit), On the downstream side, a region where the gate portion 2003 and the second start port 2004 are provided flows down.

  When the right-handed game ball passes through the gate portion 2003, a normal lottery is performed on the main control board 1310. If the lottery normal lottery result is “normal hit”, the second start port 2004 is set for a predetermined time ( For example, it is in the open state for 0.3 to 10 seconds), and the game ball can be received at the second start port 2004. When a game ball is received at the second starting port 2004, a predetermined number (for example, four) of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 321 from the payout device 830 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. The

  In the present embodiment, in the normal lottery performed by the game ball passing through the gate unit 2003, a certain amount of time is set after the normal lottery is started until the normal lottery result is suggested (for example, 0. 0). 01-60 seconds, also called normal variation time). The suggestion of the normal lottery result is displayed on the function display unit 1400 of the game board 5. The second start port 2004 is opened after the normal fluctuation time has elapsed.

  In addition, if a game ball passes through the gate portion 2003 after the game ball passes through the gate portion 2003 and before the normal lottery result is suggested, the normal lottery result cannot be started. The start of the suggestion of the result is put on hold until the suggestion of the result of the previous normal lottery ends. In addition, the number of holdings of the normal lottery result is up to 4 and the upper limit is discarded without holding even if the game ball passes through the gate unit 2003. This suppresses an increase in the burden on the game hall side by accumulating the hold.

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when a game ball is received in the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004, the main control board 1310 has an advantageous game state (for example, “hit”, “ A lottery of a special lottery result that generates “medium hit”, “small hit”, “per probability change”, “per time reduction”, etc.) is performed. Then, the lottery result of the special lottery is indicated to the player over a predetermined time (for example, 0.1 to 360 seconds, also referred to as a special variation time). Note that the special lottery results that are drawn when the game balls are received at the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 include “losing”, “small hit”, “2R big hit”, “5R big hit”, “ 15R big hit "," perpendicular change (probability change) per "," shorter time (shorter time) per "," shorter per probability change "," short per chance at the time of probable change ", etc.

  When the special lottery result (the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result) drawn by accepting game balls to the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 is a special lottery result that generates an advantageous gaming state After the elapse of the special variation time, the special winning opening 2005 is in a state where it can accept the game ball with a predetermined opening / closing pattern. When a game ball is received in the special prize opening 2005 when the special prize opening 2005 is in the open state, a predetermined number (for example, ten or thirteen) of gaming balls from the payout device 830 by the main control board 1310 and the payout board. Is dispensed to the upper plate 321. Therefore, when the winning prize opening 2005 is capable of receiving game balls, by allowing the winning prize opening 2005 to receive game balls, a lot of gaming balls can be paid out and the player can be entertained.

  When the special lottery result is “small hit”, the big winning opening 2005 is in an open state in which a game ball can be received for a predetermined short time (for example, between 0.2 seconds and 0.6 seconds). The opening / closing pattern to be closed is repeated a plurality of times (for example, twice). On the other hand, when the special lottery result is “big hit”, a predetermined time (for example, about 30 seconds) elapses after the winning prize opening 2005 becomes open to accept game balls, or the winning prize opening 2005 When any of the conditions for accepting a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls is satisfied, an open / close pattern (a single open / close pattern is referred to as one round) that closes a game ball in an unacceptable state is predetermined. Repeats the number of times (a predetermined number of rounds). For example, an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player is generated by repeating two rounds for “2R jackpot”, five rounds for “5R jackpot”, and 15 rounds for “15R jackpot”.

  In “Big Bonus”, after the big hit game ends, the probability that a special lottery result such as “Big Bonus” will be drawn is changed (“probable hit”), or the display time of the effect image that suggests the special lottery result is changed. ("Short-time hit") or "hit".

  In the present embodiment, the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004 are received from the start of the special lottery until the special lottery result is suggested by the acceptance of the game balls. When a game ball is accepted at the second start opening 2004, the suggestion of the special lottery result cannot be started, and therefore the start of the suggestion of the special lottery result is suspended until the suggestion of the special lottery result previously drawn is completed. The The number of reserved special lottery results to be held is up to four for each of the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004, and for more than that, the first start port 2002 and the second start port Even if a game ball is accepted in 2004, the special lottery result is not put on hold and discarded. This suppresses an increase in the burden on the game hall side by accumulating the hold.

  The special lottery result is suggested by the function display unit 1400 and the game board side effect display device 1600. The function display unit 1400 is directly controlled by the main control board 1310 to suggest a special lottery result. The suggestion of the special lottery result in the function display unit 1400 suggests the special lottery result based on the combination of the LEDs that are lit, after a plurality of LEDs are repeatedly turned on / off and blinked for a predetermined time.

  On the other hand, in the game board side effect display device 1600, based on the control signal from the main control board 1310, the peripheral control board 1510 indirectly controls and the special lottery result is suggested as an effect image. The effect image suggesting the special lottery result on the game board side effect display device 1600 is displayed in a variable manner by changing each symbol sequence in a state where three symbol sequences composed of a plurality of symbols are displayed side by side in the horizontal direction. Each symbol row is stopped and displayed so that the symbols in the three symbol rows that are stopped and displayed are in a combination corresponding to the special lottery result. When the special lottery result is other than “losing”, after the three symbol sequences are stopped and each symbol is stopped and displayed, a final image suggesting the special lottery result is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600, An advantageous gaming state (for example, a small hit game, a big hit game, etc.) according to the lottery special lottery result occurs.

  It should be noted that the time indicating the special lottery result in the function display unit 1400 (LED blinking time (fluctuation time)) and the time suggesting the special lottery result in the game board side effect display device 1600 (the symbol string varies). The time until the fixed image is displayed is different, and the function display unit 1400 is set to a longer time.

  Further, in the peripheral control board 1510, in addition to the display of the effect image for suggesting the special lottery result by the game board side effect display device 1600, the effect operation unit 400 in the door frame 3 according to the lottery special lottery result. Operation buttons 410, door frame side effect display device 460, various ornaments of the center accessory 2500, various ornaments of the back unit 3000, the back bottom movable movable effect unit 3100, the back upper left movable effect unit 3200, and the back left movable effect The unit 3300, the back / upper middle movable effect unit 3400, the back / under front movable effect unit 3500, and the like can be used as appropriate to perform a light emission effect, a movable effect, a display effect, and the like. The player can be entertained, and it is possible to suppress the player's interest in games from being reduced.

[Relationship between the present embodiment and the present invention]
The door frame 3 in the present embodiment is the door unit of the present invention, the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment is the main body unit of the present invention, and the through-hole 111 of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 3 of the present embodiment is the present invention. The plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320 in the door frame 3 of the present embodiment is provided in the window portion of the present embodiment, and the operation buttons 410 of the effect operation unit 400 and the second effect operation unit 400A of the present embodiment are provided in the bulge portion of the present invention. The button lens 411 corresponds to the first decorative body of the present invention, and the first button decorative portion 411a of the button lens 411 in the present embodiment corresponds to the first decorative portion of the present invention.

  Further, the decorative member in the operation button of the base unit in the present embodiment, the main screen 471 and the sub screen 472 of the screen unit 470 in the door frame side second effect display device 460A are the second decorative body of the present invention. The second button inner decorative portion 432g of the operation button inner decorative member 432, the peripheral decorative portion 472a of the screen unit 470, the sub-screen decorative member 476, and the peripheral decorative member 478 correspond to the second decorative portion of the present invention. .

  Further, each LED and sub-screen decoration board mounted on the operation button left inner decoration board 433, the operation button right inner decoration board 434, the operation button upper inner decoration board 435, and the operation button lower inner decoration board 436 in this embodiment. LED 477a of 477 is a light emitter of the present invention, door frame side effect display device 460 in the present embodiment is a back side decoration means of the present invention, frame unit 415 in the present embodiment, unit base 431 of base unit 430, and The unit base 451 of the second base unit 450 corresponds to the base portion of the present invention.

[8. Characteristic effects of this embodiment]
Thus, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the operation of the effect operation unit 400 (or the second effect operation unit 400A) attached to the front surface of the plate unit 320 that bulges forward in the door frame 3. When the button lens 411 of the button 410 is viewed from the outside, the first button decorative portion 411a and the second button internal decorative portion 432g of the operation button internal decorative member 432 (or the screen unit 470 in the door frame side second effect display device 460A). , Such as a decoration in which the peripheral decoration part 472a, the sub-screen decoration member 476, the peripheral decoration member 478, etc.) overlap, a decoration in which the first button decoration part 411a and the door frame side effect display device 460 overlap, etc. It is possible to show the player a decoration with a sense of perspective that is full of perspective, so that it can attract the player's attention strongly. It can be a pachinko machine 1 highly appealing capable to differentiate from other pachinko machine.

  Further, the operation button internal decoration member 432 (or the door frame side second effect display device 460A (screen unit 470)), the door frame side effect display device 460, and the like are arranged in the moving direction of the button lens 411 (the operation button 410). In addition, since the button lens 411 is supported by the unit base 431 (unit base 451) so that it can be moved by the player's operation, the player operates (presses) the button lens 411 to move it. As a result, the first button decorative portion 411a and the second button internal decorative portion 432g (or the peripheral decorative portion 472a, the sub-screen decorative member 476, the peripheral decorative member 478, etc.) approach or separate from each other. First button decoration 411a and second button decoration 432g (or peripheral decoration 472a, sub The first button decorative portion 411a and the second button internal decorative portion 432g (or the peripheral decorative portion 472a, the sub-screen decorative member 476, the peripheral decorative member 478) due to the change in the distance from the clean decorative member 476, the peripheral decorative member 478, etc. , Etc.), it is possible to change the perspective of the decoration that appears to overlap, and the first button decoration part 411a and the second button decoration part 432g (or the peripheral decoration part 472a, the sub-screen decoration member 476, the peripheral decoration) The decoration (cross mode) by the member 478, etc. can be changed by the player himself, and the player can be entertained and the decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  Further, since the center of the button lens 411 is bulged outwardly on the side opposite to the operation button interior decoration member 432 (or the door frame side second effect display device 460A), Since a space is formed between the second decorative body and the player, the distance from the button lens 411 to the first button decorative portion 411a and the second button of the operation button internal decorative member 432 when viewed from the player. The distance to the inner decorative portion 432g (or the peripheral decorative portion 472a of the screen unit 470, the sub-screen decorative member 476, the peripheral decorative member 478, etc.) will vary greatly, and the button lens 411 is operated and moved. Even if the player's eyes move, the first button decoration 411a and the second button decoration 432g (or the peripheral decoration 472a, sub Clean decorative member 476, the peripheral edge decorative member 478, etc.) crossing embodiment (degree of overlap with) for changes, it is possible to show a movement decorated player can strongly attract the attention of the player.

  Further, since the first button decoration part 411a having a radial decoration toward the center is provided on the outer peripheral edge of the transparent button lens 411, the center side of the button lens 411 where the first button decoration part 411a is not provided. The operation button inner decoration member 432 (or the door frame side second effect display device 460A) and the door frame side effect display device 460 can be satisfactorily viewed through and the radial shape of the first button decoration part 411a can be seen through. The player's line of sight can be directed to the center of the button lens 411 by the decoration of the operation button, and the operation button internal decoration member 432 (or the door frame side second effect display device 460A) and the door frame are passed through the center of the transparent button lens 411. The player's interest can be strongly directed toward the side effect display device 460.

  In addition, since the operation button inner decoration member 432 includes the second button inner decoration portion 432g having a plurality of concentric polygonal decorations centered on the center, the button lens 411 is viewed from the outside. The decoration of the first button decoration 411a and the decoration of the second button decoration 432g of the operation button decoration member 432 intersect each other, and the first button decoration 411a and the second button decoration 432g The pachinko machine 1 having a high appealing power to the player by making the first button decoration portion 411a and the second button inner decoration portion 432g stand out can be surely exhibited. it can.

  Further, since the decoration of the second button interior decoration portion 432g of the operation button interior decoration member 432 has a plurality of concentric polygonal decorations centered on the center, the second button interior decoration portion 432g By decorating, the player's line of sight and interest can be directed to the door frame side effect display device 460 seen in the center of the operation button interior decoration member 432, and the decoration (effect image) of the door frame side effect display device can be enjoyed. it can.

  Furthermore, each LED (or sub-screen decoration board 477) mounted on the operation button left inner decoration board 433, the operation button right inner decoration board 434, the operation button upper inner decoration board 435, and the operation button lower inner decoration board 436 is provided. When the LED 477a) is caused to emit light, the light can decorate the operation button interior decoration member 432 (or the sub-screen decoration member 476) by the light, and the button lens 411 can also be illuminated and decorated. In addition to the decoration of the button decoration part 411a and the second button internal decoration part 432g (or the sub-screen decoration member 476), the player can be entertained by the light emission decoration. At this time, the operation button left inner decoration board 433, the operation button right inner decoration board 434, the operation button upper inner decoration board 435, and the operation button lower inner area by the second button inner decoration portion 432 g (or the sub-screen decoration member 476). Since light from each LED (or LED 477a) of the decoration board 436 can be diffused, the second button inner decoration section 432g has an operation button left inner decoration board 433, an operation button right inner decoration board 434, and an operation button upper part. While the inner decoration board 435 and the operation button lower inner decoration board 436 are illuminated and decorated by direct light from each LED (or LED 477a), the first button decoration section 411a has the second button inner decoration. The light is decorated with indirect light diffused by the portion 432g (or the sub-screen decoration member 476). The second button inner decoration portion 432g (sub-screen decoration member 476) is strongly luminescent decorated, whereas the first button decoration portion 411a is weakly luminescent decorated. In the state where each LED (or LED 477a) of the operation button right inner decoration board 434, the operation button upper inner decoration board 435, and the operation button lower inner decoration board 436 emits light, the first button decoration portion 411a and the first button decoration section 411a When the two-button inner decoration part 432g (or the sub-screen decoration member 476) is viewed, it is possible to show the player a decoration with a more emphasized perspective, and appealing power that strongly attracts the player's interest. A high pachinko machine 1 can be obtained.

  Further, since the operation button interior decoration member 432 (or the door frame side second effect display device 460A) is arranged in the moving direction of the button lens 411, the button lens 411 and the operation button interior decoration member 432 (or the door). It is not necessary to secure a space for the button lens 411 to move outside the outer periphery of the frame side second effect display device 460A), and the button lens 411 or the operation button interior decoration member 432 (or the door frame). The side second effect display device 460A) can be widened to the outside and made as large as possible, and the button lens 411 and the operation button internal decoration member 432 (or the door frame side second effect display device can be enlarged). 460A) can stand out. Further, as described above, since it is not necessary to secure a space for movement outside the button lens 411, the frame unit 415 is disposed outside the button lens 411, so that the entire pachinko machine 1 is arranged. The pachinko machine 1 with high appeal that can enhance the decorativeness, enhance the appearance, and attract the player's attention strongly can be obtained.

  In addition, since the center of the button lens 411 bulges outward, when the player hits the button lens 411 and applies an impact to a part of the surface, the button lens 411 is made flat. Compared with the case, since the applied impact force is easily dispersed throughout the button lens 411, the button lens 411 can be made difficult to break (hard to break). Therefore, the button lens 411 is broken during the game, so that the game is interrupted, and it can be avoided that the player feels frustrated and lowers the interest, and the button lens 411 is damaged. By becoming difficult, it is possible to suppress an increase in the burden on the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the door frame 3 that allows the game area 5a of the game board 5 arranged in the main body frame 4 to be visually recognized through the through-hole 111 from the front, On the unit base 431 (second base unit 450) of the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) attached to the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320 bulging forward on the side, the outer diameter is 10 cm. An operation button 410 that is movable (advancing and retreating) by a player's operation in a circular shape of about 15 cm within a range of ˜30 cm, and an operation button interior that can be visually recognized from the front through the transparent button lens 411 of the operation button 410 The member 432 and the door frame side effect display device 460 (the door frame side second effect display device 460A) and the operation button 410 are arranged in the frame. The frame-shaped frame unit 415 is attached to the effect operation unit 400 having the operation button 410 as large as possible at the position where the storage ball of the game ball is conspicuous in the conventional pachinko machine (the second Since the production operation unit 400A) is visible, the player can recognize that the player is different from the conventional pachinko machine at a glance, and the pachinko machine 1 with high appeal can be obtained. The frame unit 415 includes a frame side lens 417 having translucency, and a second button decoration having translucency on the outer edge of the operation button 410 (button lens 411) so as to be adjacent to the frame side lens 417. The operation button left outer decorative substrate 422 and the operation button right outer decorative substrate 423 are provided on the unit base 431 (second base unit 450) on the rear side of the frame side lens 417 and the second button decorative portion 411b. The first button 422a, 423a for decorating the second button decoration portion 411b and the second LED 422b, 423b for decorating the frame side lens 417 are provided, and the frame side lens 417 and the second button are provided. Inside the frame body 416 that partitions the decoration portion 411b Since the tube portion 416d, the main body portion 413a and the inner extension portion 413f of the button base 413 that partitions the second button decoration portion 411b and the center side of the button lens 411 are provided, the inner tube portion 416d and the main body portion are provided. The light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a illuminates the center side of the frame side lens 417 and the button lens 411, and the light from the second LEDs 422b and 423b illuminates the second button decoration portion 411b. Illumination can be prevented, and the adjacent frame side lens 417 and the second button decoration portion 411b can be independently decorated to emit light. Therefore, the frame side lens 417 and the second button decoration portion 411b can be clearly decorated with light emission, and a light emission effect with good appearance can be performed. Moreover, various patterns of light-emitting effects can be performed by appropriately combining the turn-off, lighting, blinking, brightness, color, and the like for the adjacent frame side lens 417 and the second button decoration unit 411b. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to get bored, to entertain the player, and to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player in the game.

  Further, the first LED 422a, 423a for decorating the second button decoration portion 411b of the operation button 410 and the second LED 422b, 423b for decorating the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 by lighting are arranged as one operation button left outer decoration. Since the operation button left outer decoration substrate 422 and the operation button right outer decoration substrate 423 are attached to the unit base 431 (second base unit 450), the second button decoration portion is provided. Compared to the case where the substrate is provided on the 411b (operation button 410), the first LED 422a, 423a can be moved away from the second button decoration portion 411b as much as possible, and the light from the first LED 422a, 423a is sufficiently The second button decoration part 411b can be irradiated in a diffused state. . Accordingly, since the second button decoration portion 411b can be uniformly decorated with light emission, the appearance of the light emission decoration of the second button decoration portion 411b and the frame side lens 417 can be improved, and the player's attention is strongly attracted. In addition, the player can be entertained, and a decrease in the interest of the player can be suppressed.

  Further, since the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423 are attached to the unit base 431 (second base unit 450), the operation button left outer decorative board 422 is moved forward and backward. And the wiring connected to the operation button right outer decorative substrate 423 is not bent or extended, and the disconnection of the wiring due to fatigue can be eliminated. Therefore, even if the operation button 410 (second button decoration portion 411b) is moved, the wiring is not disconnected. Therefore, the operation button 410 can be moved (operation), the frame side lens 417 and the second button decoration portion 411b can be operated. The player can entertain the light-emitting decoration without any problem, and the decrease in the player's interest can be suppressed.

  Further, since the second button decoration portion 411b is provided on the outer edge of the transparent button lens 411 of the operation button 410, the operation button inner decoration member 432 and the door frame side effect display device 460 on the rear side through the transparent button lens 411 are provided. When the (door frame side second effect display device 460A) is viewed, the outer edge of the operation button internal decoration member 432 and the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) is attached to the second button decoration part 411b. Is in a decorated state, and the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved. Then, the first LED 422a, 423a and the second LED 422b, 423b emit light appropriately so that the operation button inner decoration member 432 and the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) can be seen behind. Since the second button decoration portion 411b and the frame side lens 417 decorating the outer edge of the button lens 411 can be illuminated with various patterns as described above, the player's interest is controlled by the operation buttons 410 and The door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) can be strongly attracted, and the light emission effect, operation of the operation button 410, and door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second display device 460A). It is possible to entertain an effect image or the like by the effect display device 460A) and suppress a decrease in interest.

  In addition, since the player can operate the button lens 411 (operation button 410) provided with the second button decoration portion 411b on the outer edge, the operation button 410 can be displayed to the player during execution of the player participation type effect. By making it operate, it is possible to entertain the player to operate the operation button 410 (player participation type effect), and to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player in the game. When the player participation type effect is executed, the player's interest can be attracted to the operation button 410 by lighting the second button decoration portion 411b of the operation button 410 or the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415. Therefore, it is possible to prompt the player to operate the operation button 410 and to entertain the player by participating in the player participation type effect.

  Further, since the second button decoration portion 411b of the operation button 410 is provided with a light-transmitting main body portion 413a and an inner extension portion 413f that can be decorated with the first LEDs 422a and 423a, the second button decoration portion 411f of the operation button 410 is provided. A portion closer to the center than the button decoration portion 411b is not illuminated (illuminated) by the first LEDs 422a and 423a, and the operation button 410 (button lens 411) is arranged at the rear side by becoming brighter. It is possible to prevent the operation button inner decoration member 432 and the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) from being difficult to see from the front. Accordingly, the second button decoration portion 411b can be decorated with light emission in a good state, and the operation button inner decoration member 432 and the door frame side effect display device 460 (the door frame side second effect are provided) through the transparent button lens 411. The display device 460 </ b> A) can be visually recognized in a good state, and the player can sufficiently enjoy decorations, light-emitting effects, and the like, and can suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

  Further, since the inner cylindrical portion 416d extends from the rear side of the frame unit 415 including the frame side lens 417, the second button decoration of the frame side lens 417 and the operation button 410 is provided on the rear side of the frame unit 415. The portion 411b can be completely partitioned by the inner cylindrical portion 416d. On the other hand, light from the first LED 422a, 423a and the second LED 422b, 423b is received at the end (rear end) on the side close to the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423 in the inner cylinder portion 416d. Since the rear end of the inner cylindrical portion 416d from the diffusion range is located closer to the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423, the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer Even if a gap is formed between the front surface of the decorative substrate 423, the light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a illuminates the frame side lens 417, or the light from the second LED 422b 423b illuminates the second button decorative portion 411b. Never do. Therefore, light can be reliably blocked by the inner cylindrical portion 416d, and the pachinko machine 1 that reliably achieves the above-described effects can be realized.

  In addition, since the main body 413a and the inner extension 413f of the button base 413 extend from the rear side of the operation button 410 (button lens 411), the second button decoration portion 411b is provided on the rear side of the operation button 410. And the center side of the button lens 411 can be completely partitioned by the main body 413a and the inner extension 413f. On the other hand, the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423 at the end (rear end) on the side close to the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423 in the main body 413a. The light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a does not go through the rear end of the main body 413a, and completely prevents the light from entering the center side of the button lens 411 of the operation button 410. Can do. Therefore, the first LED 422a and 423a can be used to decorate the second button decoration portion 411b in a favorable state, and the rear operation button interior decoration member 432 and the door frame side effect display device 460 (through the transparent button lens 411). The door frame side second effect display device 460A) can be visually recognized in a good state, and the player can sufficiently enjoy the decoration, the light emission effect, and the like, and can suppress a decrease in the interest in the game.

  Further, when viewed from the front, the second button decoration is located in front of the outer portion of the operation button inner decoration member 432 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) disposed behind the operation button 410 (button lens 411). Since the portion 411b is positioned, the operation button internal decoration member 432 (door frame side second) is formed from the gap between the button lens 411 and the operation button internal decoration member 432 (door frame side second effect display device 460A). The members on the outside of the effect display device 460A) and the rear side (back side) can be made difficult to see by the second button decoration portion 411b, and the appearance of the operation buttons 410 can be prevented from deteriorating. At this time, if the second button decoration portion 411b is illuminated with the first LEDs 422a and 423a, the operation button internal decoration member 432 (the door frame side second effect is produced with respect to the brightness of the second button decoration portion 411b. Since the outer side and the rear side of the display device 460A) are relatively dark, it is possible to make the members on the outer side and the rear side of the operation button inner decoration member 432 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) difficult to see. Accordingly, the appearance of the operation button 410, the frame unit 415, the operation button internal decoration member 432, the door frame side effect display device 460 (the door frame side second effect display device 460A), and the like can be further improved. A decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  Further, since the outer peripheral shape of the operation button 410 is circular, the second button decoration portion 411b provided on the outer edge of the operation button 410 (button lens 411) and the frame adjacent to the second button decoration portion 411b. The side lens 417 has a form extending in an arc shape. Accordingly, by appropriately emitting light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a and the second LEDs 422b and 423b, a light-emitting effect in which light rotates around the outer edge of the operation button 410, or light emission in which light spreads from the inside to the outside of the operation button 410. Since the player can show the player a light-emitting effect that the light converges from the outside to the inside of the operation button 410, etc., the player can get tired of the player by various light-emitting effects. It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the upper plate 321 used for the game is obtained by placing the game balls stored in the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320 in the door frame 3 into the game area 5a. At the same time, the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) is detachably attached to the front side and the lower side of the upper plate 321, and a predetermined installation space is provided behind the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A). The remaining space of 326j is formed, and a portion corresponding to the lower plate first area A1 in the lower plate body 325 is disposed on the left side of the remaining space of the mounting space 326j, and the remaining space of the mounting space 326j from the portion. A portion corresponding to the lower plate second area A2 in the lower plate main body 325 is extended inside, and a lower plate 322 capable of storing game balls is attached. Therefore, when viewed from the front, the lower plate 322 looks small, the lower plate 322 can be made inconspicuous, and the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) can be made relatively easy to stand out. . Therefore, when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the front, the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) can be seen at a position where the upper plate and the lower plate were seen side by side in the conventional pachinko machine. The pachinko machine 1 having a high appeal that can make the player recognize that it is different from the conventional pachinko machine at first glance and can attract the player's interest strongly. it can.

  In addition, at the part of the lower dish second region A2 in the lower dish main body 325 of the lower dish 322, it extends upward from the upper end of the main body standing wall portion 325b extending upward from the outer periphery, and extends to the remaining space side of the mounting space 326j. Since the lower plate covers 340 and 340A for restricting the movement of the game ball are provided, the game ball in the lower plate 322 is prevented from coming into contact with the rear side of the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A). The game balls supplied in the lower plate 322 and the game balls stored in the lower plate 322 abut or press against the rear side of the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A). Can be prevented. Therefore, the game ball does not contact the rear side of the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A), and the rear side of the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) is not damaged by the game ball. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game from being interrupted due to breakage of the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A), and to reduce the interest of the player, and the pachinko machine 1 is installed. An increase in the burden on the game hall side can be suppressed.

  Also, lower plate covers 340 and 340A that restrict the movement of the game ball to the remaining space side of the main body standing wall 325b and the mounting space 326j in the lower plate second region A2 of the lower plate main body 325 of the lower plate 322. Therefore, the game ball can be prevented from entering (spilling) from the lower plate body 325 into the remaining space of the mounting space 326j. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling injured or uncomfortable by intruding the game ball into the remaining space of the attachment space 326j. Can be suppressed.

  In addition, since the lower plate cover 340, 340A covers the lower plate second region A2 of the lower plate main body 325 in the lower plate 322, the game ball supplied into the lower plate 322 splashes in the lower plate 322. Even if it jumps up, it can be reliably prevented from entering the remaining space side of the mounting space 326j, and the above-described operational effects can be reliably achieved. Further, since the lower plate cover 340, 340A covers the lower plate second region A2 of the lower plate main body 325, the player can use the lower plate first region A1 side (lower plate opening portion of the lower plate main body 325). 326d), when the hand is put into the portion of the lower plate second area A2, the lower plate covers 340, 340A can prevent the fingertips or the like from entering the remaining space side of the mounting space 326j. Can prevent the player from being injured by touching the lower surface of the upper plate 321, the rear side of the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A), etc., and allowing the player to play in a safe state. Can do.

  Further, since there is a gap between the lower plate cover 340, 340A and the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A), the impact, pressure, etc. due to the contact of the game ball with the lower plate cover 340, 340A Is not transmitted from the lower plate covers 340 and 340A to the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A), and the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) is surely damaged. Can be prevented.

  In addition, since the lower dish ball hole 322a is provided in front of the lower dish ball supply port 323c in the lower dish second region A2 of the lower dish body 325 of the lower dish 322, the lower dish ball hole 322a is opened. In this state, the game ball released from the lower tray ball supply port 323c can be directly entered into the lower tray ball removal hole 322a and discharged downward (dollar box). It is possible to make it difficult to reach the front end side of the standing wall portion 325b. Even if the game ball jumps over the lower tray ball removal hole 322a, since the lower plate cover 340, 340A is provided as described above, the game ball of the rendering operation unit 400 (second rendering operation unit 400A) is provided. Since it can be prevented from coming into contact with the rear side, the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) can be prevented from being damaged, and the interruption of the game can be reduced to reduce the interest of the player in the game. Can be suppressed.

  In addition, since the bottom wall portion 325a of the lower plate main body 325 near the front end of the lower plate 322 becomes higher toward the front, the game ball toward the front end side of the main body standing wall portion 325b of the lower plate main body 325 is inclined. It will climb the bottom, and the moving speed of the game ball can be attenuated. Therefore, since the speed of the game ball contacting the lower tray cover 340, 340A can be reduced, the lower tray cover 340, 340A reliably restricts the movement of the game ball to the remaining space side of the mounting space 326j. In addition, it is possible to reduce the impact when the game ball comes into contact with the lower plate covers 340, 340A and the main body standing wall 325b, and to prevent them from being damaged.

  Further, since at least the lower plate cover 340, 340A is a separate member, when the lower plate cover 340, 340A is damaged, it can be easily repaired by simply replacing the lower plate cover 340, 340A. The increase in the burden on the side of the game hall in which 1 is installed can be reduced.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the center in the left-right direction on the front is swelled forward most below the game area 5a of the game board 5 where a game ball is received in the general prize opening 2001 or the like. The tray unit cover 326 of the tray unit 320 that has been taken out is provided with the stage operation unit 400 and the second stage operation unit 400 </ b> A detachably attached to the most bulging portion of the tray unit 320, and the upper plate 321 is attached to the dish unit cover 326. And a lower tray 322 that can store a game ball and can be stored in the storage tray (upper plate 321 and lower plate 322) outside the rendering operation unit 400 (second rendering operation unit 400A) in a front view. Lower space of the lower plate first area A1 and the space behind the installation space 326j that is behind the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) in front view. The second stage operation area 400 (second stage operation unit 400A) can be made conspicuous when viewed from the front, and the storage dish (upper dish 321). And the lower plate 322) can be made small to make it less noticeable. Therefore, since the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) that is conspicuous can be seen in the portion where the upper plate and the lower plate were seen in the conventional pachinko machine, the game machine different from the conventional pachinko machine to the player Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 having high appealing power capable of attracting the player's interest strongly can be obtained.

  In addition, since the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) is attached to the center of the front surface of the plate unit cover 326 in the left-right direction, a portion of the surface of the plate unit cover 326 where the lower plate 322 is open is provided. The first lower pan body 325 having a lower pan second region A2 located in the rear space of the attachment space 326j that is behind the rendering operation unit 400 (second rendering operation unit 400A) in front view is smaller. Since the expansion unit 325B, the second expansion unit 325C, and the lower plate covers 340 and 340A are provided, it is possible to store the game balls in a range (the lower plate second region A2) that cannot be seen from the front in the lower plate 322. it can. Therefore, a sufficient amount of game balls can be secured against the appearance from the front, so that the player can concentrate on the game without worrying about the remaining amount of game balls in the lower plate 322. It is possible to entertain the game and suppress the decrease in interest.

  Further, the lower plate body 325 and the main body 325A having the lower plate first area A1, the lower plate covers 340 and 340A having the lower plate second area A2, the first extension part 325B and the second extension. Since the lower plate 322 is configured by attaching (combining) the portion 325C, a plurality of lower plate covers 340 and 340A having different sizes, the first extension portion 325B, the second extension portion 325C, and the like are prepared in advance. By attaching the lower plate covers 340 and 340A, the first extension unit 325B, and the second extension unit 325C having a size corresponding to the concept of the pachinko machine 1, the size of the installation space 326j in the plate unit cover 326, etc. The volume of the dish 322 can be optimized. In addition, as described above, the lower plate covers 340, 340A, the first extension part 325B, and the second extension part 325C can be rearranged (replaced), so that the rear space of the attachment space 326j can be accommodated. Since the width of the rear space depends on the rearward projecting amount of the rendering operation unit 400 (second rendering operation unit 400A), various rendering operation units 400 (second It can be set as the lower plate 322 which can respond to production operation unit 400A), and the versatility of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved.

  Further, since the lower plate 322 is provided with a bottom wall portion 325a and a main body standing wall portion 325b that rises from the outer peripheral end of the bottom wall portion 325a, the lower plate 322 becomes a container shape that is depressed downward, and a game ball Can be reliably stored. In addition, since the lower plate covers 340 and 340A have the cover standing wall portion 340a rising from the upper end of the main body standing wall portion 325b of the lower plate main body 325, the lower plate covers 340 and 340A having various shapes are prepared in advance. In addition, by combining (attaching) the lower plate covers 340 and 340A having shapes corresponding to the concept of the pachinko machine 1 and the size (shape) of the rear space of the attachment space 326j, it is possible to cope with various forms. It is possible to achieve the same effects as described above.

  In the lower plate 322 constituted by the lower plate main body 325 and the lower plate cover 340, 340A, the lower plate cover 340, 340A is combined (attached) to the upper end of the main body standing wall portion 325b of the lower plate main body 325. Therefore, the part on which the game ball is placed in the lower plate 322 is the lower plate body 325, and therefore, the portion where the load of more game balls is applied due to the storage, the lower plate body 325 and the lower plate covers 340, 340A The boundary (joint, dividing line PL) is never located. Therefore, since the load of the stored game balls is received only by the lower plate body 325, a force that separates the lower plate covers 340 and 340A from the lower plate body 325 even if many game balls are stored. It does not act, and it is possible to prevent the lower plate covers 340 and 340A from being detached from the lower plate body 325.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the upper plate that can store the game balls below and in front of the game area 5a of the game board 5 in which the game is received such that the game balls are received in the general winning opening 2001 or the like. 321 and a lower plate 322, and a lower plate ball supply port 323c and a lower plate ball hole 322a in the lower plate 322 by a production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) arranged at the center in the left-right direction. Since more than half of the lower plate 322 including the front plate is difficult to see from the front (player), the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be made clean and improved in appearance. Can be made a pachinko machine 1 having a high appealing power. In addition, since it is difficult to visually recognize the game ball heading from the lower tray ball supply port 323c to the lower tray ball removal hole 322a by the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A), a game in the lower plate 322 is made to the player. This makes it difficult to notice the flow of the sphere and can prevent distraction, and can suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

  In addition, the lower tray ball supply port 323c and the lower plate on the bottom surface of the lower plate 322 for guiding the game ball from the lower plate ball supply port 323c to the lower plate ball release hole 322a by the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A). Since it is difficult to see the game ball guided by the guiding means such as the ball guiding hole 322a, the ball guiding part 322c and the buffering part 322d, the lower dish ball hole 322a remains open. The game balls supplied from the lower tray ball supply port 323c to the lower tray 322 are guided by the guiding means and discharged smoothly (immediately) downward from the lower tray ball removal hole 322a. It is possible to make an illusion that the game ball is discharged below the lower plate 322 (dollar box) without passing through the lower plate 322. This makes it difficult for the player to feel the annoyance of the game ball passing through the lower plate 322, and makes it possible for the player to concentrate on the game and to suppress a decrease in interest.

  Furthermore, since the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) makes it difficult to see more than half of the lower plate 322 including the lower plate ball supply port 323c and the lower plate ball removal hole 322a from the front, it is probable. In addition, the lower dish ball supply port 323c, the lower dish ball removal hole 322a, and the like are located behind the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A). In other words, since more than half of the lower plate 322 is circulated to the rear of the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A), the actual lower plate with respect to the size of the lower plate 322 seen from the front. Since the size (capacity) of 322 is large, it is possible to secure a sufficient amount of game balls to be stored in the lower plate 322 compared to the appearance.

  Further, in the state where the lower dish ball removal hole 322a is opened, the game balls released from the lower dish ball supply port 323c into the lower dish 322 are transferred to the lower dish ball supply port 323c and the lower dish ball on the bottom surface of the lower dish 322. Since it can be smoothly guided to the lower dish ball extraction hole 322a by the guiding means such as the part between the extraction hole 322a, the ball guiding part 322c and the buffering part 322d, and discharged to the lower part (dollar box) of the lower dish 322. Thus, it is possible to prevent the game ball from flowing so as to go around in the lower plate 322, and the game ball flowing through the lower plate 322 can be surely made difficult to visually recognize from the front (player). Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice the flow of the game ball in the lower plate 322, and to prevent the player from being distracted and to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

  Further, if the lower dish ball removal hole 322a is left open, the game balls supplied from the lower dish ball supply port 323c to the lower dish 322 are immediately noticed by the ball guiding unit 322c and the like without being noticed by the player. Since it can be discharged downward from the lower tray ball removal hole 322a, the player is given an illusion that the game ball is discharged below the lower tray 322 (dollar box) without passing through the lower tray 322. Can do. This makes it difficult for the player to feel the annoyance of the game ball passing through the lower plate 322, and makes it possible for the player to concentrate on the game and to suppress a decrease in interest.

  In addition, since the rendering operation unit 400 (second rendering operation unit 400A) makes it difficult to view more than half of the storage area (storage area) of the game ball in the plan view of the lower dish 322 from the front, the lower dish visible from the front Since the actual lower plate 322 is more than double the size of the size that can be seen with respect to the size of 322, a sufficient amount of game balls can be secured in the same manner as the lower plate of a conventional pachinko machine.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the door frame 3 bulges forward under the front view of the game area 5a of the game board 5 in which a game is received such that the game ball is received in the general winning opening 2001 or the like. A production operation unit for attaching a large production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) having the same height as the overall height of the plate unit cover 326 at the center in the left-right direction of the front surface of the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320 And a dish front lower decoration portion 326c below the center in the vertical direction on both the left and right sides of the production operation unit mounting portion 326a on the front surface of the dish unit cover 326. Due to the shape, the rendering operation unit 400 (second rendering operation unit 400A) attached to the rendering operation unit mounting portion 326a. But it can be able to show as to protrude greatly forward to stand out staging operation unit 400 (second staging operation unit 400A). Therefore, since the large-sized production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) is seen in an emphasized state at the position where the upper plate and the lower plate were seen side by side in the conventional pachinko machine, On the other hand, it can be recognized that it is different from the conventional pachinko machine at a glance, and the pachinko machine 1 having high appealing power can be obtained. Then, the lower dish 322 is recessed backward from the dish front lower decoration part 326c that is recessed rearward on the left and right outer sides of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) on the front surface of the dish unit cover 326. A portion of the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) is circulated to the rear, and the amount of game balls stored in the lower plate 322 (the volume of the lower plate 322) can be sufficiently secured. It is not necessary to play while worrying that the lower plate 322 is filled with game balls, the player can be dedicated to the game, the game can be enjoyed, and the decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  In addition, since a part of the lower plate 322 wraps around the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A), when the player puts his hand into the lower plate 322 from the front, the fingertip is placed on the lower plate. It is possible to make it difficult to touch the rear wall of 322 (the front surface of the dish unit base 323), the lower dish cover 340, and the like. This allows the player to recognize that a sufficient amount of game balls has been secured even by tactile sense, and in the state where the game balls are stored in the lower plate 322, Since it is possible to recognize that a large number of game balls are stored, it is possible to give a sense of satisfaction to the player, to entertain the game, and to suppress a decrease in interest. In addition, since the fingertip of the hand placed in the lower plate 322 is difficult to touch the rear wall of the lower plate 322, the lower plate cover 340, etc., the player is given the same feeling as the lower plate in the conventional pachinko machine. Therefore, it is possible to reduce a sense of incongruity for a player who has become accustomed to a conventional pachinko machine, and to make the player feel at ease and to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

  Furthermore, since the lower plate 322 is formed so as to become wider toward the back side (backward), a sufficient amount of game balls can be secured even when the front side is small. In other words, since the part of the front end side of the lower plate 322 is made smaller, the lower plate 322 is made inconspicuous on the front surface (the front plate lower decorative portion 326c) of the plate unit cover 326 where the lower plate 322 is open. In comparison, the rendering operation unit 400 (second rendering operation unit 400A) can be made more conspicuous. Therefore, the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) can be provided while sufficiently securing the amount of game balls stored in the lower plate 322, and the appealing power to the player can be enhanced. You can entertain and suppress the decline of interest.

  Moreover, since the side and upper part of the portion of the lower plate 322 that wraps around the rear of the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) are covered with the lower plate cover 340, the player is placed in the lower plate 322. It is possible to prevent the fingertips from touching the inner surface of the plate unit cover 326 or the rear surface of the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) when the hand is put in, and to injure the player. You can play in a safe state. Further, the lower tray cover 340 can prevent the game ball from entering (spilling) from the lower tray 322 into the tray unit cover 326.

  Furthermore, since the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) is arranged at the center in the left-right direction on the front surface of the dish unit cover 326, the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) is placed from the player side. The pachinko machine 1 can be made more conspicuous and can attract the player's interests, and the appealing power of the pachinko machine 1 can be enhanced, and the decoration by the stage operation unit 400 (second stage operation unit 400A) is easily visible. Then, the decoration and production of the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) can be enjoyed to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player.

  Further, since the lower plate 322 is provided with a lower plate ball supply port 323c that can communicate with the upper plate 321, and a lower plate ball hole 322a that is vertically opened and closed, the conventional pachinko machine is provided. Because the player has the same function as the lower plate in the game, the player who is used to the conventional pachinko machine will not be confused with the function of the lower plate 322 when playing with the pachinko machine 1, and it will be the same as in the past. It is possible to play the game with a simple feeling, and to entertain the player by dedicating the player to the game. Further, since the lower dish ball supply port 323c and the lower dish ball removal hole 322a are respectively arranged behind the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A), when viewed from the front, the lower plate ball supply port 323c and The lower dish ball opening hole 322a is not visible from the player side, can improve the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 by making the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 clear, and can attract the player's attention strongly. Machine 1 can be used.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the dish unit 320 bulging forward under the through-hole 111 of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 facing the game area 5a in the door frame 3. The door frame side effect display device 460 capable of presenting effects to the player on the base unit 430 (second base unit 450) of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) attached to the plate unit cover 326 of the player. The operation button inner decoration member 432 (screen unit 470 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A) is attached and the outer operation button inner decoration member 432 (screen unit 470) is surrounded so as to surround the outer periphery. The diameter is about 15cm and the center is away from the base unit 430 (second base unit 450) (outward) An operation button 410 having a transparent button lens 411 is attached, and the button lens 411 is provided with a first button decoration portion 411a, a second button decoration portion 411b, and a button frame 412 on the outer periphery of the button lens 411. Since the cylindrical button base 413 protruding from the 411 side to the base unit 430 (second base unit 450) side is provided, the button lens 411 and the operation button interior decoration are provided by the first button decoration portion 411a, the button base 413, and the like. It is possible to reduce the appearance of the outer edge, the rear side (rear side), and the like of the operation button inner decoration member 432 (the screen unit 470 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A) from the gap between the member 432 (the screen unit 470). And the appearance of the operation button 410 can be improved. Therefore, the appearance of the operation button 410, the operation button internal decoration member 432 provided inside, the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A), and the like can be further improved, and the player's appearance can be improved. A decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  Further, the first button decoration portion 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b, the button frame 412, and the button base 413 in the operation button 410 are separated from the gap between the button lens 411 and the operation button internal decoration member 432 (screen unit 470). Since it is possible to make it difficult to see the outer edge and the back side of the operation button inner decoration member 432 (screen unit 470), the outer diameter of the operation button 410 is increased to increase the button lens 411 and the operation button inner decoration member 432 (screen unit). 470), even if the gap between them is relatively large, the first button decoration portion 411a and the like can be favorably concealed, so that a large operation button having an outer diameter of about 15 cm can be prevented while preventing the appearance from deteriorating. 410 (button lens 411) can be embodied without problems. Therefore, since the operation button 410 and the door frame side effect display device 460 (the door frame side second effect display device 460A) can be enlarged, the pachinko machine 1 can be made conspicuous, and the player is strongly interested. The pachinko machine 1 with high appeal can be attracted.

  Furthermore, since the button base 413 (main body part 413a) protruding in a cylindrical shape from the button lens 411 side to the base unit 430 (second base unit 450) side is provided, the button lens 411 and the operation button interior decoration member 432 ( When the gap between the screen units 470) is viewed from an oblique direction, the inner wall of the button base 413 can block the objects outside the operation button interior decoration member 432 (screen unit 470) from being visible. The appearance of the button 410 can be further improved.

  Further, since the transparent button lens 411 has a three-dimensional shape (hemispherical shape) bulging in a direction (outward) away from the base unit 430 (second base unit 450), the button lens 411 is located near the outer periphery of the button lens 411. The surface is a plane formed by the opening on the front end side of the button base 413 (a plane orthogonal to the direction in which the base unit 430 (second base unit 450) and the button lens 411 are arranged, that is, the forward / backward direction of the operation button 410 Therefore, the light is easily refracted when viewed from the player side. Accordingly, the first button decoration part 411a, the second button decoration part 411b, and the button frame 412 and the button base 413 provided on the outer peripheral edge are combined to form the button lens 411 and the operation button decoration member 432 (screen unit 470). ), The outer edge and the back side of the operation button inner decoration member 432 (screen unit 470) can be made difficult to see, and the above-described operational effects can be reliably achieved.

  In addition, since the button lens 411 is formed in a three-dimensional shape that bulges outward, the volume inside the operation button 410 increases, so that the operation button internal decoration member 432 and the door frame arranged in the operation button 410 The side effect display device 460 (the door frame side second effect display device 460A) can be made larger or movable, and the door frame side effect display device that can entertain the player through the operation buttons 410. 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) can be easily provided, and the pachinko machine 1 that can make the player more entertaining can be realized.

  Further, since the button lens 411 is formed in a three-dimensional shape, design (decoration) is imparted to the operation button 410. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1, the operation button 410 is made conspicuous and the player is interested. The pachinko machine 1 can be easily selected as a pachinko machine to be played.

  In the first button decoration part 411a, the second button decoration part 411b, and the button frame 412 provided on the outer periphery of the button lens 411, the button frame 412 is opaque. It is possible to reliably hide the back side of the operation button 410, the operation button interior decoration member 432 (screen unit 470), etc. from the gap between the lens 411 and the operation button interior decoration member 432 (screen unit 470). It is possible to improve the appearance by reducing the deterioration of the appearance of the button 410 and the like.

  Further, the button lens 411 is provided with an opaque button frame 412 with a predetermined width inward from the outer peripheral end of the button lens 411, and in cooperation with the first button decoration part 411a and the second button decoration part 411b, Since the gap between the main body part 413a of the button base 413 and the operation button internal decoration member 432 (screen unit 470) in the operation button 410 can be made difficult to see from the side, the main body part 413a and the operation button internal decoration member 432 ( The space between the screen unit 470) and the screen unit 470) can be increased, and accordingly, a space for moving the operation button 410 and the screen unit 470 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A can be easily secured. Can be moved well.

  Furthermore, since the outer periphery of the button lens 411 is cylindrical, the operation button 410 can be easily moved smoothly because the outer periphery has no directivity compared to the polygonal shape. Therefore, even if the size of the operation button 410 is increased, it is possible to perform a pressing operation without any problem, and it is possible to surely entertain the player participation type effect using the operation button 410 and to suppress a decrease in interest.

  Further, since the operation button 410 is enlarged, it is easy to operate without confirming the position of the operation button 410 when performing a player participation type effect that causes the player to operate the operation button 410. Since it is possible to make the player easily touch the operation button 410 to perform a pressing operation, it is possible to make it easier for the player to participate in the player participation type effect using the operation button 410, and to entertain the player and reduce the interest. Can be suppressed.

  Further, since the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) is provided in the operation button 410, the player's interest is manipulated by presenting the effect image according to the gaming state. The door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) in the button 410 can be strongly attracted, and the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) is used. It is possible to entertain an effect, and it is possible to prompt the player to operate the operation button 410 by an effect image, a light emission effect, or the like by the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A). It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest by actively engaging the player in the player participation type production. In addition, by performing the production within the operation button 410, it can be thought that there is something good depending on the player, and the expectation for the game is raised and the decrease in the interest is suppressed. Can do.

  Further, the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) can be visually recognized through the transparent button lens 411 of the large operation button 410 (portion inside the first button decoration portion 411a). Therefore, the player can immediately recognize that the operation button 410 of the pachinko machine 1 is clearly different from the operation button of the conventional pachinko machine, and has high appeal to the player. The pachinko machine 1 can be used, and the player's operation button 410 and the door frame side effect display device 460 (the door frame side second effect display device 460A) in the operation button 410 are enhanced. And a decrease in the interest of the player can be suppressed.

  The present invention has been described with reference to preferred embodiments. However, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and various modifications can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention as described below. And design changes are possible.

  That is, in the above embodiment, the game machine applied to the pachinko machine 1 is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a pachislot machine, or a game machine in which a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine are combined, Even in this case, the same effect as described above can be obtained.

  In the above embodiment, the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 has the first button decoration portion 411a formed on the inner peripheral side of the button frame 412. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The button lens 411 in which the first button decoration portion 411a is not formed may be used.

  In the above embodiment, the operation button 410 has the opaque button frame 412 attached to the outer periphery of the button lens 411. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the button frame 412 is not attached and the button button 412 is not attached. You may make it form the decoration part for concealing a rear side over the perimeter in the site | part corresponding to the button frame 412 in the lens 411. FIG.

  Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, the base unit 430 (the first unit) is arranged so that the operation button 410 surrounds the entire outer periphery of the operation button inner decoration member 432 and the door frame side second effect display device 460A from the outer periphery of the button lens 411. Although the one provided with the button base 413 (main body portion 413a) protruding in a cylindrical shape toward the second base unit 450) side is shown, the present invention is not limited to this, and the operation button internal decoration member 432 and the door frame side second effect are provided. At least one base unit 430 (second base unit 450) may be protruded so as to surround only part of the entire outer periphery of the display device 460A. The shape of the button base 413 may be a shape along the outer periphery of the button lens 411 or a shape not along the outer periphery of the button lens 411. The button base 413 may have a decoration (a flat decoration by sticking or printing a sticker or a three-dimensional decoration by unevenness such as a relief) on at least the inner wall side. Further, the button base 413 may be translucent or non-translucent. The button base 413 may be colored or colorless and transparent. In addition, when the button base 413 is transparent, it is desirable to perform light diffusion processing such as a texture, a slit, and a prism on at least one of the inner wall side and the outer wall side.

  In the above-described embodiment, the lower plate 322 is shown as an example in which the lower plate 322 is recessed backward only from the left outer portion of the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) on the front surface of the plate unit cover 326. It is not limited to this, but a lower dish that is recessed backward from the left and right sides of the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) and is connected to each other behind the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A). 322, or only recessed from the right outer portion of the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A), and a part of the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) wraps behind. You may make it.

  Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, the shape (the shape of the front end of the lower plate 322) where the lower plate 322 is recessed backward on the front surface of the plate unit cover 326 (the shape of the front end of the lower plate 322) is curved backward. Although the example which was dented in the shape was shown, it is not limited to this, It is good also as a front surface dented in polygonal column surface shape or polyhedron shape.

  In the above-described embodiment, an example in which the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) is attached to the front surface of the dish unit cover 326 is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this. Equipped with an operation device "," equipped with a rotating body with decoration on the surface "," equipped with a decoration with decoration and a movable device for moving the decoration "," game " Characters, items, logos, and decorative bodies that three-dimensionally represent scenes (diorama), etc. according to the machine concept "," Characters, items, logos, and predetermined patterns according to the gaming machine concept , Etc., which are decorated by stickers, printing, or the like ", or a member such as a panel or a panel provided with the above may be attached. Further, the number of members attached to the attachment space 326j (the production operation unit attachment portion 326a) is not necessarily one, and a plurality (two or more) members may be attached. For example, separate members such as a member attached to the upper half of the attachment space 326j and a member attached to the lower half of the attachment space 326j may be attached.

  In the above embodiment, the pan unit cover 326 is formed with the rendering operation unit mounting portion 326a that opens forward to mount the rendering operation unit 400 (second rendering operation unit 400A). The plate unit cover (for example, a panel-like cover portion) does not have an opening (effect operation unit mounting portion 326a) for mounting the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A). A space corresponding to the attachment space 326j (or the remaining space of the attachment space 326j) may be formed behind the dish unit cover. In addition, it is desirable to apply decorations such as characters, items, logos, predetermined patterns, etc. in accordance with the concept of the gaming machine on the front surface of such dish unit covers by stickers, printing, attaching decorative members, etc. .

  Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, an area slightly larger than half of the storage area (reserved area) of the game ball in the plan view of the lower plate 322 is provided by the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) as a covering portion. Although an example in which it is difficult to visually recognize from the front is shown, the present invention is not limited to this, and an area less than half of the storage area of the game balls in the lower plate 322 may be difficult to visually recognize from the front. You may make it difficult to visually recognize the whole plate 322 from the front.

  In the above-described embodiment, the second button decoration portion 411b of the operation button 410 and the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 are shown in an arc shape partially provided in the circumferential direction. The second button decoration portion 411b and the frame side lens 417 may be in an annular shape extending over the entire circumference.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the decoration having a plurality of concentric polygons centered on the center is shown as the second button decoration element 432g of the operation button decoration member 432 in the effect operation unit 400. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the second button interior decoration portion 432g may be a decoration having a plurality of concentric circles (including an ellipse) centered on the center.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the operation button internal decoration member 432, the door frame side effect display device 460, and the door frame side second effect that are arranged on the rear side through the transparent button lens 411 (front member) of the operation button 410. Although the display device 460A and the like such that the rear member is always visible is shown, the present invention is not limited to this, and at least one of the front member and the rear member arranged in the front and rear (or up and down) is a predetermined condition. It is good also as a structure which has the variable light transmission means which a rear side becomes visible by satisfying. Here, as the variable light transmission means, “the rear side can be visually recognized due to the difference in brightness between the front side and the rear side, such as a magic mirror”, “transparent by turning the power ON / OFF, such as a liquid crystal film Or the like so that the rear side can be visually recognized. " Note that the front member and the rear member may be relatively movable or may not be relatively movable.

  By having the variable light transmitting means on at least one of the front member and the rear member, in a normal state, only the front member or the front member and the rear member are in a visible state. It is possible to show the player the decoration of the visible member. And in a special state, by satisfying a predetermined condition, a rear member (a rear member or a member arranged on the rear side of the rear member) that could not be seen in a normal state can be seen. The member and the rear member, or the front member, the rear member, and the member on the rear side of the rear member can be overlapped. Therefore, various decorations (decoration effects) can be shown to the player using the front member and the rear member, so that the player can be made hard to get tired, and the player can be entertained. It is possible to suppress a decrease in the interests.

  Specifically, for example, when the front member has variable light transmitting means such as a magic mirror, in the normal state, only the decoration of the front member is made by darkening the rear side of the front member. It can be made visible to the player. Then, when the space between the front member and the rear member or the rear side of the rear member is brightened by the light of the light emitting part such as an LED, the satisfaction condition of the variable light transmitting means in the front member is satisfied, and the rear is passed through the front member. The member can be visually recognized, and a decoration in which the decoration of the front member and the decoration of the rear member overlap can be shown to the player.

  Alternatively, if the front member is transparent and the rear member has variable light transmission means such as a magic mirror, the surface of the rear member can be seen through the front member in a normal state. It is possible to show the player the decoration with the surface of the player. When the rear side of the rear member is brightened by the light from the light emitting part such as an LED, the satisfaction condition of the variable light transmitting means in the rear member is satisfied, and the rear side can be visually recognized through the rear member. Through the member, the rear member of the rear member (for example, a display device, a decorative body such as a character) can be shown to the player.

  Furthermore, when both the front member and the rear member have variable light transmission means such as a magic mirror, in a normal state, only the decoration of the front member can be shown to the player. When the space between the rear member and the rear member is brightened by the light of the light emitting unit such as an LED, the satisfaction condition of the variable light transmitting means in the front member is satisfied, and the surface of the rear member can be visually recognized through the front member. The player can show the decoration with the rear member. On the other hand, the rear side of the rear member is brightened by the light of the light emitting part such as the LED (or the light between the front member and the rear member and the rear side of the rear member are simultaneously brightened by the light of the light emitting part such as the LED. ) And the satisfying conditions of the respective variable light transmitting means in the front member and the rear member are satisfied, and the rear member of the rear member (for example, a decorative body such as a display device or a character) is passed through the front member and the rear member. Can be shown to the player. Accordingly, by appropriately selecting a portion that is brightened by the light of the light emitting unit, the visible range can be changed in multiple stages, and a variety of decorations can be enjoyed by the player.

  In the above specific example, since the variable light transmitting means is like a magic mirror, it looks like a mirror when the rear side is darkened, so on the surface of the front member or the rear member. You can show the glittering decorations to the players.

  Further, in the above specific example, the variable light transmitting means has been described as a magic mirror. However, even when the variable light transmitting means is a liquid crystal film, similar effects can be obtained. In addition, when a variable light transmitting means such as a liquid crystal film is used, light can be transmitted even in an opaque state (having translucency), so that it can be provided between the front member and the rear member or between the rear member and the rear member. If the rear side of the member can be brightened (or light-decorated) by the light of the light-emitting unit such as an LED, it is possible to show the player various effects such as light-emitting effects and decoration effects. .

[7. Main control board, payout control board and peripheral control board]
Next, a control board for performing various controls of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 69 to 74. 69 is a block diagram of the main control board, the payout control board, and the peripheral control board, FIG. 70 is a block diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 69, and FIG. 71 is a payout control board, CR unit and frequency constituting the main board. FIG. 72 is a schematic diagram of various detection signals input / output to / from a lending device connection terminal board such as a game ball that relays the electrical connection with the display board, FIG. 72 is a block diagram showing a continuation of FIG. FIG. 74 is a block diagram showing an outline of the peripheral control MPU, and FIG. 74 is a block diagram around the sound source built-in VDP in the liquid crystal display control unit.

  As shown in FIG. 69, the pachinko machine 1 includes a first control unit MCG that performs control related to a game including payout of prize balls, in addition to generation processing of a control power source (for example, +5 V). And a second control unit SCG that performs an effect relating to a game that is progressed by the first control unit MCG.

  More specifically, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment employs a structure in which various controls are shared by preparing a plurality of substrates, and the main control substrate 1310 is used as the first control unit MCG. The payout control board 951 and the power supply board 931 are provided, and the peripheral control board 1510 is provided as the second control unit SCG. Hereinafter, in describing the control configuration of the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, the first control unit MCG will be described in the order of the main control board 1310, the payout control board 951, and the power supply board 931. 2 The controller SCG (peripheral control board 1510) will be described.

[7-1. Main control board]
Of the first control unit MCG, the main control board 1310 for controlling the progress of the game controls the power-on process executed when the power is turned on and a predetermined time has elapsed since the power was turned on, as shown in FIG. A main control MPU 1310a, which is a microprocessor that has a built-in ROM for storing various control programs such as a main control program for controlling a game operation and a command, a ROM for storing various commands, a RAM for temporarily storing data, and the like. A main control input circuit 1310b to which a detection signal from the detection switch is input, a main control output circuit 1310c for outputting various signals to an external substrate, etc., and a main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d for driving various solenoids A power failure monitoring circuit 1310e for monitoring a sign of a power failure or a momentary power failure of a predetermined voltage, Te are provided.

  The main control MPU 1310a includes a built-in RAM (hereinafter referred to as “main control built-in RAM”) and a built-in ROM (hereinafter referred to as “main control built-in ROM”). Further, a watchdog timer 1310af (hereinafter referred to as “main control built-in WDT 1310af”) for monitoring the operation (system), a function for preventing fraud, and the like are also incorporated.

  Further, the main control MPU 1310a has a built-in nonvolatile RAM. In this non-volatile RAM, a unique ID code with a unique code (a code that exists only in the world) for identifying an individual by the manufacturer that manufactured the main control MPU 1310a is stored in advance. Since the ID code once attached is stored in the nonvolatile RAM, it cannot be rewritten using an external device. The main control MPU 1310a can take out and refer to the ID code from the nonvolatile RAM.

  The main control MPU 1310a also uses a hardware random number circuit 1310an (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in") to update a big hit determination random number for use in determining whether or not to generate a big hit gaming state among various random numbers related to the game. A hard random number circuit 1310an ”). The main random number circuit 1310an with built-in main control generates a random number within a predetermined numerical range (in this embodiment, a numerical range of a value 0 to a maximum value 32767 is preset as a minimum value), A predetermined value is not fixed as the initial value (that is, the initial value is not fixed), and the circuit configuration is such that a different value is set each time the main control MPU 1310a is reset. Specifically, when the main control MPU 1310a is reset, the main random number built-in hard random number circuit 1310an first sets a clock signal (input to the main control MPU 1310a as an initial value within a predetermined numerical range). Based on the clock signal output from the main control crystal oscillator (to be described later), other values within the predetermined numerical range are extracted one after another without duplication, and all values within the predetermined numerical range are extracted. When the process is completed, one value in the predetermined numerical range is extracted again, and other values in the predetermined numerical range are not duplicated at high speed based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a. Extract one after another. The main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an repeatedly performs such a high-speed lottery, and the main control MPU 1310a wins the value extracted by the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an at the time of acquiring a value from the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an. It is set as a random number for judgment.

  The main control input circuit 1310b is not provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting information whose detection signals from various detection switches are input to the various input terminals, and does not have a reset function. Therefore, the main control input circuit 1310b is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a main control system reset described later is not input. That is, the main control input circuit 1310b does not reset the information based on the detection signals from the various detection switches input to the various input terminals by a main control system reset to be described later. The circuit is configured to be output from the output terminal.

  The main control output circuit 1310c is configured as an open collector output type in which an emitter terminal is grounded with a ground (GND), and various signals for outputting various signals to an external substrate or the like are input to the various input terminals. Main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function having a reset function in which a reset terminal for forcibly resetting the received information is provided, and a main control output circuit 1310cb without reset function without a reset function in which no reset terminal is provided. And is composed of. The main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a main control system reset described later is input. That is, the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function is reset when information for outputting various signals input to the various input terminals to an external substrate or the like is reset by a main control system reset described later. Is configured as a circuit that does not output any signal from the various output terminals. On the other hand, the main control output circuit 1310cb without a reset function is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a main control system reset described later is not input. That is, the main control output circuit 1310cb having no reset function does not reset the information for outputting various signals input to the various input terminals to an external substrate or the like by the main control system reset described later, and thus the information is output to the information. The signal based on this is comprised as a circuit from which the various output terminals are output.

  60, a first start port sensor 4002 that detects a game ball that has entered the first start port 2002, a second start port sensor 4004 that detects a game ball that has entered the second start port 2004, and general A detection signal from the general winning opening sensor 4020 that detects a game ball that has entered the winning opening 2001 or a signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e is input to a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b. Has been entered. Further, a gate sensor 4003 for detecting a game ball that has passed through the gate unit 2003, a count sensor 4005 for detecting a game ball that has entered the big prize opening 2005, and the back unit 3000 shown in FIG. A detection signal from a magnetic detection sensor 4024 that detects an illegal act using a magnet attached thereto is a predetermined input of the main control MPU 1310a via the panel relay board 4161 attached to the game board 5 and the main control input circuit 1310b. Input to the port input terminal.

  The main control MPU 1310a outputs a drive signal from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function based on the detection signals from these switches, so that the main control output circuit with reset function is output. A control signal is output from 1310ca to the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d, and a drive signal is output from the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d to the start port solenoid 2107 and the attacker solenoid 2108 via the panel relay board 4161. By outputting a driving signal from the output terminal to the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function from the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function through the panel relay board 4161 and the function display unit 1400, the first special symbol display 1403 A drive signal is output to the second special symbol display 1405, the first special reservation number display 1404, the second special reservation number display 1406, the normal symbol display 1402, the status display 1401, and the round display 1407. .

  In addition, the main control MPU 1310a outputs various information (game information) relating to the game from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function, thereby performing payout control from the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function. By outputting various information about the game (game information) to the board 951, or by outputting a signal (power failure clear signal) from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function, A signal (power failure clear signal) is output from the control output circuit 1310ca to the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e.

  In the present embodiment, the first start port sensor 4002, the second start port sensor 4004, the gate sensor 4003, and the count sensor 4005 use non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switches. For the general prize opening sensors 4020 and 4020, contact type ON / OFF operation type mechanical switches are used. This is because game balls frequently enter the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 and frequently pass through the gate portion 2003, so the first start port sensor 4002, the second start port sensor 4004, and Detection of game balls by the gate sensor 4003 also frequently occurs. Therefore, long-life proximity switches are used for the first start port sensor 4002, the second start port sensor 4004, and the gate sensor 4003. Further, when a big hit gaming state that is advantageous to the player occurs, the big winning opening 2005 is opened and game balls are frequently entered, so that the detection of the game balls by the count sensor 4005 also occurs frequently. Therefore, a proximity switch having a long life is also used for the count sensor 4005. On the other hand, detection by the general winning opening sensors 4020 and 4020 does not frequently occur in the general winning openings 2001 and 2011, in which game balls do not frequently enter. For this reason, mechanical switches having a shorter lifespan than the proximity switch are used for the general prize opening sensors 4020 and 4020.

  Further, the main control MPU 1310a transmits various commands related to payout as serial data from the output terminal of the predetermined serial output port to the main control output circuit 1310cb without reset function, thereby performing payout control from the main control output circuit 1310cb without reset function. Various commands are transmitted to the board 951 as serial data. When the payout control board 951 completes normal reception of various commands from the main control board 1310 as serial data, the payout control board 951 outputs a signal (payment ACK signal) to that effect to the main control board 1310. This signal (payer ACK signal) is input to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b.

  Further, the main control MPU 1310a receives various commands relating to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 951 as serial data by the main control input circuit 1310b, so that the input from the main control input circuit 1310b to the predetermined serial input port Various commands are received as serial data at the terminal. When the main control MPU 1310a completes normal reception of various commands from the payout control board 951 as serial data, a main control output with a reset function is sent from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to that effect (main payout ACK signal). The signal is output to the circuit 1310ca, and a signal (main payment ACK signal) is output from the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca to the payout control board 951.

  Further, the main control MPU 1310a transmits, as serial data, various commands relating to control of game effects and various commands relating to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the output terminal of the predetermined serial output port to the main control output circuit 1310cb having no reset function. Various commands are transmitted as serial data from the main control output circuit 1310cb without reset function to the peripheral control board 1510.

  Here, a main peripheral serial transmission port that transmits various commands as serial data to the peripheral control board 1510 will be briefly described. The main control MPU 1310a is configured around a main control CPU core 1310aa. In addition to the main control built-in RAM, a main peripheral serial transmission port 1310ae, which is one of the main control various serial I / O ports, and the like connects the bus 1310ah. Circuit connection (see FIG. 79). The main peripheral serial transmission port 1310ae transmits various commands to the peripheral control board 1510 as main peripheral serial data, and mainly includes a transmission shift register 1310aea, a transmission buffer register 1310aeb, a serial management unit 1310aec, and the like (see FIG. 79). When the main control CPU core 1310aa sets a command in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb and outputs a transmission start signal to the serial management unit 1310aec, the serial management unit 1310aec sends the command set in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb from the transmission buffer register 1310aeb. The data is transferred to the transmission shift register 1310aea and started to be transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 as main peripheral serial data. In the present embodiment, the transmission buffer register 1310aeb has a storage capacity of 32 bytes. The main control CPU core 1310aa continuously transmits a plurality of commands to the peripheral control board 1510 by setting a plurality of commands in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb and then outputting a transmission start signal to the serial management unit 1310aec.

  The power supply board 931 for supplying various voltages to the main control board 1310 is an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter simply referred to as “capacitor”) as a backup power supply for supplying power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined time even when the power is shut off. BC0 (see FIG. 75). With this capacitor BC0, the main control MPU 1310a can store various types of information in the main control built-in RAM even when the power is shut off. Various kinds of information stored in the main control built-in RAM are stored in the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the operation switch 954 when an operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 described later is operated within a predetermined period from the time of turning on the power. Is output from the payout control board 951 and input to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b, and when this occurs, the main control MPU 1310a completely erases it from the main control built-in RAM. (Clear).

[7-2. Dispensing control board]
Of the first control unit MCG, a payout control board 951 for controlling the payout of game balls and the like is, as shown in FIG. 70, a payout control unit 952 that performs various controls relating to payout, and an operation switch 954 that also has various functions. And an error LED display 860b for displaying the state of the pachinko machine 1. Further, the operation switch 954 having a function as a RAM clear switch is described as a RAM (hereinafter referred to as “main control built-in RAM”) built in the main control MPU 1310a based on a detection signal output by being operated. A RAM clear signal for completely erasing the information stored in.

[7-2-1. Dispensing control unit]
As shown in FIG. 70, the payout control unit 952, which performs various controls relating to payout, controls the power-on process executed when the power is turned on, and pays out game media executed after a predetermined time has elapsed since the power was turned on. Various control programs including a payout control program for controlling the operation, ROM for storing various commands, RAM for temporarily storing data, etc., a payout control MPU952a, and detection from various detection switches for payout A payout control input circuit 952b to which signals are input, a payout control output circuit 952c for outputting various signals to an external substrate, etc., and a payout motor drive circuit for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 834 of the payout device 830 CR unit input for exchanging various signals between 952d and CR unit 6 It includes a power circuit 952E, a. The payout control MPU 952a includes a built-in RAM (hereinafter referred to as “payout control built-in RAM”) and a built-in ROM (hereinafter referred to as “payout control built-in ROM”). In addition, a watchdog timer for monitoring the operation (system), a function for preventing fraud, and the like are also incorporated.

  The payout control program is controlled by the payout control MPU 952a so that various information (game information) related to games and various commands related to payouts from the main control board 1310 are serially received as main payout serial data reception signals via the payout control input circuit 952b. Receive serial data with. Also, the payout control program generates a frame state 1 command (corresponding to the first error occurrence command) triggered by the occurrence of an error in the game ball payout operation, or operates the operation switch 954 as an error release unit. Based on the signal (detection signal), a 16-bit (2 bytes) error cancellation navigation command (corresponding to the first error cancellation command) is created, and the error occurrence command and the error cancellation navigation command are respectively transmitted to the payer serial data. As a serial signal, a signal is output to the reception port of the main control board 1310 via the payout control I / O port 952b (command transmission means). In addition, the payout control program is provided after a predetermined time has elapsed since the power was turned on, that is, after the payout control unit main process is executed or the payout control unit timer interrupt process is executed to start payout control. When an error occurs with respect to the operation, the error is canceled based on a detection signal generated in response to the operation of the operation switch 954, and output of warning information corresponding to the error is stopped (error cancellation control means).

  The payout control program outputs a door frame opening command (first door opening command) when a detection signal (door frame opening detection signal) associated with the opening operation is input from the door frame opening switch 618. When a detection signal (body frame opening detection signal) accompanying the opening operation is input from the body frame opening switch 619, a body frame opening command (first body frame opening command) is output. On the other hand, when the detection signal (door frame closing detection signal) accompanying the closing operation is input from the door frame opening switch 618, the payout control program receives a door frame closing command (first door frame closing command). When a detection signal (main body frame closing detection signal) accompanying the closing operation is input from the main body frame opening switch 619, a main body frame closing command (first main body frame closing command) is output.

  The payout control input circuit 952b is not provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting information whose detection signals from various detection switches are input to the various input terminals, and does not have a reset function. Therefore, the payout control input circuit 952b is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a payout control system reset described later is not input. That is, the payout control input circuit 952b does not reset the information based on the detection signals from the various detection switches input to the various input terminals by a payout control system reset described later, and thus the various signals based on the information The circuit is configured to be output from the output terminal.

  The payout control output circuit 952c is configured as an open collector output type in which the emitter terminal is grounded to the ground (GND), and various signals for outputting various signals to an external substrate or the like are input to the various input terminals. A payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function having a reset function in which a reset terminal for forcibly resetting the received information is provided, and a payout control output circuit 952cb without a reset function having no reset function in which no reset terminal is provided. And is composed of. The payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a payout control system reset described later is input. That is, the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function resets the information for outputting various signals input to the various input terminals to an external substrate or the like by a payout control system reset described later. Is configured as a circuit that does not output any signal from the various output terminals. On the other hand, the payout control output circuit 952cb without a reset function is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a payout control system reset described later is not input. In other words, the payout control output circuit 952cb without a reset function includes the information for outputting various signals input to the various input terminals to an external substrate or the like, and is not reset by a payout control system reset described later. The signal based on this is comprised as a circuit from which the various output terminals are output.

  Out-of-game detection sensor 827 for detecting the out-of-game ball in the supply path of the in-ball supply unit 820 of the out-of-payment unit 800 and out-of-game detection sensor 842 for detecting the out-of-game ball released from the out-out outlets 831b and 832b of the out-pay device 830. The detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 840 that detects the rotation of the payout blade 839 is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control input circuit 952b. In the following description, the blade rotation detection sensor 840 is simply referred to as the rotation detection sensor 840 for the sake of explanation.

  The detection signals from the door frame opening switch 618 for detecting the opening of the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 and the main body frame opening switch 619 for detecting the opening of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 are sent to the payout control input circuit 952b. To the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a.

  Further, a detection signal from a full tank detection sensor 279 that detects whether the storage space of the foul cover unit 270 shown in FIG. It is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a via the substrate 931 and the payout control input circuit 952b.

  The payout control MPU 952a receives various commands relating to payout from the main control board 1310 via the payout control input circuit 952b in the serial data system at the input terminal of the serial input port, or the operation signal (detection of the operation switch 954). Signal) is output to the main control board 1310 via the payout control input circuit 952b. When the payout control MPU 952a normally receives various commands from the main control board 1310 as serial data, a payout control output with a reset function is sent from the output terminal of the predetermined output port. By outputting to the circuit 952ca, a signal (payer ACK signal) is output from the payout control output circuit with reset function 952ca to the main control board 1310.

Also, the payout control MPU 952a sends various commands for indicating the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the output terminal of the serial output port as serial data to the payout control output circuit 952cb without the reset function, thereby providing the payout control without the reset function. Various commands are transmitted as serial data from the output circuit 952cb to the main control board 1310.
When the main control board 1310 completes normal reception of various commands from the payout control board 951 as serial data, the main control board 1310 outputs a signal to that effect (main payout ACK signal) to the payout control board 951. This signal (main payment ACK signal) is input to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control input circuit 952b.

  Also, the payout control MPU 952a outputs a drive signal for driving the payout motor 834 from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function, whereby the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function. Is output to the payout motor drive circuit 952d, the drive signal is output from the payout motor drive circuit 952d to the payout motor 834, and the state of the pachinko machine 1 is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the error LED By outputting a drive signal for display on 860b to the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function, the drive signal is output from the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function to the error LED display 860b.

  The error LED indicator 860b is a segment indicator, and displays the state of the pachinko machine 1 by displaying alphanumeric characters and figures. The contents displayed and notified by the error LED display 860b include the following. For example, when the figure “-” is displayed, it is informed that it is “normal”, and when the numeral “0” is displayed, it is indicated that “connection is abnormal” (specifically, with the main control board 1310). The fact that there is an abnormality in the electrical connection between the board and the payout control board 951 is notified, and when the number “1” is displayed, it is “out of the ball” (specifically, out of the ball) Based on the detection signal from the detection sensor 827, a notification is made that there is no game ball in the supply passage of the payout device 830, and when the number “2” is displayed, it means that “ball is seen” (specifically, Is based on a detection signal from the rotation detection sensor 840, and the payout rotator and the game ball are meshed in the vicinity of the entrance at the entrance of the distribution space communicating with the supply passage of the payout device 830, making it difficult for the payout rotator to rotate. Number) When “3” is displayed, the fact that it is a “payout detection sensor error” (specifically, a problem has occurred in the payout detection sensor 842 based on a detection signal from the payout detection sensor 842) is notified. When the number “5” is displayed, the fact that it is a “retry error” (specifically, the fact that the number of retries of the payout operation has reached a preset upper limit value) is notified, and the number “6” When it is displayed, it is “full” (specifically, the game ball in which the accommodation space of the foul cover unit 270 is stored is full based on the detection signal from the full detection sensor 279) When the number “7” is displayed, it means that “CR is not connected” (the electrical connection is cut off from either the payout control board 951 to the CR unit 6). When the number “9” is displayed, it is “in stock (awarded ball stock (not paid out))” (specifically, the number of game balls that have not been paid out is determined in advance). That the number of balls has been reached).

  Further, the payout control MPU 952a outputs the number of game balls actually paid out from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function, thereby outputting the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function. The number of game balls actually paid out to the external terminal board 784 is output via a resistor (not shown).

Also, the payout control board 951 outputs various information (game information) relating to the game from the main control board 1310 to the external terminal board 784 via a resistor (not shown). The external terminal board 784 is provided with a plurality of photocouplers (not shown) (infrared LEDs and photo ICs are built in), and a game hall (hole) is provided via the plurality of photocouplers. ), The number of game balls, and various information (game information, content of error relating to game ball payout operation, or the fact that there was an error) are transmitted to the hall computer installed in (1).
The external terminal board 784 and the hall computer are electrically insulated by a plurality of photocouplers, and an abnormal voltage is applied to the hall computer via the external terminal board 784 of the pachinko machine 1 to cause the hall computer to The computer is prevented from malfunctioning or failing, and from the hall computer to the main control board 1310 that advances the game via the external terminal board 784 of the pachinko machine 1 and the payout control board 951 that controls the payout etc. An abnormal voltage is applied to cause malfunction or failure. The hall computer monitors the game of the player by grasping the number of game balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1 and the game information of the pachinko machine 1.

  The ball lending request signal for the game ball from the ball lending button 328 and the return request signal for the prepaid card from the return button 329 are first the frequency display board 365, the main door relay terminal board 880, and the lending device connection terminal board for game balls etc. It is input to the CR unit 6 via the 869. The CR unit 6 transmits a signal designating the number of game balls to be lent according to the ball lending request signal to the payout control board 951 through the gaming ball lending device connection terminal plate 869, and this signal is transmitted to the CR unit. It is input to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a via the input / output circuit 952e. In addition, the CR unit 6 updates the remaining level of the prepaid card inserted according to the number of rented game balls, and displays a signal for displaying the remaining level on the sphere rental return display unit 330. The equal lending device connection terminal board 869, the main door relay terminal board 880, and the frequency display board 365 are output, and this signal is input to the ball rental return display section 330. Further, the CR unit lamp 365d adjacent to the ball rental return display unit 330 is supplied with the supply voltage from the CR unit 6 via the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 and the main door relay terminal plate 880. ing.

  The power supply board 931 for supplying various voltages to the payout control board 951 includes a capacitor BC1 (see FIG. 75) as a backup power supply for supplying power to the payout control board 951 for a predetermined time even when the power is shut off. Yes. With this capacitor BC1, the payout control MPU 952a can store various types of information in the payout control built-in RAM (payout storage unit) in the power-off process even when the power is shut off. Various kinds of information stored in the payout control built-in RAM are stored in the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control input circuit 952b when the operation switch 954 is operated within a predetermined period from when the power is turned on. The payout control MPU 952a input to the input terminal of the input port determines as a RAM clear signal for completely erasing the information stored in the payout control built-in RAM, and triggered by this from the payout control built-in RAM by the payout control MPU 952a. It is completely erased (cleared). This operation signal (RAM clear signal) is output to the payout control output circuit 952cb without reset function, and is output to the main control board 1310 from the payout control output circuit 952cb without reset function.

[7-2-2. Exchange of various signals with game ball rental device connection terminal board]
Here, the exchange of various signals between the payout control unit 952 and the CR unit 6 and the exchange of various signals between the CR unit 6 and the frequency display board 365 will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 71, the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 relays the electrical connection between the CR unit 6 and the payout control board 951, and also includes the CR unit 6 and the frequency display board 365. (To be precise, the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 is electrically connected to the frequency display plate 365 via the main door relay terminal plate 880. The CR unit 6 and the gaming ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 are electrically connected, the gaming ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 and the main door relay terminal plate 880 are electrically connected, and the main door relay Terminal board 880 and frequency display board 365 are electrically connected). Between the board of the CR unit 6 and the gaming ball rental device connection terminal plate 869, between the gaming ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 and the payout control board 951, gaming ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 and the main door relay. The board between the terminal board 880 and the board between the game ball lending device connection terminal board 869 and the frequency display board 365 are electrically connected by wiring (harness), respectively. In addition, AC24V, which will be described later, from the power supply board 931 is supplied to the CR unit 6 via a gaming ball rental device connection terminal plate 869. The CR unit 6 generates a predetermined voltage VL (in this embodiment, DC +12 V (DC +12 V, hereinafter referred to as “+12 V”)) from the supplied AC 24 V by a built-in voltage generation circuit (not shown) together with the ground LG. The ball is supplied to the payout control board 951 through the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869, and is supplied to the frequency display plate 365 through the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 and the main door relay terminal plate 880. .

  The frequency display board 365 has a ball lending button 328 that is a push button switch mounted on the component surface at a position corresponding to the ball lending button 328, and a push button switch at a position corresponding to the return button 329 of the lending unit 360. A return button 329 is mounted, and a ball lending return display unit 330 that is a segment display is mounted at a position corresponding to the remaining lending display unit 363 of the lending unit 360.

  The ball rental button 328 and the return button 329 are electrically connected to the ground LG from the CR unit 6 via a game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 and a main door relay terminal plate 880. When the ball lending button 328 is pressed, the ball lending button 328 is switched on (ON), and the ball lending operation signal TDS from the ball lending button 328 is transmitted to the main door relay terminal plate 880 and the game It is inputted to the CR unit 6 through a ball lending device connection terminal board 869. When the return button 329 is pressed, the return button 329 is switched on (ON), and the return operation signal RES from the return button 329 is connected to the main door relay terminal board 880 and a rental device such as a game ball. The signal is input to the CR unit 6 through the terminal board 869.

  The ball rental return display unit 330 includes three segment indicators arranged in a line, and the three-digit segment indicator is driven by a so-called dynamic lighting system that sequentially drives each one-digit segment indicator. The digit segment display is controlled to turn on. By such lighting control, the ball rental return display unit 330 displays the remaining amount of the prepaid card inserted into the CR unit 6 or displays an error of the CR unit 6. The ball rental return display unit 330 includes digit signals DG0 to DG2 (a total of three signals) for designating a one-digit segment indicator among the three-digit segment indicators, and the designated one-digit segment indicator. The segment drive signals SEG-A to SEG-G (7 signals in total) for designating the contents to be displayed by turning on the LED, and the lending device connection terminal plate 869 such as a game ball from the CR unit 6 and the main door relay terminal When input via the board 880, according to the input digit signals DG0 to DG2 and segment drive signals SEG-A to SEG-G, a one-digit segment indicator is sequentially emitted, and these three-digit segment displays. The contents of the light emitted from the container can be visually recognized through the lending remaining display portion 363.

  A CR unit lamp 365 d is mounted on the frequency display board 365 adjacent to the ball rental return display unit 330. The CR unit lamp 365d is supplied with a predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 via a game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 and a main door relay terminal plate 880. The predetermined voltage VL is input to the CR unit 6 as a ball lending available signal TDL through a current limiting resistor mounted on the gaming ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 via the CR unit lamp 365d. The CR unit 6 creates a predetermined voltage VL from the AC 24 V supplied from the power supply board 931 by the built-in voltage creation circuit, and the ball lending button 328 and the return button 329 are in a valid ball lending state. Controls the logic of the ball lending available signal TDL to cause the CR unit lamp 365d to emit light, and this light emission can be visually recognized through the lending remaining display portion 363. The segment drive signals SEG-A to SEG-G are input to the ball lending return display unit 330 through the current limiting resistor mounted on the gaming ball lending device connection terminal board 869.

  In the CR unit 6, the ball lending button 328 is pressed and the ball lending operation signal TDS from the ball lending button 328 is transmitted from the frequency display plate 365 via the main door relay terminal plate 880 and the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869. When inputted, the ball rental request signal BRDY is output to the payout control board 951 (payout control MPU 952a) via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869. The CR unit 6 performs a single payout operation start request signal for paying out a predetermined number of rented balls (in this embodiment, 25 balls, corresponding to 100 yen as an amount) in one payout operation. Is output to the payout control board 951 (the payout control MPU 952a) via the gaming ball lending device connection terminal plate 869. The payout control board 951 (the payout control MPU 952a) to which BRDY and BRQ are input, sends EXS, which is a signal for notifying that the one payout operation has started or ended, to the gaming ball lending device connection terminal board 869. Through the terminal, the PRDY, which is a signal for outputting to the CR unit 6 or notifying that the payout operation for paying out the ball is possible or impossible, is connected to a lending device connection terminal board such as a game ball. Or output to the CR unit 6 via 869. In addition, for example, when a store clerk or the like of the hall is preset in the CR unit 6 so that a game ball of 200 yen is paid out when the ball lending button 328 is pressed, a single payout operation is performed. Is performed twice in succession, and when 25 balls for 100 yen are paid out, 25 balls for 100 yen are paid out, and 50 balls for a total of 200 yen are paid out. Become.

  In the CR unit 6, the return button 329 is pressed, and a return operation signal RES from the return button 329 is input from the frequency display board 365 via the main door relay terminal board 880 and the game ball lending device connection terminal board 869. The prepaid card is discharged from an insertion slot (not shown) and returned. The returned prepaid card stores the remaining amount obtained by subtracting the amount corresponding to the number of game balls paid out as a result of the ball lending button 328 being pressed.

[7-3. Power supply board 931]
Next, the power supply board 931 in the first control unit MCG will be briefly described. The power supply board 931 is supplied from the Pachinko Island facility, and can be electrically connected to or disconnected from AC 24 volts (AC24V), and a power supply control unit 935 that generates various power supplies. The launch control unit 953 performs launch control by the launch solenoid 682 of the hit ball launcher 650 shown in FIG. 5 and ball feed control by the ball feed solenoid 255 of the ball feed unit 250 shown in FIG.

[7-3-1. Power control unit]
The power controller 935 operates the power switch 934 to improve the power factor of the power rectified by the synchronous rectifier circuit 935a that rectifies the AC 24 volts (AC 24V) supplied from the pachinko island facility and the synchronous rectifier circuit 935a. Power factor improving circuit 935b, smoothing circuit 935c for smoothing the power whose power factor has been improved by power factor improving circuit 935b, and various direct currents for supplying the power smoothed by smoothing circuit 935c to various substrates A power generation circuit 935d for generating a power supply.

[7-3-2. Launch control unit]
A launch control unit 953 that performs launch control by the launch solenoid 682 and ball feed control by the ball feed solenoid 255 mainly includes a launch control circuit 953a. The firing control circuit 953a includes an operation signal from a handle rotation detection sensor 307 that electrically adjusts the strength (launch strength) of launching a game ball toward the game area 5a according to the rotational position of the handle 302, and a palm on the handle 302. And a single button operation sensor 312 for detecting whether or not the game ball launching (launching) is forcibly stopped by the player's will and a detection signal from the handle touch sensor 310 for detecting whether or not the finger is touching. The detection signal from is input via the handle relay terminal plate 315. In addition, when the CR unit 6 and the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 are electrically connected to each other, the launch control circuit 953a receives a CR connection signal to that effect via the payout control board 951. .

  The firing control circuit 953a adjusts the drive current for launching (launching) the game ball toward the game area 5a based on the operation signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 307 and outputs the adjusted game current to the firing solenoid 682. On the other hand, by outputting a constant current to the ball feeding solenoid 255 via the handle relay terminal plate 315, the ball feeding member of the ball feeding unit 250 receives one game ball stored in the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320, Control is performed to send the game ball received by the ball feeding member to the ball hitting device 650 side.

[7-4. Peripheral control board]
For the first control unit MCG, the peripheral control board 1510 in the second control unit SCG performs effect control based on various commands from the main control board 1310 as shown in FIG. 19, the display control drive board 4450 for drawing the display area of the door frame side effect display device 460, the peripheral control unit 1511 for exchanging control commands and various information (various data), the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door. While performing the drawing control of the frame side effect display device 460, the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 that performs sound control of music, sound effects and the like flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, calendar information specifying the date and time, hour and minute A real-time clock (hereinafter referred to as “RTC”) control unit 4165 that holds time information for specifying the second, and a lower speaker 92. And a, and volume adjustment volume 1510a be adjusted by turning operation of the volume knob portion such as music or sound effects flowing from upper speaker 573.

[7-4-1. Peripheral control unit]
As shown in FIG. 72, the peripheral control unit 1511 that performs effect control controls the peripheral control MPU 1511a as a microprocessor and the power-on process executed when the power is turned on, and after a predetermined time has elapsed since the power was turned on. Various control programs such as a sub-control program that is executed and controls the production operation, a peripheral control ROM 1511b that stores various data, various control data, and various schedule data, and a VDP 1512a built in a sound source of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 described later. Various information continued across the peripheral control unit steady process executed each time a blank signal is input (for example, schedule data for defining a screen to be drawn on the game board side effect display device 1600, and light emission modes such as various LEDs) Manage schedule data etc. Peripheral control RAM 1511c for storing information, etc., and various types of information continued across days (for example, information for managing a history of occurrence of a big hit gaming state, information for managing special performance flags, etc.) ) And a peripheral control external watchdog timer 1511e (hereinafter referred to as “peripheral control external WDT 1511e”) for monitoring whether or not the peripheral control MPU 1511a is operating normally. I have.

  Peripheral control RAM 1511c can retain the stored content only for the time when power is restored immediately after a momentary power failure occurs, and power is cut off for a long time (when a long-time power interruption occurs) The peripheral control SRAM 1511d is supplied with backup power by a large-capacity electrolytic capacitor (not shown) provided on the power supply board 931 (hereinafter referred to as “electrolytic capacitor for SRAM”). Thus, the stored contents can be held for about 50 hours. Since the SRAM electrolytic capacitor is provided on the power supply board 931, when the game board 5 is removed from the pachinko machine 1, the backup power is not supplied to the peripheral control SRAM 1511d, so the peripheral control SRAM 1511d stores the stored contents. You lose the contents because you can't hold it.

  The peripheral control external WDT 1511e is a timer for monitoring whether or not the system of the peripheral control MPU 1511a is running out of control. When this timer expires, it is reset by hardware. That is, the peripheral control MPU 1511a is reset when a clear signal for clearing the timer of the peripheral control external WDT 1511e is not output to the peripheral control external WDT 1511e within a certain period (until the timer expires). When the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control external WDT 1511e within a certain period, the peripheral control external WDT 1511e can restart the timer count of the peripheral control external WDT 1511e, so that no reset is applied.

  The peripheral control MPU 1511a incorporates a plurality of parallel I / O ports, serial I / O ports, and the like, and upon receiving various commands from the main control board 1310, based on these various commands, each decorative board of the game board 5 The game board side light emission data for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals or gradation lighting signals to a plurality of LEDs etc. provided in the lamp is outputted from the serial I / O port for lamp driving board via a peripheral control output circuit (not shown). The game board side motor drive data to be sent to the drive board 4170 or to output a drive signal to an electric drive source such as a motor or solenoid for operating various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 is serialized for the motor drive board. The signal is transmitted from the I / O port to the motor drive board 4180 via the peripheral control output circuit, or the dial drive motor 414 provided on the door frame 3 is electrically connected. Door side motor drive data for outputting a drive signal to the general drive source from the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I / O port to the peripheral control output circuit, frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, and peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 The door-side light emission data for transmitting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs provided on each decoration board of the door frame 3 is transmitted to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 via The frame decoration drive amplifier board LED serial I / O port transmits the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 via the peripheral control output circuit, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882.

  Various commands from the main control board 1310 are input to the serial I / O port for the main control board of the peripheral control MPU 1511a via a peripheral control input circuit (not shown). Further, from the detection signal from the rotation detection switch for detecting the rotation (rotation direction) of the dial operation unit 401 and the pressure detection switch for detecting the operation of the press operation unit 405 provided in the effect operation unit 400. Is serialized by a door-side serial transmission circuit (not shown) provided on the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194, and the serialized presentation operation unit detection data is transmitted from the door-side serial transmission circuit to the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882. , The frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, and the peripheral control input circuit, are input to the rendering operation unit detection serial I / O port of the peripheral control MPU 1511a.

  Detection signals from various detection switches (for example, photo sensors, etc.) for detecting the original positions and movable positions of various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 are on the game board side (not shown) provided on the motor drive board 4180. Serialized by the serial transmission circuit, and this serialized movable body detection data is input from the serial transmission circuit on the game board side to the serial I / O port for the motor drive board of the peripheral control MPU 1511a via the peripheral control input circuit. Yes. The peripheral control MPU 1511a exchanges various data between the peripheral control board 1510 and the motor drive board 4180 by switching the input / output of the serial I / O port for the motor drive board.

  The peripheral control MPU 1511a has a built-in watchdog timer (hereinafter referred to as “peripheral control built-in WDT”). It is diagnosed whether or not.

[7-4-1a. Peripheral control MPU]
Next, the peripheral control MPU 1511a that is a microcomputer will be described. As shown in FIG. 73, the peripheral control MPU 1511a has a peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab, a peripheral control DMA (abbreviation of Direct Memory Access) controller 1511ac, a peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, a peripheral control various serial I, and the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa. / O port 1511ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af, peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 1511ag, peripheral control analog / digital converter (hereinafter referred to as peripheral control A / D converter) 1511ak, and the like.

  Peripheral control CPU core 1511aa reads / writes various data to / from peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab and peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac via internal bus 1511ah, while peripheral control various serial I / O ports 1511ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af, Various data are read from and written to the various peripheral control parallel I / O ports 1511ag and the peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak via the internal bus 1511ah, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai.

  The peripheral control CPU core 1511aa reads various data from the peripheral control ROM 1511b via the internal bus 1511ah, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the external bus 1511h, while reading data from the peripheral control RAM 1511c and the peripheral control SRAM 1511d. Various data are read and written via the internal bus 1511ah, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the external bus 1511h.

  The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac includes storage devices such as a peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab, a peripheral control ROM 1511b, a peripheral control RAM 1511c, and a peripheral control SRAM 1511d, peripheral control various serial I / O ports 1511ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af, peripheral control various parallel I. / O port 1511ag and a dedicated controller for independently transferring data between devices such as the peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak and the like without using the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa. ~ It has four channels called DMA3.

  Specifically, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac includes a storage device of a peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab built in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, various peripheral control serial I / O ports 1511ae and a built-in peripheral control WDT 1511af built in the peripheral control MPU 1511a. In order to transfer data independently between the peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 1511ag and the input / output devices such as the peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak without the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa. In addition, the peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab reads / writes from / to the storage device via the internal bus 1511ah, while the peripheral control various serial I / O ports 1511ae, the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af, the peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 1511. g, and the peripheral control A / D converter input and output devices such as 1511Ak, via the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad and peripheral bus 1511Ai, reading and writing.

  The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac is a storage device such as a peripheral control ROM 1511b, a peripheral control RAM 1511c, and a peripheral control SRAM 1511d, which is externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a, and various peripheral control serial I / Os built in the peripheral control MPU 1511a. Without the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa between the devices such as the O port 1511ae, the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af, the peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 1511ag, and the peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak and the like. In order to transfer data independently, peripheral control bus controller 1511ad and external bus 1511h are connected to storage devices such as peripheral control ROM 1511b, peripheral control RAM 1511c, and peripheral control SRAM 1511d. The peripheral control serial I / O port 1511ae, the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af, the peripheral control various parallel I / O port 1511ag, the peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak, etc. Reading and writing are performed via the control bus controller 1511ad and the peripheral bus 1511ai.

  The peripheral control bus controller 1511ad controls the internal bus 1511ah, peripheral bus 1511ai, and external bus 1511h to control the central processing unit of the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa, peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab, peripheral control ROM 1511b, peripheral control RAM 1511c, and peripheral control Various devices such as a storage device such as SRAM 1511d and peripheral control various serial I / O ports 1511ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af, peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 1511ag, and peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak It is a dedicated controller that exchanges various data between them.

  Peripheral control various serial I / O port 1511ae includes a lamp drive board serial I / O port, a motor drive board serial I / O port, a frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I / O port, and a frame decoration drive amplifier board LED. Serial I / O port, frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I / O port, main control board serial I / O port, and rendering operation unit information acquisition serial I / O port.

  Peripheral control built-in watchdog timer (peripheral control built-in WDT) 1511af is a timer for monitoring whether the system of the peripheral control MPU 1511a is running out of control, and when this timer is up, a hardware reset is performed. It has become. That is, if the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa starts the watchdog timer, the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa resets if it does not output a clear signal for clearing the timer to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af within a certain period (until the timer expires). Will take. When the peripheral CPU core 1511aa starts the watchdog timer and outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af within a certain period, the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa can restart the timer count and therefore does not reset.

  The peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 1511ag output various latch signals such as a game board side motor drive latch signal and a door side motor drive light emission latch signal, and also output a clear signal to the peripheral control external WDT 1511e, The detection signals from various detection switches for detecting the original position and movable position of various movable bodies provided on the board 5 are serialized by a game board side serial transmission circuit (not shown) provided on the motor drive board 4180, and this serial The movable body information acquisition latch signal for receiving the converted movable body detection data from the serial transmission circuit on the game board side by the serial I / O port for the motor drive board of the peripheral control MPU 1511a is output. This LED is a high-intensity white LED and serves as a confirmation notification lamp for informing that the occurrence of the big hit gaming state has been confirmed. In the present embodiment, by adopting a configuration in which the LED and the peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 1511ag are electrically connected directly, the path between the LED and the peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 1511ag is shortened. Therefore, it is possible to take noise countermeasures for lighting control of the LED having a significant meaning in games. The LED lighting control is executed in a peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process described later, and other LEDs and the like other than this LED are executed in a peripheral control unit steady process described later. It has become.

  The peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak is electrically connected to the volume adjustment volume 1510a, and the resistance value is changed by rotating the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 1510a, and the resistance at the rotation position of the knob portion is changed. The voltage divided by the value is converted from an analog value to a digital value, and converted to a value in 1024 steps from a value 0 to a value 1023. In the present embodiment, the values of 1024 levels are divided into seven and managed as substrate volumes 0-6. The substrate volume 0 is set to mute, the substrate volume 6 is set to the maximum volume, and the volume is set to increase from the substrate volume 0 toward the substrate volume 6. The liquid crystal display control unit 1512 (a sound source built-in VDP 1512a, which will be described later) is controlled so that the volume is set to the substrate volume 0 to 6, and music and sound effects flow from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. As described above, music and sound effects flow from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 by adjusting the volume based on the turning operation of the knob portion.

  In this embodiment, in addition to music and sound effects, a notification sound for notifying a hall clerk or the like of the occurrence of a malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 or an illegal act on the pachinko machine 1 or a content related to a game effect is notified. (For example, to make the screen unfolded on the game board side effect display device 1600 more powerful, or to announce that there is a high possibility of shifting to a game state advantageous to the player). The notification sound also flows from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, but the notification sound and notification sound flow without depending on the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob part, and from the mute to the maximum volume Can be adjusted by controlling a liquid crystal display control unit 1512 (a sound source built-in VDP 1512a to be described later) by a program. The volume adjusted by this program can be smoothly changed from the mute to the maximum volume, unlike the substrate volume divided into the above seven stages. Thereby, for example, even when a hall clerk or the like rotates the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 1510a to set the volume to a low level, the music, sound effects, etc. flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 are produced. Although the sound is reduced, a notification sound set to a high volume (in this embodiment, the maximum volume) can be played when a malfunction occurs in the pachinko machine 1 or when the player is cheating. Therefore, even if the volume of the production sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the hall clerk or the like from becoming difficult to notice the occurrence of a malfunction or the player's cheating due to the notification sound. Also, based on the current board volume set by volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob part, the volume of the advertisement sound is reduced so as not to interfere with the music and sound effects. In addition to music and sound effects, there is a possibility that the screen unfolded on the game board side effect display device 1600 will be rendered more powerful, or a game state that is advantageous to the player may be entered. You can also announce that it is expensive.

[7-4-1b. Peripheral control ROM]
The peripheral control ROM 1511b stores in advance various control programs, various data, various control data, and various schedule data for controlling the peripheral control unit 1511, the liquid crystal display control unit 1512, the RTC control unit 4165, and the like. The various schedule data includes screen generation schedule data for generating screens to be drawn on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460, light emission mode generation schedule data for generating light emission modes of various LEDs, music And sound generation schedule data for generating sound effects and the like, and electric drive source schedule data for generating drive modes of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids. The screen generation schedule data is configured by arranging screen data for defining the screen configuration in time series, and the order of the screens to be drawn on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is specified. Has been. The light emission mode generation schedule data is configured by arranging light emission data defining the light emission modes of various LEDs in time series. The sound generation schedule data is configured by arranging sound command data in time series, and defines the order in which music and sound effects flow. The sound command data includes an output channel number for instructing which output channel to use among a plurality of output channels in the built-in sound source of the sound source built-in VDP 1512a of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 described later, and the sound source built-in VDP 1512a. A track number for instructing which of the plurality of tracks in the built-in sound source is to incorporate sound data such as music and sound effects is defined. The electrical drive source schedule data is configured by arranging drive data of electrical drive sources such as motors and solenoids in time series, and defines the operation of electrical drive sources such as motors and solenoids.

  Various control programs stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b may be read out and executed directly from the peripheral control ROM 1511b, or copied to various control program copy areas in the peripheral control RAM 1511c described later when the power is turned on. Some are read and executed. In addition, various data, various control data, and various schedule data stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b may be directly read from the peripheral control ROM 1511b, or when various power control data copy areas of the peripheral control RAM 1511c described later are turned on. Some of which are copied in the above are read out.

  In addition, the peripheral control ROM 1511b, as one of various control programs for controlling the RTC control unit 4165, corrects the luminance of the game board side effect display device 1600 according to the usage time of the game board side effect display device 1600. A brightness correction program is included. This brightness correction program corrects a decrease in brightness due to aging of the game board side effect display device 1600 when the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is an LED type. The date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 is first turned on, the current date and time, the luminance setting information, and the like are acquired from the internal RAM of the RTC control unit 4165, which will be described later, and the acquired luminance setting information is based on the correction information. To correct. This correction information is stored in advance in the peripheral control ROM 1511b. As will be described later, the luminance setting information includes luminance adjustment information for adjusting the range of the luminance of the LED, which is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600, from 100% to 70% in increments of 5%, The brightness of the LED that is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 that is set is included. For example, the date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 was first turned on and the current date and time From the date when the game board side effect display device 1600 is first turned on, when six months have already passed, the corresponding correction information (for example, 5%) is acquired from the peripheral control ROM 1511b, and the brightness When the brightness of the LED included in the setting information is 75% and the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is turned on, the correction information acquired for this 75% is used. On the game board side, the brightness of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is adjusted based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information so that the brightness is further increased by 5%. When December has already passed since the date when the effect display device 1600 was first turned on, the corresponding correction information (for example, 10%) is acquired from the peripheral control ROM 1511b, and the LED included in the brightness setting information When the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is turned on at a luminance of 75%, the luminance setting is set so that the luminance is 85% which is further increased by 10% which is the correction information acquired with respect to this 75%. Based on the brightness adjustment information included in the information, the brightness of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is adjusted to light up.

[7-4-1c. Peripheral control RAM]
As shown in FIG. 73, the peripheral control RAM 1511c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a is a backup that exclusively stores information to be backed up among various information updated by executing various control programs. The management target work area 1511ca, the backup first area 1511cb and the backup second area 1511cc for storing a copy of various information stored in the backup management target work area 1511ca, and the peripheral control ROM 1511b Various control program copy area 1511cd for storing a copy of the various control programs exclusively, and various data, various control data, various schedule data, etc. stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b, etc. Various control data copy area 1511ce for storing copied data exclusively, and backup non-management target for storing non-backup target data among various information updated by executing various control programs And a work area 1511cf.

  When the pachinko machine 1 is turned on (including when power is restored due to a momentary power failure or power failure), the value 0 is forcibly written to the backup unmanaged work area 1511cf and cleared to zero. For the management target work area 1511ca, the backup first area 1511cb, and the backup second area 1511cc, the power-on state command (see FIG. 89) from the main control board 1310 when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on starts the RAM clear effect. And a gaming state (for example, instructing the start of an effect when the operation switch 954 shown in FIG. 69 is operated within a predetermined period from when the power is turned on). Sometimes it is cleared to zero.

  The backup management target work area 1511ca is effect information (1fr) that is various information updated in the peripheral control unit steady process that is executed each time a V blank signal is input from the sound source built-in VDP 1512a of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 described later. ) Is stored exclusively as a backup target, and production information (1 ms) which is various information updated in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process executed every time a 1 ms timer interrupt described later occurs is backed up. Bank 0 (1 ms) that is stored exclusively as a target. Here, the names of Bank0 (1fr) and Bank0 (1 ms) will be briefly described. “Bank” is a minimum management unit representing the size of a storage area for storing various information. The subsequent “0” means that the storage area is normally used for storing various information updated by executing various control programs. That is, “Bank 0” means that the size of the storage area that is normally used is the minimum management unit. In addition, “Bank1,” “Bank2,” “Bank3,” and “Bank4” provided in an area from the backup first area 1511cb to the backup second area 1511cc, which will be described later, are in the same storage area as “Bank0”. It means having a size. As described later, “(1fr)” indicates that when the sound source built-in VDP 1512a outputs drawing data for one screen (one frame) to the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460, the peripheral control MPU 1511a. Since the V blank signal indicating that the screen data can be received from the peripheral control MPU 1511a is output to the peripheral control MPU 1511a, every time the V blank signal is input, in other words, one frame (1 frame) Since the peripheral control unit steady process is executed every time, “Bank 0”, “Bank 1”, “Bank 2”, “Bank 3”, and “Bank 4” are respectively added (effect information (1fr) and an effect described later) The backup information (1fr) is also used in the same meaning). As will be described later, “(1 ms)” indicates that “Bank 0”, “Bank 1”, “Bank 2”, “Bank 3”, And “Bank 4”, respectively (the effect information (1 ms) and the effect backup information (1 ms) described later are also used in the same meaning).

  Bank0 (1fr) includes a lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa, a frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab, a reception command storage area 1511cac, an RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad, and a schedule data storage area 1511cae. Etc. are provided. In the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa, the game board side light emission data SL-DAT for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs provided on each decoration board of the game board 5 is provided. Is stored in the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab, and a lighting signal, blinking signal, or gradation lighting to a plurality of LEDs provided on each decoration board of the door frame 3 This is a storage area in which door side light emission data STL-DAT for outputting a signal is set. In the reception command storage area 1511cac, various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 are received and the received various commands are stored. The RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad is an RTC control unit 4165 (an RTC 4165a described later). Various information acquired from the TC built-in RAM 4165aa) is set in a storage area, and the schedule data storage area 1511cae corresponds to the received command based on the command received from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1310a). This is a storage area in which various schedule data are set. In the schedule data storage area 1511cae, some schedule data copied from the peripheral control ROM 1511b to the various control data copy area 1511ce are read and set, and various schedule data are directly read from the peripheral control ROM 1511b. Some are set.

  Bank 0 (1 ms) includes a frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511 caf, a motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511 cag, a movable body information acquisition storage area 1511 cah, and a presentation operation unit information acquisition storage area 1511 cai, and A drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511cak and the like are provided. In the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf, door side motor drive data STM-DAT for outputting a drive signal to an electric drive source such as a dial drive motor 414 provided in the door frame 3 is stored. This is a storage area to be set, and a motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag is used to output a drive signal to an electric drive source such as a motor or solenoid for operating various movable bodies provided in the game board 5. This is a storage area where the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set. The movable body information acquisition storage area 1511cah is provided in the game board 5 based on detection signals from various detection switches provided in the game board 5. This is a storage area in which various information obtained by acquiring the original position and the movable position of various movable bodies is set, and the rendering operation unit information acquisition storage area 1511 ai includes various pieces of information (for example, a presentation operation) obtained from the rotation (rotation direction) of the dial operation unit 401 and the operation of the pressing operation unit 405 based on detection signals from various detection switches provided in the presentation operation unit 400. A storage area in which rotation (rotation direction) history information of the dial operation unit 401 created based on detection signals from various detection switches provided in the unit 400, operation history information of the pressing operation unit 405, and the like is set. Yes, in the drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511cak, when the presentation display drive board 4450 receives drawing data from the sound source built-in VDP 1512a of the peripheral control board 1510 and determines that the received drawing data is abnormal data, Peripheral control board 1510 and effects based on a LOCKN signal, which will be described later, output to convey the effect A storage area in which various information acquired defect frequency and bug occurrence between connection of the shown drive substrate 4450 is set.

  In addition, Bank0 (1fr) lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa and frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab, and Bank0 (1ms) frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf. The motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag is divided into two areas, a first area and a second area, respectively.

  In the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa, when the peripheral control unit steady process described later is executed, the game board side light emission data SL-DAT is set in the first area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa. When the next peripheral control unit steady process is executed, the game board side light emission data SL-DAT is set in the second area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa. Each time the process is executed, the game board side light emission data SL-DAT is alternately set in the first area and the second area of the lamp driving board side transmission data storage area 1511caa. For example, when the game board side light emission data SL-DAT is set in the second area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa in the current peripheral control part steady process, When the control unit steady process is executed, the process proceeds based on the game board side light emission data SL-DAT set in the first area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa.

  When the peripheral control unit steady process is executed, the frame decoration drive amplifier board-side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab has the door-side emission data STL in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board-side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab. When -DAT is set and the next peripheral control unit steady process is executed, the door-side emission data STL-DAT is set in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board-side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab. Each time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed, the door side light emission data STL-DAT is alternately set in the first area and the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab. The For example, when the door side light emission data STL-DAT is set in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab in the current peripheral control part steady process, When the previous peripheral control unit steady process is executed, the process proceeds based on the door side light emission data STL-DAT set in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED transmission data storage area 1511cab. It has become.

  The frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf is connected to the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf when a peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process described later is executed. When the side motor drive data STM-DAT is set and the next peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the door side motor drive data STM is stored in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf. -DAT is set, and each time the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the door side is connected to the first area and the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf. Motor drive data STM-DAT is set alternately. The peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed. For example, in this peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, the door side motor drive data STM-DAT is stored in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511 caf. When set, the door side motor drive data STM-DAT set in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf when the previous peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process was executed. The process is based on this.

  When the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag is set with the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT in the first area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag. When the next peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set in the second area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag, Each time the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT are alternately set in the first area and the second area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag. Peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed. For example, in the current peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set in the second area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511 cag. Sometimes, when the previous peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the process proceeds based on the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT set in the first area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag. It is like that.

  Next, the backup first area 1511cb and backup second area 1511cc that store specially copied production information which is various information stored in the backup management target work area 1511ca will be described. In the backup first area 1511cb and the backup second area 1511cc, two pairs of two banks are managed as one page. Production information (1fr), which is the content stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a storage area that is normally used, is produced as production backup information (1fr) every time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed for each frame (1frame). In addition, production information (1 ms) which is the content stored in Bank 0 (1 ms), which is a storage area normally used, is copied to the backup first area 1511 cb and the backup second area 1511 cc at high speed by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac. As the production backup information (1 ms), the peripheral control DMA controller 15 is added to the backup first area 1511 cb and the backup second area 1511 cc every time the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed every time a 1 ms timer interrupt occurs. It is copied to the high speed by 1ac. The consistency of one page is determined by whether or not the contents of two banks constituting the page match.

  Specifically, the backup first area 1511cb is managed as a pair of Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) as one pair and Bank1 (1ms) and Bank2 (1ms) as one pair. ing. The contents stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a storage area that is normally used, are the peripheral control DMA in Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) each time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed for each frame (1frame). The memory that is copied at high speed by the controller 1511ac and stored in Bank0 (1 ms), which is a storage area that is normally used, is stored every time a peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed every time a 1 ms timer interrupt occurs. The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac copies the data to Bank1 (1ms) and Bank2 (1ms) at high speed. The consistency of this page is determined by whether the contents of Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) match, and Bank1 (1ms) and Bank2 ( It carried out by whether or not the contents of the ms) are the same.

  The backup second area 1511cc is managed as one page with a total of two pairs, with Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) as one pair and Bank3 (1ms) and Bank4 (1ms) as one pair. The contents stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a storage area that is normally used, are the peripheral control DMA in Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) each time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed for each frame (1frame). The memory that is copied at high speed by the controller 1511ac and stored in Bank0 (1 ms), which is a storage area that is normally used, is stored every time a peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed every time a 1 ms timer interrupt occurs. The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac copies the data to Bank3 (1 ms) and Bank4 (1 ms) at high speed. The consistency of this page is determined by whether or not the contents of Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) match. Bank3 (1 ms) and Bank4 ( It carried out by whether or not the contents of the ms) are the same.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the backup first area 1511cb has one pair of Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr), and one pair of Bank1 (1ms) and Bank2 (1ms). It is an area to manage as a page, and the backup second area 1511cc has a total of two pairs, with Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) as one pair and Bank3 (1ms) and Bank4 (1ms) as one pair. This is an area for management as one page. Different ID codes are stored at the beginning and end of each page, that is, at the beginning and end of the backup first area 1511cb and backup second area 1511cc.

  In the present embodiment, the production information (1fr) that is the content stored in Bank0 (1fr) that is a storage area that is normally used is the production control information (1fr), and the peripheral control unit for each frame (1frame). Every time the steady process is executed, the contents are copied to the backup first area 1511cb and the backup second area 1511cc at high speed by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac and stored in Bank0 (1 ms) which is a storage area normally used. The production information (1 ms) is the backup first area 1511 cb and the backup second area 1511 cc each time the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interruption process is executed every time a 1 ms timer interruption occurs as production backup information (1 ms). Peripheral control Although designed to be copied at a high speed by the MA controller 1511Ac, a program for executing a fast copy from these peripheral control DMA controller 1511Ac are common. That is, in this embodiment, the production information (1fr) and the production information (1 ms) are managed by a common management method (execution of a common program).

[7-4-1d. Peripheral control SRAM]
A peripheral control SRAM 1511d externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a includes a backup management target work area 1511da that exclusively stores information to be backed up among various information updated by executing various control programs. A backup first area 1511db and a backup second area 1511dc are provided for storing a copy of various information stored in the backup management target work area 1511da. The contents stored in the peripheral control SRAM 1511d are the power-on state commands from the main control board 1310 when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on (including power recovery due to an instantaneous power failure or power failure) (see FIG. 89). Is for instructing the start of the RAM clear effect and the gaming state (for example, instructing the start of the effect when the operation switch 954 shown in FIG. 69 is operated within a predetermined period from when the power is turned on. Is not cleared to zero. This is completely different from the point that the backup management target work area 1511ca, the backup first area 1511cb, and the backup second area 1511cc of the peripheral control RAM 1511c are cleared to zero. Further, if the dial operation unit 401 or the press operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 is operated within a predetermined time after the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. It has come to be. By operating the dial operation unit 401 and the press operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 according to the setting mode screen, each content (item) stored in the peripheral control SRAM 1511d (for example, the history of occurrence of the big hit gaming state) The contents (items) stored in the peripheral control RAM 1511c are not displayed at all, and cannot be cleared in the setting mode. This point is also completely different between the peripheral control RAM 1511c and the peripheral control SRAM 1511d.

  The backup management target work area 1511da is production information (SRAM) that is various information continued across days (for example, information for managing the history of occurrence of the big hit gaming state and special production flag management) Information) and the like are stored in a dedicated manner as a backup target. Here, the name of Bank 0 (SRAM) will be briefly described. As described above, “Bank” is a minimum management unit indicating the size of a storage area for storing various types of information. The subsequent “0” means a storage area that is normally used for storing various information updated by executing various control programs. That is, “Bank 0” means that the size of the storage area that is normally used is the minimum management unit. “Bank1,” “Bank2,” “Bank3,” and “Bank4” provided in an area from the backup first area 1511db to the backup second area 1511dc, which will be described later, are in the same storage area as “Bank0”. It means having a size. Since “(SRAM)” is a backup target of various information stored in the peripheral control SRAM 1511d externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a, “Bank0”, “Bank1”, “Bank2”, “Bank3” , And “Bank 4”, respectively (effect information (SRAM) and effect backup information (SRAM) to be described later are also used in the same meaning).

  Next, the backup first area 1511db and backup second area 1511dc that store specially copied production information (SRAM), which is various information stored in the backup management target work area 1511da, will be described. The backup first area 1511db and the backup second area 1511dc are managed with two banks as one pair, and this one pair as one page. Production information (SRAM), which is the content stored in Bank0 (SRAM), which is a storage area used normally, is production backup information (SRAM) each time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed for each frame (1 frame). The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac copies the backup first area 1511db and the backup second area 1511dc at high speed. The consistency of one page is determined by whether or not the contents of two banks constituting the page match.

  Specifically, in the backup first area 1511db, Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) are managed as one pair, and this one pair is managed as one page. The contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM), which is a storage area that is normally used, are stored in the peripheral control DMA in Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) each time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed for each frame (1 frame). This page is copied at high speed by the controller 1511ac, and the consistency of this page is determined by whether or not the contents of Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) match.

  In the backup second area 1511dc, Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) are managed as one pair, and this one pair is managed as one page. The contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM), which is a storage area that is normally used, are stored in the peripheral control DMA in Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) each time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed for each frame (1 frame). This page is copied at high speed by the controller 1511ac, and the consistency of this page is determined by whether or not the contents of Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) match.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the backup first area 1511db is an area for managing Bank 1 (SRAM) and Bank 2 (SRAM) as one pair, and managing this one pair as one page. 1511 dc is an area for managing Bank 3 (SRAM) and Bank 4 (SRAM) as one pair, and managing this one pair as one page. Different ID codes are stored at the beginning and the end of each page, that is, at the beginning and the end of the backup first area 1511db and the backup second area 1511dc.

[7-4-2. Liquid crystal display controller]
FIG. 72 shows a liquid crystal display control unit 1512 that performs drawing control of the game board side effect display device 1600 and door frame side effect display device 460 and sound control such as music and sound effects flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. As described above, a sound source for controlling sound such as music and sound effects is built in (hereinafter referred to as “built-in sound source”), and drawing on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is performed. A sound source built-in VDP (Video Display Processor) 1512a for performing control, various character data on the screen displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460, as well as various data such as music and sound effects Liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b for storing sound data, serialized music, sound effects, etc. as audio data Audio data transmission IC 1512c that transmits toward the decorative drive amplifier board 194, and door frame side effect display attached to the right side of the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3 with drawing data serialized to the door frame side effect display device 460 Serial data output from door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d which is arranged near the lower part of device 460 and transmitted toward effect display drive board 4450 housed in dish unit 320, and peripheral control MPU 1511a of peripheral control unit 1511 In addition to the signal output from the differential circuit 1512e that differentiates the LOCKN signal output request data into a plus signal and a minus signal and the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d, the signal from the difference circuit 1512e And a signal from the differential circuit 1512e When the signal is inputted, the circuit is connected so as to transmit this signal, while when the signal from the differential circuit 1512e is not inputted, the signal outputted from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d is transmitted. And a forced switching circuit 1512f connected to the circuit. The liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b displays, for example, annular image data used for displaying a ring-shaped display object (annular display object), and an operation menu background image described later as sprite data used for displaying a screen or an image described later. Operation menu background image data to be used, selection display object image data used for displaying at least one selection display object described later, tone adjustment background image data used for displaying a volume adjustment screen including a volume scale described later, and a volume adjustment icon described later In addition to volume setting icon image data used for display, display of main body frame rear surface image data and service mode screen used for display of main body frame rear image in which the position of each part on the rear surface of main body frame 4 can be viewed when viewed from the player Service mode screen image data used for breaks, breaks used to display break timer setting screens Timer setting screen image data, and, during breaks screen image data used for displaying the break in the screen is stored. Note that the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b also stores suggestion display object image data used for displaying the suggestion display object for prompting the user to operate the pressing operation unit 405 (operation unit) of the effect operation unit 400.

  The peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 extracts screen generation schedule data corresponding to the command from the main control board 1310 from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. Set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and the top screen data of the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae is stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the peripheral control RAM 1511c of the peripheral control unit 1511. After being extracted from the control data copy area 1511ce and output to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a, the schedule data is triggered by the input of the V blank signal described later. The next screen data following the first screen data is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c in accordance with the screen generation schedule data set in the storage area 1511cae and has a built-in sound source. Output to VDP 1512a. As described above, the peripheral control MPU 1511a converts the screen data arranged in time series into the screen generation schedule data according to the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae every time the V blank signal is input. In addition, the first screen data is output to the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source one by one.

  Also, the peripheral control MPU 1511a receives the sound command data at the head of the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the command from the main control board 1310 from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. Extracted and set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, the head sound command data of the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae is the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the peripheral After extracting from the various control data copy area 1511ce of the control RAM 1511c and outputting it to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a, the schedule data recording is triggered by the input of the V blank signal. In accordance with the sound generation schedule data set in the area 1511cae, the next sound command data following the head sound command data is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and the sound source Output to the built-in VDP 1512a. As described above, the peripheral control MPU 1511a receives the sound command data arranged in time series in the sound generation schedule data according to the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae, and the V blank signal is input. Each time, the head sound command data is output to the built-in sound source VDP 1512a one by one.

[7-4-2a. Sound source built-in VDP]
When the screen data is input from the peripheral control MPU 1511a in addition to the above-described built-in sound source, the sound source built-in VDP 1512a receives a game board from the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b based on the input screen data as shown in FIG. The drawing data for one screen (one frame) displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is generated by extracting the side character data and the upper plate character data and generating sprite data. VRAM for this purpose is also built-in (hereinafter referred to as “built-in VRAM”). The sound source built-in VDP 1512a outputs the drawing data for the game board side effect display device 1600 out of the drawing data generated on the built-in VRAM to the game board side effect display device 1600 from the channel CH1 and the door frame side effect display device 460. Drawing data is transmitted from the channel CH2 via a peripheral control output circuit (not shown), a frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, a peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and an effect display drive board 4450 stored in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3. By outputting (transmitting) to the door frame side effect display device 460, the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 are synchronized.

  The drawing data output from the channel CH1 is output from the peripheral control board 1510 to the game board side effect display device 1600, whereas the drawing data output from the channel CH2 is transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay. The terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the effect display which is disposed in the vicinity of the lower side of the door frame side effect display device 460 attached to the right side of the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3 and is stored in the plate unit 320. It is output (transmitted) to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the drive substrate 4450. As described above, the drawing data output from the channel CH1 is output from the peripheral control board 1510 to the game board side effect display apparatus 1600 as described above, so that the peripheral control board 1510 and the game board side effect display apparatus 1600 Although the wiring length required for the route from the channel CH1 to the game board side effect display device 1600 is short by being attached to the game board 5, the drawing data output from the channel CH2 is the peripheral data as described above. The peripheral control board 1510 is attached to the game board 5 because it is output from the control board 1510 to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3. On the other hand, the effect display drive board 4450 is housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3. The length of the wiring required for the route from the channel CH2 to the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and the effect display drive board 4450 is extremely longer than that of the channel CH1, so that it is extremely susceptible to noise. Become. Therefore, for the channel CH2 in which the length of the wiring for sending the drawing data is extremely longer than the channel CH1, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d uses “V-by-One ( By adopting a differential communication called “registered trademark”, the system is less susceptible to noise.

Channel CH1 is LVDS (Low Voltage Differential)
In contrast to the serial interface differential interface (Signaling), the channel CH2 uses a parallel interface. The drawing data output from the channel CH2 is composed of three video signals, a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal, and three synchronization signals, a horizontal synchronization signal, a vertical synchronization signal, and a clock signal. Serialized by the door frame side effect transmitter IC 4610d and housed in a peripheral control output circuit (not shown), a frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, a peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and the tray unit 320 of the door frame 3. It is transmitted to the effect display drive board 4450. The various serialized signals are restored to parallel signals in the effect display drive board 4450 and output to the door frame effect display device 460.

  As described above, when the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs the screen data for one screen (one frame) displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a, Based on the input screen data, character data is extracted from the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b to create sprite data and displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 (1 Frame data) is generated on the built-in VRAM, and among the generated drawing data, image data for the game board side effect display device 1600 is output from the channel CH1 to the game board side effect display device 1600, and the door frame side The image data for the effect display device 460 is illustrated from the channel CH2. Output to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3. (Send. That is, “screen data for one screen (for one frame)” means drawing data for one screen (for one frame) displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. This is the data to generate above.

  The sound source built-in VDP 1512a outputs drawing data for one screen (for one frame) from the channel CH1 to the game board side effect display device 1600, and also displays image data for the door frame side effect display device 460 from the channel CH2. Output to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3. When (transmission) is performed, a V blank signal indicating that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU 1511a can be received is output to the peripheral control MPU 1511a. In this embodiment, since the frame frequency (number of screen updates per second) of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is set to approximately 30 fps per second, a V blank signal is output. The interval is about 33.3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 30 fps). The peripheral control MPU 1511a is configured to execute a peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt process to be described later when this V blank signal is input. Here, the interval at which the V blank signal is output varies somewhat depending on the liquid crystal sizes of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. In addition, even in the manufacturing lot of the peripheral control board 1510 on which the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the sound source built-in VDP 1512a are mounted, the interval at which the V blank signal is output may slightly change.

  The sound source built-in VDP 1512a employs a frame buffer method. In this “frame buffer method”, drawing data for one screen (one frame) to be drawn on the screens of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is held in a frame buffer (built-in VRAM). The drawing data for one screen (one frame) held in the frame buffer (built-in VRAM) is output to the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460.

  When the sound command data described above is input from the peripheral control MPU 1511a based on a command from the main control board 1310, the sound source built-in VDP 1512a receives music stored in the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b as shown in FIG. By extracting sound data such as sound and sound effects and controlling the built-in sound source, sound data such as music and sound effects are incorporated into the track according to the track number specified in the sound command data and used according to the output channel number An output channel is set, and music, sound effects and the like flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 are serialized and output as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 1512c.

  Note that the sound command data also includes a sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the track in which the sound data is incorporated, and a plurality of tracks in the built-in sound source of the sound source built-in VDP 1512a include effect sounds such as music and sound effects. In addition to the sub-volume value for adjusting the sound data and the volume of the sound, the sound data of the notification sound and the sound volume for notifying the clerk of the hall of the occurrence of the malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 and the fraud to the pachinko machine 1 are adjusted. Subvolume value to be included. Specifically, for the production sound, the substrate volume adjusted by rotating the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 1510a described above is set as the sub volume value, and for the notification sound, the volume adjustment is performed. The maximum volume is set as the sub-volume value without depending on the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob portion of the volume 1510a. The sub-volume value of the effect sound can be adjusted by shifting to a setting mode (to be described later) by operating the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400.

  The sound designation data also includes a master volume value for adjusting the volume of the output channel, and a plurality of output channels in the built-in sound source of the built-in sound source VDP 1512a include a plurality of sound channels in the built-in sound source of the sound source built-in VDP 1512a. Of the tracks, the sound data of the production sound built into the track to be used is combined with the sub-volume value that adjusts the volume of the production sound built into the track to be used. Actually, it is amplified to a master volume value that is a volume flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, and the amplified effect sound is serialized and output to the audio data transmission IC 1512c as audio data.

  In the present embodiment, the master volume value is set to a constant value, and when the volume of the combined effect sound is the maximum volume, the master volume value is amplified to the master volume value and flows from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. The volume is set to the maximum allowable volume. Specifically, for the production sound, among the multiple tracks, the sound data of the production sound incorporated in the track to be used and the sub-volume value that adjusts the volume of the production sound incorporated in the track to be used The set volume of the volume adjustment volume 1510a is combined with the substrate volume that has been adjusted by turning the volume, and the volume of the combined performance sound actually flows from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. Is amplified to a master volume value, and the amplified production sound is serialized and output as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 1512c. For the notification sound, the sound data of the notification sound incorporated in the track to be used; Volume control set as a sub-volume value that adjusts the volume of the notification sound built into the track to be used The maximum volume without depending on the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob portion of the volume 1510a is synthesized, and the volume of the synthesized notification sound is actually the volume flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. The master volume value is amplified, and the amplified notification sound is serialized and output as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 1512c.

  Here, when the production sound is flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, it is easy to control the flow of the notification sound so as to notify the hall clerk or the like of the occurrence of the malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 or the illegal act against the pachinko machine 1. First, the subvolume value of the track in which the production sound is incorporated is forcibly set to mute, the sound data of the track in which this production sound is incorporated, the subvolume value set for the mute, and the notification The sound data of the track in which the sound is incorporated and the sub-volume value in which the volume of the notification sound is set to the maximum volume are synthesized, and the volume of the synthesized production sound and the volume of the notification sound are actually It amplifies to the master volume value that is the volume that flows from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, and serializes the amplified effect sound and the notification sound. And it outputs the audio data transmitted IC1512c as Iodeta.

  That is, in reality, only the notification sound having the maximum volume flows from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. At this time, since the effect sound is muted, the effect sound proceeds in accordance with the sound generation schedule data described above, although it does not flow from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. In this embodiment, the notification sound flows from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 for a predetermined period (for example, 90 seconds), and when the predetermined period elapses, sound generation that has been forcibly set to mute until now is generated. The volume of the effect sound that is proceeding according to the schedule data for use is set again as the sub-volume value by adjusting the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 1510a. When the operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 is operated to adjust to the setting mode, the sub volume value of the adjusted production sound is set), and the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 are used. It comes to flow.

  In this way, when the production sound is flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, when the notification sound flows to notify the clerk or the like of the hall of the occurrence of the malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 or the fraudulent act on the pachinko machine 1, Although the volume of the production sound is muted and the notification sound flows from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, the production sound that has been muted proceeds in accordance with the sound generation schedule data. Then, when it stops flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, the production sound does not start to flow again from the point where the notification sound starts to flow, but according to the sound generation schedule data until a predetermined period has passed since the notification sound started to flow. It starts to flow again from where it has progressed.

[7-4-2b. Liquid crystal and sound control ROM]
As shown in FIG. 74, the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b draws the game board side character data for drawing in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the display area of the door frame side effect display device 460. The upper plate side character data is stored in advance, and various sound data such as music, sound effects, notification sounds, and notification sounds are also stored in advance.

[7-4-2c. Audio data transmission IC]
When the audio data transmission IC 1512c receives the serialized audio data from the sound source built-in VDP 1512a, the audio data transmission IC 1512c converts the right audio data as a positive signal and a negative signal as differential serial data, and outputs a peripheral control output circuit (not shown) A peripheral control output circuit (not shown) is transmitted to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 via the terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 and as differential serial data with the left audio data as a positive signal and a negative signal. Then, the frame is transmitted to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 via the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882. Thereby, music, sound effects and the like adapted to various effects are reproduced from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 in stereo.

  The audio data transmission IC 1512c outputs audio data as serial data of the left and right differential methods between the boards extending from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194, for example, a positive signal of the left audio data, Even when the negative signal is affected by noise, the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 combines the noise component riding on the plus signal and the noise component riding on the minus signal into one left audio data. Since noise components are canceled by canceling each other, noise countermeasures can be taken.

[7-4-2d. Transmitter IC for door frame side production]
As shown in FIG. 74, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d receives drawing data output from the channel CH2 of the sound source built-in VDP 1512a. As described above, the channel CH2 uses a parallel interface. The drawing data is composed of three video signals, a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal, and three synchronization signals, a horizontal synchronization signal, a vertical synchronization signal, and a clock signal. Each of the green video signal and the blue video signal is composed of 8 bits and a total of 24 bits. In the present embodiment, the red video signal, the green video signal, and the blue video signal that can be input to the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d are 6 bits each, for a total of 18 bits, and therefore the upper 6 bits in each video signal are the door frame. It is input to the side effect transmitter IC 1512d. Since the lower 2 bits are extremely weak color information that is difficult for human eyes to discriminate, the lower 2 bits including the weak color information are invalidated although they are output from the sound source built-in VDP 1512a.

  Three video signals such as a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal, and three synchronization signals such as a horizontal synchronization signal, a vertical synchronization signal, and a clock signal, which are drawing data output from the channel CH2 of the sound source built-in VDP 1512a. Are input to the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d receives three video signals, a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal, a horizontal synchronization signal, and a vertical synchronization signal. The signal and the three synchronization signals, the clock signal, are serialized into a differential serial signal (serial data) called “V-by-One (registered trademark)” of THINE ELECTRONICS CO., LTD. These various signals are transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 around the frame. Terminal plate 868, near the door relay terminal plate 882, and transmitted to effect display driving board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3.

  As described above, the drawing data output from the channel CH1 of the sound source built-in VDP 1512a is output from the peripheral control board 1510 to the game board side effect display device 1600, and therefore the path from the channel CH1 to the game board side effect display device 1600. Although the length of the wiring required for the (first path) is short, the drawing data output from the channel CH2 of the sound source built-in VDP 1512a includes the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and the door from the peripheral control board 1510. Since it is output (transmitted) to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the effect display drive substrate 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the frame 3, the route from the channel CH 2 to the door frame side effect display device 460 (first) The length of the wiring required for the second path) is extremely longer than the length of the wiring required for the first path. The effect of the noise is extremely susceptible.

Specifically, since the door frame 3 is pivotally supported so as to be openable and closable with respect to the main body frame 4 shown in FIG. 1, it is opposite to the locking unit 700 shown in FIG. 5 along the open side of the main body frame 4. On the closed side which is the side, for example, on the side of the main body frame 4 such as the effect display drive board 4450 accommodated in the dish unit 320 provided in the door frame 3 from the peripheral control board 1510 provided in the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4 It is necessary to pass various wirings for electrically connecting the various substrates provided and the various substrates provided on the door frame 3 side. However, on the closed side of the main body frame 4, in addition to the payout device 830, the game balls paid out by the payout device 830 can be guided to the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320, and the upper plate 321 is a game ball. A full tank branching unit 770 that can branch and guide the paid-out game ball to the lower plate 322 side when the tank is full is arranged.
Also, below the main body frame 4, a payout unit 800 shown in FIG. 5 is arranged in which the power supply board 931 and the like shown in FIG. As described above, various wirings for electrically connecting the various substrates provided on the main body frame 4 side and the various substrates provided on the door frame 3 side are drawn near the dispensing device 830, the full tank branching unit 770, the power supply substrate 931, and the like. In addition to the noise caused by driving the payout motor 834 provided in the payout device 830, the power supply line supplied from the pachinko island equipment where the pachinko machine 1 is installed and noise caused by electrostatic discharge due to the game ball It is in an environment where it receives noise etc.

  For this reason, for the channel CH2 in which the length of the wiring for sending drawing data is extremely longer than that of the channel CH1, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 provides “ By adopting a differential communication called “V-by-One (registered trademark)”, the mechanism is less susceptible to noise. In this embodiment, a door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510, a door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 described later provided in the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3, As described above, the differential 1-pair cable is used as the wiring for electrically connecting the transmitter and the receiver, and this differential 1-pair cable is composed of two wires. Is not a parallel line provided in parallel, but a twisted pair cable. This twisted pair cable is a cable in which two wires are twisted together, and is also called a twisted pair wire.

  Here, the case where a parallel line is adopted as a differential one-pair cable for electrically connecting a transmitter and a receiver will be briefly described. For the channel CH2 of the sound source built-in VDP 1512a in which the length of the wiring for sending the drawing data is extremely longer than the channel CH1 of the sound source built-in VDP 1512a, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 Even if it is a mechanism that is difficult to be affected by noise by adopting a differential communication called “V-by-One (registered trademark)” of Co., Ltd., it is only due to electrostatic discharge of a game ball with such a hardware configuration. When serial data on parallel lines is affected by noise, noise entering the power supply line supplied from the pachinko island facility where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, etc., an effect display stored in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3 For door frame side effects on drive board 4450 Since the noise is not canceled (removed) when it is received by the shiver ICSDIC0, the serial data is received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 in an affected state, and is output from the channel CH2 of the sound source built-in VDP1512a. The drawing data to be received is received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 as being disturbed different from the normal one. In the display area of the door frame side effect display device 460, a so-called sand storm-like image is displayed. There is a problem that it cannot be recognized at all.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the door frame side provided on the peripheral control board 1510 with respect to the channel CH2 of the sound source built-in VDP 1512a in which the length of the wiring for sending drawing data is extremely longer than the channel CH1 of the sound source built-in VDP 1512a. In the transmitter IC1512d for production, the differential communication called “V-by-One (registered trademark)” of Zain Electronics Co., Ltd. is adopted to make it difficult to be affected by noise, and in addition to such hardware configuration Even if differential serial data is affected by noise that enters the wiring, a twisted pair cable that can cancel (remove) the noise on the receiving side is electrically connected between the transmitter and the receiver. It was adopted as a differential 1 pair cable. As a result, even if serial data is affected in the twisted pair cable due to noise caused by electrostatic discharge of the game ball, noise entering the power supply line supplied from the pachinko island facility where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, etc., the door frame Since the noise is canceled (removed) when receiving by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the third dish unit 320, the channel of the sound source built-in VDP 1512a The drawing data output from CH2 is reliably received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive substrate 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3 and output to the door frame side effect display device 460. By doing so, in the door frame side effect display device 460, the liquid crystal display control unit 151 Image source built VDP1512a has generated a can be reliably displayed. By canceling (removing) the noise, it is possible to prevent the door frame side effect display device 460 from displaying an image that makes it impossible to recognize what the image is like a sandstorm. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to play. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to play due to the influence of noise.

  In this embodiment, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 described later provided in the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3 are provided. The frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 are interposed between the connections between the transmitter and the receiver, that is, between the transmitter and the receiver. This is because the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 are not configured integrally, but a structure in which the door frame 3 is attached to the main body frame 4 after being assembled separately is adopted. After the operation of attaching the door frame 3 to the door 4, electrically connect various wirings such as harnesses and twist cables from various boards provided on the door frame 3 side to the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 provided on the main body frame 4 side. Thus, various substrates provided on the main body frame 4 side and various substrates provided on the door frame 3 side can be electrically connected. With such a configuration, after the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4 and various wirings are removed, the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 can be maintained by removing the door frame 3 from the main body frame 4. If the problem that occurred in the door frame 3 cannot be resolved, another door frame 3 ′ is attached to the main body frame 4 instead of the defective door frame 3, and the door frame 3 By electrically connecting various wirings from various substrates provided on the 'side to the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 provided on the main body frame 4 side, various substrates provided on the main body frame 4 side and various types provided on the door frame 3' side The substrate can be electrically connected.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 employs differential communication called “V-by-One (registered trademark)” of Zain Electronics Co., Ltd. In addition to this hardware configuration, even if differential serial data is affected by noise that enters the wiring, the receiver cancels (removes) the noise. The twisted-pair cable that can be used as a differential one-pair cable that electrically connects the transmitter and the receiver. Specifically, between the peripheral control board 1510 and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, between the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 and the effect display drive. The board 4450 and the board 4450 are each electrically connected by a twisted pair cable, while the power supply wiring and other lines for transmitting various signals are electrically connected by a harness. Thereby, in addition to the video transmission wiring pattern for transmitting the serial data by the differential method transmitted by the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d, the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, A power supply wiring pattern and various signal wiring patterns for transmitting various other signals are mixed. For this reason, the above-described video transmission wiring patterns are formed on the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 by being separated from the power supply wiring pattern and various signal wiring patterns by a predetermined dimension. Since the route from the transmitter to the receiver spans a plurality of relay terminal plates such as the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, the video transmission formed on the plurality of relay terminal plates is used. Between the input and output of the wiring pattern, there is a problem that a part of the signal for transmitting the serial data by the differential method transmitted by the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d is reflected and becomes noise, or the output level of the signal is lowered. Will occur. Therefore, in this embodiment, impedance matching is performed on the video transmission wiring patterns formed on the plurality of relay terminal boards.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, between the peripheral control board 1510 and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, between the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the peripheral door relay. Between the board of the terminal board 882 and the production display drive board 4450, each is electrically connected by a twisted pair cable, whereas in the wiring for transmitting power supply wiring and other various signals, each is electrically connected by a harness. Although one of the twisted pair cables is red and the other is gray, the wiring that supplies power is red and the other multiple wirings are gray. . Note that the power supply wiring may be yellow instead of red.

[7-4-2e. Forced switching circuit, differential circuit]
Signals output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d are sent to the forced switching circuit 1512f, the peripheral control output circuit (not shown), the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and the tray unit 320 of the door frame 3. It is transmitted to the stored effect display drive board 4450. The forced switching circuit 1512f includes LOCKN signal output request data which is serial data output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 in addition to the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d. Is differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal in the differencing circuit 1512e. The differential circuit 1512e serializes the LOCKN signal output request data into a differential serial signal (serial data). This LOCKN signal output request data is displayed during the period when the start-up screen at the time of power-on of the pachinko machine 1 is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600, or in the state of waiting for the customer and the demonstration by the game board side effect display device 1600. During the period of time, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510, and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 described later provided in the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3; Is transmitted as an operation confirmation request of the door frame side effect display device 460 in order to confirm whether or not there is a problem in the connection between the transmitters, that is, between the transmitter and the receiver. The forcible switching circuit 1512f is connected to the circuit so as to transmit the two signals that are differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal in the differentiation circuit 1512e, while transmitting the two signals. When the two signals differentiated into the plus signal and the minus signal are not inputted in the merging circuit 1512e, the circuit configuration is such that the circuit is connected so as to transmit the signal outputted from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d. Has been. As a result, when two signals differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal are input in the differential circuit 1512e, the two signals are connected to each other so as to transmit the two signals. The peripheral control board 1510 transmits the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3, while the differential circuit 1512e When two signals differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal are not input, a circuit is connected so as to transmit a signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d. Signals output from the IC 1512d are transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 8. 2, and transmitted to the effect display driving board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3. The peripheral control MPU 1511a is performing a demonstration by the game board side effect display device 1600 during a period when the start-up screen when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600, or in a waiting state. In the period, the LOCKN signal output request data is transmitted toward the effect display drive board 4450 (actually, the differential circuit 1512e provided in the peripheral control board 1510) housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3.

  The effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3 receives various serialized signals when receiving a serial signal (serial data) from the peripheral control board 1510 by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 described later. The liquid crystal module circuit 4450V that restores the signal to a parallel signal and outputs the parallel signal to the door frame side effect display device 460 is mainly configured.

  When receiving the drawing data from the sound source built-in VDP 1512a and determining that the received drawing data is abnormal data, the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 transmits a LOCKN signal to be described later to the peripheral door relay terminal board 882. Then, the data is output to the peripheral control board 1510 via the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868. The LOCKN signal is input to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via a peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control board 1510. Peripheral control MPU 1511a, based on the input LOCKN signal, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, generates an image for informing that effect by controlling sound source built-in VDP 1512a and outputs it to game board side effect display device 1600. Is displayed on the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and notified.

  Further, when the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 determines that the two received signals are LOCKN signal output request data, the LOCKN signal described later is transmitted to the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 and the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868. Via the peripheral control board 1510. The LOCKN signal is input to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via a peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control board 1510. Accordingly, the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines that there is no problem in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver when the LOCKN signal is input as a response signal to the transmission of the LOCKN signal output request data. 320, it can be determined that there is no problem with the effect display drive board 4450 housed in 320, but there is a problem with the connection between the transmitter and the receiver when the LOCKN signal is not input. It is determined that a defect has occurred in the effect display drive board 4450 stored in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3, and a notification image (for example, “a defect has occurred in the upper dish side liquid crystal display device” is reported. Please call the store clerk. ”) In addition to being output to the display device 1600, a notification sound indicating that effect (for example, “a defect has occurred in the upper plate side liquid crystal display device”) is output to the audio data transmission IC 1512c by controlling the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source. As a result, a notification sound flows from the speaker provided in the door frame 3. Thereby, notification can be performed by the notification image displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the notification sound that repeatedly flows from the speaker or the like provided on the door frame 3. At this time, all of the LEDs for light emitting decoration provided in the door frame 3 and the various LEDs mounted on the various decoration boards provided in the game board 5 may be turned on.

[7-4-3. RTC control unit]
As shown in FIG. 72, the RTC control unit 4165 that holds calendar information for specifying the date and time and time information for specifying the hour, minute, and second is configured with the RTC 4165a as the center. The RTC 4165a has a built-in RAM 4165aa that holds calendar information and time information (hereinafter referred to as “RTC built-in RAM 4165aa”). The RTC 4165a is supplied with power from a battery 4165b (in this embodiment, a button battery is used) as a driving power source and a backup power source for the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa. That is, the RTC 4165a is not supplied with any power from the peripheral control board 1510 (pachinko machine 1), but is supplied with power from the battery 4165b independently of the peripheral control board 1510 (pachinko machine 1). Thereby, even if the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, the RTC 4165a can update and hold calendar information and time information by supplying power from the battery 4165b.

  The peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 acquires calendar information and time information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC 4165a, sets the information in the RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and stores the acquired calendar information and time information. An effect based on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 can be unfolded. Examples of such effects include a Christmas tree or reindeer screen on December 25 on the game board side effect display device 1600 and door frame side effect display device 460, or a New Year countdown on New Year's Eve. The screen to be executed may be unfolded on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. Calendar information and time information are set at the time of factory shipment.

  In addition to calendar information and time information, the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa stores and holds LED brightness setting information when the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is an LED type. Yes. The peripheral control MPU 1511a obtains luminance setting information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa and adjusts the luminance of the backlight by PWM control when the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is LED type. . The luminance setting information includes luminance adjustment information for adjusting the range of the luminance of the LED, which is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600, from 100% to 70% in increments of 5%, and the currently set game. The brightness of the LED which is the backlight of the board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is included.

  In addition to the calendar information, time information, and luminance setting information, the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa stores the calendar information, time information, and luminance setting information as date / time and hour / minute / second information that was first stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa. Input date information is also stored.

  When the backlights of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 are mounted with a cold cathode tube type, the peripheral control MPU 1511a performs the ON / OFF control of the backlight or only ON. It is supposed to be.

  Various information stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa, such as calendar information, time information, luminance setting information, and input date / time information, is set in the production line of the gaming machine manufacturer. In the production line, for example, in order to perform various tests such as a display test of the game board side effect display device 1600, the year when the input date information is input on the production line as the date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 was first turned on. Set to the date and time of manufacture, which is the date and time.

  Thus, in addition to calendar information and time information, the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa has brightness setting information and input date / time information when the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is an LED type. In addition, it is possible to store and hold information that needs to be maintained independently of the model information of the pachinko machine 1 (for example, the probability of occurrence of a big hit gaming state with low probability or high probability).

  Also, the brightness setting information stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa may be too bright for the backlight brightness of the game board side effect display device 1600 set at the date of manufacture depending on the environment of the hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. It may be too dark. Therefore, by operating the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400, the mode can be shifted to the setting mode and the backlight luminance can be adjusted to a predetermined luminance. When the dial operation unit 401 or the press operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 is operated within a predetermined time after the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. In addition, when the dial operation unit 401 or the press operation unit 405 of the production operation unit 400 is operated during the period when the game board side production display device 1600 is in the waiting state and the demonstration operation is performed, the setting mode is performed. Is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. By operating the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 according to the setting mode screen, the calendar information and time information can be reset, or the backlight brightness of the game board side effect display device 1600 can be set as desired. Or adjust the brightness. The adjusted desired luminance of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is overwritten (updated) as the luminance of the LED stored in the luminance setting information.

  In the setting mode, the peripheral control MPU 1511a executes the above-described brightness correction program, so that when the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is an LED type, the game board side effect is provided. The luminance decrease due to the secular change of the display device 1600 is corrected. The peripheral control MPU 1511a obtains input date / time information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165, specifies the date / time when the game board side effect display device 1600 is first turned on, and specifies calendar information and time for specifying the year / month / day. Time information that specifies minutes and seconds is acquired, the current date and time are specified, and the brightness range of the LED, which is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600, is adjusted in increments of 5%. Brightness setting information including brightness adjustment information for performing and the brightness of the LED that is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 that is currently set. The acquired luminance setting information is corrected based on correction information stored in advance in the peripheral control ROM 1511b.

  For example, if the game board side effect display device 1600 is first turned on and the current date and time, and June has already passed since the game board side effect display device 1600 is first turned on, When the corresponding correction information (for example, 5%) is acquired from the peripheral control ROM 1511b and the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is turned on when the brightness of the LED included in the brightness setting information is 75%, the 75% The luminance of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is adjusted based on the luminance adjustment information included in the luminance setting information so that the luminance is further increased by 5%, which is the correction information acquired with respect to. And when the game board side effect display device 1600 is first turned on, December has already passed. When the corresponding correction information (for example, 10%) is acquired from 1b and the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is turned on when the luminance of the LED included in the luminance setting information is 75%, The luminance of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is adjusted based on the luminance adjustment information included in the luminance setting information so that the luminance is further increased by 10% which is the correction information acquired in this way. Light.

  The current date and time may be specified by acquiring calendar information for specifying the date and time and time information for specifying the hour, minute, and second directly from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165, or a peripheral described later. Current calendar information set in the calendar information storage unit and updated by the system of the peripheral control board 1510 in the RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad of the peripheral control RAM 1511c in the current time information acquisition process of step S1002 in the control unit power-on process And the current time information set in the time information storage unit and updated by the system of the peripheral control board 1510 may be acquired to identify the current date and time.

[834. Volume adjustment volume]
As described above, the volume adjustment volume 1510a can adjust the volume of music, sound effects, and the like flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 by rotating the knob portion. As described above, the volume adjustment volume 1510a is configured such that the resistance value can be changed by rotating the knob portion, and the electrically connected peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak is connected to the knob portion. The voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotational position is converted from an analog value to a digital value, and converted into a value in 1024 steps from 0 to 1023. In the present embodiment, as described above, the values of the 1024 steps are divided into seven and managed as the substrate volumes 0 to 6. The substrate volume 0 is set to mute, the substrate volume 6 is set to the maximum volume, and the volume is set to increase from the substrate volume 0 toward the substrate volume 6. The liquid crystal display control unit 1512 (VDP 1512a with built-in sound source) is controlled so that the volume is set to the substrate volume 0 to 6, and music and sound effects flow from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573.

  As described above, music and sound effects flow from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 by adjusting the volume based on the turning operation of the knob portion. In the present embodiment, as described above, in addition to music and sound effects, a notification sound for notifying a hall clerk or the like of the occurrence of a malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 or an illegal act against the pachinko machine 1 or a game effect. (E.g., to produce a more powerful screen on the game board side effect display device 1600, or to announce that there is a high possibility of shifting to a game state advantageous to the player) Etc.) also flows from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, but the notification sound and notification sound flow without depending on the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob part. The volume up to the maximum volume can be adjusted by controlling the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 (sound source built-in VDP 1512a) by a program.

  The volume adjusted by this program can be smoothly changed from the mute to the maximum volume, unlike the substrate volume divided into the above seven stages. Thereby, for example, even when a hall clerk or the like rotates the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 1510a to set the volume to a low level, the music, sound effects, etc. flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 are produced. Although the sound is reduced, a notification sound set to a high volume (in this embodiment, the maximum volume) can be played when a malfunction occurs in the pachinko machine 1 or when the player is cheating. Therefore, even if the volume of the production sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the hall clerk or the like from becoming difficult to notice the occurrence of a malfunction or the player's cheating due to the notification sound.

  Also, based on the current board volume set by volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob part, the volume of the advertisement sound is reduced so as not to interfere with the music and sound effects. In addition to music and sound effects, the screen displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is rendered more powerful, which is advantageous for the player. It is also possible to notify that there is a high possibility that the game state will be entered.

  In the present embodiment, in addition to adjusting the volume of music and sound effects by turning the knob of the volume adjustment volume 1510a, the dial operation unit 401 of the effect operation unit 400 and the like. By operating the pressing operation unit 405, it is possible to shift to the setting mode and adjust the volume of music and sound effects. When the dial operation unit 401 or the press operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 is operated within a predetermined time after the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. In addition, when the dial operation unit 401 or the press operation unit 405 of the production operation unit 400 is operated during the period when the game board side production display device 1600 is in the waiting state and the demonstration operation is performed, the setting mode is performed. Is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. By operating the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 according to the setting mode screen, the volume of music and sound effects can be adjusted to a desired volume. Specifically, the peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak converts the voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotational position of the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 1510a from an analog value to a digital value. Thus, by adding or subtracting a predetermined value according to the operation of the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the production operation unit 400, the value of the substrate volume can be increased or decreased. Yes. This adjusted volume is set and updated as a sub-volume value for a track in which sound data of effect sound such as music or sound effect is incorporated among a plurality of tracks in the sound source of the built-in sound source VDP 1512a. However, it is not reflected in the adjustment of the volume of the notification sound or notification sound described above.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the volume of music or sound effects is adjusted by directly rotating the knob of the volume adjustment volume 1510a, and the dial operation unit 401 or the press operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400. There are two methods of adjusting the volume of music and sound effects by increasing or decreasing the value of the substrate volume by adding or subtracting a predetermined value in accordance with the above operation. Since the volume adjustment volume 1510a is mounted on the peripheral control board 1510, it is necessary to make the main body frame 4 always open from the outer frame 2. Then, the hall clerk can turn the knob of the volume adjustment volume 1510a. However, at the volume adjusted by the hall clerk, it may be difficult for the player to hear the music or sound effect, or may be loud for the player to feel the music or sound effect. Therefore, within a predetermined time after the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the dial operation unit 401 and the press operation unit 405 of the production operation unit 400 are operated, or a demonstration is performed by the game board side production display device 1600 in a waiting state. When the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the production operation unit 400 is operated during the period being performed, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board side production display device 1600, By operating the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 according to the setting mode screen, the volume of music and sound effects can be adjusted to a desired volume. Thus, the player can adjust the volume of the music and sound effects to a desired volume. Therefore, when the volume of the hall clerk feels low and it is difficult to hear the music and sound effects, the production operation unit 400 The dial operation unit 401 and the press operation unit 405 can be operated to increase the volume to a desired level. When the volume adjusted by the hall clerk feels loud and music or sound effects are felt, the production operation unit The dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of 400 can be operated to reduce the volume to a desired level.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 1 is not playing a game, the state is continued for a predetermined time, and when the game board side effect display device 1600 is repeatedly demonstrationd (for example, 10 times). The volume adjusted by the player who was sitting on the front surface of the pachinko machine 1 and playing the game last time is canceled, and the volume is initialized. In the initialization of the volume, the volume adjusted by the hall clerk, that is, the volume adjusted by the hall clerk by directly rotating the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 1510a. As a result, if it is difficult to hear the music or sound effect by adjusting the volume adjusted by the player who was sitting on the front of the pachinko machine 1 last time and adjusting the volume, A player who plays a game can operate the dial operation unit 401 and the press operation unit 405 of the production operation unit 400 to increase the volume to a desired level, and sits on the front surface of the pachinko machine 1 and plays a game last time. If the player feels loud and the music and sound effects are noisy, the player who sits on the front surface of the pachinko machine 1 and plays a game this time will have the dial operation unit 401 of the production operation unit 400 or the like. The pressing operation unit 405 can be operated to reduce the volume to a desired level.

[8. Power system]
Next, the power supply system of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 75 and 76. FIG. 75 is a block diagram showing a power supply system of a pachinko machine, and FIG. 76 is a block diagram showing a continuation of FIG. First, the power supply board 931 will be described, and then the power supplied to each control board will be described. The grounds (GND) of various substrates and the grounds (GND) of various terminal boards are electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the power supply substrate 931 and are the same ground (GND).

[8-1. Power supply board 931]
The power board 931 is electrically connected to a power cord, and the plug of the power cord is inserted into a power outlet of the pachinko island facility. When the power switch 934 is operated, the power supplied from the pachinko island facility is supplied to the power supply board 931, and the pachinko machine 1 can be turned on.

  As shown in FIG. 75, the power supply board 931 includes a power supply control unit 935 and a launch control unit 953. The power supply control unit 935 is a circuit that creates various DC voltages from AC 24 volts (AC24V) supplied from the Pachinko Island facility, and supplies backup power to the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. The unit 953 is a circuit that drives and controls the firing solenoid 682 of the ball striking device 650 shown in FIG. 5 and the ball feeding solenoid 255 of the ball feeding unit 250 shown in FIG.

  The power supply control unit 935 includes a synchronous rectification circuit 935a, a power factor correction circuit 935b, a smoothing circuit 935c, a power generation circuit 935d, and capacitors BC0 and BC1. The AC 24V supplied from the pachinko island facility is supplied to the gaming ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 via the power supply board 931 and also to the synchronous rectification circuit 935a. The synchronous rectification circuit 935a rectifies 24 volt (AC24V) supplied from the Pachinko Island facility and supplies the rectified current to the power factor correction circuit 935b. The power factor improvement circuit 935b improves the power factor of the rectified power to create a direct current + 37V (DC + 37V, hereinafter referred to as “+ 37V”) and supplies it to the smoothing circuit 935c. The smoothing circuit 935c removes the supplied + 37V ripple, smoothes + 37V, and supplies the smoothed voltage to the launch control circuit 953a and the power generation circuit 935d of the launch control unit 953.

  The capacitor BC0 supplies backup power to a RAM (main control built-in RAM) built in the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and the capacitor BC1 is built in the payout control MPU 952a of the payout control unit 952 in the payout control board 951. A backup power source is supplied to the RAM (payout control built-in RAM).

  The launch control circuit 953a of the launch control unit 953 uses the + 37V supplied from the smoothing circuit 935c as a drive power supply, and the game area 5a shown in FIG. While controlling the drive current for launching (firing) toward the direction and outputting it to the firing solenoid 682, the constant current is output to the ball feed solenoid 255 of the ball feed unit 250 to thereby control the ball of the ball feed unit 250. The feeding member receives one game ball stored in the upper plate 321 of the dish unit 320, and controls to send the game ball received by the ball feeding member to the hitting ball hitting device 650.

  The power generation circuit 935d is supplied from the smoothing circuit 935c with + 37V to DC + 5V (DC + 5V, hereinafter referred to as “+ 5V”), DC + 12V (DC + 12V, hereinafter referred to as “+ 12V”), and DC. + 24V (DC + 24V, hereinafter referred to as “+ 24V”) is created and supplied to the payout control board 951 and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, respectively. The power supply system supplied with + 5V is the + 5V power supply line, the power supply system supplied with + 12V is supplied with the + 12V power supply line, and the power supply system supplied with + 24V is supplied with the + 24V power supply line.

  + 5V generated by the power supply generation circuit 935d is supplied to the payout control board 951 as described later. + 5V supplied to the payout control board 951 is applied to the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control filter circuit 951a, and is applied to the power supply terminal of the payout control built-in RAM via the diode PD0. ing. + 12V generated by the power supply generation circuit 935d is supplied to the + 5V generation circuit 1310g of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951. The + 5V creation circuit 1310g creates + 5V that is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a from + 12V from the payout control board 951. + 5V created by the + 5V creation circuit 1310g is supplied to the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control filter circuit 1310h, and is also supplied to the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM via the diode MD0. ing.

  The negative terminal of the capacitor BC1 of the power supply board 931 is grounded to the ground (GND), while the positive terminal of the capacitor BC1 is electrically connected to the power supply terminal of the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control board 951, and is paid out. The cathode terminal of the diode PD0 on the control board 951 is also electrically connected. In other words, + 5V created by the power supply creation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 causes a current to flow toward the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 952a, and the power supply terminal of the payout control built-in RAM that is forward by the diode PD0 and the capacitor BC1. Current flows to the positive terminal. As described above, the capacitor BC1 has an electrical connection method in which + 5V generated by the power generation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 returns to the payout control board 951, and then returns again from the payout control board 951 to the power supply board 931. Is supplied and can be charged. As a result, when + 5V created by the power supply creation circuit 935d is not supplied to the payout control board 951, the charge charged in the capacitor BC1 is supplied to the payout control board 951 as payout VBB. Therefore, although the current is blocked by the diode PD0 and does not flow to the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 952a and the payout control MPU 952a does not operate, the stored contents are retained by supplying the payout VBB to the power supply terminal of the payout control built-in RAM. It has become so.

  The negative terminal of the capacitor BC0 of the power supply board 931 is grounded to the ground (GND), while the positive terminal of the capacitor BC0 is electrically connected to the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951. And is also electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode MD0 of the main control board 1310. In other words, + 5V created by the + 5V creating circuit 1310g is such that current flows toward the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, and the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM, which is forward by the diode MD0, and the positive terminal of the capacitor BC0, An electric current flows toward. In this way, the capacitor BC0 is charged with + 5V supplied by the electrical connection method in which + 5V generated by the + 5V generating circuit 1310g is supplied from the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951 to the power supply board 931. Can be done. As a result, + 12V created by the power supply creation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 is not supplied to the + 5V creation circuit 1310g of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951, and the + 5V creation circuit 1310g can create + 5V. When the charge is lost, the electric charge charged in the capacitor BC0 is supplied as the main VBB to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951. Therefore, a diode is connected to the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a. Although the main control MPU 1310a does not operate because the current is blocked by MD0 and the main control MPU 1310a does not operate, the main VBB is supplied to the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM so that the stored contents are held. Thus, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the backup power supply circuit that supplies the backup power to the main control built-in RAM is constituted by the diode MD0 and the capacitor BC0.

[8-2. Voltage supplied to each control board]
Next, an outline of the voltage supplied to each control board and the like will be described, and subsequently, the voltage supplied mainly to the payout control board and the voltage supplied to the main control board will be described.

  Three types of voltages, + 5V, + 12V, and + 24V, generated by the power generation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931, are supplied to the payout control board 951 as shown in FIG. 75, and among these three types of voltages, + 12V and Two types of voltages of +24 V are supplied to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951. Also, three types of voltages, + 5V, + 12V, and + 24V, created by the power supply creation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 are supplied to the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, and through the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, the peripheral It is supplied to the control board 1510 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, respectively.

  Three types of voltages, + 5V, + 12V, and + 24V, supplied to the peripheral control board 1510 are shown in FIG. 76A. The lamp drive circuit 4170a of the lamp drive board 4170 and the drive source drive circuit of the motor drive board 4180 are provided. 4180a, respectively. The lamp driving circuit 4170a of the lamp driving board 4170 outputs various signals such as a lighting signal, a blinking signal, and a gradation lighting signal to various decorative boards of the game board 5, and the driving source driving circuit 4180a of the motor driving board 4180 is a game. A drive signal is output to an electrical drive source such as a motor or solenoid of the panel 5.

  The peripheral control board 1510 includes a + 3.3V creation circuit 1510b that creates 3.3V DC (DC + 3.3V, hereinafter referred to as “+ 3.3V”) from + 5V supplied from the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868. ing. + 3.3V created by the + 3.3V creation circuit 1510b is supplied to the liquid crystal module 1600a of the game board side effect display device 1600. Further, + 12V supplied to the peripheral control board 1510 is supplied to the backlight power source 1600b of the game board side effect display device 1600.

  On the other hand, three types of voltages, + 5V, + 12V, and + 24V, supplied to the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 are supplied to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 as shown in FIG. 76 (b). The frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 includes a + 9V creation circuit 194a that creates DC + 9V (DC + 9V, hereinafter referred to as “+ 9V”) from + 12V supplied from the peripheral door relay terminal board 882. Along with + 9V created by the + 9V creation circuit 194a, four types of voltages, + 5V, + 12V, and + 24V, supplied from the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, are supplied to various decorative boards of the door frame 3 and the like.

  Further, + 12V supplied to the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 is supplied to the upper plate side liquid crystal module power supply circuit 4450x. The plate side liquid crystal module power supply circuit 4450x creates + 12V to + 3.3V. + 3.3V created by the upper plate side liquid crystal module power supply circuit 4450x is supplied to various electronic components constituting the liquid crystal module circuit 4450V shown in FIG. 74, and the upper plate side liquid crystal module backlight power supply circuit 4450y. And the door frame side effect display device 460, respectively. The voltage created by the upper plate side liquid crystal module backlight power supply circuit 4450y is supplied to the door frame side effect display device 460.

[8-2-1. Voltage supplied to dispensing control board]
As shown in FIG. 75, the payout control board 951 includes a payout control filter circuit 951a in addition to the payout control MPU 952a. The payout control filter circuit 951a is supplied with + 5V from the power supply board 931 and removes noise from the + 5V. In addition to being supplied to the capacitor BC1 of the power supply substrate 931 via the diode PD0, this + 5V is supplied to, for example, the payout control MPU 952a of the payout control unit 952. + 12V from the power supply board 931 is supplied to, for example, the payout control input circuit 952b of the payout control unit 952, and is also supplied to the external communication circuit 784a of the external terminal board 784 via the payout control board 951. The external communication circuit 784a of the external terminal board 784 outputs a signal that conveys the number of game balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1 and game information of the pachinko machine 1 to a hall computer installed in the game hall (hall). It is. The hall computer monitors the game of the player by grasping the number of game balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1 and the game information of the pachinko machine 1 from the signal output from the external communication circuit 784a. Note that +24 from the power supply board 931 is supplied to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951 without being used in the payout control board 951 at all.

[8-2-2. Voltage supplied to main control board]
As shown in FIG. 75, the main control board 1310 includes a + 5V creation circuit 1310g, a main control filter circuit 1310h, a power failure monitoring circuit 1310e, and the like in addition to the main control MPU 1310a. The + 5V creation circuit 1310g is supplied with + 12V from the power supply board 931 via the payout control board 951, and creates + 5V that is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a from this + 12V. In the main control board 1310, the power supply system supplied with + 5V generated by the + 5V generating circuit 1310g is the + 5V power supply line. In the present embodiment, the + 5V power supply line created by the power supply creation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 and the + 5V power supply line created by the + 5V creation circuit 1310g of the main control board 1310 are not electrically connected. Thus, the + 5V power supply line created by the power supply creation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 is not electrically connected to various electronic components of the main control board 1310, and the + 5V of the main control board 1310 is not connected. The + 5V power supply line created by the creation circuit 1310g is not electrically connected to various electronic components such as other boards other than the main control board 1310.

  The main control filter circuit 1310h is supplied with + 5V created by the + 5V creation circuit 1310g, and removes noise from this + 5V. In addition to being supplied to the capacitor BC0 of the power supply substrate 931 via the diode MD0, this + 5V is supplied to, for example, the main control MPU 1310a. For example, + 12V from the payout control board 951 is supplied to the main control input circuit 1310b and the like, and + 24V from the payout control board 951 is supplied to the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d and the like, for example.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 1310e is supplied with + 12V and + 24V from the power supply board 931 via the payout control board 951, and monitors these + 12V and + 24V power failure or signs of instantaneous power failure. The power failure monitoring circuit 1310e outputs a power failure warning signal to the main control MPU 1310a as a power failure warning when detecting a sign of + 12V and + 24V power failure or instantaneous power failure. The power failure notice signal is input to the payout control MPU 952a via the main control board 1310 and the payout control input circuit 952b of the payout control board 951. The power failure notice signal is input to the peripheral control board 1510 via the main control board 1310. The power failure warning signal is input to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 through the peripheral control board 1510, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 as shown in FIG. At the same time, the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 is inputted to the decoration board of the door frame.

  In this embodiment, the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e is applied to one of the + 12V power line and the + 24V power line by monitoring the voltages applied to the two power lines, the + 12V power line and the + 24V power line, respectively. Compared with the case where the voltage to be monitored is monitored, it is possible to more accurately grasp the sign of power interruption such as a power failure or a momentary power failure.

[9. Main control board circuit]
Next, the circuit of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 69 will be described with reference to FIGS. 77 is a circuit diagram showing a circuit of the main control board, FIG. 78 is a circuit diagram showing a power failure monitoring circuit, and FIG. 79 is a circuit showing an interface circuit for communication between the main control board and the peripheral control board. FIG. First, the main control filter circuit 1310h shown in FIG. 75 will be described, followed by the power source, main control system reset, main control crystal oscillator, main control input circuit, power failure monitoring circuit, main control MPU created by the main control board 1310. Various input / output signals to and from the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 will be described.

  69 and 75, the main control board 1310 includes a main control MPU 1310a, a main control input circuit 1310b, a main control output circuit 1310c, a main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d, a power failure monitoring circuit 1310e, a + 5V creation circuit 1310g, In addition to the control filter circuit 1310h, as a peripheral circuit, as shown in FIG. 77, a main control system reset MIC1 that outputs a reset signal, a main control crystal oscillator MX0 that outputs a clock signal (in this embodiment, 24 MHz (MHz )) Mainly.

[9-1. Main control filter circuit]
As shown in FIG. 77, the main control filter circuit 1310h mainly includes a main control three-terminal filter MIC0. This main control three-terminal filter MIC0 is a T-type filter circuit, and has excellent attenuation characteristics magnetically shielded with ferrite. In the main control three-terminal filter MIC0, + 5V generated by the + 5V generating circuit 1310g is applied to the first terminal, the second terminal is grounded to the ground (GND), and noise components are removed from the third terminal. + 5V is output. + 5V applied to the first terminal is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC0 whose one end is connected to the ground (GND), so that the ripple (AC component superimposed on the voltage) is first removed. Smoothed.

  + 5V output from the third terminal is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC1 and the electrolytic capacitor MC2 (capacitance: 470 microfarad (μF) in this embodiment), one end of which is grounded with the ground (GND). By connecting to, ripples are further removed and smoothed. The smoothed + 5V is applied to the power supply terminal of the main control system reset MIC1, the VDD terminal that is the power supply terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0, the VDD terminal that is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, and the like. Note that the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a has a power failure or a momentary power failure, and when the power supply from the pachinko island facility is cut off, the electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 is a power failure or a momentary power failure. It is applied as +5 V over a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after the occurrence.

  One end of the VDD terminal of the main control MPU 1310a is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC3 grounded to the ground (GND), and + 5V applied to the VDD terminal is further smoothed by removing ripples. The VSS terminal, which is the ground terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, is grounded to the ground (GND).

  In addition, the VDD terminal of the main control MPU 1310a is electrically connected to the anode terminal of the diode MD0 in addition to being electrically connected to the capacitor MC3. The cathode terminal of the diode MD0 is electrically connected to the VBB terminal which is a power supply terminal of a RAM (main control built-in RAM) built in the main control MPU 1310a, and one end thereof is a capacitor MC4 which is grounded to the ground (GND). Is electrically connected to the other end. In addition to being electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode MD0 and the other end of the capacitor MC4, the VBB terminal of the main control built-in RAM is connected to the plus of the capacitor BC0 of the power supply board 931 shown in FIG. It is electrically connected to the terminal. That is, + 5V smoothed by removing the noise component by the main control filter circuit 1310h is applied to the VDD terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, and via the diode MD0, the VBB terminal of the main control built-in RAM and the capacitor BC0. Are applied to the positive terminal. Thereby, as described above, + 12V generated by the power generation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 shown in FIG. 75 is not supplied to the + 5V generation circuit 1310g of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951, and + 5V is generated. When the circuit 1310g cannot create + 5V, the electric charge charged in the capacitor BC0 is supplied to the main control board 1310 as the main VBB, so that the VDD terminal of the main control MPU 1310a has Although the current is blocked by the diode MD0 and does not flow and the main control MPU 1310a does not operate, the stored contents are held by applying the main VBB to the VBB terminal of the main control built-in RAM.

[9-2. Main control system reset]
As shown in FIG. 77, +5 V smoothed by removing the noise component by the main control filter circuit 1310h is applied to the power supply terminal of the main control system reset MIC1. The main control system reset MIC1 resets the main control MPU 1310a and the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function, and has a built-in delay circuit. One end of the delay capacitor terminal of the main control system reset MIC1 is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC5 grounded to the ground (GND), and the delay time by the delay circuit is set by the capacitance of the capacitor MC5. Be able to. Specifically, when + 5V input to the power supply terminal reaches a threshold value (for example, 4.25V), main control system reset MIC1 outputs a system reset signal from the output terminal after the delay time has elapsed.

  The output terminal of the main control system reset MIC1 is electrically connected to the SRST terminal that is a reset terminal of the main control MPU 1310a and the reset terminal of the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function. The output terminal is an open collector output type, one end of which is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor MR1 that is electrically connected to the + 5V power line, and one end of which is grounded to the ground (GND). It is electrically connected to the other end of MC6. Ripple is removed and smoothed by the capacitor MC6. When the voltage input to the power supply terminal is larger than the threshold value, the output terminal is pulled up to + 5V by the pull-up resistor MR1 and the logic becomes HI. This logic is the SRST terminal of the main control MPU 1310a and the main control output with reset function. When the voltage inputted to the reset terminal of the circuit 1310ca is lower than the threshold value, the logic becomes LOW, and this logic becomes the SRST terminal of the main control MPU 1310a and the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function. Each is input to the reset terminal. Since the SRST terminal of the main control MPU 1310a and the reset terminal of the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function are negative logic inputs, respectively, the main control MPU 1310a and the reset function when the voltage input to the power supply terminal is smaller than the threshold value. The attached main control output circuit 1310ca is reset. The power supply terminal is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC7 whose one end is grounded (GND), and + 5V input to the power supply terminal is smoothed by removing ripples. The ground terminal is grounded with the grant (GND), and the NC terminal is not electrically connected to the outside.

[9-3. Main control crystal oscillator]
As shown in FIG. 77, + 5V smoothed by removing the noise component by the main control filter circuit 1310h is applied to the VDD terminal which is the power supply terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0. This VDD terminal is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC8, one end of which is grounded (GND), and + 5V inputted to the VDD terminal is further smoothed by removing ripples. In addition to the VDD terminal, the smoothed + 5V is also applied to the A terminal, B terminal, C terminal, and ST terminal, which are output frequency selection terminals. The main control crystal oscillator MX0 outputs a clock signal of 24 MHz from the F terminal which is an output terminal by applying + 5V to these A terminal, B terminal, C terminal and ST terminal.

  The F terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0 is electrically connected to the CLK terminal, which is the clock terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, and a 24 MHz clock signal is input. Note that the GND terminal, which is the ground terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0, is grounded to the ground (GND), and the D terminal that outputs the divided frequency of the F terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0 is not electrically connected to the outside. It is in a state.

[9-4. Main control input circuit]
The main control input circuit 1310b detects from the general prize opening sensors 4020 and 4020, the first starting opening sensor 4002, the second starting opening sensor 4004, the magnetic detection sensor 4024, the count sensor 4005, and the gate sensor 4003 shown in FIG. In addition to the signal, this is a circuit to which an operation signal (RAM clear signal) or the like from an operation switch 954 provided in the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 70 is input. Since the circuit configuration to which the detection signal from each switch is input is the same, here, the circuit to which the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the operation switch 954 is input will be described.

[9-4-1. A circuit to which an operation signal (RAM clear signal) is input from the operation switch]
First, as described above, the operation switch 954 includes a RAM (payout control built-in RAM) built in the payout control MPU 952a of the payout control board 951 and a main control of the main control board 1310 within a predetermined period from when the power is turned on. It is operated when clearing the RAM (main control built-in RAM) built in the MPU 1310a, or when an error is notified after the power is turned on, it is operated to cancel the error. Function to clear RAM within a predetermined period from power-on, and error cancellation after power-on (after a period during which the function is performed as RAM clear, that is, after a predetermined period elapses from power-on) And a function of performing Since the main control board 1310 does not have the function of canceling the error that the payout control board 951 has, if the operation signal from the operation switch 954 is input within a predetermined period from when the power is turned on, the main control board 1310 A process of clearing the main control built-in RAM is performed as a RAM clear signal for clearing the built-in RAM.

  When the operation switch 954 is not operated, the main control board 1310 receives an operation signal whose logic is LOW from the payout control board 951, while when the operation switch 954 is operated, the main control board 1310 receives a logic from the payout control board 951. The operation signal in which HI becomes HI is input from the payout control board 951 (detailed description of this point will be described later).

  As shown in FIG. 77, the transmission line for transmitting the operation signal from the operation switch 954 provided in the payout control board 951 within a predetermined period from the time of power-on is a pull-up in which one end is electrically connected to the + 12V power line. It is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR2 and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0 via the resistor MR3. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor MR3, the base terminal of the transistor MTR0 is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR4 that is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR0 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR5, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and a non-inverting buffer. Main control via ICMIC 10 (non-inverted buffer ICMIC 10 includes eight non-inverted buffer circuits, and the signal waveform input to one of them (MIC 10A) is shaped and output without being inverted). The MPU 1310a is electrically connected to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA.

  The circuit that outputs the operation signal from the operation switch 954 on the payout control board 951 is configured as an open collector output type in which the emitter terminal is grounded to the ground (GND), and transmits the operation signal from the operation switch 954. The line is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor MR2. In the main control board 1310, when the operation switch 954 is not operated, the operation signal from the payout control board 951 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the logic is input as LOW, while the operation switch 954 is operated. The operation signal from the payout control board 951 is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor MR2 and the logic is input as HI.

  A circuit including the resistors MR3 and MR4 and the transistor MTR0 is a switch circuit that is turned ON / OFF by an operation signal from the operation switch 954.

  When the operation switch 954 is not operated, an operation signal whose logic is LOW is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0, whereby the transistor MTR0 is turned off and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the resistor MR5 and the operation signal from the operation switch 954 whose logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. Is done. The main control MPU 1310a does not instruct to perform RAM clear that erases information stored in the main control built-in RAM when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 input to the input terminal PA0 is HI. to decide.

  On the other hand, when the operation switch 954 is being operated, an operation signal that has been pulled up to +12 V by the pull-up resistor MR2 and has a logic level HI is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0, so that the transistor MTR0 is turned on. The circuit is also turned on. As a result, the operation signal from the operation switch 954 whose logic is LOW when the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. Is done. The main control MPU 1310a instructs the RAM clear to erase the information stored in the main control built-in RAM when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 input to the input terminal PA0 is LOW. Judge.

  The operation signal from the operation switch 954 is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor MR2. This is because an operation signal from the operation switch 954 is input via the payout control board 951. That is, between the boards of the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951, it is higher than the control reference voltage + 5V in order to suppress the influence of noise entering the wiring (harness) that electrically connects the boards. The reliability of the signal is enhanced by using + 12V which is a voltage. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the detection signals from the general winning opening sensor 4020, the first starting opening sensor 4002, and the second starting opening sensor 4004 that are directly input to the main control board 1310 are set to + 5V side by the pull-up resistor. While being pulled up, detection signals from the magnetic detection sensor 4024, the count sensor 4005, the general prize opening sensor 4020, and the gate sensor 4003 that are input via the panel relay board 4161 shown in FIG. 69 are sent to the main control board 1310. Since it is not directly input, it is pulled up to the + 12V side by a pull-up resistor, similarly to the operation signal from the operation switch 954.

[9-5. Power failure monitoring circuit]
As shown in FIG. 75, the main control board 1310 is supplied with two types of voltages of + 12V and + 24V from the power supply board 931 via the payout control board 951, and + 12V and + 24V are input to the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e. ing. The power failure monitoring circuit 1310e monitors the signs of + 12V and + 24V power failure or instantaneous power failure, and detects a power failure warning signal as a power failure warning signal in addition to the main control MPU 1310a when detecting a power failure or instantaneous power failure sign. This is output to the payout control MPU 952a of 951 and the peripheral control board 1510. Here, the configuration of the power failure monitoring circuit will be described first, followed by the monitoring of the + 24V power failure or instantaneous power failure, the + 12V power failure or instantaneous power failure, and the output of the power failure warning signal.

[9-5-1. Configuration of power failure monitoring circuit]
As shown in FIG. 78, the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e mainly includes a shunt-type stabilized power supply circuit MIC20, an open collector output type comparator MIC21, a D-type flip-flop MIC22, and transistors MTR20 to MTR23.

  The reference voltage input terminal REF terminal and the cathode terminal K terminal of the shunt-type stabilized power supply circuit MIC20 are electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR20, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line. + 5V is applied, and the current input to the REF terminal is limited by the resistor MR20. The K terminal outputs a reference voltage Vref that is a comparison reference voltage of the comparator MIC21 (in this embodiment, 2.495 V is set). The K terminal is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC20 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND), and the reference voltage Vref output from the K terminal is rippled (convolved with the voltage) by the capacitor MC20. AC component) is removed and smoothed. The A terminal, which is the anode terminal of the shunt-type stabilized power supply circuit MIC20, is grounded to the ground (GND).

  The comparator MIC21 includes two voltage comparison circuits, one of which (MIC21A) is used for comparing the monitor voltage V1 of + 24V and the reference voltage Vref, and the other one (MIC21B). , + 12V monitor voltage V2 and reference voltage Vref are used for comparison. The monitoring voltage V1 of + 24V is applied to the third terminal, which is the positive terminal of the MIC 21A, and the reference voltage Vref is applied to the second terminal, which is the negative terminal of the MIC 21A. The monitoring voltage V2 of + 12V is applied to the 5th terminal which is the plus terminal of the MIC 21B, and the reference voltage Vref is applied to the 6th terminal which is the minus terminal of the MIC 21B. These comparison results are input to the D-type flip-flop MIC22. The D-type flip-flop MIC22 includes two D-type flip-flop circuits, one of which (MIC22A) is used in the present embodiment. The Vcc terminal that is the power supply terminal of the comparator MIC21 is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC21 whose one end is grounded (GND), and + 5V applied to the Vcc terminal that is the power supply terminal of the comparator MIC21 is The ripple is removed and smoothed by the capacitor MC21, and the GND terminal which is the ground terminal of the comparator MIC21 is grounded to the ground (GND).

[9-5-2. Monitoring of + 24V power outage or instantaneous power failure]
As described above, the monitoring of the + 24V power failure or instantaneous power failure is performed by the MIC 21A of the comparator MIC21 comparing the + 24V monitoring voltage V1 with the reference voltage Vref. As shown in FIG. 78, the third terminal, which is the positive terminal of the MIC 21A of the comparator MIC 21 to which the + 24V monitoring voltage V1 is applied, has one end connected to the + 24V power supply line and the other end of the resistor MR21. Is connected to the ground (GND), the other end of the resistor MR22 is electrically connected and the other ends of the resistors MR21 and MR22, and the other end of the capacitor MC23 is grounded to the ground (GND). Are electrically connected. The + 24V monitoring voltage V1 applied to the third terminal, which is the positive terminal of the MIC21A of the comparator MIC21, is divided by + 24V by the resistance ratio of the resistors MR21 and MR22, and the ripple is removed by the capacitor MC23 and is smoothed. . The values of the resistors MR21 and MR22 are preset to the power failure detection voltage V1pf (in the present embodiment, set to 21.40V) when + 24V has a power failure or a momentary power failure, and the voltage starts dropping from + 24V. The monitoring voltage V1 of + 24V is set to be the same value as the reference voltage Vref.

  The first terminal that is the output terminal of the MIC 21A of the comparator MIC 21 is an open collector output, and one end is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor MR23 that is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line. One end is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC24, which is grounded with the ground (GND), and is electrically connected to a PR terminal which is a preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. The capacitor MC24 plays a role as a low-pass filter.

  When the + 24V voltage is higher than the power failure detection voltage V1pf, the + 24V monitoring voltage V1 becomes higher than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to the first terminal which is the output terminal of the MIC 21A of the comparator MIC21 is + 5V by the pull-up resistor MR23. A signal whose logic is HI is input to the PR terminal which is a preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

  On the other hand, when the + 24V voltage is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V1pf, the + 24V monitoring voltage V1 becomes smaller than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to the first terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC 21A of the comparator MIC21, is ground (GND). The signal with the logic level LOW is input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

[9-5-3. Monitoring of + 12V power failure or instantaneous power failure]
As described above, the + 12V power failure or instantaneous power failure is monitored by the MIC 21B of the comparator MIC21 comparing the + 12V monitor voltage V2 with the reference voltage Vref. 78, the positive terminal of the MIC 21B of the comparator MIC 21 to which the + 12V monitoring voltage V2 is applied, as shown in FIG. 78, the other end of the resistor MR24 whose one end is electrically connected to the + 12V power line, and one end Are connected to the other end of the resistor MR25, and the other ends of the resistors MR24 and MR25, and the other end of the capacitor MC25 is connected to the ground (GND). Are electrically connected. The + 12V monitor voltage V2 applied to the fifth terminal, which is the plus terminal of the MIC21B of the comparator MIC21, is divided by + 12V by the resistance ratio of the resistors MR24 and MR25, and the ripple is removed by the capacitor MC25 and is smoothed. . The values of the resistors MR24 and MR25 are preset to the power failure detection voltage V2pf (in this embodiment, set to 10.47V) when + 12V has a power failure or a momentary power failure and the voltage starts to drop from + 12V. The monitoring voltage V2 of + 12V is set to be the same value as the reference voltage Vref.

  The 7th terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC21B of the comparator MIC21, is an open collector output and is electrically connected to the 1st terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC21A, so that one end is electrically connected to the + 5V power line. The D-type flip-flop MIC22 is preset by being electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor MR23 that is electrically connected, and one end being electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC24 that is grounded to the ground (GND). The terminal is electrically connected to the PR terminal. As described above, the capacitor MC24 plays a role as a low-pass filter.

  When the voltage of + 12V is higher than the power failure detection voltage V2pf, the monitoring voltage V2 of + 12V becomes higher than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to the seventh terminal which is the output terminal of the MIC21B of the comparator MIC21 is + 5V by the pull-up resistor MR23. A signal whose logic is HI is input to the PR terminal which is a preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

  On the other hand, when the voltage of + 12V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V2pf, the monitoring voltage V2 of + 12V becomes smaller than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to the seventh terminal which is the output terminal of the MIC21B of the comparator MIC21 is the ground (GND). The signal with the logic level LOW is input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

[9-5-4. Output of power failure warning signal]
The D type flip-flop MIC22 stores the value (logic) of the signal input to the 1D terminal, which is the D input terminal, according to the change in the edge of the clock signal input to the 1CK terminal, which is the clock input terminal. (Logic) is output from the 1Q terminal that is the output terminal, and a value obtained by inverting the stored value (logic) is output from the negative logic 1Q terminal that is the output terminal. In addition, when a signal whose logic is LOW is input to the CLR terminal which is the clear terminal, the D-type flip-flop MIC22 releases the latch state and changes the logic of the signal input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal. The inverted signal is output from the 1Q terminal that is the output terminal (at this time, the same logic as that of the signal that is inverted from the logic of the signal output from 1Q, that is, the signal that is input to the PR terminal that is the preset terminal) On the other hand, when a signal whose logic is HI is input to the CLR terminal which is the clear terminal, the latch state is set. The D-type flip-flop MIC22 has a logic LOW at the preset terminal PR when a signal whose logic is HI is input to the CLR terminal which is a clear terminal and the latch state is set. When the signal is input, the state that the signal whose logic is HI is output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal is maintained (the signal obtained by inverting the logic of the signal output from 1Q is negative logic) The state of outputting from the 1Q terminal is maintained.

  In the D-type flip-flop MIC22, in this embodiment, the 1D terminal that is the D input terminal and the 1CK terminal that is the clock input terminal are grounded to the ground (GND). The circuit configuration is such that there is no change in the edge of the input clock signal, and the value (logic) of the signal input to the 1D terminal which is the D input terminal is stored and is not output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal. ing. As described above, the D-type flip-flop MIC22 has a signal from the first terminal that is the output terminal of the MIC21A of the comparator MIC21 that monitors the + 24V power failure or the instantaneous power failure, and the + 12V power failure. Alternatively, a signal from the 7th terminal that is the output terminal of the MIC 21B of the comparator MIC 21 that monitors the instantaneous power failure is input, and a signal is output from the 1Q terminal that is the output terminal based on these signals. The Vcc terminal, which is a power supply terminal, is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC22 whose one end is grounded (GND), and is applied to the Vcc terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. + 5V is smoothed by removing the ripple by the capacitor MC22, the GND terminal as the ground terminal is grounded to the ground (GND), and the negative logic 1Q terminal that inverts the logic of the 1Q terminal as the output terminal is electrically connected to the outside. In an unconnected state.

  In this embodiment, in the D-type flip-flop MIC22, a power failure clear signal from the main control MPU 1310a is input to a CLR terminal which is a clear terminal via a main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function. The power failure clear signal is output after a predetermined time has elapsed after the main control side power-on process described later performed by the main control MPU 1310a. Since the CLR terminal is a negative logic input, the power failure clear signal from the main control MPU 1310a is input to the CLR terminal with the logic being LOW via the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function. When the power failure clear signal is input to the CLR terminal, the D-type flip-flop MIC22 cancels the latch state. At this time, the logic input to the PR terminal which is a preset terminal is inverted and the output terminal Is output from the 1Q terminal.

  On the other hand, when the output of the power failure clear signal from the main control MPU 1310a is stopped, the logic becomes HI via the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function and is input to the CLR terminal. When the power failure clear signal is not input to the CLR terminal, the D-type flip-flop MIC22 sets the latch state, and latches the state where the logic is LOW at the PR terminal.

  The 1Q terminal that is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22 is electrically connected to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b, and is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. A signal output from the 1Q terminal is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a as a power failure warning signal. The 1Q terminal that is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22 is electrically connected to the main control output circuit 1310cb having no reset function, and resets the signal output from the 1Q terminal that is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. The functionless main control output circuit 1310cb outputs a payout power failure notice signal to the payout control board 951 and also outputs it to the peripheral control board 1510 as a peripheral power failure notice signal.

  As shown in FIG. 78, the main control input circuit 1310b that electrically connects the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, and the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a The 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC 22, is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR26, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20 via the resistor MR27. It is connected. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor MR27, one end of the transistor MTR20 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR28 that is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR20 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR29, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and a non-inverting buffer. Main control via ICMIC 23 (non-inverted buffer ICMIC 23 includes eight non-inverted buffer circuits, and the signal waveform input to one (MIC 23A) is shaped and output without being inverted). The MPU 1310a is electrically connected to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA.

  The circuit composed of the resistors MR27 and MR28 and the transistor MTR20 is a switch circuit that is turned ON / OFF by a signal output from the 1Q terminal that is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

  When the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22 is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the transistor MTR20 is turned OFF. The switch circuit is also turned off. On the other hand, when the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20 is raised to the + 5V side, turning on the transistor MTR20, The switch circuit is also turned on.

  When both the condition that the voltage of + 24V is larger than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of + 12V is larger than the power failure detection voltage V2pf are satisfied, the signal whose logic is HI is preset in the D-type flip-flop MIC22. Since the signal is output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, the logic becomes LOW and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20. Turn off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 is pulled up to + 5V by the resistor MR29, and the power failure warning signal whose logic becomes HI via the non-inverting buffer ICMIC23 is input to the input terminal PA of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. Input to PA1.

  On the other hand, when either one of the condition that the voltage of + 24V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of + 12V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V2pf is satisfied, the signal whose logic is LOW is D Since the signal is input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the type flip-flop MIC22, the signal output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22 becomes the logic HI and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20. As a result, the transistor MTR20 is turned ON. As a result, the power failure warning signal in which the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the logic becomes LOW via the non-inverting buffer ICMIC23 is input to the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. Input to PA1.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 78, the main control output circuit 1310cb without reset function that outputs a signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, to the payout control board 951 as a payout blackout signal is opened. The circuit is configured as a collector output type, and the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22 is electrically connected to the resistor MR26 of the main control input circuit 1310b described above, and the transistor MTR21 of the previous stage is connected via the resistor MR30. It is electrically connected to the base terminal. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor MR30, one end of the base terminal of the transistor MTR21 at the previous stage is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR31 that is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the front-stage transistor MTR21 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the front-stage transistor MTR21 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR32 whose one end is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line. At the same time, it is electrically connected to the base terminal of the subsequent transistor MTR22 via a resistor MR33. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor MR33, one end of the base terminal of the transistor MTR22 at the subsequent stage is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR34 that is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the rear-stage transistor MTR22 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the rear-stage transistor MTR22 is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC26 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND). It is electrically connected to the payout control board 951 via (harness). When the collector terminal of the subsequent transistor MTR22 is electrically connected to the payout control board 951 via a wiring (harness), the payout control input of the payout control unit 952 shown in FIG. In the circuit 952b, one end is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor (not shown) that is electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line, and the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a shown in FIG. Connected.

  A circuit composed of the resistors MR30 and MR31 and the preceding transistor MTR21 is a preceding switch circuit, and a circuit composed of the resistors MR33 and MR34 and the succeeding transistor MTR22 is a succeeding switch circuit, and is a D-type flip-flop. It is turned ON / OFF by a signal output from the 1Q terminal which is an output terminal of the MIC 22.

  When the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the previous transistor MTR21 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the previous transistor The MTR 21 is turned OFF and the preceding switch circuit is also turned OFF, and the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the preceding transistor MTR 21, which is the voltage applied to the base terminal of the succeeding transistor MTR 22, is raised to the + 5V side by the resistor MR 32. As a result, the rear-stage transistor MTR22 is turned on, and the rear-stage switch circuit is also turned on. On the other hand, when the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR21 is raised to the + 5V side and the transistor MTR21 is turned ON. The front-stage switch circuit is also turned on, and the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the front-stage transistor MTR21, which is the voltage applied to the base terminal of the rear-stage transistor MTR22, is lowered to the ground (GND) side, thereby The transistor MTR22 is turned off, and the subsequent switch circuit is also turned off.

  When both the condition that the voltage of + 24V is larger than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of + 12V is larger than the power failure detection voltage V2pf are satisfied, the signal whose logic is HI is preset in the D-type flip-flop MIC22. Because the signal is input to the PR terminal, which is the terminal, the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, becomes logic LOW and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage. The transistor MTR21 is turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the former-stage transistor MTR21 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the resistor MR32 and applied to the base terminal of the latter-stage transistor MTR22. Thereby, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the subsequent transistor MTR22 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the payout control board 951 via the wiring (harness), so that the payout power failure warning signal whose logic becomes LOW is issued. Input to the control board 951.

  On the other hand, when either one of the condition that the voltage of + 24V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of + 12V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V2pf is satisfied, the signal whose logic is LOW is D Since the signal is input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the type flip-flop MIC22, the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, becomes logic HI and becomes the base terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage. As a result of the input, the previous-stage transistor MTR21 is turned ON. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the preceding transistor MTR21 is pulled down to the ground (GND) and applied to the base terminal of the succeeding transistor MTR22, thereby turning off the succeeding transistor MTR22. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage is pulled up to + 12V by the pull-up resistor in the payout control input circuit 952b of the payout control unit 952 in the payout control board 951 via the wiring (harness). A payout power failure notice signal whose logic is HI is input to the payout control board 951.

Further, as shown in FIG. 78, the main control output circuit 1310cb without reset function that outputs a signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, to the peripheral control board 1510 as a peripheral power failure warning signal is opened. The circuit is configured as a collector output type, and the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is electrically connected to the resistor MR26 of the main control input circuit 1310b described above, and the base terminal of the transistor MTR23 through the resistor MR35. And are electrically connected. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor MR35, one end of the transistor MTR23 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR36 that is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR23 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510 via a wiring (harness).
When the collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510 via a wiring (harness), a peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control unit 1511 in the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. In FIG. 7, one end is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor (not shown) that is electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line, and is electrically connected to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. Connected.

  The circuit composed of the resistors MR35 and MR36 and the transistor MTR23 is a switch circuit that is turned ON / OFF by a signal output from the 1Q terminal that is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

  When the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22 is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the transistor MTR23 is turned OFF. The switch circuit is also turned off. On the other hand, when the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23 is raised to the + 5V side, and the transistor MTR23 is turned on. The switch circuit is also turned on.

  When both the condition that the voltage of + 24V is larger than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of + 12V is larger than the power failure detection voltage V2pf are satisfied, the signal whose logic is HI is preset in the D-type flip-flop MIC22. Since the signal is output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, the logic becomes LOW and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23. Turn off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is pulled up to + 12V by the pull-up resistor in the payout control input circuit of the peripheral control unit 1511 in the peripheral control board 1510 via the wiring (harness), so that the logic becomes HI. The peripheral power failure warning signal is input to the peripheral control board 1510.

  On the other hand, when either one of the condition that the voltage of + 24V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of + 12V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V2pf is satisfied, the signal whose logic is LOW is D Since the signal is input to the PR terminal that is the preset terminal of the type flip-flop MIC22, the signal output from the 1Q terminal that is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22 becomes the logic HI and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23. As a result, the transistor MTR23 is turned ON. As a result, the peripheral power failure notice signal whose logic is LOW is generated when the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the peripheral control board 1510 via the wiring (harness). 1510 is input.

  As described above, the main control input circuit 1310b that transmits a signal output from the 1Q terminal that is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22 to the main control MPU 1310a as a power failure warning signal, and the 1Q terminal that is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. The main control output circuit 1310cb without reset function for outputting the signal output from the peripheral control board 1510 to the peripheral control board 1510 has one transistor, and the power failure warning signal input to the main control MPU 1310a and the peripheral While the logic of the peripheral power failure warning signal input to the control board 1510 is the same logic, the signal output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22 is paid out to the payout control board 951. Main system without reset function that outputs as a power failure warning signal The output circuit 1310cb has two transistors, a front stage and a rear stage, and the logic of the payout power failure warning signal is the logic of the power failure warning signal input to the main control MPU 1310a and the peripheral power failure warning signal input to the peripheral control board 1510. Is different from the logic of the power failure warning signal and the logic of the peripheral power failure warning signal.

  The collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 of the main control input circuit 1310b is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR29, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and the main control MPU 1310a via the non-inverting buffer ICMIC23. The collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 at the subsequent stage of the main control output circuit 1310cb without reset function is electrically connected to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control board via wiring (harness). In the payout control input circuit 952b of the payout control unit 952 in 951, one end is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line, and the main control output circuit 1310cb without reset function is connected. The collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is a wiring Through the harness), the payout control input circuit of the peripheral control unit 1511 in the peripheral control board 1510, which is a pull-up resistor electrically connected to one end of which is connected + 12V power supply line and electrically. This is because the transistor MTR20 and the main control MPU 1310a of the main control input circuit 1310b are connected to the main control board between the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 of the main control input circuit 1310b and the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. Since it is implemented in 1310, the main control board 1310 and the payout control board are used to perform the power outage notice by the logic (ON / OFF signal) of the power outage notice signal using + 5V which is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a. The main control MPU 1310a, between the boards 951 and between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510, in order to suppress the influence of noise entering the wiring (harness) electrically connecting the boards. Control of the payout control MPU 952a and the peripheral control MPU 1511a It is the reference voltage + doing power failure notice by the logic of the power failure warning signal with certain + 12V at a higher voltage (ON / OFF signals) than 5V.

[9-6. Various input / output signals to main control MPU]
Next, various input / output signals to the main control MPU 1310a will be described with reference to FIG. The RXA terminal which is a serial data input terminal of the serial input port of the main control MPU 1310a receives serial data from the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 69 as a payer serial data reception signal via the main control input circuit 1310b. . On the other hand, the TXA terminal and the TXB terminal, which are serial data output terminals of the serial output port of the main control MPU 1310a, receive the serial data transmitted from the TXA terminal to the payout control board 951 as the main payout serial data transmission signal and have no reset function. A main payment serial data transmission signal is transmitted to the payout control board 951 from the main control output circuit 1310cb without reset function to the circuit 1310cb, and the serial data to be sent to the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. The peripheral serial data transmission signal is transmitted to the main control output circuit 1310cb without reset function, and the main peripheral serial data transmission signal is transmitted from the main control output circuit 1310cb without reset function to the peripheral control board 1510.

  In addition to the above-described operation signal (RAM clear signal) being input to each input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a, for example, a payout that informs the completion of normal reception of the above-described main payment serial data reception signal A payer ACK signal from the control board 951 is input via the main control input circuit 1310b, or detection signals from various switches such as the first start port sensor 4002 shown in FIG. 69 are input via the main control input circuit 1310b. Each is entered.

  On the other hand, from each output terminal of a predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a, for example, a main payment ACK signal that indicates the completion of normal reception of the above-described payment serial data reception signal is output to the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function. Then, a main payout ACK signal is outputted from the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function to the payout control board 951, or a drive signal is sent to the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function for the start port solenoid 2107 shown in FIG. To output a drive signal from the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca to the start port solenoid 2107 via the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d, and various displays such as the first special symbol display 1403 shown in FIG. Drive signal to the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function. Is output from the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function to various displays, and various information about the game (game information) is output to the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function. Various information (game information) related to the game is output to the payout control board 951 from the control output circuit 1310ca.

[9-7. Interface circuit for communication between main control board and peripheral control board]
Next, a communication interface circuit between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 will be described with reference to FIG. The main control board 1310 is supplied with + 12V from the power supply board 931 shown in FIG. 75 via the payout control board 951, and the + 5V creation circuit 1310g creates + 5V that is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a from this + 12V. ing. The main peripheral serial data transmission signal transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 is affected by noise entering the wiring (harness) that electrically connects the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510. Therefore, the reliability is enhanced by using + 12V, which is a voltage higher than + 5V, which is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a.

  Specifically, the main control board 1310 causes the main control output circuit 1310cb without a reset function to function as a communication interface circuit, and the communication interface circuit mainly includes a resistor MR50, resistors MR51 and MR52, and a transistor MTR50. Has been. On the other hand, the peripheral control board 1510 includes a diode AD10, an electrolytic capacitor AC10 (capacitance: 47 μF in this embodiment), and a photocoupler AIC10 (infrared LED and photo IC) as a communication interface circuit. It is mainly configured).

+ 12V supplied from the power supply board 931 is applied to the anode terminal of the diode MD50 of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951, and the negative terminal is grounded to the ground (GND) to the cathode terminal of the diode MD50. The electrolytic capacitor MC50 (capacitance: 220 microfarad (μF) in this embodiment) is electrically connected to the plus terminal. The cathode terminal of the diode MD50 is electrically connected to the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC50, and is electrically connected to the anode terminal (first terminal) of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control board 1510 via a wiring (harness). It is connected to the.
Thereby, for example, when a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs, when electric power from the power supply board 931 is not supplied to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951, the electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC50 is reduced. + 12V can be continuously applied from the main control board 1310 to the anode terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control board 1510.

  In this way, the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, is charged to the electrolytic capacitor MC2 (capacitance: 470 μF in this embodiment) shown in FIG. 77 when a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs. Therefore, the main peripheral serial transmission port 1310ae built in the main control MPU 1310a serially manages at least the command set by the main control CPU core 1310aa in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb. The unit 1310aec can transfer the data to the transmission shift register 41aea and complete the transmission from the transmission shift register 1310aea as main peripheral serial data.

  The main peripheral serial data transmission signal transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 is connected to the wiring (harness) that electrically connects the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 as described above. In order to suppress the influence of intruding noise, the reliability is enhanced by transmitting + 12V that is higher than + 5V that is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs, the electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC50 is applied as + 12V from the main control board 1310 to the anode terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control board 1510. Therefore, the main peripheral serial transmission port 1310ae built in the main control MPU 1310a transfers the command set by the main control CPU core 1310aa in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb to the transmission shift register 41aa by the serial management unit 1310aec. When transmission is performed from the shift register 1310aea as main circumference serial data, a main circumference serial data transmission signal having a logic level of HI can be transmitted from the collector terminal of the transistor MTR50 by + 12V.

  In this embodiment, the storage capacity of the transmission buffer register 1310aeb of the main peripheral serial transmission port 1310ae built in the main control MPU 1310a has 32 bytes, and one packet is composed of 3 bytes of data. Therefore, data for 10 packets at the maximum is stored in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb. In this embodiment, the transfer bit rate of the main peripheral serial data transmitted from the main control MPU 1310a is set to 19200 bps.

  The cathode terminal (third terminal) of the photocoupler AIC10 is electrically connected to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR50 of the main control board 1310 via the resistor AR10 and its wiring (harness). The resistor AR10 of the peripheral control board 1510 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler AIC10.

  The TXB terminal that outputs the main serial data transmission signal from the main control MPU 1310a shown in FIG. 77 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR50 that is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and the resistor MR51. And is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor MTR50. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor MR51, one end of the transistor MTR50 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR52 that is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR50 is grounded to the ground (GND).

  The circuit composed of the resistors MR51 and MR52 and the transistor MTR50 is a switch circuit. When the logic of the main serial data transmission signal is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR50 is on the ground (GND) side. As a result, the transistor MTR50 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, forward current does not flow through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler AIC10 on the peripheral control board 1510, so that the photocoupler AIC10 is turned off. On the other hand, when the logic of the main serial data transmission signal is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR50 is pulled up to + 5V by the resistor MR50, turning on the transistor MTR50 and turning on the switch circuit. . As a result, a forward current flows through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler AIC10 on the peripheral control board 1510, so that the photocoupler AIC10 is turned on.

  + 5V supplied from the power supply board 931 is applied to the anode terminal of the diode AD10 of the peripheral control board 1510 via the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and the cathode terminal of the diode AD10 is connected to the ground (GND). It is electrically connected to the plus terminal of the electrolytic capacitor AC10 to be grounded. In addition to being electrically connected to the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor AC10, the cathode terminal of the diode AD10 is also electrically connected to the Vcc terminal (No. 6 terminal) that is the power supply terminal of the photocoupler AIC10. The emitter terminal (No. 4 terminal) of the photocoupler AIC10 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal (No.5 terminal) of the photocoupler AIC10 is a pull-up resistor electrically connected to the plus terminal of the electrolytic capacitor AC10. It is pulled up to + 5V by AR11 and is electrically connected to the input terminal of the serial I / O port for the main control board of the peripheral control MPU 1511a. When the photocoupler AIC10 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 changes, and this signal is used as a main peripheral serial data transmission signal as a serial I / O port for the main control board of the peripheral control MPU 1511a. Is input to the input terminal.

  Thereby, as described above, for example, when a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs, +5 V supplied from the power supply board 931 is not supplied to the peripheral control board 1510 via the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868. The electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor AC10 can be continuously applied to the Vcc terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 as + 5V. When power or instantaneous power failure occurs, +5 V from the electrolytic capacitor AC10 is applied, so that the main serial data transmission signal transmitted from the TXB terminal of the main control MPU 1310a to the peripheral control board 1510 is sent to the main control MPU 1310a. The data set in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb of the built-in main circumference serial transmission port 1310ae can be completed, and the main circumference serial data transmission signal in the middle of transmission, that is, the main circumference serial data is cut off. The peripheral control board 1510 reliably receives the signal without being lost or missing.

  When the logic of the main peripheral serial data transmission signal transmitted from the TXB terminal of the main control MPU 1310a to the peripheral control board 1510 is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR50 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the transistor Since the photocoupler AIC10 is turned off when the MTR50 is turned off, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor AR11, and the logic becomes HI. The serial data transmission signal is input to the input terminal of the serial I / O port for the main control board of the peripheral control MPU 1511a, while the logic of the main peripheral serial data transmission signal transmitted from the TXB terminal of the main control MPU 1310a to the peripheral control board 1510. When is LOW Is applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 because the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR50 is pulled up to + 5V by the resistor MR50 and the transistor MTR50 is turned on so that the photocoupler AIC10 is turned on. The main peripheral serial data transmission signal whose logic is LOW by the pulled voltage being pulled down to the ground (GND) side is input to the input terminal of the serial I / O port for the main control board of the peripheral control MPU 1511a. Thus, the logic of the main circumference serial data transmission signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 is the same as the logic of the main circumference serial data transmission signal transmitted from the TXB terminal of the main control MPU 1310a to the peripheral control board 1510. It is the logic of

  As described above, in this embodiment, the + 5V power supply line to which + 5V that is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a is applied, and the + 12V power supply line to which + 12V that is the communication voltage applied through the diode MD50 is applied. Measures are taken when a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs and the control reference voltage and the communication voltage drop. That is, for the main peripheral serial transmission port 1310ae built in the main control MPU 1310a, a + 5V power supply line, a positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC2 using the electrolytic capacitor MC2 of the main control filter circuit 1310h as a first auxiliary power supply, Are electrically connected in parallel, so that even if a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs and the control reference voltage applied from the + 5V power supply line decreases, the electrolytic capacitor of the main control filter circuit 1310h as the first auxiliary power supply By applying the control reference voltage from the plus terminal of MC2, the state in which the control reference voltage is applied can be maintained, and the resistor MR50, the resistors MR51 and MR52, and the transistor MTR50 are configured. Main function without reset function to function as a communication interface circuit For the output circuit 1310cb, + 12V applied to the + 12V power supply line is applied as a communication voltage to the anode terminal of the diode MD50, and the positive terminal of the cathode terminal of the diode MD50 and the electrolytic capacitor MC50 as the second auxiliary power supply. Even if a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs and the communication voltage applied from the + 12V power supply line via the diode MD50 is reduced by the terminals being electrically connected in parallel, the second auxiliary power supply is provided. By applying the communication voltage from the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC50, the state where the communication voltage is applied can be maintained. As a result, it is possible to prevent the command being transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 from being cut off, and to prevent omission of the command. Therefore, the peripheral control board 1510 can reliably receive the command being transmitted. can do. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the missed command immediately after the occurrence of a power failure or during a momentary power failure.

  Further, a plurality of commands set in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb of the main peripheral serial transmission port 1310ae built in the main control MPU 1310a are all composed of a resistor MR50, resistors MR51 and MR52, and a transistor MTR50 as main periphery serial data. 470 μF is set as the capacitance of the electrolytic capacitor MC2 of the main control filter circuit 1310h so that the transmission to the peripheral control board 1510 can be completed via the main control output circuit 1310cb without the reset function that functions as a communication interface circuit. 220 μF is set as the capacitance of the electrolytic capacitor MC50. As a result, even if a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs during transmission from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, a reset that causes all the commands set in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb to function as an interface circuit as main peripheral serial data Since the transmission to the peripheral control board 1510 can be completed via the main control output circuit 1310cb having no function, the peripheral control board 1510 can omit a plurality of commands set in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb without missing them. And can be received reliably.

[10. Dispensing control board circuit]
Next, the circuit and the like of the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 70 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 80 is a circuit diagram showing a circuit and the like of the payout control unit, FIG. 81 is a circuit diagram showing the payout control input circuit, FIG. 82 is a circuit diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 81, and FIG. 84 is a circuit diagram showing a circuit, FIG. 84 is a circuit diagram showing a CR unit input / output circuit, and FIG. 85 is an input / output diagram showing various input / output signals with the main control board and various output signals to the external terminal board. It is. First, the payout control filter circuit will be described, and then the payout control circuit, various input / output signals with the main control board, and various output signals to the external terminal board will be described.

[10-1. Dispensing control filter circuit]
As shown in FIG. 80, the payout control filter circuit 951a mainly includes a payout control three-terminal filter PIC0. This payout control three-terminal filter PIC0 is a T-type filter circuit, and has excellent attenuation characteristics magnetically shielded with ferrite. The first terminal of the payout control three-terminal filter PIC0 is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC0, to which + 5V from the power supply board 931 shown in FIG. 75 is applied and whose one end is grounded (GND). Then, + 5V from the power supply substrate 931 is smoothed by removing the ripple (the AC component convolved with the voltage) by the capacitor PC0. The second terminal of the payout control 3-terminal filter PIC0 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the third terminal of the payout control 3-terminal filter PIC0 outputs +5 V from which noise components have been removed.

  The third terminal of the payout control three-terminal filter PIC0 has one end connected to the ground (GND) and the other end of the capacitor PC1 and the electrolytic capacitor PC2 (capacitance: 180 microfarad (μF) in this embodiment). By being electrically connected to each other, the ripple is further removed from the +5 V output from the third terminal of the payout control three-terminal filter PIC0 and smoothed. The smoothed + 5V is applied to a power supply terminal of the payout control system reset PIC1, a VCC terminal that is a power supply terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0, a VDD terminal that is a power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 952a, and the like. . In addition, when a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs and the power supply from the Pachinko Island facility is shut off, the charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor PC2 is a power failure or a momentary power failure. It is applied as +5 V over a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after the occurrence.

  The VDD terminal of the payout control MPU 952a is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC3 whose one end is grounded (GND), and + 5V applied to the VDD terminal is smoothed by further removing ripples by the capacitor PC3. ing. The VSS terminal, which is the ground terminal of the payout control MPU 952a, is grounded to the ground (GND).

  Further, the VDD terminal of the payout control MPU 952a is electrically connected to the anode terminal of the diode PD0 in addition to being electrically connected to the capacitor PC3. The cathode terminal of the diode PD0 is electrically connected to the VBB terminal, which is a power supply terminal of a RAM (payout control built-in RAM) built in the payout control MPU 952a, and one end of the capacitor PC4 is grounded to the ground (GND). Is electrically connected to the other end. In addition to being electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode PD0 and the other end of the capacitor PC4, the VBB terminal of the payout control built-in RAM is connected to the plus of the capacitor BC1 of the power supply board 931 shown in FIG. It is electrically connected to the terminal. In other words, + 5V smoothed by removing noise components by the payout control filter circuit 951a is applied to the VDD terminal of the payout control MPU 952a, and via the diode PD0, the VBB terminal of the payout control built-in RAM and the capacitor BC1. Are applied to the positive terminal. Thereby, as described above, when + 5V generated by the power generation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 shown in FIG. 75 is not supplied to the payout control board 951, the charge charged in the capacitor BC1 is discharged. Since the current is blocked by the diode PD0 and does not flow to the VDD terminal of the payout control MPU 952a, the payout control MPU 952a does not operate. The stored contents are held by applying the payment VBB. As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the backup power supply circuit that supplies the backup power to the payout control built-in RAM includes the diode PD0 and the capacitor BC1.

[10-2. Circuit of payout control unit]
As shown in FIG. 80, the payout control unit 952 includes a payout control MPU 952a, a payout control input circuit 952b, a payout control output circuit 952c, a payout motor drive circuit 952d, and a CR unit input / output circuit 952e. The payout control system reset PIC1 that outputs a signal and the payout control crystal oscillator PX0 that outputs a clock signal (in this embodiment, 8 megahertz (MHz)) are mainly configured. Here, the payout control system reset will be described first, followed by the payout control crystal oscillator, the payout control input circuit, the payout motor drive circuit, the CR unit input / output circuit, and various input / output signals to the payout control MPU.

[10-2-1. Payment control system reset]
As shown in FIG. 80, +5 V smoothed by removing the noise component by the payout control filter circuit 951a is applied to the power supply terminal of the payout control system reset PIC1. The payout control system reset PIC1 resets the payout control MPU 952a and the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function, and has a built-in delay circuit. One end of the delay control terminal of the payout control system reset PIC1 is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC5 grounded to the ground (GND), and the delay time by the delay circuit is set by the capacitance of the capacitor PC5. Be able to. Specifically, the payout control system reset PIC1 outputs a system reset signal from the output terminal after the delay time elapses when + 5V input to the power supply terminal reaches a threshold value (for example, 4.25V).

  The output terminal of the payout control system reset PIC1 is electrically connected to the SRT0 terminal which is the reset terminal of the payout control MPU 952a and the reset terminal of the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function. The output terminal is an open collector output type, one end of which is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor PR1, which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and one end of which is grounded to the ground (GND). The other end of the PC 6 is electrically connected. The capacitor PC6 plays a role as a low-pass filter. When the voltage input to the power supply terminal is larger than the threshold value, the output terminal is pulled up to + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR1, and the logic becomes HI. This logic is the SRT0 terminal of the payout control MPU952a and the payout control output with reset function. When the voltage inputted to the reset terminal of the circuit 952ca is smaller than the threshold value, the logic becomes LOW when the voltage inputted to the power supply terminal is smaller than the threshold value. This logic is the SRT0 terminal of the payout control MPU 952a and Each is input to the reset terminal. Since the SRT0 terminal of the payout control MPU 952a and the reset terminal of the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function are negative logic inputs, respectively, the payout control MPU 952a and the reset function when the voltage input to the power supply terminal is smaller than the threshold value. The attached payout control output circuit 952ca is reset. The power supply terminal is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC7 whose one end is grounded (GND), and + 5V input to the power supply terminal is smoothed by removing ripples. The ground terminal is grounded with the grant (GND), and the NC terminal is not electrically connected to the outside.

[10-2-2. Dispensing control crystal oscillator]
As shown in FIG. 80, + 5V smoothed by removing the noise component by the payout control filter circuit 951a is input to the VCC terminal which is the power supply terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0. The VCC terminal is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC8, one end of which is grounded (GND), and + 5V input to the VCC terminal is further smoothed by removing ripples. In addition to the VCC terminal, the smoothed + 5V is also applied to an OE terminal that is an output enable terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0. The payout control crystal oscillator PX0 outputs an 8 MHz clock signal from the OUT terminal, which is an output terminal, by applying +5 V to its OE terminal.

  The OUT terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0 is electrically connected to the MCLK terminal which is the clock terminal of the payout control MPU 952a, and an 8 MHz clock signal is input to the payout control MPU 952a. Note that the GND terminal, which is the ground terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0, is grounded to the grant (GND).

[10-2-3. Dispensing control input circuit]
The payout control input circuit 952b receives the payout blackout notice signal from the door frame open switch 618, the main body frame open switch 619 shown in FIG. 70, and the blackout monitor circuit 1310e included in the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 70, a circuit to which a detection signal from the full sensor 279 is input via the power supply board 931, a circuit to which an operation signal from the operation switch 954 is input, and the like. . First, the circuit to which the detection signal from the door frame opening switch is input will be described, then the circuit to which the detection signal from the main body frame opening switch will be input, the circuit to which the payout power failure warning signal from the power failure monitoring circuit will be input, The circuit to which the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor is input and the circuit to which the operation signal from the operation switch is input will be described. Note that the full detection sensor 279 and the various detection switches such as the ball break detection sensor 827, the payout detection sensor 842, and the rotation detection sensor 840 shown in FIG. Since the circuit configuration to which the detection signal from the switch is input is substantially the same, the circuit to which the detection signal from the full sensor is input will be described here.

[10-2-3 (a). Circuit where detection signal from door frame opening switch is input]
The door frame opening switch 618 uses a normally closed type (normally closed (NC)), and the switch is turned on (conducted) with the door frame 3 opened from the main body frame 4 shown in FIG. The switch is turned off (cut) while 3 is closed by the body frame 4. The second terminal of the door frame opening switch 618 is grounded to the ground (GND), while the first terminal of the door frame opening switch 618 is a pull-up resistor PR20 whose one end is electrically connected to the + 5V power line. It is electrically connected to the end and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 via the resistor PR21. The base terminal of the transistor PTR20 is electrically connected to the resistor PR21, and one end thereof is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR22 that is grounded to the ground (GND). Further, the first terminal of the door frame opening switch 618 is electrically connected to the pull-up resistor PR20, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC20 that is grounded to the ground (GND). . The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR20 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR20 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR23, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and a non-inverting buffer. Payout control via ICPIC 20 (non-inverted buffer ICPIC 20 includes eight non-inverted buffer circuits, and the signal waveform input to one (PIC 20A) is shaped and output without being inverted). The MPU 952a is electrically connected to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA. When the transistor PTR20 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR20 changes, and the signal is input as the door opening signal to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a.

  The first terminal of the door frame opening switch 618 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR20 and is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 through the resistor PR21, and the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR20. And is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR21 via the resistor PR24. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor PR24, one end of the transistor PTR21 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR25 that is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR21 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 is electrically connected to the external terminal plate 784 via a wiring (harness). Note that when the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 is electrically connected to the external terminal plate 784 via a wiring (harness), one end of the external terminal plate 784 is electrically connected to the + 12V power line. It is electrically connected to the other end of the up resistor. When the transistor PTR21 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 changes, and the signal is input to the external terminal plate 784 as the outer end frame door opening information output signal.

  Further, the first terminal of the door frame opening switch 618 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR20 and is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 through the resistor PR21, and at the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR20. To the base terminal of the transistor PTR21 via the resistor PR24, and to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR20 and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR22 via the resistor PR26. ing. The base terminal of the transistor PTR22 is electrically connected to the resistor PR26, and one end is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR27 that is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR22 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 69 via a wiring (harness). When the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 via a wiring (harness), one end of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. The other end of a pull-up resistor (not shown) that is electrically connected to the line is electrically connected. When the transistor PTR22 is turned on / off, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 changes, and the signal is input to the main control board 1310 as the main frame door opening signal.

  The circuit composed of the pull-up resistor PR20 and the capacitor PC20 is a switch signal generation circuit, and when the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4 or when the door frame 3 is closed by the main body frame 4. It is configured as a circuit that also has a function of absorbing voltage fluctuations from the door frame opening switch 618 due to a fluttering phenomenon in which the contacts constituting the door frame opening switch 618 are repeatedly turned on and off for a short time.

  A circuit constituted by resistors PR21 and PR22 and a transistor PTR20, a circuit constituted by resistors PR24 and PR25 and a transistor PTR21, and a circuit constituted by resistors PR26 and PR27 and a transistor PTR22 are a door frame opening switch. This is a switch circuit that is turned ON / OFF by a detection signal from 618.

When the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4, the door frame opening switch 618 is ON, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR 20 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, so that the transistor PTR 20 The switch circuit is turned off and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR20 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR23, and the door frame opening signal whose logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU952a. The Further, when the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4, the door frame opening switch 618 is ON, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR21 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, thereby causing the transistor The PTR 21 is turned off and the switch circuit is also turned off.
As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 is pulled up to + 12V side by the pull-up resistor of the external terminal board 784 via the wiring (harness), and the outer end frame door opening information output signal whose logic becomes HI. Is input to the external terminal board 784. Further, when the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4, the door frame opening switch 618 is turned on, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR22 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, whereby the transistor The PTR 22 is turned off and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 is pulled up to + 12V side by the pull-up resistor of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 via the wiring (harness), and the logic becomes HI. A door opening signal is input to the main control board 1310.

  On the other hand, when the door frame 3 is closed from the main body frame 4, the door frame opening switch 618 is OFF, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR20. Thus, the transistor PTR20 is turned on and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR20 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the door frame opening signal whose logic is LOW is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a. In addition, when the door frame 3 is closed from the main body frame 4, the door frame opening switch 618 is OFF, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR21 is pulled up to the + 5V side to turn on the transistor PTR21. The switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR 21 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the outer end frame door opening information output signal whose logic is LOW is input to the external terminal plate 784. In addition, when the door frame 3 is closed from the main body frame 4, the door frame opening switch 618 is OFF, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR22 is pulled up to the + 5V side to turn on the transistor PTR22. The switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the main frame door opening signal in which the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the logic becomes LOW is input to the main control board 1310.

  As described above, when the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4, the door frame opening switch 618 is turned ON, so that the door frame opening signal whose logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal PA of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a. While the outer frame door opening information output signal that is input to PA0 and logic is HI is input to the external terminal board 784, the main frame door opening signal that is logic HI is input to the main control board 1310, When the door frame 3 is closed by the main body frame 4, the door frame opening switch 618 is turned OFF, so that the door frame opening signal whose logic is LOW is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the dispensing control MPU 952a. The outer frame door opening information output signal whose logic is LOW is input to the external terminal board 784, and the main frame door opening signal whose logic is LOW is input to the main control board 1310.

[10-2-3 (b). A circuit to which the detection signal from the body frame opening switch is input]
The body frame opening switch 619 uses a normally closed type (normally closed (NC)), and the switch is turned on (conducted) with the body frame 4 opened from the outer frame 2 shown in FIG. The switch is turned off (cut) while 4 is closed by the outer frame 2. The second terminal of the body frame opening switch 619 is grounded to the ground (GND), while the first terminal of the body frame opening switch 619 is connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor PR28 whose one end is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line. It is electrically connected to the end and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR23 via the resistor PR29. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor PR29, one end of the transistor PTR23 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR30 that is grounded to the ground (GND). In addition to being electrically connected to the pull-up resistor PR28, the first terminal of the body frame opening switch 619 is also electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC21 that is grounded to the ground (GND). . The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR23 is grounded to the ground (GND), the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 is electrically connected to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 described above, and is connected to the external terminal plate 784 via a wiring (harness). Electrically connected. Note that when the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 is electrically connected to the external terminal plate 784 via a wiring (harness), one end of the external terminal plate 784 is electrically connected to the + 12V power line. It is electrically connected to the other end of the up resistor. When the transistor PTR23 is turned on / off, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 changes, and the signal is input to the external terminal plate 784 as the outer end frame door opening information output signal.

  Further, the first terminal of the body frame opening switch 619 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR28 and is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR23 through the resistor PR29, and the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR28. And is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR24 via the resistor PR31. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor PR31, one end of the transistor PTR24 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR32 that is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR24 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR24 is electrically connected to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 described above and shown in FIG. 69 via a wiring (harness). The main control board 1310 is electrically connected. When the collector terminal of the transistor PTR24 is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 via wiring (harness), one end of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. The other end of a pull-up resistor (not shown) that is electrically connected to the line is electrically connected. When the transistor PTR24 is turned on / off, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR24 changes, and the signal is input to the main control board 1310 as the main frame door opening signal.

  A circuit composed of the pull-up resistor PR28 and the capacitor PC21 is a switch signal generation circuit, and when the main body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2 or when the main body frame 4 is closed by the outer frame 2, The contacts constituting the body frame opening switch 619 are configured as a circuit that also has a function of absorbing fluctuations in voltage from the body frame opening switch 619 due to a fluttering phenomenon in which the contacts that repeatedly turn ON / OFF repeatedly.

  A circuit composed of the resistors PR29 and PR30 and the transistor PTR23 and a circuit composed of the resistors PR31 and PR32 and the transistor PTR24 are switch circuits that are turned on / off by a detection signal from the body frame opening switch 619.

  In the state where the main body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2, the main body frame opening switch 619 is ON, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR23 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, whereby the transistor PTR23 is turned on. The switch circuit is turned off and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor of the external terminal board 784 via the wiring (harness), and the outer end frame door opening information output signal whose logic becomes HI. Is input to the external terminal board 784. In the state where the main body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2, the main body frame opening switch 619 is ON, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR 24 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, thereby The PTR 24 is turned off and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR24 is pulled up to + 12V side by the pull-up resistor of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 via the wiring (harness), and the logic becomes HI. A door opening signal is input to the main control board 1310.

  On the other hand, when the main body frame 4 is closed by the outer frame 2, the main body frame opening switch 619 is OFF, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR23 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR28. Thus, the transistor PTR23 is turned on, and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the external terminal board 784 via the wiring (harness), and the outer frame door opening information output signal whose logic becomes LOW is output. Input to the external terminal board 784. When the main body frame 4 is closed by the outer frame 2, the main body frame opening switch 619 is OFF, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR24 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR28. As a result, the transistor PTR24 is turned on, and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR24 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the main control board 1310 via the wiring (harness), and the main frame door opening signal whose logic is LOW is sent to the main control board. It is input to 1310.

  As described above, when the main body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2, the outer frame door opening information output signal whose logic is HI is input to the external terminal board 784 by turning on the main body frame opening switch 619. When the main frame door opening signal whose logic is HI is input to the main control board 1310, while the main body frame 4 is closed to the outer frame 2, the main body frame opening switch 619 is turned OFF, Is output to the external terminal board 784, and the main frame door open signal whose logic is LOW is input to the main control board 1310.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, one or both of the state in which the door frame 3 is closed by the main body frame 4 and the state in which the main body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2 are used. Even in this case, since the main frame door opening signal is input to the main control board 1310, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. Although it is not possible to determine whether the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4 or the main body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2, the door frame 3 and / or It can be determined that a state in which the player has opened the main body frame 4 does not occur during the normal game, and the outer frame door opening information output signal is output to the external terminal board 784. Because it is designed to be input, this outer end The door opening information output signal is transmitted to the hall computer via the external terminal board 784, and the hall computer is in a state where the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4 based on the outer end frame door opening information output signal. Or it is impossible to determine whether the main body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2, but there is a state in which the player does not occur during normal games that the door frame 3 and / or the main body frame 4 are opened. It can be determined that it has occurred.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, the door frame opening switch 618 and the main body frame opening switch 619 are normally closed, so that the door frame opening switch 618 is short-circuited for some reason and the switch is turned on ( Even if the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4 even if it is in a conductive state, the main body frame opening switch 619 is short-circuited for some reason and the switch is turned on (conductive). 4 is released from the outer frame 2. Thus, by adopting a normally closed switch for the door frame opening switch 618 and the main body frame opening switch 619, a main frame door opening signal can be output to the main control board 1310 even at the time of a short circuit, and the outer end The frame door opening information output signal can be transmitted to the hall computer via the external terminal board 784.

  When the door frame opening switch 618 and the body frame opening switch 619 are changed from a normally closed switch to a normally open type (normally open (NO)) switch (door frame opening switch 618 ′ and body frame opening switch 619 ′). The door frame opening switch 618 ′ is turned on (conductive) when the door frame 3 is closed from the main body frame 4, and is turned off (cut) when the door frame 3 is opened to the main body frame 4. . The body frame opening switch 619 ′ is turned on (conductive) when the body frame 4 is closed from the outer frame 2, and is turned off (disconnected) when the body frame 4 is opened to the outer frame 2. Then, even if the door frame opening switch 618 ′ is disconnected due to some cause and the switch is turned off (cut), the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4, and the main body due to some cause. Even when the frame opening switch 619 ′ is disconnected and the switch is turned off (cut), the main body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2. In this way, the door frame opening switch 618 ′ and the main body frame opening switch 619 ′ can output a main frame door opening signal to the main control board 1310 even when a normally open switch is used, or at the time of disconnection, An outer end frame door opening information output signal can be transmitted to the hall computer via the external terminal board 784.

[10-2-3 (c). A circuit that receives a power outage warning signal from the power outage monitoring circuit]
A transmission line for transmitting a power failure notice signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e provided on the main control board 1310 is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor PR40, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line, and the resistor. It is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR40 via PR41. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor PR41, one end of the transistor PTR40 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR42 that is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR40 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR43, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and a non-inverting buffer. Dispensing control via ICPIC 40 (non-inverted buffer ICPIC 40 includes eight non-inverted buffer circuits, and the signal waveform input to one (PIC 40A) is shaped and output without being inverted). The MPU 952a is electrically connected to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA. When the transistor PTR40 is turned on / off, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 changes, and the signal is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a as a payout power failure notice signal.

  A circuit composed of the resistors PR41 and PR42 and the transistor PTR40 is a switch circuit that is turned ON / OFF by a payout power failure notice signal from a power failure monitoring circuit 1310e provided in the main control board 1310.

  As described above, the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e monitors the signs of power failure or instantaneous power failure of two types of voltages, + 12V and + 24V, from the power supply board 931. A payout blackout notice signal is output to the payout control board 951 as a blackout notice via the main control output circuit 1310cb. The power failure monitoring circuit 1310e monitors the signs of a power failure or a momentary power failure of the + 12V and + 24V voltages. As described above, the condition that the voltage of + 24V is larger than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the voltage of + 12V is higher than the power failure detection voltage V2pf. When both conditions are satisfied, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the subsequent transistor MTR22 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the payout control board 951 via the wiring (harness), and the logic becomes LOW. One of a condition that the + 24V voltage is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and a condition that the voltage of + 12V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V2pf is input to the payout power failure notification signal that is input to the payout control board 951. When the condition is satisfied, the collector of the subsequent transistor MTR22 Payout power failure warning signal which logic becomes HI by the voltage applied to the data terminal is pulled + 12V side by the pull-up resistor PR40 described above via wiring (harness) is input to the payout control board 951.

  When both the condition that the voltage of + 24V is larger than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of + 12V is larger than the power failure detection voltage V2pf are satisfied, that is, there is no sign of power failure or instantaneous interruption of the voltages of + 12V and + 24V. Sometimes, since a payout power failure warning signal whose logic is LOW is input to the payout control board 951, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR40 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side to turn off the transistor PTR40. The voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the resistor PR43. As a result, a payout power failure warning signal whose logic is HI is input from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a.

  On the other hand, when either one of the condition that the voltage of + 24V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of + 12V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V2pf is satisfied, that is, the voltage of + 12V and / or + 24V When there is an indication of a power outage or a momentary power failure, a payout power failure notice signal whose logic is HI is input to the payout control board 951 and is applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR 40 by the payout power failure notice signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e. Is pulled up to + 12V by the pull-up resistor PR40, the transistor PTR40 is turned on, and the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side. As a result, a payout power failure warning signal whose logic at the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 is LOW is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a.

  Thus, when there is an indication of a power failure or instantaneous power failure at a voltage of + 12V and / or + 24V, a payout power failure notice signal whose logic is HI is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a, When there is no sign of + 12V or + 24V power failure or instantaneous power failure, a payout power failure notice signal whose logic is LOW is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a. As described above, when there is an indication of a power failure or instantaneous power failure at a voltage of + 12V and / or + 24V, a power failure warning signal whose logic is HI is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. On the other hand, when there is no sign of + 12V and + 24V power failure or instantaneous power failure, a power failure warning signal is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. The logic of the payout blackout signal input to the payout control MPU 952a and the logic of the blackout notice signal input to the main control MPU 1310a are the same logic.

[10-2-3 (d). Circuit where detection signal from full tank detection sensor is input]
The detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279 provided in the foul cover unit 270 shown in FIG. 1 is sent through the handle relay terminal plate 315 shown in FIG. 1 and the power supply board 931 shown in FIG. Has been entered. The output terminal of the full tank detection sensor 279 is configured as an open collector output type in which the emitter terminal is grounded to the ground (GND), and one end of the payout control board 951 is electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line. The pull-up resistor PR44a is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor PR44a, and is also electrically connected to the first terminal of the full terminal detection sensor three-terminal filter PIC50. The full-tank detection sensor three-terminal filter PIC50 is a T-type filter circuit, and has excellent attenuation characteristics magnetically shielded with ferrite.

  The second terminal of the full terminal detection sensor three-terminal filter PIC50 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the third terminal of the full tank detection sensor three terminal filter PIC50 is connected to the full tank detection sensor 3 via the resistor PR44b. It is electrically connected to the first terminal of the terminal filter PIC50 and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR41 via the resistor PR45. As a result, the detection signal of the full tank detection sensor 279 is input to the base terminal of the transistor PTR 41 after the noise component is removed in the full terminal detection sensor three-terminal filter PIC50. In addition to the resistor PR45 being electrically connected, the base terminal of the transistor PTR41 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR46 that is grounded to the ground (GND), and has one end connected to the ground (GND). The other end of the electrically connected capacitor PC40 is electrically connected. The capacitor PC40 plays a role as a low-pass filter. The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR41 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR41 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR47, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and a non-inverting buffer. Payout control via ICPIC 40 (non-inverted buffer ICPIC 40 includes eight non-inverted buffer circuits, and the signal waveform input to one (PIC 40B) is shaped and output without being inverted). The MPU 952a is electrically connected to the input terminal PA2 of the input port PA. When the transistor PTR41 is turned on / off, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR41 changes, and the signal is input as a full signal to the input terminal PA2 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a.

  A circuit composed of the resistors PR45 and PR46 and the transistor PTR41 is a switch circuit that is turned ON / OFF by a detection signal from the full sensor 279.

  As described above, the full tank detection sensor 279 detects whether or not the storage space in the second ball passage of the foul cover unit 270 is full with the stored game balls. In the present embodiment, when the storage space is not full with the stored game balls, the voltage applied to the output terminal of the full tank detection sensor 279 is transmitted via the handle relay terminal plate 315 and the power supply board 931. When the payout control board 951 is pulled up to + 12V by the pull-up resistor 44a and the logic becomes HI, the signal is input to the payout control board 951, while the game ball in which the accommodation space is stored is full. The signal applied to the output terminal of the full tank detection sensor 279 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the payout control board 951 via the handle relay terminal board 315 and the power supply board 931, and the signal becomes logic LOW. Is input to the payout control board 951.

  When the storage space is not full with the stored game balls, the voltage applied to the output terminal of the full detection sensor 279 is applied to the payout control board 951 via the handle relay terminal board 315 and the power supply board 931. When a signal that has been pulled up to + 12V by the pull-up resistor 44a and whose logic has become HI is input to the base terminal of the transistor PTR41 described above, the transistor PTR41 is turned ON and the switch circuit is also turned ON. As a result, a full signal in which the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR41 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the logic becomes LOW is input to the input terminal PA2 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a.

  On the other hand, when the storage space is full of stored game balls, the voltage applied to the output terminal of the full tank detection sensor 279 is supplied to the payout control board via the handle relay terminal board 315 and the power supply board 931. In 951, when the signal that is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and becomes logic LOW is input to the base terminal of the transistor PTR41 described above, the transistor PTR41 is turned OFF and the switch circuit is also turned OFF. As a result, a full-tank signal whose voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR41 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the resistor PR47 and whose logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal PA2 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a.

  In the present embodiment, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279 is input to the switch circuit including the resistor PR45, the resistor PR46, and the transistor PTR41 via the full tank detection sensor three-terminal filter PIC50. The detection signal from various detection switches such as the ball breakage detection sensor 827 and the payout detection sensor 842 shown in FIG. 70 is transmitted from a T-type filter circuit such as a full-terminal detection sensor three-terminal filter PIC50. The circuit configuration is such that it is directly input to each switch circuit without intervention. Since the full tank detection sensor 279 is provided in the foul cover unit 270 attached to the door frame 3, it is compared with the ball breakage detection sensor 827, the payout detection sensor 842, etc. provided in the payout device 830 attached to the main body frame 4. The path for transmitting the detection signal becomes extremely long and is very susceptible to noise.

  The full tank detection sensor 279 detects whether or not the storage space in the second ball passage of the foul cover unit 270 is filled with the stored game balls, and the payout control MPU 952a is a full tank detection sensor. If it is determined based on the detection signal from 279 that the storage space is full of the game balls stored, the drive control of the payout motor 834 is forcibly stopped to stop paying out the game balls by the payout rotating body. It comes to perform control. That is, when noise enters the transmission path (transmission line) that transmits the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279, the payout control MPU 952a is not filled with the game ball in which the accommodation space is stored, but the payout motor 834 In some cases, the driving control is forcibly stopped to stop paying out the game ball by the payout rotating body, or the payout motor 834 is driven even though the storage space is full of the game balls stored. If the game ball is filled up to the upstream side of the above-described prize ball passage by controlling and rotating the payout rotator to continue paying out the game ball, the payout rotator itself cannot rotate and the payout motor 834 is rotated. The dispensing motor 834 becomes overloaded and abnormally generates heat and breaks down, or the rotating shaft of the dispensing motor 834 is transmitted to the rotational motion of the dispensing rotating body. Sometimes referred to 構等 is or failure. Therefore, in the present embodiment, in order to prevent such a problem, the circuit configuration is such that the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279 is first removed by the full terminal detection sensor three-terminal filter PIC50. Adopted.

[10-2-3 (e). Circuit that receives operation signals from operation switches]
The output terminals 1 and 2 of the operation switch 954 are grounded to the ground (GND), and the output terminals 3 and 4 of the operation switch 954 are connected to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR48. It is pulled up and electrically connected to the base terminal of the previous-stage transistor PTR42 via the resistor PR49. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor PR49, one end of the base terminal of the transistor PTR42 in the previous stage is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR50 that is grounded to the ground (GND). The fourth terminal, which is the output terminal of the operation switch 954, is electrically connected to the pull-up resistor PR48, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC41 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND). ing. The emitter terminal of the front-stage transistor PTR42 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the front-stage transistor PTR42 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR51 whose one end is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line. At the same time, it is electrically connected to the base terminal of the subsequent transistor PTR43 via the resistor PR52. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor PR52, one end of the base terminal of the transistor PTR43 at the subsequent stage is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR53 that is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the rear-stage transistor PTR43 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the rear-stage transistor PTR43 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR54 whose one end is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line. A non-inverted buffer ICPIC 40 (the non-inverted buffer ICPIC 40 includes eight non-inverted buffer circuits, and shapes and outputs the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC 40C) without inversion). Via the input terminal PA3 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a. The logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the downstream transistor PTR43 is changed by turning ON / OFF the upstream and downstream transistors PTR42 and PTR43, and the signal changes as an RWMCLR signal to the input terminal PA3 of the input port PA of the payout MPU 952a. Is input.

  In addition, the third and fourth terminals, which are the output terminals of the operation switch 954, are pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR48 and are electrically connected to the base terminal of the previous transistor PTR42 through the resistor PR49. The voltage is pulled up to + 5V by the pull-up resistor PR48 and is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR44 via the resistor PR55. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor PR55, one end of the transistor PTR44 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR56 that is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR44 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR44 is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 via a wiring (harness). Note that when the collector terminal of the transistor PTR44 is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 via wiring (harness), one end of the collector terminal of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 77 is + 12V. It is electrically connected to the other end of pull-up resistor MR2 that is electrically connected to the power supply line. When the transistor PTR44 is turned on / off, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR44 changes, and the signal is input as the RAM clear signal to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a.

  The circuit composed of the pull-up resistor PR48 and the capacitor PC41 is a switch signal generation circuit, and when the operation switch 954 is pressed, the contact that constitutes the operation switch 954 repeats the ON / OFF for a short time. It is configured as a circuit that also has a function of absorbing voltage fluctuations from the operation switch 954.

  A circuit composed of the resistors PR49 and PR50 and the transistor PTR42 is a front-stage switch circuit, and a circuit composed of the resistors PR52 and PR53 and the transistor PTR43 is a rear-stage switch circuit, and the resistors PR55 and PR56 and the transistor PTR44. Is a switch circuit that is turned ON / OFF by an operation signal from the operation switch 954.

  As described above, the operation switch 954 is connected to the RAM (payout control built-in RAM) built in the payout control MPU 952a of the payout control board 951 and the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 within a predetermined period from the time of turning on the power. It is operated when clearing the built-in RAM (main control built-in RAM), or when an error is reported after the power is turned on, it is operated to cancel the error. A function for clearing RAM within a predetermined period from the time and canceling an error after the power is turned on (after a period during which the function is performed as a RAM clear has elapsed, that is, after a predetermined period has elapsed since the power was turned on) And has a function. The operation signal from the operation switch 954 becomes a RAM clear signal in the function of performing a RAM clear within a predetermined period from when the power is turned on. On the other hand, after turning on the power (after a predetermined period has elapsed since the power is turned on) In the function for performing error cancellation in (), an error cancellation signal is generated.

  When the operation switch 954 is not operated, the operation signal whose logic becomes HI by pulling up the third terminal and the fourth terminal, which are output terminals of the operation switch 954, to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR48 is a transistor in the previous stage. When input to the base terminal of the PTR 42, the previous stage transistor PTR 42 is turned ON, and the previous stage switch circuit is also turned ON, and is applied to the collector terminal of the previous stage transistor PTR 43, which is a voltage applied to the base of the subsequent stage transistor PTR 43. As a result, the rear-stage transistor PTR43 is turned OFF, and the rear-stage switch circuit is also turned OFF. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR43 at the subsequent stage is pulled up to the + 5V side by the resistor PR54, and the RWMCLR signal whose logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal PA3 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a. The payout control MPU 952a performs a RAM clear that erases information stored in the payout control built-in RAM when the logic of the RWMCLR signal input to the input terminal PA3 is HI within a predetermined period from the time of power-on. If the logic of the RWMCLR signal input to the input terminal PA3 is HI after the power is turned on (after a predetermined period has elapsed since the power was turned on), the error is canceled. Judge that it is not an instruction.

  Further, when the operation switch 954 is not operated, the operation signal in which the output terminal of the operation switch 954 and the third terminal and the fourth terminal are pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR48 and the logic becomes HI is output from the transistor PTR44. The transistor PTR44 is turned on and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the RAM clear signal in which the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR44 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the main control board 1310 via the wiring (harness) and the logic becomes LOW is sent to the main control board 1310. Entered. When the RAM clear signal whose logic is LOW is input within a predetermined period from when the power is turned on, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 has the logic shown in FIG. Is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0, the transistor MTR0 is turned OFF and the switch circuit is also turned OFF. As a result, the RAM clear signal in which the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the resistor MR5 and the logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. The main control MPU 1310a determines that the RAM clear signal for erasing the information stored in the main control built-in RAM is not instructed when the logic of the RAM clear signal input to the input terminal PA0 is HI.

  On the other hand, when the operation switch 954 is operated, the operation signal whose logic is LOW by pulling down the third terminal and the fourth terminal, which are output terminals of the operation switch 954, to the ground (GND) side is the transistor in the previous stage. When input to the base terminal of the PTR 42, the previous stage transistor PTR 42 is turned OFF and the previous stage switch circuit is also turned OFF, and the voltage applied to the base of the rear stage transistor PTR 43 is applied to the collector terminal of the previous stage transistor PTR 42. As a result, the subsequent transistor PTR43 is turned on and the subsequent switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the subsequent transistor PTR43 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the RWMCLR signal whose logic is LOW is input to the input terminal PA3 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a. The payout control MPU 952a performs RAM clear for erasing information stored in the payout control built-in RAM when the logic of the RWMCLR signal input to the input terminal PA3 is LOW within a predetermined period from the time of power-on. If the logic of the RWMCLR signal input to the input terminal PA3 is LOW after the power is turned on (after a predetermined period has elapsed since the power was turned on), the error is canceled. Judge that it is an instruction.

  In addition, when the operation switch 954 is being operated, an operation in which the logic becomes LOW by pulling down the third terminal and the fourth terminal, which are output terminals of the operation switch 954, to the ground (GND) side by the pull-up resistor PR48. A signal is input to the base terminal of the transistor PTR44, the transistor PTR44 is turned OFF, and the switch circuit is also turned OFF. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR44 is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor MR2 of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 via the wiring (harness), and the logic becomes HI. A clear signal is input to the main control board 1310. When the RAM clear signal whose logic is HI is input within a predetermined period from when the power is turned on, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 has the logic shown in FIG. When the RAM clear signal is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0, the transistor MTR0 is turned on and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the RAM clear signal in which the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the logic becomes LOW is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. When the logic of the RAM clear signal input to the input terminal PA0 is LOW, the main control MPU 1310a determines that the instruction is to perform RAM clear to erase information stored in the main control built-in RAM.

[10-2-4. Dispensing motor drive circuit]
Next, a payout motor drive circuit 952d for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 834 of the payout device 830 shown in FIG. 5 will be described. As shown in FIG. 83, the payout motor drive circuit 952d is mainly composed of a voltage switching circuit 952da and a drive ICPIC60. The power input terminals 1 and 2 of the voltage switching circuit 952da are electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line and the + 5V power supply line, respectively, and +12 and + 5V are applied, respectively. The ground terminal of the voltage switching circuit 952da is the ground (GND). Grounded. A voltage switching signal is input to the power source switching input terminal of the voltage switching circuit 952da. This voltage switching signal is output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a to the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function, and is output from the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function to the power supply switching input terminal of the voltage switch circuit 952da. It has come to be. The power output terminal of the voltage switching circuit 952da is electrically connected to the third terminal and the tenth terminal, which are the cathode terminals of the drive ICPIC 60, via the Zener diode PZD60, and electrically connected to the power supply terminal of the payout motor 834. 3 is the cathode terminal of the drive ICPIC 60 via the Zener diode PZD 60 using + 12V or + 5V as the motor drive voltage based on the voltage switch signal input to the voltage switch input terminal of the voltage switch circuit 952da. The power is supplied to the terminal and the 10th terminal and supplied to the payout motor 834.

  The drive ICPIC 60 includes four Darlington power transistors. In the present embodiment, the sixth terminal and the seventh terminal, which are the emitter terminals of the drive ICPIC 60, are grounded to the ground (GND), respectively, and are the base terminals of the drive ICPIC 60. The payout motor drive signal is input to the first terminal, the fifth terminal, the eighth terminal, and the twelfth terminal through the resistors PR60 to PR63, respectively. The second terminal, the fourth terminal, the ninth terminal, and the eleventh terminal that are the collector terminals of the drive ICPIC 60 are the first terminal, the fifth terminal, the eighth terminal, and the twelfth terminal that are the base terminals of the drive ICPIC 60, respectively. If the payout motor drive signal is input to the first terminal, the fifth terminal, the eighth terminal, and the twelfth terminal of the drive ICPIC 60 through the resistors PR60 to PR63, respectively, A certain drive pulse is output to each phase (/ B phase, B phase, A phase, / A phase) corresponding to the dispensing motor 834. This payout motor drive signal is output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a to the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function, and from the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function via the resistors PR60 to PR63, the drive ICPIC60. The signal is output to the first terminal, the fifth terminal, the eighth terminal, and the twelfth terminal, which are base terminals. These drive pulses are generated by switching excitation currents that flow through the phases (/ B phase, B phase, A phase, / A phase) of the payout motor 834, and rotate the payout motor 834. Note that a back electromotive force is generated when the drive pulse (excitation signal) of each phase (/ B phase, B phase, A phase, / A phase) is cut off by this switching. When this back electromotive force exceeds the withstand voltage of the drive ICPIC 60, the drive ICPIC 60 is damaged. As a protection, the above-described Zener diode PZD0 is electrically connected to the third terminal and the tenth terminal before the drive ICPIC 60. The circuit configuration is adopted.

[10-2-5. CR unit input / output circuit]
Next, a CR unit input / output circuit 952e for inputting / outputting various signals to / from the CR unit 6 shown in FIG. 71 will be described. As described above, the payout control board 951 receives the BRDY as a ball rental request signal and the BRQ as a single payout operation start request signal via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869, as described above. , And a predetermined voltage VL (+12 V) and a ground LG created from the AC24V supplied from the power supply board 931 shown in FIG. 71 are supplied, while the payout control board 951 is connected to a lending device such as a game ball. Via the terminal board 869, an EXS signal that indicates that one payout operation has been started or ended, and a PRDY signal that indicates that a payout operation for paying out a rental ball is possible or impossible. And are output. As shown in FIG. 84, the input / output circuit for inputting and outputting these various signals mainly includes photocouplers PIC70 to PIC74 (infrared LEDs and phototransistors are incorporated).

  The predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 via the resistor PR70. The cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC 70 is electrically connected to the ground LG from the CR unit 6. The resistor PR60 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC70. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned on, while the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is not applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70. In some cases, the photocoupler PIC 70 is turned off. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR70 via the resistor PR71, and the transistor via the resistor PR72. It is electrically connected to the base terminal of the PTR 71. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor PR71, the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor PR73 that is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line.

  In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor PR71, the base terminal of the transistor PTR70 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR74 that is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR70 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR70 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR75, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and a non-inverting buffer. FIG. 80 through ICPIC 80 (non-inverted buffer ICPIC 80 includes eight non-inverted buffer circuits, and the signal waveform input to one (PIC 80A) is shaped and output without being inverted). Are electrically connected to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a shown in FIG. When the transistor PTR 70 is turned on / off, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR 70 changes, and the signal is input as the CR connection signal 1 to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a.

  On the other hand, the base terminal of the transistor PTR71 is electrically connected to the resistor PR72 and one end is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR76 that is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR71 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71 is electrically connected to the power supply substrate 931 via a wiring (harness). Note that when the collector terminal of the transistor PTR 71 is electrically connected to the power supply substrate 931 via a wiring (harness), one end of the collector terminal of the power supply substrate 931 is electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line (not shown). Is electrically connected to the other end. When the transistor PTR71 is turned on / off, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71 changes, and the signal is input to the power supply substrate 931 as a CR connection signal.

  A circuit composed of the resistors PR71 and PR74 and the transistor PTR70 is a switch circuit that is turned on / off by turning on / off the photocoupler PIC70.

  When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is not applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned off, and the transistor PTR70 is turned on by being pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR73. It will be turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR 70 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the CR connection signal 1 whose logic becomes LOW is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a.

  On the other hand, when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned on, and the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR70 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side. As a result, the transistor PTR 70 is turned OFF, and the switch circuit is also turned OFF. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR70 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PTR75, and the CR connection signal 1 whose logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a. The

  The circuit composed of the resistors PR72 and PR76 and the transistor PTR71 is also a switch circuit that is turned on / off by turning on / off the photocoupler PIC70.

  When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is not applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned off and pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR73, thereby turning on the transistor PTR71 and the switch circuit also It will be turned on. As a result, the CR connection signal in which the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the power supply board 931 via the wiring (harness) and the logic becomes LOW is input to the power supply board 931. The

  On the other hand, when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned on, and the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR71 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side. As a result, the transistor PTR 71 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71 is pulled up to + 12V side by the pull-up resistor of the power supply board 931 via the wiring (harness), and the CR connection signal whose logic becomes HI is input to the power supply board 931. Is done.

  The predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied not only to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 but also to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 via the resistor PR77. The BRDY from the CR unit 6 is input to the cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71. The resistor PR77 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC71. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 and the BRDY logic from the CR unit 6 is LOW, the photocoupler PIC71 is turned on, while the photocoupler PIC71 is turned on. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the coupler PIC71 and the BRDY logic from the CR unit 6 is HI, the photocoupler PIC71 is turned off. Yes. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor PR78 whose one end is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line. A non-inverted buffer ICPIC 80 (the non-inverted buffer ICPIC 80 includes eight non-inverted buffer circuits, and shapes and outputs the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC 80B) without inverting it). To the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a. When the photocoupler PIC71 is turned on / off, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 changes, and the signal is input as a BRDY signal to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a.

  When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 and the BRDY logic from the CR unit 6 is LOW, the photocoupler PIC71 is turned on. The BRDY signal whose logic is set to LOW when the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the coupler PIC71 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a. On the other hand, when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 and the BRDY logic from the CR unit 6 is HI, the photocoupler PIC71 is turned off. The BRDY signal whose logic is HI is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR78 and the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a. Thus, the logic of the BRDY signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC 71 is the same as the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6.

  The predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 via the resistor PR79 in addition to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 and the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71. The BRQ from the CR unit 6 is input to the cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72. The resistor PR79 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC72. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 and the BRQ logic from the CR unit 6 is LOW, the photocoupler PIC72 is turned on, while the photocoupler PIC72 is turned on. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the coupler PIC 72 and the BRQ logic from the CR unit 6 is HI, the photo coupler PIC 72 is turned off. Yes. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor PR80 whose one end is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line. A non-inverted buffer ICPIC 80 (the non-inverted buffer ICPIC 80 includes eight non-inverted buffer circuits, and shapes and outputs the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC 80C) without inverting it). To the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a. When the photocoupler PIC72 is turned on / off, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 changes, and the signal is input as a BRQ signal to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a.

  When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 and when the BRQ logic from the CR unit 6 is LOW, the photocoupler PIC72 is turned on. A BRQ signal whose logic is LOW by the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the coupler PIC 72 being pulled down to the ground (GND) side is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a. On the other hand, when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 and the BRQ logic from the CR unit 6 is HI, the photocoupler PIC72 is turned off. The voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC 72 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR80, and the BRQ signal whose logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a. Thus, the logic of the BRQ signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC 72 is the same as the logic of the BRQ from the CR unit 6.

  An EXS signal indicating that one payout operation has started or ended from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a is output to the payout control output circuit 952cb without reset function, and the payout control output circuit without reset function 952cb is input to the cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 via the resistor PR81. One end of the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR82 that is electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line. The resistor PR82 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC73. EXS output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control output circuit 952cb without reset function when + 12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 via the resistor PR82. When the logic of the signal is LOW, the photocoupler PIC73 is turned on, while + 12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 via the resistor PR82, and a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a. When the logic of the EXS signal output from the output terminal via the payout control output circuit 952cb without reset function is HI, the photocoupler PIC73 is turned OFF. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is grounded to the ground LG from the CR unit 6, and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is connected to the inside of the CR unit 6 via the pull-up resistor PR83 via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869. The voltage is raised to a predetermined voltage VL and electrically connected to the built-in control device. When the photocoupler PIC73 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 changes, and the signal is input as EXS to the built-in control device of the CR unit 6.

  EXS output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control output circuit 952cb without reset function when + 12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 via the resistor PR82. When the logic of the signal is LOW, the photocoupler PIC73 is turned ON, so that the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and EXS in which the logic becomes LOW is the CR unit. 6 built-in control device. On the other hand, when + 12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 via the resistor PR82, the photocoupler PIC73 is output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control output circuit 952cb without reset function. When the logic of the EXS signal is HI, the photocoupler PIC73 is turned OFF, so that the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is pulled up to the predetermined voltage VL by the pull-up resistor PR83, and the logic becomes HI. EXS is input to the built-in control device of the CR unit 6. Thus, the logic of the EXS output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC 73 is the logic of the EXS signal output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control output circuit 952cb without the reset function. It has the same logic.

  A PRDY signal indicating that the payout operation for paying out the rented ball from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a is possible or impossible is sent to the cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 via the resistor PR84. Has been entered. One end of the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR85 that is electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line. The resistor PR85 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC74. PRDY output when + 12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 via the resistor PR85 and output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control output circuit 952cb without reset function. When the logic of the signal is LOW, the photocoupler PIC74 is turned on, while + 12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 via the resistor PR85, and a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a. The photocoupler PIC74 is turned off when the logic of the PRDY signal output from the output terminal via the payout control output circuit 952cb without reset function is HI. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is grounded to the ground LG from the CR unit 6, and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is connected to the inside of the CR unit 6 by a pull-up resistor PR86 via a game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869. The voltage is raised to a predetermined voltage VL and electrically connected to the built-in control device. When the photocoupler PIC74 is turned on / off, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 changes, and the signal is input as PRDY to the built-in control device of the CR unit 6.

  PRDY output when + 12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 via the resistor PR85 and output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control output circuit 952cb without reset function. When the signal logic is LOW, the photocoupler PIC74 is turned on. Therefore, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the PRDY whose logic is LOW is the CR unit. 6 built-in control device. On the other hand, when + 12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 via the resistor PR85, the output is output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control output circuit 952cb without reset function. When the logic of the PRDY signal is HI, the photocoupler PIC74 is turned OFF, so that the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is pulled up to the predetermined voltage VL by the pull-up resistor PR86, and the logic becomes HI. The PRDY is input to the built-in control device of the CR unit 6. Thus, the logic of PRDY output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is the logic of the PRDY signal output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control output circuit 952cb without reset function. It has the same logic.

[10-2-6. Various input / output signals to payout control MPU]
Next, various input / output signals input / output from the input / output terminals of the various input / output ports of the payout control MPU 952a will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 80, the RXD terminal which is the serial data input terminal of the payout control MPU 952a receives serial data from the main control board 1310 as a main pay serial data reception signal via the payout control input circuit 952b. Is done. On the other hand, from the TXD terminal which is a serial data output terminal of the serial output port of the payout control MPU 952a, serial data to be sent to the main control board 1310 is sent as a payer serial data transmission signal to the payout control output circuit 952cb without reset function. A payer serial data transmission signal is transmitted from the payout control output circuit 952cb without reset function to the main control board 1310.

  Each input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a has the above-mentioned RWMCLR signal, payout power failure warning signal, door open signal, full signal, various signals from the CR unit 6 (BRQ signal, BRDY signal, CR connection) In addition to the input of the signal 1 and the like), for example, a main payment ACK signal from the main control board 1310 that informs the completion of normal reception of the payer serial data reception signal is sent via the payout control input circuit 952b. 70, and detection signals from the ball breakage detection sensor 827, the payout detection sensor 842, the rotation detection sensor 840, and the like shown in FIG. 70 are input via the payout control input circuit 952b.

  On the other hand, the EXS signal and the PRDY signal described above are output from the output terminals of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a to the payout control output circuit 952cb without reset function, respectively, and the EXS signal from the payout control output circuit 952cb without reset function and The PRDY signal is output to the CR unit input / output circuit 952e, or the voltage switching signal described above is output to the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function, and the voltage switching signal is sent from the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function to the voltage switching circuit 952da. Or a payout motor drive signal is output to the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function, and a payout motor drive signal is output from the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function to the payout motor 834 via the payout motor drive circuit 952d. In addition to , A payer ACK signal that informs the completion of normal reception of the main payment serial data reception signal is output to the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function, and the payer ACK signal is main-controlled from the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function. 70 is output to the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function and the drive signal is output from the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function to the error LED display 860b. And so on.

[10-3. Various input / output signals with the main control board and various output signals to the external terminal board]
Next, various input / output signals between the payout control board 951 and the main control board 1310 and various output signals from the payout control board 951 to the external terminal board 784 will be described with reference to FIG.

[10-3-1. Various input / output signals with the main control board]
The payout control board 951 exchanges various input / output signals with the main control board 1310. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 85A, the payout control board 951 has the above-described payer serial data transmission signal, payer ACK signal, operation signal (RAM clear signal), main frame door open signal, and the like. Is output to the main control board 1310. These output signals are pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310.

  On the other hand, the payout control board 951, in addition to the main pay serial data reception signal, the main pay ACK signal, and the operation signal (RAM clear signal) described above, a main prize ball number information output signal, a 15 round jackpot information output signal, And games such as jackpot information output signal such as 2 round jackpot information output signal, information output signal during probability fluctuation, special symbol display information output signal, normal symbol display information output signal, short and medium time information output signal, start opening prize information output signal, etc. A game information signal, a payout blackout notice signal, etc. are input from the main control board 1310. These input signals are pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor of the payout control input circuit 952b of the payout control unit 952 of the payout control board 951.

[10-3-2. Various output signals to external terminal board]
The payout control board 951 outputs various signals to the external terminal board 784. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 85 (b), in addition to the above-described outer frame door opening information output signal, the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 834 as prize balls reaches 10 balls. The winning ball number information output signal that is output every time, the main winning ball number information output signal from the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951, the big hit information of the 15 round big hit information output signal and the two round big hit information output signal Game information signals such as an output signal, a probability changing information output signal, a special symbol display information output signal, a normal symbol display information output signal, a short time information output signal, and a start opening prize information output signal are output to the external terminal board 784. To do. These output signals are pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor of the external terminal board 784. That is, the external terminal board 784 outputs two signals, that is, an outer end frame door opening information output signal from the payout control board 951 side and a prize ball number information output signal, and the number of main prize balls from the main control board 1310 side. Information output signal, 15 round jackpot information output signal, 2 round jackpot information output signal, probability changing information output signal, special symbol display information output signal, normal symbol display information output signal, short and medium time information output signal, and start opening prize information Eight signals called output signals are outputted (passed through) the payout control board 951.

  A signal output from the external terminal board 784 is transmitted to a hall computer installed in a game hall (hall) (not shown), and the hall computer monitors a player's game and the like. When the 15 round jackpot information output signal or the 2 round jackpot information output signal is output to the hall computer as one jackpot information output signal, the hall computer counts the number of jackpots (two round jackpots). ) And the number of jackpots with 15 rounds (number of jackpots for 15 rounds) is the total number of jackpots of the pachinko machine 1. For this reason, the hall computer cannot grasp the number of occurrences of 2 rounds of big hits or the number of occurrences of 15 land big hits from the combined number of big hits. It is impossible to grasp whether it is a big hit of 2 rounds or a big hit of 15 rounds. In addition, a data counter (not shown) is arranged above the pachinko machine 1, and a player selects whether or not to play a game with reference to the number of occurrences of the big hit gaming state displayed on the data counter. Some people do.

  However, the number of occurrences of the jackpot gaming state displayed in the data counter may actually be biased to the number of occurrences of two rounds of big hits, so even if the player starts the game, only two rounds of big hits will occur. 15 round hits may not occur easily. As described above, the number of occurrences of the jackpot gaming state displayed on the data counter can give the player a sense of expectation, but may cause the player to be more eager than necessary.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, as the jackpot information output signal, the 15 round jackpot information output signal and the two round jackpot information output signal are separately output to the hall computer, so that the hall computer can generate the number of occurrences of the two round jackpot, The number of occurrences of 15 round big hits can be accurately grasped. Therefore, the hall computer can grasp whether the number of big hits actually generated by the pachinko machine 1 is the big hit of two rounds or the big hit of 15 rounds, and the data counter has 15 rounds. The number of occurrences of jackpots and the number of rounds of jackpots for 2 rounds can be displayed separately or only the number of rounds of jackpots for 15 rounds can be displayed as the number of occurrences of jackpot gaming states, which may increase the player's gambling ambition more than necessary. Absent.

  In the present embodiment, the 2-round jackpot information output signal is output to the hall computer in the period from when the 2-round jackpot is generated until it is finished, and the 15-round jackpot information output signal is also a 15-round jackpot. It is in a state of being output to the hall computer during the period from occurrence to termination. In addition to the method of outputting the 2-round jackpot information output signal and the 15-round jackpot information output signal to the hall computer as in the present embodiment, for example, when a 2-round jackpot occurs, the 2-round jackpot information output signal is output only for a predetermined period. When the 15 round jackpot is generated and the 15 round jackpot information output signal is output to the hall computer for a predetermined period when the 15 round jackpot occurs, such a 2 round jackpot information output signal and 15 round jackpot information are output. A method of outputting the output signal to the hall computer for the same predetermined period can also be mentioned.

[11. Output terminal arrangement of external terminal board]
Next, the arrangement of the output terminals of the external terminal board 784 that outputs various signals to the hall computer installed in the game hall (hall) will be described with reference to FIG. The external terminal plate 784 is attached to the rear surface of the prize ball base attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 600, and the rear side thereof is covered with the external terminal plate cover 786. FIG. 86 is a diagram showing an arrangement of output terminals of the external terminal board.

  As described above, the external terminal board 784 includes the outer frame door opening information output signal, the prize ball number information output signal, the main prize ball number information output signal, the 15 round jackpot information output signal, and the two round jackpot information output signal. When the jackpot information output signal, the probability variation information output signal, the special symbol display information output signal, the normal symbol display information output signal, the short time medium information output signal, and the start opening prize information output signal are input from the payout control board 951, This is output to the outside of the pachinko machine 1.

  Briefly explaining these various signals, the outer end frame door opening information output signal is not generated during a normal game by a player that the door frame 3 and / or the main body frame 4 shown in FIG. 1 is opened. A signal indicating that a state has occurred. The prize ball number information output signal is output every time the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 834 shown in FIG. 5 reaches 10 balls. The main prize-ball number information output signal is a signal indicating the effect, and the various prize-winning openings such as the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, the general winning opening 2001, 2011, and the large winning opening 2005 shown in FIG. This is a signal to notify that every time the number of game balls scheduled to be paid out as prize balls reaches 10 on the basis of the game balls that entered the ball, and the 15 round jackpot information output signal generates a 15 round jackpot In a state 2 round jackpot information output signal is a signal that reports that 2 round jackpots are occurring, and the probability changing information output signal is in a state where probability fluctuations are occurring. The special symbol display information output signal is a signal indicating that there is a change, and the special symbol change display is ended by the first special symbol display unit 1403 and the second special symbol display unit 1405 of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. The normal symbol display information output signal is a signal indicating that the normal symbol change display is ended (stopped) on the normal symbol display unit 1402 of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. The signal indicating that there is a time-shortage is a signal indicating that a time-short state has occurred, and the start-port winning information output signal is the first start-port 2 shown in FIG. 02 or game ball to the second start hole 2004 is a signal for transmitting this fact each time ball entrance.

  On the external terminal plate 784, as shown in FIG. 86, output terminals PT1 to PT10 are arranged horizontally in a row. The output terminal PT1 is provided in white and outputs an award ball number information output signal. As described above, the award ball number information output signal is a signal to notify that every time the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 834 shown in FIG. In the embodiment, the signal is output from the output terminal PT1 for 0.105 seconds. When the award ball number information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer receives 10 as the prize ball for the payout motor 834 of the pachinko machine 1 every time the award ball number information output signal is input. It is possible to grasp that the game balls of the balls are paid out as prize balls, and it is possible to grasp the total number of game balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1 by counting the number of game balls paid out.

  The output terminal PT2 is provided in green and outputs an outer end frame door opening information output signal. As described above, the outer end frame door opening information output signal has a state in which the player does not generate a normal game when the door frame 3 and / or the main body frame 4 shown in FIG. 1 is opened. In this embodiment, the signal is output while the door frame 3 and / or the main body frame 4 are opened from the output terminal PT2. When the outer end frame door opening information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer outputs the door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 and the pachinko machine 1 while the outer end frame door opening information output signal is input. It can be grasped that the main body frame 4 is opened.

  The output terminal PT3 is provided in gray and outputs a special symbol display information output signal. As described above, the special symbol display information output signal ends (stops) the variation display of the special symbol in the first special symbol display unit 1403 and the second special symbol display unit 1405 of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. In this embodiment, the change display of the special symbol on the first special symbol display 1403 and the second special symbol display 1405 of the function display unit 1400 is terminated (stopped) in this embodiment. Sometimes it is output for 0.128 seconds. When the special symbol display information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer receives the special symbol display information output signal and then the first special symbol of the function display unit 1400 of the pachinko machine 1. In the display 1403 and the second special symbol display 1405, it is possible to grasp that the variation display of the special symbol is finished (stopped), and the number of times is counted to count the first special of the function display unit 1400 of the pachinko machine 1. The total number of times that the special symbol is variably displayed on the symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405 can be grasped.

  The output terminal PT4 is yellow and outputs a start opening winning information output signal. As described above, the start opening winning information output signal is a signal to notify that every time a game ball enters the first start opening 2002 or the second start opening 2004 shown in FIG. Each time a game ball enters the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 from the output terminal PT4, it is output for 0.128 seconds. When the start opening prize information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer inputs the first opening opening 2002 or the second of the pachinko machine 1 every time the start opening prize information output signal is input. It is possible to grasp that a game ball has entered the start port 2004 and count the number of times the start port winning information output signal is input to the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 of the pachinko machine 1. The total number of game balls entered can be ascertained.

  The output terminal PT5 is black and outputs a 15 round big hit information output signal. As described above, the 15-round jackpot information output signal is a signal that indicates that the 15-round jackpot has been generated. In the present embodiment, while the 15-round jackpot is generated from the output terminal PT5, It is output. When the 15 round jackpot information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer generates 15 round jackpots in the pachinko machine 1 while the 15 round jackpot information output signal is input. In addition to being able to grasp the state, it is possible to count the number of times the 15 round jackpot information output signal has been input and grasp the total number of times that the 15 round jackpot has occurred in the pachinko machine 1.

  The output terminal PT6 is colored pink and outputs a 2-round jackpot information output signal. As described above, the 2-round jackpot information output signal is a signal that indicates that the 2-round jackpot has occurred. In the present embodiment, while the 2-round jackpot is being generated from the output terminal PT6, It is output. When the 2-round jackpot information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer generates a 2-round jackpot on the pachinko machine 1 while the 2-round jackpot information output signal is being input. In addition to being able to grasp the state, it is possible to count the number of times the 2-round jackpot information output signal has been input and grasp the total number of times that the 2-round jackpot has occurred in the pachinko machine 1.

  The output terminal PT7 is provided in blue and outputs a normal symbol display information output signal. As described above, the normal symbol display information output signal is a signal that indicates that the normal symbol change display is ended (stopped) on the normal symbol display unit 1402 of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. In this embodiment, the output is performed for 0.128 seconds from the output terminal PT7 when the normal symbol variation display on the normal symbol display unit 1402 of the function display unit 1400 is ended (stopped). When the normal symbol display information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer receives the normal symbol display information output signal and then the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 of the pachinko machine 1. In 1402, it is possible to grasp that the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is finished (stopped), and the number of times is counted and the normal symbol display 1402 of the function display unit 1400 of the pachinko machine 1 The number of times can be grasped.

  The output terminal PT8 is provided in red and outputs an information output signal for a short time. As described above, the time reduction / medium information output signal is a signal indicating that a time reduction state has occurred, and in the present embodiment, the signal is output from the output terminal PT8 while the time reduction state is occurring. ing. When the time and medium information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer grasps that the time and time state is generated in the pachinko machine 1 when the time and medium information output signal is input. In addition, the total number of times that the time-saving state has occurred in the pachinko machine 1 can be grasped by counting the number of times the time-short-time information output signal is input.

  The output terminal PT9 is provided with an orange color to output a probability changing information output signal. As described above, the probability variation in-progress information output signal is a signal that informs that the probability variation is occurring. In this embodiment, the signal is output while the probability variation is occurring from the output terminal PT9. It has become so. When the information output signal during probability variation from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer is in a state in which probability variation occurs in the pachinko machine 1 when the information output signal during probability variation is input. It is possible to grasp that there is a certain number of times, and to count the number of times the information output signal during probability variation is input, and to grasp the total number of times that the probability variation has occurred in the pachinko machine 1.

  The output terminal PT10 is light blue and outputs a main prize ball number information output signal. As described above, the main winning ball number information output signal is input to various winning ports such as the first starting port 2002, the second starting port 2004, the general winning ports 2001, 2011, and the big winning port 2005 shown in FIG. This is a signal to notify that every time the number of game balls scheduled to be paid out as prize balls reaches 10 based on the game balls that have been balled, and is output from the output terminal PT10 for 0.128 seconds in this embodiment. It has become so. When the main prize ball number information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer receives 10 balls as the prize ball every time the main prize ball number information output signal is input. It is possible to grasp that a game ball is scheduled to be paid out as a prize ball, and to determine the total number of game balls to be paid out by the pachinko machine 1 by counting the number of game balls scheduled to be paid out. can do. In addition, for example, game balls scheduled to be paid out as prize balls based on game balls entered in various prize openings such as the first start opening 2002, the second start opening 2004, the general winning openings 2001, 2011, and the big winning opening 2005. When the number of balls reaches 20 or more and the main award ball number information output signal is output a plurality of times, the main award ball number information output signal is 0.256 (= 0.128 seconds × 2 times) seconds, As with one continuous signal, it is output with an interval of 0.128 seconds.

  Among the output terminals PT1 to PT10 of the external terminal plate 784, the output terminals PT1 and PT2 output various signals output on the payout control board 951 side, whereas the output terminals PT3 to PT10 have the main control board. Various signals output on the 1310 side are arranged so as to be output (passed) via the payout control board 951. Each of the output terminals PT1 to PT10 is colored, and by electrically connecting wirings having connectors colored in the same colors as these colors to the output terminals PT1 to PT10, other wirings are mistakenly electrically connected. Connection can be prevented. Then, various signals output on the payout control board 951 side are transmitted to the hall computer so that various signals output on the payout control board 951 side and various signals output on the main control board 1310 side are not mixed. Output terminals PT1 and PT2 are arranged in a row on the left side of the external terminal board 784, and output terminals PT3 to PT10 for transmitting various signals output on the main control board 1310 side to the hall computer are provided on the external terminal board 784. By arranging in a line from the center left side toward the right side, also in this respect, wiring for transmitting various signals output on the payout control board 951 side to the hall computer and various outputs output on the main control board 1310 side. Wiring to transmit signals to the hall computer And it is capable to prevent the connection.

  In the present embodiment, the prize ball number information output signal output on the payout control board 951 side and the main prize ball number information output signal output on the main control board 1310 side are respectively transmitted from the external terminal board 784 to the hall. It is configured to communicate to a computer. This is because, for example, the game balls stored in the prize ball tank 720 are not supplied to the prize ball tank 720 shown in FIG. 1 due to some trouble in the pachinko island equipment. When a 15-round big hit happens to occur in the pachinko machine 1 at a time when the number of remaining game balls becomes small, the number of game balls stored in the prize ball tank 720 for paying out game balls as a prize ball is insufficient, so that the game balls are paid out. (In addition, for example, when a ball clog or a ball is generated in the payout device 830, the game ball cannot be paid out unless it can be resolved). Then, the prize ball number information output signal output on the payout control board 951 side, as described above, the number of game balls actually paid out as prize balls by the payout motor 834 shown in FIG. 5 reaches 10 balls. Since this is a signal that informs the player every time, the payout control board 951 can output the award ball number information output signal to the hall computer via the external terminal board 784 when the game ball cannot be paid out. become unable. When the game ball is not paid out, the player calls a hall clerk or the like. A hall clerk, for example, checks a hose-like supply nozzle for supplying game balls from the Pachinko Island facilities to the prize ball tank 720 to identify the position of the ball clogging (for example, occurs in the payout device 830) In this case, the game ball is returned to a state in which the game ball is paid out.

  However, even if the hall clerk is working, the game by the main control board 1310 is in progress, and the game ball is paid out by the hall clerk after the 15 round round hit. Returning to the state, the payout control board 951 pays out unpaid game balls one after another, and the payout control board 951 is in a period when the 15th round big hit ends and the 15th round big hit has not occurred. Outputs an award ball number information output signal indicating that every time the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 834 reaches 10 balls, and transmits it to the hall computer via the external terminal board 784. It will be. Then, in spite of the fact that 15 rounds of big hits have not occurred, an extremely large number of game balls will be paid out, so the gaming state of the pachinko machine 1 and the number of game balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1 There arises a problem that the hall computer cannot accurately grasp the relationship.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, regardless of whether or not the payout motor 834 is driven and controlled by the payout control board 951 and is actually paid out as a prize ball, that is, different from the prize ball number information output signal output by the payout control board 951. As shown in FIG. 8, the main control board 1310 receives the game balls that have entered the various winning ports such as the first starting port 2002, the second starting port 2004, the general winning ports 2001, 2011, and the big winning port 2005 shown in FIG. Each time the number of game balls scheduled to be paid out as prize balls reaches 10 balls, a main prize ball number information output signal is output as a signal to that effect, and the payout control board 951 and the external terminal board 784 are set. The system of passing to the hall computer was adopted. As a result, even if the above-described troubles (troubles such as clogging of the refilling nozzle or the like, clogging of the ball in the dispensing device 830 or ball clogging) occur, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 1 and the payment in this gaming state The relationship between the number of game balls to be released and the relationship with the hall computer can be accurately transmitted. Therefore, the hall computer can accurately grasp the relationship between the gaming state of the pachinko machine 1 and the number of game balls to be paid out in the gaming state.

[12. Stage display drive board circuit]
Next, a circuit of the effect display drive substrate 4450 for drawing the display area of the door frame side effect display device 460 will be described with reference to FIG. As described above, the effect display drive board 4450 is disposed in the vicinity of the lower side of the door frame side effect display device 460 attached to the right side of the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3, and is accommodated in the dish unit 320. A liquid crystal module circuit 450V that draws a display area of the door frame side effect display device 460 is mainly configured. FIG. 87 is a circuit diagram showing a liquid crystal module circuit for drawing a display area of the upper dish side liquid crystal display device.

[12-1. LCD module circuit]
As shown in FIG. 87, the liquid crystal module circuit 450V of the effect display drive substrate 4450 mainly includes a door frame-side effect receiver ICSDIC0.

  The liquid crystal module circuit 450V receives a serial signal (serial data) from the door frame side production transmitter IC 1512d of the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. Is transmitted to the common mode choke coil SDL0 via the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, respectively, and the common mode choke coil SDL0 Noise can be separated from the negative signal. The plus signal and minus signal from which noise has been separated are respectively input to the RXIN + terminal and the RXIN- terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0. A resistor SDR0 is electrically connected between the RXIN + terminal and the RXIN− terminal. The resistor SDR0 is a termination resistor (terminator), which prevents the plus signal and the minus signal from being reflected at the RXIN + terminal and the RXIN− terminal, respectively, and prevents the serial signal from being disturbed.

  Based on the serial signals (serial data) input at the RXIN + terminal and RXIN− terminal, the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 has three video signals, a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal, It is restored to three synchronizing signals, that is, a horizontal synchronizing signal, a vertical synchronizing signal, and a clock signal (that is, restored to a parallel signal before being serialized). As described above, the red video signal, the green video signal, and the blue video signal are 8 bits each of the red video signal, the green video signal, and the blue video signal output from the channel CH2 of the sound source built-in VDP 1512a. Since the red video signal, the green video signal, and the blue video signal that can be input to the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d are each 6 bits, a total of 18 bits, the upper 6 bits of each video signal.

  The liquid crystal module circuit 450V is serial data output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 as described above, in addition to the signal from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d of the peripheral control board 1510. Two signals obtained by differentiating a certain LOCKN signal output request data into a plus signal and a minus signal in the differential circuit 1512e of the peripheral control board 1510 are also input. As described above, the forced switching circuit 1512f of the peripheral control board 1510 transmits these two signals when the differential circuit 1512e receives two signals that are differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal. On the other hand, when two signals differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal are not input in the differential circuit 1512e, a signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d is transmitted. The circuit configuration is such that the circuit is connected. As a result, when two signals differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal are input in the differential circuit 1512e, the two signals are connected to each other so as to transmit the two signals. The peripheral control board 1510 is transmitted to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the liquid crystal module circuit 450V of the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3, while the difference When two signals differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal are not input in the activation circuit 1512e, the circuit connection is made so as to transmit the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d. A signal output from the frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d is transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal. 868, near the door relay terminal plate 882, and transmitted to the liquid crystal module circuit 450V of the effect display driving substrate 4450 which is housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3.

  The forcible switching circuit 1512f is a signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d, that is, the door frame when the two signals differentiated into the plus signal and the minus signal are not input in the differential circuit 1512e. The serial signal (serial data) by the differential method called “V-by-One (registered trademark)” of THINE ELECTRONICS CO., LTD. 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and is input to the common mode choke coil SDL0 and input to the RXIN + terminal and the RXIN- terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, respectively, while the differential circuit 1512e In When two signals differentiated into a negative signal and a negative signal are input from the peripheral control board 1510 via the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, the two signals are common. The signal is input to the mode choke coil SDL0, and is input to the RXIN + terminal and the RXIN- terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, respectively. The door frame-side effect receiver ICSDIC0 determines that it is an output request for the LOCKN signal when two signals differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal are input in the differential circuit 1512e. A LOCKN signal is output from the LOCKN terminal described later to the peripheral control board 1510 via the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 and the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868. The LOCKN signal is input to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via a peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control board 1510.

  Note that the LOCKN signal output request data, which is serial data output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510, displays the start-up screen when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, as described above. During the period displayed on the display device 1600 or during the period when the game board side effect display device 1600 is in the state of waiting for a customer and the demonstration is performed by the game board side effect display device 1600, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510, In order to confirm whether or not a failure has occurred in the connection between the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the drive substrate 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, the door frame side effect display device 460 It is sent as an operation confirmation request. The LOCKN signal output request data in the present embodiment is differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal in the differentiation circuit 1512e, but is a signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d, that is, the above-mentioned Zain Electronics stock. The data format is completely different from that of the company's “V-by-One (registered trademark)” differential serial signal (serial data). For this reason, when the LOCKN signal output request data is received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, it is determined that the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 is not a signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d. As data, a LOCKN signal is output from a LOCKN terminal described later. In other words, in the present embodiment, the LOCKN signal is output from the LOCKN terminal, which will be described later, by using the function of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 that outputs the LOCKN signal when it is determined that the received data is abnormal data. In order to forcibly output, the LOCKN signal output request data having a structure different in data format from the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d is intentionally transmitted from the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control board 1511. By outputting, it is possible to confirm whether or not the device called door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 is operating normally. Thereby, it is possible to confirm whether or not a failure has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver.

  The door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 has a VDD terminal, a VDDO terminal, an LVDSVDD terminal, a PLLVDD terminal, and a PDWN terminal supplied with + 3.3V respectively created by the upper plate side liquid crystal module power supply circuit 4450x shown in FIG. The GND terminal, the GNDO terminal, the LVDSGND application paper, the PLLGND terminal, the EDGE terminal, the OE terminal, the MODE0, and the MODE1 terminal of the frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 are each grounded.

  The VDD terminal is a power supply terminal for a digital circuit, and a capacitor SDC0 is electrically connected between the terminal and the GND terminal which is a ground for the digital circuit, and a + 3.3V power supply supplied to the VDD terminal. High frequency noise is removed from the line.

  The VDDO terminal is a power supply terminal for TTL (Transistor-Transistor Logic) output, and a capacitor SDC1 is electrically connected between the terminal and the GNDO terminal serving as the ground for this TTL output, and is supplied to the VDDO terminal. High frequency noise is removed from the + 3.3V power line.

  The LVDSVDD terminal is a power supply terminal for LVDS (Low Voltage Differential Signaling) input, and a capacitor SDC2 is electrically connected between the terminal and the LVDSGND terminal which is the ground for this LVDS input, and is supplied to the LVDSVDD terminal. High frequency noise is removed from the + 3.3V power line.

  The PLLVDD terminal is a power supply terminal for a PLL (Phase Locked Loop) circuit, and a capacitor SDC3 is electrically connected between the terminal and the PLLGND terminal that is the ground for the PLL circuit, and is supplied to the PLLVDD terminal. High frequency noise is removed from the + 3.3V power line.

  The PDWN terminal tells that the logic is HI when + 3.3V is supplied (applied), and that the normal operation is performed, while the supply of +3.3 is stopped and the logic becomes LOW and the power down. It is a terminal to convey. The PDWN terminal is supplied with + 3.3V through the resistor SDR1, and is electrically connected to the other end of the varistor SDZ0 whose one end is grounded. The varistor SDZ0 suppresses noise and overvoltage of the + 3.3V electric line supplied via the resistor SDR1.

  The EDGE terminal is used to transmit various signals output from various output terminals (DE terminal, SYNC0 terminal to SYNC2 terminal, and D0 terminal to D17 terminal) based on a clock signal DCLK output from the CLKOUT terminal, which will be described later. (The logic transitions from LOW to HI) or a falling edge (the logic transitions from HI to LOW). As described above, the falling edge is designated by grounding the EDGE terminal to the ground. Incidentally, when the EDGE terminal is connected to + 3.3V, the rising edge can be designated.

  The OE terminal instructs whether or not output of various output terminals (DE terminal, SYNC0 terminal to SYNC2 terminal, D0 terminal to D17 terminal, and CLKOUT terminal) described later is permitted. As described above, the output is always possible by grounding the OE terminal to the ground. By the way, if the OE terminal is connected to + 3.3V, it cannot be output.

  The MODE0 terminal and the MODE1 terminal are terminals for selecting an operation mode, and the operation mode can be selected by grounding both to the ground. The operation modes include a normal mode and a shake hand mode. In the normal mode, three video signals (18-bit video signal) of a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal based on serial signals (serial data) respectively input at the RXIN + terminal and the RXIN- terminal. And a normal operation mode in which the door frame side receiver ICSDIC0 restores to a parallel signal composed of three synchronization signals (three-bit synchronization signal), a horizontal synchronization signal, a vertical synchronization signal, and a clock signal. is there. In the shake hand mode, the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is performed. In this mode, a LOCKN signal is output from the LOCKN terminal to request transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirmation (recovery). This shake hand mode is automatically switched.

  For example, three video signals (18-bit video signal) of a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal based on serial signals (serial data) respectively input at the RXIN + terminal and the RXIN- terminal, For some reason, the door frame-side effect receiver ICSDIC0 is restored to a parallel signal composed of three synchronization signals (three-bit synchronization signal): a horizontal synchronization signal, a vertical synchronization signal, and a clock signal. When it is difficult to draw on the door frame side effect display device 460 with simple data, the normal mode is automatically switched to the shake hand mode, and the LOCKN signal is output from the LOCKN terminal. This LOCKN signal is input to the peripheral control board 1510 via the resistor SDR2, which is a damping resistor, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and a peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control board 1510 is input to the peripheral control board 1510. Via the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510. The peripheral control MPU 1511a, when a predetermined condition is established based on the inputted LOCKN signal, transmits a connection confirmation signal to the INIT terminal of the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d to notify the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d of that fact. Is output. When this connection confirmation signal is input to the INIT terminal, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d is connected between the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450, that is, between the transmitter and the receiver. A predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for recovering the image from the peripheral control board 1510 via the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 is used for the door frame side effect included in the effect display drive board 4450. Transmit to the receiver ICSDIC0. By receiving such a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver can be easily recovered. The predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) is stored in advance in the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d. It should be noted that the INIT terminal of the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450 include the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, and the peripheral door You may electrically connect directly via the relay terminal board 882.

  As described above, the LOCKN terminal is connected between the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450, that is, between the transmitter and the receiver. A terminal that outputs a request to transmit a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirming (recovering) the connection between the terminals. The LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal is input to the peripheral control board 1510 via the resistor SDR2, which is a damping resistance of the effect display drive board 4450, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, This is input to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via a peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the control board 1510.

  The SYNC0 to SYNC2 terminals output three synchronization signals, a horizontal synchronization signal, a vertical synchronization signal, and a clock signal, which are restored based on serial signals (serial data) input at the RXIN + terminal and the RXIN- terminal, respectively. Terminal. In the present embodiment, since the restored three synchronization signals of the horizontal synchronization signal, the vertical synchronization signal, and the clock signal are not used, the SYNC0 terminal to the SYNC2 terminal are unconnected terminals.

  The DE terminal is a terminal that outputs a DE signal that reports that a clock signal output from the CLKOUT terminal and data output from the D0 to D17 terminals, which are data output terminals, are valid or invalid, which will be described later. The DE signal output from the DE terminal is input to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the resistor SDR3 that is a damping resistor.

  The CLKOUT terminal is a terminal that outputs a clock signal DCLK generated by a PLL circuit built in the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0. The clock signal DCLK output from the CLKOUT terminal is input to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the resistor SDR4 which is a damping resistor.

  The D0 to D17 terminals are provided with three video signals (18, red video signal, green video signal, and blue video signal restored on the basis of serial signals (serial data) input at the RXIN + terminal and RXIN- terminal, respectively. This is a data output terminal for outputting a bit video signal. Blue video signals B0 to B5 (6 bits) are output from the 6-bit data output terminals D0 to D5 in synchronization with the clock signal DCLK, and each signal line of the blue video signals B0 to B5 is a damping resistor. Each is input to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the ladder resistor SDRA0. Green video signals G0 to G5 (6 bits) are output from the 6-bit data output terminals D6 to D11 in synchronization with the clock signal DCLK, and each signal line of the green video signals G0 to G5 is a damping resistor. Each is input to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the ladder resistor SDRA1. The red video signals R0 to R5 (6 bits) are output in synchronization with the clock signal DCLK from the 6-bit data output terminals D12 to D17, and each signal line of the red video signals R0 to R5 is a damping resistor. Each is input to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the ladder resistor SDRA2.

  The grounds of the peripheral control board 1510, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, the effect display drive board 4450, and the door frame side effect display device 460 are electrically connected, and are the same ground. It has become.

[13. Various commands related to transmission / reception of main control board]
Next, various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the payout control board 951 and various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 will be described with reference to FIGS. 88 to 91. FIG. 88 is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the payout control board, and FIG. 89 is a table showing an example of various commands sent from the main control board to the peripheral control board. 89 is a table showing the continuation of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board in FIG. 89, and FIG. 91 is a table showing an example of various commands from the payout control board received by the main control board. First, a prize ball command that is a command related to payout transmitted from the main control board to the payout control board will be described, and then various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board will be described and received by the main control board. Various commands from the payout control board will be described.

[13-1. Various commands sent from the main control board to the payout control board]
The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 detects from various winning switches such as the general winning port sensors 4020 and 4020, the first starting port sensor 4002, the second starting port sensor 4004, and the count sensor 4005 shown in FIG. When the signal is input, based on these detection signals, a prize ball command for paying out a predetermined number of game balls as a prize ball is transmitted to the payout control board. This prize ball command is a command having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits). In this embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 and the CR unit 6 (communicating with the pachinko machine 1 and driving the payout motor 834 of the pachinko machine 1 (payout device 830) to the upper dish 321 and the lower dish 322, which are storage dishes, When the game ball as a rental ball is electrically connected (such a pachinko machine is called a “CR machine”), as shown in FIG. 88 (a), the main control board Command balls 10H to 1EH (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) are prepared as prize ball commands transmitted from 1310 to the payout control board 951, and one prize ball is designated in the command 10H, and the command 11H is designated. In the example, two prize balls are designated, and in the command 1EH, 15 prize balls are designated. The payout control board 951 controls the payout of game balls by driving the payout motor 834 for the designated number of prize balls.

  Also, a pachinko machine 1 and a ball lending machine (a device that directly pays out game balls as lending balls to the upper plate 321 and the lower plate 322) are installed adjacent to the game hall (hall). 1 and a ball lending machine are electrically connected (such a pachinko machine is referred to as a “general machine”), as shown in FIG. 88 (b), a payout control board 951 from the main control board 1310. Command 20H to command 2EH are prepared as the prize ball commands to be transmitted to the command. One prize ball is designated by the command 20H, two prize balls are designated by the command 21H,... 15 spheres are designated. The payout control board 951 controls the payout of game balls by driving the payout motor 834 for the designated number of prize balls.

As a command common to the CR machine and the general machine, a command 30H is prepared as shown in FIG. 88 (c), and the self check is designated in the command 30H.
By transmitting a command 30H and checking whether or not an ACK signal is input when the transmitting side does not input an ACK signal output as a command reception confirmation from the receiving side for a predetermined period after the command is transmitted. Check the connection status. In the case of the CR machine in this embodiment, the payout control board 951 confirms the connection state with the CR unit 6.

[13-2. Various commands sent from the main control board to the peripheral control board]
Next, various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 will be described. The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 transmits various commands to the peripheral control board 1510 based on the progress of the game. These various commands are commands having a storage capacity of 2 bytes (16 bits). As shown in FIGS. 89 and 90, a status indicating the type of command having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), and And a mode showing variations of performance having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits).

  As shown in FIG. 89 and FIG. 90, the various commands are related to special figure 1 synchronized effect, special figure 2 synchronized effect related, jackpot related, power-on, general synchronized effect related, ordinary electric role effect related, notification display, state Classified into display and other.

[13-2-1. Special Figure 1 Entrainment Production Related]
The special figure 1 synchronization effect related is based on the detection signal from the first start port sensor 4002 shown in FIG. 69, and, as shown in FIG. 89, the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. The first special symbol display 1403 is composed of commands named special figure 1 synchronized effect start, special symbol 1 designation, special figure 1 synchronized effect end, and variable state designation. These various commands are assigned “A * H” as a status and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) as a mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). This is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

  The special figure 1 synchronized production start command instructs the start of the special figure synchronized production with the production pattern designated in the mode, and the special symbol 1 designated command designates the off, specific big hit, and non-specific big hit. The special figure 1 tuning effect end command is for instructing the end of the special figure 1 tuning effect, and the variable state designation command is for instructing the probability and the short time state. Note that the probability and short-time state include a low-probability short-time state that indicates a low-probability state and a short-time state, a high-probability time-short state that indicates a high-probability state and a short-time state, and a low-probability state. It is composed of a low-probability non-time-short state that indicates that the state is not a short-time state, and a high-probability non-time-short state that indicates that the state is a high-probability state and not a short-time state (as a normal gaming state, Low probability non-short state is set). Here, the high probability state is a state in which the probability of hitting is set higher than the low probability state (normal game state), and the short time state is, for example, a normal symbol display 1402 shown in FIG. Compared with the non-short-time state (normal game state), the time for displaying the symbols in a variable manner is shortened and stopped with a light emission pattern corresponding to the normal lottery result. In addition to increasing the number of times of stop display compared to the non-time-short state, the period for opening and closing the pair of movable pieces shown in FIG. 8 is made longer than that of the non-time-short state (normal game state), as shown in FIG. A state in which a lottery opportunity for a special symbol can be obtained without reducing the number of possessed balls by increasing the acceptance rate (entrance rate) of game balls to the second starting port 2004 shown (in other words, a non-short-time state) In addition, the number of times of determining whether or not to open / close the pair of movable pieces is increased, and in the case of opening / closing the pair of movable pieces, the period of the opening / closing operation of the pair of movable pieces is lengthened. The game ball acceptance rate (entrance rate) to the mouth 2004 is increased).

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, the special symbol 1 tuning effect start command is transmitted at the start of the special symbol 1 variation, and the special symbol 1 designation command is transmitted immediately after the start of the special symbol 1 tuning effect. The effect end command is transmitted when the special symbol 1 variation time has elapsed (when the special symbol 1 is determined), and the variation state designation command is transmitted immediately after the special symbol winning information designation. These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S120 in the main control timer interrupt process described later.

[13-2-2. Special figure 2 synchronized production]
The special figure 2 synchronization effect related is based on the detection signal from the second start port sensor 4004 shown in FIG. 69, and is divided into the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. 69 as shown in FIG. The second special symbol display 1405 is composed of commands named special figure 2 synchronization effect start, special symbol 2 designation, and special figure 2 synchronization effect end. These various commands are assigned “B * H” as a status and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) as a mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). This is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

  The special figure 2 synchronized production start command instructs the start of the special figure synchronized production with the production pattern designated in the mode, and the special symbol 2 designated command designates the off, specific big hit, and non-specific big hit. The end of the special figure 2 synchronization effect instructs the end of the special figure 2 synchronization effect.

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, the special symbol 2 tuning effect start command is transmitted at the start of the special symbol 2 fluctuation start, and the special symbol 2 designation command is transmitted immediately after the start of the special symbol 2 tuning effect. The effect end command is transmitted when the special symbol 2 variation time has elapsed (when the special symbol 2 is confirmed). These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S120 in the main control timer interrupt process.

[13-2-3. Jackpot related]
As shown in FIG. 89, the jackpot-related category includes a jackpot opening, a grand prize opening 1 open Nth display, a big prize opening 1 closed display, a big prize opening 1 count display, a jackpot ending, a jackpot symbol display, a small hit opening , A small hit opening display, a small hit count display, and a command with the names of small hit ending. These commands are assigned “C * H” as a status and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) as a mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). This is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

  The jackpot opening command is an instruction to start the jackpot opening, and the N-th display command for the big winning opening 1 is started during the first to sixteenth rounds of opening the big winning opening 1 (the start opening unit 2100 shown in FIG. 8). The grand prize opening 1 closing display command indicates that the grand prize opening 1 is closed during the round (the start opening unit 2100 is large). The winning prize opening 2005 is closed during the round or the closing start is instructed, and the large winning opening 1 count display command indicates that the number of game balls of 0 to 10 is counted (shown in FIG. 69). The number of game balls that have entered the big prize opening 2005 detected by the count sensor 4005) is transmitted. Is intended to instruct the loading start, big hit symbol display command is for instructing the big hit symbol information display.

  The small hit opening command is for instructing the start of the small hit opening, and the small hit opening display command is for starting the small hit opening (during opening of the big winning opening 2005 of the start opening unit 2100 at the small hit or The small hit count display command is used when a small hit middle / large prize opening winning effect (a game ball that has entered the big winning opening 2005 during the small hit is detected by the count sensor 4005). The small hit ending command is an instruction to start the small hit ending.

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, the big hit opening command is sent at the start of the big hit opening, and the big winning opening 1 opening N-th display command is when the big winning opening 1 at the 1st to 16th rounds is released (the start opening unit 2100 The grand prize opening 1 closing display command is sent when the big prize opening 1 is closed (the closing of the big prize opening 2005 of the start opening unit 2100). The prize winning 1 count display command is used when the prize winning opening 1 is opened and when the count to the prize winning opening 1 is changed (when the prize winning opening 2005 of the start opening unit 2100 is opened and when the game ball enters the prize winning opening 2005. Is detected by the count sensor 4005), and the big hit ending command is sent at the start of the big hit ending. , Big hit symbol display command is sent during the special winning opening open (when opening the special winning opening 2005 of the starting opening unit 2100).

  The small hit opening command is transmitted at the start of the small hit opening, and the small hit release display command is transmitted when the small hit is released (when the big winning opening 2005 of the start port unit 2100 is opened at the small hit), The small hit count display command is transmitted at the time of winning a small hit medium / large winning opening (when a game ball that has entered the big winning opening 2005 is detected by the count sensor 4005 during the small hit), and the small hit ending command is Sent at the start of a small hit ending. These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S120 in the main control timer interrupt process.

[13-2-4. Power on]
As shown in FIG. 89, the power-on category includes a command at the time of power-on and a name of the main control return destination at power-on. These various commands are assigned “D * H” as a status and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) as a mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). This is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

  The power-on state command is for instructing the start of the RAM clear effect and the gaming state. When the power is turned on, the power-on status command is used when the power supply is turned on (in addition to when the power is turned on, including when the power is restored due to a power failure or a momentary power failure) of the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. When the operation switch 954 is operated to clear the RAM, information indicating that, and when the power is turned on (in addition to when the power is turned on, including when the power is restored due to a power failure or a momentary power failure )), The information indicating which state (probability and short-time state) to recover from among the low-probability short-time state, high-probability short-time state, low-probability non-short-time state, and high-probability non-short-time state, And information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine. The model code of this pachinko machine is, for example, what kind of game copyright (for example, probability variation occurs) when creating so-called max type, middle type, and sweet digital type. In addition to the game specification that the state continues until the next big hit game state occurs, the game specification that the probability variation occurs when the number of changes of the special symbol is limited (for example, 30 times or 70 times). (So-called ST machine) or the like). In other words, the information on the model code of the pachinko machine is used to specify the series code for identifying which type is the max type, middle type, or sweet digital type indicating the model type, and the copyright of the work. Copyright code and game specifications (for example, if a probability change occurs, that state will continue until the next jackpot game state occurs, and the probability change with a limited number of special symbol changes) And a game specification code for specifying a game specification (ST machine, etc.).

  The main control return destination command at power-on indicates the return destination of the main control board 1310 itself. The power-on main control return destination command mainly includes information for instructing the driving state of the start solenoid 2107 shown in FIG. 69 and information for instructing the driving state of the attacker solenoid 2108 shown in FIG. ing.

  As the transmission timing of the power-on status command and the power-on main control return destination command, when the main control board power is turned on (in addition to when the power is turned on, when power is restored due to a power failure or instantaneous power failure) Is also included.) Specifically, when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, when it recovers from a power failure or a momentary power failure, the main control side power-on process described later is executed, and the peripheral control board command in step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process is executed. In the transmission process, a power-on state command and a power-on main control return destination command are transmitted.

[13-2-5. General drawing related production]
The general figure synchronization effect is based on the detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 shown in FIG. 69. As shown in FIG. 89, the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. The command 1402 is composed of commands with the names of general drawing synchronization production start, universal symbol designation, universal drawing synchronization production end, and variable state designation. These various commands are assigned “E * H” as a status and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) as a mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). This is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

  The general pattern synchronization production start command is for instructing the general pattern synchronization production start with the production pattern specified in the mode. The figure synchronization effect end command is for instructing the end of the common figure synchronization effect, and the variable state designation command is for instructing the probability and the short time state. As described above, the probability and the short time state include a low probability short time state that indicates a low probability state and a short time state, and a high probability short time state that indicates a high probability state and a short time state. A low-probability non-time-short state that indicates a low-probability state and not a time-short state, and a high-probability non-time-short state that indicates a high-probability state and not a time-short state (usually As the gaming state, a low probability non-short-time state is set).

  As the transmission timings of these various commands, the ordinary symbol synchronization effect start command is transmitted at the time of the normal symbol 1 variation start, the ordinary symbol designation command is transmitted immediately after the ordinary symbol synchronization effect start, and the ordinary symbol synchronization effect end command is When the normal symbol variation time has elapsed (when the normal symbol is determined), the variation state designation command is transmitted immediately after the ordinary symbol winning information designation. These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S120 in the main control timer interrupt process.

[13-2-6. Ordinary electric role production related]
The ordinary electric role effect is related to the pair of movable pieces shown in FIG. 8 that are opened and closed by the driving of the start opening solenoid 2107 shown in FIG. 69. As shown in FIG. It consists of commands named hitting opening, public power open display, and ending per common figure. These various commands are assigned “F * H” as a status and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) as a mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). This is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

  The opening command per base map is an instruction to start the opening per base map, and the open command display of the general power is started while the general power is open. State or when expanding), and the ending command per universal map is an instruction to start ending per universal map.

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, the opening command per base map is transmitted at the start of the opening per base map, and the general power open display command is displayed when the general power is open (a pair of movable pieces are driven by the start-up solenoid 2107). The ending command per common map is transmitted at the start of ending per universal map. These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S120 in the main control timer interrupt process.

[13-2-7. Notification display]
As shown in FIG. 90, the notification display section includes commands having names such as winning abnormality display, connection abnormality display, disconnection / short circuit abnormality display, magnetic detection switch abnormality display, door opening, and door closing. These various commands are assigned “6 * H” as a status and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) as a mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). This is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

  The winning anomaly display command is used when a winning ball is won other than during a big hit (when the condition device is operating) (a game ball is entered into the big winning port 2005 of the start opening unit 2100 even though it is not a big hit). When the count sensor 4005 detects the winning abnormality notification, the connection abnormality display command is, for example, an electrical signal on a path between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. When there is a connection abnormality, an instruction to start connection abnormality notification is given. The disconnection / short circuit abnormality display command includes, for example, a main control board 1310, a first start port sensor 4002, a second start port sensor 4004, and a count sensor. Instructs the start of the disconnection / short circuit abnormality display when a disconnection / short circuit of the electrical connection with 4005, etc. occurs. De is for instructing the start of magnetic detection switch abnormality notification when an abnormality occurs in the magnetic detection sensor 4024 shown in FIG. 69.

  Further, the door opening command is sent from the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 based on a detection signal (opening signal) from the door frame opening switch 618 input via the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. In the opened state, the door opening notification is instructed, and the door frame closing command is based on the detection signal from the door frame opening switch 618 and the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4. When it is in the state, it is instructed to end the door opening notification. On the other hand, the main body frame opening command is sent from the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 based on a detection signal (open signal) from the main body frame opening switch 619 input via the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. In the open state, the main body frame close command is sent to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the main body frame open switch 619. In the closed state, the main body frame opening notification is instructed to end.

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, a winning abnormality display command is transmitted when winning a prize winning opening other than during a big hit (when the condition device is operating), and a connection abnormality displaying command is sent from the main control board 1310 to the payout control board 951. Is transmitted when there is no ACK reply (ACK signal) from the payout control board 951 when the command is sent to the terminal, and the disconnection / short circuit abnormality display command is the first start port sensor 4002, the second start port sensor 4004, the count sensor 4005, etc. The magnetic detection switch abnormality display command is transmitted when an abnormality of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is detected. The door opening command is transmitted when the door opening is detected (when the door frame 3 is in an open state with respect to the main body frame 4 based on the detection signal from the door frame opening switch 618), and the door is opened. The frame closing command is transmitted when door closing is detected (when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4 based on a detection signal from the door frame opening switch 618). The body frame release command is transmitted when the body frame release is detected (when the body frame 4 is opened to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the body frame release switch 619). The frame closing command is transmitted when the main body frame closing is detected (when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the main body frame opening switch 619). These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S120 in the main control timer interrupt process.

[13-2-8. Status display]
As shown in FIG. 90, the status display section is composed of commands named frame status 1 command (corresponding to an error occurrence command), error canceling navigation command (corresponding to error canceling command), and frame status 2 command. Yes. These various commands are assigned “7 * H” as a status and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) as a mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). This is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

  The frame status 1 command, the error canceling navigation command, and the frame status 2 command are commands having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits) transmitted from the payout control board 951, and detailed descriptions thereof will be described later. . When the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 receives the frame state 1 command, the error release navigation command, and the frame state 2 command from the payout control board 951, as shown in FIG. 90, “7 * H” is displayed. While setting as a status, the received command is set as a mode as it is. That is, when the main control MPU 1310a receives the frame state 1 command, the error release navigation command, and the frame state 2 command from the payout control board 951, it adds “7 * H” as additional information to these received commands. Thus, the command is shaped into a command having a storage capacity of 2 bytes (16 bits).

  The shaped frame status 1 command is transmitted when the power is restored, when the status of the frame is changed, and when the error cancellation navigation is performed. The error cancellation navigation command is transmitted during the error cancellation navigation. The frame status 2 command is transmitted when the power is restored. And when the frame state changes. Note that the shaped frame state 1 command, error release navigation command, and frame state 2 command are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in the main control timer interrupt process.

[13-2-9. Test related]
As shown in FIG. 90, the test-related classification includes various commands named test. This test command is assigned “8 * H” as a status and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) as a mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). And is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

  The test command instructs various inspections of the peripheral control board 1510 (for example, the peripheral control unit 1511, the liquid crystal display control unit 1512, the lamp driving board 4170, the motor driving board 4180, and the frame decoration shown in FIG. 72). Inspects various substrates such as the drive amplifier substrate 194).

  As a test command transmission timing, it is transmitted when the main control board power is turned on when the RAM is not cleared and when the RAM is not cleared. Specifically, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, when the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 is operated when returning from a power failure or a momentary power failure, the main control side power-on process described later is performed. When executed, a test command is transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in the main control timer interrupt process.

[13-2-10. Others]
As shown in FIG. 90, the other categories include start opening prize, change shortening operation end designation, high probability end designation, special symbol 1 memory, special symbol 2 memory, normal symbol memory, special symbol 1 memory pre-reading effect, and It consists of a command with the name of special symbol 2 storage pre-reading effect. These various commands are assigned a status of “9 * H” and a mode of “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). This is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

  The start opening prize command is an instruction to start the start opening winning effect, and the start of the effect when a game ball enters the first start opening 2002 based on the detection signal from the first start opening sensor 4002. , And the start of the effect when a game ball enters the second start port 2004 based on the detection signal from the second start port sensor 4004, respectively. The command for instructing state transition from the shortened operating state to the variable shortening non-operating state, and the high probability end designation command is for instructing state transition from the high probability state to the low probability state. The special symbol 1 holds 0 to 4 pieces (the game ball enters the first starting port 2002 shown in FIG. 8 and the special symbol is changed by the first special symbol display 1403 of the function display unit 1400. The number of balls not yet used for display (the number of holdings) is transmitted, and the special symbol 2 storage command is a special symbol 2 holding 0-4 pieces (the game ball is placed in the second starting port 2004 shown in FIG. 8). The second special symbol display 1405 of the function display unit 1400 enters the ball and informs the number of balls that have not been used yet for the variation display of the special symbol (the number of holdings), and the normal symbol storage command is the normal symbol 1 Reservation 0 to 4 (the number of balls that have passed through the gate portion 2003 shown in FIG. 8 and have not yet been used for the normal symbol display on the normal symbol display 1402 of the function display unit 1400) The special symbol 1 storage pre-reading effect command is pre-read before the special symbol 1 hold is used for the special symbol variable display on the first special symbol display 1403 of the function display unit 1400. The special symbol 2 storage pre-reading effect command instructs the start of the pre-reading effect informing the advance notice of the display result by the first special symbol indicator 1403 based on the special symbol 1 hold. Before using the second special symbol display 1405 to display the variation of the special symbol, pre-read and instruct the start of the pre-reading effect to notify the advance notice of the display result by the second special symbol display 1405 based on the special symbol 2 hold To do.

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, the start opening prize command is the start opening winning prize (when a game ball enters the first start opening 2002 based on the detection signal from the first start opening sensor 4002, When a game ball enters the second starting port 2004 based on the detection signal from the starting port sensor 4004), the lower speaker 921 shown in FIG. 5 and the upper speaker 573 shown in FIG. The change shortening operation end designation command is transmitted at the end of the stop period after the change has been confirmed (after the lapse stop period has elapsed), and the high probability end designation command is transmitted. , Sent at the end of the stop period after the change is confirmed (after the elapse of the stoppage period), and the special symbol 1 storage command is stored. When the number of balls changes (in a state where a game ball enters the first start opening 2002 and there is a number of reserves that are not yet used for the special symbol change display in the first special symbol display 1403 of the function display unit 1400, When a game ball enters the first starting port 2002 and the number of holds increases, or when the number of holds decreases by using the first special symbol display unit 1403 to display the variation of the special symbols) The special symbol 2 storage command is sent to the special symbol 2 when the number of the special symbol 2 operation holding balls changes (the game ball enters the second starting port 2004 and the special symbol 2 is displayed on the second special symbol display 1405 of the function display unit 1400). In a state where there is a number of reserves that are not yet used for the variable display, when the game ball enters the second start port 2004 and the number of reserves increases, the special number display unit 1405 displays a special number from the number of reserves. Design The normal symbol storage command is used when the number of reserved symbols of the normal symbol 1 is changed (when the game ball passes through the gate part 2003 and the normal number of the function display unit 1400 is transmitted). In the state where there is a reserved number that is not yet used for the normal symbol variation display in the symbol display 1402, when the game ball passes through the gate part 2003 and the reserved number increases, the normal symbol indicator is displayed from the reserved number. 1402 is used to display the fluctuation of the normal symbol and when the number of reserved symbols decreases), the special symbol 1 storage pre-reading effect command is received when the number of special symbol 1 actuated reserved balls increases (game ball at the first start port 2002). The special symbol 2 memory pre-reading effect command is sent when the special symbol 2 actuated reserve ball number increases (the game ball enters the second start port 2004 and the hold number). But Sent when it increases). These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S120 in the main control timer interrupt process.

  By the way, as described above, the start opening prize command is given when the start opening is won (when a game ball enters the first start opening 2002 based on the detection signal from the first start opening sensor 4002, When a game ball enters the second starting port 2004 based on a detection signal from the sensor 4004), the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 are transmitted mainly to notify that effect by voice. How the peripheral control board 1510 shown in 72 uses the start opening winning command may differ depending on the specifications of the pachinko machine. For example, the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment is of a specification that is used for monitoring the presence or absence of fraud in addition to notifying by voice from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. On the other hand, in other pachinko machines, there is a specification in which the peripheral control board 1510 simply receives the start opening winning command and does not make a sound notification from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573.

[13-3. Various commands from the payout control board received by the main control board]
Next, various commands from the payout control board 951 received by the main control board 1310 will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 91, the various commands from the payout control board 951 are composed of commands named frame state 1, error release navigation, and frame state 2. The frame state 1, error release navigation, Priorities are set in the order of frame state 2.

  For the frame status 1 command (corresponding to an error occurrence command), a ball breakage, a full tank, a connection abnormality and a CR non-connection in 50 or more stocks are prepared, and bit 0 (B0, “B”) in the ball breakage. Represents a bit.) Is set to 1; when full, bit 1 (B1) is set to 1; in more than 50 stocks, bit 2 (B2) is set to 1; A value 1 is set in bit 3 (B3), and a value 1 is set in bit 4 (B4) when the CR is not connected. In bit 5 (B5) to bit 7 (B7) of the frame state 1 command, a value 1 is set in B5, a value 0 is set in B6, and a value 0 is set in B7.

  In the error canceling navigation command (corresponding to the error canceling command), a sphere ball, a payout detection sensor error and a retry error are prepared. In error, the value 1 is set in bit 3 (B3), and in retry error, the value 1 is set in bit 4 (B4). Here, the “payout detection sensor error” indicates whether or not there is a problem with the payout detection sensor 842 shown in FIG. The “retry error” indicates that a game ball that is not consistent with the retry operation has been repeatedly paid out. Bit (B0), bit (B1), and bit 5 (B5) to bit 7 (B7) of the error cancellation navigation command have a value 0 for B0, a value 0 for B1, a value 0 for B5, a value 1 for B6, The value 0 is set in B7.

  The frame state 2 command is prepared for ball removal, and the value 1 is set to bit 0 (B0) during ball removal. Bit 1 (B1) to Bit 7 (B7) of the frame status 2 command include a value 0 for B1, a value 0 for B2, a value 0 for B3, a value 0 for B4, a value 1 for B5, a value 1 for B6, and The value 0 is set in B7.

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, the frame status 1 command is transmitted when the power is restored, when the frame status is changed, and during error cancellation navigation, and the error cancellation navigation command is transmitted during error cancellation navigation. Is transmitted when the power is restored and when the frame state changes. These various commands are actually transmitted in the command transmission process in step S558 in the payout control unit main process of the payout control part power-on process described later.

[14. Various control processes of main control board]
Next, various control processes performed by the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 69 according to the progress of the game of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 92 is a flowchart showing an example of main control-side power-on processing, FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing the main control-side power-on processing in FIG. 92, and FIG. 94 is an example of main control-side timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows. First, various random numbers used for game control will be described, and then the operation of the initial value update type counter, main control side power-on processing, and main control side timer interrupt processing will be described.

[14-1. Various random numbers]
As the various random numbers used for game control, a big hit determination random number used for determining whether or not to generate a big hit gaming state, and whether or not to generate a reach (reach out) when no big hit gaming state is generated The random number for reach determination to be used for determination, and the variation for use in determining the variation display pattern of the special symbol that is variably displayed on the first special symbol display 1403 and the second special symbol display 1405 shown in FIG. Display pattern random numbers, jackpot symbol random numbers for use in determining the jackpot symbols derived and displayed by the first special symbol display 1403 and the second special symbol display 1405 when generating the jackpot gaming state, and the jackpot A big hit symbol initial value determining random number for use in determining the initial value of the symbol random number, the first special symbol indicator 1 when generating a small hit gaming state 03 and a small hit symbol for use in determining the small hit symbol derived and displayed by the second special symbol indicator 1405, and an initial value for the small hit symbol for use in determining the initial value of the random symbol for the small hit symbol A random number for determination is prepared. Further, in addition to these random numbers, it is used to determine a normal random number for determination per symbol for use in determining whether or not the movable piece shown in FIG. 8 is opened and closed, and an initial value of the random number for determination per normal symbol. For determining the initial value for determining the normal symbol, and the random number for the normal symbol variation display pattern to be used for determining the variation display pattern of the ordinary symbol that is variably displayed on the ordinary symbol display unit 1402 shown in FIG. It is prepared.

  Of the various random numbers used for such game control, the jackpot determination random number is updated by hardware, while the other various random numbers are updated by software.

  For example, the big hit determination random number is directly updated by hardware by the main control built-in hardware random number circuit 1310an built in the main control MPU 1310a shown in FIG. As described above, when the main control MPU 1310a is reset, this main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an first sets a clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a as an initial value within a predetermined numerical range. Based on (the clock signal output from the main control crystal oscillator MX0 shown in FIG. 77), other values within a predetermined numerical range are extracted one after another at high speed, and all values within the predetermined numerical range are extracted. When the extraction is completed, one value in the predetermined numerical range is extracted again, and other values in the predetermined numerical range are extracted one after another based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a. To do. The main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an repeatedly performs such a high-speed lottery, and the main control MPU 1310a wins the value extracted by the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an at the time of acquiring a value from the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an. It is set as a random number for judgment.

  On the other hand, the counter for updating the random number for determination per normal symbol is updated within a predetermined fixed numerical value range from the minimum value to the maximum value, and a range from the minimum value to the maximum value will be described later. Each time the main control side timer interrupt process is performed, the value is incremented by one. This counter counts up from the normal value for determining the initial value for determination per normal symbol toward the maximum value, and then counts up from the minimum value to the random number for determining the initial value for determination per normal symbol. When the counter finishes counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the random number for normal symbol determination, the random number for initial value determination for normal symbol is updated. Such a counter updating method is referred to as “initial value updating type counter”. The random value for determining the initial value for normal symbol determination can be obtained by executing an initial value lottery process for drawing one value from the fixed numerical range of the counter for updating the random number for determination per normal symbol. .

  In this embodiment, when the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 70 is operated when the power is turned on, or in the main control side power-on process described later, the main control MPU 1310a shown in FIG. The check sum value (sum value) obtained by calculating the sum of the game information stored in the main control built-in RAM as a numerical value is stored in the main control side power-off process (at power-off). When clearing the entire area of the main control built-in RAM, such as when the checksum value (sum value) does not match, the normal value for determining the initial value for determining the normal symbol per symbol is the main control MPU 1310a shown in FIG. Extracts the ID code from the built-in non-volatile RAM, and always updates the random number for determination per symbol based on the extracted ID code. Perform initial value derivation process of deriving the same fixed value, a fixed value this derivation has a mechanism to be set. That is, the random value for determining the initial value for determining the normal symbol is always overwritten and updated with the same fixed value derived based on the ID code by executing the initial value deriving process. As described above, the value set to the random number for determining the initial value for determining the normal symbol is derived by using the ID code, and the nonvolatile RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a by the manufacturer that manufactured the main control MPU 1310a. If the ID code is stored in the ID code, the ID code is not rewritten even if an external device is used, and the ID code is executed by executing the initial value derivation process when clearing the entire area of the main control built-in RAM. The second security measure of deriving the same fixed value based on the above and the two steps of security measures are taken to prevent analysis.

  Here, an advantage will be described in which an ID code is extracted from the nonvolatile RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a, and the extracted ID code is used as a random number for determining an initial value for normal symbol determination. For example, a person who illegally acquires a game ball to be paid out as a prize ball obtains the game board 5 by some method and disassembles it, and uses an ID code stored in advance in a nonvolatile RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a. Even if the counter value that is obtained illegally and the counter value for updating the determination random number per normal symbol and the determination value per normal symbol match can be grasped, the ID code is unique for identifying the individual. Since the reference numerals are given, the ID codes are completely different from the ID codes stored in advance in the nonvolatile RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a ′ included in the other game board 5 ′. In other words, in the other game boards 5 ′, the timing at which the counter value for updating the random number for normal symbol determination matches the normal symbol determination value is also completely different from that of the acquired game board 5. In other words, the ID code obtained by disassembling and analyzing the obtained game board 5 is completely useless in other game boards 5 ', that is, other pachinko machines 1'. Even if an instantaneous power failure is generated at every predetermined interval and the game ball is passed through the gate unit 2003 shown in FIG. 8 at each predetermined interval, the movable piece shown in FIG. A gaming state in which a game ball can be received at the start port 2004 cannot be generated.

[14-2. Main control side power-on processing]
First, when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the main control MPU 1310a is configured so that the stack pointer is set to a predetermined address as a default.
This stack pointer indicates, for example, the address accumulated on the stack to temporarily store the contents of the memory element (register) being used, or the return address of this routine when the subroutine is terminated and the routine returns. This indicates the address accumulated on the stack for temporary storage, and the stack pointer advances each time the stack is stacked.

  The main control program described above performs main control side power-on processing as shown in FIGS. 92 and 93 under the control of the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. When the main control side power-on process is started, the main control program sets RAM access permission under the control of the main control MPU 1310a (step S10). Update to the main control built-in RAM (game storage unit) can be performed by setting the RAM access permission.

  Subsequent to step S10, the main control program performs initial value setting and activation setting of the main control built-in WDT 1310af shown in FIG. 69 (step S12). Here, in order to set an initial value in the main control built-in WDT 1310af for monitoring whether or not the operation (system) of the main control MPU 1310a is operating normally, a watchdog timer control register (hereinafter referred to as “the main control MPU 1310a”). The timer setting value is set in the "WDT control register"), the main control built-in WDT 1310af is started, and the time measurement from when the main control MPU 1310a is reset is started. When the main control built-in WDT 1310af is started, the time measurement by the main control built-in WDT 1310af is started, and the watchdog timer clear register (built-in to the main control MPU 1310a is reached by the time set by the timer set value. Hereinafter, if the timer clear setting value is not set in “WDT clear register”), the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT 1310af. On the other hand, when the main control built-in WDT 1310af is activated and time measurement is started, the timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register until the time measured reaches the time set by the timer setting value. The time measurement by the main control built-in WDT 1310af is cleared, and the time measurement is started again. In this manner, the operation (system) of the main control MPU 1310a operates normally by repeatedly performing the process of clearing the time measurement by the main control built-in WDT 1310af until the time set by the timer set value is reached and starting the time measurement again. It can be monitored whether or not.

  Subsequent to step S12, the main control program performs a power failure clear process (step S14). In this electric power clear process, first, the output of the power outage clear signal is started to the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e shown in FIG. The power failure monitoring circuit 1310e includes a comparator MIC21 that is a voltage comparison circuit and a D-type flip-flop MIC22. The comparator MIC21, which is a voltage comparison circuit, compares the voltage between + 24V and the reference voltage, or compares the voltage between + 12V and the reference voltage, and outputs the comparison result. This comparison result shows that when no power failure or instantaneous power failure occurs, the logic becomes HI and is input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, while when a power failure or instantaneous power failure occurs. The logic becomes LOW and is input to the PR terminal which is a preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

  In the electric power clear process, first, output of a power outage clear signal is started to the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e, thereby starting output of the power outage clear signal to the CLR terminal which is the clear terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. This power failure clear signal is input from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a to the CLR terminal which is the clear terminal of the D-type flip-flop IC via the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function by setting the logic to LOW. Is done. As a result, the main control MPU 1310a can release the latch state of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, and the logic input to the PR terminal that is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22 until the latch state is set. It can be inverted and output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal, and the signal from the 1Q terminal can be monitored.

  Subsequently, in the electric power clear process, a wait timer process is performed to determine whether or not a power failure notice signal is input. The voltage does not increase immediately from when the power is turned on until the voltage reaches the predetermined voltage. On the other hand, when there is a power failure or a momentary power failure (a phenomenon in which the supply of power is temporarily stopped), when the voltage drops and becomes smaller than the power failure warning voltage, a power failure warning signal is input as a power failure warning from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e. Similarly, when the voltage becomes lower than the power failure warning voltage from when the power is turned on until it reaches the predetermined voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e. Therefore, in the wait timer process, after the power is turned on, the process waits until the voltage becomes larger than the power failure warning voltage and stabilizes. In this embodiment, 200 milliseconds (ms) is set as the wait time (wait timer). Has been. Whether or not the power failure warning signal is input is determined based on the signal output from the 1Q terminal that is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22 as the power failure warning signal.

  If the power failure warning signal is not input even after waiting for the voltage to become larger than the power failure warning voltage and stabilize after the power is turned on, the main control program sends a power failure clear signal to the CLR terminal which is the clear terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. Stop output. Here, the power failure clear signal is output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a, the logic is HI, and the CLR terminal which is the clear terminal of the D-type flip-flop IC via the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function. Is input. Thereby, the main control MPU 1310a can set the D-type flip-flop MIC22 to the latched state. When the D-type flip-flop MIC22 latches the state in which the logic is LOW and is input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal, the D-type flip-flop MIC22 outputs a power failure warning signal from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal.

  Subsequent to step S14, the main control program makes a state in which RAM clear processing for initializing the main control built-in RAM (game storage unit) can be executed for a predetermined time from when the power is turned on (when the game side power is turned on). Operation control means). Specifically, the main control program first determines whether or not the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 70 is operated (step S16). In this determination, the main control program inputs an error cancellation navigation command (first error cancellation command) based on an operation signal (detection signal) associated with the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 being operated to the main control MPU 1310a. Depending on whether or not it is done. Based on the logic value of the operation signal, the main control program determines that the RAM is not instructed to be cleared when the logic value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 is HI. On the other hand, when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 is LOW, it is determined that the instruction to perform the RAM clear is made and it is determined that the operation switch 954 is operated.

  In step S16, when the operation switch 954 is operated, the main control program sets a value 1 to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG (step S18). On the other hand, when the operation switch 954 is not operated in step S16, the main control program sets a value 0 to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG (step S20). That is, the main control program can execute a RAM clear process for initializing the RAM (that is, the main control built-in RAM (game storage unit)) built in the main control MPU 1310a for a predetermined time from the time of power-on. State (game control side power-on operation control means). The above-described RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG indicates whether or not to erase game information related to games such as probability variation, unpaid prize balls, etc. stored in the main control built-in RAM (game storage unit) of the main control MPU 1310a. This flag is set to a value of 1 when erasing game information and a value of 0 when not erasing game information. Note that the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG set in step S18 and step S20 is stored in a general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU 1310a.

  Subsequent to step S18 or step S20, the main control program performs a wait time standby process (step S22). In this wait time standby process, the system that performs drawing control of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 by the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 of the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. Wait until. In this embodiment, 2.5 seconds (s) is set as a standby time (boot timer) until booting.

  Subsequent to step S22, the main control program determines whether or not a power failure notice signal is input (step S24). As described above, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is shut off, or when a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e as a power failure warning voltage when the voltage becomes equal to or lower than the power failure warning voltage. The determination in step S24 is made based on this power failure notice signal. When there is a power failure warning signal input in the determination in step S24, the main control program returns to the determination in step S24 again, and repeats the determination in step S24 as long as the power failure warning signal continues to be input. As a result, the timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register built in the main control MPU 1310a for the main control built-in WDT 1310af activated in step S12, the time measurement by the main control built-in WDT 1310af is cleared, and the time measurement is started again. The main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the built-in main control WDT 1310af. Thereafter, the main control program performs this main control side power-on process again under the control of the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. A detailed description will be given later on that the determination in step S24 is performed following the wait time waiting process in step S22.

  When the power failure warning signal is not input in the determination in step S24, the main control program determines whether or not the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is 0 (step S26). As described above, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set to a value of 1 when erasing game information and a value of 0 when not erasing game information. When the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is 0 in step S26, that is, when the game information is not deleted, a checksum is calculated (step S28). This checksum is calculated by regarding the game information stored in the main control built-in RAM as a numerical value and calculating the sum.

  Subsequent to step S28, the main control program calculates the checksum value (sum value) stored in the main-control-side power-off process (power-off) described later and the calculated checksum value (sum value). It is determined whether or not they match (step S30). If they match, the main control program determines whether or not the backup flag BK-FLG is 1 (step S32). This backup flag BK-FLG stores game backup information such as game information, checksum value (sum value) and backup flag BK-FLG in the main control built-in RAM in the main control side power-off process described later. This flag is set to a value of 1 when the main control-side power-off process is normally terminated, and a value of 0 when the main-control-side power-off process is not terminated normally. In the inspection process of the production line of the main control board 1310, when the main control board 1310 is first turned on after being manufactured for inspection, the checksum is calculated in step S28 and the determination is made in step S30. A detailed description will be given later.

  When the backup flag BK-FLG has a value of 1 in step S32, that is, when the main control side power-off process has been normally terminated, the main control program sets the work area of the main control built-in RAM as the power is restored ( Step S34). In this setting, power recovery time information is read from a ROM (that is, main control internal ROM) built in the main control MPU 1310a, and the power recovery time information is set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. Thus, the game information is read from the game backup information, and various commands corresponding to the game information are stored in a predetermined storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Note that “power recovery” refers to a state in which power is turned on from a power-off state, a state in which power is subsequently recovered from a power failure or a momentary power interruption, and unauthorized means (for example, an unauthorized person is placed on the skirt of his arm). A state in which the main control board 1310 is irradiated with a high frequency from the hidden high-frequency output device) and the main control MPU 1310a itself is reset and then restored is also included.

  Subsequent to step S34, the main control program sets a value 0 to the backup flag BK-FLG (step S36). As a result, the game information, the checksum value (sum value), and the like are changed by performing various processes thereafter. Therefore, the main control side power-off process described later is terminated normally and the backup flag BK- If the value 1 is not set in FLG, as will be described later, the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is cleared.

  On the other hand, when the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is not 0 (value 1) in step S26, that is, when the game information is erased, or when the checksum value (sum value) does not match in step S30. Alternatively, when the backup flag BK-FLG is not a value 1 (value 0) in step S32, that is, when the main control side power-off process has not been terminated normally, the main control program stores all the main control built-in RAM. The area is cleared (step S38). That is, the main control program executes the game control side RAM clearing process triggered by the input of the detection signal accompanying the operation of the operation switch 954 described above (payout control side power-on operation control means). Specifically, the main control program is executed by writing the value 0 in the main control built-in RAM. Alternatively, the main control program may read and set a predetermined value from the main control built-in ROM as an initial value. In addition, the main control MPU 1310a performs processing for when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 instructs to clear the RAM, when the game information is erased, when the sum values do not match, or when the main control side power is cut off. When not finished normally, a unique ID code stored in advance in the non-volatile RAM of the main control MPU 1310a is taken out, and a fixed numerical range of a counter for updating the random number for determination per ordinary symbol based on the taken out ID code The initial value derivation process for always deriving the same fixed value from is performed, and this fixed value is set as the normal value determining random number for determining the initial value for the normal symbol determining random value described above. To do.

  Subsequent to step S38, the main control program sets a work area of the main control built-in RAM as an initial setting (step S40). This setting is performed by reading the initial information from the main control built-in ROM and setting the initial information in the work area of the main control built-in RAM.

  Subsequent to step S36 or step S40, the main control program performs interrupt initialization (step S42). This setting is to set an interrupt cycle when a main control timer interrupt process described later is performed. In this embodiment, it is set to 4 milliseconds (ms).

  Subsequent to step S42, the main control program performs serial communication initial setting (step S44). Here, various serial input / output ports (for example, serial input / output ports (reception channels and transmission channels) for the payout control board 951 and serial input / output ports (reception channels and transmission channels) for the peripheral control board 1510 built in the main control MPU 1310a. ) Corresponding to the transmission serial port prescaler, the transmission speed is set and the parity is set, and the transmission serial port control register is set to initialize the transmission circuit and set transmission permission.

  Subsequent to step S44, the main control program performs test signal output port initialization settings (step S46). Here, a test signal output port (not shown) for outputting various types of inspection information is initialized (set to OFF data output) when the power is turned on in the testing institution of the gaming machine.

  Subsequent to step S46, the main control program performs activation setting of the main random number circuit with built-in main control 1310an shown in FIG. 69 (step S48). Here, among the various random numbers related to the game, a hard random number control register built in the main control MPU 1310a in order to update the big hit determination random number for use in determining whether or not to generate the big hit gaming state by hardware And setting the acquisition of the random number by latching, and setting the activation of the hard random number circuit 1310an with the main control in the hard random number setting register. When the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an is activated by these settings, it is predetermined in advance at a high speed based on the clock signal (clock signal output from the main control crystal oscillator MX0 shown in FIG. 77) input to the main control MPU 1310a. Extract other values in the numerical range one after another without duplication, and once all the values in the predetermined numerical range have been extracted, again extract one value in the predetermined numerical range, Based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a, other values within a predetermined numerical range are extracted one after another without overlapping. The main control MPU 1310a outputs a latch signal to the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an when acquiring a random number (random number value) from the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an, and the main control when the latch signal is input. The random number (random number value) extracted by the built-in hard random number circuit 1310an is obtained from a hard random number latch register built in the main control built-in main control MPU 1310a. The main control MPU 1310a sets the acquired random number value as a jackpot determination random number.

  Subsequent to step S48, the main control program performs reservation setting for a command to be transmitted when the power is turned on (step S50). Here, in order to notify that the power is turned on (power recovery) based on the power recovery time information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34, FIG. The power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command, which are classified into the power-on shown in FIG. 5, are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. In the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34, the game information may be read from the game backup information and various commands corresponding to the game information may be stored. is there. In such a case, first after completion of transmission of various commands according to the game information, a power-on state command and a power-on main control return destination command are transmitted. These commands are transmitted in the main control side timer interrupt processing described later. A detailed description will be given later of reservation setting of a command to be transmitted at power-on in step S50.

  Subsequent to step S50, the main control program performs interrupt permission setting (step S52). With this setting, the main control side timer interrupt processing described later is repeated every interrupt cycle set in step S42, that is, every 4 ms.

  Subsequent to step S52, the main control program, when a predetermined time elapses from when the power is turned on, that is, when the main process on the main control side is started, the error cancellation navigation command associated with the operation of the operation switch 954 (operation switch). Execution of the game control side RAM clear process triggered by the reception will be restricted (normal operation control means). As described above, the main control program uses the concept of time sharing to detect a detection signal input in accordance with the operation of the operation switch 954 for a predetermined time from the time of power-on as described above. When the input is triggered, the RAM clear process is executed (game control side power-on operation control means), and after the predetermined time has elapsed, the execution of the RAM clear process is restricted even if the error canceling navigation command is input ( The game control side normal operation control means) is handled as a release switch for releasing the error notification associated with the error that has occurred. That is, the operation switch 954 (error canceling unit) that should have been originally used for canceling the error that has occurred with respect to the payout operation is used as a game storage unit instead of a predetermined time from power-on. The main control built-in RAM (and a payout control built-in RAM as a payout storage unit to be described later) functions as an operation unit for executing a RAM clear process for starting initialization, and after the predetermined time has elapsed, It can function as an operation unit for canceling an error that has occurred with respect to the ball dispensing operation.

  Next, the main control program determines whether or not a power failure notice signal is input (step S54). As described above, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is shut off, or when a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e as a power failure warning voltage when the voltage becomes equal to or lower than the power failure warning voltage. The determination in step S54 is made based on this power failure notice signal.

  When no power failure warning signal is input in step S54, the main control program performs a non-winning random number update process (step S56). In the non-winning random number update process, the above-described reach determination random number, variable display pattern random number, big hit symbol initial value determining random number, small hit symbol initial value determining random number, and the like are updated. In this way, in the non-winning random number update process, random numbers that are not involved in the winning determination (big hit determination) are updated by software. It should be noted that the above-described random numbers for normal symbol determination, random numbers for initial value determination for normal symbol determination, random numbers for normal symbol variation display pattern, and the like described above are also updated by this non-winning random number update process.

  Subsequent to step S56, the process returns to step S54 again, and the main control program determines whether or not a power failure warning signal is input. Step S54 to Step S56 are repeated. The processes in steps S54 to S56 are referred to as “main control side main process”.

  On the other hand, when a power failure warning signal is input in step S54, the main control program performs interrupt prohibition setting (step S58). With this setting, the main control side timer interrupt processing described later is not performed, writing to the main control built-in RAM is prevented, and rewriting of game information is protected.

  Subsequent to step S58, the main control program starts outputting a power failure clear signal (step S60). Here, the same process as the process that started outputting the power failure clear signal in the power failure clear process in step S14 is performed. Thereby, the main control program can release the latch state of the D-type flip-flop MIC22 under the control of the main control MPU 1310a.

  Subsequent to step S60, the main control program reads the start port solenoid 2107, the attacker solenoid 2108, the first special symbol display 1403, the second special symbol display 1405, and the first special reserved number display 1404 shown in FIG. The drive signal output to the second special reserved number display 1406, the normal symbol display 1402, the normal symbol storage display 1188, the status indicator 1401, the round indicator 1407, etc. is stopped (step S62).

  Subsequent to step S62, the main control program calculates a checksum and stores the calculated value (step S64). This checksum is calculated by regarding the game information in the work area of the main control built-in RAM as a numerical value excluding the storage area for the checksum value (sum value) and backup flag BK-FLG described above.

  Subsequent to step S64, the main control program sets a value 1 to the backup flag BK-FLG (step S66). Thereby, storage of game backup information is completed.

  Subsequent to step S66, the main control program sets the RAM access prohibition (step S68). This RAM access prohibition setting prevents access to the main control built-in RAM (game storage unit), thereby preventing the contents of the main control built-in RAM (game storage unit) from being updated.

  Following step S68, an infinite loop is entered. In this infinite loop, the timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register incorporated in the main control MPU 1310a for the main control built-in WDT 1310af activated in step S12, the time measurement by the main control built-in WDT 1310af is cleared, and the time measurement is started again. As a result, the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT 1310af. Thereafter, the main control program performs this main control side power-on process again under the control of the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. The processing from step S58 to step S68 and the infinite loop are referred to as “main control side power-off processing”.

  The pachinko machine 1 (main control MPU 1310a) is reset when a power failure occurs or an instantaneous power failure is performed, and the main control side power-on process is performed by subsequent power recovery.

  In step S30, it is checked whether or not the game backup information stored in the main control built-in RAM is normal. Subsequently, in step S32, whether or not the main control side power-off process has been normally completed. Are inspected. In this way, by checking the game backup information stored in the main control built-in RAM twice, it is checked whether or not the game backup information is stored by an illegal act.

  Here, the point where the presence / absence of the power failure notice signal in step S24 is determined following the wait time waiting process in step S22 will be described. First, when there is no determination of the presence or absence of a power failure warning signal in step S24, that is, when the value of the RAM clear flag in step S26 is determined following the wait time waiting process in step S22, and the subsequent processing is performed. The problems in will be described.

  As described above, the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a is charged to the electrolytic capacitor MC2 shown in FIG. 77 when a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs and the power supply from the pachinko island facility is cut off. The electric charge is applied as +5 V for a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after the occurrence of a power failure or a momentary power failure. In other words, even when the power supply from the Pachinko island facility is shut off due to a momentary power failure or a power failure, the electric charge charged to the hardware called the electrolytic capacitor MC2 is applied as +5 V, so that the power supply from the pachinko island facility is The main control side power-off process can be completed within a period from when the power is shut off until about 7 ms elapses. This is because when a player is playing a game, that is, when the main control side main process or the main control side timer interrupt process described later is performed, a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs and the pachinko island facility When the power is cut off, the main control side power-off process can be completed with certainty.

  However, as an extremely rare phenomenon, in the wait time waiting process of step S22 at the time of power recovery, the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display by the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 of the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. Just before the system that performs the drawing control of the device 460 starts (boots) starts to wait (boot timer: 2.5 seconds is set in this embodiment) and immediately before reaching the waiting time. Thus, if a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs, the electric charge charged to the hardware called the electrolytic capacitor MC2 is applied to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, as +5 V, but within a period of about 7 ms, step S42. The interrupt initial setting is performed in step S52, and then the interrupt permission setting is performed in step S52. Even if the main control side timer interruption process described below is performed and the contents of the main control built-in RAM are updated, the main control side power-off process in the main control-side power-on process may not be completed. . For this reason, the main control side power-on process is started again at the time of power recovery without storing the calculated value of the checksum based on the contents of the main control built-in RAM.

  Then, the main control side power-on process is started at the time of the current power recovery, and the wait time waiting process in step S22 is completed without causing an instantaneous power failure or a power failure. Thereafter, in step S28, the main control built-in RAM If the value calculated in the checksum based on the contents of the checksum is compared with the value stored in the main control built-in RAM immediately before the instantaneous power failure or power failure occurs in step S30, the checksum value should match. In step S38, the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is cleared. In other words, the information stored in the main control built-in RAM is forcibly erased (cleared) even if the operation switch 954 is operated by the hall clerk at the time of power recovery and there is no indication of the clearing of the RAM by the hall clerk. ).

  Therefore, in this embodiment, immediately after the wait time waiting process in step S22, a process for determining whether or not a power failure warning signal is input is provided as step 24, and when a power failure warning signal is input, Returning to the determination in step S24, the determination in step S24 is repeatedly performed as long as the power failure warning signal continues to be input. As a result, the timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register built in the main control MPU 1310a for the main control built-in WDT 1310af activated in step S12, the time measurement by the main control built-in WDT 1310af is cleared, and the time measurement is started again. The main control MPU 1310a can be forcibly reset by the built-in main control WDT 1310af. Although the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set to a value in the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG in step S18 or step S20 before the wait time waiting process in step S22, the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is as described above. Since it is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the control MPU 1310a, even if the RAM access permission is set in step S10, the contents (game information) of the main control built-in RAM are not changed at all.

  In this way, immediately after the wait time waiting process in step S22, a process for determining whether or not a power failure warning signal is input is provided as step 24, and when a power failure warning signal is input (ie, step If the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off after waiting in the wait time waiting process of S22 (when determined by the determination of step S24), the process returns to the determination of step S24 again, and as long as the power failure warning signal continues to be input, By repeating the determination in step S24, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 can be forcibly reset and the main control board 1310 can be restarted, so that the game can proceed. It is possible to prevent the game information from being updated, and the checksum calculation result does not fluctuate. It has become so that it does not. Thereby, when restarting, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 determines that the checksum calculation result in step S28 matches the checksum calculation value stored in step S64. Therefore, the game information that is stored and held in the main control built-in RAM is not initialized immediately before a momentary power failure or power failure occurs. Therefore, at the time of power recovery, it is possible to prevent the game information immediately before the occurrence of a momentary power failure or a power failure from being initialized.

  Further, immediately after the wait time waiting process in step S22, a process for determining whether or not a power failure warning signal is input is provided as step 24, and when a power failure warning signal is not input (that is, in step S22). When the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is proceeding with the game (when it is determined by the determination in step S24 that the power to the pachinko machine 1 is not shut off after waiting in the wait time waiting process), the pachinko machine Even when the power supply to 1 is cut off, a backup process for storing game information due to the progress of this game by supplying power to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, by the electrolytic capacitor MC2 shown in FIG. The main system constituted by the process of steps S58 to S68 and an infinite loop Since the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 can complete the process at the time of power-off on the side, when the main control MPU 1310a of the main control MPU 1310a restarts, the checksum calculation result of step S28 And the checksum calculation result in the backup process (that is, the value calculated and stored in step S64) match. The game information just before a power failure occurs is not initialized. That is, the main control board 1310 can be activated by being restored to the game information immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs.

  Further, immediately after the wait time waiting process in step S22, when it is determined in step S24 that a power failure warning signal has been input, the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT 1310af, thereby causing the contents of the main control built-in RAM. The main control side power-off process can be started again without updating the process at all. On the other hand, immediately after the wait time standby process in step S22, if it is determined in step S24 that the power failure warning signal has not been input, As a result, it is possible to reliably complete the main control side power-off process within the “instantaneous power failure or power failure securing period” of about 7 ms. That is, in the present embodiment, when the main control side power-on process is performed at the time of power recovery, a power failure from the pachinko island facility is interrupted due to an instantaneous power failure or a power failure, and the main control MPU 1310a The electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 shown in FIG. 77 is applied to the power supply VDD terminal as +5 V over a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after the occurrence of a power failure or instantaneous interruption. Therefore, if the main control-side power-off process cannot be completed within the “instantaneous power failure or power supply securing period” of about 7 ms by the hardware of the electrolytic capacitor MC2, the wait time waiting process of step S22 is performed. In step 24 immediately after that, it is determined whether or not a power failure warning signal is input. If a power failure warning signal is input, step S24 is performed. Returning to the determination again, as long as the power failure warning signal continues to be input, the determination in step S24 is repeated to clear the timer in the WDT clear register built in the main control MPU 1310a with respect to the main control built-in WDT 1310af activated in step S12. The main control MPU 1310a can be forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT 1310af by setting the set value and clearing the time measured by the main control built-in WDT 1310af and making it impossible to start the time measurement again. . The main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by such software built-in main control WDT 1310af, so that an interrupt initial setting is performed after step S24 (specifically, an interrupt initial setting is performed in step S42, and then in step S52). It is possible to avoid updating the contents (game information) of the main control built-in RAM by setting the interrupt permission and preventing the progress to the main control side timer interrupt processing (to be described later). The system is adopted. In this way, when a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs and the power from the Pachinko Island facility is shut off, the main control-side power supply and the part that is covered by software so that the contents (game information) of the main control built-in RAM are not changed The contents of the main control built-in RAM (the contents of the main control built-in RAM are divided into two parts, that is, the part covered by hardware so that the content of the main control built-in RAM (game information) is not changed at all. (Game information) can be reliably prevented from being changed.

  Next, a description will be given of the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted when the power is turned on in step S50. In step S50, as described above, the fact that the power has been turned on (recovered) based on the power recovery time information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34. In order to communicate, the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command shown in FIG. 89, which are classified into power-on, are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. As described above, the power-on main control return destination command mainly includes information for instructing the driving state of the start-port solenoid 2107 and information for instructing the driving state of the attacker solenoid 2108 shown in FIG. Yes. Here, first, when the power-on main control return destination command does not include the information for instructing the driving state of the start-up solenoid 2107 and the information for instructing the driving state of the attacker solenoid 2108 shown in FIG. The problem in the case where the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted when the power-on main control return destination command is turned on in step S50 is not performed in step S50 will be described.

  For example, when the peripheral control board 1510 controls the display of the big hit game state screen (for example, the big hit game effect screen) in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 shown in FIG. When the attacker solenoid 2108 is driven and the large winning opening 2005 shown in FIG. 8 is opened by the opening / closing member 2107, when an instantaneous power failure or power failure occurs, and then power is restored, the main control board 1310 Based on the power recovery time information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in S34, the game state immediately before the occurrence of a momentary power failure or power failure is restored. Starting to drive the solenoid 2108 and shifting from the state in which the big prize opening 2005 is closed by the opening / closing member 2107 to the state in which it is opened; That.

  However, when a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs, the peripheral control board 1510 receives various commands from the main control board 1310 and returns when power is restored. Then, when the power is restored thereafter, the peripheral control board 1510 can return based on the probability and the time-short state indicated by the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration. However, when the main control board 1310 is generating a big hit gaming state as a gaming state, if an instantaneous power failure or a power failure occurs, and then power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 is in the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration. Even if the screen can be displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and returned based on the probability and the short time state based on the probability and the short time state indicated by the power-on state command received from It is not possible to indicate at all which round of the jackpot gaming state. In other words, for example, a winning prize 1 count display command is transmitted to inform the number of gaming balls that are detected by the count sensor 4005 shown in FIG. Even if the main control board 1310 transmits to the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral control board 1510 receives the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral control board 1510 has a game ball that has entered the big winning opening 2005 on the screen according to the probability and the time-short state. Even if the number can be displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, it is not possible to display at all which round of the jackpot gaming state (that is, how many rounds).

  In such a situation, for example, when the main control board 1310 finishes four rounds (fourth round) of the big hit gaming state, the driving of the attacker solenoid 2108 is stopped and the big prize opening 2005 is opened by the opening / closing member 2107. The main prize-winning port 1 closing display command for instructing the transition from the closed state to the closed state (that is, starting the closing of the big winning opening 2005 of the start opening unit 2100 between rounds) from the main control board 1310. When transmission is made to the board 1510 and the main control board 1310 starts 5 rounds (fifth round) of the big hit gaming state, the attack solenoid 2108 is started and the big winning opening 2005 is closed by the opening / closing member 2107. That the state is to be released (that is, 5 of the big prize opening 2005) To send a special winning opening open the fifth display command instructing the open start) of the eye of the round from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510. As a result, the peripheral control board 1510 finally switches the screen of the start of the fifth round of the big hit gaming state from the screen corresponding to the above-described probability and time-short state and displays it on the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. It becomes.

  Further, for example, a screen (for example, indicating that the movable piece is expanded) that indicates that the gaming state where the game ball can be received at the second start port 2004 is in an advantageous gaming state for the player. 8 is displayed when the peripheral control board 1510 controls the display on the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 to drive the start port solenoid 2107. When a momentary power failure or power failure occurs when the movable piece is expanded in the left-right direction, and then the power is restored, the main control board 1310 displays the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34. Based on the power recovery information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in the setting, the driving state of the start port solenoid 2107 is started by being restored to the gaming state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs. And thus the transition to a state of being expanded from a state in which the movable piece of the pair climbed standing substantially perpendicularly to the lateral direction.

  However, when a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs, the peripheral control board 1510 receives various commands from the main control board 1310 and returns when power is restored. When power is restored thereafter, the peripheral control board 1510 can be restored based on the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration. However, when the main control board 1310 is in a gaming state and a gaming state in which a gaming ball can be received at the second start port 2004 is generated and a gaming state advantageous to the player is generated, a momentary power failure or power failure occurs. Then, when the power is restored after that, the peripheral control board 1510 displays the screen according to the probability and the time-short state based on the probability and the time-short state indicated by the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of power recovery. Even if it can be displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and returned, it becomes a gaming state in which a game ball can be received at the second starting port 2004 and becomes a gaming state advantageous to the player. The peripheral control board 1510 cannot display the screen indicating that it is present in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 at all. For this reason, the player who sits in front of the pachinko machine is surprised that a momentary power failure or power failure has occurred, and at the time of power recovery, the game ball is received at the second start port 2004 immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs. In some cases, it is forgotten that the gaming state is enabled. In such a case, the gaming state is restored to the second starting port 2004 as a gaming state at the time of power recovery. Nevertheless, a screen for instructing a game (that is, a screen for instructing a game to enter a game ball into the second starting port 2004) is not displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 when power is restored. Therefore, there is also a problem that the player does not know what kind of game he plays.

  Thus, in the two examples mentioned above, there was a problem that it was not possible to quickly return to the gaming state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure after power recovery. In other words, a player who sits in front of a pachinko machine mistakes for a momentary power outage or power failure, and then recovers after power recovery, and the pachinko machine system appears to be in a clumped state, a so-called frozen state. There was a problem.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, when the main control board 1310 is turned on (including when the power is turned on, and also when the power is restored due to a power failure or a momentary power failure), the power-on state command In order to transmit the power-on main control return destination command to the peripheral control board 1510, in step S50, the power-on state command and power-on main control return destination command shown in FIG. Are stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. These commands are transmitted in a main control timer interrupt process described later.

  Thereby, the peripheral control board 1510 is based on the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command received from the main control board 1310. When a momentary power failure or power failure occurs, and then the power is restored, the attacker solenoid 2108 starts to be driven as the return destination of the main control board 1310 and the big prize opening 2005 is released from the state closed by the opening / closing member 2107. Since the peripheral control board 1510 can be notified to the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral control board 1510 has a screen that specifies that it is the fourth round of the big hit gaming state (that is, a screen showing how many rounds it is) ) Cannot be displayed in the display area of the game board-side effect display device 1600, A screen (for example, “It is a big hit. The big prize opening is open. A game is played in the big prize opening is started.) The driving of the casoleole 2108 is started and the big prize opening 2005 is opened by the opening / closing member 2107. “Please play the game to make the ball enter.” Is displayed on the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the player sitting on the front of the pachinko machine is restored. Later, a game can be instructed to enter a game ball into the grand prize opening 2005. For example, in the above-described example, a game state in which a game ball can be received at the second start port 2004 is entered. When a momentary power failure or power failure occurs in a game state advantageous to the user and then power is restored, the start-up solenoid 2107 serves as a return destination of the main control board 1310. A screen that informs that the pair of movable pieces has been expanded in the left-right direction after driving is started (for example, “The movable piece has been expanded. After the power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 displays in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the player sitting on the front surface of the pachinko machine. The game can be instructed to enter the game ball into the second starting port 2004 at. As a result, when an instantaneous power failure or a power failure occurs and then the power is restored, the return destination of the peripheral control board 1510 can be finely instructed on the main control board 1310 side. Therefore, it is possible to quickly return to the gaming state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure after the power recovery. In other words, a player who sits in front of a pachinko machine mistakes for a momentary power outage or power failure, and then recovers after power recovery, and the pachinko machine system appears to be in a clumped state, a so-called frozen state. This can be prevented.

  Next, in the main control board inspection process, which is an inspection process for the production line of the main control board 1310, when the main control board 1310 is first turned on after being manufactured for inspection, the checksum of step S28 Calculation and determination in step S30 will be described. In the main control board inspection process, when the main control board 1310 is powered on for the first time after being manufactured for inspection, the main control board is configured by the above-described processes of steps S58 to S68, which are backup processes, and an infinite loop. Since the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 has never executed the control-side power-off process, even if a checksum based on the contents of the main control built-in RAM is calculated in step S28, in step S30 In the comparison determination, the checksum values cannot be matched, and the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is always cleared in step S38. Thus, when the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted at power-on is performed in step S50, the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command shown in FIG. 89 are generated. By storing the transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, only two commands, the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command, are transmitted as transmission information in the main control built-in RAM. Will be stored in For these commands, a power-on state command is transmitted first, followed by a power-on main control return destination command in a main control timer interrupt process to be described later. By utilizing this, in the main control board inspection process, when the main control board 1310 is first turned on after manufacturing for inspection, a power-on state command is sent from the main control board 1310 as the first command. It is transmitted to the inspection device in the main control board inspection process.

  Incidentally, as described above, the power-on state command is shown in FIG. 70 when the power is turned on (including when the power is turned on, and when the power is restored due to a power failure or a momentary power failure). When the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 shown is operated to clear the RAM, information indicating that, and when the power is turned on (in addition to when the power is turned on, a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs, (Including the time of recovery to recover)) In any of the above states (probability and short-time state) among the low-probability short-time state, high-probability short-time state, low-probability non-short-time state, and high-probability non-short-time state Information indicating whether to do so, and information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine. Here, a problem in the case where the power-on state command does not include information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine will be described.

  As described above, the model code of the pachinko machine corresponds to the copyright of which work when creating the so-called max type, middle type and sweet digital type as the pachinko machine 1 (more precisely, the main control board 1310). What kind of gaming specifications (for example, if the probability variation occurs, the state will continue until the next big hit gaming state occurs, in addition to the number of variations of special symbols (for example, It is possible to specify whether or not the game specifications (so-called ST machine, etc.)) in which the probability fluctuation occurs in the state of 30 times or 70 times).

In the manufacturing line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, when manufacturing the main control board 1310, there are cases where the main control boards 1310 for the copyrights of a plurality of types of works are mixed.
Then, the worker on the production line is responsible for the copyright of which work among the copyrights of a plurality of kinds of works (for example, the copyrights of the works of movie A, movie B, drama C, movie D, comic E, and comic F). The main control board for the one copyright (for example, the copyright of the movie D) among the copyrights of a plurality of types of works is lost, or it is unclear whether the main control board 1310 is flowing in the production line in order to manufacture the control board 1310 The main control board 1310 is used to manufacture the main control board 1310 for another copyright (for example, the copyright of the work of the comic F), even though the main control board 1310 flows on the production line to manufacture 1310. There is also a misunderstanding and misunderstanding that it is flowing in the production line. For this reason, when manufacturing the main control board 1310 in the manufacturing line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, if the main control board 1310 corresponding to the copyrights of a plurality of types of works is mixed, the worker of the manufacturing line can use the manufacturing line. It is impossible to confirm which copyright of the work the produced main control board 1310 belongs to, and for any copyright of the same work, any model type (max type, middle type, sweet digital type) It is also not possible to confirm what type of game it is and what type of game it is (a game specification or ST machine that will continue until the next jackpot gaming state occurs when probability changes occur). As a result, when the main control board 1310 for the copyrights of a plurality of types of works is mixed when the main control board 1310 is manufactured in the production line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, the main control board for the copyrights of the plurality of types of works is mixed. While 1310 is mixed, it is sent to a game board assembly line for attaching the main control board 1310 to the game board 5. For this reason, the operator of the game board assembly line may attach the main control board 1310 not corresponding to the game board 5 for the copyright of the work to the game board 5. As a result, there is a problem that the production efficiency of the game board 5 decreases.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, when the main control board 1310 is turned on (including when the power is turned on, and also when the power is restored due to a power failure or a momentary power failure), the model code of the pachinko machine is included. In step S50, a power-on state command and a power-on main control return destination command classified into power-on shown in FIG. 89 are transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. Are stored in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM as transmission information. These commands are transmitted in a main control timer interrupt process described later.

  Thereby, an operator of a manufacturing line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1 turns on the main control board 1310 in the main control board inspection process, which is the inspection process of the production line, so that the inspection apparatus causes the main control board 1310 to turn on. Based on the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine included in the power-on state command received from the above, that is, constituting the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine, the above-described max type indicating the model type, middle type, And a series code for specifying which of the types is a sweet digital type, a copyright code for specifying the copyright of the work, and a game specification (for example, when probability change occurs, the next jackpot game state is In addition to the game specification that the state will continue until it occurs, the probability variation with a limited number of special symbol variations By checking the detailed model information displayed on the inspection monitor based on the game specification code for specifying the game specification (ST machine, etc.), the main control board 1310 is associated with which copyright. It is possible to determine the type of machine, and for the copyright of the same work, which model type (max type, middle type, and sweet digital type), and what game specifications It is also possible to determine whether the game state or ST machine is such that when the probability variation occurs, that state will continue until the next big hit gaming state occurs. Thereby, when manufacturing the main control board 1310 in the production line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, even if the main control board 1310 for the copyrights of a plurality of types of works is mixed, the main control board inspection process of the production line The operator can discriminate each main control board 1310 with respect to the copyright of the work, by accurately determining the model type of the main control board 1310, the copyright of the work, and the game specification by visually checking the inspection monitor. It can be sent to the game board assembly line. The operator of the game board assembly line can securely attach the main control board 1310 corresponding to the game board 5 for the copyright of the work to the game board 5, and the main control board not corresponding to the game board 5 for the copyright of the work. It is possible to prevent a decrease in production efficiency of the game board 5 caused by the work of attaching 1310 to the game board 5. Therefore, it can contribute to the improvement of the production efficiency of the game board 5.

[14-3. Main control timer interrupt processing]
Next, the main control timer interrupt process will be described. This main control side timer interrupt process is repeated at every interrupt period (4 ms in this embodiment) set in the main control side power-on process shown in FIGS.

  When the main control side timer interrupt process is started, in the main control board 1310, the main control program switches register banks as shown in FIG. 94 under the control of the main control MPU 1310a (step S100). The general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU 1310a has two register banks each composed of a first register bank and a second register bank. The first register bank is used in the main control main process in the main control side power-on process described above, while the first register bank is used in the main control side timer interrupt process which is this routine. In step S100, since the second register bank is used in the main control side timer interrupt processing which is this routine, the second register bank is used from the first register bank used in the main control main processing in the main control side power-on processing. The register bank is switched to the register tank. In the present embodiment, when the main control timer interrupt process, which is this routine, is started, the process of saving each register to the stack is not necessary.

  Subsequent to step S100, the main control program performs timer subtraction processing (step S102). In this timer subtraction process, for example, the time during which the first special symbol display 1403 and the second special symbol display 1405 are turned on in accordance with the variable display pattern determined in the special symbol and special electric accessory control processing described later, In addition to the time when the normal symbol display 1402 is turned on according to the normal symbol variation display pattern determined by the symbol and normal electric accessory control process, various commands transmitted by the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1310a) are issued. When determining whether or not a payer ACK signal indicating that the signal is normally received is input, time management such as an ACK signal input determination time set as a determination condition is performed. Specifically, when the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is 5 seconds, the timer interruption period is set to 4 ms. Therefore, every time this timer subtraction process is performed, the fluctuation time is subtracted by 4 ms. When the subtraction result is 0, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is accurately measured.

  In this embodiment, the ACK signal input determination time is set to 100 ms. Each time this timer subtraction process is performed, the ACK signal input determination time is subtracted by 4 ms, and the result of the subtraction becomes 0, thereby accurately measuring the ACK signal input determination time. The various times and the ACK signal input determination time are stored as time management information in the time management information storage area of the main control built-in RAM.

  Subsequent to step S102, the main control program performs switch input processing (step S104). In this switch input process, various signals input to the input terminals of the various input ports of the main control MPU 1310a are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Specifically, the main control program is, for example, a detection signal from the general winning opening sensors 4020 and 4020 shown in FIG. 69 for detecting a game ball that has entered the general winning openings 2001 and 201 shown in FIG. The detection signal from the count sensor 4005 shown in FIG. 69 for detecting the game ball that has entered the grand prize opening 2005 shown in FIG. 8, and the game ball that has entered the first start port 2002 shown in FIG. 8 are detected. A detection signal from the first start port sensor 4002 shown in FIG. 69, a detection signal from the second start port sensor 4004 shown in FIG. 69 that detects a game ball that has entered the second start port 2004 shown in FIG. A detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 shown in FIG. 69 that detects the game ball that has passed through the gate portion 2003 shown in FIG. 8, a magnetic detection sensor that detects fraud using the magnet shown in FIG. 69, and a payer ACK signal from the payout control board 951 notifying that the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 69 has successfully received a prize ball command transmitted in the prize ball control process described later. And stored as input information in the input information storage area. In addition, a detection signal from the first start port sensor 4002 that detects a game ball that has entered the first start port 2002, and a detection from the second start port sensor 4004 that detects a game ball that has entered the second start port 2004. When each signal is read, the corresponding start port winning command shown in FIG. 90 and corresponding thereto is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above. That is, when there is a detection signal from the first start port sensor 4002, a corresponding start port winning command is stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information, and there is a detection signal from the second start port sensor 4004. The start opening winning command corresponding to this is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area.

  In the present embodiment, the detection signals from the general winning opening sensors 4020 and 4020 that detect the gaming balls that have entered the general winning openings 2001 and 2011, and the count sensor 4005 that detects the gaming balls that have entered the large winning opening 2005. , A detection signal from the first start port sensor 4002 that detects a game ball that has entered the first start port 2002, and a second start port sensor 4004 that detects a game ball that has entered the second start port 2004 And the detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 that detects the game ball that has passed through the gate unit 2003 are first read as the first time when this switch input process is started, and are each read for a predetermined time (for example, 10 μs). ) After the passage, each is read again as the second time. Then, the result read at the second time is compared with the result read at the first time. It is determined whether there is a comparison result among the comparison results. Those that are not the same result are read again as the third time, and the result read at the third time is compared with the result read at the second time. It is determined again whether there is a comparison result among the comparison results. Those that are not the same result are read again as the fourth time, and the result read at the fourth time is compared with the result read at the third time. It is determined again whether there is a comparison result among the comparison results. Those with the same result are treated as having no game balls.

  Thus, in the switch input process, the main control program receives the detection signals from the general prize opening sensors 4020 and 4020, the count sensor 4005, the first starting port sensor 4002, the second starting port sensor 4004, and the gate sensor 4003. Due to the influence of chattering, noise, etc., by reading twice, a total of two times of reading, which is compared twice for the first to third times, and twice for comparing the second time to the fourth time. Since erroneous detection can be avoided, detection signals from the general winning award opening sensors 4020 and 4020, the count sensor 4005, the first starting opening sensor 4002, the second starting opening sensor 4004, and the gate sensor 4003 are displayed. Reliability can be increased.

  Subsequent to step S104, the main control program performs a winning random number update process (step S106). In this winning random number update process, the big hit symbol random number and the small hit symbol random number described above are updated. Further, in addition to these random numbers, the big hit symbol initial value determination random number updated in the non-winning random number update process of step S56 in the main control side power-on process (main control side main process) shown in FIG. And the random number for determining the initial value for the small hit symbol is also updated. The random value for determining the initial value for the big hit symbol and the random number for determining the initial value for the small hit symbol are updated in the main control side main process and the main control side timer interrupt process, respectively, thereby improving the randomness. . On the other hand, since the big hit symbol random number and the small hit symbol random number are random numbers related to the winning determination (big hit determination), each counter is incremented only when the winning random number update process is performed. Note that the above-described random numbers for normal symbol determination and random numbers for determining the initial value for normal symbol determination are also updated by this winning random number update process.

  For example, as described above, the counter that updates the random number for normal symbol determination is an initial value update type counter, and is updated within a predetermined fixed numerical value range from the minimum value to the maximum value. To the maximum value, the value is incremented by adding 1 each time the main control timer interrupt process is performed. The random number for determining the initial value for determination per normal symbol is counted up toward the maximum value, and then the random number for determining the initial value for determination per normal symbol is counted up from the minimum value. When the counter finishes counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the random number for normal symbol determination, the random number for initial value determination for big hit determination is updated by this winning random number update processing. The random value for determining the initial value for normal symbol determination can be obtained by executing an initial value lottery process for drawing one value from the fixed numerical range of the counter for updating the random number for determination per normal symbol. .

  In the present embodiment, the big hit symbol initial value determining random number and the small hit symbol initial value determining random number are stored in the main control side power-on processing (main control side main processing) shown in FIG. The winning random number update process and the winning random number update process in step S106 in the main control timer interrupt process, which is this routine, are updated respectively. However, each time an interrupt timer is generated, the processing time of this routine becomes uneven. If the number of executions of the non-winning random number update process in step S56 is random by repeatedly executing the main process on the main control side within the remaining time until the interrupt timer is generated, a random number for determining the initial value for the big hit symbol , And the random number for determining the initial value for the small hit symbol may be updated only in the non-winning random number update process in step S56.

  Subsequent to step S106, the main control program performs prize ball control processing (step S108). In this prize ball control process, the input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area, and the prize ball command shown in FIG. 88 for paying out a game ball based on this input information is created and paid out as a prize ball. When the number of scheduled game balls has reached 10, the main prize ball number information output signal is set to notify that fact and stored as output information in the output information storage area, The self-check command shown in FIG. 88 for confirming the connection state between the control board 1310 and the payout control board 951 is created. Then, the created prize ball command or self-check command is transmitted to the payout control board 951 as main payout serial data. For example, when one game ball enters the big winning opening 2005 shown in FIG. 8, a prize ball command for paying out 15 balls as a prize ball is created, and the number of game balls to be paid out as a prize ball Is set to 10 balls, the main prize ball number information output signal output is set in order to notify that, and is stored in the output information storage area as output information, and a prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control board 951. If the payer ACK signal notifying that the payout control board 951 has successfully received the prize ball command is not input within a predetermined time, the connection state between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951 is confirmed. A self-check command to be generated is transmitted to the payout control board 951. If the number of game balls to be paid out as a prize ball exceeds 10 as in the case of creating a prize ball command for paying out 15 balls as a prize ball, In the prize ball control process, the input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area, the number of game balls to be paid out as a prize ball is added based on this input information, and the added number of game balls In order to notify that, the output of the main prize ball number information output signal is set and stored as output information in the output information storage area.

Subsequent to step S108, the main control program performs a frame command reception process (step S110). In the payout control board 951, the payout control program executes various commands of 1 byte (8 bits) classified into the status display shown in FIG. 91 (for example, frame status 1 command, error release navigation command, and frame status 2 command). Send. On the other hand, as described later, the payout control program outputs an error occurrence command when an error occurs in the payout operation, or outputs an error cancellation navigation command based on a detection signal of the operation switch 954.
In the frame command reception process described above, when the main control program normally receives the various commands as payer serial data, information that informs the payout control board 951 to that effect is stored as output information in the main control built-in RAM. Store in the area. Also, the main control program reformats the command normally received as the payer serial data into a 2-byte (16-bit) command (various commands (frame status 1 command, error release classified into the status display in FIG. 90). The navigation command and the frame state 2 command))) are stored in the transmission information storage area described above as transmission information. The frame state 1 command here corresponds to the first error occurrence command, and the error cancellation navigation command corresponds to the first error cancellation command.

  Subsequent to step S110, the main control program performs a fraud detection process (step S112). In this fraud detection process, the abnormal state related to the prize ball is confirmed. For example, when the input information is read from the above-described input information storage area and the detection signal from the count sensor 4005 is input when the game state is not a big hit game state (when a game ball enters the big winning opening 2005), etc. Then, a winning abnormality display command classified into the notification display shown in FIG. 90 as an abnormal state is created, and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above.

  Subsequent to step S112, the main control program performs a special symbol and special electric accessory control process (step S114). In this special symbol and special electric accessory control process, a latch signal is output to the main random number circuit with built-in main control 1310an shown in FIG. 69, and the random number extracted by the main random number circuit with built-in main control 1310an when the latch signal is input. (Random number value) is acquired from a hard random number latch register incorporated in main control built-in main control MPU 1310a, and the obtained random number value is set as a big hit determination random number. Whether or not the jackpot determination random number (that is, the random number value acquired from the hard random number latch register built in the main control built-in main control MPU 1310a) matches the jackpot determination value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM. (Determining whether or not to generate a big hit gaming state (referred to as “special lottery”)) or taking out the value of the counter for updating the big hit symbol random number and pre-stored in the main control built-in ROM It is determined whether or not it matches with the probability variation determination value (determination of whether or not to generate a probability fluctuation). Here, “probability fluctuation” means that the probability of a big hit changes to a high probability (at the time of probability change) that is set higher than that at normal time (low probability). In the present embodiment, the value 32668 to the value 32767 are set in the low probability as the range of the big hit determination value (big hit determination range) described above, and read from the normal determination table, whereas the value 31768 in the high probability. ˜value 32767 is set and read from the probability variation determination table. As described above, in the special symbol and special electric accessory control process in step S114, the big hit determination random number (that is, the random number value acquired from the hard random number latch register built in the main control built-in main control MPU 1310a) and the built-in main control. When determining whether or not the jackpot determination value stored in advance in the ROM matches, the jackpot determination random number (that is, the random value acquired from the hard random number latch register built in the main control built-in main control MPU 1310a) Is determined by whether or not is included in the big hit determination range.

  When these determination results are based on the first start port sensor 4002, various commands related to the special figure 1 synchronization effect shown in FIG. 89 are created, while the lottery results are based on the second start port sensor 4004. In some cases, various commands related to the special figure 2 tuning effect shown in FIG. 89 are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area, and the first special symbol display is performed according to the determined special symbol variation display pattern. The lighting signal output to the first special symbol display unit 1403 or the second special symbol display unit 1405 is set so that the indicator 1403 or the second special symbol display unit 1405 is lit, and the output information is stored in the output information storage area described above. To do. Also, depending on the game state to be generated, for example, when the game state is a big hit game state, various commands classified into the big hit relation shown in FIG. Closing display command, winning prize 1 count display command, jackpot ending command, and jackpot symbol display command) are created and stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information, or the opening / closing member 2107 shown in FIG. 8 is opened / closed. When the output of the drive signal to the attacker solenoid 2108 is set and stored as output information in the output information storage area, or when the number of times (round) when the special winning opening 2005 is opened from the closed state is two times, 2 to turn on the two-round display lamp 1407a of the round indicator 1407 shown in FIG. When the output of the lighting signal to the wind display lamp 1407a is set and stored in the output information storage area as output information, or when the round is 15 times, the 15 round display lamp 1407b of the round indicator 1407 shown in FIG. The lighting signal output to the 15-round display lamp 1407b is set so as to be lit, and is stored in the output information storage area as output information, or the presence / absence of probability fluctuation is lit in a predetermined color. The output of the lighting signal is set and stored as output information in the output information storage area.

  Subsequent to step S114, the main control program performs a normal symbol and normal electric accessory control process (step S116). In the normal symbol and normal electric accessory control process, the input information is read from the above-described input information storage area, and the gate winning process is performed based on the input information. In this gate winning process, it is determined from the input information whether a detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 has been input to the input terminal. Based on this determination result, when a detection signal is input to the input terminal, the gate information storage area of the main control built-in RAM is extracted as gate information by extracting the counter value etc. for updating the random number for determination per normal symbol described above To remember.

  This gate information storage area is provided with 0th partition to 3rd partition (four partitions), and gate information is stored in the order of 0th partition, 1st partition, 2nd partition, and 3rd partition. It is like that. For example, when gate information is stored in the 0th to 2nd sections of the gate information storage, when the detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 is input to the input terminal, the gate information is stored in the third section of the gate information storage. To do.

  The gate information stored in the 0th section of the gate information storage is set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. When this gate information is set, the gate information of the first section of the gate information storage is in the 0th section of the gate information storage, the gate information of the second section of the gate information storage is in the first section of the gate information storage, The gate information of the third section of the information storage is shifted to the second section of the gate information storage, respectively, and the third section of the gate information storage becomes an empty area. For example, when gate information is stored in the first partition to the second partition of the gate information storage, the gate information of the first partition of the gate information storage is stored in the 0th partition of the gate information storage. The gate information of the two sections is shifted to the first section of the gate information storage, and the second section of the gate information storage and the third section of the gate information storage become empty areas. Here, when the gate information is stored in the first to third sections of the gate information storage, the above-described gate information is turned on so that the normal symbol storage display 1188 is turned on using the total number of stored gate information as a holding ball. Based on the above, the output of the lighting signal of the normal symbol storage display 1188 is set and stored as output information in the output information storage area described above.

  Following the gate winning process, the gate information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM is read out, and the normal design random number is extracted from the read gate information and stored in the main control built-in ROM in advance. It is determined whether or not it matches the determination value per normal symbol (referred to as “normal lottery”). Whether or not the movable piece is opened / closed is determined based on the determination result (the lottery result of the normal lottery). In the case of performing the opening / closing operation by this determination, the pair of movable pieces is in a state of being expanded in the left-right direction, so that a gaming state in which a game ball can be received at the second starting port 2004 becomes advantageous to the player. It becomes a gaming state. The variable display pattern of the normal symbol corresponding to this determination is determined based on the above-mentioned random number for the normal symbol variable display pattern, and various commands classified as related to the general pattern synchronization effect shown in FIG. The output of the lighting signal to the normal symbol display unit 1402 is set so that the normal symbol display unit 1402 is turned on in accordance with the determined normal symbol variation display pattern while being stored in the transmission information storage area described above, and output information described above. Store in the output information storage area. Further, for example, when the value of the extracted random number for normal symbol determination matches the normal symbol determination value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM, various commands related to the ordinary electric role effect shown in FIG. Is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area, and the output of the drive signal to the start port solenoid 2107 is set so as to open and close the movable piece, and is stored as output information in the output information storage area described above. When the extracted random number for normal symbol determination does not coincide with the normal symbol determination value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM, the normal symbol variation is based on the normal symbol variation display pattern random number described above. The transmission information described above as transmission information is determined by determining the display pattern and creating various commands classified as related to the common figure synchronization effect shown in FIG. In addition to storing in the storage area, the output of the lighting signal to the normal symbol display 1402 is set so that the normal symbol display 1402 is turned on according to the determined normal symbol variation display pattern, and the output information is stored in the output information storage area described above as output information. Remember.

  Subsequent to step S116, the main control program performs port output processing (step S118). In this port output process, output information is read from the output information storage area described above from the output terminals of the various output ports of the main control MPU 1310a, and various signals are output based on the output information. The main control program, for example, outputs a main payout ACK signal when the various commands from the payout control board 951 are normally received from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a based on the output information. Or a driving signal is output to the attacking solenoid 2108 for opening / closing the opening / closing member 2107 of the winning prize opening 2005 or a starting opening solenoid 2107 for opening / closing the movable piece. In addition to output, the main prize ball number information output signal, 15 round jackpot information output signal, 2 round jackpot information output signal, probability changing information output signal, special symbol display information output signal, normal symbol display information output signal, Various information related to the game, such as short and medium information output information, start opening prize output information signal And it outputs a broadcast) signal to the payout control board 951.

  Subsequent to step S118, the main control program performs peripheral control board command transmission processing (step S120). In this peripheral control board command transmission process, the main control program reads transmission information from the transmission information storage area described above and transmits this transmission information to the peripheral control board 1510 as main peripheral serial data. The transmission information includes various commands created in the main control side timer interruption process, which is this routine, and shown in FIG. Various commands classified into commands and jackpot relations (for example, when a game ball that has entered the big prize opening 2005 (see FIG. 8) is detected, the big prize is based on the detection signal from the count sensor 4005 (see FIG. 69). 90 winning command 1 count display command corresponding to mouth count command), various commands classified as power-on, various commands related to ordinary drawing synchronization effects, various commands classified as ordinary electric role effects, FIG. Various commands (door opening command, door frame closing command, body frame opening command, body frame closing command, etc.) classified into notification display and status display shown in Various commands (frame state 1 command, error reset navigation command and the frame state 2 command), various commands and various commands are classified into other are divided into test-related are stored that. The main serial data consists of 3 bytes per packet. Specifically, the main peripheral serial data includes a status indicating a type of command having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), a mode indicating a production variation having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), and a status. And a sum value obtained by calculating the sum with the mode regarded as a numerical value, and this sum value is created at the time of transmission.

  In this peripheral control board command transmission process, the main control program transmits various commands as main peripheral serial data to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value. As described above, the charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 shown in FIG. 77 is applied to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, as + 5V when a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs. Therefore, the main peripheral serial transmission port 1310ae built in the main control MPU 1310a shown in FIG. 79 shifts at least the command set by the main control CPU core 1310aa in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb by the serial management unit 1310aec. The data can be transferred to the register 41 aea and transmitted from the transmission shift register 1310 aea as main serial data. When power is restored due to a power failure or a momentary power failure, to notify that power has been restored in the reservation setting of the command transmitted at power-on in step S50 in the main-control-side power-on processing shown in FIG. Furthermore, since the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command shown in FIG. 89 are stored in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM as transmission information. , Constituting a power-on state command as main peripheral serial data, transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value, and subsequently configuring a main control return destination command at power-on, status, The data is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of mode and sum value. The transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM reads out the game information from the game backup information in accordance with the game information in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34 in the main control side power-on process. Various commands may be stored. In such a case, first after completion of transmission of various commands according to the game information, a power-on state command and a power-on main control return destination command are transmitted.

  In this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives a frame state 1 command (first error occurrence command) from the payout control board 951 via the RXA terminal reception port, the peripheral control board 1510 (effect control unit) ) Frame status 1 command (second error occurrence command) is transmitted (error command sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the frame state 1 command in the form shown in FIG. 91 received from the payout control board 951 to the peripheral control board 1510 as the frame state 1 command in the form shown in FIG.

  On the other hand, in this peripheral control board command transmission process, if the main control program receives an error release navigation command (first error release command) from the payout control board 951 through the reception port of the RXA terminal, the peripheral control board 1510 An error cancellation navigation command (second error cancellation command) is transmitted to (error command sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the error release navigation command in the form shown in FIG. 91 received from the payout control board 951 to the peripheral control board 1510 as the error release navigation command in the form shown in FIG.

  Furthermore, in this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives a main body frame release command (first main body frame release command) from the payout control board 951 through the RXA terminal reception port, the peripheral control board 1510 A main body frame release command (second main body frame release command) is transmitted to the (production control unit) (main body frame command sending means, second main body frame sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the main body frame release command in the form shown in FIG. 91 received from the payout control board 951 to the peripheral control board 1510 as the main body frame release command in the form shown in FIG. On the other hand, in this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives a main body frame close command (first main body frame close command) from the payout control board 951 through the reception port of the RXA terminal, the peripheral control board 1510 ( A main body frame closing command (second main body frame closing command) is transmitted to the effect control unit) (main body frame command sending means, second main body frame command sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the main body frame closing command in the form shown in FIG. 91 received from the payout control board 951 to the peripheral control board 1510 as the main body frame closing command in the form shown in FIG.

  Also, in this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives a door opening command (first door opening command) from the payout control board 951 through the RXA terminal reception port, the peripheral control board 1510 (effect control) A door opening command (second door frame opening command) (door frame command sending means, second door frame command sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the door frame closing command in the form shown in FIG. 91 received from the payout control board 951 to the peripheral control board 1510 as the door closing command in the form shown in FIG. On the other hand, in this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives a door closing command (first door closing command) from the payout control board 951 through the RXA terminal reception port, the peripheral control board 1510 (effect control) A door closing command (second door closing command) (door frame command sending means, second door frame command sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the door closing command in the form shown in FIG. 91 received from the payout control board 951 to the peripheral control board 1510 as the door closing command in the form shown in FIG.

  Subsequent to step S120, the main control program clears the main control built-in WDT 1310af shown in FIG. 69 (step S122), and ends this routine. The main control built-in WDT 1310af in step S22 is cleared by setting a timer clear setting value in a WDT clear register built in the main control MPU 1310a. Thereby, the time count by the main control built-in WDT 1310af is cleared. Then, the timing by the main control built-in WDT 1310af is restarted, so that the main control MPU 1310a is not forcedly reset by the main control built-in WDT 1310af.

  In addition, as described above, the main control board 1310 stores the game information according to the progress of the game before the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off while the game is progressing. The process can be completed by executing the process. At the time of power recovery, the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off based on the game information on which the backup process was executed as the return destination of the game progress by the main control board 1310. 89. When the power-on main control return destination command in FIG. Can be output to. That is, the main control board 1310 performs main setting in the work area setting of the main control built-in RAM in step S34 in the reservation setting of the command transmitted at the time of power-on in step S50 in the main-control-side power-on process in FIG. Based on the power recovery time information set in the work area of the control built-in RAM, in order to notify that the power was turned on (power recovery), the power-on status command and the main power-on time are shown in FIG. A control return destination command is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. In the peripheral control board command transmission processing of step S120 in this routine, the power-on state command is used as the main peripheral serial data. Are transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value, and then Constituting the main control return destination command at power-transmitting status, mode, and a peripheral control board 1510 in the order of thumb value. Therefore, the peripheral control board 1510 indicates the game board side effect display device 1600 as the return destination of the progress of the game by the main control board 1310 at the time of power recovery based on the power-on main control return destination command from the main control board 1310. It is possible to display effects in the display area. As a result, when a player is playing a game, when a momentary power failure or power failure occurs, and when power is restored thereafter, the game state immediately before the power failure or power failure is restored immediately after power recovery. In addition, the return destination of the progress of the game by the main control board 1310 can be displayed and notified in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, so that the system of the pachinko machine 1 is clumped, so-called freeze Thus, it is possible to prevent the player from being mistaken for the failure due to the appearance of the player. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding that the player has failed by quickly returning to the gaming state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure after power recovery.

  In the main control board inspection process, which is an inspection process of the production line of the main control board 1310, when the main control board 1310 is first turned on after being manufactured for inspection, as described above, as shown in FIG. In step S38 in the main control side power-on process, the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is necessarily cleared. Thereby, in the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted at power-on in step S50 in the same process, when the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted at power-on is performed, the power-on state command classified into power-on shown in FIG. And a power-on main control return destination command and store them as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, thereby providing two commands: a power-on state command and a power-on main control return destination command Only the transmission information is stored in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, and in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in this routine, the power-on state command is configured as the main peripheral serial data. Inspection of main control board inspection process in order of status, mode, and thumb value Send the location, followed by forming the main control return destination command at power-transmitting status, mode, and the inspection apparatus of the main control board inspection process in the order of thumb value. The inspection apparatus of the main control board inspection process configures information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine based on the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine included in the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310, that is, information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine. The above-mentioned series type for specifying the model type, max type, middle type, and sweet digital type, the series code for specifying the type, the copyright code for specifying the copyright of the work, and the game specification (For example, in addition to a game specification in which when a probability change occurs, that state will continue until the next jackpot game state occurs, a game specification in which a probability change occurs with a limited number of special symbol changes (ST Detailed machine model information is displayed on the inspection monitor of the main control board inspection process based on the game specification code for identifying the machine) It has become.

[16-1. Various control processes of peripheral control unit]
[16-1-1. Peripheral control unit power-on processing]
First, the peripheral control unit power-on process will be described with reference to FIG. When the power to the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 72 performs a peripheral control unit power-on process as shown in FIG. When the peripheral control unit power-on process is started, the effect control program performs an initial setting process under the control of the peripheral control MPU 1511a (step S1000). In the initial setting process, the effect control program performs a process of initializing the peripheral control MPU 1511a itself, a hot start / cold start determination process, a process of setting a wait timer after reset, and the like. The peripheral control MPU 1511a first performs a process of initializing itself. The time required for the process of initializing the peripheral control MPU 1511a is on the order of microseconds (μs), and the peripheral control MPU 1511a is initialized in a very short time. be able to. As a result, the peripheral control MPU 1511a is output from the main control board 1310, for example, in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing described later, as shown in FIG. 89 and FIG. Thus, various commands such as commands relating to control of game effects and commands relating to the state of the pachinko machine 1 can be received.

  In the hot start / cold start determination process, for the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73, effect backup information (1fr) which is the contents backed up in Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) in the backup first area 1511cb. ) And the production backup information (1 ms), which is the contents backed up in Bank 1 (1 ms) and Bank 2 (1 ms), are compared, and Bank 3 (1 fr) and Bank 4 (1 fr) in the backup second area 1511 cc are compared. The production backup information (1fr), which is the content that is backed up at the same time, is compared, and the production backup information (the content that is backed up in Bank3 (1 ms) and Bank4 (1 ms)) ( ms) and when the compared contents match, the contents stored in Bank1 (1fr) with respect to Bank0 (1fr), which is a normally used storage area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. The production backup information (1fr) and the production backup information (1ms) stored in Bank1 (1ms) with respect to Bank0 (1ms) are copied back to make a hot start, When the contents do not match (that is, when they do not match), the value 0 is forcibly written to Bank0 (1fr) and Bank0 (1 ms), which are normally used storage areas of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. And cold start.

  In the hot start / cold start determination processing, the effect backup information that is backed up in Bank 1 (SRAM) and Bank 2 (SRAM) in the backup first area 1511 db is also obtained for the peripheral control SRAM 1511d shown in FIG. (SRAM) and comparison of effect backup information (SRAM), which is the contents backed up in Bank 3 (SRAM) and Bank 4 (SRAM), in the backup second area 1511 dc. When the compared contents match, the production backup information (SRAM) which is the contents stored in Bank 0 (SRAM) with respect to Bank 0 (SRAM) which is the storage area normally used in the peripheral control SRAM 1511d shown in FIG. ) Is copied back to make a hot start, but when the compared contents do not match (that is, when they do not match), the value is relative to Bank0 (SRAM), which is a storage area normally used by the peripheral control SRAM 1511d. A 0 is forcibly written to make a cold start. Subsequent to such a hot start or cold start, the value 0 is forcibly written to the backup non-management target work area 1511cf of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73 and cleared to zero. The peripheral control MPU 1511a, after performing this initialization setting process, outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af shown in FIG. 73 and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e shown in FIG. 72 and resets to the peripheral control MPU 1511a. It is made so that it doesn't take.

  Subsequent to step S1000, the effect control program performs current time information acquisition processing (step S1002). In this current time information acquisition processing, calendar information specifying the date and time and time information specifying the hour, minute, and second are acquired from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC 41654a of the RTC control unit 4165 shown in FIG. In the RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 5, the current calendar information is set in the calendar information storage unit and the current time information is set in the time information storage unit. In the current time information acquisition process, the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device is also performed. In this brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device, the peripheral control MPU 1511a acquires brightness setting information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165, and the game board is set to have the brightness of the LED included in the acquired brightness setting information. A process of turning on the backlight by adjusting the luminance of the backlight of the side effect display device 1600 is performed. As described above, the luminance setting information includes luminance adjustment information for adjusting the range of the luminance of the LED, which is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600, from 100% to 70% in increments of 5%, The brightness of the LED that is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 that has been set is included.

  Specifically, in the luminance setting process of the liquid crystal display device, the luminance of the LED included in the luminance setting information stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165 is 75%, and the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is displayed. Is turned on by adjusting the brightness of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information, and the brightness stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165. When the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is turned on when the luminance of the LED included in the setting information is 80%, the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is turned on based on the luminance adjustment information included in the luminance setting information. Lights with the brightness adjusted. In the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device, the same correction as the above-described brightness correction program for correcting the brightness of the game board side effect display device 1600 according to the usage time of the game board side effect display device 1600 is performed. It is not done at all. This is because the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device incorporates a correction program similar to the brightness correction program, so that the brightness of the LED is corrected toward 100% each time the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device is executed. This is to prevent it from being done.

  In the present embodiment, the peripheral control MPU 1511a acquires calendar information and time information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC 4165a only once when the power is turned on. In addition, the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e after performing this current time information acquisition process so that the peripheral control MPU 1511a is not reset.

  Subsequent to step S1002, the effect control program sets a value 0 to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG (step S1006). This V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute a peripheral control unit steady process to be described later, and has a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady process is executed. Is set to 0 when not executing. The V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG, which will be described later, is executed when a V blank signal that indicates that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU 1511a can be received is input from the sound source built-in VDP 1512a. The value 1 is set in the part V blank signal interrupt processing. In step S1006, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is initialized once by setting the value 0 to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG. The peripheral control MPU 1511a sets a value of 0 to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG, and then outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e so that the peripheral control MPU 1511a is not reset. Yes.

  Subsequent to step S1006, the effect control program determines whether or not the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1 (step S1008). When the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is not 1 (value 0), the process returns to step S1008 and it is repeatedly determined whether or not the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1. By repeating such a determination, the process waits until the peripheral control unit steady process is executed. The peripheral control MPU 1511a determines whether or not the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1, and then outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e to reset the peripheral control MPU 1511a. It is made so that it won't be applied.

  When the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1 in step S1008, that is, when the peripheral control unit steady process is executed, a value 1 is first set to the steady process flag SP-FLG (step S1009). The steady processing flag SP-FLG is set to a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed, and to a value of 0 when the peripheral control unit steady processing is completed.

  Subsequent to step S1009, the effect control program performs 1 ms interrupt timer activation processing (step S1010). In this 1 ms interrupt timer starting process, a 1 ms interrupt timer for executing a later-described peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is started, and the number of times this 1 ms interrupt timer is started and the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed. The value 1 is set in the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN for counting the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN. This 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is updated by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing.

  Subsequent to step S1010, the effect control program performs lamp data output processing (step S1012). In this lamp data output process, the effect control program performs DMA serial continuous transmission to the lamp drive board 4170 shown in FIG. Here, the serial I / O port for the lamp driving board is continuously transmitted by using the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. When the serial I / O port continuous transmission for the lamp driving board is started, the lamp driving board side transmission data storage area 1511caa of the peripheral control RAM 1511c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 73 is shown in FIG. The game board side light emission data SL-DAT for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs of various decorative boards provided in the game board 5 is created by a lamp data creation process described later. Is set.

  The peripheral control CPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 73 designates the transmission of the lamp drive board serial I / O port as the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and stores the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa. The first 1 byte of the game board side light emission data SL-DAT stored at the top address is transferred to the serial I / O port for the lamp driving board via the external bus 1511h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai. Transfer and write to the send buffer register. As a result, the serial I / O port for the lamp driving board transfers the written data in the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and synchronizes with the light emission clock signal SL-CLK on the game board side to 1 byte of the transmission shift register. The data starts to be transmitted bit by bit.

  The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac is triggered by the transmission interrupt request for the lamp drive board serial I / O port (in this embodiment, in the transmission buffer register of the lamp drive board serial I / O port). The written 1-byte data is transferred to the transmission shift register, and the transmission buffer register is empty because the 1-byte data is lost.), The peripheral control CPU core 1511aa is using the bus. If not, the remaining game board side light emission data SL-DAT stored in the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa is byte by byte via the external bus 1511h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai. Transmit serial I / O port for lamp drive board By transferring and writing to the buffer register, the lamp drive board serial I / O port transfers the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and synchronizes with the light emission clock signal SL-CLK on the game board side. Transmission of 1-byte data of the transmission shift register is started bit by bit, and continuous transmission is performed through the serial I / O port for the lamp driving board.

  In the lamp data output process, the effect control program performs a DMA serial continuous transmission process to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 shown in FIG. Also here, the frame I / O port LED serial I / O port continuous transmission is performed using the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac of the peripheral control MPU 1511a. When this frame decoration drive amplifier board LED serial I / O port continuous transmission starts, the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. In 1511cab, door-side light emission data STL-DAT for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals, or gradation lighting signals to a plurality of LEDs on various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 is created by a lamp data creation process described later. Is set.

  The peripheral control CPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a designates transmission of the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED serial I / O port as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and transmits the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area. The first one byte of the door-side light emission data STL-DAT stored at the head address of 1511cab is serialized for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED via the external bus 1511h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai. Transfer and write to the I / O port transmit buffer register. As a result, the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED serial I / O port transfers the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and synchronizes with the door side light emission clock signal STL-CLK. Transmission of 1-byte data is started bit by bit.

  The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac is triggered by this every time a transmission interrupt request for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED serial I / O port is generated (in this embodiment, the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED serial I / O 1 byte data written in the transmission buffer register of the port is transferred to the transmission shift register, and the transmission buffer register runs out of 1 byte data and becomes empty.), Peripheral control CPU core 1511aa When the bus does not use the bus, the remaining door side light emission data STL-DAT stored in the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab is stored byte by byte in the external bus 1511h and the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad. And frame decoration via peripheral bus 1511ai By transferring and writing to the transmission buffer register of the serial amplifier I / O port for the dynamic amplifier board LED, the serial I / O port for frame decoration drive amplifier board LED writes the data of the written transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register. Transfer and start transmitting 1-byte data of the transmission shift register bit by bit in synchronization with the door side light emission clock signal STL-CLK, and perform continuous transmission by the serial I / O port for frame decoration drive amplifier board LED Yes.

  Subsequent to step S1012, the effect control program performs effect operation unit monitoring processing (step S1014). In this effect operation unit monitoring process, the operation button 410 is operated based on detection signals from various detection switches provided in the effect operation unit 400 in the effect operation unit information acquisition process in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process described later. Based on the production operation unit information acquisition storage area 1511cai of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. It is decided as appropriate whether or not to reflect the above.

  Subsequent to step S1014, the effect control program performs display data output processing (step S1016). In this display data output processing, the drawing data for one screen (one frame) generated on the built-in VRAM of the sound source built-in VDP 1512a in the display data creation processing described later is transmitted from the channels CH1 and 2 shown in FIG. Output to the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. Thereby, various screens are drawn on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. In the display data output process, when the drawing exceeding the drawing capability of the sound source built-in VDP 1512a is performed, the generated drawing data for one screen (one frame) is used for the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect. The output to the display device 460 is canceled. This can prevent the processing time from being delayed, but although a so-called frame drop occurs, the various decorative boards provided in the game board 5 shown in FIG. 8 by the ramp data output processing in step S1012. Various effects from the lower speaker 921 shown in FIG. 5 and the upper speaker 573 shown in FIG. 2 by a plurality of LEDs and a plurality of LEDs on various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 and a sound data output process described later. It is a mechanism that can give priority to the synchronization with the production of music and sound effects tailored to.

  Subsequent to step S1016, the effect control program performs sound data output processing (step S1018). In this sound data output process, the effect control program outputs to the audio data transmission IC 1512c as audio data obtained by serializing sound data such as music and sound effects set in the sound source built-in VDP 1512a in the sound data creation process described later, In addition to music and sound effects, sound data of notification sound and notification sound is output to the audio data transmission IC 1512c as serialized audio data. When the audio data transmission IC 1512c receives the serialized audio data from the sound source built-in VDP 1512a, the audio data transmission IC 1512c is directed toward the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 as differential serial data using the right audio data as a plus signal and a minus signal. At the same time, the left audio data is transmitted toward the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 as differential serial data having a plus signal and a minus signal. As a result, in addition to the music, sound effects and the like adapted to various effects from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, the notification sound and the notification sound are also reproduced in stereo.

  Subsequent to step S1018, the effect control program performs scheduler update processing (step S1020). In this scheduler update process, the effect control program updates various schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. For example, in the scheduler update process, of the screen data arranged in time series constituting the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae, what number screen data from the top screen data is stored in the sound source built-in VDP 1512a. The pointer is updated to indicate whether to output.

  Further, in the scheduler update process, among the light emission data arranged in time series constituting the light emission mode generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae, the number of the light emission data from the first light emission data is emitted from various LEDs. The pointer is updated to indicate whether the mode is set.

  In the scheduler update process, sound data such as music and sound effects, sound data of notification sounds and notification sounds, which are arranged in time series constituting the schedule data for sound generation set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae, are instructed. Of the sound command data, the pointer is updated in order to indicate what number of sound command data from the head sound command data is to be output to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a.

  In the scheduler update process, from the drive data of the electric drive source such as a motor or a solenoid arranged in time series constituting the electric drive source schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae, The pointer is updated to indicate what number of drive data is to be output. The drive data of the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in time series constituting the electric drive source schedule data is a peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt which is repeatedly executed every time a 1 ms timer interrupt described later occurs. It is updated by the motor and solenoid drive process in the process. In the motor and solenoid drive processing that is repeatedly executed each time this 1 ms timer interrupt occurs, an electric drive source such as a motor or solenoid is driven according to the drive data indicated by the pointer, and the next drive specified in time series is performed. The pointer is updated to the data, and the pointer is updated every time its own processing is executed. In other words, since the drive data indicated by the pointer updated in the motor and solenoid drive processing is forcibly updated in the scheduler update processing, the pointer is originally instructed for some reason in the motor and solenoid drive processing. Even if other drive data is instructed from the drive data that is supposed to be performed, it is forcibly updated to instruct the drive data that should be instructed originally in the scheduler update processing.

  Subsequent to step S1020, the effect control program performs a received command analysis process (step S1022). In this received command analysis process, the effect control program receives information transmitted from the effect display drive board 4450 via the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and various kinds of information transmitted from the main control board 1310. The command is analyzed for various commands received in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing (command receiving means) described later (command analyzing means). The production control program is based on information transmitted from the production display drive board 4450 via the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 and the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, screen generation schedule data, light emission mode generation schedule data, sound Generation schedule data, electrical drive source schedule data, and the like are extracted from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c and set in the schedule data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c in 1511cae. To do. In addition, in the effect control program, the command from the main control board 1310 received in the peripheral control unit command interrupt process is, for example, a start opening prize command for instructing the start of a start opening prize effect, the number of ordinary symbols held A normal symbol storage command for identifying (0 to 4), a symbol synchronization effect start command for instructing the start of a symbol synchronization effect, a symbol storage command that is output when the number of start suspension changes, A winning prize 1 count display command output every time a game ball is received (a winning prize count command), or a frame status 1 command (second error occurrence command) indicating a full state shown in FIG. It is analyzed whether or not it is a full error occurrence command (command analysis means), and it is recognized which gaming state is currently in effect. In addition, after the predetermined time has elapsed since the power was turned on, the effect control program is configured such that a command received by the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process is a body frame opening command, a body frame closing command, a door opening command, or a door frame closing. Analyzes whether it is a command or not. Various commands from the main control board 1310 are received by the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process and stored in the reception command storage area 1511cac of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. The effect control program analyzes various commands stored in the received command storage area 1511cac. The various commands shown in FIG. 89 are classified into various commands classified as related to special figure 1 synchronized production, various commands classified as related to special figure 2 synchronized production, various commands classified as related to jackpot, and power-on. , Various commands categorized as related to ordinary drawing effect, various commands categorized as related to ordinary electric role effect, various commands categorized as notification display shown in FIG. 90, door frame opening command described above , Door frame closing command, body frame opening command and body frame closing command, error release navigation command (corresponding to the second error canceling command) and frame state 1 command (corresponding to the second error occurrence command) There are various commands that are classified, various commands that are classified as related to the test, and various commands that are classified into others.

  Subsequent to step S1022, the effect control program performs warning processing (step S1024). In this warning process, when the command analyzed by the effect control program in the received command analysis process in step S1022 as described above includes various commands classified into the notification display shown in FIG. The screen generation schedule data, the light emission mode generation schedule data, the sound generation schedule data, the electrical drive source schedule data, and the like set in the abnormality display mode for executing the abnormality notification are stored in the peripheral control unit 1511. The data is extracted from the various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the peripheral control RAM 1511c and set in the schedule data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c in 1511cae. In the warning process, when multiple abnormalities occur simultaneously, the abnormality notification is performed in the order of the priority registered in advance, and the abnormality is automatically resolved and the remaining abnormality notifications are automatically transitioned to. It is supposed to be. This allows you to monitor multiple anomalies at the same time without losing the information that an anomaly has occurred due to the occurrence of another anomaly after the occurrence of the anomaly but before resolving the anomaly Can do.

  Furthermore, in this warning process, after a predetermined time has elapsed since the power was turned on, the command analyzed by the effect control program in the received command analysis process (step S1022) described above is classified into the status display shown in FIG. Various commands, for example, an error cancellation navigation command (second error cancellation command), by controlling the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 in a mode different from the normal performance mode accompanying the performance operation, for example, on the game board side Visually warn the outside using an effect display device 1600 (effect device), door frame side effect display device 460 (effect device), and a lamp (effect device), or audibly warn the outside using a speaker ( Error notification means). In this way, when a malicious player attempts to input an error canceling navigation command to the main control board 1310 by operating the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 despite being in a gaming state. Since the pachinko machine 1 is configured to warn the outside, fraudulent acts on the main control board 1310 that may affect the progress of the game are suppressed.

  Next, following step S1024 described above, the effect control program performs an RCT acquisition information update process (step S1026). In this RTC acquisition information update process, the effect control program stores the current time information acquisition process in step S1002 and stores it in the calendar information storage unit set in the RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. The updated calendar information and the time information stored in the time information storage unit are updated. By this RCT acquisition information update process, the hour, minute and second as time information stored in the time information storage unit are updated, and the year and month as calendar information stored in the calendar information storage unit based on the updated time information. The day is updated.

  Subsequent to step S1026, the effect control program performs lamp data creation processing (step S1028). In this lamp data creation process, the effect control program updates the pointer in the scheduler update process in step S1020, and the pointer indicates the light emission data arranged in time series constituting the light emission mode generation schedule data. Based on the light emission data, the game board side light emission data SL- for outputting a lighting signal, a flashing signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs of various decorative boards provided in the game board 5 shown in FIG. The DAT is created by extracting from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and set in the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. And various decorations on the door frame 3 The door side light emission data STL-DAT for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs on the board, and various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the peripheral control RAM 1511c of the peripheral control unit 1511. And is set in the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG.

  Subsequent to step S1028, the effect control program performs display data creation processing (step S1030). In this display data creation process, the presentation control program updates the pointer in the scheduler update process in step S1020, and the screen data indicated by the pointer among the screen data arranged in time series constituting the schedule data for screen generation. Are extracted from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c and output to the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source. When the screen data is input from the peripheral control MPU 1511a, the sound source built-in VDP 1512a extracts character data from the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b based on the input screen data to create sprite data, thereby producing a game board side effect display device. 1600 and drawing data for one screen (one frame) displayed on the door frame side effect display device 460 are generated on the built-in VRAM.

  Subsequent to step S1030, the effect control program performs sound data creation processing (step S1032). In the sound data creation process, the effect control program updates the pointer in the scheduler update process in step S1020, and the pointer indicates the sound command data arranged in time series constituting the sound generation schedule data. The sound command data is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c and output to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a. When the sound command data is input from the peripheral control MPU 1511a, the sound source built-in VDP 1512a extracts sound data such as music and sound effects stored in the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b and controls the sound source by controlling the sound source. In addition to incorporating sound data such as music and sound effects according to the track number defined in the data, an output channel to be used is set according to the output channel number.

  In the sound data creation process, every time this sound data creation process is performed (that is, every time the peripheral control unit steady process is performed), the peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak shown in FIG. The voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotational position of the knob portion 1510a is converted into a value of 1024 steps from 0 to 1023. In this embodiment, the value of 1024 steps is divided into seven and managed as substrate volumes 0 to 6, and the sound volume is set to the substrate volume 0, the maximum volume is set to the substrate volume 6, and the substrate volume 0 to the substrate volume are set. Each volume is set to increase toward the volume 6. Audio data is transmitted as audio data obtained by serializing the sound data in the sound data output process of step S1018 described above by controlling the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 so that the volume set to the substrate volume 0-6 is obtained. By outputting to the IC 1512c, music and sound effects can flow from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573.

  In addition, the notification sound and the notification sound flow without depending on the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob part, and the sound volume of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 is built in the program from the mute level to the maximum volume. The VDP 1512a can be controlled and adjusted. The volume adjusted by this program can be smoothly changed from the mute to the maximum volume, unlike the substrate volume divided into the above seven stages. For example, even if a hall clerk or the like rotates the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 1510a to set the volume low, the production sound such as music and sound effects flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 is small. However, when a malfunction occurs in the pachinko machine 1 or when the player is cheating, a notification sound set to a large volume (in this embodiment, the maximum volume) can be played. Therefore, even if the volume of the production sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the hall clerk or the like from becoming difficult to notice the occurrence of a malfunction or the player's cheating due to the notification sound. Also, based on the current board volume set by volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob part, the volume of the advertisement sound is reduced so as not to interfere with the music and sound effects. In addition to music and sound effects, the screen displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is rendered more powerful, which is advantageous for the player. It is also possible to notify that there is a high possibility that the game state will be entered.

  Subsequent to step S1032, the effect control program performs backup processing (step S1034). In this backup processing, the effect control program stores the contents stored in the peripheral control RAM 1511c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 73 into the backup first area 1511cb and the backup second area 1511cc. The contents are copied and backed up, and the contents stored in the peripheral control SRAM 1511d attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a are copied and backed up in the backup first area 1511db and the backup second area 1511dc, respectively.

  Specifically, in the backup process, the peripheral control RAM 1511c is backed up every frame (1 frame) in the backup target work area 1511ca shown in FIG. 73, that is, every time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed. Included in Bank 0 (1fr), lamp driving board side transmission data storage area 1511caa, frame decoration driving amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab, reception command storage area 1511cac, RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad, and The production information (1fr), which is the content stored in the schedule data storage area 1511cae, is used as production backup information (1fr), and Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1f) of the backup first area 1511cb. Peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac in) is copied at high speed, and backup Bank3 second area 1511cc (1fr) and peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac to Bank4 (1FR) is copied at high speed.

  The high-speed copy of the contents stored in Bank 0 (1fr) by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac will be briefly described. The peripheral control MPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. The content stored in Bank0 (1fr) is designated to be copied to Bank1 (1fr) in the backup first area 1511cb, and the content stored in the first address of Bank0 (1fr) is changed to the end address of Bank0 (1fr) The stored contents are all copied in sequence starting from the first address of Bank1 (1fr) in the backup first area 1511cb up to a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte), and the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa performs peripheral control D. The content stored in Bank0 (1fr) is designated as a request factor of the A controller 1511ac, the copy to Bank2 (1fr) in the backup first area 1511cb is designated, and the content stored in the first address of Bank0 (1fr) is used as Bank0 The contents stored at the end address of (1fr) are all copied in order from the start address of Bank2 (1fr) in the backup first area 1511cb in succession by a predetermined number of bytes (for example, 1 byte).

  Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa designates the content stored in Bank0 (1fr) as the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, specifies the copy to the bank3 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc, and Bank0 (1fr) ) To the content stored at the end address of Bank0 (1fr) to the content stored at the end address of Bank0 (1fr), the first address of Bank3 (1fr) in the backup second area 1511cc continuously by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) The peripheral control MPU core 1511aa specifies the contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) as the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and specifies that the backup second area 1511cc is copied to Bank4 (1fr). Shi From the content stored at the beginning address of Bank0 (1fr) to the content stored at the end address of Bank0 (1fr), bank 4 (1fr) in the backup second area 1511cc is continuously provided by a predetermined number of bytes (for example, 1 byte). Copy everything starting from the first address.

  In the backup process, the peripheral control SRAM 1511d is a backup target every frame (1 frame) in the backup target work area 1511da shown in FIG. 73, that is, every time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed. The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac operates at high speed in the bank 1 (SRAM) and the bank 2 (SRAM) of the backup first area 1511db using the production information (SRAM) stored in the Bank 0 (SRAM) as production backup information (SRAM). The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac copies the data to the bank 3 (SRAM) and the bank 4 (SRAM) of the backup second area 1511dc at high speed.

  The high-speed copy of the contents stored in Bank 0 (SRAM) by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac will be briefly described. The peripheral control MPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. The content stored in Bank0 (SRAM) is designated to be copied to Bank1 (SRAM) in the backup first area 1511db, and the content stored at the beginning address of Bank0 (SRAM) is changed to the end address of Bank0 (SRAM). The stored contents are all copied in sequence starting from the first address of Bank 1 (SRAM) in the backup first area 1511db in order of predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte), and the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa The content stored in Bank0 (SRAM) as the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, the copy to the Bank2 (SRAM) of the backup first area 1511db is designated, and the content stored in the first address of Bank0 (SRAM) To the contents stored at the end address of Bank 0 (SRAM) are copied in order from the start address of Bank 2 (SRAM) in the backup first area 1511 db in succession by a predetermined number of bytes (for example, 1 byte).

  Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa designates the content stored in the Bank 0 (SRAM) as the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, specifies the copy of the backup second area 1511dc to the Bank 3 (SRAM), and Bank 0 (SRAM). ) To the content stored at the end address of Bank 0 (SRAM) to the content stored at the end address of Bank 0 (SRAM) continuously by a predetermined number of bytes (for example, 1 byte) at the start address of Bank 3 (SRAM) in backup second area 1511 dc The peripheral control MPU core 1511aa copies the contents stored in the Bank 0 (SRAM) as the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac to the Bank 4 (SRAM) of the backup second area 1511dc. P2 is designated, and the backup second area 1511dc is continuously written by predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte) from the content stored at the start address of Bank0 (SRAM) to the content stored at the end address of Bank0 (SRAM). Are all copied in order from the top address of Bank 4 (SRAM).

  Subsequent to step S1034, WDT clear processing is performed (step S1036). In this WDT clear process, a clear signal is output to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e so that the peripheral control MPU 1511a is not reset.

  Subsequent to step S1036, the effect control program sets the value 0 in the steady processing flag SP-FLG as completion of execution of the peripheral control unit steady processing (step S1038), returns to step S1006 again, and V blank signal detection flag VB -FLG is initialized by setting value 0, and the determination in step S1008 is repeated until value 1 is set in V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing described later. That is, in step S1008, the process waits until a value 1 is set in the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG. If it is determined in step S1008 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1, the process proceeds from step S1009 to step S1009. The process of S1038 is performed, and the process returns to step S1006 again. As described above, when it is determined in step S1008 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1, processing in steps S1009 to S1038 is performed. The processing in steps S1009 to S1038 is referred to as “peripheral control unit steady processing”.

  The peripheral control unit steady process starts from the fact that the effect control program first sets the value 1 in the steady processing flag SP-FLG, assuming that the peripheral control unit steady process is being executed in step S1009, and 1 ms in step S1010. An interrupt timer activation process is performed, and each process of steps S1012, S1014,..., And step S1036 is performed. Set to to complete. The peripheral control unit steady process is executed when the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1 in step S1008. As described above, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is executed when the V blank signal indicating that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU 1511a can be received is input from the sound source built-in VDP 1512a. The value 1 is set in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing described later. In the present embodiment, as described above, the frame frequency (number of screen updates per second) of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is set to approximately 30 fps per second as described above. The interval at which the blank signal is input is approximately 33.3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 30 fps). That is, the peripheral control unit steady process is repeatedly executed about every 33.3 ms.

[16-1-2. Peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing]
Next, the V blank signal indicating that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 can be received as shown in FIG. 72 is input from the sound source built-in VDP 1512a of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512. The peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing executed with the above as an opportunity will be described. When the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 determines whether the steady processing flag SP-FLG is 0 as shown in FIG. S1045). As described above, the steady processing flag SP-FLG has a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady processing in steps S1009 to S1038 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. It is set to a value of 0 when execution of the process is completed.

  If the steady process flag SP-FLG is not 0 (value 1) in step S1045, that is, if the peripheral control unit steady process is being executed, this routine is terminated. On the other hand, when the steady processing flag SP-FLG is 0 in step S1045, that is, when the execution of the peripheral control unit steady processing is completed, the value 1 is set to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG (step S1050). This routine ends. As described above, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute the peripheral control unit steady process. When the part steady process is not executed, the value is set to 0.

  In this embodiment, it is determined in step S1045 whether or not the steady processing flag SP-FLG is 0, that is, whether or not the peripheral control unit steady processing has been completed, and the peripheral control unit steady processing has been completed. Sometimes the value 1 is set to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG in step S1050. This is because the V blank signal is input and the V blank signal is input when the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed. When the value 1 is set to the signal detection flag VB-FLG, it is assumed that the peripheral control unit steady process is executed in step S1008 in the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. Since the peripheral control unit steady processing is started from the beginning by forcibly canceling on the way, the peripheral control unit in FIG. 95 is turned on for the purpose of preventing this. The peripheral control unit V blank signal, which is this routine, indicates that the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed by setting the value 1 to the steady processing flag SP-FLG in step S1009 in the processing (peripheral control unit steady processing). In addition to notifying the interrupt processing, the peripheral control portion steady processing is completed by setting the steady processing flag SP-FLG to 0 in step S1038 in the peripheral control portion power-on processing (peripheral control portion steady processing) of FIG. This is communicated to the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt process, which is this routine, so that the steady processing flag SP-FLG is 0 in the determination of step S1045 in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt process, which is this routine. It is determined whether or not there is, that is, whether or not the peripheral control unit steady process has been executed. In other words, this is a measure for the case where the peripheral control unit steady-state processing cannot be completed before the next V blank signal is input and the next V blank signal is input, so-called processing failure.

  As a result, in the current peripheral control unit steady process, if the process cannot be completed in about 33.3 ms and the process is lost, the next determination is made in step S1008 in the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. It is in a state of waiting until the V blank signal is input. That is, the time required to execute the current peripheral control unit steady process that has been dropped is about 66.6 ms. Normally, a peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is repeatedly executed every time a 1 ms interrupt timer is generated by starting the 1 ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit power-on process (peripheral control unit steady process) in FIG. Is executed only 32 times for one peripheral control unit steady process. However, if there is a current peripheral control unit steady process that has been dropped as described above, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is not performed 64 times. No, it is executed only 32 times. In other words, even if the peripheral control unit steady process has failed, the consistency between the presentation progress state by the peripheral control unit steady process and the presentation progress state by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, which is timer interrupt control, is consistent. It is designed not to collapse. Therefore, even if the peripheral control unit steady process is lost, it is possible to reliably match the progress state of the performance.

[16-1-3. Peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process that is repeatedly executed every time the 1 ms interrupt timer is generated by starting the 1 ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. 95 will be described. . When the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 72 determines whether the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is smaller than 33 times as shown in FIG. Is determined (step S1100). As described above, this 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is determined by this routine when the 1 ms interrupt timer is activated in the 1 ms interrupt timer activation process in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. It is a counter that counts the number of times a peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed. In the present embodiment, as described above, the frame frequency (number of screen updates per second) of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is set to approximately 30 fps per second as described above. The interval at which the blank signal is input is approximately 33.3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 30 fps). That is, since the peripheral control unit steady process is repeatedly executed about every 33.3 ms, after starting the 1 ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process, the next peripheral control unit steady process is performed. The peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed only 32 times before. Specifically, when the 1 ms interrupt timer is started in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process, the first 1 ms timer interrupt is generated first, then the second,... Will occur.

  When the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is not smaller than 33 times in step S1100, that is, when the 33 ms 1 ms timer interrupt is generated and the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is started, this routine is ended as it is. In the present embodiment, when the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt occurs accidentally before the next generation of the V blank signal, in the present embodiment, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is the peripheral control unit V as the priority of interrupt processing. Although set higher than the blank interrupt process, the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process by the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. In other words, in the present embodiment, since the V blank signal dominates the entire system of the peripheral control board 1510, if the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt occurs accidentally before the next V blank signal generation, In order to execute the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt process, the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process by the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. Then, after the 1 ms interrupt timer is started again in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process due to the generation of the V blank signal, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is newly started by the first 1 ms timer interrupt generation. ing.

  On the other hand, when the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is smaller than 33 in step S1100, the value 1 is added to the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN (increment, step S1102). By adding 1 to the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN, the 1 ms interrupt timer is activated in the 1 ms interrupt timer activation process in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on process in FIG. The number of times that the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, which is this routine, is executed is increased by one.

  Subsequent to step S1102, motor and solenoid drive processing is performed (step S1104). In this motor and solenoid drive processing, the electric drive source schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c and the peripheral control RAM 1511c externally arranged as shown in FIG. 73 are arranged in time series. 72. According to the drive data indicated by the pointer among the drive data of the electric drive sources such as the motor and the solenoid, the electric drive sources such as the motor and the solenoid of the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 and the motor drive board 4180 shown in FIG. And the pointer is updated to the next drive data defined in time series, and the pointer is updated every time the motor and solenoid drive processing is executed.

  Specifically, in the motor and solenoid drive processing, DMA serial continuous transmission processing to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 is performed. Here, the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I / O port continuous transmission is performed using the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. When this frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I / O port continuous transmission is started, first, the electrical drive source schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the peripheral control RAM 1511c to be externally attached. To output a drive signal to the dial drive motor 414 of the rendering operation unit 400 based on the drive data indicated by the pointer among the drive data of the electric drive sources such as the motors and solenoids arranged in time series. The door side motor drive data STM-DAT is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and the frame decoration drive of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. Ann Set in the transmission data storage area 1511caf substrate side motor. The peripheral control CPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a designates transmission of the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I / O port as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and stores frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data. Frame decoration drive amplifier board motor via the external bus 1511h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai with the first byte of the door side motor drive data STM-DAT stored at the head address of the area 1511caf Transfer and write to the transmission buffer register of the serial I / O port. As a result, the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I / O port transfers the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and synchronizes with the door side motor drive clock signal STM-CLK. The 1-byte data starts to be transmitted bit by bit.

  The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac is triggered by a transmission interrupt request for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I / O port (in this embodiment, the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I / O 1 byte data written in the transmission buffer register of the port is transferred to the transmission shift register, and the transmission buffer register runs out of 1 byte data and becomes empty.), Peripheral control CPU core 1511aa When the bus does not use the bus, the remaining door side motor drive data STM-DAT stored in the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf is byte by byte, the external bus 1511h, and the peripheral control bus controller. 1511ad and via the peripheral bus 1511ai By transferring and writing to the transmission buffer register of the decorative drive amplifier board motor serial I / O port, the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I / O port transmits the data of the written transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register. 1 byte data of the transmission shift register is started bit by bit in synchronization with the door side motor drive clock signal STM-CLK, and the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I / O port continuously transmits. Is going.

  In the motor and solenoid drive processing, DMA serial continuous transmission processing to the motor drive board 4180 is performed. Also here, the serial I / O port for motor drive board is continuously transmitted using the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. When the serial I / O port continuous transmission for the motor drive board is started, first, when the electrical drive source schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the peripheral control RAM 1511c is externally configured. A motor for moving various movable bodies provided in the game board 5 shown in FIG. 8 based on drive data indicated by a pointer among drive data of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in series. The game board side motor drive data SM-DAT for outputting drive signals to the solenoid and the solenoid is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and created. Peripheral control RAM 151 shown in 73 Set to the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag of c. Then, the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a designates transmission of the serial I / O port for the motor drive board as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac and stores it in the head address of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag. The first 1 byte of the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT thus received is transmitted to the serial I / O port for the motor drive board via the external bus 1511h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai. Transfer and write to register. As a result, the serial I / O port for the motor drive board transfers the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and 1 of the transmission shift register is synchronized with the game board side motor drive clock signal SM-CLK. Start transmitting byte data bit by bit.

  The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac is triggered by the transmission interrupt request for the motor drive board serial I / O port (in this embodiment, the transmission buffer register of the motor drive board serial I / O port). The written 1-byte data is transferred to the transmission shift register, and the transmission buffer register is empty because the 1-byte data is lost.), The peripheral control CPU core 1511aa is using the bus. If not, the remaining game board side motor drive data SM-DAT stored in the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag is byte by byte via the external bus 1511h, peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and peripheral bus 1511ai. , Serial I / O port for motor drive board By transferring and writing to the transmission buffer register, the motor drive board serial I / O port transfers the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and the game board side motor drive clock signal SM-CLK and Synchronously, transmission of 1-byte data of the transmission shift register is started bit by bit, and continuous transmission is performed by the serial I / O port for the motor drive board.

  Following step S1104, movable body information acquisition processing is performed (step S1106). In this movable body information acquisition process, it is determined whether or not detection signals from various detection switches provided on the game board 5 are input, thereby detecting history information of detection signals from the various detection switches (for example, original position history information). , Movable position history information, etc.) are created and set in the movable body information acquisition storage area 1511cah of the peripheral control MP1511a and the peripheral control RAM 1511c externally attached as shown in FIG. From the history information of the detection signals from the various detection switches set in the movable body information acquisition storage area 1511cah, the original positions and the movable positions of the various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 can be acquired.

  Subsequent to step S1106, an effect operation unit information acquisition process is performed (step S1108). In the effect operation unit information acquisition process, it is determined whether or not detection signals from various detection switches provided in the effect operation unit 400 are input, thereby detecting history information (for example, operation signals) from the various detection switches. Operation history information of the button 410, etc.) is created and set in the effect operation unit information acquisition storage area 1511cai of the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the peripheral control RAM 1511c externally shown in FIG. The presence / absence of operation of the operation button 410 can be acquired from history information of detection signals from various detection switches set in the effect operation unit information acquisition storage area 1511cai.

  Following step S1108, drawing state information acquisition processing is performed (step S1110). In this drawing state information acquisition process, history information of the LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450 shown in FIG. 87 is created, and the peripheral information shown in FIG. The control MPU 1511a and the externally attached peripheral control RAM 1511c are set in the drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511cak. As described above, the LOCKN signal indicates that the drawing data received from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d included in the peripheral control board 1510 by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 included in the effect display drive board 4450 is abnormal data. If it is determined, it is a signal that is output in order to convey that fact, specifically, a door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510, and a door frame side effect receiver IC ICDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450, , That is, a signal output to request transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirming (recovering) the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. The door frame side effect display device is obtained by acquiring the frequency of troubles and the state of occurrence of troubles between the connection between the peripheral control board 1510 and the effect display driving board 4450 from the history information of the LOCKN signal set in the drawing state information obtaining storage area 1511cak. The drawing state of 460 can be acquired.

  Subsequent to step S1110, backup processing is performed (step S1112), and this routine is terminated. In this backup processing, the contents stored in the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the externally attached peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73 are copied to the backup first area 1511cb and the backup second area 1511cc, respectively. At the same time, the contents stored in the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the peripheral control SRAM 1511d provided externally are copied to the backup first area 1511db and the backup second area 1511dc for backup.

  Specifically, in the backup process, the peripheral control RAM 1511c executes the 1ms timer interrupt process of the peripheral control unit, which is this routine, whenever the 1ms interrupt timer is generated in the backup target work area 1511ca shown in FIG. Each time, the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511 caf, the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511 cag, and the movable body information acquisition storage area 1511 cah included in Bank 0 (1 ms) to be backed up. Further, the production information (1 ms), which is the content stored in the production operation unit information acquisition storage area 1511cai, is used as production backup information (1 ms), and Bank 1 (1 ms) and Bank 2 of the backup first area 1511cb. Peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac to 1 ms) is copied at high speed, and backup Bank3 second area 1511cc (1ms) and peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac to Bank4 (1 ms) is copied at high speed.

  The high-speed copy of the contents stored in Bank 0 (1 ms) by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac will be briefly described. The peripheral control MPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. The content stored in Bank0 (1 ms) is designated to be copied to Bank1 (1 ms) in backup first area 1511 cb, and the content stored at the beginning address of Bank0 (1 ms) is changed to the end address of Bank0 (1 ms) The stored contents are all copied in sequence starting from the first address of Bank 1 (1 ms) in the backup first area 1511cb in succession to a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte), and the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa performs peripheral control D. The content stored in Bank 0 (1 ms) as the request factor of the A controller 1511ac is designated to be copied to Bank 2 (1 ms) in the backup first area 1511cb, and the content stored in the first address of Bank 0 (1 ms) is used as Bank 0 The contents stored at the end address of (1 ms) are all copied in order from the start address of Bank 2 (1 ms) of the backup first area 1511cb in succession by predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte).

  Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa designates the content stored in Bank0 (1 ms) as the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, specifies the copy of the backup second area 1511cc to Bank3 (1 ms), and Bank0 (1 ms) ) To the content stored at the end address of Bank 0 (1 ms) from the content stored at the top address of) in the backup second area 1511 cc, Bank 3 (1 ms) The peripheral control MPU core 1511aa specifies the contents stored in Bank0 (1 ms) as the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and specifies that the backup second area 1511cc is copied to Bank4 (1 ms). Shi From the content stored at the beginning address of Bank0 (1 ms) to the content stored at the end address of Bank0 (1 ms), bank 4 (1 ms) in the backup second area 1511 cc is continuously provided by predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte). Copy everything starting from the first address.

  As described above, in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interruption process, various processes related to the effects in steps S1104 to S1108 are executed as the progress of the effects within a period of 1 ms. On the other hand, in the peripheral control unit steady-state processing in the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. 95, various processes related to the effects in steps S1012 to S1032 described above are executed as the progress of the effects within a period of about 33.3 ms. doing. In the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, when the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is not smaller than the value 33 in step S1100, that is, when the first 1 ms timer interrupt is generated and the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is started. Since this routine is ended as it is, even if the occurrence of the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to happen before the next V blank signal, the peripheral control unit by this 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt. The start of the 1 ms timer interrupt process is forcibly canceled, and after the 1 ms interrupt timer is started again in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process due to the generation of the V blank signal, the peripheral control is newly performed by the first 1 ms timer interrupt. 1ms timer division It is adapted to start the actual processing. That is, the consistency between the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit steady process and the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process which is the timer interrupt control is not lost. Therefore, it is possible to reliably match the progress of the production.

  In addition, as described above, the interval at which the V blank signal is output varies slightly depending on the liquid crystal sizes of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460, and the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the sound source built-in VDP 1512a Even in the manufacturing lot of the mounted peripheral control board 1510, the interval at which the V blank signal is output may vary somewhat. In this embodiment, since the V blank signal is a signal that dominates the entire system of the peripheral control board 1510, if the occurrence of the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next V blank signal, the peripheral control is performed. In order to execute the part V blank interrupt process, the start of the peripheral control part 1 ms timer interrupt process by the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. That is, in this embodiment, even if the interval at which the V blank signal is output changes slightly, the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process by the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. A time shift due to a slight change in the interval at which the V blank signal is output can be absorbed.

[16-1-4. Peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing for receiving various commands from the main control board 1310 will be described. The peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 72 starts main transmission of main peripheral serial data in the peripheral control MPU 1511a when various commands from the main control board 1310 are started to be transmitted as serial data. One byte (8 bits) of information is taken into the reception buffer at the board serial I / O port, and when this fetching is completed, an interrupt is generated as a trigger, and peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing is performed. The main circumference serial data is composed of 3 bytes per packet, the status is assigned as the first byte, the mode is assigned as the second byte, and the status and mode are regarded as numerical values as the third byte and the total The sum value that is calculated is assigned.

  When the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 determines whether or not the 1-byte reception period timer has timed out as shown in FIG. 98 (step S1200). The 1-byte reception period timer sets a period during which 1-byte (8-bit) information can be received from the main peripheral serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310.

  When the 1-byte reception period timer has not timed out in step S1200, that is, within the period in which 1-byte (8-bit) information can be received from the main peripheral serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310, the peripheral The 1-byte information received from the reception buffer of the main I / O port for main control board built in the control MPU 1511a is fetched (step S1202), and a value 1 is added to the reception counter SRXC (increment, step S1204). This reception counter SRXC is a counter indicating the number of times the data has been extracted from the reception buffer. When the status, which is the first byte of the main peripheral serial data, is extracted from the reception buffer, the value is 1, and the mode is the second byte of the main peripheral serial data. The value is 2 when extracted from the reception buffer, and the value is 3 when the sum value, which is the third byte of the main serial data, is extracted from the reception buffer. The reception counter SRXC is set to an initial value 0 when the power is turned on.

  Subsequent to step S1204, it is determined whether or not the reception counter SRXC has a value of 3, that is, whether or not the sum value that is the third byte of the main peripheral serial data has been extracted from the reception buffer (step S1206). In this determination, the status that is the first byte of the main peripheral serial data, the mode that is the second byte of the main peripheral serial data, and the sum value that is the third byte of the main peripheral serial data are sequentially received from the reception buffer. It is determined whether or not it has been taken out.

  When the reception counter SRXC is not the value 3 in step S1206, that is, following the status that is the first byte of the main peripheral serial data, the mode that is still the second byte of the main peripheral serial data, and the third byte of the main peripheral serial data When the sum values are not sequentially taken out from the reception buffer, the 1-byte reception period timer is set (step S1208), and this routine is terminated. By setting the 1-byte reception period timer in step S1208, the mode that is the second byte of the main circumference serial data or the period during which the sum value that is the third byte of the main circumference serial data can be received is set.

  On the other hand, when the reception counter SRXC has a value of 3 in step S1206, that is, following the status that is the first byte of the main peripheral serial data, the mode that is the second byte of the main peripheral serial data, and the main peripheral serial data 3 When the sum value which is the byte is taken out from the reception buffer in order, the initial value 0 is set in the reception counter SRXC (step S1210), and the sum value is calculated (step S1212). In this calculation, the status that is the first byte of the main circumference serial data and the mode that is the second byte of the main circumference serial data, which have already been extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202, are regarded as numerical values and the sum (sum value). ) Is calculated.

  Subsequent to step S1212, it is determined whether or not the sum value, which is the third byte of the main serial data already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202, matches the sum value calculated in step S1212 (step S1212). S1214). The sum value which is the third byte of the main circumference serial data already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202 is the sum value allocated as the third byte of the main circumference serial data from the main circumference serial data from the main control board 1310. Therefore, it should match the sum value calculated in step S1212. However, the pachinko machine 1 is supplied with game balls from the pachinko island facility, and when the game balls rub against each other and are charged, electrostatic discharge generates noise, so the pachinko machine 1 is affected by noise. It is in a file environment. Therefore, in this embodiment, the peripheral controller 1511 side regards the status assigned as the first byte of the received main circumference serial data and the mode assigned as the second byte of the main circumference serial data as numerical values. The sum (sum value) is calculated, and the calculated sum value matches the sum value allocated as the third byte of the main circumference serial data among the main circumference serial data from the main control board 1310. It is determined whether or not. As a result, the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines whether or not the main peripheral serial data has been changed to main peripheral serial data different from the normal due to the influence of noise between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510. be able to.

  In step S1214, if the sum value that is the third byte of the main circumference serial data already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202 matches the sum value calculated in step S1212, the received main circumference serial data is received. The status assigned as the first byte and the mode assigned as the second byte of the main peripheral serial data are shown in FIG. 73, and the received command storage area 1511cac in the peripheral control RAM 1511c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a. (Step S1216), and this routine is terminated. The reception command storage area 1511cac is used as a ring buffer, and the status assigned as the first byte of the main circumference serial data and the mode assigned as the second byte of the main circumference serial data are: It is stored in the peripheral ring reception ring buffer of 1511cac. This "peripheral control unit reception ring buffer" is a buffer that is used so that the end and the top of the buffer are connected. Data is sequentially stored from the beginning of the buffer, and when it reaches the end of the buffer, it returns to the beginning. Remember. When the peripheral control MPU 1511a stores the received data in the peripheral control unit reception ring buffer in step S1216, the peripheral control MPU 1511a allocates the received status allocated as the first byte of the main peripheral serial data and the second byte of the main peripheral serial data. Are stored in association with each other, and the sum value allocated as the third byte is discarded.

  On the other hand, when the 1-byte reception period timer has not timed out in step S1200, that is, it exceeds the period in which 1-byte (8-bit) information can be received from the main peripheral serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310. Sometimes, or in step S1214, if the sum value that is the third byte of the main peripheral serial data already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202 and the sum value calculated in step S1212 do not match, this routine is directly executed. finish.

[16-1-5. Peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal executed when the power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. The interrupt process will be described. When the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt process is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 72 first activates a 2 microsecond timer (step S1320), and a power failure notification signal (peripheral power failure notification). It is determined whether or not a signal is input (step S1302). If no power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) is input in this determination, this routine is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, when a power failure warning signal is input in step S1302, it is determined whether or not 2 microseconds have elapsed (step S1304). In this determination, it is determined whether or not the timer started in step S1320 has passed 2 microseconds. If 2 macroseconds have not elapsed in step S1304, the process returns to step S1302, where it is determined whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input. If no power failure warning signal has been input, this routine is terminated. If a signal is input, it is determined again in step S1304 whether 2 microseconds have elapsed. That is, in the determination in step S1304, it is determined whether or not the power failure warning signal is continuously input for 2 microseconds after the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing, which is this routine, is started.

  When the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing, which is this routine, is started in step S1304 and the power failure warning signal is continuously input for 2 microseconds, power saving processing is performed (step S1306). In this power saving process, the backlights of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 are sequentially turned off, the motors and solenoids provided in the game board 5 are turned off, and various LEDs are turned off sequentially. Thus, by suppressing the power consumption of the entire system of the pachinko machine 1, stable operation is ensured only for a period of 20 milliseconds, which is the time during which the peripheral control MPU 1511a can operate even when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off.

  Subsequent to step S1306, command reception standby processing is performed (step S1308). In this command reception standby process, assuming that there are various commands being transmitted by the main control board 1310, at least a period of 17 milliseconds so that the peripheral control MPU 1511a can receive the command being transmitted. It is supposed to wait. When a command is received, the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process described above is started, and the reception command storage area 1511cac (peripheral control unit reception ring buffer of the peripheral control RAM 1511c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. ) Stores the received command.

  Subsequent to step S1308, command backup processing is performed (step S1310). In the backup processing of this command, the contents stored in the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) in the backup target work area 1511ca shown in FIG. 73 are changed to Bank1 (1fr) in the backup first area 1511cb and The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac copies to Bank2 (1fr) at high speed, and the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac copies to Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) in the backup second area 1511cc at high speed.

  The high-speed copy of the content stored in the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac will be briefly described. The peripheral control MPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. Specify the contents stored in the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) as the request factor of the control DMA controller 1511ac, and copy to the received command storage area included in Bank1 (1fr) of the backup first area 1511cb Then, the content stored in the start address of the reception command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) is stored in the end address of the reception command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr). Are copied in order from the start address of the received command storage area included in Bank1 (1fr) of the backup first area 1511cb in succession to a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte), and the peripheral control MPU core The content stored in the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac is transferred to the received command storage area included in Bank2 (1fr) of the backup first area 1511cb. From the content stored in the start address of the reception command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) to the content stored in the end address of the reception command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) by designating copy , A predetermined number of bytes (e.g., 1 byte) all copies sequentially from the start address of the received command storage area included in the Bank2 (1FR) of the backup successively by the first area 1511Cb.

  Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa includes the contents stored in the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac in Bank3 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc. To the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) from the contents stored in the start address of the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr). Are copied in order starting from the start address of the received command storage area included in Bank3 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc in succession to a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) and peripheral control The PU core 1511aa stores the contents stored in the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and the received command storage area included in Bank4 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc. From the content stored at the start address of the reception command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) to the content stored at the end address of the reception command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) All of the data is copied in order starting from the start address of the received command storage area included in Bank 4 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc successively by predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte).

  Subsequent to step S1310, it is determined whether a power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) is input (step S1312). If a power failure warning signal is input in this determination, WDT clear processing is performed (step S1314). In this WDT clear process, the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af shown in FIG. 73 and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e shown in FIG. 72 so that the peripheral control MPU 1511a is not reset. .

  On the other hand, when the power failure warning signal is not input in step S1312, or following step S1314, the process returns to step S1312, and it is determined whether the power failure warning signal is input. That is, it is determined indefinitely whether or not a power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) is input. By continuing the determination infinitely in this way, when the power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) is not input in step S1312, the peripheral control MPU 1511a clears the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e. Cannot be output and the peripheral control MPU 1511a is reset. On the other hand, when a power failure warning signal is input in step S1312, the WDT clear process is performed in step S1314, and the peripheral control MPU 1511a is not reset. If the peripheral control MPU 1511a is reset, the peripheral control unit power-on process shown in FIG. 95 is started again.

  As described above, when the input of the power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) continues in the infinite loop as determined in step S1312, the peripheral control is performed immediately before the power failure state is established by executing the WDT clear process in step S1314. The MPU 1511a is not reset. On the other hand, if the input of the power failure warning signal is not continued in the infinite loop and is canceled in the determination in step S1312, the WDT clear process is not executed, so the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e The output of the clear signal is interrupted. As a result, even if the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing, which is this routine, is started erroneously due to noise or the like and the noise is generated beyond the period of 2 microseconds, the determination of step S1302 is passed. If the input of the power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) is canceled without being continued in the infinite loop as determined in S1312, the peripheral control MPU 1511a is reset because the WDT clear process in step S1314 is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to cope with such noise by automatically resetting and returning.

[16-1-6. LOCKN signal history creation process]
Next, a LOCKN signal history creation process executed as one process of the drawing state information acquisition process in step S1110 in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 97 will be described. In this LOCKN signal history creation process, a history of the LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450 shown in FIG. 87 is created. As described above, the LOCKN signal is generated by the drawing data received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450 from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. When it is determined that the data is abnormal, it is a signal that is output to convey that fact. Specifically, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame provided in the effect display drive board 4450 are provided. This signal is output to request transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirming (recovering) the connection between the side effect receiver ICSDIC0, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver.

  When the LOCKN signal history creating process is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 72 is connected to the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. The LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is read out from the drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511cak (step S1500). This LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is stored in 1 byte (8 bits: most significant bits B7, B6, B5, B4, B3, B2, B1, and least significant bit B0, "B" represents a bit). The history of the LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450 is stored in the drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511cak as LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST. It is remembered.

  Subsequent to step S1500, it is determined whether or not there is a LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450 (step S1502). In this determination, when there is a LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 determines that the drawing data received from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d is abnormal data. A transmission request is made for a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirming (recovering) the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. On the other hand, when there is no LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, the drawing data received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d is not abnormal data (normal). The data) No transmission request is made for a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirming (recovering) the connection between the frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d and the door frame effect receiver IC ICDIC0, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. Is determined.

  If there is a LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 in step S1502, the LOCKN signal detection history information is shifted (step S1504). In this LOCKN signal detection history information shift process, when there is a LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST read in step S1500 is converted into the most significant bits B7 ← B6, B6 ←. B5, B5 ← B4, B4 ← B3, B3 ← B2, B2 ← B1, B1 ← the least significant bit B0 and so on are shifted bit by bit from the least significant bit B0 toward the most significant bit B7.

  When the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is shifted in step S1504, the value 1 is set to the least significant bit B0 of the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST (step S1506), and this routine is terminated.

  On the other hand, if there is no LOCKN signal from the door frame effect receiver ICSDIC0 in step S1502, the LOCKN signal detection history information is shifted (step S1508). In the LOCKN signal detection history information shift process, the same process as the LOCKN signal detection history information shift process in step S1504 is performed. When there is no LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDDIC0, the LOCKN read in step S1500 is performed. The signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST includes the most significant bit B7 ← B6, B6 ← B5, B5 ← B4, B4 ← B3, B3 ← B2, B2 ← B1, B1 ← the least significant bit B0. 1 bit to the most significant bit B7.

  When the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is shifted in step S1508, the value 0 is set to the least significant bit B0 of the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST (step S1510), and this routine is ended.

  In this way, each time this LOCKN signal history creation process is executed, the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is shifted bit by bit from the least significant bit B0 toward the most significant bit B7, and then the least significant bit B0. Since the value 1 or the value 0 is set, the history of the LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 can be created.

[16-1-7. Connection failure judgment process]
Next, a connection failure determination process executed as one process of the warning process in step S1024 in the peripheral control part steady process of the peripheral control part power-on process shown in FIG. 95 will be described. In this connection failure determination processing, the door frame side provided on the peripheral control board 1510 is based on the history of the LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450 shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not there is a problem in the connection between the effect transmitter IC 1512d and the door frame effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver.

  When the connection failure determination process is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 illustrated in FIG. 72 is connected to the peripheral control MPU 1511a illustrated in FIG. The LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is read from the drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511cak (step S1520). In the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST, as described above, the history of the LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450 is stored. As described above, the LOCKN signal is data in which the drawing data received from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d included in the peripheral control board 1510 by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 included in the effect display drive board 4450 is abnormal data. If it is determined, it is a signal that is output to convey that fact, specifically, a door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and a door frame side effect receiver IC ICDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450. , That is, a signal output to request transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirming (recovering) the connection between the transmitter and the receiver.

  Following step S1520, it is determined whether there is a LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 (step S1522). In this determination, it is determined whether or not the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST read in step S1520 matches the connection confirmation determination value. This connection confirmation determination value is stored in advance in the peripheral control ROM 1511b shown in FIG. 72, and is “00001111B (“ B ”represents a bit) in the present embodiment, and is the upper 4 bits B7 to B4. Is the value 0, and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 are the value 1. In the determination in step S1522, it is determined whether or not the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the connection confirmation determination value.

  In step S1522, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST read in step S1520 do not match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the connection confirmation determination value, the peripheral control board 1510 is prepared. It is determined that there is no problem in the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450, that is, in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. Then, this routine is finished as it is.

  On the other hand, in step S1522, if the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST read in step S1520 match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the connection confirmation determination value, the peripheral control board 1510 The door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d included in the display and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 included in the effect display drive board 4450 are connected, that is, there is a problem in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. And 1 is added to the communication check counter CC-CNT (increment, step S1524). Each time this routine is executed, the communication check counter CC-CNT counts up the number of times determined in step S1522 that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is defective. (Counting the cumulative number of times). Note that the communication check counter CC-CNT is reset when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on and is reset with a value of 0. The communication check counter CC-CNT is restored to the value immediately before the moment or power failure.

  Subsequent to step S1524, it is determined whether the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is smaller than the cumulative number upper limit CC-LMT (step S1526). In this determination, when the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is smaller than the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT, the cumulative number determined to be in a state where a connection between the transmitter and the receiver is in trouble is the cumulative number. While it is determined that the upper limit value CC-LMT has not been reached, if the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not smaller (larger) than the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT, a problem has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. It is determined that the cumulative number of times determined to be in the state has reached the cumulative number upper limit CC-LMT.

  When the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is smaller than the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT in step S1526, that is, the cumulative number determined that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is defective is the cumulative number. When the upper limit value CC-LMT has not been reached, the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG is set to 0 (step S1528), and this routine is terminated. On the other hand, when the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not smaller (larger) than the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT in step S1526, that is, it is determined that there is a problem in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. When the accumulated number of times reaches the accumulated number upper limit CC-LMT, a value of 1 is set in the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG (step S1530), and this routine is terminated. The communication abnormality flag CC-FLG indicates that the accumulated number of times determined that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is in trouble has reached the accumulated number upper limit CC-LMT, and the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. This flag indicates whether or not a failure has occurred. Value 1 when the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is definitely defective. A failure has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. When the accumulated number of times determined to be in the state is not reaching the accumulated number upper limit CC-LMT, the value is set to 0, respectively. Note that the communication error flag CC-FLG is reset when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, with the value 0 being set, but is not reset due to a momentary power failure or a power failure. At this time, the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG immediately before the moment or power failure is restored.

[16-1-8. Connection recovery process]
Next, the connection recovery process executed as one process of the warning process in step S1024 in the peripheral control part steady process of the peripheral control part power-on process shown in FIG. 95 will be described. In this connection recovery process, it is executed following the connection failure determination process shown in FIG. 101, and the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450. Output a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) to confirm (recover) the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, that is, when the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is abnormal. Notify that.

  When the connection recovery process is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 illustrated in FIG. 72 performs the peripheral control unit power-on process illustrated in FIG. 95 in the peripheral control unit steady process as illustrated in FIG. In the scheduler update process in step S1020, it is determined whether the schedule data for screen generation is being activated among the various schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. S1540). In this determination, in the scheduler update process, out of the screen data arranged in time series constituting the screen generation schedule data, the order of the screen data to be output from the head screen data to the built-in sound source VDP 1512a is instructed. Then, it is determined whether or not the pointer has been updated. In other words, in the scheduler update process, when the pointer is being updated, the presentation is progressing along the screen generation schedule data, so it is determined that the screen generation schedule data is being activated, while the screen generation schedule is When the presentation is completed along with the data and all the pointer updates are completed, it is determined that the screen generation schedule data is not activated. In this determination, a demonstration is performed by the game board side effect display device 1600 during a period when the start-up screen at the time of power-on of the pachinko machine 1 is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600, or in a waiting state of the customer. It is possible to determine whether or not the current period is based on the schedule data for screen generation, and displays a startup screen when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on on the game board side effect display device 1600. If the game board is in a waiting state or a period during which a demonstration is performed by the game board side effect display device 1600, the process proceeds to step S1542, which will be described later, while the start-up screen when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on is displayed on the game board side. The period displayed on the effect display device 1600 or the waiting state for the customer is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. That when it is not a period that is doing a demonstration in the (mere, is when in the standby state of the customer wait), which is as it is to terminate this routine.

  When the production is progressing along the screen generation schedule data in step S1540, that is, when the screen generation schedule data is being activated, this routine is finished as it is, while in step S1540, the screen generation schedule data is followed. When the presentation is completed and the updating of all the pointers is completed, that is, when the screen generation schedule data is not activated, it is determined whether or not the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not 0 (step) S1542). As described above, this communication check counter CC-CNT is used for the door frame side effect provided in the peripheral control board 1510 in the determination of step S1522 in the process every time the connection failure determination process shown in FIG. 101 is executed. Counts up the number of times it is determined that there is a problem between the connection between the transmitter IC 1512d and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. To do (count the cumulative number of times). In this determination, it is determined whether or not the number of times when it is determined that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is in a state where a failure has occurred is even one.

  When the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is 0 in step S 1542, that is, when the number of times determined that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is in trouble is not once, this is left as it is. While the routine is finished, the number of times when it is determined in step S1542 that the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not 0, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is in trouble is even once. If there is, it is determined whether or not the value of the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG is 0 (step S1544). As described above, the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG indicates that the cumulative number of times determined that there is a problem in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has reached the cumulative number upper limit CC-LMT, This flag indicates whether or not there is a problem with the connection between the receiver and the value 1 when the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is definitely defective. When the cumulative number of times determined to be in a state in which the connection has not reached the cumulative number upper limit CC-LMT, the value is set to 0.

  When the value of the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG is 0 in step S1544, that is, the accumulated number of times determined that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is defective is the accumulated number upper limit value CC-LMT. If not, SYNC pattern output processing is performed (step S1546), and this routine is terminated. In this SYNC pattern output process, the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a connection confirmation signal to the INIT terminal of the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510, thereby providing the door frame side effect provided on the peripheral control board 1510. The transmitter IC 1512d outputs a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) to the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450. This predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) is stored in advance in the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d and is output to the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0. The connection between the transmitter IC 1512d and the door frame-side effect receiver ICSDIC0, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is recovered.

  On the other hand, when the value of the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG is not 0 (value 1) in step S1544, that is, when there is a certain failure in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, communication error display processing is performed. (Step S1548), and this routine is finished. In this communication error display process, the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 provided in the game board 5 shown in FIG. 8 is used to notify that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is surely defective. Process to draw on. For example, in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, a message “A problem has occurred in the upper plate side liquid crystal display device. Please call a clerk” is displayed. Further, in the communication error display process, a period during which the start-up screen at the time of power-on of the pachinko machine 1 is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600, or a demonstration by the game board side effect display device 1600 in a waiting state. During the period of time, the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. In order to confirm whether or not a failure has occurred, LOCKN signal output request data is transmitted from the peripheral control MPU 1511a as an operation check request of the door frame side effect display device 460, and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 is set to LOCKN. As a response signal for the transmission of signal output request data, When the LOCKN signal is output from the OCKN terminal to the peripheral control MPU 1511a and this LOCKN signal is not input, it is assumed that there is a problem in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, and there is a problem in the door frame side effect display device 460. A notification image (for example, “There is a problem with the upper plate side liquid crystal display device. Please call the store clerk”) is displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. In addition, a process in which a notification sound (for example, “a defect has occurred in the upper platen side liquid crystal display device”) repeatedly flows from a speaker or the like provided on the door frame 3 is performed. At this time, you may make it perform the process which lightes all the various LED mounted on the various decoration board | substrates with which the LED for light emission decoration provided in the door frame 3 and the game board 5 are equipped.

  Next, the timing at which the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs the connection confirmation signal to the INIT terminal of the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. 74 will be described using the timing chart of FIG.

  First, the decorative symbols variably displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 provided in the game board 5 shown in FIG. 8 will be briefly described. Peripheral control of the peripheral control unit power-on process shown in FIG. The decorative symbol change display is executed by a part steady process or the like, and the main control side of the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. 93 by the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. The first special lottery result drawn by receiving the game ball to the first start port 2002 shown in FIG. 8 by the main process or the main control timer interruption process shown in FIG. 94 or the second shown in FIG. When the result of the second special lottery drawn by accepting game balls at the start opening 2004 is “big hit”, the number of times of opening / closing the winning prize opening 2005 shown in FIG. 8 is 1 round. A total of 15 rounds, up to 15 rounds. In each round, within a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds), a game ball enters the big winning opening 2005, and the number of balls is a predetermined number (for example, 9). Then, the round is digested, and every time one game ball enters the big prize opening 2005, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 15 balls) are paid out.

  The first special lottery result drawn by accepting game balls to the first start port 2002 or the second special lottery result drawn by accepting game balls to the second start port 2004 is obtained from the main control board 1310. Based on the command, the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 controls the liquid crystal display control unit 1512, so that the left decorative pattern is on the left side of the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, and the central decorative graphic is in the center. On the right side, the change display of the right decorative design is started, and after the predetermined time has elapsed, the display of the left decorative design, the central decorative design, and the right decorative design is stopped and the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result Can be recognized by the player. At this time, the first special symbol indicator 1403 of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. Also in the first special symbol or the second special symbol displayed by pattern display 1405 so that the user can confirm the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result. When the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol are displayed variably, the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol are translucent so that the background image can be visually recognized. From the upper left to the lower left of the area, the central decorative symbol rotates from the upper center of the display area to the lower central, and the right decorative pattern rotates from the upper right to the lower right of the display area. When the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol are stopped, the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol correspond to the stopped decorative display. The left decorative design, the central decorative design, and the right decorative design are opaque so that the background image at the position is difficult to see. In this way, the first special symbol or the second special symbol that is displayed in a variable manner and stopped in the first special symbol indicator 1403 or the second special symbol indicator 1405 of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. The left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol that are started and stopped in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 are synchronized.

  The peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 receives the first special lottery result drawn by receiving the game ball into the first start port 2002 or the second lot selected by receiving the game ball into the second start port 2004. Upon receiving a command from the main control board 1310 that conveys the result of the special lottery, the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 is controlled based on the received command, so that the game board side shown in FIG. When the variable display of the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol is started in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (timing K0), the peripheral control unit steady state of the power-on process of the peripheral control unit shown in FIG. In the scheduler update process of step S1020 in the process, the schedule data storage area 151 of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. Among the screen data arranged in chronological order constituting the screen generation schedule data set in cae, the pointer is used to indicate what number of screen data is output from the top screen data to the built-in sound source VDP 1512a. Because it is updated, that is, in the scheduler update process, when the pointer is updated, the production is progressing along the screen generation schedule data, so the screen generation schedule data is being activated, and the screen generation schedule While the data is being activated, that is, until the variable display of the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol is started and stopped, the peripheral control unit power-on process shown in FIG. 102 in the warning process of step S1024 in the peripheral control unit steady process of FIG. Be executed recovery process, it is determined in step S1540 in this connection restoration process, and it so as to end the routine forcibly.

  As a result, the communication check counter CC-CNT of the communication check counter CC-CNT is displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 until the variable display of the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol is started and stopped. Even when the value is not 0, that is, between the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450 (that is, between the transmitter and the transmitter). Even if the number of times that it is determined that there is a problem with the connection) between the receiver and the receiver is not performed, the SYNC pattern output process of step S1546 in the connection recovery process is not performed, and the transmitter and the receiver The connection recovery process is not performed, and the connection recovery process The communication error display process in step S1548 is not performed, and for example, the message “A problem has occurred in the upper plate side liquid crystal display device. Please call the store clerk” is not displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. Therefore, the LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 that informs that the drawing data received from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d is abnormal data is invalidated, and the door frame side effect display device Reference numeral 460 displays an image based on drawing data received from the door frame side effect transmitter IC ICDIC0 from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d.

  When the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol change display is started and stopped in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 (timing K1), the peripheral control unit shown in FIG. 95 is turned on. In the scheduler update process in step S1020 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the time process, the presentation is completed along the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. Since all the updates have been completed, that is, in the scheduler update process, while the screen generation schedule data is not started and the screen generation schedule data is not started, the peripheral control unit shown in FIG. 95 is turned on. Warning in step S1024 in the peripheral processing unit steady process of time processing In the determination of step S1540 in the connection recovery process shown in FIG. 102 executed as one process of the process, the process proceeds to the process of step S1542 in the process, and when the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is 0, that is, the transmitter When it is determined that there is no failure in the connection with the receiver, the routine is terminated as it is, but when the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not 0, that is, the transmitter If the number of times that the connection between the receiver and the receiver is determined to be in a state where there is a failure is one, the process proceeds to step S1544 in the same process, and the value of the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG is 0. When the connection between the transmitter and receiver is faulty. If the accumulated number of times determined to have not reached the accumulated number upper limit CC-LMT, the process proceeds to step S1546 in the same process, the above-described SYNC pattern output process is performed, and the routine is terminated, while the communication abnormality flag CC- When the value of FLG is not 0 (value 1), that is, when there is a certain failure in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, the process proceeds to step S1548 in the process, and the communication error display described above is performed. Perform processing and end the routine. In other words, while the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol are stopped and displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d and the door frame side effect receiver are displayed. When there is a failure in the connection between ICSDIC0, that is, between the transmitter and the receiver, even when there is a failure in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. When the accumulated number of times determined to have not reached the accumulated number upper limit CC-LMT, the SYNC pattern output process must be performed, so that the connection between the door frame-side effect transmitter IC 1512d and the door frame-side effect receiver ICSDIC0, This means that the connection between the transmitter and receiver is restored, while the transmitter is When the cumulative number of times determined that there is a problem in the connection between the receiver and the receiver has reached the cumulative number upper limit CC-LMT (that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is definitely defective) For example, in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, “There is a problem with the upper plate side liquid crystal display device. Please call the store clerk. LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 that informs that the drawing data received from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d is abnormal data. Has been activated.

  In the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol are started and stopped, and the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol are displayed again. Since the left decorative pattern, the central decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern are stopped and displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 in the interval period until the game is started, as described above, The LOCKN signal from the door frame-side effect receiver ICSDIC0 that indicates that the drawing data received from the door frame-side effect transmitter IC 1512d is abnormal data is validated, and the door frame-side effect transmitter IC 1512d and the door frame-side effect Trouble occurs between the connection with the receiver ICSDIC0, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. If the cumulative number of times determined that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is defective has not reached the cumulative number upper limit CC-LMT. By performing the pattern output process without fail, the process of recovering the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d and the door frame side effect receiver IC ICDIC0, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is performed. When the cumulative number of times that it is determined that there is a fault in the connection between the two has reached the cumulative number upper limit CC-LMT (that is, the fault between the transmitter and the receiver has definitely occurred) For example, by performing the communication error display process, the game board side effect display device 1600 The display region "problem with the upper tray side liquid crystal display device has occurred. Please call your clerk." Displays a message that to have so as to perform the process of informing.

  When the display of the left decorative design, the central decorative design, and the right decorative design is started again (timing K2), as described above, since the screen generation schedule data is being activated, the left decorative design and the central decorative design are activated. And until the right decorative symbol is stopped and displayed (timing K3), even when the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not 0, that is, for the door frame side effect provided in the peripheral control board 1510. The number of times that it is determined that there is a problem between the connection between the transmitter IC 1512d and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450 (that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver) is 1. SYNC pattern output processing in step S1546 in connection recovery processing is performed The process for recovering the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is not performed, and the communication error display process of step S1548 in the connection recovery process is not performed. For example, the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 Since the message “A problem has occurred in the upper plate LCD device. Please call the store clerk” is not displayed, the drawing data received from the door frame side transmitter transmitter IC1512d is abnormal data. The door frame side effect display device 460 invalidates the LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 that conveys the fact that the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 has received the drawing data received from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d. Display an image based on.

  As described above, the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol are started and stopped in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, and the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol are displayed again. In the interval period until the change display of the symbol is started, the LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 is informed that the drawing data received from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d is abnormal data. On the other hand, in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, the door frame side effect transmitter is transmitted until the display of the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol is started and stopped. A receiver ICSD for door frame side presentation that informs that the drawing data received from the IC 1512d is abnormal data LOCKN signal from the C0 is adapted to be disabled. In the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, the combination result in which the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol are stopped and displayed is the information most interesting to the player, which is beneficial to the player. Since the player can determine whether or not the jackpot gaming state to which the game is given occurs, the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol are displayed in a variable manner in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. Then, until the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol are stopped and displayed, the effect image drawn in the display area of the door frame side effect display device 460 is disturbed correctly due to the influence of noise or the like. Even if the drawing cannot be performed, the rendering is not interrupted and the process of recovering the drawing to the correct drawing state is not performed. Decorative symbol, central decorative pattern, and by stopping displaying the right decorative design, and the most interesting of information of the player to complete the drawing.

  In this respect, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 displays a startup screen when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on on the game board side effect display device 1600, and a waiting state. Thus, during the period of demonstration by the game board side effect display device 1600, it is greatly different from the case where the LOCKN signal output request data is transmitted to the differential circuit 1512e provided in the peripheral control board 1510. This LOCKN signal output request data is displayed during the period when the start-up screen at the time of power-on of the pachinko machine 1 is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600, or in the state of waiting for the customer, and the game board side effect display device 1600 demonstrates In the period of time, the peripheral control MPU 1511a transmits the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450. This is transmitted as an operation confirmation request for the door frame side effect display device 460 in order to confirm whether or not there is a problem in the connection between the connections, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver.

  When the LOCKN signal output request data, which is serial data output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a, is differentiated into a positive signal and a negative signal in the differential circuit 1512e provided in the peripheral control board 1510, as described above, differential Two signals that are differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal in the conversion circuit 1512e are input to a forced switching circuit 1512f provided in the peripheral control board 1510. The forcible switching circuit 1512f is connected to the circuit so as to transmit the two signals that are differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal in the differentiation circuit 1512e, so that the two signals are transmitted. One signal is transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 to the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3. When the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 of the liquid crystal module circuit 4450V provided in the effect display drive board 4450 determines that the two received signals are LOCKN signal output request data, the LOCKN signal output request data is As described above, since the data format is different from the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d, it is determined that the data is abnormal, and the LOCKN signal is transmitted to the periphery of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510. It outputs to control MPU1511a. As a result, the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines that there is no problem in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver when the LOCKN signal is input as a response signal to the transmission of the LOCKN signal output request data. While it can be determined that no malfunction has occurred, when the LOCKN signal is not input, it is determined that a malfunction has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. A notification image (for example, “A problem has occurred in the upper plate side liquid crystal display device. Please call the store clerk”) is transmitted to the game board side effect display device by controlling the sound source built-in VDP 1512a. 1600, and a notification sound (for example, “upper plate side” Problems with crystal display device has occurred. "), And notification sound from the speaker or the like provided in the door frame 3 by outputting the audio data transmission IC1512c to control the sound source built VDP1512a flows. Thereby, notification can be performed by the notification image displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the notification sound that repeatedly flows from the speaker or the like provided on the door frame 3. At this time, all of the LEDs for light emitting decoration provided in the door frame 3 and the various LEDs mounted on the various decoration boards provided in the game board 5 may be turned on.

  As described above, when the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 transmits the LOCKN signal output request data which is serial data, the forcible switching circuit 1512f can receive the LOCKN signal output request data by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDDIC0. The door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 that receives the LOCKN signal output request data outputs the LOCKN signal from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 as a response signal to the peripheral control MPU 1511a. Therefore, when the LOCKN signal is input, it can be determined that there is no problem with the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, and it can be determined that there is no problem with the door frame side effect display device 460, while LOCKN The signal is input When not it can be determined that a malfunction in the door frame side effect display device 460 as a malfunction has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and receiver occurs. Then, the peripheral control MPU 1511a can execute the communication error display process in step S1548 in the connection recovery process of FIG. It has become. In other words, when the peripheral control MPU 1511a finds a defect in the door frame side effect display device 460, it can notify the store clerk or the like of the hall by executing the notification process. Hall clerk and the like can very easily check whether there is a problem in the door frame side effect display device 460 before the player plays a game, and the check does not take time. ing. Therefore, the trouble of the door frame side effect display device 460 can be found without taking time and effort.

  Further, as described above, the LOCKN signal is data in which the drawing data received from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 by the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450 is abnormal data. If it is determined, it is a signal that is output to convey the fact, specifically, a door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and a door frame side effect receiver provided in the effect display drive board 4450. This is a signal that is output to request transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirming (recovering) the connection between ICSDIC0, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. The receiver ICSDIC0 is a door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d. When the transmitted image cannot be received normally, a communication failure occurs between the image communication between the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 and the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d, and the drawing data received becomes abnormal data. For this purpose, the LOCKN signal can be output to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511. As a result, the peripheral control MPU 1511a to which the LOCKN signal is input doors the connection confirmation signal for informing that transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d to the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 is started. By outputting to the frame-side effect transmitter IC 1512d, it is possible to eliminate communication problems between image communications. In other words, the peripheral control MPU 1511a can detect the malfunction of the door frame side effect display device 460 due to the communication malfunction between the image communications at an early stage, and can act on the door frame effect transmitter IC 1512d so as to eliminate the malfunction. It is like that. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's gaming motivation by discovering and eliminating the problem of the door frame side effect display device 460.

  Further, the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 that receives the image transmitted from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d and outputs the image to the door frame side effect display device 460 receives the image transmitted from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d. When the reception cannot be performed normally, the effect control microprocessor outputs a LOCKN signal, which is a communication failure occurrence signal indicating that a communication failure has occurred between the image communication between the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 and the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d. Since the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 can output to the peripheral control MPU 1511a, the peripheral control MPU 1511a to which the LOCKN signal is input controls the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 to cause a communication failure. Telling you The message “A problem has occurred in the upper plate side liquid crystal display device. Please call the store clerk” is generated, and this generated image is displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 for notification. Can be done. In other words, the peripheral control MPU 1511a discovers a failure of the door frame side effect display device 460 due to a communication failure between image communications at an early stage, and notifies the player sitting on the front surface of the pachinko machine 1 to that effect. Since the player can tell the hall clerk, etc., or directly notify the hall clerk who passed by the pachinko machine 1 by chance, the hall clerk etc. Work can be started at an early stage to resolve the problem. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's gaming motivation by early finding and solving the problem of the door frame side effect display device 460.

  Furthermore, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 includes a door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and a door frame provided in the effect display drive board 4450 in the period (interval period) from the timing K1 to the timing K2. Even if there is a failure in the connection between the receiver ICSDIC0 for the side effect, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, there is a failure in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. When the accumulated number of times determined to be in a state of being not reached the accumulated number upper limit CC-LMT, a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for activating the LOCKN signal and eliminating a communication failure between image communications From the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d A connection confirmation signal indicating that transmission is to be started to the frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 can be continuously output to the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d until the cumulative number reaches the cumulative number upper limit CC-LMT. It has become. Accordingly, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 causes the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 to change the first special symbol or the second special symbol game in the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405. Since it is possible to continue outputting the connection confirmation signal repeatedly only during the period when the game starts and stops and the game is not progressing, it is possible to move toward a direction in which the communication trouble is eliminated.

  Then, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 has a door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and a door frame side provided in the effect display drive board 4450 in the period (interval period) from timing K1 to timing K2. This is a case where there is a failure in the connection between the production receiver IC SDIC0, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver even once, and the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is defective. When the accumulated number of times determined to be in the state does not reach the accumulated number upper limit CC-LMT, a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for validating the LOCKN signal and eliminating a communication malfunction between image communications is displayed. Door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d to door When the connection confirmation signal informing the start of transmission to the side effect receiver ICSDIC0 is repeatedly output to the door frame effect transmitter IC 1512d until the accumulated number reaches the accumulated number upper limit CC-LMT. When the main control MPU 1310a of the control board 1310 starts changing the first special symbol or the second special symbol game in the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405 and starts executing the game again, the connection confirmation When the signal output is stopped and the connection confirmation signal output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a is stopped and no connection confirmation signal is input, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d outputs a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) to the door frame. Controlling liquid crystal display by stopping transmission to the receiver ICSDIC0 for side effects The image the sound source built VDP1512a to the generation of 1512 has been to be able to output to the door frame side for effect receiver ICSDIC0. Accordingly, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 causes the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 to change the first special symbol or the second special symbol game in the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405. By continuing to output the connection confirmation signal, which is a failure resolution signal, only during the period when the game is not started by displaying the start and stop, the communication failure can be resolved. Therefore, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 starts changing the first special symbol or the second special symbol game in the first special symbol display unit 1403 or the second special symbol display unit 1405 and stops and displays it. When the connection confirmation signal is repeatedly output only during the period when the game is not progressing, the main control board 1 Even if ten main control MPUs 1310a start changing the first special symbol or the second special symbol game in the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405 and start executing the game again, the door frame When the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 starts executing the game again and ends (period of timing K1 to timing K2), the distortion of the image (disturbance of the image) that progresses on the display screen of the side effect display device 460. Every time (interval period), it can be made to go away.

  According to the embodiment as described above, the pachinko machine 1 includes the main control board 1310 of FIG. 69 and the payout control board 951 of FIG. The main control board 1310 has a first start port 2002 or a second start which is a start area in which a game ball launched by the ball striking device 650 is directed toward the game area 5a defined in the game board 5 in the game area 5a. The main control MPU 1310a of FIG. 69, which is a game control microprocessor for controlling the progress of the game based on the ball 2004 entering the mouth 2004, is mounted. The payout control board 951 is a payout control microprocessor that controls the payout of the game balls by the payout device 830 based on the prize ball commands in FIGS. 88 (a) and 88 (b) which are payout commands from the main control board 1310. 70 payout control MPUs 952a are installed.

  The main control MPU 1310a which is a game control microprocessor includes at least a RAM (main control built-in RAM) built in the main control MPU 1310a. The main control built-in RAM can store information related to the game even after the power is shut off.

  The payout control MPU 952a, which is a payout control microprocessor, includes at least a RAM (payout control built-in RAM) built in the payout control MPU 952a. The payout control built-in RAM can store information related to payout even after the power is shut off.

  The pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment further includes an operation switch 954 shown in FIG. If the operation switch 954 is operated within the period in which the determination process of step S16 in the main control-side power-on process in FIG. 92 is performed from when the power is turned on, the information regarding the game stored in the main control built-in RAM is erased. 77 is output to the main control MPU 1310a, which is a game control microprocessor, and if the payout control unit is operated within the period during which the power-on process is performed, the payout control built-in RAM is stored in the payout control built-in RAM. The RAM clear function for outputting the RWMCLR signal of FIG. 82 to the payout control MPU 952a as the payout control microprocessor as a RAM clear signal for erasing the stored payout information, and the main control side power supply of FIG. Period (or power supply) in which the determination process of step S16 is performed in the on-time process 82 is used as an error canceling signal for canceling an error that has occurred with respect to the payout device 830 when it is operated after a period of time during which the payout control unit power-on process is performed from the time of entry. And an error canceling function for outputting to the payout control MPU 952a which is a payout control microprocessor without outputting to the main control MPU 1310a.

  As described above, when the operation switch 954 is operated within the period in which the determination process of step S16 in the main control side power on process of FIG. 92 is performed from when the power is turned on, the game stored in the main control built-in RAM. 77 is output to the main control MPU 1310a, which is a game control microprocessor, and is operated within a period during which the payout control unit power-on process is performed from when the power is turned on. The RAM clear function for outputting the RWMCLR signal of FIG. 82 to the payout control MPU 952a as a payout control microprocessor as a RAM clear signal for erasing information related to payout stored in the payout control built-in RAM, and FIG. The determination process of step S16 in the main control side power-on process is performed 82 (or a period during which the payout control unit power-on process is performed after power-on) has passed, the RWMCLR signal in FIG. 82 is used as an error cancel signal for canceling an error that has occurred with respect to the payout device 830. Since it also has an error canceling function that outputs to the payout control MPU 952a that is a payout control microprocessor without outputting to the main control MPU 1310a that is a game control microprocessor, the RAM clear function can be operated by one operation switch 954. The pachinko machine 1 can be provided with two different functions, ie, an error canceling function. Therefore, a RAM clear function and an error cancel function can be provided while contributing to cost reduction.

[Sensor signal input part of panel relay board 4161]
The sensor signal input unit of the panel relay board 4161 includes various detection sensors arranged on the game board, for example, a general winning port sensor 4020, a first starting port sensor 4002, a second starting port sensor 4004, a count sensor 4005, and a vibration detection sensor. , A circuit to which a detection signal from the magnetic detection sensor 4024 or the like is input. Since the circuit configuration to which the detection signal from each detection sensor is input is the same, here, the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is cited as an example of the detection sensor, and the circuit to which the detection signal from the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is input will be described. To do.

  In a gaming machine, try to obtain an unfair advantage by manipulating the flow-down state of a game ball as desired by bringing a magnet (for example, a permanent magnet or an electromagnet) closer to the game ball that is driven into the game area. There is no end to illegal gaming activities.

  A magnetic detection sensor 4024 capable of detecting magnetism is provided in correspondence with a predetermined position in the game area in order to detect such an illegal game action and suppress the illegal action by a light emitting means or an alarm by sound. Yes.

  Hereinafter, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, control related to game progress and effects will be summarized.

  As described above, the main control board 1310 executes various processes for controlling the entire pachinko machine 1 and outputs various control signals (control commands) according to the processing results. Also, the peripheral control board 1510 is based on the control signal (control command) output from the main control board 1310, the display mode of the effect display device 1600 (display images such as symbols, various background images, characters, characters, etc.) The display mode and operation mode of various members (such as the rendering operation unit 400 and the movable member) contributing to the rendering are controlled.

  In particular, the main control board 1310 performs a special symbol process process every time an interrupt process is performed. In this special control process, first, first and second start opening winning processes are performed. In the first and second start opening winning process, it is determined whether or not a game ball has won at the starting opening, and when it is determined that a winning is made, a process of increasing the number of holdings on the corresponding special symbol side by 1 is performed. Done.

  If the process flag is 0 when the first and second start opening winning processes are finished, the variation start process is executed. In this fluctuation start process, after the jackpot determination in the hold state is digested and executed on condition that the number of holds is 1 or more, the result of this jackpot determination (winning, its type, etc.) is stored The processing flag is updated to “1”.

  On the other hand, if the process flag is 1 when the first and second start opening winning processes are finished, the variation pattern setting process is executed. In this variation pattern setting process, the variation pattern of the special symbol (identification symbol) displayed on the first special symbol display or the second special symbol display based on the stored jackpot determination result or the current gaming state ( The processing flag is updated to “2” after determining and setting a stop symbol (such as a jackpot symbol or a lost symbol) after a special symbol variable display is started and stopped.

  On the other hand, if the process flag is 2 when the first and second start opening winning processes are completed, the changing process is executed. In this changing process, the change time determined and set in the change pattern setting process is monitored by the timer, and the change display of the special symbol on the first special symbol display or the second special symbol display based on the time-out. Stop. After that, when the big hit determination result stored in the fluctuation start process is a big hit, the process selection flag is updated to “3”, and when the big hit determination result stored in the fluctuation start process is not a big hit (losing) The processing selection flag is updated to “0”. That is, in this case, in the next interrupt process, the change start process is started again.

  On the other hand, if the process flag is 3 when the first and second start opening winning processes are finished, the big hit game process is executed. In this jackpot game process, a condition device which is one of the conditions for executing the jackpot game is operated, and the mode of the jackpot game (for example, the number of rounds) determined based on the type of winning jackpot is set. Based on this, the opening / closing operation applied to the opening / closing member 2106 is controlled. In addition, when the big hit game ends, processing to stop the operation of the condition device is performed, or when the winning big hit type is a special type, it is controlled to an advantageous state such as a short time state or a probable change state. As shown, after the game state flag is updated, the processing flag is updated to “0”. That is, in this case, in the next interrupt process, the change start process is started again.

  Note that a plurality of types of variation patterns are stored as variation patterns. The variation pattern determines the time from when the symbol variation of the special symbol starts to when it ends, and when the information is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, the effect appearing in the effect display device 1600 The type of pattern can be determined. In the present embodiment, the plurality of types of variation patterns can be classified into a jackpot variation variation pattern, a deviation reach variation variation pattern, and a variation variation variation pattern. The big hit fluctuation is a fluctuation that is performed when the result of the big hit determination is a big hit. In the effect display device 1600, after reaching the reach effect, the fluctuation display of the decorative symbol is expanded so that the big hit symbol is finally displayed in a fixed stop state. Production is performed. The loss reach variation is a variation performed when the result of the big hit determination is a loss and it is determined that the reach determination is performed based on the reach random number, and the effect display device 1600 performs the decoration through the reach effect. An effect is developed in which the change display of the symbols is finally lost and the symbols are displayed in a fixed stop state. The loss fluctuation is a fluctuation that is performed when the result of the big hit determination is a loss and the reach determination based on the reach random number is not determined to reach, and the effect display device 1600 does not reach the reach effect. Then, the effect is developed so that the variation display of the decorative symbol is finally deviated and the symbol is confirmed and stopped. The variation pattern is defined so that it can be specified which variation pattern is on the first special symbol side or the second special symbol side.

  That is, in the peripheral control board 1510, the game information such as the result of the big hit determination is obtained from the main control board 1310 and is referred to so that such a variation pattern of the decorative design can appear. In addition, on the peripheral control board 1510, based on the acquired game information, the effect display device 1600 causes the decorative pattern variation pattern to appear, and the effect display (background or reserved image) related to the degree of expectation is changed. Control for changing the mode (display and movement) of the operation unit 400 and operating a movable member such as the rear-bottom movable effect unit 3100 is executed.

  Next, the game control of the pachinko machine 1 in the present embodiment will be described in detail. FIG. 104 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the special symbol and special electric accessory control process (FIG. 94: step S114).

  Now, assuming that the main control program is shifted to the special symbol and special electric accessory control process (FIG. 94: step S114), the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 firstly, as shown in FIG. On the condition that the detection signal from one start port sensor 4002 is in an ON state (the ball enters the first start port 2002) (YES in step S5231), the first big hit determination random number is acquired from the random number counter. A first start port passage process such as storing this in the first special symbol holding storage area of the main control built-in RAM is executed (step S5232). On the condition that the detection signal from the second start port sensor 4004 is in the on state (the ball enters the second start port 2004) (YES in step S5233), the second special random number (second special symbol) A second start-port passing process is performed such that the second big hit determination random number) is acquired from the random number counter and stored in the second special symbol holding storage area of the main control built-in RAM (step S5234).

  Next, it is determined whether or not a big hit execution flag indicating that the big hit gaming state is controlled is set (step S5235). If the big hit execution flag is set, the big hit gaming state is controlled. The big hit control process (step S5240a) is executed.

In the jackpot control process according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG.
-When the result of the determination process for the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped is a mode that suggests either "8R probability variation big hit A" or "8R normal big hit", the big prize opening 2005 Opening / closing pattern (round game) which is closed when the game is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or when the count sensor 4005 detects that nine game balls have been won in the big prize opening 2005 is repeated eight times. Control to 8R jackpot gaming state,
-When the result of the determination process regarding the display mode when the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped is a mode that suggests "16R probability variation big hit", the special winning opening 2005 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds). Or an open / close pattern (round game) that is closed when the count sensor 4005 detects that nine game balls have been won in the big prize opening 2005 or not, and is controlled to a 16R big hit game state that repeats 16 times.
-When the result of the determination process for the display mode when the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped is a mode that suggests "8R probability variation big hit B", the special winning opening 2005 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds). ) Or an open / close pattern (round game) that is closed when the game is received by the count sensor 4005 after 9 game balls have been won in the grand prize opening 2005 is controlled to an 8R big hit game state that is repeated eight times.
-When the result of the determination process for the display mode when the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped becomes a mode that suggests "2R normal big hit", the special winning opening 2005 is opened for a short time (for example, 0.6 seconds). After that, the opening / closing pattern (round game) to be closed is controlled to a 2R big hit game state that repeats twice.

  That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in the situation where the time-shortening control is executed, the right-handed strike is more advantageous to the player than in the left-handed manner, and in the situation where the time-shortening control is not executed, the right-handedness is preferred. As described above, the left hand is advantageous for the player. In this regard, in the left-handed state, even if a big win is won as a result of the lottery for the first special symbol corresponding to the acceptance of the game ball to the first starting port 2002, a maximum of 8 rounds of long-open big hit game Only the state (approximately 1000 game balls can be acquired) occurs.

  On the other hand, in the right-handed state, in the lottery for the second special symbol corresponding to the acceptance of the game ball to the second starting port 2004, when a big hit is won, the probability (allocation rate of the winning species) is approximately 50%. ) Is a 16-round long-open big hit game state (approximately 2000 game balls can be obtained), etc., and the expected value of the winning ball that can be obtained when winning a big hit Therefore, when the shift control is performed to the right-handed state, a larger amount of prize balls can be expected than when the player is left-handed.

  In the big hit control process, in order to start the opening control of the big prize opening 2005, first, a process for starting the operation of the condition device, a process for resetting a later-described variation number counter, and the like are performed.

  Also, in the jackpot control process, after performing the opening control of such a big winning opening 2005, as shown in FIG. 110, according to the winning type of the jackpot that triggered the jackpot game, a high probability Each set process of a flag and a time reduction flag is executed.

  The high probability flag is a flag indicating a high probability state, and is used in the big hit determination process shown in FIG. 109 to be described later. 114 is set when the jackpot gaming state based on the probability variation jackpot, 8R probability variation jackpot B) is terminated, and when the next jackpot is reached, the first special symbol stop process shown in FIG. To reset.

  The time reduction flag is a flag indicating that the time reduction control is being executed (low probability time reduction state, high probability time reduction state), and as shown in FIG. 110, the time reduction control (high probability time reduction state) after the end of the big hit gaming state. 114. The first special symbol stop process shown in FIG. 114, which will be described later, is set when the big hit gaming state based on the big hit (8R probability variation big hit A, 16R probability variation big hit B, 8R probability variation big hit B) is terminated. Or it resets by the 2nd special symbol stop process which is not illustrated. Alternatively, when a special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is digested 100 times without winning a jackpot after a low probability short-time state occurs, the first special symbol stop process shown in FIG. Or it resets by the 2nd special symbol stop process which is not illustrated.

  The fluctuation counter is a counter indicating the number of fluctuations of a special symbol since the fluctuation counter is reset, and is used in a first fluctuation pattern setting process (second fluctuation pattern setting process) shown in FIG. It is updated when a special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) changes (for example, counts up) and at least a specific type of big hit (16R probability variable big hit, 8R probability variable big hit B) It is reset when the big hit gaming state based on is started.

  If the big hit execution flag is not set (NO in step S5235), then, as the processing of step S5236, whether or not the big hit execution flag indicating that the small hit gaming state is being controlled is set. Is determined. As a result, if the small hit execution flag is set, a small hit control process (step S5240b) for controlling the small hit gaming state is executed. In the small hit control process, a process of opening the special winning opening 2005 for a specific opening time (for example, 1.8 seconds) is performed.

  Here, in the small hit control process (step S5240b), unlike the big hit control process (step S5240a), after the opening control of the big winning opening 2005 is performed, the high probability flag, the short time flag, the short time Each set process such as a count counter is not performed. However, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 110 (a), the big hit determination is not won.

  If the small hit execution flag is not set (NO in step S5236), the value of the second special hold number counter indicating the number of second big hit determination random numbers stored in the second special symbol hold storage area is On condition that it is “0” (step S5237), the first special symbol process process including the lottery process concerning the display mode at the time of the variable display stop of the first special symbol is executed (step S5238).

  On the other hand, when the value of the second special reserved number counter indicating the number of second jackpot determination random numbers stored in the second special symbol reserved storage area is not “0” (step S5237), A second special symbol process process including a lottery process relating to the display mode when the variable display is stopped is executed (step S5239). As a result, as long as the game is performed so that the lottery for the second special symbol placed on hold is not lost (unless the value of the second special pending number counter is “0”), the first special symbol Regardless of the lottery hold status, only the lottery for the second jackpot determination random number is continuously performed without interruption (priority execution).

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the player can maintain the driving ball (right strike) to the right side of the center accessory 2500 in the short time state (high probability short time state). Only the lottery (determination process) for the big hit determination random number can be performed continuously without interruption.

  The special game (design variation) using the second special symbol (second special symbol) is limited to a game executed in preference to the special game using the first special diagram (first special symbol). Instead, for example, the execution of the special game may be started in the order in which the game balls enter (pass) through the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 and start winnings are generated. In this case, a table for storing data capable of specifying the order in which the start winnings are generated is provided, and the execution of the special game using either the first special figure or the second special figure is started from the stored data. It suffices if it can be determined.

  FIG. 105 is a flowchart showing a procedure for the first start port passage processing (step S5232).

  If it is determined in the process of step S5231 that the first start port sensor 4002 is in an on state and a game ball has entered the first start port 2002, as shown in FIG. Furthermore, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, as the processing of step S5241, first, each random number on the first special symbol side (random hit determination random number, reach determination random number, jackpot symbol random number, variation display pattern random number ) Is obtained from the random number counter.

  Next, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 obtains the counter value by the first special reservation number counter from the main control built-in RAM, and the number of reservations of the first special symbol is the maximum value based on the counter value. It is determined whether or not it is “4” which is the (upper limit value) (step S5242). If it is determined in step S5242 that the number of the first special symbol hold is not the maximum value, the variable display of the first special symbol (determination process for the first special symbol) is newly held. In order to achieve this state, the following steps S5243 to S5245 are performed.

  That is, first, as the process of step S5243, the first special reservation number counter is incremented (added by 1). Next, as the processing of step S5244, each random number acquired in step S5241 is used as a first special symbol reservation storage area corresponding to the counter value by the first special reservation number counter in the storage area of the main control built-in RAM. To store.

  Next, the first special figure prefetch process for executing the prefetch effect on the first special figure side is executed, and the process is terminated (step S5245). As will be described later, the prefetching effect on the first special symbol side is an effect that suggests in advance the determination result (or the degree of expectation) of the first special symbol before the variable display of the first special symbol is started. In the first special figure prefetching process, information required for determining whether or not the prefetching effect is executed on the peripheral control board 1510 side, the contents of the effect, etc. Information, information related to the variation pattern number for prefetch determination) is generated and stored in the corresponding storage area as transmission information for the peripheral control board 1510. At this time, instead of the determination result itself of the first special symbol, information regarding the stop symbol of the special symbol may be included in the command as information suggesting the type of jackpot game. For example, information at a stage before final determination such as an SP reach group, a normal reach group in the variation pattern, and a latent hit group or a small hit group in the symbol type may be transmitted as a prefetch command.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S5242 that the first special symbol hold count is the maximum value, the variable display of the first special symbol is not newly held. That is, by ending the process without executing the processes of steps S5243 to S5245, the first special symbol variation display is not newly put on hold.

  FIG. 106 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the second start port passage process (step S5234).

  If it is determined in the process of step S5233 that the second start port sensor 4004 is on and a game ball has entered the second start port 2004, as shown in FIG. In addition, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first performs each random number on the second special symbol side (second big hit determination random number, second reach determination random number, second big hit symbol use) in step S5251. A random number and a random number for the second variation display pattern) are obtained from the random number counter.

  Next, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 obtains the counter value by the second special reservation number counter from the main control built-in RAM, and the number of reservations of the second special symbol is the maximum value based on the counter value. It is determined whether or not “4” (step S5252). If it is determined in step S5252 that the number of the second special symbol hold is not the maximum value, the variable display control of the second special symbol (lottery for the second special symbol) is newly held. In order to achieve this state, the following steps S5253 to S5255 are performed.

  That is, first, as the processing of step S5253, the second special reservation number counter is incremented (added by 1). Next, as a process of step S5254, the second special symbol reserved storage area corresponding to the counter value by the second special reserved number counter in the storage area of the main control built-in RAM is used as the random number acquired in step S5251. To store.

  Then, the second special figure prefetching process for executing the prefetching effect on the second special figure side is executed, and the process is terminated (step S5255). As will be described later, the pre-reading effect on the second special symbol side is an effect that suggests in advance the determination result (or the degree of expectation) of the second special symbol before starting the variation display of the second special symbol. In the second special figure prefetching process, information (winning information, symbol type, variation pattern number, etc.) necessary for determining the presence / absence of prefetching and the contents of the presentation on the peripheral control board 1510 side is generated, The information is stored in the corresponding storage area as transmission information for the peripheral control board 1510. At this time, instead of the determination result itself of the second special symbol, information related to the stop symbol of the special symbol may be included in the command as information suggesting the type of jackpot game. For example, information at a stage before final determination such as an SP reach group, a normal reach group in the variation pattern, and a latent hit group or a small hit group in the symbol type may be transmitted as a prefetch command.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S5252 that the second special symbol hold count is the maximum value, the variable display control of the second special symbol is not newly held. That is, by ending the process without executing the processes of steps S5253 to S5255, the second special symbol variable display control is not newly put on hold.

  A command for instructing the number of reserved special symbols in the peripheral control board command transmission process (step S120) when the number of retained special balls changes based on the game ball entering the first starting port 2002. (First hold number designation command 0 to 4) is set and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. Further, when the number of second special symbols held changes based on the game ball entering the second starting port 2004, the peripheral control board command transmission process (step S120) indicates the number of second special symbols held. A command to be performed (second hold number designation command 0 to 4) is set and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510.

  FIG. 107 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol process (step S5238). The first special symbol process executed in step S5238 of the special symbol and special electric accessory control process and the second special symbol process executed in step S5239 of the special symbol and special electric accessory control process are the same. Since only the random numbers and tables used for the determination are different, only the first special symbol process executed in step S5238 of the special symbol and special electric accessory control processing will be described here. In the first special symbol process, one of the following five process processes is selectively executed according to the first special symbol process flag.

  1. A lottery process for the display mode when the variable control of the first special symbol is stopped based on the read random number for big hit determination read out the big hit determination random number corresponding to the first special symbol stored in the main control built-in RAM, etc. First special symbol normal processing (step S5280)

  2. First special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S5281) in which the determination process of the first special symbol variation control stop mode is performed based on the result of the determination process on the display mode at the time of the first special symbol variable control stop )

  3. The first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display 1403 on the basis of the random number for the variable display pattern 1403 and the above-mentioned effect display device (game board side effect display device) 1600 corresponding to the special symbol The first variation pattern setting process (step S5282) in which a lottery process or the like is performed for the variation mode of the effect display to be performed

  4). The first special symbol variation process that waits until the first special symbol variation display on the first special symbol display 1403 is stopped (step S5283).

  5. The first special symbol display unit 1403 displays the first special symbol variation control stop mode determined based on the result of the determination process for the display mode when the first special symbol variable control mode is stopped. First special symbol stop process for stopping the variable display of the first special symbol (step S5284)

  The initial value of the first special symbol process flag is operated to indicate that the first special symbol normal process (step S5280) should be performed.

  FIG. 108 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol normal process (step S5280).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol normal process is to be performed, as shown in FIG. As a process of (1), it is determined whether or not there is a variable display of the first special symbol that is in the hold state based on the counter value by the first special hold number counter. As a result, if it is determined that there is a change display of the first special symbol that is in the hold state, it is stored in the first special symbol hold storage area of the main control built-in RAM as the processing of step S5302 next. The first storage of random numbers related to the display mode of the first special symbol (for example, the first jackpot determination random number, the first reach determination random number, the first jackpot symbol random number, the first variation display pattern random number) The random number stored in the area is read from the main control built-in RAM. Next, as the processing of steps S5303 and S304, the first special reserved number counter is counted down and the first special reserved number stored in the first special symbol reserved storage area of the main control built-in RAM is stored. First-in first-out (First-In, First-In) random numbers (for example, first jackpot determination random number, first reach determination random number, first jackpot symbol random number, first variation display pattern random number) related to the display mode when the symbol variation display is stopped The shift operation is performed in the First-Out) mode.

  Specifically, the first special symbol reserved storage area has four storage areas (first special symbol reserved storage area a to first special symbol reserved storage area d), and a start winning prize to the first start opening 2002 is shown. The random numbers extracted according to the generation are stored in order from the first (first) area. Then, if a starting prize occurs when random numbers are stored in the nth (n = 1 to 3) storage area, the extracted random numbers are stored in the n + 1th (n = 1 to 3) storage area. When the variable display start condition based on the random number stored in the storage area is satisfied, various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read out and stored in the Nth (N = 2 to 4) storage area. Various random numbers are moved to the (N−1) th (N = 2 to 4) th storage area. As a result, the order in which the suspension of the variable display of the first special symbol occurs can be stored in an identifiable manner, and the suspension of the variable display is released in order from the earliest suspension (the suspension that occurred first). . Similarly, the second special symbol holding storage area has four storage areas (second special symbol holding storage area a to second special symbol holding storage area d), and according to the occurrence of the start winning at the second starting port 2004. The random numbers extracted in this manner are stored in order from the first (first) area. Then, if a starting prize occurs when random numbers are stored in the nth (n = 1 to 3) storage area, the extracted random numbers are stored in the n + 1th (n = 1 to 3) storage area. When the variable display start condition based on the random number stored in the storage area is satisfied, various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read out and stored in the Nth (N = 2 to 4) storage area. Various random numbers are moved to the (N−1) th (N = 2 to 4) th storage area. As a result, the order in which the suspension of the variable display of the second special symbol has occurred is stored in an identifiable manner, and the suspension of the variable display is released in order from the earliest suspension (the suspension that occurred first). .

  After that, as a process of step S5305, a big hit determination process that is a determination process for the big hit is based on the read first big hit determination random number. After that, when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S5281) (step S5306), the process ends.

  FIG. 109 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the jackpot determination process (step S5305).

  If the current gaming state is a high probability state (high probability short time state, high probability non-short time state) (step S5311), the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 has a high probability state shown in FIG. 110 (A). A jackpot determination table is selected (step S5312), and if the current gaming state is a low probability state (step S5311), the jackpot determination table at the low probability shown in FIG. 110A is selected (step S5313) and selected. The jackpot determination table and the jackpot determination random number read in step S5302 of the first special symbol normal process are compared (step S5314).

  As shown in FIG. 110 (A), the jackpot determination table is stored in the main control built-in ROM, and the game state is low in probability for each type of special random numbers (first jackpot determination random number, second jackpot determination random number). (Low probability non-short time state, low probability short time state) and low probability jackpot judgment table and high used when the gaming state is high probability (high probability non-time short state, high probability short time state) And a jackpot determination table at the time of probability. In the jackpot determination table at low probability that is referred to for comparison with the first jackpot determination random number, it matches with the jackpot determination value indicating that the 204 types of first jackpot determination random numbers have won the jackpot, 65332 The first big hit determination random numbers (65536 types) are associated with each other so that the first big hit determination random number of the type matches the loss determination value indicating that it is the loss (a big hit probability at a low probability; “1/321”). On the other hand, in order to compare with the jackpot determination random number (second jackpot determination random number) of the second special symbol in the second special symbol process processing executed in step S5239 of the special symbol and special electric accessory control processing In the jackpot determination table at the time of the low probability to be referenced, the 204 types of second jackpot determination random numbers coincide with the jackpot determination value indicating that the jackpot has been won, and the 65332 types of second jackpot determination random numbers are the above-mentioned losses. The second jackpot determination random numbers are associated with each other so as to coincide with the loss determination value indicating that (the jackpot probability at the time of low probability; approximately “1/321”).

  In addition, in the jackpot determination table at a high probability referred to for comparison with the first jackpot determination random number, 2040 types of first jackpot determination random numbers coincide with the jackpot determination value, and 63634 types of first jackpot determination The first jackpot determination random numbers are associated with each other so that the random numbers match the loss determination value (the jackpot probability at the time of high probability; approximately “1/32”). On the other hand, in the jackpot determination table at the time of high probability referred to for comparison with the second jackpot determination random number in the second special symbol process executed in step S5239 of the special symbol and special electric accessory control process. , 2040 types of second jackpot determination random numbers coincide with the jackpot determination value indicating that the jackpot has been won, and 63396 types of second jackpot determination random numbers match the loss determination value indicating that the above-mentioned loss has occurred. The second jackpot determination random numbers are associated with each other (the jackpot probability at the time of high probability; approximately “1/32”). It should be noted that the jackpot determination value set in the jackpot determination table referenced for comparison with the first jackpot determination random number and the jackpot determination table referenced for comparison with the second jackpot determination random number (the jackpot determination value of the jackpot determination value) The number of jackpot judgment values may be different with the same number (the jackpot probability is the same), or the number of jackpot judgment values may be different (the jackpot probability is different)). In this case, at least one of the jackpot determination values of the jackpot determination table at the low probability and the jackpot determination table at the high probability may be different (both may be different). .

  When the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 compares the selected jackpot determination table with the jackpot determination random number read in step S5302 of the first special symbol normal process, and determines that it is a jackpot (step S5315). ), A big hit flag indicating that the fluctuation is won by the big win is set (step S5316), and the big hit determination process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S5315 that the player has lost the jackpot, based on the selected jackpot determination table, the read jackpot determination random number matches the jackpot determination value indicating that the jackpot has been won. Is determined (step S5317). However, as described above, in step S5302 of the first special symbol normal process (second special symbol process) in this example, the big hit determination random number that matches the small hit determination value is not read (small hit probability; In this step S5317, it is determined that the small hit is not won (judgment is determined).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S5317 that the loss occurs, the reach determination table is compared with the reach determination random number read in step S5302 (step S5319).

  A reach determination table (not shown) is stored in the main control built-in ROM, and is used when the gaming state is in a high probability non-short-time state, and when the gaming state is in a high-probability short-time state. And a reach determination table for a low probability state used when the gaming state is a low probability state (low probability non-short state state).

  Here, in the reach determination table in the high-probability short-time state, a reach determination value indicating that one type of reach determination random number is reachable and 71 types of reach determination random numbers are not reachable. The reach determination random numbers are associated with each other so as to match. However, the reach determination table in the high probability short-time state matches the reach determination value indicating that all 72 types of reach determination random numbers do not reach in order to maximize the game progress speed in the short-time state. Thus, the reach determination value indicating the reach may not be matched.

  In the reach determination table in the low probability state, five types of reach determination random numbers including the same reach determination random number as the reach determination random number set in the reach determination table in the high probability short state reach. The reach determination random numbers are associated with each other so as to match the reach determination values indicating that the 67 reach reach determination random numbers do not reach. As described above, in this embodiment, in the low probability state, the reach determination value indicating reach is higher than that in the high probability short time state, and is obtained with a predetermined probability.

  Further, in the reach determination table in the high probability non-short-time state, five types of reach determination including the same reach determination random number as the reach determination random number set in the reach determination table in the high-probability short-time state and the low-probability state The reach determination random numbers are associated with the reach determination values indicating that the random numbers for reach coincide with the reach determination values indicating that the 67 types of reach determination random numbers do not reach. As described above, in this embodiment, the reach determination value indicating the reach in the high probability non-time-short state is the same as the low probability non-time-short state.

  When the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 compares the selected reach determination table with the reach determination random number read in step S5302 (step S5319) and determines that the reach is lost (YES in step S5120). Then, a reach flag indicating that the change becomes reach is set, and the process is terminated (step S5121).

  FIG. 111 is a flowchart showing a procedure for the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S5281).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop symbol setting process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 111, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first The result of the lottery process of the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped, that is, the result of the jackpot determination process (step S5305) is determined. The lottery processing result is determined by determining whether or not the big hit flag is set (step S5331).

  If the big hit flag is set in step S5331, main control MPU 1310a selects the symbol determination table shown in FIG. 110 (B), and the first big hit symbol random number read in step S5302 of the first special symbol normal process Are compared with the selected symbol determination table to determine a big hit symbol as a mode (stop symbol of the first special symbol) when the variable control of the first special symbol is stopped (step S5332).

  As shown in FIG. 110 (B), in the symbol determination table on the first special symbol side, the random number for the first big hit symbol (here, a total of 200) for the determination result (8R probability variation big hit A, 8R normal big hit) Of the first jackpot symbol) is stored in an associated manner. As shown in FIG. 110 (C), the symbol determination table on the second special symbol side includes a random number for the second jackpot symbol (16R probability variation big hit, 8R probability variation big hit B, 2R normal big hit) Here, a total of 200 second big hit symbol random numbers) are stored in association with each other.

  The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 determines the type of jackpot by specifying the determination result associated with the acquired jackpot symbol random number. In the symbol determination table of this example, the jackpot type determined based on the first jackpot symbol random number is set different from the jackpot type determined based on the second jackpot symbol random number. . More specifically, the allocation rate (allocation) between the probable jackpot that triggers the transition to the high probability state and the regular jackpot that does not trigger the transition to the high probability state are the same, but for the first jackpot symbol The expected value of the game ball that can be acquired by the jackpot determined based on the second jackpot design random number is larger than the expected value of the game ball that can be acquired by the jackpot determined based on the random number. ing.

The following is a concise summary of the specific game and performance contents for each type of jackpot.
1. The count sensor 4005 indicates that nine game balls have been won after the grand prize opening 2103 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) after the jackpot symbol combination appears in the effect display device 1600. Opening and closing patterns (round games) that are closed when detected in 8 are repeated 8 times to control the game ball to enter the big winning opening 2103 (easy) 8R big hit gaming state, and after this 8R big hit gaming state Is controlled to the high probability short-time state until the next big hit gaming state occurs, and during the execution period of the 8R big hit gaming state, a battle effect (battle victory effect) is won for a specific character, Are controlled to the effect mode indicated in the effect display device 1600 to be in a relatively advantageous state.

  2. The count sensor 4005 indicates that nine game balls have been won after the grand prize opening 2103 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) after the jackpot symbol combination appears in the effect display device 1600. Opening and closing patterns (round games) that are closed when detected in 8 are repeated 8 times to control the game ball to enter the big winning opening 2103 (easy) 8R big hit gaming state, and after this 8R big hit gaming state Is controlled to a low-probability short-time state until the special symbol fluctuation display is digested 100 times (or wins a big hit within the period until it is digested 100 times), and during the execution period of the 8R jackpot gaming state An effect display device that performs a battle effect (battle defeat effect) in which a specific character is defeated and is in a relatively unfavorable state in a low-probability short-time state 8R usually big hit controlled in the effect mode as shown in 600

  3. The count sensor 4005 indicates that nine game balls have been won after the grand prize opening 2103 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) after the jackpot symbol combination appears in the effect display device 1600. Opening and closing patterns (round game) that are closed when detected in 16 are repeated 16 times to control the game ball to enter the big winning opening 2103 (easy) to the 16R big hit gaming state, and after this 16R big hit gaming state Is controlled to a high-probability short-time state until the next big hit gaming state occurs, and an effect on whether the number of rounds exceeds 8 rounds (whether it will be 16 rounds) during the execution period of the 16R big hit gaming state (successful production) ) Will be added, and a relatively advantageous state will be given after a predetermined period of time has passed since it was controlled to a high-probability time-short state. 16R sometimes is controlled to effect mode shown in the effect display device 1600 probability variation jackpot

  4). The count sensor 4005 indicates that nine game balls have been won after the grand prize opening 2103 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) after the jackpot symbol combination appears in the effect display device 1600. Opening and closing patterns (round games) that are closed when detected in 8 are repeated 8 times to control the game ball to enter the big winning opening 2103 (easy) 8R big hit gaming state, and after this 8R big hit gaming state Is controlled to a high-probability short-time state until the next jackpot gaming state occurs, and an effect on whether the number of rounds exceeds eight (16 rounds) during the execution period of the 8R jackpot gaming state (failure effect) ) Is performed, and after a predetermined period of time has passed since it was controlled to a high-probability time-short state, this is a relatively advantageous state. 8R probability variation big hit B but which is controlled in the effect mode as shown in the effect display device 1600

  5. The count sensor 4005 indicates that nine game balls have been won after the big winning opening 2103 is opened for a short time (for example, 0.6 seconds) after the jackpot symbol combination appears in the effect display device 1600 or for a long time. The opening / closing pattern (round game) that is closed when it is detected at 2 is repeated twice to control the game ball to a 2R big hit game state that is difficult to enter the big prize opening 2103. After this 2R big hit game state, Controls the low probability short-time state until the symbol change display is digested 100 times (or wins a big hit within the period until 100 times it is consumed), and a specific character during the execution period of the 2R jackpot gaming state In the production display device 1600, a battle production (battle defeat production) is defeated, and in a low probability short-time state, the state is relatively disadvantageous. 2R usually big hit controlled in the effect mode indicated Oite

  In the left-handed state, the game ball does not pass through the gate portion 2003, and the movable piece (not shown) that opens the second starting port 2004 is not driven. Therefore, in the left-handed state, the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 2004 does not occur, only the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 2002 occurs, and there is a holding ball of the second special symbol Except for the case, only the variation display of the first special symbol is executed in the first special symbol display 1403, and the big hit (8R probability variable big hit A, 8R normal big hit) related to the first special symbol is generated. Similarly, in the right-handed state, the game ball is not won at the first start port 2002. Therefore, in the right-handed state, only the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 2004 occurs, and the second special symbol display 1186 in the second special symbol display 1186 except for the case where there is a holding ball of the first special symbol. Only the fluctuation display is executed, and big hits (16R probability change big hit, 8R probability change big hit B, 2R normal big hit) related to the second special symbol are generated.

  In addition, in the jackpot related to the first special symbol, the maximum winning opening 2103 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds), and the opening / closing pattern is repeated 8 times, whereas only about 1000 game balls are paid out. With a big hit related to the second special symbol, a maximum of 2000 game balls can be paid out by repeating an open / close pattern that opens the grand prize winning opening 2103 for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) 16 times.

  In the first special symbol stop symbol setting process, when the 8R probability variable big hit A is determined, the 8R probability variable big hit A symbol is determined as the big hit symbol, and when the 8R normal big hit is determined, the 8R normal big hit symbol is changed to the 8R normal big hit symbol. decide. Although not shown, when the 16R probability variation big hit is determined in the second special symbol stop symbol setting process, the 16R probability variation big hit symbol is decided as the big hit symbol, and when the 8R probability variation big hit B is decided, the 8R probability variation big hit is decided as the big hit symbol. When the symbol B is determined and the 2R normal jackpot is determined, the 2R normal jackpot symbol is determined as the jackpot symbol.

  In addition, if the big hit flag is not set in step S5331, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 next determines whether or not the small hit flag is set as processing in step S5333. As a result, if the small hit flag is set in the process corresponding to step S5333 in the second special symbol process (step S5239), the small special symbol ( After the specific symbol stop mode is determined (step S5334), the process proceeds to step S5337.

  Furthermore, if the small hit flag is not set in step S5333, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 determines that the special symbol is lost as the mode when the special symbol fluctuation is stopped (step S5336), and then proceeds to step S5337. To do.

  After the stop symbol determination process is performed in this way, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 performs the above-described lottery result (a big hit type, a small hit, a reach out, or a out of one) as a process in step S5337. A determination result notification command corresponding to each lottery result is set so that an instruction (which may instruct a stop symbol form of the first special symbol) is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. Thereafter, when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first variation pattern setting process (step S5282) as the process of step S5338, the process is terminated.

  The peripheral control MPU 1511a controls the display of the effect display device 1600 based on the received determination result notification command and the variation pattern command (left, middle, and right decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner and left decorative symbols → right decorative symbols → The display is stopped in the order of the middle decorative symbols (the left, middle, and right decorative symbols may be displayed in a synchronized manner with the same symbol in a variable manner and may be stopped at the same time). For example, the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines a combination of three left, middle, and right decorative symbols when a type other than 2R normal big hit is won as the big hit. On the other hand, when 2R normal jackpot is obtained, it is determined to be a specific symbol combination (a combination in which at least one of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols is not the same as other symbols). In addition, when a reach loss is specified, a design with a reach (a combination of symbols having the same left and right decorative designs of “0” to “9” but having a different middle decorative design; reach lose In the case where the symbol is determined to be out of order, the symbol is determined to be a symbol without reach (a combination in which at least the left and right decorative symbols are different from the left, middle, and right decorative symbols). The stop symbol determined in this way is displayed on the effect display device 1600 when the change time specified from the change pattern command has elapsed (when the game effect ends).

  In any case, when the winning is obtained as a result of the progress of the game, the peripheral control MPU 1511a causes the winning effect display (special display mode) to appear before the big hit game is started, and the big hit game After the game is started, an effect display during the big hit game is made to appear.

  FIG. 112 is a flowchart showing a procedure for the first variation pattern setting process (step S5282).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first variation pattern setting process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 112, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 sets the jackpot flag. If so (step S5341), a big hit variation pattern table (not shown) corresponding to the type of jackpot determined in step S5332 of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process is selected (step S5342), and the small hit flag Is set (step S5343), a variation pattern table (not shown) at the time of small hit is selected (step S5344), and if a reach flag is set (step S5345), a variation pattern table at the time of reach ( (Not shown) is selected (step S5346). If none of the grayed and reach flag is not set, that is, when the normal off (off is not executed reach demonstration) selects the off time of the fluctuation pattern table (not shown) (step S5347).

  Then, the variation pattern to be executed is determined by comparing the selected variation pattern table with the variation display pattern random number read in step S5302 of the first special symbol normal process (step S5348), and the determined variation pattern is started. The variation pattern command for notifying the peripheral control board 1510 of this fact is set, and the variation display of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display 1403 is started (step S5349). Further, the main control MPU 1310a sets the variation time set corresponding to the variation pattern determined to determine the variation pattern in the variation timer (step S5350). Then, when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process is shifted to the first special symbol variation processing (step S5283) (step S5355), the processing is terminated. As a result, the first special symbol display unit 1403 performs the variable display control of the first special symbol for the variation time determined in this way, and the effect display device 1600 controls the effect in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol. Will be done.

  In addition, the variation pattern table of this example is a big hit determination random number (first big hit determination random number, second big hit determination random number) and a big hit symbol random number (first big hit symbol random number, second big hit symbol random number) A plurality of types are provided for each determination result. The variation patterns set in each variation pattern table include a plurality of variation time information indicating predetermined times (variation times) required for variation display control of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol). The first variation display pattern random numbers are stored in association with each other. Accordingly, the main control MPU 1310a reads out the selected variation pattern table and the first special symbol normal process in step S5302 among a plurality of types of variation pattern tables according to the determination result based on the jackpot determination random number and the jackpot symbol random number. The above-mentioned special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is obtained by comparing the variable display pattern random number with the random number for variable display pattern read out and obtaining the fluctuation time information associated with the read random number for variable display pattern from this table. Determine the variation pattern. Thereby, the determination process about the variation pattern of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is performed. The variation pattern table is stored in the main control built-in ROM.

  However, as described above, in this example, since the small hit is not won, the variation pattern table at the time of the small hit is not used. In this example, the small win is not won, but the small win may be won.

  Further, in the variation pattern table at the time of reach in this example, the type of reach effect to be executed is determined by comparing the determination value indicating which reach effect is executed with the random number for the variable display pattern. Has been. For example, in the non-short-time state, 164 types of random display pattern random numbers among the 241 types of random display pattern random numbers are set as determination values (0 to 163) indicating that any one of the normal reach effects is executed. It is set as a determination value (164 to 222) indicating that one of the random numbers for the variable display pattern is to execute any one of the super-reaching effects having a low jackpot expectation level, and the 18 random display pattern random numbers have a high jackpot expectation level. It is set as a determination value (223 to 240) indicating that any one of the super reach effects is executed.

  The super reach production (SP production) has a higher expectation degree of big hit than the normal reach production, and the player who wants to generate the big hit gaming state is the player who is in the big hit gaming state when the super reach production is executed. The expectation of is becoming higher. In other words, such a super reach production has the highest selection rate in the fluctuation pattern table at the time of big hit, and even if a losing is eventually displayed, the player's expectation level for the big hit gaming state Can be increased. However, in fact, in order to sufficiently increase the player's expectation level for the big hit gaming state, a highly anticipated notice effect that is a lottery separate from the variation pattern appears during the period when the super reach effect is being executed It is required to do (combine).

  In addition, in the fluctuation pattern table at the time of loss, which is provided corresponding to the first jackpot determination random number and the first jackpot symbol random number and used to determine the fluctuation time of the first special symbol, the non-short-time state and the short-time state And 12 seconds of fluctuation time are set in common. On the other hand, in the variation pattern table at the time of loss, which is provided in correspondence with the second jackpot determination random number and the second symbol random number and is used when determining the variation time of the second special symbol, the time reduction state is 0.1 seconds to The variation time of 12 seconds can be set, and the variation time of 12 seconds is set as the non-short-time state. Thus, the variation time of the first special symbol is the same in the short-time state and in the non-short-time state, and the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 2004 is made during the variation of the first special symbol in the short-time state. In addition to prompting, a time for the player to win a game ball at the second starting port 2004 is secured.

  In addition, when 0.1 second is selected from the variation time at the time of the second special symbol loss, each game ball that is driven into the game area 5a at intervals of 0.6 seconds in the short time state (high probability short time state, etc.) It is possible to suppress the discharge without being subjected to the lottery process.

  In other words, the game ball that has been hit right is supplied to an area directly above the gate portion 2003. When the game ball is received from this area to the gate unit 2003 when in a short time state (such as a high probability short time state), a win as a normal symbol is obtained (for example, the winning probability is 100%), The movable piece related to the opening and closing of the second starting port 2004 is maintained in the open state for a long period (5.5 seconds in this example). As a result, in a situation where it can be successively received one after another at the second starting port 2004 (a short time state in which almost all of the game balls thrown to the right side of the center accessory 2500 can be received by the second starting port 2004). Even if these game balls are accepted, a control is performed so that the lottery on the second special symbol side can be digested one after another with a high jackpot probability (probability in a high probability state) of “approximately 1/32”. Become possible.

  In this example, when the player operates the handle 302, the game ball is fired at intervals of 0.6 seconds. Therefore, in the short time state (high probability short time state, etc.) Game balls are often received at the start port 2004 at intervals of 0.6 seconds. In this regard, in this example, as described above, the fluctuation pattern table at the time of the second special symbol losing based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 2004 is extremely variable as the fluctuation time of the short time state (high probability short time state etc.). It can be set to a short 0.1 second. In other words, in this case, when the losing is obtained, the symbol variation will be completed only in the time (0.1 seconds) less than the game ball firing interval (0.6 seconds). Even in a situation where game balls launched at intervals are successively received by the second start port 2004, it is possible to prevent such game balls from being discharged without being subjected to the lottery process. .

  FIG. 113 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol variation process (step S5283).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol variation process is to be performed, as shown in FIG. 113, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first performs step S5371. As the process, 1 is subtracted from the variation timer in which the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern determined in the lottery process (step S5282) for the variation pattern is set. As a result, when it is determined that the variation time timer is 0, that is, the lottery variation time has elapsed (step S5372), the process proceeds to step S5373. That is, in the process of step S5373, when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first special symbol stop process (step S5284), the process is terminated.

  When the variation timer is not 0 even though the variation timer is decremented by 1 (step S5371), until the variation time timer becomes 0 (until the time when the symbol should be stopped). Each time the timer interrupt process is performed, the processes of steps S5371 and S5372 are performed.

  FIG. 114 is a flowchart showing a procedure for the first special symbol stop process (step S5284).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop process is to be performed, as shown in FIG. 114, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first performs step S5381. As the process, the display control for causing the first special symbol indicator 1403 to display the stop symbol determined in the first special symbol stop symbol setting process is performed, and the first special symbol is displayed on the effect display device 1600. A stop display command for instructing the derivation display of the display result of the decorative symbol corresponding to the stop symbol is set as a command to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S5382).

  When the big hit flag is set (YES in step S5386), the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 sets a big hit start command indicating that the big hit gaming state is started (step S5387), The waiting time until the start of the big hit gaming state (the time for displaying to the effect of starting the big hit gaming state) is set in the interval timer (step S5388). Then, a big hit running flag indicating that the big hit gaming state is being executed is set, and if the high probability flag is set, the high probability flag is reset, and if the short time flag is set, When the time-short flag is reset (step S5389), the variation counter is further reset, and the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first special symbol normal process that is the initial value (step S5389). In step S5394), this process ends. That is, in this case, when the next interrupt control is performed, it is determined that the big hit execution flag is set in the process of step S5235, and the big hit game is executed in the above big hit control process (step S5240a). The state will be executed.

  The jackpot start command is a command transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and is prepared individually according to the type of jackpot. In step S5387, a big hit start command (8R positive change big hit A command, 8R normal big hit command, 8R normal big hit command, 16R positive big hit command, 8R normal big hit command, 8R normal big hit B, 2R normal big hit B, 2R normal big hit B) Jackpot command, 8R probability variable jackpot B command, 2R normal jackpot command). Thereby, the jackpot gaming state effect (battle effect or extra challenge effect) according to the type of jackpot instructed by the jackpot start command is executed by the effect display device 1600, each lamp / LED, each speaker, and the like.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of step S5386 that the big hit flag is not set (NO in step S5386), it is first determined whether or not the low probability time-short state is set (step S5390). And when it is in the low probability short time state, it is determined whether or not the number of fluctuations of the special symbol digested after being controlled to the low probability short time state has reached a predetermined upper limit value (here, 100 times) ( Step S5391). That is, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol digested after being controlled to the low-probability short-time state reaches a predetermined upper limit (100 times), it is determined that the condition for ending the low-probability short-time state is satisfied. The function is stopped to shift to the normal gaming state (low probability non-short game state) (step S5392).

  Then, after the processing related to the time reduction function is performed in this way, it is determined whether or not the small hit flag is set (step S5393). As a result, when it is determined that the small hit flag is set (YES in step S5393), a small hit start command indicating that the small hit gaming state is to be started is set (step S5394). The waiting time until the start of the state (the time for displaying the effect of starting the small hit gaming state) is set in the interval timer (step S5395). Then, a small hitting execution flag indicating that the small hitting gaming state is being executed is set (step S5396), and the process proceeds to the first special symbol normal process which is the initial value of the first special symbol process flag. When updated to (step S5394), this processing is terminated. That is, in this case, when the next interrupt control is performed, it is determined that the small hitting execution flag is set in the processing in step S5236, and in the small hitting control processing (step S5240b) described above. The small hit gaming state is executed. Incidentally, unlike the case where the big hit is won, the gaming state is not changed when such a small hit gaming state is executed.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that neither the big hit flag nor the small hit flag is set (NO in step S5393), the first special symbol process is performed without performing the processing relating to the big hit or the small hit as being lost. When the flag is updated so that the process is shifted to the first special symbol normal process which is the initial value (step S5394), this process is terminated. That is, in this case, when the next interrupt control is performed, it is determined that the big hit execution flag or the small hit execution flag is not set (steps S5235, S236), and a new game is determined according to the pending status. Processing related to the progress of (lottery and symbol control) is performed (steps S5237 to S5239).

  FIG. 115 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the normal symbol and normal electric accessory control process (step S116).

  If it is determined in the process of step S5401 that the detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 is on and it is determined that a game ball has passed to the gate unit 2003, as shown in FIG. The main control MPU 1310a of the control board 1310 first executes a gate section passing process such as acquiring a normal random number of a normal symbol from the random number counter and storing it in the normal symbol holding storage area of the RAM as the process of step S5402. To do.

  Next, in the normal symbol process, one of the following five process processes is selectively executed according to the normal symbol process flag.

1. Normal symbol normal processing in which a normal random number stored in the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a is read out, and a lottery process is performed on the display mode when the variation control of the normal symbol is stopped based on the read normal random number (step S5403).
2. Normal symbol variation time determination process (step S5404) in which a lottery process or the like is performed on the variation pattern (variation time) of the ordinary symbol displayed on the ordinary symbol display unit 1402 based on the ordinary symbol random number.
3. Normal symbol variation processing that waits until the variation display of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display unit 1402 is stopped (step S5405).
4). The normal symbol variation display so that the normal symbol variation control stop mode determined based on the result of the lottery process for the normal symbol variation control stop mode is displayed on the normal symbol display unit 1402. Normal symbol stop processing to stop (step S5406)
5. When the result of the lottery process regarding the mode when the variable control of the normal symbol is stopped is a mode that suggests “per-common”, the movable piece is opened and the game ball is received at the second starting port 2004. Ordinary electric accessory release process for executing the process for controlling the machine (step S5407)

  The normal symbol process flag is operated so that its initial value indicates that the normal symbol normal process (step S5403) should be performed.

  FIG. 116 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the gate section passage processing (step S5402).

  If it is determined in the process of step S5401 that the detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 is on and there is a game ball passing through the gate unit 2003, as shown in FIG. In step S5411, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first obtains the counter value by the normal hold number counter from the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a. Then, based on this counter value, it is determined whether or not the number of ordinary symbols held is “4” which is the maximum value.

  In the process of step S5411, when it is determined that the number of normal symbols held is not the maximum value, the following steps S5412 to S5414 are performed to newly put the normal symbol variable display control on hold. Processing will be performed. That is, first, as the processing of step S5412, the normal holding number counter is incremented (added by 1). In step S5413, the normal random number and the normal variable random number are acquired from the random number counter. Then, in step S5414, each random number obtained in this way is stored in the normal symbol holding storage area corresponding to the counter value by the normal holding number counter in the RAM storage area of the main control MPU 1310a.

  However, if it is determined in step S5411 that the number of normal symbols held is the maximum value, the normal symbol variation display control is not newly held. That is, by not executing the processing of steps S5412 to S5414, the normal symbol variation display control is not newly put on hold.

  FIG. 117 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the normal symbol normal process (step S5403).

  When the normal symbol process flag indicates that the normal symbol normal process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 117, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first performs the process of step S5421. It is determined whether or not there is a variable display control of the normal symbol in the hold state based on the counter value by the normal hold number counter. As a result, if it is determined that there is a variable display control of the normal symbol in the hold state, the normal symbol stored in the normal symbol hold storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a is then processed as step S5422. The random number stored in the earliest storage area among the random numbers related to the symbol display mode (for example, ordinary random numbers, ordinary variable random numbers) is read from the RAM. Then, as the processing of steps S5423 and S5424, the normal reserved number counter is counted down, and the normal symbol variation display stored in each storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a is stopped. The random number (ordinary random number, ordinary variable random number) related to the display mode is shifted in a first-in first-out (First-In First-Out) mode.

  Specifically, the normal symbol holding storage area has four storage areas 1 to 4, and the random numbers extracted according to the passage of the game ball to the gate unit 2003 are sequentially from the first (first) area. Remember. When random numbers are stored in the nth (n = 1 to 3) storage area and the game ball passes through the gate unit 2003, the extracted random numbers are stored in the n + 1th (n = 1 to 3) storage area. When the start condition of the variable display based on the random number stored in the first storage area is satisfied, various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read and the Nth (N = 2 to 4) storage area Are moved to the (N-1) th (N = 2 to 4) th storage area. Thereby, the order in which the suspension of the variable symbol display control of the normal symbol occurs can be stored in an identifiable manner, and the suspension of the variable symbol control can be released in order from the earliest suspension (the first occurrence). .

  Next, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 selects a normal time hit table determination table (not shown) if the current gaming state is a short time state (high probability short time state) (step S5426) ( In step S5426), if the current gaming state is a non-time-short state (low probability non-time-short state, high probability non-time-short state) (step S5425), a non-time-short normal figure determination table (not shown) is selected ( In step S5427, the selected normal symbol determination table is compared with the normal random number read in step S5422 of the normal symbol normal process (step S5428).

  It should be noted that the common figure determination table is stored in the ROM of the main control MPU 1310a, and the normal figure determination table used when the gaming state is short time (high probability short time state) and the gaming state is non-short time. And a non-time / short-time normal figure determination table used in the case of time (low probability non-time short state, high probability non-time short state). Then, in the hourly common figure judgment table that is referred to for comparison with the ordinary random number, all the 255 kinds of ordinary random numbers coincide with the common figure judgment value indicating that the common figure is won. The ordinary random numbers are associated with each other so that they do not coincide with the usual deviation judgment value indicating that they are off. As described above, when the game ball is passed to the gate portion 2003, the winning ball is always won by the usual time, and the movable piece is opened and the game ball to the second starting port 2004 is opened. Controls acceptance. Instead of all 255 types, a larger number of ordinary random numbers than in the non-time-saving state may coincide with the determination value per universal figure indicating that it is won per universal figure.

  In addition, in the non-time-saving ordinary figure determination table referred to for comparison with the ordinary random number, all 255 types of ordinary random numbers may coincide with the ordinary figure determination value indicating that each ordinary figure is won. The normal random numbers are associated with each other so as to coincide with the misplacement determination value indicating the misplacement. As described above, in the non-time saving time, even if a game ball passes through the gate portion 2003, it is not won per hit, so the movable piece 2106 is opened and the second start port is opened. It is not possible to control the acceptance of game balls to 2004. However, as described above, the normal symbol hit may be obtained even in the non-short-time state. In this case, the winning probability (for example, 50%) is lower than that in the short-time state, and the normal symbol lottery result is the win. When the movable piece of the second start port 2004 is opened for a time shorter than the time-shortening state, for example, for 2 seconds to allow the game ball to be received in the second start port 2004, the movable piece is moved forward again. You may make it impossible to accept the game ball in the second starting port 2004.

  If the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 compares the selected universal symbol determination table with the normal random number read in step S5422 of the normal symbol normal process, and determines that it is normal symbol (step S5429). ) After setting the flag for the normal symbol indicating that the variation is won per normal symbol (step S5430), the normal symbol per symbol as the mode when the fluctuation control of the normal symbol is stopped (ordinary symbol stop symbol) The symbol is determined (step S5431). On the other hand, if the result of comparison between the selected normal symbol determination table and the normal random number read in step S5422 of the normal symbol normal processing is that it is determined to be out of place, the variation of the normal symbol A non-usual symbol as a mode at the time of control stop (ordinary symbol stop symbol) is determined (step S5432). After that, when the above-described normal symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the normal symbol variation time determination process (step S5404) (step S5433), this process is terminated.

  While the control by the main control MPU 1310a is performed, the peripheral control MPU 1511a acquires the above-described various commands transmitted from the main control MPU 1310a, thereby obtaining the peripheral control unit steady process (received command analysis process ( In step S1022)), the game situation is grasped each time, and an effect corresponding to the game situation can be executed.

  More specifically, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first determines whether or not there is a situation in which a start winning has occurred, and performs control related to a hold display and a pre-reading effect according to the start winning in the situation. After that, by updating the process flag based on the grasped game situation, the following variation pattern designation command reception waiting process, effect symbol variation start process, effect symbol variation in process, effect symbol variation stop process, jackpot display process , One of the big hit game processing and the big hit end effect processing is executed.

  Fluctuation pattern designation command reception waiting process: It takes an effect (demonstration effect, etc.) when the symbol is not in the variation state and the control related to the big hit is not performed until the variation pattern command related to the variation pattern is received from the main control MPU 1310a. When the control is performed and the variation pattern command related to the variation pattern is received from the main control MPU 1310a, the process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the effect symbol variation start process.

  Effect symbol variation start processing: Various effect contents (effect pattern, notice effect, etc.) in the symbol change period are determined based on the change pattern command, etc., and the decoration symbol change is started based on the determined effect contents. To control. Thereafter, the value of the process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol changing process. Of the variation patterns (effect patterns), many of the “variation patterns stopped with jackpot symbols (effect patterns)” are prepared in pairs with the “variation patterns stopped with loss symbols (effect patterns)”. Since they function as the same variation pattern (effect pattern), it is possible to provide an effect as to whether a big hit symbol or a lost symbol appears. Therefore, hereinafter, when describing the variation pattern (effect pattern), when “predetermined variation pattern”, “specific variation pattern”, etc. are described, unless otherwise noted, “stops at the big hit symbol” It means both “predetermined variation pattern (specific variation pattern)” and “predetermined variation pattern (specific variation pattern) stopped by losing symbol”, and as a result of the development of the production in the same manner It will arrive at the branch point where either the big hit symbol or the lost symbol appears.

Effect symbol variation processing: Various effects determined in the effect symbol variation start process are controlled at each timing during the symbol variation period, and the process flag value is determined when the variation time ends. Update to a value corresponding to the change stop process.
Production symbol variation stop processing: Control of deriving and displaying the display result (stop symbol) by stopping the variation of the decorative symbol based on the reception of the command (design determination command) for instructing all symbols to be stopped. If the decorative symbol is stopped at the jackpot symbol, the value of the process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot display processing, and if the decorative symbol is stopped at the loss symbol symbol, the process flag value is changed to a waiting process for receiving the variation pattern designation command. Update to a value corresponding to.

  Big hit display process: Controls an effect (such as a display effect that informs the effect display device 1600 of the occurrence of a big hit) during a period from when the decorative symbol stops at the big win symbol until the big hit game is started. Thereafter, the value of the process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the big hit game processing.

  Big hit game processing: Control related to various effects during the occurrence of the big hit game state. When the big hit gaming state ends, the value of the process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the big hit end effect process.

  Big-hit end effect processing: In the effect display device 1600, an effect (such as a display effect for notifying the player that the big-hit gaming state has ended) is controlled in a period from the end of the big-hit gaming state to the variation allowed state. . Then, the process flag value is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern designation command reception waiting process.

FIG. 118 is a diagram showing an effect pattern (variable effect) determination table T1 referred to in the effect symbol variation start process when in the normal gaming state.
As shown in FIG. 118, in the determination table T1, effect patterns (variation effects) are associated with each of the change numbers 1 to 22 indicated by the change pattern commands. Therefore, when the peripheral control MPU 1511a obtains the variation pattern command from the main control MPU 1310a, the effect pattern (variation effect) associated with the variation pattern command is determined based on the determination table T1, and the determined effect pattern Based on (variation effect), control is performed so that the variation of the decorative design is started.

  Note that the effect pattern (variation effect) does not necessarily correspond one-to-one with the change number indicated by the change pattern command. For example, a plurality of effect patterns (variation effects) are associated with one variation number indicated by the variation pattern command, and one of these effect patterns (variation effects) is determined based on an effect lottery or a game situation. You may make it do. As will be described later, the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment is also configured such that a plurality of effect patterns are associated with some of the variation numbers 1 to 22.

  In addition, as will be described later, the peripheral control MPU 1511a, after determining the effect pattern (variation effect) in this way, performs a lottery (notice effect determination process) based on the result of the big hit determination, the symbol type, and the variation pattern. By performing the control (process during effect symbol variation) for causing the notice effect won in the notice lottery to appear at a predetermined timing while the determined effect pattern (variable effect) is performed, a plurality of effect contents can be obtained. The expectation degree that the jackpot symbol appears is suggested by the appearance mode etc. as those that can be combined.

  And conventionally, in such a combined effect, there are cases where a plurality of appearances are executed while one effect pattern (variable effect) is being executed while the same specific notice effect (for example, a timer effect), As a result, it is expected to maintain amusement interests. However, since the announcement effect can be combined only when the degree of expectation that the jackpot symbol appears is high, the frequency with which multiple timer effects are executed while one effect pattern (variable effect) is being executed is naturally low. Therefore, it was considered difficult to sufficiently improve the game entertainment.

  As will be described later, the “timer effect” refers to a predetermined effect that appears during execution of an effect pattern (variable effect), and a first predetermined numerical value is displayed for the timing at which the predetermined effect is performed. (E.g., "60 seconds") to a second predetermined numerical value (e.g., "0 second") or a count effect display, or a standby display (such as in preparation) before starting the count display It is. In other words, in this case, when a count display (for example, countdown) from the first predetermined value is started as a timer effect, it is guaranteed that some effect is always generated when the second predetermined value is reached. Become. Alternatively, an effect (for example, a conversation notice or cut-in A) that causes either a relatively unfavorable effect mode (a low-expectation effect mode) or an advantageous effect mode (a high expectation effect mode) to appear to the player. , B, etc.) are targeted for timer production, it is guaranteed that an advantageous production result will surely occur when the second predetermined value is reached. However, in the timer effect (especially the notice timer effect performed as a result of the notice lottery), it is kept secret as to which effect is the effect at least when the count display is started. It is desirable to do so. The “timer effect target” is an effect that appears when the count display (for example, countdown) from the first predetermined value becomes the second predetermined value (for example, “0 seconds”) as the timer effect. Therefore, in the timer effect, the count display is performed toward the timing when the effect object is generated.

  In the “timer effect” according to this embodiment, the elapsed time since the start of counting is displayed to the second decimal place, and the number of seconds and the like are accurately displayed. However, it does not necessarily have to be executed as such a timer effect. If it is executed as a count effect in which a count display is performed by counting up or counting down, the time elapsed from the start of counting ( It does not have to be an accurate indication of the number of seconds.

  Therefore, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, in addition to the timer effect (notice side timer effect) as the effect content that appears only when winning in the notice lottery, the effect pattern (based on the determination table T1) ( It is possible to execute a timer effect (variable side timer effect) incorporated in advance as the effect content of the change effect. In other words, in this case, only the notice timer effect that executes the count effect display as “the effect content of the notice effect that functions so that the expected degree of jackpot is added to the effect pattern determined based on the variation pattern command”. First, it is also executed as “the production contents of the production pattern itself determined based on the variation pattern command”, so that the expectation degree from the jackpot expectation level indicated by the production pattern determined based on the variation pattern command Count effect display (timer effect) can be made to appear without wastefully accumulating (accumulating the expectation by satisfying the condition of “winning in advance notice lottery”). For example, when the jackpot expectation level when a specific performance pattern determined based on the variation pattern command appears is “20%”, if the notice side timer effect is further executed, the jackpot expectation level is increased by the function of the composite performance. For example, when it becomes “40%” and the appearance frequency is inevitably lowered, it is expected to be a big hit when the variable side timer effect is executed as the effect content of the specific effect pattern itself. The timer effect can be executed with the degree kept at “20%” (it can appear only by selecting a specific variation pattern), and the appearance frequency can be suitably maintained.

  Note that the degree of jackpot expectation when an effect pattern (variation effect) appears in the determination table T1 varies depending on the variation number (and also the effect pattern), and basically the jackpot expectation as the variation number increases. There is a tendency to become higher. For example, in the production pattern corresponding to the variation numbers 5 (6), 9 (10), and 17 (18), the variation-side timer production in which “conversation notice” is produced as the production content is executed. The appearance ratio is variation number 5 (6)> variation number 9 (10)> variation number 17 (18), while the jackpot expectation at the time of appearance is variation number 5 (6) <variation number 9 ( 10) <variation number 17 (18). Also, here, for convenience of explanation, only the determination table that is referred to in the normal gaming state will be described in detail. However, in the determination table that is referred to in the low-probability short-time state or the high-probability short-time state, the effect content of the effect pattern itself As described above, an effect pattern (count fluctuation pattern) in which the variable timer effect can be executed is included, and can appear with a probability different from that in the normal gaming state.

  Further, in the determination table T1, the variation numbers 3 to 6 are the same in that the same normal reach effect is performed, but the variation numbers 5 and 6 can be performed on the variable side timer effect for the effect of the conversation notice. This is different from the variation numbers 3 and 4. The variable numbers 7 to 14 are the same in that the same character reach effect is performed. However, the variable numbers 9 and 10 execute the variable timer effect for the effect of the conversation notice, 12, the variable side timer effect with cut-in A as the production target is executed, and the variable numbers 13 and 14 execute the conversation notice and the cut-in A and the variable side timer effect with these as the production target is executed. It is different in that it can be done. Further, the variation numbers 15 to 22 are the same in that the same SP reach production is performed, but the variation numbers 17 and 18 are performed on the variation side timer production with the conversation notice as the production target. 20, the variable timer effect for cut-in B is executed, and the variable numbers 21 and 22 execute the conversation notice and the cut-in B, and the variable timer effect for them is executed. It is different in that it can be done. It should be noted that the big hit expectation is higher when the variable side timer effect with the cut-in A and B as the effect target is executed than when the variable timer effect with the conversation notice as the effect target is executed. Is set so that the expectation degree of jackpot is higher when the variable timer effect for both the conversation notice and the cut-ins A and B is executed.

  Note that “conversation notice” is an effect that can appear at a relatively early stage after an effect pattern (decorative effect of decoration pattern) is executed, and often has a relatively low level of expectation. On the other hand, the cut-in A and B are allowed to appear at a relatively late stage after the production pattern (decorative production of the decorative design) is executed, and the expectation level is relatively high. This is often an effect (or an effect in which a relatively high expectation is always added). Therefore, the “conversation notice” is set so that the appearance ratio (execution probability) is higher than that of other effects (cut-in A, B, and later-described accessory A action, B, etc.) with higher expectations. It is supposed to be. In addition, “cut-in” that appears as the content of the fluctuating effect is executed so as to correspond to cut-in A that appears as the content of the notice effect in the character reach, whereas in the SP reach, the notice is given. It is executed so as to correspond to cut-in B instead of cut-in A that appears as production contents of the production.

  In addition, in the determination table T1 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 118, the content of the effect (effect pattern) for a plurality of change patterns (change numbers 5, 6, 9-14, 17-22). ) Is assigned as the variable timer production. On this basis, if the variation pattern is “a predetermined type (such as variation numbers 1 to 6) such as a shortened variation or a low-expected normal reach effect”, a count effect display as a notice timer effect is displayed. While the effect is not won (by increasing the premium level) and the expected level UP when the notice timer effect appears, the change pattern is “change pattern (execution of change side timer effect ( Variation number 5, 6, 9-14, 17-22, etc.) ”, the variation pattern is the above-described predetermined type (for example, variation) compared to the case where the variation number is not such a count variation pattern. The ratio corresponding to the numbers 1 to 6) is made low.

  Here, 14 variation patterns (variation numbers 5, 6, 9-14, 17-22) are prepared as the count variation patterns in which the variation timer effect is executed. Since only the variation pattern (variation numbers 5 and 6) which may be set to the number corresponds to the predetermined type (variation numbers 1 to 6 and the like), the corresponding ratio is “2/14”. In contrast, eight variation patterns (variation numbers 1 to 4, 7, 8, 15, 16) are prepared as variation patterns in which the variation timer presentation is not executed, and four variation patterns (variations) Since the numbers 1 to 4) correspond to the predetermined type (variable numbers 1 to 6 and the like), the corresponding ratio is “4/8”.

  In such a configuration, when the effect of the variation pattern is a count effect display (variation side timer effect) that can be performed (count variation pattern effect), it is more noticeable than when the variation pattern does not perform the variation side timer effect. The ratio at which it is determined that the count effect display (notice side timer effect) cannot be executed as the effect contents of the effect becomes low. Therefore, it is possible to prompt the appearance of a plurality of count displays within one production pattern (variation production) without unnecessarily accumulating expectations and lowering the appearance frequency.

  As will be described later, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, the effect pattern (variation effect) determined in the effect symbol variation start process is a count variation pattern (variation numbers 5, 6, 9-14, 17-22). ), The proportion of occurrence of the notice side timer effect varies depending on which count variation pattern the count variation pattern is. For example, as shown in FIG. 118, when the effect pattern corresponding to the variable numbers 5 and 6 is executed, the notice timer effect is not displayed at all, and the effect patterns corresponding to the variable numbers 9 to 14 are executed. The notice timer effect is allowed to appear with a medium lottery probability, and when the effect pattern corresponding to the variation numbers 17 to 22 is executed, the notice timer effect is allowed to appear with a high draw probability. ing.

  Note that when the effect pattern corresponding to the variation numbers 5 and 6 is executed, the notice timer effect may appear with a low probability. Further, even if any of the effect patterns corresponding to the variation numbers 15 to 22 in which the notice timer effect is allowed to appear with a high lottery probability, the big hit is actually larger than the case of the loss. The notice pattern timer effect is allowed to appear with a higher lottery probability in the effect pattern that is won, and the variable number 22 is allowed to appear with a higher lottery probability than the variable number 16. ing.

  In such a configuration, the count effect display is displayed in advance according to whether the variation pattern is the first count variation pattern (for example, variation number 10) or the second count variation pattern (for example, variation number 22). The ratio to be executed as the production contents (notice timer production) is different. Therefore, among the above-described count variation patterns (variation numbers 5, 6, 9-14, 17-22) in which the ratio of appearance of a plurality of count displays within one production pattern (variation production) is high, the type thereof Depending on the situation, it is possible to further increase the rate at which a plurality of count displays appear, so that it is expected that the game entertainment will be suitably maintained.

  In particular, as will be described later, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, even if the production pattern in which the production content of the same reach type appears (for example, character reach, SP reach), the variable timer production is included as the production content. In the effect pattern (for example, variation numbers 17 to 22), the notice-side timer is within the execution period of the effect pattern compared to the effect pattern (for example, variation numbers 15 and 16) in which the variable timer effect is not included as the effect content. The ratio of the appearance of the effect (the ratio determined to execute the notice side timer effect in the notice lottery) is increased. In other words, in this case, two timer effects (fluctuating timer effect and notice timer effect) appear in one effect pattern just by expecting a big hit expectation enough to win the one notice timer effect in the notice lottery. As a result, the opportunity to produce a double timer can be realized without wasteful accumulation of the big hit expectation.

  In the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, the effect pattern (variation effect) determined in the effect symbol variation start process is a count variation pattern (variation numbers 5, 6, 9-14, 17-22). Even in such a case, the variable side timer effect (variable side count effect display) for which “conversation notice” is the effect target and the variable side timer effect (variable side count effect display) for which “cut-in” is the effect target Then, the mode of count display (the form and color of count numbers) is made different. That is, in this case, even when an effect pattern (for example, variation numbers 9 and 11) having the same reach effect as the effect content is executed, the count display mode of the variable side timer effect (variable side count effect display) is confirmed. In combination with the fact that “the rate of occurrence of the notice timer effect is different depending on which count variation pattern is present”, the ease of appearance of the notice timer effect is recognized. You can expect.

  In addition, about the aspect of the count display that appears in the notice side timer effect (notice side count effect display), regardless of whether or not the effect target is the same (conversation notice, cut-in), the variable side timer effect (variable side) It may be different from (or at least different from) any of the count display modes (conversation notice, cut-in) appearing in (count effect display), or the same (or at least the same as) the same mode. .

  However, it is relatively expected that the count display executed as the notice timer effect (notice side count effect display) is executed in a common manner regardless of the type of the effect to be produced. This is useful for improving the sense of expectation by allowing the player to recognize that the notice timer effect that is set to a high degree appears. In this sense, it is more preferable that the notice side timer effect is different from any of the count display modes (conversation notice, cut-in) appearing in the variable side timer effect (variable side count effect display). About the common aspect as the notice side timer effect (notice side count effect display), a plurality of aspects (for example, a blue count and a red count) having different degrees of expectation are prepared, and one of them is executed. You may do it.

  Moreover, in order to make it possible to more appropriately recognize that the timer side timer effect is being executed, a count display when the timer side timer effect is executed, and a count display when the variable side timer effect is executed, It is desirable that the counting speed (for example, the speed at which the number changes in counting up or counting down) is made different. In such a configuration, after the timer effect is started, the timer display is kept in focus even during the period in which the count display is in progress, and the relative timer effect is relatively low. It becomes possible to give interest about which of the high-expectation notice-side timer effects is being executed, and to keep the game entertainment during the timer digestion period suitably.

  At this time, in the variation timer production, the count display is performed at a speed (or the same speed) relatively close to the count speed of the notice timer production according to the production target (conversation notice, cut-in). If the count display is performed in the form (cut-in) and the mode in which the count display is performed at a speed that is not relatively close to the count speed of the notice timer presentation (conversation notice), whether or not the notice timer presentation is being executed. It is possible to add interest by varying the difficulty of the determination. In addition, in the variable timer effect (or notice side timer effect), the count number is displayed by repeating appearance and deletion of the count number, whereas in the notice side timer effect (or variable side timer effect), the count number is continuously displayed. The count display may be performed by displaying.

  According to such a configuration, when a situation occurs in which the count display of the variable timer effect and the count display of the notice timer effect occur simultaneously, it is easy to grasp whether the notice timer effect is being executed. It is expected that the game entertainment will be improved.

  In this regard, the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment counts the change patterns corresponding to the change-side timer effect (count change patterns such as change numbers 5, 6, 9-14, 17-22, etc.). A plurality of effect patterns having different start timings or end timings (total number of counts or time required for all counts) are set as selectable effect patterns. When the variation pattern corresponding to the variation timer effect is acquired, the variable side timer effect count display and the notice timer are determined so as to determine one of the plurality of effect patterns based on a random number for the effect. By making the ease of simultaneous execution with the count display of the performance (for example, the larger the total number of counts, the easier it is to overlap), the ease of determining whether or not the notice timer performance is being executed is different. Let ’s give it some fun

  In this embodiment, the count display start timing or end timing (total count, or time required for all counts) differing from one variation pattern, a plurality of effect patterns (timer effect targets and reach) The content of the production is the same), but multiple production patterns with different count display start timing or end timing (total number of counts or time required for all counts) (however, they are subject to production of timer production) A plurality of different variation patterns may be prepared and corresponded one-on-one with the type of reach effect executed as the effect content of the variation pattern.

  In addition, even if the count display number (total number of counts) when appearing in the variable timer effect and the notice timer effect is different, or even if the same specific count display number can be selected, the variable timer effect and the notice If the selection rate of the specific count display number is made different for the side timer effect, it becomes possible to add interest by making it difficult to determine whether or not the notice timer effect is being executed. .

  Also, if the notice timer performance is executed in the countdown display, the variable timer effect is executed in the count up display, and if the notice timer performance is executed, it is determined deterministically. It is expected that it will be possible to greatly improve the fun of gaming. In addition, the timer side timer effect is executed in a countdown display, while the variable side timer effect for a specific effect (for example, a conversation notice) is executed in a count-up display, and an effect different from the specific effect (for example, If the variable timer effect for cut-in) is executed with a countdown display, the difficulty of determining whether or not the notice timer effect is being executed will vary depending on the effect, making it interesting. Can be granted.

  In addition, as will be described later, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, there are cases where the same effect is used as the production target for the variable timer production and the notice timer production, and there are cases where different productions are used as the production target. To control. And, when the same production (for example, conversation notice) is targeted for production in the variable timer production and the notice timer production, compared with the case where the production different in the variation timer production and the notice timer production is targeted. Even if it is set so that the rate at which the big hit expectation is lowered is high, and the same effect (for example, conversation notice) is used for the effect on the variable side timer effect and the notice side timer effect, each count display The end timing is made different.

  That is, in this case, even if the same effect (for example, conversation notice) is set as the effect target in the variable timer effect and the notice timer effect, one of the variable timer effect and the notice timer effect is the first predetermined value. However, at this point in time, a different effect is targeted (the timer effect is executed in a mode with a relatively high degree of expectation). Looks like). After that, since the other count display that has been continued reaches a predetermined value in a manner that it is clear that the same effect (for example, conversation notice) is targeted for the effect, it is ended first. Even if it is made clear that a conversation notice with a relatively low expectation is targeted for production by the timer production on the end side, a different production that can appear afterwards is targeted for production ( It is expected that the game entertainment will be improved while maintaining a sense of expectation that the timer effect is being executed in a mode with relatively high expectations.

  In addition, when the same effect (for example, conversation advance notice) is set as the effect target in the variable timer effect and the notice timer effect, the timing when the variable timer effect reaches a predetermined value and the notice timer effect is predetermined. It is desirable that a separate count end corresponding display (for example, “count success!”, “Chance UP!”, Etc.) appears at the timing when the numerical value is reached.

  More specifically, a variable side timer effect and a notice side timer effect with “conversation notice” executed as an effect on the variable side or the notice side appearing in one effect pattern, respectively. In this case, the count display of the variable timer effect and the count display of the notice timer effect are simultaneously performed. In the variable timer effect, the variable side effect is related to the “conversation notice”. While the count display progresses according to the fluctuation side specific production that occurs (such as “count success!” And effects that match the appearance of the conversation notice), the notice timer production is related to the “conversation notice”. A count display is displayed according to the notice side specific effect ("chance UP!") That occurs as the notice side effect, or the timer end display that appears at the start timing of the conversation notice (or a predetermined number of seconds before the start of the effect). By proceeding, separate count end corresponding displays appear at different timings.

  By the way, it is required that the conversation announcement and the cut-in effects are always executed when they are targeted for the effect of the variation timer effect (when the count variation pattern is determined). In particular, since the conversation notice and cut-in are effects that can be executed in a plurality of modes with different degrees of expectation, when the count display reaches a predetermined value relative to the effect on the variable timer effect, Therefore, it is required to appear in a highly expected manner. Therefore, the effects to be produced for the variation timer production are incorporated in advance as the production contents of the production pattern (fluctuation production), and only the production pattern is executed, It is desirable that each of the produced effects (a mode with relatively high expectation) can appear. However, instead of this, when the variable timer effect is executed, it is also possible to control so that the effect (a mode with a relatively high degree of expectation) targeted for the effect is selected in the notice lottery. .

  In addition, each notice of the conversation notice and cut-in is not subject to the effect of the variable timer effect, it is determined whether or not to appear as the notice contents of the notice side in the notice lottery described later. A determination is made as to what aspect (a relatively high-expectation aspect or a low-expectation aspect) to appear as the side effect content, and control related to the appearance is performed based on the result of the determination .

Hereinafter, the effect pattern determination process using FIG. 118 will be summarized.
That is, when the peripheral control MPU 1511a obtains a variation pattern command, a symbol type command, and the like from the main control MPU 1310a, first, based on the variation number indicated by the variation pattern command, the symbol type indicated by the symbol type command, etc. Refer to the determination table according to the state. For example, if the effect pattern is determined based on the symbol type, it is possible to give a bias (expectation) to the probability variation expectation degree when a specific effect pattern appears or the number of rounds in the big hit gaming state. become.

  Next, as the production pattern associated with the variation number, a plurality of production patterns (a plurality of production patterns with different start timing or end timing of the count display appearing in the variation timer production) are prepared so as to be selectable. If it is determined, one of a plurality of effect patterns having different count display start timing or end timing is selected based on the success of the big hit determination. At this time, if the big hit determination is won, the production pattern is set so that the rate at which the start timing or end timing of the count display is delayed becomes high, and thereby the start timing or end timing of the count display The slower the is, the higher the probability that a jackpot symbol will appear.

  As will be described later, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, the count variation pattern (variation numbers 5, 6, 9-14, 17-22) is acquired when a special performance condition is established. Even in this case, an effect pattern that is set so that the variable-side timer effect does not appear is selected from the plurality of effect patterns.

  Then, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, after the effect pattern that appears during the symbol variation (the effect from the start of the variation of the decorative symbol to the variation stop) is selected in this way, what kind of notice effect is performed within the execution period of the effect pattern. In this manner, it is determined whether to execute additionally (composite) (notice lottery).

[12. Sound control by automatic channel method]
By the way, in the sound data creation process (step S1032 in FIG. 95) which has already been described, the explanation regarding the automatic channel sound control which is a part thereof will be described later. Thus, next, automatic channel sound control according to the present embodiment will be described. First, the background is briefly explained.

  In a general pachinko machine, an effect that attracts the player's interest is output by outputting various sounds from a speaker in each scene as the game progresses. For example, even for reach that should improve the expectations of the player, there are some that output various sounds depending on the type and others that do not. In such a general pachinko machine, each channel including the respective reach is assigned in advance to each sound to be output in each scene. It is played back using the channel (see Japanese Patent No. 5627044). However, in a general pachinko machine, even if there is an empty channel, the sound to be played may not be assigned to the empty channel due to channel assignment. There was a problem that it was difficult to realize various sound productions.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control board 1510 has a pair of upper speakers 573 (sounds) for the purpose of realizing a variety of sound effects by effectively utilizing empty channels and enhancing the interest of the player. Output means) and a pair of lower speakers 921 (sound output means), while dynamically assigning and managing each channel to each sound to be output, the number of combinations of sounds to be output is the number of each channel. When the maximum number of channels (16 channels are exemplified in the present embodiment) is exceeded, each channel is dynamically assigned to the combination of sounds scheduled to be output within the range of the maximum number of channels according to a predetermined priority. (Channel control means). Further, the peripheral control MPU 1511a simultaneously reproduces the combination of sounds scheduled to be output via each channel dynamically assigned within the range of the maximum number of channels according to the predetermined priority (sound output control means). . This will be specifically described below.

[12-1. Sound control by fixed channel method]
FIG. 119 (A) and FIG. 119 (B) each show an example of sound control by a fixed channel method as a comparison object with respect to the present embodiment. FIG. 119 (A) shows an example of a sound reproduction channel. In the sound control by the fixed channel method, for example, all 16 channels of the reproduction channel 00 to the reproduction channel 15 are used, as in the sound control by the automatic channel method according to the present embodiment described later. The “reproduction ch” shown in the figure is a reproduction channel omitted.

  On the other hand, FIG. 119 (B) shows an example of allocation of playback channels for each sound. In the sound control by the fixed channel method, as shown in the figure, each sound is assigned in advance to each reproduction channel to be used. Here, touching on the basic sound reproduction rule, one sound requires two channels when outputting in stereo, while one channel is required when outputting in monaural.

  The “notification sound 1” to “button pressing sound” shown in the figure shall not be muted in the middle of the sound that has started playback until any end of the playback. As a channel assignment method, a reproduction channel and sound are assigned exclusively as a pair so that sound overwriting does not occur. On the other hand, the “normal BGM” to “holding winning sound” shown in the figure does not cause a problem even if the sound that has started playback is overwritten with another sound during playback and muted. As a channel assignment method, the same channel is assigned as much as possible so as not to suffer from the reproduction timing.

  In the sound control by the fixed channel method, when a new sound is output to the same channel being output, the sound being output is muted and a new sound is output. For sounds that would interfere with overwriting, independent channels are assigned, or sounds that do not overlap playback timing are assigned to the same channel.

  FIG. 120 shows an example of a sound definition table for realizing sound control by the fixed channel method. This sound definition table manages the definition of playback channel number, left and right pan initial value, upper and lower pan initial value, volume initial value, sound number, playback type setting and output type setting for each sound classification and sound name. Yes. Since the playback channel number has been described above, a description thereof will be omitted.

  The left and right pan initial values represent sound image localization initial positions of left and right speakers, which are combinations of the upper left speaker 573L and the lower left speaker 921L, and the upper right speaker 573R and the lower right speaker 921R. By dynamically changing the left and right pan setting values during sound reproduction, a difference is produced in the volume output separately from the left and right speakers, and the sound image can be localized in an arbitrary space between the left and right speakers. For example, when “0x00” is set, it indicates that only the left speaker (upper left speaker 573L and lower left speaker 921L) outputs, and for example, when “0x80” is set, the upper left speaker 573L and lower left speaker are set. The difference in volume output individually from the left and right speakers, which is a combination of 921L, the upper right speaker 573R, and the lower right speaker 921R, is 0, and the sound image is localized at the center of the left and right speakers. For example, when “0xFF” is set, it indicates that only the right speaker (upper right speaker 573R and lower right speaker 921R) outputs.

  The initial values of the upper and lower pans are, for example, the sound image localization of sounds by upper and lower speakers such as a pair of upper speakers 573 (upper left speaker 573L and upper right speaker 573R) and a pair of lower speakers 921 (lower left speaker 921L and lower right speaker 921R). It represents the initial position. By dynamically changing the setting values of the upper and lower pans during sound reproduction, a difference is produced in the volume output individually from the upper and lower speakers, and the sound image can be localized in an arbitrary space between the upper and lower speakers. . For example, when “0x00” is set, it indicates that the sound is output from only the pair of upper speakers 573. For example, when “0x80” is set, the volume difference that is output individually from the upper and lower speakers that are a combination of these. Becomes 0, and the sound image is localized in the center of the upper and lower speakers. For example, when “0xFF” is set, it indicates that only a pair of lower speakers 921 outputs.

  The volume initial value represents the sound volume setting at the start of reproduction, and can be determined, for example, in a setting range from “0x00” to “0xFF”. The sound number is an identifier for distinguishing each sound described above. The playback type setting is loop playback for repeatedly playing the target sound (corresponding to “LOOP” in the figure), or 1SHOT playback for playing the target sound once (corresponding to “1SHOT” in the figure). It represents whether or not. The output type setting indicates whether the target sound is reproduced in monaural or stereo.

  FIG. 121 shows the relationship between the gaming state, the playback sound, and the playback channel. The time axis, which is the horizontal axis, indicates the gaming state, and the gaming states are, for example, “first half of fluctuation”, “second half of fluctuation”, “stop left symbol”, “stop right symbol”, “stop middle symbol”, and “big hit” Can be mentioned. On the other hand, the vertical axis represents (reproduction) priority, and (reproduction) priority increases from bottom to top.

  FIG. 122 (A) shows an example of an effect time chart, FIG. 122 (B) shows an example of a channel reproduction time chart, and FIG. 122 (C) cannot be reproduced when attempting to reproduce each sound. An example of a problem is shown. In these FIGS. 122A to 122C, the horizontal axis is a common time axis.

  In FIG. 122 (A), the game state along the horizontal axis is “first half of change”, “second half of change”, “left symbol stop”, “right symbol stop”, “middle symbol stop” and “big hit” It can be mentioned that the game is controlled to be “medium”.

  In the “first half of fluctuation” shown in FIG. 122 (A), for example, as shown in Problem 1 in FIG. 122 (C), a new sound is given as a new sound during the playback time of “first notice A” (“hold” shown in the figure). 119 (B), the “holding winning sound” is pre-assigned to the same playback channels 14 and 15 as the “first half notice A”, as shown in FIG. "Is overwritten with the reserved winning sound, and the output of the" first half notice A "sound is stopped (in the case of sound control by a fixed channel).

  In the “second half of fluctuation” shown in FIG. 122 (A), for example, as shown in Problem 2 in FIG. 122 (C), a new sound is generated during the playback time of “Full Screen Notice” (“Pending” shown in the figure). 119 (B), as shown in FIG. 119 (B), the “holding winning sound” is pre-assigned to the same playback channels 14 and 15 as the “full screen notice”. "" Is overwritten with the pending winning sound, and the output of the "full screen notice" sound stops (in the case of sound control using a fixed channel).

[12-2. Sound control by automatic channel method]
Next, an example of sound control by the automatic channel method according to the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 123A and FIG. 123B each show an example of sound control by an automatic channel method as this embodiment.

  FIG. 123 (A) shows an example of a sound reproduction channel. In the sound control by the fixed channel described above, the channel classification as an attribute of the reproduction channel is an automatic channel (corresponding to “AUTOch” in the figure). Is different. Here, the channel classification is an automatic channel means that each reproduction channel for each sound is not fixed and variable, and is controlled so as to be automatically assigned in accordance with a rule described later (described above). Equivalent to “sound control by automatic channel method”).

  In the sound control by the automatic channel method according to the present embodiment, for example, all 16 channels of the reproduction channel 00 to the reproduction channel 15 are used, as in the sound control by the fixed channel method described above. The “reproduction ch” shown in the figure is a reproduction channel omitted.

  On the other hand, FIG. 123B shows an example of allocation of playback channels for each sound. In the sound control by the automatic channel method, as shown in the figure, each sound is assigned a priority. Here, touching on the basic sound reproduction rules, as described above, one sound requires two channels when outputting in stereo, while one channel is required when outputting in monaural. Become.

  The “notification sound 1” to “button press sound” shown in the figure should not be muted in the middle of the sound that has been started to be played back until the end of playback. On the other hand, the “normal BGM” to “holding winning sound” shown in the figure does not cause a problem even if the sound that has started playback is overwritten with another sound during playback and muted.

  In the sound control by the automatic channel method, each reproduction channel is defined as an AUTO group channel (hereinafter abbreviated as “AUTO group”). While multiple AUTO groups can be defined, multiple playback channels can be defined within an AUTO group. Each AUTO group is used to reproduce sounds for the AUTO group. When assigning a sound to an AUTO group, an identifier and a priority order (priority) for specifying a specific AUTO group can be specified in each AUTO group. If the sound is defined in the AUTO group when a new sound is reproduced, it is reproduced immediately if there is an empty channel (unused channel) in the designated AUTO group.

  If there is no empty channel in the above case, the effect control program searches all channels currently being reproduced in the AUTO group based on the priority of the sound to be newly reproduced. If there is a channel whose priority is lower than or the same as that of the sound being played back, the effect control program ends the use of the AUTO channel and plays a new sound. On the other hand, the production control program does not reproduce the new sound if there is no empty channel in the AUTO group that has a lower priority or not the same as the sound being reproduced.

  FIG. 124 shows an example of a sound definition table for realizing sound control by the automatic channel method. In the sound definition table in this automatic channel method, for each sound classification and sound name, the playback channel number, left and right pan initial value, upper and lower pan initial value, volume initial value, etc. Instead of the sound number, playback type setting, and output type setting, an identifier and priority for specifying an AUTO group (also referred to as “playback priority”), left and right pan initial value, upper and lower pan initial value, volume initial value, sound Manages definitions of numbers, seek points, playback type settings and output type settings.

  First, the identifier for designating each specific AUTO group represents which AUTO group among the AUTO groups in which a plurality of sounds exist. The priority order is an index indicating which sound should be preferentially reproduced when each sound is reproduced simultaneously. This priority indicates that the higher the numerical value, the sound that should be played with priority, while the lower the numerical value, the sound that should be played without priority. In the present embodiment, as the order of the types of sounds to be reproduced with priority, for example, notification sounds having a priority of “25” (“notification sound 1”, “notification sound 2”, and “notification sound 3”) A sound effect with a priority of “20” (“big hit fixed sound” and “button press sound”), a BGM with a priority of “15” (such as “normal BGM”), and a priority of “10” Sound effects (such as “full-screen notice sound effects”), sound effects with a priority of “05” (“first half notice sound effects” to “second half notice sound effects”), hold winning sounds with a priority of “01” It is said. As a result, for example, when a notification sound is to be reproduced in a state where there is no empty channel, there is no need to reproduce using a predetermined reproduction channel, and a lower priority sound (for example, a reserved winning sound) The notification sound is preferentially played back using the channel that is playing back.

  As described above, the left and right pan initial values represent the sound image localization initial positions of the sound from the left and right speakers, which are combinations of the upper left speaker 573L and the lower left speaker 921L, and the upper right speaker 573R and the lower right speaker 921R. By dynamically changing the left and right pan setting values during sound reproduction, a difference is produced in the volume output separately from the left and right speakers, and the sound image can be localized in an arbitrary space between the left and right speakers. This left and right pan initial value is managed as pan information. For example, setting “0x00” indicates that only the left speaker (the upper left speaker 573L and the lower left speaker 921L) outputs, and setting “0x80”, for example, indicates that the upper left speaker 573L and the lower left speaker 921L are output. The difference in volume output from the left and right speakers, which is a combination of the upper right speaker 573R and the lower right speaker 921R, is 0, and the sound image is localized at the center of the left and right speakers. For example, when “0xFF” is set, it indicates that only the right speaker (upper right speaker 573R and lower right speaker 921R) outputs.

  Further, as described above, the initial pan / tilt pan initial values are, for example, the upper and lower pans of a pair of upper speakers 573 (upper left speaker 573L and upper right speaker 573R) and a pair of lower speakers 921 (lower left speaker 921L and lower right speaker 921R) Represents the initial position of the sound image localization of the sound from the speaker. By dynamically changing the left and right pan settings during sound playback, a difference is produced in the volume output individually from the upper and lower speakers, and the sound image can be localized in any space between the upper and lower speakers. . The initial value of the upper and lower pans is managed as pan information. For example, when “0x00” is set, it indicates that the sound is output from only the pair of upper speakers 573. For example, when “0x80” is set, the volume difference that is output individually from the upper and lower speakers that are a combination of these. Becomes 0, and the sound image is localized in the center of the upper and lower speakers. For example, when “0xFF” is set, it indicates that only a pair of lower speakers 921 outputs.

  Similarly, the volume initial value represents the volume setting at the start of playback, and can be determined, for example, in the setting range from “0x00” to “0xFF”. In addition, “1” is set in the third byte (0x1FF if 0xFF). ) Is not affected by the volume change caused by operating one or more volume control devices provided on the gaming machine, and is always played at the volume set at the initial value. Represents. The sound number is an identifier for distinguishing each sound described above.

  The seek point represents the reproduction start position number in the same phrase in the sound data corresponding to each sound. In this embodiment, as the seek point, for example, “0” is set in each of “upper right speaker confirmation sound” to “first half notice A sound effect”, while “second half notice A sound effect” and “second half notice B effect”. “1” is set for each “sound”. When the maximum number of sounds that can be registered in the sound source by such a seek point is exceeded, the maximum number of sounds that can be registered can be registered.

  The playback type setting is loop playback for repeatedly playing the target sound (corresponding to “LOOP” in the figure), or 1SHOT playback for playing the target sound once (corresponding to “1SHOT” in the figure). It represents whether or not. The output type setting indicates whether the target sound is reproduced in monaural or stereo.

  FIG. 125 shows the relationship between the gaming state, the playback sound, and the priority order. The time axis, which is the horizontal axis, indicates the gaming state, and the gaming states are, for example, “first half of fluctuation”, “second half of fluctuation”, “stop left symbol”, “stop right symbol”, “stop middle symbol”, and “big hit” Can be mentioned. On the other hand, the vertical axis represents (reproduction) priority, and (reproduction) priority increases from bottom to top.

  FIG. 126 (A) shows an example of an effect time chart, and FIG. 126 (B) shows an example of an AUTO channel playback time chart. In FIG. 126 (A) and FIG. 126 (B), the horizontal axis is a common time axis. In FIG. 126 (A), as the gaming state along the time axis which is the horizontal axis, “first half of change”, “second half of change”, “left symbol stop”, “right symbol stop”, “middle symbol stop” and “ It can be mentioned that the game is controlled so as to be “big hit”.

  In the “first half of fluctuation” shown in FIG. 126 (A), as shown in FIG. 126 (B), for example, the sound of “normal BGM playback” is played all the time in the playback channels 00 to 01 ( Equivalent to range A). Here, if there is a start opening prize (corresponding to the “holding winning” shown in the figure) and an attempt is made to reproduce the reserved winning sound as a new sound, the playback channels 12 to 13 exist as empty channels at the start timing. Since this reserved winning sound can be reproduced using the reproduction channels 12 to 13, any sound being reproduced is not overwritten by the reserved winning sound (corresponding to the “reserved sound reproduction” shown in the figure). Output of all kinds of sounds continues.

  In the “second half of fluctuation” shown in FIG. 126 (A), as shown in FIG. 126 (B), for example, the “reach BGM playback” sound is played all the time on the playback channels 00 to 01 ( Equivalent to range B). Here, for example, if there is a start winning (corresponding to “holding winning” shown in the figure) and the player tries to play the reserved winning sound as a new sound, the playback channels 02 to 03 exist as empty channels at the start timing. The output of all other types of sounds continues without being overwritten by the pending winning sound (corresponding to the “reserved sound reproduction” shown in the figure).

  In the “second half of the change” shown in FIG. 126 (A), for example, a notification sound (corresponding to “notification 2 occurrence” shown in the figure) is generated. 126 (equivalent to “notification 2” in the figure), as a result of searching for an empty channel, it is found that there is no empty channel at the start timing as shown in FIG. 126 (B). Therefore, the sound having the lowest priority among the sounds being reproduced at the start timing is searched, and the reproduction channels 04 to 05 are found as the channels that are reproducing the reserved winning sound having the lowest priority of “01”. In these reproduction channels 04 to 05, the reserved winning sound is reproduced as described above, but the priority (25) of the notification sound to be reproduced next (corresponding to “notification sound 2” in the figure) is set. Since it is higher than the priority (01) of the reserved winning sound, the reserved winning sound being reproduced in these reproduction channels 04 to 05 is overwritten with the notification sound.

  FIG. 127 shows an example of automatic channel control work information stored in the AUTO group channel control work area provided in the peripheral control RAM. This work information for automatic channel control includes, as a work name, a setting reservation flag, a requested sound number, a sound number during playback, an automatic assignment group, a priority at the time of automatic assignment, an elapsed time since registration, and a volume control for each channel. And a piece of information corresponding to these.

  If the setting reservation flag is a value other than “0”, it indicates that a setting reservation is made. The requested sound number represents a sound data index number as an identifier for identifying a sound to be reproduced if “−1” is stopped and other than “−1”. The sound number during playback indicates a sound data index number as an identifier for identifying the sound being played back when “−1” is stopped and other than “−1”.

  In the automatic assignment group, when “0”, the channel is fixedly assigned, while when “1”, the channel is automatically assigned (“sound control by automatic channel method” described later). Equivalent). Here, for example, if the automatic allocation group is “1”, it indicates that it is AUTO group 1, and if it is “2”, it indicates AUTO group 2. On the other hand, the priority at the time of automatic allocation represents the priority in the case of performing sound control by the automatic channel method described later.

  The elapsed time from the registration represents the elapsed time from the registration time when the desired reproduction sound is registered as “0”. Note that the elapsed time from the registration is the number of sounds being played when trying to play a new sound in a situation where multiple sounds with the same priority at the time of the automatic assignment are being played. Used to determine which sound should be overwritten and erased. For example, a sound that has been reproduced for a longer time is determined, and this sound is overwritten with the new sound and erased.

  The volume control work stores a volume value (volume value) of a sound to be reproduced. The pan control work stores pan information including the set values of the left and right pans and the top and bottom pans described above.

  FIG. 128 shows an example of an empty channel search process when sound control is performed when only one AUTO group is defined in the automatic channel method. In FIG. 128, the channel is also abbreviated as “ch”.

  When there is a request for reproduction of a new sound (step S1100A), the production control program checks an automatic allocation group related to the new sound (step S1102A), and when this automatic allocation group is “0”, fixed allocation is performed. And start playing a new sound on the designated channel.

  On the other hand, when the automatic allocation group is other than “0”, the effect control program determines that the allocation is automatic allocation, and determines whether the new sound corresponds to the monaural channel (step S1106A). .

  When the new sound is monaural, the effect control program determines whether or not there is a vacant (mono) channel (1 channel) (step S1108A). ) While starting the reproduction of the new sound in the channel (step S1109A), if it does not exist, the reproduction sound having the same or lower priority as the priority of the new sound in the (mono) channel being reproduced It is determined whether or not a channel exists (step S1110A).

  The production control program terminates the processing if there is no channel of reproduced sound that is equal to or lower than the priority of the new sound in such a (mono) channel being reproduced, while Determines whether there are a plurality of corresponding channels (step S1112A).

  When there are multiple corresponding channels, the production control program is playing the sound with the longest playback time since registration based on the elapsed time from the registration described above. The reproduction of the new sound is started on the (monaural) channel (step S1114A). On the other hand, when there is not a plurality of the corresponding channels, the effect control program starts reproduction of the new sound on a (monaural) channel that satisfies a desired condition (step S1116A).

  On the other hand, in the above-described step S1106A, when the production control program determines that the new sound is not monaural, it determines whether or not there are vacant (stereo) channels (2 channels) (step). S1120A). When it is determined that there is an empty channel, the effect control program selects a (stereo) channel that satisfies a desired condition and starts reproduction of the new sound (step S1122A).

  On the other hand, when it is determined that there is no empty channel, the effect control program determines whether or not a (stereo) channel of the sound being reproduced has the same or lower priority as the priority of the new sound (step) S1124A) Since the process is terminated if it does not exist, the sound being reproduced is not overwritten with the new sound to be reproduced. On the other hand, when there is a production control program, it determines whether or not there are a plurality of corresponding channels (step S1126A).

  The production control program starts outputting the new sound with a (stereo) channel satisfying a desired condition when there are not a plurality of corresponding channels, and when there are a plurality of corresponding channels, Based on the elapsed time from the registration, the new sound starts to be reproduced on the (stereo) channel having the longest reproduction time from the registration among the corresponding channels (step S1130A).

  As described above, the production control program searches for an empty channel in order to reproduce a new sound. Such empty channel search processing will be described in a more visually understandable manner.

  FIG. 129A and FIG. 129B to FIG. 132A and FIG. 132B each show an example of specific contents of the empty channel search processing. As shown in FIG. 129 (A), the effect control program searches for an empty channel when a normal BGM playback request with a priority of 15 is generated, and the playback channels 00 to 01 are free. Therefore, normal BGM playback is started in stereo using these playback channels 00-01.

  As shown in FIG. 129 (B), the effect control program searches for an empty channel when a request for reproducing the sound effect of the first-order notice_A having a priority of 05 is generated, and plays channels 02 to 03. Therefore, the reproduction of the sound effect of the first notice_A is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 02 to 03.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 130 (A), the production control program searches for an empty channel triggered by the occurrence of a playback request for a button pressing sound having a priority of 20, and sets the playback channels 04 to 05 to the search channels. Since there is a vacancy, playback of the button press sound is started in stereo using these playback channels 04 to 05.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 130 (B), the effect control program searches for an empty channel when a request for playing the sound effect of the first half notice_B having a priority of 05 is generated, and plays channel 06. Since there is a vacancy in .about.07, reproduction of the sound effect of the first half notice_B is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 06.about.07.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 131 (A), the production control program searches for an empty channel triggered by the occurrence of a jackpot definite sound playback request with a priority of 20, and sets playback channels 08-09 to Since there is a vacancy, the reproduction of the big hit definite sound is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 08 to 09.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 131 (B), the effect control program searches for an empty channel when a request to reproduce the sound effect of the first half notice_C having a priority of 05 is generated, and plays channel 10 Since there is a vacancy in .about.11, the reproduction of the sound effect of the first notice_C is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 10-11.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 132 (A), the effect control program searches for an empty channel when a request for playing a reserved winning tone with a priority of 01 is generated, and sets the playback channels 12 to 13 to be free. Since there is a vacancy, the reproduction of the reserved winning sound is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 12-13.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 132 (B), the effect control program searches for an empty channel when a request to reproduce the notification sound 3 having a priority of 25 is generated, and sets the reproduction channels 14 to 15 to the retrieval channels 14-15. Since there is a vacancy, the reproduction of the notification sound 3 is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 14 to 15.

  133A and 133B to 136A and 136B each show an example of specific contents of the empty channel search process. As shown in FIG. 133 (A), the effect control program searches for an empty channel when a playback request for a reach BGM with a priority of 15 is generated, and the playback channels 00 to 01 are free. Therefore, the reproduction of the reach BGM is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 00 to 01.

  As shown in FIG. 133 (B), the effect control program searches for an empty channel when a request for reproducing the notification sound 1 having a priority of 25 is generated, and there is an empty space in the reproduction channels 02 to 03. Therefore, the reproduction of the notification sound 1 is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 02 to 03.

  After repeating the processing as described above, the effect control program next, as shown in FIG. 134 (A), vacant channels are triggered by the occurrence of a request to reproduce the full-screen warning sound with the priority of 10. Since there is a free space in the reproduction channels 10 to 11, the reproduction of the full-screen warning sound is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 10 to 11.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 134 (B), the effect control program searches for an empty channel when a request for reproducing the notification sound 1 with priority 25 is generated, and FIG. 134 (A) shows. As shown, since there is a space in the reproduction channels 02 to 03 (corresponding to “non-reproduction (empty)” in the drawing), the reproduction of the sound effect of the notification sound 1 is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 02 to 03. .

  Next, as shown in FIG. 135 (A), the production control program searches for an empty channel triggered by the occurrence of a playback request for the notification sound 3 having a priority of 25, and plays channels 04 to 05 ( Since this corresponds to “non-reproduction (empty)” in the figure, there is an empty space, and the reproduction of the notification sound 3 is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 04 to 05.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 135 (B), the production control program searches for an empty channel when a request to reproduce an accessory notice sound having a priority of 10 is generated, and plays channels 12 to 13. Since there is a vacant space, the reproduction of the accessory warning sound is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 12-13.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 136 (A), the effect control program searches for an empty channel and triggers playback channels 14 to 15 ( Since there is a vacancy (corresponding to “non-reproduction (vacant)” in the figure), the reproduction of the reserved winning sound is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 14 to 15.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 136 (B), the production control program searches for an empty channel when a request for reproducing the notification sound 2 having a priority of 25 is generated, but there is no empty channel. Therefore, the use of the reproduction channels 14 to 15 that reproduce the “holding winning sound” having the lowest priority in each channel corresponding to the sound being reproduced is stopped, and the reproduction channels 14 to 15 are used in stereo. The reproduction of the notification sound 2 which is a desired sound is started.

  In this way, each sound to be output is not fixedly assigned to a specific channel in advance, and a playback channel having a lower priority is searched according to the priority of the sound, and the output schedule having a higher priority is searched. Will be played on the playback channel found in the search. Therefore, according to the present embodiment, not only can an empty channel be effectively used as described above, but also each of the sounds scheduled to be output is made as much as possible using each channel including the empty channel. Since it becomes possible to reproduce, it is possible to realize various sound effects and enhance the interest of the player.

  FIG. 137 (A) and FIG. 137 (B) to FIG. 138 (A) and FIG. 138 (B) show examples of specific contents of the empty channel search processing, respectively. As shown in FIG. 137 (A), the performance control program searches for an empty channel when a request to play a left symbol stop sound with a priority of 15 is generated, and the playback channels 00 to 01 are free. Therefore, the reproduction of the left symbol stop sound is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 00 to 01.

  As shown in FIG. 137 (B), the performance control program searches for an empty channel when a request to play a right symbol stop sound with a priority of 15 is generated, and the playback channels 00 to 01 are empty. Therefore, the reproduction of the right symbol stop sound is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 00 to 01.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 138 (A), the production control program searches for an empty channel when a request to reproduce a medium symbol stop sound having a priority of 15 is generated, and plays channels 00 to 01. Therefore, the reproduction of the middle symbol stop sound is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 00 to 01.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 138 (B), the production control program searches for an empty channel triggered by the occurrence of a big hit BGM playback request with a priority of 15, and the playback channels 00 to 01 are empty. Therefore, the big hit BGM playback is started in stereo using these playback channels 00 to 01.

  When the sound replacement playback according to the priority order occurs using a certain playback channel, the effect control program restores the previous sound played back before the replacement in the playback channel after the playback is completed. Needless to say, it can be done.

[12-3. Variation of sound control]
In the above embodiment, the sound control by the automatic channel method is performed as an example using all the reproduction channels for the maximum number of channels. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the sound control by the fixed channel described above is used. You may make it perform sound control as follows by a combination.

  FIG. 139 (A) to FIG. 139 (F) are diagrams showing variations of channel assignment in sound control by the above-described two types of channel systems or a combination thereof.

  FIG. 139 (A) shows an example of channel assignment in sound control by the fixed channel method for the maximum number of channels (16 channels) described so far as a comparative example with the embodiment described above, and FIG. 139 (B) shows this. This corresponds to the embodiment of the present invention described so far, and shows an example of channel assignment when sound control is performed by the automatic channel method for the maximum number of channels. Since sound control by these two channel assignments has already been described, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 139 (C) shows an embodiment in which sound control by the automatic channel method is performed by assigning channels to the maximum number of playback channels using a plurality of automatic channel groups (corresponding to “PTN2” in the figure). . FIG. 139 (D) shows an embodiment in which one automatic channel group is used to perform channel assignment for the maximum number of playback channels and to perform sound control by the fixed channel method described above for some playback channels. (Corresponding to “PTN3” in the figure).

  FIG. 139 (E) shows an embodiment in which channel assignment is performed for the maximum number of playback channels using a plurality of automatic channel groups, and sound control is performed for a part of the playback channels by the above-described fixed channel method. (Corresponding to “PTN4” in the figure). A specific example of the channel system shown in FIG. 139 (E) will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 140 and subsequent drawings.

  FIG. 139 (F) shows a case in which channel allocation is performed for the maximum number of playback channels using one automatic channel group, and sound control is performed using the automatic channel method, and the sound based on the fixed channel method described above is used for some playback channels. Although the control is performed, it is different from the above-described example in that the number of channels is ensured so that the number of reproduction channels is variable. Note that a specific example of the channel method shown in FIG. 139F will be described in detail later with reference to FIGS.

  As shown in the present embodiment, by adopting an automatic channel method in which all channels are grouped, empty channels are allocated or output channels are replaced based on a pre-specified standard. Sound can be output simply by determining the priority order. Therefore, unlike conventional control methods in which sound is output by specifying a channel, channel management is not required, so control related to sound output can be simplified and development efficiency can be improved. It becomes.

  In addition, by adopting the automatic channel method, it is possible to minimize the number of channels. For example, it is possible to adopt a low-priced sound source IC with a small number of channels, thereby reducing the manufacturing cost of the gaming machine. be able to.

[15. Another form of sound control by automatic channel method]
Next, details of another embodiment of the above-described sound control method will be described. In the sound control method described above, as the automatic channel method, the sound allocation to each channel is dynamically changed so that a lot of sounds can be played back by effectively utilizing the empty channels. Since diversified gaming machines in recent years select and output hundreds or thousands of sounds, the management of sound sources may be complicated.

  In addition, by superimposing and outputting a plurality of sounds, it is possible to perform a preliminary announcement effect redundantly or to enable various sound effects with a small number of sound sources. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 139 (C), the sound is divided into a plurality of groups, and by assigning a plurality of sounds and playback channels dynamically for each group, the sound is reliably duplicated and output. can do. In addition, there is an advantage that management is facilitated by dividing the sound into types.

  Furthermore, the sound includes a sound that should be output with priority over the effect sound such as a notification sound and a sound that is continuously output such as BGM. For these sounds, it is more convenient to fix the output channel than to dynamically assign the channel. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 139 (D), the sound that is output with priority or the sound that is always output is output in the fixed channel system, and the sound that changes in accordance with the result of the start winning or variation display is displayed. Output in automatic channel mode.

  By configuring as described above, it is possible to effectively use empty channels by the automatic channel method and to prevent unnecessary channel switching control from occurring by the fixed channel method. Moreover, since it becomes possible to classify according to the type of sound such as BGM, effect sound, and notification sound, management of effect data becomes easy.

  The sound control method shown in FIG. 139 (E) is a combination of the sound control methods shown in FIGS. 139 (C) and 139 (D), and has the advantages of each method. The sound control method shown in FIG. 139 (E) will be specifically described below.

[15-1. Sound control with fixed channel method and multiple automatic channel methods]
In the present embodiment, unlike the example described above, the number of channels in sound source control is 32 channels (ch), and includes channels that reproduce sound using a fixed channel method and channels that reproduce sound using an automatic channel method. . In addition, channels for reproducing sound by the automatic channel method are divided into two groups. Hereinafter, this will be specifically described with reference to FIG.

[15-1-1. Playback channel configuration]
FIG. 140 is a diagram showing an example of a configuration table of playback channels in sound source control in the present embodiment. As described above, the sound source control of this embodiment uses 32 channels, and a unique identifier (channel number) is assigned to each channel.

  The channel configuration table includes “automatic allocation” indicating whether or not automatic allocation is performed for channel numbers, “classification” indicating a group to which each channel belongs, and “purpose of use” of each channel. Note that “remarks” is added to the configuration table shown in FIG. 140 as a supplement.

  As shown in FIG. 140, the configuration of each channel of the present embodiment is that the channel numbers 0 to 7 are fixed channel systems, 8 to 19 are automatic channel systems, 20 to 23 are fixed channel systems, and 24 to 29. Is an automatic channel system, and 30 and 31 are fixed channel systems.

  Further, the channels of the automatic channel system with channel numbers 8 to 19 are “AUTO group 1”, and the channels of the automatic channel system with channel numbers 24 to 29 are “AUTO group 2”.

  In the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, sound can be output in stereo, and in the case of stereo output, one pair (two) of channels is used. On the other hand, in the case of monaural output, one channel is used.

  A channel with channel number 0 (hereinafter referred to as “channel 0”, and each channel is expressed by “channel” + “channel number”) is a channel used for the system. For example, it is a channel for outputting a sound that is used by all manufacturers regardless of a specific model. Specifically, it is the sound that is output while displaying the manufacturer's logo when the gaming machine is activated. Channel 1 is a channel that is paired with channel 0 when sound is output in stereo.

  Channel 2 is a channel used for outputting BGM during a game or waiting for a customer. Channel 3 is a channel that is paired with channel 2 when BGM is output in stereo. Similarly, channel 4 and channel 6 are channels used to output BGM, and channel 5 and channel 7 are channels that are paired with channel 4 and channel 6 when BGM is output in stereo. is there.

  In the present embodiment, not only stereo output but also a plurality of sounds are output at the same time, thereby improving the sound quality of BGM. Therefore, a plurality of (pair) channels can be used to output BGM, and BGM1 to BGM3 can be output simultaneously. Further, as will be described later, since BGM can be output also on channel 20 (and channel 21), four BGMs can be output simultaneously using a maximum of 8 channels (4 pairs). It has become.

  While the gaming machine is operating normally, the BGM is continuously output, and a predetermined sound source is repeatedly reproduced. For this reason, the channel for reproducing the BGM is continuously occupied, and it is more efficient to fix the channel in advance than to dynamically assign the channel. Therefore, in the sound source control in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the channel for reproducing the BGM is a fixed channel system, and only the BGM is output. As a result, the control can be simplified as compared with the case where the sound is reproduced only by the automatic channel method while preventing the generation of an empty channel.

  Channels 8 to 19 are channels for reproducing sound output when the notice effect is executed. In the notice effect, the sound selected by lottery according to the result of the variable display, the degree of expectation, the progress of the game, etc. is output each time. As described above, the channel can be effectively used by applying the automatic channel method to the sound output each time based on the predetermined condition.

  In this embodiment, unlike the example described above, channels to which the automatic channel method is applied are grouped. The group of channels that output the sound during the notice effect is AUTO group 1.

  When a sound is output during the execution of the notice effect, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first searches for an empty channel among the channels assigned to the AUTO group 1. In the case of stereo, empty channels for two channels are searched, and in principle, continuous channels are set as output channels. At this time, if there is an empty channel, setting is made so as to output the sound designated from the empty channel. On the other hand, when there is no empty channel, based on a predetermined condition, the used channel is released and a new sound is output, or the output of the designated sound is stopped. A detailed procedure of channel selection will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Channels 20 and 21 are channels to which the fixed channel method is applied. The channel 21 is a channel that is paired with the channel 20 at the time of stereo output. Channels 20 and 21 are channels for outputting BGM output or effect sound. This is used when four sounds are superimposed and BGM is output, or when a specific performance sound is output. The specific effect sound is, for example, a sound output in an effect other than the notice effect that is output by the automatic channel method.

  The channels 22 and 23 are channels to which the fixed channel method is applied, as in the channels 20 and 21. The channel 23 is a channel that is paired with the channel 22 at the time of stereo output. Channels 22 and 23 are channels for outputting a hold sound. The on-hold sound output on the channels 22 and 23 is, for example, a sound that is output regardless of the lottery result at the time of starting winning, or a sound that is output with priority such as when a big hit is confirmed. Note that sounds based on the lottery result at the time of starting winning are output from channels 24 to 29 as will be described later.

  Channels 24 to 29 are channels to which the automatic channel method is applied. Channels 24 to 29 play sounds that are output based on the degree of expectation according to the lottery result at the time of starting winning, or sounds that are output when the hold display changes at the start of fluctuation. By outputting channels 22 and 23 in a fixed channel manner, it is possible to reliably output the sound at the time of jackpot determination even if there is no empty channel in channels 24 to 29, and draw the player's attention. Can do.

  Channels 30 and 31 are channels to which the fixed channel method is applied. Channels 30 and 31 are channels used for the system. The channel 30 outputs a change sound when the volume is changed and a notification sound when the game medium is paid out. Also, the channel 31 outputs a notification sound when an abnormality occurs in the gaming machine. As described above, the fixed channel method in which the output destination is secured in advance is applied so that the notification sound related to the operation of the gaming machine and the notification sound when an abnormality occurs are reliably transmitted to the outside.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, a fixed channel system channel is assigned when output is continuously continued as in BGM or when it is necessary to output reliably as in an abnormal alarm sound. On the other hand, the automatic channel method is applied to the sound that is output flexibly according to the game state, etc., thereby preventing the sound from being output while there is an empty channel, and a channel with a finite number of channels. It can be used effectively.

[15-1-2. Free channel search processing]
Next, a procedure for searching for an empty channel for sound source control according to the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 141 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of an empty channel search process when the control for outputting sound according to the present embodiment is executed. 128 describes the case where there is one AUTO group, but FIG. 141 is different in that it has a plurality of AUTO groups. Note that description of common processing is omitted.

  In the empty channel search process shown in FIG. 141, it is determined whether or not there is an empty channel in the same group of channels when the new sound is the automatic channel method in the processes of step S1108B and step S1120B. That is, even if different groups of channels are available, if the same channel group is not available, the results of step S1108B and step S1120B are “No”.

  Further, in the empty channel search process shown in FIG. 141, when there is no empty channel, the reproduction of the sound output from the channel selected based on the predetermined condition is stopped, and the new sound is output from the channel (step S1118B, step S1132B). Hereinafter, the channel selection condition for stopping sound reproduction will be described with reference to FIG. The production in which the output of the sound is stopped is continuously executed without stopping the image display and the operation of the accessory.

  FIG. 142 is a diagram illustrating an example of a condition for selecting a channel for switching sound output (stopping or releasing sound reproduction) when a channel is not empty when a new sound is output in the present embodiment. . As a specific selection condition, attributes of a sound being reproduced and a new sound are compared, and a sound with higher importance is prioritized. The attributes include, as will be described later, the playback time, whether the output is stereo or monaural, the volume, the amount of change in the sound being played back, and the sound playback time at the time of channel selection, Includes remaining playback time. Each condition will be specifically described below.

  Condition 1 selects a channel based on the playback time (elapsed time) from the start of playback. For example, as shown in steps S1114A and S1130A in FIG. 128, a channel having a long reproduction time is selected. Thus, by selecting a channel having a long elapsed time since the start of reproduction, the output of the effect sound that has been sufficiently executed is terminated, and the player can easily recognize that a new effect has been executed.

  Condition 2 selects a channel based on the playback time of the entire performance. For example, an effect with a shorter playback time is selected because an effect with a higher expectation can be achieved with an effect with a longer playback time. On the other hand, the influence on the subsequently executed effects may be minimized by canceling the effects having a long playback time. In this case, the determination is made based on the preset total playback time without depending on the playback time from the start of playback.

  Condition 1 and condition 2 are conditions related to the playback time. In addition to this, for example, the sound output of a short (or long) remaining effect time may be stopped. Further, the channel may be selected in accordance with the elapsed time from the start of reproduction with respect to the entire production time, that is, the progression ratio of the production. By setting the conditions in this way, the sound output can be stopped at the initial stage or the final stage of the production.

  Condition 3 selects a channel based on the volume of the sound being played. For example, an effect in which a sound with a large volume is output can be a highly important effect, and therefore, a channel with a small volume of sound being output is preferentially selected. Conversely, a channel with a large volume of sound being output may be preferentially selected and the player may be made aware that a new performance will be executed.

  Condition 4 selects a channel based on a change in the volume of the sound being played back. For example, it is assumed that an effect in which a sound to be faded in or faded out is output can be a more important effect, and a channel with a small amount of volume change is preferentially selected. Conversely, a channel with a large volume change may be preferentially selected to reduce the load of sound control.

  Condition 5 selects a channel on the basis of a dynamic change of the sound image localization position (pan pot). For example, a channel with less change in the dynamic sound image localization position can be considered to be a more important performance that can produce a more three-dimensional sound effect by changing the left and right sound output of a stereo speaker. Select with priority. On the other hand, it is possible to preferentially select a channel with a large change in the dynamic sound image localization position to reduce the load of sound control.

  Condition 6 selects a channel based on a sound number (index). For example, a large (small) number is selected. At this time, the priority order may be associated with the sound number.

  Condition 7 selects a channel depending on whether the sound is monaural or stereo. For example, a channel that outputs a monaural sound is selected on the assumption that an effect output with stereo sound with good sound quality has a higher expectation. On the other hand, since the monaural sound uses only one channel, if the number of empty channels is not enough even if the channels that output the monaural sound are opened, a channel that outputs stereo sound is selected to increase the number of empty channels. It may be.

  Condition 8 selects a channel depending on whether or not volume adjustment is permitted. For example, an effect set so that volume adjustment cannot be performed may be higher in importance, or an effect set so that volume adjustment can be performed may be higher in importance.

  In addition to the above-described conditions, for example, in the case of the same priority, a new sound reproduction request may be discarded without switching channels. In addition, by assigning unique priorities to all sounds, the production data may be set so as not to have the same priorities.

  In the table shown in FIG. 142, conditions 1 to 8 are shown as an example, but these conditions may be applied alone or a plurality of conditions may be applied in combination. For example, a threshold value may be set for each condition and a channel satisfying more conditions may be selected, or a priority may be set for each condition and the conditions applied sequentially.

[15-1-3. Volume control]
Next, an example in which channel assignment control is performed based on priority assigned to newly output sound will be described. Here, an example in which three types of notices (first notices A to C) are executed in the first half of the change will be described. FIG. 143 is a timing chart showing an effect example for explaining the sound control of the present embodiment, in which (A) shows the timing at which the sound effects are reproduced, and (B) shows the channel from which each sound effect is output. ing. FIG. 144 is a diagram illustrating an example of the priority order of sound effects in the example of the present embodiment.

  In the effect example shown in FIG. 143, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variable display, the first half notice_A is generated. At this time, when an instruction instruction for the effect button is displayed on the display screen and the player operates the effect button, the first half notice_B is generated. Further, the first half notice C is generated while the first half notice_A and the first half notice_B are being executed.

  As shown in FIG. 144, the priority order of the first half notice_A is 03, the priority order of the first half notice_B is 05, and the priority order of the first half notice_C is 20. Further, since the volume suppression flag is set in the first half notice_B and the first half notice_C, when the announcement effect with a low priority is executed repeatedly in the same group, the volume is set based on the suppressed volume value. Reduced.

  The contents of each notice will be described. For example, the first notice_A is an effect in which a character appears. A character appears on the display screen, and sound effects are output in stereo from channels 08 and 09.

  The first half notice_B is an effect executed by the operation of the effect button, and a button press sound is reproduced when the button is operated (channels 18 and 19), and the first half notice_B is started, and the effect from the channels 10 and 11 in stereo. Sound is output.

  In the first half notice_C, along with the output of the sound effect (channels 12 and 13), the screen display is stopped for a predetermined time, and a sound having a lower priority than the first half notice_C, specifically, other notice effects and BGM are temporarily displayed. The sound is muted (blackout effect). Thereafter, when the effect screen is displayed, output of sound effects other than the first half notice_C is resumed.

  Here, the volume change of the sound effect of each notice effect will be described in more detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 145 is a timing chart showing an example of the volume change of the sound effect in the first half of the present embodiment, where (A) shows the output timing of the effect sound and (B) shows the volume change of each effect sound. The horizontal axis represents the time axis, and the vertical axis of (B) represents the volume (volume).

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the variable display is started from time t0, and the first half notice_A is started at time t1. At this time, it is output at the preset volume V_A of the effect sound effect of the first half notice_A.

  Thereafter, the operation instruction of the effect button is displayed on the effect screen, and the first half notice_B is executed by pressing the effect button (time t2). At this time, the button press sound of the effect button is reproduced with the volume V_T, and the effect sound effect of the first half notice_B is output with the volume V_B. Also, since the priority order of the first half notice_B is higher than the priority order of the first half notice_A, the volume of the sound effect of the first half notice_A is suppressed to 50%.

  Note that if the priority order of the notice effect that is executed later is lower than or the same as the priority order of the notice effect that is being executed, the volume does not have to be lowered, and even if there are few sound effects that are output at the same time It is not necessary to lower the volume. Further, the volume may be lowered only in the case of a combination of specific notice effects.

  Further, when the first half notice C is executed at time t3, the screen is darkened until time t5, and sound effects other than the first half notice_C are muted. At this time, the sound effect of the first half notice_C is output with the volume V_C.

  In addition, the output of the effect sound effects of the first half notice_A and the first half notice_B that are muted from time t3 is resumed at time t5. Originally, the button pressing sound is output until time t4, but since t5> t4, reproduction ends at time t3.

  Thereafter, the effects of the first half notice_A and the first half notice_B are continued until a preset end time (time t6, t7). Furthermore, the first half notice_C ends at time t8, and the first half of the change ends.

  Note that during the period in which the effect sound is muted, the output of the effect sound may be continued with the volume set to 0, or the output of the effect sound may be stopped. When the volume is set to 0, the volume (subvolume) for each channel may be set to 0, the main volume for controlling the volume of the overall effect sound effect is set to 0, and the sound effect of the first half notice_C is output. May be bypassed and output so as not to be affected by the control by the main volume. Even if the output of other sound effects is suppressed by the first half notice_C, sound effects, warning sounds, and notification sounds with higher priorities are output.

  As described above, when outputting a new sound and reducing the volume of the sound being played, instead of lowering the volume of the sound specified by the volume suppression flag, etc., the volume of the sound being played on all channels is reduced. Alternatively, the volume of the sound being played back on the same channel may be lowered in the channel method (fixed channel method, automatic channel method). Further, the volume of the sound being played back on the channels in the same group (AUTO group) may be lowered.

[15-1-4. effect]
By configuring as described above, in this embodiment, it is possible to preferentially output a sound having a high priority. Sounds with a high priority are, for example, sounds that are surely transmitted to players and game hall employees, such as notification sounds and warning sounds, and the expectation that the result of variable display is a big hit is high. Sound effects to increase the expectation of the game, or sound effects that have a high stage effect and can improve the interest of the game.

  Furthermore, in this embodiment, it becomes possible to easily manage production data related to production sound effects by classifying each channel used for sound source control into a plurality of groups. As a result, it is possible to improve development efficiency, for example, by suppressing the occurrence of bugs by conducting systematic tests. Further, by making a stable game possible, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In particular, in the present embodiment, channels of the automatic channel method are classified into a plurality of groups. Specifically, there are a group (AUTO group 1) for outputting a sound effect of a notice effect and a group (AUTO group 2) for outputting a sound effect related to holding. The number of sound effects of the notice effect is enormous compared to the number of channels, and a plurality of effect sound effects can be reproduced simultaneously. In particular, during the first half of the change, there may be a case where output of the effect sound exceeding the allocated number of channels may be requested by executing a pre-reading notice of the pending change together with the change notice. In such a case, it is possible to maximize the fun of the game by outputting the low-priority effect sound effect while replacing the high-priority effect sound effect in the channel assigned to the AUTO group 1. .

  Furthermore, it is desirable that the effect of notifying the expectation level by changing the hold display of the variable display and accompanying the output of the effect sound effect can greatly increase the player's expectation and be executed reliably. . In this embodiment, by outputting the effect sound effect relating to such a hold display (hold sound) from the channels belonging to the AUTO group 2, it is possible to reproduce more reliably independently of the notice effect related to the variable display. it can. Also, unlike the notice effect with variable display, since the number of effect sound effects that are output simultaneously does not greatly exceed the number of channels assigned to the AUTO group 2, the output of effect sound effects is stopped. The possibility of being reduced. Moreover, even if it is a case where it is canceled, the output of the effect sound with a low priority is only canceled. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game by reliably executing a highly effective effect that increases the player's expectation.

  In this embodiment, a channel to which the automatic channel method is applied and a channel to which the fixed channel method is applied are mixed. As described above, the automatic channel method makes effective use of a finite number of channels by searching for available channels, and gives priority to output effects and high-priority sounds by setting priorities. Is possible. On the other hand, the fixed channel method is applied when a sound is continuously output as in BGM or when a sound is preferentially output in order to notify a malfunction of a gaming machine or an illegal act. As described above, by applying a channel method suitable for the characteristics and use of sound, each channel can be used effectively, and further appropriate control according to the sound output status can be performed. For example, in the control for outputting BGM, it is only necessary to output a sound to a pre-assigned channel regardless of the gaming state. In the control for outputting an alarm sound, a designated channel is not searched without searching for an empty channel. The sound should be output directly to. On the other hand, as described above, in the automatic channel method, it is possible to make the best use of empty channels and to preferentially output a sound with a high effect.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, by controlling the volume for each effect sound effect (channel), it is possible to emphasize and execute an effect with a high priority. Also, the effect being executed can be continued while the volume is lowered without interruption. At this time, the volume can be returned to the original volume as long as the previously executed effect with the lower priority is continuing even after the effect with the higher priority is completed. Moreover, as described in the embodiment, by stopping other effects and executing a specific effect alone, it is possible to make the effect of the specific effect stand out. Thus, in this embodiment, the variation of production can be increased and the interest of a game can be improved.

[15-2. Modification of sound control with fixed channel method and automatic channel method]
In the sound control method described above, the number of channels for which the automatic channel method is set and the number of channels for which the fixed channel method is set are preset. In this modification, the automatic channel method is used. A modification in which the number of channels set and the number of channels for which the fixed channel method is set are variable will be described.

[15-2-1. Example of production]
When the number of channels is variable, for example, there is a case where it is desired to output more than the number of channels to which the same type of sound can be temporarily allocated. For example, in the case of a gaming machine capable of executing an effect including a plurality of scenes, the screen is divided into a plurality of (for example, nine divisions), and different scenes are displayed on each divided screen. At that time, it is conceivable to output BGM corresponding to each scene. FIG. 146 is a diagram illustrating a screen configuration example of effects in a modification of the present embodiment. The effect example shown in FIG. 146 is a notice effect in the latter half of the fluctuation after the occurrence of reach.

  In this modification, the display screen is divided into nine, and an effect (multi-screen effect) for displaying different scenes on each screen is executed. Then, any one scene is selected, and an effect corresponding to the selected scene is executed. At this time, BGM (9 types) of each scene is output simultaneously. The scene may be selected by lottery or selected by the player.

  The gaming machine of this modification uses 32 channels in sound source control, as in the above-described embodiment. Further, the default channel assignment is the same as the arrangement shown in FIG. Therefore, it is possible to output four types (eight channels) of BGM at the same time. However, in the multi-screen effect in this modification, it is necessary to output nine types of BGM at the same time. Therefore, in this modification, a channel for outputting BGM is reassigned, and the channel arrangement is rearranged.

[15-2-2. Channel arrangement]
FIG. 147 is a diagram showing an example of a configuration table of playback channels in sound source control in a modification of the present embodiment, where (A) shows a default configuration and (B) shows a configuration when a multi-screen effect is executed. The default configuration in FIG. 147 (A) is the same as the arrangement shown in FIG. 140 as described above.

  In this modification, when the multi-screen effect is started, the channel arrangement shown in FIG. 147 (A) is changed to the arrangement shown in FIG. 147 (B). Specifically, a fixed channel system channel for outputting BGM is added (channels 8 to 17), and the number of channels adopting the automatic channel system assigned to the AUTO group 1 is reduced. This is because even if a different notice effect is executed during execution of the multi-screen effect, it is difficult for the player to recognize.

  After the start of the multi-screen effect, all BGM corresponding to each scene is reproduced while all scenes are displayed. At this time, if all BGMs are output at a normal volume, the sound volume becomes too high, and therefore the sound is output with the sound volume set lower than normal. When a scene is selected, a notice effect (second half notice) based on the selected scene is executed, the BGM volume of the selected scene is set to a normal volume, and playback of other BGMs is terminated. . When the player selects a scene, for example, the screen divided by the operation unit provided in the gaming machine is selected, and the BGM of the selected scene is changed to another scene until the scene is determined. The volume may be made larger than the BGM of the scene, or the BGM volume of another scene may be made smaller.

[15-2-3. Volume control]
FIG. 148 is a timing chart showing an example of the volume change of the sound effect in the latter half of the variation of the modification of the present embodiment, where (A) is the output timing of the effect sound effect, and (B) is the volume change of each effect sound effect. Indicates.

  In the effect example shown in FIG. 148, the channel arrangement is changed from the default state (FIG. 147 (A)) to the multi-screen effect arrangement (FIG. 147 (B) at the timing when execution of the multi-screen effect is determined (for example, at the start of fluctuation). )). After the end of the first half fluctuation (time t11), reach occurs and the second half fluctuation starts. After the start of the second half fluctuation, the multi-screen effect is started (time t12). At this time, as shown in FIG. 146, the display screen is divided, different scenes are displayed in the divided display areas, and BGM corresponding to each scene is output.

  When the multi-screen effect is started, BGM corresponding to the purpose of use of each channel after the change to the arrangement for multi-screen effect (FIG. 147 (B)) is output. At this time, the volume V_2 is smaller than the normal volume V_1.

  Thereafter, when a scene for which the effect is to be continued is selected (time t13), the BGM volume corresponding to the selected scene is set to the normal volume V_1, and the output of the other BGM is stopped. In the effect example shown in FIG. 148, scene 5 is selected, and the volume of BGM_0-5 is set to the normal volume V_1. At this time, the display area corresponding to the scene 5 is displayed on the entire display screen, and the second half notice_5 corresponding to the scene 5 is executed.

  Note that, after the end of the multi-screen effect, the channel for outputting BGM_0-5 may be changed from channels 10 and 11 to channels 2 and 3, and the channel arrangement may be returned to the default. When the output of BGM from the channels 10 and 11 is continued as in this modification, the channel may be returned to the default arrangement at the start of the next fluctuation.

  Further, the channel arrangement may be changed at a necessary timing. For example, in this modification, the channel arrangement may be changed immediately before the execution of the multi-screen effect is started, or may be changed at the start of the second half fluctuation.

  Furthermore, instead of changing the arrangement of the channels according to the contents of the effect, it may be changed when the gaming state (for example, an effect mode such as a big hit state, a short time state, or a background change) changes.

[15-2-4. effect]
With the configuration described above, the number of fixed channels (corresponding to “variable fixed ch” in FIG. 139 (F)) that perform sound control by the fixed channel method and automatic channels that perform sound control by the automatic channel method (FIG. 139 (F) “corresponding to“ variable AUTOch ”) can be flexibly changed in accordance with the type and number of sounds to be reproduced. As a result, more notification sounds, BGM, or sound effects can be made reproducible depending on the situation. For example, in a situation where no game is played, more types of notification sounds are output. Flexible measures such as increasing the number of BGM and sound effects to be reproduced for production by suppressing the number of reproducible notification sounds.

[16. Control over sound being output on other channels]
In the embodiment described above, the example in which the channels are grouped and the sound to be output is managed by being associated with each group has been described. Also, if the number of sounds that can be assigned at the same time in the same group is exceeded, the output of the sound that is sounding is stopped based on the predetermined condition and a new sound is output, or the output of a new sound is stopped. Then, the control for the sound being output belonging to the same group has been described. Here, a case will be described in which when a sound is newly assigned to a channel for output, control is performed such as changing the volume of the sound being output on another channel.

  In the state before the occurrence of reach after the start of the special symbol variation (during the first half variation), the output of the sound of the BGM being played and other effects is regulated (muted) for a predetermined time together with the output of the predetermined sound effect. As a representative effect for performing such control, there is a blackout effect that regulates the output of sound effects and darkens the screen. In the blackout effect, after the elapse of a predetermined time after the output of the sound effect is restricted, the darkening of the screen is canceled, and the sound output by the BGM or other effects is resumed, whereby the newly output sound (the sound concerned) The effect including the output of the player is conspicuous and the player's attention can be drawn to increase the player's sense of expectation for the change.

  In the present embodiment, a case will be described in which assignment of a new sound to an empty channel is not performed, but the assignment of a channel from which sound effects are output is not canceled and a new sound is assigned. In this case, in order to return the output of BGM or the like to the state before regulation, the volume (volume) may be returned without considering processing such as reassigning the sound to the channel. Hereinafter, specific embodiments will be described.

[16-1. Control when sounds from different groups are being output]
In the present embodiment, channels are grouped and a priority order is set for each group. A description will be given of a case in which sound is output from a channel belonging to a group having a higher priority when a sound is output from a channel belonging to a group having a lower priority.

[16-1-1. Volume control table by channel group]
FIG. 149 is a diagram showing an example of a volume control table for each channel group showing the priority of volume (volume) control for each group in the present embodiment. In the present embodiment, each channel is defined as a fixed channel (fixed channel) 1, a fixed channel (fixed channel) 2, an automatic channel group (AUTO group) 1, an automatic channel group (AUTO group) 2, and an automatic channel group (AUTO group). It is divided into three groups of three.

  For each group, a group volume priority order and a suppression volume value are set. The group volume priority indicates the priority between groups, and the smaller the numerical value, the higher the priority. In this embodiment, a numerical value of 1 or more is set, and “1” has the highest priority.

  The suppression volume value is a numerical value indicating an aspect in which the volume of another sound being played is changed when the sound is played on a channel belonging to a group having a low priority. Specifically, when “−1” is set, the sound reproduction is continued without changing the other sound being reproduced. When “0” is set, control is performed to mute other sounds being reproduced. When a numerical value other than “0” is set, for example, when “50” is set, the volume of the other sound being reproduced is suppressed to 50%. That is, when a numerical value from 1 to 100 is set, the volume is changed with the unit as%. It should be noted that control may be performed so that the volume is set larger than usual by setting a numerical value of 100 or more.

  Further, each set value will be described with reference to FIG. 149. In the present embodiment as well, the fixed channel system channel and the automatic channel system channel are mixed in the same manner as the above-described embodiment. In the fixed channel, a sound such as a notification sound or BGM that is output with priority or is always output is assigned. In the automatic channel, grouped effect sounds are assigned according to the type and importance of the production.

  In fixed ch1, the group volume priority is set to “1”, which is the highest. Further, since “0” is set in the suppression volume value, when sound is reproduced with the fixed ch1, all other sounds being reproduced are muted. The sound reproduced by the fixed ch1 is a notification sound for notifying outside such as a player or a game hall employee as shown as a reference reproduction sound. This may be an alarm sound for notifying that a failure has occurred in the gaming machine, or an alarm sound for clogging a ball or the like. That is, when a sound is output from the fixed ch1, because of an illegal act or a failure, the output of the effect sound is stopped and only the notification sound is output. Further, while the notification sound is output from the fixed ch1 having the highest priority, the output of other sounds having a relatively low priority is restricted.

  In the fixed channel 2, the group volume priority order is set to “4” which is the lowest in FIG. In addition, since “−1” is set in the suppression volume value, even if sound reproduction is started on the fixed ch 2, other sounds being reproduced are not affected. Sound played on fixed channel 2 is mainly BGM in games, and in normal games, production effect sounds that draw the player's attention in response to the execution of special symbol variation display while BGM is being output, etc. Is output.

  In AUTO group 1, the group volume priority is set to “2”. In addition, since “0” is set as the suppression volume value, when sound is reproduced in the AUTO group 1, all sounds being reproduced other than the notification sound output from the fixed ch1 are muted. That is, the sound output in the AUTO group 1 is output with the highest priority in production, and other sounds are muted and output alone.

  Specific sounds output in the AUTO group 1 include a jackpot sound, a blackout sound effect, a V winning sound, etc., as shown in the reference playback sound. The big hit definite sound is a sound for notifying that the result of the variation display is a big hit at a predetermined timing such as at the time of starting winning a prize, and is a production effect sound that maximizes the expectation for the player. The V winning sound is a sound for notifying that a game ball has won a prize in the V zone and, for example, it has been determined that the game will shift to a high probability state. Can be made.

  The blackout sound effect is a sound effect that is output in a silent state while suppressing the output of other effect sound effects when executing the blackout effect described above. At this time, the display of the effect screen is also darkened. At this time, an effect of emitting a flash on the screen may be executed together with the output of the blackout sound effect. The jackpot sound and V winning sound are output in a short time after the sound is output in order to suppress the output of other sounds so that the player does not miss the output of these sounds. Is resumed. On the other hand, in the blackout sound effect, the player's attention is concentrated on the blackout effect by setting the sound effect sound of another effect not being output for a predetermined time after the blackout sound effect is output. In addition, after execution of the blackout effect, an effect linked to the blackout effect may be executed with the change. For example, the blackout effect is executed with the first half change, and the corresponding effect is executed with the second half change. It may be.

  In AUTO group 2, the group volume priority is set to “3”. In addition, since “50” is set as the suppression volume value, when sounds are played in the AUTO group 2, all sounds being played in the groups whose priority is “4” or less are halved (50% Output). For example, the BGM output from the fixed channel 2 has the group volume priority “4” as described above, so that the volume is halved and the sound of the AUTO group 2 is output at the normal volume. Thereby, it is possible to execute an effect that draws the player's attention while continuing the flow of the game without completely muting the BGM. Specific sounds output by the AUTO group 2 include, for example, a first half notice sound effect and a second half notice effect sound.

  In AUTO group 3, the group volume priority is set to “2”. Similarly to the case of AUTO group 2, since “50” is set as the suppression volume value, when sound is played back in AUTO group 3, a group whose priority is “3” or lower is being played back. All sounds are halved. For example, when a notice sound effect is output from the AUTO group 2, the volume of the notice sound effect is halved. At this time, if the volume of the BGM output from the fixed channel 2 has already been halved, it may be continued without changing the volume, or the volume may be halved (1/4 of the original volume). May be.

  Specific sounds output by the AUTO group 3 include, for example, a hold winning sound at the time of start winning, a hold changing sound indicating that the hold display has changed, a button pressing sound for notifying that the effect button has been pressed, and the like. is there. In the present embodiment, when the group volume priority order is the same, the sound is output as it is with a normal volume. Therefore, even if the AUTO group 2 blackout effect is executed and the output of BGM or the like is restricted, sounds belonging to the AUTO group 3 are output. For example, when a game ball enters a start winning opening, a pending winning sound is output even when a blackout effect is being executed.

[16-1-2. Group volume control processing]
Next, the volume control procedure in this embodiment will be described. FIG. 150 is a flowchart showing the procedure of group volume control processing for performing sound control corresponding to the group to which the output sound belongs according to this embodiment. The group volume control process is executed in the sound data creation process (step S1032) in the peripheral control part steady process (FIG. 95) of the peripheral control part power-on process. The group volume control process will be described below.

  When the group volume control process is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first determines whether or not there is a new sound reproduction request (step S1401). If there is no new sound reproduction request (the result of step S1401 is “No”), the processing from step S1420 is executed.

  On the other hand, when there is a new sound reproduction request (the result of step S1401 is “Yes”), the peripheral control MPU 1511a identifies the channel group from the sound number of the sound for which reproduction has been requested, and the volume control table for each channel group. From FIG. 149, the suppression volume value and the group volume priority order corresponding to the channel group are acquired (step S1402).

  Next, the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines whether or not the acquired suppression volume value is “−1” (no suppression control) (step S1403). When the acquired suppression volume value is “−1” (the result of step S1403 is “Yes”), that is, when control is not performed on the sound being reproduced, the processing from step S1406 is executed.

  When the acquired suppression volume value is not “−1” (the result of step S1403 is “No”), that is, when control is being performed on the sound being played back, the peripheral control MPU 1511a further controls the sound requested to be played back. It is determined whether the sound number, the suppression volume value, and the group volume priority are registered in the work area (step S1404). When the sound number, the suppression volume value, and the group volume priority order have been registered (the result of step S1404 is “Yes”), the processes after step S1406 are executed.

  When the sound number, the suppression volume value, and the group volume priority are not registered (the result of step S1404 is “No”), the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines the sound number, the suppression volume value, and the group volume priority of the sound requested to be reproduced. The rank is held in the work area (step S1405). In this work area, the parameters (sound number, suppression volume value, and group volume priority) of the sound with the highest priority currently being reproduced are recorded.

  Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines whether there is a sound that is already being reproduced (step S1406). If there is no sound being reproduced (the result of step S1406 is “No”), a predetermined volume value is set to the volume of the sound for which a new reproduction request has been made (step S1407). On the other hand, if there is a sound that is already being reproduced (the result of step S1406 is “Yes”), sound control is performed based on the parameters stored in the work area and the parameters of the new sound in the processing after step S1410.

  The control for the sound being reproduced will be described. The peripheral control MPU 1511a first determines whether or not a sound parameter for suppressing the output of the sound being reproduced has been registered in the work area (step S1410). If the sound parameter that suppresses the output of the sound being reproduced has not been registered (the result of step S1410 is “No”), the output of the sound requested to be newly reproduced is set (step S1407).

  The sound control executed after step S1410 will be described. When the sound for suppressing the output of the sound being reproduced has been registered (the result of step S1410 is “Yes”), the peripheral control MPU 1511a issues a new reproduction request. The group volume priority order of the sound is compared with the group volume priority order already stored in the work area (step S1411).

  If the group volume priority of the sound for which a new reproduction request has been made is lower than the group volume priority already held in the work area (the result of step S1411 is “<”), the peripheral control MPU 1511a The volume of the sound with the noise is reduced based on the suppression volume value of the work area (step S1414).

  If the group volume priority of the sound for which a new playback request has been made is higher than the group volume priority stored in the work area (the result of step S1411 is “>”), the peripheral control MPU 1511a performs the new playback. The requested sound number, suppression volume value, and group volume priority are overwritten in the work area (step S1412), and the volume of the sound requested for new playback is set to a predetermined volume value (step S1413). ).

  Furthermore, if the group volume priority of the sound for which a new reproduction request has been made is equal to the group volume priority held in the work area (the result of step S1411 is “=”), the peripheral control MPU 1511a While maintaining the content, the volume of the sound requested to be newly reproduced is set to a predetermined volume value (step S1413).

  Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines whether or not the group volume priority of the sound that is already being reproduced is lower than the group volume priority recorded in the work area (step S1415). If the group volume priority of the sound being played is lower than the group volume priority recorded in the work area (the result of step S1415 is “Yes”), the volume of the sound being played is recorded in the work area. The volume is reduced based on the suppression volume value (step S1416).

  When the processing of step S1415 and step S1416 is executed for all the sounds being reproduced (step S1417), or after the processing of step S1407 is completed, the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines that the suppression volume value and group volume priority are It is determined whether or not it has been registered in the area (step S1420). If the suppression volume value and the group volume priority order are not already registered in the work area (the result of step S1420 is “No”), this process ends.

  If the suppression volume value and the group volume priority are already registered in the work area (the result of step S1420 is “Yes”), the peripheral control MPU 1511a plays the sound corresponding to the sound number registered in the work area. It is determined whether or not the processing has been completed (step S1421). If the reproduction of the sound corresponding to the sound number registered in the work area has not been completed (the result of step S1421 is “No”), this process ends.

  When the reproduction of the sound corresponding to the sound number registered in the work area is completed (the result of step S1421 is “Yes”), the peripheral control MPU 1511a displays the sound number, the suppression volume value, and the group volume priority order in the work area. (Step S1422). Finally, all the sounds being reproduced are returned to the original volume values determined in advance (steps S1423 and S1424), and this process is terminated.

  The above is the processing for controlling the volume of the sound being reproduced when the reproduction of a new sound is requested in the present embodiment. Next, sound volume control will be described in time series. FIG. 151 is a timing chart for explaining the procedure for controlling the volume according to the present embodiment in a time series. (A) shows the execution timing of the production, and (B) shows the volume of each production. FIG. 151 illustrates an example in which a notice effect and a blackout effect are executed.

  When the power of the gaming machine is turned on, the game is started and the normal BGM is output on the fixed channel (fixed ch2). As shown in FIG. 149, the fixed channel 2 has a group volume priority “4” and a suppression volume value “−1”. Since the normal BGM has a suppression volume value “−1”, the sound is reproduced without recording the normal BGM sound number, group volume priority, and suppression volume value in the work area.

  When the game ball wins the start winning opening (here, sound output at the time of the winning winning is omitted), the special symbol variation display (dynamic display) is started, and the first half notice A is started (time t21). The effect sound effect of the first half notice A is output on a channel belonging to the AUTO group 2, the group volume priority is “3”, and the suppression volume value is “50” (the results of step S1402 and step S1403 are “No”). . Since no parameters were recorded in the work area at the start of the first half notice (the result of step S1404 is “No”), the parameters of the effect sound effect of the first half notice are recorded in the work area (step S1405).

  At the start of the first half notice A, the normal BGM is output (the result of step S1406 is “Yes”), and the sound number of the effect sound of the first half notice A is registered in the work area (the result of step S1410 is the result). “Yes”). At this time, the group priority of the sound requested for new reproduction and the group priority of the work area are the same (the result of step S1411 is “=”). A predetermined volume value is set (step S1413).

  At this time, since the normal BGM is being played back and the group volume priority is lower than the effect sound effect of the first half variation (result of step S1415 is “Yes”), the sound is based on the effect sound effect parameter of the first half notice A. Is suppressed (step S1416). Specifically, the normal BGM volume is reduced (suppressed) to an output of 50%.

  Thereafter, when the predetermined condition is satisfied, a blackout effect is executed (time t22). The sound effect of the blackout effect is output on a channel belonging to AUTO group 1, the group volume priority is “2”, and the suppression volume value is “0” (step S1402). At this time, the parameter of the first half notice A is recorded in the work area, but since the group volume priority is higher in the blackout effect (the result of step S1411 is “>”), the content of the work area is changed to the blackout effect. (Step S1412), and a predetermined volume value is set to the volume of the sound for which a new reproduction request has been made (step S1413).

  Furthermore, since the group priority of the effect sound of the normal BGM and the first half notice A being played is lower than the group priority of the effect sound of the blackout effect (the result of step S1415 is “Yes”), these The volume of the sound effect is reduced (step S1416). The blackout effect is muted because the suppression volume value is zero.

  Further, the second half notice B is started during execution of the blackout effect (time t23). At this time, since the group volume priority order of the second half notice B is lower than the group volume priority order of the blackout effect (the result of step S1411 is “<”), the second half notice B is started in a silenced state, Continue until is finished.

  Thereafter, when the game ball wins the start winning opening, a reserved winning sound is output (time t24). The reserved winning sound is output on a channel belonging to the AUTO group 3, and the group volume priority is “2” and the suppression volume value is “50”. In the present embodiment, when the group volume priority order is the same (the result of step S1411 is “=”), the parameters recorded in the work area are maintained, and output in a predetermined volume. Therefore, even if the blackout effect is being executed, the pending winning sound is output as usual.

  When the blackout effect ends (time t26), the blackout effect parameter recorded in the work area is deleted (step S1422), and the restricted volume is returned to the predetermined volume (step S1423). . Specifically, the volumes of the normal BGM, the first half notice A, and the second half notice B are returned to predetermined volumes. Thereafter, the output of the sound of the first half notice A and the second half notice B ends (time t27, t28).

  As described above, in the present embodiment, while a sound effect having a high group priority is being output, a specific effect can be emphasized by suppressing the output of a sound effect having a low group priority. Furthermore, volume control based on the suppression volume value allows the player to recognize that multiple performances are in progress at the same time. By setting the priority higher, it is possible to execute the effect without impairing the effect.

  In addition, when a new high priority sound is output and the output of the effect sound during playback is suppressed, in the embodiment described above, the volume of the effect sound during playback is immediately output based on the suppression volume value. The volume of other effect sound is gradually lowered to the target value (volume based on the suppression volume value) and faded out from the timing when the sound with high priority is output. Also good. In this case, the start value (the volume currently being played) and the time to reach the target value, the amount of change may be specified, or the target value based on the production contents such as the length of the reproduction time of the production effect sound. You may make it set the time to reach and the amount of change. For example, if the output of the new effect sound is short, the time to reach the target value may be set short to make the effect sound stand out. If the output of the new effect sound is relatively long, the target It is also possible to reduce the uncomfortable feeling that may occur when the effect sound effect is switched by setting a long time to reach the value.

  For example, if the newly output sound effect is a short-time output, such as a big hit confirmation sound or a V winning sound, the output of the effect sound during playback such as BGM is faded out in a relatively short time, It is possible to make the newly produced effect sound more prominent without destroying the game tempo.

  Furthermore, when the output of the new effect sound is finished and the output of the other effect sound is resumed, the volume of the other effect sound is immediately returned to the target value (predetermined volume value). Instead of this, the start value (volume during regulation), the time to reach the target value, and the amount of change may be defined and controlled to fade in. For example, the normal BGM output is suppressed to 50% during the sound effect reproduction of the first half notice A, but when the normal BGM output is resumed, the normal volume is set as the target value, and the start value (the volume currently being reproduced. Then, the volume is controlled to 50%, and the fade-in is controlled based on the specified time and the amount of change. By configuring in this way, it becomes possible to suppress the player's uncomfortable feeling while making the switching of the effect sound effect stand out, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Moreover, although this embodiment demonstrated the effect sound effect as an example, it can be applied similarly also in the case of an alarm sound or a notification sound. As an example, when outputting a notification sound having a high importance (priority order) (for example, an alarm sound due to fraud), not only a production effect sound but also a notification sound having a relatively low importance (priority order) ( For example, the output of a ball clogging notification sound) may be regulated. On the other hand, if an illegal act is performed while a low-priority (priority) notification sound is being output, output of the notification sound is interrupted, and a high-priority (priority) notification sound (alarm) Sound) may be output with priority.

  Note that the alarm sound and the notification sound are not set for the sound output time like the effect sound, but the sound output is continued until the cause of the alarm or the notification is resolved. Therefore, when a situation occurs in which a plurality of types of alarm sounds and notification sounds are output, the sound with the highest priority is output, and after the cause of outputting the sound is resolved, other notification sounds are output. . At this time, the next highest priority sound may be output to restrict the output of the remaining sound, or all the remaining sounds may be output simultaneously.

[16-2. Volume control by sound output time (long / short)
In the above, the control of the sound output redundantly according to the priority order between the groups has been described. Next, a control example for controlling the sound volume based on the sound output time (long / short) will be described.

[16-2-1. Volume control table for each sound effect]
FIG. 152 is a diagram showing an example of a volume control table for each sound effect indicating volume (volume) control for each total sound reproduction time (output time) in the present embodiment. For each sound effect, a used playback channel (ch), a total playback time, and a suppression volume value are set.

  As in the example shown in FIG. 149, the used reproduction channels are divided into five groups of fixed ch 1, fixed ch 2, AUTO group 1, AUTO group 2, and AUTO group 3.

  The total playback time is the time from the start to stop of the sound effect output. When the total playback time is set to -1, the sound effect is output at a preset volume without being affected by the suppression control by the sound effect to be output elsewhere. At this time, control is performed so that the volume of the sound effect cannot be suppressed.

  When the total playback time is set to 0, loop playback is repeatedly output, and output is continued until another sound effect is assigned to the same channel. When the numerical value set for the total reproduction time is any other number (positive number), it is the reproduction time of the sound effect. Note that the unit of the total playback time is milliseconds (ms).

  Similar to the example shown in FIG. 149, the suppression volume value is a numerical value indicating a mode of changing the volume of other sound effects that are output simultaneously. Specifically, in the case of “−1”, the sound is continuously reproduced without changing the sound being reproduced, and in the case of “0”, the sound effect being reproduced (− Output (except for sound effects set to 1) is suppressed (mute). In the case of a numerical value other than “0”, for example, when “50” is set, the volume of the sound being reproduced is suppressed to 50%.

  Subsequently, each sound effect will be described with reference to FIG. 152. In the present embodiment as well, the fixed channel method and the automatic channel method are mixed, and the assigned sound effects are the same as in the above-described embodiment. It is. In the example shown in FIG. 152, the suppression volume value is set for each channel group, but may be set for each sound effect.

  Since the total playback time is set to “−1” and the suppression volume value is set to “0” for the sound effect assigned to the fixed ch 1, when these sound effects are played back, All sounds are muted. The sound played on the fixed channel 1 is a notification sound for notifying outside such as a player or an employee of a game hall, and is caused by an illegal act or occurrence of a malfunction. Cannot be suppressed, and output of other sound effects during playback is forcibly suppressed (stopped, muted).

  Since the total playback time is set to “0” and the suppression volume value is set to “−1”, the sound effect assigned to the fixed channel 2 is repeatedly output from the start of output. These sound effects do not affect other sounds being reproduced. The sound effect assigned to the fixed channel 2 is mainly BGM in games.

  The sound effect assigned to AUTO group 1 has a total playback time set for each sound effect (play time) and a suppression volume value of “0”. All other sounds being played are muted. That is, the sound output in the AUTO group 1 is output with the highest priority in production, and other sounds are muted and output alone. As shown in FIG. 149, the specific sounds output in the AUTO group 1 are a jackpot sound, a blackout sound effect, a V winning sound, and the like.

  The sound effects assigned to the AUTO group 2 and the AUTO group 3 have the total playback time set for each sound effect (playback time) and the suppression volume value “50”. When a sound is reproduced, all other sound outputs being reproduced are halved (suppressed to 50% output). Thus, for example, as specific sounds output in the AUTO group 2 that can make the production stand out while continuing the flow of the game by halving the output of the BGM, for example, the first half notice sound effect or the second half notice effect Examples of specific sounds output by the AUTO group 3 include, for example, a hold winning sound at the time of starting winning a prize, a hold changing sound indicating that the hold display has changed, and an effect button being pressed. For example, a button press sound for notification.

[16-2-2. Volume control processing]
In this embodiment, the output of the sound effect reproduced in duplicate is controlled according to the sound effect playback time. FIG. 153A and FIG. 153B are flowcharts showing a procedure of volume control processing for performing sound control based on parameters set for each sound effect according to the present embodiment. Hereinafter, the procedure of sound effect output control in this embodiment will be described.

  When the volume control process is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first determines whether or not there is a request for playing a new sound (step S1501A). When there is no new sound reproduction request (the result of step S1501A is “No”), the processing from step S1530A is executed.

  On the other hand, when there is a request for playing a new sound (the result of step S1501A is “Yes”), the peripheral control MPU 1511a identifies the sound effect name based on the sound number of the sound that has been requested to be played, and The suppression volume value and the total reproduction time are acquired from the control table (FIG. 152) (step S1502A).

  Next, the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines whether or not the acquired suppression volume value is “−1” (no suppression control) (step S1503A). When the acquired suppression volume value is “−1” (the result of step S1503A is “Yes”), that is, when control is not performed on the sound being reproduced, the processing from step S1506A is executed.

  When the acquired suppression volume value is not “−1” (the result of step S1503A is “No”), that is, when control is being performed on the sound being played back, the peripheral control MPU 1511a further controls the sound requested to be played back. It is determined whether the sound number, the suppression volume value, and the total reproduction time have been registered in the work area (step S1504A). When the sound number, the suppression volume value, and the total reproduction time are already registered in the work area (the result of step S1504A is “Yes”), the processes after step S1506A are executed.

  If the sound number, the suppression volume value, and the group volume priority are not registered (the result of step S1504A is “No”), the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines the sound number, suppression volume value, and total playback time of the sound requested to be played. Is held in the work area (step S1505A).

  Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines whether there is a sound that is already being reproduced (step S1506A). If there is no sound being reproduced (the result of step S1506A is “No”), a predetermined volume value is set to the volume of the sound for which a new reproduction request has been made (step S1507A). On the other hand, if there is a sound that is already being reproduced (the result of step S1506A is “Yes”), sound control is performed based on the parameters stored in the work area and the parameters of the new sound in the processing after step S1510A.

  The sound control based on the parameters stored in the work area and the parameters of the new sound will be described. First, the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines whether or not the total reproduction time of the sound requested to be newly reproduced is “−1”. (Step S1510A). When the total reproduction time of the sound requested to be newly reproduced is “−1” (the result of step S1510A is “Yes”), as described above, an alarm sound is output when an abnormality occurs, and the new The volume of the playback sound is prohibited from being suppressed, and the output of other sound effects during playback is forcibly suppressed.

  The peripheral control MPU 1511a sets a predetermined volume value for the sound for which a new reproduction request has been made (step S1511A). Furthermore, the work number is overwritten with the sound number, the suppression volume value, and the total reproduction time for which a new reproduction request has been made (step S1512A).

  Then, the peripheral control MPU 1511a suppresses the volume of the sound effect being reproduced based on the sound suppression volume value for which a new reproduction request has been made (step S1513A). When the volume of all sound effects being reproduced is suppressed, the processing after step S1530A is executed (step S1514A).

  On the other hand, if the total playback time of the sound for which a new playback request has been made is not “−1” (the result of step S1510A is “No”), the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines the total playback time of the sound held in the work area. It is determined whether “−1” or a sound number is set in the work area (step S1520A). When the total reproduction time of the sound held in the work area is “−1” or the sound number is not set in the work area (the result of step S1520A is “Yes”), the processes after step S1530A are executed.

  When the total playback time of the sound held in the work area is not “−1” and the sound number is set in the work area (the result of step S1520A is “No”), the peripheral control MPU 1511a It is determined whether or not the suppression volume value of the sound requested to be newly reproduced is smaller than the suppression volume value held in the work area (step S1521A).

  If the suppression volume value of the sound for which a new playback request has been made is smaller than the suppression volume value held in the work area (the result of step S1521A is “Yes”), the peripheral control MPU 1511a The work area is overwritten with the number, the suppression volume value, and the total reproduction time (step S1522A).

  Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines whether or not the total reproduction time of the sound requested to be newly reproduced is shorter than the total reproduction time held in the work area (step S1523A). If the total playback time of the sound requested for new playback is shorter than or the same as the total playback time held in the work area (the result of step S1521A is “Yes”), the volume of the sound requested for new playback is set. A predetermined volume value is set (step S1524A). On the other hand, if the total playback time of the sound requested for new playback is longer than the total playback time held in the work area (the result of step S1521A is “No”), the volume of the sound requested for new playback The volume value reduced based on the suppression volume value of the work area is set (step S1525A).

  Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines whether or not the suppression volume value is smaller than or equal to the suppression volume value already recorded in the work area for all sounds being played (step S1526A). If the suppression volume value of the sound being reproduced is larger than the suppression volume value recorded in the work area (the result of step S1526A is “No”), the volume of the sound being reproduced is recorded in the work area. The volume is reduced based on the suppression volume value (step S1527A).

  When the peripheral control MPU 1511a performs the processing of step S1526A and step S1527A for all the sounds being reproduced, the peripheral control MPU 1511a performs the processing after step S1530A (step S1528A).

  When the volume control for the sound requested for new reproduction and the sound being reproduced is completed (step S1507A, step S1514A, step S1524A, step S1525A, step S1528A), the peripheral control MPU 1511a receives the sound number, the suppression volume value, and the total reproduction time. Is registered in the work area (step S1530A). When the sound number, the suppression volume value, and the total reproduction time have not been registered in the work area (the result of step S1530A is “No”), this process ends.

  When the sound number, the suppression volume value, and the total reproduction time are already registered in the work area (the result of step S1530A is “Yes”), the peripheral control MPU 1511a reproduces the sound corresponding to the sound number registered in the work area. It is determined whether or not the process has ended (step S1531A). If the reproduction of the sound corresponding to the sound number registered in the work area has not been completed (the result of step S1531A is “No”), this process ends.

  When the reproduction of the sound corresponding to the sound number registered in the work area is completed (the result of step S1531A is “Yes”), the peripheral control MPU 1511a obtains the sound number, the suppression volume value, and the total reproduction time from the work area. Erasing is performed (step S1532A). Finally, all the sounds being reproduced are returned to the original volume values determined in advance (steps S1533A and S1534A), and this process is terminated.

  The above is the processing for controlling the sound volume based on the total sound effect playback time in the present embodiment. Next, sound volume control will be specifically described along a time series. FIG. 154 is a timing chart for explaining the procedure for controlling the volume in the present embodiment along the time series, where (A) shows the execution timing of the production, and (B) shows the volume of each production. FIG. 154 describes an example in which the first half notice effect and the blackout effect are executed.

  When the power of the gaming machine is turned on, the game is started and the normal BGM is output. The normal BGM is output with the fixed ch2, and as shown in FIG. 152, the suppression volume value is set to “−1”. Normal BGM is loop reproduction in which reproduction is repeated until the BGM is switched, and 0 is set for the total reproduction time. Since the suppression volume value is “−1” (the result of step S1503A is “Yes”), the normal BGM parameter is not registered in the work area. Then, a preset volume value is set and normal BGM is output (step S1507A).

  After that, when the game ball wins the starting winning opening and the special symbol variation display (dynamic display) is started, the output of the sound effect of the first half notice A is newly requested in order to execute the first half notice A. (Time t31). The sound effect of the first half notice A is output on channels belonging to the AUTO group 2, the total playback time is set to 15000 ms, and the suppression volume value is set to 50 (the result of step S1503A is “No”).

  Further, since no parameters are registered in the work area at this time (the result of step S1504A is “No”), the sound number, total playback time, and suppression volume value of the first half notice A are held in the work area ( Step S1505A).

  Furthermore, at the start timing of the first half notice A, the normal BGM is being reproduced (the result of step S1506A is “Yes”), the total reproduction time of the first half notice A is 15000 ms (the result of step S1510A is “No”), and new The parameter of the sound effect of the first half notice A for which a reproduction request has been made has already been registered in the work area (the result of step S1520A is “No”, the result of step S1521A is “No”, and the result of step S1523A is “Yes”). ). Therefore, the volume of the sound effect of the first half notice A for which a new reproduction request has been made is set to a predetermined volume value (step S1524A).

  Subsequently, since the normal BGM is being reproduced at this time and the volume has not been suppressed, the suppression volume value is “100”, which is larger than the suppression volume value “50” of the first half notice A recorded in the work area. (The result of step S1526A is “No”), and the normal BGM volume is reduced to 50% based on the suppression volume value “50” of the first half notice A (step S1527A).

  Subsequently, the sound effect parameters of the first half notice A are already registered in the work area (the result of step S1530A is “Yes”), and the first half notice A is continued (the result of step S1531A is “No”). This process ends.

  Thereafter, the blackout effect is executed when the predetermined condition is satisfied, and a new sound reproduction request for the blackout effect sound is received (time t32). The blackout effect sound is output on a channel belonging to the AUTO group 1, and the total playback time is “8000” and the suppression volume value is “0” (the result of step S1503A is “No”). At this time, the parameter of the sound effect of the first half notice A is already registered in the work area (the result of Step S1504A is “Yes”), and the sound effect of the normal BGM and the first half notice A is being output (Step S1506A). The result is “Yes”).

  Furthermore, the blackout effect sound effect requested for new reproduction has a total reproduction time of “8000” (the result of step S1510A is “No”), and the total reproduction time of the sound effect of the first half notice A held in the work area. Is “15000” (the result of step S1520A is “No”).

  Next, since the suppression volume value of the sound effect of the first half notice A held in the work area is “50” and the suppression volume value of the blackout effect sound effect requested to be newly reproduced is “0” (step The result of S1521A is “Yes”), and the work number is overwritten with the sound number of the blackout effect sound effect for which a new playback request has been made, the suppression volume value “0”, and the total playback time “8000” (step S1522A).

  In addition, since the total reproduction time (8000 ms; a1) of the sound effect of the blackout notice effect is shorter than the total reproduction time (15000 ms) of the sound effect of the first half notice A (black in the result of step S1523A is “Yes”). A predetermined volume value is set to the volume of the notice effect sound effect (step S1524A).

  Subsequently, the suppression volume value of the sound being played is normally “50” for BGM, “100” for the sound effect of the first half notice A, and “0” for the sound effect volume of the blackout notice effect effect already recorded in the work area. (The result of step S1526A is “No”), the volume of the sound effect of the normal BGM and the first half notice A is set to “0” (step S1527A).

  Thereafter, when a game ball wins the start winning opening during execution of the blackout effect, a new sound reproduction request for the reserved winning sound is received (time t33). The reserved winning sound is output on a channel belonging to the AUTO group 3, and the total playback time is “2000” and the suppression volume value is “50” (the result of step S1503A is “No”). At this time, the parameter of the blackout effect sound effect is already registered in the work area (the result of step S1504A is “Yes”), and the blackout effect sound effect, the normal BGM, and the sound effect of the first half notice A are being output. Yes (the result of step S1506A is “Yes”). At this time, the output of the normal BGM and the sound effect of the first half notice A is suppressed.

  Further, the pending winning sound for which a new reproduction request has been made has a total reproduction time of “2000” (the result of step S1510A is “No”), and the total reproduction time of the blackout effect sound effect held in the work area is “8000”. (The result of step S1520A is “No”).

  Next, the suppression volume value of the blackout effect sound effect held in the work area is “0”, and the suppression volume value of the pending winning sound requested to be newly reproduced is “50” (the result of step S1521A is “No”), the work area is not overwritten, but the total reproduction time (2000 ms; a2) of the pending winning sound is shorter than the total reproduction time (8000 ms; a1) of the blackout effect sound (the result of step S1523A is “Yes”), a predetermined volume value is set to the volume of the pending winning sound (step S1524A). Further, since the work area has not been updated, the suppression volume value of the sound being reproduced is the same as the suppression volume value recorded in the work area (the result of step S1526A is “Yes”). Then, even when the output of the reserved winning sound is finished (time t34), the blackout effect sound is continuously output because the parameter of the blackout effect sound is recorded in the work area.

  Thereafter, when the blackout effect ends (time t35), the reproduction of the sound corresponding to the sound number registered in the work area ends (the result of step S1531A is “Yes”), so the blackout stored in the work area The parameter of the effect sound is deleted (step S1532A). Then, the volume of the sound effect of the normal BGM and the first half notice A in which the sound reproduction is suppressed (the volume is reduced) is returned to a predetermined volume value (step S1533A). At this time, the normal BGM is suppressed at the time of reproducing the sound effect of the first half notice A, but the normal volume is restored.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, it is possible to mute the volume of other sound effects being played and to make a specific effect (for example, blackout effect) stand out, Even if the output ends, it is possible to provide the player with a production opportunity. Specifically, if the output of the sound effect is completed during the mute period, the sound effect is output even while a specific effect is executed and the output of the sound effect of another effect is suppressed If the output of the sound effect continues until the end of the mute period, the output of the sound effect of the effect during the mute period is suppressed to make the execution of the specific effect stand out. be able to.

  By the way, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 in which the number of channels is limited, a new sound is generated when there is no vacancy in the channel to which sound data is to be assigned (the number of vacant channels is 0). If the data allocation condition is satisfied, one of the sound outputs must be discarded, and there is a concern that the game entertainment will deteriorate due to the appearance of the unintended sound output in the production design.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as described above, when a new sound data allocation condition is satisfied when there is no channel space (the number of empty channels is 0), a preset value is set. Based on the priorities, the control of the sound output with lower importance is selectively discarded, thereby avoiding the appearance of an unintended sound output in the production design and reducing the entertainment interest. Proposed to be suppressed. However, it can be said that it is also important to make technical ingenuity in the situation where there is no vacant channel (the situation where the number of vacant channels is 0) and how it is difficult to appear.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in order to enable more channel resources to be assigned to the effect sound (effect sound), various kinds of signals that are not output as long as an appropriate game is performed. As for the notification sound, it is possible to adopt a channel saving type control structure that can appropriately notify the abnormality content only with a single channel. Hereinafter, an example of a case where a channel saving type control structure is adopted for outputting various kinds of notification sounds will be described.

  FIG. 155 shows various types of notification sounds (payout notification sounds and abnormality notification sounds) excluding effect sounds as sound control by a fixed channel method, and a specific channel (hereinafter referred to as channel X) of a finite number of prepared channels. An example of a sound definition table in the case of realizing the process of outputting only in the above-mentioned manner is shown. In this sound definition table, for each sound name, the priority for playback, left / right pan initial value, upper / lower pan initial value, volume initial value, sound number, seek point, playback type setting and output type setting definition are managed. doing. Here, for the convenience of explanation, only the definitions for the notification sounds 1 to 7 are shown, and the description of the definitions of other notification sounds, effect sounds, and the like is omitted. In addition to the definition based on the fixed channel method illustrated in FIG. 120, the production sound is defined based on the automatic channel method illustrated in FIG. It is also possible to use it.

  The priority is a parameter that is used to determine which of the notification sounds is assigned to the channel X for output when a plurality of notification sounds satisfy the output conditions. The high notification sound is assigned to the channel X and output regardless of the assignment state of the notification sound having the low priority order to the channel X. As will be described later, when the priorities are the same, the notification sound previously assigned to channel X is given priority, and after the output of the notification sound is completed, the notification sound assigned to channel X is output. Will be.

  The left and right pan initial values represent sound image localization initial positions of left and right speakers, which are combinations of the upper left speaker 573L and the lower left speaker 921L, and the upper right speaker 573R and the lower right speaker 921R. By dynamically changing the left and right pan setting values during sound reproduction, a difference is produced in the volume output separately from the left and right speakers, and the sound image can be localized in an arbitrary space between the left and right speakers. For example, when “0x00” is set, it indicates that only the left speaker (upper left speaker 573L and lower left speaker 921L) outputs, and for example, when “0x80” is set, the upper left speaker 573L and lower left speaker are set. The difference in volume output individually from the left and right speakers, which is a combination of 921L, the upper right speaker 573R, and the lower right speaker 921R, is 0, and the sound image is localized at the center of the left and right speakers. For example, when “0xFF” is set, it indicates that only the right speaker (upper right speaker 573R and lower right speaker 921R) outputs.

  The initial values of the upper and lower pans are, for example, the sound image localization of sounds by upper and lower speakers such as a pair of upper speakers 573 (upper left speaker 573L and upper right speaker 573R) and a pair of lower speakers 921 (lower left speaker 921L and lower right speaker 921R). It represents the initial position. By dynamically changing the setting values of the upper and lower pans during sound reproduction, a difference is produced in the volume output individually from the upper and lower speakers, and the sound image can be localized in an arbitrary space between the upper and lower speakers. . For example, when “0x00” is set, it indicates that the sound is output from only the pair of upper speakers 573. For example, when “0x80” is set, the volume difference that is output individually from the upper and lower speakers that are a combination of these. Becomes 0, and the sound image is localized in the center of the upper and lower speakers. For example, when “0xFF” is set, it indicates that only a pair of lower speakers 921 outputs.

  The volume initial value represents the sound volume setting at the start of reproduction, and can be determined, for example, in a setting range from “0x00” to “0xFF”. The sound number is an identifier for distinguishing each sound described above. The playback type setting is loop playback for repeatedly playing the target sound (corresponding to “LOOP” in the figure), or 1SHOT playback for playing the target sound once (corresponding to “1SHOT” in the figure). It represents whether or not. The output type setting indicates whether the target sound is reproduced in monaural or stereo.

  FIG. 156 is a table showing notifying contents, notifying mode, and notifying time, as well as conditions (cancellation conditions) for notifying each notifying sound exemplified in FIG. 155, for each kind of notifying sound. In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a finite notification time is set for any notification sound, but this is used as much as possible in order to effectively use a single channel X. This is a measure for maintaining in the state and forcing a subsequent notification sound output.

  As shown in FIG. 156, the notification sound 1 (magnetic anomaly) is in a state where magnetism is detected by the magnetic detection sensor 4024 (a state where there is a high possibility that an illegal act using a magnet is being performed). This is to notify that there is. As a notification mode, a loop process for repeatedly outputting a notification sound such as “Boo-boo magnet has been detected” and display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 (for example, “Magnet has been detected”). ) And lighting by various lamps (light emitting devices) arranged on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 are executed. As the notification time, loop processing for repeatedly outputting a notification sound such as “Boo-boo magnet was detected” is 60 seconds from the detection by the magnetic detection sensor 4024 (corresponding to six notification sound repetitions). On the other hand, the display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the lighting by various lamps are continued until the release condition “re-power on” is satisfied. It has become.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in addition to the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality), a state in which vibration is detected by the vibration sensor 2405 (the possibility of a fraudulent act due to a dodging action is high). Notification sound 2 (vibration abnormality) for notifying that the player is in the state) and the count sensor 4005 (first big prize opening sensor or second big size) despite not being in the big hit gaming state (state where the big prize opening is opened) Notification sound for notifying that a state in which detection by a winning prize sensor) has been performed (a state in which there is a high possibility that an illegal act of forcibly opening a large winning opening in a closed state and winning a game ball) is performed. 3 (Large winning abnormality) is regarded as belonging to the first notification group when there is a high possibility that some kind of fraud has been performed, and the notification sound belonging to the first notification group These notification manner and broadcast time, both the release conditions are as setting to that common.

  For example, in the notification sound 2 (vibration abnormality), as the notification mode, a loop process for repeatedly outputting a notification sound such as “boost vibration detected” and display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 (for example, , “Vibration detected”) and lighting by various lamps (light emitting devices) arranged on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 are executed, and the detection by the vibration sensor 2405 is performed as a notification time. The loop processing for repeatedly outputting the notification sound is completed in 60 seconds (corresponding to six repetitions of the notification sound) from the time of the occurrence, whereas the display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and various lamps The execution of the lighting by is continued until the release condition “power-on” is satisfied. In addition, in the notification sound 3 (big prize abnormality), as a notification mode, a loop process for repeatedly outputting a notification sound such as “A boo-boo prize abnormality has been detected” and a display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 are displayed. A display (for example, “A big prize abnormality has been detected”) and lighting by various lamps (light emitting devices) arranged on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 are respectively executed, and as notification time, While the loop processing for repeatedly outputting the notification sound is completed in 60 seconds (corresponding to six repetitions of the notification sound) from the time when the detection by the count sensor 4005 is detected, the loop processing in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 is terminated. The display and lighting by various lamps will continue to be executed until the release condition “power-on” is satisfied.

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 employs different display modes for the notification sounds 1 to 3 belonging to the first notification group. About lighting by the various lamps (light emitting devices) arranged in the frame 3 and the game board 5, the same lighting mode (all of the various lamps are necessarily lighted) by the notification sounds 1 to 3 belonging to the first notification group. It does not have to be an aspect). Moreover, about the notification sound used as the object of a loop process, the notification sound 1 called "boo boo" which plays the role which alert | reports that it belongs to the 1st notification group (state with the high possibility that the fraudulent act was performed). A combination of sequential output of an alarm sound used in any of 3 to 3 and a message sound (unique sound) that plays a role of notifying individual identification as to which of the notification contents is adopted. The warning sound is a monotonous sound to give a warning meaning in a severe unfair situation, and the message sound is composed of various sounds to clarify the distinction from other notification sounds. It is desirable to do so.

  In other words, when reporting information belonging to the first notification group (a state in which there is a high possibility that fraud has been performed), rather than specifying which notification type it is, the hall side response to fraud It is important to speed up the initial action. In this regard, according to the above-described configuration, only the notification sound of “boo-boo” and the lighting mode unique to the first notification group by various lamps (light emitting devices) are output, and those belonging to the first notification group (the fraudulent acts are It is expected that the initial response of the hall side response to the fraudulent act will be expedited. In addition, a message sound for informing which notification type is to be output following the notification sound of “boo-boo”, or display within the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 is performed. Therefore, it is expected that the treatment after the initial movement corresponding to the hall side is performed smoothly.

  On the other hand, the notification sound 4 (door opening) is a state in which the door frame opening switch 618 detects that the door frame 3 is open with respect to the main body frame 4 (the possibility of fraudulent acts due to door opening). However, there is a possibility that the door may be opened by an abnormality handling measure on the hall side). As a notification mode, a loop process for repeatedly outputting a notification sound such as “the door is open ping-pong ping-pong” and a display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 (for example, “the door is open” )) And lighting by various lamps (light emitting devices) arranged on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 are respectively executed. As for the notification time, the loop processing for repeatedly outputting the notification sound such as “the door is open ping-pong ping-pong” is 30 seconds after the detection by the door frame opening switch 618 (corresponding to three repetitions of the notification sound). ), The display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the lighting by various lamps are the release condition “door closing detection (door frame opening switch 618 causes the main body frame 4 to On the other hand, the execution is continued until “detection that the door frame 3 is closed)” is satisfied.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in addition to the notification sound 4 (door opening), a state in which the main body frame opening switch 619 detects that the main body frame 4 is open with respect to the outer frame 2 ( Although there is a possibility that an illegal act is performed by opening the main body frame, a notification sound 5 (frame opening) for notifying that there is a possibility that the main body frame is opened by an abnormality handling measure on the hall side) It is considered as belonging to the second notification group when there is a medium possibility that some sort of fraud has been performed and this cannot be denied, and for notification sounds belonging to the second notification group, those notifications The mode, the notification time, and the release condition are all set to a common one.

  For example, in the notification sound 5 (frame open), as the notification mode, a loop process for repeatedly outputting a notification sound such as “the frame is open ping-pong ping-pong” and display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 ( For example, “the frame is open”) and lighting by various lamps (light emitting devices) arranged on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 are executed, respectively, and the body frame opening switch is used as the notification time. The loop processing for repeatedly outputting the notification sound in 30 seconds (corresponding to the repetition of the notification sound for three times) after the detection by 619 is ended, whereas the display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 As for lighting by various lamps, the release condition is “frame closing detection (the body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 by the body frame opening switch 619. Until the detection of it) "is satisfied so that the execution is continued.

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 employs different display modes for the notification sounds 4 and 5 belonging to the second notification group. About the lighting by the various lamps (light emitting devices) arranged in the frame 3 and the game board 5, the same lighting mode (all of the various lamps are necessarily turned on) by the notification sounds 4 and 5 belonging to the second notification group. It does not have to be an aspect). However, the lighting mode by the lamp (light emitting device) when belonging to the second notification group is different from the lighting mode by the lamp (light emitting device) when belonging to the first notification group. In addition, regarding the notification sound that is the target of the loop processing, a message sound (unique sound) that plays a role of notifying individual identification as to which content of the notification and a sound belonging to the second notification group (injustice) A combination of sequential output with alarm sounds used in either of the notification sounds 4 and 5, such as “ping-pong ping-pong”, which plays a role of notifying that the possibility of the occurrence of the error is moderate) Yes.

  In other words, when notifying those who belong to the second notification group (a state in which there is a moderate possibility of fraudulent acts) It is important to be able to perform abnormality handling on the hall side to a certain degree of speed. In this regard, according to the above-described configuration, as the notification sound, first, as in the case of belonging to the third notification group described later, a message sound for informing which notification type is output is output. Therefore, it is expected that those who are playing appropriate games will be less likely to feel disgust. On the other hand, an alarm sound such as “ping-pong ping-pong” follows the message sound, although it is an alarm sound different from the case of belonging to the first notification group so as to make it difficult for a person who is playing an appropriate game to feel disgust. In the case of belonging to the third notification group, the lighting mode is different from the case of belonging to the first notification group so that it is difficult for the person who is playing an appropriate game to feel disgust. By performing notification by turning on various lamps that are not performed, it is expected that the abnormality handling measures on the hall side will be accelerated to some extent.

  On the other hand, the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) is generated when the game ball passes through the gate portion 2003 provided in the area on the right side with respect to the center accessory 2500 in the game area 5a in spite of the non-time-short state. Passing is detected by the gate sensor 4003 (the game is being played in a manner that is disadvantageous to the player, and it should be corrected to a game in an appropriate manner (left-handed)) This is to be notified. As the notification mode, a loop process for repeatedly outputting a notification sound such as “please return to left-handed” and a display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 (for example, “please return to left-handed” )) Are executed. In addition, as the notification time, both of the loop processing for repeatedly outputting a notification sound such as “please return to the left” and the display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 are in a non-time-saving state. The detection is completed in 20 seconds (corresponding to two repetitions of the notification sound) after the detection by the gate sensor 4003.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in addition to the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance), a state where the lower tray 322 is detected to be full of game balls by the full-tank detection sensor 279 (lower pan) The notification sound 7 (ball-out guidance) for notifying that the game ball in the 322 is in a state where the ball is to be removed is provided to guide the game in order to properly advance the game although the possibility of fraud is low. It is assumed that it belongs to the third notification group when it is in the power state, and for the notification sound belonging to the third notification group, the notification mode, the notification time, and the release condition are all set in common. It is said.

  For example, in the notification sound 7 (ball guidance), as the notification mode, a loop process for repeatedly outputting a notification sound such as “please remove the ball of the lower plate” and a display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 Display (for example, “please remove the ball on the lower plate”) and a loop process for repeatedly outputting an alarm sound such as “please remove the ball on the lower plate” as a notification time, and a game board Both the display in the display area of the side effect display device 1600 are finished in 20 seconds (corresponding to repeated notification sounds for two times) from when the full tank detection sensor 279 detects. .

  However, for the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) and the notification sound 7 (ball-out guidance), when the detection is performed by the gate sensor 4003 or the full tank detection sensor 279, the sensor 2401, When 279 is still in the detection state, the notification process (notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) and notification sound 7 (ball-out guidance)) is executed again from the beginning.

  In the third notification group according to this embodiment, only the message sound is output as the notification sounds 6 and 7, but more strictly, for example, after the message sound for 5 seconds has been output, there is no sound for 5 seconds. Data is assigned to channel X, and a sound corresponding to that is output (silent output), and a loop process is repeated for repeating the notification sound for 10 seconds with the message sound and silent data as a set. It has become. And, since the notification sounds 6 and 7 are all configured to output silence data for the same time, the notification sounds 6 and 7 function as a unique notification mode different from the first notification group and the second notification group, Even on the hall side, it is possible to properly recognize that the notification belongs to the third notification group only by confirming the portion of the silent data, not the portion of the message sound that is difficult to hear in the noisy hall. Regarding the silent data, it is desirable to prepare in advance as one sound data (10-second sound data) including the message sound, and to perform the loop processing while assigning it to the channel X.

  By the way, although there can be silence in the notification sounds (such as between the alarm sound and the message sound) used in the first notification group and the second notification group, these are very short in order to have a “between”. It is clear that it is a time thing and is fundamentally different from the above-mentioned silent part (third notification group) having a relatively long time and having a group identification function.

  According to such a configuration, an alarm sound such as “boo-boo” or “ping-pong ping-pong” is not output, and only a message sound is repeatedly output with a predetermined silence period interposed therebetween. Thus, it is possible to make a notification regarding the game guidance without feeling disgusted.

  In the examples shown in FIG. 155 and FIG. 156, for the notification sounds belonging to the same notification group, the priority order is set to be the same, but the priority order is different among the notification sounds belonging to the same notification group. You may do it. In addition, loop playback in which the target sound is repeatedly played is adopted as the playback type setting. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and 1SHOT playback in which the target sound is played once may be adopted. . In addition, “boo-boo” that is commonly used for the notification sounds belonging to the first notification group and “ping-pong ping-pong” that is commonly used for the notification sounds belonging to the second notification group are connected with the message sound. The sound data may be prepared separately for each notification sound, or prepared as sound data different from the message sound, and the sound data that combines the message sound and the alarm sound is created at the time of output. After that, it may be assigned to the channel.

  FIG. 157 (a) shows processing when an output condition (abnormality detection) of another notification sound belonging to the first notification group is satisfied when one notification sound belonging to the first notification group is being reproduced. An example is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 157 (a), if there is a magnetic detection by the magnetic detection sensor 4024 in the process of step S112 (FIG. 94) at the timing tα1 at which no notification sound is currently output, In the control MPU 1310a, first, the state of the notification flag is updated so as to indicate that magnetic detection has been performed. Next, information indicating the presence of magnetic detection is set as a command for the peripheral control board 1510. Thereby, in the process of step S118 (FIG. 94), information indicating that the magnetic detection has been performed based on the state of the updated notification flag is externally output and managed in the hall computer. In the processing of S120 (FIG. 94), a command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and the information (magnetic detection) is used for processing related to notification in the peripheral control MPU 1511a.

  On the other hand, the peripheral control MPU 1511a analyzes the command in the received command analysis process in step S1022 (FIG. 95) at the timing tα1 (or immediately after) at which no notification sound is output. , The notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) shown in FIG. 156 is assigned (set) to the channel X in the warning process of step S1024 (FIG. 95) (In this case, the notification sound reproduction in the “loop of magnet detected”) is started, and a timer (60 seconds) for measuring the notification time of the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) is set.

  When assigning the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) to the channel X, the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the magnetic detection is extracted from the various control data copy areas of the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and the peripheral control is performed. This is set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the RAM 1511c. On this basis, the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) is assigned to the channel X so that the notification sound such as “Boo-boo magnet has been detected” is reproduced in a predetermined processing mode (loop). become.

  At this time, the peripheral control MPU 1511a extracts screen generation schedule data corresponding to the magnetic detection and emission mode generation schedule data corresponding to the magnetic detection from the various control data copy areas of the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the peripheral control RAM 1511c. By setting in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, the above-described display in the liquid crystal and lamp lighting are also executed. The display in the liquid crystal and the lamp lighting are continuously executed until the power is turned on again as a condition for canceling the magnetic abnormality.

  Through such processing, a notification sound such as “We detected boo-boo magnetism” is repeatedly executed for 60 seconds from the timing tα1, and display within the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 (for example, “Detect magnetism”). And lighting by various lamps arranged in the door frame 3 and the game board 5 (lighting mode of the first notification group) are executed.

  However, in the example shown in FIG. 157 (a), at the timing tα2 in which the notification sound that “60 seconds have been detected” has not been passed since the timing tα1 and a notification sound such as “boobing magnetism has been detected” is in the loop playback state, It is assumed that vibration is detected by the vibration sensor 2405 in the process of FIG. In this regard, the main control MPU 1310a first updates the state of the notification flag so as to indicate that the vibration has been detected, as in the case of the timing tα1 at which the magnetic detection has been performed. Next, information indicating that vibration has been detected is set as a command for the peripheral control board 1510. Thereby, in the process of step S118 (FIG. 94), information indicating that vibration has been detected based on the state of the updated notification flag is output to the outside and managed in the hall computer. In the processing of S120 (FIG. 94), a command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and the information (vibration detection) is used for processing related to notification in the peripheral control MPU 1511a.

  On the other hand, the peripheral control MPU 1511a analyzes the command by the received command analysis process in step S1022 (FIG. 95) at the timing tα2 (or immediately after) when the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) is in the output state (reproduction state). As a result, even if it is determined that the vibration detection information is included, the alarm sound 2 (vibration abnormality) shown in FIG. 156 is assigned to the channel X in the warning process in step S1024 (FIG. 95). I won't do that. That is, since the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) having the same priority is already assigned to the channel X, the notification sound 2 (vibration abnormality) is not newly assigned to the channel X. Thus, the reproduction of the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) on the side already assigned is preferentially executed and continued.

  Also, the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment does not set the sound generation schedule data itself according to the vibration detection at the timing tα2. Therefore, the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the notification sound 2 (vibration abnormality) is not subjected to the expansion process in a state where it is not assigned to the channel X.

  However, on the other hand, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, at the timing tα2 (or immediately after), a timer (60 seconds) for measuring the notification time of the notification sound 2 (vibration abnormality) that has not been set yet. ) Is set, and when the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) is output (reproduction state), when the timer (60 seconds) has not expired, a sound corresponding to vibration detection is set. Set the schedule data for generation, assign the notification sound 2 (vibration abnormality) to the channel X for the remaining time, and the notification sound in the notification mode (in this case, the loop of “Boom vibration detected”) Playback is to be executed.

  Further, the peripheral control MPU 1511a does not set the sound generation schedule data according to the vibration detection at the timing tα2 (or immediately after), but the screen generation schedule data according to the vibration detection and the vibration detection are not set. The light emission mode generation schedule data according to the above is extracted from the various control data copy areas of the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the peripheral control RAM 1511c and set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, so that the above-described in-liquid crystal display and lamp These are executed for lighting.

  In the liquid crystal display, a display corresponding to the vibration abnormality appears separately at a position different from the position where the display corresponding to the magnetic abnormality is performed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. Yes. In the lamp lighting, although the light emission mode generation schedule data according to the vibration detection is set, the light emission mode generation schedule data according to the magnetic detection is already set and the priority is the same. The lighting mode of the light emission mode generation schedule data according to the magnetic detection already in the set state will be reflected in each lamp emission, and the lighting mode of the light emission mode generation schedule data according to the vibration detection will be reflected in various types. It is not reflected in each lamp emission. Similarly to the sound generation schedule data, the light emission mode generation schedule data corresponding to the vibration detection may not be set at the timing tα2 (or immediately after that).

  However, as described above, in this embodiment, the light emission mode generation schedule data according to the magnetic detection and the light emission mode generation schedule data according to the vibration detection have the same data contents. Even in the case of reflecting, there is no change in lamp lighting.

  After this, at timing tα3 when 60 seconds have elapsed from timing tα1, a notification sound such as “Booming magnetism detected” is repeated based on the timer (60 seconds) of notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) being timed up. The loop process to be executed is terminated. Here, since the time required to reproduce the notification sound such as “Boo-boo magnetism detected” once is set to 10 seconds, the timer (60 seconds) of notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) At the timing tα3 that has been increased, the loop processing is terminated at a time when the notification sound “Boo-boo magnetism has been detected” has been reproduced six times, and when the notification sound is good.

  At this time, since the timer (60 seconds) for the notification sound 2 (vibration abnormality) is not up, the peripheral control MPU 1511a sets sound generation schedule data corresponding to the vibration detection, and the rest By assigning the notification sound 2 (vibration abnormality) to the channel X for the time (the time (α) from the timing tα2 to the timing tα3 subtracted from 60 seconds), the notification mode (here, “boobo vibration” is assigned. ”Is detected” loop), the notification sound reproduction is executed.

  That is, the timer for the notification sound 2 (vibration abnormality) is set at the timing tα2, while the schedule data for sound generation corresponding to the vibration detection is not set but is set when the timing tα3 is reached. Therefore, at timing tα3, the notification sound of “Boo-boo vibration detected” can be reproduced from the head, and when the timer of notification sound 2 (vibration abnormality) expires, “Boo-boo vibration is detected. It is possible to prompt the user to stop the loop processing from being played back at a halfway timing (for example, timing such as “boobing vibration”) in the notification sound such as “Done”.

  According to such a configuration, when one notification sound belonging to the first notification group is being reproduced, when an output condition (abnormality detection) of another notification sound belonging to the first notification group is satisfied (FIG. 157 (a)), when the sixth alarm sound (here “boo-boo”) and the sixth message sound (here “magnetic detected”) have finished playing, the seventh alarm sound (here Then, it is possible to realize smooth notification sound switching as if “boo-boo”) was reproduced. As a result, “Boo-boo magnetism has been detected” and “Boo-boo vibration have been detected” are connected at a strange place, making it impossible to recognize fraudulent notifications in a tense situation (for example, If the alarm sound 1 ends with “Boo-boo magnet” and the alarm sound 2 starts with “Motion detected”, an unknown notification such as “Boo-boo magnet detected” The occurrence of content that may confuse the site) can be suitably suppressed.

  Further, according to the above configuration, at the timing tα3, the remaining time of the timer corresponding to the vibration detection is shortened, and the notification sound 2 is timed up at the “boo-boo” alarm sound and ends and the message sound is Even if it is not reproduced, it is possible to recognize that some abnormality detection is occurring at the same time because the loop processing is finished at a halfway timing and the reproduction is stopped. If it is a notification, the notification sound is terminated at a good point). As a result, when the notification sound is interrupted at halfway timing, it will be prompted to check the display in the liquid crystal, and the display in the liquid crystal will show “Magnetic detected” and “Vibration detected” respectively. By being displayed, it is possible to properly recognize that the magnetic detection and the vibration detection have been performed.

  FIG. 157 (b) shows processing when the output condition (state detection) of another notification sound belonging to the second notification group is satisfied when one notification sound belonging to the second notification group is being reproduced. An example is shown.

  Here, the process when the output condition (state detection) of another notification sound belonging to the second notification group is satisfied when one notification sound belonging to the second notification group is being reproduced is shown in FIG. ) With reference to the above processing (processing when the output condition (state detection) of another notification sound belonging to the first notification group is satisfied when one notification sound belonging to the first notification group is being reproduced) ).

  For example, as shown in FIG. 157 (b), at the timing tβ1 at which no notification sound is currently output, the frame opening detection by the main body frame opening switch 619 within the process of step S110 or S112 (FIG. 94). If there is, the main control MPU 1310a first updates the state of the notification flag so as to indicate that the frame opening has been detected. Next, information indicating that the frame opening has been detected is set as a command for the peripheral control board 1510. Thereby, in the process of step S118 (FIG. 94), information indicating that the frame opening has been detected based on the state of the updated notification flag is output to the outside and managed in the hall computer. In the processing of step S120 (FIG. 94), a command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and the information (frame opening detection) is used for processing related to notification in the peripheral control MPU 1511a.

  On the other hand, the peripheral control MPU 1511a analyzes the command in the received command analysis process in step S1022 (FIG. 95) at the timing tβ1 (or immediately after) at which no notification sound is output. When it is determined that the information is included, the notification sound 5 (frame open) shown in FIG. 156 is assigned (set) to channel X in the warning process in step S1024 (FIG. 95), and the notification is made. Notification sound playback in the mode (here, “frame is open ping-pong ping-pong” loop) is started, and a timer (30 seconds) is set for timing the notification time of notification sound 5 (frame open). .

  When the notification sound 5 (frame open) is assigned to the channel X, sound generation schedule data corresponding to frame open detection is extracted from the various control data copy areas of the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the peripheral control RAM 1511c. It is set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the control RAM 1511c. Then, by assigning the notification sound 5 (frame open) to the channel X, the notification sound such as “the frame is open ping-pong ping-pong” is reproduced in a predetermined processing mode (loop). It becomes like this.

  At this time, the peripheral control MPU 1511a obtains the screen generation schedule data according to the frame opening detection and the light emission mode generation schedule data according to the frame opening detection from the various control data copy areas of the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the peripheral control RAM 1511c. By extracting and setting in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, the above-described display in the liquid crystal and lamp lighting are also executed. The in-liquid crystal display and the lamp lighting are continuously executed until the frame closing detection which is the release condition of the frame opening detection is performed.

  Through such processing, a notification sound such as “the frame is open ping-pong ping-pong” is repeatedly executed for 30 seconds from the timing tβ1, and the display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 (for example, “ And “lighting by various lamps arranged on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 (lighting mode of the second notification group)” are executed.

  However, in the example shown in FIG. 157 (b), at time tβ2 when 30 seconds have not elapsed since the timing tβ1 and a notification sound such as “the frame is open ping-pong ping-pong” is in the state of loop reproduction, step S110 Alternatively, it is assumed that the door opening detection is performed by the door frame opening switch 618 in the process of S112 (FIG. 94). In this regard, the main control MPU 1310a first updates the state of the notification flag so as to indicate that the door opening has been detected, as in the case of the timing tβ1 at which the frame opening has been detected. Next, information indicating that the door opening has been detected is set as a command for the peripheral control board 1510. Thereby, in the process of step S118 (FIG. 94), information indicating that the door opening has been detected based on the state of the updated notification flag is output to the outside and managed in the hall computer. In the process of step S120 (FIG. 94), a command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and the information (door opening detection) is used for a process related to notification in the peripheral control MPU 1511a.

  On the other hand, the peripheral control MPU 1511a analyzes the command by the received command analysis processing in step S1022 (FIG. 95) at the timing tβ2 (or immediately after) at which the notification sound 5 (frame open) is in the output state (reproduction state). As a result, even if it is grasped that the door opening detection information is included, the alarm sound 4 (door opening) shown in FIG. Do not assign. That is, since the notification sound 5 (frame opening) having the same priority is already assigned to the channel X, the notification sound 4 (door opening) is not newly assigned to the channel X. Thus, the reproduction of the notification sound 5 (frame open) on the side that has already been assigned is preferentially executed and continued.

  In addition, the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment does not set the sound generation schedule data itself corresponding to the detection of the door opening at the timing tβ2. Therefore, the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the notification sound 4 (door opening) in a state where the channel X is not assigned is not processed.

  However, on the other hand, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, at the timing tβ2 (or immediately after), a timer (30 seconds) for measuring the notification time of the notification sound 4 (door opening) that has not been set yet. ) Is set, and when the output state (reproduction state) of the notification sound 5 (frame open) ends, when the timer (30 seconds) has not timed out, it corresponds to the door open detection. Set the schedule data for sound generation, and assign the notification sound 4 (door open) to the channel X for the remaining time, and in the notification mode (here, the “door is open ping-pong ping-pong” loop) Notification sound reproduction is executed.

  Further, the peripheral control MPU 1511a does not set the sound generation schedule data according to the door opening detection at the timing tβ2 (or immediately after), but the screen generation schedule data according to the door opening detection, and By extracting the light emission mode generation schedule data corresponding to the door opening detection from the various control data copy areas of the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the peripheral control RAM 1511c and setting it in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, These are executed for display and lamp lighting.

  In the liquid crystal display, a display corresponding to the door opening appears at a position different from the position where the display corresponding to the frame opening is performed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. Yes. When the lamp is lit, the light emission mode generation schedule data corresponding to the door opening detection is set, but the light emission mode generation schedule data corresponding to the frame opening detection is already set and the priority is the same. Therefore, the lighting mode generation schedule data corresponding to the frame opening detection already in the set state is reflected in each lamp emission, and the lighting mode generation schedule data corresponding to the door opening detection is turned on. The mode is not reflected in each lamp emission. Similarly to the sound generation schedule data, the light emission mode generation schedule data corresponding to the detection of door opening may not be set at the timing tβ2 (or immediately after).

  However, as described above, in this embodiment, the light emission mode generation schedule data corresponding to the frame opening detection and the light emission mode generation schedule data corresponding to the door opening detection have the same data contents. In any case, the lamp lighting does not change.

  After this, at timing tβ3 when 30 seconds have elapsed from timing tβ1, a notification sound such as “The frame is open ping-pong ping-pong” is issued based on the time-up of the timer (30 seconds) of notification sound 5 (frame opening). The loop process that is repeatedly executed is terminated. In this case, since the time required to reproduce the notification sound such as “The frame is open ping-pong ping-pong” is set to 10 seconds, the timer (30 seconds) for the notification sound 5 (frame open) is set. At the time tβ3 when the time is up, the loop processing is finished at a good timing when the notification sound such as “frame is open ping-pong ping-pong” has been reproduced three times.

  At this time, since the timer (30 seconds) of the notification sound 4 (door opening) is not up, the peripheral control MPU 1511a sets the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the door opening detection, By assigning the notification sound 4 (door opening) to the channel X for the remaining time (time obtained by subtracting the time (β) from timing tβ2 to timing tβ3 from 30 seconds), the notification mode (here, “door Will open the notification sound in the “Ping-Pong” loop.

  That is, the timer for the notification sound 4 (door opening) is set at the timing tβ2, while the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the door opening detection is not set but is set at the timing tβ3. Therefore, at timing tβ3, the notification sound of “door is open ping-pong ping-pong” can be reproduced from the head, and when the timer of notification sound 4 (door open) times out, “door opens. It is possible to prompt the user to stop the loop processing from being played back at a halfway timing (for example, timing such as “door is open”) of the notification sound such as “Ping Pong”.

  According to such a configuration, when one notification sound belonging to the second notification group is being reproduced, the output condition (state detection) of another notification sound belonging to the second notification group is satisfied (see FIG. 157 (b)) When the third message sound (here “the frame is open”) and the third warning sound (here “ping-pong ping-pong”) have finished playing, the fourth message sound ( Here, smooth notification sound switching can be realized as if "the door is open") has been reproduced. As a result, the situation is such that “the frame is open ping-pong ping-pong” and “the door is open ping-pong ping-pong” are connected at a strange place, making it impossible to recognize the notification contents in a tense situation. Generation | occurrence | production can be suppressed suitably.

  Further, according to the above configuration, at time tβ3, the remaining time of the timer corresponding to the detection of door opening is short, and even if the notification sound 4 is interrupted at a halfway point, the message sound is reproduced first. Therefore, it is possible to reliably grasp that the door is open.

  FIG. 157 (c) shows processing when the output condition (state detection) of another notification sound belonging to the third notification group is satisfied when one notification sound belonging to the third notification group is being reproduced. An example is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 157 (c), at the timing tγ1 at which no notification sound is output, the game is in spite of being in a non-time-saving state within the process of step S112 or S116 (FIG. 94). If it is detected by the gate sensor 4003 that the game ball has passed through the gate portion 2003 provided in the area on the right side of the center accessory 2500 in the area 5a (right-handed detection in a non-short-time state), In the control MPU 1310a, information indicating that a right-handed detection has been detected in a non-time-short state is set as a command to the peripheral control board 1510. Thereby, in the process of step S120 (FIG. 94), a command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and the information (right-handed detection in the short time state) is used for the process related to the notification in the peripheral control MPU 1511a. It becomes like this. Regarding the processing of the third notification group, the notification flag is not updated in the main control MPU 1310a, and the information is not externally output to the hall computer.

  On the other hand, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, as a result of analyzing the command in the received command analysis processing in step S1022 (FIG. 95) at the timing tγ1 (or immediately after) at which no notification sound is output, When the right-handed detection information is detected, the alarm sound 6 (left-handed guidance) shown in FIG. 156 is assigned to the channel X in the warning process in step S1024 (FIG. 95) ( A timer (not shown) for starting notification sound reproduction in the notification mode (in this case, the loop of “return to left-handed”) and counting the notification time of notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) ( 20 seconds).

  Regarding right-handed detection in a non-time-short state, in this embodiment, information indicating that is output from the main control MPU 1310a as a command. Only the information that the gate sensor 4003 has detected that the ball has passed is output as a command, and the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines whether or not the detection by the gate sensor 4003 has been performed in a non-time-short state. And processing related to the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) may be performed based on the detection by the gate sensor 4003 in a non-time-short state.

  When the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) is assigned to the channel X, the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the right-handed detection in the non-short-time state is copied to various control data in the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the peripheral control RAM 1511c. It is extracted from the area and set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. Then, by assigning the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) to the channel X, the notification sound such as “please return to the left-handed” is reproduced in a predetermined processing mode (loop). It becomes like this.

  At this time, the peripheral control MPU 1511a extracts screen generation schedule data corresponding to right-handed detection in the non-time-short state from the various control data copy areas of the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and schedule data in the peripheral control RAM 1511c. By setting in the storage area 1511cae, the above-described display in the liquid crystal is also executed. Execution of the display in the liquid crystal becomes a notification end (a timer (20 seconds) for measuring the notification time of the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) is timed up), which is a release condition of the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance). Will continue to run. In addition, regarding the processing of the third notification group having a low possibility of fraud, importance is placed on avoiding the progress of the production, and the light emission mode generation schedule data corresponding to the right-handed detection in the non-time-short state is set. It will never be done.

  Through such processing, a notification sound such as “please return to the left” is repeatedly executed for 20 seconds from the timing tγ1, and the display on the game board side effect display device 1600 is displayed until the notification sound ends. The display in the area (for example, “please return to the left”) is executed.

  However, in the example shown in FIG. 157 (c), at the timing tγ2 when the notification sound such as “please return to the left-handed” is in the state where the loop sound is being played back since 20 seconds have not elapsed since the timing tγ1. It is assumed that the full-bottom detection sensor 279 detects that the lower pan is full in the process of S112 (FIG. 94). In this regard, in the main control MPU 1310a, information indicating that the lower pan full has been detected is set as a command for the peripheral control board 1510, as in the case of the timing tγ1 when the right-handed detection in the non-time-short state is detected. As a result, in the process of step S120 (FIG. 94), a command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 so that the information (lower pan full tank detection) is provided to the process related to the notification in the peripheral control MPU 1511a. Become.

  On the other hand, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, at the timing tγ2 (or immediately after) the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) is in the output state (reproduction state), the command is received in the received command analysis process in step S1022 (FIG. 95). As a result of the analysis, even if it is understood that the information about the detection of the full-bottom pan is included, the alarm sound 7 (ball removal guidance) shown in FIG. 156 is transmitted to the channel in the warning process in step S1024 (FIG. 95). Do not assign to X. That is, since the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) having the same priority is already assigned to the channel X, the notification sound 7 (ball guidance) is not newly assigned to the channel X. Thus, the reproduction of the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) on the side already assigned is preferentially executed and continued.

  In addition, the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment does not set the sound generation schedule data itself corresponding to the detection of the lower pan full tank at the timing tγ2. Therefore, the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the notification sound 7 (ball removal guidance) is not subjected to the expansion process in a state where it is not assigned to the channel X.

  However, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, at the timing tγ2 (or just after that), a timer (20 for measuring the notification time of the notification sound 7 (ball removal guidance) that has not been set yet) Second) is set, and when the output state (reproduction state) of the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) ends, when the timer (20 seconds) has not timed up, the lower pan is full. Set the schedule data for sound generation according to the detection, and assign the notification sound 7 (ball removal guidance) to channel X for the remaining time, and the notification mode (in this case, “Pull the ball on the lower plate. The notification sound reproduction is executed in the “loop”.

  In addition, the peripheral control MPU 1511a does not set the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the detection of the lower pan full at the timing tγ2 (or immediately after that), but for the screen generation corresponding to the detection of the lower pan full. The schedule data is extracted from various control data copy areas of the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the peripheral control RAM 1511c and set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, so that the above-mentioned display in the liquid crystal is executed. Yes.

  In the liquid crystal display, a display corresponding to the ball removal guidance appears separately at a position different from the position where the display corresponding to the left-handed guidance is performed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. It has become.

  After this, at timing tγ3 when 20 seconds have elapsed from timing tγ1, a notification sound such as “Please return to left-handed” is issued based on the timer (20 seconds) of notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) being timed up. The loop process that is repeatedly executed is terminated. Here, since the time required to reproduce the notification sound such as “Return to left-handed” once is set to 10 seconds, the timer (30 seconds) of notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) is set. At the time tγ3 when the time is up, the loop processing is finished at a good timing when the notification sound such as “please return to the left” has been reproduced twice.

  At this time, since the timer (20 seconds) of the notification sound 7 (ball removal guidance) is not up, the peripheral control MPU 1511a sets the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the detection of the full lower tray. Then, by assigning the notification sound 7 (ball guidance) to the channel X for the remaining time (the time obtained by subtracting the time (γ) from the timing tγ2 to the timing tγ3 from 20 seconds), the notification mode (here) Then, the notification sound reproduction in the “please remove the ball of the lower plate” loop is executed.

  In other words, at timing tγ2, while setting the timer for the notification sound 7 (ball removal guidance), the schedule data for sound generation corresponding to the detection of the full tray is not set, but is set when timing tγ3 is reached. Therefore, at the timing tγ3, the notification sound “please remove the ball in the lower plate” can be reproduced from the head and the timer of the notification sound 7 (ball removal guidance) is timed up. , So that the loop processing is terminated at the halfway timing of the notification sound such as “Please remove the ball from the lower plate” (for example, “Please remove the ball from the lower plate”) and will not be played back. Can be encouraged.

  According to such a configuration, when one notification sound belonging to the third notification group is being reproduced, the output condition (state detection) of another notification sound belonging to the third notification group is satisfied (see FIG. 157 (c)) When the second message sound (in this case, “return to the left”) has finished playing, the third message sound (here, “pull out the ball on the lower plate”) Smooth notification sound switching as if it was reproduced can be realized. As a result, “please return to the left” and “please pull out the ball on the lower plate” are connected at a strange place, and the occurrence of a situation where the notification content cannot be recognized is suitably suppressed. Will be able to.

  In the third notification group according to this embodiment, as described above, after the message sound is output, the 5-second silence data is assigned to the channel X, and the sound corresponding to that is output (silence output). It is like that. Therefore, when one notification sound belonging to the third notification group is being reproduced and when the output condition (state detection) of another notification sound belonging to the third notification group is satisfied, silence data of 5 seconds is sandwiched. Since the message sound of another notification sound is played back, the occurrence of a situation in which two different message sounds are connected by the absence of an alarm sound and the notification content cannot be recognized is preferable. It will be possible to avoid.

  FIG. 158 (a) shows an example of processing when an output condition (state detection) of a notification sound belonging to the second notification group is satisfied when one notification sound belonging to the first notification group is being reproduced. It is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 158 (a), when there is magnetic detection by the magnetic detection sensor 4024 in the process of step S112 (FIG. 94) at timing t-1 when no notification sound is output, With respect to processing according to magnetic detection (magnetic abnormality processing), processing similar to that described with reference to FIG. 157 (a) is performed. Accordingly, at timing t-1, a loop process for repeatedly executing a notification sound such as “Boo-boo magnet has been detected” is started, and the timer (60 seconds) of notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) is timed up. At t-3, the loop processing is terminated at a good timing when the notification sound “Boo-boo magnetism has been detected” has been reproduced six times. In addition, the display in the liquid crystal and the lamp lighting are continuously executed until the power is turned on again, which is a condition for canceling the magnetic abnormality.

  Here, in the example shown in FIG. 158 (a), the timing t-2 at which 60 seconds have not elapsed since the timing t-1 and a notification sound such as “Booming magnetism has been detected” is in a loop playback state. In FIG. 9, it is assumed that the door opening detection is performed by the door frame opening switch 618 within the process of step S110 or S112 (FIG. 94). In this respect, the processing of the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) according to the magnetic detection has a higher priority than the processing of the notification sound 4 (door opening) according to the door opening detection (see FIG. 155). ), Even if door opening detection occurs, the processing of the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) is continued.

  In general, as for the processing on the lower priority side, as in the case where the processing of the same priority described with reference to FIGS. 157 (a) to (c) overlaps, the notification sound on the lower priority side is transmitted. Only the timer is set and the sound generation schedule data itself is not set.

  However, the situation where the door is opened immediately after the occurrence of a magnetic abnormality is different from the case where the door is simply opened, and there is a high possibility that some sort of fraud has occurred. It can be said that it is hard to say that the notification belongs to the “second notification group with a medium possibility of fraud”. Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 158 (a), at timing t-2, neither the timer of the notification sound 4 (door opening) corresponding to the door opening detection nor the sound generation schedule data is set. Only set the flag according to the detection of door opening. Then, at timing t-3, based on the flag being set, a notification sound 4 (door opening) timer corresponding to the door opening detection and a sound generation schedule data corresponding to the door opening detection are respectively obtained. As well as setting, notification sound 4 (door open) is assigned to channel X, and notification sound reproduction in the notification mode (here, “the door is open ping-pong ping-pong” loop) is started. . Note that the display in the liquid crystal and the lamp lighting in response to the detection of the door opening are started from the timing t-2.

  According to such a configuration, while the alarm sound such as “Boo-boo magnet was detected” was detected during the loop playback, the door frame opening switch 618 detected the door opening, but “Boo-boo magnet was detected. "From the timing t-3 when the alarm sound loop playback ends, the notification sound 4 (door opening) corresponding to the door opening detection is played back for 30 seconds, and the" door is open ping-pong ping-pong " That is, the loop processing is finished at a good timing when the notification sound is reproduced three times. As described above, the notification sound 4 (door opening) corresponding to the door opening detection is reproduced in a more polite notification mode different from the processing based on the normal priority order, so that the notification belonging to the second notification group. Although it is a content (here, a “door is open ping-pong ping-pong” loop), it is expected to promote recognition that the possibility of fraud is high.

  In addition, after the notification sound “Boo-boo magnet detected”, the notification content starts from the message sound (the door is open), so that the first notification group in the most tense situation The notification to which it belongs can be recognized at an early stage that it has been terminated. On the other hand, the alarm sound “ping-pong ping-pong” is reproduced after the message sound, so that it is possible to easily recognize that it is not a notification belonging to the third notification group.

  FIG. 158 (b) shows an example of processing when the output condition (state detection) of the notification sound belonging to the third notification group is satisfied when one notification sound belonging to the second notification group is being reproduced. It is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 158 (b), when the door opening detection is performed by the door frame opening switch 618 in the process of step S110 or S112 (FIG. 94) at the timing tδ1 when no notification sound is output. As for the processing corresponding to the door opening detection (door opening processing), the same processing as the “processing according to frame opening detection (frame opening processing)” described with reference to FIG. 157 (b) is performed. Is called. Therefore, at timing tδ1, a loop process for repeatedly executing the notification sound such as “door is open ping-pong ping-pong” is started, and timing tδ3 when the timer (30 seconds) of notification sound 4 (door open) has timed up. Then, the loop process will be completed at a good timing when the notification sound such as “door is open ping-pong ping-pong” has been reproduced three times. In addition, the display in the liquid crystal and the lamp lighting are executed continuously until the door closing is detected as a door opening release condition.

  Here, in the example shown in FIG. 158 (b), at the timing tδ2 where 30 seconds have not elapsed since the timing tδ1 and a notification sound such as “the door is open ping-pong ping-pong” is in the state of loop playback. It is assumed that the right-handed detection in the non-time-short state by the gate sensor 4003 is detected in the process of S112 or S116 (FIG. 94). In this regard, the processing of the notification sound 4 (door opening) according to the door opening detection has a higher priority than the processing of the notification sound 6 (left-hand guidance) according to the right-handed detection in the non-time-short state. For this reason (see FIG. 155), even when the right-handed detection in the non-time-short state occurs, the process of the notification sound 4 (door opening) is continuously performed.

  That is, as described above, regarding the processing on the lower priority side, the notification sound on the lower priority side is the same as the case where the processing of the same priority level described with reference to FIGS. 157 (a) to (c) overlaps. Only the timer is set, and the sound generation schedule data itself is not set.

  Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 158 (b), at timing tδ2, while setting the timer (20 seconds) of the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance), sound generation corresponding to right-handed detection in a non-time-short state is performed. No schedule data is set. At time tδ3, when the timer (20 seconds) of the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) is not up, the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the right-handed detection in the non-time-short state is set, and the remaining time The notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) is assigned to the channel X by the number of minutes, and the notification sound is reproduced in the notification mode (here, the “return to left-handed” loop).

  According to such a configuration, the notification sound such as “The door is open ping-pong ping-pong” has been reproduced three times, and the notification sound that does not include the warning sound “Please return to the left” at a good timing. Thus, it is possible to easily recognize that the possibility of fraud has decreased while continuing the notification state. In the third notification group according to this embodiment, as described above, after the message sound is output, the 5-second silence data is assigned to the channel X, and the sound corresponding to that is output (silence output). It is like that. Therefore, even with such silence data, the type of notification sound that has been reproduced so far has ended, and it can be easily recognized that the notification sound belonging to the third notification group is being reproduced. It becomes like this.

  FIG. 158 (c) shows an example of processing when the output condition (state detection) of the notification sound belonging to the first notification group is satisfied when one notification sound belonging to the second notification group is being reproduced. It is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 158 (c), when the door opening detection is performed by the door frame opening switch 618 in the process of step S110 or S112 (FIG. 94) at the timing tε1 when no notification sound is output. As for the processing corresponding to the door opening detection (door opening processing), the same processing as the “processing according to frame opening detection (frame opening processing)” described with reference to FIG. 157 (b) is performed. Is called. Therefore, at timing tε1, a loop process for repeatedly executing a notification sound such as “the door is open ping-pong ping-pong” is started, and the timing tε3 at which the timer (30 seconds) of the notification sound 4 (door open) has timed up. Then, the loop process will be completed at a good timing when the notification sound such as “door is open ping-pong ping-pong” has been reproduced three times. In addition, the display in the liquid crystal and the lamp lighting are executed continuously until the door closing is detected as a door opening release condition.

  However, in the example shown in FIG. 158 (c), at the timing tε2 when 30 seconds have not elapsed since the timing tε1 and a notification sound such as “the door is open ping-pong ping-pong” is in the state of loop reproduction, step S112 It is assumed that magnetic detection by the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is performed in the process of FIG. In this regard, the processing of the notification sound 4 (door opening) according to the door opening detection has a lower priority than the processing of the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) according to the magnetic detection by the magnetic detection sensor 4024. (Refer to FIG. 155), priority is given to the processing of the notification sound 1 (magnetic anomaly) according to the magnetic detection by the magnetic detection sensor 4024, and the processing of the notification sound 4 (door opening) is performed in either sound or lamp lighting. The output contents are not reflected as the operation of each actuator. In addition, since the display in the liquid crystal is displayed at different positions in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 for each notification, priority is given during the execution of the notification with a low priority. Even in the case where a high-priority notification is generated, the in-liquid crystal display on the lower priority side is maintained.

  Here, with respect to the processing of the notification sound 4 (door opening), as a method for preventing the output contents from being reflected as the operation of each actuator in either the sound or the lamp lighting, it has been set so far at the timing tε2. A process for canceling the sound generation schedule data and the light emission mode generation schedule data corresponding to the detection of door opening from the set state may be performed.

  In this respect, in this embodiment, not only the screen generation schedule data corresponding to the door opening detection but also the sound generation schedule data and the light emission mode generation schedule data corresponding to the door opening detection at the timing tε2. Are kept in a set state, and the sound generation schedule data, the screen generation schedule data, and the light emission mode generation schedule data corresponding to the magnetic detection that has a higher priority than the respective data are respectively set. Put it in a state. Then, the assignment to the channel X and various lamp operations is performed based on the sound generation schedule data according to the door opening detection and the light emission mode generation schedule data, and the sound generation schedule data and the light emission mode generation according to the magnetic detection. By switching to the content based on the schedule data for use, the processing of the notification sound 1 (magnetic anomaly) corresponding to the magnetic detection by the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is output for any of sound, liquid crystal display, and lamp lighting. The contents are reflected as the operation of each actuator.

  According to such a configuration, as shown in FIG. 158 (c), at timing tε2, the low-priority processing in the execution state (processing at the time of opening the door) is performed without any operation. The notification content can be changed based on the priority between two different processes (door opening process and magnetic abnormality process).

  Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 158 (c), at timing tδ2, a loop process for repeatedly executing a notification sound such as “Boo-boo magnet has been detected” is started, and a timer for notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) is started. The loop processing is terminated at a good timing when the notification sound such as “Boo-Bou magnetism has been detected” has been reproduced six times in accordance with the time-up of (60 seconds). In addition, the display in the liquid crystal and the lamp lighting are continuously executed until the power is turned on again, which is a condition for canceling the magnetic abnormality.

  According to such a configuration, immediately after the occurrence of magnetic detection that is highly likely to be fraudulent, the processing of the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) is performed in any of sound, in-liquid crystal display, and lamp lighting. The output contents are reflected as the operation of each actuator. Moreover, since an alarm sound such as “boo-boo” is first reproduced as the notification sound, the notification belonging to the first notification group is performed, and the fact that the situation has changed to a tense situation is quickly transmitted to the hall side. That is expected.

  FIG. 158 (d) shows an example of processing when the output condition (state detection) of the notification sound belonging to the second notification group is satisfied when one notification sound belonging to the third notification group is being reproduced. It is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 158 (d), at the timing tζ1 at which no notification sound is output, right-handed detection in a non-short-time state by the gate sensor 4003 is performed within the processing of step S112 or S116 (FIG. 94). If there is, the processing corresponding to the right-handed detection in the non-time-short state (left-handed guidance processing) is performed in the same manner as described with reference to FIG. 157 (c). Therefore, at timing tζ1, a loop process for repeatedly executing a notification sound such as “please return to the left” is started, and timing tζ3 when the timer (20 seconds) of notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) is timed up. Then, the loop processing is ended at a good timing when the notification sound “Please return to left-handed” has been reproduced twice. In addition, the display in the liquid crystal and the lamp lighting are continuously executed until the timer of the notification sound, which is a condition for canceling the left-handed guidance, is continued.

  However, in the example shown in FIG. 158 (d), at the timing tζ2 where 20 seconds have not elapsed since the timing tζ1 and a notification sound such as “please return to the left” is in the state of loop playback, step S110 or It is assumed that the door opening detection is performed by the door frame opening switch 618 in the process of S112 (FIG. 94). In this regard, the processing of the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) according to the right-handed detection in the non-short-time state has a lower priority than the processing of the notification sound 4 (door-opening) according to the door opening detection. Therefore (see FIG. 155), priority is given to the processing of the notification sound 4 (door opening) according to the detection of the door opening, and the output content of the processing of the notification sound 6 (left-hand guidance) is reflected as the operation of the actuator. Will not be done. In addition, since the display in the liquid crystal is displayed at different positions in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 for each notification, priority is given during the execution of the notification with a low priority. Even in the case where a high-priority notification is generated, the in-liquid crystal display on the lower priority side is maintained.

  Here, with respect to the processing of the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance), as a technique for preventing the output contents from being reflected as the operation of the actuator, the right-handed detection in the non-short-time state that has been set so far is performed at the timing tζ2. Processing for canceling the sound generation schedule data according to the set state may be performed.

  In this respect, in this embodiment, at the timing tζ2, not only the screen generation schedule data corresponding to the right-handed detection in the non-time-short state but also the sound-generation schedule data corresponding to the right-handed detection in the non-time-short state. The screen generation schedule data and the light emission mode according to the door opening detection as well as the sound generation schedule data according to the door opening detection having higher priority than this are maintained. Set the generation schedule data to the set state. Then, the assignment to the channel X is switched from the content based on the sound generation schedule data according to the right-handed detection in the non-time-short state to the content based on the sound generation schedule data according to the door opening detection. Thus, the processing of the notification sound 4 (door opening) according to the detection of the door opening is made so that the output contents are reflected as the operation of each actuator in any of sound, liquid crystal display, and lamp lighting.

  According to such a configuration, as shown in FIG. 158 (d), at timing tζ 2, the low-priority processing in the execution state (left-handed guidance processing) is performed without performing any operation. The notification content can be changed based on the priority order between two different processes (left-hand guidance process and door opening process).

  Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 158 (d), at timing tζ2, a loop process for repeatedly executing a notification sound such as “the door is open ping-pong ping-pong” is started, and the notification sound 4 (door open) As the timer (30 seconds) expires, the loop processing is terminated at a good timing when the notification sound such as “door is open ping-pong ping-pong” has been reproduced three times. Further, the display in the liquid crystal and the lamp lighting are continuously executed until the door closing detection which is the release condition of the door opening is performed.

  According to such a configuration, as soon as the detection of door opening that is likely to be fraudulent occurs, notification sound 4 (door opening) is processed by sound, display in liquid crystal, lamp lighting. In either case, the output content is reflected as the operation of each actuator. Moreover, since the notification sound is first played from the message sound (the door is open), the person who is playing the appropriate game will not feel disgust, Notifications belonging to the second notification group are made by the alarm sound of “Ping-Pong”, and it is expected to promptly notify the hall side that it has been switched to a situation where there is a possibility of fraud. .

  It is possible to change the volume setting value and the luminance setting value even in a situation where such anomaly notification sound is output, but even if the volume setting value is changed, the changed volume setting value Is not reflected as volume. However, when the luminance setting value is changed, it is desirable that the changed luminance is reflected by some of the plurality of effect lamps.

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when a plurality of notification sounds shown in FIG. 155 are to be output, various processes are performed by performing the above-described processes according to the priority order. Although only a single channel (channel X) is used for the notification sound, it is possible to appropriately notify abnormal contents, game guidance, and the like (channel saving type control structure). However, as described above, the notification sound belonging to the second notification group having a medium fraud possibility may be higher than the medium depending on other detection situations. It is difficult to say that the current state of the gaming machine is properly notified only by the control based on the priority order.

  In addition, the notification sound is output not only when there is an abnormality detection with a high possibility of fraud but also when there is an abnormality detection with a low possibility of fraud. is there. In other words, if there is an abnormality detection that is likely to have been fraudulent, it is required to output a notification sound as long as the detection state continues. If there is, there is a possibility that such a detection state may be maintained for the convenience of the hall (such as recovery from various errors), so even if the detection state is continued, the output of the notification sound is not necessarily performed. It is important to be able to execute more flexible notification processing depending on the situation of the pachinko machine 1 such as not being required to continue.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in each situation illustrated in FIG. 159 to FIG. 164, in addition to the control based on the above-described priority order, special conditions are also taken into consideration to further improve the state of the gaming machine. Notification in a manner that enables appropriate expression is realized. Hereinafter, the special notification process will be described for each situation with reference to FIGS. 159 to 164.

  In the example shown in FIG. 159, door opening detection by the door frame opening switch 618 occurs at timing tα11 when no notification sound is output. Then, the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the door opening detection is set and the notification sound is assigned to the channel X, and the screen generation schedule data and the light emission mode generation schedule data corresponding to the door opening detection are also included. Set state. At this time, by setting a timer (30 seconds) for measuring the notification time of the notification sound 4 (door opening), the notification sound corresponding to the detection of the door opening is set to 30 until the timing tα12 arrives. It will be played for seconds.

  On the other hand, the display in the liquid crystal according to the door opening detection is maintained until the timing tα16 at which the door opening is not detected by the door frame opening switch 618 is reached.

  However, in the example shown in FIG. 159, at the timing tα13 when the notification sound reproduction in response to the detection of the door opening is completed and the channel X is in an empty state, the magnetic detection in which the priority for notification is relatively high. Magnetic detection by the sensor 4024 occurs. Therefore, regarding the lamp light emission corresponding to the detection of the opening of the door started from timing tα11, although the emission mode generation schedule data is maintained in the set state until the timing tα16 arrives, regarding allocation to various lamp operations. At timing tα13, the lamp emission mode is switched according to the magnetic detection.

  That is, at timing tα13, sound generation schedule data corresponding to magnetism detection is set and the notification sound is assigned to channel X, and screen generation schedule data and light emission mode generation schedule data corresponding to magnetism detection are also included. They are set. At this time, a timer (60 seconds) for measuring the notification time of the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) is set, so that the notification sound corresponding to the magnetic detection is set for 60 seconds until the timing tα14 arrives. To be played over.

  On the other hand, regarding the display in the liquid crystal and the lamp emission corresponding to the magnetic detection, the display and the emission are maintained unless the power is turned off.

  By the way, in the example shown in FIG. 159, when the alarm sound reproduction according to the door opening detection is finished and the door opening detection by the door frame opening switch 618 is still continuing, the magnetic detection sensor Magnetic detection by 4024 has occurred. Such a situation means that a person who intends to perform some unauthorized manipulation opens the door frame 3 and opens it, and then waits for the notification sound reproduction in response to the detection of the door opening to end. It is assumed that there is a possibility that the magnet is instantaneously in the detection range of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 when trying to secretly place an improper purpose magnet inside the door frame 3 in a cold state, which is extremely malicious Therefore, there is a concern that it is insufficient as a countermeasure only to perform the notification sound processing according to the magnetic detection. On the other hand, since the state of magnetic detection by the magnetic detection sensor 4024 has already been turned off, even if any countermeasure is taken, magnetic detection cannot be used as an opportunity.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the notification sound reproduction according to the magnetic detection is finished at the timing tα14, the door opening detection by the door frame opening switch 618 is still continued. Based on this, the “sound generation schedule data corresponding to the detection of door opening” in which the notification sound reproduction has already been notified for the notification time (30 seconds) is set again, and the notification sound is transmitted to the channel X. Special processing to reassign to is performed. In this case, the notification sound corresponding to the detection of the door opening for 30 seconds until the timing tα15 arrives by setting the timer (30 seconds) for measuring the notification time of the notification sound 4 (door opening). Is played.

  In such a configuration, the notification sound corresponding to the detection of the door opening that has already been in the end state is played back in a form connected to the “reproduction of the notification sound corresponding to the magnetic detection”, so that there is a great discomfort in the hall. It will be expected to attract everyone's attention. In addition, as a person who commits fraud, he is already relieved that “when the magnetic alarm is over, all of the alarm sound playback has been completed, and it is finally possible to make it inconspicuous that fraudulent acts have been performed” Because the notification sound corresponding to the detection of the door opening that should have ended is played, an unexpected notification situation will occur, so it is expected to recognize that further fraudulent activities are too risky It becomes like this.

  As will be described later, in this embodiment, during the period in which the notification process belonging to the first notification group is being performed and during the period in which the notification process belonging to the second notification group is being performed, A process of suppressing the volume of the assigned effect sound during the symbol change and the other game sounds (a process of reducing the volume to a specific value) is performed. The specific value may be volume 0. During the period in which the notification process belonging to the third notification group is being performed, the volume of the effect sound that is assigned to other channels and the other game sounds are not suppressed.

  Here, the period during which the notification process is performed (the period for which the volume is to be suppressed) refers to whether any of the sensors used in the first notification group or the second notification group is in a specific detection state (abnormal It is a period in which the conditions of whether the notification sound belonging to the first notification group or the second notification group is being reproduced (whether the notification sound is being reproduced) are satisfied. Accordingly, in the example shown in FIG. 159, the symbol variation occurs based on the fact that the period of timing tα11 to tα13 and the period of timing tα14 to tα16 are during the period in which the notification process is performed by the first notification group. A process for suppressing the volume of the production sound and the other game sounds (a process for reducing the volume to a specific value) is performed, and during the period from timing tα13 to tα14, notification by the first notification group and the second notification group Based on the fact that the process is being performed, a process (a process for reducing the volume to a specific value) that suppresses the volume of the effect sound that is changing the symbol and the other game sounds is performed.

  In this embodiment, both the notification processing by the first notification group and the second notification group are performed during the period when only the notification processing by the first notification group is performed (timing tα11 to tα13, tα14 to tα16). During the period, the volume of the effect sound that is changing the symbol and the volume of the other game sounds are reduced to the same value, but both the notification processing by the first notification group and the second notification group are performed. During the period, a process of reducing the value to a value lower than during the period in which only the notification process by the first notification group is performed may be performed. That is, in this case, it is possible to recognize that there are a plurality of notification states only by confirming the effect sound other than the notification, and it is expected that the initial movement on the hall side will be further accelerated.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 159, when the door opening detection is finished at timing tα16, the processing for suppressing the volume of the effect sound during the symbol change and other game sounds is ended. However, if the notification sound corresponding to the detection of door opening that was already in the finished state was played back in a form linked to “reproduction of the notification sound corresponding to the magnetic detection”, there was a possibility that an extremely malicious act was performed. In view of this, even when the timing of opening the door is terminated, tα16, the volume of the effect sound during the fluctuation of the symbol and the other game sounds may not be suppressed, and this may be continued.

  In the example shown in FIG. 159, as is apparent from the processing according to the door opening detection, the in-liquid crystal display corresponding to the door opening detection is displayed during the period in which the notification sound corresponding to the door opening detection is reproduced. The start period and the end period of the lamp light emission in a mode corresponding to the detection of the opening of the door are all made different, although the start period is the same. As described above, only a single channel (channel X) is used for various types of notification sounds by operating them so as to have different roles for the notification sound, display in liquid crystal, and lamp emission. However, it is possible to appropriately notify the abnormal content, game guidance, and the like.

  On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 160, after the notification sound (timing tα21 to tα22) corresponding to the door opening detection is finished, right-handed detection in the non-short-time state by the gate sensor 4003 occurs at timing tα23. Assume the case. However, in this example, unlike the example shown in FIG. 159, since the possibility of an extremely malicious act is low, the notification sound reproduction according to the right-handed detection in the non-time-short state is terminated. At the timing tα24, the notification sound according to the detection of the door opening that has already ended is not reproduced again. In addition, during the period from timing tα22 to timing tα23, the suppression mode of the volume of the effect sound during the pattern change and the other game sounds is not changed. By the way, even after the notification sound (timing tα21 to tα22) corresponding to the detection of door opening has ended, it is extremely malicious even if frame detection is detected rather than right-handed detection in a non-time-short state by the gate sensor 4003. Therefore, when the notification sound corresponding to this is finished, the notification sound corresponding to the door opening detection already in the end state is not reproduced again.

  On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 161, the magnetic detection by the magnetic detection sensor 4024 occurs at the timing tα33 after the notification sound (timing tα31 to tα32) corresponding to the door opening detection is ended, as shown in FIG. Same as example. However, in the example shown in FIG. 161, it is assumed that the door frame 3 is closed and the door opening detection is ended at the timing tα34 within the period in which the notification sound corresponding to the magnetic detection is being reproduced. Yes.

  In the example shown in FIG. 161, at the timing tα35 at which the notification sound reproduction according to the magnetic detection is terminated, the notification sound according to the door opening detection already in the end state is “notification sound reproduction according to the magnetic detection”. There is no such thing as being played back in a connected form. That is, in the example shown in FIG. 161, as in the case of the example shown in FIG. 159, a person who intends to perform some unauthorized manipulation opens the door frame 3 and opens it, and then detects the door opening. In response to the end of the corresponding notification sound reproduction, the magnet is momentarily within the detection range of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 when attempting to secretly place an improper purpose magnet inside the door frame 3 in a state where the warming is cold. The possibility of being in the situation entered is assumed. However, after timing tα34, considering that the door frame 3 is in a non-illegal state where the door frame 3 is closed and no magnetic detection occurs, the magnetic detection is performed in spite of being in such a non-illegal state. It is considered that the notification sound is played sufficiently until the timing tα35 arrives, and it is considered that it plays a sufficient role as the notification sound processing, and the channel X is freed when the further notification sound processing becomes necessary. It can be said that it is more beneficial to keep it in a state. Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 161, although only a single channel (channel X) is used for various types of notification sounds, it is possible to appropriately notify abnormal contents, game guidance, and the like.

  On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 162, FIG. 159 shows that magnetic detection by the magnetic detection sensor 4024 occurs at timing tα43 after the notification sound (timing tα41 to tα42) corresponding to the detection of door opening is completed. It is the same as the example. However, in the example shown in FIG. 162, it is assumed that the magnetic detection by the magnetic detection sensor 4024 occurs again at the timing tα44 during the period in which the notification sound corresponding to the magnetic detection is being reproduced.

  In other words, in the example shown in FIG. 162, an attempt to secretly place an improper purpose magnet inside the door frame 3 in a state where the warming is cold after waiting for the notification sound reproduction corresponding to the detection of the door opening to end. Sometimes, a magnet instantaneously enters the detection range of the magnetic detection sensor 4024, and in response to this, a magnetic abnormality notification sound is reproduced, but without falling into such a situation, it is within the detection range of the magnetic detection sensor 4024. It is assumed that the magnet is being placed again, and there is a possibility that a more malicious fraud is being carried out. Therefore, in this example, when the magnetic detection by the magnetic detection sensor 4024 occurs again at the timing tα44, while the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the magnetic detection is kept in the set state, the notification sound 1 A process for resetting a timer (60 seconds) for measuring the notification time of (magnetic anomaly) is performed.

  According to such a configuration, the notification sound corresponding to the magnetic detection for a longer time from when the first magnetic detection is performed until 60 seconds have elapsed from the timing tα44 at which the second magnetic detection is performed. Can be played continuously. In this case, the notification sound such as “Boo-boo magnet has been detected” is continuously reproduced over a period from timing tα43 to timing tα45. And finally, the loop processing is not finished at the timing when the notification sound such as “We detected boo-boo magnetism” is good, for example, the loop processing is finished at half-way timing such as “Detect boo-boo magnetism” As a result, it will be expected that everyone will be attracted attention by creating a sense of incongruity in the hall.

  Furthermore, at the timing tα44 at which 60 seconds have elapsed from the timing tα44 at which the second magnetic detection was performed, the notification sound reproduction has already been reported for the notification time (30 seconds). The sound generation schedule data corresponding to the detection is set again, and special processing for reassigning the notification sound to the channel X is performed. In this case, the notification sound corresponding to the detection of the door opening for 30 seconds until the timing tα15 arrives by setting the timer (30 seconds) for measuring the notification time of the notification sound 4 (door opening). Is played.

  In such a configuration, the notification sound corresponding to the detection of the door opening that has already been in the closed state is reproduced in a manner linked to the “reproduction of the notification sound corresponding to the magnetic detection”, and the midway such as “detecting the boo-boo magnetism”. It is played back in a form linked to “notification sound playback according to magnetism detection” in which the loop processing is terminated at an odd timing. Therefore, the priority state of the notification sound according to the detection of the door opening that has already ended is increased, and a notification mode appears as if the notification sound of the magnetic detection was reproduced in the middle, and appeared in the hall. It will be expected that everyone's attention will be gathered with a greater sense of incongruity.

  On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 163, the magnetic detection by the magnetic detection sensor 4024 occurs at the timing tα53 after the notification sound (timing tα51 to tα52) corresponding to the detection of the door opening is completed, as shown in FIG. It is the same as the example. However, in the example shown in FIG. 163, it is assumed that vibration detection by the vibration sensor 2405 occurs at timing tα54 that is within a period in which the notification sound corresponding to the magnetic detection is being reproduced.

  Even in the example shown in FIG. 163, when the notification sound reproduction corresponding to the detection of the door opening is completed, an attempt is made to secretly place an improper magnet inside the door frame 3 in a state where the warming is cold. Even though the magnet instantaneously enters the detection range of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 and the magnetic anomaly notification sound is reproduced accordingly, the pachinko machine 1 is greatly shaken without suffering from such a situation. It is assumed that there is a possibility of more malicious fraud. Therefore, in this example, at the timing tα55 at which the notification sound reproduction according to the magnetic detection is terminated, the notification sound according to the vibration detection is reproduced in a form connected to the “notification sound reproduction according to the magnetic detection”. At the timing tα56 at which the notification sound reproduction according to the vibration detection is terminated, the notification sound according to the door opening detection already in the finished state is reproduced in a manner further connected to the “notification sound reproduction according to the vibration detection”. ing.

  In addition, at the timing tα54 when the vibration detection by the vibration sensor 2405 occurs, the timer (60 for notifying the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the vibration detection and counting the notification time of the notification sound 2 (vibration abnormality) Second), and at a timing tα55 at which the reproduction of the notification sound according to the magnetic detection ends, the sound generation schedule data according to the vibration detection is set and the notification sound is assigned to the channel X .

  According to such a configuration, a notification sound such as “Boo-boost vibration has been detected” is not terminated at a good timing, for example, the loop processing is not completed at a halfway timing such as “Boo-boost vibration is detected”. Since the process will be terminated, it will be expected that everyone will be attracted with a great sense of incongruity in the hall.

  Furthermore, at the timing tα56 at which the notification sound reproduction corresponding to the vibration detection is terminated, the notification sound reproduction has already been notified for the notification time (30 seconds) “for sound generation according to the door open detection” A special process is performed in which “schedule data” is set again and the notification sound is reassigned to channel X. In this case, the notification sound corresponding to the detection of the door opening for 30 seconds until the timing tα15 arrives by setting the timer (30 seconds) for measuring the notification time of the notification sound 4 (door opening). Is played.

  In such a configuration, the notification sound according to the door opening detection already in the end state is further connected to the “notification sound reproduction according to the vibration detection” connected to the “notification sound reproduction according to the magnetic detection”. In addition to being played back at the same time, it is played back in a form linked to “playback of notification sound in response to vibration detection” at which the loop processing is terminated at an abrupt timing such as “detecting booby vibration”. Therefore, the priority state of the notification sound according to the door opening detection already in the end state becomes high, and a notification mode appears as if the notification sound of vibration detection was reproduced in the middle, and appeared in the hall It will be expected that everyone's attention will be gathered with a greater sense of incongruity.

  On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 164, the case where the magnetic detection by the magnetic detection sensor 4024 occurs at the timing tα63 after the notification sound (timing tα61 to tα62) corresponding to the detection of the opening of the frame is completed, not the door opening detection. Assumed.

  In the example shown in FIG. 164, it can be said that the situation in which the magnetic detection further occurs immediately after the detection of the frame opening is a situation where there is a high possibility that some sort of fraud is being performed. However, on the other hand, if a magnet is used for the purpose of fraud, the door frame 3 should be opened. Even if the body frame 4 is opened, it is beneficial to arrange the magnets. Therefore, it can be said that there is a possibility that the magnetic detection sensor 4024 may be erroneously detected when the magnet is used for the ball side to eliminate the clogging of the ball in the ball tank or the payout passage.

  Therefore, also in the example shown in FIG. 164, at the timing tα64 at which the notification sound reproduction according to the magnetic detection is ended, the notification sound according to the frame opening detection that has already been in the end state is “the notification sound according to the magnetic detection”. By reproducing in the form of “reproduction” (timing tα64 to tα65), it is expected that a great sense of incongruity will be generated in the hole and everyone's attention will be gathered. However, after that, at the timing tα66 when the body frame 4 is closed and the frame opening detection is ended, not only each notification process (notification sound, display in liquid crystal, lamp) according to the frame opening detection but also according to the magnetic detection. Each notification process (notification sound, in-liquid crystal display, lamp) is also subjected to a special process for ending them.

  According to such a configuration, while performing a function against fraud appropriately, in the event of erroneous detection on the hall side, only the body frame 4 is closed, and notification processing corresponding to frame opening detection and magnetic detection ( Notification sound, in-liquid crystal display, and lamp) can all be terminated, so that it is expected to quickly maintain the atmosphere in the hall by speeding up the response on the hole side to false detection. Become.

  In the example shown in FIG. 164, even when the body frame 4 is closed and the frame opening detection is ended while the notification sound corresponding to the magnetic detection is being reproduced, the frame opening detection is not performed. Not only for each notification process (notification sound, display in liquid crystal, lamp) according to detection of opening of the frame, but also for each notification process (notification sound, display in liquid crystal, lamp) according to magnetism detection You may make it perform the special process which complete | finishes.

  By the way, as described above, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment is equipped with a player-side volume adjustment function.

  For example, the peripheral control MPU 1511a monitors whether or not the effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332 are operated in the process of step S1108 (see FIG. 128), and the effect selection left button 331 is operated. If it is determined that the setting value (player setting value) by the player is reduced with respect to the volume of the speaker, and if it is determined that the effect selection right button 332 has been operated, the setting of the speaker volume by the player Processing to increase the value (player set value) is performed. In addition, when the player set value is lowered and the actually reduced volume is output from the speaker, a volume adjustment completion sound (for example, “Pi!”) Is output at the volume value after the decrease. On the other hand, when the player setting value is increased and the actually increased volume is output from the speaker, the volume adjustment completion sound (for example, “pip!”) Is output at the increased volume value. It is possible to grasp how much the volume has been changed after the volume adjustment is completed. As for the volume adjustment completion sound, the same sound may be output when the volume value is decreased and when the volume value is increased. Incidentally, the volume adjustment completion sound has a relatively high priority (for example, “20” which is the same as the button press sound) referred to when there is no empty channel, and the output volume of the production sound ( The change in the volume of the audible sound can be transmitted more reliably.

  Then, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, such a volume adjustment process is performed during a period before the game is started (the demo display etc. Not only during the period that can be performed), but also during the period when the game is started and the symbol variation according to the jackpot determination is executed, the player is allowed to accept, and more important effects appeared By making it possible to change the setting of the volume value flexibly at times, the game entertainment is maintained.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as described above, the pachinko machine 1 in the situation in which channel assignments of various effect sounds are made according to the progress of the display effect during the execution period of the symbol variation. When it is detected that 1 is in a specific state such as magnetic anomaly or door opening, a specific notification sound corresponding to the detected content among a plurality of types of notification sounds is assigned to a channel and output. At this time, the channel assignment of various effect sounds according to the progress of the display effect itself is not stopped, and the effect progress notification process for reducing the output volume to a specific value can be executed. That is, in this case, even if a specific notification sound is assigned to a channel among a plurality of types of notification sounds, the channel assignment of various effect sounds according to the progress of the display effect itself is not canceled. Thus, as long as the channel assignment or the abnormal state of the specific notification sound is completed, the effect can be enjoyed again by appropriately returning the output volume of the effect sound according to the progress of the effect display.

  However, in the above-described effect progress notification process, the channel assignment of various effect sounds according to the progress of the display effect itself is not stopped, so that only a specific notification sound is assigned to the channel at the normal time ( More channels are used than in the non-informing state, and there are no free channels to which no sound data is assigned before the end of channel assignment (notifying state) of a specific notification sound. Risk tends to be high. If there is no free channel to which no sound data is assigned before the end of the channel assignment (notification state) of a specific notification sound, any of the sound data at that time is lost. Since one channel assignment has to be discarded, after that, even if the channel assignment (notification state) of a specific notification sound is completed, the discarded sound data cannot be assigned to the channel and reproduced. There is a concern that the entertainment interest will decline.

  Concerning the concerns about the vacant channels related to the production sound, there is no direct adverse effect when the fixed channel method is adopted for the channel assignment of the notification sound, but the fixed channel method is adopted for the channel assignment of the notification sound. Whether or not to adopt the automatic channel method should be determined from the viewpoint of the design of the game and the production, so as to the notification process under the progress of production even if any channel method is adopted It is important to prepare a processing structure capable of adopting a common processing program in order to ensure cost reduction and improvement in reliability required for the development of the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, in the example described below, either the fixed channel method or the automatic channel method may be adopted for both the notification sound and the effect sound.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, even if an operation on the effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332 is performed while the effect progress notification process is being executed, the operation is reduced to a specific value. The output volume of the production sound is not variable and is maintained. That is, in this case, it is not necessary to generate the above-mentioned volume adjustment completion sound (“Pi!” Or “Pi!”) Even if there is an operation by the player while the notification process under the effect progress is being executed. Therefore, it is expected that the channel will have a margin and the risk of vacant channels being lost is promoted.

  However, while the pachinko machine 1 is capable of changing the volume value flexibly when a more important performance appears, the output volume is set while the notification process under the progress of the performance is being executed. If the change cannot be made, when the notification process under the effect progress caused by the error detection or the notification due to the convenience of the hall (door opening, etc.) is executed, the sound volume is appropriately set according to the content of the effect progress. It is inevitable that the game entertainment will decline due to the fact that the setting cannot be changed. Also, as a result of the progress of the presentation during the period in which the notification process under the progress of the presentation is being performed, the output volume (possible) After changing the setting of the volume of the listening sound is allowed, it is necessary to accept a plurality of operations in order to change the sound volume to an appropriate value. However, in this case, the channel is occupied by the above-mentioned volume adjustment completion sound. Thus, there is a concern that the game entertainment will be lowered due to the fact that the effect sound cannot be output properly because there are not enough empty channels even though the notification process under the effect progress is finally finished.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, when an operation for the effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332 is performed while the effect progress notification process is being executed, the value is reduced to a specific value. The output volume of the produced sound (the volume of the audible sound) is not variable and is maintained, while the player can accept the change of the set value (player set value) of the sound itself. When the effect progress notification process (the process of reducing the output volume to a specific value) is finished, the output volume (audible volume) that reflects all the operations up to that point is collectively changed.

  According to such a configuration, if the player accepts the change of the setting value (player setting value) in accordance with the progress of the presentation while the notification process under the progress of the presentation is being executed, a new operation can be performed. Even when the notification process under the effect progress is finished, the output volume (audible sound volume) reflecting all the operations up to that point can be changed at once. As described above, the notification process under the effect progress is completed by allowing the player to accept the change of the set value (player set value) even during the period when the effect progress notification process is being executed. It will be expected to suppress the decline in the entertainment interests until then. In addition, the volume value (audible sound volume) is changed in multiple stages as soon as the notification process under the progress of the production ends, and a situation occurs in which the empty channel is insufficient due to the volume adjustment completion sound each time. Is also preferably avoided.

  In addition, according to the said structure, when performing the batch change of the output volume to a player setting value, when the notification progress under effect progress is complete | finished, the game in the period when the notification processing under effect progress was performed. Regardless of the number of times the player setting value is changed or the number of operations by the player, etc., the volume adjustment completion sound will be played only once at the volume after the batch change. You may make it output with the sound (for example, "bee!") Of the special aspect different from.

  Furthermore, in order to more preferably resolve the shortage of empty channels when the notification progress under the effect progress is completed, the number of changes in the player setting value during the period during which the notification progress under the effect progress is being executed, or by the player Regardless of the number of operations or the like, it is desirable not to reproduce the volume adjustment completion sound itself when changing the output volume (audible sound volume) at once as the notification process under the progress of production is finished. . According to such a configuration, in particular, although the notification process under the progress of the effect due to the error detection or the notification due to the convenience on the hall side (door opening, etc.) has finally ended, the appropriate effect due to the lack of empty channels It is possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of a situation where it becomes impossible to enjoy the video.

  In the above explanation example, when the notification sound corresponding to the door opening detection is ended while maintaining the door open state, when the magnetic abnormality occurs and the notification sound corresponding to this is ended, the door opening detection is performed. The notification sound is output again (see FIG. 159). However, if a magnetic anomaly occurs when the notification sound corresponding to the door opening detection is in the output state and the notification sound corresponding to this is terminated, the door opening detection is performed even if the door opening state is maintained. It is desirable not to output the corresponding notification sound (or to output only the remaining time as the output time of the interrupted “notification sound according to door opening detection”).

  When the door is opened, lamp emission is performed according to the detection of door opening. This lamp emission continues even when the notification sound according to detection of door opening ends and when the door is open. It is desirable to make it. Furthermore, it is desirable to continue for a predetermined time after the door frame 3 is closed and the door open state is ended.

  Even if an abnormality is detected, there is a specific error that does not output a notification sound, and when the specific error occurs in a situation where the notification sound corresponding to the door open detection is terminated while maintaining the door open state, the specific error It is desirable that the notification sound corresponding to the detection of the door opening is output again based on the occurrence of this. According to such a configuration, it is possible to recognize that some abnormality has occurred by re-outputting the notification sound in response to the detection of the door opening.

  Or, even if an abnormality is detected, there is a specific error that does not output a notification sound, and when the specific error occurs in a situation where the notification sound corresponding to the door opening detection is terminated while maintaining the door open state, The notification sound corresponding to the detection of the door opening may not be output again based on the occurrence of the specific error, and the state in which re-notification is possible may be maintained.

  It is possible to change the volume setting value and the luminance setting value even in a situation where such anomaly notification sound is output, but even if the volume setting value is changed, the changed volume setting value Is not reflected as volume. However, when the luminance setting value is changed, it is desirable that the changed luminance is reflected by some of the plurality of effect lamps.

  Hereinafter, an example of the process from the execution of the effect progress notification process to the batch change of the output volume (the volume of the audible sound) will be described.

  FIG. 165 is a diagram for explaining the contents of the notification progressing progress notification process according to the notification state of the pachinko machine 1.

  First, prior to describing the processing from when the effect progress notification process is executed to when the output volume (audible sound volume) is changed collectively, the contents of the effect progress notification process will be described with reference to FIG. A brief explanation will be given. Here, for convenience of explanation, only the notification sounds 1 to 7 illustrated in FIG. 155 are shown, and description of other notification sounds is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 165, in this example, first, two types of suppression modes (first volume suppression mode and second volume suppression mode) are prepared as the volume suppression mode of the production sound. For example, in the first volume suppression mode, when the player changes the set value (player set value) for the volume, the output sound volume (audible sound volume) in the range of “20” to “50” is changed. Among these, the output volume of the production sound (the volume of the audible sound) is set to “10”. On the other hand, in the second volume suppression mode, the output volume of the production sound (the volume of the audible sound) is set to “0”. Therefore, the second volume suppression mode has a higher degree of suppression than the first volume suppression mode. In particular, in this explanation example, although the process relating to the output itself is performed, the effect sound is silenced. It is illustrated as what makes it.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, of the notification sounds 1 to 7, the notification sounds 1 to 3 (magnetic abnormality, vibration abnormality, prize winning abnormality) belonging to the first notification group having a high possibility of fraud. When the notification process regarding any of them is executed, a process of suppressing the output volume of the effect sound (the volume of the audible sound) is performed in the second volume suppression mode that is the higher suppression level. In addition, when the notification process regarding any one of the notification sounds 1 to 3 (magnetic abnormality, vibration abnormality, big prize abnormality) belonging to the first notification group is executed, even when abnormality detection is turned off, The output volume of the production sound (the volume of the audible sound) in the second volume suppression mode on the higher suppression level until a predetermined time (in this case, 60 seconds) elapses after the abnormality is detected. ) Is not terminated and this is continued.

  In this example, when the notification process related to any one of the notification sounds 1 to 3 (magnetic abnormality, vibration abnormality, big prize abnormality) belonging to the first notification group is executed, the output volume of the production sound (audible sound) The period of time during which the process of suppressing the volume of sound is continued is the same as the period from when the notification sound (magnetic abnormality, vibration abnormality, big prize abnormality) according to abnormality detection is played to when it is terminated Is set to

  On the other hand, when the notification process related to any one of notification sounds 4 and 5 (door opening, frame opening) belonging to the second notification group having a medium possibility of fraud among the notification sounds 1 to 7 is performed, the degree of suppression The process of suppressing the output volume of the effect sound (the volume of the audible sound) is performed in the first volume suppression mode on the lower side. However, when the notification process related to any one of the notification sounds 4 and 5 (door opening, frame opening) belonging to the second notification group is executed, when the abnormality detection is turned off immediately after the abnormality detection occurs, Thus, the process of suppressing the output volume of the effect sound (the volume of the audible sound) is terminated in the first volume suppression mode that is the low suppression level.

  On the other hand, when the notification process related to any one of the notification sounds 6 and 7 (left-handed guidance and ball removal guidance) belonging to the third notification group related to the game guidance among the notification sounds 1 to 7 is performed. Therefore, no processing is performed to suppress the output volume of the production sound (the volume of the audible sound).

  In this example, the suppression mode is different between the case where the notification sound belonging to the first notification group is executed and the case where the notification sound belonging to the second notification group is executed. The output volume of the production sound in one suppression mode between the case where the notification sound belonging to the first notification group is executed and the case where the notification sound belonging to the second notification group is executed are not necessarily different. You may make it perform the process which suppresses (volume of an audible sound). However, the end condition of the process to be suppressed is different in a case where the notification sound belonging to the first notification group is executed more strictly than the notification sound belonging to the second notification group is executed. It is important to make it.

  FIG. 166 shows the contents of the processing related to volume adjustment when the effect selection left button 331 or the effect selection right button 332 is operated while no abnormality detection has occurred and the process related to the notification sound is not executed. It is a figure explaining.

  In this example, the player setting value is varied by “1” within a range of “1” to “5” by an operation with the effect selection left button 331 or the effect selection right button 332. The volume of the effect sound is set to be smaller as the value is smaller. In addition, the output volume of the production sound (the volume of the audible sound) is set as a player in a state where the above-described suppression modes (first volume suppression mode and second volume suppression mode) are not set for the production sound. It is set as a numerical value 20 times the value. Therefore, in this example, the output volume of the production sound (the volume of the audible sound) is made variable in the range of “20” to “100” by the operation by the player.

  Now, as shown in FIG. 166 (A), the player setting value is “3” out of “1” to “5” with respect to the volume of the production sound, and no notification flag is set. Assume that the output volume of the effect sound (the volume of the audible sound) is set to “60”, which is 20 times that volume. Also, assuming that the decorative symbol SZ is in a stopped state, and that the big hit determination has not been performed and is in a state of waiting for a start winning prize, the effect selection left button 331 is simulated in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. The displayed display image 331a and the display image 332a imitating the effect selection right button 332 are displayed, and the volume adjustment guidance display OAH is displayed to indicate that the volume can be adjusted through these operations. Further, at this time, in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, the first volume value display OH1 that makes it possible to recognize which of the current player set values is “1” to “5” is also executed. The The volume adjustment guidance display OAH and the first volume value display OH1 may be displayed at all times, or during a specific period such as a super reach effect that is a reach effect that is executed with the background image changed. In the case of the above, at least one of a first volume value display OH1 and a later-described second volume value display OH2 may appear when the player performs an operation without displaying. Further, both the volume adjustment guidance display OAH and the first volume value display OH1 may not necessarily be displayed, one of them may be omitted, and only the other may be displayed.

  In the situation shown in FIG. 166 (A), when an operation with the effect selection left button 331 or the effect selection right button 332 is performed, the player set value is incremented by “1” each time the operation is performed. As a result, the output volume of the production sound (the volume of the audible sound) is changed by “20”. In addition, whenever the output volume of the production sound (the volume of the audible sound) changes, the volume adjustment completion sound (for example, “Pi!”) Is played at the volume after the change.

  Further, at this time, in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, a second gauge indicating which of the current set values is “1” to “5” that is the range of the player set values is indicated by a gauge display. The volume value display OH2 (see FIG. 166 (C)) is executed in place of the volume adjustment guidance display OAH, which will be described later.

  If the effect selection left button 331 is operated when the player setting value is “1”, neither the player setting value nor the output volume of the effect sound (the volume of the audible sound) is reduced. The person set value remains “1” (the output volume of the production sound (the volume of the audible sound) remains “20”). Therefore, even if the effect selection left button 331 is operated when the player setting value is “1”, the volume adjustment completion sound is not assigned to the channel itself, or even if assigned to the channel, the volume is set to “ It is desirable to prevent audible output by setting it to “0”. The same applies to the case where the effect selection right button 332 is operated when the player setting value is “5”.

  On the other hand, when the start winning is generated and the jackpot determination is performed, as shown in FIG. 166 (B), the decorative symbol SZ varies in a predetermined effect pattern based on the result of the jackpot determination and the type of the variation pattern. Is displayed. In addition, while the decorative design SZ is variably displayed, a predetermined effect is developed and an effect sound corresponding to the progress of the predetermined effect is output.

  In this regard, in the volume adjustment processing according to this embodiment, not only the period shown in FIG. 166 (a period during which a demo display or the like can be performed), but also the variation of symbols corresponding to the jackpot determination after the game is started. Even during the period of execution, the player is allowed to accept. For example, when a more important effect such as the reach effect shown in FIG. As described above, the configuration allows the setting change to be made possible.

  In other words, FIG. 166 (C) shows a state after the player has performed the operation of the effect selection right button 332 twice in accordance with the execution of the reach effect in the state shown in FIG. 166 (B). In the first operation, the player setting value has been changed from “3” to “4”, and the output volume of the production sound (the volume of the audible sound) is “60”, which is 20 times the volume. While the setting has been changed to “80”, the volume adjustment completion sound is assigned to a predetermined channel and played at “80”, which is the volume after the change, and in the second operation, The value has been changed from “4” to “5”, and the output volume of the production sound (audible sound volume) has been changed from “80” to “100”, which is 20 times that, Volume adjustment completed at “100”, the volume after the change There and reproduced is assigned to a predetermined channel.

  Further, in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 according to this embodiment, when the player setting value is changed by such an operation, the range of the player setting value is “1” to “5”. Thus, the second volume value display OH2 indicating the current set value by gauge display is executed in place of the volume adjustment guidance display OAH. This is to clarify the current set value for the player set value range of “1” to “5”, and even under a tense situation where a more important performance appears. The purpose is to prevent operation mistakes such as repeated operation of the effect selection right button 332 even though the player setting value is the maximum value “5”. In the gauge display, the numerical value range of “1” to “5” is regularly displayed as blocks, and the number of filled blocks among these blocks is increased / decreased according to the change in the player setting value. Is displayed to show the current player setting value.

  As shown in FIG. 166 (D), the second volume value display OH2 is displayed when there is an operation on the effect selection left button 331 or the effect selection right button 332 in the state shown in FIG. 166 (C). The display is turned off after a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed, and thereafter the volume adjustment guidance display OAH is executed again. Therefore, even if the operation is performed in such a manner that the player setting value does not change (operation on the effect selection right button 332 when the player setting value is the maximum value “5”), the effect selection left button 331 is selected. Alternatively, as long as the operation on the effect selection right button 332 is repeated, the display of the second volume value display OH2 is maintained. That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, an operation in a mode in which the player setting value does not change (operation on the effect selection right button 332 when the player setting value is the maximum value “5”). When the operation is performed, the volume adjustment completion sound is not audibly output every time the operation is performed, but the timer value for measuring the time until the second volume value display OH2 is not displayed is reset. Accordingly, it is more preferable to prevent an operation error such as an operation to be repeatedly performed on the effect selection right button 332 even though the player setting value is “5” which is the maximum value. become.

  On the other hand, FIG. 167 shows that the effect selection left button 331 or the effect selection right button 332 is operated while the door opening detection is generated during the symbol variation execution period and the process related to the notification sound is executed. It is a figure explaining the content about the process regarding the volume adjustment accompanying that.

  The situation shown in FIG. 167 (A) is the situation before the symbol variation is started, and is the same as the situation described with reference to FIG. 166 (A). In such a situation, when the start winning is generated and the jackpot determination is performed, as shown in FIG. 167 (B), the result or fluctuation of the jackpot determination is the same as the situation described with reference to FIG. Based on the type of pattern, the decorative symbol SZ is variably displayed in a predetermined effect pattern. In addition, while the decorative design SZ is variably displayed, a predetermined effect is developed and an effect sound corresponding to the progress of the predetermined effect is output.

  However, in the situation shown in FIG. 167 (B), the door opening detection belonging to the second notification group occurs during the symbol change execution period, and the processing related to the notification sound 4 (door opening) is executed accordingly. More specifically, a loop process (30 seconds) for repeatedly outputting a notification sound such as “the door is open ping-pong ping-pong”, and display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 (here, “ And “lighting by various lamps (light emitting devices) disposed on the door frame 3 and the game board 5”.

  In addition, as described above, when the door opening detection belonging to the second notification group occurs during the symbol variation period, and the processing related to the notification sound 4 (door opening) corresponding thereto is executed, the first sound volume suppression mode is used. An effect progress notification process for suppressing the output volume of the effect sound (the volume of the audible sound) is performed. Therefore, in the situation shown in FIG. 167 (B), the player setting value is maintained at “3”, which is the same as in the situation of FIG. 167 (A). The sound output volume (the volume of the audible sound) is set to a predetermined first specific value (here, “10”) lower than the original numerical value (20 times the player setting value). The contents of the performance are developed under the volume value.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when an operation on the effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332 is performed while such an effect progress notification process is being executed, the first identification is performed. The output volume of the production sound that is lowered to the value (here, “10”) (the volume of the audible sound) is not variable and is maintained, while the setting value (player setting value) by the player regarding the volume Accepting the change of itself, and when the above-mentioned production progress notification process (the process of reducing the output volume to a specific value) is completed, the output volume (audible volume) that reflects all the operations up to that point It is as described above that they are collectively changed.

  That is, FIG. 167 (C) shows a state after the player has performed the operation with the effect selection right button 332 twice in accordance with the execution of the reach effect in the state shown in FIG. 167 (B). Although the player setting value has been changed from “3” to “5” by the operation of the effect selection right button 332, the output sound volume (audible sound volume) of the effect sound is the original value (game) It can be seen that the predetermined first specific value (here, “10”) lower than 20 times the user set value) is maintained. Therefore, even if the player performs the operation with the effect selection right button 332 twice, until the above-described effect progress notification process (the process of reducing the output volume to a specific value) is completed, the volume of the effect sound Is not changed, and the content of the performance is developed with the volume of the first specific value.

  At this time, in the first operation among the operations by the player, the player set value is changed from “3” to “4”, but the output volume of the production sound (the volume of the audible sound) is the first specified. Since the value (here, “10”) is maintained, the volume adjustment completion sound is not audibly output, and the player setting value is changed from “4” to “5” even in the second operation. However, since the output volume of the production sound (the volume of the audible sound) is maintained at the first specific value (here, “10”), the volume adjustment completion sound is not audibly output.

  However, in the first operation, the player setting value itself is changed from “3” to “4”, and the player operation for adjusting the volume is accepted. In the display area of the device 1600, a second volume value display OH2 indicating that the current setting value is “4” among the player setting value ranges “1” to “5” is indicated by a gauge display. This is executed in place of the volume adjustment guidance display OAH, and the numerical value is changed from “3” to “4” and displayed in the first volume value display OH1.

  Also, in the second operation, the player setting value itself changes from “4” to “5”, and the player operation for volume adjustment is accepted. In the display OH2, a gauge display indicates that the current setting value has changed from “4” to “5” in the range of player setting values “1” to “5”, and the first volume value is also displayed. In the display OH1, the numerical value is changed from “4” to “5” and displayed.

  After that, the door frame 3 is closed while the sound volume adjustment guidance display OAH is returned to the state in which the sound volume adjustment guidance display OAH is executed again, and the processing related to the notification sound 4 (door opening) and the effect progress notification processing (output volume to a specific value) 167 (D), as shown in FIG. 167 (D), the output volume (audible sound volume) in which all the operations up to that time are reflected in response to the completion of the process is completed. Change all at once. That is, in this case, the player setting value is gradually changed from “3” to “4” corresponding to the first operation and “5” corresponding to the second operation during the execution process of the effect progress notification process. Because of the change, the output volume (audible sound volume) is originally “80” corresponding to the first operation from the first specific value (here, “10”), and the second operation. However, the first specific value (here, “10”) should be changed to “100” reflecting all the operations up to that point.

  As described above, the notification process under the effect progress is completed by allowing the player to accept the change of the set value (player set value) even during the period when the effect progress notification process is being executed. It will be expected to suppress the decline in the entertainment interests until then. In addition, the volume value (audible sound volume) is changed in multiple stages immediately after the notification process under the progress of the production, and the empty channel is insufficient or free due to the volume adjustment completion sound each time. The occurrence of such a situation is preferably avoided.

  Moreover, in this example, when the output volume (the volume of the audible sound) is changed in a lump (“10” → “100”) in accordance with the completion of the notification process under the effect progress, the output volume changes. Regardless, the channel assignment of the volume adjustment completion sound is not performed. According to such a configuration, in particular, although the notification process under the progress of the effect due to the error detection or the notification due to the convenience on the hall side (door opening, etc.) has finally ended, the appropriate effect due to the lack of empty channels It is possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of a situation where it becomes impossible to enjoy the video.

  Moreover, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as described above, the magnetic abnormality and the door opening are exemplified as the specific state. Regarding the notification process under the effect progress in the performed state, the end conditions may be different.

  For example, first, with respect to the presentation progress notification process in a state where the door has been opened, when the door is closed, or when a predetermined time has elapsed since the door was opened (the door has been opened) ). However, in any case, when the output volume (the volume of the audible sound) is changed all at once (for example, “10” → “100”), the channel of the volume adjustment completion sound is generated regardless of the change in the output volume. It is desirable not to make the assignment itself.

  On the other hand, the notification process under the progress of the presentation in the state where the magnetic abnormality has occurred is not terminated only when the state of the magnetic abnormality is terminated, but is continuously executed until the RAM is cleared or the power is cut off. Is desirable. In this case, the output volume (audible sound volume) is collectively changed (for example, “10” → “100”) when the RAM is cleared or the power is turned off. Even if there is a change in the output volume, it is desirable not to perform the channel assignment of the volume adjustment completion sound itself.

  In addition, in the progress notification process in the state where the door has been opened, a display indicating that is made when the player setting value is changed, whereas in the progress process in the notification process in the state where the magnetic abnormality has occurred, When the player setting value is changed, the display indicating that may be omitted. According to such a configuration, it is possible to suggest that the end conditions are different between the effect progress notification process when the door is opened and the effect progress notification process when the magnetic abnormality occurs. become.

  In addition, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the volume can be adjusted by rotating the knob of the volume adjustment volume 1510a. However, since it is assumed that the volume adjustment by the knob is mainly performed by the hall side, the output of the volume adjustment completion sound (channel assignment) cannot be performed when the volume adjustment by the knob is triggered. It is more desirable to make room for an empty channel.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, although not shown in the drawing, various effects included in the pachinko machine 1 apart from the volume adjustment buttons (effect selection left button 331 and effect selection right button 332). Lamps (for example, lamps that are controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 and are used for production, and game lamps such as special-purpose LEDs that are controlled by the main control board 1310 are excluded from the brightness setting targets. ) Brightness adjustment buttons (brightness increase button, brightness decrease button, etc.), and if it is determined that the brightness adjustment button has been operated, the player determines the brightness applied to various effect lamps. A process for changing the set value (player set value) can be executed. Further, when the player setting value related to the brightness is lowered or raised, the brightness adjustment confirmation sound (for example, the same as the volume adjustment confirmation sound) is output at a volume value corresponding to the setting value related to the volume at that time. I have to. In addition, the brightness of such an effect lamp can be set and changed by a player's operation in both a state where the symbol is not changing and a state where the symbol is changing.

  In addition, it is desirable that the luminance adjustment completion sound be assigned to the channel under the same conditions as the above-mentioned volume adjustment completion sound. In this case, even if the setting value for the luminance is changed, the luminance adjustment confirmation is performed. There will be situations where the sound channel assignment itself is not performed, or where the brightness adjustment confirmation sound is suppressed and output. According to such a configuration, it is possible to grasp the current situation (for example, whether or not the above-described performance progress notification process is being executed) when the setting value related to the brightness, not the volume, is changed. Will be possible. The brightness adjustment confirmation sound may be a sound different from the volume adjustment completion sound.

  The player setting value related to the volume is set to a specific value (for example, “3”) without any operation by the player when a predetermined condition (for example, when a predetermined time elapses after being controlled by the demo screen) is satisfied. It may be changed. However, when the setting is changed to a specific value (for example, “3”) without any operation by the player, a display indicating the current setting value (the first volume value display OH1 or the second volume) It is to the third party that the operation rate of the pachinko machine 1 is in a situation where neither the value display OH2) nor the output (channel assignment) applied to the volume adjustment completion sound is performed. It is more desirable to make it difficult to recognize.

  Also, when a new volume adjustment is performed when the volume adjustment completion sound corresponding to the volume adjustment is in the output state, the volume adjustment sound that is in the output state is output even if there is an empty channel. Assigning a new volume adjustment completion sound to the same channel and outputting it (overwriting output) in the form of quitting is more effective in making room for the number of empty channels. desirable.

  Further, when the player is further operated to increase the sound volume even if the player setting value is at the maximum value, or to the sound volume decreasing side even if the player setting value is at the minimum value. When the operation is further performed, even if there is an empty channel, the volume adjustment completion sound is not assigned to the channel and is not output, so that the number of empty channels is increased. More desirable above. At this time, the volume adjustment completion sound is not output, but a display (first volume value display OH1 or second volume value display OH2) indicating which of the current set values is displayed is displayed. Also good.

  Volume adjustment by turning the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 1510a is allowed, but it may be possible to generate a period during which the volume adjustment performed by the player's operation is not allowed.

  On the other hand, FIG. 168 shows the effect selection left button 331 or the effect selection when the state detection generated in FIG. 167 is not a door opening but a magnetic abnormality, and the process related to the notification sound is being executed. It is a figure explaining the content about the process regarding the volume adjustment accompanying operation of the right button 332.

  The situation shown in FIG. 168 (A) is the situation before the symbol variation is started, and is the same as the situation described with reference to FIG. 167 (A). In such a situation, when a start win occurs and a jackpot determination is made, as shown in FIG. 168 (B), the result or fluctuation of the jackpot determination is the same as the situation described with reference to FIG. 167 (B). Based on the type of pattern, the decorative symbol SZ is variably displayed in a predetermined effect pattern. In addition, while the decorative design SZ is variably displayed, a predetermined effect is developed and an effect sound corresponding to the progress of the predetermined effect is output.

  In the situation shown in FIG. 168 (B), the magnetic detection that belongs to the first notification group occurs during the symbol variation execution period, and the processing related to the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) is executed accordingly. Specifically, a loop process (60 seconds) for repeatedly outputting a notification sound such as “Boo-boo magnet was detected” and display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 (here, “magnetic detection”) And lighting by various lamps (light emitting devices) arranged on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 are respectively executed.

  Also, as described above, when the magnetic detection belonging to the first notification group occurs during the symbol variation period and the processing related to the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) is executed in accordance with this, the effect is produced in the second volume suppression mode. Notification processing under the progress of production for suppressing the output volume of sound (volume of audible sound) is performed. Therefore, in the situation shown in FIG. 168 (B), the player setting value is maintained at “3”, which is the same as in the situation of FIG. 168 (A). The sound output volume (audible sound volume) is set to a predetermined second specific value (here, “0”) lower than the original value (20 times the player setting value). The production contents are developed under the volume value (in this case, mute).

  In this regard, even when the effect progress notification process according to the magnetic abnormality is executed, if the operation on the effect selection left button 331 or the effect selection right button 332 is performed, the second specific value (here, “0”). ") The output volume of the production sound that has been reduced to (the volume of the audible sound (mute) in this case) is not variable and is maintained, while the player's setting value for the volume (player setting value) itself Change acceptance is allowed, and when the above-described production progress notification process (process for reducing the output volume to a specific value) is completed, the output volume (audible volume) that reflects all the operations up to that point is finished. As described above, the batch change is performed.

  That is, FIG. 168 (C) shows a state after the player performs the operation with the effect selection right button 332 twice in accordance with the reach effect being executed in the state shown in FIG. 168 (B). Although the player setting value has been changed from “3” to “5” by the operation of the effect selection right button 332, the output sound volume (audible sound volume) of the effect sound is the original value (game) It can be seen that the second specific value (here, “0 (silence)”) that is lower than 20 times the user set value) is maintained. Therefore, even if the player performs the operation with the effect selection right button 332 twice, until the above-described effect progress notification process (the process of reducing the output volume to a specific value) is completed, the volume of the effect sound Is not changed, and the content of the performance is advanced with the volume of the second specific value being maintained.

  At this time, in the first operation among the operations by the player, the player set value is changed from “3” to “4”, but the output volume of the production sound (the volume of the audible sound) is the second specified. Since the value (here “0”) is maintained, the volume adjustment completion sound is not audibly output, and the player setting value is changed from “4” to “5” even in the second operation. However, since the output volume of the production sound (the volume of the audible sound) is maintained at the second specific value (here, “0”), the volume adjustment completion sound is not audibly output.

  However, in the first operation, the player setting value itself is changed from “3” to “4”, and the player operation for adjusting the volume is accepted. In the display area of the device 1600, a second volume value display OH2 indicating that the current setting value is “4” among the player setting value ranges “1” to “5” is indicated by a gauge display. This is executed in place of the volume adjustment guidance display OAH, and the numerical value is changed from “3” to “4” and displayed in the first volume value display OH1.

  Also, in the second operation, the player setting value itself changes from “4” to “5”, and the player operation for volume adjustment is accepted. In the display OH2, a gauge display indicates that the current setting value has changed from “4” to “5” in the range of player setting values “1” to “5”, and the first volume value is also displayed. In the display OH1, the numerical value is changed from “4” to “5” and displayed.

  Incidentally, in this illustrative example, in the situation shown in FIG. 168 (C), the magnetic detection itself is already in a non-detection state. However, unlike the door detection, the output volume of the production sound (the volume of the audible sound) in the second volume suppression mode until the predetermined time (in this case, 60 seconds) elapses after the magnetic detection. The notification process under the effect progress that suppresses this is continuously executed.

  After that, a predetermined time (in this case, 60 seconds) has elapsed since the occurrence of magnetism detection while the volume adjustment guidance display OAH has returned to the state in which it is executed again. 168 (D), as shown in FIG. 168 (D), the output volume (audible sound volume) reflecting all the operations up to that time is completed in accordance with the completion of the process. Change all at once. That is, in this case, the player setting value is gradually changed from “3” to “4” corresponding to the first operation and “5” corresponding to the second operation during the execution process of the effect progress notification process. Because of the change, the output volume (audible sound volume) is originally “80” corresponding to the first operation from the second specific value (here “0”), and the second operation. However, the second specific value (here “0”) is changed to “100” reflecting all the operations up to that point.

  Note that when the notification process corresponding to the magnetic abnormality is executed, unlike the case where the notification process corresponding to the door opening is executed, even in the situation shown in FIG. Display in the display area 1600 (here, “magnetic detection”) and lighting by various lamps (light emitting devices) arranged on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 remain executed. Yes. That is, in the notification process according to the magnetic abnormality, when the notification sound is terminated, while the notification by the display in the liquid crystal and the notification by the lamp are continued, the production sound is excluded from the suppression target and corresponds to the player set value. However, in the notification process according to the opening of the door, the production sound remains to be suppressed while the notification by the display in the liquid crystal and the notification by the lamp are continued in the notification process according to the door opening. It is supposed to be.

  As described above, even when a magnetic abnormality occurs, the change acceptance of the set value (player set value) by the player is permitted even during the period in which the notification process under the effect progress is being executed. Thus, it is expected to suppress a decrease in the gaming interests until the notification process under the effect progress is completed. In addition, the volume value (audible sound volume) is changed in multiple stages immediately after the notification process under the progress of the production, and the empty channel is insufficient or free due to the volume adjustment completion sound each time. The occurrence of such a situation is preferably avoided.

  In addition, in this example, the output volume (audible sound volume) is changed in a lump (“0” → “100”) when the notification process under the effect progress due to the magnetic abnormality is terminated. In spite of the change in the volume, the channel assignment of the volume adjustment completion sound is not performed. According to such a configuration, in particular, a situation in which it is not possible to enjoy an appropriate effect due to a lack of empty channels, even though the notification process under the effect progress due to notification due to erroneous detection has finally ended. The occurrence of this can be suitably suppressed.

  As shown in Fig. 155, for the notification sound in response to the door opening, such as "door is open ping-pong ping-pong", and the notification sound in response to magnetic abnormality such as "Boo-boo magnet was detected" Since “1” (0x1FF) is set in the third byte of the value, the playback is always performed at the volume set by the initial value regardless of the player setting value.

  In addition, when the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) or the notification sound 7 (ball removal guidance) is executed, the notification process under the effect progress is not executed. Therefore, during the notification, the player setting is performed. Both the value and the output volume of the effect sound (the volume of the audible sound) can be varied as appropriate. However, for these notification sounds 6 and 7, as shown in FIG. 155, “1” (0x1FF) is set in the third byte of the volume initial value, so regardless of the player set value, Playback is always performed at the volume set by the initial value.

  Among the notification sounds 1 to 7, for the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) and the notification sound 7 (ball removal guidance) belonging to the third notification group, “1” is not set in the third byte of the volume initial value. You may make it include in the object of the volume adjustment by a player.

  In addition, for each process described in FIG. 167 and FIG. 168, not only during the period of symbol variation execution, but also the state before the symbol variation starts, and the state detection in the form of the start and end timing of symbol variation. Even when the notification process according to the above is executed, it may be executed in the same manner.

  In each process described with reference to FIGS. 167 and 168, after the effect progress notification process is completed, the effect selection left button 331 or the effect selection right button is the same as before the effect progress notification process is started. When the player setting value is changed by the operation of 332, the output volume of the effect sound (the volume of the audible sound) is changed accordingly. Whenever the output volume of the production sound (the volume of the audible sound) changes, the volume adjustment completion sound (for example, “Pi!”) Is played at the volume after the change.

  Moreover, although the process demonstrated in FIG. 167 and the process demonstrated in FIG. 168 differed in the production | presentation sound suppression aspect during the period when the production progress under notification process is performed, about this suppression aspect, it does not necessarily exist. The output sound volume (audible sound) of the production sound is suppressed in one mode between the case where the notification sound belonging to the first notification group is executed and the case where the notification sound belonging to the second notification group is executed. As described above, the processing for suppressing the sound volume may be performed.

  In addition, in the notification process under the progress of production, the output volume of various game sounds (the volume of audible sounds) is suppressed. Among these game sounds, a game ball is placed at the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004. Some game sounds such as a sound (winning sound) played in response to winning a prize may be played with the initial value set volume without being affected by volume control. That is, in this case, it becomes possible for the hall side to easily grasp whether or not the game is being continued despite the occurrence of an abnormal state as the pachinko machine 1. In this sense, some sounds such as a sound (winning sound) that is played in response to the winning of a game ball at the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 when the effect progress notification process is being executed. It is desirable to play the game sound as a special sound that cannot be output when the notification process under the effect progress is not executed.

  As described above, in FIGS. 155 to 168, there is no channel space by adopting a channel-saving control structure that can appropriately notify the abnormality content etc. with only a single channel for various notification sounds. (Situation where the number of vacant channels is 0) It was proposed that technical measures should be taken in terms of how to make this difficult to appear. However, even when such a control structure is adopted, there is a situation in which there is no vacancy in the channel to which the production effect sound (production sound) is assigned (the situation where the number of vacant channels is 0). Concerns about the appearance of the above unintended sound output still remain.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, regarding the channel assignment of the production sound, various technical matters are performed at a stage before the situation where there is no vacant channel (the situation where the number of vacant channels is 0) occurs. I try to give some ingenuity. Hereinafter, various technical ideas applied to the output of the production sound will be sequentially described. In adopting these technical devices as the pachinko machine 1, the above-described channel-saving control structure that can appropriately notify the abnormality content only with a single channel with respect to various notification sounds is not necessarily employed. You don't have to. In each example described below, either the fixed channel method or the automatic channel method may be adopted for both the notification sound and the effect sound. In addition, when the automatic channel method is employed, the above-described control based on the priority order may not necessarily be employed, and a process for discarding a new sound may be performed when all channels are in use. Good. Moreover, each example demonstrated below can be implemented in combination as appropriate.

[Channel reservation processing]
As described above, in a gaming machine in which the number of channels is limited, even if a special result is obtained by the determination by the determination means according to the winning, there is no vacant channel to which sound data is assigned In a situation where the number of empty channels is 0, a special sound corresponding to the fact that a special result has been obtained cannot be assigned to the channel, and there is a concern that the game entertainment will be lowered due to the fact that it cannot be output.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, it is determined whether or not a specific action such as “an act of praying with the hand holding the pachinko machine 1” or “button operation” has been performed. It can be detected by detection means. When it is detected that such a specific action has been performed, for example, a predetermined value that does not indicate any expectation, such as a sound corresponding to silence data composed of only silence sound (output sound with a volume of 0). By executing a process of assigning a sound to a channel over a predetermined time (channel reservation process), the channel is kept from being used by another sound. On the other hand, while the channel reservation process is performed in this way, even if special performance conditions such as a jackpot finalizing effect and a pre-reading effect are established as a result of the game ball being received at the specific winning opening, At this point, no special sound corresponding to the performance is assigned to the channel. Then, after waiting for the channel reservation process to end, an effect of assigning a special sound to the channel and reproducing it can be executed (post notification effect).

  That is, in this case, at least one of the channels that can be assigned to the special sound is reserved in advance (channel reservation) by a predetermined sound that does not show any expectation due to a specific action by the player. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of a situation where a special sound cannot be output due to a shortage of channels even though a special result is obtained in the determination according to winning.

  As for special sounds, for example, in addition to the jackpot confirmation sound that is executed only when winning a jackpot in the jackpot determination according to the winning, a highly anticipated effect mode (for example, in the effect determination based on the jackpot determination according to the winning (for example, Predictive announcement sound that is executed when a highly anticipated announcement effect that is performed during the execution of a reach production is selected, or when a predetermined judgment result is obtained by a prefetch judgment according to a prize It is possible to exemplify a pre-read notification sound or the like that is executed as an effect, but in essence, it is assigned to a channel and output when a special determination result is obtained by determination by a predetermined determination means according to winning Anything can be used.

  FIG. 169 shows that when a game ball is won at the first start opening 2002 or the second start opening 2004, a special sound (for example, a quine) according to a so-called pre-reading effect is output as a “special sound”. A channel to which a special sound can be assigned is in a state where the special sound has not been output (more precisely, a determination that a special sound is to be output (a determination that a pre-reading effect will be performed) has not yet been made). It is a time chart which shows an example about the channel reservation process ensured in advance from time.

First, prior to explaining an example of the channel reservation process, first, a general prefetch effect that is a well-known technique will be briefly explained.
That is, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when a winning is made to the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out based on the winning. The first / second start opening winning process (steps S 5231 to S 5234) shown in FIG. 104 is performed. In the first / second start opening winning process (FIG. 104: Steps S5231 to S5234), it is determined whether or not a game ball has won a start opening (first start opening 2002 or second start opening 2004). As described above, when it is determined that a prize has been won, a process of increasing the number of reservations on the corresponding special symbol side by 1 is performed.

  In addition, as described above, in the first and second start opening winning processes (FIG. 104: Steps S5231 to S5234), the prefetching process for executing the pre-reading effect on the winning start opening side is also executed (FIG. 105: Step S5245, FIG. 106: Step S5255).

  Here, as described above, the look-ahead effect on the side of the first special symbol is an effect that suggests the determination result (or the degree of expectation) of the first special symbol in advance before starting the variable display of the first special symbol. is there. In the first special figure prefetching process, information required for determining whether or not the prefetching effect is executed on the peripheral control board 1510 side, the contents of the effect, etc. Information, information related to the variation pattern number for prefetch determination) is generated and stored in the corresponding storage area as transmission information for the peripheral control board 1510. At this time, instead of the determination result itself of the first special symbol, information regarding the stop symbol of the special symbol may be included in the command as information suggesting the type of jackpot game. For example, information at a stage before final determination such as an SP reach group, a normal reach group in the variation pattern, and a latent hit group or a small hit group in the symbol type may be transmitted as a prefetch command.

  On the other hand, the pre-reading effect on the second special symbol side suggests in advance the determination result (or the degree of expectation) of the second special symbol before starting the variable display of the second special symbol as described above. It is a production to do. In the second special figure prefetching process, information (winning information, symbol type, variation pattern number, etc.) necessary for determining the presence / absence of prefetching and the contents of the presentation on the peripheral control board 1510 side is generated, The information is stored in the corresponding storage area as transmission information for the peripheral control board 1510. At this time, instead of the determination result itself of the second special symbol, information related to the stop symbol of the special symbol may be included in the command as information suggesting the type of jackpot game. For example, information at a stage before final determination such as an SP reach group, a normal reach group in the variation pattern, and a latent hit group or a small hit group in the symbol type may be transmitted as a prefetch command.

  That is, in the peripheral control board 1510, the determination process as to whether or not the big hit is won and the symbol variation is not digested, and information obtained from the prefetch command when they are put on hold ( Expectations on whether the jackpot determination that is put on hold will obtain a special result based on information related to the pre-reading effect on the first special figure side and information related to the pre-reading effect on the second special figure side) It is possible to perform a pre-reading effect that suggests the degree in advance.

  More specifically, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first determines whether or not there is a situation in which a start winning has occurred, and performs control related to a hold display and a pre-reading effect according to the start winning in the situation. After that, by updating the special symbol processing flag based on the grasped game situation, the above-described variation start processing, variation pattern setting processing, variation processing, big hit game processing, small hit establishment shown in FIG. 167 Perform one of the processes. Among these, in the control related to the pre-reading effect, for example, a new hold display corresponding to the start winning prize is displayed in any of a plurality of modes (for example, a relatively low expectation blue color and a relatively high expectation red color). Whether to perform a specific prefetching effect that suggests the prefetching expectation level depending on whether it is displayed, and a mode (for example, blue, red, or when it is determined that the prefetching effect is not performed) according to the result of the determination In the normal display mode), the hold display is performed. As a result, until the jackpot determination corresponding to the hold display is exhausted, a pre-reading effect in which the jackpot expectation degree is suggested in advance by the display mode is executed.

  By the way, in such a pre-reading effect, when a hold display (including a jackpot confirmed hold display) appears in a highly expected manner, a special sound (for example, a quine) may be output in accordance with the pre-read execution. Many. However, since such special sounds (pre-reading effects) are played at game ball winning timings that occur irregularly, a game ball winning occurs at a timing when there is no vacant channel, and pre-fetching is determined. If there is a win, the player can recognize that the special sound is not played even though the pre-reading determination is won and the hold display appears in a highly expected manner (blue or red). There is a concern that the entertainment interest will decline.

  Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 169, as described above, the special sound is output before the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 wins the game ball and outputs the special sound (prefetching effect). Channels that can be assigned in advance from the time when the special sound is not output (more precisely, the determination that the special sound is output (the determination that the pre-reading effect is performed) has not yet been made). It is possible to execute channel reservation processing to be secured in

  For example, at the timing tY10 shown in FIG. 169, the number of jackpot determinations that are currently on hold (the number of holds) is 0, and a normal background display appears in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. If the player is in a situation where the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable state, the player usually wins a game ball at the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 in order to increase the number of holds. A game (handle operation) is performed as described. As a result, when a game ball is won at the first start opening 2002 or the second start opening 2004, up to four big hit determinations are put on hold in accordance with the winnings, and the big hit determination is made. Each time the game is put on hold, processing related to hold display and pre-reading effects according to winning is performed.

  Here, as the pre-reading effect when the channel reservation process is not executed, for example, in the order of winning to the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004, the first winning (first hold), the second winning ( Assuming that the second winning), the third winning (third holding), and the fourth winning (fourth holding) have occurred, processing relating to the pre-reading effect is performed at each timing when the holding has occurred. When a pre-reading determination is won and a pre-reading effect is performed, a special sound (e.g., a cure) is output at a timing at which the corresponding hold occurs (each timing when winning and pre-reading determination is performed), and a specific mode A hold display with a mark will appear.

  On the other hand, the pre-reading effect when the channel reservation process is being executed is also, for example, in the order of winning to the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004, the first win (first hold), the second win ( Assuming that the second winning), the third winning (third holding), and the fourth winning (fourth holding) have occurred, processing relating to the pre-reading effect is performed at each timing when the holding has occurred. However, when a pre-reading effect is performed after winning the pre-reading determination, a special sound (for example, a quine) is not output at the timing when the corresponding hold occurs (winning timing), but this is kept waiting for execution. The special sound (for example, quine) is output after waiting for the channel to be channel-reserved to become available. In addition, about the hold display with a specific aspect, you may make it appear in synchronization with the timing which outputs a special sound (for example, a quine), or it may make it appear at the timing when the hold which wins prefetch determination occurred. Good. However, when a hold display having a specific mode is caused to appear at a timing when a hold that has been won for the prefetch determination is generated, a prefetch effect when the channel reservation process is being executed and a case where the channel reservation process is not being executed. In any of the pre-reading effects, it is desirable to allow only one aspect (for example, only red) to appear as a specific aspect.

  That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when a hand is held around the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, a non-contact type sensor (for example, an ultrasonic sensor or an infrared sensor) is not shown. However, this is detected as an object, and this is used as a trigger to start channel reservation processing.

  For example, at the timing tY11 shown in FIG. 169, the player holds his / her hand around the front of the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, and this is detected as an object. Then, the peripheral control board 1510 generates a prayer effect mode based on the detection. In this prayer effect mode, first, a prayer mode background display in which “Shrine Torii” is displayed as a background image in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 is performed, and “countdown countdown” is performed for a predetermined time (30 seconds). A process of assigning and reproducing “sound” to a predetermined channel is performed. Note that the countdown sound starts, for example, from “30” and ends when it is counted down every second and becomes “0”. In addition, during the period in which the prayer mode background display is displayed in this manner, an effect in which the decorative symbols are variably displayed in a predetermined effect pattern is continuously executed in the display area of the game board effect display device 1600.

  However, the “shrine torii (prayer mode background display)” in such a display area and the “countdown voice” in a predetermined channel hold the player in front of the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. This can be triggered only by the trigger (detection by the sensor), and it is not related to the content of the performance (production that suggests the degree of expectation) that is progressing within the symbol variation being executed, It does not depend on the result of the jackpot determination at all. Therefore, the display and sound generated when the player holds his hand may be appropriately changed to other contents. However, by performing such processing, the display and sound are predetermined for a predetermined time (30 seconds). The channel can be maintained in a usage state (in this case, a “countdown voice” usage state that does not indicate any expectation), and until this predetermined time (30 seconds) elapses, It is possible to avoid the occurrence of a situation in which another sound that does not know when it ends for a predetermined channel is assigned (channel reservation processing).

  Until the predetermined time (30 seconds) during which the channel reservation process is executed in this way, the player plays a game so that the game ball is won at the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004. (Handle operation) will be performed. As a result, as shown in FIG. 169, the first win (first hold), the second win (second hold), the third win (third hold), and the fourth win (fourth hold) occurred. Then, processing related to the pre-reading effect is performed at each timing when the suspension occurs. However, as described above, while the “countdown audio” is being played (while the channel reservation process is being executed), the determination result (prefetching win) that the prefetching effect is performed as a result of the determination according to the winning is Even if it is obtained, a special sound (for example, a quine) is not assigned to the channel at the time of winning, and this is stored as a state of waiting for execution. The special sound (for example, cuin) in the waiting state in this way is output as a post notification sound that is output after the winning time at timing tY12 when a predetermined time (30 seconds) has elapsed from timing tY11. Become.

  On the other hand, a prize is generated during the period from the start of the reproduction of the “countdown voice” (channel reservation process) by the player's own intention until the end (timing tY11 to tY12). If there is no winning, but a special determination result is not obtained even though a winning has occurred (the pre-reading effect was not won), even if the timing tY12 at which the reproduction of “countdown sound” ends is special Sound is not played.

  According to such a configuration, the player holds his hand and starts the reproduction of the “countdown voice” (channel reservation process) from his own intention to the end (timing tY11 to tY12). If a prize is generated and a special judgment result (pre-fetching win) is obtained in the judgment according to the prize, a special sound (cuein) is not output at that time, and the “countdown sound” It is executed as a post-announcement effect that is output aiming at the timing when the channel is vacated and the channel is vacant. Accordingly, it is possible to suitably avoid the occurrence of a situation in which a special sound cannot be output due to the absence of an empty channel even though a special determination result (prefetching win) is obtained. In addition, even if a special determination result (prefetching win) is obtained at any timing between timings tY11 to tY12, a special sound (cue) corresponding to this is generated at a timing when at least one channel is vacant. Since reproduction is aimed at tY12, it is only necessary to confirm whether or not a special sound (cuein) is generated at timing tY12, and a special determination result (read-ahead) within a relatively long period of timing tY11 to tY12. It will be possible to easily recognize whether or not (winning) has been obtained.

  In addition, when outputting a special sound (cuein) as such a post notification sound, it may be assigned to any of the channels that are idle at timing tY12 for reproduction. However, if the special sound (cuin) is selectively assigned to the predetermined channel to which the “countdown sound” has been assigned, the channel reservation processing and the post-announcement effect corresponding to it can be performed with only one channel. It can be said that it can be realized, and it can be said that it is beneficial in that the range of production can be expanded within a limited number of channels.

  Further, in this embodiment, for the prayer mode background display in which “Shrine Torii” is displayed as a background image, the timing tY12 at which the “countdown audio” playback ends and the playback of the special sound (cuein) are performed. Even after the end timing arrives, it is continuously displayed. This is based on the fact that a person who requests execution of such a channel reservation process tends to hold his hand again to generate the channel reservation process every time the number of holds decreases. It is considered that there is a benefit when holding your hand over the display of “Shrine Torii” as a background image (the probability that a special sound will be played at the timing of the announcement will increase) Yes, the prayer mode background display is continuously performed until a specific condition unrelated to the channel reservation process is satisfied (for example, release operation by a button). However, in actuality, even if “Shrine Torii” is displayed as a background image or “Shrine Torii” is not displayed as a background image, the player holds the hand When this is sometimes detected, only a process of maintaining a predetermined channel in an assigned state for a predetermined time is performed by a predetermined sound (countdown audio), and therefore the timing tY12 at which the reproduction of “countdown audio” is terminated. Alternatively, the display may be returned to the normal background display at the timing when the reproduction of the special sound (cuein) as the notification sound is terminated.

  In addition, when the player holds his hand again during the period of the timing tY11 to tY12 and this is detected, the reproduction time of the “countdown voice” until the predetermined time (30 seconds in this case) elapses from the detection again. And a special sound corresponding to the pre-reading winning may be output when the timing comes.

  In addition, such prayer effect mode is executed based on the fact that a specific action by the player is detected not only when the symbol variation is in the changing state but also when the symbol variation is not in the changing state. You may make it do. The specific action may be an action to be detected by a contact type sensor, such as a predetermined button operation, in addition to an action to be detected by a non-contact type sensor.

  However, when a special sound (cuein) is output as such a post-announcement sound, the first time winning (first hold), the second time winning ( (2nd hold), 3rd win (3rd hold), 4th win (4th hold), it will be difficult to know which special decision result (prefetch win) was obtained, so prefetch win There is a concern about a decline in the entertainment interest of the game due to being suspended and not recognized. On the other hand, the content reproduced as the special sound is not a uniform sound (here, “Cuin”), but the first prize (first hold), the second prize (second hold), the third prize (second hold) (3 hold), it is also possible to make it different depending on which hold of the fourth winning prize (fourth hold) wins. However, this changes the content of the sound that is played in the pre-reading effect when the channel reservation process is not being executed (here, “Cuin”), so that it is possible to know that the pre-reading win has been won. There is concern that it will disappear.

  Therefore, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, a special determination result is given at any timing between the timings tY11 to tY12 (first hold, second hold, third hold, and fourth hold). Depending on whether or not (prefetching win) is obtained, a process of varying the playback time of the special sound (herein “cuin”) starting from timing tY12 is performed.

  For example, in the example shown in FIG. 169, it is assumed that a special determination result (prefetching win) is obtained in the first winning (first hold) that is won at an extremely early timing among timings tY11 to tY12. In this case, however, a special sound (herein, “cue”) is reproduced for 3 seconds from the timing tY12.

  On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 170, a case where a special determination result (prefetching win) is obtained in the second winning (second hold) that is won at a relatively early timing among the timings tY11 to tY12. In this case, the special sound is reproduced for 6 seconds from the timing tY12. Here, it takes 3 seconds to play “Cuin” once. If a special sound (here “Cuin”) is played for 6 seconds, “Cuin” is played twice. As a result, a sound of a form such as “Cuin Cuin” is output.

  On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 171, it is assumed that a special determination result (prefetching win) is obtained in the third winning (third hold) winning at a relatively late timing among timings tY11 to tY12. However, in this case, the special sound is reproduced for 9 seconds from the timing tY12. Here, since the time required to play “Cuin” once is 3 seconds, when a special sound (here “Cuin”) is played for 9 seconds, “Cuin” is 3 The sound is reproduced as many times as possible, and a sound of a form such as “Cuin Cuin Cuin” is output.

  On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 172, it is assumed that a special determination result (prefetching win) is obtained in the fourth winning (fourth hold) that is won at a very late timing among timings tY11 to tY12. However, in this case, the special sound is reproduced for 12 seconds from the timing tY12. Here, since it takes 3 seconds to play “Cuin” once, when playing a special sound (here, “Cuin”) for 12 seconds, “Cuin” is 4 The sound is reproduced as many times as possible, and a sound of a form such as “Cuin / Cuin / Cuin / Cuin” is output.

  According to such a configuration, when a special sound is output at timing tY12, it is possible to grasp that a special determination result (prefetching win) is obtained between timings tY11 to tY12. It becomes possible to predict at which timing between tY11 and tY12 a special determination result (prefetching win) has been obtained by winning. In this example, the shorter the playback time of the special sound from the timing tY12, the more the special determination result (prefetching win) was obtained with the winning that occurred at an earlier timing between the timings tY11 to tY12. The longer the playback time of the special sound from timing tY12 is, the longer the timing of tY11 to tY12 between timings tY11 to tY12 is indicated, the more special judgment result (prefetching winning) is obtained. .

  In this example, it may be assumed that only the first winning is generated between timings tY11 to tY12 and a special determination result is obtained according to the winning. However, in this case as well, depending on the timing at which the winning occurs. Thus, the length of the reproduction time of the special sound from the timing tY12 is varied as described above. However, instead of this, considering that the number of holds is limited to a maximum of four, if a special determination result is obtained in the first winning, the special sound is “Cuin” 1 regardless of the winning timing. Set the playback time for the first time, and if a special judgment result is obtained in the second prize, the special sound is set as the playback time for the second time of “Cuin” regardless of the timing of the prize, and the special judgment is given in the third prize. If the result is obtained, the special sound is set to the playback time for 3 times of “Cuin” regardless of the winning timing. If the special result is obtained in the fourth winning, the special sound is set regardless of the winning timing. May be set to the playback time for four times of “Cuin”.

  Further, in this embodiment, when a pre-reading win is obtained, “cuein” is reproduced as a special sound. However, the first determination result (for example, with a relatively high degree of expectation) is determined by the pre-reading determination when winning. Depending on whether a low prefetching win) or a second determination result (for example, a prefetching win with a relatively high degree of expectation) is obtained, the playback content as a special sound may be changed. For example, when the first determination result (for example, prefetching with a relatively low expectation) is obtained in the prefetch determination at the time of winning a prize, “Cuin” is played as a special sound, whereas the prefetching at the time of winning a prize is performed. If the second determination result (prefetching winning with relatively high expectation) is obtained in the determination, if “Dokan” is reproduced as a special sound, it occurs at any timing between timings tY11 to tY12. In addition to the prediction of whether or not the pre-reading win was obtained in the winning prize, the first determination result (the pre-reading win with relatively low expectation) and the second determination result (the pre-reading win with relatively high anticipation) as the pre-reading win It is also possible to predict which one has been obtained. In this case, it is desirable to reproduce “cuin” or “docan” as a special sound also in the pre-reading effect when the channel reservation process is not executed, depending on the determination result.

  For example, in the example shown in FIG. 173, the first determination result (prefetching winning with a relatively low expectation) in the first determination (first hold) that is won at an extremely early timing among timings tY11 to tY12. ) Is obtained, and the second determination result (relatively high prefetching win) is obtained in the pre-reading determination in the fourth winning (fourth hold) that has been won at a very late timing. In this case, however, the special sound is reproduced in the “cuin” manner for 3 seconds from the timing tY12, and then the special sound is reproduced in the “docan” manner for another 9 seconds.

  According to such a configuration, by confirming that the reproduction time of the special sound in the “cue” mode is 3 seconds, the first winning ( It becomes possible to predict that the first determination result (prefetching with relatively low expectation) is obtained in the prefetch determination in the first hold). In addition, by confirming that the special sound playback time itself was performed for 12 seconds (3 + 9 seconds), it was confirmed that the prefetching was won in the prefetch determination in the fourth winning (fourth hold) that was won at a very late timing. It is possible to grasp. Furthermore, according to the fact that the first determination result (prefetching win with relatively low expectation) was obtained in the prefetch determination in the first winning (first hold) that was won at an extremely early timing among the timings tY11 to tY12. By confirming that the special sound is being played in the “docan” mode after the one-time “cuein” played is finished, the pre-reading determination in the fourth winning (fourth hold) is the second It is possible to predict that the determination result (prefetching with relatively low expectation) has been obtained.

  Alternatively, when the first determination result (pre-fetching on the first special figure side) is obtained in the pre-reading determination according to the winning at the first starting port 2002, “cuin” is reproduced as a special sound. , “Dokan” may be reproduced as a special sound when the second determination result (prefetching win on the second special figure side) is obtained in the pre-reading determination in accordance with the winning at the second starting port 2004. . In this case, in the pre-reading effect when the channel reservation process is not executed, either the pre-reading determination according to the winning at the first starting port 2002 or the pre-reading determination according to the winning at the second starting port 2004 is performed. It is desirable to reproduce “cuein” or “dokan” as a special sound depending on whether there is any.

  According to such a configuration, for example, when the situation shown in FIG. 173 occurs, by confirming that the reproduction time of the special sound in the “cue” mode is 3 seconds, the timing tY11 to tY12 The first winning (first hold) that is won at an extremely early timing is a win to the first starting port 2002 side, and the first determination result (the first special figure side of the first special figure side) in the pre-reading determination corresponding to this It becomes possible to predict that the pre-reading win) was obtained. In addition, by confirming that the special sound playback time itself was performed for 12 seconds (3 + 9 seconds), the pre-reading win is also determined in the pre-reading determination in the fourth winning (fourth hold) which is won at a very late timing. Can be grasped. Furthermore, according to the fact that the first determination result (the pre-reading win on the first special figure side) is obtained in the pre-reading determination in the first winning (first hold) that is won at an extremely early timing among the timings tY11 to tY12. By confirming that the special sound has been played in the “docan” mode after the one-time “cuein” played is finished, the fourth winning (fourth hold) is on the second start port 2004 side It is possible to predict that the second determination result (prefetching win on the side of the second special figure) has been obtained by the prefetch determination in accordance with this.

  As described above, in this embodiment, as an example of channel control in a case where a special determination result is obtained based on the fact that a game ball is received at a specific winning opening while performing the channel reservation process The case where the pre-reading winning in the pre-reading effect is obtained is exemplified. However, the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 169 to 173 is basically a gaming machine in which a determination process is performed when a game ball is received at a specific winning opening, and the determination process is special. Channel control (channel reservation processing, etc.) that has the technical characteristics in itself, which can avoid the fact that a channel shortage occurs and cannot be output when a special sound is output when the judgment result is obtained Therefore, it is clear that the application example is not necessarily limited to the pre-reading win in the pre-reading effect.

[Channel usage restriction]
As described above, in a gaming machine in which the number of channels is limited, even if a special result is obtained by the determination by the determination means according to the winning, there is no vacant channel to which sound data is assigned In a situation where the number of empty channels is 0, a special sound corresponding to the fact that a special result has been obtained cannot be assigned to the channel, and there is a concern that the game entertainment will be lowered due to the fact that it cannot be output.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the number of empty channels is monitored while the game is progressing, and if this is less than a predetermined number, at least some of the game sounds are out of various game sounds. The ratio of restricting the execution of processing related to output is increased (channel use restriction). That is, in this case, for at least some of the game sounds, the execution of processing related to the output is limited from the stage before the number of empty channels becomes zero, and the processing is executed as the number of empty channels approaches zero. Since the rate of restriction becomes high, it becomes difficult to reduce the number of empty channels to zero.

  More specifically, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, whenever the symbol variation corresponding to the jackpot determination in the hold state is digested (every time the start condition is satisfied), Determine the availability of the channel during the execution period. As a result, when there is room in the channel availability, the channel usage restriction rate (channel restriction level) is lowered until at least the relevant symbol variation to be judged is finished, and the channel availability is reduced. When there is no room in the situation, increase the rate at which channel usage is restricted (channel restriction level) at least until the relevant symbol variation, which is the subject of determination, is terminated, and limit channel limitations based on such symbol variation as one unit. By executing this, the occurrence of a situation in which the number of empty channels becomes zero during the execution period of the symbol variation to be determined is suppressed. As will be described later, a plurality of level values are prepared as channel restriction levels, and the ratio of restricting execution of processing related to game sound output increases as the level value increases.

  FIG. 174 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure for processing related to setting of such a channel restriction level.

  Assume that it is determined that a pattern command (variation pattern) has been received from the main control board 1310 within the process of step S1022 (FIG. 95). Then, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, first, as shown in FIG. 174, as the processing in step S3101, the value of the previously set channel restriction level is reset. Note that the reset process (step S3101) may be performed when the symbol variation is finished.

  Next, as the process of step S3102, based on the type of the first half of the production pattern corresponding to the received fluctuation pattern, the first half of the period (for example, the period from the start of the design fluctuation to the start of the reach production, Specify “X”, which is the number of empty channels (minimum number of empty channels) based on the timing when the channel is most empty within the period from the start of fluctuation to the time when the design is stopped without starting reach production) To do. Further, as the processing of step S3103, based on the type of the latter half of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the received fluctuation pattern, the channel within the latter half of the fluctuation period (for example, the period from the start of reach production to the stop of the fluctuation of symbols, etc.) “Y”, which is the number of empty channels (the minimum number of empty channels) based on the timing when the empty space becomes the smallest, is specified.

  However, when an effect pattern that stops the symbol without starting the reach effect from the start of the symbol variation is selected, the symbol variation corresponding to the “second half of the variation” is not performed. In this case, the next step process is performed without performing the process of step S3103 itself, or the maximum number that can be set as the number of empty channels “Y” in the process of step S3103 (a number that is not subject to channel restriction). Will be set.

  Then, in step S3104, “X” specified in step S3102 is compared with “Y” specified in step S3103. Among these “X” and “Y”, On the basis of the value on the side where the minimum number of empty channels is smaller (the side where the number of empty channels is not sufficient), the channel restriction level is set until at least the relevant symbol variation to be determined is finished. As a result, the execution of the process related to the output of the game sound can be restricted based on the set channel restriction level from the start to the end of the symbol variation to be determined. Therefore, it is expected that the number of vacant channels is hardly reduced to 0, and that it is expected to suppress a decrease in the entertainment interest due to appearance of an unintended performance mode.

  In this embodiment, when setting the channel restriction level, the “minimum free channel number” used for the determination is specified separately for the first half (step S3102) and the second half (step S3103). I am going to do that. This is because the production contents in the first half of the change (such as the period from the start of symbol change to the start of reach production) are shared by multiple production patterns (for example, long reach, super reach A, super reach B, etc.). This is because it is possible to reduce the amount of data necessary to specify the minimum number of free channels by specifying the minimum number of free channels in the first half of the fluctuation. .

  However, the minimum number of free channels used to determine the channel restriction level need not be specified separately for the first half of the fluctuation and the second half of the fluctuation. With the pattern as a unit, the number of empty channels (the minimum number of empty channels) may be specified based on the timing when the channel is most empty during the period in which the effect pattern is executed.

  In addition, the “minimum number of vacant channels” here is a sound automatically generated when the production pattern (production content) to be judged progresses (for symbol stop-related or big-hit determination according to BGM-related or big-hit determination). It shows how many channels are left in an empty state when they are assigned to each channel only for the corresponding sound effects. Therefore, a button pressing sound (such as a sound accompanying an effect generated based on a button operation), a volume adjustment completion sound, various notification sounds, a block winning sound (sound accompanying a winning in a general winning opening), a hold winning sound (first The production patterns (production contents) to be judged such as the sound associated with winning at the start opening 2002 or the second start opening 2004), the ordinary electric production sound (the sound accompanying the production according to the judgment of the normal symbol), etc. are developed. Various kinds of sounds that are not necessarily executed simply by being included are not included as judgment targets.

  FIG. 175 is a diagram illustrating a channel restriction level value set separately for the “minimum free channel number” specified in the process of step S3104, and an example of the restriction content determined separately for the channel restriction level. .

  As shown in FIG. 175, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, among the various game sounds, the block winning sound (the winning to the general winning opening) is first selected as the sound subject to channel use restriction. ), On-hold winning sound (sound associated with winning at the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004), general electric effect sound (sound accompanying effect according to the determination of the normal symbol), volume adjustment completion sound Is illustrated. Therefore, during the period of symbol fluctuation when there is not enough room in the free channel, at least for these game sounds (block winning sound, hold winning sound, general electric effect sound, volume adjustment completion sound) among various game sounds Channel usage restrictions may occur.

  More specifically, when the “minimum free channel number” specified in the process of step S3103 is 12 or more, the process of step S3104 sets the channel restriction level based on the association shown in FIG. Set to “0”. In other words, in this case, it is assumed that there is a situation where symbol variation with an empty channel is performed, and the sound that is subject to channel use restriction (block winning sound, hold winning sound, general electric effect sound, volume adjustment completion sound) None of them are limited, and if there is a prize at the general prize opening during execution of the symbol variation, a block winning sound is assigned to a predetermined vacant channel and played, and the first start port 2002 or If there is a winning at the second starting port 2004, the reserved winning sound is assigned to a predetermined vacant channel and played back. The electric sound is assigned to a predetermined vacant channel for playback, and when the volume is adjusted while the symbol variation is being executed, the volume adjustment completion sound corresponding to this is sent to the vacant channel. Ri applied to the be played.

  On the other hand, when the “minimum free channel number” specified in the process of step S3103 is any one of 6 to 11, the process of step S3104 performs channel restriction based on the association shown in FIG. Set the level to “1”. In other words, in this case, it is assumed that there is a situation in which the pattern variation with a slight margin is executed in the empty channel, and the four sounds (block winning sound, hold winning sound, general electric effect sound, volume adjustment completed) that are subject to channel use restriction Sound)), a channel use restriction (25% restriction) is generated for the block winning sound. In other words, in this case, when there is a winning in the general winning opening during the execution of the symbol variation and this is detected, the amount of prize balls corresponding to the winning is paid out, but the block winning sound is set to a predetermined value. Processing is performed so as not to allocate to an empty channel. At this time, it is desirable not to set the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the winning to the general winning opening, and not to reproduce the block winning sound itself.

  On the other hand, if the “minimum free channel number” specified in the process of step S3103 is any one of 2 to 5, the process of step S3104 sets the channel restriction level based on the association shown in FIG. Set to “2”. In other words, in this case, it is assumed that there is a situation in which there is a relatively small pattern change in the empty channel, and the four sounds (block winning sound, hold winning sound, general electric effect sound, volume adjustment) that are subject to channel use restriction are adjusted. The channel use restriction (50% restriction) is generated for two sounds of the block winning sound and the reserved winning sound among the completion sounds. That is, in this case, in addition to the restriction on the block winning sound described above, when there is a winning at the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 during execution of the symbol variation, the quantity corresponding to the winning is detected. Although the payout of the minute prize balls and the above-described first and second start opening winning prize processing are performed, the reserved winning sound is processed so as not to be assigned to a predetermined empty channel. At this time, it is desirable not to set the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the winning at the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004, and not to reproduce the reserved winning sound itself.

  On the other hand, when the “minimum free channel number” specified in the process of step S3103 is either 0 or 1, in the process of step S3104, the channel restriction level is based on the association shown in FIG. Is set to “3”. In other words, in this case, it is assumed that there is a situation where symbol variation is performed with no room in the empty channel, and four sounds (block winning sound, hold winning sound, general electric effect sound, volume adjustment complete) that are subject to channel use restriction The channel usage limit (100% limit) is generated for all of the sound. That is, in this case, in addition to the restriction on the block winning sound described above and the restriction on the pending winning sound, even if an effect corresponding to the determination of the normal symbol is performed during the execution of the symbol variation, Is processed so as not to be assigned to a predetermined empty channel. In addition, when the player performs a volume adjustment operation during the execution of the symbol variation, the volume adjustment is performed according to the operation, but the volume adjustment completion sound is processed so as not to be assigned to a predetermined empty channel. It will be. At this time, for the general electric effect sound and the volume adjustment completion sound, do not set the corresponding sound generation schedule data and do not play the normal electric effect sound or the volume adjustment completion sound itself. Is desirable.

  According to such a configuration, when the symbol variation is performed in which the number of empty channels to which no sound is assigned is less than a predetermined number while the game is progressing, the number of the empty channels is predetermined. Compared to the case where the symbol variation that does not become less than the number is executed, the ratio of restricting the execution of the processing related to the output of at least a part of the various game sounds is increased. That is, in this case, some game sounds (block winning sound, hold winning sound, general electric effect sound, volume adjustment completion sound) are output from the stage before the number of empty channels actually becomes zero. Execution of related processing is restricted, and the percentage of execution restriction increases as the number of free channels decreases, so the number of free channels becomes 0 during the execution of symbol variation. It is expected that the occurrence of such a situation is suitably suppressed.

  Further, in the above configuration, among the various game sounds, the sound that is subject to restriction on channel use is not the most important “effect sound related to jackpot determination” in the pachinko machine 1, but other “sounds associated with winning a prize” "," Production sound related to normal determination ", and" sound related to volume adjustment ". In other words, even if a restriction on channel use is generated during the execution of symbol variation, the effect on whether the big hit symbol appears due to the symbol variation is not limited, so it is executed appropriately. The decline in the entertainment interest when restricting the use of the channel is suppressed.

  In the above configuration, multiple types of game sounds that are candidates for restriction on channel use are prepared (block winning sound, hold winning sound, general electric effect sound, volume adjustment completion sound). As the channel restriction level becomes higher (as the minimum vacant channel number is smaller, the number of types of sounds subject to restriction on channel use is increased). However, a method of limiting the execution of processing related to the output from the stage before the number of free channels actually becomes 0, and increasing the rate of execution restriction as the number of free channels decreases. For example, a method described below with reference to FIG. 176 may be adopted.

  FIG. 176 is a diagram showing another example of the restriction content determined separately for the channel restriction level.

  As shown in FIG. 176, in this alternative example, the channel is used depending on the “minimum free channel number” specified in the process of step S3103 and the channel restriction level specified in the process of step S3104. A limited lottery is held as to whether or not to apply a limit. However, here, a plurality of sounds that are candidates for channel use restriction are not prepared, and when a determination result indicating that restriction is imposed in the restriction lottery is obtained, one game sound (for example, a volume adjustment completion sound) Etc.) is limited only to the channel use.

  For example, in this alternative example, when the channel restriction level is 0 (the minimum number of free channels is 12 or more), the probability of obtaining a determination result indicating that restriction is imposed in the restricted lottery is set to 0/100, The restriction process related to channel use is not executed for a specific game sound (for example, a volume adjustment completion sound) to be restricted.

  However, when the channel restriction level is 1 or more, the probability that a determination result indicating that restriction is imposed in the restricted lottery is increased as the value increases, and the channel restriction level is 1 (minimum free channel). When the number is 6 to 11), the probability is 25/100, and when the channel restriction level is 2 (the minimum number of free channels is 2 to 5), the probability is 50/100, and the channel restriction level. Is 3 (the minimum number of free channels is 0, 1), the same probability is 100/100. In this alternative example, when a determination result indicating that the restriction is applied in the restricted lottery is obtained, the restriction process related to the channel use is executed with the same contents regardless of the channel restriction level.

  Even in such a configuration, when the game is progressing and the symbol variation is executed in which the number of free channels to which no sound is assigned is less than a predetermined number, the number of free channels is reduced. Compared to the case where the symbol variation that does not become less than the predetermined number is executed, the ratio of restricting the execution of the process related to the output of at least some of the game sounds is increased. In other words, in this case, for some of the game sounds (volume adjustment completion sound), there is a limit to the execution of processing related to the output from the stage before the number of empty channels actually becomes zero. Since the rate of execution restriction increases as the number of available channels decreases, the occurrence of a situation where the number of available channels becomes zero during the execution of symbol variation is preferred. It is expected to be suppressed.

  Further, according to the above configuration, by checking whether or not a specific sound (volume adjustment completion sound) is reproduced during the symbol variation execution period, the minimum free channel during the symbol variation execution period is confirmed. It becomes possible to estimate the possibility that there is no room in the number, and it is possible to prompt the game progress (winning, button operation, etc.) corresponding to the estimation.

  In the configuration illustrated in FIG. 175 and FIG. 176, after performing determination processing for various notice effects based on the effect pattern, the minimum number of empty channels is specified from the occurrence status of the notice effects, and the specified minimum vacancy is determined. Although the channel restriction level is set based on the number of channels, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the maximum number of sounds that can be assigned to a channel at the same time during the symbol variation period can be estimated in advance for each effect pattern. Keep it. Then, when the production pattern is determined, the channel restriction ratio may be increased as the channel shortage in which the production pattern is classified in advance is more likely to occur. That is, in this case, when a specific type of performance pattern that tends to use many channels at the same time is executed, there are actually no button operations or many channels are not used without various winnings, and empty channels are not used. Even if there is a surplus in the number of channels, there will be a situation in which the execution of processing related to game sound output may be restricted during the execution of the symbol variation. It is extremely useful in that it becomes possible to avoid the number of the number of being zero, and even when such a process is executed, “the number of empty channels in the pattern fluctuation is relatively When the number is low, the rate at which execution of processing related to game sound output is restricted increases, and when the number of free channels during symbol fluctuation is relatively large, it is related to game sound output. The rate at which the execution of processing is restricted is low ", and it is expected that the game entertainment will be suitably maintained because it is a phenomenon that is not particularly uncomfortable from the player side. become. Also, in this case, by checking whether or not the sound is restricted, it is possible to estimate the possibility that the effect pattern is likely to cause a shortage of channels.

  In addition, in the configuration illustrated in FIG. 175 and FIG. 176 and other examples thereof, the channel restriction is executed with the symbol variation as one unit. The restriction level may be varied, and the channel restriction corresponding to the channel restriction level may be executed each time. Or, when a predetermined restriction condition is satisfied, such as when a specific production mode is executed over a plurality of symbol variations, the channel restriction level remains unchanged at a specific value over a plurality of symbol variations, and the channel restriction level is set. Accordingly, channel restriction may be executed.

  By the way, in the configuration illustrated in FIG. 175 and FIG. 176 and other examples thereof, the sound that is subject to channel use restriction is not the most important “production sound related to jackpot determination” in the pachinko machine 1, but other than that Only “sounds associated with winning prizes”, “production sounds related to normal judgment”, and “sounds related to volume adjustment” were adopted. However, since these sounds include those that occur less frequently than the production sounds, in order to realize a restriction process that can secure an empty channel more effectively, It is desirable to adopt “effect sound” as a restriction target. However, on the other hand, if the above-described restriction processing is performed on the “effect sound related to the big hit determination”, there is a concern that the effect sound may not be reproduced, resulting in an effect lacking in excitement. In some cases, if the jackpot symbol is stopped, there is a risk that the game entertainment will be reduced.

  In this regard, in the configuration illustrated in FIG. 175 and FIG. 176 and other examples thereof, among the “effect sounds related to the jackpot determination”, only the “effect related to symbol fluctuations that are in a reserved state and will be digested in the future” If the channel usage of the sound is restricted (for example, if it is adopted as a specific game sound to be restricted in FIG. 176 or another example thereof), the effect related to the result of the symbol variation being executed Therefore, it is possible to adopt a production sound with a high frequency of occurrence as a restriction target without any restriction.

  For example, when a winning at the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 occurs during the period in which the symbol variation is being executed and the jackpot determination corresponding to this is put on hold, the hold is usually performed. A determination process is performed as to whether or not a pre-reading effect is to be performed with respect to the jackpot determination made into a state. As a result, when a special result is obtained, a pre-reading effect (effect display, effect sound) that suggests in advance the degree of expectation as to whether or not the jackpot determination that has been put on hold is to win the jackpot; Become.

  However, when the number of channels used increases and there is anxiety about vacancy (such as when the minimum number of vacant channels is 0 or 1, symbol variation is being executed) In the case where “the effect sound corresponding to the effect relating to the symbol variation that will be digested in the future” is targeted, winning to the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 occurs and the jackpot determination corresponding to this is suspended. Even if it is in the state, the determination process for the pre-reading effect itself is not executed with respect to the jackpot determination put on hold, and both the pre-reading effect and the effect sound corresponding to this are not performed. In this case, the pre-reading effect is not limited to the change on hold in the game board side effect display device 1600, but also in a different effect means (sub liquid crystal, lamp, etc.) When it is executed to cause a change in effect (according to a change in hold, etc.), not only a change in hold in the game board side effect display device 1600 but also a different effect means (sub liquid crystal, lamp, etc.) It is more desirable to restrict the predetermined effect change so as not to be performed in order to suppress a sense of incongruity (progressive deviation) when a specific effect sound is not assigned as a countermeasure for channel shortage.

  According to such a configuration, when the number of used channels increases and anxiety occurs in the vacancy, the channel portion assigned to the production related to the future symbol variation that is not the symbol variation being executed is being executed. It is possible to supply effect sounds related to fluctuations in performance, so that effects with high occurrence frequency are restricted without any adverse effect on the effects related to the result of the ongoing symbol fluctuation. Will be able to. In addition, the effect to be restricted is only “the effect related to the future symbol fluctuation in the unexecuted state”, and even if the symbol fluctuation is subject to restriction, it will be restricted if it is suspended in the future. Since the effect during design change (the contents of the effect according to the effect pattern) that is not made is always executed, the decrease in the game entertainment effect due to the effect being restricted is also suitably suppressed.

  In addition, in the configuration illustrated in FIG. 176 and other examples thereof, a process of restricting a specific sound from being output when a “predetermined production condition” that causes concern about the number of empty channels is established; did. However, even if the “predetermined performance conditions” are not satisfied and there is no concern about the number of empty channels, processing for limiting the specific sound from being output under a predetermined condition May be executed. For example, when a specific condition different from the “predetermined effect condition” is satisfied, an effect state (effect period) in which a specific sound cannot be output over a plurality of symbol variations is generated. According to such a configuration, a special production state (production period) in which the number of vacant channels has a margin over a plurality of symbol variations appears, and in the special production state (production period), only that much. Other performances can be performed more actively.

  In addition, when “effect sound related to jackpot determination” is set as the restriction target, if only the effect sound is restricted (no sound output) among the effects (effect display, effect sound), the effect lacks excitement. However, in the above configuration, if the number of channels used increases and anxiety about the vacancy occurs, a prize is awarded and the jackpot determination is put on hold. Sometimes the judgment process for the pre-reading effect is not executed itself, and both the effect display related to the pre-reading effect and the effect sound are not performed, so a special result (pre-fetching win) cannot be obtained in the pre-reading judgment. It is only the same production situation as when it was played (the hold display when the pre-reading production is not executed), and it is preferable to avoid a decrease in the gaming interests due to the production execution lacking excitement It becomes possible way.

  In addition, when “effect sound related to jackpot determination” is set as a restriction target, when the winning combination and the jackpot determination is put on hold, the determination process regarding the prefetch effect itself is not executed, and the effect display and effect regarding the prefetch effect are performed. Although it was made not to perform both with a sound, it is not restricted to this. For example, when “effect sound related to jackpot determination” is to be restricted, determination processing for prefetch effects is performed when winning, but even if a special result is obtained, until a specific timing during symbol variation arrives Does not execute both the effect display and the effect sound related to the pre-reading effect, but restricts them, and when a specific timing arrives during the pattern change, only the effect display and the effect sound are limited to the effect display. This may be done by canceling. That is, in this case, an effect display related to the pre-reading effect is performed in a special mode (timing) different from the case where the “effect sound related to the big hit determination” is not the restriction target (normal time), and a special display is performed. Since the pre-reading effect will be executed after showing as if the result (pre-reading win) was not obtained, the pre-reading effect is suppressed while suppressing the decline in the game entertainment effect by not outputting the production sound according to the pre-reading effect. It becomes possible to perform suitably.

In addition, as a process related to the future production in the situation where channel use is restricted,
・ The pre-reading effect judgment process is performed when winning a prize, but even if a special result is obtained, both the effect display and the effect sound related to the pre-reading effect are not executed until the specific timing during the symbol change arrives. In order to limit these, when a specific timing arrives during a symbol change, the restriction display for the effect display of the effect display and the effect sound is only released and this is performed. age,
-When the winning restriction is not executed, the game is progressed when the second restriction process is used, which does not execute the judgment process for the prefetch effect itself and does not perform both the effect display and the effect sound regarding the prefetch effect. In particular, when symbol variation is performed in which the number of empty channels with no sound assigned is less than a predetermined number, compared to when symbol variation in which the number of empty channels is not less than the predetermined number is performed. The ratio of execution of either the first under-restricted process or the second under-restricted process is increased, and within the symbol variation that was in the execution state when the first under-restricted process was performed. The expected value of the number of channels used in is “A”, and the expected value of the number of channels used in the symbol variation that was in the execution state when the second restricted process is performed is “B”. When it It is more desirable that either the first restricted process or the second restricted process is executed so that these relations become a relation of “A <B”. In other words, in this case, as the number of channels used increases and the greater anxiety arises due to vacancy, it is not the first under-restricted process that restricts only the effect sound but restricts both the effect display and the effect sound. Since the ratio of channel restriction applied by the second under-restricted process increases, it is expected that anxiety when the number of channels used increases is more appropriately suppressed.

  In addition, as described above, the sound assigned to the limited channel is the first group sound whose production volume can be adjusted by the player's operation reception, and the production volume cannot be adjusted by the player's operation reception. It is possible to distinguish at least from the second group sound (such as an error sound). In this regard, when a “predetermined performance condition” that causes concern about the number of empty channels is established, it is possible to limit only the sounds that are distinguished from the first group sound. It is desirable to suitably execute the process when it occurs.

  The limited channels are divided into a plurality of groups including at least a first channel group to which a production sound can be assigned and a second channel group to which a notification sound (error sound) different from the production sound can be assigned. If it is, “the number of vacant channels in the state where no sound is assigned in the first channel group is reduced to less than a predetermined number. Compared with the execution period of the design effect display in which the number of channels is not reduced below a predetermined number, the ratio of the effect state in which the specific sound is not newly assigned to the channel of the first channel group is high. When an error occurs, it can be executed as a process only for the first channel group. And performing the definitive processing more reliably desirable in terms of both possible to reduce the processing load.

  In addition, as described above, in the configuration illustrated in FIG. 176 and other examples thereof, the “execution period of the symbol effect display in which the number of empty channels to which no sound is assigned is reduced to less than a predetermined number is empty. Technically, there is a higher percentage of the production state in which the specific production sound is not newly assigned to the channel compared to the execution period of the design production display in which the number of channels is not reduced below a predetermined number. There are features. In this regard, when the execution period of the symbol effect display in which the number of vacant channels is reduced to less than a predetermined number is processed as “the effect state in which no specific effect sound is newly assigned to the channel”, As soon as the execution period related to the symbol effect display ends, the “effect state in which no specific effect sound is newly assigned to the channel” can be canceled (terminated). On the other hand, when the execution period of the symbol effect display in which the number of empty channels is not reduced to less than the predetermined number is processed as “the effect state in which no specific effect sound is newly assigned to the channel”, The production state (the production state in which a specific production sound is not newly assigned to a channel) is always continued over a plurality of symbol variations including the design production display even after the design production display is finished. It is desirable to make it. According to such a configuration, the execution period of the symbol effect display in which the number of empty channels is not reduced to less than a predetermined number is processed as “the effect state in which a specific effect sound is not newly assigned to a channel”. Although the ratio is low, once this is processed, the production state is not easily finished and is prolonged, and during that period, the specific production sound cannot be output. That is, in this case, when a “state of production in which no specific production sound is newly assigned to a channel” appears, special production performance (the design production display is “reduced the number of empty channels to less than a predetermined number”. It is possible to add a presentation performance about “whether or not it is to be performed”, and it is expected that the game entertainment is suitably maintained.

  Further, in an effect state in which a specific effect sound is not newly assigned to a channel, a specific image that can be displayed only in the effect state may be displayed. According to such a configuration, it is possible to recognize that the “specific effect sound is not newly assigned to the channel” by displaying the specific image.

  In addition, a specific image can appear at multiple timings in one symbol variation, and if it is displayed as an image with different contents (appearance, form, etc.) at each timing, one of the multiple timings Even if there is an image of contents (looks, forms, etc.) that the player does not grasp or there is an image that the player does not grasp (images, forms, etc.) As a result, it is possible to more reliably recognize that the “specification sound is not newly assigned to the channel”.

[Channel special opening process]
As described above, in a gaming machine in which the number of channels is limited, even if a special result is obtained by the determination by the determination means according to the winning, there is no vacant channel to which sound data is assigned In a situation where the number of empty channels is 0, a special sound corresponding to the fact that a special result has been obtained cannot be assigned to the channel, and there is a concern that the game entertainment will be lowered due to the fact that it cannot be output.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when a plurality of game sounds are assigned to different channels and are in an output state, the volume of at least some of the game sounds is reduced, A process of ending assignment of a specific game sound to a channel can be performed in a state where the volume is lowered (suppressed state). Then, after the assignment of the specific game sound to the channel is finished in this way, it is possible to execute a process of increasing the volume of another game sound that is continuously assigned to the channel (channel special release process).

  According to such a configuration, the usage state is aimed at a timing in a situation where it is difficult to recognize that a change has occurred in the channel assignment mode of the game sound (the state where the volume of the game sound is reduced (suppressed state)) The number of channels in the channel is reduced (the number of empty channels is increased). Therefore, for example, in order to output important game sounds more reliably, even if the number of channels in use is reduced prior to this, the number of channels in use is reduced. This makes it difficult to be aware of this, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in gaming interests due to the fact that specific game sounds are no longer output.

  FIG. 177 is a time chart showing an example of the assignment status of each channel when such a channel special release process is performed.

  As shown in FIG. 177, during the period in which the symbol variation corresponding to the result of the big hit determination is being executed, at timing tk11, a predetermined effect pattern whose effect has been advanced on the game board side effect display device 1600 The “normal BGM playback” sound corresponding to the playback is assigned to the playback channels 02 and 03 (in this case, stereo playback), and the sound corresponding to the performance A displayed on the game board side performance display device 1600 is displayed. The “effect A playback” sound is assigned to the playback channels 08 and 09 for playback (in this case, stereo playback).

  In this regard, as shown in FIG. 177 (a), among the sounds in the playback state (normal BGM playback, effect A playback), the sound of “effect A playback” is a stage where a predetermined effect pattern is in the middle of the effect. At timing tk13 (in the middle of the execution of symbol variation), the playback channels 08 and 09 are removed and the playback ends. In this way, even if the predetermined production pattern is in the middle of production, the content of the production of the predetermined production pattern can be obtained by ending the assignment of the production sound from the channel and quickly changing it to an empty channel. When progressing, it becomes possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation where it becomes impossible to allocate and reproduce new sounds due to insufficient channels.

  However, as described above, when the predetermined production pattern according to the result of the big hit determination is in the stage of production (in the middle of the execution of symbol variation), when the production sound is unassigned from the channel and changed to an empty channel, There will be a decrease in the number of effect sounds in the playback state, and there is a concern that the degree of expectation that a jackpot symbol will appear in the effect pattern is reduced by that amount.

  Therefore, in this example, as shown in FIG. 177 (a), first, the sound of “production A reproduction” is first removed from the reproduction channels 08 and 09 before timing tk13 at which the reproduction ends. Over the period from “timing tk12” to the arrival of “timing tk14” after the timing tk13, the sound of “playing effect B” according to the effect B displayed on the game board-side effect display device 1600 The playback channels 08 and 09 are assigned to be in a playback state (in this case, stereo playback). Then, as shown in FIG. 177 (b), during the period (timing tk12 to tk14) in which the sound of “effect B playback” is in the playback state (timing tk12 to tk14), timing tk13 at which playback of “effect A playback” ends As the sound arrives, a process (volume suppression process) for reducing the volume is performed while a plurality of effect sounds including the sound of the “effect B playback” are assigned to the channel.

  More specifically, as shown in FIG. 177 (c), the sound of “effect B playback” in this example is output as an effect sound corresponding to a step effect whose effect contents can be developed up to four times. After the production contents have been developed three times (step 1, step 2 and step 3) in sequence, the production is executed as to whether or not the production contents are further developed according to step 4. Thus, a process of reducing the volume (volume suppression process) is performed while a plurality of effect sounds including the sound of “effect B playback” corresponding to the step effect are assigned to the channel. In addition, when this volume suppression process is finished and when the high expectation aspect that further develops to the effect contents according to step 4 appears when the volume is returned to the normal volume (relatively high expectation effect), While the specific effect sound corresponding to the effect content in step 4 is output as the sound of “effect B playback”, the step does not develop into the effect content according to step 4 but the effect content according to step 3 When a low-expected production mode in which the production ends is produced (a production with a relatively low expectation), a production sound different from the specific production sound is output as the sound of “production B reproduction”.

  According to such a configuration, the effect design is made to arrive at the timing tk13 aiming at the time when the volume suppression process is performed on a plurality of effect sounds. Since the “playback” sound is removed from the playback channels 08 and 09 and the playback ends, the number of channels in use has decreased (the “playback A playback” sound is in a non-playback state). It is possible to make it difficult to notice.

  In particular, in the example shown in FIGS. 177 (a) to 177 (c), the production content with relatively high expectation (production content that develops to step 4) and the production content with relatively low expectation (step) Within the period (period in which it is unclear whether it develops) within the period in which the production content (the production whether or not to develop to Step 4) appears. A volume suppression process is executed, and the “production A playback” sound is removed from the playback channels 08 and 09 and the playback ends. According to such a configuration, not only the volume of the production sound is reduced, but also the player's interest itself is strongly attracted to the production B ("production B playback" sound). Because the production A (the sound of “production A playback”) comes to an end, the volume of the production sound that was targeted for volume suppression, including the sound of “production B playback”, was then restored. Even if the sound of “production A playback” is not reproduced, the production content with relatively high expectation (production content developed into step 4) and the production content with relatively low expectation ( It becomes possible to make it difficult to notice that the sound of “production A reproduction” is not reproduced by attracting interest to which of the production contents) that has not developed into step 4).

  In addition, in the volume suppression processing according to this illustrative example, the volume is lowered while each of the plurality of effect sounds including the sound of “effect B playback” is assigned to the channel. The volume is not reduced, and a specific effect sound (here, “normal BGM playback” sound) is continuously played at the normal volume. In other words, in this case, the volume of a plurality of effect sounds is reduced while the sound volume of some effect sounds (“normal BGM playback” sound) is being played normally without being suppressed, and thus the sound is discriminated. Since the reproduction of the “production A reproduction” sound comes to an end while the reproduction of the “production A reproduction” sound is no longer reproduced, it can be made more difficult to notice. It becomes like this.

  Still further, in this example, the reproduction of the “effect A reproduction” sound is not finished immediately after the volume suppression process is performed on the plurality of effect sounds, and a predetermined time has elapsed after the volume suppression process is started. The reproduction of the sound of “production A reproduction” is terminated after waiting for the elapsed timing tk13 to arrive. That is, immediately after the volume suppression process is started, there is a possibility that the player will be interested in the production sounds A and B in which the change of “volume reduction” has occurred, but the volume decreases to a specific value. Thus, when the state that does not change with the specific value is maintained for a predetermined time, it is assumed that such interest has already faded. By finishing the reproduction of, the sound of “production A reproduction” is not reproduced and can be made more difficult to notice.

  In particular, in this example, the volume of the effect sound to be subjected to the volume suppression process is decreased in stages, and the reproduction of the “effect A playback” sound is ended after the volume becomes 0 (silence). As a result, it is possible to make it harder to notice when the sound of “production A reproduction” is not reproduced.

  In the example shown in FIG. 177, the reproduction of the “production B reproduction” sound is started in the state where the reproduction of the “production A reproduction” sound is being reproduced, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in the state where the “effect B playback” sound is being played back, the playback of the “effect A playback” sound is started. May be terminated.

  Further, the effects A and B are not necessarily the effects accompanied by the effect display in the game board side effect display device 1600. For example, the effects A and B may be executed as sound effects only.

  In the example shown in FIG. 177, the timing tk12 at which the sound of “production B reproduction” is reproduced comes from the development of the variation pattern (production pattern) according to the jackpot determination. Not limited. For example, based on an operation on a predetermined operation means (such as the operation button 410), the reproduction of “production B reproduction” is started, and the sound of “production A reproduction” is reproduced while the sound of “production B reproduction” is reproduced. May be terminated in the manner described above.

  Further, it is not always necessary to reduce the volume of the effect sound to be subjected to the volume suppression process in a stepwise manner. Conversely, as a process for returning the volume of the effect sound, the volume may be returned in stages. Also, the volume does not necessarily have to be 0 (silence), and if the volume is suppressed to a level lower than normal, it is difficult to notice that the reproduction of the “production A reproduction” sound has ended. Is possible.

  In the example shown in FIG. 177, a specific effect sound corresponding to the effect pattern (here, “normal BGM playback” sound) is excluded from the volume suppression process, and the normal sound volume is maintained. Although the reproduction is continued, the volume of all effect sounds may be lowered when the volume suppression process is performed. Conversely, the sound of “production A reproduction” may be maintained without necessarily reducing the volume when the volume suppression process is performed. Even in such a case, the volume is reduced. While the player is interested in the “production B playback” sound, the playback of the “production A playback” sound is terminated, and then the “production B playback” sound is also included. Even if the sound of “effect A playback” is not reproduced when the volume of the plurality of effect sounds that have been targeted for volume suppression is returned, the content of the effect with a relatively high expectation (step 4) The effect “playing effect A” is played back, attracting interest as to whether the content of the effect that develops to a higher level) or the content of the production with relatively low expectations (the effect that does not develop into step 4) appears Can make it harder to notice Uninaru.

  In addition, at least during the period during which the effect pattern for reproducing the sound of “effect A playback” and “effect B playback” is performed (after the volume of “effect B playback” is reduced from the normal value). Until the value is returned to the normal value), even if a winning at the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 occurs in order to maintain the interest in the sound of “production B reproduction” more appropriately, It is desirable not to reproduce the corresponding reserved winning sound. Further, even when a special result (prefetching win) is obtained in the prefetch determination when a winning at the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 occurs, the effect sound corresponding to the prefetch effect is not reproduced. It is desirable.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 177, the sound reproduction of “production A reproduction” is ended within the period in which the production sound is reduced in volume, and when the production period ends, the sound is assigned to the channel in a state where the volume is reduced until then. In addition to this, the volume of the production sound that was being played was increased (returned to the original volume value), but in addition to this, a special production sound that was not assigned to the channel until the end of the period was added to the channel. You may make it newly allocate and reproduce | regenerate (reproduction | regeneration with the normal volume). According to such a configuration, when the volume is returned, it becomes more interesting whether or not the special effect sound is played back, and it is further noticed by the fact that the “play effect A playback” sound is not played back. Can be difficult. Moreover, if the number of channels used after the volume recovery is reduced than before the volume reduction, there is a concern that the expectation that the jackpot symbol will appear due to the symbol variation is reduced. Is assigned to a channel and played back (played at normal volume), so that it is the same before or after the volume is restored, or more (2 or more performance sounds for the channel). It is also possible that the player remembers the feeling that the degree of expectation has been reduced, because it is possible to make it possible to use the channel (when newly assigned). It will be avoided. In this case, the special effect sound may or may not be played when the volume is restored, and it is suggested that the expectation is relatively high when the special effect sound is played. It is desirable to do.

  Note that when a special effect sound that was not assigned to a channel when the volume is restored is newly assigned to a channel for playback, the channel that has become empty due to the removal of the sound assignment of “effect A playback” It is desirable to assign a special performance sound to the. According to such a configuration, a wide range of effects can be realized with a small number of channel resources.

  Further, such a channel special opening process does not necessarily have to be performed when it is determined that a specific performance pattern is to be executed. For example, the restriction target in the process described with reference to FIGS. 175 and 176 As the effect of “effect A” is adopted, the smaller the number of minimum vacant channels is, the smaller the symbol variation (when the minimum number of vacant channels due to symbol variation is less than a predetermined number, compared to when the number is not less than the predetermined number). The rate at which processing is performed may be increased. According to such a configuration, in the situation where there is a margin in the number of empty channels so as not to make the user feel uneasy about the lack of channels, the “production A” can be continuously output without being terminated halfway. become.

  In the above-described example, the “volume suppression effect” in which at least some of the game sounds are output in a suppression mode or in a silent state is executed by a specific type of effect pattern based on the result of the jackpot determination (selected) ) And the content of the effect is executed over a part of the period in the effect pattern when the specific timing comes. In this regard, the number of effect patterns prepared (stored) as “specific type effect patterns” that can generate such a volume suppression effect is prepared as “other effect patterns” that do not generate a volume suppression effect ( It is desirable to set the number so as to be smaller than the number of effect patterns that are stored in order to improve the game entertainment when a sound volume suppression effect occurs.

  Further, when preparing a plurality of effect patterns as “effect patterns” that can generate a volume suppression effect, the effect patterns are longer than the effect pattern that causes the volume suppression effect to be executed over the first set time and the first set time. It is desirable that an effect pattern for executing a volume suppression effect be included over the second set time, and that the expectation level that a jackpot symbol appears in these effect patterns is different. According to such a configuration, when at least some of the game sounds are output in a suppressed manner or in a silent state, the jackpot expectation is suggested depending on how long the state continues. Will be able to.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the setting value (volume setting value) by the player is changed with respect to the volume by operating the volume adjustment buttons (the effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332). Processing can be executed (peripheral control MPU 1511a). Then, when the sound volume setting value is changed in a state where the symbol variation is not executed (such as a demo state), the peripheral control MPU 1511a adjusts the sound volume applied to the effect sound based on the changed sound volume setting value. (Processing for reflecting the volume setting value as the volume) is executed. At this time, a volume adjustment confirmation sound can be output at the adjusted volume.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, it is possible to execute a process of changing the setting value (volume setting value) by the player with respect to the volume even when the symbol variation is being executed. However, it is desirable that the volume adjustment confirmation sound is not always output even when the volume setting value is changed in a state where the symbol variation is being executed. In other words, if the pachinko machine 1 is capable of selecting an “effect pattern that can generate a volume suppression effect” and the volume adjustment confirmation sound is not always output during a pattern change regardless of the effect pattern, the volume adjustment confirmation is performed. Since the player who has seen the state in which no sound is output becomes aware of the possibility that the “volume suppression effect” is being executed, it is expected that the game entertainment will be suitably maintained. In this case, the volume adjustment confirmation sound is not output, but the effect display device 1600 displays that the volume setting value has been changed, so that the volume adjustment confirmation sound is not output. It is desirable for the user to recognize (aware of the possibility that “volume suppression effect” is being executed). “No volume adjustment confirmation sound is output” means that the volume adjustment confirmation sound itself is assigned to the channel, but in addition to outputting it at the volume 0, the volume adjustment confirmation sound itself may not be assigned to the channel. .

  The expectation level (including 100%) that the jackpot symbol appears is suggested during the period when the “volume suppression effect” is set so that at least some of the game sounds are output in a suppression mode or in a silent state. It is desirable to perform an expected display (an expected effect that causes any one of a plurality of effect modes with different degrees of expectation to appear). According to such a configuration, since the player's interest is transferred to the expected display (expected effect), the sound of “effect A playback” is heard during the period when the “volume suppression effect” is being executed. It becomes possible to make it harder to notice that it is terminated.

  When the “volume suppression effect” is executed and at least a part of the game sound is output in a suppression mode or silence, the sound is returned to a state where the “effect B playback” sound is output in a non-inhibition mode. New effect sound data that is different from any of the effect sounds that are already in the output state (“normal BGM” or “effect A playback”) at a predetermined timing before the timing arrives is assigned to the channel, and the new effect sound You may make it output the sound according to data in the non-suppression mode. That is, in this case, the sound corresponding to the new effect sound data is output in a non-suppressed manner while the “effect B playback” is output in a suppressed manner or silence. Since the sound of “Production B playback” is returned to the state of being output in the non-suppressed mode while being output in the non-suppressed mode, the sound of “Production A playback” has been terminated. Can be made more difficult to notice.

  In the period during which the “volume suppression effect” is executed, it is desirable that the display image on the effect display device 1600 is not displayed or is displayed in a suppression mode. However, in this case, it is desirable that display images displayed on the effect display device 1600 include those not targeted for the processing.

  The period during which the “volume suppression effect” is executed can appear a plurality of times within one effect pattern, and in those periods, “the time during which at least a part of the game sound is output in the suppression mode or silence” is long. It is desirable to make them different. According to such a configuration, it becomes possible to make a specific effect sound in a non-output state in a state that is difficult to be noticed by the player in any effect scene, and it is possible to improve the game interest. .

[Suppressed operation sound output processing]
As described above, in a gaming machine in which the number of channels is limited, even if a special result is obtained by the determination by the determination means according to the winning, there is no vacant channel to which sound data is assigned In a situation where the number of empty channels is 0, a special sound corresponding to the fact that a special result has been obtained cannot be assigned to the channel, and there is a concern that the game entertainment will be lowered due to the fact that it cannot be output.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when it is determined that a specific effect pattern is to be executed as the symbol variation according to the result of the jackpot determination, the symbol variation is started and ended. During the period, the game board side effect display device 1600 performs a process of advancing the display effect according to the specific effect pattern, and assigns and reproduces the sound of “BGM playback” according to the specific effect pattern to the predetermined channel. To perform the process. Then, when the display effect on the game board side effect display device 1600 progresses to a predetermined timing within the symbol variation period, a state where the sound of “BGM playback” is assigned to a predetermined channel and is output in a suppression mode or silence ( When the volume of “BGM playback” is reduced to a specific value and output), and an operation on a predetermined operation means (such as the operation button 410) is detected in this state, A special effect sound that suggests the degree of expectation that a special display mode) appears in the effect pattern is output in a non-suppressed mode (suppressed operation sound output process). The degree of expectation suggested by the special performance may be 100%.

  That is, in this case, when outputting the special effect sound according to the operation detection, although the sound of “BGM playback” is still assigned to the predetermined channel, it is set to a state of being output in a suppression mode or silence. As a result, it is possible to provide an atmosphere in which channel usage is likely to be afforded. Therefore, providing the player with an opportunity to output the special performance sound in a state where anxiety such as “Maybe there is no space in the channel and the special performance sound may not be output” has been removed. As a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the entertainment interest.

  By the way, when a sound corresponding to a specific production pattern ("BGM playback" sound) is assigned to a channel and is output in a suppressed manner or silence, the sound is generally assigned to the channel. It is assumed that the process of suppressing the volume of the sound (the sound of “BGM playback”) (the process of reducing the volume to a specific value) is performed. In fact, if such a volume suppression process is performed prior to giving an operation opportunity to a player (generating an effective period of production reception), a sound (“ It is possible to give the player an opportunity to operate (generate a valid period for the production reception) after setting the “BGM playback” sound) to a state of being output in a suppressed manner or in silence.

  However, as is well known, when an operation opportunity is given to a player, the effective period of the effect reception is generated for a predetermined time, but the operation (effect reception) is performed at any timing within this effective period. This is indeterminate (depending on the player) and cannot be predicted in advance. Therefore, even if an operation (production reception) is performed within the valid period, the volume suppression process can be terminated and the volume can be returned to the initial value. It is impossible to store the “BGM playback” sound in advance so as to start playback of the sound in accordance with this indefinite timing.

  In addition to performing the process of returning the volume when an operation is performed by the player, the sound data of “BGM playback” is switched to the sound data of “BGM playback dedicated for special effect sound playback”. It is also conceivable to perform the process of reproducing. However, the “BGM playback” sound is played in accordance with the contents of various effects and the timing of the symbol stop until the specific effect pattern is stopped after the symbol is stopped. When an operation (production reception) is performed at an indefinite time (depending on the player), when the operation (production reception) is triggered, the sound of “BGM playback” is newly reproduced. There is a concern that so-called sound misalignment will occur between the various effects and symbol stop timings thereafter, and the game entertainment will be reduced.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when a specific effect pattern is executed, first, a plurality of sound data (BGM playback) sound corresponding to the specific effect pattern ( For example, normal fluctuation sound data, sound data for the first half of the super reach production, sound data for the second half of the super reach production, etc.) are determined according to the time series defined by the corresponding sound generation schedule data. Performs the process of sequentially assigning to channels. Of the plurality of sound data stored as the “BGM playback” sound corresponding to the specific effect pattern, specific sound data (one sound material) is defined by the sound generation schedule data. If assigned to a predetermined channel in a time-series manner, playback is started by being assigned to the predetermined channel from the timing before the effective period of effect reception within the specific effect pattern, and the effective period ends. Thus, reproduction is performed while maintaining the assignment state for a predetermined channel over a long period until the timing after the above.

  In this regard, in a certain section (special period) when the specific sound data (one sound material) is viewed in time series, a suppression mode or a process related to sound output in silence compared to other sections When the specific sound data is assigned to a predetermined channel according to the time series defined by the sound generation schedule data, a partial section (special (Time period) within a time series in which the valid period of the production reception occurs. In addition to this, even if an operation is performed by the player at any timing within the effective period of the above-mentioned production reception occurring within the special period (partial section), the special period from the special period (partial section) The sound of “BGM playback” is displayed as a special effect sound corresponding to the effect reception over two sections in the specific sound data with the period after the (partial section) ends (other sections). Reproduction is performed in a non-suppressed manner on a channel different from the assigned predetermined channel.

  According to such a configuration, a plurality of sound data (for example, sound data at the time of normal fluctuation, sound data of the first half of the super reach effect, The sound data of the second half of the reach production is assigned to the predetermined channels in sequence according to the time series defined by the corresponding sound generation schedule data, and the volume is not adjusted from the initial value. In both cases, it is possible to create a “suppressed state or state (special period) output in silence”. In addition, when an operation by a player is accepted in the “suppressed state or state that is output silently (special period)” created in this way, it is specially performed in a non-suppressed manner by a highly immediate process triggered by this. While the production sound is started to be reproduced, the sound of “BGM reproduction” in the reproduction state on the predetermined channel is “in a state of being output in suppression mode or silence (special period) regardless of the production reception” Is maintained for a predetermined time. After that, a part of specific sound data (one sound material) (suppression mode or silent sound output) is completed in such a way that the special effect sound is reproduced while being reproduced. Since the data content of other sections (non-suppressed sound output) is played back, it becomes possible to return the sound of “BGM playback” to the output in a non-suppressed mode secretly. It is possible to provide a production sound without a sense of incongruity. That is, in this case, when the player receives an operation in the suppression mode or in the state where the sound of “BGM playback” is output in silence, the special performance sound is not suppressed by a process with high immediacy triggered by this. However, it is possible to suitably avoid the occurrence of a sound shift between the various effects and the timing of the symbol stop after that.

  FIG. 178 is a time chart showing an example of the assignment status of each channel when such a suppressed operation sound output process is performed. Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 178, a specific example when executing such a suppressed operation sound output process will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 178 (a), during the period in which the symbol variation corresponding to the result of the jackpot determination is being executed, the identification that the presentation is progressing on the game board side presentation display device 1600 at timing ts11 The sound of “BGM playback” corresponding to the production pattern is assigned to the playback channels 02 and 03 and is already played back (in this case, stereo playback). The sound of “BGM playback” is, for example, one sound data (one piece of data over the entire period of symbol variation from the start to the end of symbol variation when it is determined that a specific performance pattern is executed) (Sound material) may be reproduced based on sound generation schedule data, or the entire period of symbol variation is divided into a plurality of periods, and different sound data prepared for each period May be sequentially reproduced based on sound generation schedule data corresponding to the above. In the example shown in FIG. 178, one sound data (one sound material) as a sound of “BGM reproduction” over the entire period (part of the symbol variation period) in the figure including the timing ts11. Are assigned to the channels 02 and 03 and are in a playback state.

  In this regard, as shown in FIGS. 178 (a) and 178 (b), one sound data ("BGM playback" sound) assigned to the channels 02 and 03 and in a playback state is special. Silent data content is set at timing ts12 before the timing ts13 when the operation effective period (effective period of the effect reception) for which an operation opportunity that causes the production of sound is given occurs. The playback state is set for a part of the section. As a result, without adjusting the volume from the initial value for the “BGM playback” sound, the sound can be output silently while being assigned to a predetermined channel.

  According to such a configuration, at timing ts13, the sound of “BGM playback” is in a playback state within a partial section set as silent data content, and there seems to be room in channel usage. While the atmosphere is provided, it is possible to generate an operation effective period (effective period of production reception) in which an operation opportunity is given to the player. This provides an opportunity for the player to output the special performance sound in a state where anxiety such as “Maybe there is no available channel and the special performance sound may not be output” is removed. This makes it possible to suppress the decline in the gaming interests.

  Moreover, the operation valid period according to this example is a timing ts16 at which a partial section in which silent data content is set as the sound of “BGM playback” is ended even when there is no operation by the player. At time ts15 before arriving, the period is ended so that the player's operation is not accepted for production. Therefore, even if an operation by the player is accepted at any timing during the operation valid period, the sound of “BGM playback” is in a playback state within a partial section set as silent data content. A special performance sound corresponding to an operation by the player can be generated while an atmosphere is provided in which the use situation of the channel is likely to be sufficient. It should be noted that the operation effective period is ended not only when the player does not perform an operation but at the timing ts15, but also when the player receives an operation. When the timing ts15 arrives without any operation by the player, a special effect sound may be generated as in the case of the operation by the player at that timing.

  In this example, it is assumed that an operation by the player is accepted at timing ts14. Based on the acceptance of the effect, the channel 02 to which the sound “BGM playback” is assigned. , 03 is assigned to a special effect sound for reproduction on channels 08, 09 different from.

  In this regard, in this example, the maximum time from the start of the operation effective period to the end thereof (time from timing ts13 to timing ts15) is “SY”, and the operation effective period ends at this maximum time. When the time from the end of a section in which silent data content is set as the sound of “BGM playback” to the end (time from timing ts15 to timing ts16) is “BF” Even if an operation by the player is accepted at any timing of the above, the special effect sound is assigned to the channels 08 and 09 for a certain period of time “SY + α (> BF)” and reproduced.

  According to such a configuration, even when an operation by the player is accepted at any timing within the operation effective period, the timing ts16 always comes when the special effect sound is in the reproduction state. It is possible to output the “BGM playback” sound as a non-suppressed form in the form of being mixed into the special effect sound. That is, in this case, although the time until the sound of “BGM playback” is output as a non-suppressed mode after the reproduction of the special effect sound is started according to the timing when the operation by the player is accepted, the time varies. The output period of the special effect sound is a buffer period for returning the sound of “BGM playback” in a non-suppressing manner (the sound of “BGM playback” is restored in a non-suppressing manner by intermingling with the special effect sound) The period of time when it is difficult for the player to notice that the “BGM playback” sound is not restored as a non-suppressed mode when an operation by the player is accepted, and the user feels uncomfortable by returning after a predetermined time. It becomes difficult to remember.

  Then, after the sound of “BGM playback” is restored as the data content (non-suppression mode) of the production sound for BGM playback, the sound of “BGM playback” is played back in the non-suppression mode when the timing ts17 arrives. While in the state, the reproduction of the special performance sound comes to an end.

  In the example described above, the “timing at which the reproduction of the special effect sound is started” and the “timing at which the reproduction of the special effect sound is ended” are performed by the player as shown in FIG. 178 (b). Although it will be variable within the range indicated by the dotted arrows according to the timing of acceptance, the timing ts16 arrives when the special performance sound is in the playback state, regardless of which timing it falls into. It is clear that the normal section in which the data content (non-suppression mode) of the BGM playback effect sound is set as the “BGM playback” sound is started.

  In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 178, the player feels more uncomfortable by “returning the sound of“ BGM playback ”as a non-suppressed state when an operation by the player is accepted, but returning it after a predetermined time”. In order to make it difficult, it is desirable to set the volume initial value of the special effect sound to be larger than the initial value of BGM playback in the normal section. According to such a configuration, it is possible to secretly shift the BGM playback sound to the playback state in the normal section while paying attention to the special effect sound having a large volume initial value.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 178, when the player's operation is accepted, the special effect sound is generated based on the effect reception. However, the specific effect corresponding to the variation pattern and the result of the jackpot determination is used. The special effect sound may be generated based on the fact that the effect is accepted only when the condition is satisfied. Even if a specific performance condition is not satisfied, an operation valid period is generated at timing ts14, and when an operation by a player is accepted within the operation valid period, the production is accepted. Based on this, a predetermined effect sound (such as a failure effect sound) is reproduced. Even if the operation is performed at any timing within the operation effective period, the BGM playback sound is secretly set to the playback state in the normal section while the predetermined effect sound (failed effect sound or the like) is in the playback state. It is desirable to make the transition to the same as in the example shown in FIG.

  However, instead of this, when a predetermined effect sound (failed effect sound or the like) is reproduced, the reproduction time is made shorter than that when the special effect sound is put into the reproduction state, and the predetermined effect sound (failure effect sound) is reproduced. The sound of the BGM playback may be returned to the playback state in the normal section in a state where the playback of the sound or the like is finished. In this case, even if the operation is performed at any timing within the operation effective period, the timing for returning the BGM playback sound to the playback state in the normal section is the playback of a predetermined effect sound (such as a failure effect sound). It will be set so that it will arrive after ending. According to such a configuration, a silence period (according to the operation timing) from when a predetermined effect sound (failed effect sound or the like) ends to when the BGM playback sound returns to the normal state playback state. The period in which the length is variable) can be generated as the buffer period. In addition, if it is set so that a revival effect with a high degree of expectation (which may be 100%) can occur during the silent period, it is expected that the game entertainment will be maintained.

  Alternatively, when reproducing a predetermined effect sound (failed effect sound, etc.), the BGM playback sound is not restored to the playback state in the normal section, and the symbol variation is stopped in a losing manner. Also good. In this case, at timing ts12, the assignment of the BGM playback sound to the channels 02 and 03 may be terminated, and this may be made an empty channel.

  In addition, when generating a special effect sound, it is also possible to reduce the degree of attention to the sound of BGM playback by performing a movable effect that operates a predetermined movable body based on the reception of the effect. This is desirable for secretly shifting the playback sound to the playback state in the normal section.

  In the example shown in FIG. 178, “BGM playback” sound is output silently in some sections. However, the present invention is not limited to this. As long as it is output at. Here, examples of the suppressed mode include a mode of reducing the vibration frequency of the speaker cone per unit time in addition to a mode in which the volume is relatively lowered.

  In the example shown in FIG. 178, the “BGM playback” sound data assigned to the predetermined channel is set to the “BGM playback” sound data itself by setting a suppression mode or a time-series period of silence. Without adjusting the volume of the sound, it is possible to create a state of being output in a suppressed manner or silence (special period) simply by playing it. However, it is not always necessary to set a suppression mode or a time-series period of silence in the sound data of “BGM playback” assigned to a predetermined channel. For example, at time ts12, the sound of “BGM playback” You may make it perform the volume adjustment which reduces a sound volume to a specific value (it may be mute). That is, in this case, even if an operation by the player is accepted at timing ts14, a process of increasing the sound volume of the “BGM playback” from the specific value (a process of returning to the initial volume value) is triggered by the acceptance of the effect. Do not. If the specific performance condition is satisfied, the volume of the “BGM playback” sound is increased from the specific value while the special performance sound is being played when the predetermined timing ts16 arrives. Processing (processing to return to the initial volume value) is performed. On the other hand, if a specific performance condition is not satisfied, the volume of the sound of “BGM playback” is specified while a predetermined performance sound (failed performance sound, etc.) is being played, as in the above-described another example. A process of raising the value from the value (a process of returning to the initial volume value) may be performed, or the sound volume of the “BGM playback” sound may be set to a specific value after the reproduction of the predetermined effect sound (failed effect sound, etc.) (A process for returning to the initial volume value) may be performed, or the symbol variation may be terminated without raising a predetermined effect sound (such as a failure effect sound) from a specific value. Good.

  In the example shown in FIG. 178, a restriction process is made to make it difficult to assign a new sound to an empty channel over a period from a predetermined timing before timing ts12 to timing ts16. It is desirable to make it. Note that such a restriction process has nothing to do with the result of whether or not a jackpot symbol appears due to a symbol variation being executed, such as a block winning tone, a pending winning tone, a general electric effect sound, an adjustment tone, etc. It is desirable that a specific game sound is a restriction target, and that the specific game sound that is the restriction target is not newly assigned to a channel and is not reproduced.

  In addition, when it is determined that a specific effect pattern is to be executed as a symbol variation according to the result of the big hit determination, a specific effect sound (BGM) is transmitted on a channel different from the channels 02 and 03 before the timing ts12 arrives. So that it is not a music but an effect sound such as a sound effect or a speech, etc.) and a timing ts12 arrives while the specific effect sound is being played, and BGM playback is performed. It is desirable that the sound is output in a suppressed manner or silence. That is, in this case, since the sound of BGM reproduction is mixed into the specific effect sound, it becomes difficult to notice that the sound of BGM reproduction has been set to the suppression mode or the silence state. Note that the playback state of a specific effect sound is terminated before the timing ts14 when the special effect sound (or the predetermined effect sound) is output (timing ts14 or before the timing ts14). However, it is desirable to alleviate the anxiety that the special performance sound is not output.

  Here, the specific effect sound played on a channel different from the channels 02 and 03 does not necessarily start to be played at a timing before the timing ts12 arrives, and after the timing ts12. The reproduction may be started before the timing ts13. Even in such a configuration, when the sound of BGM playback is in a suppression mode or a silence state, if a specific performance sound is output in a non-inhibition mode (normal mode), “ Since the sound of BGM playback that is set to “suppression mode or silent state” can appear to have been returned to the playback mode in the normal mode, the sound of BGM playback is suppressed or silent It is possible to make it difficult to notice that

  Further, “for a specific effect sound, the reproduction state is ended before timing ts14 (or before timing ts14) when the special effect sound (or predetermined effect sound) is output”. "The output of a specific effect sound is ended based on the fact that the player's operation is received within the operation effective period, or is automatically ended at a specific timing within the timing ts13 to t15 (operation effective period)." It means that. That is, if the player does not receive an effect before the specific timing within the timing ts13 to t15 (operation valid period) arrives, the specific effect sound is automatically ended.

  In addition, when it is determined that a specific effect pattern is to be executed as a symbol variation according to the result of the big hit determination, the sound of BGM playback is output from timing ts14 at which a special effect sound (or a predetermined effect sound) is output. It is desirable that the production sound is output on a plurality of channels until the timing ts16 when the suppression mode or the silenced state ends. That is, in this case, since a plurality of effect sounds including the special effect sound are output, it becomes possible to easily mix the sound of BGM playback into these effect sounds, and the sound of BGM playback is usually changed. It becomes possible to secretly shift to the reproduction state in the mode.

  Further, such an under-suppressed operation sound output process may not necessarily be performed when it is determined that a specific effect pattern is to be executed. For example, in the process described with reference to FIGS. 175 and 176 “BGM playback sound” is used as the restriction target, and the smaller the number of symbols, the smaller the number of minimum vacant channels (when the minimum number of vacant channels due to symbol variation is less than the predetermined number, compared to when the number is less than the predetermined number) You may make it make the ratio by which the said operation sound output process under suppression is performed high. According to such a configuration, the BGM playback sound is output without being suppressed or silenced in a situation where there is a surplus in the number of empty channels so as not to feel uneasy that the special performance sound is not output due to a lack of channels. Will be able to.

  For the operation effective period (timing ts13 to ts15) shown in FIG. 178, an effect reception is always generated (automatic reception) within the effective period even if there is no operation, and a post-operation effect (special effect sound reproduction) is executed. You may do it.

  In addition, when the operation valid period (timing ts13 to ts15) shown in FIG. 178 occurs, while the sound of “BGM playback” is output in the suppression mode or in silence, the reception of the production is permitted. It may be possible to output “acceptance acceptable sound” that suggests that (or that the reception of the effect is permitted) in an unsuppressed manner. The “acceptable sound” is configured as a partial section in the “specific sound data” for outputting the “specific effect sound”, and the “specific sound data” is assigned to the channel. It may be output. That is, in this case, “specific sound data” is assigned to the channel before the operation effective period (timing ts13 to ts15) occurs, and a specific performance sound corresponding to the channel is output in a non-suppressing manner. At the same time, when the timing ts13 arrives, the “acceptable sound” is output as a sound corresponding to the “specific sound data” assigned to the channel. Alternatively, the “acceptable sound” is output from before the timing ts13 to after that so as to straddle the timing ts13. Note that the specific effect sound can be output, for example, as a precursor effect sound corresponding to a precursor effect (an effect suggesting that the effective period will occur soon) before the operation effective period occurs. In this case, “a reproduction section of a prelude effect sound” and “a reproduction section of an acceptable sound” are provided in one sound data allocated to a channel so as to straddle before and after the timing ts13. The “acceptable sound” may be a non-output state during the operation effective period (timing ts13 to ts15), or may be a non-output state at timing ts15. Although it is good, when it is in the output state and the production is accepted, it is desirable to use this as a trigger for the non-output state.

  That is, “acceptable sound is output” means that “sound data including acceptable sound” is newly allocated to the channel at timing ts13, and is already assigned to the channel. This is a concept including the arrival of the “acceptable sound reproduction section” in the sound data in accordance with the timing ts13. In addition to “removing the sound data including the acceptable sound”, the assignment state of the sound data to the channel is maintained in addition to releasing the assignment state of the sound data to the channel. The “acceptable sound reproduction section” in the sound data is a concept that includes a transition to a period in which the sound (including silent data) is reproduced after the end.

  In addition, in the operation effective period (timing ts13 to ts15) shown in FIG. 178, the time elapsed since the reception of the effect was made even if the effect was received at any timing within the effective period. Until the predetermined time value is reached, the special effect sound is reproduced in a non-suppressing manner on a channel different from the predetermined channel to which the sound “BGM reproduction” is assigned.

  In this regard, when an effect is accepted during the operation effective period (timing ts13 to ts15), a special effect display corresponding to the effect acceptance also appears as a display image on the effect display device 1600. However, for the special effect display corresponding to the reception of the effect, “the execution state (viewable state) is continued until the elapsed time from the reception of the effect reaches the predetermined time value”. Instead, it is desirable to perform the operation so that “even if the presentation is accepted at any timing within the effective period, it is not displayed when a predetermined timing in the presentation pattern arrives”. As the “predetermined timing in the production pattern”, for example, a predetermined timing (for example, timing ts16) within a period after the timing ts15 and before the timing ts17 can be adopted. There is a timing that arrives before the timing when the output state of the special effect sound ends even if the effect is accepted immediately after the operation valid period (timing ts13 to ts15) occurs. Is desirable. According to such a configuration, for the processing related to the special effect sound, the output state is not continued until the timing at which the “BGM playback” sound comes after the timing ts16 at which the sound is returned in an unsuppressed manner. However, since the special effect display can be finished before the special effect sound, the effect after the post-operation effect can be advanced at a good tempo. become. In order to obtain such effects, the specific timing at which the special effect display is not displayed is set as the timing ts16 at which the sound of “BGM playback” is restored or the timing before the timing ts16. It can be said that it is important.

  According to such a configuration, when an effect is received during the operation effective period (timing ts13 to ts15), an elapsed time from the timing when the effect is received is determined in advance based on the reception of the effect. "Processing for special effect sound that continues the output state until the time value is reached" and "Processing for special effect display that continues to be displayed until a predetermined timing in the effect pattern arrives" Will start each.

  For example, if an effect is received at a relatively early timing within the operation effective period (timing ts13 to ts15), the “processing related to the special effect display” of the post-operation effects is executed over a relatively long period. Among the post-operation effects, the “process related to the special effect sound” ends at the timing when a predetermined time value has elapsed since the reception of the effect. On the other hand, if an effect is received at a relatively late timing within the operation effective period (timing ts13 to ts15), the “processing related to the special effect display” of the post-operation effects is executed only for a relatively short time. However, the “processing related to the special effect sound” among the effects after the operation is executed from the time when the effect is accepted until the timing at which a predetermined time value elapses.

  That is, in this case, the operation effective period (timing ts13 to ts15) shown in FIG. 178 is executed based on the result of the big hit determination, and the content of the effect as the specific effect pattern is the specific timing. When an effect is received within the special operation reception effect (valid period), “the output state is changed until the elapsed time from the effect reception timing reaches a predetermined time value. This function functions to execute the “process related to the special effect sound to be continued” and the “process related to the special effect display in which the display is continued until a predetermined timing in the effect pattern arrives”.

  According to such an operation effective period (timing ts13 to ts15), if an operation is performed immediately after the effective period is generated, the execution state of the “process related to special effect display” among the post-operation effects can be maintained for a long time. As a price to become such, the end timing of “processing related to the special effect sound” of the post-operation effects comes at a relatively early stage. That said, if you do not operate for a while after the effective period occurs and operate at a later time, the end timing of “processing related to special effects sound” of the post-operation effects will be a relatively late stage. However, there is a demerit that the execution state of the “processing related to special effect display” among the post-operation effects cannot be maintained for a long time.

In other words, in the operation effective period (timing ts13 to ts15), there is no operation timing that is most desirable for exciting production.
・ Why do you enjoy the process by extending the execution state of “Process for special effect display” in exchange for accelerating the timing of completion of “Process for special effect sound”? Or)
・ In addition to shortening the execution state of “Processing related to special effects display”, whether to enjoy this process by extending the time until “Processing related to special effects sound” ends (at a later stage within the effective period) Operation), or
・ Simultaneously sacrifice the time that “process related to special effect display” is maintained in the execution state and the time until “process related to special effect sound” is finished, so that the overall balance is achieved. (Do you operate at an early or late timing within the validity period?)
It is possible to provide a strategic operation performance such as that for the effective period itself, thereby providing an operation reception performance that is difficult to get bored of, which allows the operation timing to be selected according to the player's mood. Will be able to.

  Here, in the example described above, “processing for special effect sound” and “processing for display of special effect” are performed as post-operation effects when an effect is accepted during the operation valid period (timing ts13 to ts15). However, instead of the “process for the special effect display”, the “process for operating the predetermined effect movable body” may be executed. May be executed. However, as for the “process for operating the predetermined effect movable body”, as in the case of the “process related to the special effect display” described above, even if the effect is accepted at any timing within the valid period It is desirable that the operation state is ended when a predetermined timing in the effect pattern arrives. Here, in the case where “the operation state is ended” is an effect of moving the predetermined effect movable body to the specific position, the predetermined effect movable body in the operation state at the specific position is returned to the original position. It means starting a process for operating to return.

  In the example described above, when an effect is accepted during the operation effective period (timing ts13 to ts15), the execution state is continued until a predetermined timing in the effect pattern arrives. , A process for operating a predetermined effect movable body) and a “process for a special effect sound” that is continued until an elapsed time from the timing at which the effect is received reaches a predetermined time value. It was. However, even when the operation valid period (timing ts13 to ts15) occurs, when the predetermined performance condition is not satisfied (for example, when the big hit determination is lost or the predetermined performance determination is lost) In other words, even if an effect is received within the operation reception effect, the “process for displaying the special effect (or the process of operating the predetermined effect movable body)” is not performed, and the predetermined effect condition Compared to the case where the condition is satisfied (FIG. 178), the “process for the special effect sound” in which the “predetermined time value” is set relatively short may be performed as a different effect sound. More desirable.

  However, even though the operation is performed during the operation valid period (timing ts13 to ts15), this may not be detected well (detection error), and the production reception may not be performed. As a result, the production reception is not performed. When the period ends, there is a game entertainment effect of the player who saw that the “process for special effect display (or the process for operating a predetermined effect movable body)” was not performed even though it was operated. There is concern about the decline. Therefore, an operation reception is automatically generated (automatic reception) during the operation effective period (timing ts13 to ts15), and the execution state is continued until a predetermined timing in the rendering pattern arrives. (Or a process for operating a predetermined effect movable body) "and a" process for a special effect sound "that is continued until an elapsed time from the reception timing of the effect reaches a predetermined time value, respectively. It is desirable to do so. Any of the examples described with reference to FIGS. 289 to 300 or an appropriate combination can be used as a method of automatically generating (automatically receiving) operation reception and an effect mode related thereto.

  As described above, during the operation effective period (timing ts13 to ts15) that occurs while the sound of “BGM playback” is suppressed, an effect is received when the acceptable sound is in an output state in a non-suppressed manner. Then, the post-operation effect is executed based on the effect reception, and the output state of the acceptable sound for reception is canceled at this point. In this regard, even when a normal effective period that occurs while the sound of “BGM playback” is not suppressed, the acceptable sound is output in an unsuppressed manner with the occurrence. However, it is desirable that the permissible reception sound be continued without canceling the output state even if the presentation is received when the reception allowable sound is in the output state. In addition, with respect to the acceptable reception sound that is output when the operation valid period (timing ts13 to ts15) is generated, the effect sound that can be continuously reproduced for a longer time than the acceptable reception sound that is output when the normal effective period occurs. It is desirable to use it as a game entertainment device even when the sound of “BGM playback” is suppressed.

  Also, in the effective period that occurs when the sound of BGM playback is in the suppression mode or in the silent state, N acceptance acceptable sounds that indicate that the effective period occurs (or that the effective period has occurred) are accepted. There are types (modes), and any of these types must be output (output in a non-suppressed mode). On the other hand, it is suggested that the effective period occurs (or that the effective period has occurred) in the effective period that is generated when the sound of BGM reproduction is output in a normal manner in a non-suppressed manner. There are only M types (modes) that are fewer than N as permissible acceptance sounds, and “output when any of those types (output in a non-suppressed mode)” and “output by any of those types” It is desirable that there is a case where the sound data including the acceptable sound is not assigned to the channel and the valid period is generated. It is desirable to suggest that “the expectation level at which the jackpot symbol appears is different” depending on the type of allowable reception sound.

  Alternatively, either an effective period that occurs when the sound of BGM playback is in a suppression mode or a silent state, or an effective period that occurs when the sound of BGM playback is in a normal output state in a non-suppressed mode There are a plurality of types (modes) as acceptable reception sounds, but the proportion of acceptable reception sounds with a high expectation level for big hits occurs when the sound of BGM playback is in a suppressed state or in a silent state. It is desirable for the effective period to be relatively high and to be relatively low for the effective period that occurs when the sound of BGM playback is output in a non-suppressed manner as usual. . In this case as well, in the effective period that occurs when the sound of BGM playback is in the suppression mode or in the silent state, an acceptable sound that indicates that the effective period occurs (or that the effective period has occurred) While it is always output (output in a non-suppressed manner), in the effective period that occurs when the sound of BGM playback is output in a normal manner in a non-suppressed manner, the effective period occurs ( Or “acceptable sound is output in a non-suppressed manner” and “when the sound data including the acceptable sound is not assigned to a channel and is not output”. It is desirable to have it.

  According to these configurations, when the sound of BGM reproduction is in a state of being output normally in a non-suppressed manner, the degree of expectation suggested by the acceptable reception sound is too detailed (M types less than N). May not be able to be recognized, or may not be expected (relatively low). However, in this case, since the sound of BGM playback is being output normally in an unsuppressed manner, there is a possibility that the acceptable sound will be missed by the sound of BGM playback. Even if it is leaked, it is possible to make the user aware of the possibility that the acceptable sound has not been output. On the other hand, when the sound of BGM playback is in a state of being output in a suppression mode or in a silent state, in a situation where it is possible to make the sound output in a non-suppression mode stand out, Since the output is always performed in a non-suppressed manner, it is possible to look forward to the degree of expectation suggested by this. When either (or both) of these modes are employed, the types of acceptable sound that can be output when the “effective period generated when the sound of BGM playback is in the suppression mode or in the silent state” are generated. , At least one of the types of acceptable reception sounds that can be output upon occurrence of the “effective period that occurs when the sound of BGM playback is normally output in a non-suppressed manner” (for example, Among them, the type with the lowest expectation degree of jackpot) may be included. However, the acceptable sound that can be output when the “valid period generated when the BGM playback sound is output in a normal manner in a non-suppressed manner” is included in the acceptable reception sound. Included are types that cannot be output as acceptable reception sounds that can be output when the “valid period that occurs when the state is in the state” (for example, types with the highest jackpot expectation among acceptable reception sounds). Is desirable. Also, the number of types of effects that can appear as post-operation effects in response to the effect reception in the “effective period that occurs when the sound of BGM playback is output in a normal manner in a non-suppressed manner” is “BGM playback It is desirable that there be more than the number of production types that can appear as post-operation production in response to the production acceptance in the “effective period that occurs when the sound is in the suppression mode or silence”. Among the types of effects that can appear as post-operation effects in response to an effect reception in the “effective period that occurs when the sound of BGM playback is in a state of being output normally in an unsuppressed manner”, “BGM playback sound is At least one of the types of effects that may appear as post-operation effects in response to the effect reception in the “effective period generated when in the suppression mode or silence” may be included.

  Also, in the normal gaming state where neither the time-shortening function nor the probability variation function operates, the effective period that occurs when the sound of BGM playback is in the suppression mode or the silence state, and the sound of BGM playback is in the non-inhibition mode When multiple types (modes) with different jackpot expectations are prepared as acceptable reception sounds in any of the effective periods that are generated when in a normal output state, output is possible in any of these effective periods Then, a special acceptance permissible sound that “the ratio of being stopped by the big hit symbol becomes 100%” may be output. Note that a plurality of types (modes) may be prepared as the special reception permission sound.

  That is, in this case, when the “acceptable period that occurs when the sound of BGM playback is in the suppression mode or in the silence state” is generated, if the special acceptance allowable sound is output (non-inhibited mode), the production is performed within the effective period. Even when the post-operation effect is performed based on the reception, it will be executed in a special mode that “the ratio of being stopped by the big hit symbol is 100%” when it appears. If the production is accepted in a state where the special acceptable sound is being output, the output of the special acceptable sound is interrupted. It is desirable to output a production sound.

  However, when the special reception allowable sound is output (non-suppressed mode) when the “effective period generated when the sound of BGM reproduction is in a state of being output normally in the non-suppressed mode” is generated, the effective period When it appears as a post-operation effect that is performed based on the reception of the effect in the case, it is executed in a special mode that “the ratio of being stopped by the jackpot symbol is 100%”, and executed in the special mode It is desirable that there are cases where it is not done. It should be noted that the special acceptance permission sound that is output when the “valid period generated when the sound of BGM playback is in a suppression mode or silence” is generated, and “the sound of BGM playback is output in a non-suppression mode as usual. The special acceptable sound that is output during the “valid period generated when the state is in the state” may be different types of acceptable sound. In addition, there are a plurality of types of allowable special reception sounds that are output when the “valid period generated when the sound of BGM playback is output in a normal state in a non-suppressed manner”, and among these types, , May be the same as the type of the special acceptable sound that is output when the “effective period generated when the sound of BGM playback is in the suppression mode or silence state” is generated, and may be different from the type . If an acceptance is made in a state where an acceptable reception sound (including a special acceptable sound) is output, the output of the acceptable sound is interrupted, and an effect sound corresponding to the post-operation effect (the post-operation effect is special) When it is performed in a manner, it is desirable to output a special performance sound “when the ratio is stopped at the jackpot symbol is 100%”.

  According to such a configuration, when the sound of BGM reproduction is in a suppression mode or in a silent state (when it is difficult to make a mistake in hearing), if a special acceptance allowable sound is output, As a post-operation effect that is performed based on the fact that the effect has been accepted in step 1, when it appears, it is always executed in a manner that “the ratio of being stopped by the big hit symbol is 100%”. On the other hand, in a state in which the BGM playback sound is output normally in a non-suppressed manner (when it is easy to make a mistake in hearing due to competition with the BGM playback sound) However, as the post-operation effect performed based on the reception of the effect within the effective period, the effect is not necessarily performed in a manner that “the ratio of being stopped by the big hit symbol is 100%” From the above, it becomes possible to give a suspicion (a suspicion of a mistake in hearing) whether the acceptable reception sound was output as a “special reception acceptable sound”, so that the tension can be suitably maintained. Become. As a result, while the sound of BGM playback is being output normally in a non-suppressed manner, the emphasis is placed on “how to miss the acceptable reception sound” and the tension until the acceptable reception sound is output. This can be suitably maintained. In order to increase such a feeling of tension, in the operation reception effect that “the special reception permission sound is output and the post-operation effect is not executed in a manner that the ratio of being stopped by the big hit symbol is 100% when it appears” Compared to the case of the operation reception effect “executed in a manner in which a special reception permission sound is output and the post-operation effect is“ performed to be 100% when it appears, the ratio is stopped by the big hit symbol ” It is desirable that the effective period is suddenly generated by performing the presentation (pre-permissible operation-related display or pre-permissible operation-related sound) in a relatively short time.

  In a state where the BGM playback sound is output in a non-suppressed manner as usual (when there is a tendency to make a mistake in hearing due to competition with the BGM playback sound), the “special reception permission sound is output and the operation The post-production is “not executed in a mode where the ratio of being stopped by the jackpot symbol when it appears is 100%”. The operation reception production (effective period) and “the special reception allowable sound is output and the post-production production is“ When it appears, the special reception allowable sound is output as a different type of allowable reception sound in the operation reception effect (valid period) that is executed in a manner that “the ratio of being stopped by the jackpot symbol is 100%”. Alternatively, it may be output as an acceptable sound of the same type. Further, in a state in which the BGM playback sound is output in a non-suppressed manner as usual (when there is a tendency to make a mistake in the allowable reception sound due to competition with the BGM playback sound), a “special reception allowable sound is output. In addition, the operation reception effect (valid period) that is “executed in a mode in which the ratio of being stopped by the jackpot symbol becomes 100% when it appears” may not necessarily be generated. In addition, in the case of an operation reception effect (valid period) when a special reception permission sound is output and a post-operation effect is not executed in a manner that “the ratio of being stopped by a big hit symbol is 100% when it appears” Regardless of which type of sound is output, the post-operation effect is not executed in the form of “the ratio of being stopped by the jackpot symbol when it appears is 100%”, and this aspect is prepared in the first place. It may not be.

  In addition, in the operation effective period (timing ts13 to ts15) that occurs while the sound of “BGM playback” is suppressed and the normal effective period, the image display imitating the operation means used as the operation target, and the effective display A gauge display indicating how much time remains is displayed, and an operation promotion effect is provided to prompt the player to perform an operation. In this regard, in the operation effective period (timing ts13 to ts15) that occurs at least while the sound of “BGM playback” is suppressed, when the production is accepted, the gauge display remains (displayed) and “ A process related to a special effect display in which the execution state is continued until a predetermined timing in the pattern arrives (or a process for operating a predetermined effect movable body), and an “elapsed time from the timing when the effect is accepted” It is desirable to start each of “a process relating to a special effect sound that is continued until the time reaches a predetermined time value”. According to such a configuration, it is possible to recognize which timing within the effective period is the timing at which the production is accepted based on the remaining gauge remaining as a display after the production is accepted. Thus, it is possible to predict whether or not the process related to the special effect display (or the process of operating the predetermined effect movable body) will end immediately. As a method of starting the post-operation effect while leaving the gauge display (bar display) in this way, any of the examples described with reference to FIGS. 292 to 296, or an appropriate combination, or still more The written contents can be used.

  In the example described above, for the number of effect patterns prepared (stored) as a “specific type effect pattern” for outputting the sound of “BGM playback” in silence or silence, the sound of “BGM playback” is suppressed Alternatively, setting the number to be less than the number of production patterns prepared (stored) as “other production patterns” that are not output without sound is desirable in order to improve the game entertainment when the production occurs. .

  In addition, when a plurality of effect patterns are prepared as “effect patterns” for outputting the sound of “BGM playback” in silence or silence, the sounds of “BGM playback” are suppressed in the effect patterns over the first set time. Alternatively, an effect pattern to be output with silence and an effect pattern to output the sound of “BGM playback” over a second set time longer than the first set time are included in the suppression pattern or silence. It is desirable to have different expectations. According to such a configuration, when the sound of “BGM playback” is output in a suppression mode or in a silent state, it is possible to indicate the expected degree of jackpot depending on how long the state continues. .

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the setting value (volume setting value) by the player is changed with respect to the volume by operating the volume adjustment buttons (the effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332). Processing can be executed (peripheral control MPU 1511a). Then, when the sound volume setting value is changed in a state where the symbol variation is not executed (such as a demo state), the peripheral control MPU 1511a adjusts the sound volume applied to the effect sound based on the changed sound volume setting value. (Processing for reflecting the volume setting value as the volume) is executed. At this time, a volume adjustment confirmation sound can be output at the adjusted volume.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, it is possible to execute a process of changing the setting value (volume setting value) by the player with respect to the volume even when the symbol variation is being executed. However, it is desirable that the volume adjustment confirmation sound is not always output even when the volume setting value is changed in a state where the symbol variation is being executed. In other words, in the pachinko machine 1 that can select “an effect pattern that outputs the sound of BGM playback in a suppressed manner or silence”, the volume adjustment confirmation sound is not always output during the pattern variation regardless of the effect pattern. In this case, since the player who has seen the state in which the volume adjustment confirmation sound is not output becomes aware of the possibility that the “volume suppression effect” is being executed, it is expected that the game entertainment will be suitably maintained. become. In this case, the volume adjustment confirmation sound is not output, but the effect display device 1600 displays that the volume setting value has been changed, so that the volume adjustment confirmation sound is not output. It is desirable for the user to recognize (aware of the possibility that “volume suppression effect” is being executed). “No volume adjustment confirmation sound is output” means that the volume adjustment confirmation sound itself is assigned to the channel, but in addition to outputting it at the volume 0, the volume adjustment confirmation sound itself may not be assigned to the channel. .

  The special effect sound that is output when the effect is accepted when the sound of BGM playback is in the suppression mode or in the silent state is over the time that is more than twice the operation effective period (timing ts13 to ts15). It is desirable that the output state be maintained. According to such a configuration, even when an operation is accepted immediately after the operation valid period (timing ts13 to ts15) is generated, the output time (special effect sound) after the timing ts15 has elapsed, It becomes possible to make it longer than the output time (special effect sound) until timing ts15.

[Channel assignment cancellation operation]
As described above, in a gaming machine in which the number of channels is limited, even if a special result is obtained by the determination by the determination means according to the winning, there is no vacant channel to which sound data is assigned In a situation where the number of empty channels is 0, a special sound corresponding to the fact that a special result has been obtained cannot be assigned to the channel, and there is a concern that the game entertainment will be lowered due to the fact that it cannot be output.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the process of changing at least one of the channels to which sound data is assigned to an empty channel to which no sound data is assigned is triggered by detection by the detection means. Executable (channel assignment cancellation operation). In other words, in this case, an empty channel will be created in response to the player's operation, so an empty channel is created by the player's operation at the timing immediately before the player's favorite performance sound or special sound is generated. By securing in advance, it becomes possible to reliably output the player's favorite performance sound and special sound through the empty channel secured in advance.

  Note that the operation (channel assignment cancellation operation) in this example is not limited to “button operation”, and examples include an act of praying while holding the hand against the pachinko machine 1 with reference to FIGS. 169 to 173. In short, it is based on a contact-type or non-contact-type predetermined sensor that can detect any state change that occurs when a specific action (channel assignment cancellation operation) that is the detection target is performed. Any process may be used as long as it detects the sound assigned to the channel and removes the sound from the channel and ends the reproduction.

  FIG. 179 is a time chart showing an example of the allocation status of each channel when processing related to such channel allocation cancellation operation is performed.

  As shown in FIG. 179, during the period in which the symbol variation according to the result of the big hit determination is being executed, at timing tw11, a predetermined effect pattern whose effect has been developed on the game board side effect display device 1600 "BGM1 playback" sound (for example, effect sound effect played during the execution of the super reach effect) is assigned to the playback channels 00 and 01 and played (in this case, stereo playback), and The sound of “BGM2 playback” corresponding to the production mode (for example, one piece of music that is continuously played back across multiple variations in a short-time gaming state, etc.) is assigned to playback channels 02 and 03 and played back (here, stereo playback) ) Is in the situation.

  In this regard, as shown in FIGS. 179 (a) and 179 (b), among the sounds in the reproduction state (BGM1 reproduction, BGM2 reproduction), the sound of “BGM2 reproduction” is a specific action (channel allocation cancellation operation). The channel assignment is forcibly terminated at the time when is detected, and during the period in which the symbol variation is being executed, when the timing tw12 is reached, an effect reception of the specific action (channel assignment cancellation operation) is received. An allowable reception period can be generated up to timing tw13. In the reception period from timing tw12 to timing tw13, a specific action (channel allocation cancellation operation) that is a detection target such as “operate a button and secure an empty channel” in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 An operation instruction image for prompting to perform is displayed.

  Here, FIG. 179 (a) shows the allocation status of each channel when a specific action (channel allocation cancellation operation) is not performed within the reception period from timing tw12 to timing tw13 and detection by a predetermined detection means is not performed. Show.

  As shown in FIG. 179 (a), when the detection by the predetermined detecting means is not performed until the timing tw13 arrives, the sound of “BGM2 playback” is removed from the playback channels 02 and 03. Even after timing tw13 arrives, this is continuously reproduced. Further, at the timing tw13 when the reception period ends, the operation instruction image (operate the button and secure an empty channel) displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 is not displayed.

  Further, at timing tw13, processing is performed in which a predetermined effect sound (here, a big hit definite sound) is assigned to an empty channel (reproduction channels 10 and 11) and reproduced. In this example, since the other channels (reproduction channels 10 and 11) are reserved in advance without changing the reproduction channels 02 and 03 to empty channels by detection by a predetermined detection means, the empty channels are reserved. A predetermined effect sound (here, a big hit definite sound) can be assigned to the channel and played back. However, if the other channels are not reserved in advance, there is no empty channel to which a predetermined effect sound (here, a big hit definite sound) can be assigned, and this cannot be reproduced and output. Concern will arise.

  FIG. 179 (b) shows the allocation status of each channel when a specific action (channel allocation cancellation operation) is performed at timing tw12a in the reception period from timing tw12 to timing tw13 and detection is performed by a predetermined detection means. Show.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 179 (b), when detection by a predetermined detecting means is performed before the timing tw13 arrives, the playback channels 02 and 03 are detected at the timing tw12a at which the detection is made. The sound “BGM2 playback” is removed. As a result, it is possible to secure in advance a free channel (playback channel 02, 03) that can function as a target for assigning a predetermined effect sound (here, a big hit definite sound) until the timing tw13 arrives. The concern that the predetermined effect sound (here, the big hit definite sound) cannot be reproduced and output is resolved. In addition, the playback state of the sound “BGM2 playback” is forcibly terminated when detection by a predetermined detection means is performed, and in this case, the music or speech as the sound of “BGM2 playback” is exhausted to the end (or Since the playback ends at a halfway point without being played back, the player feels that a free channel has been reserved in advance by a specific action (channel assignment cancellation operation) by the player. As a result, it becomes possible to easily wait for the timing at which a predetermined effect sound (here, a big hit definite sound) is reproduced.

  It should be noted that at the timing tw12a when the detection by the predetermined detecting means is performed, the reproduction state of the sound “BGM2 reproduction” is forcibly terminated, and the operation instruction image displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 (Operate the button and secure an empty channel) is not displayed, and the reception period in which the reception of the specific action (channel assignment cancellation operation) is permitted is ended.

  In the example shown in FIG. 179 (b), at the timing tw13, not the reproduction channels 02 and 03 reserved in advance as empty channels, but other channels (reproduction channels 10 and 10) that have been made empty before that. 11), a predetermined effect sound (here, a big hit definite sound) is assigned to be reproduced. However, if there is no vacancy in other channels at timing tw13, a predetermined effect sound (here, a big hit definitive sound) is assigned to the reproduction channels 02 and 03 secured in advance and reproduced.

  Alternatively, when the specific sound (channel assignment cancellation operation) is performed at timing tw12a and the effect sound is removed from the specific channel based on detection by a predetermined detection means, there is a vacancy in another channel. However, a predetermined effect sound (here, a big hit definite sound) may be assigned to the specific channel and played back. That is, in this case, when a predetermined effect sound (here, a big hit definite sound) is assigned to a specific channel and reproduced, the effect sound (here, different from the predetermined effect sound) Even if BGM2) is allocated, the allocation state is canceled at that time triggered by a specific action detection (channel allocation cancellation operation) such as a button operation, and therefore one channel (specific channel) is assigned. It is possible to play “BGM2 playback” sound and a predetermined effect sound (here, a big hit definite sound) only by using them, and to effectively use a playback channel which is a limited resource. .

  In the example shown in FIG. 179 (b), a predetermined effect sound (here, a big hit definite sound) is reproduced at the timing tw13 when the reception period ends, but a timing later than the timing tw13. Then, a predetermined effect sound (here, a big hit confirmation sound) may be reproduced.

  Further, as the predetermined effect sound, in addition to the jackpot definitive sound, an effect sound that suggests the degree of expectation that the jackpot symbol will appear, an effect sound that suggests that the player has lost the jackpot, and the like may be used. It is desirable that these effect sounds are selectively output based on the type of the effect pattern that appears due to the symbol variation. Alternatively, when it is suggested that the player has lost the jackpot, even if the timing tw13 arrives, no effect sound is output, and the empty channel may not necessarily be used.

  On the other hand, when a specific action (channel assignment cancellation operation) is detected, the sound that ends channel assignment is not a sound that is output in any of a plurality of forms, but is output in only one form. It is desirable to execute as a specific sound. That is, in this case, even if the specific sound is missed when the playback state is forcibly terminated, the content can be easily predicted and does not cause any trouble. It becomes possible to suppress a decrease in the gaming interest when the state is forcibly terminated.

  In the example shown in FIG. 179 (b), a reception period in which the reception of a specific action (channel assignment cancellation operation) is permitted is generated when a predetermined timing within the symbol variation arrives. Not limited to. For example, at least during a period in which a specific sound as a target to be excluded from channel assignment is in a playback state, a specific action (channel assignment cancellation operation) is allowed to be accepted, and the channel assignment of the specific sound is based on the acceptance. You may make it cancel. In this case, for example, a predetermined sound after the specific sound is put into the playback state, a predetermined timing at which a predetermined time elapses, and the state of the empty channel reserved in advance is maintained for a predetermined time, and then another sound is output to the empty channel. It is desirable to be allocated and played back.

  In addition, as a method for canceling channel assignment of a specific sound to be forcibly terminated, a method for making a channel to which the specific sound is assigned an empty channel at that time, a predetermined sound (for example, 0. It is also possible to cancel the channel assignment of a specific sound by allocating an extremely short assignment cancellation reception sound (such as 1 second) in the form of overwriting the same channel. Even in such a configuration, it is possible to cancel the channel assignment of the specific sound when the specific action is accepted and forcibly ended, at an earlier stage than when the specific action is not forcibly ended.

  In addition, at least during the period from when the reception of the effect of the specific action (channel assignment cancellation operation) is permitted until the reproduction of the predetermined effect sound using the empty channel created by the reception of the effect ends, a new sound In order to prevent the channel from being used unnecessarily, a specific game sound (for example, a winning sound, a hold-change sound, a volume adjustment sound, etc. that is not related to the effect of whether the big hit symbol appears within the symbol variation) It is desirable not to output the pre-reading effect sound or the like.

  In addition, the specific sound to be forcibly terminated ("BGM2 playback" sound) is played as a non-loop effect sound such as music or speech that is played back only for a predetermined time without being looped. It is desirable to make it easier to remember that a free channel has been reserved in advance by a specific action (channel assignment cancellation operation) by the player so that playback ends at a halfway point without being played to the end. .

[Abnormality notification while a performance according to a performance pattern is being performed]
As described above, in a gaming machine in which the number of channels is limited, even if a special result is obtained by the determination by the determination means according to the winning, there is no vacant channel to which sound data is assigned In a situation where the number of empty channels is 0, a special sound corresponding to the fact that a special result has been obtained cannot be assigned to the channel, and there is a concern that the game entertainment will be lowered due to the fact that it cannot be output.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, even when a specific abnormal state occurs, a specific notification sound corresponding to the specific abnormal state is not necessarily assigned to a channel and output. A specific notification sound is assigned to a channel and output on the condition that this occurs in a specific situation. That is, in this case, when a specific abnormal condition occurs, a specific notification sound corresponding to this is not necessarily output, thereby accelerating the reduction of the risk that there will be no more free channels due to that much room. Is expected.

  More specifically, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the predetermined movable decorative body is not at the specific position (origin position) even though it is at a timing at which the predetermined movable decoration body should be at the specific position (origin position). Is detected by a predetermined sensor (movable body abnormality), it is determined that an abnormality (movable body abnormality) has occurred in the predetermined movable decorative body. When such a movable body abnormality occurs, as a notification process by the pachinko machine 1, an output of a notification sound corresponding to the movable body abnormality (for example, “a movable body abnormality has occurred”) and a game The display at the time of abnormality in the display area of the board-side effect display device 1600 (for example, “abnormality occurred in the back movable effect unit 3200”) can be executed. In addition, it is desirable that the abnormal display in the display area is performed so that it is possible to specify which of the plurality of movable decorative bodies has an abnormality. It may be an aspect that identifies which abnormality has occurred in the movable decorative body belonging to which of the groups. For example, as a plurality of movable decorative bodies, a plurality of frame-side movable decorative bodies (not shown) provided on the door frame 3 side and a plurality of board-side movable decorative bodies provided on the game board 5 side (for example, the front front decoration unit 3100 and the like) , The back-side movable effect unit 3200, the back-left movable effect unit 3300, the back-right movable effect unit 3400, the back-upper movable effect unit 3500, the back-under-movable effect unit 3700, etc.) The display at the time of abnormality in the display area is performed in such a manner that it can be specified which side of the decorative body or the board-side movable decorative body has an abnormality. Note that the plurality of movable decorative bodies refers to movable decorative bodies that have different drive sources and are provided separately.

  However, such a movable body abnormality is basically caused by a failure of the movable decorative body, and it is highly possible that there is no error on the part of the player. Therefore, if the notification process may be executed prominently during the period in which various games (such as symbol variations and jackpot games) according to the jackpot determination are being executed, It will have a negative impact on the player, and it is an amusement for the player. Not only that, the number of empty channels is not enough for the notification sound corresponding to the abnormality of the movable body, so the player may feel uneasy about not being able to output a new sound. There is concern about a decline in the entertainment interest.

  However, on the other hand, a failure of the movable decorative body usually occurs when the movable decorative body operates, and there is a side where it is difficult to assume a situation where the mobile decorative body suddenly fails when not operating at all. Then, when the movable body abnormality occurs when the movable decorative body is not operating at all, it is abnormal when the movable decorative body is removed from a specific position (origin position) due to a fraudulent action such as a sticking action or a wire approach. If there is a possibility that it is in a detected situation and the notification sound corresponding to the abnormality of the movable body is not output in spite of being in such a situation, fraudulent acts may be promoted. If you are a big player, you may be concerned about the decline in gaming interest.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, such a movable body abnormality occurs during a period in which various games (symbol fluctuation, jackpot game, etc.) according to the jackpot determination are being executed and detected. Even in such a case, it is possible to execute a notification process (output of a notification sound, display at the time of abnormality in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, lighting at the time of abnormality by various lamps, etc.) by the pachinko machine 1. However, during a period in which various games (symbol variation, jackpot game, etc.) according to the jackpot determination are being executed, a process (variation pattern (effect pattern)) for operating the movable decorative body by at least the effect control by the peripheral control board 1510 When a movable body abnormality is detected while a movable decorative body is operated based on a performance pattern during a big hit game or the like, a notification process (output of notification sound) by the pachinko machine 1 is detected. The display at the time of abnormality in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, lighting at the time of abnormality by various lamps, etc.) are not performed. Note that the external output of the information indicating that an abnormality has occurred in the movable decorative body (hall side notification) is not performed in an obvious manner and does not adversely affect the performance, and may be performed regardless of the situation.

  According to such a configuration, even in a period in which various games (symbol variation, jackpot game, etc.) according to the jackpot determination are being executed, a situation in which a failure in the movable decorative body is unlikely to occur (by the peripheral control board 1510). Abnormality of moving object in process of moving movable ornament body by effect control (moving body driving process of moving movable ornament body based on variation pattern (effect pattern) or effect pattern during big hit game)) In the event that a failure occurs, the notification process by the pachinko machine 1 such as an abnormality notification sound can be performed, but at least in a situation where the failure of the movable decorative body is likely to occur (during the moving operation of the movable body), the movable body abnormality is In the case of occurrence, the notification process by the pachinko machine 1 such as an abnormal notification sound is not performed, so that the person who performs the illegal action is restrained from performing the illegal action. While manner also, so for a legitimate player is expected to avoid that adverse effects are exerted on the effect of running.

  For example, even if a movable body abnormality is detected in the process of operating the movable decorative body by the effect control by the peripheral control board 1510, the display control in the game board side effect display device 1600, the control control of the effect sound for the channel, and the occurrence of the abnormality The light emission control of the light emitting unit including the lamp mounted on the movable decorative body is performed as it is in the same manner as when the movable body abnormality is not detected. It is suppressed from being exerted. However, even if the stage timing for operating the movable decorative body again after the movable body abnormality is detected, the movable decorative body is operated as long as the movable decorative body has not been recovered from the abnormal state. Production is not executed.

  That is, in the peripheral control board 1510 according to this embodiment, when a movable body abnormality is detected, it is determined whether or not a notification process by the pachinko machine 1 such as an abnormality notification sound corresponding to the movable body abnormality is performed. Regardless, it is possible to execute a restoration process for performing a predetermined restoration operation (an action to move the movable decorative body to a specific position (origin position)) to restore the movable decorative body from an abnormal state. This restoration process may be executed with different contents depending on the type of the movable decorative body in which an abnormality has occurred. According to such a configuration, even if the specific movable decoration body is in an abnormal state during the execution period of the symbol variation in which the specific movable decoration that operates the specific movable decoration body is performed, the specific movable decoration is started. If the specific movable decorative body is recovered from the abnormal state at an earlier stage, it is possible to execute a specific movable effect that operates the specific movable decorative body.

  It should be noted that the movable decorative object is identified within a predetermined time even though the restoration process for performing the predetermined restoration operation (the movement to move to the specific position (origin position)) is performed on the movable decorative object. If it does not return to the position (origin position), it is determined that the recovery has failed, and the game and performance are developed while maintaining the abnormal state.

  FIG. 180 shows the allocation status of each channel when a movable body abnormality is detected in a process of operating a movable decorative body according to a variation pattern (effect pattern) according to jackpot determination during a period in which symbol variation is performed. It is a time chart which shows an example about the situation by the side of a movable decoration body.

  As shown in FIG. 180 (a), the game board side effect display device 1600 uses the game board side effect display device 1600 during the period in which the symbol variation (specific effect pattern) corresponding to the result of the big hit determination is being executed. The sound of “BGM playback” corresponding to the specific performance pattern in which the performance has been advanced is assigned to the playback channels 02 and 03 and has already been played back (in this case, stereo playback).

  In this symbol variation (specific effect pattern), at timing ti12, an operation effective period (effective period of effect reception) in which an operation opportunity is given to the player may occur over a period up to timing ti14. And if operation (for example, operation button 410) by a player is detected within this period (period from timing ti12 to timing ti14), the operation effective period (effective period of presentation reception) will be ended by using this as an opportunity. Production control for operating a specific movable decorative body is executed. If an operation (for example, the operation button 410) by the player is not detected within the operation effective period (effective period for receiving the effect), the effect control for operating the specific movable decorative body is executed after the timing ti14. Alternatively, the presentation control itself for operating a specific movable decorative body may not be executed.

  In this regard, in the example shown in FIG. 180, it is assumed that an operation by the player is accepted at timing ti13. Therefore, at timing ti13, based on the fact that the player's operation has been accepted, the movable body driving process is executed to perform a movable effect that causes the specific movable decorative body to perform a performance operation (FIG. 180 (b)). (See FIG. 180 (a)). An effect sound corresponding to the movable effect is assigned to the channels 08 and 09 for reproduction.

  Here, as the movable body driving process, for example, when operating a specific movable decorative body, first, it is determined whether or not the abnormality history is stored. As a result, when the abnormality history is stored, since the restoration process has failed and recovery cannot be expected, the movable body driving process is terminated without performing any driving. On the other hand, when no abnormality history is stored, information from a predetermined sensor is acquired, and it is determined based on the information whether a specific movable decorative body is at a specific position (original position). As a result, if the specific movable decorative body is at the specific position (original position), the specific movable decorative body is operated in a manner defined by the effect pattern. In such an operation, the specific movable decorative body is finally returned to a specific position (original position), and when driving for the specific movable decorative body is completed, information from a predetermined sensor is acquired, If it is determined based on this information that the vehicle is returned to the specific position (original position), the movable body driving process is terminated. However, when it is determined that the specific movable decorative body is not in the specific position (original position) in the movable body driving process, a restoration process for performing a predetermined restoration operation on the specific movable decorative body is executed. Then, the movable body driving process is terminated. At this time, if the restoration process fails, the abnormality history is stored in a predetermined storage area.

  With such a movable body driving process, the specific movable decorative body performs the rendering operation from the timing ti13. In this example, the specific movable decorative body is applied to the specific movable decorative body at the timing ti15 within the period during which the rendering operation is performed. It is assumed that an abnormality has occurred and this cannot work. In FIG. 180 (b), a dotted range indicates a period in which a specific movable decorative body is in an abnormal state. Therefore, at the timing ti17 after the driving for the specific movable decorative body (drive for the rendering operation) is finished, it is determined that the specific movable decorative body is not returned to the specific position (original position) (movable body). An abnormality is determined), and a restoration process for performing a predetermined restoration operation on a specific movable decorative body is executed based on the determination.

  However, as described above, a situation in which an abnormality (movable body abnormality) occurs in the specific movable decorative body while the specific movable decorative body is operating based on the effect pattern according to the result of the big hit determination is the movable Since it can be said that there is a high possibility that it has occurred due to a failure of the decorative body, in this illustrative example, the abnormality notification sound corresponding to the abnormality of the movable body is not assigned to the channel and reproduced. That is, in this case, regarding the display control in the game board side effect display device 1600, the assignment control of the effect sound to the channel, and the light emission control of the light emitting unit including the lamp mounted on the movable decorative body in which the abnormality has occurred, the movable body abnormality has occurred. Since it is executed as it is in the same manner as when it was not detected, it is possible to suppress adverse effects on the performance being executed. In other words, when a situation in which the movable body cannot be returned to the normal state (moved to the original position) when the movable process based on the effect pattern during the symbol variation is being executed, the fact that the situation has occurred appears. The execution trigger of the “restoration process for a movable body that is not restored to its normal state (a movable body that is not in the original position)” is established, but when the restoration process is performed (or the An abnormality notification sound corresponding to an abnormality of the movable body is not assigned to the channel and played back when the movable body fails to return to normal by the restoration process.

  At timing ti18, the restoration process for performing a predetermined restoration operation on the specific movable decorative body is completed. At this time, it is detected that the movable decorative body has returned to the specific position (origin position). In the case (when it is determined that the movable body abnormality has been resolved), the storage of the abnormality history is erased, and thereafter, the normal movable effect can be executed. On the other hand, as shown in the example shown in FIG. 180 (b), it is not detected that the movable decorative body has returned to the specific position (origin position) (determination that the movable body abnormality has been eliminated) and the recovery fails. In this case, after that, as long as the RAM is not cleared and the power supply is continued, a predetermined restoration operation is not performed and the game and performance are developed while maintaining the abnormal state. That is, in this case, even within the same symbol variation, or within the symbol variation after the next time, even when the timing for executing the movable effect using the specific movable ornament based on the effect pattern has arrived, The effect operation is not performed, and the display effect when the movable effect is performed is executed in the game board side effect display device 1600, and the operation effect sound when the movable effect is performed is assigned to the channel and reproduced. In addition, various light emitting units including the lamp mounted on the movable decorative body in which the abnormality has occurred only emit light in the light emitting mode when the movable effect is performed. However, especially when the movable decorative body itself does not operate, the actuator (lamp) mounted on the movable decorative body is activated (emitted) in the mode of operation, so that the movable effect is not performed. It is expected to curb the entertainment interest.

  As described above, when a movable body abnormality is detected in the process of operating the movable decorative body based on at least the variation pattern (effect pattern) according to the jackpot determination during the period in which the symbol variation is performed, the movable body By not assigning the abnormality notification sound corresponding to the abnormality to the channel and not reproducing it, it is possible to suppress an adverse effect on the effect being executed.

  On the other hand, even if an abnormality occurs in the same movable decorative body (specific movable decorative body) within the same variation pattern (specific production pattern) as in the example shown in FIG. When it occurs at a timing different from when a specific movable decorative body is operated by effect control (effect pattern), an abnormality notification sound corresponding to the abnormality of the movable body is assigned to the channel and reproduced.

  FIG. 181 shows that the movable body abnormality is not in the process of operating the movable decorative body according to the variation pattern (effect pattern) according to the big hit determination in the period in which the pattern variation is performed, but in a process different from this. It is a time chart which shows those examples about the allocation condition of each channel when detected, and the condition by the side of a movable decoration body.

  As shown in FIG. 181 (a), during the period when the symbol variation (specific effect pattern) corresponding to the result of the jackpot determination is being executed, at the timing ti11, as described above, the game board side effect The sound of “BGM playback” corresponding to a specific effect pattern whose effect has been developed on the display device 1600 is assigned to the playback channels 02 and 03 and has already been played back (in this case, stereo playback).

  As described above, in this symbol variation (specific effect pattern), when the timing ti12 is reached, the operation effective period (effective period of the effect reception) in which an operation opportunity is given to the player is the maximum, and the timing ti14. Can occur over time. And if operation (for example, operation button 410) by a player is detected within this period (period from timing ti12 to timing ti14), the operation effective period (effective period of presentation reception) will be ended by using this as an opportunity. Production control for operating a specific movable decorative body is executed.

  However, in the example shown in FIG. 181, the specific movable decorative body is moved by some external force at a timing ti <b> 11 a before the timing ti <b> 12 at which such a specific movable decorative body can perform the rendering operation (operation without operating based on the rendering pattern). Therefore, it is assumed that the specific movable decorative body is not detected at the specific position (original position) at the timing ti11b that should be at the specific position (original position) (movable body abnormality). In FIG. 181 (b) as well, a dotted range indicates a period during which a specific movable decorative body is in an abnormal state. Accordingly, at the timing ti11b, based on the determination that the movable body abnormality has occurred, a restoration process for performing a predetermined restoration operation on the specific movable decorative body is executed.

  At timing ti13a, the restoration process for performing a predetermined restoration operation on the specific movable decorative body is completed. At this time, it is detected that the movable decorative body has returned to the specific position (origin position) (movable body). If it is determined that the abnormality has been resolved), the storage of the abnormality history will be erased, and after that, it will be possible to execute a normal movable effect without performing any abnormality notification. Become so. In this regard, in the example shown in FIG. 181, the operation valid period (timing ti12 to timing ti14) occurs so as to straddle such timing ti13a. Therefore, when the operation by the player is accepted within the period of the timing ti12 to the timing ti13a in the operation effective period, the specific movable decorative body is still in an abnormal state, and therefore the rendering operation of the specific movable decorative body is The display effect when the movable effect is performed is executed in the game board side effect display device 1600, and the operation effect sound when the movable effect is performed is assigned to the channel and played back, causing an abnormality. The various light emitting units including the lamps mounted on the movable decorative body only emit light in the light emitting mode when the movable effect is performed. On the other hand, when an operation by the player is received within the period of the timing ti13a to the timing ti14 in the operation effective period (timing ti12 to timing ti14), the abnormal state of the specific movable decorative body is determined by the restoration process. If it is eliminated, the usual production control (movable body, display production, production sound, light emission) including the production operation of the specific movable decorative body is executed. In this example, it is assumed that a movable body abnormality has occurred only in a specific movable decorative body (one movable decorative body) and a restoration process corresponding to the abnormality is being performed. . That is, when a plurality of movable decorative bodies including a specific movable decorative body are in a state where restoration processing is being executed, even if an operation by the player is accepted within a period from timing ti13a to timing ti14, a specific operation is performed. Although the rendering operation of the movable decorative body is not necessarily performed, this will be described later with reference to FIGS. 182 and 183.

  However, in the example illustrated in FIG. 181, it is assumed that at the timing ti13a, it is not detected that the movable decorative body has returned to the specific position (origin position) (determination that the movable body abnormality has been resolved) and the recovery has failed. doing. Therefore, after the timing ti13a, as long as the RAM is not cleared and the power supply is continued, a predetermined restoration operation is not performed and the game and performance are developed while maintaining the abnormal state.

  In addition, as described above, a situation in which an abnormality (movable body abnormality) has occurred in the specific movable decorative body although it is not the timing at which the specific movable decorative body is operated based on the performance pattern according to the result of the big hit determination It can be said that there is a possibility that an abnormality is detected when a specific movable decorative body is removed from a specific position (origin position) by a fraudulent action such as a sticking action or a wire approach. Moreover, the timing ti13a is a situation in which the abnormality of the movable body has not been resolved by some external force even in the restoration process for performing a predetermined restoration operation on a specific movable decorative body, and there is a possibility that an illegal act has been performed. It can be said that it is increasing.

  Therefore, at the timing ti13a, although the symbol variation (specific effect pattern) is being executed, the notification process according to the movable body abnormality is executed. That is, in this case, in the channel, various effect sounds according to a specific effect pattern are assigned and reproduced according to the progress of the effect contents, and the abnormality notification sound is reproduced over a predetermined time in the reproduction channels 00 and 01. Will be assigned to and played. Further, in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, in addition to the display effect corresponding to the specific effect pattern being developed and executed as it is, the display at the time of abnormality corresponding to the movable body abnormality (for example, “ The occurrence of an abnormality in the inside movable effect unit 3200 ”is executed. In addition, in various light emitting units, as a mode corresponding to the abnormality of the movable body, a part of the light emitting units emit light in an abnormal state, and the other light emitting units are in a normal mode in accordance with the progress of the production contents. The light will be emitted.

  According to the example of FIGS. 180 and 181, even when the same movable body abnormality occurs during one symbol variation, the period during which the control relating to the rendering operation of the movable decorative body based on at least the variation pattern is executed When the movable body abnormality occurs during the operation, it is unlikely that an illegal act has been performed, and there is a possibility of failure during the production operation. . On the other hand, when the abnormality of the movable body suddenly occurs when the control related to the production operation of the movable decorative body based on the variation pattern is not executed, it is highly likely that an illegal act is performed, and the abnormality is more abnormal than the production. This is a characteristic configuration assuming that it is more important to output the notification.

  In the example shown in FIG. 181, the notification process according to the movable body abnormality is not performed at the timing ti11b, but the notification process according to the movable body abnormality is performed at the timing ti13a when the restoration process is executed but the movable body abnormality is not resolved. It was decided to do. However, at timing ti11b, a movable body abnormality is detected despite the fact that a specific movable decorative body cannot operate based on the production pattern, and even this alone causes fraudulent acts such as a sticking action or a wire approach. Since it can be said that there is a high possibility of being interrupted, the output of the notification sound corresponding to the movable body abnormality may be started at this timing ti11b. At this time, notification by display or notification by a lamp may be performed. In other words, even when the moving process based on the effect pattern during the symbol variation is not executed, if the movable body moves from its original position due to a sticking action or wire entry, the symbol variation starts or varies Do not wait for the restoration process timing at the end to arrive, and at that point (in the middle of the symbol fluctuation), the execution timing of “restoration process for movable bodies that have not returned to normal (movable bodies that are not in the original position)” However, when the restoration process is performed (or when it fails to restore the movable body to the normal state by the restoration process), an abnormality notification sound corresponding to the abnormality of the movable body is assigned to the channel and reproduced. To be done. Alternatively, when the movable body moves from its original position due to a sticking action or a wire approach, a process for moving the movable body by a driving force from a drive source (such as a motor) (a movable process not based on an effect pattern) can be executed. You may make it move to an original position within this process. In this case, if the movable body cannot be moved to the original position by such a movable process, even if the pattern is changing, the "movable body not in the original position is targeted" The execution timing of the “restoration process” is established. Then, when the restoration process is performed (or when the movable body fails to return to the normal position (return to the original position) by the restoration process), an abnormality notification sound corresponding to the movable body abnormality is assigned to the channel. Will be played back.

  In short, regarding the notification process in response to the abnormality of the movable body, within the period in which the symbol variation is performed, “the specific movable decoration body is in spite of the fact that the specific movable decoration body is not performing the production operation based on the production pattern. "A failure has occurred in the specific movable decorative body while the specific movable decorative body is performing the rendering operation based on the performance pattern". It is important not to be executed as a sufficient condition, so that it is possible for a person who performs a fraudulent act to prevent the fraudulent act from being performed, while being executed for a legitimate player It is expected to avoid having an adverse effect on the production. The condition for performing the notification process according to the abnormality of the movable body within the period in which the symbol variation is performed is as follows: “The specific movable decoration is not performed by the specific movable decoration body based on the production pattern. For example, “failure in restoration processing performed in response to the occurrence of an abnormality” or “occurring when the occurrence of an abnormality is in a specific situation” It is possible to adopt these as further conditions.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 180 and 181, it is determined whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the specific movable decorative body within the process of operating the specific movable decorative body in accordance with the effect pattern. However, if an abnormality occurs when a specific movable decorative body is operated according to the production pattern, the notification process corresponding to the movable body abnormality will not be performed as a trigger. It may not be determined whether an abnormality has occurred in the specific movable decorative body within the process of operating the decorative body in accordance with the effect pattern. In this case, it is desirable that the determination as to whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the movable decorative body is performed at a predetermined timing or every predetermined time.

  In addition, the detection method of the movable body abnormality is not limited to the detection of the position of the movable decoration body to be detected. For example, when an overload is applied to an actuator such as a motor that operates the movable decoration body, Other methods such as performing detection may be employed. That is, in this case, in the example of FIG. 180, an overload is applied to an actuator such as a motor that operates the movable decorative body at the timing ti17, thereby detecting a movable body abnormality. In the example of FIG. 181, an overload is applied to an actuator such as a motor that operates the movable decorative body at the timing ti11b, thereby detecting a movable body abnormality.

  Further, in the examples shown in FIGS. 180 and 181, the specific movable decorative body is illustrated as performing the stage operation at the timing when the operation is performed by the player. It is also possible to perform a production operation.

  In addition, among the notifications according to the abnormality of the movable body, the abnormality notification sound is assigned to the channel and reproduced for a predetermined time. You may make it perform the process to reduce.

  In the case where the abnormality notification is not executed on the sufficient condition that "the abnormality has occurred in the specific movable decorative body while the specific movable decorative body is performing the production operation based on the production pattern", after that, However, even if the abnormal state is not solved and remains, it is desirable not to notify the abnormality as long as the RAM is not cleared and the power supply is continued. In addition, it is desirable that the game or performance be developed while maintaining the abnormal state without causing a predetermined restoration operation.

  After the abnormality notification sound is assigned to the reproduction channels 00 and 01 for a predetermined time and reproduced by the notification process according to the movable body abnormality, the reproduction channels 00 and 01 are vacant channels even if the movable body abnormality remains. When the game is started in this state, it is desirable that the production sound is output in a non-suppressed manner even if the movable body abnormality remains.

  In the example described above, even if the movable effect based on the effect pattern is not executed, the restoring operation is performed on the effect movable body in which the movement abnormality has occurred when the predetermined condition is satisfied. In this regard, when the restoration is successfully performed by the restoration operation, a movable process may be performed to test whether or not the production movable body different from the production movable body in which the movement abnormality has occurred can be properly operated. Good. In other words, as a result of performing a restoration operation on a moving movable body in which a movement abnormality has occurred, if this fails, it is possible to recognize that there is a high possibility that fraud is being performed. However, as a result of performing a restoration operation on a moving movable body where movement abnormality has occurred, if it succeeds, it will be difficult to understand whether or not there is a high possibility that fraudulent acts are being performed It will be. Therefore, if the restoration is successful in the restoration operation, a fraudulent act is performed through a movable process to test whether or not the production movable body different from the production movable body in which the movement abnormality has occurred can be properly operated. It is desirable to continue the determination of whether there is a high possibility of being. Such a movable process may be further performed when the restoration fails in the restoration operation.

  Processing contents related to the restoration operation in the restoration operation performed in a situation where the movable effect based on the production pattern is not executed and the restoration operation performed when an abnormality occurs in the situation where the movable production based on the production pattern is executed It is desirable that the numbers (for example, the number of retries) are different from each other.

[Restoration of multiple movable ornaments]
As described above, in a gaming machine in which the number of channels is limited, even if a special result is obtained by the determination by the determination means according to the winning, there is no vacant channel to which sound data is assigned In a situation where the number of empty channels is 0, a special sound corresponding to the fact that a special result has been obtained cannot be assigned to the channel, and there is a concern that the game entertainment will be lowered due to the fact that it cannot be output. Therefore, conventionally, even if a movable body abnormality occurs in any of a plurality of movable decorative bodies (movable decorative bodies with different drive sources and provided separately), common abnormal sound data (one abnormality (Sound data) is assigned to a channel and played back, so that the number of channels used is not increased unnecessarily even when a movable body abnormality occurs simultaneously for a plurality of movable decorative bodies. It was. In addition, the movable body abnormality means that the movable body is in a state where it cannot operate properly, and is the same as that exemplified in “abnormality notification while an effect according to an effect pattern is performed”. is there.

  However, in recent years, the number of movable ornaments mounted on gaming machines has increased, and the game can be obtained simply by associating common abnormal sound data (one abnormal sound data) with all movable ornaments. It is becoming difficult to properly inform the state of the machine. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a plurality of movable decorative bodies are divided into two or more groups, and abnormality notification sounds that differ depending on which of the groups the movable decorative bodies have an abnormality are made to channels. By assigning and reproducing, the state of the pachinko machine 1 can be appropriately notified even when the number of movable decorative bodies mounted on the pachinko machine 1 is increasing.

  In this example as well, when a movable body abnormality occurs, as described in the above-described example of “abnormality notification while an effect corresponding to the effect pattern is being performed” (see FIGS. 180 and 181). Is performed. Therefore, even in this example, even when various games (symbol variation, jackpot game, etc.) are generated and detected, notification processing (output of notification sound) by the pachinko machine 1 is detected. The display at the time of abnormality in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, lighting at the time of abnormality by various lamps, etc.) can be executed. Similarly, during the period in which various games (symbol variation, jackpot game, etc.) according to the jackpot determination are being executed, a process (variation pattern) for operating the movable decorative body by at least the effect control by the peripheral control board 1510. When a movable body abnormality is detected while the (moving body driving process for operating the movable decorative body based on the (effect pattern) or the effect pattern during the big hit game) is being performed, a notification process by the pachinko machine 1 ( Notification sound output, abnormal display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, abnormal lighting by various lamps, etc.) are not performed.

  However, in this example, when a movable body abnormality occurs in a plurality of movable decorative bodies at the same time, only one abnormal sound data assigned to a channel and put into a reproduction state is associated with a specific group among the above groups. On the other hand, a process for performing a restoring operation on all of the plurality of movable decorative bodies in which the abnormality has occurred is executed. According to such a configuration, even when a movable body abnormality occurs in a plurality of movable decorative bodies, it is expected to promote a reduction in the risk that a channel will be freed up and there will be no free channels. As a result, it becomes possible to quickly return the abnormalities of each movable decorative body, and it is expected to reduce the channel use time by improving the efficiency of the processing when the abnormalities occur. . In addition, about the content of the restoration process, and each process at the time of success and failure, an example of the above-described “abnormality notification while an effect according to the effect pattern is being performed” (see FIGS. 180 and 181) ).

  Here, as an aspect which divides a some movable decoration body into two or more groups, it is calculated | required that it is an aspect suitable for alerting | reporting the state as the said pachinko machine 1, for example, it is provided in the door frame 3 side. A plurality of frame-side movable ornaments (not shown) and a plurality of board-side movable ornaments provided on the game board 5 side (for example, the back front decoration unit 3100, the back middle movable effect unit 3200, the back left movable effect unit 3300, the back Right movable effect unit 3400, back upper movable effect unit 3500, lower back movable effect unit 3700, etc.), the frame side movable decorative body that can be contacted without opening the door frame 3 is abnormal. Depending on the type of abnormality notification sound, it can be transmitted to the hall side whether or not an abnormality has occurred, or whether an abnormality has occurred in the movable decorative body on the panel side that is difficult to contact unless the door frame 3 is opened. So is the ability. In other words, when an abnormality occurs in the board-side movable decorative body, it can be said that there is a higher possibility that fraudulent acts are performed to the extent that contact is more difficult than when an abnormality occurs in the frame-side movable decorative body. Therefore, by performing the notification sound output based on such grouping, the notification sound according to the abnormality of the movable body is not noticed by the player side depending on the type (unpleasant feeling). Without any change), the fact that the pachinko machine 1 is in a situation of high possibility of fraud can be secretly transmitted to the hall side.

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment as well, in the event that a movable body abnormality has occurred, as a notification process by the pachinko machine 1, in addition to the output of the notification sound corresponding to the movable body abnormality, a game board side effect display As described above, the display at the time of abnormality in the display area of the device 1600 can be executed. In this regard, in this example, the plurality of movable decorative bodies are divided into two or more groups as a notification mode by display on the game board side effect display device 1600 in the notification process according to the movable body abnormality. It is desirable to display different notifications depending on whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the movable decorative body belonging to. However, the “notification by display” is inferior to the diffusion function for the occurrence of abnormality than the case of the “notification by sound”, but is superior in the information transmission function for informing the details of the abnormality in more detail. Have the same properties. Therefore, in the “notification by display”, the grouping is performed in such a manner that the information transmission function is more effectively performed in a manner different from the case of performing the “notification by sound” using the difference in properties. In particular, it is desirable to display differently depending on which of the groups thus uniquely divided belongs to the movable decorative body.

  That is, in this case, for example, when a movable body abnormality occurs in the movable decorative body A and when a movable body abnormality occurs in the movable decorative body B, the movable decorative bodies A and B are grouped into either group. Depending on whether there are any abnormalities in the movable body, the notification content displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 is the same even though the abnormality notification sound to be reproduced is the same. Is a first notification mode in which different displays are performed ”,“ a second notification mode in which an abnormality notification sound to be reproduced and a notification content to be displayed are the same even when any abnormality of the movable body occurs. ”And“ a third notification mode in which an abnormality notification sound to be reproduced and a notification content to be displayed are different from each other even when any movable body abnormality occurs ”occur. It becomes this It is possible to provide a more granular notification manner by notification by the two different contents of the sound and display.

  FIG. 182 shows an example of the allocation status of each channel and the status on the movable decorative body side when a movable body abnormality occurs simultaneously in a plurality of movable decorative bodies at a specific timing during the period in which the symbol variation is performed. It is a time chart.

  As shown in FIG. 182 (a), the game board side effect display device 1600 displays the timing change tj11 during the period when the symbol variation (specific effect pattern) corresponding to the result of the big hit determination is being executed. The sound of “BGM playback” corresponding to the specific performance pattern in which the performance has been advanced is assigned to the playback channels 02 and 03 and has already been played back (in this case, stereo playback).

  In this symbol variation (specific effect pattern), at the timing tj13, the operation effective period (effective period of effect reception) in which an operation opportunity is given to the player may occur over the period up to the timing tj15. And if operation (for example, operation button 410) by a player is detected within this period (period from timing tj13 to timing tj15), the operation effective period (effective period of effect reception) will be ended by using this as an opportunity. Production control for operating a specific movable decorative body is executed. If an operation (for example, the operation button 410) by the player is not detected within the operation effective period (effective period of the effect reception), the effect control for operating the specific movable decorative body is executed after timing tj15. Alternatively, the production control itself for operating a specific movable decorative body may not be executed.

  In this regard, in the example shown in FIG. 182, it is assumed that an operation by the player is accepted at timing tj14. Therefore, at timing tj14, based on the fact that the operation by the player has been accepted, the movable body driving process is executed to perform a movable effect that causes the specific movable decorative body to perform an effect. An effect sound corresponding to the movable effect is assigned to 08 and 09 and reproduced.

  However, in the example shown in FIG. 182, the plurality of movable decorative bodies are moved by some external force at the timing tj11 (the operation is not based on the effect pattern), and the timing tj13 at which the specific movable decorative body can perform the effect operation. A case is assumed where abnormalities of these movable bodies are detected at the previous timing tj12. In FIG. 182 (b) and FIG. 183 (b), which will be described later, a dotted range indicates a period in which each movable decorative body is in an abnormal state. Therefore, at the timing tj12, based on the determination that the movable body abnormality has occurred, the above-described restoration process is performed to perform a predetermined restoration operation on each movable decorative body in which the movable body abnormality has occurred. Accordingly, in relation to this restoration process, even if an operation by the player is received at stage tj14, a specific movable decorative body is not necessarily operated. In the example shown in FIG. 182, a board-side movable decorative body A provided on the game board 5 side, a board-side movable decorative body B provided on the game board 5 side, and a board-side movable decorative body C provided on the game board 5 side. The movable body abnormality is detected with respect to the frame side movable decorative body D provided on the door frame 3 side, the frame side movable decorative body E provided on the door frame 3 side, and the frame side movable decorative body F provided on the door frame 3 side. Each situation is assumed.

  More specifically, in the restoration process according to the example shown in FIG. 182, first, the board-side movable decorative bodies A, B, and C provided on the game board 5 side and the frame-side movable decorative body provided on the door frame 3 side. The processing mode is different between D, E, and F. For example, with respect to the board-side movable decorative bodies A, B, and C provided on the game board 5 side, a plurality of movable decorative bodies are arranged in a relatively narrow space. Therefore, after the timing tj12, the restoration process is performed so that the operation periods do not overlap each other based on a predetermined order. On the other hand, the frame side movable decorative bodies D, E, and F provided on the door frame 3 side operate using the space outside the pachinko machine 1, and the board side movable decorative bodies A, B, and C are operated. Therefore, the restoration process is simultaneously performed at the timing tj12, so that the rapid recovery of each movable decorative body can be performed.

  In such a configuration, the restoration process of the board-side movable decorative bodies A, B, and C provided on the game board 5 side is performed over a long period from timing tj12 to timing tj18, whereas the door frame 3 side In the frame-side movable decorative bodies D, E, and F provided in the above, those restoration processes can be completed in a relatively short time from timing tj12 to timing tj16.

  However, in the example shown in FIG. 182, the board-side movable decorative body provided on the game board 5 side until the operation effective period (effective period of effect reception) in which an operation opportunity is given to the player ends. It is assumed that none of the restoration processing of A, B, and C and the restoration processing of the frame side movable decorative bodies D, E, and F provided on the door frame 3 side are completed. Therefore, when the specific movable decorative body corresponds to any of the panel-side movable decorative bodies A, B, and C, it corresponds to any of the panel-side movable decorative bodies A, B, and C and the operation is effective. Regardless of the timing at which the stage is received (effective period of the stage reception), the stage is processed so that the stage operation is not performed when the stage is received.

  In other words, in this case, if there is a production reception within the period during which the restoration process for the specific movable decorative body is being performed, it is obvious that the specific movable decorative body cannot be produced using this as a trigger. Even if a production reception occurs after the restoration process for a specific movable ornament is completed, it is possible to perform another operation with another board-side movable ornament that is still in the stage of executing the restoration process. The concern of interfering arises. Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 182, when the specific movable decorative body corresponds to any one of the panel-side movable decorative bodies A, B, and C, any one within the operation effective period (timing tj13 to timing tj15). Even if an operation by the player is accepted at the timing, the specific movable decorative body is not performed, and the display effect when the movable effect is performed is executed on the game board side effect display device 1600, and the channel is displayed on the channel. On the other hand, an effect sound (operation effect sound) when the movable effect is performed is assigned and reproduced, and various light emitting units including the lamp mounted on the movable decorative body in which the abnormality has occurred perform the movable effect. In other words, the light is emitted only in the light emission mode. In short, when a specific movable decorative body corresponds to any of the panel-side movable decorative bodies A, B, and C, after all the restoration processes are completed (all the restoration processes are completed successfully), Only when the timing for performing the effect operation of the specific movable decorative body arrives, the execution of the effect operation is allowed.

  On the other hand, when the specific movable decorative body corresponds to any of the frame side movable decorative bodies D, E, and F, it corresponds to any of the frame side movable decorative bodies D, E, and F, and Processing is performed so that whether or not to perform a production operation triggered by this when the production is accepted depends on when the production is accepted within the operation valid period (effective period of production reception) It becomes.

  That is, in this case, first, if the specific movable decorative body is the frame side movable decorative body E, the timing tj13 to tj15 at which the specific movable decorative body can perform the rendering operation after the restoration process is completed (the restoration process is successful). Inevitably arrives, and even if the other movable decorative bodies A to C, D, and F are in the process of restoration, there is no concern of interfering with them. Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 182, when the specific movable decorative body corresponds to the frame-side movable decorative body E, any operation by the player is accepted within the operation effective period (timing tj13 to timing tj15). Even if it is performed, a specific movable decorative body effect operation is performed, and the display effect when the movable effect is performed is executed in the game board side effect display device 1600, and the movable effect is applied to the channel. In the light emission mode when various movable light emitting units perform the movable effect, including the lamp mounted on the movable decorative body in which an abnormality has occurred, the sound produced when the effect is performed is played back. Light is emitted.

  On the other hand, if the specific movable decorative body is the frame-side movable decorative body D, the operation effective period (timing tj13 to timing tj15) is generated so as to straddle the timing when the restoration process is ended. Therefore, when an operation by the player is accepted within the operation effective period before the restoration process is completed, the specific movable decorative body is still in an abnormal state. The body effect operation is not performed, and the display effect when the movable effect is performed is executed on the game board side effect display device 1600, and the effect sound when the movable effect is performed is assigned to the channel and reproduced. Then, various light emitting units including the lamp mounted on the movable decorative body in which an abnormality has occurred only emit light in the light emitting mode when the movable effect is performed. On the other hand, when the operation by the player is accepted within the operation effective period within the period after the end of the restoration process (successful restoration process), the other movable decorative bodies A to C and F are restored. Since there is no concern of interfering with them even if it is in progress, normal production control (movable body, display production, production sound, light emission) is also included, including production operations of specific movable ornaments. Will be executed.

  On the other hand, if the specific movable decorative body is the frame-side movable decorative body F, the operation effective period (timing tj13 to timing tj15) does not arrive after the restoration process is completed (the restoration process is successful). . Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 182, when the specific movable decorative body corresponds to the board-side movable decorative body F, an operation by the player is accepted within the operation effective period (timing tj13 to timing tj15). Even if it is performed, the specific movable decorative body is not performed, the display effect when the movable effect is performed is executed in the game board side effect display device 1600, and the movable effect is performed for the channel. Effect sound (operation effect sound) is assigned and reproduced, and various light emitting units including the lamp mounted on the movable decorative body in which an abnormality has occurred are emitted in the light emission mode when the movable effect is performed. Will stay.

  Here, the notification processing according to the example shown in FIG. 182 will be described. In this example, a plurality of board-side movable decorative bodies A and B provided on the game board 5 side are provided for notification of a notification sound in response to abnormality of the movable body. , C, and a plurality of frame side movable decorative bodies D, E, F provided on the door frame 3 side, and the abnormal movable decorative body belongs to any of these groups. Different notification sounds are output depending on whether there are any.

  In this regard, in the example shown in FIG. 182, it is assumed that the movable body abnormality occurs simultaneously in the board side movable decorative body and the frame side movable decorative body. However, such a situation cannot normally occur as a proper game is progressing, and cannot occur as a result of fraud. There is a high probability that all movable decorations have been tampered with manually, and so on. In any case, in such a special situation, the notification process itself can be troublesome, and it is required to end the notification state early.

  Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 182, it is detected that the movable body abnormality has occurred in the panel side movable decorative bodies A, B, C and the frame side movable decorative bodies D, E, F, respectively. At timing tj12, as described above, the restoration process on the board-side movable decorative body side and the restoration process on the frame-side movable decorative body side are simultaneously started as described above, while the alarm sound output is movable on the frame side. The common alarm sound for the frame side corresponding to the decorative bodies D, E, and F is not assigned to the channel, but the common alarm sound for the board side corresponding to the movable decorative bodies A, B, and C is assigned to the channel. The output is stopped.

  That is, the time for which the abnormality notification sound corresponding to the movable body abnormality is reproduced is the time until the abnormality of the movable decorative body to be notified is resolved, or a predetermined predetermined time after the abnormality notification sound is output. It is set as the time until the time (for example, 30 seconds common on the board side and the frame side) elapses. Therefore, among the board-side movable decorative bodies A, B, and C and the frame-side movable decorative bodies D, E, and F, the “board-side movable decorative body A, By assigning only the panel side common abnormality notification sound corresponding to the B and C sides to the channel, the “board side common abnormality notification sound corresponding to the panel side movable decorative body A, B, and C side” is generated. The restoration process of the frame side movable decorative bodies D, E, and F can be ended while the frame side movable decorative bodies D, E, and F are being reproduced. Since the output request of the “frame side common abnormality notification sound corresponding to the frame side movable decorative body D, E, F” after the output of “sound” is ended, it is avoided. The notification process can be ended in a simpler manner.

  Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 182, the panel-side movable decorative body A, B, C and the frame-side movable decorative body D, E, F are being restored. The “board side common decorative alarm sound corresponding to the board side movable decorative body A, B, C side” is assigned to the channel and reproduced over the period up to the timing tj18 when all the restoration processes of B, C are finished. Thus, the “frame side common abnormality notification sound corresponding to the frame side movable decorative body D, E, F side” is not reproduced. At this time, as described above, the assignment control of the effect sound to the channel is performed as usual.

  On the other hand, in the notification mode by display in the game board side effect display device 1600 in the notification process according to the movable body abnormality, the above “notification by sound” is performed by utilizing the difference in properties from the notification sound described above. The above-mentioned grouping is performed in a mode different from the above, in a mode in which the information transmission function is more exerted, and a different display is performed depending on which of the groups uniquely divided in this way is abnormal. ing. That is, in this case, for example, if the frame-side movable decorative body E is grouped with the frame-side movable decorative body F, even if the restoration processing of the frame-side movable decorative body E is completed, the frame-side movable decorative body E is in accordance with this. The “notification by display” remains maintained, and the “notification by display” is ended at the timing when the restoration process of the frame-side movable decorative body F is completed. Similarly, for example, if the board-side movable decorative body A is grouped with the frame-side movable decorative body D, even if the restoration processing of the frame-side movable decorative body A is completed, The corresponding “notification by display” remains maintained, and the “notification by display” ends at the timing when the restoration process of the frame-side movable decorative body D ends. Therefore, even if the restoration process for a specific movable decorative body ends first, depending on the execution situation related to the restoration process of the movable decorative body grouped with the specific movable decorative body, The “notification by display” corresponding to the movable decorative body for which the restoration process has been completed later may be terminated first.

  According to the example of FIG. 182, a plurality of notification sounds corresponding to the type of the movable decorative body in which the movable body abnormality has occurred are prepared as the notification sound corresponding to the movable body abnormality. When a movable body abnormality occurs simultaneously in a plurality of movable decorative bodies corresponding to each of the notification sounds, only one of the plurality of notification sounds can be reproduced. The movable decorative body that does not correspond to the notification sound is also executed during the reproduction period. Moreover, as a movable decorative body corresponding to the notification sound in the reproduction state, when a plurality of movable decorative bodies are in an abnormal state, these movable decorative bodies are individually restored according to a predetermined order. On the other hand, as a movable decorative body that does not correspond to the notification sound in the reproduction state, when a plurality of movable decorative bodies are in an abnormal state, the restoration process for these movable decorative bodies is executed simultaneously. As a result, for a movable decorative body that does not correspond to the notification sound in the playback state, the total time required for the restoration process can be made shorter than that of the movable decoration body that corresponds to the notification sound in the playback state. While one specific notification sound of the notification sound is being reproduced, all the movable decorative bodies can be returned from the abnormal state to the normal state, and the second notification sound is output. It becomes possible to avoid it.

  That is, in this embodiment, a plurality of movable decorative bodies are grouped into a board-side movable decorative body and a frame-side movable decorative body, and restoration processing corresponding to each group is performed simultaneously. Not limited to. In short, a plurality of movable decorative bodies (A to F in the above example) can be operated in two or more groups (in the above example, the board side and (The frame side), the restoration process can be executed independently for each group, and a plurality of movable decorative bodies (DF) belonging to at least one of the groups (the frame side in the above example) Among them, if it is selected as a movable decorative body that can be operated without being affected by each other's operation status and all can be restored simultaneously, refer to FIGS. 182 and 183. It is possible to configure so as to obtain the functions and effects described.

  In the example shown in FIG. 182, it is desirable that the determination as to whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the movable decorative body be made at a predetermined timing or every predetermined time. In addition, the detection method of the movable body abnormality is not limited to the detection of the position of the movable decoration body to be detected. For example, when an overload is applied to an actuator such as a motor that operates the movable decoration body, Other methods such as performing detection may be employed.

  In the example shown in FIG. 182, the specific movable decorative body is exemplified as the stage operation at the timing when the player operates. However, the specific movable decorative body is performed at the specific timing determined by the stage pattern. It may be allowed.

  In addition, among the notifications according to the abnormality of the movable body, the abnormality notification sound is assigned to the channel and reproduced for a predetermined time. You may make it perform the process to reduce.

  In the example shown in FIG. 182, the movable body abnormality occurred in the panel side movable decorative bodies A, B, and C and the frame side movable decorative bodies D, E, and F, respectively, during the period in which the symbol variation was executed. Although the description has been made assuming that the situation is assumed, the symbol variation is not necessarily executed. That is, during the execution of the big hit game or when the special symbol game is in a state of waiting for progress (for example, in the demo screen), the board side movable ornaments A, B, C and the frame side movable ornament D, Even when a movable body abnormality occurs in E and F, each process according to the movable body abnormality is performed in the same manner as the example described with reference to FIG.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 182, restoration processing is performed so that the operation periods of all the board-side movable decorative bodies A, B, and C provided on the game board 5 side do not overlap with each other based on a predetermined order. It was. However, if a plurality of movable decorative bodies that do not interfere with each other even if they are operated simultaneously are included in the panel-side movable decorative body, the panel-side movable decorative bodies are arranged based on a predetermined order. During the restoration process, the restoration process may be performed at the same time only for some movable decorative bodies that do not cause interference due to contact with each other.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 182, the timing at which it is determined whether a movable body abnormality has occurred in the board side movable decorative bodies A, B, C, and the movable body abnormality has occurred in the frame side movable decorative bodies D, E, F. Although it is assumed that the timing at which the determination is made is the same, these timings may be different. For example, as shown in FIG. 183, after it is determined that a movable body abnormality has occurred in the board side movable decorative bodies A, B, C, a movable body abnormality has occurred in the frame side movable decorative bodies D, E, F. Even when the determination is made, the restoration process for the frame-side movable decorative bodies D, E, and F is completed at an earlier timing than the restoration process for the board-side movable decorative bodies A, B, and C is completed. As long as there is a relationship, after the output of the “common alarm sound on the board side corresponding to the board side movable decorative bodies A, B, C” ends, the “frame side movable decorative bodies D, E, F side It is possible to avoid a request for output of the corresponding frame side common abnormality notification sound.

  On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 182, after it is determined that a movable body abnormality has occurred in the frame side movable decorative bodies D, E, F, a movable body abnormality has occurred in the panel side movable decorative bodies A, B, C. You may make it be the processing structure determined to have carried out. However, in this case, when it is determined that the movable body abnormality has occurred in the frame side movable decorative bodies D, E, and F, a notification process corresponding to the movable body abnormality and a restoration process of the frame side movable decorative bodies D, E, and F are performed. And wait until it is determined that the movable body abnormality has occurred in the panel side movable decorative bodies A, B, C, and then correspond to the panel side movable decorative bodies A, B, C side. While the notification process is performed, it is desirable to perform the restoration process for the board-side movable decorative bodies A, B, and C and the restoration process for the frame-side movable decorative bodies D, E, and F, respectively. In addition, as a result of waiting for the determination process whether the movable body abnormality occurred in the panel side movable decorative bodies A, B, C, no movable body abnormality occurred in the panel side movable decorative bodies A, B, C. In this case, the restoring process of the frame side movable decorative bodies D, E, and F is performed while the notification process corresponding to the frame side movable decorative bodies D, E, and F is performed.

  In the situation where a specific movable body among the panel-side movable bodies is being processed as an “abnormal state that is not subjected to the rendering operation”, the panel-side movable body itself is normal but has entered an abnormal state. A movable body that is not subjected to the production operation in relation to the “specific movable body” can be included. On the other hand, in the case of the frame side movable body, even if any of the panel side movable bodies is processed as an “abnormal state that is not subjected to the rendering operation”, the “specific movable body” that is in the abnormal state There is nothing that can no longer be used in the production operation, and if this is normal, all of them can be used in the production operation. In addition, even if any of the frame-side movable bodies is processed as an “abnormal state that is not subjected to the rendering operation”, the other frame-side movable bodies are rendered as long as they are normal. It is designed for operation. Moreover, even if any of the movable bodies on the frame side is processed as an “abnormal state that is not subjected to the rendering operation”, all of the movable bodies on the panel side are normal if this is normal. Is used for directing operations. That is, as the pachinko machine 1 adopts a configuration in which a movable effect is realized in a wider space, the number of movable bodies used for the rendering operation can be increased regardless of the abnormal situation of other movable bodies. It is like that.

  About each movable body illustrated in FIG. 182 and FIG. 183, when a movement abnormality occurs in the production operation according to the production request such as the production pattern or the big hit production, the restoration operation performed along with it failed. Even if it is a case, an abnormal alarm sound is not output. However, even if the symbol is changing, if a predetermined condition such as the detection of fraud is satisfied, the restoration operation is performed on the movable body in which the movement abnormality has occurred, but the restoration operation is performed. It is desirable to output an abnormality alarm sound based on the failure of the restoration even when the restoration operation is performed.

[Automatic multi-operation function (automatic continuous hitting function)]
By the way, in the pachinko machine 1, an operation effect may be performed a plurality of times according to each operation by prompting a predetermined operation means a plurality of operations (such as repeatedly pressing the operation button 410). However, in recent years, the predetermined operation means (operation button 410) is not operated a plurality of times in a predetermined effective period in which an operation opportunity of such multiple operations (such as continuous hitting) is given. Auto multiple operation function (automatic) that makes it possible to show the appearance when multiple operations are performed simply by performing an operation in a long mode (so-called long press etc.) that maintains the operation state for a relatively long time. Equipped with a continuous hitting function).

  In such an automatic multiple-time operation function (automatic continuous hitting function), a single operation (one operation in a short time) is performed within a relatively short time when an operation in a long mode such as so-called long press is performed. ) Is a player who is not good at multiple operations (slow hitting speed). It can be said that it is important to prevent a decrease in the gaming interest of a player or the like, or to encourage the use of the function by various players. However, when the player is in the operation state, if the effect change (for example, operation sound) when the effect is accepted every time a relatively short time elapses, it is the same for the player. Even if you intend to perform an operation with a single press, the short operation time (the time during which the operation state is slightly maintained with a single press) may become slightly longer or shorter, resulting in multiple receptions. Occurrence (multiple operation sounds are generated), production reception occurs only once (one operation sound is generated), and the number of production receptions for a single operation is stable There is a concern that the amusement interest will decrease due to the uncomfortable feeling caused by not doing so.

  In this regard, in the conventional automatic hitting function, when an operation by so-called long press is performed, first, as in the case of an operation by a single press, an effect change (for example, an operation sound) associated with an effect reception is made. Etc.) only once. After the first production change (for example, operation sound) is generated, no new production reception (operation sound) is generated until a predetermined interval time longer than the predetermined short time elapses. Then, after waiting for the predetermined interval time to elapse, an effect change (operation sound) when an effect is accepted every time a predetermined short time elapses is repeatedly generated. In other words, in this case, since there is a time margin between the time when the first production reception (operation sound) is generated and the time when the second production reception (operation sound) is generated, a single press is performed. Whether the operation is repeatedly performed within a relatively short time just by performing an operation by so-called long press while avoiding the uncomfortable feeling due to the unstable number of production receptions when the operation is performed by It is possible to produce a presentation that looks like this.

  However, from the player's side, this gives itself a time allowance between the time when the first effect is received (operation sound) and the time when the second effect is received (operation sound). It is useless in operation production, and the number of production receptions (operation sounds) per unit time is reduced by the amount of such wasted time (pseudo repeated hits when performing operations by so-called long presses) There is a concern that the gaming interest will be reduced due to the slow feeling.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, even when the operation with respect to the operation means (for example, the operation button 410) is performed only once in a single operation mode, the operation with respect to the operation means is long. As in the case of operation (long press, etc.), the specific sound accompanying the operation on the operation means can be output intermittently. That is, in this case, when an operation is performed on the operation means, a feeling as if the single operation (one operation in a short time) is repeatedly performed within a relatively short time regardless of the operation mode. This makes it possible for the player to remember (such as feeling as if fast hits are being made). As a result, all operation modes are adopted while stabilizing the responsiveness of the performance when the operation is performed by a single press (whether it is a single production change or multiple production changes). Even if it exists, it becomes possible to maintain suitably the frequency | count of occurrence of the production change (for example, operation sound etc.) per unit time.

  FIG. 184 is a time chart showing an example of control contents for realizing such an automatic multiple-time operation function (automatic continuous hitting function). Here, description will be made assuming that the operation button 410 is employed as the operation means. Also, in other drawings including FIG. 184, the white specific sound output in the figure indicates the specific sound generated based on the reception of the performance in response to the operation on the button 410, The black specific sound output in the figure indicates the specific sound generated in the form following the white specific sound output in the figure when there is no production acceptance when the operation button 410 is not operated. It is. The volume and tone color of these specific sounds are not different from each other and are preferably the same.

  First, in the example shown in FIG. 184 (a), the operation state is maintained only for a short time at timing tx11 in a predetermined effective period in which an operation opportunity of a plurality of operations (such as continuous hits) is given (single operation). In this case, it is assumed that one operation is performed. Therefore, at timing tx11, detection (determination) that an operation has been performed on the operation button 410 is performed, and based on the detection (determination), the output of the specific sound accompanying the operation on the operation button 410 is the same. A process of starting output of a display accompanying the operation (display pattern during operation) is performed.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, after a specific sound (for example, “picone”) accompanying the operation on the operation button 410 is output at the timing tx11, the player's hand is released from the operation button 410. Even if no operation is performed (in the figure, the period from timing tx12 to tx13), a specific sound (for example, “picone”) associated with the operation on the operation button 410 is intermittent in that situation. Can be output automatically.

  For example, assume that the operation state (detection state) from the timing tx11 is ended at the timing tx12. Then, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a grace period TY1 having a predetermined time length is set based on the end of the operation state (detection state). Even if the player does not detect any operation until the grace time TY1 elapses, a specific sound (for example, “picone”, for example, every time the automation time TY2 shorter than the grace time TY1 elapses. ”) Is output, it is possible to intermittently output a specific sound (for example,“ picone ”) accompanying the operation on the operation button 410.

  Here, in the grace time TY1 and the automation time TY2 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 184 (a), five times (N times) from when the grace time TY1 is started until it elapses. It is set to have a length of time that can output a specific sound of minutes (for example, “picone”). As a result, even if the operation is performed in a single operation mode within a predetermined effective period in which an operation opportunity of a plurality of operations (such as continuous hits) is given, a specific sound (a sound corresponding to the production reception) accompanying the operation Is at least 5 times (N times) (one specific sound output at the timing of operation detection and thereafter 4 times (N−) when the automation time TY2 elapses even without operation. 1) (total number of times with a specific sound).

  In particular, in this embodiment, the timing when the grace period TY1 ends during the output of the specific sound (for example, “picone”) (in the example shown in FIG. 184 (a), the grace period is output during the fifth specific sound output). Even when the timing tx13) at which the time TY1 ends is reached, processing (output interruption processing, etc.) that cuts off the specific sound being output at the timing tx13 (for example, “pico”) And the specific sound that has been output until that time tx13 (in the example shown in FIG. 184 (a), the first to fourth specific sounds) The output (sound waveform) in the same manner appears. In other words, if the specific sound accompanying the operation may be interrupted, it may become ambiguous whether the operation has been accepted for multiple times or not. However, according to such a configuration, such a concern may be caused by the player becoming difficult to remember the game. It is expected to be solved appropriately.

  Furthermore, in this embodiment, even when the predetermined validity period ends and no new operation is accepted for production during the period after the grace period TY1 starts, Until the grace period TY1 ends, a specific sound (for example, “picone”) is output every time the automation time TY2 arrives. That is, in this case, since the specific sound can be output intermittently even after the predetermined effective period ends, it is avoided that the number of stage receptions is not stable when an operation by a single press is performed. Needless to say, it is possible to make the player feel as if the operation has been performed within a period exceeding the predetermined effective period, and it is expected to improve the game entertainment. In this sense, a display (such as a remaining time display for which the valid period is continued) is performed so that the player can recognize whether the predetermined valid period is being continued or has been terminated. In addition, it can be said that it is more preferable to output the specific sound for the remaining number of times (1 to 4 times) under the condition that it can be recognized that it is in the finished state.

  In addition, regarding the “specific sound output accompanying the operation” in the figure, rather than the signal waveform accompanying the specific sound output, the volume waveform of the specific sound that is output every time the automation time TY2 elapses (other sound outputs This is a conceptual illustration of the excluded waveform). As is clear from the figure, in this embodiment, the automation time TY2 is digested before the time required to finish outputting the specific sound of the previous output to the end, and the specific sound of the previous output is obtained. On the other hand, the sound data of a new specific sound is output in the form of being overwritten on a specific channel, which makes it possible to output the specific sound continuously and continuously, as if fast repeated operation is being performed It is expected that players will be able to remember the sensation.

  By the way, as a specific sound reproduction type, in addition to a mode in which 1SHOT reproduction (corresponding to “1SHOT” in the drawing) for reproducing the target sound once is executed every time the automation time TY2 elapses, the target sound is selected. It may be a loop reproduction (corresponding to “LOOP” in the figure) that is repeatedly reproduced every time the automation time TY2 elapses. Moreover, the aspect which reproduce | regenerates the several specific sound output intermittently as one sound data may be sufficient. In the case of reproducing a plurality of specific sounds as one sound data, it is not always necessary to output all the specific sounds as the same single sound. There may be.

  On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 184 (a), regarding the display output on the game board side effect display device 1600, the operation button 410 is displayed after the operation display pattern associated with the operation on the operation button 410 is displayed at the timing tx11. Even if the player's hand leaves and no operation is performed (in the figure, the period from timing tx12 to tx13), the display contents of the operation-time display pattern are developed multiple times in that situation. It has become something that can be made.

  For example, assume that the operation state (detection state) from the timing tx11 is ended at the timing tx12. Then, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, as described above, the grace time TY1 having a predetermined time length is set based on the end of the operation state (detection state). It is. In this respect, in this embodiment, a process of sequentially outputting a plurality of display scenes 1 to 5 (display contents) in accordance with a predetermined time and order over a period from the timing tx11 until the set grace time TY1 is up. By executing this, the display content of the operation display pattern can be advanced.

  The contents of the display scenes 1 to 5 can be set as, for example, the mode shown in FIG. In other words, in the example shown in FIG. 185, “display scene 1” is a video depicting the situation where the teammate character is holding the sword and is about to pull out the sword, and “display scene 2” is the ally This is a video depicting the situation from when a character is extracted until the character is cut off, and “Display Scene 3” is a video depicting a teammate character having a meeting with an enemy character with a sword in the first mode. "Display scene 4" is a video depicting a teammate character having a meeting with an enemy character with a sword in the second mode, and "Display scene 5" is a third scene in which the teammate character and the enemy character are in a third state. This is a video depicting a state where a sword is being held in a manner.

  After displaying the operation display pattern associated with the operation on the operation button 410 at the timing tx11, the display scenes 1 to 5 are sequentially displayed while the specific sound is intermittently output. The player can be made to feel as if the content of the battle with the character has been developed in response to a plurality of operations. In addition, about each display scene 1-5, it does not necessarily need to be a moving image, and may be a still image. Further, in the game board side effect display device 1600, in addition to the display pattern at the time of operation, various effect displays (such as a hold display and an operation instruction image) may be displayed. One of these effects displays may include an image that changes effects (such as color changes) every time an effect is received by an operation by the player, but recognizes whether or not an effect has occurred. In order to make this difficult, it is important that the image is displayed as a smaller image than the display pattern during operation.

  Here, in the display pattern at the time of operation (each display scene) and the grace time TY1 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. At least 5 (M) display scenes 1 to 5 (display contents) are set to have a length of time that can be sequentially displayed. As a result, even if the operation is performed in a single operation mode within a predetermined effective period in which an operation opportunity of a plurality of operations (such as continuous hits) is given, at least five (M) display contents of the operation-time display pattern are displayed. ) Minutes (one display scene 1 displayed at the operation detection timing, and thereafter four (M-1) display scenes 2 to 5 that are sequentially displayed (progressed) even in the absence of operation. The display content is developed over the total number).

  In particular, in this embodiment, the timing at which the grace time TY1 ends during the output of the display scene (in the example shown in FIG. 184 (a), the timing tx13 at which the grace time TY1 ends during the output of the display scene 5). Unlike the case of the specific sound, the display pattern at the time of operation is terminated by interrupting the display scene 5 without displaying it until the end. In other words, unlike the case of a specific sound without progress, the display pattern at the time of operation where the production content has progress is interrupted in the middle of the display scene. It is expected that the player will be given an impression that it may have been able to be further developed, thereby prompting further operation by the player. In this sense, regarding the relationship between the display pattern at the time of operation (each display scene) and the grace period TY1, all display scenes 1 to 5 are not displayed until the grace period TY1 starts and ends. It can be said that it is more desirable to prompt the player to perform further operations. In order to encourage further operations by the player, only a part of all display scenes 1 to 5 are displayed between the start and end of the grace period TY1. Is more desirable.

  Furthermore, in this embodiment, if the predetermined effective period ends and no new operation is accepted for production during the period from the start of the grace period TY1 until the lapse of the grace period TY1, the predetermined effective At the end of the period (a state in which the remaining time of the grace period TY1 is left), the display scene in the output state is interrupted and a display showing the result as the display pattern at the time of operation is performed. This will be described later.

  The display scenes 2 to 5 are displayed and progressed sequentially according to a predetermined schedule after the display scene 1 is displayed, regardless of the mode of operation. May be set in advance according to the time (automated time TY2) from when the specific sound is output until it is output again, or set regardless of the time (automated time TY2) It may be a thing. In this sense, display contents such as switching to another display or occurrence of a new display in the contents of each display scene itself (in the example of FIG. There is a display change due to “video depiction of a sword pulled out”, and a display change due to “an effect occurring when an ally character fights against an enemy character” is inserted in the display scene 3. More desirable. If display scenes having such display changes are used, it is possible to make the display change in each display scene appear to have occurred due to the effect reception, so the output timing of the specific sound and the switching timing of the display scene It is expected that the sense of incongruity will be resolved without strictly matching the above. In addition, a plurality of display scenes do not necessarily have to be prepared as the operation display pattern, and the same display scene may be repeatedly displayed.

  On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 184 (b), the operation button 410 is operated for a relatively long time at the timing tx21 within a predetermined effective period in which an operation opportunity of a plurality of operations (such as continuous hitting) is given. It is assumed that the operation in the long mode to be maintained at is performed. Accordingly, at the timing tx21, as in the case of the timing tx11, detection (determination) that the operation is performed on the operation button 410 is performed, and the operation on the operation button 410 is performed based on the detection (determination). The process of starting the output of the accompanying specific sound and the output of the display accompanying the same operation (display pattern during operation) will be performed.

  Also, in the operation maintenance period in which the operation state from the timing tx21 to the timing tx22 is maintained, as in the case of the non-operation period (period from the timing tx12 to tx13) described above, it is specified every time the automation time TY2 elapses. A sound (for example, “picone”) can be output intermittently, and a plurality of display scenes 1 to 5 (display contents) can be sequentially output according to a predetermined time and order. The display content of the hour display pattern can be advanced in the same manner as the example shown in FIG. 184 (a).

  That is, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, in the operation maintenance period (period from timing tx21 to tx22), first, it is determined whether or not the operation on the operation button 410 is continued (operation state). Monitoring is periodically performed (determining whether or not the operation state (operation detection state) has been completed (for example, detecting a falling edge in the detection signal). As long as the operation state is continued, the grace time TY1 having a predetermined time length is not set, and the periodical monitoring is performed, “every time the automation time TY2 elapses. A process for outputting a specific sound (for example, “picone”) and a process for sequentially outputting a plurality of display scenes 1 to 5 (display contents) according to a predetermined time and order are performed. In other words, in the operation maintenance period (period from the timing tx21 to tx22), “when the automation time TY2 elapses, it is determined whether or not the operation is detected, and it is determined that the operation is detected. Based on a process such as outputting a specific sound (for example, “picone”) based on “the operation detection state is determined each time the automation time TY2 elapses, and the operation detection state is indicated” Processing such as “progress display contents based on determination” is not performed, and “periodic monitoring (determination) as to whether or not the operation on the operation button 410 is continued (operation state)”. And “a process of outputting a specific sound (for example,“ picone ”” every time the automation time TY2 elapses ”) and“ a plurality of display scenes 1 to 5 (display contents) according to a predetermined time and order. Process "and that the next output is to be carried out respectively. The “periodic monitoring (determination) as to whether or not the operation on the operation button 410 is continued (operation state)” is executed as a process executed a plurality of times while the automation time TY2 elapses. It is what is done.

  Thereafter, as a result of “periodic monitoring (determination) as to whether or not the operation on the operation button 410 is continued (operation state)”, the operation on the operation button 410 is continued ( When the timing tx22 at which it is determined that the (operation state) has been completed comes, the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment first sets a predetermined time length based on the determination result. Set grace time TY1. However, in this case, “a process of outputting a specific sound (for example,“ picone ”” every time the automation time TY2 elapses ”) and“ a plurality of display scenes 1 to 5 (display contents) are performed in accordance with a predetermined time and order. The “sequential output processing” is continuously executed over the period up to the timing tx23 until the grace time TY1 ends after the timing tx22 at which the operation state is ended. That is, in this case, from the situation where the operation on the operation button 410 is continued (timing tx21 to x22), the player's hand is released from the operation button 410 and no operation is performed (timing tx22 to x23). In a specific period (timing tx21 to x23) across the transition timing, the specific sound can be output intermittently in one processing mode that is output again each time the automation time TY2 elapses. In addition, the display pattern during operation can be continuously output in one processing mode in which a plurality of display scenes 1 to 5 (display contents) are sequentially output according to a predetermined time and order.

  According to such a configuration, the specific sound output mode at the time of the single operation shown in FIG. 184 (a) and the specific sound output mode at the time of the long press operation shown in FIG. 184 (b) are respectively generated. The processing mode (program) related to the output of the specific sound can be made common among them. Similarly, the output mode of the display pattern during operation shown in FIG. 184 (a) and the output mode of the display pattern during operation shown in FIG. 184 (b) are respectively displayed. In creating them, the processing mode (program) for outputting the display pattern during operation can be made common among them. That is, in this case, in the example of FIG. 184 (a), as a result of “periodic monitoring (determination) as to whether or not the operation of the operation button 410 is continued (operation state)” at the timing tx12. It is determined that the operation state (operation detection state) has ended. Further, the situation where the operation on the operation button 410 is continued (timing tx11 to x12) is changed to the situation where the player's hand is released from the operation button 410 and no operation is performed (timing tx12 to x13). In a specific period (timing tx11 to x13) straddling the timing, the specific sound is intermittently output in one processing mode that is output again each time the automation time TY2 elapses. The operation-time display pattern is continuously output in one processing mode in which 1 to 5 (display contents) are sequentially output in accordance with a predetermined time and order.

  As a result, even when the operation on the operation button 410 is performed only once in a single press mode, the operation on the operation button 410 is performed in the same manner as when the operation button 410 is performed in a so-called long press mode. The specific sound accompanying the operation on the operation button 410 is intermittently output. That is, in this case, when an operation is performed on the operation button 410, a single press (one operation in a short time) is repeated within a relatively short time regardless of the operation mode (single press, long press). This makes it possible for the player to remember a feeling as if it was being performed (such as a feeling as if fast hitting was being performed). As a result, while striving to stabilize the responsiveness of the performance when the operation by a single press is performed (whether it is a single change of production or multiple production changes), any operation mode (single press, Even if long press) is employed, it is possible to favorably maintain the number of production changes (specific sounds) generated by the operation per unit time.

  However, in the example shown in FIG. 184, when the operation with respect to the operation button 410 is performed only once in a single press mode (FIG. 184 (a)) and in a so-called long press mode (FIG. 184). Although the same effect change occurs in (b)), actually, in the example shown in FIG. 184 (a), an effect for one time is accepted at timing tx11, and the white in the figure is specified accordingly. In the example shown in FIG. 184 (b), while the sound is output only once, the production is accepted four times every time the automation time TY2 elapses from the timing tx11, and the white in the figure corresponding to them. The specific sound output without a cut is made four times. Therefore, in order to cause a specific effect result to appear within a predetermined effective period, an effect lottery is performed every time an effect reception is requested, or every time an effect is received, and a specific effect is determined according to the result. In the example shown in FIG. 184 (a), when the type of production that causes the production result to appear, since only one production reception has occurred, a specific production result appears. I can't expect much. However, with the pachinko machine 1 according to the embodiment, the reception of the specific sound without the black in the figure is intentionally performed even when the reception of the production is not generated, so that the reception of the production actually occurs so much. Even if it is a situation that can not be expected very much that a specific production result will appear, it is possible to operate multiple times by creating a production situation as if many production receptions are occurring Even if a player who is not good at (such as slow hitting speed) performs a single operation, it is possible to suitably suppress a decrease in gaming interest.

  In this embodiment, it is difficult to recognize how much production reception has occurred only by confirming one specific sound output at a time, but from the start of the operation to the end of the operation. By confirming how many specific sound outputs have been made, it is possible to give a star of how much production reception has occurred.

  In the operation display pattern according to this embodiment, the display scene 1 to the display scene 5 are sequentially output, then the display scene 3 is output again, and thereafter, the grace time TY1 is up. By repeatedly outputting the display scenes 3 to 5 until the predetermined validity period ends or the production conditions are satisfied within the predetermined validity period and a specific production result appears, the teammate character and the sword A depiction of just making a meeting with will appear. Therefore, it is desirable that the specific performance result is a depiction of how the teammate character wins the enemy character as a result of such a sword battle, and the specific performance result within a predetermined effective period. It is desirable to display the result of the failure at the end when the ally character is depicted as having been defeated by the enemy character as a result of such a sword battle.

  As described above, when the operation with respect to the operation button 410 is performed only once in a single press mode (FIG. 184 (a)) and when the operation with respect to the operation button 410 is performed in a long press mode (FIG. 184 (b)), the specific sound accompanying the operation is intermittently output a plurality of times, and the operation display pattern accompanying the operation is sequentially displayed according to a predetermined schedule and progressed. By doing so, even a player who is not good at operating a plurality of times is prompted to perform the operation with confidence. However, in practice, during the predetermined effective period, the operation button 410 is often operated as a multiple hitting operation in a single-press mode, and when such a continuous hitting operation is performed, 1 It is important for improving the game entertainment to let the player remember the feeling of operation in which the production reception is generated by one operation. However, if the operational feeling that the reception of an effect is generated by one operation at a time is completely reflected as an effect, a player who is good at multiple operations is more advantageous than a player who is not good at multiple operations. Since the production performance is as if it is, it is required to achieve both production elements (operation feeling, production fairness) having such a trade-off relationship.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, in order to secure the operational feeling that the reception of the production has occurred by one operation at a time, the operation is performed as an immediate operation with respect to the operation. Focus on the fact that “whether sound is generated (or changed) when operated” is a more important parameter than “whether display is generated (or changed)”. Each time the operation on 410 is performed in a single press mode, a specific sound corresponding to the production reception is output in accordance with the operation timing.

  For example, now, as shown in FIG. 186 (a), the operation on the operation button 410 is performed as a multiple hitting operation in a single-pressing manner in the period of timing tx31 to tx32 in the predetermined effective period. Suppose. Then, each time the operation on the operation button 410 is detected, the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment uses the detection as a trigger to generate a new specific sound with respect to the previous specific sound (specific sound in the output state). A new specific sound is output in such a manner that the sound data is overwritten on a specific channel. As described above, even when the operation on the operation button 410 is performed only once in a single press mode, such output is performed while the specific sound is intermittently output a plurality of times. When the operation on the operation button 410 is performed again, a new specific sound is output in such a manner that the specific sound in the output state is cut off (interrupted) in the middle of the operation. It is possible to explicitly indicate that the specific sound has been newly output and the production has been accepted at the timing when the performance is performed.

  In this embodiment, even when the operation with respect to the operation button 410 is performed only once in a single press mode or when the operation is performed by a long press, the output of the specific sound of the previous output is completed to the end. The automatic time TY2 is digested before the time required for the time elapses, and the sound data of the new specific sound is output in the form of being overwritten on the specific channel with respect to the specific sound of the previous output. This is as described above. However, in this case, the specific sound is output at an accurate rhythm every fixed time (automated time TY2), whereas the operation button 410 is operated as a multiple hitting operation in a single-pressing manner. When the operation timing by an irregular player is reached, the specific sound in the output state is cut off and a new specific sound is output. It becomes possible for the player to preferably remember the operational feeling that the production reception is occurring.

  Incidentally, also in the example shown in FIG. 186 (a), every time the operation on the operation button 410 is performed during the predetermined effective period, it is periodically determined whether or not the operation is continued (operation state). Thus, a process of monitoring (determining whether or not the operation state (operation detection state) has been completed) is performed. In this respect, in the period of the timing tx31 to tx32 when the operation on the operation button 410 is performed as a multiple hitting operation in a single-press mode, the operation is continued each time the operation on the operation button 410 is performed. As a result of periodic monitoring of whether or not it is in the (operation state), it is immediately determined that the continuation of the operation state has ended, and a predetermined time length is set accordingly. A grace period TY1 is set (not shown).

  In this regard, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, when a new operation is performed on the operation button 410 before the grace period TY1 ends (time up), the setting of the grace period TY1 is canceled. Thus, the operation button 410 is returned to a state in which processing for periodically monitoring whether or not the operation of the operation button 410 is continued (operation state) is performed. Therefore, in the period from timing tx31 to tx32, every time the operation button 410 is in an operation state or a non-operation state, a process for periodically monitoring whether or not the operation button 410 is in an operation state is performed. A state transition is performed rapidly between a state in which a grace period TY1 (not shown) having a predetermined time length is set.

  Here, in the example shown in FIG. 186 (a), after repeated striking operations for six times between timings tx31 to tx32, the user is tired from repeated striking operations, and thereafter, the operation is repeated. It is assumed that the time required has become significantly longer. If a player who is not good at such multiple operations cannot perform a continuous hit operation multiple times after the timing tx32, the number of stage receptions is greater than that of a player who is good at multiple operations. There is a concern about the decline of the game entertainment interest by being reduced. However, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, a specific sound is generated each time the automation time TY2 elapses even if the operation by the player is not detected until the grace time TY1 elapses after the operation state ends. As described above, the output process is performed. Therefore, according to the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to the present embodiment, even after the timing tx32, even if the time required for the repeated operation is significantly increased, at least a grace period TY1 after the previous operation state ends. If it is possible to perform repeated operations within a shorter period of time, it is possible to output a specific sound accompanying the operation continuously and intermittently so that the player feels as if fast repeated operations are being performed. It becomes like this.

  For example, when it is determined at the timing tx33 that the continuation of the operation state has ended as a result of periodic monitoring as to whether or not the operation state from the timing tx32 is continued, based on the determination A grace period TY1 having a predetermined time length is set. From then on, although the time required for repeated operations will be significantly increased, a specific sound is output each time the automation time TY2 elapses in a situation where no operation is performed by the player. By performing the processing, the specific sound accompanying the operation is output continuously and intermittently. However, these specific sounds are output as black specific sounds (seventh to ninth specific sounds) in the figure under the situation where no production reception is occurring.

  In this respect, black specific sounds (seventh to ninth specific sounds) in the figure can be generated only during the grace period TY1 after the previous operation state ends. However, in the example shown in FIG. 186 (a), with respect to the grace time TY1 set at the timing tx33, the operation button 410 is operated again at the timing tx34 before the grace time TY1 elapses. The setting is canceled (does not time up) based on the operation. Accordingly, at timing tx34, the white specific sound (the 10th specific sound) in the figure is output in response to the production acceptance in the form of cutting off (suspending) the specific sound in the output state. At the same time, it returns to a state in which processing for periodically monitoring whether or not the operation state is continued is performed.

  However, such an operation state is also terminated at timing tx35, and a determination to that effect is made as a result of the monitoring. Based on this determination, a grace period TY1 having a predetermined time length is determined. It will be set again. Then, every time the automation time TY2 elapses in a situation where no operation is performed by the player, the black specific sound (11th to 14th specific sound) in the figure is output again. When an operation by the player is finally performed at timing tx36 before time TY1 expires, the black specific sound (14th specific sound) in the output state is cut off (interrupted). In this way, a white specific sound (15th specific sound) is output in the figure.

  As described above, even after the timing tx32, even if the time required for the repetitive operation is significantly increased, the repetitive operation is performed within a time shorter than the grace time TY1 after the previous operation state ends. As long as it can be performed, the specific sound in the figure at the timing when the operation by the player is performed and the specific sound in the figure in the regular period when the operation by the player is not performed Are output, so that the player can remember the feeling as if a quick continuous hitting operation is being performed so that the specific sound accompanying the operation can be output continuously and intermittently. Therefore, according to such an aspect relating to the output of the specific sound, it is possible to secure an operational feeling that an effect is received by one operation at a time, and a player who is not good at multiple operations. Even in such a case, the specific sound accompanying the operation can be output continuously and intermittently by the output of the black specific sound in the non-operating state. , Production fairness) is expected to be compatible.

  However, even when the specific sound is output in such a manner, the operation display pattern that plays a role of notifying the effect result based on the operation within the predetermined effective period is a plurality of times. If a player who is good at operation and a player who is not good at multiple times of operation make a difference in the aspect of the progress of display contents, eventually it will be more than the player who is not good at multiple times of operation. There may be a performance as if a player who is good at multiple operations is advantageous, and there is a concern that the gaming interest will be lowered. Therefore, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, the display time pattern for the operation is not advanced step by step in accordance with the generation timing of the specific sound accompanying the operation, but the grace time TY1 is up. Until the end timing (specific end timing) arrives, display contents can be advanced by a predetermined dynamic display output regardless of the mode of operation.

  In this regard, in the example shown in FIG. 186 (a), as described above, it is assumed that the time required for the repetitive operation is significantly increased after the timing tx32 in the predetermined effective period. However, until the set grace time TY1 expires, the operation on the operation button 410 is performed again and the setting of the grace time TY1 is cancelled. Therefore, the timing (specific end timing) at which the grace period TY1 is timed up and ended within a predetermined effective period does not arrive.

  When the operation is performed in the manner shown in FIG. 186 (a), the display of the operation time display pattern (game board side effect display device 1600) is started based on the operation by the player at the timing tx31. Thereafter, display scenes 1 to 5 shown in FIG. 185 as the operation-time display pattern are determined in advance regardless of the operation state even though the speed of the continuous hitting operation is greatly changed as described above. It is only displayed and progressed sequentially according to the scheduled schedule, and this makes it appear that the performance fairness is maintained between the player who is not good at multiple operations and the player who is good at multiple operations. Will be able to.

  However, even if the display content as the display pattern at the time of operation is the same, the number of times that the presentation reception accompanying the operation is actually generated is the number of times that the player who is not good at the operation is operated multiple times. It is inevitable that you will be different from your favorite players. Therefore, in order to cause a specific effect result to appear within a predetermined effective period, an effect lottery is performed every time an effect reception is requested, or every time an effect is received, and a specific effect is determined according to the result. If there is a type of production that makes the production result appear, the player who is good at multiple operations is more likely to make a specific production result appear. The significance is kept. In other words, while maintaining the significance of such production, the fairness of production between the player who is not good at multiple operations and the player who is good at multiple operations is maintained in the production of sounds and displays. Therefore, it can be said that there is a technical feature in that it is possible to suppress a decrease in the gaming interests of a player who is not good at multiple operations.

  In addition, according to such a configuration, even if the continuous hitting operation is performed earlier than the interval (automation time TY2) in which the presentation is accepted when the operation by long press is performed, the aspect of the progress of the display pattern during operation is Since it is the same, it is expected to avoid the occurrence of a situation in which button deterioration is accelerated by performing a quick hitting operation too quickly.

  Incidentally, the example shown in FIG. 186 (b) assumes a case where the operation on the operation button 410 is not in time until the grace period TY1 set at the timing tx33 elapses. That is, in this case, within the predetermined effective period, the timing tx37 (specific end timing) at which the grace period TY1 is timed up is reached, and the timing tx37 (specific end timing) starts from the timing tx31. The dynamic display output (processing for sequentially displaying and advancing display scenes 1 to 5 according to a predetermined schedule) is interrupted and terminated at that time.

  In this regard, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, regarding the output of the specific sound (for example, “picone”), the timing tx37 (specific end timing) at which the grace period TY1 ends when in the output state is reached. Even if the specific sound in the output state is cut off at the timing tx37 (for example, “pico”), the process (such as the output interruption process or the process of interruption by overwriting with another sound) is performed. Even after the timing tx37 has arrived, the output (sound waveform) in the same manner as the specific sound that has been output so far appears as described above. Therefore, regarding the output of the specific sound, even after the timing tx37 (specific end timing) when the grace period TY1 ends, the last specific sound (the tenth specific sound in the figure) is If the operation of the operation button 410 is performed before the sound is muted, the player can feel the feeling that a fast repeated operation is being performed so that a specific sound accompanying the operation can be output continuously and intermittently. It is possible to make it happen.

  In fact, in the example shown in FIG. 186 (b), before the black specific sound (the 10th specific sound) in the figure output across the timing tx37 (specific end timing) is muted, After the tenth specific sound output is interrupted twice, the white specific sound in the figure is generated twice, and then the black specific sound in the figure is output intermittently again. It can be seen that is output continuously and intermittently. In the example shown in FIG. 186 (b), the specific sound is output intermittently in this way. On the other hand, in the operation display pattern, the progress of the display content is temporarily stopped at timing tx37. . Then, after that, it is apparent that the progress of the display content is started again from the first display scene (display scene 1) in accordance with the timing tx38 at which the white specific sound is output again.

  FIG. 187 shows a predetermined effective period during which an operation opportunity for a plurality of operations (such as repeated hits) is given in the pachinko machine 1 equipped with the automatic multiple times operation function (automatic hitting function) described in FIGS. 184 to 186. It is a time chart which shows the example of the effect which appears when operation is performed within this predetermined effective period (timing tx41-tx48), when the specific effect pattern which generate | occur | produces is performed.

  As shown in FIG. 187, at timing tx41, a predetermined effective period in which an operation opportunity for a plurality of operations (such as continuous hits) is given occurs, and the player at timing tx42 within the predetermined effective period Assuming that the operation is started, also in this production example, based on the detection of the operation, the output of the specific sound accompanying the operation on the operation button 410 and the output of the display accompanying the operation (display pattern at the time of operation), respectively. Processing to be started is performed.

  However, in this effect example, when an operation on the operation button 410 is accepted within a predetermined effective period, a specific sound output that is white in the figure is generated, and a special sound different from the specific sound is generated with a predetermined probability. Processing to be output can be executed.

  In other words, as described above, the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment generates a specific sound output that is black in the drawing even under a situation in which no operation is performed on the operation button 410 and no effect is received. In this figure, the black specific sound output is difficult to distinguish from the white specific sound output in the figure that occurs at the timing when the production acceptance occurs (in this production example, the same mode) ) Is output. As described above, the display contents at the time of operation appearing on the game board side effect display device 1600 are also developed according to a predetermined schedule regardless of the mode of operation. Therefore, from the player's side, even if an operation by a long press or an operation by a plurality of times is performed within a predetermined effective period, the player recognizes how much production reception is generated by these operations. It can be said that the situation is difficult. Therefore, in this production example, when an operation on the operation button 410 is accepted within a predetermined effective period, a specific sound output that is white in the figure is generated, and a special sound different from the specific sound is generated with a predetermined probability ( For example, it is possible to predict to some extent how much production reception has occurred through the output status of such special sounds.

  For example, in the example shown in FIG. 187, when there is a relatively early period (timing tx41 to tx45) after the predetermined effective period is started, two consecutive hit operations at timings tx42 and tx43, and from timing tx44, Each time a long press operation is performed, a total of nine presentations are received, and a specific sound output in white in the figure corresponding to these is continuously generated nine times (in the figure, the first to ninth) ), The number of receptions of productions per unit time is relatively large. On the other hand, in a relatively late period (timing tx45 to tx48) after the predetermined effective period is started, it takes a long time that the operation in the single operation mode cannot be said to be repeated, and the timing tx46. , Tx47 is performed twice, so that the reception of the production for two times occurs, and the specific sound output in the figure corresponding to these is generated twice over time (in the figure, the tenth) , The eleventh white specific sound), the number of times of production acceptance per unit time is relatively small.

  However, when checking the output status of the specific sound and the output status of the display pattern at the time of operation, the specific sound is compared after the predetermined effective period is started by performing the black specific sound output described above. It is continuously output in both the relatively early period (timing tx41 to tx45) and the relatively late period (timing tx45 to tx48), and the operation display pattern is compared after the predetermined effective period is started. Since the display scene is merely switched according to a predetermined schedule in both the relatively early period (timing tx41 to tx45) and the relatively late period (timing tx45 to tx48), these If you just check the output status, there will be a small number of production receptions per unit time. Whether there is in the stomach situation it can be seen that is hard to determine.

  In this regard, when the output state of a special sound that is output with a predetermined probability when a white specific sound output occurs in the figure, a relatively early period (timing) after the start of a predetermined effective period. In tx41 to tx45), the number of occurrences per unit time is larger than that in a relatively late period (timing tx45 to tx48) after the predetermined effective period is started. It is possible to predict to some extent how much production reception has occurred through the output status. Further, according to such a special sound output mode, it is possible to conceal to a certain extent which of the specific sound output with white outline or the specific sound output with black outline in the figure is generated. Therefore, it is expected that the game entertainment of a player who is not good at multiple operations will be suitably maintained. In this sense, a special sound can be generated when a specific sound output is generated, but is output based on an output condition that is different from the generation of the specific sound output. Even if the specific sound output occurs, it is required to output the special sound in a manner that does not necessarily occur.

  Further, the predetermined probability of whether or not to generate a special sound when an effect is received may be changed according to the number of effects received within a predetermined effective period. That is, in this case, it becomes possible to make it more difficult to predict which of the specific sound output with white outline or the specific sound output with black outline in the figure is generated.

  Moreover, in view of the fact that the output frequency of the special sound is lower than that of the specific sound, it has a time from when the specific sound is output until the sound is muted, or a time value longer than the automation time TY2. It is desirable to be set as a thing. In this example, the time value is set to twice the “automation time TY2”. In addition, when a new special sound is output when the previous special sound is output, it is desirable that the previous special sound is cut off (interrupted) to output a new special sound.

  However, in such a pachinko machine 1, since the same effect can be enjoyed as when the operation is performed a plurality of times only by performing an operation by a long press, the number of players performing the operation a plurality of times is reduced. There is a concern that the significance as an effect of requesting a plurality of operations will be lost. Therefore, in the effect example shown in FIG. 187, the player's operation is long-pressed during the period after the player's operation is started at least at the timing tx42 in the predetermined effective period (timing tx41 to tx48). Of the state that is continuously performed (timing tx44 to tx45) and the state that is performed as a single operation mode (timing tx42 to tx44, tx45 to tx48), the state is performed as the single operation mode. Only when a specific display condition is satisfied, display of a specific image (specific display) is allowed.

  That is, in this case, in order to confirm a specific image, it is required to perform an operation as a mode of a single operation rather than an operation by pressing and holding at least. Therefore, a plurality of images without using an automatic repeated (automatic multiple operations) function are required. Performing a turning operation (such as repeated hits) can have a production meaning, and it is expected that the game entertainment will be suitably maintained.

  Moreover, in this effect example, in order to confirm the specific image, it is not necessary to operate as a single operation mode, and the specific image is not necessarily displayed unless the specific display condition is satisfied. That is, in this case, since the difficulty of appearance of the specific image itself is increased, it is possible to operate multiple times (such as continuous hitting) without using the automatic continuous hitting (automatic multiple hitting) function every time a predetermined effective period occurs ), It appears that it is challenging to display a specific image that is difficult to appear, and it can be operated multiple times without using the automatic repeated (automatic multiple operations) function. It is expected to promote understanding of the surroundings.

  In the effect example shown in FIG. 187, a specific non-operation time (here, a time twice as long as the “automated time TY2”) has elapsed without receiving a new effect from the timing when the previous effect is received. In addition, a display of a specific image within a predetermined effective period (the specific display condition) is that a predetermined effect lottery performed when the specific non-operation time has passed is obtained as the “specific display condition” ( Specific display). In this regard, in the predetermined production lottery, when the big hit is determined in the big hit determination (or the production situation in which a success display can appear depending on the operation mode within the predetermined effective period (high expectation degree of the big hit is high) In the case of production status), it is possible to get a performance hit with a probability of 70%, whereas when a big hit is lost in the jackpot determination (or operation within a predetermined effective period) No matter how many times it is performed, in the production situation where the success display cannot appear (in the production situation where the big hit expectation degree is low), it is possible to obtain the production hit only with a probability of 30%. Therefore, when a display of a specific image (specific display) appears within a predetermined effective period, it is suggested that the expectation level that a jackpot symbol appears is high, and the game entertainment can be suitably maintained. The above-mentioned “specific display condition” is not limited to this, and “a specific non-operation time (here,“ automated time TY2 ”without receiving a new effect from the timing when the previous effect is received) is generated. 2 times the time) ”and“ Achieving per-effects in the specified effect lottery ”is adopted as the“ specific display condition ”and when this is satisfied A display (specific display) of a specific image may appear, or another condition may be adopted as the “specific display condition”.

  In addition to the types described above, the aspect of the predetermined effect lottery is, for example, in an effect situation where the success display can appear depending on the operation mode within a predetermined effective period (the effect situation where the degree of expectation of jackpot is low). An effect situation where a success per chance is obtained with a probability of 0% (or the effect lottery itself is not performed), but a success display cannot appear no matter how many operations are performed within a predetermined effective period. When it is in a production situation where the degree of big hit expectation is low, an aspect in which a production hit can be obtained with a probability of 60%. According to such an aspect, since it is definitely shown that the success display does not appear when the specific display appears, there is no need to perform a barren operation for causing the specific display to appear. Can be recognized within a predetermined effective period. In this case, as the specific display, it is desirable to use the same display content as the failure display that appears when the predetermined effective period ends without the success display.

  In this effect example, as shown in FIG. 187, when a new effect is received when the specific image is being displayed (specific display) (timing tx46), the specific image is displayed at that time. The display is hidden, and the output is continued on the condition that a state in which no operation is performed by the player (a state where no new production reception has occurred) is maintained. Yes.

  Further, in the effect example shown in FIG. 187, at least a specific number of effects must be received in order to make a specific effect result (successful display) appear within a predetermined effective period (timing tx41 to tx48). The appearance condition is satisfied at timing tx47 when the eleventh presentation reception (the eleventh white specific sound output) occurs, and the display scene 3 that is in the display state at that time is cut off ( The process of causing the success display to appear as the display pattern at the time of operation is performed. As the contents of this success display, the content of the repetitive portion (display scenes 3 to 5) in the operation display pattern, such as destroying enemy characters that had been fighting with swords in display scenes 3 to 5 It is desirable to be related. Further, when a success display appears, it is desirable to indicate that the degree of expectation of winning the big hit is high in the big hit determination.

  Further, when the appearance condition is satisfied at the timing tx47 when the eleventh presentation acceptance (the eleventh white specific sound output) occurs, at that time, the predetermined effective period is ended and a new presentation acceptance is received. It will be prevented from occurring. Therefore, at the timing after the timing tx47, a white specific sound or special sound in the figure is not newly generated, and a specific display does not newly appear.

  FIG. 188 is executed under the same processing conditions as the effect example shown in FIG. 187, but what is repeated in the single shot operation mode by the player is shorter than the grace time TY1? It is a time chart which shows the example of an effect which appears when it repeats taking a long time which cannot be said.

  As shown in FIG. 188, even if the operation in the single-shot operation mode by the player is repeated for a long time, as long as those operations are repeated at an interval shorter than the grace time TY1, After the timing tx52 when the operation is started within the predetermined effective period (timing tx51 to tx56), the specific sound is continuously output intermittently, and the display pattern at the time of the operation is displayed according to a predetermined schedule. Will be developed. According to such a production mode, even if the operation is performed only 4 times within a predetermined effective period, it is possible to create a production situation as if about 20 continuous hitting operations are performed. become able to. However, in this case, there is a concern that a person who seriously performs the continuous hitting operation cannot understand the meaning of the continuous hitting operation and the game entertainment interest is lowered.

  Therefore, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, the length of the predetermined effective period is “Tx1”, the length of the grace period TY1 is “Tx2”, and a specific performance result (successful display) within the predetermined effective period. When “EU” is the minimum number of production receptions required to appear, these numerical values are set so that the relationship “[Tx1 / Tx2” <EU] is satisfied. According to such a configuration, even when the operation is repeatedly performed at the last minute when the grace period TY1 elapses and the specific sound and the display pattern at the time of operation are continuously output, The number of production receptions that occur is less than the minimum number of production receptions (EU) that is required to make a specific production result (successful display) appear within a predetermined effective period. That is, in this case, when the operation is performed in such a malicious manner, it becomes possible to prevent a specific effect result (success indication) from appearing. It is expected that the entertainment interests of those who are present will be suitably maintained. In order to obtain such an effect more reliably, the number of times of production reception (EU) required at least for causing a specific production result (success display) to appear within a predetermined effective period, Strictly speaking, it is required to set the numerical value calculated by “Tx1 / Tx2” as a numerical value larger than the integer value obtained by rounding up the numerical value.

  In this regard, in this production example, the minimum number of production receptions (EU) required to make a specific production result (successful display) appear within a predetermined effective period is calculated by “Tx1 / Tx2”. Since it is “11 times” which is twice or more the integer value when the numerical value is rounded up to an integer, a failure display is displayed at the timing tx56 when the predetermined valid period ends. Become. That is, in this case, a failure display appears due to an insufficient number of operations, so that it is an effect situation in which it is not possible to recognize whether the big hit expectation is low or high.

  Furthermore, as described above, the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment allows the display of a specific image only when it is in a state where it is performed as a single operation mode and a specific display condition is satisfied. It is. In this respect, in this production example, when the above-mentioned “specific non-operation time” required for displaying a specific image is “Tx3”, the relationship [“Tx1 / Tx3” <EU] is established. Each of these values is set to be In such a configuration, if an attempt is made to cause a specific display to appear every time an operation is performed within a predetermined effective period, the number of production receptions that occur within the predetermined effective period is within the predetermined effective period. The number of production receptions (EU) that is required at least to make a specific production result (successful display) appear is reduced. In other words, in this case, a direct selection function for performing an attempt to make the specific display appear until the risk that the specific production result (success display) does not appear is played, and the specific display is displayed. Since it becomes impossible to make many attempts to make it appear casually, the performance of the attempt will be enhanced, so it is expected to improve the entertainment fun of the game. It becomes like this.

  Further, in this effect example, as shown in FIG. 188, when the timing tx55a at which the predetermined effective period ends without the success display appearing, the display scene 4 in the display state at that time is cut off ( The process of causing the failure display to appear as the operation display pattern is performed. As the contents of the failure display, the content of the repeated portion (display scenes 3 to 5) in the display pattern at the time of operation, such as defeating the enemy character who had been fighting with the sword in the display scenes 3 to 5 It is desirable to be related. Also, when a failure display appears, it is desirable to indicate that the degree of expectation of winning the big hit is low in the big hit determination.

  On the other hand, in this production example, as shown in FIGS. 187 and 188, the specific sound that is in the output state when the predetermined valid period is ended, regardless of whether the success display or the failure display appears. However, this is not cut off (interrupted) as described above. However, even if these specific sounds are output intermittently thereafter, those specific sounds will be muted while the success or failure indication is displayed, and then the success or failure indication will be displayed. The relationship is set so as to be hidden.

  In this embodiment, a grace period TY1 is set after the player's operation state ends, and the black specific sound output in the non-operation state is output until the grace period TY1 elapses. Although it is performed at least four times or more, the number of “specific sound output without black in the figure” that occurs when in a non-operating state is not limited to this. For example, if the grace time TY1 is set as a time that is at least twice as long as the automation time TY2, the specific sound output that is black in the non-operating state is at least twice or more. Since this occurs, it is possible to make it feel as if the continuous hitting operation (multiple operations) is continued even in the non-operating state.

  Further, in this embodiment, after the display scenes 1 to 5 are sequentially output as the operation display pattern, the display scenes 3 and 5 are repeatedly output so that the display scenes 1 and 2 are not displayed. Thus, a depiction in which the ally character just makes a battle with the enemy character with the sword appears. Therefore, specific display in which the big hit expectation degree is shown in at least one of the display scenes 1 and 2 may be performed. According to such a configuration, if there is a case where a specific display is overlooked, the non-operation state cannot be reconfirmed unless the non-operation state is continued until the grace period TY1 elapses. However, it is possible to provide an effect of selecting between the disadvantage of being wasted in vain and the disadvantage of not being able to confirm the specific display.

  Further, in this embodiment, continuous operation is permitted in such a manner that the production reception is generated at an interval shorter than the interval (automation time TY2) at which the production reception is performed when the operation by the long press is performed. Thus, it is possible to realize an operation effect with a high degree of freedom by the player (see FIG. 186). However, on the other hand, even when such a high-speed continuous hitting operation is performed, the progress of the display scene in the display pattern at the time of operation is the same as when the operation by long press is performed. Therefore, it is possible to make it less attractive to perform a high-speed continuous hitting operation, and this is expected to suppress the excessive operation on the operation button 410 and reduce the risk of breakage or the like. Will come to be.

  In addition, in order to make a specific effect result appear within a predetermined effective period, when performing an effect that requires at least a specific number of effects to be received, only an operation by long pressing is performed within the predetermined effective period. It is desirable to set the value of the specific number so that the reception of the production more than the specific number of times occurs. More preferably, it is desirable to set the value of the specific number of times so that the reception of the production more than the specific number of times occurs only by performing an operation by long pressing over a half of the predetermined effective period.

  Also, as shown in FIGS. 187 and 188, a time (specific non-operation time) that is twice as long as the “automated time TY2” has elapsed without receiving a new effect from the timing when the previous effect was received. In this case, the display of the specific image (specific display) is made to appear, but the specific non-operation time is not limited to this. For example, as a specific non-operation time, any time value within a range that is at least twice the “automated time TY2” and that has a grace time TY1 as an upper limit (below the grace time TY1) is used. In the non-operating state, in the state where the specific sound with blackening in the figure is output more than once (the state that the continuous hitting operation is performed in the non-operating state) It is possible to produce an effect as if the display of a specific image (specific display) has appeared based on the fact that the number of pseudo operations in the non-operating state (the number of outputs of a specific sound without black in the figure) has reached a predetermined value. Is possible.

[Game machines with multiple production operation units]
By the way, in the above description, the gaming machine has been described in which the tray unit 320 includes the rendering operation unit 400 that can be pressed by the player and can present the rendering image to the player. With reference to FIGS. 189 to 240, a gaming machine that can further increase the player's willingness to operate will be described. The effect control of the effect operation unit described below is performed by the peripheral control board 1510.

  FIG. 189 is a front view of a gaming machine provided with a sword effect operation unit 5000. FIG. 190 is a right side view of the gaming machine provided with the sword effect operation unit 5000. FIG. Here, the sword effect operation unit 5000 disposed on the door frame 3 of the gaming machine 1 described above will be described, the same components as those described above will be denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted as appropriate.

  The sword effect operation unit 5000 is provided in front of the door frame 3 on the right side when viewed from the front. The sword production operation unit 5000 houses a sword part 5010 having a sword part 5011, a handle part 5012, a sword part 5013 sandwiched between the sword part 5011 and the handle part 5012, and a sword part 5011 of the sword part 5010. A sword decorative body 5001 including a sheath portion 5020 is configured.

  The sword decorative body 5001 is provided on the door frame 3 so that the sheath portion 5020 can be moved in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. Further, the sword portion 5010 is provided so as to be movable in the sword direction and the sword insertion direction. The sword portion 5010 is normally in a state where the sword portion 5011 is housed in the sheath portion 5020, and the sword portion 5011 is in a sword state where the sword portion 5011 can be visually recognized by the player in the sword effect. Then, the sword portion 5010 in the sword state can function as an operation means for receiving a sword insertion operation by the player and returning to the sword state.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 191, the execution opportunity of the sword production effect accompanying the movement of the sword production operation unit 5000 (sword decoration body 5001) will be described. FIG. 191 is a diagram illustrating an example of an effect pattern selection table in an effect mode in which a sword effect can be performed. (B) shows an example of a selection table for selecting the presence / absence of an extracted book effect.

  The production pattern described here includes a pattern in which the sword book production is performed after execution of the sword preparation transition production, a pattern in which the sword book production is performed without performing the sword preparation migration production in advance, and a sword preparation migration production in advance. There is a pattern in which no sword book production is performed, there is a pattern in which the sword preparation transition effect is not performed, and there is no pattern in which the sword book production is performed. Two patterns of the form with an aura member and the form without an aura member are provided.

  As shown in FIG. 191 (A), whether or not to execute the extraction preparation transition effect is selected in accordance with the type of variation pattern determined in the main control board 1310 and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. Here, multiple types of variation patterns are classified into a variation pattern for big hit variation at the time of big hit, a variation pattern for small hit variation at the time of small hit, and a variation pattern for deviation variation at the time of outage, and variations that have advantageous results for the player The pattern is set so that the probability of executing the sword preparation transition effect is higher as the pattern is higher. Specifically, the sword preparation transition effect is executed with a probability of 50% for the variation pattern for big hit variation, is executed with a probability of 30% for the variation pattern for small hit variation, and when the variation pattern for outlier variation is used. It is executed with a probability of 20%. Note that the fluctuation pattern at the time of deviation fluctuation may change the probability according to the presence or absence of the reach effect so that the probability that the sword preparation transition effect will be executed is higher than when the reach effect is performed. .

  Next, as shown in FIG. 191 (B), the presence or absence of execution of the extracted sword effect is selected in accordance with the type of variation pattern and the presence or absence of the extracted sword preparation transition effect. When the sword preparation transition effect is executed even if the types of the variation patterns are the same, the probability that the sword main effect is executed is set higher than when the sword preparation transition effect is not executed. In addition, the variation pattern that is advantageous to the player is set such that the probability that the extracted sword effect will be executed increases. Here, even if the advantage of the variation pattern is low, it is set so that the probability that the sword preparation effect is executed is higher when the sword preparation transition effect is executed. Specifically, when the sword preparation transition effect is executed with the variation pattern for deviation variation, the probability that the sword book effect is executed is higher than when the sword preparation transition effect is not performed with the variation pattern for small hit variation. Note that, in the case of the big hit variation pattern, the extraction effect is always executed regardless of the presence or absence of the extraction preparation transition effect.

  In addition, when the sword book effect is executed, the sword preparation transition effect is executed in advance, and the probability that the sword book effect in the form with the aura member is higher as the variation pattern is advantageous to the player. Is set to be Here, in the case of the variation pattern for small hit variation, the extracted sword effect with the aura member is not selected.

(State transition and movement of the aura member by sword decoration body movement)
Next, with reference to FIGS. 192 to 195, the sword operation of the sword decorative body 5001 in the sword effect (the sword preparation transition effect and the sword book effect) will be described. Further, when the aura member 5030 is provided in the sword portion 5010 (sword portion 5011) itself that can accept a sword insertion operation by a player, and the sword portion 5010 is deformed by its own constituent member (aura member 5030) (FIG. 192). 193), and the aura member 5035 is provided in the sheath portion 5020 of the door frame 3 that houses the sword portion 5010 (blade portion 5011), and the sword portion 5010 is combined with the member on the door frame 3 side (aura member 5035). The operation of the aura members 5030 and 5035 will be described in the case of an integral decorative body (FIGS. 194 and 195).

  FIG. 192 is a state transition diagram for explaining the sword decoration operation of the sword decorative body 5001 when the aura member 5030 is provided on the sword part 5010 (sword part 5011) itself, (A) state of sword insertion, (B) first. The sword state, (C) the second sword state. FIG. 193 is a longitudinal sectional view for explaining the operation of the aura member 5030. FIG. 193 is a longitudinal sectional view showing a state in which the blade portion 5011 is extracted from the sheath portion 5020 so that the operation of the aura member 5030 can be easily understood.

  The sword ornament 5001 in the normal state is in a sword storage state in which the blade part 5011 is stored in the sheath part 5020 as shown in FIG. 192 (A). As shown in FIG. 192 (B), the sword decorative body 5001 after the sword movement in the sword preparation transition effect is visible from the player with only the portion of the blade 5011a fitted to the hand of the blade part 5011 being removed from the sheath part 5020. Becomes the first sword state. Then, as shown in FIG. 192 (C), the sword decorative body 5001 after the sword movement in the sword sword production is a second sword that is largely visible to the player by further removing the blade part 5011 from the sheath part 5020. It becomes a state. Here, the sword ornament 5001 in the second extracted state can function as an operation means that can accept a sword insertion operation by the player.

  The aura member 5030 provided in the blade part 5011 is configured to be operable independently of the blade operation of the blade part 5011. In the case where the sword decorative body 5001 is in the form with an aura member, the aura member 5030 is a sheath when the blade part 5011 is in the first sword state (FIG. 192B) from the sword state (FIG. 192A). The movable range is moved as much as possible (maximum operation) from the closed state (FIG. 193A) to the open state (FIG. 193B) inside the portion 5020, and the blade portion 5011 is deformed. Therefore, the player can visually recognize the aura member 5030 even in a changing process in which the blade part 5011 deformed by the aura member 5030 changes from the first sword state to the second sword state (FIG. 192C). As will be described later, since the aura member 5030 is provided so as to be positioned below the blade 5011a of the blade portion 5011 even if it operates maximum, the player cannot visually recognize the aura member 5030 in the first extraction state.

  The aura member 5030 in the normal state (closed state) is included in the blade portion 5011 as shown in FIG. The aura member 5030 is provided below the blade 5011a of the blade portion 5011, and meshes with the right aura member 5031, the left aura member 5032, the rack 5031a provided on the right aura member 5031, and the rack 5032a provided on the left aura member 5032. And a pinion 5033. In the aura member 5030, when the pinion 5033 is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front by a driving means (not shown), the rotational force is converted into a linear motion in the right direction of the rack 5031a and the left direction of the rack 5032a. As shown in (B), the right aura member 5031 and the left aura member 5032 are stopped at positions where they protrude outward from the outer shape of the blade portion 5011 (open state).

  Further, an LED substrate 5011c having a plurality of LEDs on the blade shaft 5011b is included below the blade 5011a of the blade portion 5011. When these LEDs emit light, the blade portion 50011 (aura member 5030) can be decorated with light emission.

  Here, regarding the operation timing of the aura member 5030, when the sword decorative body 5001 (sword part 5010) is changed from the sword insertion state to the first sword extraction state, the closed state is opened and the blade part 5011 is operated by the operation of the aura member 5030. Although the example in which the sword decorative body 5001 is changed from the first sword state to the second sword state after being deformed is shown, this is not restrictive. The aura member 5030 may start operation (deformation) after the sword ornament 5001 is in the second sword state. The final mode based on the production pattern set until the sword ornament 5001 in the second sword state functions as an operation means (including not only the mode of maximum operation but also the mode of stopping the operation on the way) ).

  FIG. 194 is a state transition diagram for explaining the blade operation of the sword decorative body 5001 when the aura member 5035 is provided on the sheath portion 5020. (A) State of blade insertion, (B) First blade state, The second sword state is shown. FIG. 195 is a longitudinal sectional view for explaining the operation of the aura member 5035. FIG. 195 is a longitudinal sectional view showing a state in which the blade portion 5011 is extracted from the sheath portion 5020 so that the operation of the aura member 5035 can be easily understood. Here, the same components as those in FIGS. 193 and 194 described above are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted as appropriate.

  As shown in FIGS. 194 (A) to 194 (C), the aura member 5035 provided in the sheath portion 5020 of the door frame 3 that houses the sword portion 5010 (sword portion 5011) is the sword portion 5010 (sword portion 5011) described above. While the aura member 5030 provided on itself moves in the left-right direction, it moves in the up-down direction. The aura member 5035 is provided so as to surround the outer periphery of the blade portion 5011. When the sword decorative body 5001 is in the form with an aura member, the aura member 5035 changes the state of the blade part 5011 while maintaining the relative positional relationship between the blade part 5011 and the aura member 5035 in the sword state (the state of the sword delivery). Operates according to the first sword state (second sword state). Thereby, the sword portion 5010 (the blade portion 5011) can be combined with the frame-side member (aura member 5035) so as to be seen as an integral decorative body.

  The aura member 5035 in the normal state (completely accommodated state) is accommodated in the sheath portion 5020 as shown in FIG. The aura member 5035 is provided so that the upper end is located below the blade 5011a of the blade part 5011 in the fully accommodated state, and is a hollow columnar surrounding aura member 5036 provided so as to surround the outer periphery of the blade part 5011, and the surrounding aura member 5036. A right rack 5036a and a left rack 5036b which are provided below the hollow portion, and a right pinion 5037a and a left pinion 5037b which mesh with the right rack 5036a and the left rack 5036b, respectively. The enclosure aura member 5036 is rotated by a driving means (not shown) such that the right pinion 5037a is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front, the left pinion 5037b is rotated clockwise when viewed from the front, and both the pinions are engaged. It is converted into an upward linear motion of the rack 5036a and the left rack 5036b, and as shown in FIG. 195 (B), the enclosure aura member 5036 stops at a position where it combines with the blade portion 5011 to form the second sword state. The aura member 5035 at this time is in a complete appearance state in which the surrounding aura member 5036 is movable (maximum operation) to the upper limit of the movable range.

  Although not shown, the blade portion 5011 includes an LED substrate having a plurality of LEDs, and the blade portion 5011 and the aura member 5035 can be decorated with light emission.

  Here, the blade part is maintained while maintaining the relative positional relationship according to the state change of the sword decorative body 5001 (the sword part 5010) (the blade state ⇔the first sword state ⇔the second sword state) with respect to the operation timing of the aura member 5035. Although the example which unites 5011 was shown, it is not restricted to this. The aura member 5035 may start the operation (union) after the sword decorative body 5001 is in the second sword state. Final mode based on the production pattern set until the sword ornament 5001 in the second sword state functions as an operation means (not only the full appearance state that is fully operated, but the midway appearance that is stopped in the middle) It is only necessary to be able to include a state with an aura member in a state). Further, the aura member 5035 may be combined with the blade portion 5011 so as not to be visually recognized by the player in the first sword insertion state from the sword insertion state.

(Example of sword production using sword ornaments)
Next, with reference to FIG. 196 to FIG. 201, a sword effect using the sword effect operation unit 5000 (sword decorative body 5001) will be described. In the following, when the sword preparation transition effect is executed in the reach effect ((X1) to (X5) in the figure), and the effect pattern ((X6) and (X7) in the figure) in which the sword book effect is not executed) The screen transition of the effect display device 1600 and the operation transition of the sword ornament 5001 will be described with respect to the effect pattern ((A1) to (D2) in the figure) in which the extracted sword effect is executed. FIG. 196 to FIG. 200 are effect transition diagrams of the sword effect. FIG. 201 is a timing chart showing the relationship between the state change timing of the sword ornament 5001 and the operation validity period related to the operation means.

  In the reach effect, first, the left decorative symbol and the right decorative symbol that are variably displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 are stopped and displayed with the same symbol (here, “7”), and only the central decorative symbol is variably displayed. A reach state is formed (FIG. 196 (X1)). Subsequently, the reach decorative pattern is reduced and displayed in the upper right part of the display area, and an effect image suggesting execution of a sword effect (movability of the sword decorative body 5001) is displayed in the center display area. Specifically, after an image (Fig. 196 (X2)) that two samurai face each other and start living is displayed, an image of one samurai holding a handle and holding a sword in a sheath (Fig. 196 (X3)) is displayed. Here, the effect which suggests that the sword ornament 5001 moves is performed by the image in the display area of the effect display device 1600. During this time, the sword decorative body 5001 of the sword effect operation unit 5000 maintains the sword state (FIG. 192 (A)).

  Next, when the sword preparation transition effect is executed by lottery based on the type of variation pattern transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, the sword preparation transition effect is displayed as shown in FIGS. 197 (X4) and (X5). When started, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the face with the eyes of the samurai who holds the sword in the above-mentioned image is displayed, and the eyes are enlarged and displayed as time passes. At this time, the sword decoration transition effect is performed by the sword ornament 5001 changing from the sword state to the first sword state. In addition, when the sword preparation transition effect is performed, the sword book effect is more likely to be executed thereafter than when the sword preparation transition effect is not performed. Therefore, it can be said that the sword preparation transition effect is an expectation effect that indicates the expectation that the sword main effect will be executed by the movement of the sword ornament 5001. In the sword preparation transition effect, by swinging the sword decorative body 5001 in the first sword state up and down, the player may be expected to further change the sword decorative body 5001 to the second sword state. Good. Note that the vertical swing of the sword decorative body 5001 in the first extraction state is performed to the extent that the aura member 5030 (5035) is not visually recognized by the player when the sword decorative body 5001 is in the form with an aura member. On the other hand, when the sword preparation transition effect is not executed, the sword decorative body 5001 may be kept in the state where the sword is placed and the image shown in FIG. 196 (X3) described above may be continuously displayed.

  Here, when the sword decorative body 5001 in the subsequent sword production effect is in the form with an aura member, the aura member 5030 is closed inside the sheath portion 5020 at the timing of the sword preparation transition effect (FIG. 193 (A )) To the open state (FIG. 193B), the movable range is operated as much as possible (maximum operation), and the blade portion 5011 is deformed. At this time, the sword decorative body 5011 in the first sword state is visible to the player from the hand of the blade part 5011 to the part of the blade 5011a, but the aura member 5030 is the Since it is provided below, there is no fear that the player can visually recognize the aura member 5030 even if the aura member 5030 operates maximum. Furthermore, the aura member 5030 is configured to be visible to the player at substantially the same timing as the sword decorative body 5001 changes from the first sword state to the second sword state. Therefore, the sword decorative body 5001 in the second sword state functions as an operation means that can accept a sword operation by the player, and at the same time, has an expectation depending on the form of the operation unit (sword unit 5010) operated by the player. It is possible to suggest.

  After the sword preparation transition effect is completed, if the sword book effect is not executed by a lottery based on the type of the variation pattern and the presence / absence of the sword preparation transition effect, the eyes are enlarged in the display area of the effect display device 1600. Sweat oozes on the forehead of the samurai (Fig. 197 (X6)), and the central decorative symbol is displayed on the left decorative symbol in the center of the screen along with the image that the samurai gives up when the central decorative symbol that has been variably displayed is stopped. In addition, the display is stopped and displayed in a stop mode different from the right-side decorative design, that is, a deviating mode (here, “6”) (FIG. 197 (X7)). At this time, the sword decorative body 5001 is returned from the first extracted state to the sword state at the time of FIG. 197 (X6), and maintains the sword state. That is, the reach effect is ended without the sword ornament 5001 functioning as an operation means.

  On the other hand, when the extracted sword effect is executed, after the sword preparation transition effect is completed, an image in which the sword cutting is performed is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, and the sword decorative body 5001 is the second extracted sword. It becomes a state. Here, in the form of the sword decorative body 5001 in the second extraction state, the form with the aura member that is visible in the form in which the blade part 5011 is deformed by the aura member 5030 and the aura member 5030 are not visible. There is provided an aura memberless form in which the blade part 5011 that is not deformed can be visually recognized.

  First, with reference to FIG. 198 and FIG. 199, a case where the sword decorative body 5001 in the second extraction state is an aura member-less form will be described. When the sword book effect starts, the display area of the effect display device 1600 displays an image in which the warrior opens his eyes and sharpens his eyes from the enlarged image of the warrior's eyes closed in FIG. 197 (X5) described above (see FIG. 198 (A1)), an image is displayed in which the sword that was held is extracted and the opponent samurai is cut (FIG. 198 (A2)). At this time, the sword decorative body 5001 changes from the first sword state to the second sword state at the time of FIG. 198 (A1), and the blade part 5011 becomes visible to the player.

  Next, when the sword decorative body 5001 is in the second sword state and a predetermined period of time elapses, the sword decorative body 5001 is operated by a sword, that is, the handle portion 5012 of the sword portion 5010 from which the player jumps out of the sheath portion 5020. In order to function as an operation means capable of accepting an operation of pushing the blade 5011 downward so that the blade portion 5011 is housed in the sheath portion 5020, an operation effective period for effectively detecting the blade operation of the sword ornament 5001 is generated. At this time, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an operation promotion effect that prompts a sword operation of the sword ornament 5001 is performed. Specifically, a sword in the same form as the second sword state of the sword decorative body 5001 is displayed, and an image indicating the operation direction and the operation validity period is displayed together with the message “Put the sword!” (FIG. 198 ( A3)). In the sword decorative body 5001, the LED on the internal LED board 5011c blinks to indicate that the operation is valid. In addition, the image in the operation promotion effect is preferably an image related to a series of rai, so that the operation effect image is displayed in front of the image immediately before the rai cut scene image (FIG. 198 (A2)). (Refer to FIG. 204 (G2) described later).

  When the player holds the handle 5012 of the sword decorative body 5001 during the operation effective period and performs a sword storage operation to place the blade part 5011 in the sheath 5020, and the sword decorative body 5001 is in the sword storage state, A post-operation effect is performed according to the expected degree of an advantageous result, and the effect ends with a symbol type winning notification (FIG. 199). Specifically, when the symbol type is a big hit, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the cut effect image is displayed in a flashy manner (FIG. 199 (C1)), and the central decorative symbol that has been variably displayed is stopped and displayed. At the same time, with the image of the opponent's samurai defeated and the conclusion of the Iai, the central decorative symbol is the same as the left decorative symbol and the right decorative symbol in the center of the screen, that is, the big hit (here "7") Is displayed (FIG. 199 (C2)). On the other hand, when the symbol type is out of place, the cut effect image is displayed more plainly in the display area of the effect display device 1600 than in the case of the big hit (FIG. 199 (D1)), and the central decorative symbol that is variably displayed is displayed. A stop mode in which the central decorative symbol is different from the left decorative symbol and the right decorative symbol at the center of the screen, together with an image in which the opponent's samurai is not defeated at the timing of the stop display and the conclusion of the Iai cannot be settled, that is, the off mode (here "6") Is stopped and displayed (FIG. 199 (D2)).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 200, the case where the sword ornament 5001 which will be in a 2nd extraction state is a form with an aura member is demonstrated. When the sword book effect starts, the display area of the effect display device 1600 displays an image in which the warrior opens his eyes and sharpens his eyes from the enlarged image of the warrior's eyes closed in FIG. 197 (X5) (see FIG. 200 (B1)), an image of cutting the opponent's samurai by extracting the sword that was held is displayed (FIG. 200 (B2)). At this time, the sword decorative body 5001 changes from the first sword state to the second sword state at the time of FIG. 200 (B1) and is deformed by the aura member 5030 (the right aura member 5031 and the left aura member 5032). Becomes visible from the player. Here, the blade part 5011 has already been deformed by the aura member 5030 when the state changes from the first sword state to the second sword state, but this is not restrictive. First, after the blade portion 5011 is in the second extraction state so that only the blade portion 5011 is visible to the player, the aura member 5030 is changed from the closed state to the open state, and the blade portion 5011 is deformed to form the form with the aura member. The sword ornament 5001 only needs to be in the form with the aura member in the second sword state before the operation effective period is started. However, since the sword decorative body 5001 is already in the second extraction state in which the player can perform a sword operation, the appearance of the aura member 5030 can surely recognize the change in expectation, while the aura member 5030 If the operation takes time, there is a concern that an erroneous operation by the player is induced. Therefore, when the aura member 5030 is made recognizable by the player while a series of movements from the first sword state to the second sword state is performed as in this example, and the sword ornament 5001 is in the second sword state. It is preferable that the operation effective period is started immediately.

  In addition, the images of FIGS. 200B1 and 200B2 are the same as the images of FIGS. 198A1 and A2 described above. I am trying not to judge whether or not. By actually looking at the sword decorative body 5001, the player can grasp whether the form is with the aura member or without the aura member. Accordingly, the sword decorative body 5001 can be focused before the sword decorative body 5001 functions as an operation means, and the player can easily recognize the sword decorative body 5001 as the operation means and enjoy the operation effect without confusion. Can do. Note that the images displayed on the effect display device 1600 at this time do not have to be the same as described above, and may be images that are similar to the extent that the player can be directed to see the sword ornament 5001. . For example, there may be some differences in samurai images (differences in eye color and effect effects).

  Then, when the operation of the sword decorative body 5001 by the player becomes an effective operation valid period, the sword image in the operation promotion effect performed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 is in the form with the aura member same as the sword decorative body 5001. Is displayed (FIG. 200 (B3)). Since the subsequent effects are the same as those in FIG. 199 described above, description thereof will be omitted. In the case of the form with the aura member, the effect images in FIGS. 199 (C1) and (D1) described above may be displayed flashy compared to the form without the aura member.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 201, the relationship between the state change timing of the sword decorative body 5001 and the operation effective period in the sword production effect in which the sword preparation transition effect and the sword book effect are performed will be described. As shown in FIG. 201, when the reach effect is started (time t0), the rai effect is started in the display area of the effect display device 1600. First, the sword decorative body 5001 is first moved from the sword state as the sword preparation transition effect. The state changes to the extracted state (time t1). At this time, when the production pattern with the aura member is set, the aura member 5030 is in the open state from the closed state. However, even if the aura member 5030 is in the open state, the aura member 5030 is played in the game. It is provided so that it cannot be visually recognized by a person. Therefore, at the stage of the first sword state, the player knows whether or not the sword decorative body 5001 further changes to the second sword state, and if it changes, whether or not the sword decorative body 5001 is in the form with an aura member. I can't. However, when the sword preparation transition effect is executed, the sword book effect is executed, and the possibility of a form with an aura member increases. Even if the sword book effect is not executed, the sword movement suggestion effect (FIG. 196 (X3)) is executed on the effect display device 1600 before the start of the sword preparation transition effect, so that the player can move the sword. As a movable body effect corresponding to the suggestion effect, a state change (movable) of the sword decorative body 5001 from the sword state to the first sword state can be captured.

  When the sword preparation transition effect is finished, the sword book effect is subsequently started, and the sword decorative body 5001 changes from the first sword state to the second sword state (time t2). Thereafter, after a predetermined period has elapsed, the operation effective period is started, and the sword ornament 5001 functions as an operation means (time t3). When the operation valid period is reached, an operation promotion effect using a sword related to a series of living together effects is performed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. Then, when a sword insertion operation by the player is detected during the operation effective period (time tx), a post-operation effect is performed. At this time, the sword decorative body 5001 returns from the second sword state to the sword state by the sword insertion operation by the player. Then, the preset operation effective period ends and the reach state ends (time t4), and the symbol type is notified in the display area of the effect display device 1600, thereby completing a series of living effects ( Time t5). Note that the operation valid period may be ended by detecting an operation by the player, as indicated by a one-dot chain line in the figure. When no operation is detected during the operation effective period, the sword ornament 5001 is automatically returned from the second sword state to the sword storage state as the operation effective period ends.

  Here, a predetermined period (time t3-t2) from when the sword decorative body 5001 enters the second sword state until the operation effective period starts (time t3-t2) is a mode (aura member) of the sword decorative body 5001 in the second sword state. As a mode confirmation period in which it is possible to confirm whether or not it is an attached mode, a light emission mode, etc., a period longer than the operation effective period (time t4-t3) is secured. That is, even when the operation unit (sword unit 5010) that can be operated by the player is in the operation position (second sword state) that functions as the operation means, the operation reception is immediately started (the operation valid period is generated). Instead, the player can operate after confirming the final mode of the operation unit at the operation position. Thereby, the player confirms the final mode before operating the sword decorative body 5001, and inflates the expectation in the subsequent development (for example, in the case of the form with the aura member, the expectation increases), or the mental preparation As soon as the second sword state is reached, the operation validity period starts and the state of the operation means cannot be confirmed, and it is not possible to confirm the aspect of the operation means. Can be wiped off.

  Further, the sword effect of the sword decorative body 5001 is performed in a series of living effects performed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. The operation effects (time t3 to t4) as the operation means are related effects. As a result, it is possible to impress the player with the unexpectedness and the variety of performance in switching the function of the sword decorative body 5001, thereby suppressing the decrease in game entertainment that results from uniform performance by the conventional operation means. Can do.

  In addition, although the aura member 5030 is provided in the sword part 5010 (blade part 5011) itself and the aura member 5030 deform | transforms the blade part 5011 in the example of the above-mentioned production, the aura member 5035 is the sheath part of the door frame 3. The same applies to the case where the sword portion 5010 is provided with a frame side member (aura member 5035) and becomes an integral decorative body.

  In this way, the sword decorative body 5001 of this example constitutes an operation means that can change (deform or combine) the aspects of members (sword part 5010 and aura member 5030) of the same system as the general decorative movable body. doing. And the mode of the sword decorative body 5001 (sword storage state, first sword state, second sword state, form without aura member and form with aura member) is a game ball to the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004. It is determined based on the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result drawn by acceptance (see FIG. 191). Therefore, the sword decorative body 5001 can suggest the expectation that the change display has an advantageous result for the player due to the change of the aspect of the sword decorative body, and the player's interest in the operation means (sword decorative body 5001) is increased. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the entertainment interest.

  Further, before the sword ornament 5001 enters the second sword state (operation position) that can be operated by the player, the expectation is suggested by changing the state of the sword ornament 5001 from the sword state to the first sword state. doing. Moreover, the expectation degree is suggested by making the aura members 5030 and 5035 appear in the state change from the first extraction state to the second extraction state. Thus, the sword decorative body 5001 of this example changes to the expected suggestion mode (the appearance of the first sword state or the appearance of the aura member) in the process of changing from the sword state to the second sword state (operation position). The player has a strong interest in the operation means until the operation means becomes operable. In addition, when the state change of the operation means and the expectation suggestion are performed separately, specifically, the expectation is high when the operation position is moved after the expectation suggestion is performed in advance. In this mode, there is a concern that an erroneous operation that the player may operate even though the operation means is not yet in an operable position when the player grasps it, but the sword decorative body 5001 of this example is operated. Since the state change to the position and the expectation suggestion proceed simultaneously, the above-described erroneous operation can be prevented.

  In the first sword state described above, only the blade 5011a portion of the blade portion 5011 is extracted from the sheath portion 5012 so that the player cannot visually recognize the aura member 5030 (5035). A part of the aura member 5030 (5035) may be made visible in the single-sword state. At this time, the amount of extraction in the first extraction state is set to be less than the maximum extraction amount in the second extraction state (operation position). Here, the aura member 5030 (5035) is in a fully appearing state when it enters the second extraction state. Since the player can visually recognize a part of the aura member 5030 (5035) indicating that the degree of expectation is high from the first sword state, the player has a higher expectation at the time of the first sword state, Increase interest in subsequent changes.

  In addition, when the player can visually recognize a part of the aura member 5030 (5035) in the first extraction state, it is a form with an aura member (high degree of expectation) at the stage of the extraction preparation transition effect. Since the player can grasp and expect great expectations, the disappointment when the sword book production is not executed in the subsequent development becomes very large. Therefore, when the sword preparation transition effect is performed, the player's feelings are greatly shaken depending on the presence or absence of the sword book effect, and an effect with a high gaming interest can be provided.

(Variation 1-Extraction using a control button)
In the following, referring to FIG. 202 to FIG. 205, the sword effect is executed in the reach effect, and the sword decoration operation of the sword decoration body 5001 in the sword effect is triggered by the pressing operation of the operation button 410 by the player. The case will be described. 202 to 204 are examples of effect transition diagrams of the sword effect of the first modification. FIG. 205 is a timing chart showing the relationship between the state change timing of the sword ornament 5001 of Modification 1 and the operation timing of the operation means. In addition, the description similar to the above-mentioned extraction effect (FIGS. 196 to 201) is omitted as appropriate.

  Here, an effect pattern ((Y1) to (Y3) → (E1) and (E2) in the figure) in which no sword preparation transition effect is performed and no sword book effect is performed, and after the sword preparation transition effect is executed About the production pattern ((Y1) to (Y3) → (F1) to (F3) → (G1) to (G4)) in the drawing, the screen transition of the production display device 1600 and the state of the operation button 410 are performed. The transition and operation transition of the sword ornament 5001 will be described.

  When the reach effect is started, the gait effect is started in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (FIG. 202 (Y1)), and an effect suggesting the operation of the operation button 410 by displaying the operation button image to which the effect is added. Is performed (FIG. 202 (Y2)). Then, when the operation effective period of the operation button 410 is started, an image display of the operation button to be operated and a gauge display of the operation effective period are performed, and an operation promotion effect that prompts the player to perform an operation is performed (FIG. 202 ( Y3) At this time, the operation button 410 to be operated is lit, and the image display operation button is also displayed in the same light emission mode, so that the player can easily perform the operation effect of the operation button 410. Note that the light emission of the operation button 410 is terminated when an operation by the player is detected.

  When the sword preparation transition effect and the sword main effect are not performed and the result is a losing result, when a pressing operation to the operation button 410 by the player is detected, the reach effect is finished in the display area of the effect display device 1600. An image for informing the result of the deviation (“767”) is displayed (FIG. 203 (E1) and (E2)), and the effect is ended. At this time, the sword ornament 5001 and the operation button 410 are not changed.

  In addition, when the sword main effect is performed after the sword preparation transition effect is executed, when the player presses the operation button 410, the sword decorative body 5001 changes from the sword state to the first sword state. A drawing preparation transition effect is performed (FIG. 203 (F1) and (F2)). At this time, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, a white character of “Tengu” is displayed on the blackout screen (FIG. 203 (F1)), and an image is displayed in which an allied samurai is about to touch the sword. (FIG. 203 (F2)). Next, the extracted sword effect in which the sword decorative body 5001 changes from the first sword state to the second sword state (form with the aura member) is started (FIG. 203 (F3), FIGS. 204 (G2) and (G2)). At this time, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, when the sword decorative body 5001 is changed from the first sword state to the second sword state (form with the aura member) by the sword main effect, immediately before FIG. 203 (F2) and immediately after 204 (G1), the image of running lightning is interrupted and displayed on the blackout screen as shown in FIG. 203 (F3), and the form of the sword decorative body 5001 (whether it has an aura member or not) ) Along with the strength of lightning, the degree of expectation that will win in the Iai will be shown.

  The subsequent effects are the same as those shown in FIGS. 198 (A2), (A3), and 199 described above. When the sword ornament 5001 is in the second extraction state and a predetermined period of time elapses, the sword ornament 5001 is attached to the player. In order to function as an operation means capable of effectively accepting the above operation, an operation effective period in which the sword operation of the sword ornament 5001 is detected effectively is generated. Then, the player is prompted to perform a sword insertion operation within the effective period of operation (FIG. 204 (G2)), and the player is notified of the symbol type (win or miss) by the sword operation by the player (FIG. 204 (G3) or ( G4)).

  Next, with reference to a timing chart shown in FIG. 205, the operation of the operation button 410 and the sword decorative body 5001 by the player and the state change of the sword decorative body 5001 will be described. The first modification is characterized in that the operation of the operation button 410 by the player starts a state change of the sword ornament 5001. When the reach effect is started (time t0), the operation effective period of the operation button 410 is generated at an early stage, and an operation promotion effect is urged to prompt the player to operate the operation button 410 (time t1). Then, when the player operates (time ty) within the operation effective period of the operation button 410 (time t1 to t2), the sword decorative body 5001 starts to change state, and first changes from the sword storage state to the first sword extraction state. Here, in the first extraction state, the player cannot determine whether or not the aura member 5030 appears (whether or not the blade part 5011 is deformed by the aura member 5030). Thereafter, the sword ornament 5001 changes from the first sword state to the second sword state (time t2), and after a predetermined time has elapsed, the sword ornament 5001 is operated to operate as the operation means. When an effective period occurs, an operation promotion effect is made to prompt the player to operate the sword ornament 5001 (time t3), and the player operates within the operation effective period of the sword ornament 5001 (time t3 to t4) ( At time tx), the decorative pattern in the reach state is stopped, the result is notified, and the effect is ended (time t5). Note that if the operation of the operation button 410 by the player is not detected within the operation effective period of the operation button 410 set in advance (time t1 to t2), the sword decorative body 5001 is in the final form (the first form) You may make it deform | transform and change a state at a stretch in the form with the aura member of a double sword state. In addition, the state change timing from the first sword state to the second sword state changes according to the operation of the operation button 410 by the player, that is, changes to the second sword state after the first sword state and a certain time has elapsed. It may be. In addition, when the operation of the sword ornament 5001 by the player is not detected within the preset operation effective period of the sword ornament 5001 (time t3 to t4), the sword ornament 5001 is second when the operation effective period ends. The sword is returned to the sword state.

  In the first modification, the state change timing of the sword ornament 5001 is determined by the operation of the operation button 410 or the sword ornament 5001 by the player. The sword decoration body 5001 extraction operation start timing is determined by the operation of the operation button 410 (time ty), and the sword decoration body 5001 insertion operation start timing is determined by the operation of the sword decoration body 5001 (time tx). As described above, the movement of the sword ornament 5001 is reversed (the sword operation and the sword operation) depending on which operation means of the operation button 410 or the sword ornament 5001 is to be operated. Periods (time t1 to t2 and time t3 to t4) are provided so as not to overlap. Therefore, even if the other operation means is operated during the operation effective period of one operation means, it becomes invalid.

  As described above, in the first modification, the state change of the sword ornament 5001 is started based on the operation of the operation button 410 by the player. Therefore, the form (final form) when the sword decorative body 5001 functions as the operating means is determined by the operation of the operation button 410 by the player (for example, the sword decorative body 5001 is deformed and changes its state, and the form with the aura member is provided. To the second sword state). Thereby, the operation value of the operation button 410 can be further increased, and the player's willingness to operate can be increased.

  Further, in the display area of the effect display device 1600 based on the operation of the operation button 410 by the player, effect images corresponding to the deformation and state change of the sword ornament 5001 (FIGS. 203 (F1) to (F3) → FIG. (G1) and (G2)) are displayed, so that the operation value of the operation button 410 can be further increased and the interest of the game can be increased.

(Modification 2-Stage aura extraction using operation buttons)
In the following, with reference to FIGS. 206 to 210, based on the first modification, the degree of appearance of the aura member 5035 in the form with the aura member of the sword decorative body 5001, specifically, the uniting of the aura member 5035 with the blade part 5011. A case where the degree (aura level) is changed according to the number of times the player operates the operation button 410 will be described. FIG. 206 to FIG. 210 are examples of effect transition diagrams of the extraction effect of the second modification. In addition, description is abbreviate | omitted suitably about the same effect as the above-mentioned.

  The aura level provided here has 0 to 3 steps. The aura level 0 indicates a completely accommodated state where the aura member 5035 is not visually recognized by the player (FIG. 195 (A)). The aura level 3 is a fully appearing state in which the aura member 5035 is visible to the maximum extent by the player as a result of the aura member 5035 being combined with the blade portion 5011 in the second extracted state while maintaining the relative positional relationship in the state of the sword. 195 (B)). The aura level 1 indicates a 1/3 appearance state in which the aura member 5035 appears to be visible to the player by one third of the complete appearance state. The aura level 2 indicates a 2/3 appearance state in which the aura member 5035 appears to be visible to the player by two-thirds of the complete appearance state.

  Here, there are no production patterns (Z1 to (Z3) → (H1) and (H2) in the figure) in which no sword preparation transition effect is performed or no sword book production is performed, and there is no sword preparation transition effect. Is a case where a sword book effect is performed, and an effect pattern (in the drawing) in which the sword decorative body 5001 becomes a final form (a form with an aura member in a complete appearance state (aura level 3)) by operating the operation button 410 once. (Z1) to (Z3) → (I1) and (I2) → (G1) to (G4)), a plurality of operations of the operation button 410 are required, and the aura level of the sword ornament 5001 changes stepwise. For the effect patterns ((Z1) to (Z3) → (J1) to (I2) → (G1) to (G4)) to be performed, the screen transition of the effect display device 1600, the state transition of the operation button 410, and the sword ornament Explain the operation transition of 5001 That.

  In the above-described first modification, the final form (form at the time of operation) of the sword decorative body 5001 is determined by one operation of the operation button 410, but in the second modification, the operation button 410 is operated step by step by a plurality of operations. A step operation effect of changing the aura level of the sword decorative body 5001 by combining the aura member 5035 with the blade part 5011 is performed.

  First, in the effect pattern in which the sword preparation transition effect is not performed and the sword book effect is not performed, that is, in the effect pattern in which the state of the sword decorative body 5001 does not change even when the operation button 410 is operated, FIG. (Y1) to (Y3) → The same effect transition as in FIGS. 203 (E1) and (E2) is followed (FIGS. 206 (Z1) to (Z3) → FIGS. 207 (H1) and (H2)).

  In addition, although there is no sword preparation transition effect, the sword main effect is performed, and the sword decoration body 5001 is in a final form (complete appearance state (aura level 3) with an aura member by one operation of the operation button 410. ), The operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected after the same effects as in FIGS. 202 (Y1) to (Y3) of the first modification (FIG. 206 (Z1) to (Z3)). Then, the sword decorative body 5001 changes its state from the sword state to the second sword state. At this time, the aura member 5035 of the sword decorative body 5001 is united with the blade part 5011 while maintaining the relative positional relationship with the blade part 5011 in the sword delivery state, and when the sword decorative body 5001 enters the second sword state, it completely appears. The state (aura level 3) is reached (FIG. 207 (I1)). Although the form with the aura member of the sword decorative body 5001 of the first modified example is configured by the aura member 5030 and the modified example 2 is configured by the aura member 5035, other effects are the same as those of the first modified example. 203 (F1) (F2) → The same effect transition as in FIG. 204 is followed (FIGS. 207 (I1) (I2) → FIGS. 204 (G1) to (G4)).

  Further, there is no sword preparation transition effect, but the sword book effect is performed. In the effect pattern in which the operation button 410 is required to be operated a plurality of times and the aura level of the sword decorative body 5001 changes stepwise, 1 Until the operation of the first operation button 410, the same effect transition as before is followed (FIGS. 206 (Z1) to (Z3)), but the sword ornament 5001 after the first operation is in the second sword state from the sword state. However, the aura member 5035 is in a completely accommodated state (aura level 0) that is not visually recognized by the player. The image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 at this time is the same image as FIG. 207 (I1) described above (FIG. 208 (J1)).

  Next, an operation effect of the second operation button 410 is started. When the operation effective period of the operation button 410 starts, an operation promotion image that prompts the player to operate the operation button 410 is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, and the operation promotion effect in which the operation button 410 to be operated is illuminated and decorated. Is performed (FIG. 208 (J2)). And if operation of the operation button 410 by a player is detected, the next production will be performed according to the preset aura levels 0-3.

  First, when the set aura level is “0” (that is, in the case of no aura member configuration), the aura member 5035 maintains the fully accommodated state even if the operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected. In the display area of the display device 1600, the staged operation effect is terminated (hereinafter, there is no operation button 410 operation request), and it is notified that the sword effect (Iai effect) corresponding to the sword decorative body 5001 in the second extracted state is returned. An image (here, white letters “Iza”) is displayed on the blackout screen (FIG. 208 (J3)). Thereafter, the sword decorative body 5001 is in the form without an aura member, and the same effect transition as in FIG. 203 (F2) → FIG. 204 in the above-described modification 1 is followed in the effect mode (color, sound, etc.) corresponding to the aura level 0. (FIG. 208 (J4) → FIG. 204 (G1) to (G4)).

  On the other hand, when the set aura level is any one of “1” to “3”, when the operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected, the aura member 5035 is changed from the fully accommodated state to the 1/3 appearance state. Become. In the display area of the effect display device 1600, an image indicating the aura level 1 is displayed (FIG. 208 (J5)). At this time, the sword decorative body 5001 is illuminated and decorated in green indicating the aura level 1.

  Next, an operation effect of the third operation button 410 is started. When the operation valid period of the operation button 410 starts, an operation promotion image that prompts the player to operate the operation button 410 is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, and the operation promotion effect in which the operation button 410 to be operated is illuminated and decorated. Is done. At this time, an image indicating the aura level 1 is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (FIG. 209 (K1)). At this time, the emission color of the operation button 410 may be green indicating the aura level 1. And if operation of the operation button 410 by a player is detected, the following effect will be performed according to the preset aura level.

  When the aura level is “1”, the aura member 5035 remains in the 1/3 appearance state even when the operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected, and the step operation effect is ended in the display area of the effect display device 1600 ( After that, there is no operation request for the operation button 410), and an image that informs the user that the operation returns to the sword effect (Iai effect) corresponding to the sword ornament 5001 in the second sword state (in this case, the message “Izai” on the blackout screen) (White character) is displayed, and an image indicating aura level 1 is displayed (FIG. 209 (K2)). After that, the sword decorative body 5001 is in a form with an aura member in the state of 1/3 appearance, and in the production mode (color, sound, etc.) according to the aura level 1, FIG. 203 (F2) → FIG. The same effect transition is followed (FIG. 209 (K3) → FIG. 204 (G1) to (G4)). At this time, an image indicating the aura level 1 is always displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600.

  When the aura level is “2” or “3”, when the operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected, the aura member 5035 changes from the 1/3 appearance state to the 2/3 appearance state. In the display area of the effect display device 1600, an image indicating the aura level 2 is displayed (FIG. 209 (K4)). At this time, the sword decorative body 5001 is illuminated and decorated in red indicating the aura level 2.

  Next, the fourth operation effect of the operation button 410 is started. When the operation valid period of the operation button 410 starts, an operation promotion image that prompts the player to operate the operation button 410 is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 together with an image indicating the aura level 2, and the operation button 410 to be operated is displayed. An operation promotion effect decorated with light emission is performed (FIG. 209 (K5)). At this time, the emission color of the operation button 410 may be red indicating the aura level 2. And if operation of the operation button 410 by a player is detected, the following effect will be performed according to the preset aura level.

  When the aura level is “2”, the aura member 5035 maintains the 2/3 appearance state even if the operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected, and the step operation effect ends in the display area of the effect display device 1600. (After this, there is no operation request for the operation button 410), and an image that informs the user of returning to the sword effect (Iai effect) corresponding to the sword ornament 5001 in the second sword state (in this case, “Izai” on the blackout screen) ) And an image indicating the aura level are displayed (FIG. 210 (M1)). After that, the sword decorative body 5001 is in a form with an aura member in the appearance of 2/3, and in the production mode (color, sound, etc.) according to the aura level 2, FIG. 203 (F2) of FIG. The same effect transition is followed (FIG. 210 (M1) → FIG. 204 (G1) to (G4)). At this time, an image indicating the aura level 2 is always displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600.

  When the aura level is “3”, when an operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected, the aura member 5035 changes from the 2/3 appearance state to the complete appearance state. In the display area of the effect display device 1600, an image indicating an aura level 3 (MAX) is displayed (FIG. 210 (L1)). At this time, the sword decorative body 5001 is illuminated and decorated in a rainbow color indicating an aura level 3. Subsequently, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the step operation effect is terminated (after that, there is no operation request for the operation button 410), and the sword effect (Iai effect) corresponding to the sword decorative body 5001 in the second sword state is obtained. An image notifying that the user is returning (in this case, a white character of “Iza”) is displayed on the blackout screen, and an image indicating an aura level 3 is displayed (FIG. 210 (L2)). After that, the sword decorative body 5001 is in a form with an aura member in a completely appearing state, and is similar to that in FIG. 203 (F2) → FIG. 204 of the above-described modification 1 in an effect mode (color, sound, etc.) according to the aura level 3. The effect transition is traced (FIG. 210 (L3) → FIG. 204 (G1) to (G4)). At this time, an image indicating the aura level 3 is always displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600.

  In the above, the range of visibility from the player is increased by changing the degree of uniting of the aura member 5035 with the blade portion 5011 each time the aura level is raised, but this increases the appearance level. Not limited to. Even if the aura level is increased, the aura level is fixed without increasing the appearance level of the aura member 5035 (specifically, when the white character “Izai” is displayed on the blackout screen), the determined aura level. You may be made to perform the stock-type coalescence which unites the aura member 5035 with the blade part 5011 at a stretch so that it may become the appearance according to a level. Further, the object whose degree of appearance is increased in stages is not limited to the aura member 5035, but may be the sword part 5010 (the blade part 5011). For example, the state of the sword portion 5010 (the blade portion 5011) may be changed stepwise from the first sword state to the second sword state.

  As described above, in the second modification, since the player is required to operate the other non-movable operation button 410 while the sword decorative body 5001 functioning as the operation means is in a movable state, it is surprisingly novel. Operation effects can be provided, and the entertainment of the game can be further enhanced as compared with the first modification. In addition, since the stage is developed step by step by giving multiple operational opportunities to the player, it is possible to impress the player with great involvement in the stage and prevent the interest in the stage from being interrupted. be able to. Further, since the confirmed aura level is reported so as to be recognizable even in the subsequent effects, the player can feel the aftereffect of the operation effects.

(Another production pattern 1 using the sword ornament 5001)
Next, another reach effect using the sword ornament 5001 will be described with reference to FIGS. 211 to 213. 211 to 213 are diagrams illustrating screen transitions of the effect display device 1600 and operation transitions of the sword ornament 5001 in the princess reach effect. Here, the following points are mainly different from the sword decorative body 5001 described above. First, the sword decorative body 5001 in the sword state functions as an operation means, and detects the sword operation by the player. Secondly, the sheath portion 5020 provided on the door frame 3 is configured to be movable in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. It can operate up to the front center.

  When the changing pattern forms the reach state, the display of the effect display device 1600 displays the change display of the three decorative symbols in the reach state (FIG. 211 (A1)), and the start image of the princess reach is displayed (FIG. 211 (A2)). Here, above the display area of the effect display device 1600, a specific decorative member SDY (a glimpse) that can be moved in the vertical direction is provided. In a normal state, the specific decorative member SDY does not overlap with the display area of the effect display device 1600 in a front view, and a part of the bag is stationary in a state (initial state) visible from the player above the display area. Yes. At this time, the sword ornament 5001 is in a sword state.

  In the princess reach production, after the image of the princess heading in the back of the cocoon is displayed (FIG. 211 (A3)), an operation effect suggestion image that suggests an operation effect is displayed (FIG. 211 (B1)). Then, the operation effect period for accepting the operation of the sword decoration body 5001 starts when the operation effect of the sword decoration body 5001 is started, and the player is prompted to operate the sword decoration body 5001 in the display area of the effect display device 1600. An operation promotion image and a gauge indicating the operation effective period are displayed (FIG. 212 (B2)). At this time, the sword decorative body 5001 and the specific decorative member SDY are moved in small increments in the vertical direction from when the operation effect suggestion image is displayed until the operation promotion image and the gauge indicating the operation effective period are displayed. Also good. When a player's sword operation is detected, an effect is performed according to a preset development pattern or end pattern.

  The sword extraction operation by the player refers to an operation in which the player grasps the handle 5012 of the sword decorative body 5001 in a sword storage state and lifts the sword portion 5010 upward to extract the blade portion 5011 from the sheath portion 5020. When the sword decorative body 5001 is changed from the sword state to the second sword state, a sword operation by the player is detected, and a detection notification operation for notifying the player of the detection is performed. The detection notification operation may be an operation that allows the player to feel an operation different from his / her own sword operation through the handle 5012 gripped by the player, such as movement or vibration of the sword 5010 (or handle 5012) moving up and down. That's fine. Further, the detection notification operation is performed for a certain period after the operation is detected, and the operation can be visually recognized even when the player removes his / her hand from the handle 5012. For this reason, since the player can visually confirm the operation detection, unnecessary contact with the sword decorative body 5001 (such as grasping again for detection confirmation) can be reduced, and failure or breakage of the movable body can be prevented. Can do.

  In the sword operation by the player here, the aura member 5030 (5035) does not appear, but according to the degree of expectation, the aura member 5030 (5035) appears visibly from the player when the player performs the sword operation. You may do it.

  When the end pattern is performed, when the player's sword operation is detected, the specific decorative member SDY does not overlap the display area of the effect display device 1600 and remains stationary above the display area (initially State) and a screen indicating the end of the operation effect by the sword ornament 5001 is displayed (FIG. 212 (C1)). Then, the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the off mode “767” (FIG. 212 (C2)). At this time, the sword decorative body 5001 is returned to the sword state at the timing when the stop result of FIG. 212 (C2) is notified, but is not limited to this, and is returned to the sword state at the timing when the detection notification operation is finished. You may do it.

  On the other hand, in the case where the development pattern is performed, when a player's sword operation is detected, the specific decorative member SDY (a glimpse) is centered on the front surface overlapping the display area of the effect display device 1600 (below the display area). The drop display is movable so that only the hold display area is visible (all fall state) (FIG. 212 (D1)) Next, a princess's shadow is projected on the display area of the effect display device 1600. At this time, the sword ornament 5001 maintains the second sword state (FIG. 212 (D2)) Note that at this time, a plurality of patterns of the shadow of the princess projected on the display area of the effect display device 1600 may be provided. The shadow color, the size of the shadow, and the comments that are displayed afterwards may be used to suggest the expectation level of the lottery result by Hime Reach (such as the winning expectation and the game profit when winning)

  Then, after the sword decorative body 5001 is brought into the second sword state by the player's sword operation, that is, when a predetermined period has elapsed since the shadow of the princess is projected on the display area of the effect display device 1600, The sword decorative body 5001 moves to the front left-right center of the display area of the effect display device 1600 by moving the sheath 5020 provided on the door frame 3 (FIG. 212 (D3)). Then, when the sword decorative body 5001 reaches the center position on the front surface of the display area of the effect display device 1600, the specific decorative member SDY returns from the total fall state to the initial state, and the display area of the effect display device 1600 that has good visibility is displayed. An image of a princess who is surprised when the bag is removed is displayed (FIG. 213 (D4)). Thereafter, the sword decorative body 5001 returns to the position where the original sword operation has been performed again, and in the display area of the effect display device 1600, when the result of the current variable display is a hit, the hit with the smiling princess is notified. An image is displayed (FIGS. 213 (E1) and (E2)), and an image informing the detachment is displayed together with the princess who is sad when the detachment occurs (FIGS. 213 (F1) and (F2)).

  When a player's sword operation is detected, the detection notification operation is performed as described above, but the movable effect that the sword ornament 5001 moves to the center in the front left / right direction of the display area of the effect display device 1600 is performed. When the player cannot move because the player is holding it, an announcement or display such as “Please release the sword” is performed. Even if the player does not stop holding the sword decorative body 5001, the performance itself proceeds, but the sword decorative body 5001 is operated by the player at the movable motion timing in the horizontal direction of the sword decorative body 5001 (FIG. 212 (D3)). When held in the performed position, it causes a delay in the movable effect in the left-right direction. However, regardless of whether or not the sword decorative body 5001 has been moved in the left-right direction, the effect that is executed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 and the drop movable effect of the specific decorative member SDY (a combination object) have progressed. Since it is comprised so that game progress may not stagnate. Note that the sword ornament 5001 may be configured to immediately perform a movable effect in the left-right direction when the player releases the holding of the sword ornament 5001, or is configured not to perform the movable effect. May be.

  As described above, in the princess reach production, the specific decorative member SDY that suggested the operation effect (operation effective) of the sword decorative body 5001 is dropped and moved by the sword decoration operation (vertical movement) of the sword decorative body 5001 by the player. At the same time, the sword decorative body 5001 itself operated outside the display area of the effect display device 1600 is moved forward of the effect display device 1600 (to the operation position) by moving the sheath 5020 provided on the door frame 3. It can be moved in the left direction). That is, based on the sword operation by the player, the sword ornament 5001 itself can be moved to an operation position different from the operation position where the sword operation has been performed, increasing the player's operation value and the player's willingness to operate. Can be suppressed. In addition, since one operation means can be operated in a stepwise manner (up and down direction during operation and left and right after operation) depending on the player's operation, an effect using a plurality of movable modes is provided. The operation value of the operation means can be increased as compared with the conventional operation means having only one movable mode. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in gaming interest.

  The left and right movable effects of the sword decorative body 5001 are effect display for the purpose of performing an effect that is integrated with the effect image performed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 and the specific decorative member SDY (a glimpse). Although the operation position outside the display area of the device 1600 is displaced to the operation position in front of the display area of the effect display device 1600, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, after the sword decorative body 5001 is positioned in front of the display area of the effect display device 1600 and the sword decorative body 5001 is moved, the sword decorative body 5001 is moved to be positioned outside the display area of the effect display device 1600. Alternatively, a left-right direction movable effect that is displaced to the left (left end of the frame) may be performed. In addition, since the player's operation of the sword decorative body 5001 of this example is an upward / downward motion (a sword operation for pulling the sword portion 5011 upward from the bottom), the sword decorative body 5001 that is performed after the operation is based on the operation. In the movable effect, it is desirable that the sword ornament 5001 operates in a direction (left and right direction as in this example) different from the operation direction (in this case, the vertical direction) at the time of the player's operation.

  Also, when a player's sword operation is detected, a detection notification operation is performed to notify the player of the detection via the operation unit (sword unit 5010) operated by the player, so that the player accurately determines the operation end timing. Can be judged. In addition, since the detection notification operation is performed so that the player can visually confirm for a certain period of time, unnecessary contact such as touching the operation unit again for detection confirmation can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from continuing the operation and delaying the subsequent moving effect of the sword ornament 5001 or damaging the movable body due to unnecessary contact. Further, when the movable effect cannot be executed by contact with the sword decorative body 5001 even after the detection notification operation, a warning such as an announcement is given to release the player's hand, and the operation is requested during the operation effective period. Even after the operation means has been detected and notified, even contact is prohibited, so that the operation value of the operation means can be increased.

(Another production pattern 2 using the sword ornament 5001)
Next, another reach effect using the sword ornament 5001 will be described with reference to FIGS. 214 to 216. 214 to 216 are diagrams for explaining the screen transition of the effect display device 1600, the state transition of the operation button 410, and the operation transition of the sword ornament 5001 in the reach effect including the operation effect of the operation button 410 that is used in many ways. is there. Here, as an operation effect of the operation button 410, a pattern (A (B) → N in the figure) in which an expectation suggestion effect that suggests an expectation that a variation being executed is a big hit and an operation of the operation button 410 are performed. A pattern ((A) (B) → M in the figure) in which an operation effect of the sword decorative body 5001 is suggested and developed as an effect will be described.

  In the reach effect here, when the variation display of the three decorative symbols is in the reach state in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (FIG. 214A), first, an operation valid period for accepting the pressing operation of the operation button 410 is set. An operation promotion effect is started to prompt the player to press the operation button 410 (FIG. 214B). In the display area of the effect display device 1600, the image of the operation means (operation button 410) to be operated and the operation valid period are displayed, and the operation button 410 to be operated is decorated with light emission. At this time, the sword decorative body 5001 maintains the sword state. Then, when a pressing operation on the operation button 410 by the player is detected, an effect is performed according to a previously set effect pattern.

  First, in a pattern in which an expectation suggestion effect is performed by a pressing operation of the operation button 410, when a pressing operation to the operation button 410 by a player is detected, an effect image is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. After that (FIG. 214 (N1)), an image suggesting the big hit expectation is displayed (FIG. 215 (N2)). Thereafter, the result of the current fluctuation display (big hit, miss) is notified (FIG. 215 (N3) or (N4)). Note that a pre-reading effect may be performed instead of the expectation suggestion effect for the variable display being executed. For example, instead of the image indicating the expectation (FIG. 215 (N2)), the display is performed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. A character that changes the held display may be displayed.

  Further, in the pattern in which the operation effect of the sword decorative body 5001 is suggested and developed by the pressing operation of the operation button 410, when the player presses the operation button 410, the display area of the effect display device 1600 is displayed. FIG. 214 (M1) in which an effect image suggesting that an operation effect requesting the sword operation of the sword ornament 5001 is performed. Next, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, a start image of the operation effect of the sword ornament 5001 (here, the message “Title chance to extract the sword” and the explanation of the operation “Take me a sword” message) is displayed. At the same time, the sword decorative body 5001 changes from the sword state to the second sword state. The sword decorative body 5001 at this time is in a form with an aura member in which the blade part 5011 is deformed by the maximum operation of the aura member 5030 (FIG. 216 (M2)). Subsequently, when a predetermined period of time has passed after entering the second sword state and the operation effective period of the sword decorative body 5001 starts, the specific decorative member SDY (a saddle accessory) is moved in small increments in the vertical direction in the initial state. In the display area of the display device 1600, an operation promotion image for prompting the player to perform a sword insertion operation of the sword ornament 5001 and a gauge indicating the operation valid period are displayed (FIG. 216 (M3)). When a player's sword operation is detected, an effect based on the result of the current variation display is performed.

  In the case where the result of the current variation display is a big hit, when the player's sword operation is detected, the specific decorative member SDY (a saddle accessory) is dropped and moved from the initial state to the fully dropped state ( FIG. 216 (M4)). Next, when the specific decorative member SDY (a combination object) is returned to the initial state again, a big hit is notified to the display area of the effect display device 1600 in which the overlap with the specific decoration member SDY (the combination object) is released. The image (decoration pattern stop mode “777”, “brilliant” message) is displayed (FIG. 216 (M5)). On the other hand, when the result of the current variation display is out of order, when the player's sword operation is detected, the specific decorative member SDY (a saddle accessory) is only stopped in small increments in the initial state. In the display area of the effect display device 1600, an image (decoration pattern stop mode “767”) notifying the dislocation is displayed (FIG. 216 (M6)).

  As described above, the pressing operation of the operation button 410 enables various effects such as suggesting the degree of expectation and developing the operation effects of the other operation means (sword ornament 5001). The subsequent expansion cannot be specified at the time of operating. Therefore, the player's interest in the operation of the operation button 410 can be increased, and the decrease in the willingness to operate and the decrease in the game interest can be suppressed due to the monotonous effect after the operation.

  In the series of reach productions, the first operation (press operation of the operation button 410) and the second operation (sword operation of the sword ornament 5001) have different operation modes (press operation and sword operation). The player is requested based on the above operation (the pressing operation of the operation button 410). Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's interest in participating in the operation, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the gaming interest that is a concern due to the monotonous operation that does not appear instead.

  In this example, the operation button 410 is used as an effective operation means as the first operation opportunity, and the second operation opportunity (sword operation of the sword decorative body 5001) is given based on the pressing operation of the operation button 410. However, it is not limited to this. As a first operation opportunity, the sword operation of the sword ornament 5001 may be an effective operation. The operation means effective for the second operation opportunity in this case targets the sword ornament 5001 rather than the operation button 410 having a lower expectation than the first sword ornament 5001. Is desirable.

(Other performance pattern 3 using sword ornament 5001)
Subsequently, another reach effect using the above-described sword ornament 5001 will be described with reference to FIGS. 217 to 221. FIG. 217 to FIG. 221 are diagrams for explaining the screen transition of the effect display device 1600, the state transition of the operation button 410, and the operation transition of the sword ornament 5001 in the reach effect. Here, a pattern ((A) (B1) (B2) → O in the figure) that becomes a big hit when the specific decorative member SDY (a saddle accessory) moves based on the pressing operation of the operation button 410, and the operation button 410 Even if the specific decorative member SDY (a combination object) does not move based on the pressing operation, and is displayed in a deviating manner, the display is re-varied from the deviating manner and the player is given an opportunity to operate again. Pattern ((A) (B1) (B2) → (P1)-(P4) in the figure → R when an opportunity to operate the sword ornament 5001 is given or R when an opportunity to operate the operation button 410 is given) Will be described.

  In the reach effect here, when the variation display of the three decorative symbols is in the reach state in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (FIG. 217 (A)), first, the start image (in this case, the operation effect of the operation button 410). , The message “Move the movable body with a single button hit” is displayed (FIG. 217 (B)), then the operation valid period for accepting the pressing operation of the operation button 410 is started, and the pressing operation of the operation button 410 is performed. A prompting operation promotion effect is performed (FIG. 217 (C)). In the display area of the effect display device 1600, the image of the operation means (operation button 410) to be operated, the number of operations, and the operation valid period are displayed, and the operation button 410 to be operated is decorated with light emission. At this time, the sword decorative body 5001 maintains the sword state. Then, when a pressing operation on the operation button 410 by the player is detected, an effect is performed according to a previously set effect pattern. The pressing operation of the operation button 410 is not limited to one stroke (one time) but may be repeated (multiple times). In addition, the specific decorative member SDY (a combination object) is moved in small increments in the vertical direction in the initial state during the operation effective period of the operation button 410 so that the player can easily grasp the object (movable body) that is moved by the operation. You may do it. Further, when the sword decorative body 5001 becomes an operation target later, the sword decorative body 5001 may be changed in state from the sword storage state to the second sword extraction state at this time.

  In a pattern in which the specific decorative member SDY (a combination object) moves and is a big hit, when a pressing operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected, the specific decoration member SDY (a combination object) is in a fully dropped state from the initial state. Is moved so as to become (FIG. 218 (O1)). Next, when the specific decorative member SDY is returned to the initial state again, the display area of the effect display device 1600 that has been de-duplicated with the specific decorative member SDY (playing object) is displayed with an image (decorative symbol of the decorative symbol). Stop mode “777”, “Superb” message) is displayed (FIG. 218 (O2)). At this time, the operation button 410 may be vibrated.

  In a pattern in which the specific decorative member SDY (a saddle accessory) does not move, when a pressing operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected, the specific decorative member SDY (a saddle accessory) is only allowed to move by being stopped in small steps. Not. Then, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, a decorative pattern with a shift mode (“767”) is displayed in a rocking manner at the center of the screen (FIG. 219 (P1)). The decorative design is developed into a pattern (FIG. 219 (P2)) that is stopped and displayed in an off mode (“767”) or a revived pattern in which the reach state is restored again.

  In the revival pattern, the display area of the effect display device 1600 has a revival start image (says “Madaja”) indicating that the variation display has not yet ended from the swinging display of the decorative pattern in the off-state of FIG. 219 (P1). (Samurai image) is inserted (FIG. 219 (P3)), the decorative design is again reached and reduced in the upper right of the screen, and the operation means of either the operation button 410 or the sword decorative body 5001 is displayed at the center of the screen. An operation effective suggestion image (a face with closed eyes of a friendly samurai) is displayed (FIG. 219 (P4)). Then, with the passage of time, the displayed eyes of the samurai are displayed in an enlarged manner, and the specific decorative member SDY (a spear object) is moved in small increments in the vertical direction in the initial state (FIG. 219 (P5)). Thereby, the player raises a sense of expectation that an effect using the specific decorative member SDY (a glimpse) is performed. Further, at this time, the operation button 410 may be decorated with light emission in a high-speed blinking manner, or the sword decoration body 5001 may be moved up and down by changing from the sword insertion state to the first sword extraction state. The operation button 410 or the sword decorative body 5001 functions as an effective operation means according to the set production pattern, and the specific decorative member SDY based on the pressing operation of the operation button 410 or the sword operation of the sword decorative body 5001. (Samurai character) is performed. Note that the pattern for which the operation button 410 is an operation target is set to have a lower expectation than the pattern for which the sword ornament 5001 is an operation target.

  When the operation button 410 is used as the operation means, an image (operation button confirmed image) in which sweat is blotted on the forehead of the samurai of the operation effective suggestion image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 is displayed. 410 is decorated with light emission (FIG. 220 (R1)). The operation of the operation button 410 is started while the operation button 410 is light-decorated while the specific decoration member SDY (a combination object) continues to move in small increments, and an operation that prompts the user to press the operation button 410. A promotion effect is performed (FIG. 220 (R2)). In the display area of the effect display device 1600, the image of the operation means (operation button 410) to be operated, the number of operations, and the operation valid period are displayed. Here, if the operation button 410 is operated the required number of times, it is not decorated with light emission.

  Then, when the result of the variable display is a big hit, when the player presses the operation button 410, the specific decorative member SDY (a combination object) is dropped from the initial state to the fully dropped state. (FIG. 220 (R3)). At this time, the decorative design displayed at the upper right of the display area of the effect display device 1600 is stopped and displayed at the lower right of the screen so as to be visible from the player. It should be noted that, similarly to the above (FIG. 216 (M4)), it may be difficult for the player to grasp the form of the decorative symbol at this point. Next, the display area of the effect display device 1600 in which the specific decorative member SDY (glazing accessory) is restored from the all-dropped state to the initial state again and the overlap with the specific decorative member SDY (glazing accessory) is displayed on the screen. An image for notifying the jackpot is displayed in the center (decoration pattern stop mode “777”, “brilliant” message) (FIG. 220 (R4)).

  On the other hand, in the case where the result of the variable display is out of order, when a pressing operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected, the small decorative movement of the specific decorative member SDY (a saddle character) is stopped, and the effect display device 1600 In the display area, the decorative pattern of the shift mode (“767”) is stopped and displayed at the center of the screen (FIG. 220 (R5)).

  When the sword decorative body 5001 is used as the operation means, an image (sword decorative body) in which the samurai who has closed the eyes of the operation effective suggestion image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 opens his eyes and sharpens his eyes. (Confirmed image) is displayed, and the sword decorative body 5001 is changed from the sword state to the second sword state with the aura member (FIG. 221 (Q1)). At this time, the sword ornament 5001 may be decorated with light emission. The player can grasp that the operation of the sword decorative body 5001 instead of the operation button 410 is effective based on the image of the display area. At this time, whether or not the sword decorative body 5001 is in a form with an aura member, etc. Can be grasped by actually looking at the sword ornament 5001. Next, while the specific decorative member SDY (a spear object) is moved in small increments, when the predetermined period of time elapses after the second sword state is reached and the operation effective period of the sword decorative body 5001 starts, the display on the effect display device 1600 is displayed. In the area, an operation promotion image that prompts the player to perform a sword operation of the sword decorative body 5001 and a gauge indicating the operation valid period are displayed (FIG. 221 (Q2)).

  Then, when the result of the current variation display is a big hit, when a player's sword operation is detected, the same effect transition as in FIGS. 220 (R3) and (R4) described above is followed (FIG. 221 ( Q3) and (Q4)). On the other hand, when the variation display result is out of order, when the player's sword operation is detected, the same effect transition as in FIG. 220 (R5) described above is followed (FIG. 221 (Q5)).

  In this way, since the degree of expectation is suggested according to the falling state of the specific decorative member SDY (a decorative object) executed based on the pressing operation of the operation button 410, the degree of expectation that is more powerful than the degree of expectation suggested by the image Suggestions can be provided, and a decrease in the entertainment interest can be suppressed. Further, even when the specific decorative member SDY (a saddle accessory) is not dropped based on the pressing operation of the operation button 410, the player is again given the opportunity to operate either the operation button 410 or the sword decorative body 5001. Is done. Since the degree of expectation can also be suggested by the operation means to which the operation opportunity is given, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the entertainment interest that is a concern due to a monotonous operation effect without being displayed instead.

  In addition, although the example of the effect pattern of the reach effect using the sword ornament 5001 was mentioned in above-mentioned FIGS. 211-221, you may combine various effect aspects. Thereby, a wide variety of effects can be provided, and the game entertainment can be further enhanced.

(Pseudo-continuous production using sword ornaments)
Next, with reference to FIGS. 222 to 236, a description will be given of a pseudo-continuous effect using the sword ornament 5001 whose form is changed stepwise according to the number of times of pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation). Pseudo-continuous production is an effect that temporarily changes the display of decorative symbols and re-variates them, and is performed in response to pseudo-continuous variation along with pseudo-continuous variation in which temporary suspension and re-variation are repeated once or multiple times. Etc. Here, the above-described temporary stop indicates a state in which the fluctuation display appears as if it has stopped, but actually fluctuates slightly and continues to fluctuate. In this example, when a variation pattern for performing pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) is selected by the main control board 1310, a pseudo-continuous effect of an effect pattern that can be selected by lottery of effect contents by the peripheral control board 1510 will be described below. Explained.

(Form of sword ornament)
First, with reference to FIG. 222, the form of the sword ornament 5001 of this example is demonstrated. The form of the sword decorative body 5001 up to the foregoing has been provided with two types, the form with an aura member and the form without an aura member. Are provided.

  FIG. 222 is a diagram for explaining the form of the sword ornament 5001 used for the pseudo-continuous performance. The sword decorative body 5001 here is provided in a two-stage form change by deformation of the handle portion 5012, and is provided inside the sheath portion 5020 of the door frame 3. From the left and right side portions of the sheath portion 5020, the player It has an aura member 5040 that appears so as to be visible. The aura member 5040 is provided inside the sheath portion 5020 of the door frame 3 in the same manner as the aura member 5035 described above, and its operation mode is movable in the left-right direction as in the aura member 5030 described above. FIGS. 222A to 222D are diagrams showing types (step changes) of the form of the sword decorative body 5001 in the sword storage state, and sequentially show the stage 0 form to the stage 3 form. The sword decorative body 5001 is in any form of stage 0 form to stage 3 form according to the effect.

  As shown in FIG. 222 (A), the stage 0 configuration is a configuration in a normal state similar to the above-described FIGS. 192 (A) and 194 (A), and no operation is required for any of the constituent members. The form is shown. As shown in FIG. 222 (B), the stage 1 form shows a form in which the aura member 5040 appears outside the side surface of the sheath part 5012 by the operation of the aura member 5040 from the stage 0 form. As shown in FIG. 222 (C), in the stage 2 form, the pattern part 5012 is spread and moved from the center to the left and right from the stage 1 form, and the first decorative part 5012a appears from the inside. Show. As shown in FIG. 222 (D), in the stage 3 form, in the stage 2 form, the second decorative part 5012b is further moved upward from the inside of the handle part 5012 to form an integral decoration with the first decorative part 5012a. The form is shown. The stage 1 form to the stage 3 form here can change the form without causing the sword decorative body 5001 to be in the second extracted state. Furthermore, since the sword portion 5010 that can accept an operation by the player as the operation portion of the operation means and the non-operating sheath portion 5020 operate together to form an integrated decorative body, a more powerful operation means is provided. Can do.

(Example of simulated rendition)
Next, with reference to FIG. 223 to FIG. 236, an example of the effect transition for the effect pattern for performing the pseudo-continuous effect will be described. First, the types of effect patterns will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 231 is a diagram illustrating the types of effect patterns that can be selected based on the variation pattern.

  As shown in FIG. 231 (A), the main control board 1310 causes the sword LV1 weak fluctuation pattern, the sword LV1 strong fluctuation pattern, the sword LV2 weak fluctuation pattern, the sword LV2 strong fluctuation pattern, the sword LV3 weak fluctuation pattern, and the sword LV3 strong fluctuation pattern. A pseudo-continuous effect is performed when any one of the six types of variation patterns is selected. The effect patterns for performing the pseudo-continuous effect include basic effect patterns (sword LV1 weak effect pattern, sword LV1 strong effect pattern, sword LV2 weak effect pattern, sword LV2 strong effect pattern, sword LV3 weakness) corresponding to each of six types of variation patterns. In addition to the effect pattern and the sword LV3 strong effect pattern), a specific effect pattern (pseudo sword LV1 weak effect pattern, pseudo sword LV1 strong effect pattern, and pseudo revival sword LV1 effect pattern) is provided. When the variation pattern is a sword LV1 weak variation pattern (sword LV1 strong variation pattern), a sword LV1 weak production pattern or a pseudo sword LV1 weak production pattern (sword LV1 strong production pattern or pseudo sword LV1 strong production pattern) is selected, When the variation pattern is a sword LV2 weak variation pattern (sword LV2 strong variation pattern), the sword LV2 weak variation pattern (sword LV2 strong variation pattern) is selected, and the variation pattern is a sword LV3 weak variation pattern (sword LV3 strong variation pattern). ), The sword LV3 weak production pattern, the pseudo sword LV1 weak production pattern, and the pseudo resurrection LV1 production pattern (sword LV3 strong production pattern, pseudo sword LV1 strong production pattern, and pseudo revival sword LV1 production pattern) Selected.

  In the production pattern, the number of times of quasi-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) (1 to 3 times), the presence / absence of operation opportunity of the sword ornament 5001 according to the number of times of continuation, and the operation opportunity are given. The mode of the specific decorative member SDY (saddle) is set (see FIG. 231 (B)). The production pattern names “LV1” to “LV3” correspond to the number of continuations of pseudo continuous fluctuation (revariation) 1 to 3 times. Further, “weak” and “strong” correspond to the drop position (semi-drop, full drop) in the drop effect of the specific decorative member SDY (a saddle character). In addition, the “pseudo sword LV1” gives a selection operation opportunity of the sword ornament 5001 for the first time of pseudo continuous variation (re-variation), and continues the pseudo continuous variation (re-variation) by selecting the player not to operate. Indicates that the performance can be obtained. In addition, the “pseudo resurrection sword LV1” follows the same effect transition as the sword LV1 weak effect pattern of the basic effect pattern that gives the opportunity to operate the sword ornament 5001 for the first time of pseudo ream fluctuation (revariation). This indicates that the pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) is again performed after the end of the fall effect of the special decorative member SDY (a glimpse) based on the first operation opportunity of the variation. The details of the contents of each effect pattern will be described later.

  Here, the basic effect pattern is set so that the degree of expectation increases as the number of continuations of pseudo-continuous variation (revariation) increases, that is, as the shape change of the sword decorative body 5001 progresses, and the specific decorative member SDY The lower the fall position of the object), the higher the expectation degree is set. However, when the fall position of the specific decorative member SDY (a saddle object) is a half fall, the number of times of continuous continuous fluctuation (revariation) is 1 It is set so that the expected degree is the same as when the specific decorative member SDY (striking object) is dropped all the time with a small production pattern. Specifically, the expected number of times of the pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) once and the half-falling sword LV1 performance pattern is 29%, the pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) once and the total falling sword Expectation level of LV1 strong performance pattern is 40%, pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) duration is 2 times, expectation degree of semi-falling sword LV2 weak performance pattern is 40%, pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) duration is 2 The expectation level of the sword LV2 strong performance pattern for the first and last drop is 50%, the expectation level of the sword LV3 weak performance pattern for the half-fall sword LV3 is 3% The expectation of the sword LV3 strong production pattern of 3 times of variation) and the total falling sword LV3 is set to 65%. In addition, the specific effect pattern is set so that the degree of expectation varies depending on the selected variation pattern even if it is the same effect pattern, and the degree of expectation is set higher as the variation pattern has a higher expectation level. The expectation level of the pseudo sword LV1 weak production pattern that gives the player a selection operation opportunity is 38% and 53% respectively when the selected variation pattern is a sword LV1 weak variation pattern and when the selected variation pattern is a sword LV3 weak variation pattern. It becomes. In addition, the expectation level of the pseudo sword LV1 strong production pattern is 47% and 74% when the selected variation pattern is the sword LV1 strong variation pattern and when the selected variation pattern is the sword LV3 strong variation pattern, respectively. Further, after following the same effect transition as the sword LV1 weak effect pattern, the expectation degree of the pseudo-revival sword LV1 effect pattern in which the pseudo-continuous change (re-change) is restored is set to 100% regardless of the change pattern.

  Hereinafter, the pseudo-continuous production of each production pattern shown in FIG. 231 (B) will be described with reference to the production transition examples shown in FIGS. 223 to 230 and the production execution timing charts shown in FIGS. FIG. 223 is a diagram illustrating an effect transition example of a pseudo-continuous effect common to all effect patterns. FIG. 224 to FIG. 226 are diagrams showing transition examples of effects regarding whether or not an opportunity to operate the sword ornament 5001 is given while pseudo continuous variation (revariation) is being performed. FIG. 227 is a diagram illustrating a transition example of the post-operation effect of the sword ornament 5001 (the fall effect of the specific decorative member SDY (a saddle character)) during the pseudo continuous variation (revariation) common to all the effect patterns. is there. FIG. 228 and FIG. 229 are diagrams showing an effect transition example that is a feature of the pseudo sword LV1 weak effect pattern and the pseudo sword LV1 strong effect pattern. FIG. 230 is a diagram illustrating an effect transition example that is a feature of the pseudo-revival sword LV1 effect pattern. FIG. 232 to FIG. 236 are operation execution timing charts of the sword ornament 5001 and the specific decorative member SDY (a spear object) in the pseudo-continuous effect, and FIG. 232 is a sword LV1 weak effect pattern (sword LV1 strong effect pattern). 233 is a sword LV2 weak performance pattern (sword LV2 strong performance pattern), FIG. 234 is a sword LV3 weak performance pattern (sword LV3 strong performance pattern), and FIG. 235 is a pseudo sword LV1 weak performance pattern (pseudo sword LV1 strong performance pattern). FIG. 236 shows a pseudo resurrection LV1 effect pattern. Below, it demonstrates along the example of an effect transition in case a pseudo | simulation continuous effect is performed in the effect before a variable display is started and it will be in a reach state.

(Common to all production patterns)
As shown in FIG. 223 (A), when the variable display is started, three decorative symbols are variably displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. At this time, the specific decorative member SDY (saddle character) does not overlap the display area of the effect display device 1600 in a front view, and a part of the heel is visible from the player above the display area (initial state) ) Is stationary. At this time, the sword decorative body 5001 is in the sword storage state in the stage 0 form (initial form).

  Next, as shown in FIGS. 223 (B) and (C), in the display area of the effect display device 1600, a start image indicating the start of the pseudo-continuous effect (effect content notification “100 chances if you can defeat 100 bodies” message, Samurai Is displayed to indicate to the player that the pseudo-continuous production is started. At this time, there is no change in the specific decorative member SDY (a spear object) and the sword decorative body 5001.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 223 (D), the three decorative symbols variably displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 are temporarily stopped and displayed in a pseudo continuous manner, and the decorative symbols are re-varied to the player. Inform you. Here, among the three decorative symbols, the central decorative symbol is a pseudo continuous sword symbol that is not prepared for the left and right decorative symbols, specifically, the form and effect level (number of pseudo continuous fluctuations) of the sword decorative body 5001 are shown. By displaying in the form of the pseudo continuous sword symbol, the player can easily recognize the re-change of the decorative design (start of the pseudo continuous change). At this time, there is no change in the specific decorative member SDY (a spear object) and the sword decorative body 5001, but the pseudo continuous sword pattern displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 has a first pseudo continuous variation (revariation). A sword image indicating in advance the form (stage 1 form) of the sword ornament 5001 in FIG. Thus, since the form of the sword ornament 5001 and the effect level (number of pseudo continuous fluctuations) in the pseudo continuous fluctuation (revariation) are notified at the time of temporary stop display just before the pseudo continuous fluctuation (revariation) starts, the player It is possible to grasp the stage of pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation).

  When the first pseudo continuous variation (revariation) is started, as shown in FIG. 223 (E), the display area of the effect display device 1600 is displayed at the time of FIG. 223 (D) described above. In addition, the pseudo continuous sword pattern is enlarged and displayed, and the effect display is moved and displayed toward the sword decorative body 5001 so as to act on the sword decorative body 5001, and the change of the decorative pattern is displayed. Then, the sword decorative body 5001 changes in form from the stage 0 form (initial form) to the stage 1 form in which the aura member 5040 becomes visible. The shape change of the sword ornament 5001 at this time is the timing at which the player's line of sight moves to the sword ornament 5001 from the effect display in which pseudo-variation (revariation) is started and moved toward the sword ornament 5001. That is, it is performed after the start of pseudo-variation (re-variation). It should be noted that the shape change timing of the sword ornament 5001 may be before the start of pseudo-variation (re-variation). For example, the sword ornament 5001 is displayed together with the display of the pseudo-continuous sword at the time of FIG. Alternatively, pseudo continuous variation (revariation) may be started.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 223 (F), the sword image of the pseudo-sword pattern displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 is changed from the sword state to the second sword state while being displayed in an enlarged manner. Then, the sword decorative body 5001 changes from the sword state to the second sword state.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 223 (G), in the display area of the effect display device 1600, whether or not the second sword decoration body 5001 in which the sword can be operated by the player is enabled as an operation means. An operation opportunity suggestion image (samurai image with closed eyes) indicating the determination result of whether or not to give an operation opportunity to the player is displayed. Subsequent effects include a pattern in which the sword ornament 5001 is effective in operation (an effect pattern with “LV1” in the name) and a pattern in which the sword ornament 5001 is not effective in operation (name). To “LV2” or “LV3”). Below, an example of an effect transition is demonstrated in order about nine types of effect patterns.

(Sword LV1 weak production pattern / Sword LV1 strong production pattern)
First, referring to FIG. 224 and FIG. 227, a sword LV1 weak effect pattern or a sword LV1 strong effect pattern that makes the sword decorative body 5001 effective as an operation means in the first pseudo continuous change (re-change) is set. An example of the effect transition in this case will be described. When these effect patterns are set and an opportunity to operate the sword ornament 5001 is given by the first pseudo continuous change (re-change), the display area of the effect display device 1600 has the above-described FIG. ), An operation confirmation image (an image with a samurai eye open) indicating that an operation opportunity is given is displayed (FIG. 224 (T1)). Next, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an image (“Opportunity !!” message) indicating that an operation opportunity for a player to request an active operation is given is displayed (FIG. 224 (T2)). . Then, while the operation effective period of the sword decorative body 5001 is generated, an operation promotion effect for encouraging the sword decorative body 5001 to be stored in the display area of the effect display device 1600 is performed. Specifically, the sword image in the same second sword state (stage 1 form) as the sword ornament 5001 is displayed, and an image indicating the operation direction and the operation validity period is displayed together with the message “Put the sword!”. (FIG. 224 (T3)). When a player's knitting operation is detected, an expectation notification effect is performed by a falling effect of the specific decorative member SDY (a saddle accessory) according to the set effect pattern.

  Here, when the set production pattern is a “strong” production pattern, when a player's sword operation is detected, as shown in FIG. ) Is moved from the initial state to the fall state. Then, the sword ornament 5001 is changed from the second sword state to the sword state by the player's sword insertion operation and is returned to the stage 0 form (initial form). After that, as shown in FIG. 227 (U2), the specific decorative member SDY (blanket) is returned from the all-drop state to the initial state, and the display area of the effect display device 1600 has the above-described FIG. 223 (B). An expected degree notification image (“100 body defeat!”) For notifying the expected degree of the variation display result is displayed in a manner corresponding to the start image of the pseudo-continuous effect shown. Here, the degree of expectation indicated by the total fall state is set to be higher than the degree of expectation indicated by a later-described half-fall state. At this time, there is no change in the sword ornament 5001. Here, the expectation degree notification image is displayed so that the player can grasp the end of the pseudo continuous variation (revariation).

  In addition, when the set production pattern is a “weak” production pattern, when a player's sword operation is detected, as shown in FIG. 227 (U3), the specific decorative member SDY (a glimpse) Is moved to fall from the initial state to a semi-falling state. The semi-dropped state refers to a state in which the specific decorative member SDY (a decorative object) is dropped and moved to an intermediate position between the initial state and the full-fall state, and overlaps with the upper half region of the display area of the effect display device 1600 in a front view. . Then, the sword ornament 5001 is changed from the second sword state to the sword state by the player's sword insertion operation and is returned to the stage 0 form (initial form). After that, as shown in FIG. 227 (U4), the specific decorative member SDY (a glimpse) is returned from the semi-dropped state to the initial state, and the display area of the effect display device 1600 has the above-described FIG. 223 (B). An expected degree notification image (“50 body defeat!”) Is displayed in a manner corresponding to the start image of the pseudo-continuous effect shown. At this time, there is no change in the sword ornament 5001. Similarly to the “strong” performance pattern, the expectation notification image at this time is displayed so that the player can grasp the end of the pseudo continuous variation (revariation).

  If no sword operation by the player is detected within the operation effective period of the sword ornament 5001, regardless of whether the set production pattern is a “strong” production pattern or a “weak” production pattern. In the display area of the effect display device 1600, a runaway image (“enemy, getaway!”) Indicating that the pseudo-continuous variation (revariation) has ended without the effect of dropping the specific decorative member SDY (a saddle character) being performed. Is displayed (see FIG. 229 (W2)). In other words, the player is prevented from grasping the expectation of the variation display result when the player does not detect the sword insertion operation within the operation valid period. At this time, the sword ornament 5001 is returned to the initial state of the sword after the operation valid period ends. Here, the runaway image is displayed so that the player can grasp the end of the pseudo continuous variation (revariation).

  Then, when the pseudo continuous variation (revariation) is finished, as shown in FIG. 227 (U5), a reach state is formed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 by the decorative pattern of the normal mode, and the reach effect is started. The Regarding the reach effect at this time, the reach effect of the same effect content is executed in the “weak” effect pattern and the “strong” effect pattern. Thus, by operating when the sword decorative body 5001 is required to be delivered, the player can perform the reach effect after grasping the degree of expectation based on the falling position of the specific decorative member SDY (a saddle object). I can greet you. Therefore, even if the subsequent reach production is the same, it is possible to have a different expectation every time, so that the player's willingness to operate is suppressed, and further, the decline in the game interest for uniform production is suppressed can do.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 231 (B) and FIG. 232, the operation of the sword decorative body 5001 and the specific decorative member SDY (a combination object) when the sword LV1 weak effect pattern or the sword LV1 strong effect pattern is set. The execution timing will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 231 (B), in the sword LV1 weak production pattern and the sword LV1 strong production pattern, the sword ornament 5001 in the first stage is operated in the period T1 in which the first pseudo continuous variation (revariation) is performed. It is effective as a means and gives the player an opportunity to operate. When the sword LV1 weak performance pattern is set, a fall effect (expectation notification effect) in which the specific decorative member SDY (a saddle object) falls half by the player's operation is performed. Moreover, when the sword LV1 strong effect pattern is set, a fall effect (expectation notification effect) in which the specific decorative member SDY (a saddle object) completely falls by the player's operation is performed. When there is no operation by the player, the drop effect (expected degree notification effect) is not performed regardless of the effect pattern.

  As shown in FIG. 232, when the sword LV1 weak performance pattern is set, the sword ornament 5001 changes from the initial form to the stage 1 form simultaneously with the start of the first pseudo continuous change (re-change) ( (See FIG. 223 (E)). Thereafter, the sword decorative body 5001 changes from the sword state to the second sword state (see FIG. 223 (F)), and whether the operation is enabled by the operation opportunity suggestion image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. No, after raising the thrill of the player and making the player fully recognize the sword ornament 5001 in the operable state (second sword state) (FIG. 223 (G) → FIG. 224 (T1) → (T2 )), An operation valid period for effectively accepting the player's operation is started (see FIG. 224 (T3)).

  When the player performs a sword insertion operation during the operation effective period, the sword ornament 5001 changes from the second sword state to the sword insertion state and changes from the stage 1 form to the initial form. At this time, in the case of the “weak” performance pattern, the specific decorative member SDY (a glimpse) changes from the initial state to the half-dropped state (see FIG. 227 (U3)). Then, at the end of the first quasi-continuous change (re-change), that is, at the end timing of the period T1, the specific decorative member SDY (a glimpse) returns to the initial state and corresponds to a half drop in the display area of the effect display device 1600 Since the expected degree notification image of the expected degree is displayed (see FIG. 227 (U4)), the player recognizes the end of the period T1. Further, in the case of the “strong” performance pattern, the specific decorative member SDY (a glimpse) changes from the initial state to the total fall state (see FIG. 227 (U1)), and the expectation of the expectation corresponding to the total fall is notified. The difference is that an image is displayed (see FIG. 227 (U2)).

  On the other hand, when the player does not perform the sword insertion operation during the operation effective period, the sword decoration body 5001 changes from the second sword state to the sword storage state with the end of the operation effective period, and changes from the stage 1 form to the initial form. Change shape. Then, at the end of the first pseudo continuous change (re-change), that is, at the end timing of the period T1, an escape image indicating that the degree of expectation is not notified is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (FIG. 229). (See W2)), the player recognizes the end of the period T1.

(Sword LV2 weak production pattern / Sword LV2 strong production pattern)
Next, referring to FIGS. 224 and 225, a sword LV2 weak effect pattern or a sword LV2 strong effect pattern that makes the sword ornament 5001 effective as an operation means in the second pseudo-continuous change (re-change) is set. An example of effect transition in the case of being present will be described. The description of the effect transition similar to the effect pattern described above will be omitted as appropriate.

  When the set production pattern is the sword LV2 weak production pattern or the sword LV2 strong production pattern, the operation opportunity of the sword decorative body 5001 is not provided at the operation opportunity provision timing of the first pseudo continuous variation (revariation). After following the effect transitions shown in FIGS. 223 (A) to (G), no operation opportunity is given to the display area of the effect display device 1600 from the operation opportunity suggesting image shown in FIG. 223 (G). A continuation image indicating that the samurai's eyes are closed is displayed, and the sword decorative body 5001 that has been in the second sword state is returned to the sword state while maintaining the form in the stage 1 form (FIG. 224 (S1)).

  Next, the three decorative symbols that have been variably displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 are temporarily stopped and displayed in a pseudo-continuous manner to notify the player that the decorative symbols will be changed again (FIG. 224 (S2)). ). Here, among the three decorative symbols, the central decorative symbol is a pseudo continuous sword symbol that is not prepared for the left and right decorative symbols, specifically, the form and effect level (number of pseudo continuous fluctuations) of the sword decorative body 5001 are shown. By displaying in the form of the pseudo continuous sword symbol, the player can easily recognize the re-change of the decorative design (start of the pseudo continuous change). Then, a sword image indicating in advance the form (stage 2 form) of the sword decorative body 5001 in the second quasi-continuous change (revariation) is displayed on the pseudo continuous sword pattern displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. Is done. At this time, there is no change in the specific decorative member SDY (a spear object) and the sword decorative body 5001. Further, the sword decorative body 5001 maintains the stage 1 form. In this way, at the temporary stop display just before the second quasi-continuous variation (revariation) starts, the form and effect level (number of quasi-continuous variation) of the sword ornament 5001 in the second quasi-continuous variation (revariation). Since the notification is made, the player can grasp the stage of the pseudo-continuous change (re-change) and face it.

  When the second pseudo continuous variation (revariation) is started, the pseudo continuous sword symbol displayed at the time of FIG. 224 (S2) is enlarged and displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. At the same time, the effect display is moved and displayed toward the sword decorative body 5001 so that the effect display acts on the sword decorative body 5001, and a re-variation of the decorative design is displayed. Then, the sword decorative body 5001 changes from the stage 1 form to the stage 2 form in which the handle 5012 is cracked to the left and right to make the first decorative part 5012a visible (FIG. 224 (S3)). Subsequently, the sword image of the pseudo-sword pattern displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 is changed from the sword state to the second sword state, and the sword ornament 5001 is actually moved from the sword state to the second sword state. The state changes to (FIG. 224 (S4)). In addition, the form change timing from the stage 1 form to the stage 2 form of the sword decorative body 5001 and the state change timing from the sword state to the second sword state may be set to be simultaneous. The effect display displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 is performed so as to act on the sword ornament 5001, and the sword ornament 5001 changes at a stroke when the player's line of sight is directed toward the sword ornament 5001. Impressing the powerful movement, it can attract the player's interest.

  Thereafter, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, whether or not the sword decoration body 5001 in the second sword state (stage 2 form), which can be operated by the player, is enabled as an operating means, that is, a game An operation opportunity suggestion image (samurai image with closed eyes) showing a result of determining whether or not to give an operation opportunity to the person is displayed (FIG. 225 (V1)).

  Here, when the set production pattern is the sword LV2 weak production pattern or the sword LV2 strong production pattern, an operation opportunity of the sword ornament 5001 is given by the second pseudo continuous variation (revariation). In the display area of the effect display device 1600, an operation confirmation image (an image in which the eyes of the samurai are opened) indicating that an operation opportunity is given from the operation opportunity suggestion image shown in FIG. 225 (V1) described above is displayed ( FIG. 225 (V2)). Next, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an image (“Opportunity !!” message) indicating that an operation opportunity for a player to request an active operation is given is displayed (FIG. 225 (V3)). . Then, while the operation effective period of the sword decorative body 5001 is generated, an operation promotion effect for encouraging the sword decorative body 5001 to be stored in the display area of the effect display device 1600 is performed. Specifically, the sword image in the same second sword state (stage 2 form) as the sword ornament 5001 is displayed, and an image indicating the operation direction and the operation valid period is displayed together with the message “Put the sword!”. (FIG. 225 (V4)). When a player's sword operation is detected, as shown in FIG. 227 described above, an expectation notification effect is produced by a fall effect of the specific decorative member SDY (a saddle character) according to the set effect pattern. Therefore, the player can grasp that the pseudo continuous variation (revariation) has ended. In addition, when no sword operation by the player is detected during the operation valid period, the effect display device 1600 does not depend on whether the set effect pattern is a “strong” effect pattern or a “weak” effect pattern. In the display area, a runaway image (“enemy, runaway!”) Is displayed indicating that the pseudo-continuous variation (revariation) has been completed without performing the fall effect of the specific decorative member SDY (a saddle). 229 (W2)). In other words, the player is prevented from grasping the expectation of the variation display result when the player does not detect the sword insertion operation within the operation valid period. At this time, the sword ornament 5001 is returned to the initial state of the sword after the operation valid period ends. Here, the runaway image is displayed so that the player can grasp the end of the pseudo continuous variation (revariation).

  Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 231 (B) and FIG. 233, the operation of the sword decorative body 5001 and the specific decorative member SDY (a saddle accessory) when the sword LV2 weak effect pattern or the sword LV2 strong effect pattern is set. The execution timing will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 231 (B), in the sword LV2 weak production pattern and the sword LV2 strong production pattern, the operation opportunity of the sword ornament 5001 is not given in the period T1 in which the first pseudo continuous variation (revariation) is performed. In the period T2 during which the second pseudo continuous change (re-change) is performed, the sword ornament 5001 in the stage 2 form is made effective as an operation means, and an operation opportunity is given to the player. And when the sword LV2 weak performance pattern is set, the fall effect (expectation notification effect) in which the specific decorative member SDY (a saddle object) falls half by the player's operation is performed. Moreover, when the sword LV2 strong effect pattern is set, a fall effect (expectation notification effect) in which the specific decorative member SDY (a saddle accessory) completely falls by the player's operation is performed. If no player operation is detected, the drop effect (expectation notification effect) is not performed for either effect pattern.

  As shown in FIG. 233, when the sword LV2 weak performance pattern is set, the sword ornament 5001 changes from the initial form to the stage 1 form simultaneously with the start of the first pseudo continuous change (re-change) ( (See FIG. 223 (E)). Thereafter, the sword decorative body 5001 changes from the sword state to the second sword state (see FIG. 223 (F)), and whether the operation is enabled by the operation opportunity suggestion image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. The sword ornament 5001 in an operable state (second sword state) is generated without generating an operation valid period in which the player's operation is effectively received, although the feeling of pounding of the player is increased (see FIG. 223 (G)). Is returned to the state of sword (see FIG. 224 (S1)). Then, the sword ornament undergoes the second pseudo-continuous change (re-change) while maintaining the stage 1 form (see FIG. 224 (S2)).

  Then, simultaneously with the start of the second quasi-continuous change (re-change), the sword ornament 5001 changes from the stage 1 form to the stage 2 form (see FIG. 224 (S3)). After that, the sword decorative body 5001 changes from the sword state to the second sword state (see FIG. 224 (S4)), and is the operation enabled by the operation opportunity suggestion image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600? No, the player's thrilling feeling is enhanced and the player is made to fully recognize the sword ornament 5001 in the operable state (second sword state) (see FIG. 225 (V1) → (V2) → (V3)). ), An operation valid period for effectively accepting the player's operation is started (see FIG. 225 (V4)).

  When the player performs a sword insertion operation during the operation effective period, the sword ornament 5001 changes from the second extraction state to the sword insertion state and changes from the stage 2 form to the initial form. At this time, in the case of the “weak” performance pattern, the specific decorative member SDY (a glimpse) changes from the initial state to the half-dropped state (see FIG. 227 (U3)). Then, at the end of the second quasi-continuous change (re-change), that is, at the end timing of the period T2, the specific decorative member SDY (a glimpse) returns to the initial state and corresponds to a half drop in the display area of the effect display device 1600 Since the expected degree notification image of the expected degree is displayed (see FIG. 227 (U4)), the player recognizes the end of the period T2. Further, in the case of the “strong” performance pattern, the specific decorative member SDY (a glimpse) changes from the initial state to the total fall state (see FIG. 227 (U1)), and the expectation of the expectation corresponding to the total fall is notified. The difference is that an image is displayed (see FIG. 227 (U2)).

  On the other hand, when the player does not perform the sword operation during the operation effective period, the sword ornament 5001 changes from the second sword state to the sword state with the end of the operation effective period, and changes from the stage 2 form to the initial form. Change shape. Then, at the end of the second pseudo-continuous change (re-change), that is, at the end timing of the period T2, a runaway image indicating that the degree of expectation is not notified is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (FIG. 229 ( (See W2)), the player recognizes the end of the period T2.

(Sword LV3 weak production pattern / Sword LV3 strong production pattern)
Subsequently, referring to FIG. 225 and FIG. 226, a sword LV3 weak effect pattern or a sword LV3 strong effect pattern that makes the sword ornament 5001 effective as an operation means in the third pseudo continuous change (re-change) is set. An example of effect transition in the case of being present will be described. The description of the effect transition similar to the effect pattern described above will be omitted as appropriate.

  When the set production pattern is the sword LV3 weak production pattern or the sword LV3 strong production pattern, the sword ornament is applied at the operation opportunity giving timing of the second pseudo continuous variation (revariation) shown in FIG. 225 (V1) described above. Since the operation opportunity 5001 is not given, after the effect transition shown in FIGS. 223 (A) to (G) → FIG. 224 (S1) to (S4) → FIG. 225 (V1) is followed, the effect display device 1600 In the display area, a continuation image (an image with the samurai eyes closed) indicating that no operation opportunity is given from the operation opportunity suggestion image shown in FIG. 225 (V1) is displayed. The sword ornament 5001 is returned to the sword state while maintaining the form in the stage 2 form (FIG. 225 (V5)).

  Next, the three decorative symbols that have been variably displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 are temporarily stopped and displayed in a pseudo-continuous manner to notify the player that the decorative symbols will be changed again (FIG. 225 (V6)). ). Here, among the three decorative symbols, the central decorative symbol is a pseudo continuous sword symbol that is not prepared for the left and right decorative symbols, specifically, the form and effect level (number of pseudo continuous fluctuations) of the sword decorative body 5001 are shown. By displaying in the form of the pseudo continuous sword symbol, the player can easily recognize the re-change of the decorative design (start of the pseudo continuous change). Then, a sword image indicating in advance the form (stage 3 form) of the sword decorative body 5001 in the third quasi-continuous variation (revariation) is displayed on the pseudo-ream sword pattern displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. Is done. At this time, there is no change in the specific decorative member SDY (a spear object) and the sword decorative body 5001. The sword decorative body 5001 maintains the stage 2 form. In this way, at the time of temporary stop display just before the third pseudo continuous variation (revariation) starts, the form and the production level (number of pseudo continuous variations) of the sword ornament 5001 in the third pseudo continuous variation (revariation). Since the notification is made, the player can grasp the stage of the pseudo-continuous change (re-change) and face it.

  Then, when the third pseudo continuous variation (revariation) is started, the pseudo continuous sword symbol displayed at the time of FIG. 225 (V6) described above is enlarged and displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. At the same time, the effect display is moved and displayed toward the sword decorative body 5001 so that the effect display acts on the sword decorative body 5001, and a re-variation of the decorative design is displayed. Then, the sword decorative body 5001 changes from the stage 2 form to the stage 3 form in which the second decorative part 5012b protrudes above the first decorative part 5012a so that both decorative parts can be visually recognized as an integrated decorative body ( FIG. 225 (V7)). Subsequently, the sword image of the pseudo-sword pattern displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 is changed from the sword state to the second sword state, and the sword ornament 5001 is actually moved from the sword state to the second sword state. The state changes to (FIG. 225 (V8)). It should be noted that the shape change timing from the stage 2 form to the stage 3 form of the sword ornament 5001 and the state change timing from the sword state to the second sword state may be set to be simultaneous. In addition, the form of the sword decorative body 5001 may not be changed every time according to the number of pseudo-continuous changes, and may be changed in a plurality of stages collectively when the final stage is reached. The effect display displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 is performed so as to act on the sword ornament 5001, and the sword ornament 5001 changes at a stroke when the player's line of sight is directed toward the sword ornament 5001. Impressing the powerful movement, it can attract the player's interest.

  Thereafter, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, whether or not to enable the sword decoration body 5001 in the second sword state (stage 3 form) that can be operated by the player as the operating means, that is, a game An operation opportunity suggestion image (samurai image with closed eyes) showing a result of determining whether or not to give an operation opportunity to the person is displayed (FIG. 226 (X1)).

  Here, when the set production pattern is the sword LV3 weak production pattern and the sword LV3 strong production pattern, the operation opportunity of the sword ornament 5001 is given by the third pseudo continuous variation (revariation). In the display area of the effect display device 1600, an operation confirmation image (an image in which the eyes of the samurai are opened) indicating that the operation opportunity is given from the operation opportunity suggestion image shown in FIG. 226 (X1) described above is displayed. FIG. 226 (X2)). Next, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an image (“Opportunity !!” message) indicating that an operation opportunity for requesting an aggressive operation is given to the player is displayed (FIG. 226 (X3)). . Then, while the operation effective period of the sword decorative body 5001 is generated, an operation promotion effect for encouraging the sword decorative body 5001 to be stored in the display area of the effect display device 1600 is performed. Specifically, a sword image in the same second sword state (stage 3 form) as the sword ornament 5001 is displayed, and an image indicating the operation direction and the operation validity period is displayed together with the message “Put the sword!”. (FIG. 226 (X4)). When a player's sword operation is detected, as shown in FIG. 227 described above, an expectation notification effect is produced by a fall effect of the specific decorative member SDY (a saddle character) according to the set effect pattern. Therefore, the player can grasp that the pseudo continuous variation (revariation) has ended. If the player does not detect a sword operation during the operation valid period, the effect display device 1600 regardless of whether the set effect pattern is a “strong” effect pattern or a “weak” effect pattern. In the display area, a runaway image (“enemy, runaway!”) Is displayed indicating that the pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) has been completed without performing the fall effect of the specific decorative member SDY (a saddle). (See FIG. 229 (W2)). In other words, the player is prevented from grasping the expectation of the variation display result when the player does not detect the sword insertion operation within the operation valid period. At this time, the sword ornament 5001 is returned to the initial state of the sword after the operation valid period ends. Here, the runaway image is displayed so that the player can grasp the end of the pseudo continuous variation (revariation).

  Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 231 (B) and FIG. 234, the operation of the sword decorative body 5001 and the specific decorative member SDY (a saddle accessory) when the sword LV3 weak effect pattern or the sword LV3 strong effect pattern is set. The execution timing will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 231 (B), in the sword LV3 weak production pattern and the sword LV3 strong production pattern, the period T1 in which the first pseudo continuous fluctuation (revariation) is performed and the second pseudo continuous fluctuation (revariation) occur. In the period T2 in which the sword ornament 5001 is not given an opportunity to operate, the sword ornament 5001 in the stage 3 form is enabled as an operation means in the period T3 in which the third pseudo-variation (re-variation) is performed. Give the operator an opportunity to operate. And when the sword LV3 weak performance pattern is set, the fall effect (expectation notification effect) in which the specific decorative member SDY (a saddle object) falls half by the player's operation is performed. Moreover, when the sword LV3 strong effect pattern is set, a fall effect (expected degree notification effect) in which the specific decorative member SDY (a saddle character) completely falls by the player's operation is performed. If no player operation is detected, the drop effect (expectation notification effect) is not performed for either effect pattern.

  As shown in FIG. 234, when the sword LV3 weak performance pattern is set, the sword ornament 5001 changes from the initial form to the stage 1 form simultaneously with the start of the first pseudo continuous change (re-change) ( (See FIG. 223 (E)). Thereafter, the sword decorative body 5001 changes from the sword state to the second sword state (see FIG. 223 (F)), and whether the operation is enabled by the operation opportunity suggestion image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. The sword ornament 5001 in an operable state (second sword state) is generated without generating an operation valid period in which the player's operation is effectively received, although the feeling of pounding of the player is increased (see FIG. 223 (G)). Is returned to the state of sword (see FIG. 224 (S1)). Then, the sword ornament undergoes the second pseudo-continuous change (re-change) while maintaining the stage 1 form (see FIG. 224 (S2)).

  Then, simultaneously with the start of the second quasi-continuous change (re-change), the sword ornament 5001 changes from the stage 1 form to the stage 2 form (see FIG. 224 (S3)). After that, the sword decorative body 5001 changes from the sword state to the second sword state (see FIG. 224 (S4)), and is the operation enabled by the operation opportunity suggestion image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600? Although it increases the throbbing feeling of the player (see FIG. 225 (V1)), the sword ornament 5001 in the operable state (second sword state) without generating an operation effective period for effectively receiving the player's operation. Is returned to the state of sword (see FIG. 225 (V5)). Then, the sword ornament undergoes the third pseudo-continuous change (re-change) while maintaining the stage 2 form (see FIG. 225 (V6)).

  Then, simultaneously with the start of the third quasi-continuous change (re-change), the sword ornament 5001 changes from the stage 2 form to the stage 3 form (see FIG. 225 (V7)). Thereafter, the sword decorative body 5001 changes from the sword state to the second sword state (see FIG. 225 (V8)), and is the operation enabled by the operation opportunity suggestion image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600? If the player feels thrilled and makes the player fully recognize the sword ornament 5001 in the operable state (second sword state) (see FIG. 226 (X1) → (X2) → (X3)). ), The operation effective period for effectively receiving the player's operation is started (see FIG. 226 (X4)).

  When the player performs a sword insertion operation during the operation effective period, the sword decorative body 5001 changes from the second extraction state to the sword insertion state, and changes from the stage 3 form to the initial form. At this time, in the case of the “weak” performance pattern, the specific decorative member SDY (a glimpse) changes from the initial state to the half-dropped state (see FIG. 227 (U3)). Then, at the end of the third quasi-continuous change (re-change), that is, at the end timing of the period T3, the specific decorative member SDY (a glimpse) returns to the initial state and corresponds to a half drop in the display area of the effect display device 1600. Since the expected degree notification image of the expected degree is displayed (see FIG. 227 (U4)), the player recognizes the end of the period T3. Further, in the case of the “strong” performance pattern, the specific decorative member SDY (a glimpse) changes from the initial state to the total fall state (see FIG. 227 (U1)), and the expectation of the expectation corresponding to the total fall is notified. The difference is that an image is displayed (see FIG. 227 (U2)).

  On the other hand, when the player does not perform the sword insertion operation during the operation effective period, the sword decoration body 5001 changes from the second sword extraction state to the sword storage state with the end of the operation effective period, and from the stage 3 form to the initial form. Change shape. Then, at the end of the third pseudo-continuous change (re-change), that is, at the end timing of the period T3, a runaway image indicating that the degree of expectation is not notified is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (FIG. 229). (See W2)), the player recognizes the end of the period T3.

(Pseudo-sword LV1 weak production pattern / Pseudo-sword LV1 strong production pattern)
Subsequently, referring to FIG. 228 and FIG. 229, the sword ornament 5001 is made effective as the operation means in the first pseudo continuous change (re-change), but the pseudo continuous change is made by selecting that the player does not operate. An effect transition example in the case where a pseudo sword LV1 weak effect pattern or a pseudo sword LV1 strong effect pattern that can acquire continuation (level change effect) is set will be described. The description of the effect transition similar to the effect pattern described above will be omitted as appropriate.

  When the set production pattern is the pseudo sword LV1 weak production pattern or the pseudo sword LV1 strong production pattern, the operation opportunity of the sword ornament 5001 is given at the first pseudo continuous fluctuation (re-variation) operation opportunity provision timing. . However, the operation opportunity at this time is not an operation opportunity for requesting the player to perform an active operation as described above, but a selection operation opportunity for requesting the player to select whether or not to operate. Therefore, after following the effect transition shown in FIGS. 223 (A) to (G) to FIG. 224 (T1), the operation area shown in FIG. 224 (T1) is given to the display area of the effect display device 1600. An operation selection image (“Maybe an opportunity !?” message) is displayed (FIG. 228 (Z1)) indicating that it is a selection operation opportunity for requesting the player to select whether or not to perform an operation from the operation confirmation image indicating that )). Then, the operation effective period of the sword ornament 5001 is generated, and in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an operation selection promotion effect that prompts the user to select the sword ornament operation of the sword ornament 5001 is performed. Specifically, a sword image in the same second sword state (stage 1 form) as the sword decorative body 5001 is displayed, and the operation direction and the operation valid period are shown together with a message “Please select whether you want to place the sword”. An image is displayed (FIG. 228 (Z2)).

  Here, the set pseudo sword LV1 weak production pattern (pseudo sword LV1 strong production pattern) is either the sword LV1 weak variation pattern or the sword LV3 weak variation pattern (sword LV1 strong variation pattern or sword LV3 strong variation pattern). Depending on whether the production pattern is set based on the pattern, the subsequent production transition varies greatly.

  In the case of a pseudo sword LV1 weak production pattern (pseudo sword LV1 strong production pattern) set based on the sword LV1 weak fluctuation pattern (sword LV1 strong fluctuation pattern), the player performs a sword operation during the operation valid period. When detected, the same effect transition (FIG. 227) as the basic effect pattern sword LV1 weak effect pattern (sword LV1 strong effect pattern) is followed.

  On the other hand, if the player does not detect a sword operation during the operation valid period, the operation selection promotion effect shown in FIG. 228 (Z2) described above, regardless of the set effect pattern (“weak” or “strong”) When the operation effective period during which the operation is performed ends, the sword decorative body 5001 is returned from the second sword state in the first stage to the initial sword state, and the display area of the effect display device 1600 has the present selection operation opportunity. An image indicating that it was an opportunity to operate (“Is it an opportunity?”) Is displayed (FIG. 229 (W1)). At this time, there is no change in the specific decorative member SDY (glare). Next, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, a runaway image (“enemy, getaway!” Indicating that the pseudo decoration variation (re-variation) has ended without the fall effect of the specific decorative member SDY (a saddle character) being performed. ) Is displayed (FIG. 229 (W2)). Then, when the pseudo continuous variation (revariation) ends, a reach state is formed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 by the decorative pattern of the normal mode, and the reach effect is started (FIG. 229 (W3)).

  In the case of a pseudo sword LV1 weak performance pattern (pseudo sword LV1 strong performance pattern) set based on the sword LV3 weak variation pattern (sword LV3 strong variation pattern), the player performs a sword insertion operation during the operation valid period. When detected, in the same manner as when an operation is detected at an operation opportunity in the sword LV3 weak performance pattern (sword LV3 strong performance pattern) of the basic performance pattern, FIG. 227 (U3) → (U4) (FIG. 227 (U1) → After tracing the effect transition of (U2)), the remaining effect period (the total period of the periods T2 and T3) is displayed in a normal manner with a decorative pattern (not shown). Then, the reach state is formed by the decorative pattern in the normal mode at the same timing as the timing predetermined in the sword LV3 weak variation pattern (sword LV3 strong variation pattern), and then the reach effect is started (FIG. 227 (U5)). reference).

  On the other hand, if the player does not detect a sword operation during the operation valid period, the operation selection promotion effect shown in FIG. 228 (Z2) described above, regardless of the set effect pattern (“weak” or “strong”) When the operation effective period during which the operation is performed is completed, the operation pseudo-continuous variation (revariation) is continued by acquiring the level-up effect. The effect transition at this time shifts from the above-described FIG. 228 (Z2) to a continuation image (FIG. 224 (S1)) indicating that the operation opportunity is not given at the first operation grant timing, that is, the continuation of the pseudo continuous variation. Then, similarly to the sword LV3 weak performance pattern (sword LV3 strong performance pattern) of the basic performance pattern, FIG. 224 (S2) to (S4) → FIG. 225 (V1) → FIG. 225 (V5) to (V8) ) → FIG. 226 (X1) to (X4) → FIG. 227 (U1) → (U2) or (U3) → (U4) → FIG. 227 (U5).

  In this way, the pseudo sword LV1 weak effect pattern (pseudo sword LV1 strong effect pattern) has a greatly different effect development after the selection operation opportunity is given according to the variation pattern selected on the main control board 1310. When the selected variation pattern is a sword LV1 weak variation pattern (sword LV1 strong variation pattern), the player should select to operate at the selection operation opportunity. Similarly, it is possible to grasp the degree of expectation and reach the reach production. On the other hand, if you choose not to operate, you will not only be able to acquire the level-up effect described later, but you will also reach a reach effect without knowing the degree of expectation you know if you were operating it originally . Further, when the selected variation pattern is the sword LV3 weak variation pattern (sword LV3 strong variation pattern), the player should select not to operate at the selection operation opportunity. If the operation is not performed at the selection operation opportunity, it is possible to enjoy the effect by continuing the pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) as in the case of the basic effect pattern. On the other hand, if an operation is performed, an effect (continuous change in the shape of the sword decorative body 5001 due to a level-up effect) caused by continuing pseudo-variation (revariation) that can be obtained without the operation will be missed and the form of the sword decorative body 5001 will be initialized. It will return to form. The operation at the selection operation opportunity is the operation effect obtained in accordance with the variation pattern selected by the main control board 1310 that is not known to the player, and the operation during the operation effective period in which the operation is effectively accepted is the game. It provides a novel production that results in disadvantageous operation results. Further, the operation at the selection operation opportunity of the specific effect pattern has a greater influence on the subsequent effect development than the operation at the operation opportunity of the basic effect pattern. Therefore, the player faces the operation at the selection operation opportunity with a sense of tension and expectation. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to operate, and to suppress a decrease in game entertainment that results from a uniform operation effect.

  In particular, when the pseudo sword LV1 weak production pattern (pseudo sword LV1 strong production pattern) is set based on the sword LV3 weak variation pattern (sword LV3 strong variation pattern), in the first pseudo continuous variation (revariation). When the player operates the sword ornament 5001 at the selection operation opportunity, the stage 3 form is lowered from the stage 1 form when the selection operation opportunity is selected to the stage 0 form (initial form). On the other hand, if the player does not operate the sword ornament 5001, the pseudo continuous variation (re-variation) is continuously performed twice, the level is increased to the stage 3 form, and the operation opportunity is given again. Conventionally, the number of operations set in advance in the production pattern is required, but in this example, an opportunity for two operations (LV1 and L3) can be given in advance. The granting ends at the opportunity, and a novel effect that more reflects the player's intention can be provided. Accordingly, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to operate with respect to an operation effect that does not appear instead, and to suppress a decrease in the gaming interest.

  In other words, even if an effect pattern in which the sword ornament 5001 can change from the initial form to the stage 3 form is set according to the variation pattern selected by the main control board 1310, depending on the player's operation, the initial form to the stage 1 form You can see only the changes until you reach the reach. Since the player can be made to select the operation without being caught by the selected variation pattern (the set effect pattern), it is possible to give the player the feeling that his / her operation selection determines the effect. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to operate and to suppress a decrease in gaming interest.

  Further, when the sword decorative body 5001 is operated at the selection operation opportunity, the form of the sword decorative body 5001 returns to the initial form, but the degree of expectation can be grasped by the fall effect of the specific decorative member SDY (a saddle character). . If the sword decorative body 5001 is not operated, the degree of expectation cannot be grasped, and the operation is performed at the operation opportunity given after the form is further changed (leveled up) to become the stage 3 form. In some cases, the degree of expectation can be ascertained by the fall effect of the specific decorative member SDY (a glimpse). In this way, the operation selection at the selection operation opportunity produces the same normal operation effect as the basic effect pattern, and the selection without operation produces an effect lower than the normal operation effect or higher than the normal operation effect. Therefore, it is preferable that the degree of expectation is higher when the effect is high than when the effect is low. In FIG. 231 (A), the expectation level in the same effect pattern (pseudo sword LV1 weak effect pattern, pseudo sword LV1 strong effect pattern) is changed according to the variation pattern, but this is not restrictive. For example, the expectation degree of the same effect pattern may be constant regardless of the variation pattern. In addition, in order to provide an appropriate effect that matches the player's own selection feeling, it is preferable to change the degree of expectation in the same effect pattern according to the variation pattern and the effect. As a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to operate and to suppress a decrease in the gaming interest.

  Subsequently, referring to FIG. 231 (B) and FIG. 235, the sword decorative body 5001 and the specific decorative member SDY (a spear object) when the pseudo sword LV1 weak effect pattern or the pseudo sword LV1 strong effect pattern is set. The operation execution timing will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 231 (B), in the pseudo sword LV1 weak production pattern and the pseudo sword LV1 strong production pattern, the sword decorative body 5001 in stage 1 form in the period T1 in which the first pseudo continuous variation (revariation) is performed. Is made effective as an operation means, and an operation opportunity is given to the player. When the pseudo sword LV1 weak performance pattern is set, a fall effect (expectation notification effect) in which the specific decorative member SDY (a saddle accessory) falls half by an operation of the player is performed. Moreover, when the pseudo sword LV1 strong effect pattern is set, a fall effect (expectation notification effect) in which the specific decorative member SDY (a saddle accessory) completely falls by the player's operation is performed. Further, when the variation pattern selected at this time is a sword LV3 weak variation pattern or a sword LV3 strong variation pattern, since three quasi-continuous variations (revariations) are inherently provided, a specific decoration is provided. After the fall effect of the member SDY, the normal pattern variation is performed in the remaining effect period (period T2 + period T3).

  If no player operation is detected, the drop effect (expectation notification effect) is not performed for either effect pattern. When the variation pattern selected at this time is the sword LV3 weak variation pattern or the sword LV3 strong variation pattern, the second and third pseudo continuous variations (revariations) are continued, and the second pseudo continuous variation is performed. In the period T2 during which (revariation) is performed, the operation opportunity of the sword ornament 5001 is not given, and in the period T3 during which the third pseudo variation (revariation) is performed, the sword ornament 5001 in the stage 3 form is operated. And enable the player to have operational opportunities. And when the pseudo sword LV1 weak effect pattern is set, a fall effect (expected degree notification effect) in which the specific decorative member SDY (a saddle accessory) falls half by the player's operation is performed. Moreover, when the pseudo sword LV1 strong effect pattern is set, a fall effect (expectation notification effect) in which the specific decorative member SDY (a saddle accessory) completely falls by the player's operation is performed. If no player operation is detected, the drop effect (expectation notification effect) is not performed for either effect pattern.

  As shown in FIG. 235, when the pseudo sword LV1 weak performance pattern is set, the sword ornament 5001 changes from the initial form to the stage 1 form simultaneously with the start of the first pseudo continuous change (re-change). (See FIG. 223 (E)). Thereafter, the sword decorative body 5001 changes from the sword state to the second sword state (see FIG. 223 (F)), and whether the operation is enabled by the operation opportunity suggestion image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. No, the player's thrilling feeling is enhanced and the player is made to fully recognize the sword ornament 5001 in the operable state (second sword state) (FIG. 223 (G) → FIG. 224 (T1) → FIG. 228). (See (Z1)), the operation valid period for effectively accepting the player's operation is started (see FIG. 228 (Z2)).

  When the player performs a sword insertion operation during the operation effective period, the sword ornament 5001 changes from the second sword state to the sword insertion state and changes from the stage 1 form to the initial form. At this time, in the case of the “weak” performance pattern, the specific decorative member SDY (a glimpse) changes from the initial state to the half-dropped state (see FIG. 227 (U3)). Then, at the end of the first quasi-continuous change (re-change), that is, at the end timing of the period T1, the specific decorative member SDY (a glimpse) returns to the initial state and corresponds to a half drop in the display area of the effect display device 1600 Since the expected degree notification image of the expected degree is displayed (see FIG. 227 (U4)), the player recognizes the end of the period T1. Further, although not shown, in the case of the “strong” performance pattern, the specific decorative member SDY (a decorative object) changes from the initial state to the total fall state (see FIG. 227 (U1)), and corresponds to the total fall. An expectation degree notification image is displayed (see FIG. 227 (U2)).

  On the other hand, when the player does not perform the sword operation during the operation valid period and the quasi-continuous variation (revariation) continues (when the sword LV3 weak variation pattern or the sword LV3 strong variation pattern is set), the sword The decorative body 5001 changes its state from the second sword state to the sword state with the end of the operation effective period, but maintains the stage 1 form (see FIG. 224 (S1)).

  Then, simultaneously with the start of the second quasi-continuous change (re-change), the sword ornament 5001 changes from the stage 1 form to the stage 2 form (see FIG. 224 (S3)). After that, the sword decorative body 5001 changes from the sword state to the second sword state (see FIG. 224 (S4)), and is the operation enabled by the operation opportunity suggestion image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600? Although it increases the throbbing feeling of the player (see FIG. 225 (V1)), the sword ornament 5001 in the operable state (second sword state) without generating an operation effective period for effectively receiving the player's operation. Is returned to the state of sword (see FIG. 225 (V5)). Then, the sword ornament undergoes the third pseudo-continuous change (re-change) while maintaining the stage 2 form (see FIG. 225 (V6)).

  Then, simultaneously with the start of the third quasi-continuous change (re-change), the sword ornament 5001 changes from the stage 2 form to the stage 3 form (see FIG. 225 (V7)). Thereafter, the sword decorative body 5001 changes from the sword state to the second sword state (see FIG. 225 (V8)), and is the operation enabled by the operation opportunity suggestion image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600? If the player feels thrilled and makes the player fully recognize the sword ornament 5001 in the operable state (second sword state) (see FIG. 226 (X1) → (X2) → (X3)). ), The operation effective period for effectively receiving the player's operation is started (see FIG. 226 (X4)).

  When the player performs a sword insertion operation during the operation effective period, the sword decorative body 5001 changes from the second extraction state to the sword insertion state, and changes from the stage 3 form to the initial form. At this time, in the case of the “weak” performance pattern, the specific decorative member SDY (a glimpse) changes from the initial state to the half-dropped state (see FIG. 227 (U3)). Then, at the end of the third quasi-continuous change (re-change), that is, at the end timing of the period T3, the specific decorative member SDY (a glimpse) returns to the initial state and corresponds to a half drop in the display area of the effect display device 1600. Since the expected degree notification image of the expected degree is displayed (see FIG. 227 (U4)), the player recognizes the end of the period T3. Further, although not shown, in the case of the “strong” performance pattern, the specific decorative member SDY (a decorative object) changes from the initial state to the total fall state (see FIG. 227 (U1)), and corresponds to the total fall. An expectation degree notification image is displayed (see FIG. 227 (U2)).

  On the other hand, when the player does not perform the sword insertion operation during the operation effective period, the sword decoration body 5001 changes from the second sword extraction state to the sword storage state with the end of the operation effective period, and from the stage 3 form to the initial form. Change shape. Then, at the end of the third pseudo-continuous change (re-change), that is, at the end timing of the period T3, a runaway image indicating that the degree of expectation is not notified is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (FIG. 229). (See W2)), the player recognizes the end of the period T3.

  In addition, when the player does not perform a sword operation during the operation valid period and the quasi-continuous variation (re-variation) is not continued (when set based on the sword LV1 weak variation pattern or the sword LV1 strong variation pattern), The decorative body 5001 changes its state from the second sword state to the sword state as the operation effective period ends, and changes from the stage 1 form to the initial form. Then, at the end of the first pseudo continuous change (re-change), that is, at the end timing of the period T1, an escape image indicating that the degree of expectation is not notified is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (FIG. 229). (See W2)), the player recognizes the end of the period T1.

(Pseudo Resurrection Sword LV1 production pattern)
Subsequently, referring to FIG. 230, the same transition as the above-mentioned sword LV1 weak performance pattern is traced, and after appearing as if it has entered the reach production as it is, the pseudo-continuous change (re-change) is restored. An example of the effect transition when the sword LV1 effect pattern is set will be described. The description of the effect transition similar to the effect pattern described above will be omitted as appropriate.

  The pseudo revival sword LV1 effect pattern is an effect pattern that can be set by the peripheral control board 1510 when the sword LV3 weak fluctuation pattern or the sword LV3 strong fluctuation pattern is selected by the main control board 1310.

  When the set effect pattern is a pseudo-revival sword LV1 effect pattern, as in the above-mentioned sword LV1 weak effect pattern, the above-described FIG. 223 (A) to (G) → FIG. 224 (T1) to (T3) Follow production transition. When an operation by the player is detected at the first operation opportunity, regardless of the type of variation pattern, FIG. 230 (FIG. 230 (U3), (U4), and (U5)) is the same effect as described above. After following the effect transition of UA1) → (UA2) → (UA3), the pseudo continuous variation by the pseudo continuous sword design is resumed. If no operation by the player is detected at the first operation opportunity, the sword decorative body 5001 changes to the initial state of the sword storage state with the end of the operation valid period, as in other production patterns, In place of the above-described FIG. 230 (UA1) → (UA2), the pseudo-continuous variation (revariation) ends in the display area of the effect display device 1600 without performing the drop effect of the specific decorative member SDY (a glimpse). A runaway image (“enemy, runaway!”) Is displayed (see FIG. 229 (W2)).

  The resumption and resumption of the pseudo-continuous change (re-change) is performed at the center of the three decorative symbols in the reach state (“7 ↓ 7”) displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 shown in FIG. 230 (UA3) described above. Is temporarily stopped with a pseudo-sword design that is not prepared for the left and right decorative designs, specifically, a pseudo-sword design in a form indicating the form and production level (number of pseudo-sequential fluctuations) of the sword ornament 5001. As a result, the player is notified (FIG. 230 (UA4)). At this time, the sword image and the effect level 3 of the sword ornament 5001 in the stage 3 form are displayed on the pseudo-ream sword design. At this time, there is no change in the sword decorative body 5001, and the initial form (sword storage state) is maintained. As described above, in the pseudo-revival sword LV1 effect pattern, when the pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) is restored, the pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) corresponding to the sword ornament 5001 in the stage 1 form and the stage 2 form is not performed. Pseudo continuous variation (revariation) corresponding to the sword ornament 5001 in the stage 3 form is performed. Then, at the time of a temporary stop display just before the pseudo continuous variation (revariation) starts in the stage 3 form (FIG. 230 (UA4)), the form and effect level of the sword decorative body 5001 in the pseudo continuous variation (revariation) are notified. Therefore, the player can grasp the stage of pseudo-continuous change (re-change) and face it.

  In the display area of the effect display device 1600, the sword ornament is displayed so that the pseudo-sword pattern displayed at the time of FIG. 230 (UA4) is enlarged and the effect display is applied to the sword ornament 5001. The display is moved toward 5001, and the re-variation of the decorative symbol is displayed. The sword decorative body 5001 is changed from the initial form to the stage 3 form in which the aura member 5040, the first decorative part 5012a, and the second decorative part 5012b are operated so that both decorative parts can be visually recognized as an integrated decorative body. (FIG. 230 (UA5)). Subsequently, the sword image of the pseudo-sword pattern displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 is changed from the sword state to the second sword state, and the sword ornament 5001 is actually moved from the sword state to the second sword state. The state changes to (FIG. 230 (UA6)). Here, since the sword decorative body 5001 changes its shape at once from a plurality of stages from the initial form to the stage 3 form, it can impress a powerful action and attract the player's interest.

  Thereafter, the sword ornament 5001 in the second sword state (stage 3 form) that can be operated by the player is made effective as an operation means, and the above-described FIG. 226 (X1) to (X5) are given an operation opportunity. When an operation by the player is detected after tracing the effect transition, the specific decorative member SDY (in accordance with whether or not the operation is detected at the first operation opportunity, regardless of the type of the variation pattern, is not illustrated. The type of the fall effect of the 簾 (character) is determined. When the operation is detected at the first operation opportunity, the specific decorative member SDY (a saddle accessory) is once in a half-dropped state, so that the level is raised and the above-described FIG. 227 (U1) → (U2) → An expected degree notification effect by the entire fall effect of the specific decorative member SDY (saddle) as in (U5) is performed, and the pseudo continuous variation (re-variation) ends. On the other hand, when the operation is not detected at the first operation opportunity, the expectation degree due to the semi-drop effect of the same specific decorative member SDY (a decorative object) as in FIG. 227 (U3) → (U4) → (U5) described above The notification effect is performed, and the pseudo continuous variation (re-variation) ends.

  In the case where an operation by the player is not detected at an operation opportunity for enabling the sword decoration body 5001 in the second sword state (stage 3 form) as an operation means, the operation effective period ends as in the case of other effect patterns. At the same time, the sword decorative body 5001 changes to the initial state of the sword insertion state, and the display area of the effect display device 1600 is not subjected to the drop effect of the specific decorative member SDY (a saddle character), but is subjected to pseudo-variation (revariation). A runaway image (“enemy, runaway!”) Is displayed (see FIG. 229 (W2)), and the pseudo-continuous variation (revariation) is terminated.

  As described above, in the pseudo resurrection sword LV1 effect pattern, the same effect transition as the above-mentioned sword LV1 weak effect pattern is followed. The same level of performance as the third stage (the third pseudo-variation (re-variation) production in the basic production pattern) will be performed, so the player will be surprised and reach with greater expectations than the other production patterns. Can face. In addition, even if the player is given an operation opportunity by the first pseudo-continuous change (re-change), or the subsequent fall effect of the specific decorative member SDY (a saddle character) becomes a semi-fall, the player does not feel distracted. You can enjoy the game in anticipation of the revival of pseudo-variation (re-variation).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 231 (B) and FIG. 236, the operation execution timings of the sword decorative body 5001 and the specific decorative member SDY (a saddle accessory) when the pseudo revival sword LV1 effect pattern is set will be described. .

  As shown in FIG. 231 (B), in the pseudo revival sword LV1 effect pattern, the sword ornament 5001 in the stage 1 form is enabled as an operation means in the period T1 in which the first pseudo continuous variation (revariation) is performed. Give players an opportunity to operate. At this time, regardless of the selected variation pattern (sword LV3 weak variation pattern or sword LV3 strong variation pattern), the falling effect (expectation notification) that the specific decorative member SDY (a saddle character) falls half by the player's operation Production). Note that when there is no operation by the player, the drop effect (expectation notification effect) is not performed.

  Then, after the first quasi-continuous variation (re-variation) is finished and once the display of the decorative pattern variation is returned to the normal mode, the third quasi-continuous variation (re-variation) in another effect pattern is performed. Pseudo continuous variation (revariation) is performed using the sword ornament 5001 corresponding to T3, that is, the shape of the sword decorative body 5001 is changed to the stage 3 form. Then, the stage 3 form sword ornament 5001 is made effective as an operation means, and an operation opportunity is given to the player. At this time, if the fall effect of the specific decorative member SDY (a saddle character) is performed in the period T1, the fall effect (expectedness notification) in which the specific decorative member SDY (a saddle character) is completely dropped by the player's operation. Production). Moreover, when the fall effect of the specific decorative member SDY (Samurai character) is not performed in the period T1, the fall in which the specific decorative member SDY (Samurai character) falls half by the player's operation. Production (expectation notification production) is performed. Note that when there is no operation by the player, the drop effect (expectation notification effect) is not performed.

  As shown in FIG. 236, when the pseudo-revival sword LV1 effect pattern is set, the sword ornament 5001 changes from the initial form to the stage 1 form simultaneously with the start of the first pseudo continuous change (re-change). (See FIG. 223 (E)). Thereafter, the sword decorative body 5001 changes from the sword state to the second sword state (see FIG. 223 (F)), and whether the operation is enabled by the operation opportunity suggestion image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. No, after raising the thrill of the player and making the player fully recognize the sword ornament 5001 in the operable state (second sword state) (FIG. 223 (G) → FIG. 224 (T1) → (T2 )), An operation valid period for effectively accepting the player's operation is started (see FIG. 224 (T3)).

  When the player performs a sword insertion operation during the operation effective period, the sword ornament 5001 changes from the second sword state to the sword insertion state and changes from the stage 1 form to the initial form. Then, the specific decorative member SDY (glazing accessory) changes from the initial state to the semi-dropped state (see FIG. 230 (UA1)). Then, at the end of the first quasi-continuous change (re-change), that is, at the end timing of the period T1, the specific decorative member SDY (a glimpse) returns to the initial state and corresponds to a half drop in the display area of the effect display device 1600 Since the expectation level notification image of the expected level is displayed (see FIG. 230 (UA2)), the player recognizes the end of the period T1.

  On the other hand, when the player does not perform the sword insertion operation during the operation effective period, the sword decoration body 5001 changes from the second sword state to the sword storage state with the end of the operation effective period, and changes from the stage 1 form to the initial form. Change shape. Then, at the end of the first pseudo continuous change (re-change), that is, at the end timing of the period T1, an escape image indicating that the degree of expectation is not notified is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (FIG. 229). (See W2)), the player recognizes the end of the period T1.

  Thereafter, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the reach state is once formed by the decorative pattern of the normal mode (see FIG. 230 (UA3)), but the pseudo continuous variation (revariation) is restored (FIG. 230 (UA4 )reference).

  The sword ornament 5001 changes from the initial form (stage 0 form) to the stage 3 form simultaneously with the resumption of the pseudo continuous change (re-change) (see FIG. 230 (UA5)). After that, the sword decorative body 5001 changes from the state where the sword is placed into the second sword state (see FIG. 230 (UA6)), and whether the operation is enabled by the operation opportunity suggestion image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. If the player feels thrilled and makes the player fully recognize the sword ornament 5001 in the operable state (second sword state) (see FIG. 226 (X1) → (X2) → (X3)). ), An operation valid period for effectively accepting the player's operation is started (see FIG. 226 (X4)).

  When the player performs a sword insertion operation during the operation effective period, the sword decorative body 5001 changes from the second extraction state to the sword insertion state, and changes from the stage 3 form to the initial form. At this time, in the case where the specific decorative member SDY (a combination object) is dropped in the first pseudo continuous change (re-change), the specific decoration member SDY (the combination object) is changed from the initial state to the fully dropped state. A changing drop effect is performed (see FIG. 227 (U1)). Then, at the end of the revival pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation), that is, at the end timing of the period T3, the specific decorative member SDY (a glimpse) returns to the initial state and corresponds to the total fall in the display area of the effect display device 1600. Since the expectation degree notification image of the expectation degree is displayed (see FIG. 227 (U2)), the player recognizes the end of the period T3. In addition, although not shown in the drawings, if the specific decoration member SDY (a combination object) is not dropped in the first pseudo continuous change (revariation), the specific decoration member SDY (the combination object) is moved from the initial state. The point is changed to a semi-falling state (see FIG. 227 (U3)), and the expectation degree notification image corresponding to the semi-falling is displayed (see FIG. 227 (U4)).

  On the other hand, when the player does not perform the sword insertion operation during the operation effective period, the sword decoration body 5001 changes from the second sword extraction state to the sword storage state with the end of the operation effective period, and from the stage 3 form to the initial form. Change shape. Then, at the end of the revival pseudo-continuous change (re-change), that is, the end timing of the period T3, a runaway image indicating that the degree of expectation is not notified is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (FIG. 229 (W2 )), The player recognizes the end of the period T3.

  As described above, in the pseudo continuous effect using the sword ornament 5001, the pseudo continuous change frequency is 2 times and 3 times in the sword LV2 effect pattern and the sword LV3 effect pattern in which the pseudo continuous change (re-change) is performed a plurality of times, respectively. If it is less than that, the sword decoration body 5001 is changed from the sword state to the second sword state every time the pseudo continuous change (re-change) is made, and the player can operate, but an operation effective period is provided. (Without giving the player an opportunity to operate), and returning to the sword state. For this reason, since the player is expected to expect whether or not the operation is effective even when the sword decorative body 5001 becomes operable, the player is interested in the sword decorative body 5001 as the operation means. It is possible to suppress a decrease in the willingness to operate and a decrease in the entertainment interest.

  In addition, the pseudo continuous change (re-change) is characterized in that the sword decorative body 5001 returns to the initial form when the player operates the sword decorative body 5001 whose form has changed from the initial form. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a novel impression different from the conventional uniform operation effect that provides a beneficial effect for the player by the player's operation. Make the player's choice of operation carefully. Therefore, interest can be given to the operation in the sword decorative body 5001, and a decrease in the willingness to operate and a decrease in the entertainment interest can be suppressed.

  Further, since the sword ornament 5001 can change in form step by step until an operation opportunity is given (until the operation valid period is generated), the player's expectation and interest are increased step by step. A decrease in interest can be suppressed. It should be noted that during the period from when the sword decorative body 5001 is in the operating state and the second sword extraction state (operating position) to when the operation effective period is generated, the player operates the operating mode at the operating position (form, light emission, movable Etc.) is preferably provided for a period during which it can be sufficiently confirmed. Thereby, the player can check the operation mode before operating the sword ornament 5001, so that the operation effective period is generated as soon as the second sword state is entered, and the mode of the operation means cannot be checked. It is possible to dispel the concern that the game entertainment will be lowered by shifting to the operation effect.

  In addition, although the stage change of the above-mentioned sword ornament 5001 was shown with the form, it is not restricted to this. Each effect mode, such as a change in the light emission mode or operation mode of the sword ornament 5001, may be changed in stages in correspondence with the number of times of continuous pseudo fluctuation (re-change).

(Application to pre-reading production)
In the above description, the sword effect in the pseudo-reach reach effect has been described. The case of applying to pre-reading effects will be described below. In the following, an example will be described in which the third hold is the prefetch effect target and the katana LV3 strong effect pattern is set as the prefetch effect pattern.

  When a hold to be prefetched is generated as the third hold 3, effects similar to those shown in FIGS. 223 (B) to (F) described above are performed in the variable display executed at the time of occurrence. Note that the sword decorative body 5001 is different in that the second sword extraction state is limited when an operation opportunity is given (operation valid period is generated). Then, in the next fluctuation display (that is, the fluctuation display of the hold 1 when the hold 3 occurs), the same effects as those shown in FIGS. 223 (G) to 224 (S1) to (S4) are performed. Further, in the next fluctuation display (that is, the fluctuation display of hold 2 when hold 3 occurs), the same effects as in FIG. 225 (V1) → (V5) → (V8) → FIGS. 226 (X1) to (X3) are performed. Is called. Note that, as described above, the sword ornament 5001 changes from the sword state to the second sword state in the pre-reading effect only when the operation effective period occurs. Here, the operation effective period is generated at the timing when the variable display of the hold 3 that is the target of the pre-reading effect is started. To the second sword state). Thereafter, the same effect transition as in FIG. 227 (U1) → (U2) → (U5) is followed, and the prefetching effect is ended.

  The state change of the sword decorative body 5001 from the sword state to the second sword state is limited to the generation timing of the operation valid period. It may be performed at the start. The pre-reading effect also has the same effect as the pseudo-reach reach effect.

(Indication before operation using specific decorative member SDY)
Next, with reference to FIGS. 237 to 240, the pre-operation suggestion effect executed before the operation effective period in which the operation button 410 or the sword ornament 5001 is effective in the reach effect will be described. In the pre-operation suggesting effect, it is possible to suggest whether the operation button 410 is effective in operation or the sword decorative body 5001 is effective in operation among a plurality of operation means by the operation of the specific decorative member SDY (a glimpse). . Specifically, the operation effective period is generated in a state in which the specific decorative member SDY (the black object) is positioned at the initial position as an suggestion pattern by the pre-operation suggesting effect using the specific decorative member SDY (the black object). There are a first suggestion pattern and a second suggestion pattern that generates an operation effective period in a state in which the specific decorative member SDY (a glimpse) is moved from the initial position to the suggestion position. In the case where the operation is effective, the second suggestion pattern is executed at a higher rate than the first suggestion pattern. Specifically, the pre-operation suggestion effect of the first suggestion pattern (FIG. 237 (B)) that generates the operation effective period in a state where the specific decorative member SDY (a glimpse) is positioned at the initial position even during the operation effective period. Is performed, the operation of the sword ornament 5001 is enabled with a probability of 30%, and the operation button 410 is enabled with a probability of 70%. On the other hand, when the pre-operation suggestion effect of the second suggestion pattern (FIG. 239 (AA1)) in which the operation effective period is generated in a state where the specific decorative member SDY (a combination object) is moved to the suggestion position is performed The operation of the sword ornament 5001 is enabled with a probability of 70% (including a step-up pattern), and the operation button 410 is enabled with a probability of 30%. Below, the example of the effect transition according to the operation | movement of the specific decoration member SDY (a glimpse) in the 1st suggestion pattern of a pre-operation suggestion effect and a 2nd suggestion pattern is demonstrated.

(First suggestion pattern)
237 and 238 show either the operation button 410 or the sword ornament 5001 during the reach effect by the lottery by the peripheral control board 1510 based on the change effect (reach effect) of the change pattern drawn by the main control board 1310. It is a figure which shows the example of a transition of the reach | attainment effect in which the pre-operation suggestion effect of a 1st suggestion pattern is performed when it determines that operation is effective. In this reach effect, an operation button that is determined in advance to be validated by lottery of the peripheral control board 1510 when three decorative symbols are in a reach state in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (FIG. 237 (A)). The pre-operation suggestion effect of the first suggestion pattern is executed before the operation valid period for the operation means of 410 or the sword ornament 5001 is generated. As a specific effect content of the first suggestion pattern, there is an operation effect suggestion image (aura rotation) that suggests that the operation means is effective in the display area of the effect display device 1600 before the operation effective period is generated. Displayed (FIG. 237 (B)), and at this time, the specific decorative member SDY (a combination object) maintains the initial position. Further, the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001 are not changed.

  Then, an operation effective period for the operation means (the operation button 410 or the sword decoration body 5001) that is determined to be effective in advance is generated in a state where the specific decorative member SDY (a combination object) is maintained at the initial position. Let In this example, when the operation button 5001 is validated, the first suggestion pattern is set to be executed at a higher rate than the second suggestion pattern (described later) as the pre-operation suggestion effect. In other words, when the operation effective period occurs in a state where the specific decorative member SDY (a combination object) is in the initial position, the operation button 410 is made effective at a higher rate than the sword decorative body 5001. It can be suggested to the player.

  When the operation button 410 becomes effective, as shown in FIG. 237 (C), an operation effective period for the operation button 410 is generated in a state where the specific decorative member SDY (holding object) maintains the initial position. Let At the same time, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an operation promotion effect is displayed in which an operation promotion image for prompting the player to press the operation button 410 and a gauge indicating the operation valid period are displayed. At this time, the operation button 410 is illuminated and decorated so that the player can easily recognize the operation target. Even when the sword ornament 5001 is enabled for operation, the pre-operation suggesting effect may be executed with the first suggestion pattern at a lower rate than the operation button 410. At that time, as shown in FIG. 237 (D), the operation effective period for the sword decorative body 5001 is generated in a state where the specific decorative member SDY (holding object) maintains the initial position. At the same time, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an operation promotion effect is displayed in which an operation promotion image that prompts the player to perform a sword insertion operation of the sword ornament 5001 and a gauge that indicates the operation validity period are displayed. At this time, the sword decorative body 5001 is changed from the state of the sword into the second sword state (form with the aura member), so that the player can perform the sword insertion operation.

  In the above-described FIG. 237 (C) or (D), when an operation on the operation means (operation button 410 or sword ornament 5001) that is effective in operation is detected, The specific decorative member SDY (a saddle accessory) is dropped and moved from the initial state to the fully dropped state (FIG. 238 (CC1)). Next, when the specific decorative member SDY (a combination object) is returned to the initial state again, a big hit is notified to the display area of the effect display device 1600 in which the overlap with the specific decoration member SDY (the combination object) is released. The image (decoration pattern stop mode “777”, “brilliant” message) is displayed (FIG. 238 (CC2)). On the other hand, when the result of the present variable display is out of order, the specific decorative member SDY (a combination object) is not moved while maintaining the initial state, and the display area of the effect display device 1600 is notified of the outage. An image (decoration pattern stop mode “767”) is displayed (FIG. 238 (CC3)).

(Second suggestion pattern)
FIG. 239 shows the pre-operation suggestion effect of the second suggestion pattern when it is determined that either the operation button 410 or the sword decorative body 5001 is valid during the reach effect as in the first suggestion pattern described above. It is a figure which shows the example of a transition of the reach production performed. Note that FIG. 240 shows that although the second suggestion pattern is performed as the pre-operation suggestion effect, the operation button 410 is once enabled and the sword decoration 5001 is not enabled, and then the sword decoration is performed. It is a figure shown about the suggestion effect before operation of the step-up pattern in which the body 5001 becomes operation effective.

  As shown in FIG. 239 (AA1), the pre-operation suggestion effect of the second suggestion pattern is either the operation button 410 or the sword ornament 5001 that is determined in advance to be valid by the lottery of the peripheral control board 1510. This is executed before the operation valid period for the operation means is generated. As a specific effect content of the second suggestion pattern, there is an operation effect suggestion image (aura rotation) that suggests that the operation means is effective in the display area of the effect display device 1600 before the operation effective period is generated. Is displayed. The operation effect suggestion image displayed at this time is the same as the image displayed in the first suggestion pattern. However, in the second suggestion pattern, the specific decorative member SDY (a glimpse) is displayed together with the display of the operation effect suggestion image. It operates in a small fall state (suggested position) that overlaps with the upper part of the display area of the effect display device 1600 in front view from the initial position, and the specific decorative member SDY (a glimpse) moves vertically between the initial position and the suggested position It can be moved in small directions. At this time, there is no change in the operation button 410 and the sword ornament.

  Then, the operation effective period for the operation means (the operation button 410 or the sword decoration body 5001) that is determined to be effective in advance in a state where the specific decorative member SDY (a combination object) is moved to the suggestion position. generate. In this example, when the operation of the sword ornament 5001 is validated, the second suggestion pattern is set to be executed at a higher rate than the first suggestion pattern as the pre-operation suggestion effect. In other words, when the operation effective period occurs in a state where the specific decorative member SDY (a combination object) is in the suggested position, the sword decorative body 5001 is made effective at a higher rate than the operation button 410. It can be suggested to the player.

  When the sword ornament 5001 is effective for operation, as shown in FIG. 239 (AA3), the operation effective period for the sword ornament 5001 in a state in which the specific decorative member SDY (a spear object) is operating at the suggested position. Is generated. At the same time, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an operation promotion effect is displayed in which an operation promotion image that prompts the player to perform a sword insertion operation of the sword ornament 5001 and a gauge that indicates the operation validity period are displayed. At this time, the sword decorative body 5001 is changed from the sword state to the second sword state (form with an aura), so that the player can perform a sword insertion operation. Even when the operation button 410 is enabled, there is a case where the pre-operation suggesting effect is executed with the second suggestion pattern although the rate is low. At that time, as shown in FIG. 239 (AA2), an operation effective period for the operation button 410 is generated in a state where the specific decorative member SDY (a combination object) is operating at the suggested position, and at the same time, the effect display device 1600 In the display area, an operation promotion effect is displayed in which an operation promotion image for prompting the player to press the operation button 410 and a gauge indicating the operation validity period are displayed. In the second suggestion pattern, when the player's operation is detected in the operation promotion effect, the specific decorative member SDY (a combination object) is moved from the state operating to the suggestion position to the initial state. Further, the specific decorative member SDY (a combination object) may be moved from the state operating to the suggestion position without being returned to the initial state to the entire fall state or the initial state.

  Then, when an operation on the operation means (operation button 410 or sword ornament 5001) that is effective in operation is detected in FIG. 239 (AA2) or (AA3), the above-described FIG. 237 (C) or (D) Similarly, when the result of the current variation display is a big hit, the specific decorative member SDY (a combination object) is dropped and moved from the initial state to the fully dropped state (FIG. 238 (CC1)). Next, when the specific decorative member SDY (a combination object) is returned to the initial state again, a big hit is notified to the display area of the effect display device 1600 in which the overlap with the specific decoration member SDY (the combination object) is released. The image (decoration pattern stop mode “777”, “brilliant” message) is displayed (FIG. 238 (CC2)). On the other hand, when the result of the present variable display is out of order, the specific decorative member SDY (a combination object) is not moved while maintaining the initial state, and the display area of the effect display device 1600 is notified of the outage. An image (decoration pattern stop mode “767”) is displayed (FIG. 238 (CC3)). The effect transition after the operation promotion effect is the same as the effect transition after the operation promotion effect in the first suggestion pattern.

  It should be noted that the operation pattern of the specific decorative member SDY (a glimpse) in the second suggestion pattern is not limited to the pattern operated at the suggestion position, and a plurality of operation patterns may be provided. For example, when a plurality of types of motion patterns are provided so that the operation efficiency of the sword decorative body 5001 is different, it is possible to increase the player's interest in the motion, so that the specific decorative member SDY (a saddle character) is attached. It is possible to enhance the interest of the pre-operation suggestion effect and the operation promotion effect used.

(Step-up pattern)
When the pre-operation suggestion effect of the second suggestion pattern that the operation effective period is generated in a state where the specific decorative member SDY (a spear object) is moved to the suggestion position is performed, and the sword ornament 5001 is operated effectively, In addition to the basic pattern of tracing the effect transition of FIG. 239 (AA1) → (AA3) before the sword ornament 5001 becomes effective, the operation button 410 is once activated, and then the sword ornament 5001 A step-up pattern is provided to enable operation.

  As shown in FIGS. 240 (BB1) to (BB4), the pre-operation suggestion effect of the step-up pattern is the operation effective period for the sword ornament 5001 that is determined in advance to be effective by lottery of the peripheral control board 1510. This is executed before the operation promotion effect of the sword ornament 5001 shown in FIG. 239 (AA3) is performed.

  In the step-up pattern, first, the display of the operation effect suggestion image (rotation of the aura) similar to the above-described FIG. 239 (AA1) and the small movement of the specific decorative member SDY (the glimpse) are performed (FIG. 240 (BB1)). ). Next, an operation effective period for the operation button 410 is generated in a state in which the specific decorative member SDY (a combination object) is moved to the suggested position. At the same time, the operation button 410 is illuminated and decorated, and in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an operation promotion effect is displayed in which an operation promotion image for prompting the player to press the operation button 410 and a gauge indicating the operation valid period are displayed. (FIG. 240 (BB2)). Here, even if the player detects a pressing operation of the operation button 410 during the operation effective period of the operation button 410, the result notification as shown in FIG. The suggestion image (most blackout image) is displayed (FIG. 240 (BB3)). The switching suggestion image is displayed when the player presses the operation button 410 or the operation valid period of the operation button 410 ends. Thereafter, the sword ornament 5001 changes from the sword state to the second sword state (aura-equipped form), and in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an operation means that is effective for operation is displayed from the operation button 410 to the sword ornament 5001. A switching notification image (message of “extraction chance” and “having a sword”) is displayed (FIG. 240 (BB4)). In the meantime, the specific decorative member SDY (a glimpse) has been moved to the suggested position. Then, when the operation effective period of the sword ornament 5001 is generated, the operation promotion effect of the sword ornament 5001 shown in FIG. 239 (AA3) is performed. The effect transition after the operation promotion effect is the same as the effect transition after the operation promotion effect in the second suggestion pattern (FIG. 238).

  Note that only the image display of the button operation 410 may be performed without enabling the button operation 410 (no operation promotion effect) in the above-described FIG. 240 (BB2). It is only necessary that the sword ornament 5001 is operated after the player's interest is once directed to the button operation 410. Further, the step-up pattern is not limited to the second suggestion pattern, but may be selectable when it becomes the first suggestion pattern.

  As described above, in the pre-operation suggestion effect of this example, the specific decorative member SDY (saddle character) is displayed before the operation effective period of the operation means in which one of the plurality of operation means is enabled. ) Can be changed, and an operation means that is effective according to the position is suggested. Specifically, in the first suggestion pattern (FIG. 237 (B)) in which the operation effective period is generated in a state where the specific decorative member SDY (a combination object) is located at the initial position, the operation button 410 is operated effectively. In the second suggestion pattern (FIG. 239 (AA1)), the sword ornament 5001 has a high degree of expectation and the operation effective period is generated in a state in which the specific decoration member SDY (a spear object) is located at the suggestion position. Therefore, since the player pays attention to the state of the specific decorative member SDY (a combination object) in order to grasp which operation means is effective, it is suggested before the operation. The interest of the production can be enhanced.

  Further, in the second suggestion pattern, the specific decorative member SDY (a saddle accessory) is moved in small increments in the vertical direction in the pre-operation suggestion effect. Since the operation effect (falling effect) of the specific decorative member SDY (a saddle accessory) is also used for the result notification after the operation of the operating means (FIG. 238), a series of falling effects are made from the vertical movement of the suggestion effect before the operation. It can be shown in the production of this, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in the entertainment interest. In the above description, the state of the specific decorative member SDY (a glimpse), that is, the expectation that the operation means that is effective by the movable body is effective, is not limited to this. A display may be made to indicate the degree of expectation. In addition, when the operation means to be effective is determined, not only the lighting of the operation button 410 or the change of the sword decorative body 5001 to the second extraction state, but also the operation means to be effective in operation is moved by vibration or the like. Or you may.

  In the second suggestion pattern, after the operation button 410 is activated once (or after it appears that the operation is validated) in a state where the specific decorative member SDY (a glimpse) is located at the suggested position, D) A step-up pattern is provided in which the sword ornament 5001 is operated effectively. Thereby, the player is interested in both operation means. Also, even if the operation button 410 becomes effective immediately after the pre-operation suggestion effect, it can be expected that the operation of the sword ornament 5001 may become effective thereafter. Can be suppressed.

  In the first suggestion pattern of the pre-operation suggestion effect, the operation effect suggestion image before the operation effective period in which any one of the plurality of operation means (the operation button 410 or the sword ornament 5001) is effective is displayed. At the same time (FIG. 237 (B)), similarly to the second suggestion pattern (FIG. 239 (AA1)), the specific decorative member SDY (glare) is viewed from the initial position in the display area of the effect display device 1600. It is also possible to operate in a small fall state (suggested position) overlapping with the upper part, and to move in small increments in the vertical direction between the initial position and the suggested position. In addition, when the operation effective period is generated thereafter, the specific decorative member SDY (saddle) is returned to the initial position (still). As a result, the motion of the specific decorative member SDY (a glimpse) in the first suggestion pattern is partly the same as the motion in the second suggestion pattern at the same timing, so that the player provides an operation effect suggestion by the first suggestion pattern. Even when the image is displayed, it is possible to make it seem that the pre-operation suggestion effect of the second suggestion pattern is being executed. For this reason, even when the pre-operation suggestion effect by the first suggestion pattern is being executed, it is possible to cause the player to expect that the sword decorative body 5001 is operated effectively. The player strongly desires that the operation valid period is generated in a state in which the specific decorative member SDY (a combination object) operated at the display timing of the operation effect suggestion image is moved to the suggested position. The interest of the production can be improved.

[Specific operation-related effects]
As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, when a specific result is obtained in the effect determination according to the result of the jackpot determination, the game board side effect display device 1600 has a specific effect. Produce with a pattern. In the production period in which the specific production pattern is executed, a specific production reception period (valid period) for establishing a specific production execution condition can be generated by an operation by the player, and the operation is performed within the specific production reception period. Based on the establishment of a specific performance execution condition, it is possible to execute a specific operation-time effect (such as an effect that suggests the degree of expectation related to privilege provision). 100% or 0% may be expected for the privilege grant suggested as a result of the specific operation time effect.

  In addition, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as an operation means provided for such an operation-time effect (such as an effect that suggests the degree of expectation for providing a privilege when operated) In addition to the button 410, it is possible to further include another operating means (sword ornament 5001 or the like). In this regard, in a specific effect pattern, when an operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410 based on the result of the effect determination (when a specific effect execution condition is satisfied when the operation button 410 is operated), There are cases where an operation opportunity is given to another operation means (such as the sword ornament 5001) (when a specific performance execution condition is satisfied when another operation means is operated). Then, when an operation opportunity is given to another operation means (such as the sword decorative body 5001), the pre-operation effect in which the operation opportunity is given is generated even if the operation opportunity is not performed. It is made possible for the player to recognize that the degree of expectation (givenness expectation degree) related to privilege grant is higher than when the operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410. 100% or 0% may be expected for providing the privilege suggested when an operation opportunity is given to another operation means (such as the sword decorative body 5001).

  According to such a configuration, when an operation opportunity is given to another operation means (such as the sword ornament 5001), an operation corresponding to the operation on the other operation means (such as the sword ornament 5001) is performed. It is possible to improve the game entertainment when the stage is in a previous stage where the stage has not yet been performed and the operation is just being performed. That is, in this case, a desired effect result (such as an effect result that suggests that the degree of expectation related to the provision of a privilege is high) does not appear in the operation effect according to the operation on another operation means (such as the sword ornament 5001). So that even if the operation means cannot be operated within the specific production reception period (valid period), the game entertainment can be improved through such operation-related productions. Become.

  In the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, an operation opportunity is given to any of a plurality of operation means (such as the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001) having such a stunning property. In the case where the operation opportunity is given, a common operation-related effect can be executed when the operation opportunities are given.

For example, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, at least as an effect mode for generating an effective period (effect reception period) in which an operation on the operation button 410 is enabled (production reception is possible),
The operation on the operation button 410 is enabled after the “specific operation-related effect” that can appear even when the operation on the sword decorative body 5001 is enabled (allowing for receiving the effect). ) The first production mode for generating a valid period (production reception period), and the operation for the operation button 410 is activated without producing the “specific operation-related production” (production reception is possible). A plurality of production modes such as a second production mode for generating a valid period (production reception period) are prepared, and the operation on the operation button 410 is validated (production) by executing one of the production modes. An effective period (production reception period) to be accepted is generated.

  According to such a configuration, when a period in which an operation on a specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410) among the plurality of operation means (the operation button 410, the sword ornament 5001, etc.) can be accepted for production occurs. Regardless of the case in which a period during which the operation means different from the specific operation means (for example, the sword decorative body 5001) can accept the production occurs, it is common (specification prior to the occurrence of those periods). ) Operation-related effects can be executed, so that it is possible to have an interesting aspect as to which of the specific operation means and another operation means can be accepted. By causing the operation to be performed while the game is being performed, it is possible to suppress a decrease in gaming interest.

  Note that such a common (specific) operation-related effect corresponds to one of a plurality of operation means (for example, the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001) when a predetermined time has elapsed since the effect was started. An effect reception period will be generated. At least when the effect starts to be produced, which of the operation means (for example, the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001) corresponds to the effect reception period. It is desirable to keep secret.

  Hereinafter, several production modes that can be adopted when such a common (specific) operation-related production will be described. In each of the following explanation examples and other examples, the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001 are used as a plurality of operation means that are targets of common (specific) operation-related effects. The types of operation means are not limited to these, and three or more operation means may be prepared as a plurality of operation means that are targets of common (specific) operation-related effects. In addition, the following production examples and other examples thereof mainly show production contents when any production reception period occurs after execution of a common (specific) operation-related production. ) If any production reception period occurs without the execution of the operation related production, the content of the production may be omitted. However, the content of the production in the case where any of the production acceptance periods occurs without executing the common (specific) operation-related production is “the operation on the operation button 410 without executing the specific operation-related production”. A general effect such as an operation instruction image that prompts an operation or an operation instruction image that prompts an operation on the sword ornament 5001 appears. Furthermore, in each of the following production examples and other examples thereof, a common (specific) operation-related production is performed when the reach state is not formed, but the reach state is formed and the reach production is performed. A common (specific) operation-related effect may be generated as an image different from the effect image displayed as the reach effect during the period in which the game is executed, or common during the jackpot game execution period A (specific) operation-related effect may be generated.

  In addition, each effect described below can be executed in combination with each other, which will be described later, as appropriate, and can also be executed in appropriate combination with each effect described above. Is possible. Each of the effects described below can be combined by substituting a part of each of the effects described later, and when the first effect pattern is executed, the effects described below are performed. Thus, when the second effect pattern is executed, it is possible to perform effects of different examples described later. The same can be said between the productions of different examples described later.

[First production mode]
241 and 242 show that at least one of the operation button 410 and the sword decorative body 5001 can accept an effect during a period in which the specific operation-related effect is being executed after the specific operation-related effect is started. It is a figure which shows the example of a production (1st production aspect).

  FIG. 241 (a) shows that, in the normal gaming state, the decorative display SZ (special symbol) is displayed on the effect display device 1600 in a specific effect pattern according to the result of the jackpot determination when the number of holds is 0. The production situation is shown.

  FIG. 241 (b) shows an effect situation in which a specific operation-related effect has been started during the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 241 (a).

  Here, in the specific operation-related effect shown in FIG. 241 (b), the button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410 and the sword decoration image SYG corresponding to the sword decoration body 5001 are displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. A display that moves in each is performed. As described above, a plurality of types of operation-related images (here, the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG) respectively corresponding to different types of operation means are displayed in the display area, so that the operation button 410 and the sword are displayed. It remains unclear which of the decorative bodies 5001 can receive the production, suggesting that operations on any of these operation means (operation button 410, sword decorative body 5001) will soon be able to receive the production. Will be able to.

  In FIG. 241 (c), the specific operation-related effects shown in FIG. 241 (b) progress, and both the button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410 and the sword decoration image SYG corresponding to the sword decoration body 5001 are displayed. An instruction display prompting to operate any one of the operation means (the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001) in a state where each area is stopped and displayed (in this case, a character display such as “operate”) and an effect reception The production situation in which a bar display indicating the remaining time of the possible period appears.

  According to such a production mode, although the operation can be received for at least one of the operation button 410 and the sword decorative body 5001, the operation means (the operation button 410, the sword decorative body 5001). It becomes possible to make it unclear which of the productions can be accepted. This is because the same effect mode (FIG. 241 (c)) is the same in both the situation where the operation on the operation button 410 can be accepted and the situation where the operation on the sword ornament 5001 can be accepted. It is nothing but because it is displayed. That is, in this effect example (first effect mode), a plurality of operation means before the operation can be accepted for the operation of at least one of the plurality of operation means (operation button 410, sword decorative body 5001). Common (specific) operation relations as shown in FIGS. 241 (b) and (c) over a period until an operation for at least one of the (operation button 410, sword ornament 5001) can be accepted. The production is executed.

  Therefore, in addition to this production example, in each production example described below and other examples thereof, the production content of the specific operation-related production is limited to the contents shown in FIGS. 241 (b) and (c). Absent. In short, when a specific operation-related effect is executed, at least one of the effect reception period for the operation button 410 and the effect reception period for the sword ornament 5001 is thereafter (here, the execution period of the specific operation-related effect). Middle). With such a configuration, at least one of the operation means (operation button 410, sword ornament 5001) remains unclear as to which of the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001 can receive the production. It is possible to suggest that the operation for one can be accepted. For example, a plurality of types of operation-related images (here, the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG) respectively corresponding to different types of operation means may not necessarily be displayed simultaneously, or the button image BTG and the sword decoration image may be displayed simultaneously. None of the images SYG may appear, and an effect image different from any of them may appear as a specific operation-related effect.

  However, in order to more reliably conceal which of the operation buttons 410 and the sword decorative body 5001 can be accepted for the production, the production reception period for the operation buttons 410 occurs and the production for the sword decoration 5001 It is more desirable that the time required from the execution of a specific operation-related effect (production start) to the generation of the effect reception period is set to be the same when the reception period occurs.

  In addition, as an operation instruction to be displayed while a specific operation-related effect is being performed, it is unclear which of the operation means should be operated, but a display prompting an operation on any of the operation means (“operate” Etc.), or always operating a specific operation means among the plurality of operation means regardless of how each of the operation means can receive a production. It is also possible to perform a display prompting the user. In short, even if an operation instruction is given, the same effect mode appears in both the situation where the operation on the operation button 410 can be accepted and the situation where the operation on the sword decorative body 5001 can be accepted. By doing so, it becomes possible to give an operation opportunity while keeping secret which of the plurality of operation means can receive the production.

  Also, in the effect example (first effect mode) shown in FIG. 241 (c), it is concealed whether the operation of the operation button 410 or the sword ornament 5001 can be accepted. Even when the operation on the sword decorative body 5001 can be accepted for production, and also when the operation on the sword ornament 5001 is not accepted for production (when in any of the first to third situations described later) However, only the operation button 410 of the operation button 410 and the sword decorative body 5001 is in a light emitting state, and the operation on the operation button 410 is prompted. However, instead of this, both the operation button 410 and the sword decorative body 5001 may be in a non-light-emitting state, or light emitting means may be provided on the sword decorative body 5001 side to provide a connection between the operation button 410 and the sword decorative body 5001. Both may be made to emit light.

  Here, in this production example (first production mode), the production situation in which the image shown in FIG. 241 (c) appears is that only the operation on the operation button 410 among the operation buttons 410 and the sword ornament 5001. Whether it is in the first situation where it is possible to accept the production, whether it is in the second situation where only the operation on the sword ornament 5001 is acceptable, or the operation on the operation button 410 and the operation on the sword ornament 5001 Both are set to be in any one of the third situations where the production can be accepted. When a second situation (a situation in which an operation opportunity is given to the sword ornament 5001) occurs among the plurality of situations, an operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410. The degree of expectation for granting a privilege is higher than when the situation) occurs. Therefore, the ratio of occurrence of the second situation (situation where an operation opportunity is given to the sword ornament 5001) within the symbol variation according to the result of the jackpot determination is the first situation (operation opportunity for the operation button 410). It is desirable to make it lower than the rate of occurrence of

  In this effect example (first effect mode), an operation on the operation button 410 is performed when the first condition (the operation button 410) or the third condition (the operation button 410 or the sword ornament 5001) is present. Is performed (whether "FF" is progressed in the figure), or the second situation (sword ornament 5001) and the third situation (operation button 410, sword ornament 5001) When an operation is performed on the sword decorative body 5001 (when “GG” in the drawing is made progress), an effect is accepted and an operation effect according to the operation (FIGS. 242 (d) and 242 (f)). Is to be done.

  In the operation effect, regardless of the situation shown in FIGS. 242 (d) and (f), the specific decorative member SDY is displaced to the front of the display area, and the effect display device 1600 displays a predetermined display effect. ("Chance!") Is executed. In addition, as the predetermined display effects, for example, “chance !!” suggested that the degree of expectation is relatively low, and “hot heat!” Suggested that the degree of expectation is relatively high. It is also possible to prepare a plurality of presentation modes, and to display one of these presentation modes according to the reception of the presentation, thereby suggesting the degree of expectation related to the provision of benefits. Similarly to this, for the operation of the specific decorative member SDY, for example, by providing an effect mode that does not perform the operation of displacing to the front of the display area, and making any of these effect modes appear in response to the effect reception In addition, the degree of expectation related to the privilege grant may be suggested. The degree of expectation may be “100%” or “0%”.

  Moreover, in the operation effect according to this effect example (first effect mode), the effect is accepted by the player's operation in any of the situations shown in FIGS. 242 (d) and (f). Then, based on the operation, it is possible to execute control for setting the operating means to the operating state (a state different from the non-operating state before the operation).

  More specifically, in the production situation shown in FIG. 242 (d), the operation is performed in response to the production reception even though the operation is performed on the operation button 410 by the player. It is possible to execute control for reciprocating the sword decorative body 5001 on the side that is not performed between the first position and the second position. According to such a configuration, although there is a situation in which an effect is received as a result of an operation performed by the player on the operation button 410 and an operation effect on the operation button 410 side is executed, Even if the button 410 is not operated and the sword decorative body 5001 on the higher expectation side is operated, the production reception is generated and the on-stage operation on the sword decorative body 5001 side is executed. ”Can be appealed to the player.

  On the other hand, in the performance situation shown in FIG. 242 (f), as a result of the player performing a sword operation on the sword decorative body 5001, the sword decorative body 5001 is placed in the sword position according to the reception of the performance. Instead of returning to the (sword state), it is possible to execute control to maintain the blade position (sword state). As a result, the sword ornament 5001 moves from the sword position (sword state) to the sword position (sword state) based on an operation by the player, and is maintained in such a sword state. Occasionally there will be a performance during operation. Therefore, even if the same effect (specific decoration member SDY, predetermined display effect, etc.) is produced by the operation effect on the operation button 410 side and the operation effect on the sword ornament 5001 side, the sword ornament at that time By confirming the operation state of 5001, it becomes possible to learn the actual feeling that the operation effect due to the operation on the sword decorative body 5001 side is being executed.

  Then, after the operation effect (FIGS. 242 (d) and (f)) is performed in this way, as shown in FIG. 242 (e), a reach state is formed and the reach effect can be performed. However, since there is a possibility that an effect using the sword ornament 5001 may be executed during the execution period of the reach effect, either the operation effect on the operation button 410 side or the operation effect on the sword ornament 5001 side is selected. Even when it is executed, when the predetermined time has elapsed (before the reach effect is started), the sword decorative body 5001 is not operated (sword insertion position (sword insertion state)). Control to return to is performed. However, in order to preferably obtain the above-described effects, the sword decorative body 5001 has at least half or more of a period from when the specific decorative member SDY moves to the display area side to return to the initial position (non-driving position). It is desirable that the operation state (reciprocal operation or maintenance in the sword state) is continued over a period of time. In addition, regarding the sword decorative body 5001, the power consumed by stopping the operation state at an earlier stage than before the specific decorative member SDY returns to the initial position (non-driving position) to prevent the driving force from being applied. More desirable in relation to quantity (movable load).

  According to the effect example (first effect mode) shown in FIGS. 241 and 242 as described above, specific operation means (for example, sword decoration body) among the plurality of operation means (operation button 410 and sword decoration body 5001). 5001) is the case where the production can be accepted and the case where the production cannot be accepted, the common (specific) operation-related production starts, and the common (specific) where the production is started. While an operation-related effect is being executed, a specific operation means (for example, a sword decorative body 5001) can receive an effect, or the specific operation means (for example, a sword decorative body 5001) cannot receive an effect. Since the operation button 410 can be receivable at the same time, the specific operation means (for example, the sword ornament 5001) and the other operation means (for example, the operation button 410) have effects respectively. It is possible to impart operation opportunities while if there is a possibility with the secret.

  In this effect example (first effect mode), in particular, a specific operation means (for example, a sword decorative body 5001) can accept an effect, or the specific operation means (for example, a sword decorative body 5001) is in effect. Regardless of whether or not the operation button 410 can be receivable without being accepted, when the operation opportunity is given while such a common (specific) operation-related rendition is being performed, the operation button 410 and Coupled with the fact that only the operation button 410 of the sword decorative body 5001 emits light, even if the sword decorative body 5001 can accept the production, the sword decorative body 5001 can accept the production. You will be able to be confused as if not. That is, in this case, when an effect is received, it becomes possible to prompt the user to operate the operation button 410 on the lower side instead of the sword decorative body 5001, which is the side with a higher rate of expectation. When a common (specific) operation-related effect is performed, it is expected to add interest about which operation means should be operated.

  In addition, when such a common (specific) operation-related effect is being performed and the operation means on the side that is not enabled to receive the effect (the side where the effect reception period has not occurred) is operated, No reaction will occur. However, it is possible to enjoy the demerit that the production reception period is consumed by the amount of such erroneous operation and the remaining time is reduced.

  However, when the operation means on the side that is not enabled to receive the production (the side where the production reception period has not occurred) is operated while the common (specific) operation-related production is being performed, Although the reception of the production required for the execution of the production (specific decorative member SDY, predetermined display production, etc.) is not established, the operation is detected, and the operation on the side where the production can be accepted based on the detection. You may make it perform control which ends the production reception period with respect to a means at the time. According to such a configuration, since there is a risk that the operation opportunity will be lost, it is urged to carefully consider which of the plurality of operation means is allowed to receive the production and to operate it carefully. become able to.

  Also, in the above-described effect example (first effect mode), the same effect (specific decoration member SDY, predetermined display effect, etc.) is produced by the operation effect on the operation button 410 side and the operation effect on the sword decorative body 5001 side. However, the operation effects may be different from each other. For example, in the operation effect on the sword decorative body 5001 side, in addition to the effect mode performed in the operation effect on the operation button 410 side, another effect mode (for example, a light emitting unit different from the effect display device 1600 emits light) If an effect on the sword ornament 5001 is accepted, the game entertainment can be improved more appropriately.

  Further, when preparing another production mode that can be executed only when the first operation means (for example, the operation button 410 or the sword ornament 5001) is operated, it is related to the generation of the other production mode. When the production reception period is set for the first operation means (for example, the operation button 410 or the sword ornament 5001), the production reception period related to the generation of the other production mode is not set. An effect reception period is set for the second operation means (for example, the operation button 410 if the first operation means is the operation button 410 and the operation button 410 if the first operation means is the sword decoration 5001). In either case, it may be possible to perform an operation-time effect when there is an operation on the first operating means in the situation shown in FIG. 241 (c). That is, in this case, when there is an operation on the first operating means when the production reception period related to the generation of the other production mode is set while the common (specific) operation-related production is performed, When another production mode is executed as an operation-time production, while a common (specific) operation-related production is performed, the production reception period related to the generation of the other production mode is not set (No. When an operation for the first operation means is performed during the time period for receiving the effect for the second operation means), another effect mode is not executed as the operation effect, but when the operation button 410 is operated. The same operation will be performed. In short, when an effect reception period related to the generation of another effect mode is not set for the first operation means, the effect reception period related to the generation of the operation effect on the second operation means side is set to the second operation means. The setting is made for both the operating means and the first operating means. In addition, when making another production | generation aspect appear as an operation time production, in addition to the production aspect performed with the operation time production | generation on the 2nd operation means side, it does not make the said other production aspect appear, but 2nd operation The operation-time effect may be performed as effect content different from the operation-time effect on the means side.

  In the above-described effect example (first effect mode), the situation in which the instruction display prompting the operation appears while the common (specific) operation-related effect is performed is that the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001 are displayed. The first situation in which only the operation on the operation button 410 can accept the effect, the second situation in which only the operation on the sword ornament 5001 can accept the effect, and the operation on the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001 It is supposed that the setting is made so as to correspond to any one of the third situations in which the production can be accepted. In this case, in the first situation and the second situation, when the presentation is accepted, the same operation-time effect appears. In the third situation, the operation is different from both the first situation and the second situation. It is desirable that an effect or another effect aspect (different from the operation effects in the first situation and the second situation) should appear. However, in the example of the production, the third situation is not necessarily required.

  In addition, the operation button 410 according to the above-described effect example is not provided as an operation unit to which driving force is applied by the control by the peripheral control MPU 1511a, but the operation button 410 is provided as an operable operation unit. Above, in the production example (first production mode), even in the production situation shown in FIG. 242 (f), the player does not perform an operation as in the production situation shown in FIG. 242 (d). The control for operating the operation button 410 on the other side may be executable. In such control, it is important to operate at least the operation means on the side that has not been operated by the player. At this time, the operation means on the side that has been operated by the player is also operated. Whether or not it may be designed appropriately. However, the control for operating the operation means on the side on which the player has not performed the operation is performed at an earlier stage than before the specific decorative member SDY provided on the game board 5 returns to the initial position (non-drive position). It is desirable to end the operation state so that the player's gaze is naturally returned to the game board 5 side.

  In the case where the operation button 410 is provided as an operable operation means, the drive source that applies the drive force to the operation button 410 and the drive source that applies the drive force to the sword ornament 5001 are different drive sources. Alternatively, the same drive source may be used.

[Second production mode]
FIGS. 243 to 246 are executed as effects indicating the progress of the effect until a specific operation-related effect appears in either the first effect result or the second effect result. When the first effect result appears as a result of the above, it is suggested that an effect reception period for the operation button 410 occurs among the plurality of operation means, and when the second effect result appears as a result of the effect, the plurality of operation means It is a figure which shows the example of production (2nd production aspect) suggested that the production reception period with respect to the sword decorative body 5001 generate | occur | produces among these.

  In FIG. 243 (a), in the normal gaming state, the display of variation of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is performed on the effect display device 1600 with a specific effect pattern corresponding to the result of the big hit determination when the number of holds is zero. The production situation is shown.

  FIG. 243 (b) shows an effect situation in which the effect of the specific operation-related effect is started during the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 243 (a).

  Here, in the specific operation-related effect shown in FIG. 243 (b), the button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410 and the sword decoration image SYG corresponding to the sword ornament 5001 are displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. The image of the lightning image IZ acting on these images BTG and SYG is depicted. As described above, a plurality of types of operation-related images (here, the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG) respectively corresponding to different types of operation means are displayed in the display area, so that the operation button 410 and the sword are displayed. It remains unclear which of the decorative bodies 5001 can receive the production, suggesting that operations on any of these operation means (operation button 410, sword decorative body 5001) will soon be able to receive the production. Will be able to.

  In FIG. 243 (c), the specific operation-related effect shown in FIG. 243 (b) has progressed, and the button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410 and the sword decoration image SYG corresponding to the sword ornament 5001 are effect-displayed. There is an effect of pushing each other in the display area of the device 1600 to push the other party out of the display area.

  That is, the specific operation-related effects (FIGS. 243 (b) and (c)) according to this effect example (second effect mode) are “the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG are pressed against each other, An effect is received for the operation button 410 when an effect result (first effect result) in which the button image BTG is left appears. When a period occurs and an effect result (second effect result) in which the sword decoration image SYG is left appears, an effect reception period for the sword ornament 5001 is generated. Therefore, in this effect example (second effect mode), the effects shown in FIGS. 243 (b) and (c) are “the effect reception period for the operation button 410 and the effect reception period for the sword ornament 5001”. This is equivalent to a “specific operation-related effect that can appear before the occurrence of these periods”.

  Note that the left diagram in FIG. 243 (c) depicts a state in which the button image BTG remains dominant in the display area, and the right diagram displays the sword decoration image SYG. Describes the prevailing situation of remaining in the area. In a specific operation-related effect, such inferiority / dominance situation changes with time.

  FIG. 244 (d) shows a state in which the sword decoration image SYG is completely pushed out of the display area as a result of the performance shown in FIG. 243 (c), and the button image BTG is left in the display area. An effect depicting the above is performed (first effect result). When progressing to this effect content, the effect reception period for the sword ornament 5001 does not occur, and only the effect reception period for the operation button 410 occurs.

  That is, a specific operation-related effect (FIGS. 243 (b) and (c)) is executed that suggests that an operation opportunity will be given soon while keeping which of the plurality of operation means can be accepted. As a result, the sword decoration image SYG corresponding to the sword ornament 5001 is not displayed in the display area, and the button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410 is displayed in the display area (FIG. 244 (d)). Is executed, it is possible to recognize that the operation on the operation button 410 among the plurality of operation means can be accepted for the production (the production acceptance period for the operation button 410 occurs).

  At this time, in addition to the button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410, an instruction display for prompting an operation (a character display such as “press” or a bar display indicating the remaining time of the effect reception period) is displayed. It is possible to recognize that the operation on the operation button 410 among the operation means is in a state in which the effect can be accepted (during the effect accepting period for the operation button 410). In particular, in this production example, only the operation button 410 out of the operation button 410 and the sword decorative body 5001 is made to emit light, and the operation on the operation button 410 is prompted.

  Note that the effects shown in FIG. 244 (d) are not progressed through the specific operation-related effects (FIGS. 243 (b), (c), etc.), and without the specific operation-related effects. There is a case where an effect is developed (for example, an effect is developed from the effect state shown in FIG. 243 (a)). However, even if the same effect shown in FIG. 244 (d) is performed, when the effect is performed through a specific operation-related effect, the effect is performed without passing through the specific operation-related effect. It is desirable that the degree of expectation for granting a privilege be higher.

  In addition, regarding the length of the effect reception period, when an effect (FIG. 244 (d)) in which an operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410 through a specific operation-related effect is performed, the specific operation-related effect is performed. The rate at which the length of the effect reception period generated for the operation button 410 is shorter than when the effect that the operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410 without performing the operation (FIG. 244 (d)) is performed. It is desirable to increase the value. According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the gaming interests due to the dramatic delay described later when a specific operation-related effect is passed.

  In FIG. 244 (e), as a result of the operation performed on the operation button 410 among the plurality of operation means while the effect shown in FIG. 244 (d) is performed, the effect is accepted and the operation is performed. This is a depiction of the performance during operation.

  The operation effect shown in FIG. 244 (e) is the same as FIG. 242 (d). That is, in the operation effect shown in FIG. 244 (e), the specific decorative member SDY is displaced to the front side of the display area, and a predetermined display effect (“chance !!”) is executed in the effect display device 1600. It has become. At this time, the sword decorative body 5001 on the side where the operation is not performed is set to the first position and the second according to the reception of the presentation even though the operation is performed on the operation button 410 by the player. The same is true in that the control for reciprocating between the positions (control for setting the operation state) can be executed. In addition, as the predetermined display effects, for example, “chance !!” suggested that the degree of expectation is relatively low, and “hot heat!” Suggested that the degree of expectation is relatively high. It is also possible to prepare a plurality of presentation modes, and to display one of these presentation modes according to the reception of the presentation, thereby suggesting the degree of expectation related to the provision of benefits. Similarly to this, for the operation of the specific decorative member SDY, for example, an effect mode that does not perform the operation of displacing to the front side of the display area is provided, and any of these effect modes is caused to appear in response to the effect reception. Thus, the degree of expectation related to privilege provision may be suggested. The degree of expectation may be “100%” or “0%”.

  Then, after such an operation effect (FIG. 244 (e)) is performed, a reach state is formed and a reach effect can be performed as shown in FIG. 244 (f). However, since there is a possibility that an effect using the sword ornament 5001 may be executed during the reach effect execution period, when a predetermined time elapses after the operation effect is executed (the reach effect is started). Control is performed to return the sword decorative body 5001 to a non-operating state (sword storage state)) at an earlier stage. However, in order to preferably obtain the above-described effects, the sword decorative body 5001 has at least half or more of a period from when the specific decorative member SDY moves to the display area side to return to the initial position (non-driving position). It is desirable that the operation state (reciprocal operation or maintenance in the sword state) is continued over a period of time. In addition, regarding the sword decorative body 5001, the power consumed by stopping the operation state at an earlier stage than before the specific decorative member SDY returns to the initial position (non-driving position) to prevent the driving force from being applied. More desirable in relation to quantity (movable load).

  On the other hand, in FIG. 245 (g), as a result of the performance shown in FIG. 243 (c), the button image BTG is completely pushed out of the display area, and the sword decoration image SYG is within the display area. An effect depicting the remaining state is being performed (second effect result). When progressing to this effect content, the effect reception period for the operation button 410 does not occur, and only the effect reception period for the sword ornament 5001 occurs.

  That is, a specific operation-related effect (FIGS. 243 (b) and (c)) is executed that suggests that an operation opportunity will be given soon while keeping which of the plurality of operation means can be accepted. As a result, the button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410 is not displayed in the display area, and the sword decoration image SYG corresponding to the sword decoration 5001 is displayed in the display area (FIG. 245 (g)). Is executed, it is possible to recognize that the operation for the sword decorative body 5001 among the plurality of operation means can be accepted for production (the production reception period for the sword decorative body 5001 occurs). .

  At this time, in addition to the sword decoration image SYG corresponding to the sword decoration body 5001, an instruction display for prompting an operation (a character display such as “Take out the sword” or a bar display indicating the remaining time of the production reception period) is displayed. Thus, it is possible to recognize that the operation for the sword decorative body 5001 among the plurality of operation means is in a state in which the effect can be received (that is during the effect receiving period for the sword decorative body 5001). In particular, in this production example, only the operation unit including the operation button 410 and the sword decorative body 5001 including the sword decorative body 5001 (the sword decorative body 5001 itself may be turned on) is turned on. By doing so, an operation on the sword decorative body 5001 is urged.

  In addition, the effect shown in FIG. 245 (g) is not progressed through a specific operation-related effect (FIGS. 243 (b), (c), etc.), and without the specific operation-related effect. There is a case where an effect is developed (for example, an effect is developed from the effect state shown in FIG. 243 (a)). However, even if the same effect shown in FIG. 245 (g) is performed, when the effect is performed through a specific operation-related effect, the effect is performed without passing through the specific operation-related effect. It is desirable that the degree of expectation for granting a privilege be higher. Still further, when the effect shown in FIG. 244 (d) is performed through a specific operation-related effect, the effect shown in FIG. 245 (g) is performed without performing the specific operation-related effect. The degree of expectation required for granting the privilege is higher than the case, and the expectation required for granting the privilege is made lower than when the effect shown in FIG. 245 (g) is performed through a specific operation-related effect. desirable.

  FIG. 245 (h) shows that, as a result of the operation performed on the sword decorative body 5001 among the plurality of operation means while the effect shown in FIG. 245 (g) is performed, the effect is accepted and the operation is performed according to the operation. This is a depiction of the performance during the operation.

  The operation effect shown in FIG. 245 (h) is basically the same as the operation effect shown in FIG. 244 (e), and the specific decorative member SDY is displaced to the front side of the display area and the effect display device. In 1600, a predetermined display effect is executed. Here, although the production mode such as “Intense heat !!”, which indicates that the degree of expectation is relatively high, is displayed according to the production reception, it is suggested that the degree of expectation is relatively low. “Chance!” May be displayed. Similarly to this, for the operation of the specific decorative member SDY, for example, there is an effect mode that does not perform the operation of displacing to the front side of the display area, and any of these effect modes appears in response to the effect reception. Thus, the degree of expectation related to the privilege grant may be suggested. The degree of expectation may be “100%” or “0%”.

  However, in the operation effect shown in FIG. 245 (h), based on the operation on the sword ornament 5001, the effect aspect of the sword ornament 5001 itself changes to one of the above-described plural aspects ( The change from the stage 0 form shown in FIG. 222 to any of the stage 1 form to the stage 3 form) is possible, and depending on which of these forms appears, the degree of expectation required for granting a bonus such as a big hit The height is suggested.

  Moreover, as shown in FIG. 245 (i), even when the operation effect (FIG. 245 (h)) is ended and the specific decorative member SDY is returned to the initial position (non-drive position), The sword decorative body 5001 is not returned to the sword state, but is maintained in the sword state. That is, in this production example, although illustration is omitted, the sword decorative body 5001 is kept in the sword state and thereafter the sword decorative body 5001 is brought into the sword state (for example, during the period when the reach production is performed). An operation opportunity to be operated is further given, and at that time, an operation-time effect according to the operation to the state of the sword can be further executed.

  According to such a configuration, an operation opportunity is given to two operation steps for one operation means (sword decoration body 5001), and the first step operation (operation to the sword state) and the second step operation are performed. Since the operation effects are performed according to each operation (operation to the sword state), not only when the operation on the operation means (sword decorative body 5001) is performed, the first stage In the non-operation period from the time when the operation (operation to the sword state) is performed to the time when the second operation (operation to the sword state) is performed, it is expected to favorably maintain the gaming interest for the operation. Become so. It is desirable that the first-stage operation and the second-stage operation have different operation modes (in this case, operations in directions opposite to each other). In addition, it is desirable that the operation-time effect according to the first-stage operation and the operation-time effect according to the second-stage operation have different contents.

  In addition, when the operation effect (FIG. 245 (h)) corresponding to the first-stage operation is performed, the sword ornament 5001 is not necessarily maintained in the extracted state, and is not maintained in the extracted state. In this case, it is desirable not to be given the second stage operation opportunity. Whether the sword decorative body 5001 is maintained at a position where the second stage operation opportunity (operation opportunity from the sword state to the sword state) can be given (the sword state) in the operation stage production corresponding to the first stage operation. You may make it perform as an effect which suggests the expectation degree of no. That is, when the sword decorative body 5001 is not maintained in the sword state but returned to the sword state, it is practically impossible to give a second stage operation opportunity (operation opportunity from the sword state to the sword state). It is clear that it will be said. The degree of expectation may be “100%” or “0%”.

  As a result of performing the operation effect (FIG. 245 (h)) corresponding to the operation at the first stage, if the sword ornament 5001 is not maintained in the extracted state, when a predetermined time has elapsed (reach effect) Control is performed to return the sword decorative body 5001 to a non-driven state (sword storage state)) at a stage prior to the start of). In this case, however, the sword decorative body 5001 is in its operating state (reciprocating) over a period of at least half of the period from when the specific decorative member SDY moves to the display area side until it returns to the initial position (non-driving position). It is desirable to continue the operation or the maintenance in the sword state. In addition, regarding the sword decorative body 5001, the power consumed by stopping the operation state at an earlier stage than before the specific decorative member SDY returns to the initial position (non-driving position) to prevent the driving force from being applied. More desirable in relation to quantity (movable load).

  On the other hand, in FIG. 246 (j), as a result of the performance shown in FIG. 243 (c), the sword decoration image SYG is completely pushed out of the display area as in the case shown in FIG. 244 (d). Thus, an effect depicting the state in which the button image BTG is left in the display area is performed. That is, in this effect example (second effect mode), when the predetermined time has elapsed since the effect shown in FIG. 243 (c) is performed, the effect shown in FIG. 244 (d) or the result shown in FIG. Or the effect shown in FIG. 246 (j) appears. Note that which content of the effect appears is determined in advance in the determination process of the effect pattern according to the result of the big hit determination.

  However, in the effect shown in FIG. 246 (j), unlike the effect shown in FIG. 244 (d), the effect performed in a specific operation-related effect (FIGS. 243 (b) and (c)). Here, the lightning image IZ is continued, and it is suggested that such a lightning image IZ may cause some change to the button image BTG.

  In addition, in the effect shown in FIG. 246 (j), an instruction display for prompting an operation (a character display such as “press” or a bar display indicating the remaining time of the effect reception period) is not displayed. This is different from the case of the production shown in FIG. Thereby, although the sword decoration image SYG is completely pushed out of the display area and the button image BTG is left in the display area, the effect reception period for the button image BTG has not yet occurred. It becomes possible to recognize that there is.

  FIG. 246 (k) shows that, as a result of the development shown in FIG. 246 (j), the lightning image IZ acts on the button image BTG, the button image BTG is wrapped in 靄 MY, and even its outline is lost. There is a production that will be broken.

  That is, in the effect shown in FIG. 246 (k), all effect elements (button image BTG) that suggested that the operation on the operation button 410 can be accepted as an effect are removed. Therefore, although there is a situation once suggested by the effect shown in FIG. 246 (j) that the operation on the operation button 410 can be accepted, the effect shown in FIG. 246 (k) appears. Thus, it becomes possible to give a suspicion that the production reception period for the operation button 410 will occur.

  In the effect shown in FIG. 246 (k), the effect display (in this case, the lightning image IZ) performed in the specific operation-related effect (FIGS. 243 (b) and (c)) is continued. . However, here, the aspect of the lightning image IZ is changing (disappearing), and the remaining time until it is clearly shown for which of the plurality of operation means the production reception period occurs is reduced. Suggests that

  In FIG. 246 (i), as a result of the development shown in FIG. 246 (k), the outline of the bag MY approaches the sword decoration body 5001 (sword decoration image SYG) instead of the operation button 410 (button image BTG). There is a performance that depicts the appearance.

  According to such a configuration, although the sword decoration image SYG is not yet displayed, there is a possibility that an effect reception period for the sword decoration body 5001 may occur instead of the operation button 410 depending on the outer shape of the heel MY. Will be able to.

  Also, in the effect shown in FIG. 246 (i), the effect display (in this case, the lightning image IZ) that was performed in the specific operation-related effect (FIGS. 243 (b) and (c)) is continued. . However, here, the aspect of the lightning image IZ is further changed (immediately before disappearing) from FIG. 246 (k), and until which of the plurality of operation means the production reception period occurs is clearly indicated. This suggests that the remaining time is less.

  Then, in this effect example (second effect mode), when the effect shown in FIG. 246 (i) further progresses and 靄 MY is hidden, the sword decoration image SYG is displayed and FIG. 245 is displayed. The effect shown in (g) is performed.

  According to such a configuration, as a result of a specific operation-related effect (FIGS. 243 (b) and (c)), the sword decoration image SYG is not displayed on the effect display device 1600, and the button image BTG is displayed. Even if it is done (FIG. 244 (d), FIG. 246 (j)), there is a possibility that an effect reception period for the sword decorative body 5001 will be generated. Will be able to.

  In particular, in this effect example (second effect mode), when the sword decoration image SYG is not displayed on the effect display device 1600 and the button image BTG is displayed (FIGS. 244 (d) and 246 (j)). By confirming whether or not the effect display by the lightning image IZ that appeared in the specific operation-related effect (FIGS. 243 (b) and (c)) is still continued, the effect on the sword ornament 5001 It is possible to grasp whether or not there is a possibility that the reception period will occur, and this also makes it possible to maintain the gaming interest.

  In this effect example (second effect mode), when the effect shown in FIG. 246 (j) appears, the button image BTG is hidden by 靄 MY (FIG. 246 (k)), and further When the production progresses, the sword decoration image SYG is displayed, and the production shown in FIG. 245 (g) is always generated. In this sense, the effect shown in FIG. 246 (j) does not display the sword decoration image SYG on the effect display device 1600 and displays the button image BTG. It can also be said that the production suggests that a production reception period for the body 5001 occurs.

  However, instead of this, when the effect shown in FIG. 246 (k) progresses, the operation button 410 (button image BTG) is set such that the outer shape of the heel MY does not necessarily approach the sword decoration body 5001 (sword decoration image SYG). ) May be set so as to appear, and when the effect pattern appears, the button image BTG is displayed again and the effect shown in FIG. 244 (d) may be performed. When such an effect pattern can be performed, the effect shown in FIGS. 246 (j) and (k) is also concealed from which of the plurality of operation means can be accepted. It will be executed as a specific operation-related effect.

  In addition, in the production situation shown in FIG. 245 (h) in the above production example (second production mode) with the operation button 410 provided as an operable operation means, FIG. 244 (e) As in the production situation shown in FIG. 4, it may be possible to execute control for operating the operation button 410 on the side where no operation is performed by the player. In such control, it is important to operate at least the operation means on the side that has not been operated by the player. At this time, the operation means on the side that has been operated by the player is also operated. Whether or not it may be designed appropriately.

  In the case where the operation button 410 is provided as an operable operation means, the drive source that applies the drive force to the operation button 410 and the drive source that applies the drive force to the sword ornament 5001 are different drive sources. Alternatively, the same drive source may be used.

[Third production mode]
247 to 250 are basically the same as the second effect mode with respect to the specific operation-related effect, but show another example of the effect (third effect mode) different from the second effect mode. It is.

  In FIG. 247 (a), in the normal gaming state, the decorative display SZ (special symbol) is displayed on the effect display device 1600 with a specific effect pattern according to the result of the big hit determination when the number of holds is 0. The production situation is shown.

  FIG. 247 (b) shows an effect situation where a specific operation-related effect has been started during the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 247 (a). However, as shown in FIG. 247 (b), in a specific operation-related effect according to this effect example (third effect mode), first, a predetermined movable member different from the effect display device 1600 is operated. Thus, it is suggested that either the operation button 410 or the sword decorative body 5001 can soon receive the production.

  In particular, in this effect example (third effect mode), the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001 are adopted as such a predetermined movable member, and the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001 are operated respectively. Thus, it is easy for any of the operation buttons 410 and the sword ornament 5001 to be ready to receive an effect soon after the effect display related to the operation is not yet performed on the effect display device 1600 side. It is supposed to be recognizable. Here, control is performed to operate the operation button 410 and the sword decorative body 5001 from the initial position toward the operation position. However, compared to when operating the operation button 410 and the sword decorative body 5001 to the operation position when giving an operation opportunity, respectively. Each of them at a slow speed.

  According to such a configuration, it is an operating means that still has time left until the production reception period occurs, or an operation means in which the production reception period does not occur until the symbol variation ends. Regardless, these operation means (the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001) operate. Therefore, from the situation where there is still time until the production reception period occurs, or when the production reception period does not occur until the symbol change ends, It can be suitably maintained.

  In this effect example (third effect mode), a specific operation-related effect is generated not by the effect display on the effect display device 1600 but by each operation by the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001 (FIG. 247 (b)). After the start, basically the same production progress as the second production mode is made.

  For example, first, of the effects shown in FIG. 247 (c), the effect display on the effect display device 1600 is except that the button image BTG is displayed as corresponding to the “movable operation button 410”. The production contents are as described with reference to FIG. 243 (b).

  However, in the effect shown in FIG. 247 (c), unlike the effect shown in FIG. 243 (b), the operation button 410 and the sword decorative body 5001 are operated from their initial positions (positions when not driven), respectively. It has become. In the effect shown in FIG. 247 (c), it is suggested that either the operation button 410 or the sword decorative body 5001 can accept the effect even by such a movable effect.

  In the effect shown in FIG. 247 (c), the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001 are different from the initial positions (positions when not driven) after the specific operation-related effect is started. And an operation state (a state where driving force is applied) at a position different from the operation position when the operation opportunity is given.

  That is, when such an operation-related effect is performed, the operation-related effect is extended as compared with the case where the operation-related effect is not performed and an operation opportunity is immediately given, When the operation means is employed, even if such an operation-related effect is finally ended, it is necessary to operate the operation unit on the side where the effect can be accepted at least to the operation position. Therefore, the operation-related effects are further extended for the time required for such operations, and there is a concern that the gaming interest will be reduced by such an extension.

  Therefore, in this effect example (third effect mode), the operation button 410 and the sword decorative body 5001 are placed at both the initial position (non-drive position) and the operation position during the period in which the specific operation-related effect is performed. It is made to position as an operation state (state which applied driving force) in a different position (for example, intermediate position). As a result, when a specific operation-related effect is ended and an effect reception period occurs, the operation means on the side where the effect reception period occurs is operated to the operation position in a shorter time, or the effect reception period does not occur The operation means on the other side can be moved to the initial position only in a shorter time, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the game entertainment interest due to the extension of the operation-related effects. Also, until the production reception period occurs, the operation means on the side to be operated is positioned as an operation state at a position different from the operation position. It becomes possible to easily recognize that this has not yet occurred.

  Then, when the effect shown in FIG. 247 (c) progresses and the effect shown in FIG. 247 (d) is performed, the effect display on the effect display device 1600 indicates that the button image BTG is “movable operation button. Except for being displayed as corresponding to “410”, the content of the effect is as described with reference to FIG. 243 (c). However, even in the effect shown in FIG. 247 (d), unlike the effect shown in FIG. 243 (c), the operation button 410 and the sword decorative body 5001 are moved to the initial position (position when not driven) and the operation position, respectively. These are positioned as operating states (states where driving force is applied) at positions different from the above.

  In the effects shown in FIGS. 247 (b) and (c), the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG in the effect display device 1600 are in the initial position (non-driven position). In contrast, the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001 are positioned in an operating state at a position different from the initial position (non-driven position). In this way, the mode of the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG in the effect display device 1600 and the mode of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001 are different from each other, so that their matching will be soon. It can be suggested that the illustrated effect (whether the mode of the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG changes or the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001 operate) occurs.

  As a result of the effect shown in FIG. 247 (d), when the effect shown in FIG. 248 (e) is performed, the effect display on the effect display device 1600 indicates that the button image BTG is “at the operation position”. Except for being displayed as corresponding to the movable operation button 410 "at the time, the contents of the production are as described with reference to FIG. 244 (d).

  However, in the effect shown in FIG. 248 (e), unlike the effect shown in FIG. 244 (d), the operation button 410 is in the operating position and the sword ornament 5001 is in the initial position. It is in a state of being operated at a position different from both the (non-driving position) and the operation position. That is, in this case, since the operation button 410 has moved from the position closer to the operation position to the operation position than the initial position (position at the time of non-drive), the extension of the operation-related effects is preferably suppressed. Become so.

  As an effect shown in FIG. 248 (e), “a display effect in which the button image BTG is displayed (desirably displayed in a manner moved to the operation position) and the sword decoration image SYG is not displayed” is first provided. After performing the display effect, the operation button 410 is moved to the operation position, and an instruction display for prompting the operation by generating an effect reception period for the operation button 410 (character display such as “press”) You may make it display the bar display which shows the remaining time of a reception period. According to such a configuration, the button image BTG that appears as a result of execution of a specific operation-related effect is displayed in the “mode moved to the operation position”, whereas the operation button at the time of display is displayed. 410 is a mode different from the “mode moved to the operation position”. As described above, the button image BTG that appears as a result of the execution of the specific operation-related effects is displayed as a mode different from the mode of the operation button 410 at that time, so that the deviation of these modes is soon filled. (Here, the operation button 410 moves to the operation position) can be suggested in advance.

  When the effect shown in FIG. 248 (e) is performed as a result of the effect shown in FIG. 248 (e), the effect display device 1600 has been described with reference to FIG. 244 (e). The contents of the street will appear. However, in the effect shown in FIG. 248 (f), unlike the effect shown in FIG. 244 (e), the operation button 410 is returned from the operation position to the initial position (non-drive position). In addition, the sword ornament 5001 is in a state of operating at a position different from both the initial position (position when not driven) and the operation position.

  After such an operation effect (FIG. 248 (f)) is performed, as shown in FIG. 248 (g), a reach state can be formed and a reach effect can be performed. Is as described with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, when the effect shown in FIG. 247 (d) is performed as a result of the effect shown in FIG. 247 (d), the effect display on the effect display device 1600 is the operation of the sword ornament 5001. Except for the fact that the instruction content is “push in” and the sword decoration image SYG is displayed in the “mode moved to the operation position”, the effect as described with reference to FIG. 245 (g) It is the contents.

  However, in the effect shown in FIG. 249 (h), unlike the effect shown in FIG. 245 (g), the operation button 410 is at a position different from both the initial position (position at the time of non-drive) and the operation position. In this state, the sword ornament 5001 is in the operating position. That is, in this case, since the sword decorative body 5001 has moved from the position closer to the operation position to the operation position than the initial position (position at the time of non-driving), the extension of the operation-related effects is preferably suppressed. Will come to be.

  Note that the effect shown in FIG. 249 (h) is “a display effect in which the button image BTG is not displayed and the sword decoration image SYG is displayed (desirably displayed in a manner moved to the operation position)”. After performing the display effect, the sword decorative body 5001 is moved to the operation position, and an instruction display for prompting the operation by generating an effect reception period for the sword decorative body 5001 (characters such as “push”) Display or a bar display indicating the remaining time of the production reception period) may be displayed. According to such a configuration, the sword decoration image SYG that appears as a result of execution of a specific operation-related effect is displayed in the “mode moved to the operation position”, whereas the sword at the time of display is displayed. The decoration image SYG is different from the “mode moved to the operation position”. As described above, the sword decoration image SYG that appears as a result of the execution of the specific operation-related effects is displayed as a mode different from the mode of the sword decorative body 5001 at that time. It is possible to suggest in advance that it will soon be buried (here, the sword ornament 5001 moves to the operating position).

  Then, as a result of the effect shown in FIG. 249 (h), when the effect shown in FIG. 249 (i) is performed, the effect display device 1600 has been described with reference to FIG. 245 (h). The contents of the street will appear. However, in the effect shown in FIG. 249 (i), unlike the effect shown in FIG. 245 (h), the operation button 410 operates at a position different from both the initial position (position when not driven) and the operation position. In this state, the sword decorative body 5001 is returned to the initial position (non-driven position) from the operation position.

  After such an operation-time effect (FIG. 249 (i)) is performed, as shown in FIG. 249 (j), a reach state can be formed and a reach effect can be performed. Is as described with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, when the effect shown in FIG. 247 (d) is performed as a result of the effect shown in FIG. 247 (d), the effect image on the effect display device 1600 is displayed on the button image BTG “operating position”. Except for being displayed as corresponding to a movable operation button 410 "at the time, the contents of the production are as described with reference to FIG. 246 (j).

  However, in the effect shown in FIG. 250 (k), unlike the effect shown in FIG. 246 (j) and the effect shown in FIG. 248 (e), the operation button 410 and the sword decorative body 5001 are respectively in the initial positions ( It is in a state of operating at a position different from both the non-driving position) and the operation position. Even in such an operation state, it is suggested that there is still no possibility that an effect reception period for the operation button 410 has occurred, or that an effect reception period for the sword ornament 5001 will still occur. Will be able to.

  When the effect shown in FIG. 250 (k) is performed and the effect shown in FIG. 250 (l) is performed, the effect display device 1600 has been described with reference to FIG. 246 (k). The contents of the street will appear. However, in the effect shown in FIG. 250 (l), unlike the effect shown in FIG. 246 (k), the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001 are respectively set to the initial position (position when not driven) and the operation position. It is in a state of operating at a position different from both.

  When the effect shown in FIG. 250 (l) is performed and the effect shown in FIG. 250 (m) is performed, the effect display device 1600 has been described with reference to FIG. 246 (l). The contents of the street will appear. However, in the effect shown in FIG. 250 (l), unlike the effect shown in FIG. 246 (k), the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001 are respectively set to the initial position (position when not driven) and the operation position. It is in a state of operating at a position different from both. In the effect shown in FIG. 250 (m), it is more desirable that the outer shape of the heel MY is closer to the sword ornament 5001 at the operation position than the sword ornament 5001 at the initial position.

  When the effect shown in FIG. 250 (m) is further developed, the sword decoration image SYG is displayed and the effect shown in FIG. 249 (h) is always generated. In this sense, the effect shown in FIG. 250 (k) does not display the sword decoration image SYG on the effect display device 1600 and displays the button image BTG. It can also be said that the production suggests that a production reception period for the body 5001 occurs.

  However, instead of this, when the effect shown in FIG. 250 (l) progresses, the operation button 410 (button image BTG) is kept so that the outer shape of the heel MY does not necessarily approach the sword decoration body 5001 (sword decoration image SYG). ) So that an effect pattern approaching the outer shape can appear, and when the effect pattern appears, the button image BTG is displayed again and the effect shown in FIG. 248 (e) may be performed. When such a production pattern can be performed, the production shown in FIGS. 250 (k) and (l) also conceals which of the plurality of operation means can accept the production. It will be executed as a specific operation-related effect.

  In this effect example (third effect mode), the drive source for applying the drive force to the operation button 410 and the drive source for applying the drive force to the sword decorative body 5001 are different drive sources. Alternatively, the same drive source may be used.

  In each of the above-described production modes and other examples thereof, when a “button image BTG imitating the operation button 410 (first display mode)” appears as a production result in which a specific operation-related production is performed, The operation opportunity is given only to the operation button 410 out of the operation button 410 and the sword decorative body 5001, and when the operation for the operation button 410 is accepted for the production, the operation on the button side is performed. Become. When a “sword decoration image SYG imitating a sword ornament 5001 (second display mode)” appears as a result of a specific operation-related effect, basically, the operation button 410 and the sword decoration are displayed. When an operation opportunity is given only to the sword decorative body 5001 of the body 5001 and an operation for the sword decorative body 5001 is received, an effect during operation on the sword accessory side is performed. In this regard, in the operation at the time of operation on the button side, the effect at the time of success (the specific decorative member SDY is operated) and the effect at the time of failure (the specific decorative member SDY is not operated) based on the result of the effect lottery according to the big hit determination While either one of them is made to appear, even when the sword-playing side operation is performed, based on the result of the effect lottery according to the jackpot determination, the production at the time of success (specific decoration member SDY is operated) and the production at the time of failure (The specific decorative member SDY is not operated) is caused to appear, and the contents of the effects are the same. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the gaming interest when the operation opportunity is given to the operation means on the side different from the side desired by the player among the operation buttons 410 and the sword ornament 5001.

  It should be noted that the operation effect on the button side and the operation effect on the sword accessory side are the same effects on the display effect performed on the effect display device 1600 in addition to the effect on whether or not the specific decorative member SDY operates. You may make it be contents.

  In addition, in each of the above-described production examples related to a specific operation-related production, the production operation is given to which of the plurality of operation means is given, and the operation means on the side according to the result is given. An operation opportunity was given to the system. However, there is a case where a specific operation-related effect is performed with the content of the operation that gives an operation opportunity to the specific operation means, regardless of which effect results appear, such as pushing between the specific operation means. There may be.

  For example, any mode (for example, an operation in which the sword decorative body 5001 in the sword state is placed in the sword state, or a mode in which the sword decorative body 5001 in the sword state is placed in the sword state with respect to one operation means The operation may be given to the operating means in a manner corresponding to the result. In this case, the sword decorative body 5001 is operated in a state different from both the sword state and the extracted state while the specific operation-related effect is performed, and the operation is performed in any manner in the specific operation-related effect. It is desirable that the sword decorative body 5001 be operated in the sword insertion state or the sword extraction state when an effect result indicating whether or not to perform the operation is shown.

  In addition, when the symbol variation in the hold state is digested, a specific operation-related effect is performed within the symbol variation execution period, when the symbol variation is in the hold state (which was digested before this) You may make it perform the effect suggested from the execution period of a symbol fluctuation. According to such a configuration, although the operation opportunity is given to only one of the plurality of operation means, the operation means on the side to which the operation opportunity is given and the operation means on the side to which the operation opportunity is not given It becomes possible to maintain the game entertainment related to the operation for a longer period. In addition, as such an effect, when the symbol variation in which the specific operation-related effect is performed is in a suspended state (within the execution period of the symbol variation digested before this), the specific operation-related effect is It is desirable to operate each of a plurality of operating means provided.

  In the above-described second and third effect forms and other examples thereof, as specific operation-related effects, a plurality of images corresponding to a plurality of operation means (operation buttons 410, sword ornament 5001) (button images BTG, Although the sword decoration image SYG) is displayed, these images are not necessarily displayed. In short, when a specific operation-related effect is executed, any one of the effect reception period for the operation button 410 and the effect reception period for the sword ornament 5001 may be generated thereafter. With such a configuration, while it is suggested that an effect reception period occurs for either the operation button 410 or the sword decorative body 5001, these operations are performed until the effect reception period occurs. It becomes possible to keep secret which of the means the production reception period occurs. Therefore, a plurality of types of operation-related images (here, the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG) respectively corresponding to different types of operation means may not necessarily be displayed simultaneously, or the button image BTG and the sword decoration image may be displayed simultaneously. None of the images SYG may appear, and an effect image different from any of them may appear as a specific operation-related effect.

  However, even when the effect mode in which the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG are not displayed simultaneously while the specific operation-related effect is being executed, the button image is displayed when the specific operation-related effect is ended. Either BTG (an image corresponding to the operation button 410) or a sword decoration image SYG (an image corresponding to the sword decoration body 5001) is displayed to indicate which of these operation means the production reception period occurs. It will be. In this case, the button image BTG (image corresponding to the operation button 410) or the sword decoration image SYG (image corresponding to the sword decoration body 5001) displayed in this way is displayed during the execution period of a specific operation-related effect. When the specific image (for example, the lightning image IZ) that has been executed is executed as the content of the effect, the specific operation-related effect is determined for which of the plurality of operation means the effect acceptance period occurs. It can be said that it is important to make it function as a suggestion. For example, a specific operation-related effect is executed as an effect of dropping lightning on one of two rocks. When lightning falls on one rock, a button image BTG appears from the rock, and the other When lightning falls on the rock on the side, the sword decoration image SYG appears from the rock, so that the effect can be advanced to the effects shown in FIGS. 244 (d) and 245 (g). . Alternatively, a specific operation-related effect is executed as an effect of dropping lightning toward one rock, and when lightning falls on a rock, either a button image BTG or a sword decoration image SYG appears from the rock. Thus, it is possible to make the production progress to the production shown in FIGS. 244 (d) and 245 (g). In short, it is desirable to produce the effect as an effect such that the button image BTG or the sword decoration image SYG is displayed as the effect result of the specific operation-related effect.

  Further, in the above-described second and third production modes and other examples thereof, there are specific cases in which a production reception period for the operation button 410 occurs and a production reception period for the sword ornament 5001 occurs. It is more desirable to set the time required from the time when the operation-related effects are executed (the effect start) to the time when the effect reception period occurs. Moreover, it is desirable to set the production reception period to occur for the same period of time even if an operation opportunity is given to any operation means after a specific operation-related production is performed.

  In addition, a plurality of effect modes are prepared as specific operation-related effects, and an effect reception period in which a specific effect (operation effect) can be generated according to which of the effect modes is performed. You may make it the ratio set with respect to the specific operation means among several operation means differ. The ratio may be 100% or 0%.

  Further, in the above-described second and third production modes and other examples thereof, the operation was not performed based on the operation performed on the operation means on the side indicated by the specific operation-related production. When operating the operating means on the side (FIG. 244 (e), etc.), control is performed to return the operating means on the side that has not been operated to the initial position after a predetermined time has elapsed from the time when the operation has been performed. It may be. However, the time when the operation is performed is not used as a reference, and the operation means on the side that has not been operated is operated until the operation is ended depending on at which timing in the production reception period the operation is performed. It is desirable to vary the length of time.

  That is, when the operation means on the side indicated by the specific operation-related effect is operated, the time remaining in the effect reception period is short, and the operation means on the side indicated by the specific operation-related effect should be operated. It can be said that there is a high possibility that the player has struggled by operating the operating means on the side that is not shown in the specific operation-related effects. Therefore, depending on at which timing in the production reception period it is operated (depending on the possibility of conflict), the operation means on the side that has not been operated is operated and then the operation is terminated. The length of time until (“even if the operation means on the side indicated by a specific operation-related effect was operated, the effect was received and the effect during the operation was executed” If the time length for appealing the player to the player is made different, the game interest can be suitably maintained.

  In addition, after a specific operation-related effect is performed, when none of the plurality of operation means provided for the effect is operated, the plurality of operation means provided for the effect when the effect reception period ends. All may be operated.

  Also, during the period from when the specific operation-related effect is started to when the effect result (button image BTG, sword decoration image SYG, etc.) is displayed, the side with high expectation as the effect result of the specific operation-related effect It is also possible to perform a predetermined effect that suggests the ratio at which the effect image (sword decoration image SYG) is displayed. A movable body effect may be performed as a predetermined effect, but in this case, a specific movable body that operates based on an effect reception within an effect reception period after a specific operation-related effect is performed (here, It is possible to operate the movable body different from the specific decorative member SDY) more reliably based on the stage reception within the stage reception period after the specific operation-related stage is performed. It is desirable to make it possible.

  Moreover, it corresponds to any one of images that can appear in the effect result after the start of the specific operation-related effect until the effect result (button image BTG, sword decoration image SYG, etc.) is displayed. An operation opportunity may be given to a specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410). According to such a configuration, for example, a specific operation regarding which of the operation button 410 and the sword decorative body 5001 is used to generate an effect reception period related to a specific effect (an effect such as operating a specific decorative member SDY). While the related effects are being performed, the effect acceptance period is generated only for one side (for example, the operation button 410) of the operation means. This makes it possible to produce a special production mode as if the production result was shown and the production result ended even though it was in the middle of a specific operation-related production, and the production was performed. During this time, it is possible to favorably maintain the gaming interest. When a specific operation-related effect is being performed and an operation for one side (for example, the operation button 410) of the operation means is received, a predetermined effect is performed based on the reception of the effect. Therefore, it is desirable to suggest the ratio at which the high-expected effect image (sword decoration image SYG) is displayed as the effect result of the specific operation-related effect.

  Here, as the specific operation means to which an operation opportunity is given during the execution of a specific operation-related effect, the expectation is relatively high among a plurality of operation means (for example, the operation button 410 and the sword decorative body 5001). It is desirable to use the lower operation means (for example, the operation button 410) in order to improve the game entertainment when the player knows that it was in the middle of a specific operation-related effect. .

  In addition, when the specific operation-related effects relating to a plurality of operation means are in the middle of being performed, if an effect reception period is generated only for the operation button 410 of these operation means, When the operation button 410 is operated, a special operation effect is executed when a predetermined effect condition is satisfied, and when the special operation effect is executed, a plurality of operation means (for example, Even when either the operation button 410 or the sword decorative body 5001) appears as a production result, the degree of expectation for granting the privilege may be the same. The degree of expectation may be 100%. According to such a configuration, it is possible to lose the performance as the specific operation-related effect between the start of the production of the specific operation-related effect and the display of the effect result. As a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in gaming interest when an operation opportunity is given to the operation means having a relatively low expectation. However, when the special operation effect is executed, the special operation effect is not executed, and more privilege is given than when an operation opportunity is given to the operation means having a higher expectation among the plurality of operation means. It is desirable to increase the degree of expectation.

  Further, in each of the above-described production reception periods, normally, when there is an operation by the player, an production is generated based on the operation, but even if such an operation is not performed, the production reception period elapses. It may be possible to set an automatic button effect state, which will be described later, in which control for starting the same effect as when the operation was performed before is performed. According to such an automatic button effect state, an effect at the time of operation is generated without operation every time an effect reception period occurs, so that it is possible to suppress a decrease in the entertainment interest due to forgetting to operate. Become. When the specific operation-related effect is performed while the automatic button effect state is set, the effect reception period for any of the plurality of operation means occurs as a result of the effect. Even in such a case, the same operation-time effect as when the operation means is operated without operating the corresponding operation means within the effect reception period.

  However, even in the case where the automatic button effect state described later is set, the effect acceptance period is only for the operation button 410 of those operation means while the specific operation-related effect is being performed. When the operation button 410 is not operated within the production reception period, it is desirable that the special operation production is not executed (automatic button function does not function). After this, even if an effect reception period occurs for any of the plurality of operation means as a result of performing a specific operation-related effect, the corresponding operation means is operated within the effect reception period. Even if it is not, it is desirable that the same operation-time effect as when the operation means is operated (automatic button function to function) is executed. According to such a configuration, it becomes possible to grasp whether or not a specific operation-related effect is being performed depending on whether or not the automatic button function is functioning. It is expected to suppress the decrease of the above.

  In addition, regarding the setting change related to on / off of the automatic button effect state, for example, it is possible not only during the period when the symbol variation is not performed by the operation of the operation button 410 but also during the period when the symbol variation is being performed. It is desirable that For example, when the operation button 410 is operated when the automatic button effect state is in the off state and the effect acceptance period for the operation button 410 is not generated, the setting of the automatic button effect state can be changed from the off state to the on state. When the effect reception period occurs for the operation button 410 when the effect state is on, and the operation button 410 is operated within the effect reception period, an operation effect according to the operation is performed, and an automatic button effect state is set. It is possible to change the setting from the on state to the off state. However, since it is considered that there may be a case where it is desired to generate an on-operation effect by an operation by the player while the on state of the automatic button effect state is maintained, for example, the automatic button effect state is turned on. In the production reception period for the operation button 410 at the time, when the operation is performed on the other operation means by enabling the operation on the operation means other than the operation button 410 as well as the operation button 410, Unlike the case where the operation button 410 is operated, it is desirable to cause a change in the effect being executed while the automatic button effect state is maintained in the on state. At this time, it is more desirable to generate the same operation effect as when the operation button 410 is operated.

  The operation mode may be different between when the automatic button effect state is changed from the off state to the on state and when the automatic button effect state is changed from the on state to the off state.

  Further, in the above-described second and third production modes and other examples thereof, as a production result in which a specific operation-related production is performed, a button image BTG simulating the operation button 410 or a sword ornament 5001 is simulated. While the displayed sword decoration image SYG is displayed, an operation opportunity corresponding to the sword decoration image SYG is given, but the present invention is not limited to this. That is, two different display modes (a first display mode and a second display mode) are prepared, and when the first display mode is displayed among the display modes, an operation opportunity (production reception is received) for the operation button 410. Period) and when the second display mode is displayed, the first display mode and the second display mode are provided as long as an operation opportunity (effect reception period) is given to the sword ornament 5001. Any display content may be adopted.

  For example, in the second and third effect modes described above, the effect image CG (first image) shown in FIG. 251 (a) instead of the effect images shown in FIGS. 244 (d) and 248 (e). Display mode) and display the effect image TG (second display mode) shown in FIG. 251 (b) instead of the effect images shown in FIGS. 245 (g) and 249 (h). Also good. According to such a configuration, while the specific operation-related effect is being performed, the effect part and the other background image (the part that was displayed before the specific operation-related effect was started) Both are suddenly switched to the effect image CG (first display mode) or the effect image TG (second display mode) as the result of the specific operation-related effect (substantially the entire effect in the display area is 244 (d), 245 (g), 248 (e), and 249 (h), a partial display mode (button image BTG, sword) Unlike the case where the decorative image SYG) appears, the effect display related to the provision of the operation opportunity is made using substantially the entire display area (until other effect images such as a background portion where the degree of expectation is suggested) is displayed. To be done So it is expected to improve the game playability for work.

  In addition, in the effect image CG (first display mode) shown in FIG. 251 (a), the first image having a shield (button image BTG simulating the operation button 410) incorporating the operation button 410 in the design is held. Characters are displayed, and in the effect image TG (second display mode) shown in FIG. 251 (b), a sword (sword decoration image SYG) imitating the sword decoration body 5001 is held. The second character is displayed, and it implicitly suggests which operation means (operation button 410, sword ornament 5001) should be operated. As described above, the effect image CG (first display mode) and the effect image TG (second display mode) do not need to be prepared as effect images imitating the operation buttons 410 or the sword decorative body 5001 itself. It is desirable that the operation means be displayed as an effect image incorporating at least a part of the shape or a part of the design.

  Further, the effect image CG (first display mode) and the effect image TG (first display mode) and the effect image TG using the entire display area as described above are produced. You may make it perform also as the production | presentation which suggests a different expectation degree depending on which (2nd display mode) is displayed. For example, when the effect image TG (second display mode) appears, it is suggested that the degree of expectation related to privilege provision is higher than when the effect image CG (first display mode) appears. Further, as the effect image CG (first display mode) and the effect image TG (second display mode), a plurality of effect modes (different colors, etc.) are prepared, and depending on which of these effect modes is displayed. You may make it suggest an expectation. In this case, even if the effect image CG (first display mode) appears, when it is displayed in a specific display mode, the degree of expectation is higher than when the effect image TG (second display mode) appears. It may be.

  In addition, regarding the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG, when a specific operation-related effect is executed and displayed as the effect result (desired to have a relatively high expectation), a specific When an operation-related effect is displayed without being executed (for example, after a later-mentioned precursor effect that is not a specific operation-related effect) is displayed (it is desirable that the effect state is relatively low in expectation). There may be. In this case, for example, when a specific operation-related effect is executed and a button image BTG (first display mode) is displayed as the effect result, the effect is produced only for the operation button 410 among the plurality of operation means. While the reception period is generated, the button image BTG (first display mode) is not executed (for example, after a prelude effect described later that is not a specific operation-related effect) is not executed. When displayed, the operation reception period for the operation means (operation button 410) corresponding to the button image BTG as well as another operation means (for example, the sword decorative body 5001) not corresponding to the button image BTG. May be generated. According to such a configuration, even if the button image BTG appears in a performance situation where the specific operation-related effect is not executed and the expectation is relatively low, the specific operation-related effect is executed. Therefore, it is possible to give an interesting aspect of the operation different from the case where the button image BTG appears in a relatively highly expected production situation, and to improve the game entertainment. Another operation means may be an operation means different from the sword decorative body 5001.

  In addition, when a button image BTG appears in a performance situation where a specific operation-related effect is not executed and the expectation is relatively low, an operation for another operation means that does not correspond to the button image BTG within the effect reception period When the effect is received, a special operation effect is executed when a predetermined effect condition is satisfied. When the special operation effect is executed, a “specific operation-related effect is executed relatively It is desirable to suggest that there is a production situation with a higher expectation than when it is in a production situation where the sword decoration image SYG appears in a production situation with a high degree of expectation. The degree of expectation may be 100%.

  Here, when a button image BTG appears in a production situation where a specific operation-related production is not executed and the expectation is relatively low, an operation means (operation button) corresponding to the button image BTG within the production reception period. 410) is operated, the effect reception period for another operation means occurring at the same time is ended so that the special operation effect is not executed, and according to the operation on the operation means (operation button 410). It is desirable that the effect during the operation is executed.

  On the other hand, when a button image BTG appears in a performance situation where a specific operation-related effect is not executed and the expectation is relatively low, the operation means corresponding to the button image BTG within the effect reception period When another operation means is operated, the effect reception period for the operation means corresponding to the button image BTG is also ended so that the special operation effect is executed when a predetermined effect condition is satisfied. desirable. In this case, when the predetermined effect condition is not satisfied, the special operation effect is not executed. Instead, the operation means (the operation button 410) corresponding to the button image BTG is not operated and the operation is not performed. Although the operation means different from the means is operated, the operation effect when the operation means (operation button 410) corresponding to the button image BTG is operated may be executed.

  When a specific operation-related effect is executed when the automatic button effect state is set, the side corresponding to either the button image BTG or the sword decoration image SYG as a result of the effect. Even when an effect reception period occurs for the operation means, the same operation effect as when the operation means is operated without operating the corresponding operation means within the effect reception period is executed. It is desirable to make it so that the automatic button function works. However, when the button image BTG appears without executing a specific operation-related effect when the automatic button effect state is set, the operation means (operation button 410) corresponding to the button image BTG is displayed. The operation means corresponding to the button image BTG can be obtained even if no operation is performed even when the production reception period is generated for both the operation means and the operation means. It is desirable that only the same operation-time effects as when operated are executed, and the special operation effects that can appear only when another operation means not corresponding to the button image BTG is operated.

  However, within the effect reception period, another operation time effect (the effect when the operation means corresponding to the button image BTG is operated) appears by the above-described automatic button function before another timing. When an operation is performed on the operation means and a predetermined performance condition is satisfied, a special operation effect is performed in response to the reception of the effect, and a specific timing has arrived. In addition, it is desirable to prevent the effect during operation (the effect when the operation means corresponding to the button image BTG is operated) from appearing. In this case, the automatic button function described above does not substantially function during the production reception period, but the automatic button production state is continued in the ON state even after the production reception period ends. It is desirable.

  In the above-described effect example, the above-described effects (such as effects during operation and an automatic button function) may be applied after the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG are reversed. That is, in this case, when the button image BTG (first display mode) is displayed without executing a specific operation-related effect (for example, after executing a precursor effect described later that is not a specific operation-related effect). If a sword decoration image SYG (second display mode) is displayed without a specific operation-related effect being executed (for example, after a later-described precursor effect that is not a specific operation-related effect is executed), In addition to the operation means (sword decoration body 5001) corresponding to the sword decoration image SYG, an effect acceptance period is generated for another operation means (for example, the operation button 410) not corresponding to the sword decoration image SYG. It becomes.

  In addition, as described above, in each of the above-described effect modes, and other examples thereof, “the button image BTG imitating the operation button 410 (first display mode)” or the effect result of the specific operation-related effect is performed. If any one of the “sword decoration image SYG imitating the sword decoration body 5001 (second display mode)” is displayed and the presentation is accepted by the operation means on the displayed side, the relative The first operation-time effect (for example, an effect mode in which the specific decorative member SDY operates) and the effect content that is suggested to have a relatively low expectation level. One of the second operation effects (for example, an effect mode in which the specific decorative member SDY does not operate) can appear. That is, in this case, when the sword decoration image SYG (second display mode) is displayed, the expectation is relatively high at a higher rate than when the button image BTG (first display mode) is displayed. The first operation-time effect, which is the effect content that suggests, is executed. However, when the first operation effect is executed based on the effect reception within the effect reception period that occurs through the specific operation-related effect, the first operation effect is the button image BTG (first For the sword ornament 5001 when the sword decoration image SYG (second display mode) is displayed. It is desirable to suggest the same degree of expectation as when executed based on. The degree of expectation may be 0% or 100%. According to such a configuration, an effect image (button image BTG (first display mode)) with a relatively low expectation is displayed as an effect result of a specific operation-related effect. However, as long as the first operation-time effect is executed based on the reception of the effect, an effect image (a sword decoration) on the side with a relatively high expectation as an effect result of the specific operation-related effect. Compared to the case where the image SYG (second display mode)) is displayed, no demerit is caused in the production result, so that it is possible to suppress a decrease in the gaming interest.

  Further, in the timer effect described above (FIG. 118), “granting an operation opportunity to the operation means” can be set as the effect target (one of the plurality of effect modes set as the timer target). In other words, in the timer effect for which “granting an operation opportunity to the operation means” is produced, when the count display reaches a predetermined value (in this case, “0”), an operation opportunity is soon given to the operation means. As a result, it is possible to enjoy the performance during operation. In this case, in the “operation opportunity for the operation means” prepared as a candidate for the effect of the timer effect, when an operation is performed on the operation means, an effect result advantageous to the player according to the result of the predetermined effect lottery One of the disadvantageous production results can appear. However, when the “operation opportunity for the operation means” is given as an effect target of the timer effect, the proportion of the effect results that are advantageous to the player is higher than when the timer effect effect is not given. It is more desirable to be. The percentage may be 100%.

  In this regard, when an effect pattern in which a timer effect with the effect of “granting an operation opportunity for the operating means (for example, the sword ornament 5001)” appears, the “target operation opportunity for the operation means” is selected. A specific operation-related effect using “grant” may be further performed. That is, in this case, when the count display of the timer effect reaches a predetermined value (here, “0”), the sword decoration image SYG appears and an operation opportunity is given to the sword decoration body 5001. Before the sword decoration image SYG appears, a specific operation-related effect regarding which of the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG appears is executed.

  According to such a configuration, the timer effect and the specific operation-related effect are executed for the same effect, respectively, so that an operation opportunity is given to the operation means (for example, the sword ornament 5001). It will be possible to improve the game entertainment at the time.

  However, in this case, two different effects (timer effect, specific operation-related effect) may be simultaneously developed until just before the effect object (granting an operation opportunity to the sword ornament 5001). However, it is difficult to understand which production should be watched, and there is a concern that attention will be distracted and the entertainment interest will decline.

  Therefore, when executing a specific timer effect and a specific operation-related effect for one effect object (granting an operation opportunity to the sword ornament 5001), as described below with reference to FIG. Until the count display of a specific timer effect is executed and the count value reaches a predetermined value (here, count “0”), the “specific operation-related effect” is set to an unexecuted state, and the count value It is desirable to start the “specific operation-related effect” after the value reaches a predetermined value (here, the count is “0”).

  FIG. 252 is a diagram for explaining an example of effects when a specific timer effect and a specific operation-related effect are executed for one effect object (granting an operation opportunity to the sword ornament 5001). In addition, the following timer effects are equivalent to the above-mentioned notice side timer effects, and are executed as a result of performing various processes corresponding thereto.

  FIG. 252 (a) shows that the effect display device 1600 displays a variation of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) with a specific effect pattern according to the result of the jackpot determination in the normal gaming state when the number of holds is zero. The production situation is shown.

  FIG. 252 (b) shows an effect in which the timer effect is started (countdown display here) with a specific numerical value (here, “3”) during execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 252 (a). Indicates the situation. In the effect situation shown in FIG. 252 (b), the “specific operation-related effect” has not yet been executed, and it is not clear which effect the timer effect is for. Yes.

  That is, in the timer effect according to this effect example, the count value is first set to a predetermined value (unknown state) in which it is unknown which of the plurality of timer target effect candidates is being executed. Here, the count reaches “0”) and is displayed. Then, after “0 (predetermined value)” is displayed as the count value in this way, as shown in FIG. 252 (d), the “specific operation-related effect” is started to be produced. At the time when the “specific operation-related effect” is started, the count value is not “0” and is not displayed.

  According to such a timer effect, after the count display reaches a predetermined value (here, count “0”), the button image BTG (first display mode) and the sword decoration image SYG (second display mode) are displayed. A specific operation-related effect regarding which one is displayed is executed. That is, in this case, although two different effects (timer effect, specific operation-related effect) are executed for one effect object (granting an operation opportunity to the sword ornament 5001), the effects are sometimes Since overlapping in series is avoided, it is possible to enjoy different effects.

  However, if the timer effect count display reaches a predetermined value (here, the count is “0”) when the specific operation-related effect is in an unexecuted state, the timer effect targets any effect. There is a concern that it may not be possible to recognize whether it was done as a game, and the entertainment interest of the game will decline. Therefore, in this effect example, as shown in FIG. 252 (c), after the count display reaches a predetermined value (here, count “0”), until a specific operation-related effect is started, An effect suggesting an effect type (granting an operation opportunity for the sword ornament 5001) that the timer effect is an effect object is performed.

  In the example shown in FIG. 252 (c), when the count display of the timer effect reaches a predetermined value (here, the count is “0”), first, the effect display device 1600 displays “sword”. Thus, it is suggested that the timer effect is “the provision of an operation opportunity for the sword decorative body 5001 (operation opportunity by“ sword ”)”.

  According to such a configuration, as shown in FIG. 252 (d), an effect image (sword decoration image SYG (second display mode)) corresponding to the sword decoration body 5001 is displayed ("sword storage" ”Will be given the opportunity to operate”), the “specific operation-related effects” will begin to be produced in the production situation recognized by the player, so that it is possible to improve the game entertainment become. In addition, when the count display of the timer effect reaches a predetermined value (here, count “0”), the count display (count “0”) is displayed when the display “1” is performed on the effect display device 1600. Also, it may be displayed continuously.

  Also, in this effect example, as shown in FIG. 252 (c), when the count display of the timer effect reaches a predetermined value (here, count “0”), the sword ornament 5001 moves in a predetermined operation (here, (Reciprocating operation in the vertical direction) is performed, and this also indicates that “granting an operation opportunity (operation opportunity by“ sword ”) to the sword ornament 5001” is the target of the timer effect. I try to suggest.

  Note that the predetermined operation by the sword ornament 5001 is not only displayed when the timer effect is “granting an operation opportunity for the sword ornament 5001”, but also when another effect is the effect object. It may be performed when becomes 0. That is, in this case, the predetermined action by the sword ornament 5001 does not function as an effect that suggests the effect type that the timer effect is the effect of, but as an effect that suggests that the count display has become 0. It becomes. In this sense, the predetermined operation by the sword decorative body 5001 is after the count display becomes 0 and before the production to be produced is started, and the timer production is the production target. It is made to be executed at the same time or earlier than the timing at which the production suggesting the production type is started, and the production suggesting the production type that the timer production is the production target is also being executed during the execution state. It can be said that it is important to do so.

FIG. 252 (d) shows an effect situation where the effect of “specific operation-related effect” has started.
In this effect situation, as described above, not only the count value is already hidden, but also the effect suggesting the effect type that the timer effect is the effect target is also hidden. Further, the predetermined operation by the sword decorative body 5001 is also completed. However, it is important to perform the production suggesting the production type that the timer production is the production target and the predetermined operation by the sword ornament 5001 before the production of the specific operation-related production starts. Even after the operation-related effect is started, the execution state may be continued.

  Then, after the “specific operation-related effect” is started, the effects are developed in the order of FIGS. 252 (e) to (h). The contents of these effects are shown in FIG. 243 (c). ), FIG. 245 (g) to (i), or 247 (d) and 249 (h) to (j), the details are omitted.

  Note that, as a timer effect performed in connection with a specific operation-related effect, either the timer effect shown in FIG. 252 or a timer effect different from the timer effect is based on the result of a predetermined effect lottery. It may be made executable. That is, in another timer effect, the specific operation-related effect is started after the timer effect is started, which is the same as the timer effect shown in FIG. 252, but the specific operation-related effect is the effect. The count value does not reach the predetermined value (here, “0”) at the start timing (strictly before this), and continues after the specific operation-related effect is started. It has become. In this case, even if either the button image BTG (first display mode) or the sword decoration image SYG (second display mode) is shown as the effect result of the specific operation-related effect, a privilege is granted ( The degree of expectation for the big hit is the same. The degree of expectation may be 100%.

  According to such another timer effect, the specific operation-related effect and the timer effect are simultaneously developed, but at the time when the effect situation where the effect is developed simultaneously appears, Regardless of which of the button image BTG (first display mode) and the sword decoration image SYG (second display mode) is shown as the effect result, the effect value thereof is the same (expectation required for granting a bonus (big hit)) The same). That is, in this case, the specific operation-related effect itself can be substantially lost, so even if the specific operation-related effect and the timer effect are simultaneously developed, It is possible to avoid the situation where it is difficult to understand whether or not to pay attention to the situation and distracting attention. However, in order to improve the game entertainment, when an effect pattern in which a specific operation-related effect and a timer effect are simultaneously developed appears, the bonus is given more than when the effect pattern shown in FIG. 252 appears. It is desirable to increase the degree of expectation.

  In the example shown in FIG. 252 (c), when the count display of the timer effect reaches a predetermined value (here, the count is “0”), the display (1600) first suggests the type of effect target ( “Sword”) is performed, but such a display that suggests an effect target may be performed even when another effect mode is set as the effect target as the timer effect. However, when a specific effect is selected as a timer object among a plurality of effects that can be a timer object, a display that suggests which effect is a timer effect may not be performed.

  Further, in each of the above-described production modes and other examples thereof, before giving an operation opportunity to either the operation button 410 or the sword decorative body 5001, there is an operation opportunity for any of these operation means. It was decided to perform a specific operation-related effect as to whether it was granted. However, prior to giving an operation opportunity to the operation button 410 (before an effect reception period occurs), a first sign effect that does not appear when an operation opportunity is given to the sword ornament 5001 Or before the operation opportunity is given to the sword decorative body 5001 (before the production reception period occurs), it does not appear when the operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410. An effect pattern for performing a second sign effect may appear. When performing these precursor effects (first predictor effect, second predictor effect), the time required for the effect (predictor effect) is set shorter than when a specific operation-related effect is performed, It is desirable to lower the degree of expectation for granting a bonus when an effect appears, in order to enhance the gaming interest when a specific operation-related effect is performed.

  Here, as an indication effect, for example, fog appears before an effect image (for example, button image BTG) imitating an operation means (for example, operation button 410) on the side to which an operation opportunity is given, for example. A specific image is displayed, such as expressing the state of being trapped. Next, while the specific image is being displayed, the button image BTG is displayed at a position (a position on the layer that is behind the specific image) that is difficult to view by overlapping the specific image. Then, the button image BTG is gradually changed by gradually changing the specific image to non-display (such as increasing the transmittance or decreasing the area where the specific image is displayed). It is possible to execute as an effect that makes it appear to be exposed. An example of a specific depiction mode related to such a precursor effect will be described later.

  At this time, if the button image BTG is displayed in any one of a plurality of display modes (for example, a blue button image BTG, a red button image BTG, etc.) with different expectation levels related to the privilege grant (big hit), In the progress of the sign effect that the button image BTG is gradually exposed, it is possible to have an interest in which display mode of the button image BTG appears.

  It should be noted that a first sign effect that appears when an operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410 and no operation opportunity is given to the sword ornament 5001, and an operation opportunity is not given to the operation button 410 and a sword decoration. The second precursor effect that appears when an operation opportunity is given to the body 5001, and the specific operation-related effect that appears when an operation opportunity is given to either the operation button 410 or the sword ornament 5001 It is important that each is executed as different production contents. In addition to the contents of the effects, it is desirable that the time required for the effects is different.

  Such a precursor effect is the above-mentioned “specific operation-related effect” in the sense that “when an operation opportunity is given to a specific operation means, it is performed as an effect related to the provision of the operation opportunity”. It can be said that it is a superordinate concept that includes it. As for the indication effect including the “specific operation-related effect”, as described below with reference to FIG. 253, a plurality of effect modes are prepared, and the sign effect is performed in any of these effect modes. Depending on whether or not the indication reception period that occurs in response to the indication effect has a length, it is possible to improve the game entertainment when the indication effect is performed. It is more desirable to make it.

  FIG. 253 is a time chart for explaining an example of the contents of each effect for the effects when a plurality of types (the effect effects A, B1, B2, and C) are prepared as the effect effects.

  First, in the example shown in FIG. 253 (a) (predictive effect A), the predecessor effect A is started when a first predetermined time has elapsed since the start of symbol variation. This precursor effect A is executed as the above-mentioned “specific operation-related effect” regarding which of the operation buttons 410 and the sword decorative body 5001 is given an operation opportunity. When A is executed, an effect reception period (effective period) T1 is generated for the specific operation means on the side indicated as the effect result. That is, in the example shown in FIG. 253 (a) (prediction effect A), when the indication effect A is performed, the same time length is obtained even if an operation opportunity is given to any operation means. The production reception period (valid period) T1 will be generated.

  In the effect reception period (valid period) T1, an instruction display for prompting the specific operation means on the side shown as a result of the sign effect A (a character display such as “press”) or a bar display indicating the remaining time of the effect reception period ) Is displayed. Then, when an effect is received by an operation on the specific operation means within the effect reception period (effective period) T1, based on the effect reception, the above-described operation effects (for example, FIGS. 242 (d), (f), 244 (e), FIG. 245 (h), FIG. 248 (f), FIG. 249 (i), etc.) are executed, and the process of ending the period T1 at that time is performed. To be done.

  On the other hand, in the example (prediction effect B1) shown in FIG. 253 (b), not when the first predetermined time has elapsed since the start of symbol variation, but when the second predetermined time has elapsed. The sign effect B1 is started. This precursor effect B1 is not a “specific operation-related effect”, but is executed prior to an operation opportunity given to a specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410) (specific operation) When an operation opportunity is given to the means, it is not executed), and when the precursor effect B1 is executed, an effect reception period (effective period) T2 for a specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410). Is supposed to occur.

  In the effect reception period (valid period) T2, an instruction display (character display such as “Press” or a bar display indicating the remaining time of the effect reception period) is displayed to prompt the specific operation means corresponding to the sign effect B1. Is done. Then, when an effect is received by an operation on a specific operation means within the effect reception period (valid period) T2, a predetermined operation-time effect different from the above-described operation-time effect is executed based on the effect reception. At the same time, a process of ending the period T2 at that time is performed.

  In this regard, in this effect example, the effect reception period (valid period) T2 corresponding to the sign effect B1 is the effect reception period corresponding to the sign effect A as shown in FIGS. 253 (a) and (b). (Effective period) It is generated as a period having a time length different from T1 (here, a short time length). This suggests how long the production reception period that occurs in response to the precursor effect depends on which aspect (the precursor effect A, the precursor effect B1) was performed. This makes it possible to maintain the game entertainment at the time when the precursor effect is performed.

  On the other hand, in the example (prediction effect B2) shown in FIG. 253 (c), the sign effect B2 is started when the second predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the symbol variation. The sign effect B2 is also executed prior to an operation opportunity given to a specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410), not a “specific operation-related effect”, like the sign effect B1. (Not executed when an operation opportunity is given to a specific operation means). However, when the precursor effect B2 is executed, the effect reception period (specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410) having a time length different from the effect reception period (valid period) T2 corresponding to the precursor effect B1). Production reception period) T3 is generated.

  It should be noted that in this effect reception period (effective period) T3, an instruction display prompting an operation to a specific operation means corresponding to the sign effect B2 (character display such as “press”) and a bar indicating the remaining time of the effect reception period Display) is displayed. In addition, when an effect is received by an operation on a specific operation means within the effect reception period (effective period) T3, an operation time effect that is different from the case where the precursor effects A and B1 are executed based on the effect reception. Is executed, and a process of ending the period T3 at that time is performed.

  In this regard, in this production example, the production reception period (valid period) T3 corresponding to the sign production B2 is the production reception period corresponding to the sign production A as shown in FIGS. 253 (a) and (c). (Effective period) It is generated as a period having the same time length as T1. That is, in this case, the same time as when a specific operation-related effect with a relatively high degree of expectation is executed in spite of the execution of the precursor effect B2 with a relatively low degree of expectation for granting a bonus (big hit) Since it is suggested that the production reception period (effective period) T3 having a length is generated, a production situation as if a specific operation-related production was performed is generated, and the sign production B2 is It is possible to favorably maintain the gaming interest when played. In this case, it is desirable that the degree of expectation for the provision of benefits differs between when the effect reception period (effective period) T2 occurs and when the effect reception period (effective period) T3 occurs.

  In addition, for the indication effects B1 and B2, the same effect mode appears until the intermediate timing after the start of the effect, and different effect modes appear after the timing elapses. The operation means may be provided with a performance as to which of the production reception period (effective period) T2 and the production reception period (effective period) T3 is to be generated. However, it is not always necessary to have such performance, and the timing of starting the presentation effects B1 and B2 is also started when a different time has elapsed since the start of symbol variation. Alternatively, the indication effects B1 and B2 may have different lengths of time.

  On the other hand, in the example (predictive effect C) shown in FIG. 253 (d), the prelude effect C is started when the third predetermined time has elapsed since the start of symbol variation. This precursor effect C is executed as the above-mentioned “specific operation-related effect” regarding which of the operation buttons 410 and the sword decorative body 5001 is given an operation opportunity. When C is executed, an effect reception period (valid period) T4 is generated for the specific operation means on the side indicated as the effect result. In other words, in the example shown in FIG. 253 (d) (precursor effect C), when the predictor effect C is performed, even if an operation opportunity is given to any operation means, the same time length is obtained. The held production reception period (valid period) T4 occurs.

  Even during the production reception period (valid period) T4, an instruction display for prompting the specific operation means on the side shown as a result of the sign production C (character display such as “press”) and a bar display indicating the remaining time of the production reception period ) Is displayed. Then, when an effect is received by an operation on the specific operation means within the effect reception period (effective period) T4, based on the effect reception, the above-described operation effects (for example, FIGS. 242 (d), (f), 244 (e), FIG. 245 (h), FIG. 248 (f), FIG. 249 (i), etc.) are executed, and the process of ending the period T4 at that time is performed. To be done.

  In this regard, in this effect example, the effect reception period (valid period) T4 corresponding to the sign effect C is the effect reception period corresponding to the sign effect A as shown in FIGS. 253 (a) and (d). (Effective period) It is generated as a period having the same time length as T1. In other words, in this case, even if the length of time required for the warning effect C itself is shorter than the warning effect A, if the warning effect is executed as the “specific operation-related effect” described above, Since it is suggested that the production reception period (valid period) T4 having the same length of time as in the case of the precursor effect A is generated, the game entertainment at the time of the precursor effect C is suitably maintained. Will be able to.

  In the effect example shown in FIG. 253, the effect reception period is associated with the types of precursor effects A, B1, B2, and C in a one-to-one relationship with the length of the effect reception period (effective period). The length of (validity period) was suggested. However, the production reception period (effective period) can be set by setting the ratio of occurrence of a specific production reception period (for example, production reception period T2 or the like) having a predetermined length of time for each type of sign production. ) May be suggested.

  Further, in each of the above-described production modes and other examples thereof, after a specific operation-related production is performed, the specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410) on the side suggested as a result of the production is performed. When the effect reception period (effective period) occurs, an effect image (for example, a button image BTG) imitating the specific operation means is displayed. At this time, the effect image (for example, the button image BTG) is displayed so as to imitate the same state as that at the time of the specific operation means. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 248 (e), the operation button 410 is in a state of operating at the operation position, but the button image BTG is also displayed as a state of operating in the operation position in accordance with this, FIG. In the example shown in (h), the sword decorative body 5001 is in a state where the sword decorative body 5001 is operated at the operation position (sword extraction state). Has been.

  However, a specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410) to which an operation opportunity is given after a specific operation-related effect is performed is displayed as an effect image (for example, a button image BTG) imitating its appearance. If the result of the performance is displayed even though a specific operation-related performance with a relatively high degree of expectation is performed, the range of the performance will be remarkably narrowed. Concerned.

  Therefore, when a specific operation-related effect is performed, as described below with reference to FIGS. 254 and 255, an effect image (for example, a button image) simulating a specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410). With regard to BTG), it is desirable that the state of the specific operation means at that time is not necessarily expressed as it is, and is displayed as a state different from the specific operation means at that time.

  FIG. 254 is a diagram illustrating an example of the effects of the effect contents when the precursor effect that is not a specific operation-related effect is performed and the effect contents when the predictor effect as the specific operation-related effect is performed.

  First, FIGS. 254 (a) to 254 (c) show the contents of effects when a precursor effect that is not a specific operation related effect is performed. For example, in the normal gaming state, the effect display device 1600 is performing a variation display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) with a specific effect pattern according to the result of the jackpot determination in the state where the number of holds is 0. Suppose you are in a situation. In the production state, as shown in FIG. 254 (a), not the “specific operation-related production” but only the operation button 410 and the sword decorative body 5001 corresponding to the sword decorative body 5001 side. If the precursor effect is executed, it is possible to recognize that an operation opportunity is soon given to the sword ornament 5001. It should be noted that in the prelude effect (the predecessor effect in another example is also the same), if a predetermined display corresponding to the operation means on the side to which the operation opportunity is to be provided is given, an effect image imitating the operation means Is not necessarily displayed. According to such a configuration, it is possible to recognize that an operation opportunity will soon be given to the sword decorative body 5001 since the sword decorative image SYG displayed during the production reception period is not yet displayed. It comes to be.

  In the precursor effect shown in FIG. 254 (a), a sword decoration image SYGa wearing a blue aura with relatively low expectations and a sword decoration image SYGb wearing a red aura with relatively high expectations. Are displayed on the effect display device 1600, and the effect content about which of them is finally left in the display area appears. Therefore, in this production situation, although it is possible to recognize that an operation opportunity is soon given to the sword decorative body 5001, it is possible to recognize that the sword decorative image SYGa has a low expectation as the sword decorative image SYG, or the expectation degree. Which of the high sword decoration images SYGb is displayed is kept secret.

  FIG. 254 (b) shows an effect result in which a sword decoration image SYGb wearing a red aura is finally left. As a result, the sword decoration object 5001 is in an effect state with a relatively high expectation. It will be suggested that the production reception period for. In the display shown in FIG. 254 (b), a final effect is displayed that suggests that there is no change from a sword decoration image SYGb wearing a red aura to another effect image (such as a sword decoration image SYGa). .

  FIG. 254 (c) shows an example of an effect when an effect reception period for the sword ornament 5001 occurs. When the effect reception period occurs, an instruction display for prompting the sword ornament 5001 to operate (“push in” "And a bar display indicating the remaining time of the production reception period). In addition, when the production reception period for the sword decorative body 5001 occurs, the state of the sword decorative body 5001 changes from the sword state to the extracted state. The sword decorative image SYGb is also extracted from the sword state in accordance with this. The state is changed to the state. When an effect is received within the effect reception period, an effect at the time of a predetermined operation is performed based on the effect reception, the sword decoration image SYG is not displayed, and the sword decoration body 5001 is in the sword state. Maintained. Moreover, the process which complete | finishes the said production | presentation reception period at that time is performed.

  According to such a configuration, when a precursor effect corresponding to only one of the operation button 410 and the sword decorative body 5001 is performed, when the effect reception period occurs, the operation means on the operation target side (here, , The effect image (here, the sword decoration image SYGb) simulating the sword decoration body 5001) is displayed in the same state (extracted state) as the operation means on the operation target side (here, the sword decoration body 5001). Become so. In particular, in the effect reception period according to this effect example, an effect image (here, a sword decoration image SYGb) simulating the operation means on the operation target side, and an operation means on the operation target side (here, the sword ornament 5001) Are stopped at a predetermined position.

  On the other hand, FIGS. 254 (d) to (g) show the contents of effects when a specific operation-related effect is performed as a precursor effect. For example, in the normal gaming state, the effect display device 1600 is performing a variation display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) with a specific effect pattern according to the result of the jackpot determination in the state where the number of holds is 0. Suppose you are in a situation. Then, as shown in FIG. 254 (d), if the precursor effect as the “specific operation-related effect” is started as shown in FIG. It becomes possible to recognize that an operation opportunity will soon be given to these.

  FIG. 254 (e) shows an effect situation in which the precursor effect as the “specific operation-related effect” has progressed and the effect result has appeared. In this effect situation, the button image BTG is not displayed and the sword decoration image SYG is displayed to indicate that an operation opportunity is given to the sword ornament 5001 as the effect result of the “specific operation-related effect”. Has been. In the display shown in FIG. 254 (e), the final effect suggesting that the sword decoration image SYG does not change to another effect image (button image BTG or the like) is displayed.

  FIG. 254 (f) shows an example of an effect when an effect reception period for the sword decorative body 5001 occurs. When the effect reception period occurs, an instruction display for prompting the sword decorative object 5001 to be operated (“push in” "And a bar display indicating the remaining time of the production reception period). In addition, when an effect reception period for the sword decorative body 5001 occurs, the sword decorative body 5001 changes from the sword state to the extracted state, and the sword decorative image SYG is displayed in the extracted state.

  In this regard, in the example shown in FIGS. 254 (f) and (g), the sword decoration image SYG is maintained as the display content when the sword decoration body 5001 is in the sword extraction state (sword decoration image SYG). In contrast, the sword decorative body 5001 is configured to continuously perform the upward displacement slowly over the period until the presentation reception period ends, and is different from each other. I try to do it.

  In the production reception period, regardless of the position of the sword decorative body 5001, the production reception is performed when an operation to the sword state is performed on the operation subject accessory 141. Based on the reception, an effect at the time of a predetermined operation is performed, the sword decoration image SYG is not displayed, and the sword decoration body 5001 is maintained in the sword state. Moreover, the process which complete | finishes the said production | presentation reception period at that time is performed.

  According to such a configuration, when an effect reception period occurs through a specific operation-related effect, one side of the sword decorative body 5001 and the sword decorative image SYG continues to operate and is used for the effect. On the other hand, the other side does not operate and can play a role of accurately communicating the current situation. In the example of FIGS. 254 (f) and (g), the sword decoration image SYG is stopped and the sword decoration body 5001 is continuously operated during the production reception period. The decorative image SYG may be continuously operated so that the sword decorative body 5001 is stopped.

  In this way, in the effect example shown in FIG. 254, both the sword decorative body 5001 and the sword decorative image SYG are displayed in the effect receiving period (FIG. 254 (c)) that occurs without a specific operation-related effect. In contrast to the stop state, in the effect reception period (FIG. 254 (f)) that occurs through a specific operation-related effect, one of the sword decoration body 5001 and the sword decoration image SYG is set to the stop state. The other side is continued in a dynamic state so that it can be used for production. Therefore, when an effect reception period occurs through a specific operation-related effect, the range of the effect can be widened, and the game entertainment can be suitably maintained.

  In particular, even if the operation button 410 itself is not an operation means to which a driving force is applied by the control by the peripheral control MPU 1511a, when an effect reception period for the operation button 410 occurs through a specific operation-related effect, the operation button 410 While the button 410 itself is in a stopped state, if the button image BTG imitating the operation button 410 is made to be a dynamic state and the depiction is continued, a specific operation-related effect is obtained. It is expected that the width of the production when the production acceptance period for the operation button 410 occurs is greatly improved.

  Note that either a sword decoration image SYGa wearing a blue aura with relatively low expectation or a sword decoration image SYGb wearing a red aura with relatively high expectation is displayed as a sword decoration image SYG. The technique may be adopted not only when a predecessor effect that is not a specific operation-related effect is performed, but also when a specific operation-related effect as a precursor effect is performed. That is, in this case, in the specific operation-related effect, in addition to the effect on which of the button image BTG imitating the operation button 410 and the sword ornamental image SYG imitating the sword ornament 5001 appears, When an effect image (for example, button image BTG) appears, whether the effect image (button image BTG) is displayed in a display mode with a relatively high expectation or a display mode with a relatively low expectation It is possible to provide further performance. About this method, you may make it employ | adopt suitably also in each above-mentioned production aspect other than the example of an effect of FIG. 254, and those other examples.

  And when giving such two performances with respect to a specific operation-related effect, first, as the effect result of the specific operation-related effect, either the button image BTG or the sword decoration image SYG is used. Whether it appears or is recognizable, and it is unclear whether the appearance of the effect image on the appearing side is highly expected (for example, the effect image imitating the operation means is outlined and only the contour is drawn) Display in a recognizable display state, etc.) so that it appears as the production progresses. Then, after that, it is possible to recognize whether or not the display mode of the side effect image that appears as the effect result of the specific operation-related effect is highly expected (for example, the effect image imitating the operation means is outlined) It is desirable that the state is released and the color can be confirmed, for example, to appear in sequence as the production progresses further. In addition, when the button image BTG is displayed through such an effect development, a state in which it is possible to recognize whether or not the display mode is highly expected under a predetermined condition (for example, the operation means is changed). The button image BTG is further hidden and the sword decoration image SYG can be recognized as appearing as a result of the specific operation-related effect. Whether the display mode of the sword decoration image SYG is high in expectation or not is unknown (for example, the sword decoration image SYG is outlined so that only the outline can be recognized). Further, it may be possible to generate an effect pattern for further effect development. After this, it is possible to recognize whether or not the display mode of the sword decoration image SYG that appears as a result of the specific operation-related effect is highly expected (for example, the white state of the sword decoration image SYG) To make it possible to confirm the color. In this case, the display mode when the button image BTG is displayed is a display mode with a higher expectation (for example, red) than when the display mode is a lower display mode (for example, blue). However, it is desirable to increase the rate at which such further production progress occurs.

  255 (a) to (e) are diagrams showing other examples of the effects shown in FIGS. 254 (d) to (g) as effect contents when a specific operation-related effect is performed as a precursor effect. In other words, in FIG. 255 (a), an indication effect as a “specific operation-related effect” is started, but the indication effect has a shield (button image BTG) imitating the operation button 410. A second character (effect image corresponding to the sword ornament 5001) having a first character (effect image corresponding to the operation button 410) and a sword (sword ornament image SYG) imitating the sword ornament 5001 Is depicted, and suggests which of the operation buttons 410 and the sword decorative body 5001 is provided with an operation opportunity depending on which of these characters is left in the display area. I am doing so.

  FIG. 255 (b) shows an effect situation in which the effect result of the precursor effect as the “specific operation-related effect” appears. In this production situation, the first character (production image corresponding to the operation button 410) is not displayed to suggest that an operation opportunity is given to the sword decoration body 5001, and the second character (sword decoration) is displayed. An effect image corresponding to the body 5001) is displayed. The display image shown in FIG. 255 (b) is substantially the same as the display image TG shown in FIG. 251 (b) (the instruction display that prompts the sword decorative body 5001 to be operated is not displayed). While the operation-related effect is being performed, both the effect part (characters facing each other) and the other background image (the part that was displayed before the specific operation-related effect was started) The effect image (display image shown in FIG. 255 (b)) as the effect result of the specific operation-related effect is suddenly replaced (substantially the entire effect in the display area is replaced).

  255 (c) to (e) show examples of effects when an effect reception period occurs for the sword ornament 5001, and when the effect reception period occurs, first, as shown in FIG. 255 (c). In addition, an instruction display for prompting the sword decorative body 5001 to be operated (a character display such as “push-in” or a bar display indicating the remaining time of the production reception period) is displayed.

  Here, in this production example, as shown in FIG. 255 (c), when the production reception period occurs, the sword ornament 5001 starts to move from the sword state to the sword state, As shown in FIG. 255 (d), the sword ornament 5001 completes the operation (movement) from the sword state to the sword state only after a relatively short period of time has elapsed since the start of the production reception period. It is supposed to be. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 255 (e), unless there is an operation by the player, the sword ornament 5001 is maintained in the sword state until at least the presentation reception period ends, and the player Will wait for the operation (operation from the sword state to the sword state).

  On the other hand, in the effect display device 1600, as shown in FIGS. 255 (c) to (e), the movement of the sword decorative body 5001 (movement in the linear direction) is completely different from the movement (rotation in the rotation direction). In the lowering operation), the second character is drawn to swing down the sword decoration image SYG, and the sword decoration image SYG continues even after the sword decoration body 5001 is maintained in the extracted state. The operation is to be performed. The sword decoration image SYG according to this production example loops a series of displays from the start of the swing-down operation (FIG. 255 (c)) to the end (FIG. 255 (e)) within the production reception period. The process is repeated.

  However, even if this loop processing is performed, the display of the bar indicating the remaining time of the effect reception period is not affected, and the display change progresses by the amount corresponding to the passage of time. Further, the sword decorative body 5001 also enters the sword state while a series of displays from the start of the swing-down operation (FIG. 255 (c)) to the end (FIG. 255 (e)) is performed. However, even if the loop process is performed, the operation is maintained without being affected by the loop process. In addition, when the operation to the operation subject character 141 is performed to the operation object role 141 within the effect reception period, the effect is received, and a predetermined operation time effect is performed based on the effect reception, and the above The loop processing is terminated, the sword decoration image SYG is not displayed, and the sword decoration body 5001 is maintained in the sword state. Moreover, the process which complete | finishes the said production | presentation reception period at that time is performed.

  According to such a configuration, when a precursor effect as a specific operation-related effect is performed, both the sword decorative body 5001 and the sword decorative image SYG operate within the effect reception period. The operation modes (operations responsible for accurately transmitting the current situation (operations until moving to the operation position) and loop operations provided for production) are different from each other, and the operation of the sword ornament 5001 is completed. After that, the sword decoration image SYG continues the operation without ending. Thus, when an effect reception period (FIGS. 255 (c) to (e)) that occurs through a specific operation-related effect occurs, the contents of the effect of the specific operation-related effect continue until after the effect reception period occurs ( For example, the background can be continued and executed, and the range of the production can be widened, and the game entertainment can be suitably maintained.

  In addition, according to the example of the effect shown in FIG. 255, the contents of the effect (display where the characters confront each other) that appeared when the precursor effect (FIG. 255 (a)) as the specific operation-related effect is performed. The effects (FIGS. 255 (c) to (e)) when the effect reception period occurs in the form of changing both the background image and the background image are executed. In particular, in the effect reception period according to this effect example, the special image (sword decoration image SYG) and the character (sword decoration image SYG) differing from each other while the dedicated background (full moon) is displayed. Since the display is performed during the reception period by dynamically displaying both the image and the image), it is possible to improve the performance during the presentation reception period. In this sense, also in the sign effect, the effect is performed using at least one of the effect image (sword decoration image SYG) imitating the operation means and the character. It can be said that it is more desirable in order to further improve the performance by providing a direct connection between them. In addition, the dedicated background (full moon) has a plurality of display modes with different degrees of expectation for granting a privilege, and may be displayed in any of these display modes.

  It should be noted that, for a prelude effect as a specific operation-related effect or an effect within the effect reception period, a plurality of effect modes are prepared as those effects, and the effect reception is performed depending on which of these effect modes appears. You may be made to suggest whether a mode with a high expectation appears as an operation time production when a production reception is made in a period. You may make it suggest the expectation degree concerning privilege provision using the background image which appears when a precursor effect is performed.

  In addition, in the effect example shown in FIG. 255, when a precursor effect as a specific operation-related effect is being performed, the effect reception is performed by changing both the effect content and the background image that appeared in the predictor effect. When the presentation within the period is executed, but the above-mentioned precursor effect that is not a specific operation-related effect is being performed, both the effect content and the background image that appeared in the precursor effect are changed. It is also possible to execute an effect when an effect reception period occurs.

  In the production example shown in FIG. 255, the operation of the sword ornament 5001 is started after the production reception period occurs, but the operation of the sword decoration 5001 is started before the production reception period occurs. The operation of the sword ornament 5001 that was started before the production reception period occurs is completed before the production reception period occurs (the role of accurately transmitting the current situation). The operation performed may be completed before the production reception period occurs), and thereafter the stopped state may be maintained.

  In addition, even when an operation opportunity is given to a specific operation means (for example, a sword ornament 5001), when the display is performed to change the background image when the production reception period occurs, the background image is changed. There may be a case where the display is not performed. In this case, when the display for changing the background image is performed at the time of the production reception period, the expectation for giving the privilege is higher than when the display for changing the background image is not performed at the time of the production reception period. It is desirable to make it.

  Further, in each of the above-described production modes and their other examples, after a specific operation-related production is performed, an operation on a specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410) on the side suggested as a result of the production is performed. When an effect is received, the specific decorative member SDY (movable body provided on the game board 5 side) is operated as an operation-time effect based on the effect reception. At this time, for example, in the production examples shown in FIGS. 242 (d), 244 (e), and 245 (h), a sword decorative body 5001 (or an operation button) is provided as a movable body provided on the door frame 3 side. 410) is also operated to improve the performance of the operation-time effect when a specific operation-related effect is passed. As described above, in order to improve the performance of the operation-time effect when the specific operation-related effect is passed, the operation-time effect when the specific operation-related effect is passed depends on the result of the effect. As a result, a state of success when both the movable body provided on the game board 5 side and the movable body provided on the door frame 3 side (game machine main body side) are activated appears, or the movable body provided on the game board 5 side. While the production situation at the time of failure where both the body and the movable body provided on the door frame 3 side do not operate appears, the production-time production (for example, a specific production-related production) In the operation effect after the sign effect that is not the operation related effect), either the movable body provided on the game board 5 side or the movable body provided on the door frame 3 side according to the result of the effect If there is a successful production situation that only works, game board 5 It is desirable that both the movable member provided in the movable body and the door frame 3 side provided to so appear produce situations of failure that does not operate.

  Further, in the above-described each production mode and specific operation-related productions according to other examples, when the sword decoration image SYG is displayed as a result of the production, the button image BTG is displayed as a result of the production. As a result, the degree of expectation for granting a privilege is made higher. In this regard, when the button image BTG is displayed as an effect result of a specific operation-related effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 256 (a), the button is displayed in a mode (specific effect mode) in which a princess character is added. When the image BTG may be displayed and the button image BTG is displayed in this manner, the degree of expectation for granting a privilege is greater than when the sword decoration image SYG is displayed as the effect result of the specific operation-related effect. If it is made high, it will become possible to maintain suitably the game entertainment at the time of the button image BTG being displayed as an effect result of a specific operation related effect.

  Further, the mode (specific production mode) in which the princess character is displayed may be applied to the sword decoration image SYG as shown in FIG. 256 (b). In this case, when the sword decoration image SYG is displayed in a specific effect mode, it is desirable that the degree of expectation related to privilege provision be higher than when displayed in the normal mode.

  In addition, as an effect pattern that may appear as a result of performing a specific operation-related effect, a first effect pattern in which the button image BTG is displayed in a specific effect mode (a mode in which a princess character is displayed) (FIG. 256 (a)) and the second effect pattern in which the sword decoration image SYG is displayed in a specific effect mode (a mode in which the princess character is displayed) as a result of the specific operation-related effect (FIG. 256 (b) )) And may be prepared respectively. In this case, when the first effect pattern appears as a result of the specific operation-related effect, the expectation level related to the privilege grant is set to be the same when the second effect pattern appears. It is desirable to do. According to such a configuration, the button image BTG and the sword can be provided, as well as providing an interest as to which of the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG appears as a result of performing the specific operation-related effect. Regardless of which one of the decorative images SYG appears, it is possible to provide a completely different interest, such as whether or not a specific production mode (a mode in which the princess character is displayed) appears. The degree of expectation may be 0% or 100%.

  In addition, as a result of performing a specific operation-related effect, in order to allow such a specific effect mode (a mode in which a princess character is displayed) to appear, when a predetermined effect condition is satisfied, As shown in FIG. 256 (c), the specific effect mode is in a stage where the effect result of the specific operation-related effect (whether the button image BTG or the sword decoration image SYG appears) has not yet appeared. From (for example, when a specific operation-related effect is being produced), this may be displayed in advance. According to such a configuration, although a specific operation-related effect regarding which of the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG appears is being performed, a specific effect mode (a princess character is displayed) ) Appears, the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG have the same effect value (the same expectation). That is, in this case, the specific operation-related effect itself will be lost, so that it is like a “prediction effect by the princess character” even though the specific operation-related effect is being performed. It is possible to provide a performance with a completely different purpose.

  In addition, the sword decorative body 5001 according to each of the above-described production modes and the other examples of the sword decorative body 5001 is such that the sword part (the pattern part 5012 and the blade part 5011) can be operated in the vertical direction. In addition to the first operation mode (first operation mode), as shown in FIG. 212, the second operation in which the sheath portion (sheath portion 5020) of the sword decorative body 5001 is operable in the lateral direction. It is provided so as to have a mode (second operation mode). Therefore, in each of the above-described production modes, and other examples thereof, which of the first operation mode and the second operation mode is given to the sword ornament 5001 provided as one operation unit. You may make it perform the said specific operation related effect as an effect about. The sword part (the handle part 5012, the blade part 5011) and the sheath part (sheath part 5020) are both supported by a single body support part (not shown) provided on the door frame 3 so as to be operable (operable), and Even if one side of the sword part (the handle part 5012, the blade part 5011) and the sheath part (sheath part 5020) is in a state of being operated (operated), the other side can be operated (operated). Is formed.

  However, when a specific operation-related effect is performed in such a manner, the operation mode is different regardless of which effect result appears. Since there is no change, there is a concern that an operation error is likely to occur on the player side. In particular, even in the case where an operation opportunity is given to either the first operation mode or the second operation mode, for example, an effect image imitating the sword part of the sword decorative body 5001 (and its If an instruction prompting operation) is displayed, there is an increasing concern that an error in operation between the first operation mode and the second operation mode will occur on the player side. Become. In other words, in this case, let the player first perform an operation to correct the operation error while the remaining time of the production reception period is decreasing, and then further perform the operation in the original correct mode. If the production reception period ends before the production is accepted even though a specific operation-related production with a relatively high degree of expectation is performed. There is a concern that the entertainment interest will be reduced.

  The sword decorative body 5001 has a mode such as “moving in the vertical direction” by the sword part and a mode such as “movement in the horizontal direction” by the sheath part, and a plurality of complicated operations not having such a reverse relationship. In an operation unit that can provide an aspect, if an incorrect operation is performed when an operation opportunity is given, it takes time to perform an appropriate operation, and the production reception period ends. Therefore, it can be said that the risk of losing operational opportunities is increased.

  Therefore, when the specific operation-related effect is performed as an effect on whether an operation opportunity according to either the first operation mode or the second operation mode is given to the sword ornament 5001 provided as one operation unit. As described below with reference to FIG. 257 and FIG. 258, an operation error occurs between the first operation mode and the second operation mode on the player side, and the state of the operation error is corrected. Even if the original correct operation is performed as it is, it is desirable that the production reception is performed properly and the production during operation corresponding to the production reception is executed.

  FIG. 257 and FIG. 258 show an example of an effect when an operation error occurs between the first operation mode and the second operation mode on the player side in an effect pattern in which a specific operation-related effect is performed. FIG.

  In FIG. 257 (a), in the normal gaming state, the display of variation of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is performed on the effect display device 1600 in a specific effect pattern according to the result of the big hit determination when the number of holds is zero. The production situation is shown.

  FIG. 257 (b) shows an effect situation in which the effect of the specific operation-related effect is started during the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 257 (a).

  Here, in the specific operation-related effect shown in FIG. 257 (b), the first effect imitating the first operation mode in which the sword part of the sword decorative body 5001 is operated from the sword state to the sword state. An image OX and a second effect image TX simulating a second operation mode for operating the sheath portion of the sword decorative body 5001 to move in the horizontal direction are displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. It is displayed at the same time, and it is suggested that an operation opportunity according to any of these operation modes will soon be accepted. In this regard, in the first effect image OX, although the image portion imitating the sword part of the sword ornament 5001 is displayed larger than the second effect image TX, the first effect image OX and the first effect image OX are displayed. In the second effect image TX, the sword part is displayed as an image, and an operation error may occur between the first operation mode and the second operation mode.

  In FIG. 257 (c), the specific operation-related effect shown in FIG. 257 (b) progresses, and the first effect image OX corresponding to the first operation mode and the second corresponding to the second operation mode. The effect image TX is pressed against each other in the display area of the effect display device 1600, and an effect is made to push the other party out of the display area. When an effect result (first effect result) in which the first effect image OX is left appears, an effect reception period for the first operation mode occurs, and an effect result (second effect) in which the second effect image TX is left. When the (result) appears, an effect reception period for the second operation mode is generated.

  In the specific operation-related effect according to this effect example, as shown in FIG. 257 (c), a display such as “push-in” can be visually recognized when the first effect image OX remains dominant. Thus, the display such as “slide” is made visible when the situation becomes dominant while the second effect image TX is left. The details of the operation contents are made easy to recognize according to the state of the production. However, these displays may not necessarily be performed because there is a concern that the display is erroneously recognized as prompting an operation at the timing when the production reception period has not yet occurred.

  FIG. 257 (d) shows that, as a result of the effect shown in FIG. 257 (c), the second effect image TX is completely pushed out of the display area, and the first effect image OX is within the display area. An effect depicting the state left in is performed (first effect result). When progressing to this effect content, even if an operation in the second operation mode is performed, a specific operation-time effect (such as a movable effect by the specific decorative member SDY) does not occur, and in the first operation mode When the operation is performed, an effect is received, and a specific operation effect (such as a movable effect by the specific decorative member SDY) corresponding to the effect is generated.

  In other words, in the effect situation shown in FIG. 257 (d), an effect reception period related to a specific operation effect is generated only for the first operation mode side of the first operation mode and the second operation mode. In the production reception period, in addition to the first production image OX corresponding to the first operation mode, an instruction display prompting an operation (character display such as “push”) and the remaining time of the production reception period are shown. Bar display) is displayed. At this time, the sword ornament 5001 moves from the sword state to the sword state so that the operation according to the first operation mode can be performed.

  In FIG. 258 (e), although the first effect image OX corresponding to the first operation mode is displayed, the operation (erroneous operation) by the second operation mode is performed instead of the first operation mode. The production situation when performed by the player is shown.

  That is, in this effect example, even when the effect reception period related to the specific operation effect is generated only for the first operation mode side of the first operation mode and the second operation mode, The operation detection of operation mode 2 itself is made effective. Then, when an operation in the second operation mode is detected during the production reception period, a specific notification that cannot appear when an operation in the first operation mode is received, assuming that there is an operation error by the player. (Here, “You can leave it as is”).

  Also, as shown in FIG. 258 (f), the content of such specific notification is changed over time so that the player can regain calmness (here, “settled and pushed in”). It is like that. According to such a configuration, even if the content to be notified is complicated, it becomes possible to sequentially notify with a short word, so this is suitable even if the player side is in a panic state It is expected to be suppressed. Thereby, even if the operation according to the first operation mode is performed on the sword decorative body 5001 in the second operation mode as it is, the player is notified that this is properly rendered. You will be able to recognize.

  FIG. 258 (g) shows that an appropriate operation (first operation mode) is performed in the production status (production acceptance period when in an erroneous operation state) of FIG. 258 (e) and FIG. 258 (f). As a result, an effect is received and the above-described operation effect according to the operation is depicted. However, at this time, when the player's hand is released from the sword decorative body 5001 (when the operation is completed), the sword decorative body 5001 is changed from the second operation mode to the non-operating state (normal state). ).

  According to such a configuration, an operation error occurs between the first operation mode and the second operation mode on the player side, the state of the operation error is not corrected, and the original correct operation remains as it is. Even if it is performed from the state (operation error state), the production reception is appropriately performed, so that a decrease in the game entertainment when an operation error occurs is suppressed.

  In the above-mentioned production example, when an erroneous operation is performed by the player, notification is made that the operation should be performed without correcting the operation error, but the content (the operation is performed without correcting the operation error). It is not always necessary to perform detailed notification for the purpose of (should). In other words, as described above, in a situation where an erroneous operation has been performed, there is a possibility that the player is in a panic, so it may be counterproductive to report complex contents. Therefore, when there is an operation error by the player during the reception period, a specific notification that cannot appear when an operation in an appropriate mode is received is not a message display but an effect or sound only notification. It is desirable to perform simple notifications such as. In this case, there is a possibility that the player side does not recognize that an operation error has been made, but a special situation is confirmed such that a specific notification is made based on the operation being made and no effect during operation is made. Therefore, it can be expected that the operation is switched to the appropriate operation.

  On the other hand, depending on the player (especially an elderly player), it may be assumed that a situation in which an operation is erroneously performed before the production reception period occurs in a specific operation-related effect. For example, when there is no operation instruction related to the second operation part (for example, the sheath part), the first operation part is in a state where an operation (such as lateral movement of the sheath part) is performed on the second operation part. It is also assumed that there will be a production reception period related to a specific operation-time effect only on the operation part (for example, the sword part) side, and in this case as well, how the player side operates There is a concern that it may not be recognized.

  Therefore, when a specific operation-related effect regarding whether an operation opportunity is given to which of the first operation part (sword part) or the second operation part (sheath part) is performed, Although the operation instruction (bar display of the remaining time) is not given to the operation unit side 2 (for example, the situation shown in FIGS. 257 (b) and (c)), the second operation unit Even when an operation on is performed, it is desirable to be able to perform a specific notification that cannot appear when an operation in an appropriate mode is accepted. This specific notification may be “message display indicating that it is only necessary to operate the operation unit on the appropriate side to which an operation opportunity will be given soon while maintaining the operation state”. Alternatively, simple notification such as an effect or notification only by sound may be used. In any case, by checking a special situation in which a specific notification is given based on the operation and no effect during the operation is performed, the operation is performed on the appropriate side. It can be said that it is possible to fully expect to get a chance to go.

  In this case, for example, the first operation unit (for example, the sword decorative body 5001 is moved leftward) while the operation is performed on the second operation unit (for example, the sheath part). Even if the stage for receiving a specific operation-time effect occurs only on the sword part) side, a state in which an operation is performed on the second operation part (for example, the sheath part) (sword decorative body) When the first operation unit (for example, the sword part) side is operated while maintaining the state in which 5001 is moved in the left direction), an effect is received and the above-described operation-time effect corresponding to the operation is performed. It becomes.

  According to such a configuration, an operation error occurs between the first operation mode and the second operation mode before the production reception period occurs, and the production reception is generated while the operation error is maintained. Even if the state of the operation error is not corrected within the period, even if the original correct operation is performed as it is, the stage reception will be made properly, so the operation error will occur before the stage reception period occurs. When this happens, the decline in the game entertainment will be suppressed.

  However, during the period in which a specific operation-related effect regarding whether the operation opportunity is given to which of the first operation unit and the second operation unit is performed, the effect result is shown and the effect reception period If the above-mentioned specific notification is made in the period immediately before the occurrence of information, information will be mixed with the information (indication indication, etc.) notified within the production reception period, and the player will be more confused There is a concern. Therefore, in the period until the production result is displayed when the production result that suggests that the operation opportunity is given to the first operation unit is the final production-related production that is displayed. The above-mentioned specific notification is executed when the operation in the second operation mode is performed even though the operation instruction regarding the second operation unit (for example, the sheath part) is not displayed. Even if an operation in the second operation mode is performed in the situation, there is a second period in which the above-described specific notification is not performed, and the first period and the second period are sequentially followed by the first period. It is desirable to generate an effect reception period for one operation unit.

  In the above-described production example, when performing specific notification, an expectation degree related to privilege provision may be suggested. The degree of expectation may be 0% or 100%.

  Further, in the sword decorative body 5001 according to each of the above-described effect modes and their other examples, the effect mode of the sword decorative body 5001 itself changes to any of the above-described multiple modes (for example, FIG. 222). The change from the stage 0 form shown in FIG. 1 to any one of the stage 1 form to the stage 3 form) is possible. In this regard, after a specific operation-related effect is performed, the sword ornament 5001 is changed to one of the above-described plurality of modes, and an effect reception period for the sword ornament 5001 is generated in the changed state. You may make it make it. Alternatively, the sword decorative body 5001 may be changed to any one of the above-described modes when the effect reception period occurs after a specific operation-related effect is performed.

  In this case, in the effect display device 1600 during the effect reception period, an instruction display for prompting an operation on the sword decorative body 5001 (character display such as “push-in” or a bar display indicating the remaining time of the effect reception period), or a sword decoration 5001 The sword decoration image SYG is displayed, but the sword decoration image SYG is displayed in the same form as the sword decoration body 5001 (stage 0 form to stage 3 form shown in FIG. 222). It will be.

  However, when displaying the sword decoration image SYG on the effect display device 1600, if the sword decoration image SYG is always displayed in the same manner as the sword decoration body 5001, the sword decoration image SYG can be given some interest. In other words, the performance is poor when there is a production reception period. Therefore, when displaying the sword decoration image SYG on the effect display device 1600, when a predetermined effect condition is satisfied, the sword decoration image SYG may be displayed in a mode different from the sword decoration body 5001 at that time. It is desirable to ensure the performance when there is a production reception period.

  At this time, the aspect expressed by the sword decoration image SYG has a higher expectation than the aspect of the sword decoration body 5001, so that the stage performance during the stage reception period can be improved. It is desirable to ensure it appropriately. For example, when the sword decorative body 5001 is in the stage 1 form and the predetermined performance condition is satisfied, the sword decoration image SYG is not in the stage 1 form but in the stage 2 form or the stage 3 form. Display it. According to such a configuration, even if the sword decorative body 5001 is in the stage 1 form, it can be understood that the degree of expectation is higher by checking the mode of the sword decorative image SYG. Therefore, the game entertainment at the time of the production reception period is suitably maintained.

  In order to obtain such operational effects, it is only necessary that the number of rendering modes on the sword decoration image SYG side is larger than the number of rendering modes on the sword decoration body 5001 side. The number of performance modes on the sword decorative body 5001 side may be one. Moreover, when preparing a several production | presentation aspect as the sword ornament 5001, it is not necessary to change a form as these several production | generation aspects.

  However, if the mode of the sword decorative body 5001 and the mode of the sword decorative image SYG are simply different from each other in this way, some players may have an unpleasant feeling that a false display is made. There is concern, and this may reduce the entertainment interest. Therefore, more preferably, the aspect of the sword decoration image SYG is a special aspect different from any of the aspects (here, the stage 0 form to the stage 3 form shown in FIG. 222) prepared as the form of the sword decoration body 5001. When a predetermined performance condition is satisfied, the sword decoration image SYG is displayed in a special form instead of the sword decoration body 5001 at that time. It is desirable to make the decoration image SYG different from each other. The special mode may be a mode in which the outer shape of the sword decorative image SYG is changed by further deforming and combining the sword decorative image SYG. It may emit light in a manner that does not appear.

  According to such a configuration, since it is in the form of realizing a stylistic expression that is difficult on the structure of the sword decorative body 5001 by the sword decorative image SYG, it is possible to suppress anxiety that the display is false. In addition to being able to do so, it is expected that the game entertainment will be improved by providing performance beyond the imagination of the player when viewing the structure of the sword ornament 5001.

  Even when the sword decorative image SYG is given a special mode in this way, the sword decorative image SYG is provided for each mode (here, shown in FIG. 222) prepared as the mode of the sword decorative body 5001. It is desirable to be able to perform display in the stage 0 form to the stage 3 form. That is, in this case, basically, the sword decoration image SYG is displayed in the same manner as the sword decoration body 5001, and the sword decoration image SYG is only displayed when a predetermined performance condition is satisfied. It will be displayed in a special manner. In addition, when the sword decoration image SYG is displayed in a special mode, it is desirable to indicate that the degree of expectation for granting a privilege is higher than when the sword decorative image SYG is displayed in another mode. The degree of expectation may be 100%.

  In addition, with respect to a technique for enabling the sword decoration image SYG to be displayed in a special manner, in addition to a case where a specific operation-related effect is performed, another effect (for example, the effects shown in FIGS. 223 to 230, etc.) You may make it apply.

  For example, if it is in the production situation shown in FIG. 226 (X1), the next production progress destination is the production situation shown in FIG. 259 (a) in addition to the production situation shown in FIG. 226 (X2). A production pattern for production development is prepared. When the production progresses to the production pattern, first, as shown in FIG. 259 (a), the display area of the production display device 1600 is operated from the operation opportunity suggestion image shown in FIG. 226 (X1). A continuation image (image with the samurai eyes closed) indicating that no opportunity is given is displayed, and the sword decorative body 5001 that has been in the second sword state is in the sword state while maintaining the form in the stage 3 form. Returned.

  Next, the three decorative symbols that have been variably displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 are temporarily stopped and displayed in a pseudo-continuous manner, informing the player that the decorative symbols will be changed again (FIG. 259 (b)). ). Here, among the three decorative symbols, the central decorative symbol is a pseudo continuous sword symbol that is not prepared for the left and right decorative symbols, specifically, the form and effect level (number of pseudo continuous fluctuations) of the sword decorative body 5001 are shown. By displaying in the form of the pseudo continuous sword symbol, the player can easily recognize the re-change of the decorative design (start of the pseudo continuous change).

  However, here, as shown in FIG. 259 (c), the pseudo continuous sword pattern displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 has a form of the sword ornament 5001 in the fourth pseudo continuous variation (revariation). A sword image indicating (special aspect) is displayed. This special aspect can appear only in a sword image (sword decoration image SYG) imitating the sword decoration body 5001 in the display area. The body 5001 itself cannot change. The special mode according to this production example is a mode in which the sheath part is divided into two. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 259 (c), even if the sword image imitating the sword decoration body 5001 (sword decoration image SYG) in the display area is changed to a special mode, the sword decoration body 5001 has three stages. It will change from a sword state to a 2nd sword state while maintaining.

  After that, an operation effective period for generating the operation of the sword decorative body 5001 is generated, and at the display area of the effect display device 1600, an operation promotion effect for urging the sword decoration operation of the sword decorative body 5001 is performed. Specifically, while the sword decorative body 5001 is in the second sword state (stage 3 form), a sword image (sword decorative image SYG) simulating the sword decorative body 5001 in a special mode is displayed. An image (bar display) indicating the operation direction and the operation effective period is displayed together with the message “Put the sword!” (FIG. 259 (d)). Then, as shown in FIG. 259 (e), when the player's sword operation is detected in the operation effective period, the fall of the specific decorative member SDY (a saddle character) is caused according to the set effect pattern. The expectation notification effect is performed, and the sword ornament 5001 changes from the stage 3 form to the initial form. As a result, the player can grasp that the pseudo continuous variation (revariation) has ended.

  Further, in each of the above-described effect modes and other examples thereof, for example, when the symbol variation is performed in the first effect pattern based on the result of the big hit determination, the operation button 410 is operated within the symbol variation. The first sign effect that appears when an operation opportunity is given and no operation opportunity is given to the sword ornament 5001 can be executed. Further, when the symbol variation is performed in the second effect pattern based on the result of the big hit determination, the operation button 410 is not given an operation opportunity and the sword ornament 5001 is operated within the symbol variation. It is possible to execute the second precursor effect that appears when an opportunity is given. Further, when the symbol variation is performed in the third effect pattern based on the result of the jackpot determination, the third sign that appears when an operation opportunity is given to either the operation button 410 or the sword ornament 5001. Production (specific operation-related production) can be executed.

In this respect, these precursor effects are executed as different contents of the effects, but as the contents of the effects, for example,
-Before the effect image imitating the operation means on the side to which the operation opportunity is given appears in the display area, the specific image is displayed so as to cover at least the area portion where the effect image appears,
-After that, display an effect image that imitates the operation means on the side to which an operation opportunity is given at a position that is difficult to visually recognize by the specific image,
-After that, it is common to change the specific image gradually from the display area to non-display (such as increasing the transmittance of the specific image itself or decreasing the area where the specific image is displayed). You may make it make it. For example, in the first sign effect, a display effect by “cloud effect” is performed as the specific image (display effect that makes it easy to visually recognize the effect image imitating the operation means). Display effect by “effect” (display effect that makes it easier to visually recognize the effect image imitating the operation means, and in the third precursor effect, the display effect by the “water effect” (the effect image imitating the operation means is used as the specific image) It is possible to make the precursor effects different from each other by changing the type of the specific image, such as performing a display effect that gradually makes it easier to visually recognize. When the display effect is performed, it is possible to recognize that the first sign effect is performed prior to the operation opportunity being given to the operation button 410, When the display effect by the “flame effect” is performed, it is possible to recognize that the second precursor effect is performed prior to the operation opportunity being given to the sword decorative body 5001, and the “water effect” When the display effect is performed, it can be recognized that the third warning effect (specific operation-related effect) regarding which of the operation buttons 410 and the sword decorative body 5001 is given the operation opportunity is performed. Will come to be.

  And when performing a precursor effect (at least one of the first precursor effect, the second precursor effect, and the third precursor effect) with such effect contents, the effect image imitating the operation means by the specific image It is desirable to generate an effect reception period for the operation means during a period in which it is difficult to view. When such a configuration is applied to either the first sign effect or the second sign effect, the effect image imitating the operation means has a display mode with high expectation (for example, red) and low expectation. An operation opportunity is given to the operation means from the stage where the display mode (for example, blue) is not certain, so that the effect during the effect reception period is given. Can be improved. In addition, even when such a configuration is applied to the third precursor effect (specific operation-related effect), it is certain that the operation opportunity is given to either the operation button 410 or the sword ornament 5001. Since the operation opportunity is given to the operation means from the stage where the user cannot hold the performance, the performance during the production reception period can be improved.

  FIG. 260 is a diagram illustrating an example of an effect when the first precursor effect is performed with such effect content, and FIG. 261 is an example of an effect when the first precursor effect is performed with the same content. It is a time chart which shows. Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 260 and FIG. 261, an example of an effect when the first sign effect is performed will be described. However, this effect example is not the first sign effect but the second sign effect or the third sign effect. It is also possible to apply to the sign production.

  In FIG. 260 (a), in the normal gaming state, the display of variation of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is performed on the effect display device 1600 in a specific effect pattern according to the result of the jackpot determination when the number of holds is 0. The production situation is shown.

  FIG. 260 (b) shows an effect situation in which the first precursor effect has been produced during the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 260 (a).

  Here, in the effect situation shown in FIG. 260B, the display effect by the “cloud effect” is performed in a large range within the display area of the effect display device 1600. The display effect by such “cloud effect” is gradually changed from the display area to non-display after the effect starts at the timing t1 shown in FIG. Or the area where the specific image is displayed is reduced).

  In this effect example, as shown in FIG. 261, the effect reception period for the operation button 410 is set at the timing t <b> 2 when the display effect by the “cloud effect” is gradually changing to non-display. A button image BTG that imitates the operation button 410 and an instruction display that prompts an operation on the operation button 410 (a bar display that indicates the remaining time of the effect reception period) are displayed respectively. FIG. 260 (c)).

  In this effect example, the button image BTG can be displayed in any of a plurality of modes, and when the button image BTG is displayed in the first display mode (for example, red), the second display mode (for example, , Blue), the rate at which the effect at the time of operation is performed in a mode with high expectation is higher than when the button image BTG is displayed. In this regard, in the effect state shown in FIG. 260 (c), the “cloud effect” cannot be confident that the button image BTG is displayed in either the first display mode or the second display mode. In spite of this, when an operation is performed on the operation button 410, an effect is received, and an operation-time effect corresponding to the effect is received. That is, in this case, even in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the effect at the time of operation is executed in such a way that the effect contents are switched from the precursor effect, so that the button image BTG has the first display mode and It is possible to advance the production without having certainty about which of the two display modes is displayed.

  In addition, in the effect situation shown in FIG. 260 (c), the button image BTG cannot be surely displayed in the first display mode or the second display mode by the “cloud effect”. In spite of this, the instruction display prompting the operation on the operation button 410 continues to change the length of the bar display so as to suggest that the remaining time of the effect reception period is gradually decreasing.

  On the other hand, at the timing t3 when a predetermined time has elapsed since the production situation shown in FIG. 260 (c) has occurred, the “cloud effect” is performed while the production reception period generated at the timing t2 is continued. Is completely hidden (FIG. 260 (d)). In such a situation, the operation of the operation button 410 can be performed while it is easily recognizable whether the button image BTG is displayed in the first display mode or the second display mode. become able to. In other words, in this case, the operation time effect is executed in the form in which the effect content is switched from the effect shown in FIG. 260 (d).

  According to such a configuration, the period (timing t2 to t3) from when the button image BTG is displayed until the “cloud effect” is completely hidden in the effect reception period (timing t2 to t4). ), It is possible to provide performance by making the button image BTG relatively difficult to visually recognize.

  It should be noted that, in order to enhance the stage performance during the stage reception period (timing t2 to t4) throughout the period, the period during which the “cloud effect” is completely hidden (timing t3 to t4). It is desirable to perform effect display that is not performed during the period from the timing t2 to t3. In this production example, when the “cloud effect” is completely hidden (timing t3 to t4), a message such as “press” is displayed, but for example, at a timing t2 to t3. If the effect of dynamically displaying the button image BTG displayed in the stop mode in the period in the period of the timing t3 to t4 is performed, the performance in the period (timing t3 to t4) is more preferably improved. Will be able to.

  In the example of production shown in FIG. 260, the instruction display for prompting the operation on the operation button 410 and the button image BTG imitating the operation button 410 are displayed simultaneously (when the production reception period occurs). The button image BTG simulating the operation button 410 may be displayed before the production reception period occurs. That is, in this case, after the effect display by the “cloud effect” is performed, an effect situation in which the button image BTG is difficult to visually recognize appears first, and after the predetermined time, the effect situation is difficult to visually recognize. Until this time, an effect reception period for the operation button 410 occurs, and an instruction display for prompting an operation for the operation button 410 appears.

  At this time, when the button image BTG is in an effect state that is difficult to visually recognize before the effect reception period occurs, an effect pattern (third sign) that changes the display mode of the button image BTG to a more expected mode. In the case of an effect, an effect pattern that changes from the button image BTG to the sword decoration image SYG) may appear. According to such a configuration, as the button image BTG is in a production situation that is difficult to visually recognize, it becomes possible to provide fun that makes the value of gazing at the button image BTG higher. It can be suitably maintained.

  260, the button image BTG is made difficult to visually recognize by the “cloud effect”, but the instruction display for prompting the operation on the operation button 410 is influenced by the “cloud effect”. It was decided to display so that the visibility was maintained. Thereby, it becomes possible to enjoy the state in which the visibility of the button image BTG changes while grasping the remaining time of the effect reception period.

  However, the instruction display for prompting the operation on the operation button 410 may be difficult to visually recognize until the timing t3 due to the influence of the “cloud effect”. That is, in this case, the player can have a conflict as to whether or not to operate the operation button 410 without having certainty of the display mode without being able to grasp the remaining time of the presentation reception period well. It will be possible to provide an unprecedented performance.

  In addition, in any of the first sign effect, the second sign effect, and the third sign effect, when such a performance is applied, the effect image imitating the operation means is clear after the sign effect is started. Even if the length of time until the image is visible (time until the specific image is hidden) is different from each other, the effect image is clearly displayed after the effect image imitating the operation means is displayed. It is desirable to set the time until the image is visible (time until the specific image is not displayed) to the same time. Further, when such a performance is applied to any one of the first sign effect, the second sign effect, and the third sign effect, the effect imitating the operation means after the sign effect is started As for the length of time until the image can be clearly seen (time until the specific image is hidden), a plurality of these are prepared so as to have a plurality of performances with different expectations. However, the time from when the effect image imitating the operation means is displayed until the effect image is clearly visible (the time until the specific image is hidden) is the same. It is desirable to set the time.

  Further, as a technique for making it difficult to visually recognize the effect image imitating the operation means, it is not always necessary to use another image (specific image). For example, the effect image imitating the operation unit itself may appear in a display mode (timing t2) that is relatively difficult to visually recognize due to a change in the setting of the transmittance of the effect image itself. May be gradually changed toward a display mode (timing t3) that is easy to visually recognize. However, the timing at which the effect image simulating the operation means appears in a display mode that is relatively difficult to visually recognize may be a timing before the timing t2, and in this case, it appears in such a display mode itself. May be performed as a precursor effect, or an effect image imitating an operation means may be displayed in a display mode that is relatively difficult to visually recognize while performing a different display as a precursor effect. Also good.

  Further, when a specific effect pattern according to the result of the jackpot determination is executed, the specific operation-related effects described with reference to FIGS. 241 to 261 are described in a specific effect state (automatic button effect state described later). ) May be executed only when it occurs. That is, at the time when the production of the specific operation-related effect is started, it is concealed which of the plurality of operation means is allowed to receive the effect. Since an effect reception period corresponding to only one of the operation means will occur, if there is a case in which it is delayed to determine which of the plurality of operation means should be operated, rather than being operated by the player The production reception period may end before all the remaining time is consumed. In this regard, if a specific operation-related effect can be executed only when a specific effect state (automatic button effect state) described later is occurring, the effect after the specific operation-related effect is performed In the reception period, even if an image corresponding to any operation means appears as an effect result of a specific operation-related effect, the player's operation on the operation means on the operation target side and the automatic effect function Since the production is accepted by any of the above and the post-operation production is always executed, it is possible to suitably maintain the game entertainment when a specific operation-related production is performed.

[Automatic button production state]
As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, control to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) can be executed, and the automatic button effect state is controlled. When an effect reception period for the operation button 410 (more precisely, a predetermined effect pattern in which an effect reception period for the operation button 410 is set) occurs based on the result of the jackpot determination, Even if the player's operation is not accepted for the production, the processing (automatic production function) that causes the same change to the production as when the player's operation is accepted within the production acceptance period can be executed. Yes. According to such an automatic button effect state, a post-operation effect is generated when an operation is performed, without being operated every time an effect acceptance period occurs, thereby suppressing a decrease in the entertainment interest due to forgetting to operate it. Will be able to. As for the automatic production function, when this function is activated, the same production reception is performed as when the operation was actually performed, so that processing corresponding to the production reception may be performed, or the production reception is generated. The same processing as when there was an acceptance of production may be performed.

  In the embodiment related to the “automatic rendering function” described below, the above-described operation-related techniques, renderings, settings, and the like may be used in appropriate combinations or replaced.

  Here, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, the automatic button is operated by operating the operation means a plurality of times during a period in which the demonstration screen in which the symbol variation is not executed is displayed. The production state can be set. More specifically, after the menu screen is displayed by the first operation on the operation button 410, the menu screen is displayed by the second operation on the operation button 410 (or an operation means different from the operation button 410). The “various settings” screen is selected and the “various settings” screen is displayed, and the “various settings” screen is displayed by a third operation on the operation button 410 (or an operation means different from the operation button 410). When “automatic button effect state setting” displayed in the button is selected, the automatic button effect state is set. Note that only the operation button 410 may be operated a plurality of times, or may be operated a plurality of times in combination with an operation with respect to the operation button 410 and an operation with a different operation means.

  On the other hand, during the period when the symbol variation is in the execution state, the operation button 410 can be set to the automatic button effect state only by operating once, and by simplifying such operation, It is possible to set the automatic button effect state while keeping a close watch on the effect progress during the pattern change. However, some players want to actively operate the operation button 410 regardless of whether or not the valid period has occurred. If there is a case where the automatic button effect state is set just by operating it, the game entertainment may be lowered. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in order to set the automatic button effect state during the period in which the symbol variation is in the execution state, the operation state for the operation button 410 is set to a predetermined time ( In this case, it is required to be operated once in a mode (so-called “long press mode”) maintained for 2 seconds. As a result, during the period when the symbol variation is in the execution state, even if the operation on the operation button 410 is actively performed regardless of whether or not the effective period has occurred, the automatic button effect state is entered. It is possible to make it difficult to cause a mistaken setting. It should be noted that it is desirable not to be set to the automatic button effect state even if the operation is performed in a long-press manner when at least the effect acceptance period occurs in the period in which the symbol variation is in the execution state. .

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, even if the automatic button effect state is set, the demo screen in which the symbol variation is not executed is also used as a method of canceling the setting. Different operation modes are required between the displayed period and the period when the symbol variation is in the execution state.

  That is, during the period when the demo screen in which the symbol variation is not executed is displayed, the automatic button effect state setting can be canceled by operating the operation means a plurality of times. More specifically, after the menu screen is displayed by the first operation on the operation button 410, the menu screen is displayed by the second operation on the operation button 410 (or an operation means different from the operation button 410). The “various settings” screen is selected and the “various settings” screen is displayed, and the “various settings” screen is displayed by a third operation on the operation button 410 (or an operation means different from the operation button 410). When “cancel automatic button effect state” displayed in is selected, the automatic button effect state is canceled.

  On the other hand, during the period in which the symbol variation is in the execution state, the setting of the automatic button effect state can be canceled only by operating the operation button 410 once. By simplifying such an operation, The setting of the automatic button effect state can be canceled while keeping a close watch on the effect progress during the pattern change. However, unlike the case of setting to the automatic button effect state, the operation button 410 is moved to the operation state without maintaining the operation state with respect to the operation button 410 for a predetermined time (even if it is not a long-pressing operation mode). The automatic button effect state is canceled only by detecting that this has been done (just by operating in a single operation mode). That is, if any operation is performed on the operation button 410, it can be said that the desire to perform the operation on the operation button 410 appears. It is expected that the game entertainment will be favorably maintained by canceling the state setting and quickly returning to the normal performance state.

  Note that, as described above, the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment includes a plurality of operation means including the operation buttons 410. In this regard, the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to the present embodiment is different from the operation button 410 based on the result of the big hit determination when in the automatic button effect state set by the operation on the operation button 410. An effect reception period in which an operation opportunity is given to a specific operation means (for example, a sword ornament 5001 or the like) (more precisely, a predetermined effect pattern in which an effect reception period for the sword ornament 5001 or the like is set) Even if an operation by the player (operation on the sword ornament 5001) is not accepted within the production reception period, an operation by the player (operation on the sword decoration 5001) is not received during the production reception period. It is possible to execute a process (automatic effect function) that causes the same change to the effect when the effect is accepted. According to such a configuration, a period in which the operation of the operation button 410 among the plurality of operation means (the operation button 410, the sword ornament 5001, etc.) can be accepted for production occurs, or another operation means (for example, When the above-described effect (specific operation-related effects (see FIGS. 241 to 261)) regarding whether a period during which an operation on the sword decorative body 5001) can be accepted is generated, the effect result Even if any of the operation button 410 and the sword decorative body 5001 can be accepted, there is no need to worry about forgetting to operate, so that such a specific operation-related effect can be enjoyed with peace of mind. .

In the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment,
-When the first side production reception period in which the first operation means (for example, the operation button 410) among the plurality of operation means is set as the operation target occurs when being controlled in a specific production state (automatic button production state). When the operation on the first operation means is not performed within the first side production reception period, it is possible to execute automatic processing that causes the same change to the effect as when the operation on the first operation means is performed. Yes (first automatic production means)
A second-side effect acceptance period in which a second operation means (for example, a sword ornament 5001 or the like) among a plurality of operation means is set as an operation target when controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state). When this occurs, an automatic process is executed to cause the same change to occur when the operation on the second operation means is not performed within the second side effect acceptance period. Possible (second automatic production means)
Even if any of the first side production reception period and the second side production reception period occurs, the first specific time elapses after the period has occurred. Automatic processing by one automatic presentation means or automatic processing by second automatic presentation means can be executed.

  According to such a configuration, when controlled to a specific performance state (automatic button performance state), the first side production reception period in which the first operation means is set as the operation target, and the second operation means is the operation target. The automatic production function can function when the same specific time has passed since the occurrence of any of the second side production acceptance periods set as Therefore, you will be able to enjoy the production with peace of mind.

  However, when the first side production reception period in which the first operation means (for example, the operation button 410) is set as the operation target occurs, when a specific time has elapsed since the first side production reception period has occurred. When the automatic processing by the first automatic effecting means is executed and when the time different from the specific time has elapsed after the first side effect receiving period has occurred, the automatic processing by the first automatic effecting means is executed. You may make it perform presentation progress within a design fluctuation so that there may be a case. According to such a configuration, when it was assumed that the automatic processing by the first automatic rendering means is executed when a specific time has elapsed since the occurrence of the first side rendering acceptance period, a timing different from this is assumed. Since the production is accepted and the post-operation production is automatically generated, it can be functioned as a surprise production.

  In addition, when controlled to a specific performance state (automatic button performance state), an operation opportunity is given to the operating means within the symbol variation period than when not controlled to a specific performance state (automatic button performance state). The ratio at which the effect reception period is generated may be increased. That is, in this case, it can be assumed that the frequency of occurrence of the production reception period is increased, so that the frequency of forgetting operation within the production reception period is also increased. Since the post-operation production is executed by the function functioning, the production reception period can be generated at a higher frequency while suppressing a decrease in the game entertainment due to frequent forgetting to operate. By the way, when controlled to a specific production state (automatic button production state), it is desirable that both the production reception period for the first operation means and the production reception period for the second operation means increase. However, it is more desirable that the degree of increase in the generation ratio is different between the effect reception period for the first operation means and the effect reception period for the second operation means.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment,
-If the production acceptance conditions are satisfied within the production acceptance period, the post-operation production can be executed (post-operation production execution means),
A process for establishing the condition for receiving the presentation based on the operation performed by the player within the period for receiving the presentation is executable (player operation receiving means),
When the player does not perform an operation within the production reception period, a process for establishing the production reception condition can be executed without receiving an operation by the player at a specific timing within the production reception period (automatic production reception means )
However, the specific timing within the production reception period is set so that it does not arrive until at least half of the time set as the production reception period elapses after the production reception period starts. To do. As a result, a sufficient margin for the player himself to operate until the automatic performance function is functioned, and the option for causing the reception of the performance by the operation of the player is left. The game entertainment can be suitably maintained.

  In this case, the automatic processing by the first automatic production means is executed when the specific time has elapsed since the first side production reception period has occurred, and the specific time after the first side production reception period has occurred. When the progress of the presentation within the symbol variation is performed so that the automatic processing by the first automatic presentation means may be executed when a time different from the above has elapsed, the “specific time” or the “specific time” Any of “time different from” is set as a time value longer than at least half of the time set as the first side production reception period.

  Here, when an effect reception period for the operation button 410 occurs during the symbol variation execution period when the automatic button effect state is controlled, and an operation for the operation button 410 is received for the effect during the effect reception period. Then, a process of generating a post-operation effect according to the effect reception is executed. However, in this case, in addition to the process of generating the post-operation effect according to the reception of the effect, a process of canceling the setting of the automatic button effect state may also be performed.

  Similarly, an effect reception period for an operation means (such as a sword ornament 5001) different from the operation button 410 is generated during the symbol variation execution period when the automatic button effect state is controlled. Even when an operation for the sword ornament 5001 is received during the period, a process for generating an post-operation effect corresponding to the reception of the effect and a process for canceling the setting of the automatic button effect state are executed. Is desirable. In this case as well, with regard to “post-operation effect according to the effect reception”, an effect reception period for the sword ornament 5001 occurs during the period when the automatic button effect state is not controlled, and the sword decoration within the effect reception period. This is executed as an effect having the same content as the post-operation effect that is executed when an operation on the body 5001 is accepted.

  That is, after being controlled to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), a desire (specific effect) to return to the effect state (normal effect mode) in which the effect can be developed depending on the player's own operation. A desire to end the situation). Such a desire often occurs when an effect reception period in which an operation opportunity is given to a player occurs, but a limited time from the start of the effect reception period to the end thereof It is difficult to perform both an operation for ending a specific performance state and an operation for accepting an operation, and as a result, an operation opportunity may be lost. If there is, the entertainment interest may decrease. In this regard, in the above configuration, when an effect reception period related to a specific effect occurs when the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) is controlled, an operation button to which an operation opportunity is given within the effect reception period The process of ending the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) and the process that can change the effect by simply performing an operation on 410 or the sword ornament 5001 (just by operating in a single operation mode) (Processing for performing post-operation production) is performed, so that the desire to advance the production depending on the player's own operation by terminating the automatic button production state (specific production state) is accepted. Even if it occurs within the period, it is possible to smoothly switch the production state.

  However, regarding changes in settings related to the automatic button effect state (setting changes to the automatic button effect state and cancellation of the automatic button effect state setting) during the period when the demo screen is displayed (in the state where the symbol variation is not executed) The setting of the sword decorative body 5001 can be changed without requiring any operation. In other words, the sword decorative body 5001 has a lower frequency of operation opportunity than the operation button 410 during the symbol change execution period. The degree will be increased. Therefore, the operation for the sword ornament 5001 is not allowed only for the purpose of changing the setting in the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), thereby giving an operation opportunity to the sword ornament 5001. It can be said that it is more desirable to increase the premium feeling at the time of the game and maintain the entertainment interest. In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, during a period in which a demonstration screen in which the symbol variation is not executed is displayed, operation means other than the sword ornament 5001 (operation buttons) among the plurality of operation means. 410 or another operation means) can be operated a plurality of times to set or cancel the automatic button effect state.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, even during the symbol variation execution period when the automatic button effect state is not controlled, the operation to the automatic button effect state is not required without requiring an operation on the sword ornament 5001. Settings can be changed. That is, as described above, if the operation button 410 is operated once in the “long press mode”, the automatic button effect state is controlled, but only the setting change to the automatic button effect state is performed. For this purpose, the operation on the sword ornament 5001 is not allowed.

  That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the case where the setting relating to the automatic button effect state can be changed by the operation on the sword decorative body 5001 refers to the pattern when the automatic button effect state is controlled. It is limited to the case where an effect reception period for the sword ornament 5001 occurs during the execution period of the fluctuation, an operation for the sword ornament 5001 is received during the effect reception period, and a post-operation effect corresponding thereto appears. . According to such a configuration, it is possible to change the setting to the automatic button effect state by operating the sword ornament 5001 without impairing the premium feeling when an operation opportunity is given to the sword ornament 5001. It becomes like this.

  The plurality of operation means provided in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment includes “automatic operation that generates an operation-time effect without operation within the effect reception period” when in an automatic button effect state. In addition to the operation means (operation button 410, sword ornament 5001) that can be the target of the “production function”, the special operation means that are not the target of the “automatic production function that generates the production effect during operation without operation within the production reception period” May further be included. That is, in this case, when the symbol variation is in the execution state, an effect reception period in which an operation opportunity for the special operation means is given occurs, and if an operation for the special operation means is received within the effect reception period, The degree of expectation for the big hit will be suggested by the post-operation production according to the production reception. However, even if the operation is controlled to the automatic button effect state, the same post-operation effect as when the effect is accepted appears if the effect on the special operation means is not accepted within the effect acceptance period. There is no. However, in this case, the same post-operation effect as when the effect is received does not appear, but if it is an effect different from that when the effect is received, it may be made to appear.

  In addition, regarding the setting to the automatic button effect state using the operation button 410 (operation in a long press mode), the effect reception period for the operation button 410 occurs during the period in which the symbol variation is in the execution state. In addition to the time, an effect reception period for an operation means different from the operation button 410 (an effect reception period in which an expectation is suggested when the sword ornament 5001 is operated, or an expectation is indicated when the special operation means is operated. It is desirable that this is not allowed even when a production reception period or the like occurs. That is, when the operation button 410 is operated (operation in a long press mode) when the operation reception period for the operation means different from that of the operation button 410 is within an automatic reception effect state. In the middle of the production reception period, the “automatic production function that generates the production effect during operation without operation during the production reception period” is activated, and the original production reception (operating means different from the operation button 410 is operated). If there is a player who is not familiar with the automatic button effect state, the effect reception period for the operation button 410 has occurred or the operation button 410 It may be confusing whether the production reception period for the operation means different from that has occurred, and this may reduce the entertainment interest This is because that is just in case.

  Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, it is possible to execute the warning effect prior to the generation of the effect reception period, but control is performed in a specific effect state (automatic button effect state). A sign effect that appears prior to the occurrence of the effect reception period when not being performed, and a sign effect that appears prior to the occurrence of the effect reception period when controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state) It may be possible to execute as a different display mode. That is, in this case, it becomes possible to recognize in advance whether there is a production state in which the automatic production function can function within the specific production reception period, and the production can be enjoyed with peace of mind.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, a specific image indicating the remaining time (for example, “bar display” indicating the remaining time) is displayed in the effect receiving period. However, when the production reception period occurs, at least the specific image (for example, “bar display” indicating the remaining time) is displayed so that the specific image is directed toward the specific area where the specific image is displayed. An effect image different from the specific image (for example, an image where lightning falls toward the specific region) may be displayed (a sign effect) outside the region. In other words, in this case, when the production reception period occurs, the movement of the production image different from the specific image is confirmed, and the “specific image suggesting the remaining time” in a non-display state will be watched. , It is possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the specific presentation acceptance period ends without the player's operation in time, Even if the operation by the player is not in time, the post-operation effect is executed by the function of the automatic effect function, so that it is expected that the game entertainment will be suitably maintained.

  In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to execute the state setting and the setting cancellation related to the automatic button effect state by the operation of the player, but the results of the jackpot determination including the following explanation examples are included. Based on the progress of the game or effect, the state may be set to the automatic button effect state, or the setting of the automatic button effect state may be canceled. As an example in which state setting and setting cancellation may be performed in accordance with the progress of the game or production, for example, “While being controlled in the normal gaming state, it is controlled as an automatic button presentation state, but the big hit gaming state Control mode such as “Auto button effect state is canceled when transitioned to high probability short-time state” or “Auto button effect state is generated within the symbol variation execution period, and symbol variation in the execution state is completed Control mode such as “Generate an effect pattern to be released when a predetermined time has elapsed since the occurrence” or “Generate an automatic button effect state over a period in which multiple symbol variations are performed” It is possible to adopt a mode such as a control mode. In addition, the pachinko machine 1 that is always controlled to the automatic button effect state may be used. In this case, the setting of the automatic button effect state is not canceled and the automatic button effect state is not set. Such a process itself is eliminated.

  In addition, the timing at which the above-described automatic performance function functions may be a predetermined timing after the remaining time of the production reception period is consumed, or the remaining time of the production reception period remains. It may be an intermediate timing (specific timing). When the remaining time of the production reception period is exhausted, or when the above-described automatic production function functions at a predetermined timing thereafter, the post-operation production is performed as if the production reception was made after the production reception period ended. Will be executed. On the other hand, when the above-described automatic production function functions at a timing (specific timing) during which the remaining time of the production reception period remains, the above-described automatic production function functions in the same manner as when there is an actual operation. At the time point (specific timing), the effect reception period ends and the post-operation effect is executed.

  However, in order to ensure a sense of security that the post-operation production will occur even if no operation is performed when the automatic button production state is controlled, the period until the production reception period ends (production reception It is important to cause the above-described automatic performance function to function at a specific timing within a period and start a post-operation performance according to this. In other words, in this case, when the above-described automatic performance function does not function despite the arrival of a specific timing within the performance reception period, a post-operation effect is generated by the player operating after the specific timing has arrived. Anxiety when being controlled to the automatic button effect state (for example, “If the automatic button effect state is not controlled, it is erroneously controlled. It may be difficult to confirm the presentation after the operation ”or“ The automatic presentation function may not work due to some trouble and the presentation may not be confirmed after the operation ”). Will be able to.

  The pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment has a characteristic technique related to such an automatic button effect state. Hereinafter, characteristic techniques related to the automatic button effect state will be described in order, but these characteristic techniques may be applied to each of the above-described effect examples, and the following characteristic techniques may be applied. You may make it use combining suitably.

  In describing each of the following characteristic techniques, as a premise thereof, in a specific production state (automatic button production state), usually, when the specific production state (automatic button production state) is not controlled. When an effect reception period that can occur is generated, the same post-operation effect as when the operation is performed is generated even if no operation is performed within the effect reception period. However, instead of this, a specific display effect (display effect that can be selected based on the result of the jackpot determination) that can be executed only when controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state) is prepared, When a specific effective period related to this occurs during the specific display effect, the same post-operation effect as when the operation is performed is generated even if the operation is not performed within the specific effective period. It may be. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve performance when controlled to a specific performance state (automatic button performance state) (improvement of performance by allowing the generation of a specific display effect). Of course, even if a specific production state (automatic button production state) occurs, the automatic production function may not function during another production reception period set when a specific display production is not performed. On the other hand, during a specific effective period when a specific display effect is being performed, it is possible to experience the VIP feeling due to the fact that the operation effect is saved by the function of the automatic effect function. Therefore, it is expected that the game entertainment will be suitably enhanced. Note that it is not always necessary to prevent the automatic production function from functioning in all of the other production reception periods set when a specific display production is not performed, and automatic production is performed at least in some production reception periods. If the function cannot function, the above-mentioned effect when the specific effective period occurs when the specific display effect is performed (when the effect reception period during which the automatic effect function always works) occurs. It is possible to expect Even when such a specific effective period occurs, if there is no operation by the player until the specific timing within the specific effective period arrives, the above-described automatic performance function is caused to function at the specific timing. It is desirable to start a post-operation effect according to this.

Moreover, after preparing at least the first specific display effect, the second specific display effect, and the third specific display effect as specific display effects that can be executed based on the result of the jackpot determination,
If the first specific effective period occurs when the first specific display effect is being executed, the automatic effect described above at the timing when the first predetermined time has elapsed since the first specific effective period has occurred. While the function is activated to end the first specific effective period and generate a post-operation effect according to this,
If a second specific effective period occurs when the second specific display effect is being executed, a second predetermined time longer than the first predetermined time after the second specific effective period occurs The above-described automatic performance function functions at the timing when elapses to end the second specific effective period and generate a post-operation performance in accordance with this,
When the third specific effective period occurs when the third specific display effect is being executed, the third specific effective period is controlled despite being controlled to the specific effect state (automatic button effect state). If there is no operation before the operation is completed, each processing such as preventing the same post-operation effect from appearing when the operation is performed may be performed when the operation is in a specific effect state. According to such a configuration, even if an effect reception period (specific effective period) occurs when controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state), the first time from when the effect reception period occurs is the first. When the predetermined time elapses, the automatic production function described above functions, or when the second predetermined time longer than the first predetermined time has not elapsed, the automatic production function described above does not function, Even if the production reception period ends, the automatic production function described above cannot be performed in the first place. Therefore, even if it is controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state), it is confirmed which type of specific display effect was performed when the effect reception period (specific effective period) occurs For example, when the above-described automatic rendering function does not function even though the first predetermined time has elapsed, the above-described need is satisfied when the second predetermined time has elapsed. It is possible to make the presentation progress with a sense of tension, such as whether the automatic presentation function is functioning or whether the above-described automatic presentation function does not function in the first place. The first specific effective period, the second specific effective period, and the third specific effective period are all when the operation means (for example, the operation button 410) to be operated is in an operation state (so-called When a single operation is performed), an effect is received and a post-operation effect is generated.

  Note that the first specific display effect, the second specific display effect, and the third specific display effect can only be executed when controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state). There may be. Thus, when controlled to a specific performance state (automatic button performance state), a display mode that cannot appear when not controlled to the specific performance state (automatic button performance state) can be displayed. In such a case, it is possible to favorably maintain the gaming interest when in a specific performance state (automatic button performance state). Also, a first specific display effect (first specific effective period) and a second specific display effect (second specific effective period) are prepared, and the third specific display effect (third specific effective period) is prepared. Is not necessarily prepared. In addition, the post-operation effects that are generated when an effect is received during the first specific effective period, the second specific effective period, and the third specific effective period may have different effects.

  In addition, when the post-operation effect is generated by the function of the automatic effect described above, at which timing within the effect acceptance period the automatic effect function worked (when the effect is accepted, as the effect acceptance period The automatic presentation function worked for the bar display (display that changes the image (the area changes in this case) over time) that shows the remaining time of the production reception available period so that it can be recognized. You may make it generate | occur | produce the post-operation production in the state which displayed this instead of making it non-display. According to such a configuration, for example, by confirming the remaining time indicated by the “bar display” that is continuously displayed when the automatic performance function functions, the production reception period is set to the first specific effective period ( The period during which the automatic production function functions when the first predetermined time, which is a relatively early stage after the production reception period has occurred, and the second specific effective period (relative to the generation of the production reception period). It becomes possible to recognize whether the automatic production function is functioning when the second predetermined time, which is a late stage, has elapsed.

  In this sense, when the first specific effective period (the period during which the automatic effect function functions when the first predetermined time has elapsed since the generation acceptance period occurs) and the second specific effective period ( The degree of jackpot expectation differs depending on the occurrence of the automatic production function when the second predetermined time has elapsed after the production reception period has occurred (for example, the second specific effective period is more advantageous) It is desirable to do so. In this case, the first specific display effect and the second specific display effect may not necessarily be executed. However, when the first specific display effect and the second specific display effect are executed, a big hit is expected when the first specific display effect appears and when the second specific display effect appears. It functions so that the degrees are different (for example, the second specific display effect is more advantageous). Further, when a post-operation effect is generated by an operation by the player within the effect reception period, the “bar display” may be hidden in a state where the post-operation effect has occurred, or the above-described automatic effect function As in the case of functioning, the “bar display” may not be hidden, and the post-operation effect may be generated in a state where it is displayed. The post-operation effect does not have to be executed as a display change in the effect display device 1600. For example, it is executed as a light emission by a lamp provided on the game board 5 or an operation by a movable decorative body. Also good.

  In addition, when the post-operation effect is generated by the function of the automatic effect described above, the player is not involved with the operation means (for example, the operation button 410) that is the target of the operation. Since the effect is automatically generated, there is a concern that it is impossible for the player side to grasp which operation means corresponds to the automatically generated post-operation effect. Therefore, when the post-operation effect is generated by causing the above-described automatic effect function to function, first, an operation target suggestion image (for example, an operation to be an operation target) suggesting an operation means to be an operation target within the effect reception period. Even if the above-described automatic rendering function is activated, the post-operation rendering is generated while the operation target suggestion image is not displayed but displayed. It is desirable to make it. In this case, the display mode (for example, color, transmittance, etc.) of the operation target suggestion image does not necessarily have to be the same before and after the generation of the post-operation effect. It suffices if it can be recognized even in the state where the post-operation effect has occurred. On the other hand, when the post-operation effect is generated by the player's operation within the effect reception period, the operation target suggestion image may be hidden in the state where the post-operation effect is generated, or the above-described automatic As in the case where the effect function is activated, the post-operation effect may be generated in a state where the operation target suggestion image is not displayed but displayed. When the above-described automatic effect function functions, such as when the automatic effect function functions within the above-described first specific effective period, or when the automatic effect function functions within the above-described second specific effective period, The post-operation effect may be generated in a state where the operation target suggestion image is not displayed but displayed.

  Further, at this time, if the post-operation effect is generated in a state where the operation target suggestion image is displayed in any of a plurality of modes having different big hit expectation degrees, both the operation target suggestion image mode and the post-operation effect mode are displayed. Can be confirmed at the same time, and the game entertainment can be improved. Further, the post-operation effect need not be executed as a display change in the effect display device 1600, and is executed, for example, as a light emission by a lamp provided on the game board 5 or an operation by a movable decorative body. There may be.

  In addition, when an operation that generates an effect reception period in which an operation opportunity is given to an operation means (one of a plurality of operation means) is an “operation system effect”, the operation system effect is related to this. It may be executed in parallel with another specific effect (for example, a movable body effect, a count effect, or the like) without an image. However, in this case, when “Operation system effect” is executed but “Other specific effect unrelated to this” is not executed, “Operation system effect” and “ It is desirable that the ratio of the above-described automatic performance function to be higher than when the “specific production” is in the production situation in parallel. In other words, when there is an effect situation in which “operation system effect” and “another specific effect unrelated to this” are in parallel, the “operation system effect” is not accepted and the post-operation effect is not executed. In addition, since “another specific effect unrelated to this” is in the execution state, the decline in the entertainment interest of the game can be suppressed, whereas the “operation system effect” is executed, but “another effect not related to this” When there is a production situation in which the “specific production” is not executed, if there is a case where the production operation is not accepted and the post-operation production is not executed, no production will be executed. Therefore, a decline in the entertainment interest is inevitable. Therefore, when there is a performance situation in which “operation-related effects” are executed but “other specific effects not related to this” are not executed, “operation-related effects” and “other specific effects not related to this” are specified. By making the ratio of the above-described automatic performance function to be higher than when the “production” is in a parallel production situation, it is possible to favorably maintain the gaming interest when the operation system production occurs. become. The percentage may be 100%. By the way, the warning effect that is performed before the production reception period occurs, the production that the operation means to be operated is operated, etc. are executed as “operation system production” or production related thereto. It can be said that it is a thing. In addition, as “another specific effect”, for example, if it is generated before the start of the effect reception period (preferably, the sign effect), it is suggested in advance that the ratio of the above-described automatic effect function will increase. Will be able to. In this case, it is desirable to be executed as an effect that ends after the end of the effect reception period (preferably, the post-operation effect). On the other hand, as “another specific effect”, for example, if it occurs after the start of the effect reception period (preferably, the sign effect) and is executed as an effect that ends before the end of the effect reception period, It becomes possible to recognize only immediately before whether the ratio of the above-described automatic performance function is high, and it is possible to provide the performance in a sense of tension. In this regard, if the “other specific effect” is to be generated before the start of the effect reception period (preferably the predicate effect), the “other specific effect” may be repeated multiple times within one symbol variation. If it is done, it will be executed even when the production reception period does not occur, so the ratio of the automatic production function functioning when “another specific production” is executed is high This makes it possible to give a sense of tension as to whether or not the production reception period occurs.

  Further, when in a specific effect state (automatic button effect state), the loss variation corresponding to the result of the big hit determination is sequentially digested, and the number of executions thereof is a specific value (for example, 999 times the loss variation is executed continuously, Until it reaches the 1000th change in loss), an effect reception period in which an operation opportunity is given to the operation means (one of the plurality of operation means) based on the result of the jackpot determination can be generated with a predetermined probability. In addition, even if the production reception period occurs, when there is no operation by the player, there is a case where the above-described automatic production function is made to function and a case where the above-mentioned automatic production function is not made to function. On the other hand, when there is a specific effect state (automatic button effect state), the loss variation according to the result of the big hit determination is sequentially digested, and the number of executions is a specific value (for example, 999 times the loss variation is executed continuously) In the case of reaching the 1000th loss fluctuation), when the symbol fluctuation (production pattern) reaches the specific value, the operation means (one of a plurality of operation means) is operated regardless of the result of the jackpot determination. Is always generated, and even if there is no operation by the player within the reception period, the above-described automatic performance function is operated and there is an operation by the player within the reception period. You may make it perform the process which always produces | generates the same post-operation production as time. According to such a configuration, when the number of continuous executions of the loss variation reaches a specific value, “the player should be operated every time an effect reception period occurs while the loss variation is continuously executed. Even though there was no operation by the player as if he felt the responsibility so far, the pachinko machine 1 itself must function automatically. Since it is realized as an effect to be played, it is possible to suitably maintain the game entertainment. At this time, in the production reception period that occurs when the loss variation is digested sequentially and the number of executions reaches a specific value (for example, the 1000th loss variation), the loss variation is sequentially digested and executed. A special display image (for example, “operating”, etc.) that is different from a display image (for example, “operate”) that has appeared during the effect reception period until the number of times reaches a specific value (for example, up to 999 loss fluctuations) It would be desirable to make it appear, such as “If I am troublesome, I will act for you”. In addition, even after the symbol variation (production pattern) that has reached a specific value is digested, the symbol variation is consumed each time the symbol variation is digested until a specific condition (for example, occurrence of a big hit gaming state) is satisfied. Within the (effect pattern), an effect reception period during which an operation opportunity is given to the operation means (one of the plurality of operation means) is always generated regardless of the result of the big hit determination, and a special display image (for example, “ If it is troublesome, I will act on behalf of you, etc.)), and even if there is no operation by the player within the period for receiving the production, the automatic production function described above will function and respond to the production reception. It is desirable to execute a process that always generates a post-operation effect.

  It should be noted that the loss variation according to the result of the big hit determination is digested sequentially when in the specific effect state (automatic button effect state), and the number of executions is a specific value (for example, 999 times the loss change is executed continuously, You may make it display the remaining fluctuation | variation number until it reaches | attains the 1000th loss fluctuation | variation.

  Also, during the symbol variation, the first operation is performed during the symbol variation until the loss variation according to the result of the big hit determination is sequentially digested and the number of executions reaches a specific value when in the specific rendering state (automatic button rendering state). Both the production reception period for the means and the production reception period for the second operation means can occur, but in the pattern fluctuation when the loss variation is sequentially digested and the number of executions reaches a specific value In addition, it is possible to cause the presentation to progress so that only one of the presentation acceptance period for the first operation means and the presentation acceptance period for the second operation means always occurs and the other side cannot occur. According to such a configuration, since an operation opportunity is always given to the same operation means, it is suitably suppressed that the production acceptance period has occurred and the expectation is given to itself. Become moist. However, this example of the performance is "Despite the fact that the player has been encouraged to operate every time the production acceptance period occurs, In view of the fact that the pachinko machine 1 itself is always realized as an effect that makes the automatic effect function work even if there is no operation by the player, as if it had felt the responsibility so far, In order to prevent further expectation, an effect reception period is generated for the first operation means (for example, the operation button 410) on the side where the expectation at the time of occurrence is relatively low, and the second operation means (for example, It is desirable not to generate an effect reception period for the sword ornament 5001).

  In addition, the first effect reception period in which an operation opportunity is given to the first operation means (for example, the operation button 410) among the plurality of operation means is controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state). It can occur both when it is not and when it is controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state), but the second operation means (for example, the sword ornament 5001) among the plurality of operation means. The second effect acceptance period in which an operation opportunity is given to the user cannot occur when not controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state) and is controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state). It may be made possible to generate when it is done. According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the performance when controlled to a specific performance state (automatic button performance state), and when in the specific performance state (automatic button performance state) It becomes possible to suitably maintain the gaming interests of the game.

Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, when the production reception period is generated based on the result of the jackpot determination,
-Display a spear image imitating the operation means (an operation target suggestion image that suggests an operation means to be operated) (a spear image display means)
-After the production reception period has occurred, if an operation by the player is performed while the spear image is displayed, a post-operation production can be executed based on the operation (player operation reception means),
・ After the production reception period has occurred, if a specific timing arrives without any player operation while the spear image is displayed, the post-operation effect can be executed without receiving any operation by the player ( Automatic production reception means)
However, the 摸 image is displayed in one of a plurality of modes with different ratios (expectations) in which the post-operation effect is executed in the “mode advantageous to the player” when the effect is accepted. It is desirable to be able to do this. According to such a configuration, the expectation can be recognized whether the post-operation effect is generated by the player operation receiving means or the post-operation effect is generated by the automatic effect receiving means. The post-operation effect can be generated.

  In addition, when the post-operation effect is generated by the function of the automatic effect described above, the player is not involved with the operation means (for example, the operation button 410) that is the target of the operation. Since the effect is automatically generated, there is a concern that it is impossible for the player side to grasp which operation means corresponds to the automatically generated post-operation effect. Therefore, when the post-operation effect is generated by causing the above-described automatic effect function to function, first, a spear image (an operation target suggestion image that suggests an operation means to be operated) is displayed within the effect reception period, Even when the automatic rendering function described above is functioning, it is desirable to generate the post-operation rendering in a state in which the haze image is displayed without being hidden. In this case, the display mode (for example, color, transmittance, etc.) of the operation target suggestion image does not necessarily have to be the same before and after the generation of the post-operation effect. It suffices if it can be recognized even in the state where the post-operation effect has occurred. On the other hand, when the post-operation effect is generated by the player's operation within the effect reception period, the operation target suggestion image may be hidden in the state where the post-operation effect is generated, or the above-described automatic As in the case where the effect function is activated, the post-operation effect may be generated in a state where the operation target suggestion image is not displayed but displayed. The post-operation effect may be executed using at least a region different from the region in which the spear image is displayed in the effect display device 1600, or light emission by a lamp provided on the game board 5 or a movable decorative body It may be executed as an operation by.

  At this time, when the cocoon image is displayed in any of a plurality of modes having different degrees of expectation, the expectation level (摸 image) suggested in the effect reception period even in the state where the post-operation effect has occurred. Display mode) can be confirmed.

  The haze image that is continuously displayed in this manner is hidden after the post-operation effect has occurred. However, the case where the automatic processing by the first automatic production means is executed when the specific time has elapsed since the first side production reception period occurs, and the specific time after the first side production reception period occurs When the automatic processing by the first automatic rendering means is executed when a different time has elapsed, the time from when the post-operation rendering is performed until the haze image is hidden should be different from each other. Is desirable. According to such a configuration, it is possible to recognize whether a post-operation effect has occurred due to automatic processing when a specific time has elapsed, or whether a post-operation effect has occurred due to automatic processing when a time different from the specific time has elapsed. Even if there is not, it is possible to recognize at which time the post-operation effect has occurred by checking the time from the execution of the post-operation effect until the haze image is hidden. .

  In addition, when a post-operation effect is generated by automatic processing when a specific time has elapsed, and when a post-operation effect is generated by automatic processing when a time different from the specific time has elapsed, The degree of expectation that is obtained may be different.

  In addition, when an effect reception period in which an operation opportunity is given to a player is generated while being controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state), two displays are displayed during the effect reception period. Either a mode (for example, a low-expected display mode with a relatively low jackpot expectation level or a high-expected display mode with a relatively high jackpot expectation level) can appear, and a high-expected display mode (for example, a red operation image) ) Appears, even if no operation is performed within the period for receiving the production, the production is always accepted (the automatic production function is always functioning), and the post-operation production according to the production reception is executed. When a mode (for example, a blue operation image) appears, when an operation is not performed within the effect reception period, an effect is received (the automatic effect function is functioned), and a post-operation effect corresponding to the effect reception is executed. When and where Biasing may be made to effect development so that there is a case where (automatic directing feature function) after Sarezu operation effect is not executed. That is, if forgetting to operate when a high-expected display mode (for example, a red operation image) appears, it is inevitable that the game entertainment will decline due to the fact that the post-operation effect cannot be confirmed. When a display mode (for example, a blue operation image) appears, even if the user forgets to operate it, it is assumed that the game entertainment will not decrease so much, so a high expectation display mode (for example, a red operation image) has appeared. If forgetting to operate sometimes occurs, by making sure that the automatic production function is functioned within the production reception period, it is possible to avoid a decrease in the entertainment interest due to forgetting to operate, but a low expectation display mode (for example, blue operation) If you forget to operate when an image) appears, play the game so that you do not forget to operate it by not allowing the automatic production function to function during the production reception period. And to have a sense of tension is possible to enhance the player's sense of participation it will be expected against. In addition, when it is not controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state), a low expectation display mode (for example, a blue operation image) appears, but a high expectation display mode (for example, a red operation image) It may be prevented from appearing. In addition, any of three or more display modes may appear during the effect reception period.

  And in each characteristic technique demonstrated below, you may make it implement by applying suitably also about the other example concerning these automatic button production | presentation states.

[Suggestion suggestion by automatic production function]
As described above, in the automatic button effect state, even if no operation is performed by the player within the effect reception period (the first specific effective period or the second specific effective period when the above-described example is applied), It is possible to execute a process (automatic rendering function) that causes the same change to the performance as when the operation was performed. In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, in the automatic button effect state, when an operation by the player is not accepted within the effect acceptance period, the same change as when the effect is accepted An effect pattern in which a process (automatic effect function) for generating an effect is not executed can also be generated. At this time, in the automatic button effect state, when the automatic effect function does not function when the operation by the player is not accepted within the effect acceptance period, the symbol variation is larger than when the automatic effect function functions. , The process of producing the effect within the symbol variation can be executed so that the expectation (ratio) at which the big hit symbol appears is low. At this time, the expectation degree (ratio) at which the jackpot symbol appears may be 0%.

  According to such a configuration, when an effect reception period for the operation button 410 occurs in the automatic button effect state, the automatic effect function is activated when the operation on the operation button 410 is not intentionally performed within the effect reception period. By confirming whether or not it functions, it is possible to grasp the degree of expectation as to whether or not a jackpot symbol appears due to a symbol variation in the execution state. In other words, in this case, in the automatic button effect state, it is impossible to confirm the post-operation effect itself that should have been confirmed as long as the effect is accepted (operation on the operation button 410) within the effect acceptance period. In the presence of a risk that could cause dramatic demerits, the novel directing effect of causing the player to exercise a direct selection such as “do not perform any operation on the operation button 410 within the period of receiving the production” As a result, it is expected that the game entertainment will be suitably maintained.

  In addition, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, it is possible to receive an effect on the operation button 410 among a plurality of operation means (the operation button 410, the sword ornament 5001, etc.). The above-described effects (specific operation-related effects (FIGS. 241 to 261) regarding whether a period occurs or whether a period during which an operation on another operation means (for example, a sword ornament 5001) can be accepted) occurs. ))). In this regard, in the automatic button effect state, in the effect reception period that occurs corresponding to such a specific operation-related effect, these effects are compared to the effect reception period that occurs without executing the specific operation-related effect. It is possible to execute a process in which the effect in the symbol variation is advanced so that the above-described ratio of the automatic effect function is increased when there is no operation (acceptance effect) within the reception period. At this time, the rate at which the automatic performance function functions may be 100%.

  According to such a configuration, the fact that a specific operation-related effect is executed before the effect acceptance period occurs itself also functions as an effect suggesting that the above-described automatic effect function is highly functional. As a result, it is possible to more suitably improve the game entertainment when a specific operation-related effect is executed.

  In addition, as described above, in a specific operation-related effect, there is an operation opportunity for the sword decorative body 5001 as compared to a case where an operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410 as the effect result. In the case where it is shown that it is given, it is set so that the degree of expectation that the jackpot symbol will appear due to the symbol variation in the execution state is higher. However, in the automatic button effect state, the operation button 410 has a ratio that the above-described automatic effect function functions when there is no operation (effect reception) within an effect reception period that occurs in response to a specific operation-related effect. On the other hand, it is more desirable to set so that the same ratio is obtained when it is indicated that an operation opportunity is given and when an operation opportunity is indicated for the sword ornament 5001.

  According to such a configuration, an effect situation with a relatively low expectation (implying that an operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410) appears as an effect result of a specific operation-related effect. However, since the ratio of the above-described automatic performance function is not changed by this (the performance result of the specific operation-related performance), the expectation for the above-mentioned automatic performance function to function It becomes possible to maintain suitably. In this way, the game entertainment can be enhanced by paralleling two different effects (specific operation-related effects, suggestion of expectation by the automatic effect function) that are not affected by each other's effects.

  Hereinafter, specific examples of effects in which the degree of expectation is suggested by such an automatic effect function will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 262 (a) shows that in the automatic button effect state, the number of holds is 3, and the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is displayed on the effect display device 1600 with a specific effect pattern according to the result of the jackpot determination. This shows the performance status being performed. As shown in the figure, during the period controlled to the automatic button effect state, a display indicating that the automatic button effect state is controlled in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (here, “auto button "Setting in progress" appears continuously.

  FIG. 262 (b) shows an effect situation in which a specific effect acceptance period for the operation button 410 has occurred during the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 262 (a). As shown in the figure, in a specific effect reception period, a button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410 is displayed in the display area, and an instruction display prompting an operation on the operation button 410 (here, “press” ”And a bar display indicating the remaining time of the specific production reception period). At this time, the operation button 410 to be given an operation opportunity is in a light emitting state, and this also prompts the operation on the operation button 410.

  Here, assuming that an operation on the operation button 410 is accepted within the specific effect acceptance period shown in FIG. 262 (b), the specific decorative member SDY (a glimpse) as the post-operation effect corresponding to the effect acceptance. Etc.) and a plurality of modes with different expectations in the display area (for example, “chance!” With a relatively low expectation and “hot heat!” With a relatively high expectation). Either one will be displayed. At this time, the automatic button effect state is canceled and returned to the normal effect state, and the specific effect reception period is ended when the effect is received without using the remaining time.

  On the other hand, in the production state shown in FIG. 262 (b), when no operation is performed on the operation button 410 within a specific production reception period (when production reception does not occur), the ratio is 60%. Thus, the automatic production function described above does not function, and the automatic production function described above functions at a rate of 40%.

  That is, when the above-described automatic performance function does not function at a rate of 60%, as shown in FIG. 262 (c), the operation for the operation button 410 is not accepted within the specific production reception period. As long as the production reception is performed, the post-operation production that should have occurred is not executed. Then, the production progresses in a form in which a reach state is formed a predetermined time after a specific production reception period occurs.

  On the other hand, when the above-described automatic effect function functions at a rate of 40%, as shown in FIG. 262 (d), the operation button 410 is not operated within a specific effect acceptance period. The post-operation effect having the same content as when the operation was performed and the effect was received within a specific effect reception period is executed. In other words, as described above, in the post-operation effect generated by the reception of the effect within the specific effect reception period, the specific decorative member SDY (such as a glimpse) is effected and the degree of expectation is different in the display area. One of multiple modes (for example, “Chance!” Or “Intense heat!”) Is displayed, but a post-operation effect occurs in response to an operation within a specific effect reception period. In both cases, the mode displayed in the display region is the same in both cases where the post-operation effect occurs due to the function of the automatic effect function. Then, as shown in FIG. 262 (e), the production progresses in a form in which a reach state is formed a predetermined time after the specific production reception period occurs.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, the specific production reception period is generated as the “production reception period in which the above-described automatic production function functions” or “the above-described automatic production function”. Is determined (selected) based on the result of jackpot determination when executing the symbol variation, and as a result, 60% in the specific effect reception period. The above-described automatic performance function does not function at a rate of 40%, and the above-described automatic performance function functions at a rate of 40%. For example, when a big win is won as a result of the big hit determination, the selection table for winning is referred to, and based on the distribution ratio in the selection table for the corresponding selection, “the above-mentioned production reception function that the automatic production function functions” Period "or" production reception period during which the above-mentioned automatic performance function does not function "is generated, and when a big hit is determined as a result of the big hit determination, the selection table for the loss is referred to, Based on the distribution ratio in the selection table, an “effect reception period in which the above-described automatic effect function functions” or an “effect reception period in which the above-described automatic effect function does not function” is generated. As a result, the automatic production function described above does not function at a rate of 60% during a specific production reception period, and the automatic production function functions at a rate of 40%.

  Moreover, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, when the specific production reception period is generated as the “production reception period in which the automatic production function described above functions”, The period of occurrence of the jackpot symbol is higher when the symbol variation is stopped than when the symbol variation is stopped than when it is generated as the “Performance reception period during which the automatic production function is not functioning” Is determined (selected) based on the result of the jackpot determination.

  According to such a configuration, when an effect is received, when an effect reception period in which it is determined that a high-expected aspect (such as “Intense heat!”) Appears as a post-operation effect, the automatic effect function functions. When the production reception period occurs, it is determined that a mode of low expectation (such as “chance!”) Will appear as a post-operation production. The rate at which functions work is relatively low. Therefore, when the production reception period for the operation button 410 occurs in the automatic button production state, whether or not the automatic production function functions when the operation button 410 is not intentionally operated within the production reception period. By confirming, it is possible to grasp the degree of expectation as to whether a jackpot symbol appears due to the symbol variation in the execution state. In other words, in this case, in the automatic button effect state, it is impossible to confirm the post-operation effect itself that should have been confirmed as long as the effect is accepted (operation on the operation button 410) within the effect acceptance period. In the presence of a risk that could cause dramatic demerits, the novel directing effect of causing the player to exercise a direct selection such as “do not perform any operation on the operation button 410 within the period of receiving the production” As a result, it is expected that the game entertainment will be suitably maintained.

  However, as shown in FIG. 262 (d), even if the automatic presentation function functions when the operation button 410 is not operated during the presentation reception period, the post-operation presentation is expected. Low-level aspects (such as “chance!”) Can also appear, so even if the automatic production function is functioning, it is suggested that the degree of expectation is relatively high. Such stunning expectations (suggestions due to the functioning of the automatic performance function, suggestions based on the mode of post-operation effects) will realize a stunning performance, and it is possible to favorably maintain the gaming entertainment Expected.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 262 (c), even if the automatic production function does not function when the operation button 410 is not operated during the production reception period, the production reception is still accepted. In this case, there is a possibility that an aspect with high expectation appears in the post-operation effect that should have appeared, so that it is expected that the game entertainment will be suitably maintained. However, when the production situation shown in FIG. 262 (c) (the situation where the automatic production function does not function and the production after the operation does not appear) appears, the production situation shown in FIG. 262 (d) (the automatic production function). However, it is desirable that the degree of expectation be lower than when an appearance with a low degree of expectation appears as a post-operation effect.

  FIG. 263 and FIG. 264 show effects that the degree of expectation is suggested by the automatic effect function when an effect reception period corresponding to a specific operation-related effect (see FIGS. 241 to 261) occurs in the automatic button effect state. A specific example is shown.

  FIG. 263 (a) shows that in the automatic button effect state, the number of holds is 3, and the decorative display SZ (special symbol) is displayed on the effect display device 1600 with a specific effect pattern according to the result of the big hit determination. This shows the performance status being performed. Also in this example, as shown in the figure, during the period in which the automatic button effect state is controlled, the display indicating that the automatic button effect state is controlled in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (here, , “Auto button is being set”) appears continuously.

  FIG. 263 (b) shows a specific operation-related effect exemplified in FIGS. 243 to 246 during execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 263 (a). (Which may be a production) shows the production situation where production has started. That is, as described above, in the specific operation-related effects exemplified in FIGS. 243 to 246, an operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410 and an operation opportunity is given to the sword ornament 5001. A common display effect is performed, and while the common display effect is performed, it is concealed which of the operation buttons 410 and the sword decorative body 5001 is given an operation opportunity. . However, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of a specific operation-related effect, an effect state indicating that the operation button 410 should be operated appears as a first effect result having a relatively low degree of expectation, As a second performance result having a relatively high degree of expectation, a state of production indicating that the sword decorative body 5001 is in a state to be operated appears, so that the operation button 410 having a relatively low degree of expectation and a relatively high degree of expectation. Which of the high sword ornaments 5001 is given the operation opportunity is shown.

  FIG. 263 (c) indicates that, as a result of the specific operation-related effect shown in FIG. 263 (b) being performed, the operation button 410 should be operated as the first effect result having a relatively low expectation. An effect state indicating that the effect acceptance period for the operation button 410 has occurred is shown. In this production situation, as shown in the figure, a button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410 is displayed in the display area, and an instruction display prompting an operation on the operation button 410 (here, “press”). A character display and a bar display indicating the remaining time of a specific production reception period) appear. At this time, the operation button 410 to be given an operation opportunity is in a light emitting state, and this also prompts the operation on the operation button 410.

  Here, if an operation on the operation button 410 is received within the effect reception period shown in FIG. 263 (c), a specific decorative member SDY (such as a glimpse) is used as the post-operation effect according to the effect reception. Any one of a plurality of modes (for example, “chance!” Having a relatively low expectation degree or “hot heat!” Having a relatively high expectation degree) having a different expectation degree in the display area while performing a production operation. Will be displayed. At this time, the automatic button effect state is canceled and returned to the normal effect state, and the specific effect reception period is ended when the effect is received without using the remaining time.

  On the other hand, in the production state shown in FIG. 263 (c), when the operation button 410 is not operated within the production reception period (when production reception does not occur), the above-mentioned ratio is 20%. The automatic performance function is not functioning, and the automatic performance function described above is functioning at a rate of 80%.

  That is, in a specific operation-related effect (specific display effect), the player side becomes confused as to which of the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001 is activated, and as a result, an appropriate effect is received within the effect reception period. There may be a situation where the operation cannot be performed. Therefore, in the automatic button effect state, when an effect reception period corresponding to such a specific operation-related effect occurs (see FIG. 263 (c)), an effect that occurs without executing the specific operation-related effect. The effects within the symbol variation so that the ratio of the above-described automatic effect function is increased when there is no operation (effect reception) within the effect reception period compared to the reception period (see FIG. 262 (b)). It is possible to execute a process that is advanced. According to such a configuration, the operation button 410 and the sword decoration are suppressed while suppressing anxiety such as “an appropriate operation cannot be performed within the effect reception period and an effect corresponding to the operation may not appear”. It is possible to provide the interest about which of the bodies 5001 is activated through the specific operation-related effects. In order to obtain such an effect, it is not always necessary to provide a configuration that suggests the degree of expectation depending on whether or not the automatic performance function functions.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, during a period in which the automatic button effect state is controlled, an effect reception period corresponding to the specific operation-related effect (specific display effect) is executed. Until it is finished, as shown in the figure, the display (in this case, “Auto button high accuracy”) indicating that the ratio of functioning of the automatic performance function is high continues. To appear.

  In addition, when the above-mentioned automatic performance function does not function at a rate of 20%, as shown in FIG. 263 (d), it is assumed that the operation on the operation button 410 was not received in the production reception period. As long as the production reception is performed, the post-operation production that should have occurred is not executed. Then, the production progresses in a form in which a reach state is formed a predetermined time after a specific production reception period occurs. However, in the production situation shown in FIG. 263 (c), the above-described automatic production function does not function when the operation button 410 is not operated within the production reception period (when production reception does not occur). In the case of the production situation shown in FIG. 262 (b), when the operation on the operation button 410 is not performed within the production reception period (when the production reception does not occur), the automatic production function described above functions. It is desirable that the degree of expectation is higher than the case where it is not.

  In addition, when the above-described automatic performance function functions at a rate of 80%, as shown in FIG. The post-operation effect having the same content as when the operation was performed during the reception period and the effect was received is executed. In other words, as described above, in the post-operation effect generated by the reception of the effect within the specific effect reception period, the specific decorative member SDY (such as a glimpse) is effected and the degree of expectation is different in the display area. One of multiple modes (for example, “Chance!” Or “Intense heat!”) Is displayed, but a post-operation effect occurs in response to an operation within a specific effect reception period. In both cases, the mode displayed in the display region is the same in both cases where the post-operation effect occurs due to the function of the automatic effect function. Then, as shown in FIG. 263 (f), the production progresses in a form in which a reach state is formed a predetermined time after the specific production reception period occurs.

  On the other hand, FIG. 264 (g) shows a state in which the sword ornament 5001 should be operated as a second effect result having a relatively high expectation as a result of the specific operation-related effect shown in FIG. 263 (b). An effect state indicating that the effect is received appears and an effect reception period for the sword ornament 5001 is generated. In this production situation, as shown in the figure, a sword decoration image SYG corresponding to the sword decoration 5001 is displayed in the display area, and an instruction display prompting an operation on the sword decoration 5001 (here, “ A character display such as “Put a sword” and a bar display indicating the remaining time of a specific production reception period) appear. At this time, the operation button 410 to which the operation opportunity is given is in an operation state, which also prompts the operation on the operation button 410 and moves the sword ornament 5001 from the operation state to the original position. Is allowed to operate.

  Here, assuming that an operation for the sword ornament 5001 is received within the effect receiving period shown in FIG. 264 (g), an operation for the operation button 410 is received for the effect within the effect receiving period shown in FIG. 263 (c). The same post-operation effect as that performed is executed. However, when an operation for the sword decorative body 5001 is accepted within the effect acceptance period shown in FIG. 263 (g), an operation for the operation button 410 is accepted within the effect acceptance period shown in FIG. 263 (c). A mode with a high degree of expectation among a plurality of modes (for example, “chance!” With a relatively low degree of expectation and “hot heat!” With a relatively high degree of expectation) The rate of appearance in the display area is high. This percentage may be 100%. In addition, when an operation on the sword decorative body 5001 is accepted during the production reception period, the automatic button production state is canceled and returned to the normal production state, and the specific production reception period also consumes the remaining time. It is the same as the case of the production reception period shown in FIG.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the operation on the sword decorative body 5001 is not performed within the effect reception period in the effect state shown in FIG. 264 (g) (the effect reception did not occur). In the case), although the production situation shown in FIG. 263 (c) occurs, the reception of the production is generated in the production situation shown in FIG. As in the case of not doing so, the automatic production function described above does not function at a rate of 20%, and the automatic production function described above functions at a rate of 80%.

  According to such a configuration, as a result of performing a specific operation-related effect, an effect state (FIG. 263) indicating that the operation button 410 is in a state to be operated as a first effect result having a relatively low expectation. Even if (see (c)) appears, the ratio of the above-described automatic performance function to function is not changed by this (the performance result of the specific operation-related performance). The expectation that the function will function can be suitably maintained. In this way, two different effects (specific operation-related effects, suggesting the degree of expectation by the automatic effect function) that are not affected by each other's effect results in parallel, resulting in an unfavorable effect result on one side. It will be possible to suppress the decline in game entertainment at the time. However, in this case, in the production situation shown in FIG. 263 (c), when the operation on the operation button 410 is not performed within the production reception period (when the production reception does not occur), the automatic production function described above functions. In this case, in the production situation shown in FIG. 264 (g), when the operation on the sword decorative body 5001 is not performed within the production reception period (when the production reception does not occur), the automatic production function described above is performed. Expectation will be lower than when it works.

  If the automatic production function described above does not function at a rate of 20%, as shown in FIG. 264 (h), it is assumed that the operation for the sword decorative body 5001 was not accepted within the production reception period. The post-operation effect that would have been generated is not executed as long as the effect is accepted. Then, the production progresses in a form in which a reach state is formed a predetermined time after a specific production reception period occurs. However, in the production situation shown in FIG. 264 (g), when the operation on the sword ornament 5001 is not performed within the production reception period (when the production reception does not occur), the automatic production function described above functions. Even in the case where there is not, the automatic production function described above is performed when the operation button 410 is not operated within the production reception period in the production situation shown in FIG. 262 (b) (when production reception does not occur). It is desirable that the degree of expectation is higher than when it does not function.

  Further, when the above-described automatic performance function functions at a rate of 80%, as shown in FIG. 264 (i), even though no operation is performed on the sword ornament 5001 within the performance reception period, The post-operation effect having the same content as when the operation was performed and the effect was received within the effect reception period is executed. In other words, as described above, in the post-operation effect generated by the reception of the effect within the specific effect reception period, the specific decorative member SDY (such as a glimpse) is effected and the degree of expectation is different in the display area. One of multiple modes (for example, “Chance!” Or “Intense!”) Is displayed, but a post-operation effect occurs in response to an operation within the effect acceptance period In both cases where the post-operation effect occurs due to the functioning of the automatic effect function, the modes displayed in the display area are the same. Then, as shown in FIG. 264 (j), the production progresses in a form in which a reach state is formed after a predetermined time after the production reception period corresponding to the specific operation-related production occurs.

  It should be noted that an effect reception period (see FIGS. 263 (c) and 264 (g)) corresponding to a specific operation-related effect is generated as an “effect reception period in which the above-described automatic effect function functions” or “ As in the case of an effect reception period (see FIG. 262 (b)) that occurs without the execution of a specific operation-related effect, it is also generated as “the effect reception period during which the automatic effect function is not functioning”. At the time of execution, the decision is made (selected) based on the result of the jackpot determination, and as a result, the above-described automatic performance function is allowed to function at a rate of 20% during the production reception period corresponding to the specific operation-related production. However, the automatic production function described above functions at a rate of 80%. For example, when a big win is won as a result of the big hit determination, the selection table for winning is referred to, and based on the distribution ratio in the selection table for the corresponding selection, “the above-mentioned production reception function that the automatic production function functions” Period "or" production reception period during which the above-mentioned automatic performance function does not function "is generated, and when a big hit is determined as a result of the big hit determination, the selection table for the loss is referred to, Based on the distribution ratio in the selection table, an “effect reception period in which the above-described automatic effect function functions” or an “effect reception period in which the above-described automatic effect function does not function” is generated. As a result, the automatic production function described above does not function at a rate of 20% during the production reception period corresponding to the specific operation-related production (see FIGS. 263 (c) and 264 (g)), and 80% The automatic production function described above functions at the rate of.

  Similarly, an effect reception period corresponding to a specific operation-related effect (see FIGS. 263 (c) and 264 (g)) is also generated as an “effect reception period in which the above-described automatic effect function functions”. In such a case, the ratio of the big hit symbol appearing when the symbol variation is stopped is higher than the case where it is generated as “the stage for accepting the stage where the above-mentioned automatic stage function does not function”. Which of these periods is to be generated is determined (selected) based on the result of the jackpot determination.

  The post-operation effects are generated in the case of an effect reception period corresponding to a specific operation-related effect (see FIGS. 263 (c) and 264 (g)), and the specific operation-related effect is not executed. You may be made to perform as an effect different in the case of an effect reception period (refer FIG. 262 (b)). However, even if it is executed as a different effect, it is desirable that any one of a plurality of modes with different expectations can appear in the post-operation effect. The degree of expectation may be 0% or 100%.

  Further, the sword decorative body 5001 used in the production example shown in FIGS. 262 to 264 may be the sword decorative body 5001 of the type shown in FIG. 222. In addition, in FIGS. 263 and 264, an example in which “the effect using the automatic effect function” is applied to the specific operation-related effects shown in FIGS. 243 to 246 is described. The “effect using the function” may be applied to any specific operation-related effects in FIGS. 241 to 261.

  Also, in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 263 and 264, when a specific operation-related effect is executed in a state where the automatic button effect state is not controlled, an effect reception period corresponding to the specific operation-related effect In the state where the setting operation to the automatic button effect state is not accepted, the “setting operation to the automatic button effect state is not accepted” state before the effect acceptance period occurs. It is desirable that it be generated at least when it is in the production situation shown in FIG. 263 (b) (the production situation in which a specific operation-related production is started), and this is continued until the production reception period. According to such a configuration, since the setting operation to the automatic button effect state is confirmed after confirming that the specific operation-related effect is started, the automatic button effect state is not accepted. It is now possible to provide “directing using the automatic directing function” for only those who are continuously playing games while maintaining the state of the game. It is possible to provide stunning value for what to do.

  In addition, an effect reception period (see FIG. 262 (b)) that occurs without executing a specific operation-related effect, or an effect reception period (FIG. 263 (c), FIG. 264 (g) corresponding to a specific operation-related effect. )) In the first display mode (for example, the blue button image BTG or the blue sword decoration image SYG) or the second display mode (for example, the green button image BTG or the green sword decoration). The image SYG) can appear, and when the second display mode appears, the “production reception period during which the above-described automatic performance function functions” is generated compared to when the first display mode appears It is desirable that a certain ratio be higher.

  In addition, an effect reception period (see FIG. 262 (b)) that occurs without executing a specific operation-related effect, or an effect reception period (FIG. 263 (c), FIG. 264 (g) corresponding to a specific operation-related effect. )), A third display mode (for example, a red button image BTG or a red sword decoration image SYG) can appear, and when the third display mode appears, the above-mentioned automatic production is performed. You may make it be in the state where the production | presentation reception period when a function functions is generating.

  According to these configurations, in the automatic button effect state, it is impossible to confirm the post-operation effect itself that should have been confirmed as long as the effect is accepted (operation on the operation button 410) within the effect acceptance period. In order to provide a judgment material as to whether or not to perform a stunning selection such as “Do not deliberately operate the operation button 410 within a staging reception period”. As a result, it is expected that the game entertainment will be suitably maintained.

  In addition, regardless of whether or not to apply “the effect using the automatic effect function”, the effect reception period corresponding to each “specific operation related effect” illustrated in FIGS. 241 to 261 and FIGS. 263 and 264. Is preferably generated as a period having a longer time than an effect reception period (such as FIG. 262 (b)) that occurs without executing a specific operation-related effect. That is, in a specific operation-related effect (specific display effect), the player side becomes confused as to which of the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001 is activated, and as a result, an appropriate effect is received within the effect reception period. Although it may happen that the operation cannot be performed, it is possible to prevent such a situation from occurring by giving a long time to the production reception period corresponding to the “specific operation-related production”. Is expected.

  In particular, in the example of FIG. 263 and FIG. 264, in the effect reception period corresponding to the “specific operation-related effect”, it is considered that the ratio at which the automatic effect function functions is set to be relatively high. For example, whether or not the automatic production function functions so that the production reception period is set to have a longer time than the production reception period that occurs without executing the “specific operation-related production”. It can be said that it is desirable to improve the entertainment interest of the game by maintaining the performance of the game for a longer time. In this case, the timing at which the automatic production function is activated comes when the first time has elapsed since the occurrence of the period in the production reception period that occurs without executing the “specific operation-related production”. On the other hand, in the production reception period corresponding to the “specific operation-related production”, the automatic production function is to arrive when a second time longer than the first time has elapsed since the occurrence of the period. It is important to maintain the performance of whether or not the function is longer.

  In addition, the period from the start to the end of the period for the stage reception period that occurs without the execution of the "specific operation-related stage" and the stage for reception period corresponding to the "specific operation-related stage" Even if it is made to differ, about the bar display which shows the remaining time of a production reception period, this is displayed in the same mode (bar display of the same length), and the gauge remaining amount is decreased. It is desirable to only vary the speed. That is, in this case, even if the production reception period corresponding to the “specific operation-related production” occurs, the duration continues for the same time as the production reception period that occurs without executing the “specific operation-related production”. As a result, it is possible to make it seem like it is, and coupled with the “fuzziness” of being continued for a longer period of time than expected, it is possible to maintain a stunning performance as to whether or not the automatic performance function works. To be able to.

  According to the example shown in FIGS. 262 to 264, the first effect reception period (the effect reception period for the specific operation means (operation button 410)) when controlled to the specific effect state (automatic button effect state). Even if the operation for the specific operation means (operation button 410) is not performed within the first effect reception period, the process by the first automatic effect means (the automatic effect function for the operation button 410) is not necessarily performed. Although it is not necessarily executed, in the effect reception period that occurs when a predetermined time elapses after the specific display effect (specific operation-related effect) is executed, the specific display effect is generated without being executed. The specific operation means (operation button 410) within the first production reception period than the one production reception period (production reception period for the specific operation means (operation button 410)) So that the ratio is performed is high (auto-effect function for the operation button 410) first automatic presentation means according to the process when the operation is not performed against.

  In this regard, in such an automatic button effect state, the ratio (“60% -40%”, “20% -80%”) of the automatic effect function varies depending on the type of the effect reception period as described above. When the set automatic button effect state is the “first automatic button effect state”, the distribution ratios (“50% -50%”, “10” differ depending on the type of the effect reception period. % -90% ") and the" second automatic button effect state "set differently, and when the effect acceptance period occurs, the automatic effect function is set to function regardless of the type as the period. The third automatic button effect state may be further prepared so that any one of these effect states can be set including the normal effect state where the automatic effect function does not function. Also, a normal performance state in which the automatic performance function does not function is not prepared, and a game is always performed in an automatic button production state (first automatic button production state, second automatic button production state, third automatic button production state). Or production may be executed.

  In addition, the effects shown in FIGS. 262 to 264 may be modified as follows. That is, when the automatic effect function functions in the first effect reception period shown in FIG. 262 (b), the timing when the first predetermined time elapses after the first effect reception period occurs (first The above-described automatic performance function functions at the timing within the production reception period) to end the first production reception period and generate a post-operation production corresponding thereto. However, if the automatic production function does not function within the first production reception period shown in FIG. 262 (b), the timing at which the first predetermined time has elapsed since the first production reception period occurred (the first production time) The above-mentioned automatic production function does not function at the timing of the first production reception period), and thereafter the first production reception period is terminated without performing the post-operation production (after that, the post-operation production is not executed). ). On the other hand, when the automatic effect function functions in the second effect acceptance period shown in FIG. 263 (c) or the third effect acceptance period shown in FIG. 264 (g), the second effect acceptance period or The above-described automatic effect function functions at the timing when the second predetermined time longer than the first predetermined time has elapsed since the occurrence of the third effect reception period, and the second effect reception period or the third effect reception period. The production reception period is ended and a post-operation production corresponding to the production reception period is generated. However, if the automatic effect function does not function within the second effect acceptance period shown in FIG. 263 (c) or the third effect acceptance period shown in FIG. 264 (g), the second effect acceptance period or The above-described automatic performance function does not function at the timing when the second predetermined time has elapsed since the occurrence of the third performance reception period, and then the second performance reception period or the third time without performing the post-operation performance. The production reception period is terminated (after that, the post-operation production is not executed).

  According to such a configuration, the automatic production function can function at a relatively early stage in the first production reception period where the ratio of the automatic production function to function is low. Even if it does not function, there will be enough time to allow the player to receive the production by his own operation until the end of the first production reception period. You can play games with heart. On the other hand, in the second production reception period or the third production reception period on the higher side where the automatic production function functions, the automatic production function can function only at a relatively late stage. Providing a game with a sense of tension even though the proportion of the automatic production function is high, because there will be little time left for the player to operate when it does not function Will be able to.

  In addition, about the said modification, in the 1st production reception period, when the above-mentioned automatic production | generation function functions at the timing (timing in the 1st production reception period) when 1st predetermined time passed, and when it does not function However, in the second presentation reception period and the third presentation reception period, the automatic presentation function described above always functions at the timing when the second predetermined time has elapsed (timing within the second presentation reception period). You may do it. Even in such a configuration, if the automatic production function can only function at a relatively late stage, and the automatic production function does not function by any chance (for some trouble), the time for the player to operate it Since it is considered that the player has a delusion that there is not much room left, a similar effect can be expected.

  Further, in addition to the production examples described above with reference to FIGS. 262 to 264, in other production examples, control to the automatic button production state (specific production state) is not necessarily performed by an operation by the player. For example, it may be controlled based on the result of the big hit determination, or may be always controlled as an automatic button effect state (specific effect state). Further, the automatic button effect state setting itself is not performed, and the automatic effect function may be always provided as a gaming machine that can function at a predetermined rate.

[Operation unification control when in automatic button production state]
As described above, in the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), an operation by the player within the effect acceptance period (the first specific effective period or the second specific effective period when the above-described example is applied). Even if is not performed, it is possible to execute a process (automatic rendering function) that causes the same change to the rendering as when the operation was performed. However, after controlling to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), the desire to return to the normal effect mode where the effect can be developed depending on the player's own operation (I want to end the automatic button effect state) Desire) may occur. Such a desire often occurs when an effect reception period in which an operation opportunity is given to a player occurs, but a limited time from the start of the effect reception period to the end thereof It is difficult to perform both the operation for ending the automatic button effect state and the operation for accepting the operation, and as a result, the operation opportunity may be lost. If there is, the entertainment interest may decrease.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, when an effect reception period related to a specific effect occurs when the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) is controlled, the effect reception is performed. After an operation corresponding to the process of finishing the automatic button effect state and receiving the effect, the operation means (operation button 410, sword ornament 5001, etc.) to be given the operation opportunity within the period only needs to be operated once. Production (processing that can cause a change in production) is performed (operation unification control in the automatic button production state). As a result, even if a desire to end the automatic button production state and advance the production depending on the player's own operation occurs within the production acceptance period, the loss of operation opportunity is avoided and the production mode is switched. Can be performed smoothly.

  As described above, when the automatic button effect state is set when the symbol variation is in the execution state, only the operation button 410 among the operation buttons 410 and the sword ornament 5001 is allowed to be set. .

  On the other hand, as described above, when the automatic button effect state is canceled when the symbol variation is in the execution state, the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001 are operated in the state where the effect reception period has not occurred. Only the button 410 is permitted to cancel the setting. On the other hand, in the state in which the production reception period is occurring, when an operation is performed on the operation means (the operation button 410 or the sword decorative body 5001 or the like) to which an operation opportunity is given during the production reception period. Then, a process for ending the automatic button effect state and a post-operation effect (a process that can cause a change in the effect) in accordance with the effect acceptance are performed (operation unification control). Therefore, even if an operation is performed on the operation button 410 in a state where an effect reception period for the sword decorative body 5001 is generated, the operation is not received, and the process for terminating the automatic button effect state is not executed.

  However, some players play games with their own game technique, such as, “While maintaining the automatic button effect state (without switching the effect mode), the player can perform the operation only when he / she wants to improve the effect”. It can be envisaged that some people wish to do that. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, the door frame 3 further includes special operation means (automatic mode continuation button) different from either the operation button 410 or the sword decorative body 5001. When the operation button 410 (or the sword decorative body 5001) is operated within the effect reception period related to the specific effect when the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) is controlled, the automatic button effect is generated. A process for ending the state (a specific effect state) and a process that can cause a change in the effect are performed (operation unification control in the automatic button effect state), but control to an automatic button effect state (a specific effect state) When the operation for the special operation means is performed within the period for receiving the performance related to the specific effect when Dynamic button effect state (specific effect state) may process causes a change in the effect depending on the manipulation process is not performed to terminate it is to be performed.

  According to such a configuration, when the automatic button effect state is ended and an operation game is to be actively performed thereafter, the operation button 410 (or the sword ornament 5001) is operated during the effect reception period. If you want to perform rare operations while maintaining the automatic button effect state (without switching the effect mode), the special operation means should be operated during the effect acceptance period. Thus, it is possible to realize a game desired by the player simply by properly using the operation means.

  Hereinafter, the operation unification control in the automatic button effect state will be described with reference to FIGS. 265 to 267.

  FIG. 265 (a) shows that in the automatic button effect state, the number of holdings is 1, and the decorative display SZ (special symbol) is displayed on the effect display device 1600 with a specific effect pattern according to the result of the jackpot determination. This shows a state in which an effect reception period for receiving a pressing operation of the operation button 410 has occurred under the reach state being formed. As shown in the figure, during the period controlled to the automatic button effect state, a display indicating that the automatic button effect state is controlled in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (here, “auto button "Setting in progress" appears continuously.

  Also, as shown in the figure, during this presentation reception period, the button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410 is displayed in the display area, and an instruction display for prompting the operation on the operation button 410 (here, the lower display) An arrow display in the direction and a bar display indicating the remaining time of the presentation reception period) appear. At this time, the operation button 410 to be given an operation opportunity is in a light emitting state, and this also prompts the operation on the operation button 410. However, in actuality, not only the operation button 410 in the light emitting state but also a special operation means (a button described as “PUSH” in the drawing) 1410 in which no change occurs is allowed to be operated.

  265 (b) to (d) show that the operation button 410 is not operated within the effect reception period generated in FIG. 265 (a), but the above-described automatic effect function functions, and the effect reception period. It shows a state in which the post-operation effect having the same content as when the operation is performed and the effect is accepted is executed. When the above-described automatic performance function is activated, the production reception period generated in FIG. 265 (a) is terminated, and the operation opportunity for the operation button 410 and special operation means (“PUSH” in the figure are described). Button) 1410 will be lost.

  That is, in the post-operation production according to this production example, staged production progress appears, and any production results in a plurality of modes (FIGS. 265 (c) and 265 (d)) with different expectations are obtained. Even if the final appearance is determined at the start of symbol variation (determined based on the result of the jackpot determination), first, as shown in FIG. 265 (b), a specific effect image (here, an explosion) To display the smoke image. Then, when the production progresses to a production result having a relatively low expectation after this, as shown in FIG. 265 (c), a specific production image (here, an explosion) shown in FIG. 265 (b). As the smoke image by) gradually disappears, an effect image (in this case, “Okichi” fortune) that suggests a relatively low expectation result will be displayed. When the production progresses to a high production result, as shown in FIG. 265 (d), the specific production image (here, the smoke image due to the explosion) shown in FIG. 265 (b) gradually disappears. In the course of this, an effect image (here, “Nakakichi” fortune) that indicates a relatively high expectation effect result is displayed.

  Then, the flow of the effects shown in FIGS. 265 (a) to (d) appears as a basic effect progress when the effect acceptance period occurs in the automatic button effect state, and the above-described automatic effect function Even after the post-operation effect (FIGS. 265 (b) to 265 (d)) is executed, the automatic button effect state is maintained without being terminated unless the player performs an operation. .

  However, as described above, after being controlled to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), the desire to return to the normal effect mode in which the effect can be developed depending on the player's own operation (the automatic button effect state is A desire to end) may arise. Such a desire often occurs when an effect reception period in which an operation opportunity is given to a player occurs, but a limited time from the start of the effect reception period to the end thereof It is difficult to perform both the operation for ending the automatic button effect state and the operation for accepting the operation, and as a result, the operation opportunity may be lost. If there is, the entertainment interest may decrease.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, when an operation is performed on the operation button 410 within the effect reception period generated in FIG. 265 (a), it is detected that the operation has occurred. Based on the fact that the operation button 410 is positioned at the operation position, a process for terminating the automatic button effect state and a post-operation effect corresponding to the effect reception are performed (automatically). Operation unification control in the button production state). It should be noted that at the time when the operation on the operation button 410 is accepted for the production, the production acceptance period generated in FIG. 265 (a) is ended, the above-described automatic production function cannot be performed, and the special operation means ( The operation opportunity for the button 1410 (“PUSH” in the drawing) is also lost.

  Even when an operation is performed on the operation button 410 within the production reception period generated in FIG. 265 (a), as shown in FIG. 266 (e), the operation is performed within the production reception period and the production reception is performed. First, a specific effect image (here, a smoke image due to an explosion) is displayed as a post-operation effect corresponding to the fact. After that, when the production progresses to the production result having a relatively low expectation, as shown in FIG. 266 (f), the specific production image (here, the explosion) shown in FIG. 266 (e). As the smoke image by) gradually disappears, an effect image (in this case, “Okichi” fortune) that suggests a relatively low expectation result will be displayed. When the production progresses to a high production result, as shown in FIG. 266 (g), the specific production image (here, the smoke image due to the explosion) shown in FIG. 266 (e) gradually disappears. In the course of this, an effect image (here, “Nakakichi” fortune) that indicates a relatively high expectation effect result is displayed.

  However, when an operation is performed on the operation button 410 within the effect reception period generated in FIG. 265 (a), a process for ending the automatic button effect state based on the operation is also performed. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 266 (e) to 266 (g), after the operation for the operation button 410 is accepted, the automatic button effect state is controlled in the display area of the effect display device 1600. The display (in this example, “auto button is being set”) is not displayed. Note that in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the operation button 410 is operated within the effect reception period generated in FIG. 265 (a), the process of ending the automatic button effect state is executed. A suggestion display (here, “auto button release”) appears (see FIG. 266 (e)).

  Further, as described above, in the effect reception period generated in FIG. 265 (a), not only the operation button 410 in the light emitting state but also special operation means (“PUSH” in the figure) in which no change has occurred is described. Button) 1410 is allowed to be operated. And this special operation means (button indicated as “PUSH” in the drawing) 1410 “operates itself only when desired while maintaining the automatic button effect state (without causing the effect mode to be switched). As described above, it is prepared in order to make possible a tricky game technique such as “progressing the production in the future”.

  Therefore, even when an operation is performed on the special operation means (button indicated as “PUSH” in the drawing) 1410 within the effect receiving period generated in FIG. 265 (a), as shown in FIG. 267 (h). In addition, a specific effect image (here, a smoke image due to an explosion) is first displayed as a post-operation effect in response to the operation being performed during the effect reception period. After that, when the production progresses to a production result with relatively low expectation, as shown in FIG. 267 (i), the specific production image shown in FIG. 267 (h) (here, explosion) As the smoke image by) gradually disappears, an effect image (in this case, “Okichi” fortune) that suggests a relatively low expectation result will be displayed. When the production progresses to a higher production result, as shown in FIG. 267 (j), the specific production image (here, the smoke image due to the explosion) shown in FIG. 267 (h) gradually disappears. In the course of this, an effect image (here, “Nakakichi” fortune) that indicates a relatively high expectation effect result is displayed. It should be noted that when the operation for the special operation means (button indicated as “PUSH” in the drawing) 1410 is accepted, the effect reception period generated in FIG. The function cannot be performed, and the operation opportunity for the operation button 410 is lost.

  However, when an operation is performed on the special operation means (button indicated as “PUSH” in the drawing) 1410 within the effect reception period generated in FIG. 265 (a), the automatic button effect state is based on the operation. The process of ending is not performed at the same time. Accordingly, as shown in FIGS. 267 (h) to 267 (j), it is indicated that the automatic button effect state is controlled in the display area of the effect display device 1600 even after the effect on the operation button 410 is accepted. The display (in this case, “auto button is being set”) is continuously displayed.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, the special operation means (button indicated as “PUSH” in the drawing) 1410 within the effect reception period generated in FIG. A special case that cannot appear when an operation is performed, when the above-described automatic performance function functions (FIG. 265 (b)), or when an operation is performed on the operation button 410 (FIG. 266 (e)). The production can appear. Such a special effect may be an effect using a movable body, a lamp, or the like, but in the effect example shown in FIG. 267 (j), the above-described automatic effect function functions in the effect display device 1600. In addition to the effect image (post-operation effect) that appears when the operation button 410 is operated (FIG. 265 (b)) or when the operation button 410 is operated (FIG. 266 (e)), a sparkling effect display is additionally displayed. I try to do it. Instead of the sparkling effect display, an effect using a movable body or a lamp may be additionally performed.

  According to such a configuration, the content of the change in the effect that occurs when the operation button 410 is operated during the effect receiving period related to the fortune effect when the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) is controlled. When an automatic button effect state (a specific effect state) is being controlled, an operation is performed on special operation means (button labeled “PUSH” in the drawing) 1410 during the effect reception period related to the fortune effect. The contents of the production changes that occur in some cases are made different from each other. In this case, when the above-mentioned special effect (here, a sparkling effect display) appears, “the operation for the operation means is performed and the post-operation effect corresponding to the effect reception appears, but the automatic button effect state is It can be recognized while enjoying the post-operation effect that “the setting is not canceled and this is continued”. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 267 (i), even when an effect image (here, “Yoshi” fortune) is displayed that suggests an effect result with relatively low expectation, A production (here, a sparkling effect display) can appear.

  Further, such a special effect (here, a sparkling effect display) is added to the post-operation effect described above at a predetermined rate based on the result of the big hit determination, and the special effect is displayed. When an effect appears additionally, it is desirable that the rate of appearance of a big hit symbol due to the symbol variation is higher than when the special effect does not appear. However, in this case, it is beneficial for the player to perform an operation not on the operation button 410 but on the special operation means (button indicated as “PUSH” in the drawing) 1410. There is a concern that the operation will not be performed. Therefore, a special effect (here, glittering) shines when an operation is performed on the special operation means (button indicated as “PUSH” in the drawing) 1410 within the effect reception period generated in FIG. 265 (a). If the effect display does not appear, any effect result appears by operating the operation button 410 within the effect reception period generated in FIG. 265 (a) or by the function of the automatic effect function described above. It is desirable that the rate at which the jackpot symbol appears due to the symbol variation is lower than in the case of the above.

  According to such a configuration, “the operation on the operation means is performed by the operation on the special operation means (button indicated as“ PUSH ”in the drawing)” 1410, and the post-operation effect corresponding to the effect reception appears. In order to create a state in which the automatic button effect state is not canceled and this is continued ”, there is a dramatic demerit such as“ it can be suggested that the rate of jackpot symbols appearing significantly due to symbol variation ” Therefore, it is expected that the game entertainment is suitably maintained by causing the player to exercise such a stunning selection.

  Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 267 (i), the above-described production demerits have occurred, although the same production mode as in the example shown in FIG. 266 (f) appears. Thus, it is possible to recognize that the ratio of appearance of the big hit symbol due to the symbol variation is lower than the examples shown in FIGS. 265 (c) and 266 (f). However, in the example shown in FIG. 267 (i), while making it possible to recognize that the degree of expectation is low, the production mode is shown in FIG. 265 (c) and FIG. 266 (f). By making it the same as the case, the third party who is not operating the special operation means (button indicated as “PUSH” in the figure) 1410 is in a production situation where the production selection has failed. As a result, it is expected to suppress a decrease in the entertainment interest of the game.

  Note that in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, no matter which production selection is made within the production reception period generated in FIG. 265 (a), FIG. 265 (b) and FIG. 266 ( e) As shown in FIG. 267 (h) or the like, a specific effect image (here, a smoke image due to explosion) is displayed. You may make it display in either the ratio with which the production | generation aspect (here Nakamichi's fortune) with high expectation appears, or the multiple aspect from which the ratio which a special production appears differs.

  In addition, even if any production selection is performed within the production reception period generated in FIG. 265 (a), this is omitted without displaying a specific production image, and production modes with different expectations. (Here, “Kiyoshi” or “Nakakichi” fortune) may appear directly as post-operation effects. However, in order to make it difficult for a third party to grasp that the production situation is present when the production situation (FIG. 267 (i)) in which the production selection has failed appears, production styles with different degrees of expectation ( Here, it is desirable to display a specific effect image (here, a smoke image due to an explosion) when any of “Kiyoshi” or “Nakakichi's fortune” appears as a post-operation effect.

  Also, an effect that suggests the degree of expectation can be performed even within the effect acceptance period that occurred in FIG. 265 (a), and this is used to determine whether or not to take the above-mentioned effect risk. May be.

  Further, the special operation means (button indicated as “PUSH” in the drawing) 1410 is not necessarily prepared as a dedicated operation means for continuing the state when in the automatic button effect state. Alternatively, other operating means already prepared may be used.

  In addition, in the production reception period that occurs in FIG. 265 (a), whether a period during which the operation on the operation button 410 can be production reception among a plurality of operation means (operation button 410, sword ornament 5001, etc.) occurs. Or, the above-described effect (specific operation-related effects (see FIGS. 241 to 261)) regarding whether or not there is a period during which an operation on another operation means (for example, a sword ornament 5001) can be accepted is performed. May occur as a result.

  Further, in the effect reception period in which an operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410, a first effect in which an operation opportunity for the special operation means (a button described as “PUSH” in the drawing) 1410 is also given. A reception period (see FIG. 265 (a)) and a second performance reception period in which an operation opportunity for special operation means (a button described as “PUSH” in the drawing) 1410 is not given are included. Good. In this case, when the first effect reception period (see FIG. 265 (a)) occurs, the above-described specific operation-related effects (see FIGS. 241 to 261) are performed more than when the second effect reception period occurs. It is desirable that the rate of appearance until the symbol variation is stopped is increased. According to such a configuration, the ratio at which the above-described specific operation-related effects (see FIGS. 241 to 261) appear depends on which of the first effect reception period and the second effect reception period occurs. It will function as a suggested performance.

[Stable side automatic production processing]
As described above, in the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), an operation by the player within the effect acceptance period (the first specific effective period or the second specific effective period when the above-described example is applied). Even if is not performed, it is possible to execute a process (automatic rendering function) that causes the same change to the rendering as when the operation was performed. However, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, a special effect such as “a plurality of operation means are allowed to receive effects, and different effects are executed depending on which operation means is operated”. The production reception period can be generated. Therefore, such a special effect reception period occurs when the automatic button effect state (a specific effect state) is being controlled, and any operation means is operated within the special effect reception period. If there is no operation, for which of the plurality of operation means the automatic rendering function is to be activated (which of the plurality of operation means causes the same change as when the rendering was accepted) Is a problem.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, a special effect such as “a plurality of operation means can be accepted and different effects are executed depending on which operation means is operated”. If there is a production reception period of, “whether there is a possibility that a production result with a higher expectation will appear” or “whether a production result with a lower expectation may appear” Based on the above, the process of enabling the automatic performance function for the operation means different from "the operation means on the side that can produce the production with the possibility that the production result with lower expectation may appear" (stable side automatic production Process).

  According to such a configuration, the production mode having the lowest expectation among the plurality of production modes that can occur when the production reception is made for any of the plurality of operation means within the special production reception period, Since it will not appear when the automatic production function is activated, the occurrence of a situation such as “the production mode with the lowest expectation appears by the automatic production function when you forget to operate” It can be preferably avoided.

  Hereinafter, the stable automatic production process in the automatic button production state will be described with reference to FIGS. 268 to 270.

  First, a description will be given of an effect example when a special effect reception period occurs when the automatic button effect state is not controlled and the normal effect state occurs. In FIG. 268 (a), in the normal effect state, the number of holds is 3 and the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is displayed on the effect display device 1600 in a specific effect pattern according to the result of the jackpot determination. The player can select either the pressing operation of the operation button 410 or the sword operation of the sword decorative body 5001 under the reach state being formed. An effect state in which an effect display suggesting that a special effect acceptance period starts is shown. In this production situation, although both the production reception for the operation button 410 and the production reception for the sword decorative body 5001 are not yet effective, the operation button 410 and the sword have been used since that situation. The operation button 410 is in a light emitting state and the sword decorative body 5001 is moved to the extracted position in order to prompt the user to determine which of the decorative body 5001 should be operated. In the effect display device 1600, a button image BTG and a sword decoration image SYG are displayed.

  FIG. 268 (b) shows that the player receives either a special effect reception period suggested by the effect display shown in FIG. 268 (a) (press operation of the operation button 410 or sword operation of the sword ornament 5001). The production situation in which the production reception period (which can be selected by the user) has occurred is shown. In this effect situation, at least a part of the effect display (here, button image BTG, sword decoration image SYG) in the effect display device 1600 that has appeared since the effect situation shown in FIG. While the state of 410 and the sword decorative body 5001 is maintained, an instruction display for prompting an operation on either the operation button 410 or the sword decorative body 5001 (here, the button image BTG or the sword decorative image SYG is displayed). Correspondingly, a downward arrow and a bar display indicating the remaining time of the special production reception period are displayed.

  Here, in the effect situation shown in FIG. 268 (b), a character image such as “stable” is displayed corresponding to the button image BTG, and a character image such as “disturbance” is displayed corresponding to the sword decoration image SYG. Has been. However, instead of this, the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG may not be displayed, and a dedicated mark may be displayed when both of the operation means are capable of receiving the effects.

  That is, in this effect example, when an effect is received for the operation button 410 within the special effect reception period shown in FIG. 268 (b), the effect reception for the operation button 410 is first performed as an effect after the button operation. After it is displayed that it has been done (FIG. 268 (c)), as the production result suggesting that the smaller the number of defeated, the lower the degree of expectation and the higher the number of defeated, the higher the degree of expectation is. And an effect (FIG. 268 (d), FIG. 268 (e)) for causing either “100 body defeat” to appear based on the result of the jackpot determination is executed. For example, in the post-button operation effect when winning a big hit, the effect mode shown in FIG. 268 (d) appears at a rate of “40%”, and in FIG. 268 (e) at a rate of “60%”. As shown in FIG. 268 (d), the effect mode shown in FIG. 268 (d) appears at the rate of “60%” and the rate of “40%”. Thus, it is possible to make the production mode shown in FIG. 268 (e) appear.

  On the other hand, when an effect is received for the sword decorative body 5001 within a special effect reception period, first, it is displayed that an effect is received for the sword decorative body 5001 as an effect after the sword side operation ( FIG. 269 (f)), “1 body defeat”, “100 body defeat”, “ An effect (FIGS. 269 (g) to 269 (i)) for causing any of “777 body defeat” to appear based on the result of the big hit determination is executed. For example, in the post-sword-side operation effect when winning a big hit, the effect mode shown in FIG. 269 (g) appears at a rate of “10%” and the rate of “50%” in FIG. 269 (h). The production mode shown in FIG. 269 (i) appears at the rate of “40%”, and the rate of “40%” in the post-sword-side operation production when the jackpot is lost. 269 (g) appears, the effect shown in FIG. 269 (h) appears at the rate of “50%”, and the effect shown in FIG. 269 (i) at the rate of “0%”. It is possible for an aspect to appear.

  In the production examples shown in FIGS. 268 to 270, the production mode with a small number of defeats regardless of whether the production after the button side operation or the production after the sword side operation is performed. Has a lower degree of expectation than a production mode with a large number of defeats. In addition, when the number of defeats is the same production mode (for example, the production mode shown in FIG. 268 (e), the production mode shown in FIG. 269 (h), or the production mode shown in FIG. 270 (e) described later). Expectation may be different, but it should be the same.

  In such a configuration, a special production reception period allowing the production reception is generated for both the operation button 410 (first operation means) and the sword ornament 5001 (second operation means), and the special production reception period is generated. Because it is possible to generate different operation effects (effects after button side operation, effects after sword side operation) depending on the type of operation means on the side operated within the production reception period of As a result, the monotonous performance can be improved, and the game entertainment can be improved.

  In particular, the same expectation is not shown regardless of which one of the operation button 410 (first operation means) and the sword ornament 5001 (second operation means) is operated, but the sword ornament 5001 (first Only when the second operation means) is operated, a specific effect mode (here, shown in FIG. 269 (g)) that suggests that it is difficult for the jackpot symbol to appear due to the symbol variation (the symbol variation in the execution state). "I want to see the effect on the sword decorative body 5001 (second operation means) side (effect after the sword operation) until such a risk is taken. It will be expected to maintain amusement interest by giving conflicts and stimuli.

  In this case, the button-side post-operation effect is “a specific effect mode with the lowest expectation” among the effect modes that appear when either the operation button 410 or the sword decorative body 5001 is operated within the special effect reception period. In this case, the appearance risk of “one-body defeat” shown in FIG. 269 (g) is eliminated, and the post-operation effect functions relatively stably. In addition, the post-sword-side operation effect is “a specific effect mode with the lowest expectation (here) among the effect modes that appear when either the operation button 410 or the sword decorative body 5001 is operated within a special effect reception period. Then, it will function as a post-operation effect relatively including disturbance, in the sense that it has the appearance risk of “the appearance mode of“ one body defeat ”” shown in FIG. 269 (g).

  Furthermore, in this production example, the production situation shown in FIG. 268 (a) appears until the production situation shown in FIG. 268 (b) appears (in this special production reception period). The production mode shown in FIG. 268 (a-b) can be made to appear based on the result of the jackpot determination. When the production mode appears, the production mode does not appear. When the operation on the sword decorative body 5001 is performed, the ratio of occurrence of “a specific production mode with the lowest expectation (here, a production mode of“ one body defeat ”shown in FIG. 269 (g)”) is low. The production progress can be executed in this way. This percentage may be 0%.

  According to such a configuration, until the risk that the “specific production mode with the lowest degree of expectation (here, the production mode of“ one body defeat ”shown in FIG. 269 (g)”) may appear, Since it becomes possible to use the effect result of whether or not the effect mode shown in FIGS. 268 (a-b) appears as a material for determining whether to operate the sword ornament 5001 instead of the operation button 410. It is expected that the game entertainment will be suitably improved when the special production reception period shown in FIG. 268 (b) occurs.

  In the normal production state, when the special production reception period shown in FIG. 268 (b) has occurred, no production production is accepted within the special production reception period. The function does not function, and the effect progresses without executing both the effect after the button side operation and the effect after the sword side operation.

  On the other hand, FIGS. 270 (a) to 270 (e) show examples of effects when such a special effect reception period occurs when the automatic button effect state is controlled.

  As shown in FIG. 270 (a), FIG. 270 (a-b), and FIG. 270 (b), even if it is controlled to the automatic button effect state, it is controlled to the automatic button effect state. An effect display suggesting that a special effect acceptance period is started appears, except that a display indicating this (in this case, “auto button is being set”) appears continuously in the effect display device 1600. Until the end of the special performance reception period until the end of the special performance reception period (FIGS. 268 (a), 268 (ab), and 268 (b)). Progress.

  However, as described above, when neither the operation button 410 nor the sword decorative body 5001 is operated within the special production reception period shown in FIG. 270 (b), “the production result with lower expectation (here, the figure) 269 (g), the automatic rendering function is enabled for the operation button 410 that is different from the sword ornament 5001 on the side that can generate the rendering that may appear. The process to be performed (stable side automatic production process) can be executed.

  That is, in this case, the automatic effect function for the operation button 410 is activated even though neither the operation button 410 nor the sword ornament 5001 is operated within the special effect reception period shown in FIG. 270 (b). As a result, the same change as that in the case where the operation for the operation button 410 is accepted within the special effect acceptance period is caused to the effect. Accordingly, as the post-button side effect, first, it is displayed that the effect has been accepted for the operation button 410 (FIG. 270 (c)), and the smaller the number of defeats, the lower the degree of expectation and the greater the number defeated. As an effect result that indicates that the degree of expectation is higher, an effect that causes either “50 defeats” or “100 defeats” to appear based on the result of the jackpot determination (FIG. 270 (d), FIG. 270 (e)) ) Will be executed.

  According to such a configuration, the expectation is the lowest among a plurality of effects that can occur when an effect is received for either the operation button 410 or the sword ornament 5001 within a special effect reception period. The production mode (in this case, the production mode of “one body defeat” shown in FIG. 269 (g)) cannot appear when the automatic production function is functioned. Thus, it is possible to suitably avoid the occurrence of a situation such as “the rendering mode having the lowest expectation appears by the automatic rendering function”.

  Here, due to the convenience of the automatic performance function, there is a concern that the player will not operate either the operation button 410 or the sword ornament 5001 to maintain the automatic button performance state. However, as described above, during the special production reception period, the production mode shown in FIGS. 270 (ab) can appear based on the result of the jackpot determination, and when the production mode appears. , The sword-side post-operation effect while the ratio of occurrence of the “low-expected specific effect mode (here, the“ 1 body defeat ”effect mode shown in FIG. 269 (g)”) is low. Since an opportunity to enjoy the game is given, it is expected that the sword decorative body 5001 is preferably urged to be operated.

  In the example of production shown in FIGS. 268 to 270, a special period in which an operation for the operation button 410 is accepted for production and a period for which the operation for the sword ornament 5001 is produced is simultaneously generated and ended simultaneously. Although control is performed as the production reception period, it is not always necessary to generate these periods simultaneously. For example, if the period during which the operation on the operation button 410 is accepted for production and the period during which the operation for the sword ornament 5001 is accepted for production are overlapped in some of those periods, the periods are separated. It may be generated at the timing.

  Further, when a specific effect pattern is selected from the plurality of effect patterns based on the result of the big hit determination, “a plurality of operation means are allowed to receive effects, and different effects depend on which operation means is operated. The special production reception period such as “executed” may be generated without fail. In other words, in this case, at a relatively early stage from when the symbol variation is started with a specific effect pattern, “Which of the plurality of operation means should be operated within the special effect reception period, and also a special effect reception period occurs. You should be able to come up with a stunning strategy that presupposes that a special production reception period will occur, such as `` Do you need to set the automatic button production state before you do? '' . For example, it will be possible to confirm "how much notice effect was performed in what kind of effect (expected degree)" before the special effect acceptance period occurs. The result can be used as a judgment material for “which of a plurality of operation means should be operated within the special production reception period”, and the game until the special production reception period occurs This also makes it possible to maintain this favorably.

  However, even when a specific production pattern is selected, when there is an operation on the operation button 410 within a special production reception period, or when there is an operation on the sword ornament 5001, an automatic production function is further provided. Which direction of appearance will appear when the function is activated is determined by lottery (determination) based on the result of the big hit determination at the start of symbol variation or when the reception of an effect occurs (or when the automatic effect function is functioning). It is desirable to do so.

  In addition, even if there is a production situation in which a special production reception period has not yet occurred, the player can select either the pressing operation of the operation button 410 or the sword operation of the sword ornament 5001. When there is an effect state in which an effect display (FIG. 268 (a), FIG. 270 (a)) suggesting that a special effect acceptance period is started, setting to the automatic button effect state is allowed. It is desirable to control this as a prohibition period so as not to occur. According to such a configuration, it is suggested that “a special production reception period in which the player side can select either the pressing operation of the operation button 410 or the sword operation of the sword ornament 5001 is started. Even if you try to perform the setting operation to the automatic button effect state after confirming that the `` effect display '' has started, it will not be accepted, so you will continue to play games while maintaining the automatic button effect state It is now possible to provide “stable automatic production processing when in the automatic button production state” only for those who are in the state, and the production for continuously playing the game while maintaining the automatic button production state Will be able to provide value.

  Further, in the production examples shown in FIGS. 268 to 270, the “specific production mode with the lowest expectation (FIG. 269 (g)” that can appear when the post-sword side operation is performed is displayed on the button side operation. Although it was decided to execute as a unique production mode that is different from any of the production modes that can appear when the post-production is performed, for the “specific production mode with the lowest expectation”, the post-button-side operation production is It may be executed in the same manner as the performance mode that can appear when it is performed (for example, “50 body defeat” shown in FIG. 268 (d)). Even if “the specific production mode with the lowest expectation” appears as a result of the action, the same mode as the production mode that can appear when the post-button operation is performed appears for the purpose of viewing. Operation buttons It becomes difficult for a third party who does not know which of 410 and sword decorative body 5001 has been operated to recognize that there is a remarkably low performance situation. In this case, in the effect display device 1600, only one effect state such as “a specific effect mode is displayed based on the effect reception” appears. Despite this, depending on whether the production status is caused by an operation on the operation button 410 or an operation on the sword ornament 5001, the design variation (the design variation in the execution state) ), The expectation level that the big hit symbol will appear will be different, so it will be even more interesting as an effect using multiple operation means It becomes possible to.

  However, this is the case where the “specific effect mode having the lowest expectation” in the post-sword operation effect is executed as the same mode as the effect mode that can appear even when the post-button operation effect is performed. However, with regard to the “highest expectation special effect mode” in the post-sword operation, a unique effect mode (for example, different from any of the effect modes that can appear when the post-button operation is performed) (“777 body defeat” shown in FIG. 269 (i)) It is desirable to execute this as such. Appears, it is difficult to recognize that the third party who does not know which one of the operation button 410 and the sword decorative body 5001 has been operated is in a production situation in which the degree of expectation is extremely low. When a “special performance mode with the highest expectation” appears in the post-sword side operation, even a third party who does not know which of the operation button 410 or the sword ornament 5001 has been operated. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that there is a production situation where the degree of expectation is extremely high, so the player can take the above risks without worrying about the eyes of a third party. It is possible to enjoy the effect on the sword decorative body 5001 (second operation means) side (the effect after the sword side operation). Anything can be used as long as it is recognizable. For example, uniqueness among other effects may be ensured by executing a movable body operation or lamp light emission.

  In addition, in the production examples shown in FIGS. 268 to 270, as a result of performing the post-sword side operations (FIGS. 269 (f) to 269 (i)), the “777 body defeat” production mode (FIG. 269 ( i)) can appear, and when the "777 body defeat" effect mode (FIG. 269 (i)) appears, any other effect mode (FIGS. 268 (d) and 268 (e)) 269 (g) and FIG. 269 (h)), the ratio of the big hit symbol appearing in the symbol variation (the symbol variation in the execution state) is higher. This percentage may be 100%. However, it is not always necessary that the “777 body defeat” effect mode (FIG. 269 (i)) appears. In this case, the effect mode shown in FIG. The appearance ratio of the production mode shown in FIG. 269 (h) is made higher than the appearance ratio of the production mode shown in FIG. 268 (e) by the amount that the expectation level of the production mode shown in (g) is lowered. It becomes.

  In addition, in the effects shown in FIGS. 268 to 270, effects after the button side operation (FIGS. 268 (c) to 268 (e)) and effects after the sword side operation (FIGS. 269 (f) to 269 (i)). ), A common performance mode (here, a “100 body defeat” performance mode) can appear, but a common performance mode should not appear. Also good. In addition, only the display change appears in the post-button-side operation, whereas in the post-sword-side operation, in addition to the display change, a movable body operation, lamp light emission, and the like may be executed. Further, the post-button-side operation and the sword-side post-operation may not be common as the content of the effect regarding the number of defeats, and the content itself may be executed as different effects.

  In the example of production shown in FIG. 268 to FIG. 270, first, for any of the operation buttons 410 and the sword ornament 5001 when the production is accepted, including when the production is accepted by the function of the automatic production function. Although the display (FIG. 268 (c), FIG. 269 (f), FIG. 270 (c)) that suggests whether or not the production has been accepted appears here, the expectation is suggested without causing the display to appear. An effect that causes an effect result to appear may be executed.

  In addition, in the production examples shown in FIGS. 268 to 270, as a result of performing the post-sword side operations (FIGS. 269 (f) to 269 (i)), the “777 body defeat” production mode (FIG. 269 ( When i)) appears, it is related to the specific operation described above than when any other production mode (FIG. 268 (d), FIG. 268 (e), FIG. 269 (g), FIG. 269 (h)) appears. The rate at which the effects (see FIGS. 241 to 261) appear before the symbol variation is stopped, and further, when the specific operation-related effects appear, the operation means (the sword decorative body) on the higher expectation side It is desirable to increase the proportion of operation opportunities given to 5001). According to such a configuration, in the production examples shown in FIGS. 268 to 270, it is possible to preferably prompt the user to perform an operation on the sword decorative body 5001 on the side where the production risk is high.

[Production reception process according to display type]
As described above, in the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), an operation by the player within the effect acceptance period (the first specific effective period or the second specific effective period when the above-described example is applied). Even if is not performed, it is possible to execute a process (automatic rendering function) that causes the same change to the rendering as when the operation was performed. However, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment,
The first display effect can be displayed within the effect reception period that permits the effect reception (operation) for the operation button 410, and the operation button 410 is operated while the first display effect is displayed. And a process of generating a first expected effect (post-operation effect that suggests the degree of expectation) based on the reception of the effect by the operation, and an effect reception that permits the effect reception (operation) to the operation button 410 The second display effect can be displayed within the period, and when the operation on the operation button 410 is performed while the second display effect is displayed, the second display effect is displayed based on the fact that the operation is accepted by the operation. It is possible to execute processing related to a plurality of different operation effects, such as processing to generate a second expected effect (post-operation effect that suggests the degree of expectation) different from the one expected effect Yes.

  In such a configuration, the type of effect as an expected effect (post-operation effect) that appears at the time of operation differs according to the display effect (first display effect, second display effect) displayed within the effect reception period. Therefore, it is possible not only to increase the game entertainment at the time of operation, but also to increase the game entertainment from the generation reception period to the operation.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, at least in the effect reception period that permits the effect reception (operation) to the operation button 410 when being controlled to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state). When an effect situation in which the first display effect is displayed or an effect situation in which the second display effect is displayed within an effect reception period in which an effect reception (operation) with respect to the operation button 410 is permitted appears, the effect reception is performed. Processing for generating the same expected effect (here, the first expected effect or the second expected effect) as when the operation button 410 is operated even if the operation button 410 is not operated within the period Can be executed.

  According to such a configuration, when the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) is controlled, the operation button 410 is operated when the effect state in which the first display effect is displayed within the effect acceptance period appears. The first display effect is executed regardless of whether or not the operation button 410 is operated when an effect situation in which the second display effect is displayed appears in the effect reception period. Regardless, the second display effect is executed. Therefore, in the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), even if either the first display effect or the second display effect is displayed within the effect receiving period, the user is worried about forgetting to operate. You will be able to enjoy the production without any problems.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, the first display effect can be displayed only when the effect reception period for generating the post-operation effect occurs. However, the second display effect can be displayed even when the effect reception period for generating the post-operation effect does not occur. And
An effect situation in which an effect reception period that is controlled to an automatic button effect state (a specific effect state) and allows an effect reception (operation) with respect to the operation button 410 is generated and the first display effect is displayed. When the operation on the operation button 410 is performed, a process for generating the first expected effect (post-operation effect) and a process for ending the automatic button effect state are performed (the effect shown in FIG. 271 described later). See progress),
An effect situation in which an effect reception period that is controlled to an automatic button effect state (a specific effect state), permits an effect reception (operation) with respect to the operation button 410, and the second display effect is displayed. When the operation on the operation button 410 is performed, the process of generating the second expected effect (post-operation effect) is performed, but the process of ending the automatic button effect state is not performed (shown in FIG. 272 described later). See Production Progress),
An effect that is controlled to an automatic button effect state (a specific effect state), does not generate an effect reception period that permits an effect reception (operation) for the operation button 410, and displays the second display effect. When an operation is performed on the operation button 410 in the situation, neither the process of generating the first expected effect (post-operation effect) nor the process of generating the second expected effect (post-operation effect) is performed, and the automatic button The process of ending the effect state is also not performed (refer to the effect progress shown in FIG. 273 described later),
An effect reception period that is controlled to an automatic button effect state (a specific effect state) and that allows an effect reception (operation) to the operation button 410 does not occur, and the first display effect and the second display effect When an operation is performed on the operation button 410 in an effect situation where none of these are displayed, a process for generating a first expected effect (post-operation effect) and a process for generating a second expected effect (post-operation effect) None of the above is performed, and the process of ending the automatic button effect state may be performed according to the effect status (effect reception process according to the display type).

  According to such a configuration, when the operation on the operation button 410 is performed when the first display effect appears and the second display effect does not appear, the first display effect appears. If the operation on the operation button 410 is performed when the second display effect appears, the type (first operation) as the expected effect (post-operation effect) corresponding to the operation (effect reception) The expected effect (post-operation effect) itself does not appear even if the operation is performed only when the second display effect appears, as well as making the first expectation effect and the second expectation effect different. There is a possibility that the process for terminating the automatic button effect state is not performed. Accordingly, diversity as an effect using the operation buttons 410 is ensured, and it is possible to suitably improve the game entertainment when the effect using the operation buttons 410 is performed.

  Hereinafter, the effect reception process according to the display type when in the automatic button effect state will be described with reference to FIGS. 271 to 275.

  FIG. 271 shows that the period of timing tb11 to tb13 (see FIG. 271 (a)) in the symbol variation execution period is controlled as “automatic button effect state”. The example of an effect when the 1st effect pattern which can be set as "the effect reception period which accepts" is performed is shown.

  In this first effect pattern, when the timing tb11 for generating the “effect reception period permitting the operation reception (operation) to the operation button 410” has arrived, as shown in FIG. A button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410 is displayed, and an instruction display for prompting an operation to the operation button 410 (here, a downward arrow display and a bar display indicating the remaining time of the production reception period) appears. (First display effect).

  If an operation for the operation button 410 is accepted at timing tb12 prior to the timing tb13, as shown in FIG. 271 (c), the symbol variation (in the execution state) based on the effect acceptance. A first post-operation effect (in the figure, “Nakakichi” fortune) is executed (first expected effect) that suggests the degree of expectation that the big hit symbol will appear in the symbol variation). At this time, the automatic button effect state is canceled based on the effect reception and returned to the normal effect state, and the effect reception period generated from the timing tb11 is also received without digesting the remaining time. It will end at the time. Therefore, at the timing tb12 when the effect is received, the “display indicating that the automatic button effect state is being controlled” (in this case, “auto button is being set”) that has appeared in the display area of the effect display device 1600. ) "Is also hidden.

  In this case, however, the first post-operation effect (due to the effect reception) generated by the effect reception as shown in FIG. 271 (d) at the timing tb13, regardless of which effect is received within the period of the timing tb11 to tb13. The first expectation effect) is not finished yet and is in the midst of execution so that the game entertainment is suitably maintained over the period of the timing tb11 to tb13 regardless of the timing when the effect is accepted. This is desirable.

  FIG. 272 shows that the period of timing tb21 to tb23 (see FIG. 272 (a)) in the symbol variation execution period is controlled as “automatic button effect state”. The example of an effect when the 2nd effect pattern which can be set as "the production reception period which accepts" is performed is shown.

  In the second effect pattern, when the timing tb21 for generating the “effect reception period permitting the operation reception (operation) for the operation button 410” has arrived, as shown in FIG. , “Haunted OBK with a gift box” appears (second display effect).

  Here, when “ghost box with a present box” is displayed, unlike the case where the button image BTG is displayed, an effect that indicates the degree of expectation is necessarily generated when the operation button 410 is operated. Therefore, an instruction display for prompting an operation on the operation button 410 (a downward arrow display or a bar display indicating the remaining time of the production reception period) does not appear.

  In this regard, in the production example shown in FIG. 272, the ghost OBK with a present box can be displayed within the period of timing tb21 to tb23, and the period before the ghost OBK is displayed before the timing tb23. When the operation on the operation button 410 is performed at the timing tb22, the effect is accepted, and as shown in FIG. 272 (c), the jackpot symbol is changed by the symbol variation (the symbol variation in the execution state) based on the effect acceptance. A second post-operation effect (character display of “hot heat” in the figure) suggesting the expected degree of appearance is executed (second expected effect).

  However, at this time, the effect reception period that has occurred from the timing tb21 is terminated when the effect is received without using the remaining time, whereas the automatic button effect state is not canceled. This is to be maintained. Therefore, at the timing tb22, the display indicating that “the automatic button effect state is being controlled (here“ auto button is being set ”)” that has appeared in the display area of the effect display device 1600 continues to be displayed. Will be.

  It should be noted that the second post-operation effect (second operation) generated by the reception of an effect is received at the timing tb23, as shown in FIG. 272 (d), regardless of which of the effects is received within the period of the timings tb21 to tb23. In order to maintain the game entertainment favorably over the period from timing tb21 to tb23, regardless of the timing at which the presentation is received, it is assumed that the expected production) is not finished yet and is in the middle of execution. Is desirable.

  FIG. 273 shows that the second post-operation effect is generated in the period of timing tb31 to tb33 (see FIG. 273 (a)) in the symbol variation execution period while being controlled to the automatic button effect state. The example of an effect when the 3rd effect pattern which displays "a ghost OBK with a present box" is performed, although the production reception period of no.

  In this third effect pattern, when the timing tb31 arrives, as shown in FIG. 273 (b), the effect display device 1600 causes a ghost OBK with a present box to appear (second display effect).

  However, as described above, in the production situation in which the ghost OBK with a present box is displayed, unlike the case where the button image BTG is displayed, the post-operation production in which the degree of expectation is suggested even if the operation button 410 is operated. Since it is not necessarily generated, an instruction display prompting an operation on the operation button 410 (an arrow display in a downward direction or a bar display indicating the remaining time of the production reception period) does not appear.

  In this regard, in the effect example shown in FIG. 273, a ghost OBK with a present box can be displayed within the period of timing tb31 to tb33, but the ghost OBK is displayed as shown in FIG. 273 (a). In this period, the “effect reception period that allows the reception (operation) of the operation button 410” does not occur. Accordingly, as shown in FIGS. 272 (a) and 272 (c), even if an operation is performed on the operation button 410 while the ghost OBK with a present box is displayed, the operation after the operation corresponding to the operation is performed. The effects (first post-operation effect and second post-operation effect) do not appear, and the ghost OBK with a present box is displayed over the period of timing tb31 to tb33.

  However, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, in the automatic button effect state, the operation button 410 is operated when the effect reception period related to the post-operation effect has not occurred. In this case, basically, the process for terminating (releasing the setting) the automatic button effect state is performed, but even if the effect reception period related to the post-operation effect has not occurred, the process is shown in FIG. When the operation button 410 is operated in such a production situation (the production situation where the ghost OBK with a present box is displayed), the process of generating the post-operation production and the automatic button production state It is assumed that the production is advanced so that none of the processing to be terminated is performed.

Therefore, the second operation shown in FIG. 272 (c) is performed when the mode shown in FIG. 273 (b) (the ghost OBK with a present box), which is the same mode as FIG. 272 (b), is displayed. Even if the operation button 410 is operated in anticipation of the occurrence of the post-production (second expected production), the production does not change, but the automatic button production state is not canceled. This can be continued. At this time, as a method of not canceling the setting of the automatic button effect state,
Even in the state where the effect reception period related to the post-operation effect has not occurred, only the detection of whether or not the operation button 410 has been operated is validated, and when the effect reception period related to the post-operation effect has not occurred If there is a detection, it is determined whether or not the detection timing is “within the period of time tb31 to tb33 when the ghost OBK with a present box is displayed”. When it is within the period of time tb31 to tb33 when the ghost OBK is displayed, the processing for canceling the setting of the automatic button effect state is not performed, and the timing when the ghost OBK with a present box is displayed is displayed. If it is not within the period of tb21 to tb23, a process for canceling the setting of the automatic button effect state is performed. Approach to (the method to set the period of timing tb31~tb33, as the prohibition period in accordance with the setting release of the automatic button directing state)
-Adopting a technique such as detecting whether or not there is an operation on the operation button 410 during the period from the timing tb21 to tb23 when the ghost OBK with a present box is displayed. It is possible, and any implementation method may be used.

  FIG. 274 shows that the period of the timing tb11 to tb13 (see FIG. 274 (a)) of the execution period of the symbol variation is controlled as “automatic button effect state”. Although the above-described first effect pattern that can be set as “allowable effect reception period” is executed, an example of effect when the operation button 410 is not operated within the period of the timings tb11 to tb13 is shown.

  As described above, in the first effect pattern, when the timing tb11 for generating the “effect reception period permitting the operation reception (operation) with respect to the operation button 410” arrives, as shown in FIG. In the device 1600, a button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410 is displayed, and an instruction display for prompting an operation to the operation button 410 (here, a downward arrow display and a bar indicating the remaining time of the effect reception period) Display) appears (first display effect).

  In this regard, in the effect example shown in FIG. 274, the operation button 410 is not operated within the period of the timing tb11 to tb13, but when the timing tb12 ′ before the timing tb13 arrives, the above-described automatic performance function Thus, the same change as that when the operation on the operation button 410 is performed is caused to the effect. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 274 (c), at the timing tb12 ′, the expectation degree that the jackpot symbol appears due to the symbol variation (symbol variation in the running state) based on the function of the automatic performance described above. A suggested first post-operation effect (in the figure, “Okichi” fortune) is executed (first expected effect). However, at this time, the production reception period that has occurred from the timing tb11 ends when the automatic production function functions without using up the remaining time, but the automatic button production state continues without being canceled. Become. Therefore, at the timing tb12 ′, the “display indicating that the state is controlled to the automatic button effect state (here,“ auto button is being set ”), which has been displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, continues. Will be displayed.

  Also, when the above-described automatic effect function functions at timing tb12 ′, as shown in FIG. 274 (d), the first post-operation effect (first operation) generated by the above-described automatic effect function at timing tb13. It is desirable that the expectation effect) is not finished yet and is in the middle of execution in order to favorably maintain the game entertainment over the period of timing tb11 to tb13.

  FIG. 275 shows that the period of the timing tb21 to tb23 (see FIG. 275 (a)) of the execution period of the symbol variation is controlled by “automatic button effect state”. Although the above-described second effect pattern that can be set as “allowable effect reception period” is executed, an example of effect when the operation button 410 is not operated within the period of the timings tb21 to tb23 is shown.

  As described above, in the second effect pattern, when the timing tb21 for generating the “effect reception period permitting the operation reception (operation) with respect to the operation button 410” arrives, as shown in FIG. In the device 1600, “a ghost OBK with a present box” appears (second display effect).

  Here, as described above, when the “ghost box with a present box” is displayed, unlike the case where the button image BTG is displayed, the degree of expectation is suggested when the operation button 410 is operated. Therefore, an instruction display (an arrow display in the downward direction or a bar display indicating the remaining time of the reception period) appears. There is no.

  In this regard, in the effect example shown in FIG. 275, the operation button 410 is not operated within the period of the timing tb21 to tb23, but when the timing tb22 ′ before the timing tb23 arrives, the automatic effect function described above Thus, the same change as that when the operation on the operation button 410 is performed is caused to the effect. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 275 (c), at the timing tb22 ′, the expectation degree that the jackpot symbol appears due to the symbol variation (the symbol variation in the execution state) based on the function of the automatic performance described above. A suggested second post-operation effect (character display of “hot heat” in the drawing) is executed (second expected effect). However, in this case as well, the production reception period that has occurred from the timing tb21 ends when the automatic production function functions without using up the remaining time, but the automatic button production state continues without being canceled. It becomes. Therefore, at the timing tb22 ′, the “display indicating that the state is controlled to the automatic button effect state (here,“ auto button is being set ”), which has been displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, is continued. Will be displayed.

  Also, when the above-described automatic effect function functions at the timing tb22 ′, as shown in FIG. 275 (d), the second post-operation effect generated by the above-described automatic effect function (second) at the timing tb23. It is desirable that the expectation effect) is not finished yet and is in the middle of execution in order to favorably maintain the game entertainment over the period of timing tb21 to tb23.

  Incidentally, although illustration is omitted, although the above-described third effect pattern (see FIG. 273) is executed while being controlled in the automatic button effect state, the operation button 410 is not affected within the period of the timing tb31 to tb33. When the operation is not performed, since the production reception period for generating the second post-operation production does not occur in the first place, the automatic production function described above cannot function, and the automatic button production state is also canceled. It goes without saying that it will continue (that is, nothing will change).

  In the effect examples shown in FIGS. 271 to 275, the first display effect shown in FIG. 271 and the second display effect shown in FIGS. 272 and 273 are executed with different contents. Depending on whether the operation on the operation button 410 is performed when the first display effect or the second display effect is displayed, the type (first operation) as the post-operation effect when the operation is performed The expectation effect (post-operation effect) itself may not appear even if the second display effect appears as well as the expected effect (second expectation effect) and the second expectation effect). There is a possibility that the processing to end the automatic button effect state is not performed. Accordingly, diversity as an effect using the operation buttons 410 is ensured, and it is possible to suitably improve the game entertainment when the effect using the operation buttons 410 is performed.

  In addition, about a 1st display effect, there exists a some effect aspect from which a degree of expectation differs, and it may be made to be able to be performed by either of these effect aspects. In addition, the second display effect also has a plurality of effect modes with different degrees of expectation, and may be executed in any of these effect modes. However, it is important that the first display effect and the second display effect are executed as display contents having contents that are not related to each other. In the effect examples shown in FIGS. 271 to 275, in the first display effect, an instruction display for prompting an operation on the button image BTG or the operation button 410 is displayed, whereas in the second display effect, a button is displayed. Neither the image BTG nor the instruction display prompting the operation on the operation button 410 is displayed, and a specific background image (a ghost with a present box) that is not displayed when the first display effect is being performed is displayed. It has become.

  Moreover, about the 1st expectation effect, there exist a some effect aspect from which an expectation degree differs, and it may be made to be able to be performed by either of these effect aspects. In addition, the second expected effect also has a plurality of effect modes with different degrees of expectation, and may be executed in any of these effect modes. However, it is important that the first expected effect and the second expected effect are executed as effect contents having contents that are not related to each other. In the production examples shown in FIGS. 271 to 275, the fortune-telling image is displayed in the first expected production, whereas the fortune-telling image is not displayed in the second expected production, and the expectation degree due to the character display Is suggested. By executing either the first expected effect or the second expected effect as an effect by a movable effect or a lamp display, the contents may not be related to each other.

  In addition, in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 271 to 275, when the second display effect appears as the effect pattern for causing the second display effect to appear within the symbol variation execution period, the “effect for the operation button 410” is displayed. The second display pattern and the second display pattern that are preliminarily determined (for example, in the determination process performed at the start of symbol variation) that the “acceptance period for allowing reception (operation)” to occur occur. A third effect pattern that is determined in advance (for example, in a determination process that is performed at the start of symbol variation) that “the effect reception period that allows the operation reception (operation) for the operation button 410” does not occur. It was decided to prepare. However, after preparing the second effect pattern in which it is determined in advance that the “effect reception period allowing the operation reception (operation) for the operation button 410” when the second display effect appears, A determination (lottery) is performed as to whether or not the second expected effect is generated based on the fact that the effect is received within the “effect reception period allowing the operation reception (operation) for the operation button 410”, By generating a second expected effect when a specific result is obtained in the determination, and not generating a second expected effect when the specific result is not obtained in the determination, FIG. The example of the effect shown in FIG. 275 may be realized. In addition to the second effect pattern according to such another example, when the second display effect appears, the “effect reception period allowing the operation reception (operation) for the operation button 410” may not occur. The above-described third performance pattern may be further prepared in advance (for example, in a determination process performed at the start of symbol variation).

  When the second expected effect occurs as a result of the effect acceptance (operation) for the operation button 410 while the second display effect is being performed, the first display effect is being performed. As a result of the presentation acceptance (operation) for the operation button 410, the ratio of the big hit symbol appearing in the symbol variation (the symbol variation in the execution state) may be higher than when the first expected rendering occurs. desirable.

  Further, when the second display effect is performed, the specific operation-related effect (see FIGS. 241 to 261) described above is stopped until the symbol variation is stopped as compared with the case where the first display effect is performed. It is desirable to make the ratio of appearing during the period higher. According to such a configuration, even if the second expected effect does not occur as a result of the effect reception (operation) with respect to the operation button 410 while the second display effect is being performed, the specific operation is performed. It becomes possible to have a sense of expectation that related effects (see FIGS. 241 to 261) will be performed, and it is possible to suitably suppress the game entertainment.

  Further, in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 271 to 275, when the first display effect (see FIG. 271 (b)) is displayed, the second display effect (FIGS. 272 (b) and 273). The above-described automatic performance function is made to function both when (see (b)) is displayed. However, when the second display effect (see FIGS. 272 (b) and 273 (b)) is not necessarily generated even if there is an operation, the above-mentioned automatic operation is not performed. When the effect function is made to function, when the second display effect (see FIGS. 272 (b) and 273 (b)) is displayed, the above-described automatic effect function is left to perform the operation. There is concern that it will disappear. Accordingly, when the first display effect (see FIG. 271 (b)) is displayed, the automatic effect function described above functions, but the second display effect (FIGS. 272 (b) and 273 (b)) is displayed. When the second display effect is displayed, it is not known whether the second expected effect will occur, but at least it must be operated. For example, the second expected effect may not be generated.

  In the example of the effects shown in FIGS. 271 to 275, when the ghost OBK is displayed, the “effect reception period that allows the reception of the operation (operation) to the operation means” is generated while the ghost OBK is displayed. You may do it. In addition, in the example of the effects shown in FIGS. 271 to 275, when displaying the ghost OBK, the automatic effect function functions within the “effect reception period permitting the operation reception (operation) to the operation means”, or by the player Even if an operation is performed, the ghost OBK may not be hidden, and the effect that the ghost OBK is displayed at the timing tb23 or the timing tb33 may be continued.

[Automatic hitting function in automatic button production state]
As described above, in the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), an operation by the player within the effect acceptance period (the first specific effective period or the second specific effective period when the above-described example is applied). Even if is not performed, it is possible to execute a process (automatic rendering function) that causes the same change to the rendering as when the operation was performed. However, the pachinko machine 1 prompts a predetermined operation means a plurality of operations (such as repeatedly pressing the operation button 410) and generates a presentation reception each time the operation is performed, and a plurality of operation effects are performed in response thereto. May be. Therefore, in the automatic button effect state, it becomes a problem how to make the above-described automatic effect function function when a specific effect acceptance period in which such an operation effect is performed a plurality of times occurs.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, a predetermined operation means (for example, the operation button 410) is used during a specific effect receiving period in which an operation opportunity of a plurality of operations (such as continuous hitting) is given. Even if the predetermined operation means is maintained in the operation state for a relatively long time without performing the operation multiple times, an effect when the operation is performed a plurality of times only by performing an operation in a long mode (so-called long press etc.) It is equipped with an automatic multiple-time operation function (automatic continuous hitting function) that makes the mode appear, and the automatic multiple-time operation function (automatic continuous hitting function) is performed by performing an operation on a predetermined operation means in a long operation mode. When the operation state is maintained, a presentation is accepted every time a predetermined time elapses, and a post-operation presentation corresponding to these is generated multiple times. It is set to be executed.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, an operation opportunity of a plurality of operations (such as continuous hitting) is given when controlled to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state). When the specific effect reception period occurs, even if the operation means is not operated during the specific effect reception period, the operation means is automatically operated in the long operation mode within the specific effect reception period. As in the case where the multi-time operation function (automatic continuous hitting function) is activated, a process for generating an effect corresponding to the effect reception is executed every time a predetermined time elapses (automatic effect function).

  According to such a configuration, the pachinko machine 1 in which the automatic continuous hitting function is activated when an operation by a so-called long press is performed within a specific effect receiving period in which an operation opportunity of a plurality of operations (such as continuous hits) is given. Thus, when at least the automatic button effect state is controlled, the same effect mode as that when the automatic continuous hitting function is activated appears even if the long press operation is not performed within the specific effect acceptance period. Therefore, even when the automatic effect function is made to function when a specific effect reception period requiring a plurality of operation receptions in the automatic button effect state occurs, the specific effect (operation reception) within the specific effect reception period. The player can enjoy the production without feeling dissatisfied with the occurrence frequency.

  FIG. 276 (a) shows a period of timing tc11 to tc13 in the symbol variation execution period when the automatic button effect state is not controlled. The specific effect pattern that can be set as the “specific effect reception period to which is given” is executed, and the operation button 410 is operated a plurality of times in a single operation mode in which the operation state is maintained for a relatively short time within the specific effect reception period. The example of the production when performed over is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 276 (a), in this effect example, every time the operation button 410 is operated in the above-described single operation mode within the specific effect reception period (timing tc11 to tc13) (the operation button 410 is the original). Whenever it is detected that the position is changed from the position to the operation state (in this case, rising detection is performed), an effect is received according to the operation, and a specific effect (post-operation effect) is executed according to the reception. . Then, when a specific performance condition is satisfied, such as the number of times that operation detection (production reception) is performed on the operation button 410 reaches a specific number of times, or a specific result is obtained by a lottery when the production is received. In addition, a production mode in which the degree of expectation is suggested in response to the specific production condition being satisfied is caused to appear, and the specific production reception period is terminated at that time without digesting the remaining time. .

  Here, although omitted in the figure, in the specific effect reception period (timing tc11 to tc13), the specific time from the start of the specific effect (post-operation effect) according to the effect reception to the end thereof. There may be a new production reception (operation detection). In such a case, the specific effect (post-operation effect) that is in the process of being executed when the effect is received is interrupted, and a specific effect (post-operation effect) corresponding to the effect reception is newly generated. Thus, it is desirable to suitably maintain the operational feeling (effect responsiveness) when operated by the player. Note that the newly generated specific effect (post-operation effect) is terminated when a specific time has elapsed since it was started unless a new effect is received again during execution of the specific effect. Become.

  FIG. 276 (b) shows a period of timings tc11 to tc13 in the symbol variation execution period when the automatic button effect state is not controlled. A specific production pattern that can be set as a “specific production reception period” is executed, and an operation is performed in a long mode (so-called long press) in which the operation state is maintained for a relatively long time within the specific production reception period The example of the effect when operation with respect to the button 410 is performed is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 276 (b), in the specific effect reception period (timing tc11 to tc13), the operation button 410 is in the operation state while the operation state with respect to the operation button 410 is maintained in a long press manner. The process of generating a new specific effect (post-operation effect) every time a predetermined time t1 elapses after the first specific effect (post-operation effect) is generated based on the operation detection (effect reception) when Auto-strike function) is executed. As this processing (automatic continuous hitting function), for example, “operation detection (effect reception) is performed on the condition that the operation button 410 is in an operation state every time the predetermined time t1 elapses, It is possible to execute the process as “a new specific effect (post-operation effect) is generated based on reception” ”. Then, when a specific performance condition is satisfied, such as the number of times that operation detection (production reception) is performed on the operation button 410 reaches a specific number of times, or a specific result is obtained by a lottery when the production is received. In addition, a production mode in which the degree of expectation is suggested in response to the specific production condition being satisfied is caused to appear, and the specific production reception period is terminated at that time without digesting the remaining time. .

  FIG. 277 (a) shows a period of timings tc11 to tc13 in the symbol variation execution period when the automatic button effect state is controlled. A specific effect pattern that can be set as the “specific effect receiving period to which“ is given ”is executed, and an example of the effect when no operation is performed within the specific effect receiving period is shown.

  First, when no operation is performed in the specific effect reception period (timing tc11 to tc13) when the automatic button effect state is not controlled, the specific effect is not executed once and at time tc13. At that time, the specific production reception period ends.

  On the other hand, if no operation is performed during the specific effect reception period (timing tc11 to tc13) while being controlled to the automatic button effect state, as shown in FIG. The automatic production function described above functions at a timing tc12 when a predetermined time has elapsed since the production reception period has occurred. That is, in this case, after the first specific effect is generated at the timing t12, the automatic effect function generates a new specific effect (e.g., every time the predetermined time t1 elapses, as in the case where the above-described auto-strike function functions. Processing to generate post-operation effects) is executed.

  In addition, as this processing (automatic effect function), for example, “operation detection (effect reception) is performed every time the predetermined time t1 elapses, and a new specific effect (based on reception of the effect) is performed”. It can be executed as a process such as “generation of post-operation effect”. Further, when the above-described automatic performance function is activated at timing tc12, the automatic repetitive strike function is used, and this is used so that “operation detection (production reception) is performed each time a predetermined time t1 elapses, and the operation detection is performed. A process of generating a new specific effect (post-operation effect) based on (effect reception) may be performed. Then, when a specific performance condition is satisfied, such as the number of times that operation detection (production reception) is performed on the operation button 410 reaches a specific number of times, or a specific result is obtained by a lottery when the production is received. In addition, a production mode in which the degree of expectation is suggested in response to the specific production condition being satisfied is caused to appear, and the specific production reception period is terminated at that time without digesting the remaining time. .

  FIG. 277 (b) shows that the period of timing tc11 to tc13 in the execution period of the symbol variation is “operation opportunity of multiple operations (such as continuous hitting) on the operation button 410 when the automatic button effect state is controlled. The specific effect pattern that can be set as the “specific effect receiving period” is executed, and the operation on the operation button 410 is long pressed in the state where the above-described automatic effect function is functioning during the specific effect receiving period. The example of the effect in the case of being performed is shown.

  In the effect example shown in FIG. 277 (b), as in the effect example shown in FIG. 277 (a), the automatic effect function described above functions at the timing tc12, and thereby the first specific effect at the timing tc12. After the occurrence of, a new specific effect (post-operation effect) is generated each time the predetermined time t1 elapses, as in the case where the above-described automatic continuous hitting function functions (or by causing the automatic continuous hitting function to function). The process to be executed is executed.

  However, in this effect example, it is assumed that the operation on the operation button 410 is performed in a long press manner at the timing tc12a when the process by the automatic effect function is being executed. Therefore, at the timing tc12a, when the operation on the operation button 410 is detected when the automatic button effect state is set, the setting of the automatic button effect state is canceled (terminated). However, in this effect example, the reception of the effect is not made even though the operation by the player is detected at the timing tc12a. In this way, the specific effect (post-operation effect) corresponding to the effect reception is prevented from occurring at the timing tc12a, and the process (predetermined time t1) is executed before the automatic button effect state is canceled. This is continued without ending the process of generating a new specific effect (post-operation effect) every time elapses.

  According to such a configuration, in the automatic button effect state, when the above-described automatic effect function is functioning within the specific effect acceptance period, an operation by long press at any timing when in the state Even if is started, there is no longer any delay in the progress of the production due to a change in the rhythm or tempo of the specific production (post-operation production) triggered by the operation, and it was already in the running state. The process (a process of generating a new specific effect (post-operation effect) every time the predetermined time t1 elapses) is executed in a manner that is inherited until after the operation mode by long press is started. Therefore, even in the automatic button effect state, even if the above-mentioned automatic effect function is functioning within the specific effect acceptance period, the player can operate without worrying about the adverse effect on the effect in the execution state. This makes it possible to perform an operation by the player. That is, in the effect example shown in FIG. 277 (b), although the long press operation by the player is started at the timing tc12a, the effect situation is different from the effect example shown in FIG. 277 (a). The same aspect appears as the aspect of the specific effect appearing within the specific effect reception period.

  It should be noted that the process already in the execution state (the process of generating a new specific effect (post-operation effect) every time the predetermined time t1 elapses) is taken over after the operation mode by long press is started. It can be executed in the form of an auto-tapping function that functions when a long press operation is performed within the specified production reception period, and a function when no operation is performed within the specific production reception period. The same process (a process of generating a new specific effect (post-operation effect) every time the predetermined time t1 elapses) is executed regardless of which of the automatic effect functions is performed. It is none other than.

  However, after the long press operation by the player is started at the timing tc12a, it is determined whether or not the operation button 410 is in the operation state every time the predetermined time t1 is consumed, and the fact that the operation state is in the operation state. On the condition that the above determination is made, the process (process for generating a new specific effect (post-operation effect) every time the predetermined time t1 elapses) that has been executed since the automatic button effect state has been continued is continued. It will be. Therefore, when the operation button 410 is not in the operating state at the time when the predetermined time t1 based on the previously executed specific effect is consumed, a new specific effect (post-operation effect) is generated at that time. Rather, the process that has been executed since the automatic button effect state was entered (the process of generating a new specific effect (post-operation effect) every time the predetermined time t1 elapses) is terminated.

  In addition, in the production example using the automatic repetitive function shown in FIG. 276 (b) and the automatic production function shown in FIGS. The process of generating a new specific effect (post-operation effect) after the elapse of time (the first mode as the automatic continuous hitting function and the automatic effect function) is executed, but instead, the timing at which the specific effect starts is used as a reference As described above, a process of generating a new specific effect (post-operation effect) after the elapse of the predetermined time t2 (second mode as an automatic repetitive function and an automatic effect function) may be executed. In this case, the predetermined time t2 may be longer than the specific time required from the start of the specific effect to the end, but preferably, from the start of the specific effect to the end. Is set to be shorter than the specific time required for. According to such a configuration, when a specific effect is in the middle of execution, a new specific effect is executed in a manner that is interrupted. Even though no operation is performed, it is possible to feel the sense that a single operation is repeatedly performed at high speed, and it is expected that the game entertainment will be suitably maintained.

  In the effect example shown in FIG. 277 (b), when the operation button 410 is operated before the timing tc12 when the automatic effect function functions (within the period of timing tc11 to tc12), at that time. The automatic button effect state is canceled (terminated). At this time, the first specific effect is generated according to the operation on the operation button 410, and thereafter, every time the predetermined time t1 (or the predetermined time t2) elapses if the operation is a long press mode. A process (automatic striking function) for generating a new specific effect (post-operation effect) is executed, and if the operation is a single press mode, it is detected that the operation button 410 is in the operation state. Each time a new specific effect (post-operation effect) is generated.

  Also, in the production examples shown in FIG. 276 and FIG. 277, when the production reception is performed when the specific production is in the middle of execution, the specific production in the middle of execution is interrupted in response to the production reception. Although the new specific effect is generated, a new specific effect corresponding to the reception of the effect may be generated in parallel with the specific effect that is in the middle of execution without ending.

  As described above, in the production examples shown in FIGS. 276 and 277, when a new single operation is performed and the production is accepted when the previous specific production generated by the single operation is in the middle of execution, When a new specific effect (post-operation effect) is generated in response to an effect reception, while the previous specific effect generated by the automatic effect function (or auto repetitive function) is in the middle of execution Even if it is detected that the operation button 410 has changed from the original position to an operation state by a single operation or a long press operation, a new specific effect (post-operation effect) is not generated at the time of the detection. The process (the process of generating a specific effect every time a predetermined time elapses) is continued. After this, if the operation state is maintained when a predetermined time has elapsed with reference to the previous specific effect (in the case of a long press operation), the process that is already in the execution state (the specific effect is changed to the predetermined time). The processing that is generated every time elapses) is further continued, so that the player can end the automatic button effect state while preferably continuing the operation system effect in the execution state from the automatic button effect state. It becomes possible to shift to a state in which an operation system effect is performed by the operation of, and it is expected that the player participation consciousness will be raised.

[Setting process related to automatic button effect state according to effect pattern type]
As described above, in the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), an operation by the player within the effect acceptance period (the first specific effective period or the second specific effective period when the above-described example is applied). Even if is not performed, it is possible to execute a process (automatic rendering function) that causes the same change to the rendering as when the operation was performed. In addition, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, even if it is during the symbol change execution period, an operation on a predetermined operation means (for example, the operation button 410) Settings and cancellations related to the automatic button effect state can be made, and by simplifying such operations, settings and cancellations related to the automatic button effect state can be maintained while keeping a close watch on the progress of the effect during symbol variation. To be able to do it.

  However, if the automatic button effect state is set or canceled during the symbol change execution period, the processing load increases due to a setting change that was not expected at the start of the symbol change. There is a concern that it will have an adverse effect on the decided production progress. In this regard, the types of “effect patterns executed based on the result of the jackpot determination” are at least “a first effect pattern in which a specific effect reception period during which an instruction prompting an operation appears can be set” and “operation Since the “second effect pattern in which the specific effect acceptance period in which the prompt indication is displayed cannot be set” is prepared, the setting and release of the automatic button effect state are not necessarily executed promptly depending on the type of effect pattern. In some cases, there may be no problem. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, depending on which of the first effect pattern and the second effect pattern is in the execution state, it is during the symbol variation execution period. By changing the processing mode related to the setting and release of the automatic button effect state, an increase in processing load during the symbol variation execution period is suppressed.

  FIG. 278 shows a “first effect pattern in which a specific effect acceptance period in which an instruction display prompting an operation appears can be set” when the automatic button effect state is controlled and the number of holds is in the effect state of three. Is a time chart showing a processing example when an operation for canceling the automatic button effect state (release operation) and an operation for setting (setting operation) are performed within the symbol variation execution period . The first effect pattern may be either a hit variation or a loss variation.

  As shown in FIG. 278, when the automatic button effect state is currently controlled and the number of holds is in the effect state of three, a “first effect reception period in which an instruction display prompting an operation appears can be set. It is assumed that the symbol variation is started with the “effect pattern”. Then, although it is during the execution period of the symbol variation, the progress of the effect as the first effect pattern is made while the automatic button effect state is in a state where the automatic button effect state can be released (a state in which the release operation is allowed). .

  In this effect example, it is assumed that the release operation by the player is detected at the timing td11 shown in the figure, and the automatic button effect state is canceled based on the detection of the release operation. (Finished). As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the setting cancellation of the automatic button effect state during symbol variation is executed based on the detection that the operation button 410 is in the operation state. Is done.

  Further, in this effect example, after the automatic button effect state is canceled in this way, the operation on the operation button 410 (the operation button 410 is in the operation state) at the timing td12 within the specific effect reception period shown in the figure ) Is detected. When an operation on the operation button 410 is detected within the specific effect reception period, the effect is received, the post-operation effect corresponding to the effect reception is executed, and the specific effect reception period ends without digesting the remaining time Will be. As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in the specific effect reception period when the automatic button effect state is not set, if the operation on the operation button 410 is performed, the effect is received. It is not accepted as a setting operation to the automatic button effect state. On the other hand, in the specific effect receiving period when the automatic button effect state is set, when the operation on the operation button 410 is performed, the effect is received and the effect after the operation is executed, and the automatic button effect state is canceled. Acceptance as an operation is also made, and the automatic button effect state is canceled (terminated).

  Furthermore, in this effect example, it is assumed that a setting operation by the player is detected at the timing td13 shown in the figure after the specific effect acceptance period ends in this way, although the symbol is changing. The automatic button effect state is set based on the detection of the setting operation. As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the setting to the automatic button effect state during the pattern change is maintained for a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds) when the operation button 410 is in the operation state. It will be executed when it is detected. However, instead of this, the setting to the automatic button effect state during the symbol variation may be executed based on the detection that the operation button 410 is in the operation state.

  In this production example, when the symbol variation is stopped after the automatic button production state is set, a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) after the symbol variation is stopped, The next symbol variation is digested (variation start). Then, during the period in which the next symbol variation is being executed, unless the player performs a release operation, the performance progress is made with the state set in the automatic button effect state.

  As described above, in the effect example shown in FIG. 278, the specific effect is included in the period in which the first effect pattern is executed in a state where the automatic effect effect state is not controlled and the first effect pattern is being executed. When an operation is performed on the operation button 410 when the reception period is not set, the control to the automatic button effect state can be executed while the first effect pattern is in the execution state. According to such a configuration, it is assumed that symbol variation has been started in the “first effect pattern in which a specific effect acceptance period in which an instruction display prompting an operation appears can be set” in a state where the automatic button effect state is controlled. In addition, by performing the release operation before the specific production reception period occurs, it is possible to cause the specific production reception period to be generated in a state where the automatic button production state is released, and the player himself operates It is possible to favorably maintain the gaming interest when the desire to be generated arises. In the production example shown in FIG. 278, it is assumed that the release operation is received before the specific production reception period is started, but the release operation is performed after the specific production reception period is ended. It is also possible to end the automatic button effect state within the period of one effect pattern.

  Further, according to the above configuration, during the period in which the symbol variation is being executed in the “first effect pattern in which the specific effect receiving period in which the instruction prompting the operation appears can be set” is set, the setting operation to the automatic button effect state is performed. Is also allowed. In the example of the effect shown in FIG. 278, it is assumed that the setting operation is accepted after the end of the specific effect acceptance period. However, the setting operation by the player within the period before the start of the specific effect acceptance period. Even if this is done, the setting operation is accepted. Therefore, when the symbol variation is started in the “first effect pattern in which the specific effect acceptance period in which the instruction display prompting the operation appears can be set” in a state where the automatic button effect state is not controlled, the specific effect acceptance period occurs. By performing an operation on the operation button 410 so that the setting operation to the automatic button effect state is detected in a period before, the specific effect reception period is generated in the state set to the automatic button effect state. This is also possible, and it is possible to favorably maintain the game entertainment when the user wants to enjoy the post-operation production by the automatic production function.

  In order to obtain such effects, when the first effect pattern is selected at the start of symbol variation, any effect determination result regarding the determination (lottery) related to the effect contents in the first effect pattern. Even if it is obtained, it is desirable to always generate this during the specific performance reception period. In addition, a specific effect display can appear within the symbol variation period, and when the specific effect display appears, a specific effect reception period always occurs before the symbol variation in the execution state is ended. It is desirable to make the production progress. According to these configurations, it is possible to recognize that the specific production reception period occurs by confirming the production contents appearing within the symbol variation execution period, and until the specific production reception period occurs. It is possible to select whether to cancel or set the automatic button effect state.

  At this time, as for the specific effect display, it is possible to give an indication as to whether or not the post-operation effect is likely to be performed in a highly expected manner when the effect is received within the specific effect reception period. If it is performed in any one of a plurality of modes, it is expected that the determination is made for selection regarding whether to cancel or set the automatic button effect state.

  Still further, the specific effect display includes at least a first specific effect display and a second specific effect display. When the first specific effect display appears, the first specific effect display appears. It is permissible to set (or cancel) the automatic button effect state by an operation by the player after the specific effect acceptance period occurs, but when the second specific effect display appears, If it is not allowed to set (or cancel) the automatic button effect state by an operation by the player between the time when the second specific effect display appears and the time when the specific effect acceptance period occurs, the specific effect It is possible to favorably maintain the game entertainment from when the display appears until the specific production reception period occurs.

  FIG. 279 shows that when the automatic button effect state is controlled and the number of holds is in the effect state of three, “the second effect pattern in which the specific effect acceptance period in which the instruction display prompting the operation appears cannot be set” ) ”Is started, and an example of processing when an operation for canceling the automatic button effect state (release operation) and an operation for setting (setting operation) are performed within the execution period of the symbol variation It is a time chart which shows.

  As shown in FIG. 279, when the automatic button effect state is currently controlled and the number of holds is in the effect state of three, “the specified effect acceptance period in which the instruction display prompting the operation appears cannot be set. Assume that symbol variation is started in “2 effect patterns”. Then, in this effect example as well as in the case shown in FIG. 278, the automatic button effect state can be released (the release operation is allowed), although the symbol variation is being executed. Production progress as the second production pattern will be made.

  In this effect example, it is assumed that the release operation by the player is detected at the timing td21 shown in the figure, and the automatic button effect state is canceled based on the detection of the release operation. (Finished). As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the setting cancellation of the automatic button effect state during symbol variation is executed based on the detection that the operation button 410 is in the operation state. Is done.

  That is, it seems that there is little merit to end the automatic button effect state when the second effect pattern in which the specific effect acceptance period is not set is in the execution state. When it appears, normally, when the symbol variation in the hold state is digested, there is a high possibility that the “first effect pattern in which the specific effect acceptance period is set” appears. At this time, there may be a desire to return to a normal performance mode (a desire to end a specific performance state) in which the performance can be developed depending on the player's own operation.

  In this regard, according to the above configuration, not only during the period in which the first effect pattern in which the specific effect acceptance period is set is being executed, but also in the period in which the second effect pattern in which the specific effect acceptance period is not set is being executed. In addition, the automatic button effect state can be ended by an operation by the player. Therefore, it becomes possible to end the automatic button effect state in advance when the “first effect pattern for which the specific effect acceptance period is set” is still on hold. It is possible to avoid the occurrence of a situation where the automatic button effect state is terminated immediately before the specific effect acceptance period is set and the operation means (operation button 410) has to be performed without rushing.

  Further, in the effect example shown in FIG. 279, it is assumed that the setting operation by the player is performed at the timing td23 shown in the figure after the automatic button effect state is canceled in this way. However, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, when the second effect pattern in which the specific effect reception period is not set and is not controlled in the automatic button effect state is being executed. Even if an operation is performed by the player (even if the operation button 410 is in the operation state from the original position and the operation state is maintained for a predetermined time (2 seconds in this case)), at least the second effect pattern The setting operation by the player is not accepted (the setting to the automatic button effect state is not performed) during the period during which is executed. Instead of this, even when the operation button 410 is detected based on the detection that the operation button 410 is in the operation state, the setting to the automatic button effect state during the pattern change is performed. The setting operation by the player is not accepted during the period in which the second effect pattern is being executed.

  In other words, even if “setting from the normal effect state to the automatic button effect state” is performed immediately before the specific effect reception period occurs, it is necessary to perform any operation within the specific effect reception period. In addition, even if the operation is performed, the effect is accepted and the effect after the operation is executed. In view of such a fact, it is necessary to quickly set the automatic button effect state even if the setting operation is performed during the period in which the second effect pattern in which the specific effect acceptance period is not set is being executed. However, it is considered that there is no problem if the automatic button effect state is set before the specific effect acceptance period that can occur after the next symbol variation is digested.

  In this regard, in the effect example shown in FIG. 279, during the period in which the second effect pattern (loss variation) in which the specific effect acceptance period is not set is being executed, the setting operation by the player was performed within the period. However, until the end of the period (while the symbol variation is being executed), the automatic button effect state is not set, and the symbol variation corresponding to the second effect pattern is terminated and the symbol stop (losing) When in the symbol stop state (timing td24 in the figure), the automatic button effect state is set based on the setting operation. In this way, within the period in which the symbol variation of the second effect pattern is being executed, even if an operation by the player is performed, the setting to the automatic button effect state is not permitted, and the set timing is Since it was carried over after being stopped, the processing load increases due to a setting change related to the production state that was not determined at the start of symbol variation occurring during the symbol variation execution (by an operation by the player) Such a situation can be suitably suppressed.

  In the example of production shown in FIG. 279, when a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) has passed since the symbol variation was stopped, the automatic button production state is set, and the hold state is set. The next symbol variation that was present is digested (variation start). Then, during the period in which the next symbol variation is being executed, unless the player performs a release operation, the performance progress is made with the state set in the automatic button effect state.

  As described above, in the effect example shown in FIG. 279, in a state where the second effect pattern is in the execution state in a state where the second effect pattern is being executed without being controlled to the automatic button effect state. Even if the operation button 410 is operated at any timing, the control to the automatic button effect state is not executed while the second effect pattern is in the execution state, and the second effect pattern ends. Then, the control to the automatic button effect state can be executed. As a result, it is possible to suitably suppress an increase in processing load due to a setting change relating to the effect state that was not determined at the start of symbol variation occurring during the symbol variation execution (by an operation by the player). It becomes like this.

  In the effect example shown in FIG. 279, it is assumed that the next symbol variation in the hold state is started after the symbol variation of the second effect pattern in which the specific effect acceptance period is not set is stopped. However, when the symbol variation of the second effect pattern is stopped (losing symbol stopped), even if the next symbol variation is not in the hold state, the automatic button is used when the symbol is stopped (losing symbol stopped). The production state is set.

  In addition, in the effect example shown in FIG. 279, when a setting operation is performed by the player during a period in which the second effect pattern (loss variation) in which the specific effect acceptance period is not set is executed, the second effect pattern The automatic button effect state is set when the symbol variation is stopped. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and in short, the automatic button within the period during which the second effect pattern is being executed. Any setting may be used as long as the setting timing is not allowed and the set timing is carried over after the symbol is stopped. For example, it is desirable that the automatic button effect state is set when the symbol is stopped (losing symbol stopped) or within the period during which the next symbol variation is being executed. In other words, when the next symbol variation is started, if there is a production situation such as “It is decided to change the setting related to the production state within the symbol variation”, the production is performed according to the determined schedule. Since it only needs to be advanced, an increase in processing load due to an unintended state change during the execution of symbol variation is preferably avoided.

  In this case, even if the next symbol variation is executed as the second effect pattern (the same effect pattern as the previous one), when the symbol is stopped (losing symbol stopped) or the next symbol variation is executed It is desirable that the automatic button effect state is set within the set period. According to such a configuration, when the setting operation is performed by the player within the period in which the symbol variation is executed in the second effect pattern, the determination as to which effect pattern the next symbol variation is executed is performed. It is possible to carry over the timing at which the automatic button effect state is set after the symbol is stopped without performing.

  In addition, when the operation button 410 is in the operation state within the period in which the second effect pattern is being executed to set the automatic button effect state, at least a predetermined time has elapsed since the second effect pattern was ended. The automatic button effect state may be set only after that. That is, in this case, when the second effect pattern is ended while the next symbol variation is in the hold state, the automatic button effect state is set within the execution period of the next symbol variation. If the second effect pattern is terminated while the button is not in the on-hold state, the automatic button effect state can be set when the symbol is stopped (losing symbol stop).

  Further, apart from “the second effect pattern in which the instruction display prompting the operation to appear cannot be set” (second fluctuation pattern), “the specific effect acceptance period in which the instruction display to prompt the operation appears cannot be set. "3 effect pattern (winning variation)" is further prepared, and when the player performs a setting operation within the period in which the symbol variation is executed in the third effect pattern, the symbol stop state or the jackpot game execution period The automatic button effect state may be set in the screen.

[Prohibited period for setting automatic button production state]
As described above, in the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), an operation by the player within the effect acceptance period (the first specific effective period or the second specific effective period when the above-described example is applied). Even if is not performed, it is possible to execute a process (automatic rendering function) that causes the same change to the rendering as when the operation was performed. In addition, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, even if it is during the symbol change execution period, an operation on a predetermined operation means (for example, the operation button 410) The settings related to the automatic button effect state can be made, and the simplification of such an operation makes it possible to perform the setting related to the automatic button effect state while keeping a close watch on the progress of the effect during the design variation. ing.

  However, if the specific process related to the production such as the production setting is allowed at any time during the symbol change execution period including the setting process to the automatic button production state, the tension will be reduced. There is a possibility that the entertainment interest of the game will be lowered due to the lack of performance. Therefore, during the period in which the symbol variation corresponding to the result of the jackpot determination is executed, at least when a specific production reception period has not occurred, a specific process related to production such as production setting is performed by an operation by the player. In an allowed gaming machine, it is desirable that a prohibition period during which a specific process relating to the above-described effect is not allowed to start during a period from when the symbol change is started to when the specific effect acceptance period occurs is preferably started. That is, in this case, since there is a concern that the prohibition period will occur, even when the specific production reception period has not occurred, the operating means (such as the operation button 410) while the prohibition period has not occurred. ) Is required to be performed, and it is possible to favorably maintain player participation consciousness with respect to games and performances.

  Hereinafter, although the example of the effect which adopted "the setting processing to an automatic button effect state" as "specific process regarding an effect" is explained in full detail, as an "specific process regarding an effect", it is not restricted to this, For example, effect mode ( You may make it apply as other processes, such as the process which changes the production mode (the 1st character becomes a leading role) to other production modes (the production mode in which a 2nd character becomes a leading role).

  In FIG. 280, when the automatic button effect state is not controlled, the symbol variation is started in the “third effect pattern in which the specific effect acceptance period (specific effective period) in which the instruction prompting the operation appears can be set” ”. FIG. 281 is a time chart showing an example of processing when an operation for setting the automatic button effect state is performed within the execution period of fluctuation, and FIG. 281 is an effect example when the effect is advanced with the third effect pattern. FIG. The third effect pattern may be either a hit variation or a loss variation, and may be the same as the first effect pattern described above.

  As shown in FIG. 280 and FIG. 281 (a), when there is an effect situation that is not controlled in the automatic button effect state, the “third effect effect period in which the instruction display prompting the operation appears can be set. It is assumed that symbol variation is started at “Pattern”. Then, although it is during the execution period of the symbol variation, the progress of the effect as the third effect pattern is made in a state where the automatic button effect state can be set (a state in which the setting operation is allowed). .

  However, in this effect example, when symbol variation is performed in “a third effect pattern in which a specific effect acceptance period in which an instruction prompting an operation appears” can be set, timing te11 (before the specific effect acceptance period occurs) In FIG. 280), the operation acceptance itself for setting the automatic button effect state or the prohibition period during which the setting process for the automatic button effect state is not allowed is started. As shown in FIG. 281 (b), in this prohibition period, a specific effect (prohibited image) that can appear only when the prohibition period occurs is displayed. In the specific effect (prohibited image) shown in FIG. 281 (b), an image in which a chain is wrapped around a padlock is displayed, and a character such as “auto setting invalid” is displayed as a button lock effect. Has been.

  The prohibition period thus generated is terminated when a timing te12 at which a first specific time (for example, 25 seconds) has elapsed from the timing te11 has arrived. However, no matter how much operation (operation with respect to the operation button 410) is performed before the timing te12 arrives, as shown in FIGS. 281 (c) and (d), the specific effect (prohibited image) is displayed. ) Is designed to prevent any changes.

  When the prohibition period ends at timing te12, the specific effect (prohibited image) is not displayed, and the setting process for the automatic button effect state is permitted. Thereafter, when the above-mentioned “prediction effect” or “specific operation-related effect” is performed (see FIG. 281 (e)), a specific effect reception period in which an instruction display prompting an operation appears at timing te13. (Refer to FIG. 281 (f)). In the example shown in FIG. 281 (f), the stage is set as the stage for accepting an operation opportunity for the sword ornament 5001, but the stage for receiving an operation opportunity for the operation button 410 is accepted. It may be set as a period.

  In this regard, in the effect example shown in FIG. 280 and FIG. 281 (f), the specific effect reception period occurs in a state where the automatic button effect state is not set. The automatic production function described above does not function at a specific timing. However, even when the “third effect pattern in which the specific effect acceptance period in which the instruction display prompting the operation appears can be set” is executed in the effect state shown in FIG. 280, before the prohibition period starts. If the automatic button effect state is set to the automatic button effect state, it is possible to generate the specific effect acceptance period in the state set to the automatic button effect state. The automatic production function described above can be made to function at a specific timing within the reception period.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the setting to the automatic button effect state during the pattern change is not the timing when the operation button 410 enters the operation state, but the operation button 410 is in the operation state. It may be executed when it is maintained for a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds). However, in this case, when the operation button 410 is set in the operation state and maintained for 2 seconds within a period of less than 2 seconds before the arrival of the timing te11 shown in FIG. 280, the timing te11 occurs. Thus, the setting to the automatic button effect state can be permitted. Therefore, the specific effect (prohibited image) is not generated at the timing te11 when the prohibited period is started as in the effect example shown in FIG. 280, but is generated at a timing delayed from the timing te11. Is desirable.

  FIG. 282 and FIG. 283 are diagrams showing a modification of the prohibition period (here, the prohibition period related to setting of the automatic button effect state) related to “specific processing related to effects such as effect setting”.

  That is, as described above, in the production example described above with reference to FIGS. 280 and 281, if a prohibition period occurs at timing te <b> 11 (see FIG. 280), the first specific time (e.g. 25 No matter how many operations (operations on the operation button 410) are performed after the second (second) elapses, the setting operation is not accepted and the specific effect (prohibited image) is displayed. Is designed to prevent any changes.

  However, in the following modification example described in detail with reference to FIG. 282 and FIG. 283, the prohibition period is “one requiring a first specific time (for example, 25 seconds) from the occurrence to the end”. Are the same, but when a second specific time (for example, 10 seconds) shorter than the first specific time elapses after the prohibition period occurs, an operation (operation button) by the player to end the prohibition period early This is different from the above-described effect example described in detail with reference to FIG. 280 and FIG.

  That is, as shown in FIG. 282 and FIG. 283 (a), when there is an effect state that is not controlled to the automatic button effect state, a “specific effect reception period during which an instruction prompting an operation appears can be set. It is assumed that symbol variation is started with “3 effect patterns”. Then, in this modification as well, during the symbol variation execution period, the progress of the presentation as the third presentation pattern is in a state where the automatic button presentation state can be set (a state in which the setting operation is allowed). Will be made.

  In addition, at timing te11 (see FIG. 282) before the specific effect reception period occurs, the operation reception itself for setting the automatic button effect state or the setting process to the automatic button effect state is allowed. 280 and FIG. 280 and FIG. 280 also show that a specific effect (prohibited image) that can appear only when the prohibited period occurs is displayed during the prohibited period. This is the same as the effect example described above with reference to 281.

  However, in this modified example, as shown in FIG. 282, the period from the timing te11 to the arrival of the timing te11a after the second specific time (for example, 10 seconds) has arrived (period in which cancellation is not possible). Then, no matter how much operation (operation with respect to the operation button 410) is performed within the period, no change occurs in the specific effect (prohibited image) (see FIG. 283 (c)). In the period from the timing te11a to the timing te12 (timing when the first specific time (for example, 25 seconds) has elapsed since the prohibition period occurred), the operation by the player When (operation with respect to the operation button 410) is performed, it is possible to execute processing that can end the prohibition period early.

  More specifically, when the timing te11a arrives and the prohibition period can be terminated early by an operation by the player (operation on the operation button 410), first, the timing te11a arrives in the effect display device 1600. A special image that has not appeared in the period up to (the period in which cancellation is impossible) is displayed. In this modification, as shown in FIG. 283 (d), an image NJG that suggests the remaining time as the prohibition period is displayed as the special image.

  That is, in the prohibition period according to this modified example, when the timing te11a arrives, such an image NJG appears (see FIG. 283 (d)), so that the prohibition period cannot be canceled ( From the timing te11 to te11a), it can be suggested that the prohibition period has been canceled (timing te11a to te12), and the remaining time is indicated in the prohibition period. Can be made to function as an effect on whether or not to end early.

  Then, when the first operation (operation on the operation button 410) is performed within a period (timing te11a to te12) in which the prohibition period is allowed to be released, the operation button 410 enters an operation state. Based on this, a process for ending the prohibition period early is executed. Thus, after the first operation (operation on the operation button 410) is performed, the setting operation by the player can be accepted even if the timing te12 has not yet arrived.

  Here, in this modification, when the prohibition period ends early due to the first operation by the player (operation on the operation button 410), the effect display device 1600 also changes the effect based on the first operation. Can be executed. In this modified example, as shown in FIG. 283 (e), an image in which a chain is attached to a padlock is destroyed and characters such as “successful release” are displayed to cause a production change. Accordingly, the specific effect (prohibited image) is also hidden before the timing te12 arrives.

  Then, in the state where the prohibition period is ended early, when the second operation (operation on the operation button 410) is performed within the period before the timing te12 arrives, as shown in FIG. When the second operation is performed (here, when the operation state is maintained for 2 seconds), the setting process to the automatic button effect state can be performed. In this case, in the effect display device 1600, a display (here “auto button is being set”) accompanying the effect setting appears.

  Thereafter, when the above-mentioned “prediction effect” or “specific operation-related effect” is performed (see FIG. 283 (f)), a specific effect reception period in which an instruction display prompting an operation appears at timing te13. (Refer to FIG. 283 (g)). In the example shown in FIG. 283 (g), an effect reception period in which an operation opportunity is given to the sword ornament 5001 is set, but an effect reception in which an operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410 is set. It may be set as a period.

  In this regard, in the effect example shown in FIG. 282 and FIG. 283 (g), since the specific effect reception period occurs in the state set to the automatic button effect state, If the player does not perform an operation until the specific timing arrives, the above-described automatic performance function will function. However, even in the production example shown in FIG. 282 and FIG. 283 (g), the invalid period is first set by performing the first operation within the period (timing te11a to te12) in which the invalid period can be canceled. In the case of the production example shown in FIG. 280 and FIG. 281 (f), the setting process to the automatic button production state is not performed by performing the second operation in the state of early termination. Needless to say, the same production situation will appear.

  In the production examples shown in FIGS. 280 to 283, the specific production reception period is generated after a predetermined time has elapsed since the “prohibition period in which the setting process to the automatic button production state is not permitted” is ended. A specific effect reception period may be generated immediately after the “prohibition period during which the setting process for the automatic button effect state is not permitted” is ended (in a manner linked to the prohibition period). That is, in this case, if the prohibition period occurs when the automatic button effect state is not controlled, the specific effect acceptance period occurs while the opportunity to set the automatic button effect state remains disabled. It becomes possible to raise player participation consciousness when there is no production reception period.

  Further, in the production examples shown in FIGS. 280 to 283, in the “prohibited period during which the setting process to the automatic button production state is not permitted”, when production reception is performed within a specific production reception period that occurs thereafter. You may make it make any one of several production modes in which the ratio which the production aspect of comparatively high expectation appears as a post-operation production, the ratio which a big hit symbol appears by the symbol fluctuation in an execution state, etc. appear.

Moreover, in the production example shown in FIG. 282 and FIG. 283, based on the result of the big hit determination,
When in the third state where the effect image of FIG. 283 appears, a plurality of third effect modes (for example, “padlocks” having different ratios (expectations) in which the jackpot symbol appears due to the symbol variation in the execution state. , Etc.)), and the appearance of one of the multiple appearance modes with different destruction conditions of the image with the chain attached to the
-When it is in the 2nd state where the production image of Drawing 283 (d) appears, when it will be in the above-mentioned 3rd state, "a specific 3rd production mode (a plurality of 3rd productions") Among the modes, a plurality of second performance modes (for example, “a plurality of performance modes with different colors of the image NJG”) having different ratios (expectations) of “appearance that is most advantageous to the player”. Make one appear,
-When it is in the 1st state where the production image of Drawing 283 (b) and (c) is appearing, when it will be in the above-mentioned 2nd state, "specific 2nd production mode (plurality) Of the second presentation mode, a plurality of first presentation modes (for example, “a plurality of presentation modes having different background image colors”) that have different ratios (expectations) appearing. It is desirable to execute a process such as “appearing” or the like. According to such a configuration, the degree of expectation can be suggested in stages by the effects related to each other while the effects are advanced within the prohibition period or the process for early termination of the prohibition period is executed. Therefore, it is expected that the gaming interests during the prohibition period can be suitably maintained, and that the player's participation consciousness is increased by promptly ending the prohibition period. In this sense, the first effect mode and the second effect mode are executed as an effect that the movable decorative body cannot operate, and only the third effect mode that directly leads to the early end of the prohibition period is movable. It is desirable to be able to be executed as a production mode for operating the decorative body. A predetermined movable decoration body is operated when a specific third performance aspect among a plurality of third performance aspects appears, and a predetermined movable decoration is displayed when a third performance aspect different from the specific third performance aspect appears. The body may not be operated.

  In addition, for the effects illustrated in FIGS. 281 (e) and (f) and FIGS. 283 (f) and (g), the operation button 410 is selected from among a plurality of operation means (such as the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001). The above-described effect (specific operation) regarding whether a period in which an operation can be accepted occurs or whether a period in which an operation on another operation means (for example, a sword ornament 5001) can be accepted occurs. It may be executed as a related effect (see FIGS. 241 to 261).

  Further, in the production examples shown in FIGS. 280 to 283, it has been described that the specific production reception period is necessarily generated after the “prohibition period during which the setting process to the automatic button production state is not permitted” is generated. However, it is not always necessary to generate the specific effect reception period. After the “prohibition period during which the setting process for the automatic button effect state is not allowed” is generated, the symbol variation stops without generating the specific effect reception period. An effect pattern that can be performed may be prepared.

  Further, in the production examples shown in FIGS. 280 to 283, for the “prohibited period during which the setting process to the automatic button production state is not permitted”, the production pattern (for example, the super reach state) with a relatively low expectation degree of jackpot It is desirable that an effect pattern having a relatively high expectation degree of jackpot (for example, an effect pattern in which a super reach state occurs) has a higher appearance ratio than an effect pattern in which no occurrence occurs. That is, in this case, the opportunity to execute the setting process to the automatic button effect state over a predetermined period is forcibly lost despite the appearance of the effect pattern with a relatively high expectation degree of jackpot. It becomes possible to encourage the player to participate in the operation, and it is expected that the player's participation consciousness for winning the big hit will be increased.

  However, if the setting process for the automatic button effect state is completely prohibited for a predetermined period, it will be unavoidable that the player who wants the automatic button effect state will not be affected. As shown, when a certain amount of time has elapsed, the player can cancel the prohibition period early, and when it is released, the setting operation by the player to the automatic button effect state is returned to a state that is allowed again. It is desirable to make it.

  Regarding the setting operation to the automatic button effect state, the operation target set by the operation by the player may be other operation means such as a touch panel, a sword ornament 5001, and a cross key in addition to the operation button 410. In addition, the prohibition period may be ended early by operating an operation object different from the operation object used when setting to the automatic button effect state, or when setting to the automatic button effect state. The prohibition period may be terminated early by operating the operation target to be used. However, when the prohibited period is ended early by operating the operation target used when setting the automatic button effect state, the operation mode (single press, long press, etc.) should be different from each other. Is desirable.

  As described above, in FIGS. 280 to 283, an example of an effect in which “automatic button effect state setting process” is adopted as “specific process related to effect” is shown. Not limited to. However, with regard to the “specific processing related to the effect”, regardless of the type of symbol variation performed as the effect pattern according to the result of the jackpot determination, the operation means may be operated within the symbol variation execution period. It is desirable that it can be executed by operation.

[Automatic rendering function for movable operation means]
As described above, in the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), an operation by the player within the effect acceptance period (the first specific effective period or the second specific effective period when the above-described example is applied). Even if is not performed, it is possible to execute a process (automatic rendering function) that causes the same change to the rendering as when the operation was performed. In addition, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, even if it is during the symbol change execution period, an operation on a predetermined operation means (for example, the operation button 410) The settings related to the automatic button effect state can be made, and the simplification of such an operation makes it possible to perform the setting related to the automatic button effect state while keeping a close watch on the progress of the effect during the design variation. ing.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, as the operation means, in addition to the operation button 410, a movable operation provided between the original position and the operation position so as to be operable by a predetermined driving force. Means (here, a sword ornament 5001), and in an automatic button effect state (specific effect state), the player operates within the effect reception period for the movable operation means (here, the sword ornament 5001). Even when the operation is not performed, a process (automatic rendering function) that causes the same change as that when the operation is performed to the rendering can be executed.

  By the way, when the production reception period for such a movable operation means (here, the sword ornament 5001) occurs, for example, as shown in FIG. 204 (G2), the movable operation means is moved to the original position by a predetermined driving force. In some cases, the player is given an opportunity to operate to move to the operating position first and operate the movable operating means in the moved state. In this operation opportunity, the production reception may be performed by an operation of moving from the operation position to a position different from the original position instead of an operation of returning from the operation position to the original position.

  However, when such a production reception period occurs, there is a possibility that some abnormality / failure has occurred in the movable operation means (here, the sword decorative body 5001), and thereby the movable operation means (here, If there is a case where the sword decorative body 5001) cannot be driven from the original position to the operation position, the operation opportunity as shown in FIG. There is a concern that a post-operation effect cannot be generated. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, some abnormality / failure has occurred in the movable operating means (here, the sword decorative body 5001), and thereby the movable operating means (here, Even if the sword decorative body 5001) cannot be driven from the original position to the operation position and an effect reception period as shown in FIG. 204 (G2) occurs, the automatic button effect state is controlled. If a specific operation by the player from the operation position is detected within the production reception period, a process (automatic production function) that causes the production to produce the same change can be executed. .

  According to such a configuration, even if some abnormality / failure occurs in the movable operation means (here, the sword decorative body 5001) and it becomes inoperable, the automatic operation function can be used to move the movable operation means. A post-operation effect using the operation means can be appropriately made to appear.

  However, when some abnormality or failure occurs in the movable operation means (here, the sword ornament 5001) and it cannot operate, the operation itself on the movable operation means (here, the sword ornament 5001) Since it is in a difficult situation, if an operation to the movable operation means (here, the sword ornament 5001) is required to set the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), the automatic button The setting to the effect state (specific effect state) cannot be performed, and eventually the post-operation effect corresponding to the effect reception for the movable operation means (here, the sword decorative body 5001) cannot be generated.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, first, in the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), the operation button 410 and the movable operation means (here, the sword ornament 5001) and No matter which production reception period occurs, the same production change is caused as when the operation means (the operation button 410 or the sword decorative body 5001 here) on which the operation opportunity is given is operated. Processing can be executed (automatic rendering function). On this basis, the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) can be set only by operating the operation button 410 out of the operation button 410 and the movable operation means (here, the sword decorative body 5001). It is supposed to be.

  That is, in this case, not only on the movable operation means (here, the sword ornament 5001) that may not be able to operate when an abnormality / failure occurs, only by operating the general push-type operation button 410, An automatic button effect state (specific effect state) corresponding to both the operation button 410 and the movable operation means (here, the sword ornament 5001) can be generated. Therefore, even if an abnormality / failure occurs in the movable operation means (here, the sword ornament 5001) during the symbol variation execution period, the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) is set by operating the operation button 410. By performing the above, it becomes possible to appropriately generate the post-operation effect according to the effect reception for the movable operation means (here, the sword ornament 5001).

  In order to suitably ensure the operability at the time of such an abnormality / failure, the operation means (here, the operation button 410) used for the setting operation to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) It is important that it is provided as an operating means that is basically non-driven (to the extent that it vibrates even if there is a drive system) so that it is not subject to the restoration process described above in the event of an abnormality or failure. I can say that.

  However, even if an abnormality / failure occurs in the movable operation means (here, the sword decoration body 5001), as long as the movable operation means (here, the sword decoration body 5001) maintains a stopped state, the abnormality / failure occurs. Since it is difficult for the player side to recognize that it is in the state, it cannot be expected that the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) will be set.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, when an abnormality / failure occurs in the movable operating means (here, the sword ornament 5001) at the start timing (or end timing) of the symbol variation. The restoration operation for returning the movable operation means (here, the sword ornament 5001) to normal (original position) is executed. The restoration process can be executed as the above-described processing content. For example, a restoration operation (an operation for 5 seconds) for returning the movable operation means (here, the sword ornament 5001) to the original position is performed. The process is repeatedly executed up to a predetermined number of times (for example, 3 times) until it properly returns to the original position.

  According to such a configuration, the movable operation is confirmed by confirming that the restoration process is started with respect to the movable operation means (here, the sword decorative body 5001) at the start timing (or end timing) of the symbol variation. The player can recognize that the means (here, the sword decorative body 5001) is in an abnormal state or failure. Furthermore, as a result of the restoration process being performed, it is confirmed whether or not the movable operation means (here, the sword decorative body 5001) has been properly returned to the original position, so that the movable operation means (here, the sword is displayed). The player side determines whether the state in which an abnormality / failure has occurred due to the successful restoration process for the decorative body 5001) has been resolved, or whether the state in which an abnormality / failure has occurred due to the failure of the restoration process is continued. Be able to recognize. That is, in this case, when the player recognizes that the state in which the restoration process has failed and the abnormality / failure has continued continues, the operation on the operation button 410 causes the automatic button effect state (specific effect state). Thus, even if there is an abnormality / failure in the movable operating means (here, the sword decorative body 5001), the movable operating means (here, the sword decorative body 5001) is not affected. It is possible to appropriately generate a post-operation effect according to the effect reception.

  However, after confirming that the restoration process for the movable operation means (here, the sword ornament 5001) in a state where an abnormality / failure has occurred, the setting operation to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) is performed. Even if it is performed, an effect reception period for the movable operation means (here, the sword ornament 5001) occurs before the automatic button effect state occurs (for example, during the execution period of the restoration process). If there is, there is a concern that the post-operation effect according to the reception of the effect on the movable operation means (here, the sword ornament 5001) cannot be properly generated.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, a plurality of special performance reception periods can be generated in which an operation opportunity is given to the movable operation means (here, the sword decorative body 5001). No matter which production pattern is selected and executed based on the result of the big hit determination, the maximum time required for the restoration processing for the movable operation means (here, the sword decorative body 5001) (restoration operation (5 (Time when second operation) is repeated up to the upper limit number (for example, 3 times)) and the time required for setting operation to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) (here 2 seconds) It is possible to execute a process for producing a presentation so that the special presentation acceptance period is not generated only after the passage.

  According to such a configuration, when the symbol variation is started with an effect pattern that can generate a special effect reception period in which an operation opportunity is given to the movable operation means (here, the sword decorative body 5001), the movable operation is started. Even if an abnormality / failure occurs in the means (here, the sword ornament 5001), the player recognizes that the abnormality / failure has occurred before the special performance reception period occurs. Since the setting operation to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) can be performed, the post-operation effect corresponding to the effect reception for the movable operation means (here, the sword decorative body 5001) is appropriate. Can be generated. In other words, in the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), even if the special effect acceptance period occurs in a state where abnormality / failure has occurred in the movable operation means (here, the sword ornament 5001), the special effect is generated. The same change as that when the operation with respect to the movable operation means is performed within the reception period is caused to the effect.

  FIG. 284 is a time chart showing an example of such effect processing.

  As shown in FIG. 284, in this example of the effect process, when an abnormality / failure occurs in the movable operation means (here, the sword ornament 5001), the movable operation means (here) Then, the restoration process for returning the sword ornament 5001) to normal is executed for a maximum of 15 seconds. The setting operation for the automatic button effect state requires 2 seconds. In addition, the special effect reception period can be continued for a maximum of 3 seconds, and the post-operation effect corresponding to the reception of the operation on the movable operation means (here, the sword decorative body 5001) is included. It takes 10 seconds.

  In view of such time setting values, first, as an effect pattern (variation pattern) that can generate a special effect acceptance period, 15 seconds (restoration processing), 2 seconds (setting operation), 3 seconds (special effect acceptance) Period) and 10 seconds (post-operation effect) are allotted a time longer than “30 seconds”, and 15 seconds (restoration process) and 2 seconds (setting operation) are added to “17”. Unless the effect is advanced so that the special effect acceptance period is generated at a timing later than “second”, the pattern change (in the state where the abnormality / failure occurs in the movable operation means (here, the sword decorative body 5001)) It is not possible to ensure the above-described performance when the performance pattern that can generate the special performance reception period is started.

  Therefore, in the figure, as the plurality of effect patterns that can be selected based on the result of the big hit determination, effect patterns A to E to which different times (design variation times of 11 seconds to 60 seconds) are assigned are illustrated. However, in the effect patterns A to C to which only a time shorter than the above-described addition time “30 seconds” is allocated, only the effect progress in which the special effect acceptance period cannot occur is executed. . On the other hand, in the production patterns D and E to which a time longer than “30 seconds” that is the above-described addition time is assigned, a special production acceptance period can be generated, but symbol variation is started. By making it possible to execute only the performance development that cannot cause the special performance reception period at the timing before “17 seconds (addition time of 15 seconds (restoration process) and 2 seconds (setting operation))”, To ensure the above-described performance when the movement of the movable operation means (here, the sword decorative body 5001) has an abnormality / failure and the pattern change (the production pattern that can generate the special production reception period) is started. I have to.

  In the example related to the effect process, the special effect acceptance period can be generated in all of the plurality of effect patterns to which the time longer than the above-described addition time “30 seconds” is assigned. The special effect acceptance period may be generated only in a part of the plurality of effect patterns to which the time longer than “30 seconds” is assigned.

  However, in reality, if the special production acceptance period may occur immediately after the addition time of 15 seconds (restoration process) and 2 seconds (setting operation) has elapsed since the start of symbol variation, the restoration process will fail. If the setting operation to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) is not performed immediately after recognizing the fact, the special effect acceptance period is generated with the setting changed to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state). It is not realistic because it cannot be done. That is, when the player recognizes that the restoration process has failed, it usually requires time to determine whether or not to perform the setting operation to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state). If the above time setting values are not designed in consideration of such time values, it can be said that there is no effectiveness with respect to the above-described effects.

  In this respect, the design including such a time value is that a plurality of operation effective periods (for example, 8 Seconds), or a long press effective period (for example, 10 seconds) in which an effect is received when an operation means to which an operation opportunity is given is maintained in an operation state for a predetermined time or more and an effect after operation is generated In the effective period (production reception period), even if the operation is started after the effective period is started, the operation and the long press are repeated a plurality of times / appropriate times until the effective period ends. Can be done over.

  In view of such a fact, in the above time setting, instead of 2 seconds (setting operation), a plurality of operation effective periods (for example, 8 seconds) or long press effective periods (for example, 10 seconds) are used. It is desirable to make it. That is, in this case, as an effect pattern (variation pattern) that can generate a special effect acceptance period, “15 seconds (restoration process)”, “8 seconds or 10 seconds (multiple operation effective period or long press effective period)”, A time longer than “36 seconds” or “38 seconds” obtained by adding “3 seconds (special effect reception period)” and “10 seconds (post-operation effect)” respectively, and “15 seconds (Restoration process) ”and“ 8 seconds or 10 seconds (multiple operation effective period or long press effective period) ”are added, and a special performance reception period is generated at a timing later than“ 23 seconds ”or“ 25 seconds ” In this way, the effect is advanced, and only the effect pattern E among the effect patterns A to E can be executed as the effect pattern that satisfies the condition.

  It should be noted that the multi-operation effective period (for example, 8 seconds) and the long press effective period (for example, 10 seconds) are not necessarily generated in the effect pattern (variation pattern) that can generate the special effect reception period. It may be generated with a different production pattern. Further, the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) may generate only one of a plurality of operation effective periods (for example, 8 seconds) and a long press effective period (for example, 10 seconds). Will set the length of the valid period on the generating side in place of 2 seconds (setting operation). In addition, when the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) can generate both a valid operation period (for example, 8 seconds) and a long press effective period (for example, 10 seconds), these effective periods It is desirable to set the longer side of 2 instead of 2 seconds (setting operation).

  In the gaming state in which the time reduction function is enabled, it is required to digest the symbol variation one after another in a shorter time. Therefore, in the gaming state in which the time reduction function is enabled, each time setting described above This design may not necessarily be performed. However, in this case, there is a concern that a special effect reception period may occur during a period in which the restoration process is being performed on the movable operation means (here, the sword ornament 5001). Therefore, even during a period in which the restoration process is being performed on the movable operation means (here, the sword decorative body 5001), the control to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) is performed by the setting operation by the player. It is desirable to be able to obtain. According to such a configuration, the post-operation effect as an effect using the movable operation means is in a period during which the restoration process is being performed on the movable operation means (here, the sword ornament 5001). Can be executed, and an efficient process in which both the restoration process for the movable operating means (here, the sword ornament 5001) and the post-operation effect can be realized. This process is not limited to the gaming state in which the time reduction function is enabled, and may be applied to the gaming state in which the time reduction function is not enabled. In this case, the design for each time setting described above is used. Will not be performed.

  Moreover, in the example concerning the effect process described with reference to FIG. 284, the effect using the movable operation means may be executed as one of the effects shown in FIGS. 190 to 261. . When a specific operation-related effect is executed, the “effect using movable operation means” shown in the figure is realized as an effect that sequentially performs a specific operation-related effect, a special effect reception period, and an effect after operation. The Rukoto.

  Further, a special effect reception period in which an operation opportunity is given to the movable operation means (here, the sword ornament 5001) is generated only when the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) is controlled. When the special effect reception period occurs, even if no operation is performed, the effect reception for the movable operation means is always performed within the special effect reception period, and the post-operation effect may appear. When the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) is not controlled, there is an opportunity to operate the movable operation means (here, the sword ornament 5001) at least during the symbol variation in the normal game state. The special reception period that is given does not occur, but the production reception period in which an operation opportunity is given to the operation means (in this case, the operation button 410) that is not subject to the above-described restoration processing in the case of abnormality or failure is generated. Is possible. An effect reception period in which an operation opportunity is given to an operation means (in this case, the operation button 410) that is not the target of the above-described restoration process in the case of an abnormality / failure is controlled to an automatic button effect state (a specific effect state). It can also occur when. When such a configuration is adopted, the design for each time setting described above may be performed, but the movable operation means (here, the sword decorative body 5001) may be provided without performing the design for each time setting described above. It is possible to ensure the above-described performance when a performance pattern that can generate a special performance reception period is started in a state where an abnormality or failure has occurred.

  Further, in this example of the effect process, control to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) is performed by the setting operation by the player, but control to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) is performed. Is not necessarily performed by the player's operation, for example, it is controlled based on the result of the big hit determination, or the automatic button effect state setting itself is not performed, and the automatic effect function always functions. It may be provided as a possible gaming machine.

[Post-operation effects that suggest automatically accepted operation targets]
As described above, in the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), the first reception effect (the effect in which an operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410) according to the establishment of a predetermined effect condition is executed. Even if no operation is performed on the operation button 410 within the period, when a predetermined timing arrives within the period during which the first reception effect is executed, the effect reception is automatically generated and the operation button 410 is operated. The same post-operation effects are executed. In addition, an operation on the sword ornament 5001 is performed within a period in which a second reception effect (an effect in which an operation opportunity is given to the sword ornament 5001) according to establishment of an effect condition different from the predetermined effect condition is executed. Similarly, when the second reception effect is executed, when the predetermined timing arrives, the effect reception is automatically generated, and the same post-operation effect as when the sword ornament 5001 is operated is performed. It is supposed to be executed. Therefore, even when the operation button 410 and the sword decorative body 5001 on which the operation opportunity is not given are erroneously operated when the reception effect occurs, the operation opportunity is lost during the operation. It is suppressed that the situation where it becomes impossible to confirm the post-production is generated. The “predetermined production condition” and the “production condition different from the predetermined production condition” can be established separately as a result of the production determination based on the result of the jackpot determination.

  However, if there is a case where a production reception is automatically generated at a place where the player does not know due to “look away” or the like, and a post-operation production corresponding to the production reception is executed, the post-operation production becomes an operation target. The player is generated without any involvement with the operating means (for example, the operation button 410). That is, in this case, since the player cannot recognize which of the operation buttons 410 and the sword decorative body 5001 is the post-operation effect that occurs, the first reception effect and the second reception effect. If the degree of expectation is different, it may be impossible to recognize it, and there is a concern that the entertainment interest will decline.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, the ratio of the predetermined performance condition being satisfied (the ratio of the first reception effect is executed) when the symbols change, The determination concerning the various effects (effect determination based on the result of the jackpot determination) is performed so as to be higher than the ratio that is satisfied (the ratio at which the second reception effect is executed), and within the symbol variation based on the result of the determination Control related to production is performed. As a result, even if the production reception is automatically generated at a place where the player does not know, it is possible to predict that the first reception production is likely to be executed in proportion. Become.

  Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, when the production reception is automatically generated, the “image suggesting the type of the operation target (the first image) If it is 1 reception effect, it corresponds to the button image BTG, and if it is the 2nd reception effect, it corresponds to the sword decoration image SYG) ”, while maintaining this as a display state without being hidden, The post-operation production based on the reception is started. According to such a configuration, the post-operation effect is executed while the “image suggesting the type of the operation target” is displayed even when the effect reception is automatically generated without the player's knowledge. As a result, it becomes possible to suitably suppress the inability to recognize the post-operation effect caused by the operation on either the operation button 410 or the sword ornament 5001.

  In this case, the display mode (for example, color and transmittance) and the display position of the “image suggesting the type of operation target” may be the same before and after the post-operation effect is generated. However, what is important is that the type of the operation means that is the operation target is expressed as a display on the effect display device 1600 when the effect after the operation is started. That's fine. Further, when the post-operation effect is generated based on the reception of the effect generated by the operation by the player, the “image suggesting the type of operation target” may be hidden when the post-operation effect is generated. As in the case where the above-described production reception is automatically generated, the post-operation production based on the operation by the player is started while the “image suggesting the type of operation target” is not hidden and is maintained in the display state. You may do it. However, in view of simplification of design and processing load, regardless of whether or not the production reception is automatically generated, the “image suggesting the type of operation target” is not hidden and is maintained in the display state. Therefore, it is desirable to start the post-operation effect based on the operation by the player.

  FIG. 285 shows an example of the progress of the production when the post-operation production is started while the “image suggesting the type of operation target” is not hidden and maintained in the display state when the production reception is automatically generated. It is a time chart which shows. FIG. 286 and FIG. 287 are diagrams illustrating an effect display example that appears on the effect display device 1600 when an effect pattern that is effected in the manner shown in FIG. 285 is executed. In this production example, description will be made on the assumption that production reception can be automatically generated.

  That is, the specific effect pattern that can be set as the “effect reception period allowing the reception (operation)” of the timing tf1 to tf3 in the symbol change execution period while being controlled in the automatic button effect state. Is started based on the result of the big hit determination, as shown in FIG. 286 (a), in the effect display device 1600, the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is first displayed in a variable manner.

  In this specific effect pattern, as shown in FIG. 286 (b), it is confirmed that the reception (operation) of the effect will be allowed soon before the arrival of the timing tf1 (see FIG. 285) in the symbol change execution period. A specific operation-related effect exemplified in FIGS. 243 to 246 or the like (may be a specific operation-related effect exemplified separately) is performed as an indication effect to suggest. That is, as described above, in the specific operation-related effects exemplified in FIGS. 243 to 246, an operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410 and an operation opportunity is given to the sword ornament 5001. A common display effect is performed, and while the common display effect is performed, it is concealed which of the operation buttons 410 and the sword decorative body 5001 is given an operation opportunity. . However, when a predetermined time elapses after the start of the specific operation-related effect and the timing tf1 (see FIG. 285) arrives, the operation button 410 should be operated as the first effect result having a relatively low expectation. A production situation showing that it is in the state appears, or a production situation showing that the sword ornament 5001 is in a state to be operated appears as a second production result having a relatively high expectation. Which of the operation button 410 with a low degree and the sword ornament 5001 with a relatively high expectation is given an operation opportunity is shown.

  FIG. 286 (c) shows the result of the specific operation-related effect shown in FIG. 286 (b). As a result, the operation is performed as the first effect result with relatively low expectation at timing tf1 (see FIG. 285). A production situation that indicates that the button 410 is in a state to be operated appears, and a production situation in which the first reception production in which an operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410 is started (based on the result of the jackpot determination) The first production condition (the production pattern in which the production result shown in FIG. 286 (d) described later appears) or the second production condition (the production in which the production result shown in FIG. 286 (e) described later appears) is displayed. The production situation) when the pattern) is satisfied.

  In this production situation, as shown in the figure, a button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410 (a bag image imitating the operation button 410) is displayed in the display area and prompts an operation on the operation button 410. An instruction display (here, a character display such as “Press”, an arrow display in the downward direction, and a bar display indicating the remaining time during which an effect reception is allowed) appears. At this time, the operation button 410 to be given an operation opportunity is in a light emitting state, and this also prompts the operation on the operation button 410.

  However, in this effect example, the operation button 410 is not operated within a period (FIG. 285: timings tf1 to tf3) set so that the reception of the effect is permitted, and a predetermined timing (here) Here, it is assumed that the automatic performance function for the operation button 410 is activated at the timing tf2 (see FIG. 285).

  That is, in this case, the same change as that in the case where the presentation is accepted by the operation on the operation button 410 within the period (FIG. 285: timing tf1 to tf3) set so that the acceptance of the presentation is allowed is generated. It becomes. Here, based on the result of the effect determination performed at the time of the symbol variation, “a low-expected aspect effect (the figure is not displayed on the effect display device 1600 and the chance!” Is displayed on the effect display device 1600). 286 (d)) ”or“ a specific decorative member SDY (a glimpse) ”operates, and a high-expected aspect effect is displayed on the effect display device 1600 (see FIG. 286 (e)). ) "Is executed as a post-operation effect.

  However, even if the post-operation effect is executed in any form, the post-operation effect is started in a state in which the bag image (button image BTG) imitating the operation button 410 is not hidden and maintained. Even if the production reception is automatically generated without the player's knowledge, the post-operation production is performed according to the “production reception for the operation button 410” (relative expectation). Can be recognized as a post-operation effect on the lower side.

  In this effect example, as shown in FIG. 285, the period during which the effect reception is allowed is terminated early at timing tf2 when the automatic effect function for the operation button 410 is activated and the effect reception is automatically generated. It will be. After this, while the acceptance of the production is not allowed, the post-operation production is started with the bag image (button image BTG) imitating the operation button 410 being displayed, but the operation button 410 is imitated. The haze image (button image BTG) is hidden before the timing tf5 at which the post-operation effect ends.

  According to such a configuration, in the period from the start of the post-operation effect to the end of the operation, the bag image imitating the operation means (in this case, the operation button 410) that is the operation target is displayed. Period (timing tf2 to tf4) and a period (timing tf4 to tf5) in which no cohabitation image is displayed appear. Therefore, even when the post-operation effect is started with the haze image imitating the operation means (in this case, the operation button 410) that is the operation target being displayed, the haze image is not displayed. It is expected that the tension feeling due to the fact that the post-operation effect must be confirmed before being performed is suitably maintained.

  In this effect example, the period from timing tf2 to tf3 and the period from timing tf3 to tf4 are set to the same length. According to such a configuration, when a time that doubles the “remaining time indicated by the bar display” has elapsed when the production reception is automatically generated, the operation means (in this case, the operation button) 410), it is possible to recognize that the haze image is hidden, so that it is possible to prevent the haze image from being missed (the haze image is hidden during the post-operation effect). It is expected to suppress the decrease in the entertainment interest when played. In this case, the bar display may be continued without being hidden when the production reception is automatically generated.

  On the other hand, in this effect example, at the timing tf1 (see FIG. 285) after the specific operation-related effect shown in FIG. 286 (b) is performed, the effect situation shown in FIG. The production situation shown in 287 (f) (the third production condition (the production pattern in which the production result shown in FIG. 287 (g) described later appears) in the production determination performed based on the result of the jackpot determination), or the fourth There may be a case where an effect condition (the effect situation when the effect pattern in which an effect result shown in FIG. 287 (h) described later appears) is satisfied.

  Also in this effect situation (FIG. 287 (f)), as shown in the figure, a button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410 (a bag image imitating the operation button 410) is displayed in the display area. An instruction display for prompting an operation to the operation button 410 (here, a character display such as “press”, a downward arrow display, and a bar display indicating the remaining time during which the reception of an effect is allowed) appears. At this time, the point that the operation button 410 to be given an operation opportunity is in a light emitting state is the same as the effect situation shown in FIG. 286 (c).

  However, in the effect situation shown in FIG. 287 (f), the button image BTG (a spear image imitating the operation button 410) is displayed in a specific manner (here, a manner of wearing a flame). Compared with the normal mode (in this case, the mode that does not wear a flame) that appeared in the production situation shown in 286 (c), the proportion of the big hit symbol that appears in the symbol variation (relative expectation as the post-operation production) It is suggested that there is a high situation in which a high performance result (in this case, the rate at which “hot heat !!”) appears).

  Also in this effect example, the operation button 410 is not operated within a period (FIG. 285: timings tf1 to tf3) set so that reception of the effect is permitted, and a predetermined timing (here) In this case, it is assumed that the automatic performance function for the operation button 410 is activated at timing tf2 (see FIG. 285).

  In this regard, even when the effect reception is automatically generated when the button image BTG is in the effect state displayed in the specific mode, as shown in FIGS. 287 (g) and (h), the button image BTG is in the normal mode. As in the above-described case (FIGS. 286 (d) and (e)) where the production reception is automatically generated when the production status is displayed, the “specific decorative member SDY (a combination object) does not operate and the production display device. In 1600, a chance to display a low expectation mode (see FIG. 287 (g)) ”or“ a specific decorative member SDY (a glimpse) ”operates, and a stunning heat! The displayed high-expected aspect effect (see FIG. 287 (h)) ”is executed as a post-operation effect (the same change as when the effect was accepted by an operation on the operation button 410).

  However, here, as shown in FIGS. 287 (g) and (h), the haze image imitating the operation button 410 is not hidden, even if the post-operation effect is executed in any manner. The post-operation effect is started in a state where this is displayed in a specific mode (here, a mode of wearing a flame). As a result, even if the production reception is automatically generated at a place that the player does not know, the post-operation production is performed in response to the “production reception for the operation button 410”, and a highly expected specific aspect It is possible to recognize that the button image BTG has been displayed (in this embodiment, wearing a flame).

  That is, in this effect example, even when the same effect mode (for example, chance!) Appears as the post-operation effect, the operation is performed while the bag image imitating the operation button 410 is displayed in a specific mode. When the post-production is started (see, for example, FIG. 287 (g)), when the post-operation production is started while the haze image imitating the operation button 410 is displayed in the normal mode (for example, (See FIG. 286 (d)), the ratio of appearance of jackpot symbols is higher than that, so that it is possible to recognize such a difference in performance even after the start of the post-operation effect. Will be expected to maintain.

  In this production example as well, the timing when the period during which the production acceptance is permitted ends, the timing at which the haze image (specific mode) imitating the operation button 410 is hidden, and the period from timing tf2 to tf3 The point where the period of timing tf3 to tf4 is set to the same length is as shown in FIG. 285, which is the same as the case of the example described above with reference to FIGS. 286 (c) to (e). is there.

  On the other hand, in this effect example, at timing tf1 (see FIG. 285) after the specific operation-related effect shown in FIG. 286 (b) is performed, it is shown in FIG. 286 (c) and FIG. 287 (f). The production situation shown in FIG. 287 (i) (the effect result shown in FIG. 287 (j) described later) appears in the production situation shown in FIG. 287 (i), not in any production situation. There may be cases where an effect pattern) or a sixth effect condition (the effect situation when an effect pattern in which an effect result shown in FIG. 287 (k) described later appears) is satisfied.

  In this effect situation (FIG. 287 (i)), as shown in the figure, a sword decoration image SYG (a sword image simulating the sword decoration body 5001) corresponding to the sword decoration body 5001 is displayed in the display area. In addition, an instruction display for prompting an operation on the sword decorative body 5001 (here, a character display such as “Put the sword”, an arrow display in the lower right direction, and a bar display indicating the remaining time during which the performance reception is allowed) Appears. At this time, the sword ornament 5001 to be given an operation opportunity is moved to the operation position, thereby allowing the player to operate the original position.

  Also in this effect example, the operation means (here, the sword decorative body 5001) that is the operation target within the period (FIG. 285: timings tf1 to tf3) set so that the reception of the effect is permitted is operated. Instead, it is assumed that the automatic performance function for the sword ornament 5001 is activated at a predetermined timing (here, timing tf2 (see FIG. 285)) within the effective period.

  In this regard, even when the production reception is automatically generated when the sword decoration image SYG is displayed, the production status in which the button image BTG is displayed as shown in FIGS. 287 (j) and (k). As in the above-described case (FIG. 286 (d), (e) or FIG. 287 (g), (h)) in which the production reception is automatically generated when First, the low expectation mode effect (see FIG. 287 (j)) in which the chance !! is displayed on the effect display device 1600, or “the specific decorative member SDY (a glimpse)” operates, and the effect display device 1600 “Highly expected aspect effect (see FIG. 287 (k))” is displayed as a post-operation effect (the same change as when the effect was accepted by an operation on the sword ornament 5001). It has become.

  However, here, as shown in FIGS. 287 (j) and (k), the sword decoration image SYG imitating the sword decoration body 5001 is not displayed even if the post-operation effect is executed in any manner. The post-operation effect is started in the displayed state. As a result, even if the production reception is automatically generated without the player's knowledge, it can be recognized that the post-operation production is performed in response to the “production reception for the sword decorative body 5001”. Become.

  That is, in this production example, even when the same production mode (for example, chance!) Appears as the post-operation production, the operation is performed while the sword decoration image SYG imitating the sword decoration body 5001 is displayed. When the post-production is started (see, for example, FIG. 287 (j)), the post-operation production is started while the cocoon image imitating the operation button 410 is displayed in the normal mode or the specific mode. (For example, see FIG. 286 (d) and FIG. 287 (g)) Since the rate of appearance of jackpot symbols is higher than that, it is expected that the game entertainment will be suitably maintained. .

  Also in this effect example, the timing when the period during which the reception of the effect is permitted ends, the timing when the spear image (sword decorative image SYG) imitating the sword decorative body 5001 is hidden, and the timing tf2 to tf3 The period and the period from timing tf3 to tf4 are set to the same length as shown in FIG. 285. In the case of the example described above with reference to FIGS. 286 (c) to (e) Is the same.

  According to the production examples shown in FIGS. 285 to 287, since the post-operation effect is generated in a state where the operation target suggestion image is displayed in any of a plurality of modes having different jackpot expectations, the operation target suggestion is performed. Both the image mode and the post-operation effect mode can be confirmed at the same time, and the game entertainment can be improved.

  In the production examples shown in FIGS. 285 to 287, when the production situation shown in FIG. 286 (c) appears, when the production situation shown in FIG. 287 (f) appears, FIG. 287 (i) When the production situation shown in the above appears, the same production content appears as the post-operation production. However, instead of this, the production situation shown in FIG. 286 (c) (the situation where a reception production where an operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410 has occurred) and the production situation shown in FIG. 287 (f) are shown. In the production situation shown in FIG. 287 (i), the same post-operation production is generated but the reception production in which an operation opportunity is given to the sword decorative body 5001 is produced. A post effect (for example, a post-operation effect shown in FIG. 269) may be generated. In addition, a different post-operation effect is produced for each effect situation in the effect situation shown in FIG. 286 (c), the effect situation shown in FIG. 287 (f), and the effect situation shown in FIG. 287 (i). You may make it appear. When these other examples are adopted, the precursor effect shown in FIG. 286 (b) may not necessarily be executed.

  In the above-described effect examples shown in FIGS. 285 to 287, after executing the “precursor effect shown in FIG. 286 (b) (here, a specific operation-related effect)” indicating that a reception effect will occur soon, “Reception effect in which an operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410 (production situation shown in FIGS. 286 (c) and 287 (f))” and “Operation opportunity is given to the sword decorative body 5001. "Reception effect (the effect status shown in FIG. 287 (i))" is generated, but "Reception effect (to FIG. 287 (i) where the operation opportunity is given to the sword decorative body 5001" is given. It is not always necessary to generate the “presentation status shown)”. That is, in this case, as shown in FIG. 286 (c), a reception effect in which an operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410 at the timing tf1 after the sign effect that suggests that the reception effect will be generated soon is executed. One of the effect status and the effect status shown in FIG. 287 (f) is displayed. Even in such a case, the operation button 410 is pressed when the effect after the operation is started. The degree of expectation for the post-operation effect will differ depending on whether the imitation image is displayed in the normal mode or whether it is displayed in a specific mode with a high degree of expectation (in this case, a mode of wearing a flame) Therefore, it is expected that the game entertainment will be suitably maintained.

  In this case, it is desirable that the content of the sign effect is executed as a sign that cannot appear in the sign effect when an operation opportunity is given to the sword ornament 5001. In addition, a common sign is displayed when the haze image imitating the operation button 410 is displayed in a normal mode and when the haze image is displayed in a specific mode with high expectation (here, a mode wearing a flame). It is desirable to execute the effect and to develop the effect so that the habit image imitating the operation button 410 appears in the normal mode or the specific mode as a result.

  In addition, the habit image imitating the operation button 410 is displayed in one of three or more modes including a normal mode and a specific mode, and the degree of expectation varies depending on which of the modes is displayed. You may do it. However, in the above-described effect example, at the timing tf1, even if the haze image imitating the operation button 410 is displayed in any of these modes, the post-operation effect is started while the mode of the haze image is displayed. It will be.

  In addition, after a specific sign effect appears, “the effect situation shown in FIG. 286 (c)”, “the effect situation shown in FIG. 287 (f)”, and “the effect situation shown in FIG. 286 (c)”. As in the case of the effect display device 1600, the spear image imitating the operation button 410 is displayed in a normal manner. However, when there is no operation by the player, the automatic effect function for the operation button 410 is not activated and the effect after the operation is performed. Any of the production situations (not shown) may not be executed. In other words, in this case, when a reception effect is generated in which a spear image imitating the operation button 410 is displayed in a normal manner, it is understood whether the automatic effect function for the operation button 410 is activated when there is no operation by the player. It is expected that the feeling of tension when the reception effect occurs (a feeling of tension about whether the player should operate and start the operation after the operation) should be suitably maintained. Become so. On the other hand, when the spear image imitating the operation button 410 is displayed in a specific manner, even if there is no operation by the player, the automatic effect function for the operation button 410 is activated and a post-operation effect always occurs. Therefore, coupled with suggesting that the degree of expectation is high, it is possible to suitably improve the gaming interest.

  It should be noted that, based on the result of the big hit determination, not the “effect situation shown in FIG. 286 (c)”, but “the effect button shown in FIG. 286 (c)” is similar to the operation button 410 in the effect display device 1600.摸 When an image is displayed in a normal manner, but when there is no operation by the player, an automatic effect function for the operation button 410 is not activated and an effect state (not shown) in which an effect after operation is not executed is generated If the operation button 410 is not operated before the production reception period ends, the post-operation production is not executed. However, in this case as well, when the production acceptance period ends and the production situation is such that production acceptance is not permitted, the haze image that imitates the operation button 410 is not hidden, but is displayed in the normal mode. Is desirable. According to such a configuration, although the reception effect in which the bag image imitating the operation button 410 is displayed in the normal mode is generated, the post-operation effect is not executed without the operation by the player. When the habit image imitating the operation button 410 is displayed in the normal mode at the next reception effect, the automatic effect function for the operation button 410 is activated. In particular, it is expected to prompt the player to operate without excessive expectation.

  In the above-described effect examples shown in FIGS. 285 to 287, when an effect is received by the automatic effect function, the display mode of the spear image imitating the operation button 410 or the spear image imitating the sword decorative body 5001 is changed. Although the post-operation effect is started in a state in which these simulated images are displayed in the changed display mode, the operation button 410 is imitated with the display mode and the display position in the effect reception period. The post-operation effect may be started in a state where an image or a spear image imitating the sword ornament 5001 is displayed.

  The post-operation effect that is started while displaying the spear image imitating the operation button 410 or the spear image imitating the sword decorative body 5001 is a display effect on the effect display device 1600 and light emission by a lamp provided on the game board 5. Any one of an effect, an effect by sound, and a movable effect by a decorative accessory may be used, or an appropriate combination of these effects. As will be described later, a first post-operation effect that starts while displaying a spear image simulating the operation button 410 or a spear image simulating the sword ornament 5001, and a spear image or sword decoration simulating the operation button 410 A second post-operation effect that is started after the timing tf4 when the haze image imitating the body 5001 is not displayed may be executed.

  In the above-described effect examples shown in FIGS. 285 to 287, when an effect is received by the automatic effect function, an operation is performed while displaying a spear image imitating the operation button 410 or a spear image imitating the sword ornament 5001. The post-production was started. However, in terms of processing load, even when an effect is received by an operation by the player, the post-operation effect is started while the spear image imitating the operation button 410 or the spear image imitating the sword ornament 5001 is displayed. In this way, it is desirable that the post-operation effect is executed in the same process.

  In the above-described effect examples shown in FIGS. 285 to 287, as in the case of the effect examples described later, a spear image imitating the operation button 410 and a spear image imitating the sword ornament 5001 are dynamically displayed. The post-operation effect may be started in a state where the dynamic display is maintained.

  The operation button 410 is also displayed when the warning effect shown in FIG. 286 (c) is generated soon and the warning effect shown in FIG. 286 (c) is executed. The post-operation effect may be started while the imitation image is displayed.

[Post-operation effects that make it difficult to recognize the timing of automatic reception]
As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the automatic performance function for the operation target is activated at a predetermined timing within the valid period in which the performance reception is permitted, and the operation is performed without any operation by the player. It is possible to generate a post-production. However, if the player wants to generate a post-operation effect by the player's own operation in a state where the “automatic effect function” can be activated, it is predetermined within the period during which the reception effect is performed. Must be operated before the scheduled timing (timing at which the automatic performance function is activated) has arrived, and if the player himself tries to operate, the period of validity as the reception performance is increased accordingly. It will be substantially shortened. Therefore, in such a situation where the reception effect is being executed, it is not possible to recognize what operation should be performed, or an image suggesting the elapsed time (remaining time) after the effective period has occurred If there is something to check one by one, when the player himself wants to operate, the stage reception may be automatically generated, and there is a concern that the game entertainment will deteriorate.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, first, a cocoon image simulating a specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410) that is an object of reception of an effect is displayed as a plurality of cocoon images (for example, the operation buttons 410). "How to move a specific operation means" by displaying it as a moving image by sequentially displaying a plurality of spider images drawn in different operating states (operation states) as The operation method is suggested. In addition, when displaying a cocoon image as a moving image in this way, a predetermined predetermined cocoon image is displayed as an image to be displayed first among a plurality of cocoon images, and thereafter, a plurality of images are displayed in a predetermined order. By displaying the 摸 images sequentially, it is possible to determine the elapsed time since the occurrence of the specific reception effect (valid period) just by looking at how much the display as the moving image has progressed. It is also possible to recognize.

  That is, in this case, the operation method for “how to move the specific operation means” and the specific reception effect are executed only by looking at the bag image imitating the specific operation means that is the subject of the effect reception. It becomes possible to simultaneously recognize the elapsed time from the occurrence of the period (effective period). This makes it possible to shorten the time required for the player to grasp the operation method and the remaining time since he / she wants to operate it, so that it can be operated before the stage reception is automatically generated. It is expected to be encouraged.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to execute the process of automatically generating the effect reception at a timing after half of the period during which the specific reception effect is executed. This also prompts the user to operate before the production reception is automatically generated.

  However, even if these processes are performed, it is not possible to completely avoid a situation in which the production reception is automatically generated before the player himself operates. Therefore, it can be said that it is more important to take measures to make it difficult for the game entertainment interest to be lowered even if the situation occurs. Note that, when the countermeasure is taken, the above-described process of “prompt to be able to operate before the production reception is automatically generated” may not be necessarily performed.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, even when the production reception is automatically generated, the process of displaying the cocoon image as a moving image is continued without being stopped. That is, after the production reception is automatically generated and the post-operation production is started, the habit image as a moving image is continuously displayed in a progress manner, so that a predetermined time (video) While the image continues, it is difficult to recognize that the post-operation effect has been started, and the player performs an operation while the heel image as the moving image is continuously displayed. For example, it is possible to give an impression that the post-operation effect has been started by the operation.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, even if the operation by the player is performed after the “automatic generation of the effect reception”, it seems as if the effect change has occurred due to the operation. In order to give a good impression, the post-operation effects are executed as stepwise effects. This makes it possible to give the impression that the stage change after the second stage is caused by the player's operation, and the player's operation opportunity is deprived by the “automatic reception of the stage reception”. It is expected to make it difficult to have a strong impression.

  FIG. 288 shows a samurai image (sword decoration image SYG) simulating a specific operation means (here, a sword decoration body 5001) that is the target of the effect reception when a specific reception effect occurs. FIG. 5 is a diagram illustrating an example when images are displayed as moving images by sequentially displaying images (here, a plurality of cocoon images depicted so that the operation states (operation states) as the sword ornament 5001 are different). is there.

  Now, assuming that a period during which a specific reception effect is executed based on the result of the jackpot determination and the effect reception is allowed has occurred, the peripheral control MPU 1511a uses specific operation means (here, First, the sword decoration image SYGa (predetermined sword image) shown in FIG. 288 (a) is displayed as a “first displayed image” as a sword image (sword decoration image SYG) imitating the sword decoration body 5001). At this time, a bar display indicating the remaining time during which the production reception is allowed is also displayed in a state where the gauge is full.

  Here, the sword decoration image SYGa shown in FIG. 288 (a) is a moving image of “a cocoon image imitating the sword decoration body 5001” when a reception effect in which an operation opportunity is given to the sword decoration body 5001 occurs. When displaying as an image, it is always selected as the “first displayed image”. That is, the state in which the bar display of “gauge full” is displayed within the period during which the reception of the production is allowed can be said to be the state in which the sword decoration image SYGa is displayed, and these images correspond to each other. It can be said that it is a thing.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 288 (b) to (f), the bar display indicating the remaining time is depicted as a moving image in which the gauge amount decreases with time (a plurality of gauge remaining amounts differ). As for the sword decoration image SYG, a plurality of cocoon decoration images (in the figure, the sword decoration is shown) so that the movement amount (operation amount) is depicted as a moving image that increases over time. The images SYGb to SYGf) are displayed in a predetermined order.

  According to such a configuration, just by looking at the movement of the sword decoration image SYG that appears when a specific reception effect occurs, an operation method for “how to operate the sword decoration body 5001”, It is possible to recognize both the elapsed time since the period during which the performance acceptance is allowed (which can be grasped by the operation amount (operation amount) of the sword decoration image SYG starting from the sword decoration image SYGa). It becomes like this. Therefore, it is expected that it will be difficult to generate a timing at which the production reception automatically occurs before the player performs an operation, even though the player himself has attempted to operate it. become.

  Here, in the specific reception effect, the timing shown in FIG. 288 (d) in the period during which the effect reception is allowed (the timing after the half of the period in which the specific reception effect is executed). ) Is automatically generated. Therefore, when the player himself wants to operate, it is required to operate the sword decorative body 5001 until the moving image as the sword decorative image SYG is displayed and advanced on the “sword decorative image SYGd”. It becomes.

  By the way, even if there is no operation by the player, if the specific reception effect is executed so that the reception is automatically generated at the timing shown in FIG. 288 (d), the “sword decoration image SYGe” and The “sword decoration image SYGf” can be said to be an image that cannot be originally displayed regardless of whether or not there is an operation by the player. However, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, even if the production reception is automatically generated at the timing shown in FIG. 288 (d), the “sword decoration image SYGe” and “sword decoration image SYGf” are used. "Is intentionally displayed, which will be described later.

  In FIGS. 289 to 291, although a specific reception effect in which a spear image imitating the sword decorative body 5001 is dynamically displayed has occurred, an operation by the player is not performed until the timing at which the effect reception is automatically generated has arrived. It is a figure which shows the example about the effect which appears when it is not in time. In this production example, description will be made on the assumption that production reception can be automatically generated.

  In FIG. 289 (a), the number of reservations is 2 and the effect display device 1600 performs the change display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) in a specific effect pattern according to the result of the jackpot determination. Indicates the situation.

  FIG. 289 (b) shows that the specific moving image TDG is displayed based on the fact that a predetermined effect condition (first effect condition) is satisfied during execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 289 (a). The production status that has been displayed is shown. The “predetermined production condition” includes, for example, accumulating a certain value of scores accumulated in the production.

  That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when a predetermined performance condition is satisfied, the “effect mode for generating an operation opportunity for the sword ornament 5001” is set in a waiting state (up to three times). ) The process for waiting can be executed. In this regard, in FIG. 289 (b), in the effect display device 1600, the display of the “specific moving image TDGa (specific moving image TDG)” is started within the frame of the first coin and the “sword stock” is displayed. By performing a display for changing the count value from “0” to “1”, the “effect mode for generating an operation opportunity for the sword decorative body 5001” is in a performance state newly waiting for execution. Has come to be suggested.

  Here, with regard to the specific moving image TDG according to this production example, each image shown in FIGS. 255 (b) to (e) is displayed as a moving image by being sequentially displayed within a frame shaped with coins. It has become. Then, after the “image shown in FIG. 255 (b)” is displayed and the images shown in “FIG. 255 (e)” are sequentially displayed, a series of these displays (FIG. 255 (b) to ( e)) is repeatedly performed by loop processing.

  In FIG. 289 (c), after the display of the “specific moving image TDGa (specific moving image TDG)” shown in FIG. 289 (b) is started, the predetermined effect condition (first effect condition) is satisfied again. Based on this, the presentation situation where a new “specific moving image TDGb (specific moving image TDG)” different from the “specific moving image TDGa (specific moving image TDG)” that has already been displayed has started to be displayed. Is shown.

  That is, as described above, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, when a predetermined performance condition is satisfied, the “effect mode for generating an operation opportunity with respect to the sword decorative body 5001” is set as a waiting state (maximum It is possible to execute a waiting process (up to three times). In this regard, in FIG. 289 (c), in the effect display device 1600 in which the “specific moving image TDGa (specific moving image TDG)” is displayed within the frame of the first coin, the second coin Even within the frame shaped, the “specific moving image TDGb (specific moving image TDG)” is newly displayed and the count value of “sword stock” is changed from “1” to “2”. It is suggested that the “mode of producing an operation opportunity for the sword ornament 5001” for two times is in a production state in which the execution is awaited.

  Here, in this production example, when the display of “specific moving image TDGb (specific moving image TDG)” is newly started in the frame formed of the second coin, the frame formed of the first coin. In this case, a process of displaying in synchronization with the “specific moving image TDGa (specific moving image TDG)” that is already being displayed is performed. That is, the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment performs processing for updating the timer value of the predetermined timer for the specific moving image TDG every predetermined time. The image corresponding to the timer value (any one of the images shown in FIGS. 255B to 255E) is selectively displayed as “first displayed image”.

  For example, if the timer value of the predetermined timer is updated every predetermined time within the range of “1” to “4”, when the above-referenced timer value is “1”, FIG. ) Is selectively displayed as “first displayed image”, and when the above-referenced timer value is “2”, the image illustrated in FIG. 255C is displayed as “first displayed image”. When the timer value referred to above is “3”, the image shown in FIG. 255 (d) is selectively displayed as “first displayed image”. When the referenced timer value is “4”, the image shown in FIG. 255 (e) is selectively displayed as “first displayed image”. Then, after a new display for the specific moving image TDG is started in this way, each time the timer value of the predetermined timer is updated, an image corresponding to the updated timer value is newly set as a “specific moving image TDG”. Display the image so that the previously displayed image is hidden. By performing such processing for the specific moving image TDGa in the first coin and the specific moving image TDGb in the second coin, respectively, the specific moving image TDGa and the specific moving image are processed. TDGb is displayed as a moving image synchronized with each other regardless of the display start timing (in FIG. 289 (c), both the specific moving image TDGa and the specific moving image TDGb are shown in FIG. 255 (d). Displayed as an image shown). In addition, about the specific moving image TDGa and the specific moving image TDGb, the method of displaying them synchronously is not limited to this, and other methods may be adopted.

  However, the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment does not display any specific moving image TDG for the update process for each predetermined time with respect to the predetermined timer (for example, the situation shown in FIG. 289 (a)). In addition to the above, it is also executed in the case where the symbol variation is not performed, etc.), and within the frame formed by the first coin, the “specific moving image TDGa (specific moving image TDG) ”Is started indefinitely so that which of the images shown in FIGS. 255B to 255E is selected as the“ first displayed image ”is different each time. The “first displayed image” changes according to the timing at which a predetermined performance condition is satisfied. That is, as will be described later, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, a “moving image as a sword decoration image SYG” in which a “first image to be displayed” is predetermined within a period during which a specific reception effect is performed. (FIG. 288 (a) to (f)) ”and“ moving image as specific moving image TDG (FIG. 255 (b) to (e)) ”in which“ first displayed image ”is indefinite. Is displayed.

  After the specific moving image TDGb is newly displayed in this way, as shown in FIG. 289 (d), the specific moving image TDGa and the specific moving image TDGb are each displayed as a moving image display synchronized with each other. .

  Then, while the specific moving image TDGa and the specific moving image TDGb are displayed as a moving image display synchronized with each other in this way, the effect mode for generating an operation opportunity for the sword ornament 5001 that is in the above-described waiting state is displayed. ”Is satisfied, the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment is displayed in the first coin as shown in FIG. 289 (e). It is suggested that the “presentation mode for generating an operation opportunity for the sword ornament 5001” is started by performing a display in which a production operation (predetermined movement) like a coin toss appears in the “specific moving image TDGa”. Like to do. At this time, the peripheral control MPU 1511a performs a process of changing the “sword stock 2” that has been displayed until then to “stock discharging”, and the “specific moving image TDGa” is displayed as a coin toss on the background image. An effect change (effect) accompanying the appearance action (predetermined movement) is generated.

  In the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, when an effect operation (predetermined movement) like a coin toss appears in the “specific moving image TDGa”, as shown in FIG. 289 (f), the “specific moving image TDGa”. "Is performed without returning to the original position", and "the production mode for generating an operation opportunity for the sword ornament 5001" is executed, whereby the player to the specific moving image TDGa is executed. The gaze by is encouraged. In this case, as the “presentation mode for generating an operation opportunity for the sword decorative body 5001”, first, a display such as “chance to pull out a sword” and “a sword that has a sword placed” is performed on the effect display device 1600. Then, a process of moving the sword ornament 5001 to the operation position is performed.

  Note that, after that, the specific moving image TDGa that has performed the predetermined movement is kept in the moved state, and the display progress from before the movement is continued. Therefore, the specific moving image TDGa is displayed and advanced as a moving image display synchronized with the specific moving image TDGb displayed in the second coin even in the moved state. The specific moving image TDGa according to this embodiment is displayed in a state different from the state before moving in the state of movement (here, the state slightly rotated horizontally). It is suggested that the “presentation mode for generating an operation opportunity” is in a started state.

  Then, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the “presentation mode for generating an operation opportunity for the sword ornament 5001”, an operation opportunity for the sword ornament 5001 is obtained as shown in FIG. 290 (g). The specific reception effect to which is given is started. In a specific reception effect, a spear image imitating a sword ornament 5001 is dynamically displayed in the form shown in FIG. 288, and this causes a sword decoration image to appear when a specific reception effect occurs. Just by looking at the movement of SYG, the operation method for “how to operate the sword decoration 5001” and the elapsed time since the period during which the stage reception is allowed (the sword decoration image SYGa is displayed). As described above, it is possible to recognize both the starting point and the movement amount (operation amount) of the sword decoration image SYG.

  Therefore, also in this effect example, assuming that an effective period corresponding to a specific reception effect occurs at the timing shown in FIG. 290 (g), first, “a spear image imitating a sword ornament 5001” and “effect reception” 290 (h), (i) (corresponding to FIGS. 288 (b), (c)) after “bar display indicating the remaining time is displayed” in the manner shown in FIG. 288 (a). The display progresses in each mode.

  However, in this effect example, it is assumed that no operation is performed by the player within the effective period corresponding to the specific reception effect, which is shown in FIG. 290 (j) (corresponding to FIG. 288 (d)). When the timing arrives, an effect reception is generated by the automatic effect function, and a post-operation effect corresponding to the effect reception is started.

  In this regard, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, as described above, the spear image (sword decoration image SYG) is displayed as a moving image even when the effect reception is automatically generated within the specific reception effect. The processing is continued without stopping. In other words, as shown in FIG. 290 (j) and FIGS. 291 (k) and (l), a spear image (sword decoration image) as a moving image even after the effect reception is automatically generated and the post-operation effect is started. SYG) is continuously displayed as it is, so that it is recognized that the post-operation effect is in a predetermined period after the effect is automatically generated (while the moving image is continued). If the player performs an operation while the sword decoration image SYG is continuously displayed (within the period shown in FIG. 290 (j) and FIGS. 291 (k) and (l)). By this operation, it is possible to give an impression as if the post-operation effect has been started.

  Further, in this effect example, while the dynamic display as the sword decoration image SYG is continued at least (within the period shown in FIGS. 290 (j) and 291 (k), (l)), after the operation Regardless of whether the first effect result (FIG. 290 (m)) or the second effect result (FIG. 290 (n)) with different expectation levels appears as the effect, (A mode that is not suggested) appears (first stage change in production). Here, as shown in FIG. 290 (j) and FIGS. 291 (k) and (l), as the “same effect mode”, the sword decorative body 5001 is set as “the mode in which the aura member 5040 appears” and the effect. An effect corresponding to the aura member is also displayed on the sword decoration image SYG displayed on the display device 1600.

  Then, after the dynamic display as the sword decoration image SYG is not displayed, based on the result of the effect determination performed at the time of the symbol variation, “the specific decorative member SDY (a combination object) operates and the effect Low expected mode effect display (see FIG. 291 (m)) displayed on display device 1600 ”or“ specific decorative member SDY (a glimpse) ”operates, and the display device 1600 generates intense heat! Is displayed as a post-operation effect (second stage effect change). Further, while the degree of expectation is suggested by the post-operation effect, drive control is performed to return the sword ornament 5001 and the aura member 5040 to their original positions.

  In this way, according to the configuration in which the post-operation effect is executed as a step-by-step effect, the operation by the player is “automatic reception of effect reception (timing shown in FIG. 290 (j) (FIG. 288 (d)))”. Even when it is not in time, it is delayed while the dynamic display as the sword decoration image SYG is continued (until the timing shown in FIG. 290 (l) (FIG. 288 (f))) If so, the post-operation effect (the second-stage effect change) is performed in a manner in which the degree of expectation is suggested. As a result, it is expected that it is difficult to give the impression that the player's operation opportunity has been taken away by the “automatic generation of production reception”.

  In particular, in this embodiment, as described above, in a specific reception effect (FIGS. 290 (g) to (j) and FIGS. 291 (k) and (l)), the effective period corresponding to the reception effect is An image to be displayed at the time of start (an image to be displayed first) is a predetermined “moving image as a sword decoration image SYG (FIGS. 288 (a) to (f))”, and the image is indefinite. Each time, a different “moving image as a specific moving image TDG (FIGS. 255 (b) to (e))” is displayed. In other words, not the “moving image as the sword decoration image SYG (FIGS. 288 (a) to (f))” but the progress status in the “moving image as the specific moving image TDG (FIGS. 255 (b) to (e))”. If the player confirms that there is a possibility that the elapsed time since the start of the specific reception effect may be erroneously recognized, but according to the above configuration, the specific reception effect As a result of misrecognizing the elapsed time from the start of the game, the player's operation may not be in time for "automatic reception of production reception (timing shown in FIG. 290 (j) (FIG. 288 (d))" Even in this case, it is expected that the game entertainment will be suitably maintained.

  Incidentally, the specific reception effect described above with reference to FIGS. 290 and 291 is also basically advanced in the same manner as the effect example shown in FIG. 285. That is, the effect situation shown in FIG. 290 (g) appears at the timing tf1 shown in FIG. 285, and the effect situation shown in FIG. 290 (j) appears at the timing tf2 shown in FIG. It has become. However, at the timing tf2 shown in FIG. 285, only the post-operation effect that does not suggest the degree of expectation is executed, and the moving image that has been continued as the sword decoration image SYG is hidden. The timing tf4 shown in FIG. It can be said that it is different from the production example shown in FIG. In this effect example, another example described above with reference to FIG. 285 may be applied.

  Also in this effect example, as in the case of the effect example shown in FIG. 285, the time from when the effect reception is automatically generated until the period initially set as the effect reception period ends (timing tf2 to tf3). ) And the time (timing tf3 to tf4) from the timing when the period initially set as the production reception period ends to the time when the moving image is not displayed is set as the same length of time. desirable.

  It should be noted that a plurality of modes are prepared as the specific moving image TDG, and a plurality of modes with different expectations are prepared as a spear image (here, the sword decoration image SYG) simulating the operation means to be operated. In addition, when the predetermined effect condition (first effect condition) is satisfied, it is determined which of the plurality of aspects is displayed as the specific moving image TDG, and the specific moving image TDG is displayed in any of these aspects. Depending on how it is done, a mode with a high degree of expectation may appear easily as the above-described spear image (here, the sword decoration image SYG).

  In the above-described effect example, the case where the second effect condition is satisfied after “two specific moving images TDG” are displayed and “the effect mode for generating an operation opportunity for the sword decorative body 5001” is executed is illustrated. However, the second effect condition may be satisfied in a state where only one specific moving image TDG is displayed. Further, even when the second effect condition is satisfied (when the specific motion image TDG has a predetermined motion), the “effect mode for generating an operation opportunity for the sword ornament 5001” is not necessarily required. For example, any one of a plurality of effect modes including “an effect mode for generating an operation opportunity for the sword ornament 5001” may be selectively executed. Further, in the above-described effect example, such a specific moving image TDG may not necessarily be displayed, and a specific reception effect is started when a predetermined timing arrives while the symbol effect is being performed. It may be.

  Despite the fact that “same spear image (here, sword decoration image SYG)” and “bar display with the same length” are displayed within the effective period during which the reception of the production is permitted, the acceptance of the production is permitted. The first reception effect and the second reception effect having different effective periods may be executed. In other words, in this case, regarding the “bar display”, the rate at which the gauge amount decreases in accordance with the length of the effective period is changed. However, for the “摸 image (here, the sword decoration image SYG)” Regardless of which of the first reception effect and the second reception effect is being executed, an operation method for “how to operate the operation target (here, the sword ornament 5001)”; Recognizing both the elapsed time since the period during which the production acceptance is permitted (which can be grasped by the operation amount (operation amount) of the sword decoration image SYG starting from the sword decoration image SYGa). It is desirable that display progress as a moving image is performed in the same manner as possible. According to such a configuration, even in a situation where it is difficult to recognize which one of the first reception effect and the second reception effect is being executed, the “摸 image (here, the sword decoration) As long as the image “SYG)” is confirmed, it is possible to grasp the elapsed time since the acceptance of the performance. Then, based on the elapsed time grasped in this way, whether the first reception effect or the second reception effect is being executed by checking whether the remaining gauge amount on the bar display is large or small. Can be recognized. That is, normally, the first reception effect and the second reception effect are often different in the expectation of the effect. Therefore, the post-operation effect is started by recognizing the type of the reception effect. Therefore, it is expected that the game entertainment will be suitably maintained.

  When the first reception effect and the second reception effect described above are prepared, it is desirable that the time from when the valid period occurs until the effect reception is automatically generated is set as a different time. When the time is set differently in this way, the time until the stage reception is automatically generated is mistaken, and as a result, a situation may occur in which the operation is not in time even though the player himself has tried to operate. However, according to the production example in which the dynamic display by the “sword image (here, the sword decoration image SYG)” is continued or the post-operation production is executed step by step, such a situation has occurred. However, the decline in the game entertainment will be suitably suppressed.

  In the above-described effect example, when a spear image (here, the sword decoration image SYG) imitating the operation means to be operated in a specific reception effect is displayed as a moving image, as shown in FIG. The operation from “position to be operated (see FIG. 288 (a))” to “position where operation has been completed (see FIG. 288 (f))” is matched with the length of the effective period as the specific reception effect. We decided to make the display progress. However, one operation from “the position where the operation is started (see FIG. 288 (a))” to “the position where the operation is completed (see FIG. 288 (f))” is not necessarily matched with the length of the effective period. For example, the “operation start position (see FIG. 288 (a))” and the “operation end position (FIG. 288) are required over the time until the effective period ends. (Refer to (f)) ”. In short, an image (first displayed image) displayed at the time when the effective period corresponding to the reception effect is started is determined in advance, and after that, the moving image is displayed in a predetermined order and progress speed. If progress (sequential display by a plurality of images) is allowed, an operation method for “how to operate the operation target (here, the sword decorative body 5001)” and an effect reception are permitted. Both the elapsed time since the occurrence of the period (which can be grasped by the amount of movement of the sword decoration image SYG starting from the sword decoration image SYGa (here, the amount of movement including how many times the sword has been reciprocated)) It is possible to recognize.

  In the above-described production example, the “post-operation production executed stepwise” performed based on the production reception may be another mode. For example, in a state in which a moving image as a spear image imitating an operation means to be operated (here, the sword ornament 5001) is continued, the “light emission effect by the lamp provided on the game board 5” is 1 Start as stage after operation. Then, after the moving image as a spear image imitating the operation means to be operated (here, the sword ornament 5001) is hidden, and “light emission effect by the lamp provided on the game board 5” "Is being executed as a first stage post-operation effect," display effect on the effect display device 1600 "or" movable effect by a decorative accessory "(or at least one of them) is in two steps. It is started as a post-operation effect for eyes (the post-operation effect in the second stage uses an effect target different from the effect target used in the post-operation effect in the first stage). According to such a configuration, the “light emission effect by the lamp provided on the game board 5” is “the display effect in the effect display device 1600” or “the movable effect by the decorative accessory” (or at least one of them). Since it is expected to function in a stunning manner as a precursor effect, even if it is recognized that this is a first-stage post-operation effect, a sense of incongruity (the reception of the effect has been made and a predetermined time has passed) In the meantime, it is possible to provide a post-operation effect without an uncomfortable feeling that the post-operation effect using the effect display device 1600 and the post-operation effect using the decorative accessory are not executed.

  In addition, the same production target (for example, a light emission production by a lamp provided on the game board 5) is used for the first stage post-operation presentation and the second stage post-operation presentation. In a state in which a moving image as a spear image imitating the operating means (here, the sword decorative body 5001) is continued, a post-operation effect (light emission effect by a lamp) is performed in a manner that the degree of expectation is not suggested. In this way, after the moving image as the haze image is hidden, the post-operation effect (light emission effect by the lamp) may be developed as an aspect in which the degree of expectation is suggested.

  A plurality of modes with different expectations are prepared as modes of a moving image as a spear image imitating the operation means to be operated (here, the sword ornament 5001), and the moving image is displayed in any of these modes. Even if it is a case, you may make it display a moving image continuously after the reception of production | presentation generate | occur | produces with respect to the aspect.

  Even when a spear image imitating the operation means to be operated (here, the sword decorative body 5001) is displayed as a moving image, an effect is produced if the operation means is not operated within the effective period. You may make it produce the special reception effect which does not generate | occur | produce by establishment of production conditions different from the production conditions which generate | occur | produce the said specific reception effect. In other words, in this case, the “reception image is automatically generated by displaying the“ moving image based on the same samurai image (here, the sword decoration image SYG) ”and the“ bar display having the same length ”. It is possible to make it difficult to grasp which “specific reception effect” or “special reception effect” in which the effect reception does not occur automatically, and provides a reception effect with a sense of tension. Will be able to. However, in the case of a “specific reception effect” in which an effect reception is automatically generated and a “special reception effect” in which an effect reception is not automatically generated, it is possible for the effect reception to occur so that different effects appear as post-operation effects. This is desirable for recognizing which reception effect it was. In addition, the production pattern that allows only one of the “specific reception production” where the production reception is automatically generated and the “special reception production” where the production reception does not automatically occur, or both of them occur at different timings. By preparing an effect pattern that can be performed and executing any one of a plurality of effect patterns including the effect pattern based on the result of the jackpot determination at the time of the pattern variation, at a predetermined timing within the symbol variation, A “specific reception effect” or a “special reception effect” may appear.

  In the production examples shown in FIGS. 289 to 291, when a production reception is generated by the automatic production function, a moving image as a spear image imitating the operation means (here, the sword decorative body 5001) to be operated. In addition, the post-operation effect is started while continuing the progress of the dynamic display, and the post-operation effect is executed step by step. However, in terms of processing load, even when an effect is received by an operation by the player, a moving image as a spear image imitating the operation means (here, the sword decorative body 5001) to be operated is displayed. It is desirable to start the post-operation effect while continuing the progress of the target display and to execute the post-operation effect in a stepwise manner so that the post-operation effect is executed in the same process.

[Post-operation effect that suggests the type of auto-accepted reception effect]
As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the automatic performance function for the operation target is activated at a predetermined timing within the valid period in which the performance reception is permitted, and the operation is performed without any operation by the player. It is possible to generate a post-production. However, in the pachinko machine 1 having such an “automatic effect function”, since the reception of the effect is automatically generated even if the player forgets to perform the operation, there is an opportunity for the player to operate. There is a concern that the feeling of tension at the time of being given will disappear, and that it will become a mere display effect in which a predetermined moving image flows.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to generate the first reception effect and the second reception effect that have different times from when the period during which the reception of the production is allowed to occur until the reception of the production automatically occurs. In the above, the remaining time image (for example, bar display) and the heel image (for example, button image BTG) respectively displayed at the reception of the effects are made to be the same image. In other words, in this case, it is urged to be misrecognized that the second reception effect has occurred despite the fact that the first reception effect has occurred. , “Due to the time when the stage reception is allowed, the stage reception should not automatically occur even though the stage where the stage reception should automatically occur has arrived (or the stage where the stage reception should automatically occur has not yet arrived. It is possible to maintain the tension until the reception of the production automatically occurs. Expected.

  However, even if the first reception effect is generated, if it is mistakenly recognized that the second reception effect is different from the time until the generation reception is automatically generated, We cannot understand whether progress has been made, and there is concern that the entertainment interest will decline. In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the bar display indicating the remaining time as the effective period is continuously displayed even after the production reception is automatically generated. That is, in this case, at the occurrence of an effective period in which the production reception is allowed, even if the first reception production or the second reception production is not recognized, the production reception is automatically generated (the production after the operation starts) ) By checking how much gauge is left as a bar display when the first reception effect or the second reception effect is being executed. After the operation, the production can be started.

  In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the precursor effect of the same content occurs, and even when the valid period occurs, the same spear image and the same bar display are displayed, respectively. It is possible to execute the progress of production in which the production reception is automatically generated and the production reception is not automatically generated within the effective period. In such a configuration, even if a prelude effect or a reception effect occurs, it is impossible to distinguish whether or not it is automatically received within the valid period, so it is possible to perform the reception effect with a sense of tension. become able to.

  FIG. 292 and FIG. 293 are diagrams illustrating examples of the first reception effect and the second reception effect that have different times from when the period during which the effect reception is allowed (effective period) to when the effect reception is automatically generated. is there. In this production example, description will be made on the assumption that production reception can be automatically generated.

  FIG. 292 (a) shows that the number of holds is 3 and the decorative display SZ (special symbol) is displayed on the effect display device 1600 in an effect pattern according to the result of the jackpot determination, and the reach state is reached. The production situation is shown.

  FIG. 292 (b) shows a presentation reception (operation) during the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 292 (a) (here, the reach state may be a non-reach state). This shows a production situation in which a precursor production suggesting that is soon to be permitted.

  FIG. 292 (c) shows an effect situation (result of jackpot determination) in which the first reception effect in which an operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410 is started after the precursor effect shown in FIG. 292 (b) is performed. The first effect condition (the effect pattern in which the effect result shown in FIG. 292 (e) described later appears) or the second effect condition (the effect result shown in FIG. 292 (f) described later) The production situation) when the production pattern (which appears) is satisfied is shown.

  In this production situation, as shown in the figure, a button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410 (a bag image imitating the operation button 410) is displayed in the display area and prompts an operation on the operation button 410. An instruction display (here, a character display such as “Press”, an arrow display in the downward direction, and a bar display indicating the remaining time during which an effect reception is allowed) appears. At this time, the operation button 410 to be given an operation opportunity is in a light emitting state, and this also prompts the operation on the operation button 410.

  However, in this effect example, the operation button 410 is not operated within the period set to allow the reception of the effect, and the automatic effect function for the operation button 410 is activated at a predetermined timing within the effective period. The case is assumed. FIG. 292 (d) depicts a state where the automatic rendering function for the operation button 410 is just being activated in the execution period (valid period) of the first reception rendering, and the automatic rendering function is activated. Then, the same change as that in the case where the presentation is accepted by the operation on the operation button 410 within the effective period set so that the acceptance of the presentation is allowed is caused. Here, based on the result of the effect determination performed at the time of symbol variation, “a low-expected aspect effect in which“ the specific decorative member SDY (a glimpse) ”operates and a chance! 292 (e)) ”or“ a specific decorative member SDY (a glimpse) ”is operated, and a highly anticipated effect is displayed on the effect display device 1600 (see FIG. 292 (f)). ) "Is executed as a post-operation effect.

  In this regard, in this effect example, even if the post-operation effect is executed in any manner (FIGS. 292 (e) and (f)), “the remaining time as a period during which the effect reception is allowed is shown. The “bar display” is not hidden, but the post-operation effect is started in a state where this is maintained. As a result, by confirming how much gauge remaining amount is left at the time when the post-operation effect is started, the reception effect is “reception accepted after the period during which the effect reception is allowed (valid period) occurs”. It becomes possible to recognize which one of the first reception effect and the second reception effect has a different time until automatically occurs. In other words, since the first reception effect and the second reception effect are often different in expectation of production, it is possible to start the post-operation effect after recognizing the type of reception effect. Therefore, it is expected that the game entertainment will be suitably maintained.

  On the other hand, in this effect example, after the effect situation shown in FIG. 292 (a) appears, the effect situation in which the sign effect shown in FIG. 293 (g) appears instead of the sign effect shown in FIG. 292 (b). (In the effect determination performed based on the result of the big hit determination, the third effect condition (the effect pattern in which the effect result shown in FIG. 293 (j) to be described later appears) or the fourth effect condition (in FIG. 293 (k) to be described later) When the fifth production condition (the production pattern in which the production situation shown in FIGS. 293 (l) and (m) described later) is satisfied) appears. There is.

  Then, after the precursor effect is performed in the mode shown in FIG. 293 (g), the second reception effect in which an operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410 is started as shown in FIG. 293 (h). Will be.

  However, in this second reception effect, the time from when the period during which the effect reception is allowed to occur until the automatic effect function is activated is shorter than the first reception effect. As shown together in FIG. 293 (c) and FIG. 293 (h), the button image BTG (the cocoon image simulating the operation button 410) and the bar display (the gauge length is the same) indicating the remaining effective period. ) And the same image as in the case of the first reception effect.

  That is, in this case, the first reception is performed in both the production situation shown in FIG. 293 (c) and the production situation shown in FIG. 293 (h). It becomes difficult to recognize which one of the production and the second reception production is occurring, and it is possible to give a sense of tension as to when the production reception occurs.

  In this production example, the operation button 410 is not operated within the period set to allow the production reception, and the automatic production function for the operation button 410 is activated at a predetermined timing within the valid period. The case is assumed. FIG. 293 (i) depicts a state where the automatic effect function for the operation button 410 is about to be activated in the execution period (effective period) of the second reception effect. When the automatic effect function is activated at a timing earlier than the second reception effect, the same change as that in the case where the effect is accepted by the operation on the operation button 410 is caused to the effect. Here, based on the result of the effect determination performed at the time of symbol variation, “a low-expected aspect effect in which“ the specific decorative member SDY (a glimpse) ”operates and a chance! 293 (j)) ”or“ a specific decorative member SDY (a spear object) operates and a highly anticipated effect is displayed on the effect display device 1600 (see FIG. 293 (k)). ) "Is executed as a post-operation effect.

  In this regard, in this effect example, even if the post-operation effect is executed in any mode (FIGS. 293 (j) and (k)), “the remaining time as a period during which the effect acceptance is permitted is shown. The “bar display” is not hidden, but the post-operation effect is started in a state where this is maintained. As a result, by confirming how much gauge remaining amount is left at the time when the post-operation effect is started, the reception effect is “reception accepted after the period during which the effect reception is allowed (valid period) occurs”. It becomes possible to recognize which one of the first reception effect and the second reception effect has a different time until automatically occurs. In other words, since the first reception effect and the second reception effect are often different in expectation of production, it is possible to start the post-operation effect after recognizing the type of reception effect. Therefore, it is expected that the game entertainment will be suitably maintained.

  However, in this effect example, even if the precursor effect in the form shown in FIG. 293 (g) and the reception effect in the form shown in FIG. 293 (h) are sequentially displayed, FIG. As shown in l), if an operation by the player is not performed, the automatic production function is not activated and the production situation (the fifth production condition) in which the valid period as the reception production is ended may appear. ing.

  That is, in this case, the same effect of the precursor (see FIG. 293 (g)) occurs, and the same bar image and the same bar display (including gauge length and how to reduce the gauge, etc.) are included even when the effective period occurs. In the case where it is executed as a second reception effect that is automatically generated within the effective period (see FIGS. 293 (i) to (k)), Is executed as a third reception effect that does not automatically occur (see FIGS. 293 (l) and (m)). In such a configuration, even if a warning effect in which a specific aspect appears or a reception effect in which a specific aspect appears is displayed, it is impossible to distinguish whether or not the automatic reception is made within the valid period. The reception effect can be performed with the.

  In addition, in this effect example, as shown in FIG. 293 (m), even when the effective period as the reception effect is ended without the automatic effect function being enabled, the effective period is ended and the effect is accepted. Is not permitted, the “bar display indicating the remaining time as a period during which the production reception is permitted” is not hidden and is maintained. Therefore, it was a reception effect in which the automatic effect function was not activated by confirming that the effect situation that the effect after the operation did not occur even though the gauge remaining amount was “0” occurred. Can be recognized, and it is expected to suppress a decrease in the entertainment interest of the game. In the drawing shown in FIG. 293 (m), “?” Is made to appear, but no effect change may be caused.

  In this example, although the type of precursor effect (see FIG. 292 (b) and FIG. 293 (m)) is different, the same haze image and the same bar display are displayed when an effect is received. However, the time until the automatic performance function is activated is different (see FIGS. 292 (c) and 293 (h)). It is possible to provide a directivity for whether the automatic production function is activated at an early timing, whether the automatic production function is activated at a relatively late stage, or whether the automatic production function is not activated in the first place. Thus, it is possible to perform the reception effect with a sense of tension. On the other hand, when it is confirmed that the precursor effect has been performed in the mode shown in FIG. 292 (b), it can be recognized in advance that a reception effect in which the automatic effect function is surely activated is generated. Therefore, it is expected that the game entertainment will be suitably maintained.

  In this example, the display mode is different between the precursor effect shown in FIG. 292 (b) and the precursor effect shown in FIG. 293 (g), but these are executed in the same display mode. It may be. In other words, in this case, even if both the warning effect and the reception effect are confirmed, the operation opportunity is kept in a state in which it is concealed at which timing the automatic performance function is activated, and further, whether the automatic performance function is originally activated. Can be granted.

  Incidentally, each reception effect described above with reference to FIGS. 292 and 293 is also basically developed in the same manner as the effect example shown in FIG. 285. That is, at the timing tf1 shown in FIG. 285, the production situation shown in FIG. 292 (c) or FIG. 293 (h) appears, and at the timing tf2 shown in FIG. 285, FIG. 292 (e), (f ) Or the production situation shown in FIGS. 293 (j) and (k). However, in the example shown in FIG. 285, there are cases where the automatic performance function cannot be activated, and the timing tf2 at which the automatic performance function is activated is delayed depending on the established production conditions (production pattern). It can be said that it is different from the example of the effect shown in FIG. 285 in that it may be prematurely and the point that the post-operation effect is started while the bar display remains. In this effect example, another example described above with reference to FIG. 285 may be applied. In this effect example, in addition to the bar display, the post-operation effect may be started with the haze image imitating the operation means remaining. In addition, when the post-operation effect is started with the haze image imitating the operation means left, the haze image may be continued as a moving image as described with reference to FIGS. 290 and 289.

  Also in this effect example, as in the case of the effect example shown in FIG. 285, the time from when the effect reception is automatically generated until the period initially set as the effect reception period ends (timing tf2 to tf3). ) And the time (timing tf3 to tf4) from the timing when the period initially set as the production reception period ends until the bar display is not displayed may be set as the same length of time. desirable.

  Also in this effect example, when starting the post-operation effect while leaving the bar display, the stepwise effect as described with reference to FIGS. 290 and 289 may be performed.

  Also, the time from when the second reception effect occurs until the reception is automatically generated and the bar display is hidden is from the time from when the first reception effect occurs until the reception automatically occurs. It is desirable to set as a short time. According to such a configuration, when the bar display is displayed in the manner shown in FIG. 292 (d), it is clear that the reception is not the second reception effect that is automatically generated at a relatively early timing. (If it is the second reception effect, it should already be hidden), so that the remaining effective period can be enjoyed with the possibility of being the first reception effect.

  In this effect example, when the reception effect in which the automatic effect function is not activated is set as the third reception effect, the effect pattern (FIGS. 293 (l) and (m)) for generating the third reception effect is not necessarily prepared. May be.

  The first reception effect and the second reception effect may be sequentially generated within one symbol variation. However, when the second reception effect is executed for a relatively short time until the automatic effect function is activated, the first reception effect can occur before the symbol is stopped, When the first reception effect is executed for a relatively long time until the automatic effect function is activated, the second reception effect cannot be generated until the symbol is stopped thereafter. It is desirable. According to such a configuration, a person who recognizes that the time until the reception of the effect is relatively long by executing the first reception effect is relatively early when the second reception effect occurs. It is expected that the situation where the operation opportunity is lost due to the automatic generation of the production reception is suitably suppressed.

  Also in the production example, the cocoon image simulating the operation means may be displayed in any of a plurality of modes (first mode and second mode) with different expectations. When the first mode with a low degree of expectation appears, the automatic performance function is not necessarily activated (third reception effect). When the second mode with a high degree of expectation appears, the automatic performance function is necessarily activated. (First reception effect or second reception effect).

  In the production example, when the first reception production (see FIGS. 292 (c) to (f)) occurs and when the second reception production (see FIGS. 293 (h) to (k)) occurs. When the third reception effect (see FIGS. 293 (l) and (m)) is generated and when the effect is received, the same post-operation effects (such as the operation of the specific decorative member SDY (a glimpse)) Is to be done. However, when the first reception effect (see FIGS. 292 (c) to (f)) occurs, when the second reception effect (see FIGS. 293 (h) to (k)) occurs, Different post-operation effects may be performed when the reception is performed when the reception is performed (see FIGS. 293 (l) and (m)).

  In the above-described effect examples shown in FIGS. 292 and 293, after an operation is performed with the bar display remaining when an effect is received by the automatic effect function, or when the effective period ends without the automatic effect function being enabled. The production situation that the production is started and the production is not started after the operation is made to appear. However, in terms of processing load, even when an effect is received by an operation by a player, the post-operation effect is started with the bar display remaining, and the post-operation effect is executed in the same process. It is desirable.

[Sign production that also functions as a production suggesting whether it will be automatically accepted]
As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the automatic performance function for the operation target is activated at a predetermined timing within the valid period in which the performance reception is permitted, and the operation is performed without any operation by the player. It is possible to generate a post-production. However, in the pachinko machine 1 provided with such “automatic effecting means”, even if the player forgets to perform the operation, the reception of the effect is automatically generated, so that an operation opportunity is given to the player. There is a concern that the feeling of tension at the time of disappearing may be lost, and that it may become a mere display effect that only a predetermined moving image flows.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a non-automatic reception effect that is not the target of the “automatic effect function” and an automatic reception effect that is the target of the “automatic effect function” can be generated. That is, in this case, since the reception of the production does not necessarily occur automatically, it is expected that the tension until the reception of the production is automatically generated is suitably maintained.

  However, even though a non-automatic reception effect that is not the target of the “automatic effect function” has occurred, there may be cases where it is not operated as a result of misrecognizing that an effect reception occurs without an operation by the player, There will be a loss of opportunity to receive the production, and there is a concern about the decline in the entertainment interest. In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the precursor effect is executed in a special manner, an automatic reception function is always generated as a reception effect corresponding to the precursor effect. It is made possible to prevent a decrease in the entertainment interest of the game due to the loss of the opportunity to receive the production reception without understanding whether the game is activated.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, during the period in which the warning effect is executed in a special mode, the reception effect corresponding to the warning effect is an object of the “automatic effect function”. When the sign production is ended and the reception production (automatic reception production) is actually generated (effective period), the reception production is “automatic production”. It is difficult to recognize which is an automatic reception effect that is a target of “function” and a non-automatic reception effect that is not a target of “automatic effect function”. For example, in both the non-automatic reception effect and the automatic reception effect, by displaying the same operation means as the operation target and imitating the operation means, a bar display having the same length of the gauge amount, etc. This makes it difficult to recognize which reception effect has occurred.

  According to such a configuration, if it is overlooked in which aspect the precursor effect is being executed, whether or not the “automatic effect function” is activated after the reception effect is once started. It is difficult to recognize. Accordingly, it is expected that the tension until the reception of the effect is automatically generated is suitably maintained while the effect indicating whether or not the “automatic effect function” is activated is executed. .

  FIGS. 294 to 296 are diagrams showing an example of an effect that suggests whether or not a reception effect in which the “automatic effect function” is activated is generated depending on the mode of the sign effect. Here again, an explanation will be given as an example of an effect when the automatic effect function can be activated (automatic effect mode, or a gaming machine that can always be automatically effected). Since a reception effect that is not subject to validation can also occur, a display such as “during auto button setting” is not performed.

  In FIG. 294 (a), the number of holds is 3 and the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is displayed on the effect display device 1600 in an effect pattern according to the result of the jackpot determination. The production situation is shown.

  FIG. 294 (b) shows a presentation reception (operation) during the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. This shows a production situation in which a precursor production suggesting that is soon to be permitted.

  Here, the precursor effect shown in FIG. 294 (b) occurs when the timing tg1 (see FIG. 296 (a)) arrives, and a schematic image imitating the operation button 410 that is the operation target is obtained. It is displayed as an effect image (special aspect) that moves so as to make a vortex toward a place that appears later. Then, when the warning effect is executed in such a special mode, the automatic reception effect targeted for the “automatic effect function” is always generated as the reception effect corresponding to the warning effect. Thus, it is possible to grasp in advance that the “automatic rendering function” is activated in the subsequent reception performance during the period in which the sign performance is performed. It should be noted that in the precursor effect according to this effect example, a display such as “Auto button!” Also appears, but this need not necessarily be displayed.

  FIG. 294 (c) shows the effect situation (the effect performed based on the result of the jackpot determination) when the precursor effect shown in FIG. 294 (b) is performed and the timing tg2 (see FIG. 296 (a)) arrives. The determination shows the first determination condition (the effect pattern in which the effect result shown in FIG. 294 (e) described later appears) or the second determination condition (the effect pattern in which the effect result shown in FIG. 294 (f) described later appears). In the drawing, a reception effect in which an operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410 has just started.

  In this production situation, as shown in the figure, a button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410 (a bag image imitating the operation button 410) is displayed in the display area and prompts an operation on the operation button 410. An instruction display (here, a character display such as “Press”, an arrow display in the downward direction, and a bar display indicating the remaining time during which an effect reception is allowed) appears. At this time, the operation button 410 to be given an operation opportunity is in a light emitting state, and this also prompts the operation on the operation button 410.

  Then, as described above, in the reception effect shown in FIG. 294 (c), the effect reception is automatically generated (the “automatic effect function” is activated) when the predetermined timing within the valid period arrives without any operation by the player, The same post-operation effects appear when the player's operation is performed. However, as will be described later, in the production situation shown in FIG. 294 (c), is an automatic reception effect in which the “automatic production function” is activated or non-automatic in which the “automatic production function” is not activated? It is difficult to recognize whether the reception effect has occurred. That is, in this case, if it is overlooked in which aspect the precursor effect is being executed, it is possible to recognize whether or not the “automatic effect function” is activated after the reception effect is once started. Have difficulty. Therefore, while maintaining an effect (a sign effect of a special aspect) suggesting whether or not the “automatic effect function” is activated, it is preferable to maintain the tension until the effect reception is automatically generated. Is expected.

  In this effect example, the operation button 410 is not operated within a period set to allow the reception of the effect, and the operation button 410 is set at a predetermined timing tg3 (see FIG. 296) within the effective period. It is assumed that the automatic performance function is activated. FIG. 294 (d) depicts a state where the automatic performance function for the operation button 410 is about to be activated at the timing tg3. When the automatic performance function is activated, the reception of the performance is permitted. Thus, the same change as that in the case where the production is accepted by the operation on the operation button 410 within the effective period set as described above is caused to the production. Here, based on the result of the effect determination performed at the time of symbol variation, “a low-expected aspect effect in which“ the specific decorative member SDY (a glimpse) ”operates and a chance! 294 (e)) ”or“ a specific decorative member SDY (a spear object) is operated, and a high expectation mode effect is displayed on the effect display device 1600 (see FIG. 294 (f)). ) "Is executed as a post-operation effect.

  In this respect, in this effect example (including the effect part described later with reference to FIG. 295), even if the post-operation effect is executed in any manner (FIGS. 294 (e) and (f)). “The bar display indicating the remaining time as a period during which the reception of the effect is permitted” is not hidden and the post-operation effect is started in a state where this is maintained. That is, although detailed description is omitted, in this example of production (including the production part described later with reference to FIG. 295), the production reception is automatically performed after the period during which the production reception is permitted (effective period) occurs. The first reception effect and the second reception effect with different time until occurrence are prepared, and by checking how much gauge remaining is left at the time when the post-operation effect is started, It is possible to recognize whether the reception effect is “the first reception effect and the second reception effect whose time from when the period during which the effect reception is allowed (effective period) occurs until when the effect reception is automatically generated” It is supposed to be. In other words, since the first reception effect and the second reception effect are often different in expectation of production, it is possible to start the post-operation effect after recognizing the type of reception effect. Therefore, it is expected that the game entertainment will be suitably maintained. In this production example as well, the above-described configuration (“bar display” is not hidden but is maintained in the state of “post-operation production that suggests the type of reception effect automatically accepted” is also maintained. You may make it employ | adopt suitably also about each structure other than the effect which starts the operation after operation).

  Also, in this effect example (including the effect part described later with reference to FIG. 295), the bag image display described in the item “post-operation effect that suggests an automatically accepted operation target” was left. You may make it employ | adopt the structure of starting the post-operation presentation as it is. In this case, each configuration other than the above-described configuration (starting the post-operation effect while leaving the haze image display) described in the same item may be adopted as appropriate. In this case, the configuration for generating the post-operation effect while leaving the bar display hidden is not necessarily adopted and may be omitted.

  On the other hand, in this effect example, FIG. 294 (b) is shown during execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 294 (a) (here, the reach state may be a non-reach state). 295 (g) is not the sign effect of the special mode shown in FIG. 295 (g) in the effect situation (the third determination condition (described later) in the effect determination performed based on the result of the big hit determination 295 (j) where the effect result appears), or the fourth determination condition (the effect pattern where the effect result shown in FIG. 295 (k) described later), or the fifth determination condition (described later FIG. 295 ( There are cases where the production situation) in the case where the production pattern (in which the production situation shown in l) and (m) appears is satisfied.

  Here, the precursor effect shown in FIG. 295 (g) occurs when the timing tg1 (see FIGS. 296 (a) and (b)) arrives, and simulates the operation button 410 that is the operation target. The two simulated images are displayed as an effect (specific mode) until they approach each other and overlap, but in the precursor effect, the simulated image imitating the operation button 410 that is the operation target is not necessarily used. Also good. Then, when the warning effect is executed in such a specific mode, when the automatic reception effect targeted for the “automatic effect function” is generated as a reception effect corresponding to the warning effect, There is a case where a non-automatic reception effect that is not targeted occurs as a reception effect corresponding to the sign effect. ”Cannot be known in advance. In addition, in the precursor effect according to this effect example, a display such as “auto button?” Appears, but this need not necessarily be displayed.

  FIG. 295 (h) shows the effect situation when the precursor effect shown in FIG. 295 (g) is performed and the timing tg2 shown in FIG. 296 (a) has arrived. The place where the reception production where the opportunity is given has just started is depicted.

  In this production situation, as shown in the figure, a button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410 (a bag image imitating the operation button 410) is displayed in the display area and prompts an operation on the operation button 410. An instruction display (here, a character display such as “Press”, an arrow display in the downward direction, and a bar display indicating the remaining time during which an effect reception is allowed) appears. At this time, the operation button 410 to be given an operation opportunity is in a light emitting state, and this also prompts the operation on the operation button 410.

  Then, as described above, in the reception effect shown in FIG. 295 (h), when the reception is automatically generated within the effective period even if there is no operation by the player (the “automatic effect function” is activated), If there is no operation by the player, there is a case where the production reception is not generated within the valid period (the “automatic production function” is not activated). In addition, as described above, in the effect state shown in FIG. 295 (h), the button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410 (a spear image imitating the operation button 410) and the remaining time for which the effect reception is allowed Are only displayed, and it is difficult to distinguish from the production status shown in FIG. 294 (c). As a result, it is possible to suitably maintain a sense of tension until the reception of an effect automatically occurs, while performing an effect that suggests that the “automatic effect function” is activated (a sign effect of a special aspect). Expected.

  In this regard, when an automatic reception effect in which the “automatic effect function” is activated has occurred, when the timing tg3 (see FIG. 296 (a)) arrives without any operation by the player, As shown in 295 (i), an effect situation in which the automatic effect function for the operation button 410 is about to be activated now appears. After that, when the automatic production function is activated, the same change as that in the case where the production is accepted by the operation on the operation button 410 within the effective period set so that the production acceptance is permitted is caused to the production. Will be allowed to. Here, based on the result of the effect determination performed at the time of symbol variation, “a low-expected aspect effect in which“ the specific decorative member SDY (a glimpse) ”operates and a chance! 295 (j)) ”or“ a specific decorative member SDY (a spear object) operates, and a highly anticipated effect is displayed on the effect display device 1600 (see FIG. 295 (k)). ) "Is executed as a post-operation effect.

  As described above, in this production example, even if the post-operation production is executed in any manner (FIGS. 295 (j) and (k)), the “remaining time as a period during which the production reception is allowed” The “bar display showing” is not hidden, but the post-operation effect is started in a state where this is maintained. As a result, by confirming how much gauge remaining amount is left at the time when the post-operation effect is started, the reception effect is “reception accepted after the period during which the effect reception is allowed (valid period) occurs”. It becomes possible to recognize which one of the first reception effect and the second reception effect has a different time until automatically occurs. In other words, since the first reception effect and the second reception effect are often different in expectation of production, it is possible to start the post-operation effect after recognizing the type of reception effect. Therefore, it is expected that the game entertainment will be suitably maintained.

  However, as described above, in this production example, the indication effect in the specific mode shown in FIG. 295 (g) and the reception effect in the mode shown in FIG. 295 (h) are sequentially displayed. Even if there is no operation by the player, there is a case where the production reception is not generated within the valid period (the “automatic production function” is not activated). In this case, when the timing tg4 arrives without any operation by the player, as shown in FIGS. 295 (l) and 296 (b), the automatic presentation function is not activated and the reception is performed. An effect situation in which the effective period as an effect ends (when an effect pattern is selected according to the establishment of the fifth determination condition) appears.

  In other words, in this case, when a precursor effect of a specific mode (see FIG. 295 (g)) is performed, the same saddle image and the same bar display are respectively displayed in the reception effect corresponding to the precursor effect. In other words, there are cases where the production reception is automatically generated within the effective period (see FIGS. 295 (i) to (k)) and when the production is not automatically generated (see FIGS. 295 (l) and (m)). Therefore, it is possible to perform the reception effect with a sense of tension.

  In addition, in this effect example, as shown in FIG. 295 (m), even when the effective period as the reception effect is ended without the automatic effect function being enabled, the effective period is ended and the effect is accepted. Is not permitted, the “bar display indicating the remaining time as a period during which the production reception is permitted” is not hidden and is maintained. Therefore, it was a reception effect in which the automatic effect function was not activated by confirming that the effect situation that the effect after the operation did not occur even though the gauge remaining amount was “0” occurred. Can be recognized, and it is expected to suppress a decrease in the entertainment interest of the game. In the drawing shown in FIG. 295 (m), “?” Is made to appear, but any production change may not be caused.

  Also in this effect example, as in the case of the effect example shown in FIG. 285, the time from when the effect reception is automatically generated until the period initially set as the effect reception period ends (in FIG. 296 (a)). Timing tg3 to tg4) shown, and the time from the end of the period initially set as the effect reception period until the bar display is not displayed (timing tg4 to tg5 shown in FIG. 296 (a)) Are preferably set as the same length of time.

  Also in this effect example, when starting the post-operation effect while leaving the bar display, the stepwise effect as described with reference to FIGS. 290 and 289 may be performed.

  Also, the time during which the bar display remains when the automatic performance function is activated (timing tg3 to tg5 shown in FIG. 296 (a)) and the time during which the bar display remains when the automatic performance function is not activated ( It is desirable that the timings tg4 to tg5a) shown in FIG.

  The non-automatic reception effects (FIGS. 295 (g), (h), (l), (m)) and the automatic reception effects (FIGS. 294 (b) to (f)) are sequentially within one symbol variation. May be generated. However, when the non-automatic reception effect is executed, the automatic reception effect can subsequently occur. However, when the automatic reception effect is executed, the non-automatic reception effect cannot be generated thereafter. It is desirable. According to such a configuration, a person who misunderstood that the reception is automatically generated by executing the automatic reception effect so that the opportunity for the generation in the reception effect in which the automatic performance function is not activated is lost thereafter. It is expected that such a situation is suitably suppressed.

  Also in the production example, the cocoon image simulating the operation means may be displayed in any of a plurality of modes (first mode and second mode) with different expectations. And about the 1st mode with low degree of expectation, although it can be displayed in both the reception stage where the automatic production function is activated and the reception production where the automatic production function is not activated, about the second mode with high degree of expectation May appear only when a reception effect for enabling the automatic effect function is occurring.

  In the above-described example of production, an automatic reception effect (see FIGS. 294 (d) to (f)) that occurs through a precursor effect of a special mode and an automatic reception effect (FIG. 295 (i)) that occurs through a precursor effect of a specific mode. (See (k)) and non-automatic reception effect (see FIGS. 295 (l) and (m)) that occurs after a prelude effect of a specific mode, the same post-operation effect ( For example, the operation of the specific decorative member SDY (strap) is performed. However, an automatic reception effect (see FIGS. 294 (d) to (f)) generated through a prelude effect in a special mode and an automatic reception effect (see FIGS. 295 (i) through (k) through a predecessor effect in a specific mode. )) And a non-automatic reception effect (see FIGS. 295 (l) and (m)) that occurs after a predecessor effect of a specific mode, so that different post-operation effects are performed when the effect is accepted. It may be.

  In the above-described example of production, an automatic reception effect (see FIGS. 294 (d) to (f)) that occurs through a precursor effect of a special mode and an automatic reception effect (FIG. 295 (i)) that occurs through a precursor effect of a specific mode. ~ (K)) and the non-automatic reception effect (see FIGS. 295 (l) and (m)) generated through the sign effect of the specific mode, the sign at the same timing tg1 after the start of symbol variation The production is started and the reception production is started at the same timing tg2, but the start timings are not necessarily the same. As described above, each of these effects is executed in different effect patterns.

  The effect time may be different between the warning effect of the special mode shown in FIG. 294 (b) and the warning effect of the specific mode shown in FIG. 295 (g). For example, it is set as a relatively long production time so that it is difficult to overlook the sign effect of the special mode shown in FIG. 294 (b), and this is overlooked for the sign effect of the specific mode shown in FIG. 295 (c). If the presentation time is relatively short so that it is easy, it will be easy to overlook only when a sign production that is inconvenient for the player appears. Can be suppressed.

  In the above-described production example, the case where the operation button 410 is used as the operation target has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, in the automatic reception effect (see FIGS. 294 (d) to (f)) that is generated through a prelude effect in a special mode, the automatic reception effect (see FIGS. 294 (d) to (f)) is the automatic reception effect that is generated through the prelude effect in a specific mode. 295 (i) to (k)) and the non-automatic reception effect (see FIGS. 295 (l) and (m)) generated through the precursor effect of the specific mode, the operation button 410 is the operation target. You may do it. Furthermore, in the automatic reception effect (see FIGS. 294 (d) to (f)) generated through the sign effect of the special mode, when the reception effect for the sword decorative body 5001 is generated and the operation button 410 There may be a case where a reception effect for the operation target occurs. In addition, when generating the reception effect which makes the operation object the sword decoration body 5001, it cannot be overemphasized that the heel image displayed during this reception effect will be displayed as a sword decoration image SYG.

  In the above-described effect example, a part of the period in which the sign effect (special aspect, specific aspect) is executed and the period in which the reception effect is executed may overlap. For example, if at least a part of the precursor effect (for example, a part of the spiral effect) is left only for a predetermined time after the reception effect is started and gradually disappears, Even after the effective period is started, it is possible to grasp that the automatic performance function is activated in the early stage. In addition, you may make it leave only after the start of the said reception effect only the warning effect of a special aspect among the warning effect of a special aspect and the warning effect of a specific aspect.

  In this effect example, when a precursor effect (FIG. 295 (g)) in a specific mode appears, a non-automatic reception effect that is not subject to the “automatic effect function” is necessarily generated as a reception effect corresponding to the precursor effect. Thus, during the period in which the sign production is performed, it may be possible to grasp in advance that the “automatic production function” is not activated in the subsequent reception production. That is, in this case, after the reception effect shown in FIG. 295 (h) occurs, if no operation is performed by the player, FIGS. 295 (l) and (m) appear in sequence, and FIG. 295 (i) ~ (K) will be omitted.

  In the above-described effect examples shown in FIGS. 294 to 296, after the operation with the bar display remaining, when the effect reception is generated by the automatic effect function or when the effective period ends without the automatic effect function being enabled. The production situation that the production is started and the production is not started after the operation is made to appear. However, in terms of processing load, even when an effect is received by an operation by a player, the post-operation effect is started with the bar display remaining, and the post-operation effect is executed in the same process. It is desirable.

[Receiving effect that also functions as an effect that suggests automatic reception]
As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the automatic performance function for the operation target is activated at a predetermined timing within the valid period in which the performance reception is permitted, and the operation is performed without any operation by the player. It is possible to generate a post-production. However, in the pachinko machine 1 provided with such “automatic effecting means”, even if the player forgets to perform the operation, the reception of the effect is automatically generated, so that an operation opportunity is given to the player. There is a concern that the feeling of tension at the time of disappearing may be lost, and that it may become a mere display effect that only a predetermined moving image flows.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the precursor effect is executed in a specific manner, a non-automatic reception effect that is not the target of the “automatic effect function” is generated as the reception effect corresponding to the precursor effect. In some cases, an automatic reception effect that is the target of the “automatic effect function” may occur. That is, in this case, since the reception of the production does not necessarily occur automatically, it is expected that the tension until the reception of the production is automatically generated is suitably maintained.

  However, even though a non-automatic reception effect that is not the target of the “automatic effect function” has occurred, there may be cases where it is not operated as a result of misrecognizing that an effect reception occurs without an operation by the player, There will be a loss of opportunity to receive the production, and there is a concern about the decline in the entertainment interest. In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, during the period in which the warning effect is executed in a specific manner, the reception effect corresponding to the warning effect occurs in either the automatic reception effect or the non-automatic reception effect. Although it is difficult to recognize, within the effective period after the reception effect is started, a display that can recognize that the reception effect is generated by the automatic reception effect can appear. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the loss of the opportunity to receive the production reception without understanding whether the automatic production function is activated.

  FIG. 297 to FIG. 299 are diagrams illustrating examples of effects that make it possible to recognize that the “automatic effect function” is enabled only in the reception effect, out of the sign effect and the reception effect. Here again, an explanation will be given as an example of an effect when the automatic effect function can be activated (automatic effect mode, or a gaming machine that can always be automatically effected). Since a reception effect that is not subject to validation can also occur, a display such as “during auto button setting” is not performed.

  FIG. 297 (a) shows that the number of holds is 3, and the decorative display SZ (special symbol) is displayed on the effect display device 1600 in the effect pattern according to the result of the jackpot determination, and the reach state is reached. The production situation is shown.

  FIG. 297 (b) shows a presentation reception (operation) during the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 297 (a) (here, the reach state may be a non-reach state). This shows a production situation in which a precursor production suggesting that is soon to be permitted.

  Here, the precursor effect shown in FIG. 297 (b) is generated when the timing th1 (see FIG. 299 (a)) has arrived, and two examples simulating the operation button 410 that is the operation target. It is displayed as an effect (specific mode) until the images approach each other and overlap. In particular, in this production example, the first image that displays “reliable” suggesting that the “automatic production function” is activated, and the “automatic production function” is activated or concealed. It is displayed as an effect (specific mode) until the second simulated image on which “dokidoki” is displayed approaches each other and overlaps. When the warning effect shown in FIG. 297 (b) appears, as the reception effect corresponding to the warning effect, an automatic reception effect in which the “automatic effect function” is activated occurs, and the “automatic effect function” is Since there is a case where a non-automatic reception effect that is not activated occurs, either the automatic reception effect or the non-automatic reception effect is performed after the precursor effect is performed while the precursor effect is performed. It is difficult to recognize what happens. In this precursor effect, the simulated image imitating the operation button 410 that is the operation target does not necessarily have to be displayed. Which of the automatic reception effect and the non-automatic reception effect occurs after the precursor effect is performed? As long as it is difficult to recognize.

  FIG. 297 (c) is a first schematic image in which “safe” is displayed indicating that the “automatic rendering function” is activated as a result of the precursor performance shown in FIG. 297 (b). , Among the second simulated images that are displayed as “Dokidoki” that is activated or concealed, the first simulated image that is displayed as “reliable” is left, The production situation in which the second image, which is displayed as “Dokidoki”, is not displayed (the first determination result (the production result shown in FIG. The production pattern that appears) or the second determination result (the production pattern in which the production result shown in FIG. 297 (f) described later appears) is shown. Such an effect situation appears when timing th2 (see FIG. 299 (a)) arrives, and at the timing th2, a reception effect in which an operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410 is started. Will be.

  More specifically, as shown in the figure, the first simulated image displayed as “reliable” as the button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410 (the cocoon image simulating the operation button 410) is displayed in the display area. In addition, an instruction display for prompting an operation on the operation button 410 (here, a character display such as “press”, a downward arrow display, and a bar display indicating a remaining time during which an effect reception is allowed) appears. It is like that. At this time, the operation button 410 to be given an operation opportunity is in a light emitting state, and this also prompts the operation on the operation button 410.

  In this respect, when the first image (reliable) is displayed in the reception effect, “the reception of the effect is automatically generated when the predetermined timing within the valid period arrives even without any operation by the player (the“ automatic effect function ” Only when the player is in a situation where an “automatic reception effect where the same post-operation effect appears as when the player performs the operation” is being executed. Therefore, by confirming that the first image (reliable) is displayed when the reception effect is generated, it is confirmed that the “automatic effect function” is being executed as an automatic reception effect. It becomes possible to recognize.

  According to such a configuration, while the precursor effect (see FIG. 297 (b)) is being performed, the “automatic reception effect in which the automatic effect function is activated” is the reception effect corresponding to the precursor effect. It is possible to grasp that the "automatic reception effect in which the automatic performance function is activated" is being executed when the reception effect is started, while keeping the subsequent occurrences secret. Become so. In other words, in this case, until the reception effect is started, the “automatic effect function” is kept secret until the reception effect starts. By making it possible to grasp this, it is possible to suppress the loss of the opportunity for the production reception without understanding whether the “automatic production function” is enabled.

  In this production example, the operation button 410 is not operated within a period set to allow the production reception, and at a predetermined timing th3 within the valid period (see FIG. 299 (a)). It is assumed that the automatic performance function for the operation button 410 is activated. FIG. 297 (d) depicts a state where the automatic performance function for the operation button 410 is about to be activated at the timing th3. When the automatic performance function is activated, the reception of the performance is permitted. Thus, the same change as that in the case where the production is accepted by the operation on the operation button 410 within the effective period set as described above is caused to the production. Here, based on the result of the effect determination performed at the time of symbol variation, “a low-expected aspect effect in which“ the specific decorative member SDY (a glimpse) ”operates and a chance! 297 (e)) ”or“ a specific decorative member SDY (a spear object) operates and a highly anticipated effect is displayed on the effect display device 1600 (see FIG. 297 (f)). ) "Is executed as a post-operation effect.

  In this regard, in this effect example (including the effect portion described later with reference to FIG. 298), even if the post-operation effect is executed in any manner (FIGS. 297 (e) and (f)). The haze image imitating the operation button 410 (button image BTG) is not hidden, and the post-operation effect is started in a state in which it is maintained. As a result, even if the production reception is automatically generated without the player's knowledge, it can be recognized that the post-operation production is performed in response to the “production reception for the operation button 410”. In addition, since there is a description such as “reliable”, it is possible to recognize that the “post-operation effect is automatically generated by the automatic effect function being activated”.

  In this effect example, as shown in FIG. 299 (a), the period during which the effect reception is permitted is early at timing th3 when the automatic effect function for the operation button 410 is activated and the effect reception is automatically generated. Will be terminated. After this, while the acceptance of the production is not allowed, the post-operation production is started with the bag image (button image BTG) imitating the operation button 410 being displayed, but the operation button 410 is imitated. The haze image (button image BTG) is hidden before the timing th6 when the post-operation effect ends.

  According to such a configuration, in the period from the start of the post-operation effect to the end of the operation, the bag image imitating the operation means (in this case, the operation button 410) that is the operation target is displayed. Period (timing th3 to th5) and a period (timing th5 to th6) in which the same image is not displayed appear. Therefore, even when the post-operation effect is started with the haze image imitating the operation means (in this case, the operation button 410) that is the operation target being displayed, the haze image is not displayed. It is expected that the tension feeling due to the fact that the post-operation effect must be confirmed before being performed is suitably maintained.

  On the other hand, in this effect example, after the precursor effect shown in FIG. 297 (b) is performed, the reception effect shown in FIG. 298 (g) occurs instead of the reception effect shown in FIG. 297 (c). There is also a case where it is possible.

  That is, FIG. 298 (g) is a first pattern in which “safe” is displayed as a suggestion that the “automatic rendering function” is activated as a result of the precursor performance shown in FIG. 297 (b). Of the image and the second simulated image that is displayed as “Dokidoki” where the “automatic rendering function” is activated or concealed, the second simulated image that is displayed as “Dokidoki” is left. , An effect situation in which the first image that is displayed as “reliable” is hidden (the third determination result (the effect shown in FIG. 298 (i) described later) in the effect determination performed based on the result of the big hit determination The effect pattern in which the result appears), the fourth determination result (the effect pattern in which the effect result shown in FIG. 298 (j) described later) appears, or the fifth determination result (shown in FIGS. 298 (k) and (l) described later). Production patterns appearing It shows the case) the emission) is obtained. Such an effect situation appears when the timing th2 (see FIG. 299 (a) or (b)) arrives, and an operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410 at the timing th2. The reception effect will be started.

  More specifically, as shown in the figure, a second simulated image that is displayed as “button-like” as a button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410 (an image simulating the operation button 410) is displayed in the display area. In addition, an instruction display for prompting an operation on the operation button 410 (here, a character display such as “press”, a downward arrow display, and a bar display indicating a remaining time during which an effect reception is allowed) appears. It is like that. At this time, the operation button 410 to be given an operation opportunity is in a light emitting state, and this also prompts the operation on the operation button 410.

  In this regard, when the second image (dokidoki) is displayed in the reception effect, “the reception of the effect is automatically generated when the predetermined timing within the valid period arrives without any operation by the player (the“ automatic effect function ” Enabled), when there is a situation where an “automatic reception effect where the same post-operation effect appears as when an operation by the player is performed” is executed, and “there is no operation reception without an operation by the player” In addition, there is both a situation where a “non-automatic reception effect where no post-operation effect is executed” is being executed. Therefore, by confirming that the second simulated image (pounding) is displayed when the reception effect occurs, it is impossible to recognize whether or not the “automatic effect function” is activated. To be able to understand and to maintain tension.

  According to such a configuration, while the precursor effect (see FIG. 297 (b)) is being performed, and the reception effect corresponding to the precursor effect (see FIG. 298 (g)) is being performed. In both cases, it becomes difficult to recognize whether or not the “automatic rendering function” is activated, and this makes it possible to maintain a sense of tension.

  When the reception detection shown in FIG. 298 (g) is executed as “automatic reception effect in which the automatic performance function is activated”, the operation by the player is not performed and the timing th3 (FIG. 299 ( When (see a)) arrives, as shown in FIG. 298 (h), an effect situation in which the automatic effect function for the operation button 410 is about to be activated now appears. After that, when the automatic production function is activated, the same change as that in the case where the production is accepted by the operation on the operation button 410 within the effective period set so that the production acceptance is permitted is caused to the production. Will be allowed to. Here, based on the result of the effect determination performed at the time of symbol variation, “a low-expected aspect effect in which“ the specific decorative member SDY (a glimpse) ”operates and a chance! 298 (i)) ”or“ a specific decorative member SDY (a spear object) operates, and a highly anticipated effect is displayed on the effect display device 1600 (see FIG. 298 (j)). ) "Is executed as a post-operation effect.

  As described above, in this effect example, even if the post-operation effect is executed in any manner (FIGS. 298 (i) and (j)), the bag image (button image BTG) imitating the operation button 410 ) Is not hidden and the post-operation effect is started in a state where this is maintained. As a result, even if the production reception is automatically generated without the player's knowledge, it can be recognized that the post-operation production is performed in response to the “production reception for the operation button 410”. , "Dokidoki" and the post-operation effect as a result of the automatic production reception while it was kept secret that it was in the state of "automatic reception production is activated to enable the automatic production function" You will be able to recognize that you are in a situation where

  On the other hand, when the reception detection shown in FIG. 298 (g) is executed as “a non-automatic reception effect in which the automatic performance function is not activated”, the timing th4 (FIG. As shown in FIG. 298 (k) and FIG. 299 (b), an effect situation in which the effective period as the reception effect ends without the automatic effect function being activated as shown in FIG. 298 (k) and FIG. 299 (b). (When the effect pattern corresponding to the fifth determination result being obtained) appears.

  In this effect example, as shown in FIG. 298 (l), even when the effective period as the reception effect is ended without the automatic effect function being enabled, the effective period is ended and the effect is received. Is not permitted, the “saddle image imitating the operation button 410 (button image BTG)” is not hidden and is maintained. Therefore, the post-operation effect is not performed as a result of the fact that the effect reception was not automatically generated while it was kept secret that "the automatic reception effect where the automatic effect function is activated" has occurred. You will be able to recognize the situation. In addition, although “?” Appears in the diagram shown in FIG. 298 (l), any production change may not be caused.

  Also in this effect example, as in the case of the effect example shown in FIG. 285, the time from when the effect reception is automatically generated until the period initially set as the effect reception period ends (in FIG. 299 (a)). Timings th3 to th4 shown) and the time from when the period initially set as the production reception period ends until the haze image is hidden (timing th4 to th5 shown in FIG. 299 (a)) It is desirable to set as the same length of time.

  Also, the time during which the haze image is left when the automatic effect function is activated (timing th3 to th5 shown in FIG. 299 (a)) and the time during which the haze image is left when the automatic effect function is not activated ( It is desirable to set the same time as the timings th4 to th5a) shown in FIG. 299 (b).

  The non-automatic reception effects (FIGS. 298 (g), (k), (l)) and the automatic reception effects (FIGS. 297 (b) to (f)) can occur sequentially within one symbol variation. You may do it. However, when the non-automatic reception effect is executed, the automatic reception effect can subsequently occur. However, when the automatic reception effect is executed, the non-automatic reception effect cannot be generated thereafter. It is desirable. According to such a configuration, a person who misunderstood that the reception is automatically generated by executing the automatic reception effect so that the opportunity for the generation in the reception effect in which the automatic performance function is not activated is lost thereafter. It is expected that such a situation is suitably suppressed.

  Also in the production example, the cocoon image simulating the operation means may be displayed in any of a plurality of modes (first mode and second mode) with different expectations. And about the 1st mode with low degree of expectation, although it can be displayed in both the reception stage where the automatic production function is activated and the reception production where the automatic production function is not activated, about the second mode with high degree of expectation May appear only when a reception effect for enabling the automatic effect function is occurring.

  In the above-described effect example, an automatic reception effect (see FIG. 297 (c)) in which the first image that is displayed as “reliable” is displayed, and a second image that is displayed as “dokidoki” is displayed. There is an automatic reception effect (see FIG. 298 (h)) and a non-automatic reception effect (see FIG. 298 (k)) in which a second image with a display such as “Dokidoki” is displayed. When done, the same post-operation effects (such as the operation of a specific decorative member SDY (a glimpse)) are performed. However, an automatic reception effect (see FIG. 297 (c)) in which the first simulated image displayed as “safe” is displayed and an automatic reception in which the second simulated image displayed as “dokidoki” is displayed. When the production is accepted for the production (see FIG. 298 (h)) and the non-automatic reception production (see FIG. 298 (k)) in which the second simulated image with a display such as “Dokidoki” is displayed. Different post-operation effects may be performed.

  In the above-described effect example, an automatic reception effect (see FIG. 297 (c)) in which the first image that is displayed as “reliable” is displayed, and a second image that is displayed as “dokidoki” is displayed. The automatic variation effect (see FIG. 298 (h)) and the non-automatic reception effect (see FIG. 298 (k)) on which the second image with a display such as “Dokidoki” is displayed have pattern fluctuations. Although the precursor effect is started at the same timing th1 after the start and the reception effect is started at the same timing th2, the start timings are not necessarily the same. As described above, each of these effects is executed in different effect patterns.

  A reception effect (see FIG. 297 (c)) in which a first image that is displayed as “safe” is displayed and a reception effect (see FIG. 298) in which a second image that is displayed as “dokidoki” is displayed. (See (h) and (k)), the length of the valid period in the reception effect may be different. In particular, in the reception effect (see FIGS. 298 (h) and (k)) in which the second simulated image displayed as “Dokidoki” is displayed, the first simulated image displayed as “safe” is displayed. By setting the effective time shorter than the reception effect (see FIG. 297 (c)), it is possible to more suitably maintain a sense of tension during the effective period.

  In addition, an automatic reception effect (see FIG. 298 (h)) in which a second simulated image displayed as “Dokidoki” is displayed and a non-automatic display in which a second simulated image displayed as “Dokidoki” is displayed. The length of the effective period in the reception effects may be different from the reception effects (see FIG. 298 (k)). In particular, in the non-automatic reception effect (see FIG. 298 (k)) in which the “automatic effect function” is not activated, the automatic reception effect (see FIG. 298 (h)) in which the “automatic effect function” is activated. By setting the short effective time, it becomes possible to more suitably maintain the tension in the effective period.

  In the above-described production example, the case where the operation button 410 is used as the operation target has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, in the automatic reception effect (see FIG. 297 (c)) in which the first image that displays “safe” is displayed, the sword decorative body 5001 is set as the operation target, and the second display in which “dokidoki” is displayed. An automatic reception effect (see FIG. 298 (h)) in which a dummy image is displayed, and a non-automatic reception effect (see FIG. 298 (k)) in which a second dummy image with a display such as “Dokidoki” is displayed. Then, the operation button 410 may be set as an operation target. In addition, when generating the reception effect which makes the operation object the sword decoration body 5001, it cannot be overemphasized that the heel image displayed during this reception effect will be displayed as a sword decoration image SYG.

  In the above-described effect example, a part of the period in which the sign effect (special aspect, specific aspect) is executed and the period in which the reception effect is executed may overlap. For example, only for a predetermined time after the start of the reception effect, at least a part of the sign effect (for example, a predetermined effect, etc.) is left in the form of being entirely or partially overlapped with the bag image, which is gradually If it disappears, it becomes difficult to grasp that the automatic production function is activated in the early stage even after the validity period of the reception production starts. It should be noted that the reception effect (see FIG. 297 (c)) in which the first image that is displayed as “safe” is displayed and the reception effect that is displayed in the second image that is displayed as “dokidoki” ( Only in one of the reception effects as shown in FIGS. 298 (h) and (k)), at least a part of the sign effect (for example, a predetermined effect, etc.) overlaps entirely or partly with the obscene image. It may be left in the form.

  In this effect example, the reception effect in which the second simulated image that is displayed as “Dokidoki” is displayed may be generated only as a non-automatic reception effect that is not the target of the “automatic effect function”. That is, in this case, after the reception effect shown in FIG. 298 (g) occurs, if no operation is performed by the player, FIGS. 298 (k) and (l) appear in sequence, and FIG. 298 (h) ~ (J) will be omitted.

  In the above-described production examples shown in FIGS. 297 to 299, after the operation is performed with the haze image remaining when the production reception is generated by the automatic production function or when the effective period ends without the automatic production function being activated. The production situation that the production is started and the production is not started after the operation is made to appear. However, in terms of processing load, even if an effect is received by an operation by the player, the post-operation effect is started with the same process, so that the post-operation effect is started with the spear image remaining. It is desirable.

  In the above-described effect examples shown in FIGS. 297 to 299, the sign image effect corresponding to the reception effect in which the first image image displayed as “reliable” is displayed, and the second image image displayed as “dokidoki”. The sign effect corresponding to the reception effect that is displayed is the same. However, as a precursor effect corresponding to the reception effect in which the first image that is displayed as “safe” is displayed on condition that a predetermined effect condition is satisfied, normal time (FIG. 297 (b)) is used. The content of the production different from that of the reference) may appear. For example, if a flame effect indicating that the degree of expectation is high is added to the sign production, “the degree of expectation is high” and “the automatic production function is activated” Since it is suggested in advance only when the performance condition is satisfied, it is possible to improve the game entertainment while maintaining a sense of tension when the effective period occurs.

  In the above-described effect examples shown in FIGS. 297 to 299, when the effect acceptance occurs, or when the effective period ends without the automatic effect function being enabled, the operation means that is the operation target is imitated. The display mode of the image is changed, and the post-operation effect is started (or the post-operation effect is not started) in a state where the simulated image is displayed in the changed display mode. The post-operation effect may be started (or the post-operation effect is not started) in a state where the bag image is displayed with the display mode and display position in the period).

  A post-operation effect that is started while displaying a spear image imitating the operation means to be operated is a display effect in the effect display device 1600, a light effect by a lamp provided in the game board 5, an effect by sound, and Any one of the movable effects by the decorative accessory may be used, or an appropriate combination of these effects may be used. In addition, the first post-operation effect that is started while displaying the eyelid image simulating the operation means to be operated, and the timing th5 when the eyelid image simulating the operation means to be operated is hidden You may make it each perform the 2nd post-operation production started after that.

  In the above-described effect examples shown in FIGS. 297 to 299, as in the case of the effect example described above, the heel image imitating the operation means to be operated is dynamically displayed and the dynamic display is maintained. You may make it start the post-operation production in the state performed.

  In the above-described effect examples shown in FIGS. 297 to 299, when a reception effect is performed by adding a notation such as “relief” or “dokidoki” to the samurai image and changing the mode as the samurai image. We decided to suggest whether the “automatic rendering function” would be effective. However, a special image that is displayed only when the “automatic rendering function” is activated may be displayed within a period during which the reception rendering is performed (valid period). You don't have to. In this case, it is desirable not to hide the special image that is displayed separately from the haze image, but to start the post-operation effect while leaving it untouched. Similarly to this, the notation “dokidoki” may be displayed separately from the cocoon image, and the post-operation effect may be started with the image remaining (or the post-operation effect is not started).

  In the above example, the display of “Reliable” and “Dokidoki” is changed during the period when the reception effect is performed. I decided to do it. However, instead of this, by changing the mode of the operation means to be operated (light emission mode, operation state (presence / absence of vibration), etc.), an automatic reception effect that enables the “automatic performance function” is generated. You may make an suggestion about what you are doing. Or, during the period in which the reception effect is performed, both the display of “reliable” and “dokidoki” and the mode of the operation means to be operated (light emission mode, operation state (vibration presence / absence), etc.) are different. However, in this case, one of the display of “reliable” and “dokidoki” and the mode of the operation means to be operated (light emission mode, operating state (presence of vibration), etc.) It is desirable to continue the state only and to end the state and start the post-operation effect in order to shift the gaze to the newly generated post-operation effect.

  In the above example, when an automatic reception effect in which the “automatic effect function” is activated occurs, a display such as “reliable” is displayed within a period before the occurrence of the precursor effect for the automatic reception effect. A specific display mode that suggests that a reception effect in which the first schematic image is displayed may appear. In this case, it is desirable that the specific display mode is not displayed at least before the reception effect is started, such as within a period from when the sign effect is started to when it is ended.

  In the above production example, after a specific image (pounding) that suggests that the “automatic direction function” may not be activated within the period in which the prelude production is performed, the specific image (pounding) is displayed. The reception effect may be started in the form of changing to a special image (reliable) that has been hidden until the end. Even in such a configuration, it is impossible to recognize that the “automatic rendering function” is activated within the period in which the sign production is performed, and it is preferable to maintain a sense of tension when the valid period occurs. Will be able to.

[Improve performance using the automatic rendering function]
As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the automatic performance function for the operation target is activated at a predetermined timing within the valid period in which the performance reception is permitted, and the operation is performed without any operation by the player. It is possible to generate a post-production. In this regard, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment is devised to increase the operating rate of the pachinko machine 1 by creating such a novel stage using the “automatic presentation function”. I have to.

  FIG. 300 is a diagram for explaining novel rendering using the automatic rendering function. More specifically, the reception effect is generated based on the number of suspensions (0 to 3) for maintaining the unexecuted state when the symbol variation is newly digested, or further, the automatic effect function is enabled. It is a random number distribution table used for the production determination for the. The total number of random numbers is “100”, and any one of these random numbers is acquired, and the reception effect is generated by referring to which of the distribution tables the acquired random numbers are distributed. In addition, an effect determination regarding whether to activate the automatic effect function is performed. Note that here as well, an explanation will be given as an example of an effect when the automatic effect function is enabled (automatic effect mode, or a gaming machine that is always in an automatic effect state).

  As shown in FIG. 300, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, in the normal gaming state, the number of holdings (the game has just started) is still small (for example, specific The ratio that this is a “non-automatic reception effect that is not the target of the automatic performance function” when the reception effect occurs within the symbol variation (direction pattern) digested when the number is less than “2” However, the reception effect is within the symbol variation (effect pattern) digested when the second effect situation (for example, more than the specific number “2”) is high (the game is continued to some extent). When this occurs, the control related to the production is performed so that it becomes higher than the ratio of “non-automatic reception production that is not subject to the automatic production function”.

  In this case, in the case of the design fluctuation (production pattern) started when the number of holdings is still small, the ratio of generating “non-automatic reception production that is not subject to automatic production function” is relatively high. On the other hand, in the pattern variation (production pattern) started when there is a large number of holdings, the ratio of generating the “non-automatic reception production that is not the target of the automatic production function” is relatively low. In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the automatic reception effect that is the target of the “automatic effect function” is also the same in the case of the pattern variation (effect pattern) started when the number of holdings is small. While the generation rate is relatively high, the generation rate is relatively low in the design variation (effect pattern) started when there is a large number of suspensions. However, the rate of change in the rate of occurrence is more gradual (mild) than in the case of non-automatic reception effects that are not subject to the “automatic performance function”. The ratio of “non-automatic reception effect that is not the target of the effect function” is made lower as the number of holds increases.

  According to such a configuration, the ratio that this is not an automatic reception effect but a non-automatic reception effect when a reception effect occurs is higher than when there is a large number of holdings. Therefore, when the game has just started and the number of holds is low, it is possible to increase the player's awareness of participation in the game and encourage enthusiasm. Also, if the game is continued to some extent and the number of pending is high, the proportion of non-automatic reception effects will be low, so another stage of performance ( It is possible to provide calm performance. Thus, by changing the stage performance related to the operation while the game is continued, it is expected that the game entertainment is suitably maintained without being bored.

  In addition, according to the above configuration, when the above-described other performance (settled performance) is tired and the player quits the game, there is a performance that can increase the awareness of participation in the game by reducing the number of holds. Since it will reappear, it is expected that the change in performance will discourage game interruption.

  An important point as an invention relating to this production example is to change the rate at which the “automatic production function” is activated by increasing or decreasing the number of holds, thereby changing the production performance of the “automatic production function”. It is to produce. Therefore, the rate of occurrence of the reception effect may or may not differ between the symbol variation that is digested when the number of reservations is small and the symbol variation that is digested when the number of reservations is large. It can be said that there is a technical feature in how the rate at which the “automatic effect function” is activated for the reception effect changes when the reception effect occurs within the symbol variation.

  For example, only "Non-automatic reception effect not targeted for automatic performance function" among "Non-automatic reception performance not targeted for automatic performance function" and "Automatic reception performance targeted for automatic performance function" When the number of holds is low and the number of holds is high, the rate of occurrence is different, and “automatic reception effects subject to the automatic performance function” has a low number of holds. The occurrence rate may be the same when there is a certain number of times and when there is a large number of holds. That is, in this case, for “non-automatic reception effect that is not the target of the automatic effect function”, for example, the random number distribution shown in FIG. In the pattern), the occurrence rate is relatively high, and the occurrence rate is relatively lowered in the symbol variation (effect pattern) started when the number of reservations is large. However, for the automatic reception effect that is the target of the “automatic effect function”, the same occurrence rate (for example, the value of “automatic reception function” shown in FIG. Regardless of the number, all are set to “20”.

  According to such a configuration, a level that guarantees that the same post-operation effect is performed even when there is no operation by the player (the occurrence ratio of “automatic reception effect subject to the automatic effect function”) As for this, it will be made uniform regardless of the number of holds. Therefore, even if the occurrence ratio of the “non-automatic reception effect that is not the target of the automatic performance function” is changed according to the number of suspensions, it is uniform regardless of the game situation against the player forgetting to operate. Security can be provided, and a sense of security is created.

  In addition, for “non-automatic reception effects that are not subject to the automatic performance function”, there are a plurality of performance modes (such as different display contents during reception effect generation, different post-operation effects, different operation targets, etc.) In addition to the case where a non-automatic reception effect is generated only in any one of the production modes based on the result of the production determination at the time of symbol variation, the non-automatic reception production is sequentially performed multiple times in two or more production modes. It may be generated. In other words, in this case, the occurrence rate of “non-automatic reception effect not subject to the automatic effect function” means the rate at which at least one of these effect modes occurs within the symbol variation execution period.

  In addition, for "automatic reception effects targeted for the automatic performance function", a plurality of performance modes (such as different display contents during reception effect generation, different post-operation effects, different operation targets, etc.) Are prepared, and the automatic reception effect is generated sequentially in two or more effect modes in addition to the case where the automatic reception effect is generated only in any one of the effect modes based on the result of the effect determination at the time of symbol variation. There may be cases. In other words, in this case, the occurrence ratio of “automatic reception effect targeted for the automatic effect function” means a ratio in which at least one of the effect modes is generated within the symbol variation execution period.

  However, when the non-automatic reception effect is executed, the automatic reception effect can subsequently occur. However, when the automatic reception effect is executed, the non-automatic reception effect cannot be generated thereafter. It is desirable. According to such a configuration, a person who misunderstood that the reception is automatically generated by executing the automatic reception effect so that the opportunity for the generation in the reception effect in which the automatic performance function is not activated is lost thereafter. It is expected that such a situation is suitably suppressed.

  Further, in the above-described effect example, only one of “non-automatic reception effect that is not the target of the automatic performance function” and “automatic reception effect that is the target of the automatic performance function” is displayed within the period when the symbol variation is performed. Although described as an example of occurrence, “a non-automatic reception effect that is not the target of the automatic performance function” and “automatic reception effect that is the target of the automatic performance function” may be sequentially generated. In this case, in the table shown in FIG. 300, the total number of random numbers obtained by adding the distribution value “without reception effect” and the distribution value “with reception effect” exceeds “100”.

  Further, in the above-described production example, in at least one of the “non-automatic reception production that is not the target of the automatic production function” and “automatic reception production that is the target of the automatic production function”, the operation means that is the operation target is 2 There may be more than one. For example, a random number value of “20” that is assigned to “automatically accept function” when the number of holds is “0” is given to the first operating means, and the second operating means On the other hand, it may be further distributed according to the case where an operation opportunity is given.

  It should be noted that the determination of whether or not to generate a “non-automatic reception effect that is not the target of the automatic performance function” and the determination of whether or not to generate the “automatic reception effect that is the target of the automatic performance function” are performed when the pattern changes It is desirable to be executed as one of the effect determinations according to the result of the big hit determination.

  As described above, in the above-described effect example, when there is a large number of holds, the “non-automatic reception effect that is not subject to the automatic effect function” is unlikely to occur. In this regard, when the “non-automatic reception effect” occurs in spite of such a large number of holds, the “non-automatic reception effect” occurs when the hold number is low, If the ratio of the “automatic reception effect subject to the automatic performance function” is further increased within one symbol variation in which the “non-automatic reception performance” has occurred, only when the number of holdings is large, The “non-automatic reception effect” can be made to function as an effect that suggests the occurrence of the “automatic reception effect” (an effect that suggests before the sign effect for the automatic reception effect). Depending on the situation, it is possible to vary the performance of the automatic performance function. In addition, as a technique to increase the rate of further occurrence of “automatic reception effect” within one symbol variation where “non-automatic reception effect” has occurred, instead of increasing the rate of occurrence of “automatic reception effect” itself, It is desirable that the production condition for generating the “automatic reception effect” is easily established as the production condition for generating the “non-automatic reception production” is established.

  In addition, when there is the largest number of holdings (the situation in which the “non-automatic reception effect” is most unlikely to appear), when the “non-automatic reception effect” occurs, the one symbol variation in which the “non-automatic reception effect” occurs The “automatic reception effect” may also be generated within. According to such a configuration, the “non-automatic reception effect” can be made to function as a precursor effect with respect to the “automatic reception effect”, and this also makes it possible to vary the performance of the automatic effect function. become.

  When the "non-automatic reception effect" is in a situation (valid period) or when the "automatic reception effect" is in a situation (valid period) It is desirable to make the display contents different. In this case, of the display images displayed when the “non-automatic reception effect” is in the situation (valid period) and when the “automatic reception effect” is in the situation (valid period) It is desirable that at least the parts that are different are not hidden and that the production reception is generated and the post-operation production is performed. This is as described in the example of the “post-production”. For parts that are different (such as a spear image that simulates the operation means), leave it undisplayed and generate a production reception so that post-operation production is performed. The configuration described in the “post-operation effects suggested” or other examples may be adopted as appropriate.

  About each structure mentioned above concerning the said production example (production improvement using an automatic production function) and its modification, the non-automatic reception production which is not made into the object of an automatic production function, and the automatic reception made into the object of an automatic production function You may make it apply with respect to each production example mentioned above which can produce each.

[Prevents channel wastage through automatic production function]
As described above, in a gaming machine in which the number of channels is limited (for example, 32 channels), even if a special result is obtained in the jackpot determination according to the prize, the channel to which sound data is to be assigned is determined. In a situation where there is no free space (a situation where the number of free channels is 0), a special sound corresponding to the fact that a special result has been obtained cannot be assigned to a channel, and this cannot be output (or a sound that is already in a playback state). There is a concern that the game entertainment will be reduced due to the forced suspension.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when it is determined that a specific effect pattern is to be executed as the symbol variation according to the result of the jackpot determination, the symbol variation is started and ended. During the period, the effect display device 1600 performs a process of developing a display effect corresponding to a specific effect pattern, and a process of assigning and reproducing the sound of “BGM playback” corresponding to the specific effect pattern to a predetermined channel. Do. Then, when the display effect in the effect display device 1600 progresses to a predetermined timing within the symbol variation period, the sound of “BGM playback” is assigned to the predetermined channel, and the sound is output in a suppression mode or silence. The reception effect for the operation means (operation button 410, sword ornament 5001, etc.) is generated. As a result, when an effect is received, the sound of “BGM playback” is maintained in a state of being output in a suppression manner or silence, while a big hit symbol (a special display manner in the effect pattern) is displayed due to the symbol variation. A special performance sound that suggests an expected degree of appearance is output in a non-suppressed manner (suppressed operation sound output processing). The degree of expectation suggested by the special performance may be 100%.

  That is, in this case, when outputting the special effect sound in response to the effect reception, although the sound of “BGM playback” is still assigned to the predetermined channel, it is set to a state of being output in silence or silence. As a result, it is possible to provide an atmosphere in which channel usage is likely to be afforded. Therefore, providing the player with an opportunity to output the special performance sound in a state where anxiety such as “Maybe there is no space in the channel and the special performance sound may not be output” has been removed. As a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the entertainment interest.

  Note that data related to various effect sounds such as a plurality of BGM data is stored in predetermined storage means, and various effect sounds are reproduced by being read from the storage means and assigned to channels. Become.

  By the way, in a case where specific BGM data ("BGM playback" sound) corresponding to a specific performance pattern is assigned to a channel and this is to be output in a suppressed manner or silence, it is generally assigned to a channel. It is assumed that the process of suppressing the volume of the sound being recorded (the sound of “BGM playback”) (the process of changing the volume initial value defined in the sound data and reducing it) is performed. In fact, if such a volume suppression process is performed prior to giving an operation opportunity to a player (generating an effective period of production reception), a sound (“ It is possible to give the player an opportunity to operate (generate a valid period for the production reception) after setting the “BGM playback” sound) to a state of being output in a suppressed manner or in silence.

  However, as is well known, when an operation opportunity is given to a player, the effective period of the effect reception is generated for a predetermined time, but the operation (effect reception) is performed at any timing within this effective period. This is indeterminate (depending on the player) and cannot be predicted in advance. Therefore, even if an operation (production reception) is performed within the valid period, the volume suppression process can be terminated and the volume can be returned to the initial value. It is impossible to store the “BGM playback” sound in advance so that the specific music is cued at an indefinite timing.

  In addition to performing the process of returning the volume when an operation is performed by the player, the sound data of “BGM playback” is switched to the sound data of “BGM playback dedicated for special effect sound playback”. It is also conceivable to perform the process of reproducing. However, the “BGM playback” sound is played in accordance with the contents of various effects and the timing of the symbol stop until the specific effect pattern is stopped after the symbol is stopped. When an operation (production reception) is performed at an indefinite time (depending on the player), when the operation (production reception) is triggered, the sound of “BGM playback” is newly reproduced. There is a concern that so-called sound misalignment will occur between the various effects and symbol stop timings thereafter, and the game entertainment will be reduced. In short, considering that “the remaining time from the reception of the production to the end of the symbol variation is also undefined”, the length corresponding to the undefined remaining time at the timing of the reception of the production It can be said that it is difficult to newly assign the BGM data ("BGM playback" sound) to the channel.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when a specific effect pattern is executed, first, a plurality of sound data (BGM playback) sound corresponding to the specific effect pattern ( For example, normal fluctuation sound data, sound data for the first half of the super reach production, sound data for the second half of the super reach production, etc.) are determined according to the time series defined by the corresponding sound generation schedule data. Performs the process of sequentially assigning to channels. Of the plurality of sound data stored as the “BGM playback” sound corresponding to the specific effect pattern, specific sound data (one sound material) is defined by the sound generation schedule data. If assigned to a predetermined channel in a time-series manner, playback is started by being assigned to the predetermined channel from the timing before the effective period of effect reception within the specific effect pattern, and the effective period ends. Thus, reproduction is performed while maintaining the assignment state for a predetermined channel over a long period until the timing after the above.

  In this regard, in a certain section (special period) when the specific sound data (one sound material) is viewed in time series, a suppression mode or a process related to sound output in silence compared to other sections Is set in advance (stored as silence data), and the specific sound data is assigned to a predetermined channel according to the time series defined by the sound generation schedule data, Within the partial section (special period), there is a time-series relationship in which the valid period of the production reception is generated. In addition to this, even if an operation is performed by the player at any timing within the effective period of the above-mentioned production reception occurring within the special period (partial section), the special period from the special period (partial section) The sound of “BGM playback” is displayed as a special effect sound corresponding to the effect reception over two sections in the specific sound data with the period after the (partial section) ends (other sections). Reproduction is performed in a non-suppressed manner on a channel different from the assigned predetermined channel.

  According to such a configuration, a plurality of sound data (for example, sound data at the time of normal fluctuation, sound data of the first half of the super reach effect, The sound data of the second half of the reach production is assigned to the predetermined channels in sequence according to the time series defined by the corresponding sound generation schedule data, and the volume is not adjusted from the initial value. In both cases, it is possible to create a “suppressed state or state (special period) output in silence”. In addition, when an operation by a player is accepted in the “suppressed state or state that is output silently (special period)” created in this way, it is specially performed in a non-suppressed manner by a highly immediate process triggered by this. While the production sound is started to be reproduced, the sound of “BGM reproduction” in the reproduction state on the predetermined channel is “in a state of being output in suppression mode or silence (special period) regardless of the production reception” Is maintained for a predetermined time. After that, a part of specific sound data (one sound material) (suppression mode or silent sound output) is completed in such a way that the special effect sound is reproduced while being reproduced. Since the data content of other sections (non-suppressed sound output) is played back, it becomes possible to return the sound of “BGM playback” to the output in a non-suppressed mode secretly. It is possible to provide a production sound without a sense of incongruity. That is, in this case, when the player receives an operation in the suppression mode or in the state where the sound of “BGM playback” is output in silence, the special performance sound is not suppressed by a process with high immediacy triggered by this. However, it is possible to suitably avoid the occurrence of a sound shift between the various effects and the timing of the symbol stop after that.

  As described above, “BGM playback” corresponding to a specific performance pattern is a partial section (special period) when viewed in time series, and is output in a suppressed manner or silently compared to other sections. The data content (silence data etc.) that prescribes that the processing related to is performed is set in advance. The volume may be reduced by adjustment. According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress adverse effects due to noise or the like from a channel to which BGM data is assigned.

  Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the sound of “BGM playback” corresponding to a specific performance pattern is being played, in a section (normal section) different from the special section described above. Also, a reception effect for the operation means (operation button 410, sword ornament 5001, etc.) is generated.

  That is, in the pachinko machine 1 in which the number of channels is limited, a reception effect occurs in a situation where there is no vacant channel to which sound data is to be assigned (the number of empty channels is 0). When an operation by the player is accepted for the production, the production sound corresponding to the production reception is output in the form of stopping output of any production sound in the playback state, or according to the production reception It is necessary to stop the output of the produced sound itself. And in this case, there will be a production situation that lacks excitement, such as when the production sound is forcibly terminated or no production sound is played even though the production is accepted, such as when you are defeated in the big hit judgment Therefore, even on the player side, a consciousness (a consciousness that an operation reception should not be generated by an operation) that does not want to generate such an awkward performance situation works.

  In this case, there is a concern that the player's operation is not easily performed despite the generation of the reception effect, and it is difficult to improve the game entertainment. However, if the above-mentioned “technology for automatically generating a reception effect” is simply applied against the player's intention of “I do not want to generate a reception”, the gaming interest will be reduced. It can also be done.

  On the other hand, on the side of the developer who is confident or fond of the reception, no matter what the channel usage status is, “the player will be able to generate the reception by the active operation, It can be assumed that there is a speculation such as “I want you to have fun”.

  Therefore, as described above, in the above-described configuration, first, the special BGM effect sound can be output in a suppression mode or silence in a section from when the specific BGM data is allocated to the channel until the allocation is completed. The normal section is different from the special section. In the normal section, “non-automatic reception effect that is not the target of the automatic performance function” can be generated as the reception effect, and in the special section, “automatic reception effect that is the target of the automatic performance function” is received. It can be generated as a production.

  That is, in this case, in “a normal section in which a specific BGM effect sound can be output in a normal mode without being suppressed or silenced”, whether or not to generate an effect (predicting channel availability) Since the selection right is entrusted only to the player, the reception effect is automatically generated against the player's intention, such as “There may be no free channel, so do not generate the reception” This is preferably avoided (prevention of wasteful use of channels by the automatic performance function).

  On the other hand, in the “special section in which the specific BGM effect sound can be output in a suppressed manner or silence”, the impression that the specific BGM effect sound is out of the channel assignment and an empty channel is created (as viewed from the player side). Even if the channel feels empty). Therefore, it is possible to actively encourage the player's operation in a state where the anxiety such as “Maybe there is no vacant channel and may not be able to output special performance sound” is removed. Of course, even if no operation is performed by the player, by automatically generating the reception effect, "If the effect reception occurs anyway, next time, let's generate the effect reception by the player's own operation" Can be encouraged to become.

  FIG. 301 is a time chart showing an example of the assignment status of each channel when such processing is performed. Hereinafter, a specific example when such processing is executed will be described with reference to FIG. In this example, the special section is described as a silence section in which silence data is set, but it may be a suppression section in which data in a suppression mode is set.

  As shown in FIG. 301 (a), during a period in which a specific effect pattern corresponding to the result of the effect determination is being executed, the timing tm11 corresponds to the specific effect pattern being advanced. The sound “BGM playback” is assigned to the playback channels 02 and 03 and is already played back (in this case, stereo playback). The sound of “BGM playback” is, for example, one sound data (one piece of data over the entire period of symbol variation from the start to the end of symbol variation when it is determined that a specific performance pattern is executed) (Sound material) may be reproduced based on sound generation schedule data, or the entire period of symbol variation is divided into a plurality of periods, and different sound data prepared for each period May be sequentially reproduced based on sound generation schedule data corresponding to the above. In any case, in the example shown in FIG. 301, one piece of sound data (one sound) as the sound of “BGM playback” over the entire period (part of the symbol variation period) in the figure including the timing tm11. Material) is assigned to the channels 02 and 03 and is in a playback state.

  In this regard, as shown in FIGS. 301 (a) and 301 (b), one piece of sound data (sound of “BGM playback”) assigned to the channels 02 and 03 and in a playback state is the timing. When tm14 is reached, the playback state is set in a silent section in which silent data content (silent data) is set. As a result, the sound of “BGM playback” corresponding to a specific performance pattern can be set to a state in which it is output silently while being assigned to a predetermined channel without performing volume adjustment from the initial value. .

  According to such a configuration, in the silent period after the timing tm14 occurs, an atmosphere is provided in which the channel usage state seems to have a margin as much as the sound of “BGM playback” seems to be removed from the channel. On the other hand, in the normal section before the timing tm14 occurs, an atmosphere in which there is no room in the channel usage status is provided as much as the “BGM playback” sound occupies the channel. Will come to be.

  That is, although illustration is omitted, timing tm14 is generated for various sounds different from the “BGM playback” sound (for example, a notice effect sound, an effect sound accompanying the occurrence of a valid period, a winning sound, etc.). In each of the subsequent silent period and the normal period before the timing tm14 is generated, it is assigned to an appropriate channel and is set in a reproduction state. In particular, in the normal section, since many sounds are often output at the same time to increase the production or suggest that a change has occurred in the game situation such as winnings or payouts, It is difficult to grasp whether it is in use (whether there is a free channel), and the sound of “BGM playback” is always in the playback state, so there seems to be no room in the channel usage. A new atmosphere will be provided. The reproduction channels “00” and “01” are dedicated channels for assigning the various error sounds described above, and this also reduces the number of channels that can be used as effect sounds.

  In this production example, when the timing tm12 arrives in a normal section in which there is no room for channel usage, an operation opportunity is given to the operation means (the operation button 410, the sword ornament 5001, etc.). A reception effect is generated. When an effect is received by an operation by a player within the operation valid period A (timing tm12 to tm13) for the normal reception effect, as shown in FIGS. 301 (a) and (b), As one of the post-operation effects in response to the effect reception, “special effect sound A” is assigned to an empty channel (channels “08” and “09” in the figure) and reproduced. On the other hand, when all of the channels to which “special effect sound A” can be assigned at the time when the effect is accepted within the operation valid period A, any of the sounds in the playback state is forcibly interrupted. The process is finished by assigning “special effect sound A” to the channel, or processing is performed without assigning “special effect sound A” to the channel.

  However, as described above, in a normal section where there is no room for channel usage, some players may be aware that it should not generate an effect. Therefore, in this production example, the normal reception effect (operation valid period A) that occurs in the normal section where there is no room in the channel usage status is referred to as “non-automatic reception effect that is not subject to the automatic performance function”. Is going to be generated. As a result, since the right to select whether or not to produce an effect within the operation valid period A is left to the player only, “there is no room for a free channel, so no effect is accepted. It is preferable to avoid automatically generating a reception effect against the player's intention such as “Let ’s do it” (preventing channel wastage using the automatic effect function).

  In other words, if the player does not perform an operation on the operation means to be operated in the normal reception effect (operation effective period A), the normal reception effect (operation effective period A) remains without generating an effect. ) Will be terminated, and any post-operation effects including “special effect sound A” will not be executed, and the subsequent effects will be advanced.

  On the other hand, in this effect example, as described above, when the timing tm14 arrives, a silent section appears in which the channel usage state seems to have room. Then, when the timing tm15 arrives in such a silent section, by generating an in-silent reception effect (operation effective period B) that gives an operation opportunity to the operation means (the operation button 410, the sword ornament 5001, etc.), Proactively urges players to accept productions by removing the anxiety such as “Maybe there is no channel available and special production sounds may not be output” This is also as described above. If an effect is received within the operation effective period B (timing tm15 to tm16) for the silent reception effect, as shown in FIGS. 301 (a) and 301 (b), the post-operation effect corresponding to the effect reception is performed. For example, the “special effect sound B” is assigned to an empty channel (channels “10” and “11” in the figure) and reproduced.

  With regard to this point, the anxiety reception effect (operation valid period B) according to this effect example has been removed from the anxiety such as “Maybe there is no space in the channel and the special effect sound may not be output”. In view of being in a state, this is to be generated as “automatic reception effect subject to automatic performance function”. In other words, in this case, the player will no longer have the intention of “not receiving the reception because there may be no free channel,” so that the reception is automatically generated against the player ’s intention. Thus, the post-operation effect according to the effect reception within the silent reception effect (operation valid period B) can be surely executed while avoiding the occurrence of the sound appropriately.

  In addition, in the silent reception reception effect (operation effective period B) according to this effect example, until a predetermined timing tm15a within the operation effective period B arrives (operation When the timing tm15a arrives at the latest (when the automatic performance function is activated), the production reception is sure to occur. Then, as shown in FIGS. 301 (a) and 301 (b), while the “special effect sound B” is in the playback state as one of the post-operation effects in response to such an effect reception, the “BGM playback” is performed. The timing tm17 at which the sound "" changes from the silent section to the normal section arrives.

  According to such a configuration, while the “special effect sound B” is being reproduced, the silent section of the specific sound data (the sound of “BGM reproduction”) is terminated and the like. Since the data content of the section (non-suppressed sound output) will be played back, it becomes possible to return the sound of “BGM playback” to the output in a non-suppressed mode secretly, It is possible to provide a production sound without a sense of incongruity. That is, in this case, when an effect is received in a state in which the sound of “BGM playback” is output as silence data, playback of “special effect sound B” is started in a non-suppressing manner through highly immediate processing triggered by this. While doing so, it is possible to suitably avoid the occurrence of a sound shift in the BGM between various effects and the timing of symbol stop thereafter. Thus, in order to return the sound of “BGM playback” to an output in a non-suppressing manner in a secret manner, the silent reception reception effect (operation effective period B) is set as the target of the “automatic effect function”. It can be said that it is important to generate it as an “automatic reception effect”.

  In the operation effective period B (timing tm15 to tm16) according to this production example, the symbols are changing so that all channels to which “special production sound B” can be assigned are not used. Execution periods such as various notice effects are set.

  FIG. 302 is a diagram for explaining in more detail the technical features of the normal reception effect (operation valid period A) according to this effect example. Next, with reference to FIG. 302, the normal reception effect (operation valid period A) will be described in further detail.

  As described above, the in-normal reception effect (operation valid period A) according to this effect example is usually within the period during which specific sound data (sound “BGM playback”) corresponding to a specific effect pattern is reproduced. Based on the arrival of the timing tm12 in the section, it is generated as “a non-automatic reception effect not subject to the automatic effect function”. Although illustration is omitted, when the inside reception effect (operation valid period A) occurs, a sign effect (for example, FIG. 293 (g)) suggesting that an operation opportunity is given to the player is given. However, it is desirable that the precursor effect is executed as display content different from the precursor effect performed when the silent reception effect (operation valid period B) is generated.

  When the operation valid period A corresponding to the normal reception effect occurs, the operation valid period A is terminated by the production reception accompanying the operation within the operation valid period A, or within the operation valid period A Until the operation valid period A ends without the operation being performed and the reception of the production not occurring, for example, the aspect described with reference to FIGS. 293 (h) and (l) (or another example thereof) Etc., an image prompting the operation, an image indicating the remaining time, and the like are displayed. When an operation is performed within the operation effective period A and an effect is received, “special effect sound A” is output as one of the post-operation effects, in addition to FIGS. 293 (j) and (k) Another post-operation effect is further executed in the mode (or another example thereof) described with reference to FIG. When performing post-operation effects step by step, it is desirable to output “special effect sound A” first. On the other hand, when the operation is not performed within the operation effective period A and the operation effective period A is terminated without receiving the production reception, for example, the mode described with reference to FIG. In another example, the production situation appears after the operation valid period A ends.

  Here, the normal reception effect (operation effective period A) according to this effect example is set as a period from timing tm12 to timing tm13 when "time Ta" has elapsed, and the normal reception effect (operation effective period). When an effect is received within A), the “special effect sound A” is output over a “time Tc” longer than the “time Ta”.

  That is, in this case, even when the player receives an operation and receives an effect reception immediately after the normal reception effect (operation valid period A) occurs at timing tm12, the “special effect sound A” is As shown in FIG. 302 (a), the output is assigned to the channel until the timing tm13a after the timing tm13. On the other hand, when the player performs an operation just before the timing tm13 when the normal reception effect (operation valid period A) ends, the “special effect sound A” is displayed in FIG. 302 (b). As shown in (), the channel is assigned to the output until the delayed timing tm13b.

  According to such a configuration, the “special effect sound A” corresponding to the normal reception effect (operation effective period A) is distributed over a range that is at least twice as wide as the operation effective period A, such as timing tm12 to tm13b. It can be understood that it can be used. This means that at timing tm12 to tm13b, at least four channels (stereo BGM, stereo special effect sound A) can be used, and there is no more room in the free channel.

  In this regard, as shown in FIGS. 302 and 303, in the normal reception effect according to this effect example, “time Ta” as the operation effective period A is set as a silent reception reception effect (operation effective period B described later). ) As a time shorter than “Time Tb”. As a result, the time (timing tm12 to tm13b) until the output related to the “special effect sound A” is completed can be relatively shortened. The occurrence of a situation where the number of channels becomes insufficient can be suitably suppressed. In addition, by making the time as the operation effective period A comparatively short, it seems that there is not enough room in the empty channel, and in the period when the automatic performance function cannot be activated, It is also possible to create a performance that requires selection of whether or not to operate.

  Note that in this effect example, the output related to the “special effect sound A” is ended before the timing tm14 at which the sound is switched to the silent section at the latest (FIGS. 302A and 302). see b)). In this regard, according to the above-described configuration in which the timings tm12 to tm13b are relatively shortened, silence is generated at a relatively early stage after the normal reception effect is generated while maintaining the relationship between the timings tm13b and tm14. It becomes possible to make the section appear, and it is possible to suitably eliminate the steep delay.

  FIG. 303 is a diagram for explaining in more detail the technical features of the silent reception reception effect (operation valid period B) according to this effect example. Next, with reference to FIG. 303, the silent reception reception effect (operation valid period B) will be described in further detail.

  As described above, the in-normal reception effect (operation valid period B) according to this effect example is silent during the period in which specific sound data (sound “BGM playback”) corresponding to a specific effect pattern is reproduced. Based on the arrival of timing tm15 in the section, it is generated as “automatic reception effect subject to automatic performance function”.

  Although not shown in the drawing, as described above, when the in-silence reception effect (operation valid period B) is generated, a sign effect (for example, FIG. b)).

  In this regard, although illustration is omitted, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, even when the symbol variation is performed with a predetermined effect pattern different from the specific effect pattern based on the result of the effect determination, the predetermined timing When the sound arrives, the BGM data ("BGM playback" sound) corresponding to the predetermined effect pattern can be output in a suppressed manner or silence. However, when a “period of suppression or silence output” is generated within a predetermined effect pattern, no reception effect is generated after a predetermined time (a certain period) has elapsed since the occurrence of the period. Thus, production progress is performed to return the BGM data ("BGM playback" sound) to the production state output in a non-suppressed manner.

  In view of the pachinko machine 1 in which such an effect progress (predetermined effect pattern) can appear, the above-mentioned sign effect (for example, FIG. 292 (b)) is started after the timing tm14 at which the silent section appears, so that it is difficult to recognize whether or not the reception effect is generated at the time when the silent section appears. It is desirable to maintain the feeling. Further, at this time, it is desirable that the degree of expectation is higher in the production progress in which the reception effect occurs in the silent section than in the performance development in which the reception production does not occur in the silent section.

  By the way, in the predetermined effect pattern, the method of outputting BGM data ("BGM playback" sound) in a suppression manner or silence is limited to a method of setting the data content (volume initial value) itself to the suppression manner or silence. Instead, this may be realized by adjusting the volume from the initial value. That is, in the predetermined effect pattern, the reception effect cannot be generated while the BGM data (the sound of “BGM playback”) is output in a suppression mode or silence, and the BGM data (“BGM playback” The timing at which the sound is to be output in a non-suppressing manner is not indefinite, and is determined in advance, so that even if the volume adjustment from the initial value is performed, the above-described sound deviation, etc. There is no inconvenience.

  Now, as shown in FIG. 303 (a), if an operation effective period B corresponding to the silent reception reception effect occurs, the effect reception accompanying the operation within the operation effective period B occurs. For example, FIG. 292 (c) shows that the operation effective period B ends or the operation effective period B ends due to the fact that no operation is performed within the operation effective period B and the production reception is automatically generated. , (D) and the like (or another example thereof), an image prompting an operation, an image showing the remaining time, and the like are displayed.

  Here, the reception effect within silence (operation effective period B) according to this effect example is set as a period from timing tm15 to timing tm16 when "time Tb" has elapsed, and the silent reception reception effect (operation effective period). When an effect is received within B), the “special effect sound B” is output over a “time Td” longer than the “time Tb”.

  That is, in this case, even if the player performs an operation immediately after the silent reception reception effect (operation valid period B) occurs at timing tm15, the “special effect sound B” is generated. As shown in FIG. 303 (a), the output is assigned to the channel until the timing tm17a after the timing tm17 returned to the normal section. On the other hand, at the timing tm15a (the timing when the specific time (<time Tb) has elapsed since the operation effective period B occurred) within the silent reception effect (operation effective period B), the automatic effect function is enabled. When the effect reception is automatically generated, the “special effect sound B” is assigned to the channel and output until the delayed timing tm17b as shown in FIG. 303 (b).

  By the way, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this production example, the setting process by the player in the “automatic production mode” is not installed, and the operation by the player when the silent reception effect (operation valid period B) occurs. If there is not, the “automatic rendering function” is always enabled at timing tm15a to automatically generate the performance reception. Accordingly, the silent reception effect (operation effective period B) itself occurs as a period that can be continued from the timing tm15 to the timing tm16, but is substantially continued only from the timing tm15 to the timing tm15a. It can be said that it is a period that cannot be obtained. In other words, in this case, it is impossible for an effect to be received within the period from the timing tm15a to the timing tm16. However, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this effect example, such a disguise period (timing tm15a to tm16). In addition, the silent reception effect (operation valid period B) is generated for a longer period (including timings tm15 to tm16).

  According to such a configuration, unlike the case of the above-described normal reception effect (operation valid period A), both the number of empty channels and the remaining time as the operation valid time B have a margin. In the atmosphere with a sense of security that looks like this, it becomes possible to give an operation opportunity to the player, thereby improving the game entertainment.

  In order to make the remaining time as the operation effective time B appear as if there is a margin, the gauge amount applied to the bar display indicating the remaining time of the normal reception effect (operation effective period A) is satisfied at the timing tm15. It is desirable to display so as to decrease in such a manner (speed) that it becomes 0 as the timing tm16 arrives after being displayed as the tongue state. Also, in this case, since the timing tm15a arrives with the gauge amount for the bar display remaining, and the production reception is automatically generated, the mode shown in FIGS. 292 (e) and (f) (or As in the other example, the bar display is not hidden, and the “special effect sound B” is started to be output while the bar display is continuously displayed. As a result, within the normal reception effect (operation valid period A) It is desirable to be able to recognize that the “automatic rendering function” has been activated. The bar display left in this way is hidden while the “special effect sound B” is in the output state.

  Further, according to such a configuration, the operation effective time B can be substantially shortened than the time recognized by the player (the remaining time indicated by the bar display). For example, if there is a case in which an operation by the player may be performed immediately before the timing tm16 when the silent reception reception operation (operation effective period B) ends, the special reception sound B may occur. As shown in FIG. 303 (c), "" is assigned to the channel and output until the delayed timing tm17c. Then, the “special effect sound B” corresponding to the reception effect within silence (operation valid period B) has a possibility that the channel can be used over a very wide range of timings tm15 to tm17c. It can be understood that the margin of the empty channel is lost.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this production example, as described above, the operation effective time B is substantially shortened (timing tm15 to tm15a) with respect to the time recognized by the player (timing tm15 to tm16). By doing so, the period during which the “special effect sound B” corresponding to the reception effect within silence (operation effective period B) can use the channel is shown from the range shown in FIG. 303 (c) (timing tm15 to tm17c). The range can be narrowed to the range shown in 303 (b) (timing tm15 to tm17b), and an empty channel can be given a margin accordingly.

  However, in the above-described effect example, even if the reception effect within silence (operation valid period B) is viewed as a substantially shortened period (specific time from timing tm15 to timing tm15a), This is set as a time longer than the time Ta set as the internal reception effect (operation valid period A). It is important to adopt such a configuration to create a safe atmosphere that seems to have room for both the number of empty channels and the remaining operation time B. You can say that.

  In addition, in the production example related to the silent section, “a sense of incongruity caused by returning the sound of“ BGM playback ”as a non-suppressed state when an operation by the player is accepted without returning the sound after a predetermined time” is further enhanced. In order to make it difficult to remember, it is desirable to set the volume initial value of the special effect sound B to be larger than the initial value of BGM playback in the normal section. According to such a configuration, while attention is paid to the special effect sound B having a large volume initial value, the BGM playback sound can be secretly shifted to the playback state in the normal section.

  Moreover, in the production example related to the silent section, the special production sound B is generated based on the production reception. However, only when specific production conditions according to the variation pattern and the result of the jackpot determination are satisfied. The special effect sound B may be generated based on the reception of the effect. Even when a specific performance condition is not satisfied, an operation effective period is generated at timing tm15, and when an effect is received within the operation effective period, a predetermined operation is performed based on the reception of the effect. Play the production sound (failed production sound, etc.). Even if the operation is performed at any timing within the operation effective period, the BGM playback sound is secretly set to the playback state in the normal section while the predetermined effect sound (failed effect sound or the like) is in the playback state. It is desirable that the point of transition to be the same as in the case of the above-described effect example.

  However, instead of this, when a predetermined effect sound (failed effect sound or the like) is reproduced, the reproduction time is made shorter than that when the special effect sound is put into the reproduction state, and the predetermined effect sound (failure effect sound) is reproduced. The sound of the BGM playback may be returned to the playback state in the normal section in a state where the playback of the sound or the like is finished. In this case, even if the operation is performed at any timing within the operation effective period, the timing for returning the BGM playback sound to the playback state in the normal section is the playback of a predetermined effect sound (such as a failure effect sound). It will be set so that it will arrive after ending.

  Alternatively, when reproducing a predetermined effect sound (failed effect sound, etc.), the BGM playback sound is not restored to the playback state in the normal section, and the symbol variation is stopped in a losing manner. Also good. In this case, at timing tm14, the assignment of the BGM playback sound to the channels 02 and 03 may be terminated, and this may be made an empty channel.

  Further, when the special effect sound B is generated, the display change and the movable effect for operating the predetermined movable body are performed together based on the acceptance of the effect so as to reduce the degree of attention to the sound of the BGM reproduction. It is desirable to secretly shift the sound of BGM playback to the playback state in the normal section. In this case, when the special effect sound A is generated, it is desirable that only the display change is generated based on the reception of the effect, and the movable effect that operates the predetermined movable body is not executed.

  Further, in the above production example, the sound of “BGM playback” is output silently in some sections, but the sound is not limited to this and is output in a mode that is suppressed more than the sound of “BGM playback” in other sections. Anything is acceptable. Here, examples of the suppressed mode include a mode of reducing the vibration frequency of the speaker cone per unit time in addition to a mode in which the volume is relatively lowered.

  Also, in the above production example, the volume of the “BGM playback” sound is set by setting a suppression mode or a time-series period of silence in the “BGM playback” sound data itself assigned to the predetermined channel. It is possible to create a suppression mode or a state (a special period) in which sound is output without any adjustment just by playing it. However, it is not always necessary to set the suppression mode or the time-series period in which the sound data of “BGM playback” assigned to a predetermined channel is set to silence, for example, the sound of “BGM playback” at timing tm14. You may make it perform the volume adjustment which reduces a sound volume to a specific value (it may be mute). In other words, in this case, even when an effect is received at the timing tm15a, the process of increasing the sound volume of the “BGM playback” from the specific value (the process of returning to the initial volume value) is not performed when the effect is received. . When the specific performance condition is satisfied, the volume of the “BGM playback” sound is increased from the specific value while the special performance sound is being played when the predetermined timing tm17 arrives. Processing (processing to return to the initial volume value) is performed. On the other hand, if a specific performance condition is not satisfied, the volume of the sound of “BGM playback” is specified while a predetermined performance sound (failed performance sound, etc.) is being played, as in the above-described another example. A process of raising the value from the value (a process of returning to the initial volume value) may be performed, or the sound volume of the “BGM playback” sound may be set to a specific value after the reproduction of the predetermined effect sound (failed effect sound, etc.) (A process for returning to the initial volume value) may be performed, or the symbol variation may be terminated without raising a predetermined effect sound (such as a failure effect sound) from a specific value. Good.

  Further, in the above-described production example, a restriction process that makes it difficult to assign a new sound to an empty channel is performed for at least a period from a predetermined timing before timing tm14 to timing tm17. Is desirable. Note that, as such a restriction process, for example, a specific game that has nothing to do with the result of whether or not a jackpot symbol appears due to the symbol variation being executed, such as a pending winning sound, a general electric effect sound, a volume adjustment sound, etc. It is desirable that a sound is a restriction target and that a specific game sound that is the restriction target is not newly assigned to a channel and is not reproduced.

  In addition, when it is determined that a specific effect pattern is to be executed as a symbol variation according to the result of the jackpot determination, a specific effect sound (BGM) is transmitted on a channel different from the channels 02 and 03 before the timing tm14 arrives. So that it is not a music but an effect sound such as a sound effect or a speech), and the timing tm14 arrives while the specific effect sound is being played, and BGM playback is performed. It is desirable that the sound is output in a suppressed manner or silence. That is, in this case, since the sound of BGM reproduction is mixed into the specific effect sound, it becomes difficult to notice that the sound of BGM reproduction has been set to the suppression mode or the silence state. Note that the playback state of a specific effect sound is terminated before timing tm15 at which the special effect sound B (or predetermined effect sound) can be output (timing tm15 or before timing tm15). This is desirable in order to relieve anxiety that the special effect sound B is not output.

  In addition, when it is determined that a specific effect pattern is to be executed as a symbol variation according to the result of the jackpot determination, the sound of BGM playback is generated from the timing at which the special effect sound B (or a predetermined effect sound) is output. It is desirable that the production sound is output through a plurality of channels until the timing tm17 when the suppression mode or the silenced state ends. That is, in this case, since a plurality of effect sounds including the special effect sound B are output, it becomes possible to easily mix the sound of BGM playback into these effect sounds, and the sound of BGM playback It becomes possible to secretly shift to the reproduction state in the normal mode.

  Also in the pachinko machine 1 according to the above-described effect example, a setting process by the player according to the “automatic effect mode” may be installed. In other words, in this case, when the “automatic effect mode” is set, the automatic effect function is activated and the effect acceptance occurs when the predetermined timing arrives even within the normal reception effect (operation valid period A). . On the other hand, when the reception effect within silence (operation effective period B) occurs when the “automatic effect mode” is set, the automatic effect function is activated when a predetermined timing before the timing tm15a arrives. It is desirable that the production acceptance is made valid.

  In the above-described effect example, the execution periods of various notice effects during the symbol change are set so that the number of empty channels does not become zero even during the execution period of the normal reception effect (operation valid period A). You may make it do. The point is that the sound of “BGM playback” is continuously output in a non-suppressing manner, so long as it provides an atmosphere in which there is no room in the free channel. Conversely, the number of empty channels may be 0 even during the execution period of the silent reception effect (operation valid period B). In short, it is only necessary to provide an atmosphere in which an empty channel can be felt as much as possible by allowing the sound of “BGM playback” to be output in a suppressed manner or in silence.

  In the above example, “special effect sound A” is assigned to channels “08” and “09”, whereas “special effect sound B” is assigned to channels “10” and “11”. These “special effect sound A” and “special effect sound B” may be assigned to the same channel.

  In the above-mentioned effect example, the sign effect for the silent reception effect (operation effective period B) is started after the timing tm14 at which the silent section appears. However, the warning effect may be started before the timing tm14 at which the silent section appears, and the timing tm14 at which the silent period appears while the warning effect is being executed may be reached. According to such a configuration, it is possible to provide a performance such as whether or not a silent section appears while a precursor performance is being performed.

  In the production example, the same operation means (for example, the operation button 410) is set as the operation target in the normal reception effect (operation effective period A) and the silent reception effect (operation effective period B). In the normal reception effect (operation valid period A), the operation is performed as a reception effect with the operation button 410 as an operation target, whereas in the silent reception effect (operation valid period B), the sword decorative body 5001 is set as the operation target. It may be executed as a reception effect. In this case, different heel images (button image BTG, sword decoration image SYG) are generated during the execution period of the normal reception effect (operation effective period A) and during the execution period of the silent reception effect (operation effective period B). Therefore, when the post-operation effect is started with those reception effects, the bag image is not displayed as in the mode described with reference to FIGS. 285 to 287 (or another example thereof). Instead, the post-operation effect may be started while the display is continuously displayed.

  In the above production example, in the specific production pattern, the normal reception effect (operation valid period A) is generated only once when in the normal section, but non-automatic reception is performed when in the normal section. The normal reception effect (operation valid period A) as an effect may be generated a plurality of times. However, it is desirable that different post-operation effects are executed in these normal reception effects. On the other hand, in a silent section in a specific performance pattern, the “BGM playback sound” is secretly output in a non-suppressed manner while the “special performance sound B” is being played back. It is desirable to generate the effect (operation valid period B) only once. Then, it is desirable that the post-operation effect by the normal reception effect (operation effective period A) and the post-operation effect by the silent reception effect (operation effective period B) have different effects.

[Moveable performance triggered by the establishment of conditions different from the conditions for design games]
As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 (main control MPU 1310a), when a game ball is received at the start port (first start port 2002, second start port 2004), a determination regarding hit is made. As a result, when the big hit is won, the big hit game in which a large number of game balls can be obtained after executing the symbol change in which the big hit symbol is displayed is executed, and after the big hit game, the player is advantageous. It is possible to control the game state (short time state, probability change state). In addition, while such a symbol game is being performed, the peripheral control MPU 1511a provides effects according to the result of the determination related to winning (for example, various other notice effects such as timer effects, operation effects, pre-read effects, in addition to effect patterns) As described above, the game entertainment is maintained until the big hit game is performed.

  However, only by performing an effect according to the symbol game by the main control MPU 1310a, the display change in the effect display device 1600 and the behavior of the movable decorative body (for example, the back front decoration unit 3100 and the back middle movable effect unit 3200, specific There is a concern that it may be difficult to maintain the pachinko machine 1 at a high operation rate over a long period of time.

  Therefore, in this pachinko machine 1, the display contents and the movable content in the effect display device 1600 are also obtained even when another condition unrelated to the determination process related to the progress of the game and the corresponding symbol variation (symbol game start condition) is satisfied. It is possible to execute a process capable of causing a change in the behavior of the decorative body. That is, in this case, a display change and a movable body operation appear in a mode exceeding the category of symbol games, and the monotony is eliminated, so that the pachinko machine 1 is maintained at a high operating rate for a long period. Can be expected.

Here, when another condition unrelated to the determination process related to the progress of the game and the corresponding symbol variation (symbol game start condition) is satisfied, the display content on the effect display device 1600 and the behavior of the movable decorative body change. For example, the following methods listed below can be envisaged as methods for generating the above. In order to cause a change in the display content on the effect display device 1600 and the behavior of the movable decorative body when another condition unrelated to the symbol game start condition is satisfied, any of the following methods is adopted. Alternatively, a method different from any of the methods listed below may be adopted. However, a situation where the symbol variation is not executed temporarily (the processing flag shown in FIG. 167 is “0” and the number of holds) The above-mentioned another condition must be able to be satisfied even if the condition is “0”, and even if the other condition is satisfied in the situation, It must be possible to cause a change in the behavior of the movable decorative body.
・ Performance lottery that is not related to symbol fluctuations periodically, and that a specific result is obtained by this production lottery is the above-mentioned method of “establishment of another condition”. The above-mentioned method of “satisfying another condition” that reaches a predetermined number • Time is measured (for example, when power is turned on) by RTC (real-time clock) function or arithmetic processing in peripheral control MPU 1511a (or main control MPU 1310a) Measure the time from the above), and the above-mentioned “establishment of another condition” means that the measured time reaches a predetermined time

  In general, in a pachinko machine, when the time measured using the RTC function reaches a predetermined time, it is assumed that another condition is satisfied, and the display content in the effect display device 1600 and the behavior of the movable decorative body are changed. Is often adopted. However, regardless of which method is used, if a change occurs in the display content or the behavior of the movable body when another condition unrelated to the start condition of the symbol game is satisfied, the change timing will arrive In general, it takes a relatively long time (for example, several hours), so that the display content or the behavior of the movable decorative body may be changed despite the long time. If there is a situation that can not be done, there is a concern that the gaming interest will be reduced.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a specific state (for example, an RTC state) in which the movable body operation time for operating the movable decorative body in a specific manner is set in advance as the start condition of the symbol game. Can be generated based on the fact that another specific condition (for example, the measurement time by the RTC function reaches a predetermined time) is satisfied. In a situation where the movable decorative body is in an abnormal state (for example, it is not in the original position even though it should be in the original position), and the specific state has not occurred, the design fluctuates. When the corresponding restoration operation time has arrived, the movable decoration body can be started to perform a predetermined restoration operation, whereas the movable decoration body is in an abnormal state and a specific state occurs. In such a situation, even if a predetermined restoration operation time arrives, a process for performing a predetermined restoration operation at a predetermined time within a specific state can be started without starting a process for performing a predetermined restoration operation. .

  That is, in this case, in a specific state that can be generated based on the fact that a specific condition different from the start condition of the symbol game is established, a process for performing a predetermined restoration operation according to the symbol variation side is prohibited. Since a process for performing a predetermined restoration operation at a predetermined time in a specific state can be started, the movable body abnormality is detected in a predetermined procedure in the specific state without being affected by the execution state of the symbol variation. It is expected that the operation in the specific mode by the movable decorative body (the operation when another condition is satisfied) is more reliably executed by being restored.

  Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 304, an example of processing contents when operating the movable decorative body when such a specific condition is satisfied will be described. In the example shown in FIG. 304, for convenience of explanation, “when the elapsed time from power-on has reached a predetermined time using the RTC function, an RTC state in which different display content appears ( The specific state) is generated and the process of sequentially operating the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C in accordance with the generation timing of the RTC state (specific state) is described. As described above, the method for causing a change in the display content and the behavior of the movable decorative body in the effect display device 1600 when another condition (specific condition) unrelated to the game start condition is satisfied is described above. Even when other methods are adopted, it is possible to appropriately employ each technique described below.

  Assuming that there is a state prior to the occurrence of the RTC state (specific state), the peripheral control MPU 1511a first determines the remaining time (until the RTC state occurs) until the elapsed time from power-on reaches a predetermined time. Will be updated periodically. In this regard, in the example shown in FIG. 304, at time Rt2, the elapsed time from power-on reaches a predetermined time to generate the RTC state (specific state), and the RTC state (specific state) occurs. Based on the above, it is possible to execute processing for sequentially operating the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C. In this way, the flow of the game so far is achieved by sequentially operating the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C on the basis of the establishment of the condition (the establishment of the second condition) that has nothing to do with the situation of the symbol variation. You can have a sense of expectation that will change. At this time, the display content on the effect display device 1600 may be changed.

  In order to more appropriately increase the expectation when the RTC state (specific state) occurs, for example, the RTC state is made to function as an effect period limited to a predetermined time (10 minutes). If a big win is won between the occurrence of the period (RTC state) and the end, the progress of the production by the production character that cannot appear when the RTC state (specific state) has not occurred (normal state) ( It is more desirable to have a production privilege such as enabling a special production mode).

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 304, even at such a timing Rt1 slightly before the timing Rt2 (for example, 5 seconds before), a condition unrelated to the situation of the symbol variation is established. Based on the establishment of the condition (the establishment of the first condition), it is possible to execute a previous display indicating that the RTC state will soon occur (the second condition is established). That is, the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this example determines whether or not the timing Rt1 has arrived in addition to the timing Rt2 by periodically checking the passage of time since the power is turned on. When it is determined that the time Rt has arrived, a previous display (display change) appears, and when it is determined that the timing Rt2 has arrived, processing according to the occurrence of the RTC state (the behavior of the movable decorative body) is executed. . The “previous display” can be executed as, for example, a display such as “RTC state soon” or a countdown display toward the timing Rt2.

  According to such a configuration, when the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C are sequentially operated in accordance with the timing Rt2 at which the RTC state (specific state) occurs, these movable body operations are the results of the jackpot determination. Is not based on the game (no expectation of any big hits) will be suggested to the player in advance, so it is preferable to avoid a decline in gaming interests due to misrecognition by the player Will be able to.

  In particular, in the example shown in FIG. 304, at least in the period of timings Rt1 to Rt2, only a display (display that does not conform to symbol variation) that does not show any expectation is displayed as the display content in the effect display device 1600. In order to prevent the display of the decorative design (effect pattern) itself, it is not displayed. That is, in this case, only the display that does not show any expectation level (display that does not conform to symbol variation) appears as the display contents in the effect display device 1600, and the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C are sequentially operated. Since the processing to be started is started, it is expected to more suitably avoid a decrease in gaming interest due to a recognition error by the player.

  Here, “pre-display that appears at timing Rt1” and “movable body operation that appears at timing Rt2” each correspond to “display that does not conform to symbol variation” and correspond to “behavior of a movable decorative body that does not conform to symbol variation”. To do. Therefore, at the timings Rt1 and Rt2, the display and the behavior of the movable body are generated regardless of the execution state of the symbol variation at those timings (including the execution / non-execution). However, depending on the execution situation of the symbol variation, the situation in which the movable decorative bodies A, B, C are not ready to operate (the movable decorative bodies A, B, C are in the original position despite the timing Rt2 has arrived). It is feared that the process of sequentially operating the movable decorative bodies A, B, and C cannot be performed even when the timing Rt2 finally arrives.

  For example, when any one of several variation patterns is selected as the symbol variation according to the result of the big hit determination, the movable ornament A, the movable ornament B, Although a movable effect using the movable decorative body C may be executed, the movable body operation time (in this case, when the RTC state occurs) in the RTC state described above is reached during the execution of such a movable effect. In some cases, at least one of the movable decorative bodies A, B, and C cannot be used as the above-described “behavior of the movable decorative body in accordance with the pattern variation”. Can be assumed.

  In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, when the restoration operation time corresponding to the symbol variation comes, various movable bodies provided in the pachinko machine 1 as well as the movable decorative bodies A, B, and C are provided. It is possible to execute a movable abnormality determination such as whether or not the decorative body is in the original position (normal state). Then, when it is determined that there is a movable decorative body that is not in a normal state in this movable abnormality determination (abnormal determination), a predetermined amount is determined with respect to the movable decorative object that is the determination target in a form following the abnormality determination process. By executing a restoration process for performing a restoration operation (such as an operation of moving to the original position), it is possible to recover the movable decorative body in an abnormal state at an early stage. Therefore, the movable body operating time within the above-described RTC state arrives during the execution of the restoration process for performing a predetermined restoration operation (such as an operation of moving the movable decorative body to the original position). If there is at least the movable decorative body A, B, or C, the movable decorative body that is in the middle of the restoration operation cannot be used as the above-described “behavior of the movable decorative body in accordance with the design variation”. Can be assumed.

  As the “restoration operation time corresponding to symbol variation”, for example, symbol variation start timing (time to acquire a command sent from the main control MPU 1310a when symbol variation starts), symbol variation It is possible to execute (execute restoration processing based on command acquisition) as at least one of the stop times (when to acquire a command sent from the main control MPU 1310a when the symbol fluctuation is stopped) It is.

  Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 304 (peripheral control MPU 1511a), first, at least “the timing Rt2 at which the RTC state (specific state) occurs has arrived, and then the movable decorative body is specified by the movable body operating time in the RTC state. When it is in the period until the operation (in this case, the sequential operation by the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C) is completed, the movable decorative bodies (movable decorative body A and movable decorative body B used within the period). The movable decorative body C) is prohibited from being used as a movable effect according to the effect pattern on the symbol variation side, so that the movable object operation in a specific mode within the RTC state (the movable ornament not conforming to the symbol variation) It is possible to suppress a situation in which the behavior of the body) cannot be performed due to the movable effect on the symbol fluctuation side.

  However, at this time, there is a concern that the game entertainment may be lowered if the movable effect is not executed in the effect pattern even though the effect pattern corresponding to the movable effect is displayed. In this regard, in the example shown in FIG. 304 (peripheral control MPU 1511a), at timing Rt1, only a display that does not show any expectation as a display content on the effect display device 1600 (a display that does not conform to symbol variation) appears. As described above.

  Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 304, when there is a symbol variation (in the diagram, B variation (losing) in the middle of execution) when the timing Rt2 has arrived, The display that is not shown again (display from the timing Rt1) is not hidden at this time, and this is changed over the period until the timing Rt2a at which the symbol fluctuation (B fluctuation (losing) in the figure) is stopped. I try to keep it.

  According to such a configuration, at the timings Rt <b> 2 to Rt <b> 2 a, although the RTC state (specific state) is generated and the symbol variation is actually performed, the effect display device 1600 has a decoration. Only the display in which the design pattern is not displayed and no expectation is shown. Then, while such a display appears, the operation by the movable ornament according to the occurrence of the RTC state (here, the sequential operation by the three movable ornaments A, B, and C) is advanced. It can be expected that the lowering of the game entertainment due to the fact that the movable effect corresponding to the effect pattern is not executed within the period of the timings Rt2 to Rt2a is suitably suppressed.

  In the example shown in FIG. 304, when the symbol fluctuation (B fluctuation (losing) in the figure) that was in the middle of execution when timing Rt2 has come to an end (stopped) (when timing Rt2a has arrived). Even if it is within the operation period of the movable decorative body according to the occurrence of the RTC state, the “display without any expectation (display from timing Rt1)” that has been displayed so far is not displayed at this time. Thus, a specific background (for example, during the RTC state) after the occurrence of the RTC state (specific state) can be made to appear. After that, when a new symbol variation (C variation (losing) in the diagram) is started, even if it is within the operation period of the movable decorative body according to the occurrence of the RTC state, The display showing the expected degree of the production pattern and the notice production is started as usual.

  However, even if a new symbol variation (C variation (losing) in the figure) is started and the effect pattern is displayed, the “timing Rt2 at which the RTC state (specific state) occurs has arrived. As long as it is within a period until the movable decorative body finishes operating in a specific manner (here, the sequential operation by the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C) depending on the movable body operating time in the RTC state. Needless to say, the movable effect on the symbol variation side using any one of the movable decorative body A, the movable decorative body B, and the movable decorative body C is prohibited. In this state, the movable effect on the symbol variation side is prohibited, but since the movable body operation according to the occurrence of the RTC state is in the middle of execution, the game due to the prohibition of the movable effect on the symbol variation side The decline in interest will be suppressed.

  As such a prohibition process, it is determined whether the situation should be prohibited at the start of symbol fluctuation (C fluctuation in the figure), and if it is determined that the situation should be prohibited, the corresponding symbol fluctuation (figure Among them, the C fluctuation) itself may be set as a prohibition target of a movable effect (a movable effect using at least one of the movable decorative body A, the movable decorative body B, and the movable decorative body C). That is, in this case, the moving decorative body is moved according to the movable body operation time in the RTC state after the arrival of the timing Rt2 at which the RTC state (specific state) occurs in the middle of the corresponding symbol fluctuation (C fluctuation in the figure). Even if the period until the operation (here, the sequential operation of the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C) is completed in a specific manner is completed, the movable effect ( Execution of at least one of the movable decorative body A, the movable decorative body B, and the movable decorative body C is not permitted.

  By the way, in the example shown in FIG. 304, the timing for causing the specific background (for example, during the RTC state) after the occurrence of the RTC state to appear is the timing Rt2a that is later than the original timing Rt2. There is concern about the decline. However, although the RTC state itself occurs at the timing Rt2, the production privilege due to the occurrence of the RTC state (if the big win is won between the occurrence of the RTC state and the end, the special production mode is controlled. Etc.) is not generated at the timing Rt2, and only the symbol variation (C, D variation in the diagram) after the symbol variation first digested after the occurrence of the RTC state is targeted. It can be said that it is appropriate to make the specific background (for example, in the RTC state) appear when the timing Rt2a arrives.

  By the way, until the timing Rt2 arrives, the symbol fluctuation (B fluctuation (losing) in the figure) that was in the middle of execution is finished (stopped) (until the timing Rt2a arrives). ) “After the timing Rt2 when the RTC state (specific state) occurs, the movable decorative body operates in a specific manner according to the movable body operating time in the RTC state (here, the three movable decorative bodies A, B, It can also be assumed that the “period until completion of sequential operation by C” elapses. However, even in this case, as long as the timing Rt2a has not arrived, the state in which “a display in which no expectation degree is indicated (display from the timing Rt1)” appears is maintained. This is the example shown in FIG. 304, and the symbol variation (B variation in the figure) executed so as to straddle before and after the occurrence of the RTC state (before and after timing Rt2) is the target of the RTC effect privilege. Because it is not.

  Furthermore, in the example (peripheral control MPU 1511a) shown in FIG. 304, at least “after the arrival of the timing Rt2 at which the RTC state (specific state) occurs, the movable decorative body is specified according to the movable body operating time in the RTC state. In this case, the restoration process is triggered even if the restoration operation time corresponding to the symbol variation has arrived (the period until the completion of the sequential movement by the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C). By prohibiting this so as not to be performed (a process for performing a predetermined restoration operation on the movable decorative body in an abnormal state), the movable body operation in a specific mode within the RTC state (not conforming to symbol variation) It is possible to suppress a situation in which the behavior of the movable decorative body) cannot be performed by the restoration process on the symbol fluctuation side.

  According to such a configuration, in the RTC state (specific state) that can be generated based on the establishment of a specific condition different from the game start condition, a predetermined restoration operation corresponding to the symbol variation side is performed. The processing to be performed is prohibited, and the processing to perform a predetermined restoration operation at a predetermined time in the RTC state (specific state) can be executed. It is expected that the abnormal operation of the movable body is restored by a predetermined procedure in the RTC state (specific state) without being received, and the operation in the specific mode by the movable decorative body is more reliably executed. .

  In other words, in the example shown in FIG. 304, when the game state is controlled in the normal game state and the symbol variation (A variation (losing) in the figure) is being performed according to the big hit determination, It is assumed that the timing Rt1 arrives. As described above, first, at the timing Rt1, as a display that does not conform to the symbol variation, for example, a display “RTC state soon” appears in the background display of the effect display device 1600. Then, the symbol variation (A variation (losing) in the figure) is completed during the period from when the “RTC state is about to be displayed” to the timing Rt2 when the RTC state occurs, and a new symbol is displayed. Variation (variation B (loss)) is started. The timing Rt2 arrives when the symbol variation is in the middle of the process. At the timing Rt2, the three movable movable behaviors that do not conform to the symbol variation are observed. Processing for sequentially operating the decorative bodies A, B, and C is executed. It should be noted that “display not conforming to symbol variation” from timing Rt1 is continued over a period until a new symbol variation (variation B (losing) in the diagram) is stopped.

  In addition, as described above, in the example shown in FIG. 304, “three movable decorative bodies A, R2 are generated depending on the movable body operation timing in the RTC state after the arrival of the timing Rt2 at which the RTC state (specific state) occurs. In the period until the sequential operation by B and C is completed (normal time: timings Rt2 to Rt5, abnormal time: timings Rt2 to Rt5 ′), at least the movable decorative bodies A, B, This is prohibited so that neither the moving effect on the symbol variation side using C nor the restoration process on the symbol variation side is performed. Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 304, in the period of timings Rt2 to Rt2a, although the symbol variation (B variation (losing) in the diagram) is being performed, the effect display on the symbol variation side ( The display in which the degree of expectation is displayed), the movement effect on the symbol fluctuation side (movable body operation in which the degree of expectation is indicated), and the restoration process on the symbol fluctuation side are controlled as a period in which none is executed (first) One limit). On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 304, during the period of timings Rt2a to Rt5, the effect display on the symbol variation side (display indicating the degree of expectation) is executed, but the movable effect on the symbol variation side (expectation) This is controlled as a period in which neither the movable body operation in which the degree is indicated) nor the restoration process on the symbol variation side is executed (second restriction).

  It should be noted that such control at the timings Rt2 to Rt2a (both the effect display on the symbol variation side (display indicating the expected degree) and the movable effect (movable body operation indicating the expected degree) are not performed) Even if the symbol variation in the period is not a loss variation, but is performed based on the winning of the big hit (big hit variation), it is executed. That is, in this case, no expectation effect is executed, and the big hit symbol suddenly appears at the timing Rt2a when the sequential operation by the three movable ornaments A, B, and C is in the middle of execution. Therefore, the player who was expecting to be in the RTC state can enjoy the fun as a surprised performance exceeding the expectation. In addition, after the big hit symbol appears in this way, the big hit gaming state is generated while the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C are sequentially operated.

  In addition, as described above, for the display from timing Rt1 (only the display of the decorative symbol is not performed and no expectation is shown), the symbol variation that was in the middle of execution when timing Rt2 has arrived. The display is not displayed at the timing Rt2a to be stopped, and instead, a specific background (such as “RTC state”) after the occurrence of the RTC state is displayed. In addition, when a symbol variation (in the diagram, variation pattern C) is newly started in a state in which a specific background (such as “RTC state”) is displayed, an effect display (expectation level indicates the variation pattern) is started. Display) will be executed as usual. However, with respect to the movable effect on the symbol variation side using the movable decorative bodies A, B, and C, unless the process of sequentially operating the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C is completed, the timing Rt2a has arrived. Will also be maintained in a prohibited state. Therefore, even if an effect pattern in which a movable effect on the symbol variation side using any of the movable decorative bodies A, B, and C is selected based on the result of the big hit determination, Although the display in the liquid crystal display, sound, and lighting of the lamp are normally performed, the corresponding movable decorative body is not operated.

  In addition, as described above, in the example shown in FIG. 304, the three movable decorative bodies A and B are moved depending on the movable body operation timing in the RTC state after the timing Rt2 when the RTC state (specific state) occurs. , C until the completion of the sequential operation (normal time: timings Rt2 to Rt5, abnormal time: timings Rt2 to Rt5 ′) ”, the restoration operation timing corresponding to the symbol variation (here, the symbol variation start) Even if the time and stop time come, this is prohibited so that the restoration process (a process for performing a predetermined restoration operation on the movable decorative body in an abnormal state) is not performed. . Accordingly, in the example shown in FIG. 304, at the timing Rt2a, the stop time (restoration operation time) of the symbol fluctuation (B fluctuation (lost) in the figure) and the symbol fluctuation (C fluctuation (lost) in the figure). )) Start time (restoration operation time) comes, but at these restoration operation times, even if there is a movable decorative body in an abnormal state, the movable decorative body is restored. Processing is never executed.

  However, in the period of the timings Rt2 to Rt5 (timing Rt2 to Rt5 ′ at the time of abnormality), instead of prohibiting the restoration process on the symbol variation side in this way, first, at timing Rt2, the movable decorative body A is in an abnormal state. It is determined whether or not. In the example shown in FIG. 304 (f), it is determined that the movable decorative body A is not in an abnormal state. Based on the determination result, the movable decorative body A is operated in a normal operation mode. Processing to operate (operation at normal time) is executed. Here, the normal operation mode applied to the movable decorative body A is, for example, after the movable decorative body A at the original position is moved to a predetermined presentation position (first position) and then at the predetermined presentation position. This can be realized as an operation mode in which the movable decorative body A is moved to the original position.

  Next, at the timing Rt3 after the normal operation by the movable decorative body A is finished, it is determined whether or not the movable decorative body B is in an abnormal state. In the example shown in FIG. 304 (f), it is determined that the movable decorative body B is not in an abnormal state. Based on the determination result, the movable decorative body B is operated in the normal operation mode. Processing to operate (operation at normal time) is executed. Here, the normal operation mode applied to the movable decorative body B is, for example, after the movable decorative body B at the original position is moved to a predetermined effect position (second position) and then at the predetermined effect position. This can be realized as an operation mode in which the movable decorative body B is moved to the original position.

  Next, at the timing Rt4 after the normal operation by the movable decorative body B is finished, it is determined whether or not the movable decorative body C is in an abnormal state. In the example shown in FIG. 304 (f), it is determined that the movable decorative body C is not in an abnormal state. Based on the determination result, the movable decorative body C is operated in a normal operation mode. Processing to operate (operation at normal time) is executed. Here, the normal operation mode applied to the movable decorative body C is, for example, that the movable decorative body C at the original position is moved to a predetermined effect position (third position) and then is in the predetermined effect position. It can be realized as an operation mode in which the movable decorative body C is moved to the original position.

  In the example shown in FIG. 304 (e), when the timing Rt5 comes after the operations by the movable decorative bodies A, B, and C are sequentially completed, the RTC state (specific state) is generated. The “behavior of the movable decorative body not conforming to the symbol variation” is terminated, and the prohibition state for the restoration processing on the symbol variation side is released.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that any of the abnormality determinations for the movable decorative bodies A, B, and C is in an abnormal state, a process for performing a predetermined restoration operation on the movable decorative body in the abnormal state Can be executed. However, while a series of movable body operations (in this case, sequential operations by the three movable ornament bodies A, B, and C) at the time of occurrence of the RTC state are being executed, a predetermined value is applied to the movable ornament body in an abnormal state. If the player feels that the restoration operation is being performed, the player will be awakened, and there is a concern that the gaming interest will be reduced.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to the present embodiment, a predetermined restoration operation for the movable decorative body in an abnormal state is performed by a series of movable body operations (here, three movable bodies) when the RTC state occurs. The operation is not performed independently as an operation different from the sequential operation by the decorative bodies A, B, and C, but is performed as an operation in a special mode including an operation of returning the movable decorative body in an abnormal state. . That is, in this case, the predetermined restoration operation for the movable decorative body in the abnormal state itself can appear as if it is an operation incorporated in a part of the operation at the time of occurrence of the RTC state. Thus, it is possible to favorably avoid a decrease in gaming interest when performing a predetermined restoration operation on the movable decorative body in an abnormal state.

  For example, in the example shown in FIG. 304 (f), it is assumed that it is determined that the movable decorative body B is in an abnormal state at timing Rt3 after the normal operation by the movable decorative body A ends. However, on the basis of the result of the abnormality determination, not the process of operating the movable decorative body B in the normal operation mode (normal operation), but an abnormality including an operation of returning (restoring) the movable decorative body B It is possible to execute a process of operating in the operation mode (special operation). Thereafter, the restored (restored) movable decorative body B is not operated again in the normal operation mode (normal operation), and the timing Rt4 (movable) shown in FIG. Similarly to the timing after the normal operation by the decorative body B is finished, it is determined whether or not the movable decorative body C is in an abnormal state, and when the movable decorative body C is not in an abnormal state, the movable decorative body C A process of operating the body C in a normal operation mode (normal operation) is executed. The time required for the normal operation by the movable decorative body B and the time required for the special operation by the movable decorative body B may or may not be the same.

  According to such a configuration, even when an abnormality occurs in the movable decorative body B after the RTC state occurs (for example, during the operation of the movable decorative body A), the movable decorative body B in which the abnormality has occurred is generated. Until the timing to operate is reached, this is left in an abnormal state regardless of the situation on the symbol fluctuation side. When the timing for operating the movable decorative body B arrives, the movable decorative body B is operated in a special mode including a restoration operation instead of the normal operating mode. It is possible to restore the movable decorative body B in which the abnormality has occurred while preferably maintaining the rendering mode at the time of occurrence of the RTC state such as “sequential operation by the movable decorative bodies A, B, and C”. That is, in this case, since one of the operation modes prepared as the operation at the time of occurrence of the RTC state can be performed, it is possible to perform a predetermined restoration operation on the movable decorative body in the abnormal state. The fall of the game entertainment at the time of performing is suitably avoided.

  Note that the symbol variation (C variation (losing) in the figure) started at the timing Rt2a is sequentially performed by the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C depending on the movable body operation timing in the RTC state. It starts when it is in the middle of the stage and continues until the sequential operation by the three movable decorative bodies A, B, C is completed. Therefore, the stop timing (restoration operation timing) of the symbol variation (C variation (losing) in the diagram) and the start timing (restoration operation timing) of the next symbol variation (D variation (losing) in the diagram) have arrived. In this case, since the prohibition state for the restoration process on the symbol variation side has already been released, when there is a movable decorative body in an abnormal state at those times, the restoration process is executed on the movable decorative body. The Rukoto.

  In the example shown in FIG. 304 (f), the “special aspect including the restoration operation” when the movable decorative body B is operated in the “special aspect including the restoration operation” What is necessary is just to restore the movable decorative body B by the operation mode different from the “mode” (return to the original position).

  In the example shown in FIG. 304, only a display (for example, “RTC state soon”) that does not show any expectation is displayed as the display content on the effect display device 1600 at the timing Rt1. The display is maintained until the timing Rt2a arrives, but the display differs depending on the occurrence of the RTC state at the timing Rt2 (for example, “RTC ready state”). You may make it switch to. However, even if the display content is switched at the timing Rt2 to cause a new display to appear, a display that does not show any expectation as the display content on the effect display device 1600 during the period of the timing Rt2 to Rt2a (design variation) It is important that a display that does not conform to

  In the example shown in FIG. 304, the case where an abnormality has occurred in the movable decorative body B has been described. However, even when an abnormality is determined when the movable decorative bodies A and C are operated, Instead, it is desirable to operate each in a special manner including a restoration operation.

  In the example shown in FIG. 304, the movable body operation timing for operating the movable decorative body in a specific manner is set as the generation timing of the RTC state (specific state). However, the movable body operation timing may be set to a timing at which a predetermined time has elapsed since the occurrence of the RTC state (specific state).

  Also, in the example shown in FIG. 304, based on the arrival of timings Rt1 and Rt2 that are satisfied based on a function (RTC function) that does not conform to symbol variation on the peripheral control MPU 1511a side, “Display” and “Behavior of movable ornament not conforming to design fluctuation” are started. However, instead of this, based on a command transmitted based on a function not conforming to symbol variation on the main control MPU 1310a side, "display not conforming to symbol variation" or "behavior of a movable decorative body not conforming to symbol variation" May be started.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 304, “the movable decorative body operates in a specific manner according to the movable body operation time in the RTC state after the timing Rt2 at which the RTC state (specific state) occurs (here, 3T This is forbidden so that the restoration process on the symbol fluctuation side is not performed during the period until the completion of the "sequential operation by one movable decorative body A, B, C". It is made difficult to cause a situation in which the movable body operation (the behavior of the movable decorative body not conforming to the symbol variation) in the specific mode in the (specific state) cannot be performed due to competition with the restoration process on the symbol variation side. However, if the restoration process for any of the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C is started immediately before the occurrence of the RTC state (specific state), the restoration process is in the execution state. In particular, the RTC state (specific state) occurs, and as a result, the movable body operating time in the RTC state (specific state) may arrive. That is, in this case, the movable body operation (the behavior of the movable decorative body not conforming to the symbol variation) in the specific mode in the RTC state (specific state) is performed by the restoration process started immediately before the occurrence of the RTC state (specific state). There is a concern that it will not be obtained. Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 304, even during the period of the timings Rt1 to Rt2, the restoration process for at least three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C among the various movable decorative bodies included in the pachinko machine 1 is performed. It is desirable to prohibit this so that it is not executed.

  FIG. 305 is a modification of the example shown in FIG. 304. “During the period of timings Rt1 to Rt2, among the various movable ornaments included in the pachinko machine 1, at least three movable ornaments A, B, and C This is different from the example shown in FIG. 304 in that “restoration processing is not executed”.

  That is, in the example shown in FIG. 305, in the period (timing Rt1 to Rt2) from the arrival of timing Rt1 to the occurrence of the RTC state (timing Rt1 to Rt2), abnormality determination for at least three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C (or The restoration process) is not executed itself. As a result, even if any of the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C is in an abnormal state while a display not conforming to the symbol variation (such as “RTC state soon”) is made, this is restored. It will never be left in an abnormal state.

  In the example shown in FIG. 305, when the timing Rt2 at which the RTC state occurs, the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C are first processed prior to executing the process relating to the movable body operation in the RTC state. An abnormality determination (first abnormality determination) is performed as to whether or not any of the above is in an abnormal state.

  As a result of the abnormality determination, when it is determined that there is no abnormality in any of the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C, it is assumed that the movable body operation timing (second abnormality determination) in the RTC state has arrived. As described above, the process (the process related to the movable body operation in the RTC state) is performed. Therefore, when the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C are sequentially operated, the abnormality determination as to whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the movable decorative body to be operated is performed separately, and there is no abnormality. When it is determined, the operation in the normal mode (see FIG. 304 (e)) appears, and when it is determined that there is an abnormality, the operation in the special mode (see FIG. 304 (f)) appears. That is, in this case, for example, in the movable decorative body B, the first abnormality determination is performed before the process related to the movable body operation in the RTC state is started, and the process related to the movable body operation in the RTC state is started. After that, prior to operating the movable decorative body B, the second abnormality determination is executed.

  On the other hand, as a result of the above-described abnormality determination prior to executing the process relating to the movable body operation in the RTC state, it is determined that any of the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C is abnormal. In such a case, the restoration process for the movable decorative body in the abnormal state is executed in a manner that delays the arrival of the movable body operating time in the RTC state. That is, the situation in which the abnormality determination is made is “a situation in which the movable body operation time in the RTC state has not yet arrived and the operation in a specific mode by the movable decorative body has not yet started”. By restoring the movable decorative body in an abnormal state while maintaining the situation, the operation in the specific mode by the movable decorative body can be executed in the “normal mode” instead of the above “special mode”. Become so.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 305 (f), at the timing Rt2 when the RTC state occurs, “the movable body operating time in the RTC state has not yet arrived, and the operation in a specific mode by the movable decorative body is performed. Suppose that it is determined that there is an abnormality in one of the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C as a result of the abnormality determination when “is not started yet”. Then, while maintaining the “situation in which the movable body operating time in the RTC state has not yet arrived and the operation in the specific mode by the movable decorative body has not yet started”, the movable decorative body determined to be abnormal is maintained. Will be restored.

  That is, in this case, as shown in FIGS. 305 (e) and (f), compared with the case where it is determined that none of the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C are abnormal, they are within the RTC state. The arrival of the movable body operation time is delayed (in the figure, the delay from the timing Rt2 to the timing Rt2b), but the period generated by such a delay (in the figure, the timings Rt2 to Rt2b) is used. Thus, the movable body operating time in the RTC state can be reached after the abnormally determined movable decorative body is restored. After that, when the movable body operation time comes within the RTC state, the processing as described above with reference to FIG. 304 is performed.

  In this regard, in the example shown in FIG. 305 (f), it is assumed that it is determined that no abnormality has occurred in any of the movable decorative bodies when the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C are sequentially operated. doing. That is, in this case, from the delayed timing Rt2b, the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C are sequentially operated in the manner described with reference to FIG. 304 (e). When the timing Rt5b comes after the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C are sequentially operated in the normal state, when the RTC state (specific state) occurs, the “movable decorative body that does not conform to symbol variation”. ”Behavior” is ended, and the prohibition state (prohibition state over timings Rt1 to Rt5a) for the restoration process on the symbol variation side is released.

  On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 305 (g), when it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the movable decorative body B when the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C are sequentially operated (timing). It is assumed that after abnormality determination (first abnormality determination) at Rt2 is performed (or after restoration), an abnormality has newly occurred in the movable decorative body B). That is, in this case, from the delayed timing Rt2b, the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C sequentially operate in the manner described with reference to FIG. 304 (f). After the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C are sequentially operated in a mode according to each determination result (the movable decorative bodies A and C are normal modes and the movable decorative body B is a special mode). When the timing Rt5b arrives, the “behavior of the movable decorative body not conforming to the symbol variation” at the occurrence of the RTC state (specific state) is terminated, and the prohibition state for the restoration processing on the symbol variation side (the prohibition state over the timings Rt1 to Rt5b) ) Will be released. That is, in this case, for example, if an abnormality has occurred in the movable decorative body B even in the first abnormality determination, the restoration process (restoration operation) according to the first abnormality determination and the second abnormality determination Each of the operations in the special mode is executed.

  According to such a configuration, a series of movable body operations at the time of occurrence of the RTC state (here, three Sequential operations by the movable decorative bodies A, B, and C) can be appropriately executed, and the expectation that the RTC state has occurred can be suitably maintained.

  In the example shown in FIG. 305, when there is an abnormality in a plurality of movable decorative bodies in the abnormality determination at the timing Rt2, the restoration process for the movable decorative bodies in the abnormal state is sequentially executed, and then the RTC state is changed. It is desirable to execute a series of movable body operations at the time of occurrence (sequential operations by three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C here). In this case, as the number of movable decorative bodies to be restored is increased, a series of movable body operations at the time of occurrence of the RTC state (in this case, sequential operations by three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C). ) Is delayed for a longer time, but a series of movable body operations at the time of occurrence of the RTC state can be executed in a normal state. The restoration operation for a plurality of movable decorative bodies may be executed in parallel. In this case, the delay time until a series of movable body operations are started when the RTC state occurs can be suppressed. become.

  However, even in the example shown in FIG. 305, if the player may feel that a predetermined restoration operation is being performed on the movable decorative body in an abnormal state, it will be an amusement. There is concern about the decline. Therefore, in the example shown in FIGS. 305 (f) and (g), when the “restoration operation” is completed, “sequential operation by three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C” is executed (sequential execution). ) So that a series of movable body operations up to the timings Rt5a and Rt5b including the restoration operation appearing at the timing Rt2 can be seen as “a series of movable body operations at the time of occurrence of the RTC state”. It is difficult to recognize that a predetermined restoration operation is being performed on the movable decorative body in an abnormal state.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1, when an abnormality occurs in a situation different from these abnormality occurrence situations, an indication (error code or the like) indicating that an abnormality has occurred in the movable decorative body can be performed. In the example shown in 304 (f), in the example shown in FIGS. 305 (f) and 305 (g), the restoration operation (restoration process) is being performed on the movable decorative body in the abnormal state. An abnormality occurs in the movable decorative body (during the restoration operation according to the first abnormality determination) or during the period during which the movable decorative body B is operated in a special mode (in the special mode operation according to the second abnormality determination). The display (error code, etc.) indicating that it is in progress will not appear. In addition, the timing at which the operation in the special mode is started after the operation in the normal mode is completed, the timing at which the operation in the normal mode is started after the operation in the special mode is completed, and FIG. The display contents on the effect display device 1600 are triggered by the occurrence of these timings at the timing when the sequential operations by the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C are started after the restoration operation shown in f) and (g) is finished. There is no such thing as causing any change. These also indicate that a predetermined restoration operation is being performed on the movable decorative body in an abnormal state so that only a “series of movable body operations at the time of occurrence of the RTC state” is performed. It can be said that it is important to make it difficult to recognize.

  In FIG. 304 and other examples thereof, and in FIG. 305 and other examples thereof, as the movable body operation based on the occurrence of the RTC state, the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C are sequentially operated. The movable decorative body (one, two, three or more, etc.) that is also used in the movable effect on the symbol variation side is not limited to the above, based on the establishment of a specific condition different from the game start condition (starting condition) What is necessary is just to operate | move by a specific aspect in the movable body operation | movement time within the specific state to generate | occur | produce.

  In addition, as a movable decorative body that can be operated at the movable body operation time in such an RTC state (specific state), a frame-side movable decorative body provided on the door frame 3 side (for example, an operably provided body). Operation buttons 410, sword ornaments 5001, and the like, and board-side movable ornaments provided on the game board 5 side (for example, the front front decoration unit 3100, the back middle movable production unit 3200, the specific decoration member SDY (a spear accessory) ) Etc.) may be used respectively.

  However, for example, in FIG. 304 and other examples thereof, or in FIG. 305 and other examples thereof, as one of the movable decorative bodies that can be operated at the movable body operation time in the RTC state (specific state), When the frame side movable decorative body (such as the operation button 410 and the sword decorative body 5001) that is also used is used, the frame side movable decorative body that is also used as such an operation means after the timing Rt2a arrives. There may be a situation in which “operation not conforming to symbol variation” is performed.

  That is, as described above, at the timing Rt2a, even if it is within the operation period of the movable decorative body according to the occurrence of the RTC state, the “display that does not indicate any expectation level (until the timing Rt1 is displayed). "Display)" is not displayed at this time, and a specific background (for example, in the RTC state) after the occurrence of the RTC state (specific state) can appear. After that, when a new symbol variation (C variation (losing) in the diagram) is started, even if it is within the operation period of the movable decorative body according to the occurrence of the RTC state, As described above, the display indicating the degree of expectation such as the effect pattern and the notice effect is started as usual. Therefore, the frame side movable decorative body (such as the operation button 410 and the sword decorative body 5001) that is also used as the operating means is used within a period in which such a new symbol variation (C variation (losing) in the figure) is performed. In spite of being in a state of being subjected to a specific operation according to the occurrence of the RTC state, an operation opportunity may be given to the frame side movable decorative body that is also used as an operation means depending on the production pattern, There can be a situation where the production is confusing. In the period from timing Rt2 to Rt2a (further, the period from timing Rt1 to Rt2 before that), only the display that does not conform to the symbol variation (display that does not show any expectation) appears. Even if symbol variation (C variation (losing) in the figure) is performed, an operation opportunity is not given within the period.

  Therefore, the specific operation means (the frame-side movable decorative body) is in a state where it is subjected to a specific operation in response to the occurrence of the RTC state, and according to the result of the jackpot determination for the specific operation means. When the production time for giving the operation opportunity has arrived, the production display device 1600 performs a specific display (operation instruction image) that prompts the user to perform an operation on the specific operation means. Even if a specific operation means in a state where a specific operation is being performed is operated, it is desirable not to receive the effect. According to such a configuration, when a specific operation corresponding to the occurrence of the RTC state is being performed, it is assumed that the operation opportunity was originally given to the specific operation means. It is possible to make an appropriate suggestion to the person. In addition, it is possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of a failure or an abnormality by performing an operation on a specific operation unit in an operating state by preventing the production of an operation on the specific operation unit. Expected.

  However, during the execution period of the specific operation corresponding to the occurrence of the RTC state, the operation for the specific operation means is not accepted even though the specific display for prompting the operation to the specific operation means is performed. If such a thing occurs frequently, the entertainment interest of the game due to the fact that the production is not progressed may be lowered. Therefore, among the frame side movable decorative bodies provided on the door frame 3 side (for example, the operation buttons 410 and the sword decorative body 5001 provided so as to be operable), the operation effects within the symbol variation according to the big hit determination The operation means (for example, the operation button 410) having a relatively high generation rate is not used as one of the movable decorative bodies that can be operated at the movable body operation time in the RTC state (specific state). It is desirable to do. In this case, there is an operation opportunity for the operation means (for example, the operation button 410) having a relatively high operation effect generation rate within the symbol variation within the operation period of the movable decorative body according to the occurrence of the RTC state. When given, it is desirable that the display relating to the operation instruction image and the effect reception when operated (a predetermined effect corresponding to the effect reception) are executed as usual.

  That is, among the frame-side movable decorative bodies provided on the door frame 3 side (for example, the operation buttons 410 provided so as to be operable (for example, vibration), the sword decorative body 5001, etc.), the symbol variation according to the big hit determination A specific operation means (for example, a sword decorative body 5001) having a relatively low occurrence rate of the operation effect in the interior of the movable decorative body that can be operated at the movable body operating time in the RTC state (specific state). By using the movable decorative body (for example, the sword decorative body 5001), the movable decorative body (for example, the sword decorative body 5001) is in a state of being subjected to a specific operation according to the occurrence of the RTC state. For example, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the production time for the operation opportunity grant according to the result of the jackpot determination is reached for the sword decorative body 5001).

  Also, a frame-side movable decorative body (preferably, a specific operation means having a relatively low operation effect occurrence rate within the symbol variation) provided on the door frame 3 side is a movable body in the RTC state (specific state). When used as one of the movable decorative bodies that can be operated at the operation time, when the RTC state occurs, the operation is independent from the sequential operation by the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C. It is desirable to perform an operation by the frame side movable decorative body (for example, a sword decorative body 5001). According to such a configuration, a special operation (see FIG. 304) or a restoration operation (see FIG. 305) is performed on any of the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C. In addition, it is possible to perform an operation that does not conform to the symbol variation by the frame-side movable decorative body (for example, the sword decorative body 5001) without being influenced by the operation (delay or the like). In this case, it is desirable that all of the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C are used as a panel-side movable decorative body. Accordingly, even if any of the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C is restored, the possibility of interference with the movable decorative body is eliminated, and the movable decorative body A is provided on the door frame 3 side. The operation by the frame side movable decorative body can be executed in parallel.

  Then, after the RTC state (specific state) is generated, the frame-side movable decorative body (preferably, a specific operation means (for example, a sword decorative body with a relatively low generation ratio of the operational effect within the symbol variation). 5001)) When the time required to complete the operation that does not conform to the symbol variation (operation according to the occurrence of the RTC state) is “specific time”, any of the effect patterns according to the jackpot determination is executed. Even if, at least the “specific time” has not elapsed since the start of the pattern variation (the start of the production pattern), a predetermined operation opportunity grant timing (here, the frame side movable decoration) in the production pattern It is desirable to make settings related to each production pattern (internal operation opportunity grant timing) so that a body (for example, an operation opportunity for the sword ornament 5001) does not arrive. .

  According to such a configuration, in FIG. 304 and another example thereof, or in FIG. 305 and another example thereof, even if the symbol variation having any effect pattern is started at the timing Rt2a, When an operation opportunity is given to the frame-side movable decorative body (for example, the sword decorative body 5001), the operation by the frame-side movable decorative body according to the occurrence of the RTC state (according to the occurrence of the RTC state) Since the operation) has already been completed and the production can be accepted, the production at the time of occurrence of the RTC state can be improved without sacrificing the production on the symbol variation side.

  Further, as described above, in view of the fact that normal effect control is allowed only by the symbol variation after the symbol variation first digested after the occurrence of the RTC state, the frame side movable decorative body (for example, As for the operation (operation according to the occurrence of the RTC state) that does not conform to the symbol variation by the sword ornament 5001), the execution can be started based on the occurrence of the RTC state, whereas the RTC state occurs. Since the symbol variation to be digested first after that is inevitably started, the frame-side movable decorative body (for example, the sword decorative body 5001) is equivalent to the delay time (timing Rt2 to Rt2a). ), It is possible to provide a margin for completing operations that do not conform to the symbol variation in advance.

  Further, when the operation at the time of occurrence of the RTC state by the frame side movable decorative body (for example, the sword decorative body 5001) is executed as an operation independent of the sequential operation by the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C, When performing the determination, it is determined whether an abnormality has occurred in the frame-side movable decorative body, and when it is determined that the abnormality has occurred, a special mode including a restoration operation is used instead of the normal mode operation. It is desirable to perform the operation in the normal state in the form of performing the operation by the frame-side movable decorative body (for example, the sword decorative body 5001) as the above-mentioned operation, or performing the restoration operation and subsequent to this. In this case, the “special mode including the restoration operation” also restores (returns to the original position) the frame side movable decorative body (for example, the sword decorative body 5001) by an operation mode different from the “normal operation mode”. For example, a minimum operation mode required for returning to the frame-side movable decorative body (for example, the sword decorative body 5001) may be used.

  Then, the operation at the time of occurrence of the RTC state by the frame side movable decorative body (for example, the sword decorative body 5001) is “normal mode”, “special mode including the recovery operation”, and “restoration operation”. As long as the operation is not completed, the frame-side movable decorative body (for example, the sword decorative body 5001) is used as long as the operation is not completed. Therefore, it is more desirable to make settings related to each production pattern so that the timing at which an operation opportunity is given does not arrive. According to such a configuration, when any of the effect patterns corresponding to the big hit determination is executed at the timing Rt2a, the RTC state is generated when the frame side movable decorative body (for example, the sword decorative body 5001) is generated. Regardless of whether the operation is executed in a normal mode or an abnormal determination mode, the frame side movable decorative body (for example, the sword decorative body 5001) is applied only after the operation is completed. On the other hand, an operation opportunity can be given.

  When an operation opportunity for the frame-side movable decorative body (for example, a sword decorative body 5001) is accepted, at least one of the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C is operated based on the presentation reception. A specific movable effect may be made executable. However, in this case, when an operation opportunity is given to the frame-side movable decorative body (for example, the sword decorative body 5001) within the symbol variation started at the timing Rt2a, the operation (RTC) by the frame-side movable decorative body is given. Even if the operation according to the occurrence of the state has already been completed, if the sequential operation by the three movable decorative bodies A, B, C is still in the middle of execution, the operation opportunity is given. It becomes impossible to receive the production, and there is a concern that the game entertainment will decline. Therefore, when the time from the above-mentioned timing Rt2 required to complete the sequential operation by the three movable decorative bodies A, B, C in the normal mode is “special time”, the big hit determination As long as neither of the “specific time” and the “special time” have elapsed since the symbol variation started (the effect pattern started) Each production pattern (internal operation opportunity grant timing) so that a predetermined operation opportunity grant timing in the production pattern (here, an operation opportunity for the frame-side movable ornament (for example, an operation opportunity for the sword ornament 5001) does not arrive). It is desirable to perform the setting related to.

  When the frame-side movable decorative body (for example, the sword decorative body 5001) is also in an abnormal state within the period of the timings Rt1 to Rt2, the restoration process for the frame-side movable decorative body (for example, the sword decorative body 5001) is performed. It is desirable that the timing Rt2 arrives while maintaining the abnormal state.

  On the other hand, among the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C, this is the case with respect to a specific movable decorative body (for example, the movable decorative body A having a fast operation order or a movable decorative body having a long time required for the restoration operation). When it is in an abnormal state within the period of the timings Rt1 to Rt2, the restoration process (restoration operation) for the movable ornament is prohibited, but a movable ornament different from the specific movable ornament (for example, the operation order is slow) When the movable decorative body B (or movable decorative body C) or a movable decorative body having a short restoration time is in an abnormal state within the period of timings Rt1 to Rt2, the movable decorative body is restored. Processing (restoration operation) may be performed without prohibition. This is because, for example, the restoration process (restoration operation) for the movable decorative body B (or movable decorative body C) does not need to be completed by the timing Rt2, and the movable decorative body A moves when the RTC occurs. This is because if it can be completed during the operation, the sequential operation by the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C can be executed in the normal state.

  In addition, after the RTC state occurs, the timing when a series of operations of the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C is started and the operation of the frame side movable decorative body (for example, the sword decorative body 5001) are started. It may be different from the timing.

[Restoration process for movement abnormality with less influence on movement production]
As described above, in this pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a), when a specific movable decorative body is in an abnormal state (more accurately, a state where the specific state has not occurred) When the restoration operation time to be performed (for example, the start time or the stop time of symbol variation) arrives, it is possible to execute processing for causing the specific movable decorative body to perform a predetermined restoration operation. However, if such a restoration process is executed regardless of the state of production, there is a concern that the game entertainment will be reduced.

For example, it is assumed that the “symbol fluctuation start time” described above is set as the “restoration operation time corresponding to symbol fluctuation”. Now, as shown in FIG. 306, assuming that a timing tm1 at which a new symbol variation starts in a situation where a specific movable decorative body is in an abnormal state, the peripheral control MPU 1511a performs at least the following processes. Will be executed.
-Based on the acquisition of a command sent from the main control MPU 1310a when the symbol variation is started, an effect pattern corresponding to the symbol variation is set, and the symbol variation is performed on the set effect pattern. In particular, based on the acquisition of a command sent from the main control MPU 1310a side when the processing to advance the effect and symbol variation is started (based on the fact that the restoration operation time corresponding to the symbol variation has arrived) To perform a predetermined restoration operation on the movable decorative body

  Here, in the example shown in FIG. 306, it is assumed that “a specific effect pattern that allows a specific movable decorative body to be operated at a specific timing tm2 within the symbol variation” is set as the effect pattern. Therefore, when the timing tm1 arrives, the progress of the production concerning the “specific production pattern in which the specific movable decorative body can be operated at the specific timing tm2 within the design variation” and the predetermined restoration operation for the specific movable decorative body are performed. A situation in which the processing to be performed is performed in parallel will appear.

  In general, in the pachinko machine 1 in which such a specific performance pattern can be executed, the performance pattern (relatively expected) that is pairwise with the specific performance pattern. Low production pattern) is prepared. And in the production pattern which is a pair relationship (production pattern with relatively low expectation), the specific movable decorative body is not operated at the specific timing tm2 within the symbol variation, but toward the specific timing tm2. An effect in the same manner as in the case of “a specific effect pattern (a relatively high expectation effect pattern) in which a specific movable decorative body can be operated at a specific timing tm2 within a design variation” is performed. The In this way, by providing two effect patterns (effect pattern that operates a specific movable decorative body and effect pattern that does not operate a specific movable decorative body) that are paired in terms of performance, a specific timing tm2 is provided. (For example, a predetermined time until the specific timing tm2 arrives) is a predetermined effect (for example, an effect display about whether to operate) or not. Can be executed, and the play entertainment is suitably maintained by such performance.

  However, if the process for causing the specific movable decorative body to perform the predetermined restoration operation is still in the execution state even when the specific timing tm2 comes after the symbol variation is started, the specific timing It becomes apparent that the specific movable decorative body is in a situation where it is not possible to perform a staging operation despite the arrival of tm2. That is, in this case, even if the predetermined effect is performed at the specific timing tm2 within the symbol variation, the function as the predetermined effect having the effect of whether or not the specific movable decorative body operates may be lost. , There is a concern that the entertainment interest will decline.

  Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 306, the progress of the production relating to the “specific production pattern that can operate the specific movable decorative body at the specific timing tm2” among the production patterns, and the predetermined movable decoration body. When a situation in which a process for performing a restoration operation (a restoration process based on a restoration operation time corresponding to symbol variation) occurs in parallel with each other, a specific time tm2 until the specific timing tm2 arrives regardless of the restoration situation. The “processing for performing a predetermined restoration operation on the movable decorative body” is ended. In addition, as "a process for performing a predetermined restoration operation for a specific movable decorative body", various methods can be adopted, but in the following description, "whether the abnormal state is resolved, A description will be given on the assumption that “a process in which a restoration operation for a specific movable decorative body is repeatedly performed until a predetermined upper limit number is reached” is executed.

  More specifically, with regard to “a process for causing a specific movable decorative body to perform a predetermined restoration operation”, restoration from the abnormal state is completed depending on the degree of abnormality of the specific movable decorative body. The time required to be different will be different. For example, if the abnormal state is resolved and the original position is restored (restored) simply by executing the first restoration operation for a specific movable ornament, “predetermined restoration for a specific movable ornament” is performed. The timing tx at which “the process for performing the operation” is completed also arrives relatively early, but the number of times this is repeated until the restoration operation for the specific movable decorative body fails and is restored (restored). As the number increases, the timing tx at which the “processing for performing a predetermined restoration operation on a specific movable decorative body” is completed is deferred to a later timing. At the latest, if the restoration operation for the specific movable decorative body has failed and has not yet been restored (restored), but if the restoration operation is executed once again, the timing tx will be exceeded, the specific movable decorative body will be displayed. By terminating the process of performing the predetermined restoration operation while the body is in an abnormal state, the process of performing the predetermined restoration operation is completed before the specific timing tm is reached regardless of the restoration situation. It becomes like this.

  In addition, when the restoration operation for a specific movable decorative body is performed once, x time is required, so that the relationship of “x time × n times <time of timings tm1 to tm2” is established so that one time The upper limit number n for repeating the predetermined restoration operation within the fluctuation is set, and even if the restoration (restoration) is not performed when the upper limit number n is reached, the process for performing the predetermined restoration operation is ended. By doing so, the process of performing a predetermined restoration operation may be terminated before the specific timing tm2 comes regardless of the restoration situation.

  According to such a configuration, the development of the specific production pattern that can cause the specific movable decorative body to operate at the specific timing tm2 within the symbol variation and the predetermined restoration operation for the specific movable decorative body are performed in parallel. If a situation occurs, the process for performing a predetermined restoration operation is ended before the specific timing tm2 comes regardless of the restoration situation. That is, in this case, not only when the specific movable decorative body is restored until the specific timing tm2 arrives, but also when the specific movable decorative body is not restored, the specific movable decorative body is not restored at the specific timing tm2. Since the movable decorative body comes to be in a stopped state, it can be suitably maintained as to whether or not the specific movable decorative body operates when the specific timing tm2 arrives. become. For example, even if a specific movable decorative body is stopped at a position different from the original position, when the specific timing tm2 arrives, it may cause some behavior, or the movable decorative body does not operate. However, the lamp of the movable decorative body may emit light (in the case where the lamp of the movable decorative body emits light when an effect operation is performed by the movable decorative body). .

  However, in reality, when the specific movable decorative body is performing a restoring operation while the predetermined performance is being performed, there is a directing effect as to whether or not the specific movable decorative body operates. The function as the predetermined production may be lost. Therefore, the timing tx at which the “process for causing the specific movable decorative body to perform a predetermined restoration operation” is completed before the predetermined effect is started regardless of the restoration status. It can be said that it is more desirable to maintain the entertainment interest.

  In addition, as a predetermined effect, for example, a specific movable decorative object operates when a specific display result (for example, a display result that an attack hits) appears in the super reach effect, and operates when the specific display result does not appear. When it is provided as `` nothing '', it is possible to exemplify a `` display effect that appears in advance in a manner that inquires whether or not a specific display result appears ''. When it is provided as “acting based on the reception of an effect by an operation by the player (or receiving an effect but not operating)”, “the effect of causing a specific display to prompt an operation by the player” Can be exemplified.

  Here, in the example shown in FIG. 306, at a timing tx at which “a process for performing a predetermined restoration operation on the specific movable ornament” is completed, the specific movable ornament is restored (restored) from the abnormal state. It is assumed that the normal state has been achieved. In this way, even when there is an abnormal state at the start of fluctuation (or the “restoration operation time” such as when the previous symbol is stopped), the specific timing tm2 within the symbol fluctuation has arrived after restoration to the normal state. Then, it becomes possible to perform a specific movable decorative body at the specific timing tm2.

  On the other hand, at the timing tx when the “process for performing a predetermined restoration operation on the specific movable decorative body” is completed, the specific movable decorative body cannot be restored (restored) from the abnormal state and remains in the abnormal state. When the specific timing tm2 within the symbol variation arrives, the stopped state is maintained at least from the specific timing tm2 (more precisely, timing tx) until the symbol variation ends and the next restoration operation timing arrives. It becomes. That is, in this case, although it is not possible to perform a specific movable decorative body at the specific timing tm2, it is possible to suitably maintain the directivity of whether or not the specific movable decorative body operates. When the specific effect pattern is based on the jackpot variation, the jackpot symbol is stopped at the specific timing tm2 even though the specific movable decorative body does not perform the effect, thereby providing a surprise effect. Will be able to.

  However, in recent years, pachinko machines have come to be equipped with movable decorative bodies that perform a multi-stage movement with a more complicated structure. With such movable decorative bodies, it is longer until the restoration process is completed. Often time-consuming. However, on the other hand, in a specific effect pattern that can operate a specific movable decorative body at a specific timing tm2 within the symbol variation, or in an effect pattern that is paired with this, when the effect pattern is started Even if the specific movable decorative body is in an abnormal state, within a time shorter than the time required for the specific timing tm2 to arrive after the pattern change is started (more preferably, the time until the predetermined effect is performed). As described above, it is required to end the process of performing a predetermined restoration operation on a specific movable decorative body. That is, in this case, every time a specific movable decorative body becomes abnormal, it can be restored only in a first-aid and simple manner, and this accelerates the deterioration as the specific movable decorative body. It can also be.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, a special effect pattern (effect pattern for restoration / diagnosis) is prepared, and from the main control MPU 1310a side when the symbol variation is started. When the special production pattern is selected based on the command to be sent, while the special production pattern is produced, while the special production pattern is developed (while the symbol variation corresponding to the special production pattern is performed) Control is performed so that the decorative body is not operated and a predetermined effect (for example, an effect display as to whether or not to operate) does not appear. Then, as shown in FIGS. 307 (a) and 307 (d), as a result of the timing tm11 at which the symbol variation starts in a situation where the specific movable decorative body is in an abnormal state, the performance development related to the special performance pattern is reached. And when a situation in which a predetermined restoring operation is performed on a specific movable decorative body appears in parallel, at least during a special performance pattern (period until the symbol is stopped) Does not end the restoration process, but continues it.

  More specifically, in the restoration process started from timing tm11, the abnormal state is resolved and the original position is restored (restored) only by executing the first restoration operation for the specific movable decorative body. Even in this case, the restoration process is not completed at least while the special effect pattern is being performed, and the restoration process for the specific movable decorative body is executed over the entire period.

  According to such a configuration, when a specific movable decorative body is in an abnormal state, aiming at the time when the special effect pattern is performed, a restoration process in a more serious manner (for example, normal diagnosis after restoration is performed). This special function pattern will function as an effect pattern for restoration / diagnosis, and will be carefully restored in this way as a player. You will be able to enjoy the subsequent performance with confidence. In this sense, it is desirable to prepare a special effect pattern that can be selected only when the winning combination is lost. In addition, it is desirable that the display contents on the effect display device 1600 appear a unique display mode such as “This is an effect pattern for restoration / diagnosis. Please wait for a while”.

  Moreover, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 307 (a) and 307 (d), the timing tm11 arrives when the specific movable decorative body is in an abnormal state. When the special effect pattern is performed, the restoration process started at the timing tm11 is not ended and is continued after the timing tm12 when the special effect pattern is ended. According to such a configuration, the restriction that “the abnormality must occur in a specific movable decorative body, the restoration process must be executed for each unit in which symbol variation is performed” is eliminated. For this reason, it is possible to perform restoration processing in a more serious manner.

  However, at the timing tm12 when the special performance pattern is finished, if there is a case where the performance pattern according to the new symbol fluctuation is performed without interruption, the next restoration operation time (here, the next restoration operation time) The symbol change start time) will arrive. At this time, if the restoration process started at the timing tm11 is still continued, it is determined that the specific movable decorative body is still in an abnormal state (such as not in the original position). Will be. If a restoration process for a specific movable decorative body is newly started based on the determination, it can be substantially completed within a time when one symbol variation is performed. Since only restoration processing can be performed, the content of the processing is naturally limited, and failure to adequately handle abnormalities may also accelerate deterioration of the specific movable decorative body. .

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 307 (b) and (d), a restoration process for a specific movable decorative body is being executed. Sometimes when the next restoration operation time (here, the next symbol variation start time) arrives, the restoration process in the running state is not terminated, but this is continued in the form of the next restoration operation time. . According to such a configuration, even if there is any hold during the execution of the restoration process for the specific movable decorative body, “even though an abnormality has occurred in the specific movable decorative body, Since the restriction of “the restoration process must be executed for each unit in which the symbol variation is performed” is eliminated, the restoration process in a more serious manner can be performed.

  However, as shown in FIGS. 307 (c) and (d), as a result of starting a new symbol variation when the restoration process for the specific movable decorative body is being executed, the new symbol variation is performed. As a case, “a specific effect pattern that allows a specific movable decorative body to be operated at a specific timing tm2 within the symbol variation” may appear. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 307 (a) to 307 (c), the timing is started from the timing tm11 regardless of the state of the game and the effect after the special effect pattern is ended (and the situation of restoration, etc.). As for the timing tx at which the “process for performing a predetermined restoration operation on a specific movable decorative body” is completed, the time required until the specific timing tm2 in the next symbol variation (more preferably, It is desirable to finish within a shorter time than the time until the predetermined effect is performed. Even in such a configuration, in addition to the time of timing tm11 to tm12 (time required for digestion of the special performance pattern), the specific movable over a relatively long time until the time of timing tm12 to tx ends. It becomes possible to continue the restoration process for the decorative body.

  In addition, after a special performance pattern (restoration / diagnosis production pattern) is finished, a situation in which a special performance pattern (restoration / diagnosis production pattern) is continuously executed appears. Do not end the restoration process in a new special production pattern (production pattern for restoration / diagnosis), and straddle three or more symbol variations (production patterns) (after one restoration process is started, the one One restoration process may be continued in such a manner that the restoration process spans two or more restoration operation periods.

  In the example shown in FIG. 307, at a timing tx at which “a process for performing a predetermined restoration operation on a specific movable decorative body” is completed, the specific movable decorative body is restored (restored) from the abnormal state and is normal. It is assumed that the situation is reached. As described above, since one restoration process is continued across the next restoration operation timing (here, the next symbol fluctuation start timing), it is a serious abnormal state that could not be restored in the past. However, this can be made returnable, and a specific movable decorative body can be effected at the specific timing tm2.

  On the other hand, a specific movable decorative object is abnormal at the timing tx even though the one restoration process is continued over the next restoration operation timing (here, the next symbol variation start timing). When the state cannot be restored (restored), the stopped state is maintained until the next restoration operation time comes after the symbol variation is finished from the timing tx. That is, in this case, although it is not possible to perform a specific movable decorative body at the specific timing tm2, it is possible to suitably maintain the directivity of whether or not the specific movable decorative body operates. When the specific effect pattern is based on the jackpot variation, the jackpot symbol is stopped at the specific timing tm2 even though the specific movable decorative body does not perform the effect, thereby providing a surprise effect. Will be able to.

  In addition, in a situation where a specific movable decorative body is in an abnormal state and the restoration process for the specific movable decorative body is not executed, each time the restoration operation time (in this case, the symbol variation start time) arrives, If the restoration process for a movable ornament of a certain number of times is started several times, if the specific movable ornament has a failure that cannot be restored, the specific movable ornament cannot be restored. There is a concern that the game entertainment will be lowered by the repeated restoration process on the body. Therefore, after the specific movable decorative body is set in an abnormal state, the restoration operation timing has reached the predetermined upper limit number (the number of executions of the restoration process (specific movable decorative body) has reached the predetermined upper limit number. In spite of this, when the abnormal state is not restored, it is desirable not to newly start the restoration process for the specific movable decorative body even if a new restoration operation time comes.

  However, on the other hand, after a specific movable decorative body is in an abnormal state, only a special production pattern (production pattern for restoration / diagnosis) is continuously executed (started) by the predetermined upper limit number. If a situation occurs in which an effect pattern (for example, a specific effect pattern) different from the special effect pattern (the effect pattern for restoration / diagnosis) is executed, One restoration process may be continued in a form straddling the next production pattern. That is, in this case, after the specific movable decorative body has been brought into the abnormal state, the restoration operation timing has not been restored from the abnormal state although the predetermined upper limit number has been reached. Even when the +1 ”-th restoration operation time comes, the restoration process for the specific movable decorative body is continued without being finished. As described above, with respect to an aspect in which one restoration process is continued in a manner straddling the restoration operation time, the predetermined upper limit number is set no matter how many times the restoration operation time comes while the one restoration process is continued. It is desirable that the count for is handled as a single restoration process so that it is not terminated so that the restoration process in a more serious manner is not hindered.

  By the way, with respect to such restoration processing (restoration processing performed based on the restoration operation time corresponding to symbol variation), a board-side movable decorative body (for example, the back front decoration unit 3100 or the backside decoration unit 3100 provided on the game board 5 side) In addition to the middle movable effect unit 3200 and the specific decorative member SDY (eg, a decorative object), the frame side movable decorative body provided on the door frame 3 side is basically executed in the manner as described above. The However, among the frame-side movable decorative bodies provided on the door frame 3 side, the frame-side movable decorative bodies that are also used as operation means (for example, the operation buttons 410 and the sword decorative body 5001 provided so as to be operable) are used. In some cases, restoration (return) may be performed in a manner different from that of the specific movable decorative body (board-side movable decorative body) described above.

  For example, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, as described above, a movable operation in which an operation opportunity giving effect for giving an operation opportunity to the sword ornament 5001 is executed during the period when the symbol variation is performed. A system effect pattern (for example, the effect pattern shown in FIG. 252) is prepared. Also, as described above, in such an operation opportunity giving effect, “a process of moving the sword ornament 5001 from the original position to the operation position with a predetermined driving force (see FIG. 252 (f))”, “Process for generating an effect reception period for the sword ornament 5001 (see FIG. 252 (f))”, “Character display for prompting operation (“ press ””), and bar display indicating the remaining time of the effect reception period ”(See FIG. 252 (f))”. As a result, when the sword decorative body 5001 that has been moved to the operation position is operated (in this case, an operation to push in) and an effect is received, the “specific decorative member SDY (a decorative object) ) And the like (see FIG. 252 (g)) and “Process for causing change in display contents (see FIG. 252 (g))”. Become. It should be noted that the board-side movable decorative body that is rendered in this process may be the specific movable decorative body described with reference to FIGS. 306 and 307.

  However, “operation for moving the sword ornament 5001 from the original position to the operation position by a predetermined driving force” in such an operation opportunity giving effect is not executed when the sword ornament 5001 is in an abnormal state and is normal. The “sword decoration body 5001 is in a normal state with respect to“ a process for generating an effect reception period for the sword decoration body 5001 ”and“ a process for performing a display for prompting an operation ”. It can be executed at any time and when it is in an abnormal state. Accordingly, in the effect pattern of the movable operation system, even if the sword decorative body 5001 is in an abnormal state, when the player views the “display for prompting operation” and the sword decorative body 5001 is operated and received an effect, “Processing for effecting the board-side movable decorative body such as the specific decorative member SDY (a glimpse)” and “processing for causing a change in the display content on the effect display device 1600” are respectively performed. In addition, in the production pattern of the movable operation system, even if the sword decorative body 5001 is in an abnormal state, the sword decorative body 5001 receives an external force due to an operation by such a player, and the operation part moves, so that the abnormal state It may occur when the problem is resolved.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, a frame-side movable decorative body (for example, an operation button 410 that is operably provided, a sword decorative body 5001, and the like) that is also used as an operation means. In the state described with reference to FIG. 306 and FIG. 307, in the case of an abnormal state, the frame side movable decorative body (operating means) is applied with a driving force for returning to the original position. Restoration processing) is performed at each timing of “the above restoration operation time (here, the start time of symbol variation)” and “after an effect is received by an operation by the player within the effect pattern of the movable operation system”. It can be executed.

  According to such a configuration, when the board-side movable decorative body is in an abnormal state, the board-side movable body is aimed at the timing at the start or stop of the symbol variation (more strictly, after the start or after the stop). While the process of returning the decorative body is performed, when the frame-side movable decorative body is in an abnormal state, not only the timing of the start and stop of the symbol variation, but also a different original timing (during the variation period) Among them, aiming at the frame side movable decorative body (operation), the external force (operation by the player) is applied and the abnormal state may be resolved) Since the process of restoring (returning) means) is performed, it is expected that the original position return of the frame-side movable decorative body (operation means) in an abnormal state can be realized at an early stage. .

  FIG. 308 is a time chart showing an example of processing until the sword ornament 5001 is returned to the original position when the sword ornament 5001 is used as such a frame-side movable ornament (operation means). is there.

  As shown in FIG. 308, an effect pattern of a movable operation system (an effect pattern in which an operation opportunity giving effect for giving an operation opportunity to the sword decorative body 5001 is executed during a period in which symbol variation is performed) is executed. At timing tm21, it is assumed that “a process for moving the sword ornament 5001 from the original position to the operation position” is executed. When the sword ornament 5001 is located at the operation position, “characteristic display such as“ processing for generating an effect reception period for the sword ornament 5001 ””, “display for prompting operation (“ push ””), and an effect reception period If the player has operated the sword ornament 5001 and received a production (timing tm22) while the display of the remaining time is being executed), the “special decorative member SDY (a saddle accessory) etc. “Processing for effecting the board-side movable decorative body” and “processing for causing a change in display content on the effect display device 1600” are respectively performed. In the example shown in FIG. 308, based on the reception of the effect, the specific movable decorative body described in FIG. 306 and FIG. 307 is performed as a board-side movable decorative body.

  In this regard, in the example shown in FIG. 308, an abnormality occurs in the sword ornament 5001 at the timing tm22 in which the presentation is received in this way, and the sword decoration 5001 is not returned to the original position. It is assumed that another abnormality occurs in the body (board-side movable decorative body) and this cannot be restored to the original position. At this time, a determination that an abnormality has occurred in the sword decorative body 5001 and a determination that an abnormality has occurred in a specific movable decorative body are made. However, an abnormality has occurred in a specific movable decorative body. Regarding the determination of the effect, neither the specific notification sound nor the display notification associated therewith is executed, and the determination that an abnormality has occurred in the sword ornament 5001 is accompanied by a specific notification sound and display. It is desirable that at least one of the notifications is performed. This is because the sword decorative body 5001 is “placed by the player's hand (the door frame 3)”, and if the sword decorative body 5001 is informed of the abnormal state, the repair work from the abnormal state is performed. While it is expected to be performed by the player's hand, the specific movable decorative body is “placed out of the reach of the player (game board 5)”, and this has become an abnormal state This is because, as a player, nothing can be helped as a player, and simply highlighting the fact that the movable performance is not executed may promote a decrease in the gaming interest. However, such notification is desirably terminated when a predetermined time has elapsed.

  Furthermore, in the example shown in FIG. 308, an abnormality has occurred in the specific movable decorative body while performing the “process for performing the specific movable decorative body” based on the reception of the presentation at timing tm22. However, it is recognized that an abnormality has occurred in a specific movable decorative body by performing this process as usual with respect to the “process for causing a change in the display content on the effect display device 1600”. It is desirable to make it difficult. After that, the effect pattern of the movable operation system is developed while the sword ornament 5001 and the specific movable ornament are both in an abnormal state, and the design variation is stopped at timing tm23. .

  In the example shown in FIG. 308, when the timing tm23 is reached, the already-pending symbol variation is immediately digested (started) after 0.6 seconds, for example. It is assumed that the specific effect pattern described in FIG. 306 is executed as the effect pattern according to the change. That is, in the specific effect pattern, the specific movable decorative body is effected at the timing tm2 when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the symbol variation, but the restoration operation time (here, the symbol variation start time). The timing tx at which the “process for performing a predetermined restoration operation on a specific movable decorative body” started at) is completed within a time shorter than the timing tm2 (more preferably, regardless of the restoration status) As described above, the process ends until the predetermined effect is started.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, the restoration operation time (here, when the symbol variation starts) has arrived for the sword ornament 5001 as well. It is possible to execute a process of performing a predetermined restoration operation on the body and an operation (applying a driving force) so that at least a part of the operation is returned to the original position in parallel. In addition, the timing at which the “process for causing the sword decorative body 5001 to perform a predetermined restoration operation” is completed within a time shorter than the timing tm2 (more preferably, the predetermined effect). Until it is started).

  According to such a configuration, when the abnormal state of the specific movable decorative body is eliminated, and the moving effect is performed by the specific movable decorative body at the timing tm2, the restoration operation by the sword decorative body 5001 is performed. Since there is no such thing as being continued, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of a rush when the restoration operation and the movable effect are performed in parallel.

  In the example shown in FIG. 308, the timing at which the restoration process for the specific movable ornament is started / finished and the timing at which the restoration process for the sword ornament 5001 is started / terminated are the same. However, only one of these timings may be the same, or any of these timings may be different.

  As for “a process for performing a predetermined restoration operation on a specific movable decorative body”, as described with reference to FIG. 307, when a special effect pattern (an effect pattern for restoration / diagnosis) appears. In addition to being able to continue after the end of the special effect pattern, the symbol variation that is in the suspended state after the end of the special effect pattern is immediately consumed (eg, after 0.6 seconds). In this situation, when the next restoration operation time (here, the next symbol variation start time) is crossed, the processing (one restoration processing) is not finished but can be executed in such a way that it can be continued. It is desirable that “the process of causing the decorative body 5001 to perform a predetermined restoration operation” can be executed in the same manner (the manner described with reference to FIG. 307). That is, in this case, the “processing for causing the sword ornament 5001 to perform a predetermined restoration operation” also strides the next restoration operation time (here, the next symbol variation start time) when a special effect pattern appears. It will be executed in the form, but it will be ended regardless of the restoration situation between the time when the next symbol variation is started and the time required until the timing tm2 arrives. Become.

  Also, after the sword decorative body 5001 is made abnormal, only a special effect pattern (restoration / diagnosis effect pattern) is continuously executed for a predetermined upper limit number, and then a special effect pattern ( When a situation in which an effect pattern (for example, a specific effect pattern) different from the effect pattern for restoration / diagnosis appears is executed, the special effect pattern for the predetermined upper limit number and the next effect pattern are straddled. One restoration process for the sword decorative body 5001 may be continued.

  In the example shown in FIG. 308, it is assumed that the restoration process for the specific movable decorative body and the restoration process for the sword decorative body 5001 are finished at the timing tx, respectively, but the restoration fails. Therefore, at the timing tm2, the moving effect by the specific movable ornament is not performed, and the specific effect pattern is developed with the sword ornament 5001 and the specific movable ornament remaining in an abnormal state. Thus, the symbol variation is stopped at timing tm24.

  In the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, an external force is applied to a specific movable decorative body (a driving force by a motor or the like is not applied) within a period of timing tx to tm2 within a specific performance pattern. Even if the position is returned to the original position (returned to the normal state) by the above, the staged action by the specific movable decorative body is not performed at the timing tm2. That is, it can be said that this is an abnormal situation in which an external force (without applying a driving force by a motor or the like) is applied to a specific movable decorative body within a period from timing tx to tm2. Even in the case of such a low-reliability situation, there is a high possibility that this will fail even if a specific movable decorative body is performed. It is desirable to do so.

  In addition, when the restoration process for the sword decorative body 5001 fails and becomes abnormal again, it is desirable that neither a specific notification sound nor a display notification associated therewith be performed. In other words, if the restoration process for the sword decorative body 5001 fails and the notification is made whenever an abnormal state occurs again, the player will misunderstand that the abnormal state cannot be resolved. Therefore, the above-described notification (at least one of a specific notification sound and display notification) is performed only at the time of the first abnormality that has changed from the normal state to the abnormal state, so that the repair work by the player is encouraged. Is desirable.

  In the example shown in FIG. 308, the sword ornament 5001 and the specific movable ornament are restored by a restoration process triggered by any restoration operation time (here, symbol variation start time) that comes after the timing tm24. It is assumed that only a specific movable decorative body has returned from an abnormal state. Now, while only the sword ornament 5001 is in the abnormal state, the effect pattern of the movable operation system is performed again, and as shown in FIG. 308, the sword ornament 5001 in the abnormal state at the timing tm25. If an effect is received by an operation by the player, it is possible to expect a possibility that the abnormality that has occurred in the sword ornament 5001 has been eliminated by such an operation.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to the present embodiment, when the sword decorative body 5001 in an abnormal state is received at the timing tm25 by the player's operation, the sword decorative body 5001 is thereafter used as the original. A driving force can be applied so as to return to the position (remain in the original position). At this time, in view of the fact that a movable effect by a specific movable decorative body is performed based on the reception of the performance, a period (one time) in which a process of applying a driving force to return the sword decorative body 5001 to the original position is performed. Is generated after the start of the movable effect by the specific movable decorative body, and the movable effect by the specific movable decorative body ends (the specific movable decorative body is returned to the original position). It is desirable that the process be terminated before the process is returned) in order to make it difficult to recognize that such a return process is being executed. However, in view of the few chances that the possibility of return of the sword decorative body 5001 that could not be recovered by such external force (operation by the player) has increased, the sword decorative body 5001 is in its original position. If the process of applying the driving force so as to return to the state (returning operation with respect to the sword decorative body 5001) has failed, the sword decorative body 5001 is used as the original for a period after the end of the movable performance by the specific movable decorative body. By making it easier for the player to recognize the abnormal situation by continuously executing the process of applying the driving force so as to return it to the position (returning the sword decoration body 5001 is performed again), It is desirable to encourage help. However, even if this return processing fails, it is desirable that neither a specific notification sound nor a display notification accompanying this be performed.

  In the example shown in FIG. 308, it is assumed that the return process (return to the original position) for the sword decorative body 5001 using such external force (operation by the player) is successful. The sword decorative body 5001 and the specific movable decorative body are both in the normal state, and the effect pattern of the movable operation system is developed, and the design variation is stopped at timing tm26.

  As described above, according to the example shown in FIG. 308, the frame-side movable decorative body (sword decorative body 5001) used also as the operation means is set for the board-side movable decorative body (specific movable decorative body). In addition to the restoration operation timing (at the start of symbol variation), the restoration operation timing (timing after the presentation is accepted) using external force (operation by the player) is set. That is, the frame-side movable decorative body (sword decorative body 5001) that is also used as an operating means is likely to be in an abnormal state because it may be directly contacted by a player, but even if it is in an abnormal state, Since there are many opportunities for position return and various modes (modes that return only by applying driving force, modes that return using at least external force) are used, the abnormal state is resolved. The possibility that the game will be enjoyed is also increased, and the decline in the entertainment interest can be suppressed.

  Regarding the process of applying the driving force for returning the sword decorative body 5001 to the original position after the sword decorative body 5001 in an abnormal state is accepted by the player's operation, the symbol variation start is started. A driving force may be applied to the sword ornament 5001 with different contents (different operation modes) from the restoration process performed when the time (for example, the timing tm23) arrives. In other words, since the sword decorative body 5001 is restored using external force (operation by the player) for the process, it is possible to perform the process with a different content from the process when the external force is not used. It can be said that it is desirable to increase the probability. In addition, the process is executed in a simple manner such that the return process is terminated within the symbol variation regardless of the return status, and when the return fails, it is more serious at the next restoration operation timing. It is desirable to perform a proper return process.

  In the example shown in FIG. 308, the restoration operation time (in this case, the symbol variation start time) has reached the predetermined upper limit number, and the restoration processing for the sword ornament 5001 has been executed for that number of times. However, it is not restored from the abnormal state, and it is movable when the restoration process for the sword ornament 5001 is not newly started even if a new restoration operation time (here, the symbol variation start time) comes. Even when the effect pattern of the operation system is started and the sword ornament 5001 in an abnormal state is received at the timing tm25 by the player's operation, the sword ornament 5001 is displayed after the effect is received. It is desirable to perform a process of applying a driving force so as to return to the original position (to remain at the original position). That is, as described above, the return process after the presentation is accepted is performed when the return possibility of the sword ornament 5001 that could not be returned by external force (operation by the player) is increasing. Therefore, it can be said that it is desirable to execute the processing without giving up even in the above-described situation where the return without external force is given up. Therefore, a “process for generating an effect reception period for the sword decorative body 5001 (see FIG. 252 (f))” and a character display such as a display for prompting an operation (“press”) and a bar indicating the remaining time of the effect reception period. It is important that the processing (see Fig. 252 (f)) "is performed as usual even in the above-described situation where the return without external force is given up.

  Further, when the first operation opportunity is given so that the sword decorative body 5001 is pushed in the state where the sword decorative body 5001 is located (operated to a specific detection position), and when the sword decorative body 5001 is in the original position (to the specific detection position) If the operation means is provided so that there is a case where the second operation opportunity is given to be operated), even if the production reception is generated at the second operation opportunity with respect to the sword decorative body 5001 in the abnormal state A driving force for returning to the original position is applied only when an effect is received at the first operation opportunity with respect to the sword decorative body 5001 in an abnormal state without applying the driving force for returning to the original position. It is desirable to do so. That is, even if the presentation is accepted when the second operation opportunity is given, the amount of operation of the operation part is relatively small, and therefore the possibility that the abnormal state has been eliminated is naturally expected to be low.

  In addition, after the sword decorative body 5001 in an abnormal state has been accepted for production by an operation by the player, the processing for providing the driving force for returning the sword decorative body 5001 to the original position is not necessarily accepted. It does not have to be executed on the condition that it has been done. For example, it may be executed after the production reception period ends.

  In the examples shown in FIGS. 304 to 308, the symbol change start time (and the timing after the reception of the effect) is exemplified as the restoration operation time corresponding to the symbol variation. The timing may be a predetermined timing that arrives at least on the condition that the symbol variation is executed. For example, it may be used as at least one of the symbol variation start timing and the symbol variation stop timing. When the symbol fluctuation stop timing is used as the restoration operation timing corresponding to the symbol fluctuation, the restoration processing is started based on a command sent from the main control MPU 1310a side when the symbol fluctuation is stopped. The restored processing is terminated until the timing tm2 in the specific production pattern that has been reserved is reached, or is executed so as to be straddled before the end of the special production pattern that has been reserved. Each process described above is performed.

  In addition, the appearance frequency of a special effect pattern (an effect pattern for restoration / diagnosis) may vary depending on the state of the game. For example, when a special production state in which the operation frequency of the movable decorative body is increased occurs, an abnormal state is likely to occur as much as the operation frequency is increased. Therefore, in the special production state, the normal production state It is desirable that the game can be made so that the frequency of appearance of a special performance pattern (restoration / diagnosis performance pattern) is higher than that in the above.

  By the way, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, a frame side movable decorative body (for example, a sword decorative body 5001 etc.) used as an operation means or a specific movable decorative body is in an abnormal state. When the above-mentioned special performance pattern (restoration / diagnosis production pattern) is performed, as shown in FIG. 307, the abnormal state over the period until the next production pattern corresponding to the symbol variation is started. It is possible to continue to execute one restoration process for the movable decorative body. However, in this case, even if a new restoration operation time (for example, symbol variation start time) arrives while one restoration process is being continuously executed, the restoration process for the movable decorative body in the abnormal state is performed again. It is not started, and one restoration process that is already in the running state is continued without being terminated. Therefore, the movable decorative object that is the object of the restoration process is movable. It becomes a problem at which timing the restoration process for the other movable decorative body is started when the decorative body is newly in an abnormal state.

  For example, in the example shown in FIG. 307, the restoration process for the specific movable decorative body started at the timing tm11 is performed after the timing tm12 at which the special effect pattern ends, after the new restoration operation timing (next This is continuously executed without ending even when straddling the symbol variation start time). In this regard, a new abnormality has occurred in a movable decorative body different from the specific movable decorative body after the timing tm11 elapses and before the new restoration operation timing (the next symbol variation start timing) arrives. In this case, at least one of the following methods 1 to 3, or “both method 1 and method 2”, or “both method 1 and method 3” is employed to restore the other movable decorative body. It is desirable to perform.

  Method 1: If at least “a specific movable decorative body is provided as a board-side movable decorative body, whereas another movable decorative body is provided as a frame-side movable decorative body” When a new restoration operation time (starting time of the next symbol variation) arrives while one restoration process for the movable decorative body is continuously executed, the new restoration operation time (starting time of the next symbol variation) ) Is newly started, restoration processing for another movable decorative body (frame side movable decorative body) is started.

  According to such a method 1, the new restoration operation time (the next symbol variation start time) is treated as invalid for the restoration processing for the specific movable decorative body already in the execution state. Another movable decorative body (frame side movable decorative body) that has not yet been restored is treated as effective, and triggered by this timing (new restoration operation time). The restoration process for the body (frame side movable decorative body) can be newly started. That is, in this case, a situation in which a restoration process for a specific movable decorative body (board-side movable decorative body) and a restoration process for another movable decorative body (frame-side movable decorative body) are performed simultaneously appears. There is no concern that interference may occur between these movable decorative bodies, and early return of these movable decorative bodies is expected.

  Method 2: If at least “a specific movable decorative body and another movable decorative body are both provided as a board-side movable decorative body”, one restoration process for the specific movable decorative body is continued. Even if a new restoration operation time (the next symbol change start time) arrives during execution, the restoration process for another movable decorative body (frame side movable decorative body) is not started at that time, After waiting for one restoration process for the movable decorative body to be completed, another movable decorative body (frame-side movable decorative element) based on the arrival of the new restoration operation time (the next design change start time). Body) is newly started.

  According to such a method 2, the new restoration operation time (starting time of the next symbol variation) is treated as invalid for the restoration processing for the specific movable decorative body already in the execution state. Another movable decorative body (frame-side movable decorative body) that has not yet been restored is treated as effective. In this respect, since the restoration process for another movable decorative body (frame side movable decorative body) is started, since one restoration process for a specific movable decorative body is to be completed, these are restored. There is no concern that interference may occur between the movable decorative bodies, and early return of these movable decorative bodies is expected.

  Method 3: If at least “a specific movable decorative body and another movable decorative body are provided as a panel-side movable decorative body”, one restoration process for the specific movable decorative body is continued. Even if a new restoration operation time (next symbol variation start time) arrives during execution, another movable decorative body is triggered by the arrival of the new restoration operation time (next symbol variation start time). The restoration process is not executed, but after waiting for one restoration process for a specific movable ornament to be completed, the restoration operation time that comes after that is triggered by another movable ornament (frame side movable The restoration process for the decorative body is newly started.

  According to such a method 3, the new restoration operation time (starting time of the next symbol variation) is the same as the restoration process for a specific movable ornament that is already in the execution state and another movable ornament that is not yet in the execution state. As long as one restoration process for a specific movable decorative body is not completed, even if a new abnormality occurs in another movable decorative body, it will be treated as invalid. No processing for the abnormal state is executed. That is, in this case, even if another movable decorative body becomes abnormal when one restoration process for a specific movable decorative body is in an execution state, the movable decorative bodies can be carefully restored one by one. As a result, it becomes possible to take sufficient measures against abnormalities, so that it is expected to suppress the rate of progress of deterioration as these movable decorative bodies.

[Operational penalties for operation units that can produce effects]
As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the setting value (volume setting value) by the player is changed with respect to the volume by operating the volume adjustment buttons (the effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332). Processing can be executed (peripheral control MPU 1511a). Normally, when the volume setting value is changed in this way, the peripheral control MPU 1511a adjusts the volume applied to the effect sound based on the changed volume setting value (processing for reflecting the volume setting value as the volume). Will be executed. At this time, a volume adjustment confirmation sound can be output at the adjusted volume.

  Although this is also described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, although not shown, the pachinko machine 1 is separate from the volume adjustment buttons (effect selection left button 331 and effect selection right button 332). A brightness adjustment button is provided for various effect lamps (lamps to be controlled by the peripheral control MPU 1511a). When it is determined that the brightness adjustment button is operated, the brightness applied to the various effect lamps is determined. A process for changing a setting value (luminance setting value) by the player can be executed (peripheral control MPU 1511a). Normally, when the luminance setting value is changed in this way, the peripheral control MPU 1511a executes a process of adjusting the emission luminance based on the changed luminance setting value (a process of reflecting the luminance setting value as a light amount). It will be. At this time, the brightness adjustment confirmation sound can be output at the “volume according to the volume setting value” when the player setting value (brightness setting value) related to the brightness is lowered or raised.

  It should be noted that with regard to the change acceptance for such setting values (volume setting value, luminance setting value) and the adjustment processing according to the changed setting value, the design has changed and the design has changed. In any of the states, the player can execute the game by an operation by the player.

  By the way, in recent years, in the field of gaming machines, there is a tendency for the number of operation units to be operated by a player to increase. However, these operation units may be handled roughly, and as a result, one of these operation units If one of them breaks down, the operability and performance will be remarkably reduced, so a decline in game entertainment is inevitable.

In particular, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as described above, apart from the operation button 410,
A sword decorative body provided so that the sword part 5010 (the sword part 5011, the handle part 5012, and the heel part 5013) can be moved (variably) by a predetermined operation (striking operation and sword operation) between the sword position and the sword position. 5001 (see FIG. 192, FIG. 222, etc.)
Although the operation opportunity is not given, the “operation to extract the sword portion 5010 (sword portion 5011, handle portion 5012, heel portion 5013) from the sheath portion 5020 (extraction operation)” or “sword If the “operation” is repeatedly performed, it may cause a failure.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, an effect light-emitting unit (not shown) is arranged on each of the blade part 5011, the handle part 5012, and the collar part 5013, and the sword part 5010 (the blade part). 5011, handle part 5012, collar part 5013) has a special detection part (not shown) capable of detecting whether or not the sheath part 5020 is in a specific position (original position) where the blade is in a state of being delivered. And, at least “during the period when the demo screen is displayed (non-game state in which the game effect or symbol variation according to the jackpot determination has not been executed)”, the sword portion 5010 is identified as a result of detection by the special detection unit. If it is determined that it is not at the position (original position), the peripheral control MPU 1511a generates an effect restriction period as a penalty.

  According to such a configuration, at least in a non-game state in which no symbol variation is performed, the sword portion 5010 is used together with the effect light emitting portions (the blade portion 5011, the handle portion 5012, and the heel portion 5013) by a predetermined operation. As a result of the displacement, if it is detected that the position is not located at a specific position, an effect restriction period can occur, so that the handling of the operation unit can be suitably suppressed.

In this regard, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, the above-described “change in the set value (volume setting value) related to the output volume of the effect sound” and the “set value (luminance set value) related to the light emission luminance” described above. All of the “changes” are allowed to be accepted by an operation by the player, and the production restriction period is generated. However, as will be described later,
・ Regarding the production sound, even if the setting value (volume setting value) for the output volume is changed, the production sound is not output at the volume corresponding to the volume setting value, and the volume is adjusted. While the confirmation sound is not output,
-Regarding the effect lamp, when the setting value (luminance setting value) related to the light emission luminance is changed, the effect light emission unit included in the sword unit 5010 as the detection target among the plurality of effect lamps included in the pachinko machine 1 The blade part 5011, the handle part 5012, and the collar part 5013 are not emitted at the brightness corresponding to the brightness setting value, but are provided in different parts from the sword part 5010 that is the detection target. For the effect lamps (for example, various effect LEDs mounted on the decorative board of the game board 5), the process such that the effect light emission with the luminance corresponding to the set value is made executable is performed. Can be done.

  According to such a configuration, when the production restriction period occurs, the setting value change related to the sound volume and the setting value change related to the luminance can both be accepted, but the sound volume setting is related. The degree of restriction differs between the process and the process related to the brightness setting.

  In other words, although the volume setting value is secretly variable internally with respect to the production sound, the production sound is not output in the form of reflecting the changed volume setting value, and even the volume adjustment confirmation sound. Is also output so that the player is given a sense of tension (maybe they have done something that should not be done).

  On the other hand, regarding the luminance, even if the luminance setting value is changed for the effect light emitting unit (the blade portion 5011, the handle portion 5012, and the heel portion 5013) provided in the “sword portion 5010” operated by the player. The effect light is not emitted in the form of reflecting the changed brightness setting value, but the effect lamp provided in a part different from the “sword part 5010” operated by the player has been changed. By making it possible to perform effect light emission (for example, light emission in accordance with the timing at which a specific notice effect is performed) in a manner in which the luminance setting value is reflected, The pachinko machine 1 as a whole can appropriately appeal that it intends to continue the game and the production, while warning that it is possible to recognize that the production restriction is imposed. It made. In this sense, for the effect lamp on the game board 5 where the game ball flows down or wins, the effect light emission is executed in a manner that reflects the changed luminance setting value as usual. Is desirable. As a result, it is possible to issue a warning for handling the operation section in a rough manner while preferably avoiding “the player's willingness to start the game or prompting the end of the game”. become.

  Moreover, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the restriction condition for the process related to the sound volume setting and the restriction for the process related to the luminance setting are made different from each other. . In particular, the “process related to volume setting” on the side that initially imposed relatively strict restrictions strongly encourages continuation of the game by making significant improvements to the normal state relatively early. On the other hand, the “Brightness setting-related processing” on the side that originally imposed relatively sweet restrictions showed an improvement trend, but slowed the overall improvement speed, In other words, it is expected that a sense of tension is maintained appropriately over a long period of time to prevent a mishandled operation from being re-executed.

  FIG. 309 is a time chart illustrating an example of restrictions on volume setting and luminance setting when a penalty is generated for an operation on the sword unit 5010.

  Now, assuming that there is a non-game state in which a game is not executed, such as in a demo screen, and a normal state in which no error state or penalty occurs, in that state, as shown in FIG. Execution of processing for changing a setting value (volume setting value) by the player regarding the volume is permitted. When the volume setting value is changed, processing for adjusting the volume applied to the effect sound (processing for reflecting the volume setting value as the volume) is executed based on the changed volume setting value, and the adjusted volume The volume adjustment confirmation sound will be output.

  Further, in the same state, execution of processing for changing a setting value (luminance setting value) by the player regarding the luminance is also permitted. When the brightness setting value is changed, a process of adjusting the light emission brightness based on the changed brightness setting value (a process of reflecting the brightness setting value as a light amount) is executed, and a brightness adjustment confirmation sound is output. It will be.

  In the same state, the pattern LED (the effect light emitting part in the handle part 5012), the heel LED (the effect light emitting part in the heel part 5013), the blade LED (the effect light emitting part in the blade part 5011), and the LED outside the operation part (game) All of the effect lamps on the panel 5 are in the “normal light emission” state. The “normal light emission” state corresponds to the “state in which light emission is maintained” as long as it is provided as an effect lamp that always maintains light emission regardless of the state of the effect. However, if the lamp is provided as an effect lamp that emits light based on when a predetermined effect condition is satisfied, the “light emission waiting state in which a light emission state is permitted when the predetermined effect condition is satisfied” It is a concept including “(light-off state)” and does not necessarily have to be in a light-emitting state. Further, it is desirable that the sheath portion 5020 is provided in such a manner that it has translucency so that the light emission mode of the blade LED can be confirmed even in the state of the sword.

  However, as shown in FIG. 309, the sword part 5010 (the blade part 5011, the handle part) is obtained as a result of the predetermined operation being performed at the timing to <b> 1 in spite of the non-game state where the operation effect cannot occur. 5012, hook part 5013) is detected with respect to the sheath part 5020, it is detected that it is not in the state of being sharpened (detected that it is not at a specific position (original position)). Pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment (peripheral control MPU 1511a) First, the first effect suppression state is generated.

  In the first effect suppression state, as shown in FIG. 309, execution of processing for changing the setting value (volume setting value) by the player with respect to the volume is permitted. However, even if the volume setting value is changed, the process for adjusting the volume applied to the effect sound based on the changed volume setting value (the process for reflecting the volume setting value as the volume) is not executed, and the volume adjustment is performed. No confirmation sound is output.

  Further, in the same state, execution of processing for changing a setting value (luminance setting value) by the player regarding the luminance is also permitted. In this regard, when the brightness setting value is changed, among the plurality of effect lamps provided in the pachinko machine 1, the pattern LED (effect light emitting unit in the pattern unit 5012) in the sword unit 5010 moved (displaced) by a predetermined operation. , For the heel LED (the effect light emitting portion in the heel portion 5013) and the blade LED (the effect light emitting portion in the blade portion 5011), a process for adjusting the light emission luminance based on the changed luminance setting value (the luminance setting value is a light quantity) For the outside operation unit LED (the effect lamp in the game board 5) that is not moved (displaced) by a predetermined operation, based on the changed brightness setting value. Processing for adjusting the light emission luminance (processing for reflecting the luminance setting value as the amount of light) is executed. In the same state, the emission brightness of some of the plurality of effect lamps (the LED outside the operation unit) can be adjusted, but the brightness adjustment confirmation sound is not output even if the adjustment is performed. I am doing so.

  According to such a configuration, in the first effect suppression state, although both the setting value change related to the volume and the setting value change related to the luminance can be accepted, the volume setting is related. The degree of restriction differs between the process and the process related to the brightness setting.

  In other words, although the volume setting value is secretly variable internally with respect to the production sound, the production sound is not output in the form of reflecting the changed volume setting value, and even the volume adjustment confirmation sound. Is also output so that the player is given a sense of tension (maybe they have done something that should not be done).

  On the other hand, regarding the luminance, even if the luminance setting value is changed for the effect light emitting unit (the blade portion 5011, the handle portion 5012, and the heel portion 5013) provided in the “sword portion 5010” operated by the player. The effect light is not emitted in a manner in which the changed brightness setting value is reflected, but the effect lamp (the operation lamp provided on the game board 5 on which the game is played is not moved (displaced) by a predetermined operation) The outside LED) produces an effect light emission in the form in which the changed brightness setting value is reflected (for example, if a game is started in this state and a predetermined effect condition is satisfied, a specific notice effect is performed. Light emission in accordance with the timing). Accordingly, it is possible to appropriately appeal that the pachinko machine 1 as a whole intends to continue the game and the production while warning about miscellaneous handling of the “sword part 5010”.

  More specifically, in the first effect suppression state, the pattern LED (the effect light emitting part in the pattern part 5012) continues the light emission state (penalty light emission) in a predetermined light emission luminance and light emission mode. For example, even if the luminance setting value is changed in the first effect suppression state, the changed luminance setting value is not reflected, and depending on the result of the jackpot determination when the symbol variation is started Even if a light emission request is generated, a light emission mode corresponding to the light emission request does not appear.

  In addition, the 鍔 LED (the effect light emitting unit in the heel portion 5013) can emit light as normal even in the first effect suppression state, and the effect lamp that always maintains the light emission regardless of the effect status. If it is provided as an effect lamp that emits light based on when a predetermined effect condition is satisfied, it is set as “predetermined effect”. A light emission waiting state in which a light emission state is permitted when the condition is satisfied is set. However, even if the brightness setting value is changed in the first effect suppression state, the 鍔 LED does not emit the effect light in a manner that the changed brightness setting value is reflected. Even within the part 5010, while allowing a light-emitting effect to encourage continuation of the game, it is possible to warn about mishandled handling of the “sword part 5010”.

  Further, the blade LED (the effect light emitting unit in the blade part 5011) is controlled so as to continue the light-off state in the first effect suppression state, for example, a light emission request according to the result of the jackpot determination when the symbol variation is started. If this happens, it will not respond to this. Therefore, in the blade LED, even if the brightness setting value is changed in the first effect suppression state, it is impossible for the effect light to be emitted in a manner in which the changed brightness setting value is reflected.

  On the other hand, no limitation is imposed on the outside-operation-unit LED provided outside the sword unit 5010 that is moved (displaced) by a predetermined operation, and the above-described “normal light emission” state is continued. It will be. Therefore, when the luminance setting value is changed in the first effect suppression state, the changed luminance setting value can be reflected (if it is in the light emission state), and the light emission corresponding to the result of the jackpot determination is started when the symbol variation is started. When a request is generated, a light emission mode corresponding to the request appears.

  In such a configuration, since the restriction is imposed only on the effect lamp provided in the “sword part 5010” that is moved by a predetermined operation, the game board 5 on which the game is performed is applied. If there is a case where only the gaze is gathered, it seems that the light emission luminance can be adjusted as usual when the luminance setting value is changed, so that the first effect suppression state is occurring. There is a concern that this will not be recognized. In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the luminance setting value is changed by the operation by the player in the first effect suppression state, and the light emission luminance of some of the effect lamps (outside the operation unit LED) Even if this adjustment is performed, the brightness adjustment confirmation sound is not output. Thereby, even when “sword part 5010” is not visually recognized, the player can be made aware that the performance is in a restricted state, and “sword part 5010” is returned to the original position. Can be encouraged to.

  Then, at the timing to2 after the occurrence of the first effect suppression state, an operation for positioning the sword portion 5010 to the sword insertion state is performed, and it is detected that the sword portion 5010 is in the sword insertion state (specification). If the position (original position is detected), the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment performs a process of shifting from the first effect suppression state to the second effect suppression state.

  In this second effect suppression state, as shown in FIG. 309, with respect to the volume, all the restriction contents when in the first effect suppression state are canceled and processed normally. Both the execution of the process for reflecting the volume setting value as the volume and the execution of the process for outputting the volume adjustment confirmation sound as well as the execution of the process for changing the volume setting value are permitted. It has become.

  On the other hand, regarding the brightness, the “restriction on the brightness adjustment confirmation sound” in the restriction contents when the first effect is suppressed is canceled, but the “partial restriction on the brightness adjustment” is continued without being released. It has come to be. Therefore, in the second effect suppression state, execution of the process for changing the brightness setting value, execution of the process for adjusting the light emission brightness for the LED outside the operation unit among the plurality of effect lamps, and output of the brightness adjustment confirmation sound Execution of the process is permitted, but the process of adjusting the light emission luminance of the effect lamp included in the sword portion 5010 among the plurality of effect lamps is not allowed to be executed (restricted state). It will be maintained as it is.

  That is, the second effect suppression state is a state that occurs based on “the sword portion 5010 is detected to be in the sword state” in the first effect suppression state. It can be said that the miscellaneous handling has been eliminated. In response to this, the “sound volume setting process” on the side that initially imposed relatively strict restrictions strongly encourages continuation of the game by quickly and greatly improving to the normal state. Is the main purpose.

  However, after the first effect suppression state has occurred, if all the restrictions are immediately released simply by returning the sword portion 5010 to the specific position (original position), the function as a penalty is insufficient. Yes, miscellaneous handling of “Sword 5010” may recur. In this regard, according to the above-described configuration, when “the sword portion 5010 is detected to be in the sword state” in the first effect suppression state, the state is shifted to the second effect suppression state. And regarding the brightness, the “restriction on the brightness adjustment confirmation sound” of the restriction contents when in the first effect suppression state is released, but the “partial restriction on the brightness adjustment” is continued without being released. I am doing so.

  In other words, in this case, the “sword part 5010”, which is the target of miscellaneous handling, is left with a production restriction, and therefore the atmosphere (“ It will be possible to provide a “breakage”, etc., and as a result, prevention of recurrence can be expected.

  On the other hand, in the second effect suppression state, since the mishandling with respect to the “sword portion 5010” has already been eliminated, the player is gazing at the game board 5 where the game is performed ( The situation where the game is concentrated) is no longer a desirable situation. In this regard, in the second effect suppression state, when the player is gazing at the game board 5 where the game is performed (the situation where the sword portion 5010 is not visually recognized), the luminance setting value is changed. Sometimes, the brightness setting value is changed by the player's operation so that the light emission brightness can be adjusted as usual (it appears to be in the normal state), and some of the multiple effect lamps (operation When the emission brightness of the external LED) is adjusted, a brightness adjustment confirmation sound is output. As a result, the player is concentrated on the game to avoid reoccurrence of misuse of the sword portion 5010.

  According to such a second effect suppression state, the “processing related to the brightness setting” on the side that originally imposed a relatively sweet restriction, although showing an improvement trend, is subject to rough handling. As long as the “sword part 5010” becomes limited, the player can play the game while keeping the tension moderately over a long period of time and preventing the mishandling from happening again. It is expected to concentrate on.

  In the second effect suppression state, some effect lamps (pattern LED, heel LED, blade LED) among the plurality of effect lamps are excluded from the adjustment target of the light emission luminance. When the light emission brightness in the effect lamp (outside the operation unit LED) is adjusted, a brightness adjustment confirmation sound is output in the same manner as when the light emission brightness is adjusted in the normal state. That is, in this case, even if the second effect suppression state occurs, it is not a situation where the operation by the player is not accepted, but a situation where the player can react by the operation as in the normal state. It becomes possible to appeal, and it is possible to preferably encourage the player to continue the game.

  In particular, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, even when the light emission luminance is adjusted only for a part of the effect lamps (LEDs outside the operation unit) in the second effect suppression state, the normal state is maintained. The same brightness adjustment confirmation sound as at a certain time is assigned to a channel and output. As a result, even in a situation where only partial adjustment is possible, it is expected to give a sense of security as if the player has already returned to the normal state and to encourage motivation to continue the game. However, when the second effect suppression state is finished and the state transitions to the normal state, the brightness in the pattern LED is adjusted in a manner that the brightness setting value at that time is reflected collectively. It is important to prevent the adjustment confirmation sound from being output in order to make it appear as if it has already returned to normal.

  Also, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 309, whether or not a predetermined time (for example, 60 seconds) has elapsed since the occurrence of the second effect suppression state has occurred. When it is determined that the predetermined time has elapsed (timing to3), it is possible to execute processing for terminating the second effect suppression state and shifting to the normal state.

  In other words, regarding the transition condition from “the first effect suppression state with a relatively severe effect restriction degree” to “the second effect suppression state with a relatively restrictive effect restriction degree”, “the operation by the player is an opportunity”. This makes it possible to establish this early, so that the willingness to continue the game is not lost. However, regarding the transition condition from “second effect suppression state with relatively limited effect restriction” to “normal state”, “a predetermined time has elapsed since the second effect suppression state occurred”. Therefore, it is not allowed to establish this early. By adopting these transition conditions, it will be possible to effectively warn about miscellaneous handling while appropriately maintaining the willingness to continue the game, and as a result, prevention of recurrence can be expected. It becomes like this.

  In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 309, a plurality of effect lamps provided in the “sword portion 5010” that is a target of rough handling. Regarding some of the effect lamps (here, the LED, the blade LED, and the blade LED), the second effect suppression state is terminated and returned to the normal state. In addition, only light emission with “restricted” is allowed.

  More specifically, for the candy LED and the blade LED, although it is possible to emit light as normal, even if the luminance setting value is changed, the changed luminance setting value is reflected. There is no effect light emission only with a predetermined brightness setting value. That is, in this case, in particular, for the 鍔 LED, after the first effect suppression state has occurred, only effect light emission under the same restriction is continuously performed, which may cause a failure in part. It is expected that the mishandling of the “sword portion 5010” will be prevented from being reoccurred by recognizing it. Or even after the production suppression state ends and becomes a normal state, it can function as a history that the production suppression state has occurred before that, and stable operation as the pachinko machine 1 is expected. Will be able to. In addition, although it may be made to maintain the said production | presentation restrictions which remain with respect to a samurai LED and a blade LED, it cannot be canceled, but, for example, by conditions different from before, such as RAM clear and a power shutdown It is desirable to make it releasable.

  According to such a configuration, even after the first effect suppression state ends and the process related to the volume adjustment returns to normal, the process related to the brightness adjustment needs to be further improved in stages. Therefore, it becomes possible to maintain a sense of tension over a longer period of time while maintaining the willingness to play.

  As for the first effect suppression state (further, the second effect suppression state), in addition to the non-game state (such as in the demo screen), the game execution state in which the game is being executed (the symbol corresponding to the result of the big hit determination) It can be generated based on the fact that the sword portion 5010 is not in the sword state (detected that the sword portion 5010 is not in the specific position (original position)) even when it is changing or in a big hit game state. It is desirable to do. In other words, the sword portion 5010 should not be dealt with in a gaming state (such as when the symbol changes according to the result of the jackpot determination), in which a manipulation opportunity is not given. This is because it is desired to be handled appropriately.

  However, even if the situation is controlled to the “second effect suppression state” shown in FIG. 309, when the game is in the game execution state (the symbol variation is in the execution state), the change in the luminance setting value is accepted. Therefore, it is desirable not to output the brightness adjustment confirmation sound when the brightness adjustment corresponding to this is performed. That is, when the transition is made from the “first effect suppression state” to the “second effect suppression state”, at least the processing related to the volume adjustment is released, so the tension is well maintained. There is concern that you will not be able to. However, in order to strongly encourage the continuation of the game, it is important to greatly improve the restriction on “processing related to volume adjustment” on the strict side.

  In this regard, “when the tension cannot be maintained well” means that the situation where the second performance suppression state has occurred (the situation where the first performance suppression state with strict performance restrictions has ended) is disregarded and the game is resumed. It is also assumed that the situation is such that the tension is well maintained in a situation where the game is not resumed. Therefore, even in the second effect suppression state, when in the symbol variation execution state (game resumption) where it is assumed that tension cannot be maintained well, do not output the brightness adjustment confirmation, By looking only at “processing related to adjustment”, it can be expected that moderate tension will be imparted by making it appear that the first effect suppression state has not been improved.

  In this sense, in the situation where the “second effect suppression state” shown in FIG. 309 is controlled, the change in the volume setting value is accepted when the symbol variation is in the execution state, and the volume adjustment is performed accordingly. Even when the operation is performed, the volume adjustment confirmation sound may not be output. In addition, for such special processing (processing that does not output the volume adjustment confirmation sound and processing that does not output the luminance adjustment confirmation sound) when the symbol variation is in the execution state, the second effect suppression state ends and the restriction is limited. You may make it apply also when it is in the condition returned to the normal state in the form which is left behind. In other words, if the brightness adjustment confirmation sound or volume adjustment confirmation sound is output while the game is running, or if the brightness adjustment confirmation sound or volume adjustment confirmation sound is not output, the meaning cannot be understood and the game cannot be understood. This is because there is a risk of being unable to concentrate.

  In the above explanation example, the handle LED, the heel LED, and the blade LED are provided. However, the sword portion 5010 may be provided with at least the handle LED as an effect lamp. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to maintain game motivation by showing step-by-step improvements while warning the rough handling of the “sword part 5010” in the first effect suppression state and the second effect suppression state. Is possible.

  Further, in the above explanation example, as soon as “detected that the sword portion 5010 is in the sword state” is detected in the first effect suppression state, the state is shifted from the “first effect suppression state” to the “second effect suppression state”. For example, based on the fact that a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed since the “detection that the sword unit 5010 is in the sword state” in the first effect suppression state. Then, the process of shifting from the “first effect suppression state” to the “second effect suppression state” may be performed. According to such a configuration, while the transition from the “first effect suppression state” to the “second effect suppression state” is allowed relatively early, the effect is limited at least for a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds). It can be maintained in the strict first effect suppression state. The predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) may be set as a time shorter than the predetermined time (for example, 60 seconds) required from the occurrence of the second effect suppression state to the end thereof. Although desirable, it is not necessarily limited to this.

  In the example described above, the cause of the production restriction is the predetermined operation for the operation means (sword unit 5010), but is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, even if it is a specific object that is not an operation target by the player (for example, an object that can move between the first state and the second state, such as a decorative movable body and the door frame 3), this is subject to rough handling. If it is forcibly displaced, it may cause a failure. Therefore, based on the fact that at least a “lamp that is subject to effect restrictions such as the above-described pattern LED” is provided at least as an effect lamp for the specified object, and it is detected that the specified object is not in the original position. It is desirable to generate the effect suppression state as described above. That is, in this case, regardless of whether the game is in the non-game state or the game state, the first effect suppression state as described above is set based on the detection that the specific object is not in the first state (original position). After that, the second effect suppression state as described above is generated based on the detection that the specific object has been returned to the first state (original position), and a predetermined time has elapsed since the occurrence. Based on this, the normal state (or normal state with limitation) is restored.

  In addition, in the above example, as a method for not outputting the volume adjustment confirmation sound or the brightness adjustment confirmation sound, in addition to not assigning the volume adjustment confirmation sound or the brightness adjustment confirmation sound to the channel, A confirmation sound or a brightness adjustment confirmation sound is assigned to a channel, but it can also be realized by setting the volume value to “0”.

  In the example described above, when a change to the sound volume setting value is received a plurality of times in the “first effect suppression state” and then the state is shifted to the “second effect suppression state”, the “second effect suppression state”. At the time of shifting to the “state”, the volume is adjusted in such a manner that the contents of the plurality of changes to the volume setting value so far are reflected at once. In addition, when a change to the luminance setting value is received a plurality of times in the “first effect suppression state” or the “second effect suppression state” and then returned to the normal state at the timing to3, the “normal state” is entered. When the transition is made, the brightness of the pattern LED is adjusted in such a way that the contents of the plurality of changes to the brightness setting value so far are reflected in a lump. The method of collectively adjusting the set value changes of a plurality of times at “a certain timing” (including the presence / absence of output of the adjustment confirmation sound at that time) is the content described with reference to FIGS. 166 to 168. Can be realized by appropriately adopting. Further, in this case, the timing to2 at which the sound volume setting value can be reflected at once and the timing to3 at which the brightness setting value can be reflected at the same time are different, so that the path to return to the normal state can be shown stepwise. As a result, it is possible to encourage the user to continue playing the game by making it appear as if it had already returned to normal or in a recovery tendency. Further, the predetermined time from when the second effect suppression state is generated to when it is ended may be about 10 seconds.

  Note that the volume adjustment confirmation sound and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound are output as the same sound, and it is not possible to confirm which "confirmation sound" has been output, but some "confirmation sound" has been output. It is desirable to make it recognizable. In other words, if various sounds are adopted as confirmation sounds, there is a concern that the possibility of being an expected production sound that suggests the degree of expectation may occur, and the entertainment amusement may be reduced. Because.

[Brightness adjustment during abnormality notification]
As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, illustration is omitted, but various types of pachinko machine 1 are provided separately from the volume adjustment buttons (effect selection left button 331 and effect selection right button 332). A brightness adjustment button for an effect lamp (lamp that is subject to effect control by the peripheral control MPU 1511a) is provided, and when it is determined that the brightness adjustment button has been operated, a game relating to the brightness applied to various effect lamps is provided. It is possible to execute a process of changing a setting value (brightness setting value) by a person (peripheral control MPU 1511a). Usually, if there is an effect lamp that is in a light emitting state when the brightness setting value is changed in this way, a process of adjusting the light emission brightness in the effect lamp based on the changed brightness setting value ( The process of reflecting the brightness setting value as the amount of light) is executed. At this time, the brightness adjustment confirmation sound can be output at the “volume according to the volume setting value” when the player setting value (brightness setting value) related to the brightness is lowered or raised.

  For the effect lamps that are not in the light emitting state at the time when the brightness setting value is changed, the brightness corresponding to the changed brightness setting value is then set when there is a light emission request based on the result of the jackpot determination. The light emission state is set. More specifically, if the lamp is provided as an effect lamp that always maintains light emission regardless of the state of the effect, light emission corresponding to the changed brightness setting value is received as soon as the change of the brightness setting value is accepted. If the lamp is provided as an effect lamp that emits light based on the fact that a predetermined effect condition is satisfied (effect request according to jackpot determination), the predetermined lighting condition is changed. The effect light emission is performed as the light emission luminance corresponding to the changed luminance setting value at the timing when the effect condition is satisfied. That is, until the predetermined effect condition is satisfied, the effect light emission at the light emission luminance corresponding to the changed luminance setting value is maintained (light emission waiting state).

  In addition, regarding the acceptance of the change relating to the luminance setting value and the adjustment processing according to the changed luminance setting value, the player can be used in both the state where the symbol is not changing and the state where the symbol is changing. Each can be executed by the operation of.

  By the way, as described above, when the specific abnormality detection illustrated in FIG. 156 occurs in the pachinko machine 1, an abnormality notification according to the abnormality type is performed. If it is a type of abnormality detection with a low possibility of being present, there may be a case where the player wants to continue the game as it is. That is, if the gaming interest is reduced as a result of performing the abnormality notification even though it is a minor abnormality that is not serious, and the player may end the game, the operation rate as the pachinko machine 1 is increased. There may be a penalty for the decline.

  Therefore, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, when it is detected that the pachinko machine 1 is in a specific state (for example, a state where a right gate passage (abnormal game) occurs in a non-time-short state). Of the plurality of effect lamps, some effect lamps (for example, effect lamps provided on the game board 5) are in a state capable of light emission by effect (during effect light emission or conditions for effect light emission). Can be executed using at least a specific effect lamp (for example, an effect lamp provided on the door frame 3) included in the other effect lamps in the waiting state (light-off state)). It is said.

  And even during the execution period of such anomaly notification light emission, whenever a player accepts an operation, the change of the brightness setting value can be accepted, and the state where the light emission by the effect is possible is left. In the some effect lamps, the emission luminance can be adjusted based on the changed luminance setting value, whereas in the specific effect lamp, the changed luminance is obtained. The abnormality notification light emission is executed only at a predetermined luminance setting value regardless of the setting value.

  According to such a configuration, even when the abnormality notification light emission is being executed, the brightness setting value is changed each time an operation is accepted by the player although it is partial among the plurality of effect lamps. Is reflected, and effect light emission at the reflected luminance setting value is executed. Therefore, it is possible to suitably encourage the player to continue the game while notifying the hall side of the abnormality.

  However, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the brightness adjustment target is in the period of execution of the abnormality notification light emission limited to a part in this way, the change of the brightness setting value is accepted. Even if the brightness adjustment confirmation sound is not necessarily output, the brightness adjustment confirmation sound can be output again when the remaining time until the end of the period when the target of brightness adjustment is limited is reduced So that it is possible to suggest to the player that the abnormal notification light emission has been completed and that the normal light emission will be allowed soon. I have to.

  FIG. 310 is a time chart showing an example of the light emission mode of the effect lamp during the abnormality notification period according to the specific abnormality detection.

  As shown in FIG. 310, at a timing tp1 when a game is not being executed, such as during a demo screen, a specific state (for example, passing through the right gate in an untimed state (abnormal game)). Is detected), the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment generates a lamp warning period (timing tp1 to tp3) based on the detection.

  In this lamp warning period (timing tp1 to tp3), the effect light emission is performed for some effect lamps (corresponding to “LED-A group” in the drawing) among the plurality of effect lamps provided in the pachinko machine 1. While being enabled, the abnormality notification light emission is performed using the other effect lamps (corresponding to “LED-B group” in the drawing). Note that the abnormality notification light emission does not necessarily have to be performed using all of the other effect lamps, and a part of the other effect lamps (for example, a specific effect lamp provided on the door frame 3). You may make it perform using only.

  That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, even if a specific state (for example, a state in which a right gate passage (abnormal game) has occurred in a non-time-short state) occurs, some of the effects For the lamp (corresponding to “LED-A group” in the figure), the light emission effect is performed in the same manner as when the specific state does not occur. While notifying, the player is preferably encouraged to continue the game.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, even when the lamp warning period (timing tp1 to tp3) is occurring, change acceptance relating to the luminance setting value is allowed. Then, in some production lamps (which correspond to “LED-A group” in the figure) that are set to “not perform abnormality notification light emission”, the light emission luminance is the same as when the lamp warning period is not in effect. , And can be adjusted based on the changed luminance setting value (changes immediately if light is always emitted, light emission waiting state with changed luminance setting value if light is emitted in response to a production request) (Adjustment can be reflected).

  On the other hand, for the other effect lamps (corresponding to “LED-B group” in the figure), even if the brightness setting value is changed during the lamp warning period (timing tp1 to tp3), it is changed. The luminance setting value is not reflected, and the abnormality notification light emission is performed only at a predetermined luminance setting value (adjustment reflection cannot be performed). In other words, in this case, light emission with different brightness setting values reflected in some effect lamps and other effect lamps can be performed at the same time. It is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that the abnormality notification light emission that is not related to is being performed. In this sense, it is desirable for the effect light emission to be able to change the brightness setting value only within a range equal to or less than the brightness setting value adopted by the abnormality notification light emission.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the abnormality notification light emission is being executed, the brightness adjustment confirmation sound is not necessarily generated even when the change of the brightness setting value is accepted. I do not output. That is, until a timing tp2 has arrived (timing tp1 to tp2) that the remaining time until the period in which the brightness adjustment target is limited is less than a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) comes. Even if the brightness setting value is changed and the light emission brightness in some effect lamps is actually adjusted, the brightness adjustment confirmation sound is not output. Then, based on the arrival of the timing tp2, when the change of the brightness setting value is accepted (when the light emission brightness of some effect lamps is actually adjusted), the brightness adjustment confirmation sound can be output again. Is trying to generate a situation.

  According to such a configuration, if the luminance adjustment confirmation sound is not output in spite of the change of the luminance setting value during the abnormality notification light emission execution period, the remaining time until the period ends. When it is possible to recognize that the situation is longer than a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds), when the brightness adjustment confirmation sound is output when the brightness setting value is changed, the period ends. It becomes possible to recognize that the remaining time until is shorter than a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds). Therefore, there is no change in the mode of the abnormality notification light emission itself, and even if it is in a state of continuing this, it is suggested to the player that it is in the state of being in a normal state (improvement) internally. As a result, even if the abnormality notification light emission is performed over a relatively long time, it is expected that the willingness to continue the game is preferably promoted.

  In particular, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, all effects are produced even during the execution period of abnormality notification light emission (timing tp2 to tp3) in which the luminance setting value is reflected only partially (LED-A group). The same sound as in the normal state where the brightness setting value can be reflected is output as the brightness adjustment confirmation sound, thereby giving a sense of security as if it has already returned to the normal state, It is intended to suppress a decrease in game entertainment during the period in which the abnormal notification light emission is performed. However, in this case, as shown in FIG. 310, at the timing tp3 when the abnormality notification light emission execution period ends, even if the luminance setting value has been changed a plurality of times, the luminance setting value at that time is changed. Effect lighting is performed in a manner that is reflected in a batch on other lamps for production ("LED-B group" which has been performing abnormal alarm light emission until then). It is important to prevent the output from being output as if it had already returned to the normal state.

  In the above example, when in a non-game state in which a game is not being executed, such as in a demonstration screen, a specific state (for example, a state in which a right gate passage (abnormal game) occurs in a non-time-short state) The lamp warning period (timing tp1 to tp3) is generated as an example based on the fact that it has been detected. However, when it is in a gaming state in which a game is being executed (such as a symbol variation state), it is detected that a specific state (for example, a state in which a right gate passage (abnormal game) has occurred in a non-time-short state) has occurred. In this case, the lamp warning period (timing tp1 to tp3) is generated based on the detection.

  When the ramp warning period (timing tp1 to tp3) is generated when the game is in a game execution state in which a game is being executed (such as a symbol variation state or a big hit game state), it is basically the same as in the case of the above-described example. It is. However, in this case, the lamp warning period (timing tp1 to timing tp1) is set regardless of whether or not the period (timing tp2 to tp3) after the timing tp2 when the remaining time becomes less than a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) has come. It is desirable not to output the brightness adjustment confirmation sound at tp3). That is, the case of being in the game execution state means that the game is just being continued by the player, so it is assumed that there is very little possibility that the game will be terminated. Therefore, even if the situation (timing tp2 to tp3) can be returned to the normal state soon, the control that does not output the brightness adjustment confirmation sound is maintained, so that “it is still during the execution period of the abnormal notification light emission. It can be said that it is more desirable to make accurate information such as "" recognized as a player. In this case, even after the abnormality notification light emission execution period (timing tp1 to tp3) ends and becomes normal, the state in which the luminance adjustment confirmation sound is not output is maintained while the game execution state continues. You may do it. This is because if the brightness adjustment confirmation sound is output in the middle of the game execution state or the brightness adjustment confirmation sound is not output, the meaning cannot be understood and the player cannot concentrate on the game.

  In the example described above, when the game is in the game execution state from the non-game state during the period of the timings tp2 to tp3 in which the brightness adjustment confirmation sound can be output (design variation starts) In such a case, the “control that does not output the brightness adjustment confirmation sound (non-audible control at timings tp1 to tp2)” is re-executed based on the game execution state. Then, the “control that does not output the brightness adjustment confirmation sound” is maintained until the timing tp3 arrives or until the game execution state ends.

  Further, in the example described above, for example, even when the time after the timing tp2 when the remaining time is less than a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) has come (timing tp2 to tp3), If it is rediscovered that it is in a specific state (for example, a state where a right gate passage (abnormal game) has occurred in a non-time-short state) when it is within the period, it It is desirable that the processing relating to the abnormality notification light emission (processing after timing tp1) is performed again. That is, in this case, even if the brightness adjustment confirmation sound is in a state that can be output, the brightness adjustment confirmation sound is returned to a state in which it is not output.

  In the example described above, when the timing tp3 arrives, the transition to a normal state in which all effect lamps can be adjusted based on the brightness setting value is performed. However, during the lamp warning period (timing tp1 to tp3), a plurality of effect lamps are prepared as effect lamps that cannot be adjusted based on the brightness setting value, and when the timing tp3 arrives, Only a part can be adjusted based on the luminance setting value, but at least a specific effect lamp cannot be adjusted based on the luminance setting value even in a normal state after the timing tp3 arrives. You may do it. According to such a configuration, since a restriction on brightness adjustment is left for a specific effect lamp, even after the lamp warning period ends and becomes normal, a lamp warning is issued before that. It becomes possible to function as a history of occurrence of a period, and stable operation as the pachinko machine 1 can be expected. Note that the restriction remaining for a specific effect lamp may be maintained in an unreleasable state. However, for example, it may be made releasable by clearing the RAM or shutting off the power. Is desirable.

  Note that the brightness adjustment confirmation sound is output as the same sound as the volume adjustment confirmation sound, and it cannot be confirmed which "confirmation sound" was output, but some "confirmation sound" has been output. It is desirable to make something recognizable. In other words, if various sounds are adopted as confirmation sounds, there is a concern that the possibility of being an expected production sound that suggests the degree of expectation may occur, and the entertainment amusement may be reduced. Because.

  In addition, during the period of execution of the abnormality notification light emission according to the above-described example, it is desirable that the acceptance of the change in the set value related to the volume of the effect sound is permitted based on the operation acceptance by the player. In this case, the “processing related to notification sound and volume adjustment” during the execution period of the abnormality notification light emission can be realized by appropriately adopting the contents described with reference to FIGS. 166 to 168. In this case, the “processing regarding the notification sound and volume adjustment” described with reference to FIGS. 166 to 168 may be terminated (collection of volume) when the timing tp3 arrives. You may make it complete | finish (collective reflection of a sound volume) when tp2 comes. In such a configuration, the timing tp2 at which the sound volume setting value can be reflected collectively and the timing tp3 at which the luminance setting value can be reflected collectively become different, so that the path to return to the normal state can be shown stepwise. It will be possible to promote the game continuation by making it appear as if it has already returned to its normal state or as if it is in a recovery trend.

  Further, in the above explanation example, the specific state is exemplified as “a state in which a right gate passage (abnormal game) has occurred in a non-time-short state”, but the present invention is not limited to this, and see FIGS. It may be the same as the case of the example described above (a state where a door opening abnormality or a magnetic detection abnormality occurs).

  In addition, in the above example, as a method for not outputting the volume adjustment confirmation sound or the brightness adjustment confirmation sound, in addition to not assigning the volume adjustment confirmation sound or the brightness adjustment confirmation sound to the channel, A confirmation sound or a brightness adjustment confirmation sound is assigned to a channel, but it can also be realized by setting the volume value to “0”.

[14. Production control by scheduler]
In the gaming machine, various effects are performed during the game by sound output, lamp lighting / flashing, image display, and the like, and in order to enhance the entertainment of the game, various effects are tried. As described above, the gaming machine controls a plurality of types of effect devices by the peripheral control board 1510 that is an effect control device based on a command output from the main control board 1310, and executes an effect according to the gaming state of the game. To do. The main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 are connected by a unidirectional signal line that transmits signals in a single direction.

  In order to execute a plurality of types of effects in cooperation with each other, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 7-313694 discloses a control technique that realizes various types of effects using scenario data. The scenario data is data in which symbols to be displayed on the screen are sequentially specified in time series. By preparing a control process for realizing a general-purpose process for sequentially displaying designated symbols in accordance with this scenario data, there is an advantage that various presentation displays can be easily realized simply by switching the scenario data. The scenario data may include BGM designation. In this case, the sound corresponding to the display screen can be output by outputting the BGM designated by the sound source IC.

  However, game machines are demanding more elaborate effects. In the above-described conventional technology, it is difficult to perform various effects by interlocking a plurality of effect devices such as sound output, lamp lighting, and image display. For example, the BGM cannot be changed while the image display according to the scenario data is being executed. Further, when outputting a sound effect in response to a user operation during image display, the image display and BGM output are stopped and the sound effect is output. When the output of the sound effect is finished, the BGM and the image display are restarted from the beginning regardless of how far the BGM has been played, and it is an effect that gives a sense of incongruity. The lighting / flashing of the lamp is controlled by an individual program regardless of the content of the image display, depending on the gaming state, and it is difficult to realize a wide variety of lighting / flashing linked to the image display. there were.

[18-1. Software configuration in the peripheral control unit]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the peripheral control unit 1530 provided in the peripheral control board 1510 receives the main command from the main control board 1310 and executes a game effect. In the present embodiment, each component that executes an effect based on the received main command is configured as software, but may be configured as hardware. Hereinafter, after describing the configuration and outline of the functions for realizing the effect control in the present embodiment, the details of each function will be described.

[18-1-1. Configuration and overview of each function]
FIG. 311 is a functional block diagram for explaining the configuration and outline of functions for executing the presentation control in the present embodiment. The peripheral control unit 1530 includes an input command analysis unit 5010, an effect control unit 5020, a layer data storage unit 5030, an effect block control unit 5040, an effect block data storage unit 5050, a scheduler execution unit 5060, a scheduler data storage unit 5070, and an output module unit. 5080.

  The input command analysis unit 5010 receives an input of a main command and analyzes the input command. The effect control unit 5020 acquires layer data from the layer data storage unit 5030 based on the analysis result of the main command, and determines block control information (effect block number). The layer will be described. In this embodiment, a layer is set for each effect division such as the background and the character, each effect element is drawn on each layer, and these layers are displayed in an overlapping manner to display an image on the liquid crystal display device. Is output. Thereby, for example, if only the background is different and the display (motion) of the character is the same, it is possible to share the layer for displaying the character. Thereby, the capacity | capacitance of presentation data (scheduler data) can be reduced, or development efficiency can be improved. The layer data storage unit 5030 stores information for specifying an effect for each layer.

  The effect block control unit 5040 receives the block control information (effect block number) determined by the effect control unit 5020, and acquires the effect block data corresponding to the effect block number from the effect block data storage unit 5050. The effect block data includes scheduler data for executing the effect. The scheduler data stores a plurality of functions instructing a predetermined process to be executed among a plurality of processes required in accordance with the rendering device in order to be performed in order to control the rendering in each rendering device. It is data. The effect block data includes “liquid crystal effect block data” for executing an effect displayed on the liquid crystal display device, “liquid crystal design block data” for variably displaying the identification symbol on the liquid crystal display device, sound (sound), There are three types of “sub-effect block data” for controlling lamps, accessories and the like. The effect block control unit 5040 executes control according to the type of effect block data, and passes scheduler control information including the effect block data to the scheduler execution unit 5060.

  The scheduler execution unit 5060 acquires the scheduler data included in the effect block data from the scheduler data storage unit 5070. Then, the scheduler data is executed, a function corresponding to each rendering device is called, and rendering device control information is transmitted to the output module unit 5080.

  The output module unit 5080 receives the rendering device control information from the scheduler execution unit 5060, and transmits rendering device drive data to each rendering device based on the rendering device control information. Each rendering device performs an operation based on rendering device drive data. In the output module unit 5080, the production control unit 5020 is configured in software by a CPU (peripheral control MPU 1511a) provided in the production control device (peripheral control board 1530), and the CPU executes another computer program. It is realized by. Note that the effect control unit 5020 may be configured as a separate arithmetic circuit and configured as hardware.

[18-1-2. Module configuration]
Next, the details of the configuration of the module or the like that realizes each function described above will be described. FIG. 312 is a diagram illustrating an example of the configuration of modules and the like in the peripheral control unit 1530 of the gaming machine of the present embodiment. Each configuration is configured as software by a computer program executed by the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1530, but a part or all of the configuration may be configured as hardware.

  In the present embodiment, a system module 5100 for driving each rendering device is processed by the peripheral control unit 1530. The system module 5100 includes a command analysis module 5200, a liquid crystal module 5400, a sound module 5500, a lamp module 5600, a drive device module 5700, and the like as modules relating to effects. Also included is an effect control unit 5020 for creating effect device control information for driving each effect device based on the main command.

  The system module 5100 includes a main command buffer 5110, a liquid crystal display list command buffer 5120, a lamp data output buffer 5130, a motor data output buffer 5140, and a serial control IC 5150. The main command buffer 5110 receives the main command transmitted from the main control board 1310 and passes it to the command analysis module 5200. In this embodiment, the main command is 3-byte one-set information, which is a command status value, a command mode value, a command status and a checksum value of the mode value in order from the first byte, and is divided into 3 times each 8 bits. The main command buffer 5110, which is output in response, receives this signal, evaluates the checksum value, and if the received command is not determined to be correct, discards the received command, If it is determined, it is passed to the command analysis module 5200.

  The main command includes information representing contents related to the effect among the gaming state and the operating state of the gaming machine. For example, presence / absence of a game ball at the start winning opening, the result of special drawing lottery, a special symbol variation pattern (variation time), and the like can be included in the main command. In addition, when this embodiment is applied to a slot machine, door opening and other sensor outputs, operation of a start lever and a stop button, rotation and stop of a reel, success or failure of a stop, and the like can be mentioned. The commands listed here are examples, and various commands can be included depending on the type of gaming machine and the contents of the effects.

  The command analysis module 5200 is included in the input command analysis unit 5010, analyzes the content of the main command, and determines whether the command is related to the effect. When it is determined that the command is related to the effect, the command is transferred to the effect control unit 5020.

  The effect control unit 5020 specifies the layer that is the target of the effect control from the layer data table based on the analysis result of the main command. And a block data number (effect block number) is acquired from the specified layer, and the block data number corresponding to each layer is transmitted to the effect block control unit 5040.

  The effect block control unit 5040 includes a liquid crystal effect block control unit 5310 and a sub effect block control unit 5320. The liquid crystal effect block control unit 5310 determines control information for executing the effect of displaying an image on the liquid crystal display device. The sub effect block control unit 5320 determines control information for executing sound output, lamp lighting / flashing, action of an accessory, and the like.

  When the effect block number is determined, liquid crystal effect block control unit 5310 executes liquid crystal effect block data corresponding to the effect block number. The liquid crystal effect block data is block data for executing a liquid crystal display effect, and includes one or a plurality of drawing scheduler data. By executing the drawing scheduler data, the background, characters, identification symbols, etc. are displayed on the liquid crystal display device.

  The liquid crystal effect block control unit 5310 activates the scheduler execution unit 5060 corresponding to the control (display) target, and executes the drawing scheduler data included in the block data. The liquid crystal display scheduler execution unit 5060 includes a liquid crystal effect 1f drawing scheduler execution unit 5331 for displaying effect elements such as backgrounds and characters, and a liquid crystal design 1f drawing scheduler execution unit 5332 for displaying identification symbols. included.

  The liquid crystal effect 1f drawing scheduler execution unit 5331 and the liquid crystal symbol 1f drawing scheduler execution unit 5332 are executed at a frame period (1f = about 33.334 milliseconds) which is a screen update period. The liquid crystal effect 1f drawing scheduler execution unit 5331 and the liquid crystal symbol 1f drawing scheduler execution unit 5332 drive the drawing scheduler data specified by the liquid crystal effect block data by the drawing scheduler, and the liquid crystal module 5400 generates a liquid crystal display list command. The liquid crystal display list command is delivered to the effect display devices (game board side liquid crystal display device 1600, door frame side liquid crystal display device 460) via the liquid crystal display list command buffer 5120.

  The sound source built-in VDP 1540a generates display data based on the liquid crystal display list command buffer 5120 and outputs it to the effect display device (game board side liquid crystal display device 1600, door frame side liquid crystal display device 460). The display data is generated by, for example, a method in which character data specified by a liquid crystal display list command is developed on a frame buffer at a specified position.

  When the effect block number is determined, sub effect block control unit 5320 executes sub effect block data corresponding to the effect block number. The sub effect block data is block data for executing lamp, sound, and motor effects, and includes one or a plurality of sub effect scheduler data. By executing the sub effect scheduler data, the lamp, sound, and motor effect devices perform operations defined in advance in the sub effect scheduler data.

  The sub effect block control unit 5320 activates the scheduler execution unit 5060 corresponding to the execution cycle of the various effect devices, and executes the sub effect scheduler data included in the sub effect block data. The scheduler execution unit 5060 for controlling various production devices includes a sub production 1f scheduler execution unit 5333 that controls the production device at intervals of one frame and a sub production 1 ms scheduler execution unit 5334 that controls the production devices at intervals of 1 millisecond. included. Thus, by providing the scheduler execution unit corresponding to the execution interval, it is possible to execute the presentation according to the configuration of the gaming machine and the required specifications of the presentation device. For example, since 1f corresponds to the drawing update interval, it is possible to synchronize the sound output and the action of the accessory with the liquid crystal display. In addition, if the detection interval of the sensor is 1 ms unit, it becomes possible to quickly cope with a malfunction in the operation of the accessory.

  The sub effect block control unit 5320 executes effect control other than the liquid crystal display. In this embodiment, for example, three types of effect control of sound (sound) output, lamp lighting / flashing, and action of an accessory are performed. explain. The production control by the sub production 1f scheduler execution unit 5333 and the sub production 1 ms scheduler execution unit 5334 will be described as being the same except for the execution cycle. Hereinafter, an outline of control according to the type of the rendering device will be described.

  First, a case where an effect by sound (sound) output is executed will be described. If the sub effect block data includes scheduler data for sound output, the scheduler execution unit 5060 activates the scheduler for sound output and executes the scheduler data. When a sound output function (for example, SPLAY) is executed, the sound module 5500 generates sound source drive data (sound source command) based on the designated parameter. In addition, it is possible to start a plurality of schedulers. For example, by controlling output of BGM and effect sound effects with different schedulers, sound source drive data can be generated in parallel and sound can be output simultaneously. . The sound source built-in VDP 1540a reads the sound source data specified by the sound source drive data from the liquid crystal and sound ROM 1540b, and outputs it from the speakers 921 and 573 by the audio data transmission IC 1540c.

  Next, a case where an effect using a lamp is executed will be described. If the sub effect block data includes the scheduler data for lamp control, the scheduler execution unit activates the lamp scheduler and executes the scheduler data. When a lamp control function (for example, HPLAY) is executed, the lamp module 5600 generates lamp drive data based on the designated parameter. As in the case of sound output, a plurality of schedulers can be started, and a plurality of lamps and layers can be controlled in parallel.

  The lamp module 5600 creates lamp driving data for each cycle (one frame or one millisecond) and outputs it to the lamp data output buffer 5130. The lamp data output buffer 5130 has a double buffer structure, temporarily stores the lamp driving data generated by the lamp module 5600, and outputs the data to the serial control IC 5150. By making the ramp data output buffer 5130 a double buffer, it is possible to simultaneously create and output ramp data in a single cycle. By configuring in this way, the output of the lamp data is the next operation to create the lamp data against the increase in the lamp control processing time due to the increase of the lamp system or the overlapping of the lamp layers. By setting the cycle, the processing related to the creation of the ramp data may be completed within the processing cycle.

  Specifically, when the ramp data output buffer 5130 is composed of the buffer A and the buffer B, for example, if the previously generated lamp driving data is stored in the buffer A, the data for the next cycle is stored in the buffer B. Is output from the buffer A to the serial control IC 5150 by DMA to turn on and blink each lamp. In the next cycle, the buffer is switched, lamp drive data is output from the lamp module 5600 to the buffer A, and the lamp drive data stored in the buffer B is output to the serial control IC 5150. The case of controlling lighting / flashing of the LED is the same as that of the lamp, and the description of the control of the lamp can be replaced with the LED unless otherwise specified.

  Finally, the case of controlling a driving device (for example, a motor or a solenoid) for operating an accessory will be described. If scheduler data for driving device control is included in the sub effect block data, the scheduler execution unit activates the driving device scheduler (motor scheduler) and executes the scheduler data. Then, when a function for driving device control (for example, MPLAY) is executed, the driving device module 5700 generates lamp drive data based on the designated parameter. As in the case of sound output, a plurality of schedulers can be activated, and a plurality of drive devices can be controlled in parallel.

  The drive device module 5700 creates motor drive data for each cycle and outputs the motor drive data to the motor data output buffer 5140. In the present embodiment, motor drive data is created and output at a cycle of 1 millisecond. The motor data output buffer 5140 temporarily stores the motor drive data generated by the drive device module 5700 and outputs it to the serial control IC 5150. The motor drive data is output from the serial port of the peripheral control MPU 1511a without using DMA. However, the output of the latch signal for reflecting the motor data to each drive device is not the same timing as the timing output from the motor data output buffer 5140 to the serial control IC 5150, but the latch signal is output at the next cycle of all motor data transmission Output. This is because the latch signal output timing is after the completion of serial transmission of all motor data. As the serial transmission time of motor data increases, the waiting time until completion of serial transmission becomes an overhead, and the overall processing time for each frame period. This is because there is not enough. In this embodiment, the waiting time until the completion of serial transmission is reduced to 0 by shifting the timing of latch signal output corresponding to motor data serial transmission. However, a plurality of DMAs can be used depending on the CPU used. In this case, the motor drive data is serially transmitted using DMA, and a latch signal is output by a DMA completion interrupt, so that the waiting time until completion of serial transmission can be reduced to zero. Simultaneously with the output of the motor drive data, effect drive photo information is input to the drive device module 5700 (peripheral control MPU 1511a). Each effect driving photo information is received by serial communication via a parallel serial control IC.

[18-2. Data structure]
In the present embodiment, the scheduler data can take various structures. For example, you may provide the call function for taking in other scheduler data as a part of scheduler data. The scheduler execution unit 5060 sequentially executes the processing specified by the scheduler data, and when executing the call function, once the other scheduler data specified by the call function is executed, the original scheduler data processing is continued. Will be executed. By doing so, it is possible to utilize general-purpose production contents in various scenes in the same way as calling a subroutine in a general program.

  This function not only can reduce the load of creating scheduler data, but also has an effect specific to the gaming machine as shown below. In the gaming machine, various lotteries are performed during the game, and the development of the game changes depending on the result. Some players can find a subtle difference in the contents of the presentation during the lottery and guess the lottery result. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the general function contents can be used in various scenes by the call function, so that such a subtle difference can be eliminated and it is difficult to predict the lottery result or the like. It is possible to prevent the entertainment of the game from being impaired.

  As another configuration, the scheduler data may include a conditional branch function for switching the production contents according to the gaming state. The scheduler execution unit 5060 sequentially executes the processing specified by the scheduler data, and at the time of executing the conditional branch function, determines the gaming state based on the main command and executes the effect contents according to the gaming state. . By doing so, it is possible to deal with a variety of gaming states that branch with a single scheduler data. Examples of the gaming state used for conditional branching include the result of a lottery performed during a game, the presence / absence of a player's operation of a button, and the like. A spinning reel stop state may be used for a spinning-type game machine, and a winning state for a start winning opening may be used for a pachinko machine. Further, conditional branching may be performed depending on whether or not an error has occurred during the game.

  The content of the effect after the conditional branching can be variously configured. For example, after the conditional branching, it may be configured to be completely separated into two or more processes. Moreover, after performing a predetermined process by a conditional branch, you may comprise so that it may return to the process before a branch. According to the latter aspect, for example, after a process of outputting a sound effect temporarily when a button is pressed during a game, it is possible to return to the previous effect without any sense of incongruity.

  As described above, the game machine can include various effect devices, and as an example, a display device for displaying an image can also be included. As the display device, various devices capable of displaying an image, such as a liquid crystal panel, a CRT, an organic EL panel, and a plasma display, can be used. The display content of the display device is controlled by the image processing device. The image processing device is a device that develops a bitmap image according to a predetermined display command and generates display data for displaying the image on the display device. For example, a combination of a VDP (Video Display Processor) and a character ROM or the like prepared with a bitmap of characters and the like to be displayed on the screen can be configured.

[18-3. Basic concept of production control]
FIG. 313 is an explanatory diagram showing the basic concept of effect control in the gaming machine of the present embodiment. Here, a case where the main effect control is a sub effect executed by executing scheduler data including a function will be described, and in particular, a sound (sound) output will be described as an example.

  The scheduler execution unit 5060 (sub-effects scheduler execution unit 5320) activates the type and number of schedulers 5502 corresponding to the effect device at the time of effect execution. The scheduler execution unit 5060 acquires the scheduler data specified as the sub effect block data from the scheduler data storage unit 5070, and executes the function included in the scheduler data. The structure of the scheduler data will be described later.

  Sound functions executed at the time of sound output include “SPLAY” for reproducing a phrase, “STOP_PH” for stopping a phrase being reproduced, “VOL_PH” for setting a volume level during phrase reproduction, and the like. These sound functions are processed by the sound module 5500, and control designated by parameters or the like is executed. When the sound module 5500 accepts the execution of the sound function, the sound module 5500 generates sound source drive data and outputs the sound source drive data to the sound source built-in VDP 1540a.

  The function processed by the sound module 5500 controls the output of the sound corresponding to the designated channel. In the gaming machine of this embodiment, 32 channels are provided, but the number of channels is described as 4 for easy understanding. The sound output by each channel is output from the speakers [1] to [4] via the volumes 5506v [1] to [4]. The speakers [1] to [4] shown here schematically represent outputs of the respective channels Ch1 to Ch4, and correspond to any one of the physical speakers provided in the gaming machine. It does not mean that

  The correspondence between the scheduler 5502 and the output channel is managed by channel management works 5507 [1] to 5507 [4] provided in association with the channels Ch1 to Ch4. The data structure of the channel management work 5507 is illustrated in the lower right of the figure. The work 5507 stores a phrase number, a stereo reproduction flag, an output volume, and a loop attribute. The phrase number is information indicating which phrase is currently being reproduced. The stereo reproduction flag indicates whether to output in stereo. The output volume is a volume for each channel. The loop attribute is a designation of whether or not to reproduce repeatedly. These pieces of information are specified by the sound module 5500 based on the sound function.

  As described above, in FIG. 313, the basic concept of effect control in the present embodiment is shown by taking sound output control as an example. The sub effect scheduler execution unit starts the scheduler specified by the sub effect block data and executes the scheduler data on the scheduler. When the scheduler data is executed, a function for controlling each effect device is called and processed by modules (sound module 5500, lamp module 5600, drive device module 5700) corresponding to each effect device.

[18-4. Data flow in production control]
The basic concept of the module configuration and control in the effect control of the gaming machine has been described above. Next, the flow of effect control from when the main command is received until the scheduler data is acquired will be described.

[18-4-1. Acquisition of data necessary for production control]
FIG. 314A is a diagram illustrating a configuration until data necessary for presentation control of the gaming machine of the present embodiment is acquired. As described in FIG. 312, when the effect control unit 5020 receives a main command from the main control board 1310, the effect analysis unit 5020 analyzes the command by the command analysis module 5200 and notifies the effect control unit 5020 of the analysis result.

  The effect control unit 5020 is based on the layer data table, each layer, a variation pattern layer (a layer that performs an effect related to a variation pattern), a hold layer (a layer that performs an effect related to a hold effect), and a game instruction layer (game instructions). Based on the analysis result of the command analysis module 5200 for each of the communication layer, the communication error layer (the layer that performs communication error notification), the notification layer (the layer that performs various notifications), and the abnormality notification layer (the layer that performs abnormality notification). The production block data number corresponding to each layer is acquired and updated. Further, the obtained effect block data number is delivered to the effect block control unit 5040. For example, if the effect block number is a variation pattern layer, the variation pattern-specific liquid crystal effect block data combination number table, the variation pattern-specific liquid crystal symbol block data combination number table, the variation pattern-specific sub-effect block data based on the variation pattern number Determined from the combination number table. The division unit of the effect block is divided into predetermined units (blocks) that are common effects within a series of effects (for example, effects that are executed from when the change of the special symbol is started until it is stopped). In addition, block data including control information such as effect contents and effect time for each effect device is defined for each block. It is possible to synchronize the effects produced by each effect device by controlling the effects in units of effect blocks based on the effect block numbers. Also, the arrangement of layers corresponds to the layers on the liquid crystal display. In this embodiment, the variation pattern layer is the backmost surface and the abnormality notification layer is the foreground. It is the structure for.

  When the effect block control unit 5040 receives a block data number (effect block number) corresponding to each layer, the scheduler control unit (liquid crystal effect block control unit 5310, liquid crystal symbol block control unit 5311, sub effect block) corresponding to each layer. The corresponding block data (liquid crystal effect block data 5051, liquid crystal symbol block data 5052, sub effect block data 5053) is acquired by the control unit 5320). As described above, each block data includes scheduler data for performing an effect.

  For example, when the main command is a start winning command, a hold layer is specified, and liquid crystal effect block data 5051 for performing a hold display on the liquid crystal display screen and sub effect block data for outputting a sound effect at the start winning prize 5053 is acquired. Also, at the start of the variation of the special symbol, a variation start command or the like is transmitted to identify the variation pattern layer. Furthermore, a command is also transmitted when an error occurrence or warning is notified, and an abnormality detection layer is specified. Moreover, a plurality of effects can be performed simultaneously by performing effects for each layer.

  When the liquid crystal effect block control unit 5310 acquires the liquid crystal effect block data 5051 from the liquid crystal effect block data combination number table corresponding to each layer based on the liquid crystal effect block data number, the liquid crystal effect 1f drawing scheduler execution unit 5331 performs liquid crystal display. The effect 1f scheduler is activated. The liquid crystal effect 1f drawing scheduler execution unit 5331 further acquires liquid crystal effect schedule data 5071. Then, by executing the liquid crystal effect schedule data 5071 on the liquid crystal effect 1f scheduler, the liquid crystal module 5400 is instructed to process the function defined in the liquid crystal effect schedule data 5071. The liquid crystal module 5400 processes the function instructed to be executed based on the designated scheduler data, creates a display list command necessary for driving the VDP 1540a, outputs the display list command to the VDP 1540a, and plays the game board An image is drawn on the side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. The process in the liquid crystal effect 1f scheduler is executed in synchronization with the screen update interval (one frame).

  Also, when the liquid crystal symbol block control unit 5311 acquires the liquid crystal symbol block data 5052 from the liquid crystal symbol block data combination number table corresponding to each layer based on the liquid crystal symbol block data number, the liquid crystal symbol if rendering scheduler execution unit 5332. To start the liquid crystal symbol 1f scheduler. The liquid crystal symbol if drawing scheduler execution unit 5332 further acquires liquid crystal symbol schedule data 5072. Then, the liquid crystal symbol schedule data 5072 is executed on the liquid crystal symbol if scheduler to instruct the liquid crystal module 5400 to perform the function defined in the liquid crystal symbol schedule data 5072. The liquid crystal module 5400 processes the function instructed to be executed based on the designated scheduler data, creates a display list command necessary for driving the VDP 1540a, outputs the display list command to the VDP 1540a, and plays the game board An image is drawn on the side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. The process in the liquid crystal symbol 1f scheduler is executed in synchronization with the screen update interval (one frame).

  When the sub effect block control unit 5320 acquires the sub effect block data 5053, the sub effect block control unit 5320 specifies an execution cycle (one frame or one millisecond) based on information designated in the sub effect block data 5053. When the execution cycle is 1 frame, the sub-effect 1f scheduler execution unit 5333 starts the sub-effect 1f scheduler, or when the execution cycle is 1 millisecond, the sub-effect 1 ms scheduler execution unit 5334 causes the sub-effect 1 ms. Start the scheduler.

  Furthermore, the sub effect 1f scheduler execution unit 5333 or the sub effect 1 ms scheduler execution unit 5334 acquires the sub effect schedule data 5073 and executes it on the corresponding scheduler. The sub performance schedule data 5073 is not different depending on the execution cycle, and all functions can be executed by the scheduler of all execution cycles. This makes it possible to create scheduler data that is commonly used by schedulers with different execution cycles, thereby reducing the data capacity. It is also possible to respond quickly to changes in the execution cycle of the rendering device. In addition, the same schedule data can be executed simultaneously by different schedulers, which makes it possible to share scheduler data, prevent the occurrence of the same type of problems at multiple locations, and reduce the data capacity. it can.

  Here, a specific example in which the same schedule data is simultaneously executed by different schedulers will be described. FIG. 314B is a diagram illustrating a liquid crystal drawing effect for step-up notice according to the present embodiment. There are four types of step-up notices, step-up notices 1 to 4, which can be executed. By executing an effect that has been developed in stages, the player is expected to see the result of the variable display of symbols. Suggest a degree.

  In step-up notice 1, when the step-up 1 effect is executed, the notice effect ends. In the step-up notice 2, the step-up 2 effect occurs just before the end of the step-up 1 effect, and the notice effect ends after the step-up 2 effect ends. The effects are similarly executed for the step-up notices 3 and 4, and after the step-up 3 effects and the step-up 4 effects are finished, the notice effects are finished.

  In the step-up notice, the sound and the lamp also execute the step-up notice effect in accordance with the liquid crystal effect. In the sound production, different sounds are output at each stage of the step-up production, and therefore, four types of scheduler data from step 1 to step 4 are defined for each progressing state (stage) of the production. On the other hand, in the lamp effect, since the same lamp pattern is displayed at each stage of the step-up effect, one kind of common lamp scheduler data may be defined.

  Note that when the step-up notice liquid crystal effect develops to the next stage, the next step-up notice starts immediately before the end of the current step-up notice. There is a period. As described above, it is necessary to execute the same scheduler data for the subsequent step-up effect in the lamp effect, but in the present embodiment, the same scheduler data can be simultaneously executed by a plurality of schedulers. It has become. For this reason, when the same effect is executed at each stage, one type of common scheduler data may be defined even if the execution periods of the effects overlap.

  Specifically, when the step-up notice lamp scheduler data (SCH_LMP_STEP) is executed by the ramp scheduler (LMP_SCH01) in the step-up 1 production, the same step-up occurs when the step-up 2 production that starts just before the end of the step-up 1 production occurs. The notice lamp scheduler data (SCH_LMP_STEP) is executed by another lamp scheduler (LMP_SCH02). By configuring in this way, the same scheduler data can be executed simultaneously (overlapping) without defining the same scheduler data redundantly, thereby producing the same pattern effects in parallel in a series of effects. It is realized to execute.

  The sub-effect 1f scheduler execution unit 5333 or the sub-effect 1 ms scheduler execution unit 5334 calls a module (sound module 5500, lamp module 5600, drive device module 5700) corresponding to the control target effect device, and is defined in the sub-effect schedule data 5073. Instructs processing of the specified function. Each module processes the function instructed to be executed based on the designated scheduler data, creates data necessary for driving the rendering device, and outputs the driving data to the rendering device.

[18-4-2. Overview of scheduler data execution]
FIG. 315 is a diagram for explaining the flow of execution of scheduler data according to the present embodiment. The effect control unit 5020 determines the effect contents based on the analysis result of the main (main board) command by the command analysis module 5200, and various effect devices are provided by the sound source built-in VDP 1540a, the sound module 5500, the lamp module 5600, and the drive device module 5700. Control. FIG. 315 shows the structure of scheduler data 5401 referred to for setting this command.

  In the present embodiment, the scheduler data 5401 is prepared for each production number designated from the production block control unit 5040 and stored in the peripheral control ROM 1530b. The correspondence between the scheduler data 5401 and the production number is defined in the production management table. As shown on the left side of the figure, the effect management table includes an effect management pointer indicating the storage address of the scheduler data. The number of effect management pointers corresponding to the effect number is prepared, but only five are illustrated here. In the example shown in the figure, for example, the production management pointer [1] initially stores the start address A1 of the scheduler data 5401. As the processing of the scheduler data is executed, the value of the production management pointer [1] sequentially shifts to A1 and A2.

  In the present embodiment, the effect number uses the address value of the effect management pointer. In the example of FIG. 315, production numbers 01H, 02H, etc. represent storage addresses of production management pointers [1], [2], etc., respectively. The production number is not limited to the address value, and any identification information can be used. In this case, the effect management table may be configured to associate the effect number with the effect management pointer, and the scheduler execution unit 5060 searches for the effect management pointer using the effect number as a key, and then stores the scheduler data. What is necessary is just to make it process. If the address value of the production management pointer is used as the production number, the data amount of the production management table can be reduced, and the above-described search is not required, so the load required for the scheduler data processing can be reduced.

  As shown in FIG. 315, each command constituting the scheduler data 5401 is basically composed of functions and parameters. As described above, the function is a command for controlling the effect device, for example, for instructing each module to operate the effect device. The parameter is a variable that specifically indicates the processing content of the function. A function that does not need to specify a parameter may be provided.

  The functions are classified into groups such as sequence control, lamp, sound, motor (drive device), and user. The sequence control is a basic function for performing production control, and the lamp, sound, and motor are functions for controlling each production device. Users are functions that do not belong to these groups. A specific description of the function will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  In the example shown in FIG. 315, the “call” function is designated at the address A2. The “call” function belongs to the sequence control group, saves the pointer value of the next function, and sets the address specified by the parameter to the effect management pointer. The scheduler execution unit 5060 temporarily returns to the previous processing based on the saved pointer value after processing the scheduler data by temporarily shifting to the address specified by the parameter.

  The scheduler execution unit 5060 executes the address A31 specified by the parameter of the “call” function after the address A2. A liquid crystal command is set at address A31, a voice operation number is set at A32, a lamp operation number is set at A33, and the process returns at A3n. When the effect command ends these processes, it returns to the address A2 where “call” is designated, and proceeds to the process of the next address A3.

  Thus, by utilizing the “call” function, the contents of a series of blocks BL3 designated by the addresses A31 to A3n can be taken into various portions of the scheduler data. By doing so, the capacity of the scheduler data can be reduced and the creation load can be reduced. In gaming machines such as pachinko machines and slot machines, various lotteries and the like are performed during the game, and the development of the game changes depending on the result. Some players can find a subtle difference in the contents of the presentation during the lottery and guess the lottery result. On the other hand, in the present invention, since the general-purpose production contents can be utilized in various scenes by calling, such a subtle difference can be eliminated and the lottery result or the like can be difficult to predict. It is possible to prevent the entertainment of the game from being damaged.

  Although the “call” function can be used as described above, the scheduler data 5401 of this embodiment is different from the interpreter program. As described above, the main function used in the scheduler data 5401 is to set the instruction contents to other schedulers such as “object action number set”, “voice action number set”, “lamp action number set”, etc. This is because the scheduler execution unit 5060 is merely a specific instruction for a very limited function that can be realized.

  In the example shown in FIG. 315, NOP (wait) is executed next at address A3. The “NOP” function waits for the designated number of frames and continues the scheduler data processing. Here, the processing of the scheduler data is waited until the time specified by the parameter Prm [031] elapses. As will be described later, in this embodiment, processing is repeatedly executed by a timer interrupt. Therefore, if the value of the parameter Prm [031] is not 0 in the “NOP” function, the scheduler execution unit 5060 once terminates the scheduler data processing without performing the subsequent processing. Then, the process to move to the function of the next address is performed.

  In the present embodiment, a voice operation number or the like is designated using a work in the same format as the work area 5301 shown in FIG. 314A. The work area 5301 used by the system event and the work used by the scheduler execution unit 5060 are prepared separately. The scheduler execution unit 5060 stores the voice operation number and the like in the work according to the designation of the scheduler data. Also, the layer designated by the effect control unit 5020 is provided separately from the system module layer (see FIG. 314A). Also in the work for each module, a plurality of voice operation numbers and lamp operation numbers can be specified in parallel from these layers.

  Similarly, after the conditional branch address A11, the scheduler data is defined by functions and parameters. In the example shown in FIG. 315, the conditional branch is not provided from the conditional branch address A11 to the end of the production (address An). Since this range is a block BL2 different from the block BL1 described above, an accessory command (address A22), a voice action number (address A21), etc. can be specified without considering conflict with the block BL1. . Instead of these settings, the block BL3 or the like may be fetched by a “call” function.

  In the scheduler data, a conditional branch and a “call” function may be used in combination. For example, a random number for switching the production contents may be generated, and a different address may be called according to the value of the random number. In the example shown in FIG. 315, if the condition “random number ≦ Th1?” Is added to the address A2, the effects of the addresses A31 to A3n are executed when this condition is satisfied. If the address A41 (not shown) is called after the address A2 (address A2 + 1) with the condition “Th1 <random value ≦ Th2?”, The address A31 and the subsequent addresses are called. Different performances are performed. In this way, if different addresses are called in a conditional branch according to a random number, the contents of the presentation can be switched randomly according to the random number, and the fun of the game can be enhanced. Hereinafter, switching the contents of effects in this way is referred to as “effect lottery” in this specification.

  In the effect lottery, all of display, sound, lamp, and driving device may be switched, or only a part may be switched. When switching all of them, all the contents of the display, sound, and lamp should be specified in the scheduler data called by the “call” function. When switching only a part, specify only the part to be switched in the scheduler data called by the “call” function, and specify the other part after returning from the “call” function. do it.

  Further, in the scheduler data, a conditional branch and a “call” function may be used so as to call different scheduler data according to the random number for the effect lottery. In this case, the display, sound, lamp, and driving device independently perform the effect lottery. As a result, the effect modes realized by the combination become very diverse, and there is an advantage that it can be more interesting.

  However, regardless of the result of the lottery of the display, sound, lamp, and driving device, it is preferable that these effects end at the same time in order to realize an effect without a sense of incongruity. Therefore, in this embodiment, the scheduler data to be selected for the effect lottery has the content that the effect ends in the same time. Note that it is not an essential requirement that the production ends in the same time, and these production times may not be the same.

  The effect lottery based on the scheduler data has a variety of effects, and has the advantage that the lottery mode can be switched according to the output status of the display, sound, lamp, and driving device. For example, when an effect lottery is instructed, when the drive device is executing an 8-shaped sorting operation and other operations are restricted, the drive device module 5700 prohibits the effect lottery related to the drive device. May be. Similarly, for the display, sound, and lamp, the effect lottery may be prohibited depending on the situation when the effect lottery is instructed. In the production lottery prohibition, the production lottery may be partially prohibited by prohibiting selection of some scheduler data.

  As described above, the effect lottery switches the content of the effect only by the control processing of the peripheral control board 1510, and does not affect the game itself. However, by enabling the effect lottery in this way, it is possible to realize more various effects than the types of commands output from the main control board 1310, and to enhance the interest.

[18-4-3. Overview of sound output control]
Next, the function of the sound module that controls the output of sound will be described. FIG. 316 is an explanatory diagram showing functions of the sound module 5500 of the present embodiment. The sound module 5500 receives an instruction from the scheduler execution unit 5060, executes the process specified by the function included in the scheduler data, and outputs a sound. The sound module 5500 can receive requests from a plurality of schedulers 5502 and perform processing. Each scheduler 5502 is provided in association with a sound layer for voice. Each scheduler 5502 is provided with a work 5507 for operation management. The contents of the work 5507 will be described later.

  When the scheduler execution unit 5060 specifies the voice operation number based on the scheduler control information, the scheduler execution unit 5060 refers to the voice operation number table and specifies scheduler data 5505 to be executed. The voice action number table is a table in which a sound pointer and a sound layer are associated with a voice action number. In the present embodiment, the voice operation number corresponds to the storage address of the voice operation number table. Although any identification information can be used for the voice action number, the capacity of the voice action number table is reduced and the processing load when referring to the table is reduced by making it correspond to the storage address as in the case of the production number described above. There is an advantage of enabling.

  The sound pointer designates the storage address of the scheduler data 5505. In the present embodiment, the address SA1 is stored in the sound pointer [1].

  The scheduler data 5505 is composed of functions and parameters. Functions used in the scheduler data 5505 for controlling sound output will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  In the example shown in FIG. 316, a “call” function is defined at the address SA2. The scheduler execution unit 5060 executes a series of blocks after the address SA31 (not shown), and then processes the address SA3 next to the address SA2.

  At address SA3, phrase playback is defined. The scheduler execution unit 5060 reads phrase data 5508 corresponding to the phrase number 00H specified by the parameter, and reproduces it.

  An example of the structure of the phrase data 5508 is shown on the right side of FIG. The phrase number is identification information attached to each phrase data. In this embodiment, arbitrary identification information can be used, but the storage address of the phrase data 5508 may be used as the phrase number. In this case, the phrase number can be omitted from the phrase data 5508.

  The channel is an output channel designated during phrase playback. The left and right pan pots and the upper and lower pan pots are the left / right / up / down output balance of each speaker provided in the gaming machine. The volume is an output volume. The song number is an identification number of the sound to be reproduced. When the music number is notified to the sound source built-in VDP 1540a, the sound source built-in VDP 1540a reads sound source data corresponding to the music number from the liquid crystal and sound ROM 1540b and reproduces the sound. The loop is a designation as to whether or not to reproduce the sound repeatedly. Stereo is a designation of whether or not to output in stereo.

  Each scheduler 5502 is associated with a work 5507 for operation management. The work 5507 stores various information shown in the figure. The operation state indicates whether each layer is operating. The voice number represents the number of the scheduler data 5505 in operation. In the present embodiment, the start address of the scheduler data 5505 is used. The sound pointer is an address of scheduler data 5505 executed by the scheduler 5502. In the example shown in FIG. 316, as the process proceeds, the value of the sound pointer sequentially shifts to SA2 and SA3. The timer value represents a waiting time until the next function is executed. It is set when the waiting time is specified by the scheduler data 5505, and is subtracted sequentially as time passes. The sound module 5500 executes the next function when this value becomes zero.

  The number of call nestings and the number of loop nestings represents the number of nestings of calls and loops that are specified in a multiple manner by the scheduler data 5505 and the phrase number. That is, for example, when the scheduler data 5505 of another address is called by the “call” function (second call) in the processing after the address SA31 called by the “call” function (first call) of the address SA2, the call nest is performed. The number is 2. When the second call is finished and returned to the first call, the number of call nests is reduced to one. The same applies to the loop. The call return address is a return address from the call destination and is provided according to the number of call nesting. The loop start address is the start address of the loop range, and the loop count is the number of loop iterations. The loop head address or the like is provided according to the number of loop nests.

[18-4-4. Overview of lamp output control]
Next, the function of the lamp module that controls the output of the lamp will be described. FIG. 317 is an explanatory diagram showing functions of the lamp module 5600 of the present embodiment. The lamp module 5600 receives an instruction from the scheduler execution unit 5060, executes the process specified by the function included in the scheduler data, and performs lamp output, that is, lamp lighting / flashing control. Similarly to the sound module 5500, the lamp module 5600 can receive requests from a plurality of schedulers 5602 and perform processing. Each scheduler 5602 is provided in association with a lamp layer for lamps. Each scheduler 5602 is provided with a work 5603 for operation management. The contents of the work 5603 will be described later.

  When the scheduler execution unit 5060 specifies the lamp operation number based on the scheduler control information, the scheduler execution unit 5060 refers to the lamp operation number table and specifies scheduler data 5601 to be executed. The lamp operation number table is a table in which a lamp pointer and a lamp layer are associated with a lamp operation number. In the present embodiment, the lamp operation number corresponds to the storage address of the lamp operation number table. Although any identification information can be used for the lamp operation number, as in the case of the production number described above, using the storage address reduces the capacity of the lamp operation number table and the processing load when the table is referenced. There is an advantage of making it possible.

  The lamp pointer designates the storage address of the scheduler data 5601. In the present embodiment, the address LA1 is stored in the lamp pointer [1].

  The scheduler data 5505 is composed of functions and parameters, similarly to the effect data (FIG. 315). A function used in the scheduler data 5505 for controlling the lamp will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the example shown in FIG. 317, a “call” function is defined at the address LA2. The scheduler execution unit 5060 executes a series of blocks after the address LA31 (not shown) and then processes the address LA3 next to the address LA2.

  In the address LA3, gradation pattern setting is defined. The scheduler execution unit 5060 sets the gradation pattern data 5606 stored at the address LA11 specified by the parameter. Each of the lamp schedulers 5602 is provided with a gradation scheduler 5604 associated with it. The lamps are turned on with the designated gradation data 1 and when the time designated by the timer value has elapsed, the gradation data 2 is used. Lights up. Here, an example in which two kinds of gradation data are designated is shown, but even when three or more kinds of gradation data are designated, the lamp is turned on while sequentially switching the gradation data at the time interval of the timer value. By preparing a plurality of gradation pattern settings after address LA12, it is possible to light the lamp with various gradation patterns while changing the timer value for switching between gradation data. It is also possible to provide a loop in the gradation pattern data. When the gradation scheduler 5604 executes a series of processes at the addresses LA11 to LA1n, the lighting of the lamp is terminated. The ramp scheduler 5602 returns to the processing of the address LA3 of the scheduler data 5601 and executes the processing of the next address until it reaches the stop (address LAn).

  Each scheduler 5602 is associated with a work 5603 for operation management. The work 5603 stores various information shown in the figure. The scheduler status indicates whether the scheduler is active. The operation pattern number represents the number of the scheduler data 5601 in operation. In this embodiment, the head address of the scheduler data 5601 is used. The scheduler timer represents a waiting time until the next function is executed. It is set when the waiting time is specified by the scheduler data, and is subtracted sequentially as time passes. The lamp performs the next function when this value reaches zero. The gradation data timer represents a waiting time until the next gradation data is executed when the gradation pattern data 5606 is executed. In the example shown in FIG. 317, when the gradation data specified by the address LA11 is executed, the gradation data timer shifts from the gradation data 1 to the gradation data 2 when the timer value set in the gradation data timer becomes 0. When the timer value becomes 0 again, the processing at the address LA11 is terminated and the processing proceeds to the processing at the address LA12.

  The ramp pointer is an address of scheduler data 5601 executed by the scheduler 5602. In the example shown in FIG. 317, as the process proceeds, the value of the ramp pointer sequentially shifts to LA1, LA2, and LA3. The gradation data pointer is an address of gradation pattern data 5606 executed by the gradation scheduler 5604. In the example in the figure, as the processing proceeds, the value of the gradation data pointer sequentially shifts to LA11 and LA12. The loop count is the loop repeat count, and the loop head address is the head address of the loop range. As with sound, you may allow loops to be nested.

[18-4-5. Overview of drive unit control]
Next, the function of the driving device module 5700 that controls the operation of the driving device will be described. The driving device is, for example, a stepping motor. Since the control is the same as that of the lamp module 5600, the illustration is omitted. The driving device module 5700 receives an instruction from the scheduler execution unit 5060, executes processing designated by the function included in the scheduler data, and controls the operation of the driving device. The driving device module 5700 can also receive requests from a plurality of schedulers and perform processing.

  The control items of the drive device include, for example, movement amount (stepping motor rotation step angle), movement time, movement speed (motor rotation speed), excitation method, trapezoidal drive, rotation direction, and the like. In addition, an instruction to perform a return operation to return to the origin position or an instruction to stop the mechanical end (stop in a state where the drive device is energized to a limit position of the movable range when the movable range of the drive device is mechanically limited). included. In the trapezoidal drive, the rotation speed is changed at a predetermined angular acceleration instead of changing the speed in a step function when starting and stopping the rotation.

  The scheduler data is composed of functions and parameters. The functions used in the scheduler data for controlling the driving device will be described later with reference to FIG.

[18-5. function]
In the above, the example which uses a function in the module used for presentation control was demonstrated. Here, other functions will be described. 318 to 320 are diagrams showing examples of functions in the effect control of the gaming machine according to the present embodiment. As described above, functions are grouped into sequence control, lamp, sound, motor, and user group. Hereinafter, functions belonging to each group will be described.

[18-5-1. Function details (sequence control)]
The functions belonging to the sequence control group are mainly functions for controlling the flow of effects. FIG. 318 shows an example of a sequence control function. The outline of each function will be described below.

  “STOP” is a function representing the end of scheduler data. “NOP” is a wait function that waits for a time corresponding to the number of executions by specifying the number of executions as a parameter. The time corresponding to the number of executions differs depending on the processing cycle for executing the “NOP” function. In the case of execution in the frame cycle, one frame is approximately 33.334 milliseconds in the present embodiment. If 30 is specified, the operation waits for about 1 second. If the execution is performed in a cycle of 1 ms, if the number of executions is specified as 30, the operation waits for about 30 ms. “NOP_F_VALUE” uses the number of executions (number of frames), scheduler memory number, mask value, and comparison value as parameters. When the conditions based on the scheduler memory number, mask value, and comparison value are satisfied, the “NOP_F_VALUE” function is terminated. If not satisfied, this is a conditional wait function that waits for a time corresponding to the number of executions.

  “MEMW” is a function that uses the target scheduler work number and value as parameters, and writes a specified value in the corresponding scheduler work area. “LOOPST” is a function for performing repetitive processing (loop), specifies the top of the loop, and sets the number of loops as a parameter. When “0” is set as the number of loops, an infinite loop is set. “LOOP” is a function for designating the end of repetitive processing (loop).

  “RET” is a function for returning the processing to the calling block (function data). The pointer value saved by the “call” function is set in the effect management table. “CALL” is the above-described “call” function, which executes processing from a specified address (block), and sets information for specifying a call destination such as an address value or a label as a parameter. In “CALL”, the pointer value of the function to be executed next is saved, and the address of the call destination is set in the effect management pointer. Then, after executing the call destination process, the address saved by the “RET” function described above is set in the effect management pointer, and the process returns to the previous process.

  “SUBC” selects a process to be called (block to be executed) using the scheduler work number value as an index based on the target scheduler work number and branch table specified in the parameters, and executes the selected process. That is, the “call” function is executed based on the designated condition. A specific example using “SUBC” will be described later with reference to FIG. When the callee process is completed by the “SUBC” function, the process returns to the caller process (the process next to the “SUBC” function).

  “SUBJ” selects a process to be called (block to be executed) using the scheduler work number value as an index based on the target scheduler work number and table specified in the parameters, and executes the selected process. That is, the “JUMP” function described later is executed based on the designated condition. A specific example using “SUBJ” will be described later with reference to FIG. The process of the call destination is continued as it is without returning to the process of the caller that executed the “SUBJ” function. “JUMP” sets the address designated by the parameter to the effect management pointer, and continues processing from the designated address or label.

  “REQ” is a function for starting another scheduler specified by a parameter. A specific example using “REQ” will be described later with reference to FIG. “REQF”, like “REQ”, is a function for starting another scheduler specified by the parameter, and other scheduler data is overwritten until the overwrite prohibition time specified by the parameter elapses. It is prohibited to start. In “REQ”, control by a plurality of scheduler data can be executed in parallel. On the other hand, “REQF” can be executed independently for a specified period of processing of scheduler data to be executed. For example, in the case of initialization of an accessory, other scheduler data for operating the accessory is executed and controlled. It can be prevented from becoming impossible.

[18-5-2. Function details (lamp)]
The functions belonging to the lamp group are functions for controlling the flow of the lamp effect. FIG. 319 shows an example of functions related to lamp control, and an outline of each function will be described.

  “HPLAY” is a function for executing lamp gradation data reproduction processing for lighting a lamp based on gradation data designated by a parameter. In “HPLAY”, resetting is performed even when the lamp is being reproduced with the same gradation data, and reproduction of the lamp is started from the beginning when the function is executed. The gradation data is designated by setting the gradation pattern data address, and the gradation data timer in the work 5603 is cleared to instruct execution of the gradation data.

  “KPLAY” is a function for executing lamp gradation data reproduction processing for lighting the lamp based on the gradation data specified by the parameter, similarly to “HPLAY”. In “KPLAY”, when the lamp is reproduced with the same gradation data, the reproduction of the lamp being executed is continued without being reset.

  “HPLAY2” is a function for executing a ramp gradation data reproduction process by specifying a layer in addition to gradation data by a parameter. The processing is the same as “HPLAY”. “KPLAY2” is a function for executing a ramp gradation data reproduction process by designating a layer in addition to gradation data by a parameter, similarly to “HPLAY2”. The processing is the same as “KPLAY”.

  “HPLAY” and “KPLAY” execute a specified lamp gradation data reproduction process for reproducing the lamp gradation data designated by the parameter. When the lamp gradation data has already been reproduced, the reproduction of the lamp gradation data is interrupted at the time of reproduction by “HPLAY”, and the same lamp gradation data is reproduced from the head, and the reproduction of the lamp gradation data at the time of reproduction by “KPLAY” Continue playing without interruption. That is, even if the same lamp gradation data is executed using “KPLAY” while the lamp gradation data is being reproduced, no particular processing is executed.

  In addition to the function of “HPLAY” described above, “HPLAY2” is the same as “HPLAY” except that the layer for reproducing the ramp gradation data is designated by the parameter and the layer is designated by the parameter.

  In addition to the function of “KPLAY” described above, “KPLAY2” is the same as “KPLAY” except that a layer for reproducing ramp gradation data is specified by a parameter and a layer is specified by a parameter.

[18-5-3. Function details (Sound)
The functions belonging to the sound (sound) group are functions for controlling sound output. 319 and 320 show examples of functions related to sound control, and an outline of each function will be described.

  “SPLAY” is a function for executing a phrase reproduction process of outputting a sound based on a phrase number designated by a parameter. In “SPLAY”, the sound is reset even when the sound of the same phrase number is being reproduced, and the sound reproduction is started from the beginning when the function is executed. Similar to “SPLAY”, “SXPLAY” is a function for executing a phrase reproduction process that outputs a sound based on a phrase number specified by a parameter. In “SXPLAY”, when the sound of the same phrase number is being reproduced, the reproduction of the sound is continued without being reset. “STOP_PH” is a function for executing phrase stop processing for stopping sound reproduction based on a phrase number specified by a parameter.

  “PAN_PH” uses the transition time and panpot end coordinate position specified by the parameter from the audio output coordinate position at the start of the “PAN_PH” function execution for the phrase being played specified by the parameter, and the panpot end This is a function for moving the audio output coordinate position in the transition time designated up to the coordinate position. “PAN_PH2” can specify the pan-pot start coordinate position with a parameter in addition to the function of the “PAN_PH” function. Similar to the “PAN_PH” function, the voice output coordinates of the target phrase at the start of function execution This is a function for moving the audio output coordinate position in the transition time designated from the panpot start coordinate position designated by the parameter to the panpot end coordinate position.

  “VOL_FADE_PH” is specified from the volume value at the start of the “VOL_FADE_PH” function to the fade end volume value using the transition time and fade end volume value specified by the parameter. This function is used to increase / decrease the volume value at the transition time. “VOL_FADE_PH2” can be used to specify a fade start volume value with a parameter in addition to the function of the “VOL_FADE_PH” function. As with the “VOL_FADE_PH” function, the volume value of the target phrase is set to the parameter when the function is started. This function is used to increase / decrease the volume value during the transition time specified from the fade start volume value specified in step 1 to the fade end volume value.

  “VOL_PH” is a function for increasing / decreasing the volume value of the phrase being reproduced designated by the parameter using the volume value designated by the parameter. “VOL_MUTE_ON_PH” is a function for muting the volume of the phrase specified by the parameter. “VOL_MUTE_OFF_PH” is a function for canceling mute of the volume of the phrase specified by the parameter.

  “SCPLAY” and “SXCPLAY” execute a designated channel music reproduction process for reproducing the phrase corresponding to the phrase number designated in the parameter on the designated channel. When the same phrase has already been reproduced, the reproduction of the phrase is interrupted and reproduced from the beginning when reproducing by “SCPLAY”, and the reproduction of the phrase is continued without interruption when reproducing by “SXCPLAY”. In other words, even if the same phrase is executed using “SXCPLAY” while the phrase is being reproduced, no particular processing is executed.

  “PAN_CH” performs a panpot for the phrase (ch), whereas “PAN_PH” performs the panpot for the phrase. Ch is specified by a parameter and the phrase changes to ch. Other than “PAN_PH”, the process does not change. With regard to “PAN_CH2”, “PAN_PH2” described above performs a panpot for a phrase, whereas panning for a ch is performed, except that ch is specified by a parameter and the phrase is changed to “PAN_PH2”. The process does not change.

  “VOL_FADE_CH” performs fading for ch, whereas “VOL_FADE_PH” performs fading for the phrase. “Ch_FADE_PH” is “VOL_FADE_PH” except that ch is specified by a parameter and the phrase changes to ch. Processing does not change. As for “VOL_FADE_CH2”, “VOL_FADE_PH2” described above performs the fade for the phrase, whereas the fade is performed for the ch. “Ch_FADE_PH2” except that the ch is specified by the parameter and the phrase is changed to the ch. Processing does not change.

  “VOL_CH” increases or decreases the volume value for the phrase, whereas “VOL_PH” increases or decreases the volume value for the ch. Ch is specified by a parameter and the phrase changes to ch. Otherwise, the process is the same as “VOL_PH”. Regarding “VOL_MUTE_ON_CH”, the above-mentioned “VOL_MUTE_ON_PH” performs mute for the phrase, but mute for the ch. Ch is specified by the parameter and the phrase changes to ch. Otherwise, the process is the same as “VOL_MUTE_ON_PH”. With respect to “VOL_MUTE_OFF_CH”, “VOL_MUTE_OFF_PH” described above cancels mute (mute) for a phrase, whereas mute is canceled for a ch. Ch is a phrase specified by a parameter. The process is the same as “VOL_MUTE_OFF_PH” except that is changed to ch.

[18-5-4. Function details (motor)]
The function belonging to the motor group is a function for controlling the output of the motor or solenoid. FIG. 320 shows an example of functions related to motor control, and an outline of each function will be described.

  “MPLAY” executes a motor regeneration process for causing the motor to reproduce an operation based on the motor data number specified in the parameter. “MMPLAY” executes a motor regeneration process for causing the motor designated by the parameter to reproduce an operation based on the motor data number. “SOL_ON” executes a solenoid ON process for causing the solenoid to perform an operation based on the solenoid data number specified in the parameter. “SOL_OFF” executes a solenoid OFF process for causing the solenoid to stop the operation based on the solenoid data number specified in the parameter.

[18-5-5. Function details (user)]
The function belonging to the user group is a function for executing the control not belonging to the group described so far. FIG. 320 shows an example of these functions, and an outline of each function will be described.

  “MBUF_SET” executes a motor output buffer scheduler work value setting process for setting a scheduler work value in the motor output buffer. “COMMAND” and “COMMAND0” are processes for issuing commands from within the scheduler. “COMMAND” issues a command to the sound source built-in VDP 1540a and the like. For example, a command for starting drawing is issued to the liquid crystal display device. On the other hand, the command issued by “COMMAND0” is analyzed by the command analysis module 5200 and performs the same operation as the main command. “MEMC” executes scheduler memory copy processing for copying the contents of the work area of the scheduler being executed to the work area of another scheduler.

[18-6. Scheduler]
Next, a scheduler that calls each function will be described. The scheduler is used to execute scheduler data, which is a data string in which functions necessary for executing a series of processes are defined in order of execution. One or more schedulers are provided for each purpose of management, but all functions can be executed by all schedulers. Functions related to ramps can be executed by sound schedulers, There is no difference other than the processing cycle (frame or 1 ms) in a plurality of schedulers that can execute a sound function for each application, and all functions can be executed in a mixed manner. The number of schedulers to be executed is not limited, and a plurality of registered schedulers can be executed simultaneously.

  FIG. 321 is a diagram illustrating an example of the scheduler definition of this embodiment. The scheduler can be classified for convenience according to the state transition and the device to be controlled. Hereinafter, an outline of typical types of schedulers will be described.

  First, an example of a scheduler related to state transition will be described. There are special figure state schedulers (special figure states SCH and TOK_SCH) for executing main state transition scheduler data for controlling the transition of the game state of the entire game. In the effect control on the peripheral control board 1510, the transition of the gaming state is controlled based on the command received from the main control board 1310. The processing cycle of the special figure state scheduler is 1f (frame).

  There are also sub-state schedulers (sub-states SCH and SUB_SCH) for executing sub-state scheduler data for controlling transition of internal states (sub-internal states) in the peripheral control board 1510. The internal state changes when a predetermined condition is established, for example, when the player operates an effect button, wins an effect execution lottery, or changes to another state when a predetermined time elapses from the start of fluctuation. To do. The processing cycle of the sub-state scheduler is 1f (frame).

  In the scheduler for sounds, the background for controlling the output of sound output in accordance with the background display and the display of changes in the design, the scheduler for executing the design sound scheduler data (SND_SCH01), and output when the notice effect is executed. There is a scheduler (SND_SCH02, 03) for controlling the output of sound and a scheduler (SND_SCH04) for controlling the output of sound at the time of advance notice execution by an accessory. The processing cycle of the scheduler for sound is 1f (frame).

  Similarly to the sound-related scheduler, the related scheduler for the lamp includes a background (LMP_SCH01) for executing the background and design lamp scheduler data for controlling the lighting and blinking of the lamp in accordance with the background display and the change display of the design. ), A scheduler (LMP_SCH02, 03) for controlling the lighting / flashing of the lamp when the notice effect is executed, and a scheduler (LMP_SCH04) for controlling the lighting / flashing of the lamp when the notice is executed by an accessory. The processing cycle of the scheduler targeted for the ramp is 1f (frame).

  Also, a scheduler that controls sound and lamps in conjunction with each other is defined. Such a scheduler has a sound / lamp notification layer that outputs sound and lights / flashes the lamp in order to notify the outside of notifications such as ball breakage or ball clogging, and alarms due to abnormality detection by magnetic sensors, etc. There is a scheduler (INF_SCH01 to 03) for executing scheduler data for each layer. In addition, there is a sound / lamp general-purpose scheduler (SNDLMP_SCH01-05) that is used for general purposes in order to execute an effect in which sound output and lamp lighting / flashing are linked. The processing cycle of these schedulers is 1f (frame).

  The scheduler for the motor includes a scheduler (MOTSSYS_SCH) for executing the motor system scheduler data for executing the system operation, and a scheduler for executing the motor ram clear scheduler data for setting the RAM clear ( MOTRAM_SCH), a scheduler (MOTINI_SCH) for executing the motor accessory initialization scheduler data for initializing the arrangement of the accessory, and the motor accessory correction scheduler data for correcting the position of the accessory There is a scheduler (MOTHOS_SCH) and a scheduler (MOT_SCH) for executing an action of an accessory by production or the like.

  The scheduler for executing the action of the accessory by the production etc. is a general-purpose that is used without depending on the scheduler (MOT_SCH01 to 05) for controlling the action of the specific accessory or the kind of the accessory. There is a scheduler (MOT_SCH05 to 10).

  The processing cycle of the scheduler for the motor is 1 ms (milliseconds), which is shorter than the processing cycle of the scheduler for the management of the game state and the sound and the ramp (this embodiment 1f = about 33.334 ms). It has become.

  Note that the number of schedulers that control each target device is fixed in the present embodiment, but the number of schedulers may be controlled so as to dynamically increase or decrease in accordance with the gaming state or notice. Thereby, it becomes possible to start each scheduler without depending on the number or the number of effects provided in the gaming machine, and the restrictions for executing the effects can be reduced.

[18-7. Application example of scheduler data (Production 1)]
The function types used in production control and the outline of the types and functions of schedulers that perform a series of controls by combining these functions have been described above. Specific examples of application of scheduler data and functions will be described below with reference to the drawings. explain.

[18-7-1. Production overview]
FIG. 322A is a diagram illustrating an example of an operation of the accessory controlled using the scheduler data according to the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 322A, the game board 5 of the present embodiment includes a logo character 5001, a star character 5002 (a left star character 5002a, a middle star character 5002b, a right star character 5002c) and a spear character 5003. Is placed.

  The logo accessory 5001 is arranged at the upper left of the game area. When the logo accessory 5001 operates, it drops (moves) from the initial position (upper position) to the intermediate position, and returns to the initial position after the presentation is finished. Further, the logo accessory 5001 can perform an effect of vibrating in the vertical and horizontal directions before and after the movement in addition to the vertical movement.

  The star combination 5002 is arranged above the game area, the left star combination 5002a is arranged on the left side, the middle star combination 5002b is arranged in the center, and the right star combination 5002c is arranged on the right side. Each star object 5002 can operate independently, and one or more star objects 5002 operate at a predetermined timing according to the contents of the production.

  The left star role 5002a moves to the lower left and can move to a position slightly lower left in the center of the game area. Further, the middle star character 5002b moves downward and can move to a position slightly above the center of the game area. The right star role 5002c moves to the lower right, and can move to a position slightly lower right in the center of the game area. Each star character 5002 may stop before moving to the final arrival position, or may return to the middle position and stop after reaching the final arrival position.

  The bonus item 5003 is arranged at the upper center of the game area. The scissors 5003 can be dropped (moved) from an initial position (upper position) to an intermediate position and a lower position. Depending on the player's operation of the production button or the lottery result of the bonus announcement notice production, it moves from the initial position to the middle position, stops temporarily, and then moves to the lower position or moves from the initial position to the lower position at once. An operation mode is set. As with the logo accessory 5001, the saddle accessory 5003 can also produce an effect of vibrating vertically and horizontally before and after movement.

  Next, a description will be given of the flow of a notice effect that is executed with one symbol variation. First, with reference to FIG. 322B, a step-up notice, a button (BTN) cut-in notice, a group notice, a star object notice, and a button (BTN) logo object fall notice will be described. Note that the flow of the notice effect including the 演出 notice effect will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 322B is a diagram for explaining an example of the execution timing of the notice effect executed in a series of change display from the start of change to the stop of the special symbol in this embodiment, and illustrates the scheduler and scheduler data used at this time. is there. In the series of fluctuation display shown in FIG. 322B, a step-up notice and a button (BTN) cut-in notice are executed in the first half of the fluctuation. Then, reach occurs, and in the latter half of the fluctuation, group notice, star character notice, and button (BTN) logo character fall notice are executed. For each notice effect, scheduler data for controlling lamp lighting, sound output, image output, action of an accessory, etc. is executed.

  In the following, a part of scheduler data for executing each notice effect will be extracted, and the functions controlled and configured by the scheduler data will be described. Specifically, the scheduler data “SCH_LMP_YKK_STP” for controlling the lamp in the step-up notice (FIG. 323), the scheduler data “SCH_LMP_YKK_CUT” (FIG. 324) for controlling the lamp in the button cut-in notice, and the star object in the star notice The motor scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA1” (FIGS. 325 to 327) for controlling the operation of 5002 and the motor scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_LGO” (FIG. 328) for controlling the operation of the logo accessory 5001 in the button logo accessory drop notice will be described.

[18-7-2. Lamp control in step-up notice]
In the step-up notice of the present embodiment, control is performed so that the lighting state of a predetermined lamp changes stepwise according to the degree of expectation (the lottery result value of the step-up notice). As shown in FIG. 322B, the step-up notice lamp scheduler data “SCH_LMP_YKK_STP” belongs to the notice group 01 and is driven by the notice group 01 lamp scheduler data scheduler (lamp SCH notice 01) “LMP_SCH02”.

  FIG. 323 is a diagram for explaining the contents of the scheduler data “SCH_LMP_YKK_STP” for performing the lighting / flashing control of the lamp in the step-up notice of the present embodiment.

  When the scheduler data “SCH_LMP_YKK_STP” is started, first, a function “SUBC: YKK_STP: TBL_LMP_STP” is executed. This function is a scheduler work area index branch call “SUBC”, and is executed using the target scheduler work number “YKK_STP” and the step-up advance branch call address table “TBL_LMP_STP” as parameters.

  The scheduler execution unit 5060 refers to the designated step-up advance branch call address table “TBL_LMP_STP”, and identifies the address of the scheduler data that is the branch destination based on the contents of the step-up advance work area “YKK_STP”. In the step-up advance notice work area “YKK_STP”, a lottery result value of the step-up advance notice is stored and corresponds to the index (address) of each record in the step-up advance branch call address table “TBL_LMP_STP”.

  The step-up notice branch call address table “TBL_LMP_STP” stores the address of the step-up notice lamp scheduler data. Specifically, SUBC_NON, SUBC_LMP_STP1, SUBC_LMP_STP2, SUBC_LMP_STP3, and SUBC_LMP_STP4 indicating the address of the scheduler data are stored. Note that SUBC_NON is a dummy call address indicating that no processing is performed, and by preparing a dummy call address, it is possible to turn off the lamp when the preliminary announcement is not won. . SUBC_LMP_STP1, SUBC_LMP_STP2, SUBC_LMP_STP3, and SUBC_LMP_STP4 are addresses of scheduler data for executing a step-up notice corresponding to the step-up number (1 to 4).

  In this embodiment, the step-up notice work area “YKK_STP” stores the lottery result value corresponding to the step-up notice with the number of step-ups of 4, and the scheduler data “SUBC_LMP_STP4” is executed. The scheduler data “SUBC_LMP_STP4” designates gradation pattern data (PTA_STP_PT1 to 4) corresponding to each step and executes a ramp gradation data reproduction process (KPLAY), and waits for 90 frames (about 3 seconds) for each step. Execute the process. Thereby, in each step, the lamp is lit and blinks with a corresponding gradation pattern for 3 seconds. At this time, the scheduler data “SUBC_LMP_STP4” is driven using the background and symbol lamp scheduler data scheduler “LMP_SCH01”.

  Thereafter, the function “RET” is executed in the scheduler data “SUBC_LMP_STP4”, thereby returning to the processing of the caller (scheduler data “SUBC_LMP_YKK_STP”). Further, the function “STOP” is executed, and the scheduler data “SUBC_LMP_YKK_STP” is terminated.

  In this embodiment, the step-up notice work area “YKK_STP” stores the lottery result value corresponding to the step-up notice with the number of step-ups of 4, and the scheduler data “SUBC_LMP_STP4” is executed. The scheduler data “SUBC_LMP_STP4” designates ramp gradation pattern data (PTA_STP_PT1 to 4) corresponding to each step-up and executes a ramp gradation data reproduction process (KPLAY), and 90 frames (about 3 seconds) for each step. The wait process is executed. Thereby, in each step, the lamp is lit and blinked with a corresponding lamp gradation pattern for 3 seconds. At this time, the scheduler data “SUBC_LMP_STP4” is driven by using the notice group 01 lamp scheduler data scheduler “LMP_SCH02”.

  Thereafter, the function “RET” is executed in the scheduler data “SUBC_LMP_STP4”, thereby returning to the next process of the caller (scheduler data “SUBC_LMP_YKK_STP”). Further, the function “STOP” is executed, and the scheduler data “SCH_LMP_YKK_STP” is terminated.

  The step-up notice has been described above. Here, functions that can be realized by the scheduler work area index branch call “SUBC” will be described. First, it is possible to call the scheduler data for the lottery result in one action for a plurality of lottery results based on the dynamically rewritten work memory contents (in this embodiment, the notice lottery result value). is there. Depending on the content of the advance notice, there are cases where the range of the lottery result value is several hundreds, and in the case of two branches such as an IF sentence, the number of scheduler data for judgment becomes too complex and management of correction and the like becomes difficult. On the other hand, “SUBC” solves the above problem easily by using the contents of the work memory as an index. In this embodiment, the number of work memory and the number of call address tables for branching is one. However, a complicated conditional branch may be processed with one action by using a plurality of both. Secondly, since the format is “CALL”, it is possible to execute common scheduler data after executing the “SUBC” function, and it is not necessary to describe the number of branches of the scheduler data after the branch. By describing one scheduler data, the same processing can be executed after all branches. Further, in order to deal with a problem in the program, when the value of the work memory exceeds the number of elements in the call address table for branching, the “SUBC” function may be terminated without performing branch processing.

  That is, the function “SUBC” can select the scheduler data of the branch destination based on the value stored in the work area from the branch destination held in advance in a table format, and can call the selected scheduler data. In simple conditional branches, it is necessary to define conditions according to the number of branches and set scheduler data for each branch destination. However, in the function “SUBC”, branch destinations can be easily added or deleted. This makes it easy to add and change production contents and improve development efficiency.

[18-7-3. Lamp control in button cut-in notice]
The button cut-in notice of this embodiment is started in the first half of the fluctuation, and the notice is executed to the end by accepting an operation button operation input by the player within a predetermined period. Further, similarly to the step-up notice, the lighting state of a predetermined lamp is controlled in accordance with the degree of expectation (button cut-in notice lottery result value).

  The button cut-in notice belongs to the notice group 02, and the lamp scheduler data “SCH_LMP_YKK_CUT” is driven by the notice group 02 lamp scheduler data scheduler (lamp SCH notice 02) “LMP_SCH03” as shown in FIG. 322B. Since it belongs to a notice group different from the step-up notice and the scheduler data is driven by another scheduler, the notice can be executed in parallel.

  FIG. 324 is a view for explaining the contents of the scheduler data “SCH_LMP_YKK_CUT” for controlling the lamp in the button cut-in notification according to this embodiment.

  When the scheduler data “SCH_LMP_YKK_CUT” is started, the function “KPLAY: LMP_SCH03: PTA_CUT_STA” is first executed, and then the wait process “NOP: 30” for 30 frames (about 1 second) is executed. Accordingly, the designated lamp is turned on (flashes) for one second based on the gradation pattern data “PTA_CUT_STA”. At this time, the ramp scheduler “LMP_SCH03” is used.

  Subsequently, a loop process for 3 seconds is executed in order to receive an input of an effect button from the player. Specifically, the function “LOOPST” is executed with the parameter loop count set to 90 times. Since one frame corresponds to one frame, 90 loops corresponds to 3 seconds. In the loop processing, the function from “LOOPST” indicating the start of the loop to the function “LOOP” indicating the end of the loop is executed a maximum number of times. Therefore, the function “SUBC: YKK_BTN: TBL_LMP_CUB” is executed a maximum of 90 times.

  The function “SUBC: YKK_BTN: TBL_LMP_CUB” will be described. The scheduler work area index branch call “SUBC” is executed using the target scheduler work number “YKK_BTN” and the button cut-in advance branch call address table “TBL_LMP_CUB” as parameters.

  The scheduler execution unit 5060 refers to the button cut-in advance branch call address table “TBL_LMP_CUB” and identifies the start address of the scheduler data to be branched based on the contents of the button ON_OFF work area “YKK_BTN”. The button ON_OFF work area “YKK_BTN” stores the operation state of the effect button. When the effect button is not operated, “0: button OFF” is displayed. When the effect button is operated, “1: button ON” is displayed. Is set. The operation state of the effect button corresponds to the index (address) of each record in the button cut-in advance branch call address table “TBL_LMP_CUB”. Further, the contents of the button ON_OFF work area “YKK_BTN” are rewritten by a button processing program outside the scheduler data.

  While the button ON_OFF work area “YKK_BTN” is set to “0: Button OFF”, the lamp scheduler data “SUBC_LMP_CUT_BTNOFF” is selected in the button cut-in advance branch call address table “TBL_LMP_CUB”. The The content of the scheduler data “SUBC_LMP_CUT_BTNOFF” is only the function “RET”, and returns immediately after the function “SUBC: YKK_BTN: TBL_LMP_CUB” of the caller scheduler data “SCH_LMP_YKK_CUT” (function “LOOP”). Therefore, if the input of the effect button is not detected during the 90 loop processes, the loop process is exited, the function “STOP” is executed, and the scheduler data “SCH_LMP_YKK_CUT” ends.

  On the other hand, when “1: button ON” is set in the button ON_OFF work area “YKK_BTN”, the lamp scheduler data “SUBC_LMP_CUT_BTNON” when the button cut-in advance notice button is ON in the button cut-in advance branch call address table “TBL_LMP_CUB”. Is selected. The content of the scheduler data “SUBC_LMP_CUT_BTNON” is the function “SUBJ: YKK_CUT: TBL_LMP_CUT”, the scheduler work area index branch jump “SUBJ” is the target scheduler work number “YKK_CUT”, and the button cut-in advance branch jump address table “TBL_LMP_ Is executed as a parameter.

  The button cut-in notice branch jump address table “TBL_LMP_CUT” stores the address of button cut-in notice lamp scheduler data. Specifically, SUBJ_NON, SUBJ_LMP_CUT1, SUBJ_LMP_CUT2, SUBJ_LMP_CUT3, and SUBJ_LMP_CUT4 indicating the address of the scheduler data are stored. Note that SUBJ_NON is a dummy call address indicating that no processing is performed, and by preparing a dummy call address, it is possible to turn off the lamp when the preliminary announcement is not won. . SUBJ_LMP_CUT1, SUBJ_LMP_CUT2, SUBJ_LMP_CUT3, and SUBJ_LMP_CUT4 are addresses of scheduler data for executing a lamp lighting pattern (color, lighting time) corresponding to a lottery result value of button cut-in notice.

  In the present embodiment, the button cut-in notice work area “YKK_CUT” stores a lottery result value indicating the button cut-in notice pattern (PTN) 4, and the scheduler data “SUBJ_LMP_CUT 4” is executed. In the scheduler data “SUBJ_LMP_CUT4”, first, the lamp is lit red (gradation data pattern “PTA_CUT_RED”) by the ramp gradation data reproduction process (KPLAY), and then the 150-frame wait process is performed for 5 seconds. Let At this time, the scheduler data is driven using the ramp scheduler “LMP_SCH03”. At this time, the scheduler data “SUBC_LMP_STP4” is driven using the notice group 02 lamp scheduler data scheduler “LMP_SCH03”.

  Since the call of the button cut-in warning lamp scheduler data “SUBJ_LMP_CUT4” is not CALL but JUMP, the execution of the button cut-in warning lamp scheduler data ends with the function “STOP” and returns to the calling scheduler “SUBC_LMP_YKK_CUT”. do not do. Therefore, the end of the scheduler “SCH_LMP_YKK_CUT” is performed when the “STOP” function included in the “SCH_LMP_YKK_CUT” is executed, and when the “STOP” function included in the “SUBJ_LMP_CUT4” is executed from the scheduler “SUBJ_LMP_CUT1”. There is.

  The button cut-in notice has been described above. Here, functions that can be realized by the scheduler work area index branch jump “SUBJ” will be described. First, it is possible to call the scheduler data for the lottery result in one action for a plurality of lottery results based on the dynamically rewritten work memory contents (in this embodiment, the notice lottery result value). Depending on the content of the notice, the lottery result value range may be several hundreds, and the bifurcation like the IF statement increases the number of scheduler data for judgment, making it difficult to manage corrections. . In “SUBJ”, the above problem is easily solved by using the contents of the work memory as an index. In this embodiment, the number of work memory and the number of call address tables for branching is one. However, a complicated conditional branch may be processed with one action by using a plurality of both. Secondly, since the format is “JUMP”, all different processes can be executed depending on the branched scheduler data after the “SUBJ” function is executed. Similarly to “SUBC”, in order to deal with a problem in the program, if the value of the work memory exceeds the number of elements in the call address table for branching, the branch processing is not performed and the “SUBC” function is terminated. You may do it.

  That is, the function “SUBJ” selects the branch destination scheduler data based on the value stored in the work area from the branch destination stored in the table format in advance, like the function “SUBC”, and the selected scheduler data. It is possible to transition the processing to the above, and the same effect as the function “SUBC” can be obtained.

  In addition, unlike the function “SUBC”, the function “SUBJ” continuously executes the process of the schedule data of the call destination and does not return to the process of the call source, so it is suitable for executing the process alternatively. ing. For example, when the content of the effect to be executed differs depending on whether or not the effect button is operated, it is possible to suppress the effect from being executed redundantly by using the function “SUBJ”. On the other hand, since the function “SUBC” returns to the process based on the scheduler data of the caller, it is possible to execute the common post-process after executing the process of the callee, thereby simplifying the process.

  Therefore, by using the function “SUBC” and the function “SUBJ”, it is possible to simplify the structure of the scheduler data and make it possible to flexibly cope with the processing branch. Furthermore, it becomes easy to cope with additions and changes simply by changing the branch destination of the table format, so that development efficiency is improved and it is easy to cope with changes in the specifications of the gaming machine.

[18-7-4. Motor control for star role notice]
Subsequently, the control of the star object notice executed in the second half of the change in the present embodiment will be described. When reach occurs in the change display of the special symbol and shifts to the latter half of the change, a group notice is generated, and a star object notice is executed independently of the group notice. In the star role announcement, a plurality of types of star roles 5002 (in this embodiment, three types of left star role 5002a, middle star role 5002b, and right star role 5002c) that can be operated by a driving body (motor) are provided. By operating, the expected degree of symbol variation is notified. Specifically, the higher the number of appearances of the star object 5002, the higher the degree of expectation.

  As shown in FIG. 322B, the star role notice in this embodiment is executed by driving the star role notice motor scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA1” by the motor scheduler “MOT_SCH02” (left star role scheduler data scheduler). Is done. In the gaming machine of this embodiment, a dedicated scheduler (MOT_SCH02 to 04) for operating the star object 5002 is provided in advance, but a general-purpose scheduler (MOT_SCH05 to 09) can also be used. .

  FIG. 325 to FIG. 327 are diagrams for explaining the contents of scheduler data for performing motor control in the star combination notice of the present embodiment. FIG. 325 is the entire flow and scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA1” for controlling the left star role 5002a, FIG. 326 is scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA2” for controlling the right star role 5002c, and FIG. 327 is the scheduler for controlling the middle star role 5002b. It is a figure explaining data "SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA3".

  When the scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA1” is started, first, a function “SUBC: YKK_HYA: TBL_MOT_HYA” is executed. This function is a scheduler work area index branch call “SUBC”, and is executed by using the target scheduler work number “YKK_HYA” and the star object notice branch call address table “TBL_MOT_HYA” as parameters.

  The scheduler execution unit 5060 refers to the designated star role forking branch call address table “TBL_MOT_HYA”, and specifies the address of the scheduler data to be branched based on the contents of the star role forcing work area “YKK_HYA”. . The star role notice work area “YKK_HYA” stores the lottery result value of the star role notice, and corresponds to the index (address) of each record of the star role notice branch call address table “TBL_MOT_HYA”.

  In the star role notice branch call address table “TBL_MOT_HYA”, the address of the star role appearance scheduler data is stored. Specifically, SUBC_NON, SUBC_MOT_HYA1, SUBC_MOT_HYA2, and SUBC_MOT_HYA3 indicating the address of the scheduler data are stored. Note that SUBC_NON is a dummy call address indicating that no processing is performed, and by preparing a dummy call address, it is possible to make the accessory non-operating when the preliminary announcement is not won. Yes. SUBC_MOT_HYA1, SUBC_MOT_HYA2, and SUBC_MOT_HYA3 are addresses of scheduler data for executing the star role notice. Specifically, SUBC_MOT_HYA1 is only the left star role 5002a, SUBC_MOT_HYA2 is the left star role 500c, SUBC_MOT_HYA3 is scheduler data for operating all three types of star objects 5002.

  In the present embodiment, a lottery result value indicating that a star role notice for causing the left star role 5002a, the middle star role 5002b, and the right star role 5002c to appear in the star role notice work area “YKK_HYA” is executed. “3” is stored, and scheduler data “SUBC_MOT_HYA3” is executed. When only the left star role 5002a is operated, the lottery result value of the star role notice is “1”, and when the left star role 5002a and the right star role 5002c are operated, the lottery of the star role notice is selected. The result value is set to “2”.

  The scheduler data “SUBC_MOT_HYA3” first designates the parameter “PTA_HYA_LEF” indicating the pattern of the appearance action of the left star role 5002a, and executes the function “MPLAY” corresponding to the motor regeneration process. At this time, the function “MPLAY” is executed by the motor scheduler “MOT_SHC02” in which the scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA1” is executed.

  Next, the scheduler execution unit 5060 executes the right star role 5002c appearance scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA2” by the function “REQ”. The function “REQ” is a function for executing the scheduler data specified by the parameter by the scheduler similarly specified by the parameter. Here, the right star role 5002c appearance scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA2” is executed using the right star role 5002c scheduler data scheduler “MOT_SHC03”. Similarly, the function “REQ” executes the middle star role 5002b appearance scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA2” using the middle star role 5002b scheduler data scheduler “MOT_SHC04”. In this embodiment, the motor regeneration process (function “MPLAY”) for operating the right star object 5002c and the middle star object 5002b is executed in the same frame as the motor regeneration process for the left star object 5002a. ing. As described above, the star data 5002 can be controlled in parallel by causing the different schedulers to execute the scheduler data for operating the star objects 5002.

  Subsequently, the scheduler execution unit 5060 executes a wait process “NOP: 300” for 300 frames (10 seconds). During this wait time, the left star role 5002a operates in the designated manner. After the wait process is completed, the function “RET” is executed to return to the caller star role notice motor scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA1”, and the execution of the scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA1” is ended by the function “stop”.

  Next, control of the right star object 5002c will be described with reference to FIG. The right star role 5002c appearance scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA2” is executed by using the right star role 5002c scheduler data scheduler “MOT_SHC03” designated at the time of execution by the function “REQ”.

  When the scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA2” is started, as shown in FIG. 326, the parameter “PTA_HYA_RGT” indicating the appearance mode (pattern) of the right star role 5002c is specified, and the motor regeneration process “MPLAY” is executed. . Subsequently, a wait process “NOP: 300” for 300 frames (10 seconds) is executed. This wait time is the operating time of the right star object 5002c. After completion of the wait process, the process is terminated by executing the function “STOP” without returning to the caller scheduler data process.

  Finally, with reference to FIG. 327, control of the central star object 5002b will be described. The central star role 5002b appearance scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA3” is executed using the central star role 5002b scheduler data scheduler “MOT_SHC04” specified at the time of execution by the function “REQ”.

  When the scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA3” is started, as shown in FIG. 327, the parameter “PTA_HYA_MID” indicating the appearance mode (pattern) of the central star 5002b is specified, and the motor regeneration process “MPLAY” is executed. . Subsequently, a wait process “NOP: 300” for 300 frames (10 seconds) is executed. This wait time becomes the operation time of the middle star object 5002b. After completion of the wait process, the process is terminated by executing the function “STOP” without returning to the caller scheduler data process.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, in the scheduler data for operating the left star role 5002a, the scheduler data for operating the right star role 5002c and the scheduler data for operating the middle star role 5002b are represented by the function “REQ”. It is possible to operate each accessory in parallel by executing using. In other words, the operations of each accessory can be executed in parallel without performing special control by executing individually defined scheduler data as necessary. The advantage of executing scheduler data in parallel is that a single actor action can be described without being aware of other schedulers. Furthermore, when performing a plurality of operations corresponding to the notice pattern with one scheduler, the number of combinations becomes enormous, the scheduler data becomes complicated and the number of data becomes enormous. By calling the scheduler data in parallel, a minimum number of scheduler data can be created and called, thereby enabling easy control. In the present embodiment, an example in which three types of objects are operated in parallel has been described. However, more objects can be executed in parallel if there is no problem in the operation of the objects. As described above, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to operate a plurality of actors in parallel without requiring complicated control, and it is possible to easily realize a variety of effects.

[18-7-5. Motor control in the event of the logo object falling notice]
Next, the control of the logo accessory drop notice executed in the second half of the change in this embodiment will be described. The logo object fall notice is executed independently of the group notice and the star object notice. The logo object fall notice is a notice effect in which the logo object 5001 simulating the logo of the gaming machine falls in the vertical direction in front of the game board side effect display device 1600, and the probability of occurrence of a big hit than usual. Is high.

  As shown in FIG. 322B, the logo character object fall notice of the present embodiment is driven by driving the logo character object fall notice motor scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_LGO” with the motor scheduler “MOT_SCH01” (logo character object scheduler data scheduler). Executed. It should be noted that a general purpose scheduler (MOT_SCH05-09) can operate the logo accessory 5001.

  FIG. 328 is a view for explaining the contents of the scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_LGO” for performing the motor control in the logo accessory fall notice of the present embodiment.

  When the scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_LGO” is started, first, the function “MPLAY: PTA_LGO_GAT” is executed, and then the wait process “NOP: 30” of 30 frames (about 1 second) is executed. Thereby, based on the operation pattern data “PTA_LGO_GAT”, a specified operation is performed for one second. Specifically, the logo accessory 5001 vibrates. At this time, the motor scheduler “MOT_SCH01” is used.

  Subsequently, a loop process for 3 seconds is executed in order to receive an input of an effect button from the player. Specifically, the function “LOOPST” is executed with the parameter loop count set to 90 times. As described above, in the loop process, the function between “LOOPST” and “LOOP” is repeatedly executed. Therefore, the function “SUBC: YKK_LGO: TBL_YKK_LGO” is executed a maximum of 90 times.

  The function “SUBC: YKK_LGO: TBL_YKK_LGO” will be described. The scheduler work area index branch call “SUBC” is executed by using the target scheduler work number “YKK_LGO” and the button logo bonus drop notice lottery result branch call table “TBL_YKK_LGO” as parameters. The

  The scheduler execution unit 5060 refers to the button logo accessory drop notice lottery result branch call table “TBL_YKK_LGO”, and determines the start address of the scheduler data to be branched based on the contents of the button logo accessory notice work area “YKK_LGO”. Identify. The button logo object notice work area “YKK_LGO” stores the result of the button logo object fall notice execution lottery. If the button logo object fall notice execution lottery is off, “0: Not executed”, button When winning the lottery for the logo object fall notice, “1: Logo drop notice execution” is set. The result of the lottery for the button logo bonus drop notice corresponds to the index (address) of each record of the button logo bonus drop lottery result branch call table “TBL_YKK_LGO”.

  While the button logo object notice work area “YKK_LGO” is set to “0: Not Executed”, the button logo object object drop notice lottery result branch call table “TBL_YKK_LGO” shows that the logo object object object notice is not executed The data “SUBC_YKK_LGO_NON” is selected. The content of the scheduler data “SUBC_YKK_LGO_NON” is only the function “RET”, and returns immediately after the function “SUBC: YKK_LGO: TBL_YKK_LGO” of the caller scheduler “SCH_MOT_YKK_LGO” (function “LOOP”). Therefore, if the player loses the button logo symbol drop notice lottery, the loop process is executed 90 times, the loop process is exited, the function “STOP” is executed, and the scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_LGO” is completed. .

  On the other hand, when “1: Logo drop notice execution” is set in the button logo object notice work area “YKK_LGO”, that is, when the button logo object drop notice execution lottery is won, the button logo object fall In the notice lottery result branch call table “TBL_YKK_LGO”, the motor scheduler data “SUBC_YKK_LGO_DOWN” at the time of executing the logo object fall notice is selected. The contents of the scheduler data “SUBC_YKK_LGO_DOWN” are the function “SUBC: YKK_BTN: TBL_MOT_LGO”, the scheduler work area index branch call “SUBC”, the target scheduler work number “YKK_BTN”, and the button logo object fall notice button branch call address table. “TBL_MOT_LGO” is executed as a parameter.

  The scheduler execution unit 5060 refers to the button logo character item fall notice button branch call address table “TBL_MOT_LGO”, and identifies the start address of the scheduler data to be branched based on the contents of the button ON_OFF work area “YKK_BTN”. As in the case of the button cut-in notice, the button ON_OFF work area “YKK_BTN” stores the operation state of the effect button, and when the effect button is not operated, “0: button OFF”, the effect button is operated. If “1” is selected, “1: button ON” is set. The operation state of the effect button corresponds to the index (address) of each record in the button logo bonus item drop notice branch call address table “TBL_MOT_LGO”.

  While the button ON_OFF work area “YKK_BTN” is set to “0: Button OFF”, in the button logo accessory fall notice button branch call address table “TBL_MOT_LGO”, the motor scheduler data “SUBC_MOT_LGO_BTNOFF” when the logo accessory fall notice button is OFF Is selected. The content of the scheduler data “SUBC_MOT_LGO_BTNOFF” is only the function “RET”, and returns immediately after the function “SUBC: YKK_BTN: TBL_MOT_LGO” of the caller scheduler data “SUBC_YKK_LGO_DOWN” (function “RET”). This further returns to the function “LOOP” of the scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_LGO”. Therefore, even when the button logo winning combination drop notice is won, if the production button input is not detected during the 90 loop processing, the function “STOP” is exited from the loop processing. This is executed, and the scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_LGO” ends.

  On the other hand, when “1: button ON” is set in the button ON_OFF work area “YKK_BTN”, the motor scheduler at the time of the logo feature fall notice button ON in the button logo feature fall notice button branch call address table “TBL_MOT_LGO”. The data “SUBC_MOT_LGO_BTNON” is selected. As for the contents of the scheduler data “SUBC_MOT_LGO_BTNON”, first, the function “COMMAND: COM_LGO_ON” is executed. The function “COMMAND” is a function for issuing a command when the scheduler data is executed. Here, the command “COM_LGO_ON” is issued. The command “COM_LGO_ON” is a command for causing the game board side effect display device 1600 to start drawing an effect when the logo character object 5001 is dropped, and is issued to the effect control unit 5020.

  Further, the scheduler execution unit 5060 executes the function “MPLAY: PTA_LGO_DOWN” in the same frame as the issue of the command “COM_LGO_ON”. The parameter “PTA_LGO_DOWN” is pattern data for performing an operation of dropping the logo accessory 5001. Furthermore, a weight process of 120 frames (about 4 seconds) is executed by the function “NOP: 120”. At this time, the logo accessory 5001 performs a dropping operation over 3 seconds, and stops at the dropping position for the remaining 1 second.

  Furthermore, by executing the function “MPLAY: PTA_LGO_INI”, the logo accessory 5001 moves from the drop position to the initial position. Subsequently, a weight process of 90 frames (about 3 seconds) is executed by the function “NOP: 90”, and the logo accessory 5001 is returned to the initial position during that time. After completion of the weight processing, the execution of the logo object dropping operation is completed, so the function “MEMW: YKK_LGO: 0” is executed, the button logo object notice lottery result is rewritten to “0: not executed”, and the caller scheduler Return to immediately after the function “SUBC: YKK_BTN: TBL_MOT_LGO” (function “RET”) of the data “SUBC_YKK_LGO_DOWN”. This further returns to the function “LOOP” of the scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_LGO”. The function returns to the function “LOOP” of the scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_LGO”, but since the button logo bonus notice lottery result has been rewritten to “0: Not executed”, the scheduler data “PTA_LGO_DOWN” that causes the button logo bonus to fall is executed. Instead, the remaining number of loops is processed, and the execution of the scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_LGO” is terminated by the function “STOP”.

  As described above, when the logo accessory 5001 is dropped, by issuing a command internally, an effect can be displayed on the liquid crystal only when the logo accessory 5001 is dropped and when the logo accessory 5001 is dropped. realizable. In the present embodiment, by using the function “COMMAND”, it is possible to execute a plurality of types of effect devices in cooperation with each other as needed at an appropriate timing, and it is possible to execute a more interesting effect. .

  In this embodiment, the function “COMMAND” is used to display the effect on the liquid crystal in the sound source built-in VDP 1540a, but the control is transferred from the scheduler to the program by processing the command issued by the function “COMMAND” on the program side. Once it is restored, complicated processing that cannot be handled by the function command is performed, and the processing result is written in a work area used by the scheduler, so that processing that cannot be controlled by the function command can be performed. In addition, a merit of issuing a command in the scheduler data is that time management and execution determination by a program are not required because the command issuance timing is set as the processing timing as it is. Further, it is possible to interactively process an external input (button, jog dial, touch pad) by a user that is not determined in advance at the start of fluctuation, issue a command using the function “COMMAND”, and perform processing.

  In this embodiment, the function “COMMAND” has a function of transmitting a fixed value command. However, the function “COMMAND” is not a fixed value but a work area is specified and the contents of the work area are transmitted as a command. May be.

[18-8. Example of applying scheduler data (at power-on)]
Next, scheduler data executed on the peripheral control board 1510 when the gaming machine is powered on will be described. Here, the control from when the gaming machine is turned on until the game is started until the first variation display is started will be described.

[18-8-1. Outline of processing]
FIG. 329 is a diagram illustrating scheduler data executed when the gaming machine according to the present embodiment is powered on. In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, when the gaming machine is turned on, a power-on command is output from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510.

  When receiving the power-on command, the scheduler execution unit 5060 drives the scheduler data “SCH_STS_POWERON” with the sub-state scheduler “SUB_SCH”.

  When the scheduler data “SCH_STS_POWERON” is executed, the sub internal state transition scheduler is executed in a predetermined order, and the scheduler data corresponding to the sub gaming state (sub internal state) is activated. As the scheduler data “SCH_STS_POWERON” progresses, a screen corresponding to the sub internal state is displayed on the liquid crystal display screen, for example, a standby screen, a maker demo screen, a model demo title screen, a goto prevention screen, etc., as shown in FIG. Is done. At this time, the main game state is a standby state. When the waiting state is finished, the game is started, and when the game ball is won at the start winning opening, the main game state and the sub internal state are changed to the changing state.

[18-8-2. Power-on control]
Next, a configuration for processing various commands and scheduler data will be described. FIG. 330 is a diagram for explaining the configuration for processing commands and scheduler data in the peripheral control board 1510 of the gaming machine of this embodiment and the relationship between these configurations.

  As described above, when the power of the gaming machine is activated or when a predetermined event occurs in the game control in the main control board 1310, the main command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 and received by the peripheral control board 1510. The As described in FIG. 312, the main command is stored in the main command buffer 5110 of the system module 5100 and analyzed by the main command analysis process in the command analysis module. The command analysis module identifies the type of event generated by the main command analysis process, and activates the corresponding scheduler to execute the scheduler data.

  In addition, when the function “COMMAND0” (FIG. 319) is executed and a command is output from the scheduler, the output command is stored in the main command buffer 5110 and analyzed by the main command analysis process, similarly to the main command. Is done.

  When a main command or a command output by the function “COMMAND0” is received, a command for executing control on the peripheral control board 1510 is generated by main command analysis processing. The generated command includes a command for starting the scheduler and a command for controlling various rendering devices (sub-internal output command).

  In the command for starting the scheduler, for example, the main control board such as scheduler data for performing control corresponding to the change in the gaming state on the main control board 1310 or the change in the sub internal state due to the progress of the control in the peripheral control board 1510, the start winning etc. Scheduler data for executing an effect corresponding to the event notified from 1310, scheduler data defined so that various effect devices operate in a series of modes, and the like are executed. In this embodiment, in addition to starting the scheduler directly from the command, it is possible to start another scheduler by the function “REQ” included in the scheduler data.

  On the other hand, the command (sub internal output command) for controlling the effect device is, for example, a liquid crystal command for displaying a predetermined image on the liquid crystal display device. The command for controlling the rendering device is output by the function “COMMAND” included in the scheduler data, in addition to the case where the command is output based on the result of analyzing the main command. The commands for controlling the effect device are temporarily stored in the sub internal output command buffer and processed in the order stored from the top of the buffer.

  As described above, in this embodiment, by further starting other schedulers from the scheduler, it is possible to execute a combination of a plurality of schedulers in a hierarchical manner by receiving one main command. As a result, various controls on the peripheral control board 1510 can be made into parts in units of scheduler data, and by combining the scheduler, various types of effects can be implemented in parallel, The development efficiency of gaming machines can be improved, such as making debugging work more efficient.

  Furthermore, in this embodiment, command analysis processing can be shared by command output by the function “COMMAND0”. This makes it possible to share scheduler data selection logic and function parameter determination logic by command analysis, which causes a problem that a large number of scheduler data combinations must be managed in a table. This can be suppressed.

  Next, the activation of the scheduler and the execution of the scheduler data when a power-on command is received from the main control board 1310 will be described. FIG. 331 is a diagram illustrating the process of executing scheduler data when the power is turned on according to the present embodiment.

  As described with reference to FIG. 330, when the gaming machine is turned on and the peripheral control board 1510 receives the power-on command transmitted from the main control board 1310, the power-on command is analyzed by the main command analysis process, and the scheduler The sub-state scheduler is activated by the activation process, and the corresponding scheduler data is sequentially executed. In executing each scheduler data, a function “COMMAND0” is executed and a command is issued to create a sub internal state, and further, a lamp and sound corresponding to the sub internal state are output as necessary. .

  The scheduler to be executed will be specifically described. First, the state power-on scheduler data “SCH_STS_POWERON” is executed using the sub-state scheduler “SUB_SCH”. In the state power-on scheduler data “SCH_STS_POWERON”, a command “COM_STS_TAIKI” that changes to the next internal state is issued by the function “COMMANDO”, and the scheduler is stopped.

  The command “COM_STS_TAIKI” is processed in the “main command analysis process”, and the state standby scheduler data “SCH_STS_TAKI” corresponding to the next sub internal state is executed.

  Subsequently, when the state standby scheduler data “SCH_STS_TAKI” is executed using the sub-state scheduler “SUB_SCH”, the function “KPLAY: PTA_LAMP_TAIKI” is executed. Thereby, the lighting of the lamp is started based on the lamp lighting pattern “PTA_LAMP_TAIKI” in the standby state. Thereafter, the function “NOP: 900” is executed to enter a standby state for 900 frames (30 seconds). After the end of the standby state, a command “COM_STS_MDEMO” for changing to the next internal state is issued by the function “COMMANDO”, and the scheduler is stopped.

  The command “COM_STS_MDEMO” is processed in the “main command analysis process”, and the state maker demo scheduler data “SCH_STS_MDEMO” corresponding to the next sub internal state is executed.

  Subsequently, when the state maker demo scheduler data “SCH_STS_MDEMO” is executed using the sub state scheduler “SUB_SCH”, the function “KPLAY: PTA_LAMP_MDEMO” is executed. Accordingly, the lighting of the lamp is started based on the lamp lighting pattern “PTA_LAMP_MDEMO” in the maker demo state. Thereafter, the function “NOP: 300” is executed to enter a standby state for 300 frames (10 seconds). After the end of the standby state, a command “COM_STS_KDEMO” for changing to the next internal state is issued by the function “COMMANDO”, and the scheduler is stopped.

  The command “COM_STS_KDEMO” is processed in the “main command analysis process”, and the state model demo scheduler data “SCH_STS_KDEMO” corresponding to the next sub internal state is executed.

  Subsequently, when the state maker demo scheduler data “SCH_STS_KDEMO” is executed using the sub state scheduler “SUB_SCH”, the function “KPLAY: PTA_LAMP_KDEMO” is executed. Accordingly, the lighting of the lamp is started based on the lamp lighting pattern “PTA_LAMP_KDEMO” in the model demonstration state. Thereafter, the function “NOP: 900” is executed to enter a standby state for 900 frames (30 seconds). After the end of the standby state, a command “COM_STS_GOTO” for changing to the next internal state is issued by the function “COMMANDO”, and the scheduler is stopped.

  The command “COM_STS_KDEMO” is processed in the “main command analysis process”, and the state anti-going scheduler data “SCH_STS_GOTO” corresponding to the next sub internal state is executed.

  Subsequently, when the state goto prevention scheduler data “SCH_STS_GOTO” is executed using the sub state scheduler “SUB_SCH”, the function “KPLAY: PTA_LAMP_GOTO” is executed. As a result, the lighting of the lamp is started based on the lighting pattern of the lamp data “PTA_LAMP_GOTO” in the got prevention state. Furthermore, by executing the function “SPLAY: PTA_SND_GOTO”, the sound reproduction is started based on the sound data “PTA_SND_GOTO” in the got prevention state. Thereafter, the function “NOP: 450” is executed to enter a standby state for 450 frames (15 seconds). After the end of the standby state, a command “COM_STS_TAIKI” for changing to the next internal state is issued by the function “COMMANDO”, and the scheduler is stopped.

  The command “COM_STS_TAIKI” is processed in the “main command analysis process”, and the state standby scheduler data “SCH_STS_TAKI” corresponding to the next sub internal state is executed. The gaming machine is ready to play at this stage, the game is started, and loops in this standby state until the game ball wins.

  As described above, in this embodiment, it is possible to set the internal state of the peripheral control board 1510 only by receiving the power-on command transmitted from the main control board. Specifically, the function “COMMAND0” can be controlled as if the main control board 1310 issued a command. For example, the initialization command at power-on may have a fixed parameter, and is transmitted from the main control board 1310 by outputting the command with the function “COMMAND0” instead of the main command from the main control board 1310. It is possible to reduce the number of main commands. This makes it possible to reduce the capacity of the game control program on the main control board 1310, which is particularly effective when the capacity of the game control program is limited.

[18-9. Application example of scheduler data (production 2)]
Next, an example will be described in which a saddle object fall notice is executed instead of the button cut-in notice and the button logo object fall notice. The fall notice of the samurai role is divided into the first half and the second half, and the first half notice and the second half notice are executed in cooperation. At this time, control different from the control described so far is performed in that control such as passing over the parameter used in the first half notice to the second half notice is performed.

[18-9-1. Production overview]
FIG. 332 is a diagram showing an example of a notice effect in a series of change display from the start of change to the stop of the special symbol in the present embodiment, and (A) shows the effect executed from the start of change to the end, The scheduler data for executing the production and the scheduler to be executed are shown, and (B) is a diagram for explaining the position of the winning combination 5003 in the winning combination falling notice.

  In the series of change display shown in FIG. 332 (A), a step-up notice and a button (BTN) winch first half drop notice are executed in the first half of the change. After that, reach occurs, and in the latter half of the change, the group trailer and the button half-fall first fall notice continued from the first half are followed by the second half fall notice. For each notice effect, scheduler data for controlling lamp lighting, sound output, image output, action of an accessory, etc. is executed. The details of the step-up notice are as described above.

  Next, the content of the winning combination fall notice will be described with reference to FIG. 332 (B). As described above, the winning combination fall notice is divided into a button (BTN) winning combination first half falling notice and a winning combination latter half falling notice.

  In the first half of the button 鉈 combination first half fall notice, the notice effect progresses by operating the effect button. Therefore, even if the player wins the first lottery drop lottery of the button winning combination, if the effect button is not operated, the falling effect of the winning combination 5003 is not executed. On the other hand, in the latter half of the winning combination second half drop notice, the effect is executed based on the result of the winning combination second half drop notice execution lottery regardless of the operation of the effect button.

  When winning the lottery for the first half drop notice of the button winning combination and operating the effect button at a predetermined timing, the winning combination 5003 falls to the middle position. Furthermore, if the winning combination for the second half drop notice of winning the winning combination is won while the winning combination 5003 has fallen to the middle position, the winning combination 5003 falls to the lower position. In other words, the winning combination 5003 falls from the upper part (upper position, initial position) to the center (middle position) in the first half of the advance notice of the falling of the winning combination, and falls to the lower part (lower position) in the second half. If the winning lottery for the second half of the winning combination is selected, it will fall to the bottom regardless of the position of the winning combination 5003. Further, when the winning combination falling notice is finished, the winning combination 5003 returns to the upper part (initial position).

  Therefore, as shown in FIG. 332 (B), the stunning object fall notice is executed in six patterns. More specifically, when the result of lottery for the first half drop notice of the button winning combination is not won, since it does not depend on the operation of the production button, the second half fall notice is not won (Pattern 1). And there is a case of winning (Pattern 2). In the case of the pattern 1, the button winning combination first half drop notice and the second half falling notice are not selected, so that the winning combination 5003 is not dropped and is not moved from above. In the case of the pattern 2, the winning combination 5003 does not fall and is positioned at the upper part in the advance notice, while the winning combination latter half drop notice is won in the execution lottery. It falls at a stretch.

  When winning the lottery for the first half drop notice of the button winning combination, the presentation mode of the first half drop notice depends on whether or not the production button is operated. Therefore, for the winning combination object fall notice, four patterns of effect forms can be executed depending on the presence / absence of operation of the effect button and the result of the execution of the late winning object fall notice.

  If the player wins the first lottery drop lottery and does not operate the production button, and the result of the second half drop prior notice is not selected, the bonus player 5003 will not fall. (Pattern 3). When the button lottery first half drop notice execution lottery is won and the production button is operated, and the result of the second half fall notice of the second half fall notice is not won, the bonus item 5003 is displayed when the production button is operated. Falls from the top to the middle, and remains in the middle until the end of the falling notice of the bonus item (pattern 4).

  If you win the first lottery drop lottery and don't operate the production button, and if you win the second half fallout announcement lottery, you won't operate the production button. The winning combination 5003 is not dropped and is positioned at the upper part until the second half drop notice starts, and falls from the upper part to the lower part in the second half drop notice (pattern 5). If you win the first lottery drop lottery and operate the production button, and if you win the second half fallout notice lottery, when the production button is operated, It falls to the middle, and then falls from the top to the bottom in the second half drop notice (pattern 6).

  As described above, there are six patterns of appearances that can appear in the winning combination fall notice of the present embodiment, and scheduler data for controlling the operation of the winning combination 5003 in the winning combination fall notice will be described below. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 332 (A), the button 鉈 combination first half drop notification motor scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA1” for controlling the operation of the combination item 5003 in the button 鉈 combination first half drop notification, Next, description will be made regarding the second half fall advance notice motor scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA2” for controlling the action of the last prize 5003 in the fall notice.

[18-9-2. [Various controls in the fall notice of a role]
FIG. 333 is a view for explaining the contents of the button 鉈 accessory first half drop notification scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA1” that performs motor control in the button 鉈 accessory first half drop notification, which is the first half of the player combination drop notification of the present embodiment. . As described above, when the player wins the first half drop notice for the button bonus item, the operation of the effect button is accepted for 3 seconds by the function “LOOP”, and the effect object 5003 is operated when the effect button is operated. The effect to be executed is executed. When the execution lottery for the first half drop notice of the button winning combination is not won, if the effect button is not operated even after winning, the winning combination 5003 is ended without operating. The motor scheduler “MOT_SCH01” is used for the execution of the first half fall notice scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA1” of the button combination.

  When the scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA1” is started, first, the function “COMMAND: COM_NTA1_STA” is executed to start drawing an effect when the game board side effect display device 1600 rattles the winning combination 5003. Thereafter, the function “MPLAY: PTA_NTA_GAT” is executed, and then the wait process “NOP: 30” for 30 frames (about 1 second) is executed. Thus, the designated operation is performed for 1 second based on the operation pattern data “PTA_NTA_GAT”. Specifically, the winning combination 5003 vibrates.

  Subsequently, a loop process for 3 seconds is executed in order to receive an input of an effect button from the player. Specifically, the function “LOOPST” is executed with the parameter loop count set to 90 times. As described above, in the loop process, the function between “LOOPST” and “LOOP” is repeatedly executed. Therefore, the function “SUBC: YKK_NTA1: TBL_YKK_NTA1” is executed a maximum of 90 times.

  The function “SUBC: YKK_NTA1: TBL_YKK_NTA1” will be described. The scheduler work area index branch call “SUBC” is set with the target scheduler work number “YKK_NTA1” and the button winning combination first half drop notice lottery result branch call address table “TBL_YKK_NTA1”. Executed.

  The scheduler execution unit 5060 refers to the button winning combination first half drop advance notice lottery result branch call address table “TBL_YKK_NTA1”, and based on the contents of the button winning combination first half drop advance notice work area “YKK_NTA1”, the scheduler data to be branched to Specify the start address of. The button 鉈 character first half drop notice work area “YKK_NTA1” stores the results of the button 鉈 character first half drop notice execution lottery. If the button 鉈 character first half drop notice execution lottery is not selected, “0: “1” is selected for the first half fall notice of the winning combination when the “No win” button is selected. The result of the lottery for the first half drop notice of the button winning combination corresponds to the index (address) of each record of the branch call address table “TBL_YKK_NTA1” for the first drop of the button bonus combination.

  When “0: Non-Winning” is set in the work area “YKK_NTA1” for the first drop of the button combination, the button combination is displayed in the branch call address table “TBL_YKK_NTA1”. The motor scheduler data “SUBC_YKK_NTA1_NON” at the time when the first half drop notification is not executed is selected. The content of the scheduler data “SUBC_YKK_NTA1_NON” is only the function “STOP”, and the result of the button drop of the first half of the button combination is “non-winning”. The execution of is terminated.

  On the other hand, when “1: Bonus first half fall notice execution” is set in the “YKK_NTA1” button win combination first fall notice work area, that is, when the button win combination first half fall notice is selected. In the button winning combination first half drop advance notice lottery result branch call table “TBL_YKK_NTA1”, the motor scheduler data “SUBC_YKK_NTA1_DOWN” is selected when the bonus combination drop notice is executed. The content of the scheduler data “SUBC_YKK_NTA1_DOWN” is the function “SUBC: YKK_BTN: TBL_MOT_NTA1”, the scheduler work area index branch call “SUBC” is the target scheduler work number “YKK_BTN” and the button 鉈 character first half drop notice button branch call address The table “TBL_MOT_NTA1” is executed as a parameter.

  The scheduler execution unit 5060 refers to the button winning combination first half drop notice button branch call address table “TBL_MOT_NTA1”, and identifies the start address of the scheduler data to be branched based on the contents of the button ON_OFF work area “YKK_BTN” . As in the case of the button cut-in notice and button logo object fall notice, the button ON_OFF work area “YKK_BTN” stores the operation state of the effect button, and when the effect button is not operated, “0: button OFF “When the effect button is operated,“ 1: button ON ”is set. The operational state of the effect button corresponds to the index (address) of each record in the button winning combination first half drop notice branch call address table “TBL_MOT_NTA1”.

  While the button ON_OFF work area “YKK_BTN” is set to “0: Button OFF”, in the button 鉈 accessory first half drop notice button branch call address table “TBL_MOT_NTA1”, the button 鉈 accessory first half drop notice button OFF motor scheduler The data “SUBC_MOT_NTA1_BTNOFF” is selected. The content of the scheduler data “SUBC_MOT_NTA1_BTNOFF” is only the function “RET”, and returns to immediately after the function “SUBC: YKK_BTN: TBL_MOT_NTA1” of the caller scheduler data “SUBC_YKK_NTA1_DOWN” (function “RET”). This further returns to the function “LOOP” of the scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA1”. Therefore, even if the winning lottery for the first notice of the drop of the button winning combination is won, if the input of the effect button is not detected during the 90 loop processing, the function “STOP” is exited from the loop processing. Is executed, and the scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA1” ends.

  On the other hand, when “1: button ON” is set in the button ON_OFF work area “YKK_BTN”, the button 鉈 accessory first half fall notice button ON in the button 鉈 accessory first half drop notice button branch call address table “TBL_MOT_NTA1” The hour motor scheduler data “SUBC_MOT_NTA1_BTNON” is selected. As for the contents of the scheduler data “SUBC_MOT_NTA1_BTNON”, first, the function “COMMAND: COM_NTA_STA-MID” is executed, and the command “COM_NTA_STA-MID” is issued. The command “COM_NTA_STA-MID” is a command for causing the game board side effect display device 1600 to start drawing the effect when the winning combination falls, and is issued to the effect control unit 5020.

  Furthermore, the scheduler execution unit 5060 executes the function “MPLAY: PTA_NTA_STA-MID” within the same frame as when the command “COM_NTA_STA-MID” is issued. The parameter “PTA_NTA_STA-MID” is pattern data for performing the operation of dropping the scissors 5003 to the intermediate position. Furthermore, a weight process of 120 frames (about 4 seconds) is executed by the function “NOP: 120”, and the winking object 5003 falls to an intermediate position during this time.

  Finally, by executing the function “MEMW: SCH_MEM_NTA: 1”, “1” is written in the scheduler saddle position information work area “SCH_MEM_NTA”, and the fact that the saddle accessory 5003 has moved to the intermediate position is recorded. Thereafter, the execution of the scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA1” is terminated by the function “STOP”.

  When the first half drop notification of the bonus item is completed, the second half drop notification of the bonus item is started. FIG. 334 and FIG. 335 are diagrams for explaining the contents of the winning combination latter half fall notice scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA2” that performs motor control in the latter half fall notice that is the latter half of the winning combination fall notice of the present embodiment. is there. In order to execute the late bonus drop scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA2”, the motor scheduler “MOT_SCH01” is used in the same manner as the previous bonus drop scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA1”.

  When the scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA2” is started, first, the function “COMMAND: COM_NTA2_STA” is executed, and drawing of an effect indicating whether or not the winning combination 5003 falls on the game board side effect display device 1600 is started. . Thereafter, a wait process “NOP: 90” for 90 frames (about 3 seconds) is executed. When the winning combination 5003 falls, the big hit expectation increases, and the player's expectation is enhanced by drawing the effect for 3 seconds.

  Subsequently, the scheduler execution unit 5060 executes the function “SUBC: YKK_NTA2: TBL_YKK_NTA2”. In the function “SUBC: YKK_NTA2: TBL_YKK_NTA2”, the scheduler work area index branch call “SUBC” is executed with the target scheduler work number “YKK_NTA2” and the winning combination late fall notice lottery result branch call address table “TBL_YKK_NTA2” as parameters. .

  The scheduler execution unit 5060 refers to the winning combination latter half fall notice lottery result branch call address table “TBL_YKK_NTA2” and, based on the contents of the winning combination latter half fall notice 2 work area “YKK_NTA2,” the scheduler data to be branched to Specify the start address. The results of the lottery for the second half of the fall notice are stored in the “YKK_NTA2” work area “YKK_NTA2”. “If the winning combination for the second half of the fall of the winning combination is selected,“ 1: The second half of the falling notice of the winning combination is executed ”is set. The execution lottery result of the late combination of the late winning combination of the bonus item corresponds to the index (address) of each record of the branch call address lottery result branch call address table “TBL_YKK_NTA2”.

  If the winning area second half fall notice 2 work area “YKK_NTA2” is set to “0: Not elected”, then the second half fall fall of the bonus object in the second half fall notice lottery result branch call address table “TBL_YKK_NTA2” The motor scheduler data “SUBC_YKK_NTA2_NON” at the time when the notice is not executed is selected. In the scheduler data “SUBC_YKK_NTA2_NON”, the function “SUBC: SCH_MEM_NTA: TBL_YKK_NTA2NON” is executed, the value of the scheduler position information work area “SCH_MEM_NTA” and the branch winning second half fall notice lottery result non-winning branch call address KNT_NO2 Branch based on.

  When “0: initial position” is set in the scheduler position information work area “SCH_MEM_NTA” for the scheduler, the second half drop notification is not made in the second half drop notice lottery result branch call address table “TBL_YKK_NTA2NON”. The run-time motor scheduler data “SUBC_MOT_NTA1_NON_NTA2_NON” is selected. In the scheduler data “SUBC_MOT_NTA1_NON_NTA2_NON”, the function “RET” is executed, and the scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA2” is restored.

  When “0: initial position” is set, the motor scheduler data “SUBC_MOT_NTA1_NON_NTA2_NON” is selected when the last half-fall fall notice is not executed in the second half drop notice lottery result branch call address table “TBL_YKK_NTA2NON”. The In the scheduler data “SUBC_MOT_NTA1_NON_NTA2_NON”, the function “RET” is executed, and the scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA2” is restored. Thereafter, the value of the scheduler saddle position information work area “SCH_MEM_NTA” is overwritten on “0: initial position”, and the scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA2” is terminated.

  On the other hand, when “1: intermediate position” is set in the heel position information work area “SCH_MEM_NTA” for the scheduler, the first half drop of the winning combination in the winning combination latter half fall notice lottery result branch call address table “TBL_YKK_NTA2NON” Pre-execution / second half-fall notice non-winning motor scheduler data “SUBC_MOT_NTA1_DOWN_NTA2_NON” is selected.

  In the case of the motor scheduler data “SUBC_MOT_NTA1_DOWN_NTA2_NON” at the time of non-winning for the first half fall notice, first, a 120 frame (about 4 seconds) wait process “NOP: 120” is executed. In the weight process executed here, as will be described later, it becomes a waiting time for returning to the intermediate position when the winning combination 5003 is in the lower position. In this case, since there is originally a scissors 5003 at the intermediate position, the user waits for 4 seconds.

  After the end of the wait process, the function “MPLAY: PTA_NTA_INIT_MID-TOP” is executed to return the saddle accessory 5003 from the intermediate position to the initial position. Furthermore, in order to secure the operating time of the winning combination 5003, a wait process “NOP: 120” of 120 frames (about 4 seconds) is executed, and the function “RET” returns to the scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA2”.

  In addition, when “1: 鉈 late fall notice” is set in the “YKK_NTA2” work area “YKK_NTA2”, the 鉈 feature late fall notice lottery result branch call address table “TBL_YKK_NTA2” The motor scheduler data “SUBC_YKK_NTA2_DOWN” at the time of winning of the second half of the winning combination is selected. In the scheduler data “SUBC_YKK_NTA2_DOWN”, the function “SUBC: SCH_MEM_NTA: TBL_YKK_NTA2DOWN” is executed, and the value of the scheduler position information work area “SCH_MEM_NTA” and the branch object fall notice 2 branch call address table “TBL_YKK_NT” are used. .

  When “0: initial position” is set in the heel position information work area “SCH_MEM_NTA” for the scheduler, the first half drop notification is not made in the second half drop notice lottery result branch call address table “TBL_YKK_NTA2DOWN”. The motor scheduler data “SUBC_MOT_NTA1_NON_NTA2_DOWN” at the time of execution / late fall notice win selection is selected.

  In the scheduler data “SUBC_MOT_NTA1_NON_NTA2_DOWN” (FIG. 335), first, the function “COMMAND: COM_NTA_STA-END” is executed, and the command “COM_NTA_STA-END” is issued. The command “COM_NTA_STA-END” is a command for causing the game board side effect display device 1600 to start drawing an effect in which the winning combination 5003 falls from the initial position to the lower position.

  Furthermore, the scheduler execution unit 5060 executes the function “MPLAY: PTA_NTA_STA-END” in the same frame as the issue of the command “COM_NTA_STA-END”. The parameter “PTA_NTA_STA-END” is pattern data for performing an operation of dropping the scissors 5003 to the lower position. Furthermore, a weight process of 240 frames (about 8 seconds) is executed by the function “NOP: 240”, and during this time, the scooping object 5003 is dropped from the initial position to the lower position.

  Then, the function “COMMAND: COM_NTA_END” is executed and the command “COM_NTA_END” is issued at the timing when the winning combination 5003 moves to the lower position. The command “COM_NTA_END” is a command for causing the game board side effect display device 1600 to start drawing an effect when the winning combination 5003 reaches the lower position. Further, a weight process of 90 frames (about 3 seconds) is executed by the function “NOP: 90”, and effect drawing is continued on the game board side effect display device 1600.

  After that, the function “MPLAY: PTA_NTA_INIT_END-MID” is executed. The parameter “PTA_NTA_INIT_END-MID” is pattern data for performing an operation of returning the saddle accessory 5003 from the lower position to the intermediate position.

  Subsequently, the function “CALL: SUBC_MOT_NTA1_DOWN_NTA2_NON” is executed, and the above-described scheduler data “SUBC_MOT_NTA1_DOWN_NTA2_NON” is called to return the saddle winning object 5003 from the middle position to the initial position. After that, the function “RET” returns to the scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA2”.

  On the other hand, when “1: intermediate position” is set in the heel position information work area “SCH_MEM_NTA” for the scheduler, the first half drop of the winning combination in the winning combination latter half fall notice lottery result branch call address table “TBL_YKK_NTA2DOWN” Motor scheduler data “SUBC_MOT_NTA1_DOWN_NTA2_DOWN” is selected at the time of execution of the advance notice / late fall notice.

  In the scheduler data “SUBC_MOT_NTA1_DOWN_NTA2_DOWN” (FIG. 335), first, the function “COMMAND: COM_NTA_MID-END” is executed and the command “COM_NTA_MID-END” is issued. The command “COM_NTA_MID-END” is a command for causing the game board side effect display device 1600 to start drawing an effect in which the winning combination 5003 falls from the intermediate position to the lower position.

  Furthermore, the scheduler execution unit 5060 executes the function “MPLAY: PTA_NTA_STA-END” in the same frame as the issue of the command “COM_NTA_STA-END”. The parameter “PTA_NTA_STA-END” is pattern data for performing an operation of dropping the scissors 5003 to the lower position. Further, a weight process of 120 frames (about 4 seconds) is executed by the function “NOP: 120”, and during this time, the scooping object 5003 is dropped from the intermediate position to the lower position.

  Then, the function “COMMAND: COM_NTA_END” is executed and the command “COM_NTA_END” is issued at the timing when the winning combination 5003 moves to the lower position. The command “COM_NTA_END” is a command for causing the game board side effect display device 1600 to start drawing an effect when the winning combination 5003 reaches the lower position. Further, a weight process of 90 frames (about 3 seconds) is executed by the function “NOP: 90”, and effect drawing is continued on the game board side effect display device 1600.

  Here, in order to match the timing of starting the operation of returning the winning combination 5003 from the initial position to the lower position with the timing of starting the operation of returning the winning combination 5003 to the initial position, 120 frames (about (4 seconds) wait processing is executed. This time is the time required for the winning combination 5003 to move from the initial position to the intermediate position.

  Thereafter, as in the case of “SUBC_MOT_NTA1_NON_NTA2_DOWN”, the function “MPLAY: PTA_NTA_INIT_END-MID” is executed to return the winning combination 5003 from the lower position to the intermediate position. Furthermore, the function “CALL: SUBC_MOT_NTA1_DOWN_NTA2_NON” is executed to return the saddle accessory 5003 from the middle position to the initial position. After that, the function “RET” returns to the scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA2”.

  When the saddle object 5003 returns to the initial position and returns to the scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA2”, the function “MEMW: SCH_MEM_NTA: 0” is executed and the value of the scheduler position information work area “SCH_MEM_NTA” is set to “0: initial position”. And the scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA2” is terminated.

  In the winning combination fall notice, the scheduler data is divided into the first half and the second half, and the operation of the winning combination 5003 in the second half differs depending on whether or not the player operates the effect button in the first half. Therefore, it is possible to specify the position of the winning combination 5003 by writing the position of the winning combination 5003 using the function “MEMW” in the first half and acquiring the position information written in the second half. . Thereby, the moving amount of the motor can be determined for each position of the winning combination 5003, and it is possible to execute an effect according to the operation result of the effect button by calling each corresponding scheduler data.

  Also, in the returning operation to the initial position after the operation of the winning combination 5003, since the common scheduler data is called by the movement from the intermediate position to the initial position, the entire scheduler data can be simplified.

  The function “MEMW” can refer to a common value by writing a fixed value in a predetermined area when the scheduler data is executed and referring to it when other scheduler data is executed. As a result, it is possible to specify a value indicating a state that changes due to the execution of a plurality of scheduler data at the time of execution of each scheduler data, so that a program code can be created according to the player's operation, etc. The processing can be completed only by defining the scheduler data without creating scheduler data. This makes it possible to minimize the required number of scheduler data that requires different processing depending on the state, making it easier to create and debug scheduler data and facilitate management. In this embodiment, the function is a function for writing a fixed value. However, by specifying a work name as a function parameter instead of a fixed value, data can be transferred from the program side, and processing based on command information can be performed. Therefore, more complicated processing can be performed by the scheduler. A unique feature of the function “MEMW” is that information that is not determined at the start of execution of scheduler data including the function “MEMW” can be processed if the information is determined before the function “MEMW” is executed. This enables effective time control and interactive control.

[18-10. Example of scheduler data configuration (variation pattern)]
The flow of executing a series of notice effects has been described above. The contents of execution of such a series of notice effects are drawn based on the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control board 1310. Furthermore, specific production contents are drawn for each announcement production.

  Hereinafter, based on the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control board 1310, the procedure for controlling the execution of a series of notice effects and the basic effects related to the series of notice effects and the variation pattern (regardless of lottery other than the notice effects) A description will be given of the configuration of the scheduler data for executing the effect produced and the effect related to the background effect and the design effect that is one-to-one with the variation pattern.

  In the present embodiment, the period from when the change of the special symbol is started to when the change is stopped is managed by a block unit (effect section) divided by a predetermined structural unit. For example, the block can be used from the start of symbol variation until reach occurs, or when reach does not occur until the symbol stops (first half variation), or from reach occurrence until symbol stops (second half variation). ), From the stop of the symbol to the end of the change. Each block is assigned a time corresponding to the variation pattern, and the execution timing and execution time of the notice effect within the assigned time are defined. The time corresponding to each block and the data related to the basic effect to be executed are combined into block data.

  The rule of block division is that when the basic effects related to variation are compared in multiple variation patterns, the same basic effect part is divided into common block data, and the part with the difference in the basic effect of liquid crystal display is divided into block data To do. Referring to FIG. 336A, in the variation pattern-based liquid crystal effect block data combination number table (LCD_CTL_BLOCKDATA_NO) storing the combination of liquid crystal effect block data corresponding to the change pattern command in this embodiment, the change pattern “10H01H” has a normal change of 6 seconds. It is lost, and the normal fluctuation is performed for 6 seconds, and then the design of lost is performed. Since the normal variation 6-second effect and the loss stop effect are also used in other variation patterns, the normal variation 6-second liquid crystal effect block data (LCD01_BLK) and the loss-stop liquid crystal effect block data (LCD02_BLK) are divided.

  The variation pattern “10H02H” has a normal variation of 12 seconds, and the normal variation is performed for 12 seconds, and thereafter, the design effect of the loss is performed. Since the normal variation 12-second effect is also used in other variation patterns, it is divided as the normal variation 12-second liquid crystal effect block data (LCD03_BLK), and the lost pattern effect is exactly the same as the variation pattern “10H01H”. The liquid crystal effect block data (LCD02_BLK) for stopping the stop is commonly used as the liquid crystal effect block data for the stop of loss, which is divided into the liquid crystal display blocks by the variation pattern “10H01H”. Similarly, with respect to other variation patterns, portions that have already been converted into block data regarding the basic effects are used in common, and block portions that are different are newly converted into block data.

  As described above, by creating a block, the common basic effect part becomes a unique number of block data, and all the variation patterns and basic effects such as jackpots other than variation are combined with unique liquid crystal effect block data. It is possible to realize basic effects such as all variation patterns and jackpots other than variations. It is also important that the total amount of production data to be created is significantly reduced, but the biggest purpose of blocking is to create a liquid crystal production that includes a specific basic production when there is a change in a specific basic production. The change is reflected in all the fluctuation patterns using the block data.

  With respect to the liquid crystal display in the present embodiment, since the sound source built-in VDP 1540a is controlled, the format and function are completely different from those of the sound, lamp, and accessory scheduler data in the present embodiment. The structure in which the rendering scheduler data for effects and the rendering scheduler data for notice effects are combined has the same structure as the sub-effect block data for controlling sounds, lamps, and accessories. In addition, drawing scheduler data for liquid crystal display includes frame information, still image and moving picture material ID, display position information, enlargement / reduction information, rotation angle information, color, pictures and movies displayed in the background, and effects related to designs. It consists of functions that can specify control information for generating a display list command for the sound source built-in VDP 1540a, such as information, alpha information, and the type and execution timing of the effect related to the notice effect that occurs in the block data. The information shown is embedded.

  Further, in this embodiment, block data for variably displaying the identification symbol on the liquid crystal display device is defined as liquid crystal symbol block data separately from block data for performing other liquid crystal effects. This makes it possible to make the control for variably displaying the identification symbol independent of the control of other liquid crystal effects, for example, even when displaying the variability by changing the shape of the identification symbol. It becomes possible to execute with a liquid crystal display device. Note that the drawing scheduler data for symbol display has the same format and function as the drawing scheduler data for liquid crystal effect. In addition, a configuration in which drawing scheduler data for basic effects and drawing scheduler data for notice effects related to symbols is combined for each block data is the same as the above-described sub-effect block data and liquid crystal effect block data. The drawing scheduler data for symbol display has the same configuration and function as the drawing scheduler data for liquid crystal display, and in addition, information for specifying the variation display mode of the identification symbol is embedded.

  FIG. 336A is a diagram for explaining a variation pattern-specific liquid crystal effect block data combination number table (LCD_CTL_BLOCKDATA_NO) for storing combinations of liquid crystal effect block data corresponding to the change pattern commands in the present embodiment. FIG. 336B is a diagram for explaining a variation pattern liquid crystal symbol block data combination number (ZUG_CTL_BLOCKDATA_NO) storing a combination of liquid crystal symbol block data corresponding to the variation pattern command in the present embodiment. FIG. 337 is a view for explaining a sub pattern block data combination number table (SCH_CTL_BLOCKDATA_NO) for each variation pattern storing a combination of sub effect block data corresponding to the variation pattern command in the present embodiment.

  The variation pattern-specific liquid crystal effect block data combination number table (LCD_CTL_BLOCKDATA_NO) is a table that holds information indicating a combination of liquid crystal effect block data for each variation pattern. For example, unique numbers that specify the liquid crystal effect block data to be configured are held in chronological order with respect to the variation pattern numbers. For example, when the variation pattern number is “10H03H”, it is constituted by “LCD03_BLK” indicating a normal variation for 12 seconds in the first half variation, “LCD04_BLK” indicating a normal short reach in the second half variation, and “LCD02_BLK” indicating the stoppage time of disconnection. Is done. At this time, “LCD03_BLK”, “LCD04_BLK”, and “LCD02_BLK” are stored in this order. In this way, the configuration of the basic effect and the notice effect can be defined (realized) by connecting the liquid crystal effect block data for each variation pattern.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 435, the same liquid crystal effect block data is used for the same effect section. For example, when the first half fluctuation is a normal fluctuation of 12 seconds, “LCD03_BLK” is used regardless of the content of the notice effect that is actually executed. Thereby, the number of liquid crystal effect block data can be realized by a unique number corresponding to the type of variation, and the liquid crystal effect block data can be uniquely specified for each variation pattern.

  As shown in FIG. 336B, the variation pattern liquid crystal symbol block data combination number table (ZUG_CTL_BLOCKDATA_NO) holds information indicating the combination of block data for each variation pattern, similar to the variation pattern liquid crystal effect block data combination number table. . Further, the sub effect block data corresponding to the variation pattern number is defined by a configuration (the same combination and the same effect time) corresponding to the liquid crystal effect block data having the same variation pattern number on a one-to-one basis.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 337, the variation pattern-specific sub-effect block data combination number table (SCH_CTL_BLOCKDATA_NO) is information indicating the combination of block data for each variation pattern, similar to the variation pattern-specific liquid crystal effect block data combination number table. Hold. Further, the sub effect block data corresponding to the variation pattern number is defined by a configuration (the same combination and the same effect time) corresponding to the liquid crystal effect block data and the liquid crystal symbol block data having the same variation pattern number on a one-to-one basis.

  Next, a procedure for executing a notice effect based on scheduler data corresponding to a variation pattern will be described. Here, the execution procedure of the basic effect and the notice effect based on the effect scheduler data corresponding to the variation pattern “10H03H” will be described. First, an outline of a procedure for performing effect control based on liquid crystal effect block data, effect control based on liquid crystal symbol block data, and effect control based on sub effect block data will be described. FIG. 338 is a diagram for explaining the outline of effect control of the first half fluctuation (normal fluctuation 12 seconds) of the fluctuation pattern “10H03H” in the present embodiment.

  When the variation pattern command (main variation related command) “10H03H” is received from the main control board 1310, the variation pattern number “10H03H” is identified by analyzing the command received by the command analysis module 5200, and the effect control unit 5020 receives the variation pattern number. Notice.

  As described with reference to FIG. 314A, the effect control unit 5020 determines a layer to be used, determines a block data number corresponding to the layer, and sets each variation pattern number “10H03H” based on the determined block number. Corresponding block data numbers are obtained from the variation pattern liquid crystal effect block data combination number table (LCD_CTL_BLOCKDATA_NO), the change pattern liquid crystal symbol block data combination number table (ZUG_CTL_BLOCKDATA_NO), and the variation pattern sub effect block data combination number table (SCH_CTL_BLOCKDATA_NO). To do. By making all the block data numbers corresponding to each effect device the same number, it is possible to execute all the effects of each effect device in synchronization.

  Then, the effect control unit 5020 transmits block data numbers for all layers to the liquid crystal effect block control unit 5310, the liquid crystal symbol block control unit 5311, and the sub effect block control unit 5320.

  Thereafter, the liquid crystal effect block control unit 5310 is a liquid crystal effect 1f drawing scheduler execution unit 5331, the liquid crystal design block control unit 5311 is a liquid crystal design if drawing scheduler execution unit 5332, and the sub effect block control unit 5320 is a sub effect 1f (1 ms) scheduler execution unit. By 5333 (5334), the block data corresponding to the transmitted block data number is executed in chronological order. Specifically, the liquid crystal effect 1f drawing scheduler execution unit 5331 is a normal variation 12-second liquid crystal effect block data “LCD03_BLK” corresponding to the first half change, and the liquid crystal symbol 1f drawing scheduler execution unit 5332 is a normal variation 12-second liquid crystal design block data “ZUG03_BLK”. The sub-effect 1f (1 ms) scheduler execution unit 5333 (5334) executes the normal fluctuation 12-second sub-effect block data “SCH03_BLK”.

  When the processing of the liquid crystal effect block data is started, one or a plurality of liquid crystal effect 1f schedulers corresponding to the liquid crystal effect block data are activated, and the drawing scheduler data specified according to the effect contents is executed. The drawing scheduler data includes liquid crystal function information for displaying an image on the liquid crystal display device, specifies parameters according to the contents of the effect, and transmits the liquid crystal function information to the liquid crystal module 5400 in a predetermined order. The liquid crystal module 5400 analyzes and executes the received liquid crystal function information, and transmits a DISPLAY list to the sound source built-in VDP 1540a, thereby rendering the liquid crystal display device.

  Further, when processing the liquid crystal symbol block data, the liquid crystal symbol if scheduler is activated, and the drawing scheduler data corresponding to the variation display mode of the identification symbol is executed. The procedure for drawing on the liquid crystal display device is the same as when processing the liquid crystal effect block data.

  On the other hand, when the processing of the sub production block data is started, one or a plurality of sub production 1f (1 ms) schedulers corresponding to the sub production block data are activated, and the scheduler data specified according to the production content is executed. Note that the scheduler may be prepared according to the execution cycle, or may be set as the shared execution cycle at startup.

  As described above, the scheduler data includes an effect data designation function for controlling effect devices such as a lamp (“KPLAY”), a speaker (“SPLAY”), and an accessory (“MPLAY”). It is configured to execute the specified effect by sequentially executing the effect data specifying function in the defined order. The effect data designation function is transmitted to modules (lamp module 5600, sound module 5500, drive device (motor) module 5700, etc.) corresponding to the effect device to be controlled, and effects by various effect devices are executed by each module.

  It is also possible to call other scheduler data from the scheduler data by the function “REQ, REQF”. Various rendering devices can be controlled by executing a rendering data designation function in the called scheduler data. Further, by using the command transmission function “COMMAND” or “COMMAND0”, it is possible to control by a command instead of a function. For example, by sending a liquid crystal command to the liquid crystal module 5400 at the timing of executing the effect data specifying function for controlling the action of the accessory, the action of the accessory and the drawing are linked as in the above-described effect of falling notice of the accessory Can be performed.

  Here, a procedure for performing effect control using the sub effect block data will be described. FIG. 339 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the variation pattern-specific sub-effect block data control start processing related to the variation pattern layer of the present embodiment.

  The effect block control unit 5040 selects the change pattern layer by the effect control unit 5020 based on the change pattern number notified from the command analysis module 5200, and changes the control of the block data number for each change pattern corresponding to the change pattern. Control is started using the pattern-specific sub effect block data combination number table (FIG. 337). The row position of the variation effect sub effect block data combination number table (FIG. 337) is set in the variation pattern sub effect block data combination number table row index (step S7001). For example, in the table shown in FIG. 337, if the variation pattern number is “10H01H”, “0” is set in the variation effect sub-effect block data combination number table row index, and the variation pattern number is “10H03H”. For example, since it is the third row, “2” (row-1) is set in the sub-effect block data combination number table row index by variation pattern.

  Next, the effect block control unit 5040 initializes the sub-effect block data combination number table column index for each variation pattern with “0” (step S7002). It starts from the sub effect block data corresponding to the first column of the designated row (variation pattern-specific sub effect block data combination number table row index). Finally, the effect block control unit 5040 executes the variation effect-specific sub-effect block data control scheduler activation process by the scheduler execution unit 5060 (step S7003). Thus, the scheduler for executing the sub-effect block data for each variation pattern is activated, and the scheduler data included in the sub-effect block data is executed.

  FIG. 340 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the variation pattern-based sub-effect block data control activation process of the present embodiment.

  First, the scheduler execution unit 5060 acquires the number of the sub pattern block data number table for each variation pattern based on the row and column indexes from the sub effect block data combination number table for each variation pattern (step S7011). Further, the sub effect block data number table row index is initialized with “0” (step S7012). As a result, the processing is started from the top record of the variation effect sub-effect block data number table specified from the variation effect sub-effect block data combination number table.

  Subsequently, the scheduler execution unit 5060 activates the scheduler data registered in the sub-effect block data classified by variation pattern (step S7013). The scheduler data is registered in the sub effect block data corresponding to each effect registered in the sub effect block data number table for each variation pattern (FIG. 342 (B)). Specifically, based on the sub effect block data number table row index, sub effect block data corresponding to each effect (background sub effect block data, sub effect block data corresponding to the notice) is subtracted from the sub effect block data number table. get. In the sub effect block data corresponding to each effect (background sub effect block data, sub effect block data corresponding to the notice), one or a plurality of scheduler data is registered, and a scheduler corresponding to each scheduler data is defined. ing. When a plurality of scheduler data are registered, one or a plurality of scheduler data is associated with each other based on a lottery result of a notice or the like.

  Furthermore, the scheduler execution unit 5060 updates the sub effect block data number table row index when the activation of all the scheduler data defined in the sub effect block data is completed, and the sub effect block data number table row index changes to the variation pattern. It is determined whether or not the number of elements in the row of the different sub effect block data number table has been exceeded (step S7014). When the number of elements in the row of the variation effect-specific sub effect block data number table is exceeded (the result of step S7014 is “YES”), the sub effect block data control activation process is terminated. On the other hand, when the number of row elements of the variation effect sub-effect block data number table is not exceeded (the result of step S7014 is “NO”), the next sub-effect block data is processed.

  FIG. 341 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of the sub-effect block data control update process for each variation pattern according to the present embodiment. In the sub-effect block data control update processing for each variation pattern, the sub-effect block data corresponding to each effect (background sub-effect block data and sub-effect block data corresponding to the notice) constituting the variation effect sub-effect block data number table This is a process for executing the next sub-effect block data by variation pattern when execution of all the scheduler data is completed. The sub-effect block data control update process for each variation pattern is periodically executed to monitor the execution status of the sub-effect block data for each variation pattern.

  First, the scheduler execution unit 5060 obtains the number of the sub-effect block data number table for each variation pattern from the variation effect sub-effect block data combination number table using the variation effect sub-effect block data combination number table row and column index. (Step S7021). Thereby, sub effect block data corresponding to each effect (background sub effect block data, sub effect block data corresponding to the notice) constituting the variation effect sub effect block data number table is specified and defined as sub effect block data. It is determined whether the scheduler being executed is being executed (step S7022). If it is being executed (the result of step S7022 is “YES”), the execution of the scheduler is continued as it is, and the sub effect block data control update process is terminated.

  Next, the scheduler execution unit 5060 operates all schedulers of sub-effect block data corresponding to each effect (background sub-effect block data and sub-effect block data corresponding to a notice) defined by the sub-effect block data by variation pattern. Is completed (the result of step S7022 is “NO”), the sub-effect block data combination number table column index for each variation pattern is incremented, and whether or not the next column data is end data (“DATA_END”). Is determined (step S7023). If it is end data (the result of step S7023 is "YES"), since a series of effects has been completed, the sub-effect block data control update process for each variation pattern is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the next column data is not the end data (the result of step S7023 is “NO”), scheduler execution unit 5060 starts executing the sub-effect block data by variation pattern corresponding to the next column data. Then, the sub-effect data block control scheduler activation process for each variation pattern is executed (step S7024).

  As described in FIG. 336A, FIG. 336B, and FIG. 337, the sub-effect block data for each variation pattern is defined in association with the liquid crystal effect block data and the liquid crystal symbol block data, and the corresponding block data is executed at the same timing. By making the execution times of the respective block data the same, it is possible to synchronize the effect control by the drawing scheduler, the effect control by the sub effect scheduler, and the effect control by a plurality of schedulers. In addition, if the same variation pattern is obtained by blocking, the number of times the scheduler is defined in the production block and the production block is always the same regardless of the combination of production and the appearance of the production. Complexity can be reduced, and as a result, quality can be improved.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, by synchronizing the production control by one or a plurality of drawing schedulers and sub-production schedulers, it is possible to link the operations of various production devices and execute various productions without any sense of incongruity. can do. In addition, because scheduler data having the same execution time can be executed in parallel, scheduler data for controlling various rendering devices can be independently developed and checked for operation in rendering device units and block data units. Can improve the development efficiency.

  FIG. 342 is a diagram for explaining the procedure for executing the basic effect and the notice effect of the variable display corresponding to the change pattern “10H03H” of the present embodiment. FIG. The execution time of the notice effect, (B) shows the configuration of the sub-effect block data for each variation pattern. The sub effect block data for each variation pattern includes background sub effect block data and notice sub effect block data for executing the background effect and the notice effect. In FIG. 342 (B), a combination of two types of sub-effect block data, background block data and notice block data, is used, but the number of sub-effect block data can be varied.

  As shown in FIG. 342, the variation effect-specific sub-effect block data constituting the variation display of the variation pattern “10H03H” are “SCH03_BLK” (normal variation 12 seconds), “SCH04_BLK” (normal short reach), “SCH02_BLK” ( It is configured by a stoppage of losing. The sub-effect block data “SCH03_BLK” for each variation pattern corresponds to 12 seconds from the start of variation until the left symbol and the right symbol stop. The sub-effect block data “SCH04_BLK” for each variation pattern corresponds to a period in which the left symbol and the right symbol stop at the same identification symbol, and normal short reach is executed. The sub-effect block data “SCH02_BLK” for each variation pattern corresponds to a period in which the middle symbol is stopped, the variation display result is confirmed as lost, and the confirmed symbol is displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 342 (A), the sub-effect block data related to the background and the sub-effect block data related to the background and the sub-effect block data related to the background stop notice are displayed in the sub-effect block data “SCH03_BLK” for each variation pattern. Block data is defined. Further, the sub effect block data “SCH04_BLK” defines the sub effect block data for the cut-in notice and the group notice and the sub effect block data related to the background. Further, in the sub effect block “SCH02_BLK”, the sub effect block data related to the background is defined without defining the notice effect sub effect block data. In the drawing, the execution of the notice effect is not duplicated, but a plurality of notice block data may be defined and executed so that a plurality of notice effects are duplicated. The contents of each notice effect shown in FIG. 342 are as described above.

  Hereinafter, the effect control by each sub effect block data will be described. As shown in FIG. 342 (B), two types of sub-effect block data in the variation display of the variation pattern “10H03H” are executed in parallel. First, the sub-effect block data “SCH03_BLK” classified by variation pattern will be described.

  In the sub effect scheduler data related to the background, the normal variation 12-second background sub effect block data is defined. In the normal variation 12-second background sub-effect block data, a sub-effect scheduler number and sub-effect scheduler data related to a normal variation 12-second background are defined. The normal variation 12-second background sub effect block data is scheduler data related to the background, and therefore has the same effect time as the sub effect block data “SCH03_BLK”. Therefore, it is continuously executed until the sub effect block data “SCH03_BLK” ends.

  In the sub effect scheduler data related to the notice, a function “NOP”, a step-up notice sub effect block data, a BTN logo object fall notice sub effect block data, and a symbol stop notice sub effect block data are defined. The function “NOP” is a weight for synchronizing with the liquid crystal effect scheduler, and is defined to perform a sub effect in accordance with the liquid crystal effect. In the step-up notice sub-effect block data, a sub-effect scheduler number and sub-effect scheduler data related to the step-up notice are defined. The step-up notice sub-effect block data has the same effect time as the step-up notice liquid crystal effect block data. The sub effect block data and sub effect scheduler data related to the BTN logo character object drop notice are defined in the BTN logo object drop notice sub effect block data. The BTN logo accessory drop notice sub-effect block data has the same effect time as the BTN logo accessory drop notice liquid crystal effect block data. In the symbol stop notice sub effect block data, a sub effect scheduler number and sub effect scheduler data related to the symbol stop notice are defined. The symbol stop notice sub-effect block data has the same effect time as the symbol stop notice liquid crystal effect block data. The sub-effect block data “SCH03_BLK” for each variation pattern is configured by combining and executing the above-described sub-effect block data.

  By executing the sub effect block data in synchronization with the liquid crystal effect block data, the scheduler data of each sound, lamp, and motor defined in the sub effect block data is executed in synchronization with the liquid crystal effect. It will be.

  At this time, the liquid crystal effect block data corresponding to the next liquid crystal notice effect from the end of the liquid crystal effect block data corresponding to each liquid crystal notice effect until the first liquid crystal effect block data (step-up notice) is started from the start of the fluctuation. Function until the start of the liquid crystal effect block data corresponding to the last liquid crystal notice effect (design stop notice) until the execution of the sub effect block data “SCH03_BLK” by the variation pattern is finished. “NOP” is executed and waits for a specified time. In this way, by controlling the appearance timing of the sub effect scheduler data corresponding to each liquid crystal effect block data within the scheduler block according to the variation pattern by the function “NOP”, the scheduler is sequentially executed at the execution timing of each notice effect by a program or the like. If the corresponding scheduler data is started without instructing the execution of the data, it is possible to execute the effects of each effect device corresponding to the liquid crystal notice effect at the designated timing. Further, it is assumed that the last function “NOP” of each scheduler data in the sub-effect block data by variation pattern may not be present.

  The execution time of the notice effect set by the scheduler data for controlling the effect device such as the lamp, sound, and accessory is defined for each notice effect. Thereby, since the time from the start of the control based on the sub effect block data to the execution of each notice effect is uniquely determined, the control timing of each effect device can be synchronized.

  Further, the time information at the time of execution of the sub-effect block data by variation pattern is managed not by the start of variation but by the relative value from the start of execution of the sub-effect block data by variation pattern. As a result, when the same variation pattern-specific sub-effect block data is used in a plurality of variation patterns, each effect in the variation pattern-specific sub-effect block data for each variation pattern has an effect start time from the start of the variation. Although different, since the time value is relatively managed in the sub-effect block data for each variation pattern, it can be processed without any problem. Similarly, in the case of the liquid crystal effect block data by variation pattern, the relative value from the start of execution of the liquid crystal effect block data by variation pattern is managed in the same way. In the case of the liquid pattern block data by variation pattern, the liquid crystal design block by variation pattern It is managed as a relative value from the start of data execution.

  Next, the sub-effect block data “SCH04_BLK” classified by variation pattern will be described. The sub-effect block data “SCH04_BLK” for each variation pattern corresponds to normal short reach, but at this time, two types of sub-effect block data are executed in parallel.

  Normal short reach background sub effect block data is defined in the sub effect scheduler data related to the background. In the normal short reach background sub effect block data, a sub effect scheduler number and sub effect scheduler data related to the normal short reach background are defined. Since the normal short reach background sub effect block data is scheduler data related to the background, the effect time is the same as the variation effect sub effect block data “SCH04_BLK”. Therefore, it is continuously executed until the sub-effect block data “SCH04_BLK” for each variation pattern is completed.

  In the sub effect scheduler data related to the notice, a function “NOP”, cut-in notice sub effect block data, and group notice sub effect block data are defined. The function “NOP” is a weight for synchronizing with the liquid crystal effect scheduler, and is defined to execute the sub effect in accordance with the liquid crystal effect. In the cut-in notice sub-effect block data, a sub-effect scheduler number and sub-effect scheduler data related to the cut-in notice are defined. The cut-in notice sub-effect block data has the same effect time as the cut-in notice liquid crystal effect block data. In the group notice sub-effect block data, a sub-effect scheduler number and sub-effect scheduler data related to the group notice are defined. The group notice sub-effect block data has the same effect time as the group announcement liquid crystal effect block data. The sub effect block data “SCH04_BLK” for each variation pattern is configured by combining and executing the above sub effect block data.

  By executing the sub effect block data in synchronization with the liquid crystal effect block data, the scheduler data of each sound, lamp, and motor defined in the sub effect block data is executed in synchronization with the liquid crystal effect. It will be.

  The variation effect sub-effect block data “SCH04_BLK” has the same number of sub-effect block data columns as the variation effect sub-effect block data “SCH03_BLK”. no problem.

  Finally, in the sub-effect block data “SCH02_BLK” for each variation pattern, no effect related to the notice is performed, so only the losing stop background sub-effect block data is executed. Loss stop background sub effect block data is defined in the sub effect scheduler data related to the background. In the stop stop background sub-effect block data, a sub-effect scheduler number and sub-effect scheduler data related to a normal fluctuation 12-second background are defined. Loss-stop background sub-effect block data is scheduler data related to the background, and therefore has the same effect time as the sub-effect block data “SCH02_BLK”. Therefore, it is continuously executed until the sub effect block data “SCH02_BLK” is completed.

  FIG. 343 is a view for explaining the relationship between the variation pattern-specific liquid crystal effect block data and the variation pattern-specific liquid crystal design block data of the present embodiment. In the liquid crystal effect block data by variation pattern and the liquid crystal design block data by variation pattern, the function executed in the scheduler data in the liquid crystal effect scheduler data is only different from the function executed in the scheduler data in the sub effect block data. Since the data format and the control method are common, the description is omitted.

  Subsequently, the configuration of the sub-effect block data will be described using the step-up effect described in FIG. 314B as an example. First, an outline of creating liquid crystal display scheduler data for step-up notice will be described. FIG. 344 is a diagram showing an image in which a drawing data file is created in units of step-up effects (step-up 1 effect to 4 effects) using the video composition / motion creation graphic tool for the step-up notice for liquid crystal display of the present embodiment. is there.

  The drawing data file is created in units of step-up effects, and is composed of a series of effects combining still images and moving images. Further, as shown in FIG. 344, the drawing data file is converted into the liquid crystal effect scheduler data in the present embodiment by the tool in units of step-up effects.

  The reason why the drawing data file is not created one-to-one with the liquid crystal notice effect (step-up notices 1 to 4) is, for example, when only the step-up 1 effect is changed, as in this embodiment, four types of step-up notices. If it is feasible, it is necessary to change the drawing data file for 4 lines. Considering the work time required for the change and the risk of omission of correction, the drawing data file is created with a unique number for each step. This is because it is more efficient to combine and realize the notice.

  FIG. 345 is a diagram for explaining the configuration of effect block data for step-up notice according to the present embodiment. (A) shows the structure of step-up notice liquid crystal effect block data, and (B) shows the structure of step-up notice sub-effect block data. As described above, in this embodiment, four types of step-up notices can be executed, but (A) and (B) show step-up notices 1 and 2. In step-up notices 3 and 4, step-up 3 effects and step-up 4 effects are executed at a predetermined timing.

  The step-up notice liquid crystal effect block data will be described. First, based on the lottery result value of the step-up notice acquired at the start of the change, it is determined which of the step-up notices 1 to 4 is to be executed. The If the lottery result value of the step-up notice is non-winning, the step-up notice liquid crystal effect block data is terminated without executing, and therefore the step-up notice is not executed and drawing on the liquid crystal display device is not performed.

  On the other hand, if the lottery result value of the step-up notice is the step-up notice 1, the step-up notice 1 of the step-up notice liquid crystal effect block data is selected, and if the lottery result value of the step-up notice is the step-up notice 2, Step-up notice 2 of the step-up notice liquid crystal effect block data is selected, and the corresponding effect block data is selected. The effect block data of the step-up notice 2 operates in the liquid crystal scheduler LCD_SCH01 for executing the step-up 1 liquid crystal effect scheduler data and the liquid crystal scheduler LCD_SCH02 for executing the step-up 2 liquid crystal effect scheduler data in parallel.

  In the liquid crystal scheduler LCD_SCH01, when the step-up 1 liquid crystal effect scheduler data is executed, the data to be executed next is “DATA_END”, and thus the operation in the liquid crystal scheduler LCD_SCH01 is terminated.

  Further, the function “NOP” is executed by the liquid crystal scheduler LCD_SCH02, and after waiting for the time specified by the parameter, the step-up 2 liquid crystal effect scheduler data is executed. Step-up 2 After the execution of the liquid crystal effect scheduler data, since the data to be executed next is “DATA_END”, the operation in the liquid crystal scheduler LCD_SCH02 is ended.

  As described above, a plurality of variations of a single notice can be realized by combining the notice scheduler data of the notice in the minimum structural unit.

  Next, the step-up notice sub-effect block data will be described with reference to FIG. 345 (B). The step-up notice sub-effect block data is configured in a one-to-one correspondence with the step-up notice liquid crystal effect block data and the block configuration and execution time. Thereby, it becomes possible to synchronize dynamically with all effect apparatuses also with respect to the combination of a fluctuation pattern and a lottery result of a notice, and can realize an effect with a sense of unity.

  The step-up notice sub-effect block data is different from the step-up notice liquid crystal effect block data only in the function executed by the liquid crystal effect scheduler data and the function executed by the sub-effect scheduler data. Since the data format and the control method are common, the description is omitted.

  As described above, in this embodiment, when the variation pattern command is received from the main control board 1310, the sub-effect block data stored in the order of data access is acquired from the variation effect sub-effect block data combination table “SCH_CTL_BLOCKDATA_NO”. Then, by executing the scheduler data included in the acquired sub-effect block data according to the data access order, it becomes possible to execute the basic effect and the notice effect defined at a predetermined order and at a predetermined timing. .

  Therefore, according to the present embodiment, the scheduler data for controlling the various effect devices can be executed in parallel, and the scheduler data executed at the same timing is defined at the same execution time. The production can be synchronized. Further, when the execution of the scheduler data is started, a predetermined operation is subsequently performed at a timing set in the scheduler data. As a result, by simply executing the corresponding block data based on the information specifying the effect contents such as the fluctuation pattern, the scheduler data defined in a hierarchical manner is automatically acquired, and the effect is executed at the defined timing. It is possible to do.

  Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, since a plurality of schedulers can be started and the schedule data can be executed independently by each scheduler, it is possible to develop a plurality of types of scheduler data in parallel, thereby dramatically improving the development efficiency. Can be improved.

  In addition, according to the present embodiment, the scheduler analyzes the scheduler data described in a predetermined format, and controls the rendering device. Therefore, even if the control mechanism of the gaming machine (for example, the peripheral control board 1510 or the arithmetic device included therein) is updated, a common schedule can be obtained by installing a scheduler corresponding to a new gaming machine. Data can be used. That is, the scheduler has a function as middleware for executing common schedule data on different platforms, and it is possible to use software assets related to the presentation control of the gaming machine for a long time.

  Note that the scheduler in the present embodiment may be realized by software or hardware. When the scheduler is realized by software, the scheduler activated when the scheduler data is executed may be stopped after use, and the memory use area may be released. By stopping the scheduler, the memory usage can be reduced. For example, it may be released when a predetermined time elapses after execution of the schedule data is completed, or may be stopped other than the minimum scheduler when the gaming machine enters a customer waiting state.

[19. Production control by LCD production scheduler data]
Next, details of the liquid crystal effect scheduler data constituting the liquid crystal effect block data will be described. The liquid crystal effect scheduler data is constituted by a combination of functions for controlling the effect object, similarly to the sub effect block data. In the sub effect block data, sound output, lamp lighting, driving device operation, and the like are controlled objects, but the liquid crystal effect scheduler data is controlled on drawing on the liquid crystal display device.

[19-1. Scheduler function for LCD production]
First, a function (liquid crystal effect scheduler function) constituting the liquid crystal effect scheduler data will be described. The liquid crystal effect scheduler function is a command (function, command) for effect control described in the liquid crystal effect scheduler data constituting the liquid crystal effect block data described above. Send and execute the production. Further, when executing the scheduler function for liquid crystal effect, it is possible to change the attributes (for example, color, shape, operation content, etc.) of the object to be displayed by specifying parameters.

[19-1-1. Scheduler function for LCD production]
FIG. 346 is a diagram illustrating an example of a scheduler function for liquid crystal effect according to the present embodiment. Hereinafter, an overview of each liquid crystal effect scheduler function will be described.

  Each liquid crystal effect scheduler function is managed for each group. In the present embodiment, there are groups of coordinate setting, scale setting, rotation angle setting, α setting, frame setting, Z index setting, effect SW setting, and sub-scheduler setting.

  First, functions belonging to the coordinate setting group will be described. For example, the function belonging to the coordinate setting group is to set the liquid crystal display object by designating the coordinates of the display area of the liquid crystal display device. Thereby, it becomes possible to designate and display the position of the liquid crystal display object.

  The functions “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_POSX”, “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_POSY”, and “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_POSZ” specify the X-axis coordinate position, the Y-axis coordinate position, and the Z-axis coordinate position, respectively, and set the display position of the liquid crystal display object.

  The function “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_ANCHORX” specifies the X axis coordinate position, the function “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_ANCHORY” specifies the Y axis coordinate position, and sets the liquid crystal display target anchor point position. The function “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_ANCHORXY” designates the X-axis and Y-axis coordinate positions and sets the liquid crystal display target anchor point position. The liquid crystal display object anchor point position is the center position of the liquid crystal display object.

  Next, a group to which a function for performing scaling (scale setting) of a display target (still image, moving image) belongs will be described. Scaling is, for example, setting the center of a display area that is designated to be enlarged or reduced when displayed on a liquid crystal display device from the size of a still image or moving image stored on the CGROM, or converting the coordinate unit. It is to do. By performing a drawing process by setting an appropriate coordinate system in the display area, the liquid crystal display object can be displayed at an appropriate position and size.

  The functions “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_SCALE”, “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_SCALEX”, “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_SCALEY”, “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_SCALEZ”, “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_SCALEXY”, and “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_SCALEXYZ” belong to the scale setting group. The function “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_SCALE” specifies the X-axis and Y-axis values, and sets the enlargement or reduction ratio of the liquid crystal display object. The function “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_SCALEX” designates the X-axis value and sets the coordinates of the liquid crystal display object. The function “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_SCALEY” designates the Y-axis value and sets the enlargement or reduction ratio of the liquid crystal display object. The function “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_SCALEZ” designates the Z-axis value and sets the enlargement or reduction ratio of the liquid crystal display object. The function “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_SCALEXY” specifies the X-axis and Y-axis values and sets the enlargement or reduction ratio of the liquid crystal display object. The function “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_SCALEXYZ” specifies the X-axis, Y-axis, and Z-axis values, and sets the enlargement or reduction ratio of the liquid crystal display object.

  Next, a group to which a function for setting an angle when rotating and displaying a liquid crystal display object will be described. By storing only the reference liquid crystal display object in the CGROM and displaying it by designating an angle, there is no need to store a plurality of liquid crystal display objects after rotation, thereby suppressing an increase in storage capacity. it can.

  The functions “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_ANGLEX”, “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_ANGLEY”, “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_ANGLEZ”, and “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_ANGLEXYZ” belong to the rotation angle setting group. The function “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_ANGLEX” specifies the X-axis value, the function “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_ANGLEY” specifies the Y-axis value, the function “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_ANGLEZ” specifies the Z-axis value, and rotates the liquid crystal display object. The function “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_ANGLEXYZ” designates the X-axis value, the Y-axis value, and the Z-axis value, and rotates the liquid crystal display object.

  Next, other functions will be described. The function “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_ALPHA” is an α setting process. Specifically, the α value is specified to set the transmittance of the liquid crystal display object. The α value is a numerical value indicating transparency, and can be set from transparent (colorless) that completely transmits the background color to completely opaque that does not pass the background color at all.

  The function “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_FRAME” is a frame setting process, and specifically sets a frame value that is a drawing update interval of the liquid crystal display object. The frame value is a numerical value indicating an interval at which the liquid crystal display object is redrawn during animation processing.

  The function “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_ZINDEX” sets the Z index of the liquid crystal display object. The Z index is a hierarchy for displaying a liquid crystal display object, and by setting this, the liquid crystal display object is displayed on the front or moved to the back side on the screen. For example, when the liquid crystal display object is the background, the Z index is set so as to be drawn on the back surface.

  The functions “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_LCDSW”, “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_FRAMELCDSW”, and “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_KICKLCDSW” belong to the effect SW setting group in order to set information related to the effect SW. The effect SW, which will be described in detail later, is information embedded in control information for drawing (images, moving images). By detecting this information, a predetermined process is called back, and the contents of the effect are switched. Or perform another production. The function “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_LCDSW” sets the effect SW information to the still image index number on the CGROM or the moving image index number on the CGROM in the liquid crystal effect scheduler data. The function “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_FRAMELCDSW” sets the frame effect SW information in the entire liquid crystal effect scheduler data. The function “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_KICKLCDSW” sets SW information defining special control information described later in the liquid crystal effect scheduler data.

  The function “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_SUBSCH” is a function for calling the sub-scheduler. By defining a highly versatile process as a sub-scheduler and calling back at a predetermined timing, the process can be simplified and the development efficiency can be improved.

[19-1-2. Scheduler function parameters for LCD production]
In the foregoing, an example of the liquid crystal effect scheduler function used in the gaming machine of the present embodiment has been described. Next, parameters specified when executing the scheduler function for liquid crystal effect will be described with an example. 347 and 348 are diagrams showing an example of parameters for the scheduler function for liquid crystal effect in the present embodiment.

  The parameters of the scheduler function for liquid crystal effect are managed for each group as in the scheduler function for liquid crystal effect. The group of the scheduler function for liquid crystal effect and the group of parameters are different groups. The parameter group includes sequence control, effect SW, footage setting, symbol replacement related, sub effect scheduler function, and the like.

  The sequence control parameter groups include "AAD_FRAME", "AAD_POS", "AAD_POS2", "AAD_POS3", "AAD_ALPHA", "AAD_ANGLE", "AAD_ENTRY", "AAD_ENTRY_B", "AAD_SKIP", "AAD_SKIP_B", "AAD_SCALE_SIZE", "AAD_AD" And the like. Hereinafter, each parameter will be described.

  “AAD_FRAME” is a parameter for designating a frame value and has a length of 16 bits. “AAD_POS” is a parameter for designating the X-axis coordinate position, and has a length of 16 bits. “AAD_POS2” is a parameter for setting the X-axis and Y-axis coordinate positions, and each has a length of 16 bits. “AAD_POS3” is a parameter for setting the X-axis, Y-axis, and Z-axis coordinate positions, and each has a length of 16 bits.

  “AAD_ALPHA” is a parameter for designating an α value that is the transmittance of the liquid crystal display object, and has a length of 8 bits. “AAD_ANGLE” is a parameter for designating the rotation angle of the liquid crystal display object, and has a length of 16 bits. “AAD_ENTRY” is a parameter that specifies the total number of data of the parameter to be set, and has a length of 16 bits. “AAD_ENTRY_B” is a parameter for designating the total number of data of the parameters to be set, and is two parameters divided into 8-bit lengths.

  “AAD_SKIP” is a parameter that specifies the number of frames to be skipped, and has a length of 16 bits. “AAD_SKIP_B” is a parameter for designating the number of frames to be skipped during liquid crystal display, and is two parameters divided into 8-bit lengths.

  “AAD_SCALE” is a parameter for designating a scale value when the coordinate system of the display area is one axis, and has a length of 16 bits. “AAD_SCALE2” is a parameter that specifies an enlargement or reduction ratio when the coordinate system of the display area is two axes, and each has a length of 16 bits. “AAD_SCALE3” is a parameter for designating an enlargement or reduction ratio when the coordinate system of the display area is three axes, and each has a length of 16 bits. “AAD_SIZE” is a parameter for designating the size of the liquid crystal display object on the XY2 axes, and each has a length of 16 bits.

  The parameter group of the production SW includes “AAD_LCDSWENTRY”, “AAD_LCDSW”, “AAD_LCDSW_PARAM”, “AAD_KICKLCDSWENTRY”, “AAD_KICKLCDSW”, “AAD_FRAMELCDSWENTRY”, “AAD_FRAMELCDSW_PARAM”, and the like.

  “AAD_LCDSWENTRY” is a parameter for designating the total number of registered effects SW, and has a length of 16 bits. “AAD_LCDSW” is a parameter that specifies the number of the effect SW, and specifies two 16-bit numeric values. “AAD_LCDSW_PARAM” is a parameter for passing the effect SW number, and has a length of 16 bits.

  “AAD_KICKLCDSWENTRY” is a parameter for designating the total number of registrations of kick effects SW, and has a length of 16 bits. “AAD_KICKLCDSW” is a parameter that specifies the number of the kick effect SW, and specifies two 16-bit numeric values. “AAD_FRAMELCDSWENTRY” is a parameter for designating the total number of registration of the frame effect SW, and has a length of 16 bits. “AAD_FRAMELCDSW_PARAM” is a parameter for passing the frame effect SW number and has a length of 16 bits.

  The group of parameters for footage setting includes “AAD_SEQFOOTENTRY”, “AAD_SEQFOOT”, and the like. “AAD_SEQFOOTENTRY” is a parameter that specifies the number of still images to be registered in a predetermined area, and has a length of 16 bits. “AAD_SEQFOOT” is a parameter for designating the index number of a still image stored in the CGROM, and has a length of 16 bits.

  The group of parameters related to symbol replacement includes “AAD_ZUGARA” and the like. “AAD_ZUGARA” is a parameter for designating a symbol index number, and has a length of 16 bits.

  The parameter group of the sub effect scheduler function includes “AAD_SUBENTRY”, “AAD_SUB”, and the like. “AAD_SUBENTRY” is a parameter for specifying the number of sub-scheduler function parameters, and has a length of 16 bits. “AAD_SUB” is a parameter for designating a sub-scheduler function number, and has a length of 16 bits.

[20. Callback control based on image information]
Production control in gaming machines has been realized by combining and executing programs that individually control various production devices and programs that link multiple production devices. These programs are described by program codes representing the operation contents and control procedures of the rendering device for each notice content in addition to the commands related to the variation pattern, and are created by a highly skilled programmer. In the liquid crystal drawing, individual effect drawing data is called in a frame in which the effect is executed, and a plurality of effect drawing (background, symbol, notice, hold, etc.) are combined.

  However, in recent gaming machines, in order to improve the performance of the hardware and the interest of the gaming machine, it is required to perform a wide variety of effects, and it is necessary to realize complex effect control. As a result, a high level of skill is required for each programmer and the development man-hours increase, making it difficult to secure the necessary personnel (programmers) both qualitatively and quantitatively. Furthermore, since the total amount of program codes of the production control program is increased, the man-hours required for testing for the purpose of confirming the operation of the gaming machine and improving the quality have also increased.

  Therefore, in order to solve the above-mentioned problems, in the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, in order to shorten the development period and improve the quality, it is not possible to realize an effect executed in conjunction with liquid crystal drawing (image display) with a program code. Instead, the program data for the gaming machine is output by a tool for creating a liquid crystal rendering effect, and the effect is controlled based on the output program data, thereby realizing a reduction in development period and an improvement in quality.

  Specifically, a tool capable of creating data for executing a liquid crystal rendering effect is used by assigning images and moving images displayed on the liquid crystal display device in time series. In this tool, a single effect drawing data (notice, background, design, hold, etc.) is defined as one effect block, and an effect common block is created by grouping effect blocks for each state such as a variation pattern or jackpot, By combining a plurality of effect common blocks, a series of effect drawing such as a variation pattern and a big hit is realized.

  However, because of the configuration of the gaming machine, display or non-display of the effects related to the lottery, replacement of the effects and symbols, and interactive effects in response to external input by the player, so simply execute the combined effect common block as it is Then, it is impossible to realize all the productions.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when creating a production common block using the above-described tool, a production switch (production SW for invoking a program for performing the production at a predetermined timing or executing a predetermined control. ) Can be set (incorporated). The effect SW is a flag on the RAM and is set to ON or OFF. When the effect SW set in the effect data for drawing is set, the callback always occurs regardless of the effect SW “ON” and “OFF”. Further, when the effect SW is ON in the callback destination function, a predetermined control is performed based on the defined effect SW information corresponding to the effect SW. The effect SW is set to ON by a command issued inside the main control board 1310 or the peripheral control board 1510. The effect SW is set for each display object, still image, and moving image in the liquid crystal layer table, the liquid crystal effect common block, the liquid crystal effect block, the liquid crystal effect scheduler data, and the liquid crystal effect scheduler data.

  When the liquid crystal effect block control unit 5310 executes and analyzes the effect blocks included in the effect common block at the time of liquid crystal drawing and detects the incorporated effect SW, the program function is dynamically called based on the detected effect SW (callback) To do). Based on the information processed by the program function that is called back, a display list command can be created, and effect display ON / OFF and effect replacement can be realized. In the program function called by the callback, it is possible to execute effects other than the liquid crystal effect (for example, sound output, lamp lighting, action of an accessory, etc.). Also, it is possible to perform processing such as setting information necessary for subsequent production control, such as setting a flag and updating data in a predetermined area. As described above, by calling the program function by detecting the effect SW, it is possible to realize display or non-display of drawing by a plurality of effect blocks, replacement of effects and symbols, and interactive effects for external input by the player. .

  The program function for turning on / off the liquid crystal effect and the effect replacement called by the callback is incorporated in the peripheral control unit 1530 in advance, and does not need to be newly created. Therefore, by setting a presentation SW so that a designer or plan creator who does not have advanced program knowledge sets a presentation element such as an image or a video at the time of presentation design, and calls a predefined program function, Complex production specifications can be realized. In addition, using the production creation tool, production blocks (liquid crystal production scheduler data) can be created in production units, and the development period can be greatly reduced. In addition, production contents can be created based on random lottery results. By performing the test using the effect SW without performing the test, the test process can be simplified and the time required for the test can be greatly reduced.

[20-1. Direction switch configuration]
Next, the configuration of the effect switch (SW) will be described. FIG. 349 is a diagram illustrating the configuration of the effect switch in the present embodiment. The effect SW is uniquely identified by the effect SW number, and is associated with information necessary for replacing the effect, a program function called by a callback, and the like.

  An effect SW group ID, an effect SW reset group ID, an effect SW attribute, an effect SW start command address, an effect replacement information table address, and the like are associated with the effect SW number.

  The effect SW group is a set of effects SW grouped according to the execution mode of the effect, and the effect SW group ID is an identifier of the effect SW group, and defines which effect SW group belongs to. The effect SW reset group has the same configuration as the effect SW group. By specifying the effect SW reset group ID, the effect SW group belonging to the effect SW reset group is set to OFF, and the effects belonging to the effect SW group are collectively displayed. Can be hidden. The effect SW reset group ID is an identifier of the effect SW reset group. Since the effect SW group ID and the effect SW reset group ID have a bit configuration, a plurality of effect SW groups can be specified.

  FIG. 350 is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of the effect SW group of the present embodiment. Further, as described above, there are active and passive effects SW, and the effect SW group is composed of one or more active effects SW and passive effects SW. Specifically, the head group number of the active effect SW belonging to the effect SW group and the number of the active effect SW, and the head group number of the passive effect SW and the number of the passive effect SW are included.

  The effect SW attribute is information indicating the attribute of the effect SW, and specifically includes liquid crystal effect SW total reset information, replacement information, special control information, passive / active information, and the like. The liquid crystal effect SW all reset information is information for designating whether or not the effect SW belonging to the effect group designated at the time of evaluating the effect SW is set to OFF. The replacement information is information for designating whether or not to call a callback function for effect replacement when evaluating the effect SW. The special control information (special control behavior) is information for designating whether or not to call a predetermined callback function when evaluating the effect SW. The passive / active information indicates a method of evaluating the effect SW. The effect SW is statically evaluated in the passive state, and the effect SW is dynamically evaluated in the active state.

  The effect SW start command address is an address of the effect SW start command table. The effect SW activation command is a command sequence for setting the effect SW to ON, and a command for setting the effect SW to ON is defined in the effect SW activation command table. FIG. 351 is a diagram showing an example of the effect SW activation command table of the present embodiment. In FIG. 351, an effect SW activation command table “lcdsw_cmd_en_ykk_b051_crs_charenge_suc” and an effect SW activation command table “lcdsw_cmd_act_b056_cmc_su3_out_red” are illustrated. Each table is composed of the number of commands and data corresponding to the number of commands for determination.

[20-2. Control by effect switch in step-up notice effect]
Next, the effect control using the effect switch will be described using a step-up notice effect as an example. FIG. 352 is a diagram illustrating an example of a step-up notice in the present embodiment, where (A) shows a stage where a step-up notice effect is executed, and (B) shows a screen displayed on the liquid crystal display device at each stage. An example is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 352 (A), the step-up notice of this embodiment can be executed in up to four stages, and at the end of the step-up notice of each stage, the development effect to the next stage is executed. . When the step-up notice develops, the next step-up notice effect is continuously executed, and when the step-up notice does not develop, the step-up notice ends.

  Here, variations of the step-up notice effect at each stage will be described. In step-up notice 1, which is the first stage after the start of step-up notice effect, an effect that the display screen is filled with black ink is executed. At this time, the degree of expectation is suggested by the color of black and the pattern of fill. For example, when the color of black is black, the degree of expectation is low, and the degree of expectation increases in the order of white, red, and rainbow colors. In addition, as the pattern of filling, the degree of expectation is higher as the number of positions where filling starts is higher, and the degree of expectation may be changed at the position where filling starts. For example, the expectation is low when filling starts from only one place in the lower left, and when filling starts from two places in the lower left and upper left, the filling starts from three places in the lower left, upper left, and upper right. The expectation is higher in order, and the expectation is highest when the filling is started from the four corners.

  Further, as described above, at the end of the step-up notice at each stage, the development effect for the step-up notice at the next stage is executed. Regardless of whether or not the development effect is actually developed to the next stage, the effect is executed in a common manner until the middle in order to increase the player's expectation. The case of the step-up notice 1 will be described. First, the liquid crystal display screen is filled with a combination of the ink color determined by lottery and the paint pattern. After that, when the screen is completely filled, the ink gradually fades (thinens), and characters for display in the step-up notice 2 emerge. When the step-up notice 2 is developed, the ink is applied as it is, and the character display is darkened, and the production is continued. On the other hand, when the development effect fails, the character display is not darkened and the ink is drawn and the character is not displayed.

  In step-up notice 2, characters corresponding to the degree of expectation are displayed. As for the character pattern, the degree of expectation increases in the order of “change”, “punishment”, “feeling”, “continuation”, and “one-shot killing”. In the effect mode of step-up notice 2, the screen is first filled while enlarging the area to be filled with the combination of the ink color and the paint variation in step-up notice 1 in a state where characters are displayed. Thereafter, when the screen is completely filled with black, the process proceeds to step-up notice 3. On the other hand, if the development effect fails, the ink is gradually removed before the screen is completely filled with ink, and eventually the ink is completely removed, and the displayed characters disappear. Will end up.

  In step-up notice 3, the liquid crystal display screen is filled with black in step-up notice 2, and an effect that the ink is gradually removed from this state is executed. At this time, the degree of expectation is suggested according to the pattern that the ink brushes. For example, when ink is applied only from the lower left, the expectation is low, and when ink is applied from the lower left and the upper left, the ink is applied from the lower left, upper left, and upper right. The degree of expectation increases in the order of going, and the degree of expectation becomes highest when ink is drawn from the four corners. If the characters are displayed in the process of brushing the ink and the characters are displayed on the liquid crystal display screen after all the ink is removed, the development effect is successful and the process proceeds to step-up notice 4. On the other hand, if no characters are displayed on the liquid crystal display screen after all the ink has been removed, the development effect has failed.

  Step-up notice 4 is the final stage of step-up notice, and the degree of expectation is suggested by the content (pattern) and color of characters displayed on the liquid crystal display screen. For example, the expectation of a character pattern increases in the order of “game”, “opportunity”, “development”, “hot fight”, “extreme heat”, and “happiness”. In addition, the expectation level of the character color increases in the order of black, white, red, and rainbow. In the effect mode of step-up notice 4, an animation or the like in which the displayed characters are enlarged is executed.

  Next, a procedure for executing the step-up notice described above using the effect SW will be described. FIGS. 353 to 355 are diagrams for explaining the execution procedure of the step-up notice using the effect SW in the present embodiment. FIG. 353 is a diagram showing the correspondence between all the production contents and the production SW in the step-up notice 1. FIG. 354 (A) shows step-up notice 1 liquid crystal effect scheduler data and drawing image for executing step-up notice 1 for painting with black ink from four directions on the screen, and (B) shows red ink from the upper right and lower left of the screen. The step-up notice 1 liquid crystal effect scheduler data and the drawing image for executing the step-up notice 1 to be filled in are shown. FIG. 355 is a diagram showing the relationship between the effect SW for replacing the effect related to the step-up notice 1 and the effect.

  FIG. 353 shows all the effects produced in the step-up notice 1 and is divided according to each drawing (ink drawing lower left, ink drawing upper left, ink drawing lower right, ink drawing upper right, character failure, character success). The name of the effect SW and the content of the effect are described for each category. The total number of step-up effects shown in the figure is 16 effects with 4 effects each for the lower left, upper left, lower right, and upper right drawing categories, and 10 effects with 5 effects each for the character failure and character success drawing categories, totaling 26 effects. It has become. In addition, since there is always one effect that can be executed simultaneously in each drawing section, and only one of the drawing sections “character failure” and “character success” is executed, the maximum effect that can be executed simultaneously in step-up notice 1 The number of renderings is 5 effects, including the drawing category “lower left”, the drawing category “upper left”, the drawing category “lower right”, the drawing category “upper right” and the drawing category “character failure” or the drawing category “character success”.

  Further, according to the notice lottery result value of the step-up notice 1, the effect determining method for each drawing section will be specifically described. First, the lottery of the step-up notice 1 is performed, and the contents of effects related to the ink drawing are determined. The effects related to ink drawing are specifically the selection of the position where ink appears from the drawing category “lower left, upper left, lower right, upper right” and the color of the ink appearing from the place where the selected ink appears. Become. In addition, either the drawing division “character failure” or the drawing division “character success” and the contents of the character displayed at this time are displayed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 354 (A), the structure of the step-up notice 1 liquid crystal effect scheduler data and the step-up notice 1 liquid crystal effect scheduler data when executed without any control will be described. . As described above, the total number of effects of the step-up notice 1 is 26 effects in total, but the step-up notice 1 liquid crystal effect scheduler data includes one for each drawing category of lower left, upper left, lower right, upper right, character failure, and character success. Only the production data is defined. When the step-up notice 1 liquid crystal effect scheduler data is executed without any control, that is, when all the step-up notice 1 liquid crystal effect scheduler data is executed at the same time, as shown in the drawing of the step-up notice 1 drawing image. In addition, black ink spreads simultaneously from the lower left, upper left, lower right, and upper right of the screen, and the characters “change” are displayed lightly in the drawing division “character failure” and the drawing division “character success”, and then the drawing division “character” The characters “change” are deleted by “failure”, and the characters “change” are clearly displayed in the drawing category “character success”.

  Further, in FIG. 354 (B), according to the lottery result of the step-up notice 1, the drawing section “lower left” is “red”, the drawing section “upper left” is “none”, and the drawing section “lower right” is “none”. A command is issued in which the classification “upper right” is “red”, the drawing classification “character failure” is “feeling”, and the drawing classification “character success” is “none”. As a result, the red ink spreads from the drawing section “lower left” and the red ink spreads from the drawing section “upper right”, and the character “Kai” is displayed lightly in the drawing section “character failure”. The character “Kai” is erased in the drawing division “character failure”.

  At this time, the effect SW corresponding to the effect corresponding to the content of each issued lottery command is set to ON. Specifically, the step-up notice 1 lottery command drawing category “lower left” is set to “red”, “LEDSW_LEFDW_S1_RED” is set to ON, and the step-up notice 1 lottery command drawing category “upper right” is set to “red”. Thus, “LEDSW_RIGUP_S1_RED” is set to ON, and “LEDSW_MOJI_NGS1_KIA” is set to ON for the step-up notice 1 lottery command drawing classification “Character failure”. On the other hand, the step-up notice 1 lottery command drawing category “upper left” is “none”, the step-up notice 1 lottery command drawing category “lower right” is “none”, and the step-up notice 1 lottery command drawing category “character success” is “none”. Since the command “” is not performed, none of the effects SW is set to ON and is set to OFF.

  As described above, the red ink spreads from the drawing category “lower left” and the red ink spreads from the drawing category “upper right” from all the effects of the step-up notice 1. The effect SW corresponding to the case of displaying characters is set to ON according to the command based on the lottery result of the step-up notice 1.

  Subsequently, referring to FIG. 355, using the step-up notice 1 liquid crystal effect scheduler data of FIG. 354 (A), an effect according to the lottery result of the step-up notice 1 of FIG. 355 (B) is performed. A mechanism for directing the production will be described.

  FIG. 355 is a diagram for explaining the master data defined on the liquid crystal effect scheduler data for each drawing category in the present embodiment, and the effect SW corresponding to the replacement data replaced with the master data. More specifically, referring to the lower left ink effect replacement group in FIG. 355, the effect SW corresponding to the master data of the step-up notice 1 liquid crystal effect scheduler data is the index number on the CGROM of the moving image in which black ink spreads from the lower left. And the corresponding effect SW “LEDSW_LEFDW_S1_BLK”. On the other hand, the effect SW corresponding to the replacement data corresponds to the effect SW “LEDSW_LEFDW_S1_WHI” corresponding to the index number on the CGROM of the moving image in which white ink spreads from the lower left, and the index number on the CGROM of the moving image in which red ink spreads from the lower left. The effect SW “LEDSW_LEFDW_S1_RED”, the effect SW “LEDSW_LEFDW_S1_RED” corresponding to the index number on the CGROM of the moving image in which the rainbow ink spreads from the lower left. The replacement data is not defined in the step-up notice 1 liquid crystal effect scheduler data, but is separately defined in the lower left ink effect replacement table. Further, the effect SW “LEDSW_LEFDW_S1_BLK” corresponding to the index number on the CGROM of the moving image in which black ink spreads from the lower left of the master data is defined in both the step-up notice 1 liquid crystal effect scheduler data and the lower left ink effect replacement table.

  In the liquid crystal effect 1f drawing scheduler execution unit 5331, the step-up notice 1 liquid crystal effect scheduler data is analyzed and executed in the process of creating the display list command for drawing the effect, and is defined as the step-up notice 1 liquid crystal effect scheduler data. With the effect SW “LEDSW_LEFDW_S1_BLK” as a trigger (detected), a callback is generated, and control is transferred from the liquid crystal effect 1f drawing scheduler execution unit 5331 to a program function for effect replacement.

  The replacement program function called by the callback refers to the lower left ink effect replacement table, determines all the effect SWs registered in the lower left ink effect replacement table, and identifies the effect SW set to ON. To do. In this embodiment, the step-up notice 1 lottery command drawing category “lower left” is “red”, and the effect SW “LEDSW_LEFDW_S1_RED” is set to ON, so that “from the lower left” corresponding to the effect SW “LEDSW_LEFDW_S1_RED” is set. The moving image number on the CGROM of “Red ink” is specified.

  The replacement program function called by the callback passes the specified moving image number on the red CGROM to the liquid crystal effect 1f drawing scheduler execution unit 5331 from the lower left and ends the execution. When the control returns again to the liquid crystal effect 1f drawing scheduler execution unit 5331, the liquid crystal effect 1f drawing scheduler execution unit 5331 performs CGROM corresponding to the moving image in which black ink appears from the lower left defined in the step-up notice 1 liquid crystal effect scheduler data. Instead of creating a display list command using the upper video number, a display list command is generated using the video number on the CGROM corresponding to the video in which red ink appears from the lower left handed over from the replacement program function. create.

  The feature of the effect replacement by callback in this embodiment is that the control structure is low level (in this embodiment, liquid crystal effect scheduler data, data structure that is easy to change and suitable for tooling) and high level control structure (this implementation) By calling a program function for replacement, a program function that is unsuitable for modification but capable of executing complex processing) with a callback, it is possible to separate detection of replacement timing from replacement control, and simple It is possible to perform complicated processing using the liquid crystal effect scheduler data having a data structure.

  In the present embodiment, the process is always executed by the callback regardless of the identifier for the callback (ON / OFF setting value of the effect SW in the present embodiment). The same control as the effect control of the present embodiment is not executed by callback, but a structure for performing complex control on the liquid crystal effect scheduler data side is incorporated, and a complicated liquid crystal effect scheduler is executed on the liquid crystal if drawing scheduler execution unit side. When production control is realized by analyzing and executing data, the complexity of the program code processed on the liquid crystal if drawing scheduler execution unit side is increased, and when new functions are added or functions are changed It is necessary to change the LCD effect scheduler data. In this case, it is necessary to change both the program code and the data, and not only the trouble caused by the change of control but also the function that worked normally before the change will affect the new trouble. There is a risk that.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, regardless of the identifier for the callback (ON / OFF setting value of the effect SW), the callback is always executed by the callback, and a plurality of the callbacks executed by the callback are executed. Whether or not execution is possible and the processing contents are determined in the callback function. By creating a callback function that corresponds to a single function, even if a new function is added or a function is changed, there is no need to change the LCD effect scheduler data structure, and a call corresponding to a new function. This can be achieved by creating a back function or modifying an existing callback function. For this reason, the influence range due to the change or addition of the function is limited to the callback function to be newly added or changed, and the possibility of causing a problem by affecting other callback functions is reduced. Also, compared to the case where the execution analysis of the LCD effect scheduler data is executed centrally with a single large program, the execution analysis is performed with a plurality of callback functions and the LCD effect scheduler data for realizing each function. However, the program structure and configuration can be further simplified.

  Although this embodiment has been described specifically for the replacement of the production, the control mechanism by the callback of the present embodiment is not limited to the exchange of the production, the replacement of the design, the control of display or non-display of the production, the drawing target The present invention can also be applied to conversion of drawing data, execution of scheduler data of other effect display devices, and conversion of scheduler data.

  Here, the purpose of defining the effect SW “LEDSW_LEFDW_S1_BLK” corresponding to the index number on the CGROM of the moving image where black ink spreads from the lower left of the master data in both the step-up notice 1 liquid crystal effect scheduler data and the lower left ink effect replacement table. explain. When the index number on the CGROM corresponding to the master effect SW is not defined in the effect replacement table, the relationship between the master and the replacement target, that is, the index number on the CGROM corresponding to the master effect SW is always the liquid crystal effect scheduler. The index number on the CGROM corresponding to the effect SW for replacement corresponding to the master exists only in the effect replacement table. In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, about several thousand of the effect replacement table and the effect SW are defined. In situations where game specification changes and game specification additions frequently occur between the planning and development of a gaming machine and the launch of the game machine, the consistency between the index number of the moving image (image) on the CGROM and the effect SW It will be extremely difficult to maintain.

  In the relationship between the index number on the CGROM and the effect SW, the index number on the CGROM corresponding to the master effect SW is erroneously defined in the effect replacement table, or conversely, the CGROM corresponding to the effect SW for replacement. It may happen that the above index number is mistakenly registered in the LCD effect scheduler data. In this case, a difference occurs between the command value of the effect lottery and the number of data of the index number on the CGROM corresponding to the effect SW on the replacement table, and replacement is performed with an effect different from the effect selected in the effect lottery. . Since the degree of expectation is set for each production, it is possible that an effect dedicated to big hits that does not appear due to fluctuations in outliers may appear, which is a fatal problem for a gaming machine. As in this embodiment, by defining the effect replacement table including the index number on the CGROM corresponding to the master effect SW, the consistency check can be realized by comparing the total number of effects with the replacement table. Become. Further, the liquid crystal effect scheduler data operates without any problem even if any data in the replacement table is defined. In this embodiment, even if the master effect defined on the liquid crystal effect scheduler data is selected as a result of the effect lottery, the index number on the master CGROM on the liquid crystal effect scheduler data is not used and must be replaced. A display list command is created using the index number on the master CGROM defined in the table, and an effect is drawn.

  In the step-up notice 3, as described above, the ink is gradually erased from some or all of the vertices of the display area from the painted state, and the character emerges when the development effect is successful. On the other hand, when the development effect fails, the characters are not displayed and the ink is completely erased, and the step-up notice ends as it is. In both cases of success and failure, an effect that the ink is gradually erased from the vertex of the display area is executed. Therefore, the effect SW flags for four types of drawing patterns that gradually erase the ink for each vertex. (Layer) is defined. Also, two types of effect SW flags (layers) corresponding to the result of the development effect are defined.

  The upper left ink replacement group, lower right ink replacement group, upper right ink replacement group, character failure effect replacement group, and character success effect replacement group other than the lower left ink replacement group described in FIG. 355 have the same configuration and control method as the lower left ink replacement group. It is.

  In the step-up notice 4, since the step-up notice is not continuously executed, an effect SW flag (layer) corresponding to the mode may be defined for the animation of the displayed character, or one kind of effect SW flag ( Only the layer) may be defined, and the type of character animation may be set by the parameter.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, different types of effects can be achieved by individually defining drawing appearance patterns for each ink appearance position or character content and setting the effect SW flag corresponding to the effect to be executed to ON. It is possible to execute or perform a combined effect. Since the switching and combination of effects only switches the setting of the effect SW flag individually, the planner who configures the effects only needs to set the parameters with the tool without the need to create a new program. Various variations of production can be realized. For example, in the step-up notice 1, it is possible to realize dozens of types of drawing patterns only by combining four types of drawing patterns based on the appearance position of black and two types of display patterns as a result of development effect. This minimizes the types of programs to be developed, improves the development efficiency of presentation control programs for gaming machines, and improves the quality of inspections of developed presentation control programs. Can do.

[20-3. Overview of control based on production switches]
Next, an outline of control based on the effect switch will be described. FIG. 356 is a diagram for explaining the control procedure by the effect switch of this embodiment, and particularly shows the evaluation procedure for setting the effect SW to ON. In this embodiment, first, when a main command (main control command) that triggers the start of production is received from the main control board 1310, the peripheral control internal issued by the peripheral control unit 1530 to the configuration in the peripheral control board 1510 An issue command is generated. The peripheral control internal issuance command is a command for executing a preliminary lottery or performing an effect by the peripheral control unit 1530.

  The effect SW command analysis module of the peripheral control board 1510 evaluates the analyzed main control command and the received sub-internal issue command, and sets the corresponding effect SW to ON. Specifically, it is compared with the effect SW determination data stored in the peripheral control ROM 1530b, and it is determined whether or not data matching the received command is registered. It is determined whether or not data that matches the received command is registered in the command sequence of the effect SW determination data. If there is data that matches, the peripheral control is performed based on the effect SW number corresponding to the command sequence. The effect SW flag stored in the RAM 1530c is set to ON.

  The effect SW determination data includes two types of information, and the first information is an effect SW determination command sequence for turning on the effect SW. The effect SW determination command sequence is not a fixed length, and it is possible to combine a plurality of command values, main control command values, and sub internal command values, or to combine peripheral control internal issue command values and peripheral control internal command values. . For example, the change start designation command value and the probability state designation command value transmitted from the main control board 1310 are defined side by side, or the background designation command of the peripheral control internal issue command value and the command value of the lottery result of the mini character notice are defined side by side. It is possible.

  By defining multiple commands side-by-side, for example, even if the same mini character notice is used, if the mini characters that are displayed for different backgrounds are different, the background command value is determined, and after specifying the background, the mini character command value is determined. For the first time, it is possible to specify the effect of the mini character corresponding to the background, but it is necessary to make multiple determinations by the number of commands. On the other hand, by defining the background designation command and the command value of the lottery result of the mini character notice as in this embodiment, the effect SW corresponding to the command value can be a mini character corresponding to the background. There is no need to make multiple determinations, and an effect defined by a combination of a plurality of commands can be specified in the same way as an effect defined by a single command. Further, since a plurality of effects SW can be defined for the same command value, a plurality of effects SW can be activated simultaneously with a single command value.

  The second information of the effect SW determination data is the effect SW number and the index number of the effect SW flag array. The effect SW determination data is registered for all the effect SWs by a combination of the effect SW determination command value and the effect SW number.

  As described above, as shown in FIG. 356, when the command “0x103001” is received, the effect SW flag “LCDSW_LEFDW_S1” with the effect SW number 100 is registered in the effect SW determination data, so the effect SW flag stored in the RAM is stored. Set lcdsw_flg [LCDSW_LEFDW_S1] to ON.

  As described above, by setting the effect SW flag corresponding to the command, as shown in FIGS. 353 to 355, a predetermined process is called when the liquid crystal effect scheduler data for executing the corresponding notice effect is executed. It is.

  In the effect SW command analysis module, a function for executing an effect based on the effect SW is defined. Hereinafter, an example of these functions will be described. FIG. 357 is a diagram illustrating an example of a function defined in the effect SW command analysis module of the present embodiment. Each function takes an effect SW number (LEDSW number) as an argument.

  LEDSW_TST is a function for determining whether or not the effect SW number is ON from a steady program or a callback program. LEDSW_SET is a function for turning on the effect SW from a steady program or a callback program, not the effect SW activation by the command.

  LEDSW_OFF is a function for turning off the effect SW from a steady program or a callback program. Further, when the “all reset” attribute is defined in the attribute of the effect SW, the reset target effect SW based on the “reset target effect SW group ID” of the “effect SW information table” corresponding to the effect SW number. All effects SW belonging to the group are set to OFF.

  LEDSW_GET is a function for acquiring attribute information of the target effect SW from a steady program or a callback program. LCDSW_ATIMER is a function for obtaining the frame time from the activation of the active effect SW from the steady program or the callback program.

[20-4. Example of production switch implementation]
Next, an implementation example of control using the effect switch will be described. FIG. 358 to FIG. 363 are diagrams showing a part of the program code for executing the control using the effect switch in the present embodiment. The program code shown in each figure is written in C language.

  As described above, the effect SW is set for each display target, still image, and moving image in the liquid crystal layer table, the liquid crystal effect common block, the liquid crystal effect block, the liquid crystal effect scheduler data, and the liquid crystal effect scheduler data. Since the effect SW is set for all the effect blocks, the process based on the effect SW is always called back when the effect block is executed. Even if it is not necessary to execute specific processing, the callback is executed, and it is determined that the specific processing is not performed in the callback function, and the callback function is terminated.

  FIG. 358 is a diagram for explaining the details of the configuration of the effect SW information table of the present embodiment. (A) is an example of a program code defining the effect SW information table, and (B) is a bit assignment of the effect SW control information. (C) is a figure which shows an example of production SW group.

  The effect SW information table is configured based on the effect SW information table management structure shown in (A). The effect SW group ID, the reset target effect SW group ID, the effect SW control information (effect SW attribute), and the effect SW It includes command information address and effect replacement information table information.

  The effect SW group ID is identification information of the effect SW group to which the corresponding effect SW belongs. The effect SW group is grouped according to functions such as an effect SW for performing the same (same type) notice effect, an effect SW for holding display, or an effect SW for notification. ing. The effect SW group ID is expressed by bits, and one effect SW can belong to a plurality of effect SW groups.

  The reset effect SW group ID is identification information for designating an effect SW group in which the effect SW is set to OFF when “effect SW all reset” is designated in “attrib bit assignment” to be described later. As a result, it is possible to collectively specify the effects SW whose processing is to be stopped (reset) at the same time when the effects SW are switched. The reset target effect SW group ID is represented by bits in the same manner as the effect SW group ID, and a plurality of groups can be designated.

  The effect SW control information is information that defines the function of the effect SW, and specifically includes liquid crystal effect SW total reset information, replacement information, special control information, and passive / active information. The effect SW control information is composed of 16 bits, and each bit defines the function of the effect SW. The bits corresponding to the function of the effect SW are as shown in FIG. 358 (B), and the contents will be described below.

  Passive / active (ACTIVE) information indicates an evaluation method of the production SW, and is “PASSIVE” when the bit is “0”, and “ACTIVE” when the bit is “1”. In passive, even when a command for starting the effect SW is received a plurality of times during the period in which the effect SW is defined, the rendering effect corresponding to the effect SW is performed only once, and in the active period, the effect SW is effected in the period in which the effect SW is defined. When a command for starting SW is received a plurality of times, the effect is re-executed as many times as the number of commands received for the corresponding effect. Active is used for displaying a rendering effect corresponding to the button press when the button is pressed a plurality of times within the button effective period.

  The special control information (special control behavior) is information for designating whether or not to call a predetermined callback function when evaluating the effect SW. When the bit is set to “1”, the user side callback function is called instead of the system side callback function.

  The replacement information is information for calling a callback function for effect replacement when evaluating the effect SW. When the bit is set to “1”, a predefined replacement callback function is called when the presentation SW defined for each display target, still image, and moving picture in the liquid crystal presentation scheduler data is called. It is.

  The liquid crystal effect SW all reset information is information for designating whether or not the effect SW belonging to the effect group designated at the time of evaluating the effect SW is set to OFF. When the bit is set to “1”, the effect SW belonging to all the groups set in the “reset target effect SW group ID” is set to OFF during the effect SW evaluation.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. 358 (A). As for the effect SW command information address, the defined command information is output when the effect SW is set to ON during the evaluation SW evaluation. The output command is stored in the reference destination of the effect SW command information address, and a new effect SW is controlled or effected by the output command.

  The effect SW replacement table information is a replacement table in which data to be replaced is defined when “1” is set in the replacement information bit of the effect SW control information (when “with replacement” is specified). Is stored. Details of the replacement table will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the effect SW group will be described. In the present embodiment, when a plurality of related effects SW are set, they are managed as an effect group. The effect group includes an effect SW group ID, an active effect SW head ID, the number of active effects SW, a passive effect SW head ID, and a number of passive effects SW.

  The effect SW group ID is an identifier of the effect SW group. In the effect SW group, the active effect SW and the passive effect SW are stored in a continuous area. The active effect SW head ID is identification information of the effect SW located at the head among the active effects SW belonging to the effect SW group. The number of active effects SW is the number of active effects SW arranged from the effects SW corresponding to the active effect SW head ID. The passive effect SW head ID is identification information of the effect SW located at the head among the passive effects SW belonging to the effect SW group. The number of passive effects SW is the number of passive effects SW arranged from the effects SW corresponding to the passive effect SW head ID. As described above, by defining the effect SW group ID as the reset target effect SW group ID, when “reproduction SW all reset” is designated by “attrib bit assignment”, the continuous belonging to the effect SW group ID. It is possible to simultaneously set the plurality of passive effects SW and the plurality of continuous active effects SW to OFF.

  FIG. 359 is a diagram illustrating an example of a program code defining an effect SW number corresponding to the effect SW in the present embodiment. In the program code shown in FIG. 359, a specific numerical value is defined for the effect SW number using an enumeration type (enum). In the present embodiment, the work area and the effect information table can be referred to using the effect SW number as an index.

  By defining the effect SW numbers in an enumerated form in this way, it is not necessary to directly handle numerical values when setting or referring to the effect SW numbers in the program, and the readability of the program can be improved.

  Next, the effect SW flag and the effect SW information table will be described. 360 is a diagram illustrating an example of program data defining an effect SW flag and an effect SW information table according to the present embodiment, in which (A) shows an effect SW flag and (B) shows an effect SW information table.

  The effect SW flag is a flag indicating whether or not (ON / OFF) the process based on the corresponding effect SW is executed on the callback function side that has called back. As shown in (A), the effect SW flag is stored in a byte-type array variable, and the array index corresponds to the effect SW number. “1” (ON) is set when the effect SW corresponding to the effect SW number is executed, and “0” (OFF) is set when the effect SW is not executed.

  The effect SW information table is defined by the effect SW information table management structure shown in FIG. 358 (A), and each element of the effect SW information table is read when the program is executed and is not updated unless the program data is changed. It has become. The effect SW information table is stored in an array having the effect SW number as an index, similarly to the effect SW flag, and data corresponding to all the effect SWs is stored.

  Next, the effect SW replacement table information and the effect SW replacement table for effect replacement will be described. The effect SW replacement table information is included in the effect SW information table as shown in FIG. FIG. 361 is a diagram showing an example of the effect SW replacement table information included in the effect SW information table of this embodiment and the program data defining the effect SW replacement table, where (A) is the effect SW replacement table information and (B ) Shows an effect SW replacement table.

  FIG. 361 (A) is program data showing the configuration of the effect SW replacement table information “lcdsw_cchanege_info_lefdw_s1”. In the effect SW replacement table information, the address of the effect SW replacement table, the effect SW master data, and the effect SW replacement data are stored. The address of the effect SW replacement table is the address of the table in which the actual replacement material number is stored.

  The effect SW master data is effect SW data defined in the liquid crystal effect scheduler data. In the case of “lcdsw_cchanege_info_lefdw_s1,” this corresponds to the case where the black color is black (LCDSW_LEFDW_S1_BLK). The replacement data is information indicating the material to be replaced from the master data. For example, the ink color is replaced with white (LCDSW_LEFDW_S1_WHI), and the material information is replaced with the corresponding replacement data by evaluating the effect SW.

  FIG. 361 (B) is program data showing the configuration of the effect SW replacement table “lcdsw_cchanege_lefdw_s1”. In the effect SW replacement table, first, the number of columns and the number of rows of material numbers defined in the replacement table are defined. In this embodiment, the number of columns is 1 and the number of rows is 4. After the definition of the number of columns and the number of rows, information indicating the replacement material is stored. In this embodiment, the replacement information has a one-dimensional table structure, but there is no problem with a two-dimensional or three-dimensional table structure.

  As a specific replacement method, first, the effect SW replacement switch master data and the effect SW replacement data defined in the effect SW replacement table information are evaluated with reference to the effect SW replacement table information. At this time, any effect SW defined in the effect SW replacement table information is set to ON by a command issued as a result of the effect lottery. Here, description will be made assuming that the effect SW replacement data (LCDSW_LEFDW_S1_WHI) is set to ON. The same line of the effect SW replacement table is specified using the number of lines of the effect SW set to ON in the effect SW replacement table information as an index. The material number (CG_MOVE_LEFDW_S1_WHI) corresponds to the line of the effect SW replacement data (LCDSW_LEFDW_S1_WHI) in the effect replacement data, and the material number to be replaced is specified. The material number is an index number for specifying a still image or a moving image on the CGROM.

[21. Layer configuration]
Next, layers for displaying images and moving images will be described. The layer can draw the liquid crystal display object into a plurality of regions (layers, layers) and draw the display result for general use. For example, by dividing the background layer, it is possible to draw with a common method even if the displayed character is changed.

  In this embodiment, a table (layer information table) for storing layer information is individually stored and managed, so that even if some layers are changed, other layers are not affected. Can do.

  FIG. 362 is a diagram showing an example of program data defining the layer information table of the present embodiment, where (A) is a list storing addresses for storing each layer information table, and (B) is a layer information table (background). For). The effect SW described above is also defined in the layer information table, and the callback function is called with the effect SW as a trigger, and whether or not the corresponding liquid crystal layer table is executed based on the information of the effect SW in the callback function. decide. For example, when the effect SW (LEDSW_BG_RIV) is ON, the river background layer table (direct_layer01_common0002) is executed. FIG. 363 is a diagram showing an example of the program data defining the layer information table of the present embodiment. (A) shows the contents of the layer information table (first notice 1) and (B) shows the layer information table (notice). The contents of the first half 2) are shown. The layer information tables in the first and second half of the notice both determine the layer table to be executed by the effect SW, similarly to the layer information table for the background.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 362 (A), layer information tables for background, symbol display, for the first half notice, for big hit effect, for accessory operation, for hold display, etc. are defined.

  FIG. 362 (B) shows a layer information table for background. In the effect in this embodiment, a sea background, a mountain background, and a river background are defined. Medium background, high accuracy medium background) are also defined. Furthermore, variations can be added by changing the background color in part by the effect SW.

  FIG. 363 (A) shows a layer information table for the first half of the notice, in which roulette notice, blackout notice, window notice are defined, and a notice clear command is also defined. FIG. 363 (B) shows a layer information table for the first half of the notice, in which step-up notice, button mini-character notice, and conversation notice are defined. As in the case of the first notice 1, the layer table for clearing the notice. Is also defined. The layer table for clearing the notice is used to end the drawing of the notice executed in the layer table for each notice defined in the layer information table for each notice. Specifically, the effect SW group ID of the notice layer is defined as the reset target effect SW group ID of the effect SW control information of the effect SW described above, and “effect SW all reset” is defined by “attrib bit assignment”. When the effect SW (LEDSW_YKK_CLR) is set to ON, all the notice effects SW belonging to the effect SW group ID defined in the effect SW group ID to be reset are set to OFF and the drawing corresponding to the effect SW. Ends and disappears. The layer table for clearing the notice is empty data because no production is performed.

  The end judgment record is stored at the end of the area allocated to the list for storing the layer table and the table for storing the layer information. When the end judgment record is detected, it is determined that the data reading is finished. It becomes possible to do. As a result, the data amount (number of records) can be dynamically changed without setting the number of elements for each list or table in advance.

[22. Step-up notice implementation example]
Subsequently, an implementation example of the notice effect by the liquid crystal effect block data (common block) will be described using the step-up notice effect as an example.

[22-1. Production layer table / LCD production block data]
FIG. 364 is a diagram showing an example of the program data defining the liquid crystal layer table and the liquid crystal effect common block in the present embodiment, (A) is the liquid crystal layer table of the step-up notice effect, and (B) is the liquid crystal effect common block. The structure of is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 364 (A), in the liquid crystal layer table corresponding to the step-up notice effect, the number of liquid crystal effect common blocks registered in the liquid crystal layer table and the number of liquid crystal effect common blocks corresponding to the number of liquid crystal effect common blocks are It is defined as a pair with the total number of drawn frames and the effect SW. In the present embodiment, a total number of drawn frames (580), an effect SW “LCDSW_STEPUP”, and a common block “LCD_COMMONBLK_STEPUP” are defined. The callback is executed based on the effect SW “LCDSW_STEPUP”, and it is determined whether or not to execute the common block “LCD_COMMONBLK_STEPUP” based on the information of the effect SW “LCDSW_STEPUP” in the callback function.

  The liquid crystal effect common block “LCD_COMMONBLK_STEPUP” is defined in the order of effect SW, total number of frames drawn, loop start frame position, playback time, and liquid crystal effect block. As shown in FIG. 364 (B), when there are a plurality of liquid crystal effect blocks, a plurality of lines are defined in the same format. After the step-up notice 4, a terminal is set, and it is configured to be able to cope with increase / decrease of the number of steps by adding and deleting liquid crystal effect blocks. For example, when the step-up notice 5 is added, data corresponding to the step-up notice 5 may be added between the step-up notice 4 and the end.

  The effect SW controls whether or not the corresponding liquid crystal effect block can be executed based on the set value, similarly to the effect SW defined in the layer table. The total number of drawn frames defines the total number of effect frames of the liquid crystal effect block. To explain using the step-up notice 1 on the first line, it is defined that the liquid crystal effect block of the step-up notice 1 is reproduced by (150) frames. The loop start frame position is a frame position for determining which display data frame to return to after completion of the reproduction of the liquid crystal effect block “LCD_YKK_STEPUP_SU1” in the first row.

  The playback time is the playback time of the liquid crystal effect block “LCD_YKK_STEPUP_SU1”. The relationship between the total playback time, loop start frame position and playback time is that the playback time is the playback time of the liquid crystal effect block “LCD_YKK_STEPUP_SU1”. When loop playback is performed from the beginning or midway, the number of frames to be looped is added to the playback time, and the added number of frames is defined as the total playback time. Step-up notice 1 “LCD_YKK_STEPUP_SU1” liquid crystal effect block playback time is (150) frames, so when the LCD frame “LCD_YKK_STEPUP_SU1” finishes playing, the second half 50 frames are looped twice. This can be realized by defining (250) frames of time (150) frames + loop playback time (50 × 2) frames and defining (100) frames at the loop start frame position. An effect of performing fluctuation fluctuation without determining a symbol during a pseudo-continuous production can be realized by using a loop playback function.

  The reason why the loop start frame is defined as the frame immediately before the end of playback despite the fact that the total playback time and playback time of the liquid crystal effect block “LCD_YKK_STEPUP_SU1” of the present embodiment is the same is due to some trouble. In order to prevent the drawing from being updated when the next production common block is not executed and the liquid crystal screen to stop, the drawing is repeated based on the loop start point when the total reproduction time is exceeded.

  In the present embodiment, when the production from the step-up notice 1 to the step-up notice 3 is executed, the control by the liquid crystal effect common block “LCD_COMMONBLK_STEPUP” is executed after the lottery of the notice related to the production is executed on the peripheral control board 1530 and then the step-up. A peripheral control internal command, a step-up notice 1 command, a step-up notice 2 command, and a step-up notice 3 command related to the notice effect are issued. Subsequently, the step-up 1 effect SW “LEDSW_YKK_STEP_SU1”, the step-up 2 effect SW “LEDSW_YKK_STEP_SU2”, and the step-up 3 effect SW “LEDSW_YKK_STEP_SU3” are set to ON in response to the issued command. On the other hand, the step-up 4 effect SW “LEDSW_YKK_STEP_SU4” remains set to OFF because the step-up notice 4 command has not been issued.

  After setting the effect SW, the callback is executed based on all the effect SWs defined in the liquid crystal effect common block “LCD_COMMONBLK_STEPUP”, and the callback function is called. In the called callback function, it is determined whether or not each effect SW is set to ON, and a liquid crystal effect block corresponding to the effect SW set to ON is executed. In the LCD production common block “LCD_COMMONBLK_STEPUP”, “LEDSW_YKK_STEP_SU1”, “LEDSW_YKK_STEP_SU2”, and “LEDSW_YKK_STEP_SU3” are set to ON, so the LCD production blocks “LCD_YKK_STEPUP_SU1”, “LCD_YKK_STEPUP_STEPUP_SUPP” On the other hand, since “LEDSW_YKK_STEP_SU4” is set to OFF, “LCD_YKK_STEPUP_SU4” is not executed. As described above, a plurality of liquid crystal effect blocks can be defined in the liquid crystal effect common block, and it can be controlled whether or not the liquid crystal effect block is executed using the effect SW. In addition, the display / non-display of each effect can be switched.

  Next, the contents of the liquid crystal effect block at each step in the step-up notice will be described. FIG. 365 is a diagram showing an example of program data defining the liquid crystal effect blocks (LCD_YKK_STEPUP_SU1 to 4) of each step of the step-up notice.

  As the contents of the liquid crystal effect block, first, the total number of data defined in the liquid crystal effect block is defined. The number of execution frames, the function, or the function used in the liquid crystal effect block as the liquid crystal effect scheduler data is two types of “LCD_NOP” and “LCD_NULL” and the liquid crystal effect scheduler data. “LCD_NOP” is a function that waits for the number of execution frames, and “LCD_NULL” is a function that indicates the end of the liquid crystal effect block.

  Subsequently, the liquid crystal effect block will be specifically described. Describing with reference to the liquid crystal effect block “LCD_YKK_STEPUP_SU2”, the top (3) indicates that “LCD_YKK_STEPUP_SU2” is composed of three rows of data (the number of steps is 3). In the next line, the number of execution frames (120) is designated as “LCD_NOP”, and therefore, the process waits for (120) frames from the start of execution of the liquid crystal effect block. (120) After waiting for the frame, the liquid crystal effect scheduler data “LCD_DIR_STEPUP_SU2” is executed for the number of frames corresponding to the number of execution frames (175). Thereafter, “LCD_NULL” in which the number of execution frames (1) is designated is executed, and the execution of the liquid crystal effect block “LCD_YKK_STEPUP_SU2” is ended.

  Realized by using the weight of “LCD_NOP” at the end of step-up notice for each step of step-up notice as described in FIG. doing.

  Specifically, the liquid crystal effect block “LCD_DIR_STEPUP_SU1” does not wait and starts executing the liquid crystal effect scheduler data “LCD_DIR_STEPUP_SU1”. The liquid crystal effect block “LCD_DIR_STEPUP_SU2” executes the wait by “LCD_NOP”, waits for (120) frames, and then starts executing the liquid crystal effect scheduler data “LCD_DIR_STEPUP_SU2”, so that the liquid crystal effect scheduler data “LCD_DIR_STEPUP_SU1” becomes The liquid crystal effect scheduler data “LCD_DIR_STEPUP_SU2” starts to be executed when (120) frames have passed since the start of the execution. Thus, at the end of the step-up notice 1, it is possible to repeatedly execute the development effect to the next step-up notice 2.

  In addition, a plurality of liquid crystal effect scheduler data can be defined in time series in the liquid crystal effect block. When the liquid crystal effect scheduler data is defined continuously, the liquid crystal effect scheduler data corresponding to the number of execution frames is used. To execute the liquid crystal effect scheduler data of the next line.

  In the effect scheduler data for step-up notice 2, after the total number of functions is defined, function NOP for waiting while executing step-up notice effect 1, function LCD_YKK_STEPUP_SU2 for executing step-up notice effect 2, Finally, a function LCD_NULL indicating the end of scheduler data is defined. The step-up notice 3 and the step-up notice 4 are similarly described.

[23. Implementation example of button mini character production]
The liquid crystal effect scheduler data for the step-up notice effect has been described above. Next, a description will be given of an effect in which a mini character appears on the liquid crystal display screen by prompting an operation of the effect button during the change of the pattern and operating the effect button within a predetermined period.

[23-1. Button mini character production aspect]
FIG. 366 is a diagram illustrating an outline of the button mini character effect according to the present embodiment. The button mini character effect is executed when an execution lottery is performed at the time of receiving a main command or at the start of variation, and winning. In the button mini character effect, when the effect button is operated during the button operation input reception period, a predetermined character (mini character) is displayed on the liquid crystal display screen. In addition, the first half effective period and the second half effective period are set in the button operation input reception period, and the mini characters are displayed in different modes.

  More specifically, when the button lottery effect lottery is won and 90 frames (f) have elapsed from the start of the change, the first half of the button mini character validity period is reached. The button mini character first half effective period is 90 frames, and an image (moving image) that prompts the user to press the button is displayed on the liquid crystal display screen with the start of the button mini character first half effective period. When the button is operated during the first half of the button mini character period, the mini character is displayed. Specifically, as will be described later, when the button is operated during the first half of the button mini character effective period, the effect SW for displaying the mini character is set to ON, and the corresponding liquid crystal effect block is executed by the callback.

  When the button is operated during the second half of the button mini character validity period, the mini character is displayed as in the first half of the button mini character first half validity period. In FIG. 308, the character is displayed in a mode different from the case where the button is operated during the first half of the button mini character effective period, but may be displayed in the same mode or when the button is operated during the first half effective period of the button mini character. Characters may be displayed in different ways as long as possible.

  When the button is operated during the second half of the button mini character validity period, the mini character is displayed as in the first half of the button mini character validity period. In FIG. 366, the character is displayed in a manner different from that when the button is operated during the first half of the button mini character effective period, but may be displayed in the same manner or when the button is operated during the first half effective period of the button mini character. Characters may be displayed in different ways as long as possible.

[23-2. LCD production common block]
FIG. 367 is a diagram showing an example of program data defining a liquid crystal layer table corresponding to the button mini character effect in the present embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 367, the liquid crystal layer table “direct_layer05_common0002” corresponding to the button mini character effect is the total number of the liquid crystal effect common blocks registered in the liquid crystal layer table and the total number of liquid crystal effect common blocks registered in the liquid crystal effect table. The number is defined in pairs with the effect SW. In the present embodiment, the total number of drawn frames (180), the effect SW “LCDSW_BTN_MINIBEF”, and the liquid crystal effect common block “LCD_COMMONBLK_MINIBEF” are defined. Subsequently, the total number of drawn frames (150), the effect SW “LCDSW_BTN_MINIAFT”, and the liquid crystal effect common block “LCD_COMMONBLK_MINIAFT” are defined. In the liquid crystal layer table “direct_layer05_common0002”, first, the liquid crystal effect common block “LCD_COMMONBLK_MINIBEF” is executed for (180) frames. Thereafter, the liquid crystal effect common block “LCD_COMMONBLK_MINIAFT” is executed for (150) frames, and the execution of the liquid crystal layer table “direct_layer05_common0002” is terminated.

  Next, the configuration of each liquid crystal effect common block of the button mini character effect will be described. FIG. 368 is a diagram showing an example of program data defining individual common blocks for button mini-character effects in the present embodiment.

  The configuration and control method of the liquid crystal effect common blocks “LCD_COMMONBLK_MINIBEF” and “LCD_COMMONBLK_MINIAFT” in FIG. 368 are the same as the effect layer table and the liquid crystal effect block data described in FIG. The effect SW “LEDSW_YKK_MINIBEF” and “LEDSW_YKK_MINIAFT” that call the callback function to determine whether or not to execute the liquid crystal effect block data “LCD_YKK_MINIBEF” and “LCD_YKK_MINIAFT” are active effects that define the active attribute in the effect SW control information SW. Therefore, the rendering effect (effect block) corresponding to the effect SW is executed as many times as the button is operated.

[23-3. LCD production block data]
FIG. 369 is a diagram showing an example of program data defining liquid crystal effect block data for executing the button mini character effect in the present embodiment.

  The configuration and control method of the liquid crystal effect block data “LCD_YKK_MINIBEF” and “LCD_YKK_MINIAFT” shown in FIG. 369 are the same as the liquid crystal effect block data described with reference to FIG. To explain the processing by each liquid crystal effect block data, first, in the first half effect, “LCD_NOP” defined at the top in the liquid crystal effect block data “LCD_YKK_MINIBEF” is executed, and waits for (90) frames from the start of variation. . Subsequently, the liquid crystal effect scheduler data “LCD_DIR_MINIBEF” corresponding to the first half period of the button mini character is executed for (90) frames, and the execution of the liquid crystal effect block data “LCD_YKK_MINIBEF” is ended. In the latter half of the production, “LCD_NOP” defined at the top of the liquid crystal production block data “LCD_YKK_MINIAFT” corresponding to the button mini-character second half effective period is executed, and waits for (30) frames from the start of variation. Thereafter, the liquid crystal effect scheduler data “LCD_DIR_MINIAFT” corresponding to the button mini character second half effective period is executed for (120) frames, and the execution of the liquid crystal effect block data “LCD_YKK_MINIAFT” is ended.

  As described above, since the production SW “LEDSW_YKK_MINIBEF” and “LEDSW_YKK_MINIAFT” are active production SW, the production SW “LEDSW_YKK_MINIBEF” and “LEDSW_YKK_MINIAFT” are set to ON while the liquid crystal production scheduler data “LCD_DIR_MINIBEF” and “LCD_DIR_MINIAFT” are executed. If the command to be issued is issued a plurality of times, the rendering effects corresponding to the effects SW “LEDSW_YKK_MINIBEF” and “LEDSW_YKK_MINIAFT” are executed as many times as is issued. Further, a callback is always generated by the effect SW every frame, and the corresponding callback function is called. The control at the time of pressing the button is executed in the called callback function, and the callback is executed every frame after the button pressing control is finished and until the liquid crystal effect scheduler data is finished. By creating liquid crystal effect scheduler data for effect rendering during the button effective period and controlling it with the active effect SW, a control is performed in which the callback period is executed without determining the button effective period separately. Is possible. For example, the number of repeated hits can be counted by repeatedly hitting a button, and an effect corresponding to the number of hits can be executed. Further, the lamp can be turned on in response to the button operation by calling the sub effect scheduler data including the function for controlling the lamp in the callback function. Furthermore, it is possible to execute the scheduler data for returning to the initial position after the button operation effective period is ended by calling the sub effect scheduler data including the function for controlling the accessory and performing the operation according to the number of button operations. The procedure for returning the accessory to the initial position is, for example, executing a production block including a function for causing the accessory to return to the initial position by waiting for “LCD_NOP” until the button operation valid period ends.

[24. Liquid crystal production scheduler for design]
As described above, in the present embodiment, when the notice effect is executed, it is possible to change the drawing contents according to the gaming state and the expectation of the variable display game to be noticed. Similarly, it is possible to replace the identification symbol to be variably displayed in the variation display game when a predetermined condition such as a gaming state is satisfied. The outline of the procedure for replacing the identification symbol will be described below.

  In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the variation display of the identification symbol is stopped in the order of the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol, and a reel in which the identification symbols are arranged in a predetermined order is assigned to each column. An identification symbol is drawn on each reel in a manner corresponding to the gaming state, and each reel is defined for each manner. The variation display of the identification symbol is realized by sequentially displaying the identification symbol drawn on each reel together with the background image.

  The display of the identification symbol is updated for each frame, as in the notice effect, and the effect SW is assigned. In the liquid crystal effect scheduler data for displaying the identification symbol, the index number on the CGROM of the still image or moving image for displaying the identification symbol and the effect SW corresponding to the index number on the CGROM are defined as master data. . A reel number is defined for the effect SW for replacing the identification symbol. The reel number represents a unique identification number displayed for each gaming state or performance. For example, if the identification symbols displayed on the mountain background, river background and sea background are different, the left symbol on the mountain background is R0, the middle symbol is R1, the right symbol is R2, the left symbol on the river background is R3, and the middle symbol. Is R4, the right symbol is R5, the left symbol of the mountain background is R6, the middle symbol is R7, and the right symbol is R8. By using the reel number, it is possible to individually correspond to the gaming state and effects, and it is also possible to specify the display position of the identification symbol.

  Further, the reel number includes a reel index number. The reel index number is defined for each number of reels of identification symbols. With the reel arrangement, the identification symbols are displayed in the order 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 0, and the design of the identification symbol and the identification symbol when the display is returned to 1 after 0 A reel index is defined that defines the total number and the display order of identification symbols. A plurality of reel indexes can be defined.

  The tables for replacing the identification symbols include a reel number and a reel index number corresponding to the reel index number corresponding to the reel number, and a reel replacement work number table for reel replacement. In the identification symbol replacement table, an index number on the CG ROM of a still image or a moving image corresponding to the reel arrangement is defined for each reel index.

  The replacement of the identification symbol is performed using a reel index replacement work number table in addition to the identification symbol replacement table. The reel index replacement work number table defines work numbers for reel replacement on one or more RAMs corresponding to each reel index. The reel replacement work is displayed when the identification symbol such as the temporary stop symbol number value of the identification symbol related to the quasi-continuous variation or the confirmed symbol number value of the identification symbol can be recognized as stopped or stopped by the player. The identification symbol number value is stored in advance by the peripheral control program at the start of variation according to the effect contents.

  The identification of the data for replacing the identification symbol will be described. When a callback is executed based on the effect SW for replacing the identification symbol, the reel index number corresponding to the reel number is set in the callback function for replacement of the identification symbol. Based on the reel index replacement work number table, the target reel index replacement work number is specified. Further, the identification symbol number value stored in the reel index replacement workpiece is taken out, and the reel index replacement workpiece number is corrected based on the number of identification symbols displayed in the liquid crystal effect scheduler data. Similarly, based on the reel index number corresponding to the reel number, the corresponding replacement table is specified by the replacement table of the identification symbols, and the index number on the CGROM of the still image or moving image to be replaced in the specified table is corrected. Specify using the index replacement work number.

  In addition, even if the master effect defined on the liquid crystal effect scheduler data is selected, the index number on the CGROM of the master on the liquid crystal effect scheduler data is not used for the replacement of the identification symbol. The display list command is always created using the index number on the master CGROM defined in the replacement table, and the production contents are drawn.

  Furthermore, by replacing the identification symbol every frame, even if an erroneous identification symbol is displayed due to the occurrence of noise or the like, it is possible to immediately return to the normal display. In addition, by setting a reel according to the gaming state, even if a failure occurs in the replacement of the identification symbol due to an error, the player can grasp the gaming state regardless of the content of the identification symbol. It is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player.

[25. Callback timing]
Next, the occurrence timing of the callback when the effect SW is detected will be described. In the present embodiment, it is possible to determine the drawing classification by the parameter delivered to the function in the callback function to be called back.

  FIG. 370 is a diagram illustrating an example of drawing divisions that can be determined in the callback function at the time of callback execution by the effect SW of the present embodiment.

  “LCD_EFF_BEF_LCD_A” generates a callback before the start of drawing of liquid crystal A, and “LCD_EFF_AFT_LCD_A” generates a callback after starting of drawing of liquid crystal A. Further, “LCD_EFF_BEF_LCD_B” generates a callback before starting the liquid crystal B drawing, and “LCD_EFF_AFT_LCD_B” generates a callback after starting the liquid crystal B drawing. Liquid crystal A and liquid crystal B are different liquid crystals, and before completion of drawing of each liquid crystal, it is possible to determine whether drawing has been completed. As a result, it becomes possible to perform drawing on the liquid crystal A.

  In “LCD_EFF_BEF_ANIM”, a callback is generated before all drawing is started, and in “LCD_EFF_AFT_ANIM”, a callback is generated after all drawing is completed. Initializing the frame buffer with the required background color before drawing by performing the determination before drawing starts, or determining the end of drawing to instruct the execution of the effect to other effect devices when drawing is completed It becomes possible.

  “LCD_EFF_BEF_ANIM” generates a callback before drawing of the corresponding layer is started, and “LCD_EFF_AFT_ANIM” generates a callback after drawing of the corresponding layer is completed. A predetermined process can be executed before or after the drawing of a specific layer. For example, when a plurality of notifications are generated at the time of drawing a notification layer by performing the determination before the start of layer drawing, it is possible to enlarge and display the notification display having a high priority. In addition, by performing the determination after the start of layer drawing, by drawing the effect around the symbol that was drawn at the timing when the symbol with high expectation stops before the symbol layer drawing starts, the symbol with high expectation It is possible to display an effect around the symbol only when is stopped.

  As described above, it is possible to specify a drawing section and execute a predetermined process before or after the start of drawing. It is also possible to generate a callback for each common block. As shown in FIG. 370, “LCD_EFF_BEF_COMBLK” can generate a callback before the start of common block drawing, and “LCD_EFF_AFT_COMBLK” can generate a callback after completion of common block drawing. By performing the determination before starting the common block rendering, the execution of a specific liquid crystal rendering block corresponding to a single rendering that constitutes the liquid crystal rendering common block is stopped and rendering of the rendering is not performed, or the liquid crystal rendering common block By performing the determination after the drawing is finished, it is also possible to execute a liquid crystal effect common block different from the liquid crystal effect common block scheduled to be executed at the start of the fluctuation.

  Also, “LCD_EFF_BEF_DIR” generates a callback before the start of drawing of the liquid crystal effect block in the common block of liquid crystal effects, and “LCD_EFF_AFT_DIR” generates a callback after drawing of the liquid crystal effect block. By performing the determination before the liquid crystal effect block drawing is started, it is possible to change the liquid crystal effect block to be executed as a result of the external input by the player. Further, by performing the determination after the start of the liquid crystal effect block drawing, it becomes possible to add a new drawing to the content drawn by the liquid crystal effect block based on the drawing content of the liquid crystal effect block for drawing a single effect. Further, “LCD_EFF_BEF_CAST” can generate a callback before the start of drawing of still images and moving images in the liquid crystal effect scheduler data, and “LCD_EFF_AFT_CAST” can generate a callback after completion of drawing of still images and moving images. Various effects can be replaced by making a determination before starting to draw a still image or a moving image. In addition, by performing the determination after the drawing of the still image or the moving image is completed, it is possible to add the rendering of the effects according to the replacement contents of the various effects.

  As described above, since the control that can be realized differs depending on the drawing section, it is very important to determine the drawing section in various callback functions that have been called back.

[26. Production switch group management]
As described so far, in this embodiment, a plurality of procedures (functions) are managed by the liquid crystal effect scheduler data for each liquid crystal effect block, and images and videos are drawn for each layer based on the state of the gaming machine and the effect category. Is done. Further, as described above, one or a plurality of effects SW are set for each layer.

  When the effect is executed, images and the like are drawn in parallel with the plurality of layers, and the plurality of liquid crystal effect scheduler data are executed in parallel. For example, in the step-up notice effect, when the step-up notice 1 is executed, the background layer background is drawn, and the identification symbol is drawn on the symbol layer. Furthermore, the drawing by the step-up notice 1 is performed on the notice layer (preliminary_first half 1 layer). FIG. 371 is a diagram illustrating an example of drawing results of individual layers and drawing results of all layers when the notice effect is executed according to the present embodiment.

  At this time, one or a plurality of effects SW are set for each layer. However, if these effects SW are to be managed individually, the processing may be complicated. Therefore, in this embodiment, the effect SW is grouped and managed for each layer, gaming machine state, and effect category.

  For example, the effects SW assigned for each layer are grouped. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 371, the effect SW group background, the effect SW group symbol, and the effect SW group notice are configured corresponding to the background layer, the symbol layer, and the notice layer. These effect SW groups may be further grouped and managed, and the effect SW may be managed for each state of the gaming machine and each effect category.

  In this way, by managing the effect SW as a group, it is possible to collectively control individual effect elements. For example, if you want to change the background that is currently displayed and the background display, design layer, and hold display to a different background when a new change starts, the background layer, design layer, hold layer The effect SWs are grouped, and the effect SWs belonging to the group are collectively set to OFF in the callback function using the callback. This makes it possible to hide the symbol display and hold display according to the current background together with the background, and by performing the symbol display and hold display according to the new background in the corresponding layer, It is possible to switch the drawing only for the necessary effect display from among the plurality of effect displays displayed superimposed on the layers.

  In addition, in the effect that spans the game state, for example, in the jackpot effect from the start of the change to the end of the change, the symbol is hidden and the background is changed to the effect of the jackpot, but for the hold, the hold that was drawn during the change It is also possible to display continuously. Such control defines the effect group to be hidden as described above as the reset effect SW group ID, and the effect SW for which the effect SW is all reset is designated as the liquid crystal effect common block at the start of fluctuation, This can be realized by defining a common block for liquid crystal effects at the start of the big hit effect.

[27. Exception common block]
In the present embodiment described so far, in order to enhance the interest of the player, all the effects are managed as a common block in blocks of a certain length for the purpose of improving the control of the complicated game effects. As a result, a production block is selected according to the fluctuation pattern and the result of the notice lottery, and a series of productions such as symbol fluctuation display and jackpot is realized by drawing based on the selected production block, and complicated control is performed. Therefore, the control that synchronizes the sub-effects such as an accessory, a lamp, and a sound output with the drawing contents has been realized. In the common block, a period divided by a predetermined timing from the start of symbol variation to the symbol determination is set. These periods correspond to, for example, the first half variation and the second half variation, and are assigned to the variation pattern. It was set according to the change time of the pattern.

  By configuring in this way, the common block can be used universally with a plurality of types of variation patterns. Further, by ensuring the independence of the notice effect executed in the first half of the change and the notice effect executed in the second half of the change, the degree of freedom of the combination of the common blocks can be increased.

  However, as described above, since the common blocks are divided by a predetermined period, it is difficult to realize an effect that continues from the start of change to the end of change only by combining the effect blocks of a certain length. When performing such effects over a plurality of periods, the common block is associated with the preceding common block and the subsequent common block is reduced, and each common block is executed independently. For this reason, the control may be complicated in order to maintain the continuity of the production. Therefore, in order to realize such an effect, it is necessary to create and control a program code individually rather than setting program data.

  Therefore, in order to solve the above-described problem, in this embodiment, not only the display of variable symbols and a series of effects of big hits are performed by combining effect blocks of a certain length for all effects, but the length of the effect blocks Is configured not to be exceptionally constant, but to allow the production block length to match the production period. Furthermore, by rendering rendering blocks having different rendering times in combination, and rendering rendering blocks that span the combined rendering blocks at the same time, a rendering rendering that continues from the start of change to the end of change is realized.

  Examples of effects that span a plurality of periods include a countdown effect in which numbers are counted down as the symbols start to change, and the countdown display continues from the first half to the second half. FIG. 372 is a diagram for explaining an example of a common block extending over a plurality of periods according to the present embodiment, in which (A) is a symbol display and execution timing of a notice effect, (B) is a liquid crystal notice effect block by the common block, and The structure of the liquid crystal notice effect block by the common block over a plurality of periods is shown.

  In the example shown in FIG. 372, the first half fluctuation is “normal fluctuation 12 seconds” and the second half fluctuation is “normal short reach” corresponding to the fluctuation pattern “10H03H”. As shown in FIG. 372 (A), a step-up notice and a BTN logo character fall notice are executed in the first half fluctuation, and a cut-in notice and a group notice are executed in the second half fluctuation. The contents of each notice effect are as described above. Further, the countdown notice is executed from the start of the step up notice until the end of the group notice.

  In FIG. 372 (B), the liquid crystal effect block data of the notice effect (step-up notice, BTN logo object fall notice, cut-in notice and group notice) using the common block and the group notice from the start of the step-up notice are shown. The structure of the production block of the countdown notice executed during the period until the end is shown. Each block data corresponding to the common block is as described above.

  The countdown notice effect block includes a function NOP that waits until the liquid crystal effect notice block data is started, a liquid crystal effect notice block data, and a function NOP that waits until the latter half of the fluctuation is finished after the liquid crystal effect notice block data ends. . The function NOP that waits until the liquid crystal effect notice block data starts is a NOP that is executed before the start of the step-up notice, and the function NOP that waits until the latter half of the change is finished is a NOP that is executed after the end of the group notice. The same waiting time is set.

  As described above, by making it possible to set an exception in the execution period of the production block, the common block can be operated more flexibly. Further, by setting the standby time before and after the start of the production, it is possible to minimize the influence of the execution timing of other production blocks being shifted due to the exception setting. Note that the exception common block is also controlled by a callback function using the effect SW, similarly to the other common blocks.

[28. Image conversion]
For the purpose of enhancing the fun of the game and shortening the processing time related to drawing, drawing data for one screen of the liquid crystal display is taken out from the frame buffer and stored separately from the frame buffer in the capture storage area of the sound source built-in VDP 1540a. Then, processing such as image reuse, deformation and additional drawing was performed. As described above, by temporarily storing drawing data in another area and using it for drawing the next frame, various presentation expressions are efficiently realized.

  FIG. 373 is a diagram for explaining a conventional configuration for writing an image to a frame buffer by writing an image written to each layer. As shown in FIG. 373, conventionally, an image drawn in each layer is overwritten on a frame buffer and then output to a display device.

  Specifically, first, a moving image or a still image displayed on the background layer is written on the frame buffer using a display list command. Next, a moving image or a still image displayed on the symbol layer is overwritten on the frame buffer using a display list command. Furthermore, a moving image or a still image displayed on the notice layer is overwritten on the frame buffer using a display list command. Finally, a moving image or a still image related to the hold layer is overwritten on the frame buffer by using a display list command to create drawing data for one frame.

  Thereafter, the peripheral control board 1530 copies the drawing data for one frame to be displayed created in the frame buffer to a capture buffer separately allocated to the RAM of the sound source built-in VDP 1540a. After newly adding an effect around the design to the drawing data stored in the capture buffer, it is written back to the frame buffer to create drawing data for one frame for the next display.

  In this way, drawing data to be displayed in the next frame can be easily created simply by applying an effect to the created drawing data. However, with such conventional image conversion, only image conversion for drawing data for one frame can be realized, and in addition to addition of a new drawing element to a liquid crystal drawing screen for one frame, This is limited to enlargement or reduction of the entire liquid crystal drawing screen. It is impossible to perform image conversion on a drawing element drawn on each layer or each drawing element in the layer on the capture buffer.

  The reason why image conversion cannot be performed for each drawing element is that the drawing elements in each effect, for example, background, design, notice, etc. are overwritten on the frame buffer in layer order. Will be overwritten by the layer's drawing elements. In addition, since the drawing element is a set of dots (points) that are colored when drawn on the frame buffer, even if an attempt is made to extract the drawing element as a rectangle, it is overwritten with another drawing element. This is because the data of the drawing element of the overwritten portion is lost.

  At present, due to the improved processing capability of VDP, the need to re-use image data for one drawn liquid crystal display screen has been reduced, but the expression of production is diversified for the purpose of improving the fun of the game. For this reason, an increase in load has been expected in order to execute a complicated drawing process.

  In the present embodiment, in order to solve the above-described problems and perform more diverse effects, the image data for one screen of the liquid crystal display of the created frame buffer is captured, and the captured image is deformed or newly drawn. When drawing image data for one screen of the liquid crystal display newly, instead of adding the image, each image display unit constituting the image data for one screen of the liquid crystal display is dynamically changed during drawing. Realize complex presentation by adding new drawing.

  Specifically, a single effect drawing data (notice, background, design, hold, etc.) is defined as one effect block, and the effect SW is displayed in units of effect blocks in the liquid crystal effect scheduler data for display by the effect block. Incorporate Then, the liquid crystal effect scheduler data is executed and analyzed at the time of liquid crystal drawing, and the process (program function) is dynamically called (callback) based on the information of the effect SW incorporated in the liquid crystal effect scheduler data.

  When the image is changed, the corresponding effect block in the liquid crystal effect scheduler data and the program function that is called back is not drawn on the frame buffer, but is allocated on the RAM of the sound source built-in VDP 1540a separately from the frame buffer. Drawing is performed on an off-screen buffer (image display information temporary storage means). Then, after changing the image or adding a new image to the image on the off-screen buffer, the image is written back on the frame buffer. By configuring in this way, in addition to changing the image only for a specific notice, adding a new image, or replacing the effect only for the background, the image can be changed for an image in which a plurality of effects are superimposed, or a new image can be changed. Addition can be realized.

  Hereinafter, a configuration in which an image drawn on each layer is stored in an off-screen buffer, and the image stored in the off-screen buffer is converted and written to the frame buffer will be specifically described. FIG. 374 is a view for explaining the procedure for converting the image file stored in the off-screen buffer and writing it in the frame buffer in this embodiment.

  As described above, one or a plurality of image conversion buffers called off-screen buffers different from the frame buffers are allocated to the RAM of the sound source built-in VDP 1540a. Then, image conversion is performed in an image conversion buffer, and complex image conversion is enabled by combining an image converted on one or a plurality of off-screen buffers and an image drawn on the frame buffer.

  More specifically, the effect SW is embedded in the liquid crystal effect block data constituting each layer corresponding to the effect and the liquid crystal effect scheduler data constituting the liquid crystal effect block data, and is embedded when the display list command is created at the time of liquid crystal drawing. A callback function is called by a callback based on the effect SW, and image conversion is performed in the callback function.

  In FIG. 374, first, before starting the drawing of the background layer, the drawing target is switched from the frame buffer to the off-screen buffer A within the function called back based on the effect SW. Next, at the drawing timing of each effect element in the background layer, within the function called back based on the effect SW, a display list command for enlarging each effect element in the background layer is created and transmitted to the off-screen buffer A. Thus, each enlarged background is drawn on the off-screen buffer A.

  Subsequently, before starting drawing of the symbol layer, the drawing target is switched from the frame buffer to the off-screen buffer A in the function called back based on the effect SW. Next, an effect is applied to the symbol drawn on the background drawn on the off-screen buffer A in the function called back based on the effect SW at the drawing timing of each effect element in the symbol layer. Create a display list command. By transmitting this display list command, an effect can be applied to the background and the pattern drawn in the off-screen buffer A, and the image drawn in the off-screen buffer A is overwritten in the frame buffer.

  Subsequently, before starting drawing of the notice layer, the drawing target is switched from the frame buffer to the off-screen buffer B in the function called back based on the effect SW. Next, at the timing when drawing of all the effect elements related to the notice layer is finished, a display list command for rotating the notice drawing of each effect element of the notice layer is issued in the function called back based on the effect SW. create. By transmitting the display list command, each rotated notice is drawn in the off-screen buffer B, and the image drawn in the off-screen buffer B is overwritten on the frame buffer.

  Finally, all effect elements of the reserved layer are written into the frame buffer, and a one-frame liquid crystal drawing screen for displaying this time is created.

  By the above procedure, unlike the conventional image conversion described above, the image conversion is not performed on the entire screen, but on the basis of each layer drawing unit, the drawing element unit constituting the layer, and the drawing order in the frame buffer. It can be performed.

  The present embodiment is characterized in that a callback based on the same effect SW is performed a plurality of times at each drawing timing within a period from the start of drawing of the liquid crystal screen for one frame to the end of drawing. The details of the types of drawing timing are as described above with reference to FIG.

  In addition, by performing image conversion by callback, it is not necessary to determine or monitor whether or not the image being drawn is an image conversion target. Furthermore, at the timing of creating a display list command for drawing an image to be converted, instead of starting a series of fluctuation-related drawing, the image is based on the lottery result value of the notice lottery or the result of interactive operation by the user's external input. It is possible to determine the conversion method.

[29. RAM-less transfer]
Conventionally, a display list command is created based on animation data stored on the CGROM, and the created display list command is processed by the sound source built-in VDP 1540a to draw at the time of game effect execution. At this time, the display list command created while analyzing the animation data stored in the CGROM is stored in a buffer assigned to the peripheral control RAM 1530c, and after the display list command for one screen is created, the external request DMA (transfer means) Was used to send the contents of the buffer to the VDP.

  However, at present, the production specifications are complicated and the processing load increases, so that the processing time for the notice lottery processing at the start of the fluctuation increases, while the lamp lighting data layer composition processing due to the increase in the number of lamp systems and the motor system The processing time of the motor data creation process due to the increase in the number is also increasing. Since the processing time of the peripheral control such as production is executed at a predetermined cycle, there is a possibility that the processing cannot be completed within the cycle when the processing with high load as described above is executed repeatedly. .

  If the process cannot be completed within the cycle exceptionally, the game control by the main control device and the effect control by the peripheral control device are synchronized based on the processing cycle. There is a risk that the progress of the game and the production of the game by each production device will deviate, and the interest of the game will be significantly reduced.

  For this reason, it has been necessary to reduce the processing time of the peripheral control process by reducing the time required for a process with a high load in the peripheral control process such as an effect. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the processing time for generating a native display list command that can be processed by the sound source built-in VDP 1540a by analyzing the animation data on the CGROM described above, which is relatively heavy load in the peripheral control processing, in particular, the above-described animation data. A means for reducing the processing time of the entire peripheral control process will be described.

  First, a conventional procedure for transferring a display list command group for displaying an image on the liquid crystal display device to the sound source built-in VDP 1540a will be described. FIG. 375 is a diagram for explaining the procedure for temporarily storing the display list command group in the peripheral control RAM 1530c and then transferring it to the sound source built-in VDP 1540a.

  In the procedure shown in FIG. 375, first, various liquid crystal effect scheduler data is acquired from the peripheral control ROM 1530b by the liquid crystal effect scheduler display list control module, and the liquid crystal effect scheduler data is analyzed and converted into a VDP native display list command group. The purpose of converting the liquid crystal effect scheduler data into the VDP native display list command group is that the liquid crystal effect scheduler data includes information on the display list command to be transmitted to the sound source built-in VDP 1540a (parameter value corresponding to the VDP register number and register number). Therefore, it is necessary to convert the liquid crystal effect scheduler data into a VDP native display list command that can be executed by the built-in sound source VDP 1540a. The converted VDP native display list command group is temporarily stored in the peripheral control RAM 1530c. Further, when a callback function called by the effect SW is executed when the liquid crystal effect scheduler data is executed, the liquid crystal effect scheduler data is analyzed and converted into a VDP native display list command group as necessary and stored in the peripheral control RAM 1530c.

  The peripheral control MPU 1511a performs display list transfer setting for the external request DMA in the process of processing the liquid crystal effect scheduler data. Thus, the VDP native display list command group stored in the peripheral control RAM 1530c is acquired from the peripheral control RAM 1530c by the external request DMA and transferred to the sound source built-in VDP 1540a.

  When receiving the transferred VDP native display list command, the sound source built-in VDP 1540a temporarily stores it in the display list FIFO. The sound source built-in VDP 1540a processes the display list stored in the display list FIFO from the top, and outputs an image (moving image) to the liquid crystal display device.

  As described above, the display list command group for one frame is stored in the buffer of the peripheral control RAM 1530c, and the display list command group is transferred from the buffer to the VDP 1540a using the external request DMA in the next processing cycle in which the display list command group is created. Drawing is realized by sending. However, the process of analyzing and converting the enormous liquid crystal effect scheduler data for one screen into the VDP native display list command group is a heavy processing load. If a plurality of VDPs of different manufacturers are mounted on a single gaming machine, the liquid crystal effect scheduler data, which is an intermediate data format, is analyzed and converted into a VDP native display list command group corresponding to each manufacturer's VDP. It becomes possible.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, a configuration in which a part or all of the display list command group can be transferred to the sound source built-in VDP 1540a without being stored in the peripheral control RAM 1530c is applied. FIG. 376 is a diagram illustrating a procedure for transferring the display list command group to the VDP 1540a with a built-in sound source without storing it in the peripheral control RAM 1530c according to the present embodiment.

  In the procedure shown in FIG. 376, first, the display list transfer setting is performed for the external request DMA by the liquid crystal effect scheduler display list selection management module. The external request DMA acquires the set display list command group not from the peripheral control RAM 1530c but from the peripheral control ROM 1530b.

  The peripheral control ROM 1530b stores liquid crystal effect scheduler data as in the case where the display list command group is temporarily stored in the peripheral control RAM 1530c, but each liquid crystal effect scheduler data is converted into the converted VDP native display list command group. And an interrupt display list command.

  The external request DMA acquires the designated liquid crystal effect scheduler data from the peripheral control ROM 1530b based on the transfer setting by the liquid crystal effect scheduler display list selection management module, and transfers it to the sound source built-in VDP 1540a. The sound source built-in VDP 1540a temporarily stores the transferred VDP native display list command and interrupt display list command in the display list FIFO.

  The sound source built-in VDP 1540a extracts the VDP native display list command from the display list FIFO, analyzes and executes the extracted VDP native display list command, and writes an image in the frame buffer. Further, the analysis of the display list is interrupted when the interrupt display list command transferred together with the VDP native display list command group is analyzed and executed, and a transfer interruption request is generated for the external request DMA. Thereafter, an interrupt is generated for the peripheral control MPU 1511a.

  When the peripheral control MPU 1511a detects an interrupt from the sound source built-in VDP 1540a, the interrupt processing module determines that the interrupt factor is an interrupt by an interrupt display list command, and executes a callback. The callback function refers to the callback information table corresponding to the liquid crystal effect scheduler data and replaces effects and symbols. The effect replacement method is the same as the description using FIG. 361 described above, and the symbol replacement method is the same as the description using FIG. 361 described above. In the liquid crystal effect scheduler data corresponding callback information table, the effect SW corresponding to the number of interrupt display list commands defined in the liquid crystal effect scheduler data is defined. The replacement information is determined by the callback function, a display list command is created based on the determined replacement information, and is transmitted to the sound source built-in VDP 1540a. Thereafter, the peripheral control MPU 1511a transmits a display list command for resuming display list analysis to the sound source built-in VDP 1540a. The sound source built-in VDP 1540a analyzes the display list command for resuming display list analysis, generates a transfer resume request for the external request DMA, and resumes analysis of the display list command.

  By processing only the replacement part of the effect using the callback function as described above, the peripheral control RAM 1530c (temporary storage means) is used without performing any conversion of the VDP native display list related to all effects other than the replacement. First, it is possible to transfer from the peripheral control ROM 1530b to the sound source built-in VDP 1540a using the external request DMA (transfer means).

  With the above configuration, the VDP native display list command group can be transferred to the sound source built-in VDP 1540a without being stored in the peripheral control RAM 1530c. As a result, it is possible to reduce the load on the peripheral control MPU 1511a that accompanies the image display, and the image processing can be speeded up. Further, since the use area of the peripheral control RAM 1530c can be saved, the storage area can be used effectively.

  The peripheral control ROM 1530b may store only the frequently used VDP native display list command group, and the less frequently used VDP native display list command group may be processed by a conventional procedure. As a result, the processing speed of the display list command that is frequently used is shortened, so that the overall processing speed can be increased and the increase in the capacity of the peripheral control ROM 1530b can be suppressed. Also, display list commands corresponding to highly versatile images (moving images) are stored in the peripheral control ROM 1530b, and different image processing depending on the model and version is performed according to the conventional procedure, thereby improving development efficiency. Is also possible.

[30. Alignment adjustment]
Processors (CPU, MPU) used for game control and peripheral control (production control) of gaming machines can basically handle integer type and floating point type data types. The integer types that can be used by a 32-bit CPU are a char (character, character) type, an int (integer) type, and a long (long integer) type, each having a size of 1 byte, 2 bytes, and 4 bytes. . The floating-point types are a float (single precision) type and a double (double precision) type, and have a size of 4 bytes and 8 bytes, respectively.

  The processor used for the peripheral control of the gaming machine is a byte capable of reading / writing data stored in all addresses in units of 1 byte in the memory (ROM, RAM) regardless of whether the processor is a CISC processor or a RISC processor It has become a machine. The address for reading / writing a plurality of bytes of data is not limited to this. When the processor reads data of a plurality of bytes, the data is always read from a byte boundary, and when accessed so as to cross the byte boundary, an alignment violation occurs. The behavior when an alignment violation occurs depends on the processor.For example, instead of being able to continue processing, program execution is delayed due to multiple memory accesses, or processing is interrupted due to the occurrence of a runtime exception. I'll be relaxed.

  However, in current game machine development, when a program for controlling a game is executed, a data structure composed of a plurality of pieces of information on a memory (ROM, RAM) is created without being aware of alignment. There were many things. For this reason, an alignment violation occurs during program execution, and the execution speed of the program may decrease. In the peripheral control of a gaming machine, it is necessary to complete all processing within a predetermined processing cycle, and thus a decrease in the execution speed of the program may be a serious problem. In particular, since the effects of the gaming machine are configured based on a plurality of elements, it is necessary to collectively manage various information related to each element, and various information is stored in different types of data types. Data structure is adopted.

  In order to solve the above problems, in the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, in a data structure composed of a plurality of information used for game control, each piece of information is stored when data corresponding to the data structure is stored in a memory. Explicitly embed empty data between or at the end of the storage area. As a result, the data access start position by the processor is adjusted, and the information is arranged so that the processor always accesses from the byte boundary address, so that an alignment violation does not occur and a decrease in the program execution speed is prevented. Can do. Adjusting the alignment of the data structure on all ROMs and RAMs is an enormous amount of work. Therefore, the lottery process at the start of fluctuation that increases the load on the processor and increases the processing time. It is desirable to adjust the alignment with the data structure on the ROM and RAM related to the conversion process, the control process related to the liquid crystal drawing, the lamp control process, and the like. In addition, there is no problem in performing alignment adjustment other than the processing described above.

[Help image that encourages understanding of production]
As described with reference to FIG. 118, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, an effect pattern determination as to which of a plurality of effect patterns is executed based on the result of the jackpot determination is executed. It is possible. When one effect pattern is selected as a result of the effect pattern determination, any one of a plurality of expected effects (notice effects, etc.) prepared corresponding to the type of the selected effect pattern is selected. It is possible to execute the notice effect determination as to whether or not the expected effect (s) are selectively made to appear. Depending on the result of the notice effect determination, all of a plurality of expected effects (notice effect etc.) prepared corresponding to the type of the selected effect pattern may be sequentially executed. Any of a plurality of expected effects (notice effects, etc.) may not be executed.

  Then, when such an effect pattern determination or a notice effect determination is performed, the effect display according to the determination result is displayed on the effect display device 1600, thereby changing the decoration pattern according to the result of the jackpot determination. The effect is executed together with the expected effect (notice effect) related to the background depiction (background notice), the movable body operation (actual effect), and the like. As a result, when the variation effect by the decorative design is executed together with the expected effect related to the background depiction and the movable body operation, etc., when the bonus display is stopped and displayed, the bonus game as a bonus is executed for the player. Become possible.

  In such a configuration, the fluctuating effect by the decorative design is provided as an effect having “a function for definitively indicating whether or not a big hit is obtained as a result of the big hit determination”. The expected effect relating to the body movement or the like is provided as an effect having “a function that suggests the degree of expectation (including 0% and 100%) that a big hit is obtained”. That is, the player will enjoy the game through these effects.

  However, when such an expected effect is realized as a background depiction (background notice), it basically has a directivity such as “how much numerical value should be set for the rate of appearance of highly expected images”. It can only be done. Therefore, the fundamental problem such as “it is difficult to have a sense of expectation for a big hit unless an image with high expectation (expected production) appears” has not yet been solved.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, first, when it is determined that a special effect is to be performed as a result of the notice effect determination (when a predetermined effect condition is satisfied), at least the background depiction It is possible to execute processing for displaying the background image used in the image in a special mode different from the original image data. When displayed in the special mode, the expectation ( It is suggested that the ratio of appearance of jackpot symbols is high.

Here, as the “processing to display in a special mode”, for example,
A process for displaying original image data as rotation processing data that is rotated by a predetermined angle (rotation centered on any of the x, y, and z axes in the display area (or an appropriate combination)),
-It is possible to exemplify processes such as displaying original image data as mosaic processed data with a predetermined degree of "blurring".

  That is, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, when a predetermined performance condition is satisfied, the original image data is subjected to a slight processing (rotation processing, mosaic processing, etc.). A special effect for displaying this (displayed in a special form) is intentionally performed. According to such a configuration, even if a special effect in which only a slight processing is performed on the original image data is performed, it is difficult for the player side to detect and recognize the fact definitely. However, in exchange for this, even if the special performance is not performed, it seems to be able to remember the sensation and illusion that “there may be the special performance being executed” Therefore, even if a state in which an image with a high degree of expectation (special effect) does not appear continues, it is expected that the sense of expectation for the big hit is suitably maintained.

  However, if there is no clue for the player to recognize the implementation status related to such “processing to display in a special mode”, it is difficult to even recognize the possibility of a high-expected situation. In the end, the meaning of this special performance can be lost.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, a help image is displayed as to whether the “processing to display in a special mode” is being executed in response to an operation by the player. The processing to be executed is made executable. According to such a configuration, the help image can be displayed in response to an operation by the player, so that it is not possible to recognize whether or not the “processing to display in a special mode” is being executed. It is expected that the decrease in the above will be suppressed, and as a result, the expectation will be suitably maintained.

  However, the “help image” according to this explanation example does not clearly indicate whether or not the “processing to display in a special mode” is being executed, but it includes the recognition difficulty. ing. Because it is intended to have such recognition difficulty, even if it does not appear to be in the state where “processing to display in a special mode” is executed, it can not be convinced. Will be left behind and will be able to maintain their expectation.

  FIG. 377 shows a display example on the effect display device 1600 when a state transition is made between a non-game state in which a game is not executed (such as in the demo screen) and a game execution state in which a game is executed. .

  FIG. 377 (a) shows a display example on the effect display device 1600 when the game is in a non-game state (such as in a demo screen). As shown in FIG. 377 (a), in the effect display device 1600 when in the non-game state, a character image PG (here, which is useful for examining whether the special effect is being executed) A guide image AG suggesting that a character imitating a penguin can be made to appear by an operation on a predetermined operation means (such as the operation button 410) is displayed. In this example, an explanatory note and a character image PG are displayed as the guide image AG.

  When the start prize is generated and the game (changes in the special symbol according to the big hit determination) is started in the situation shown in FIG. 377 (a), the effect display device 1600 first displays FIG. 377 (b). The guide image AG is hidden as shown in FIG. At the same time, the changing effect by the decorative design SZ is executed together with the expected effect (notice effect) related to the background depiction (background notice), the movable body operation (function effect effect), and the like. In this way, by causing the guide image AG to be automatically hidden when the game is started, while avoiding adverse effects on the stage performance when in the game execution state, The presence of the character image PG (here, a character simulating a penguin) can be suitably appealed.

  FIG. 377 (c) shows a display example on the effect display device 1600 when the changing effect by the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 377 (b) is ended (stop display).

  When the hold information remains in the situation shown in FIG. 377 (c), the guide image AG is not displayed by starting the variation effect by the decorative design SZ by digesting the hold information. The state of production shown in FIG. 377 (b) will appear again in the state that has been made. On the other hand, if no hold information remains in the situation shown in FIG. 377 (c), the state is again shifted to a non-game state (such as in the demo screen). In other words, in this case, the guide image AG is based on the fact that the state where the game is not newly started for a predetermined time has been continued after the variation effect by the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. The displayed situation (the situation shown in FIG. 377 (a)) will appear again. In the effect display device 1600 when the guide image AG is displayed, the decorative symbol SZ may be stopped and displayed, or the decorative symbol SZ itself may be hidden.

  The “processing to display in a special manner” according to this effect example is a state in which the fluctuating effect by the decorative symbol SZ is executed in the “specific effect pattern” (when a predetermined determination result is obtained in the effect determination). In addition, it can be executed when it is within a period in which a specific effect image appears (a predetermined timing within a specific effect pattern).

  In FIG. 378, in the state where the variation effect by the decoration symbol SZ is executed in the “specific effect pattern”, the expected effect that the princess character (specific effect image) is displayed as a large background image is performed. The example of a display in the production | presentation display apparatus 1600 when it exists in the state is shown.

  That is, in this production example, when at least “expected production where a princess character (specific production image) is displayed as a background image” is being performed, on condition that a predetermined production condition is satisfied, A process of displaying only the original image data of the decorative design SZ and its background image (princess character) after performing a slight rotation process (a process of displaying in a special manner) can be executed. Yes. When the princess character (specific effect image) for which “processing to display in a special manner” is executed is displayed, the princess character (specific effect image) for which “processing to display in a special manner” is not executed. The rate at which jackpot symbols appear is higher than when they are displayed.

  More specifically, in the situation shown in FIG. 378 (a), the “processing to display in a special manner” is not executed, and the decorative design SZ and its background image (princess character) are included in each original image data. It is displayed as it is. On the other hand, in the situation shown in FIG. 378 (b), the original image data of the decorative design SZ and its background image (princess character) is rotated three times to the left and then displayed. In the situation shown in FIG. 378 (c), the process (the process of displaying in a special mode) is executed. In the situation shown in FIG. 378 (c), the original image data of the decorative design SZ and its background image (princess character) is 6 degrees to the left. In this state, the process of displaying these (the process of displaying in a special mode) is executed after the rotation processing is performed.

  As is apparent from FIGS. 378 (a) to 378 (c), each original image data of the decorative design SZ and its background image (princess character) even when the “processing to display in a special mode” is performed. In contrast, only a small amount of rotational processing is applied. In particular, in the figure, it can be seen by comparing between FIGS. 378 (a) to 378 (c), but in the actual production, FIG. 378 (a) corresponding to the result of the production determination is shown. Only one of () to (c) is displayed, and no comparison can be made between them. Therefore, even if FIGS. 378 (b) and (c) appear, it is difficult to be sure that the state is displayed in the special mode, but the state is displayed in the special mode. The player is expected to be aware of a certain possibility (possibility of high expectation), and even if FIG. 378 (a) appears, it is not displayed in a special manner. It is difficult to be convinced, and it is expected that the degree of leaving a hope (maintaining a sense of expectation) such as “may be in a state of being displayed in a special manner” is expected.

  In addition, a process of displaying the original image data of the decorative design SZ and its background image (princess character) 3 degrees (or 6 degrees) to the left and then displaying them (a process of displaying them in a special manner) ) May be executed as a process in which each original image data is rotated and displayed separately, and each original image data is converted into one image after being converted into one image. The image may be executed as a process of rotating and displaying the image.

  In addition, for FIGS. 378 (b) and (c), when the image shown in FIG. 378 (c) is displayed, the ratio at which the jackpot symbol appears than when the image shown in FIG. 378 (b) is displayed. It may be possible to have a relationship that increases Alternatively, when “processing to display in a special mode” is executed, after displaying FIG. 378 (a) once, it is displayed as a moving image whose inclination changes in the order of FIGS. 378 (b) and (c). You may make it make it. Alternatively, both of FIGS. 378 (b) and (c) are not necessarily prepared, and only one of FIGS. 378 (b) and (c) may be displayed.

  However, as described above, if there is no clue for the player to determine the implementation status related to such “processing to be displayed in a special manner”, the special meaning of performing such a special effect is lost. There is no doubt. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, the operation button 410 is at least when the “expected effect in which the princess character (specific effect image) is displayed as a large background image” is performed. It is possible to execute a process of displaying a help image as to whether or not the “process to display in a special mode” is being executed by an operation on a predetermined operation means such as.

  FIG. 379 shows that the help image is displayed based on the fact that the operation by the player is accepted in the state where the “expected effect in which the princess character (specific effect image) is displayed as a background image” is being performed. The example of a display in the effect display apparatus 1600 is shown.

  That is, in this effect example, at least in the state (see FIG. 378) where the “expected effect that the princess character (specific effect image) is displayed as a background image” is performed (operation button) 410, etc.), a character image PG (here, a character imitating a penguin) useful for examining “whether a special effect (here, a tilt effect) is being executed” is used as a help image. It is displayed.

  More specifically, when the player performs an operation (such as the operation button 410) in the situation shown in FIG. 378 (a), the situation shown in FIG. 379 (a) appears, and FIG. When the player performs an operation (such as the operation button 410) in the situation shown in b), the situation shown in FIG. 379 (b) appears, and when the situation shown in FIG. 378 (c) is present. If the player performs an operation (such as the operation button 410), the situation shown in FIG. 379 (c) will appear.

  However, as is clear from FIGS. 379 (a) to (c), when the character image PG (help image) is displayed, it can be used to determine whether the “processing to display in a special mode” is being executed. It is not explicitly stated whether or not the “process for displaying in a special mode” is being executed. Because it is intended to have such recognition difficulty, if it seems to be in the state where "processing to display in a special mode" is executed, it will become possible to be strongly aware of the possibility, Even if it appears that the “process to display in a special mode” is not in a state of being executed, it is not possible to be convinced, and hope for the feasibility of the process can be left and the expectation can be maintained. Become possible.

  Here, as shown in FIGS. 379 (a) to (c), the character image PG (help image) according to this effect example is in a state in which “processing to display in a special manner” is being executed. Regardless of the mode of execution, display is possible only in one mode that is a predetermined position and has a ruler in the horizontal direction. In this way, by causing an image (here, a ruler) that is not affected by the “processing to display in a special mode” and that extends in the horizontal direction to appear by an operation by the player, the image is displayed. (Here, the ruler) can be made to function as a reference image (help image) as to whether or not it is in the “state where the special effect (here, the tilt effect) is being executed”.

  In particular, in this production example, the horizontal direction is not affected by the “processing to display in a special mode” at a position overlapping with the image (princess character) that is the execution target of the “processing to display in a special mode”. A guide image (in this case, a ruler) displayed so as to extend is displayed. Therefore, by confirming the degree of overlap with the image (princess character) that is the execution target of the special processing, it can be further used to determine whether the special processing is being performed. become.

  That is, in such an effect example, the special effect that has been “processed to display in a special manner” is an effect that is slightly tilted, and when the tilted effect is performed, the tilted effect is Expectation is higher than if not done. For this reason, the player operates predetermined operation means (such as the operation button 410) in order to determine whether or not the tilting effect is being performed. It has a recognition difficulty that does not definitely report whether the “process for displaying in a special mode” is being executed. As a result, the player is expected to be aware of the possibility of high expectation when it appears that a tilting performance is being executed, and even if it does not appear to be performing a tilting effect, It is expected to leave a hope (maintaining a sense of expectation) such as “the tilting performance may be in a state of being executed”.

  Furthermore, a target image (here, a ruler) indicating whether or not the “special effect (here, the tilt effect) is being executed” is set as a target of “processing to display in a special manner”. The image (decorative symbol SZ, background image) is displayed in a way that at least part of it is displayed in a superimposed manner, and a standard image (here, a ruler) is a single effect (expectation) ), And it can be provided as an effect that the function is exhibited for the first time by comparing with the effect image (here, the princess character) that is already in the display state.

  In addition, according to such a configuration, it is possible to develop the presentation without displaying the reference image (here, the ruler) depending on the selection by the player (depending on the operation). To be able to enjoy various ways of playing, such as avoiding the player's operation when he / she is not confident that he / she is in a state where the performance (in this case, the tilt performance) is being executed Become.

  In this production example, the “processing to display in a special mode” is executed as “processing to display after rotating the original image data”, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, instead of the original image data, the image data created based on the original image data may be executed as a process to be displayed after being rotated. Further, the image data is not subjected to rotation processing, but may be subjected to another processing or conversion. In short, it is possible to execute a special process that is converted into an image having a mode different from the normal mode and to display it, and when the special process can be performed, the special process is performed by an operation by the player. If it is possible to display a guide image that does not become necessary, it is possible to achieve the above-described effects.

  By the way, in the above-described effect example, the “process to display in a special mode” can be executed when the “expected effect in which the princess character (specific effect image) is displayed as a background image” is being performed. As described above, depending on the result of the production determination, the decoration symbol SZ may be executable a plurality of times within a period from the start of the change to the stop of the change. At this time, when the number of times that the “process to display in a special mode” is executed is large, it is desirable that the rate of appearance of the big hit symbol is higher than when the number of times is small.

  In addition, the character image PG (particularly, a ruler here) is not only in a state where the “expected effect where a princess character (specific effect image) is displayed as a background image” is being performed, The display may be enabled by the player's operation over the entire period from the start of the change to the stop of the change. Further, even when the decorative symbol SZ is in a stopped state, the decorative symbol SZ may be displayed by an operation by the player.

  That is, in this case, even if any background image is displayed on the effect display device 1600, if there is an operation by the player, a process of causing the character image PG (in particular, a ruler here) to appear is executed. It becomes. However, in view of the fact that the character image PG (in particular, a ruler here) is a “comparison reference image (reference image) with respect to the background image”, the preferred display position for displaying the character image PG is the background image for each case. It is clear that it differs depending on the type of. However, if the display position or display form of the character image PG (especially the ruler here) is changed in accordance with the type of the background image in each case, the character image PG is compared with the comparison reference. The essential function as an image (reference image) may be lost, and there is a concern that the entertainment interest of the game may deteriorate due to the suspicion of lack of reliability. That is, the character image PG as the comparison reference image (reference image) is required to be displayed as an absolute image that is invariant regardless of the production situation.

  Therefore, it is desirable that the display position of the character image PG can be changed between a plurality of predetermined display positions in accordance with an operation (such as the operation button 410) by the player. . However, it is important that the display form is the same regardless of the display position.

  FIG. 380 shows a display example when the character image PG is displayed so as to change the display position by an operation by the player.

  FIG. 380 (a) shows an effect situation in which a specific background image is displayed in the reach state. Now, in this production situation, the player has the suspicion that “the process of displaying in a special mode has been executed” and performs an operation for displaying the comparison reference image (reference image). Assuming that the character image PG is displayed as a comparison reference image (reference image) at any of a plurality of display positions (see FIGS. 380 (b) to (d)) determined in advance according to the operation mode. Processing is performed.

  For example, when the operation button 410 is operated only once within a predetermined short time, the character image PG as a comparison reference image (reference image) is displayed on the left side in the display area (FIG. 380 (b)). Is displayed. On the other hand, when the operation button 410 is operated twice within a predetermined short time, a character image as a comparison reference image (reference image) is displayed at the center position (FIG. 380 (c)) in the display area. When processing for displaying PG is performed and the operation button 410 is operated three times within a predetermined short time, the comparison reference image (reference image) is displayed at the right position (FIG. 380 (d)) in the display area. ) As a character image PG is displayed.

  As is apparent from FIGS. 380 (b) to (d), the character image PG (in particular, a ruler here) has the same form regardless of the display position. Since the positional relationship between the background image (or decoration pattern) and the character image PG (especially a ruler in this case) that can be the target of “processing to display in a special mode” is different, “display in a special mode” The ease of determining whether or not “the process to be performed” is being executed is naturally different.

  For example, when a character image PG (especially a ruler here) is displayed at the position shown in FIG. 380 (center position in the display area), the character image PG (especially a ruler here) is to be compared. When the character image PG (particularly, a ruler in this case) is displayed at the position shown in FIG. 380 (d) (the right side position in the display area). The character image PG (especially the ruler here) is displayed so as to hide almost the entire background image (signature) although it overlaps the background image to be compared. It can be said that it is relatively difficult to determine whether the “processing to be performed” is being executed.

  According to such a configuration, a character image PG (particularly, a ruler here) as a comparison reference image (reference image) is played in a “display position suitable for comparison” that differs depending on the type of background image in each case. Since it can be displayed by the user's operation, it is possible to suitably provide a determination material as to whether or not the “process for displaying in a special mode” is being executed.

  In this production example, the display position of the character image PG (particularly, a ruler here) as a comparison reference image (standard image) is made variable in accordance with the number of operations for the operation button 410 within a predetermined time. However, this is not necessarily the case. For example, the display position may be made variable according to the length of the long press time for the operation button 410, or a plurality of operation means different from the operation button 410 are provided, and any of these operation means is operated. The character image PG may be displayed at a predetermined display position corresponding to the operated operating means. When the character image PG is displayed by an operation on an operation means different from the operation button 410, the character image PG is displayed even in a situation where the operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410 (acceptance period). Can be made possible.

  In addition, the character image PG (particularly, a ruler here) as a comparison reference image (standard image) cannot function as an effect (expected degree) by itself, and is therefore required for comparison and determination with the background image. After a sufficient time (for example, 3 seconds) elapses, it becomes a worthless image that makes it difficult to visually recognize the expected effect (background image). Therefore, when a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) elapses from when it is displayed by an operation by the player, it is desirable that the operation is automatically hidden without requiring any operation.

  However, depending on the relationship between the position at which the character image PG (particularly, a ruler in this case) is displayed as the comparison reference image (standard image) and the type of the background image, the “processing to display in a special mode” is executed. There may be a case where a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) is not enough to compare and judge whether the user is in the current state. Therefore, in the above-described effect example, while the character image PG as the comparison reference image (reference image) is displayed (within 3 seconds), the predetermined operation means operated to make the character image PG appear again is operated again. If so, the time during which the character image PG is continuously displayed is extended. For example, every time a predetermined operation means is re-operated, if the display is hidden after a predetermined time (for example, after 3 seconds) with reference to the operated timing, it is intermittent until the player is satisfied. By performing various operations, the display state of the character image PG can be maintained, and comparison and determination can be made carefully.

  However, if such an unlimited continuous display as the comparison reference image (character image PG) is simply allowed, it may be very easy to determine whether the special processing is being executed. . That is, the player may always obtain a confident conclusion that "the special process is being executed" or "the special process is not being executed". It does not clearly indicate whether or not the processing to be displayed is being executed, but the above-mentioned meaning of “having recognition difficulty” is lost.

  Therefore, when the predetermined operation means is operated again while the character image PG is displayed (within 3 seconds), in exchange for extending the time during which the character image PG (ruler) is continuously displayed, The size (display area) of the comparison reference image (character image PG) as a whole is reduced, such as by shortening the length (longitudinal direction) of the ruler possessed by the character image PG by a predetermined unit (for example, 1 cm). Thus, it is desirable to add difficulty to the comparison with the background image. That is, in this case, every time a predetermined operation means is re-operated while the character image PG is displayed, in exchange for extending the time until the comparison reference image (character image PG) is not displayed. Since the display area of the comparison reference image (character image PG) as a whole gradually decreases (here, the ruler gradually decreases), the display time of the comparison reference image (character image PG) It is possible to suitably maintain the difficulty of recognizing whether or not the process of displaying in a special mode is being executed.

  However, if the comparison reference image (character image PG) is displayed too small (the ruler length is displayed too short), it cannot be used for comparison with the background image, which reduces the game fun. It can be connected. Accordingly, with respect to the size (display area) of the comparison reference image (character image PG) as a whole, a minimum size (here, the length of the ruler with the shortest limit) is set in advance, and the minimum level is set. The time until the comparison reference image (character image PG) is not displayed is not extended even when the predetermined operation means is re-operated in this state. It is desirable not to further reduce the display area of the comparison reference image (character image PG) as a whole.

  Further, it is desirable that the size (display area) of the comparison reference image (character image PG) as a whole is carried over after the comparison reference image (character image PG) is not displayed. . That is, in this case, each time the predetermined operation means is operated to cause the comparison reference image (character image PG) to appear (or to extend the display time), the comparison reference image (character image PG) is displayed as a whole. Will gradually become smaller (here, the ruler will become shorter) and will not even appear at all, so when you really want to know if the "processing to display in a special mode" is being executed It becomes possible to prompt the user to operate only, and other than that, it is expected to concentrate on the original performance content.

  Note that the size (display area) of the comparison reference image (character image PG) as a whole may be carried over after the variation effect is finished and the next variation effect is started. According to such a configuration, the comparison reference image (character image PG) can be given as an extremely valuable presentation opportunity. Basically, only by looking at the background image and the decorative design SZ, the “special mode” It is possible to provide a performance (see FIG. 378) for predicting whether or not the “displaying process” is being executed.

  Incidentally, the comparison reference image (character image PG) shown in FIGS. 379 and 380 is in a state when it is displayed for the first time by an operation on a predetermined operation means after power-on (or RAM clear). Thereafter, each time an operation is performed on a predetermined operation means, the display area of the comparison reference image as a whole gradually decreases (here, the ruler becomes gradually shorter), and finally does not even appear. . However, when a specific detection is made or when a specific condition is satisfied, the comparison reference image (when appearing at multiple positions, only the comparison reference image corresponding to any one of those positions) Processing for displaying the display area as a whole (in this case, the ruler is long) may be prepared. According to such a configuration, it is possible to recover the remaining number of times that the comparison reference image (character image PG) can appear by an operation on a predetermined operation means.

  In addition, as described above, when preparing a plurality of operation means set so that the display positions of the comparison reference image (character image PG) are different from each other, the operation is performed depending on which of these operation means is operated. The character image PG is displayed at a predetermined display position corresponding to the operated means. In this case, for each operation means (display position), the remaining number of times that the comparison reference image (character image PG) can appear (the number of operations until reaching the minimum unit) is set, and the specific operation means is set. When the operation is performed, it is desirable that only the comparison reference image (character image PG) displayed at the position corresponding to the specific operation means is displayed small (the ruler is displayed short).

  For example, in the case of the production example described with reference to FIG. 380, when the first operating means is operated in the production situation shown in FIG. 380 (a), the production situation shown in FIG. 380 (b) appears. It becomes. In the effect situation shown in FIG. 380 (b), when the first operation means is operated again, this is in exchange for the display time of the comparison reference image (character image PG) in the display state being extended. As described above, the display is made smaller (the ruler is shorter). However, after this, even if the second operation means is operated, the production situation shown in FIG. 380 (c) only appears, and the comparison criteria associated with the first operation means being operated again. The reduced display as the image (character image PG) is not carried over to the comparison reference image (character image PG) displayed at the center position by the operation on the second operation means. Similarly, when the third operating means is operated, only the effect situation shown in FIG. 380 (d) appears, and a comparison reference image (character image PG) associated with the first operating means being operated again. Is not carried over to the comparison reference image (character image PG) displayed at the right position by the operation on the third operation means.

  In this regard, while the comparison reference image (character image PG) is displayed at a specific position (for example, the central position shown in FIG. 380 (c)) (within 3 seconds), it corresponds to the specific position (center position). When another operation means (for example, the first operation means) that is not operated is operated, the comparison reference image (character image PG) that is already displayed at the specific position (center position) is maintained in the display state. Therefore, it is desirable to newly display the comparison reference image (character image PG) at another position (left side position) corresponding to the other operation means (first operation means).

  That is, in this case, even if the comparison reference image (character image PG) appears at a position that is difficult to compare in relation to the background image by an operation on the predetermined operation means, it is different from the predetermined operation means. By operating the operating means, it becomes possible to newly display the comparison reference image (character image PG) at another display position. This makes it possible to add interest for performing a search as to where the comparison reference image (character image PG) should be displayed in order to improve the ease of comparison.

  In addition, in the above configuration, even when the comparison reference image (character image PG) is newly displayed at another display position, the comparison reference image (character image PG) that has already been displayed is triggered by this. The display state is not maintained, but the display state is maintained. According to such a configuration, a plurality of comparison reference images (character images PG) are displayed simultaneously, and the amount of comparison material with the background image is increased by that amount (here, two rulers are arranged) And the horizontal length becomes substantially longer), so that a background image that is difficult to compare appears, but the “processing to display in a special mode” is being executed. It is possible to give an opportunity to greatly improve the ease of comparison at the timing when it is absolutely necessary to know whether or not there is. However, this simultaneously consumes two “remaining number of times that the comparison reference image (character image PG) can appear (number of operations until reaching the minimum unit)” set for each of the plurality of operation means. Therefore, it can be said that there is a great price for greatly improving the ease of comparison.

  Further, as described above, the comparison reference image (character image PG) is not displayed after a predetermined time (3 seconds) after being displayed by the operation by the player, so that a plurality of comparison reference images (character images) are displayed. In order to lengthen the time during which PG) is simultaneously displayed, it is required to operate the second operating means as soon as possible after operating the first operating means. That is, in this case, it is determined whether or not the comparison reference image (character image PG) appearing by the operation with respect to the first operation means is in the “special processing is being executed” state, or the price is increased. In this case, a quick decision on whether or not to further improve the ease of comparison by further operating the second operation means will be required. Since it will be enlarged, a feeling of tension can be suitably maintained.

  In addition, according to such a configuration, even when a plurality of comparison reference images (character images PG) are displayed simultaneously, the timing at which these comparison reference images (character images PG) are not displayed is different. In addition, the size (the length of the ruler) as each comparison reference image (character image PG) also differs depending on the operation situation. Further, depending on the operation state (remaining number of times) in each operation means, “the comparison reference image (character image PG) is not displayed even if a specific operation means is operated, but if another operation means is operated, the comparison reference image is displayed. Since an effect situation such as “Character image PG is displayed” can also appear, which operation means should be operated to make the comparison reference image (character image PG) appear? Even in the determination, it is possible to provide more interestingness by adding a determination element other than the type of the background image to be compared.

  As described above, the comparison reference image (character image PG) is hidden after a predetermined time (3 seconds) after being displayed by the player's operation, but the predetermined time has elapsed. When the symbol variation (decorative symbol SZ) is lost and stopped before this, it is desirable that the symbol change is not displayed. That is, as shown in FIG. 379 and FIG. 380, in the state where the comparison reference image (character image PG) is displayed, it is difficult to visually recognize the effect contents in the display area, and by comparison with the background image or the like. It will be difficult to concentrate on the production content. As a result, if there is a case where it is not noticed that the player has stopped due to a loss, the purpose of the character image PG for use in the production will be lost. When this occurs, it is desirable to hide the character image PG with this as an opportunity.

  However, the character image PG may not be hidden when the game is stopped due to the big hit, but may be continued in the display state until a predetermined time has elapsed. That is, when the game is stopped due to a big hit, the big hit game is started even if it is not noticed. Therefore, when the character image PG is not displayed after a predetermined time, it is a surprise. It is expected to function as a production.

  In addition, when the comparison reference image (character image PG) is displayed, it is desirable that the specific sound related to the comparison reference image (character image PG) can be output. Even when the user is gazing, it can be easily recognized that the comparison reference image (character image PG) has been displayed. It is more desirable to adopt such a method in order to maintain the entertainment interest.

  That is, the remaining number of times (the number of operations until reaching the minimum unit) at which the comparison reference image (character image PG) can appear is set separately for each operation means (display position). If the comparison reference image (character image PG) is frequently displayed during the period until the number of times is consumed, the effect content in the display area is difficult to visually recognize, and the original effect is concentrated. It becomes difficult. Thus, when the character image PG is displayed, a specific sound (for example, a penguin cry) can be output, while the specific sound (for example, a penguin cry) is “process to display in a special manner”. The sound output can be allowed only when it is not executed. In this way, regarding the execution of the “processing to display in a special mode”, a specific sound (for example, a penguin cry) is not used as a definite suggestion on the affirmative side, but a specific sound (for example, a definite suggestion on the negative side) In this situation, the player who hates the specific sound concentrates on the original performance and is highly likely to execute the “processing to display in a special manner”. It is expected that the comparison reference image (character image PG) appears only at certain times.

  However, for a specific sound (for example, a penguin cry), a comparison reference image (character image PG) is displayed by an operation by the player when the “processing to display in a special mode” is not executed. Even in such a case, it is desirable that the sound output is not necessarily allowed. That is, in this case, a comparison reference image (character image PG) is newly displayed (or changed in comparison with the size of the comparison reference image already in the display state (the length of the ruler is short)) by the player's operation. Sometimes when a specific sound (for example, a penguin cry) is output, it is definitely recognized that the “processing to display in a special manner” is not executed, but the specific sound ( For example, when the sound of a penguin cry) is not output, it may be either a state in which “processing to display in a special mode” is executed or a state in which “processing to display in a special mode” is not executed. As a result, it becomes possible to maintain the fun when a specific sound (for example, a penguin cry) is not output.

  Note that a specific sound (for example, a penguin cry) may be output under the above-described predetermined condition regardless of which of a plurality of operation means having different display positions is operated. However, only when a specific operation means among a plurality of operation means is operated, if a specific sound can be output under the predetermined condition described above, a specific sound may be output. A comparison reference image (character image PG) that is useful for determining whether or not the “processing to display in a special mode” is being performed appears or a specific sound is not output. It becomes possible for the player to select whether or not a comparison reference image (character image PG) that is useful for determining whether or not the “processing to be displayed in” state is being executed.

  Moreover, in the said production example, it displays by making it small (a ruler is short) and displaying it in a special mode in exchange for extending the display time of the comparison reference image (character image PG) in the display state. The difficulty of recognizing whether the process is being executed is suitably maintained. In this regard, when a specific sound (for example, a penguin cry) is output when the comparative reference image (character image PG) is relatively small, the specific sound (when the comparative reference image (character image PG) is relatively large) For example, if the volume is made lower than when a penguin cry is output, the difficulty of recognition when the display time of the comparative reference image (character image PG) in the display state is extended to some extent. It is expected to be maintained.

  Further, the size of the comparison reference image (character image PG) and its display position are arranged so that they do not overlap each other when the comparison reference image (character image PG) is simultaneously displayed at a plurality of display positions (see FIG. 380). It is desirable to set each of these. The comparison material with the background image can be increased by the amount that each comparison reference image (character image PG) is displayed without overlapping.

  Further, the comparison reference image (character image PG) may be displayed as a transparent image. According to such a configuration, even if a large part of the background image overlaps the comparison reference image (character image PG), the comparison is made with the background image that can be seen through the comparison reference image (character image PG). It becomes possible to perform suitably.

  Further, in the above-described effect example, each time the predetermined operation means is operated, the comparison reference image (character image PG) is displayed with a small size (the ruler is shortened). However, the present invention is not limited to this. What is necessary is just an aspect which raises the difficulty of recognition about whether it is in the state where the process displayed in a mode is performed. For example, each time a predetermined operation means is operated, the comparative reference image (character image PG) itself remains the same in shape and size, but the portion where the transparency is relatively increased is gradually enlarged. It may be. That is, when the comparison reference image (character image PG) is “displayed with a specific transparency”, the portion displayed with the specific transparency in the comparison reference image (character image PG) is made small (specified on the ruler). It is important to display the image with the transparency being shortened), and the portion that is not displayed with the specific transparency may be hidden or displayed with a transparency higher than the specific transparency. You may make it display and raise visibility difficulty.

  In addition, as described above, the “processing to display in a special mode” is, for example, from the display state shown in FIG. 378 (a) to the display state shown in FIG. 378 (b) and shown in FIG. 378 (c). It may be a dynamic drawing process for changing to a display state. When the “process to display in a special mode” is realized as such a dynamic drawing process, when the “process to display in a special mode” is terminated, for example, from the display state shown in FIG. The display state shown in 378 (b) is returned to the display state shown in FIG. 378 (a).

  In this respect, as described above, the comparison reference image (character image PG) is hidden after a predetermined time (3 seconds) after being displayed. It is desirable to perform the “process for displaying in a special mode” in a time shorter than a predetermined time (3 seconds). That is, in this case, if the “reference display process” as the dynamic depiction process is being executed, if the comparison reference image (character image PG) can appear by the player's operation, While the comparison reference image (character image PG) maintains the display state (within 3 seconds), the display state shown in FIG. 378 (b) is changed from the display state shown in FIG. Since the movement “returned to the display state shown in 378 (a)” always appears, it is possible to facilitate the comparison / determination as to whether or not the process of displaying in a special mode is being executed. become able to.

  However, the “process for displaying in a special mode” as the dynamic depiction process may be performed in a time longer than a predetermined time (3 seconds). In other words, in this case, it is assumed that the comparison reference image (character image PG) can be caused to appear by an operation by the player when the “process to display in a special mode” as the dynamic depiction process is being executed. Also, while the comparison reference image (character image PG) maintains the display state (within 3 seconds), the display state shown in FIG. 378 (b) is changed from the display state shown in FIG. 378 (c). After that, the movement “returned to the display state shown in FIG. 378 (a)” does not necessarily appear, so it is difficult to compare / determine whether or not the processing for displaying in a special mode is being executed. It becomes possible to make it. In addition, a strategy is also added because the display time of the comparison reference image (character image PG) can be extended.

  In addition, the “process to display in a special mode” as the dynamic depiction process is performed in a time shorter than a predetermined time (3 seconds) or from a predetermined time (3 seconds) depending on the result of the production determination. May be performed in a long time. Further, within the period from when the decorative design SZ starts to change until it stops changing, “processing to display in a special manner” as a dynamic drawing process that is performed in a time shorter than a predetermined time (3 seconds); “Processing for displaying in a special manner” as dynamic drawing processing performed in a time longer than a predetermined time (3 seconds) may be performed at different predetermined timings.

  In addition, the comparison reference image (character image PG) is hidden after a predetermined time (3 seconds) after being displayed, but when the comparison reference image (character image PG) is displayed. For specific sounds that can be output (for example, penguin calls), the sound output should be interrupted in a time significantly shorter than the predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds, which is less than half the time). Is desirable. That is, in this case, even if the comparison reference image (character image PG) is displayed immediately before the “processing to display in the special mode” is executed, the specific sound is not recorded until after the “processing to display in the special mode” is executed. Since the output of (for example, penguin squeak) is suppressed, the specific sound (for example, the process of displaying in a special mode) is being executed. It is possible to make it difficult for the production situation to appear as if it were denied by the penguin cry.

  In this case, the display state of the comparison reference image (character image PG) is maintained (for 3 seconds) in a form spanning from before the “processing to display in a special mode” to after it is executed. Become. Therefore, when the “process to display in a special mode” as the dynamic depiction process is executed, for example, the display shown in FIG. 378 (a) is performed while the comparison reference image (character image PG) is displayed. The state changes from the state shown in FIG. 378 (b) to the state shown in FIG. 378 (c).

  Although the comparison reference image (character image PG) is composed of a character imitating a penguin and a ruler, only a character imitating a penguin and a ruler may be displayed. In short, any reference image (character image PG) that is not a target of “processing to be displayed in a special manner” can be used as long as it can be made appear by an operation by the player. However, if a guide image (ruler) showing the length unit in the horizontal direction is displayed, it is possible to facilitate the determination of whether or not the “processing to display in a special mode” is being executed. Is possible.

  The guide image AG in the demonstration screen shown in FIG. 377 may not necessarily be displayed.

  In addition, in the above example, as a method for not outputting the volume adjustment confirmation sound or the brightness adjustment confirmation sound, in addition to not assigning the volume adjustment confirmation sound or the brightness adjustment confirmation sound to the channel, A confirmation sound or a brightness adjustment confirmation sound is assigned to a channel, but it can also be realized by setting the volume value to “0”.

  Note that the volume adjustment confirmation sound and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound are output as the same sound, and it is not possible to confirm which "confirmation sound" has been output, but some "confirmation sound" has been output. It is desirable to make it recognizable. In other words, if various sounds are adopted as confirmation sounds, there is a concern that the possibility of being an expected production sound that suggests the degree of expectation may occur, and the entertainment amusement may be reduced. Because.

[Prevents mischief against multiple operating means]
As described with reference to FIG. 118, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, an effect pattern determination as to which of a plurality of effect patterns is executed based on the result of the jackpot determination is executed. It is possible. When one effect pattern is selected as a result of the effect pattern determination, any one of a plurality of expected effects (notice effects, etc.) prepared corresponding to the type of the selected effect pattern is selected. It is possible to execute the notice effect determination as to whether or not the expected effect (s) are selectively made to appear. Depending on the result of the notice effect determination, all of a plurality of expected effects (notice effect etc.) prepared corresponding to the type of the selected effect pattern may be sequentially executed. Any of a plurality of expected effects (notice effects, etc.) may not be executed.

  Then, when such effect determination (effect pattern determination, notice effect determination) is performed, the effect display according to the result of the effect determination is displayed on the effect display device 1600, so as to correspond to the result of the jackpot determination. The variation effect by the decorative design is executed together with the expected effect (notice effect) related to the background depiction (background notice), the movable body operation (function effect effect), and the like. As a result, when the variation effect by the decorative design is executed together with the expected effect related to the background depiction and the movable body operation, etc., when the bonus display is stopped and displayed, the bonus game as a bonus is executed for the player. Become possible.

  In such a configuration, the fluctuating effect by the decorative design is provided as an effect having “a function for definitively indicating whether or not a big hit is obtained as a result of the big hit determination”. The expected effect relating to the body movement or the like is provided as an effect having “a function that suggests the degree of expectation (including 0% and 100%) that a big hit is obtained”. That is, the player will enjoy the game through these effects.

  Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the player sets a setting value (volume setting value) for the volume by operating the volume adjustment buttons (the effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332). The process to be changed is executable (peripheral control MPU 1511a). Normally, when the volume setting value is changed in this way, the peripheral control MPU 1511a adjusts the volume applied to the effect sound based on the changed volume setting value (processing for reflecting the volume setting value as the volume). Will be executed. At this time, a volume adjustment confirmation sound can be output at the adjusted volume.

  Although this is also described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, although not shown, the pachinko machine 1 is separate from the volume adjustment buttons (effect selection left button 331 and effect selection right button 332). A brightness adjustment button is provided for various effect lamps (lamps to be controlled by the peripheral control MPU 1511a). When it is determined that the brightness adjustment button is operated, the brightness applied to the various effect lamps is determined. A process for changing a setting value (luminance setting value) by the player can be executed (peripheral control MPU 1511a). Normally, when the luminance setting value is changed in this way, the peripheral control MPU 1511a executes a process of adjusting the emission luminance based on the changed luminance setting value (a process of reflecting the luminance setting value as a light amount). It will be. At this time, the brightness adjustment confirmation sound can be output at the “volume according to the volume setting value” when the player setting value (brightness setting value) related to the brightness is lowered or raised.

  It should be noted that with regard to the change acceptance for such setting values (volume setting value, luminance setting value) and the adjustment processing according to the changed setting value, the design has changed and the design has changed. In any of the states, the player can execute the game by an operation by the player.

  Further, as described with reference to FIGS. 189 and 190, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, many operation means (operation button 410, sword part 5010, effect selection left button 331) are operated as the operation object by the player. , An effect selection right button 332, a brightness adjustment button not shown in the figure, and the like. When a predetermined performance condition is satisfied, an operation opportunity is given to the player while the variation effect is performed by the decorative design. To maintain.

  However, if such a large number of operation means are provided, the presence of these operation means becomes conspicuous, and the player is likely to be a target of mischief by the player. As a result of mishandling, if any one of these operating means is abnormal or malfunctioned, the operability and performance will be significantly reduced, and a decline in the game entertainment will be inevitable.

  Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment is in a non-game state (a state in which the above-described operation effect cannot be generated) in which the game effect corresponding to the big hit determination is not executed. When there is a high possibility of being mischievous due to the occurrence of operation detection in multiple operation means, a production restriction period (function restriction period) is generated, thereby suppressing the handling of the operation means in a rough manner. I am trying to do it.

More specifically, in a state where the game is not started (non-game state), among the plurality of operation means provided in the pachinko machine 1, some predetermined operation means that should not be operated ( Here, when operations on the operation button 410 and the sword portion 5010) are respectively detected within a predetermined continuous operation detection time,
In the effect display device 1600, in a state of displaying (reproducing) a specific video (warning video) that cannot appear in a state where the game effect according to the big hit determination is being executed,
-Even if there is an operation on the volume adjustment button, changes in the volume setting value for the output volume of the production sound are not accepted, the current volume setting value is not displayed,
・ Even if there is an operation on the brightness adjustment button, a change in the brightness setting value related to the brightness of the effect lamp is not accepted, and the current brightness setting value is not displayed. (Period) is generated over a predetermined time (for example, 5 minutes). In addition, when a predetermined time (for example, 5 minutes) has elapsed since the production restriction period (function restriction period) has occurred, the specific moving image is hidden, and operation reception relating to the volume is permitted and the volume is permitted. An adjustment confirmation sound is also output, and a normal state as a non-gaming state is returned, such as that an acceptance of an operation relating to luminance is permitted and a luminance adjustment confirmation sound is also output.

  It should be noted that in the production restriction period (function restriction period) according to this embodiment, “change in the volume setting value for the output volume of the production sound is not accepted even if there is an operation on the volume adjustment button, and the current volume "The setting value is not displayed" and "The change of the luminance setting value related to the luminance of the effect lamp is not accepted even if there is an operation on the luminance adjustment button, and the current luminance setting value is not displayed" However, only one of the process related to volume adjustment and the process related to brightness adjustment may be limited.

  Also, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, a plurality of operation modes (operation patterns) that are triggered by such a production restriction period (function restriction period) are prepared. As a result, it is expected that the conditions for generating the production restriction period are complicated, and that a tension is felt such that “the prank action is actually monitored by the hall side”.

  FIG. 381 is a time chart for explaining an example of processing when an effect restriction period is generated based on the fact that a predetermined effect restriction condition is satisfied in a non-game state (such as in a demo screen). is there.

  Now, the state where the game is not started (non-game state) is controlled and the standby display is performed on the effect display device 1600 (the situation where the decorative symbols are displayed in the stopped state, the demonstration screen, etc. , Etc.). As described above, in such a situation, when a volume adjustment button (effect selection left button 331 or effect selection right button 332) is operated, the volume setting value is changed, and some effect sound is output during the operation. If it is in the state, processing for adjusting the volume (processing for reflecting the volume setting value as the volume) is executed. At this time, a volume adjustment confirmation sound can be output at the adjusted volume. Similarly, when the brightness adjustment button is operated, the brightness setting value is changed, and if a predetermined effect lamp is in a light emitting state at the time of the operation, a process of adjusting the brightness (the brightness setting value is used as the light amount). Process to be reflected). At this time, a brightness adjustment confirmation sound can be output.

  As described above, in the non-game state, when the player starts the game, the volume adjustment button and the brightness adjustment button are operated so that the volume and the luminance can be set according to his / her preference. Reception is allowed. When the operation is accepted, the player is expected to prompt the player to start the game by changing the sound volume setting value or the luminance setting value according to the operation.

  However, as described above, in a non-gaming state, a mischievous operation may be performed on a plurality of operation means including such a volume adjustment button and a brightness adjustment button. As a result, if an abnormality or failure occurs in any one of these operation means, the operability and performance will be remarkably deteriorated, and a decrease in game entertainment is inevitable.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, several operation patterns (detection patterns) that are recognized as mischievous detection are prepared. Based on the fact that it has been detected that there has been an operation, it is possible to execute a process of generating an effect restriction period (function restriction period) for which a penalty is imposed over a predetermined time (for example, 5 minutes).

In the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, when any of the following operation patterns (detection patterns) is detected in the non-game state, the fact that the conditions related to the production restriction are satisfied is certified. It is said.
a. The timing of the first timer time (for example, 3 seconds) is started when the operation detection for the sword portion 5010 is triggered, and the operation detection for the operation button 410 newly occurs until the first timer time is measured, In addition, when the operation of the newly generated operation button 410 is detected, the second timer time (for example, 3 seconds) is started, and the operation detection for the sword portion 5010 is detected until the second timer time is measured. Operation pattern (detection pattern) for which detection conditions such as reoccurring are set
b. A new operation detection for the sword portion 5010 occurs between the time when the third timer time (for example, 3 seconds) is started with the operation detection for the operation button 410 and the time until the third timer time is measured, In addition, when the operation of the newly generated sword portion 5010 is detected, the timing of the fourth timer time (for example, 3 seconds) is started, and the operation detection of the operation button 410 is performed until the time measurement of the fourth timer time is completed. Operation pattern (detection pattern) for which detection conditions such as reoccurring are set

  Note that these operation patterns a and b are merely examples, and an effect restriction period (function restriction period) may be generated when detection conditions relating to other operation patterns are satisfied, or may be detected. It is not always necessary to prepare a plurality of target operation patterns, and only one of them may be used. Further, the first to fourth timer times may be the same time or different times. Further, the time may be measured using the same timer, or may be measured using a different timer.

  Here, “long press with respect to the operation button 410”, “continuous hitting operation with respect to the operation button 410 (multiple operations)” and the like are also not obtained in a state where the game is not started (non-game state). It can be said. However, these modes are modes in which an operation instruction can be given in the operation effect in the game execution state, so that even in the non-game state, the player has a certain purpose (for example, application or pre-exercise practice). It is assumed that these operations can be performed, and it is relatively well confirmed that such a situation actually occurs. Therefore, “operation combinations for a plurality of operation means (for example, operations in the order of“ sword unit 5010 → operation button 410 → sword unit 5010 ”), which is a detection target for the purpose of mischief, is in the game execution state. It can be said that it is important in order to avoid erroneous detection to be set so that no operation instruction is given as an operation effect at a certain time. Thereby, it is avoided that the production restriction period occurs relatively frequently and the operation rate as the pachinko machine 1 is greatly reduced.

  In particular, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, before and after the operation with respect to the specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410), the operation with respect to another operation means (for example, the sword portion 5010) is performed. The detection condition concerning the operation pattern (detection pattern) is satisfied and the production restriction period (function restriction period) is generated only when operations on a plurality of operation means are disturbed within a relatively short time. I have to. Therefore, a player who only touches one time at a time because of his rarity, not the intention of mischief, can be excluded from the penalty, and the production restriction period occurs relatively frequently and the pachinko machine 1 As a result, it is possible to more suitably avoid that the operating rate is greatly reduced.

  The stricter detection conditions in this way are to avoid the fact that the production restriction period occurs relatively frequently and the operating rate of the pachinko machine 1 is greatly reduced, and the mischief is confused by the mischief. This is because there is a high possibility that the detection condition will be satisfied even if the detection condition is tightened, because it is assumed that the operation is performed in various combinations.

  In the example shown in FIG. 381, first, an operation on the sword portion 5010 is detected at timing tq1 when the player is in the non-game state. Then, the peripheral control MPU 1511a generates a first timer time (for example, 3 seconds) based on the detection, and whether or not the second-stage detection condition is satisfied until the first timer time is consumed. It will be in the state (1st step state) which judges.

  That is, as described above, in “operation pattern (detection pattern) a”, three conditions (sword part 5010 → operation button 410 → sword part 5010) are imposed as conditions for generating the production restriction period. Each time is fulfilled one by one, the stairs for generating the production restriction period are raised one step at a time.

  At timing tq1, the first staircase among the three staircases until the production restriction period is generated is raised. The state of the first stage can be continued until the first timer time (for example, 3 seconds) is consumed, and the detection condition of the second stage (in this case, the operation on the operation button 410) is not satisfied. When the first timer time has been consumed, the original state in which none of the above three conditions is satisfied (the state of the 0th stage after going down one step) is returned.

  In this regard, in the example shown in FIG. 381, the operation on the operation button 410 is detected at the timing tq2 when the first timer time has not been consumed (the state of the first stage), and the operation pattern (Detection pattern) Among the three conditions of a, the “second-stage detection condition” is satisfied. Then, the peripheral control MPU 1511a generates a second timer time (for example, 3 seconds) based on the detection, and the third detection condition (here, last time) until the second timer time is consumed. The detection condition) is determined (second stage state).

  In other words, at timing tq2, the second staircase is raised among the three staircases until the production restriction period is generated. The state of the second stage can be continued until the second timer time (for example, 3 seconds) is consumed, and the detection condition of the third stage (in this case, the operation on the sword portion 5010) is not satisfied. When the second timer time has been consumed, the state is returned to the original state in which none of the above three conditions are satisfied (the state of the 0th stage after going down two stairs).

  In the example shown in FIG. 381, the operation on the operation button 410 is detected again at timing tq3 when the second timer time has not been consumed (second stage state), and the operation pattern (detection) is detected. Among the three conditions of the pattern a, the “third detection condition (last detection condition)” is satisfied. Therefore, the peripheral control MPU 1511a displays (reproduces) a specific video (warning video) that cannot appear in the state where the game effect according to the big hit determination is being executed in the effect display device 1600 based on the detection. Let it begin. At the same time, even if there is an operation on the volume adjustment button, the change of the volume setting value for the output volume of the production sound is not accepted, the current volume setting value is not displayed, and of course the volume adjustment confirmation sound is not output. Furthermore, even if there is an operation on the brightness adjustment button, the change of the brightness setting value related to the brightness in the effect lamp is not accepted, the current brightness setting value is not displayed, and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound is of course not output. , Producing production restrictions. And the production | presentation limitation period (function limitation period) in which such a penalty is imposed will be continued over predetermined time (for example, 5 minutes) from timing tq3.

  According to such a configuration, if a plurality of operations are operated so as to be disturbed, an effect restriction period occurs, so that operations due to mischief can be suppressed.

  Also, in order to generate the production restriction period, it is necessary to clear the conditions one by one and raise the state level (up the stairs), but when time runs out on the middle of the road, All state levels are canceled to return to the original state. Thereby, even when the game is ended in a state where the state level is raised, it is also preferable that the production restriction period is unintentionally generated when a new player tries to start the game. Can be avoided.

  In the process of increasing the state level (up the stairs) in this way, the “volume adjustment button” or “brightness” that is the operation means to be restricted when the production restriction period occurs It may be assumed that the “adjustment button” is operated. However, these operation means (volume adjustment button, brightness adjustment button) can be operated so that the player can set the volume and brightness to suit his / her preference when starting the game. It is acceptable. Therefore, no matter how much these operation means (volume adjustment button, brightness adjustment button) are operated in the process of increasing the state level (up the stairs), the state is triggered by this. It is desirable to prevent the level from changing or affecting the first timer time or the second timer time.

  That is, in this case, no matter how mischievous the buttons for adjusting the volume and the buttons for adjusting the brightness are subjected to the operation by the mischief, it is not possible to generate the production restriction period. However, at least the already raised state level will not decrease due to these operations, and once the production restriction period occurs, the production restriction targets are “volume adjustment button” and “brightness adjustment button”. This means that operations for these functions will be disabled at all, so it is also preferable to suppress mischief for “volume adjustment buttons” and “brightness adjustment buttons” that are not subject to detection of operations by mischief. To be expected to do.

  Further, as an operation pattern (detection pattern) used for detecting mischief, the operation pattern (detection pattern) is sandwiched between “two operations for another operation means (for example, the sword portion 5010) (timing tq1, tq3 in FIG. 381)”. The “operation for the specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410) (timing tq2 in FIG. 381)” is a condition that the operation is not performed once but a predetermined number of times. Is more desirable.

  That is, in this case, for example, in the case of the above-mentioned “operation pattern (detection pattern) a”, an operation on the sword portion 5010 is detected, and the operation is performed within a fifth timer time (for example, 3 seconds) corresponding to the detection. An operation on the button 410 is detected, and an operation on the operation button 410 is detected again within a sixth timer time (for example, 3 seconds) according to the detection, and a seventh timer time (for example, 3 seconds) according to the detection. When an operation on the sword portion 5010 is detected again, the detection condition relating to the “operation pattern (detection pattern) a” is satisfied and the production restriction period is generated. In addition, the fifth to seventh timer times may be the same time or different times. Further, the time may be measured using the same timer, or may be measured using a different timer.

  When the operation on the operation button 410 is not detected again within the sixth timer time (for example, 3 seconds) and the operation on the sword portion 5010 is detected again, the sixth timer time (for example, 3 seconds) is reset. It is more desirable that the detection condition for the operation pattern (detection pattern) is not satisfied and the production restriction period is not generated. In addition, within the seventh timer time (for example, 3 seconds), the operation on the operation button 410, not the operation on the sword 5010, is detected again (specific number of times (here, 2 times) more than the number of times to be detected (here 2 times)). In the third detection), the seventh timer time (for example, 3 seconds) is reset, and the detection condition for the operation pattern (detection pattern) is not satisfied and the production restriction period is not generated. It is more desirable.

  According to such a configuration, an operation pattern (detection pattern) is applied when the operation button 410 is operated n times (here, twice) at a timing during which the sword unit 5010 is operated twice. The detection condition is satisfied and the production restriction period occurs. That is, when the operation button 410 is operated only m times (<n times) or the operation button 410 is operated once (> n times) between the two operations on the sword portion 5010, the production limitation period is set. Since it will not occur, it is expected that the generation conditions of the production restriction period will be complicated, and it will be expected to have a tension such as `` Is the prank action actually being monitored by the hall side ''? Become.

  In order to increase the complexity, when the operation button 410 is operated only m times (<n times) and the sword portion 5010 is operated again within the timer time, the operation button 410 is turned on. When operating within each timer time over a number of times (> n times), it is desirable to control each state to be different from the original state (may be different between m times and l times). . Therefore, even if an operation is performed according to the above-described “operation pattern (detection pattern) a” in a state controlled in these different states, the production restriction period does not occur.

  Furthermore, when the operation button 410 is operated l times (> n times) between the two operations on the sword portion 5010, the production limitation period is not generated, but when the operation button 410 is operated k times (> l times). If the production restriction period can be generated (same as when operated n times), the production condition of the production restriction period is further complicated, and “the prank action is not actually monitored by the hall side. It will be expected to have a more favorable tension such as Also in this case, it goes without saying that each time the operation button 410 is operated, a timer time is generated and the next operation detection is required within the timer time. Even with such a configuration, a plurality of “predetermined operation modes (operation patterns (detection patterns))” that are triggered by the production restriction period are prepared.

  However, such mischievous acts are very different from fraudulent acts such as magnet goto, and making too strict measures can lead to a disadvantage on the hall side. Therefore, for specific videos appearing in the production restriction period, rather than displaying strong warning content, the content should be of a level that explains the appropriate handling method for the game and production, etc. It is desirable.

  Note that, as described above, when a predetermined time (for example, 5 minutes) has elapsed since the production restriction period (function restriction period) has occurred, the specific moving image is not displayed, and “accepting volume-related operations is allowed. Thus, a sound volume adjustment confirmation sound is also output, and an operation relating to luminance is allowed and a luminance adjustment confirmation sound is also output, "and the normal state as a non-game state is returned.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 382, the player starts the game at timing tq4 before a predetermined time (for example, 5 minutes) elapses from when the production restriction period (function restriction period) occurs. It can be assumed that the game is shifted to a game execution state in which a decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner by generating a start winning. In such a case, the above-mentioned intended purpose of quitting the mischief act and starting the game has been achieved, so in a state where a predetermined time (for example, 5 minutes) has not yet elapsed. A certain production restriction period (function restriction period) is ended.

  However, if the game is started without waiting for the elapse of a predetermined time (for example, 5 minutes), there is a possibility that the reflection will be insufficient. Until the display is finished, each reception of volume adjustment and brightness adjustment is allowed, but even if the volume is adjusted, the current volume setting value is displayed, but the volume adjustment confirmation sound is not output and the brightness Even if it is adjusted, it is desirable to control it as a partial restriction period such as “the current brightness setting value is displayed but the brightness adjustment confirmation sound is not output”.

  As shown in FIG. 382, when the game execution state is entered in this way, the detection for the above-mentioned “operation pattern (detection pattern)” is invalidated regardless of whether or not it is controlled during the partial restriction period. Become so. Therefore, even if an operation on the sword portion 5010 or an operation on the operation button 410 is performed, the first timer time or the second timer time is not counted as a trigger, and the production restriction period occurs. Absent.

  According to such a configuration, when a transition is made to the game execution state without waiting for the original duration time as the production restriction period, the game is left in the form of a part of the restriction contents when it is in the production restriction period. Since the state is shifted to the execution state, reflection on the mischievous action can be promoted without hindering the progress of the game effect.

  In addition, about the partial restriction period, not only until the change display of the decorative symbol that triggered the end of the production restriction period is ended, but also the decorative symbol is put in a stopped state with the number of holdings being zero. It may be possible to continue at least until (until a non-game state).

  In addition, at a timing at which the game execution state ends and shifts to the non-gaming state (for example, timing tq5 shown in FIG. 382), a predetermined safe time is set and the predetermined safe time elapses. It is desirable to continue the state where the detection for the above-mentioned “operation pattern (detection pattern)” is invalidated in spite of the non-game state. That is, in the situation where the game execution state has just ended, it is assumed that the excitement of the player is not cooled, and the operation on a plurality of operation means is excessively performed. This is because imposing a penalty may lead to an immediate cancellation of the game. Therefore, it is desirable that the safe time is always set when the game execution state is ended and the state is shifted to the non-game state.

  In addition, when a transition is made to a non-gaming state while being controlled as the partial restriction period described above, there is a possibility that reflection on the mischievous action may still be insufficient, so partial restriction until the safe time elapses. The period may be continued. At this time, detection of the above-described “operation pattern (detection pattern)” is permitted again when the safe time has elapsed.

  The safe time is set as a time value that is longer than the shortest time value among a plurality of time values that can be selected as the symbol variation time from when the decorative symbol variation display is started to when it is stopped. It is desirable to do. According to such a configuration, even when the decorative symbol variation display is immediately ended, the detection of the above-described “operation pattern (detection pattern)” is performed at least until the safe time is ended. It becomes possible to continue the invalidated state or continue the partial restriction period.

  In addition, when the decorative symbol variation display is started in the form of the production limitation period (function limitation period), the symbol variation time longer than the safe time is always selected, and only the selected symbol variation time is selected. It is desirable that the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. According to such a configuration, the partial restriction period described above can be continued for a relatively long time.

  In the example described above, even if the detection approaching the generation limit period is detected within the detection period for the above-described operation pattern (detection pattern) (the portion where fine dots are applied in FIG. 381). The behavior of is not appearing. However, instead of this, a specific sound is output every time the timer time is set in the above-described operation pattern (detection pattern) (every time the stairs for generating a penalty are raised), thereby prompting the user to stop the operation due to mischief. You may do it. The specific sound may be output as a different sound depending on the type of operation means that is a detection target. Similarly, every time the timer time is set in the above-described operation pattern (detection pattern) (every time the stairs for generating a penalty are climbed), the display content on the effect display device 1600 is changed. Also good.

  In addition, in the above example, as a method for not outputting the volume adjustment confirmation sound or the brightness adjustment confirmation sound, in addition to not assigning the volume adjustment confirmation sound or the brightness adjustment confirmation sound to the channel, A confirmation sound or a brightness adjustment confirmation sound is assigned to a channel, but it can also be realized by setting the volume value to “0”.

  Note that the volume adjustment confirmation sound and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound are output as the same sound, and it is not possible to confirm which "confirmation sound" has been output, but some "confirmation sound" has been output. It is desirable to make it recognizable. In other words, if various sounds are adopted as confirmation sounds, there is a concern that the possibility of being an expected production sound that suggests the degree of expectation may occur, and the entertainment amusement may be reduced. Because.

[Noise prevention by adjustment confirmation sound when opening a store]
As described with reference to FIG. 118, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, an effect pattern determination as to which of a plurality of effect patterns is executed based on the result of the jackpot determination is executed. It is possible. When one effect pattern is selected as a result of the effect pattern determination, any one of a plurality of expected effects (notice effects, etc.) prepared corresponding to the type of the selected effect pattern is selected. It is possible to execute the notice effect determination as to whether or not the expected effect (s) are selectively made to appear. Depending on the result of the notice effect determination, all of a plurality of expected effects (notice effect etc.) prepared corresponding to the type of the selected effect pattern may be sequentially executed. Any of a plurality of expected effects (notice effects, etc.) may not be executed.

  Then, when such effect determination (effect pattern determination, notice effect determination) is performed, the effect display according to the result of the effect determination is displayed on the effect display device 1600, so as to correspond to the result of the jackpot determination. The variation effect by the decorative design is executed together with the expected effect (notice effect) related to the background depiction (background notice), the movable body operation (function effect effect), and the like. As a result, when the variation effect by the decorative design is executed together with the expected effect related to the background depiction and the movable body operation, etc., when the bonus display is stopped and displayed, the bonus game as a bonus is executed for the player. Become possible.

  In such a configuration, the fluctuating effect by the decorative design is provided as an effect having “a function for definitively indicating whether or not a big hit is obtained as a result of the big hit determination”. The expected effect relating to the body movement or the like is provided as an effect having “a function that suggests the degree of expectation (including 0% and 100%) that a big hit is obtained”. That is, the player will enjoy the game through these effects.

  Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the player sets a setting value (volume setting value) for the volume by operating the volume adjustment buttons (the effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332). The process to be changed is executable (peripheral control MPU 1511a). Normally, when the volume setting value is changed in this way, the peripheral control MPU 1511a adjusts the volume applied to the effect sound based on the changed volume setting value (processing for reflecting the volume setting value as the volume). Will be executed. At this time, a volume adjustment confirmation sound can be output at the adjusted volume.

  Although this is also described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, although not shown, the pachinko machine 1 is separate from the volume adjustment buttons (effect selection left button 331 and effect selection right button 332). A brightness adjustment button is provided for various effect lamps (lamps to be controlled by the peripheral control MPU 1511a). When it is determined that the brightness adjustment button is operated, the brightness applied to the various effect lamps is determined. A process for changing a setting value (luminance setting value) by the player can be executed (peripheral control MPU 1511a). Normally, when the luminance setting value is changed in this way, the peripheral control MPU 1511a executes a process of adjusting the emission luminance based on the changed luminance setting value (a process of reflecting the luminance setting value as a light amount). It will be. At this time, the brightness adjustment confirmation sound can be output at the “volume according to the volume setting value” when the player setting value (brightness setting value) related to the brightness is lowered or raised.

  It should be noted that with regard to the change acceptance for such setting values (volume setting value, luminance setting value) and the adjustment processing according to the changed setting value, the design has changed and the design has changed. In any of the states, the player can execute the game by an operation by the player.

  By the way, since there are only new customers who want to start a game for a while after the hall opens, volume adjustment and brightness adjustment can be frequently made to start the game with a set value that suits their preference. However, in this case, if the volume adjustment confirmation sound or the brightness adjustment confirmation sound is output every time the volume adjustment or brightness adjustment is performed, the adjustment confirmation sound will reverberate in the hall and the atmosphere will be spoiled. It is an amusement.

  Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment does not allow the player to accept operations relating to volume adjustment and brightness adjustment until the predetermined condition is satisfied after the power is turned on. However, when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the volume setting value and the luminance setting value are set to the respective “predetermined specific values”, and the change of the volume setting value and the luminance setting value can be accepted. I am going to make it.

  According to such a configuration, when a predetermined condition is satisfied after the power is turned on, the setting value (volume setting value) and the luminance setting value relating to the output volume of the effect sound are set to the respective “predetermined specific values”. It will be set automatically. That is, in this case, the “specific value” that is automatically set is adopted as the volume setting value that many players tend to prefer, so that many games can be played in the time zone soon after the hall opens. It can be expected that it will be difficult for a person to adjust to a sound volume setting value and a luminance setting value according to his / her preference. Note that the establishment of the predetermined condition may be that a certain time has elapsed since the power was turned on, receiving a predetermined command from the main control MPU 1310a, or in the peripheral control MPU 1511a. The specific process may be terminated.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, the volume setting value and the like are determined based on whether a predetermined condition is satisfied or based on a predetermined timing after the predetermined condition is satisfied. Acceptance of changes in brightness setting values is allowed, but a special period (opening-only period) during which a sound volume adjustment confirmation sound or a brightness adjustment confirmation sound is not output even if such a change in the setting values is accepted over a predetermined time (for example, 1 hour) First, generate it. And after such a special period (opening-only period) is over, if changes in those setting values are accepted, a period (normal business period) during which the volume adjustment confirmation sound and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound can be output is generated. Yes. As a result, for a while after opening the hall (until the time required for completing various adjustments by a new customer), various adjustment confirmation completion sounds are not output. Thus, it is possible to give an opportunity to perform volume adjustment and brightness adjustment to start a game with a set value that suits one's preference.

  FIG. 383 is a time chart illustrating an example of processing related to a special period (opening-dedicated period).

  As shown in FIG. 383, if the power is turned on at timing tr0, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, the volume by the player until a predetermined condition is satisfied. Control is performed in such a manner that an operation relating to the adjustment and an operation acceptance relating to the luminance adjustment are not permitted. In such a situation, detection (main control side) related to a game such as a start winning is not permitted, and the game cannot be started. In the effect display device 1600, a dedicated display (preparation screen) during power recovery appears or no display output is performed, and a standby screen (design stop display, demo screen, etc.) is still not available. Do not show.

  Thereafter, when a timing tr1 at which a predetermined condition (for example, a predetermined command is transmitted from the main control MPU 1310a) is reached, detection related to a game such as a start winning is permitted, and a game start waiting state ( It is controlled as a state of waiting for a start prize. Also in the effect display device 1600, the stop symbol (standby screen) is displayed, so that it is possible to recognize that it is in the symbol variation waiting state.

  At this time, the volume setting value and the luminance setting value are set to the respective “predetermined specific values”, and “change of the volume setting value and the luminance setting value is permitted. Even if the change of the setting value is accepted, a special period (opening-only period) during which no volume adjustment confirmation sound or luminance adjustment confirmation sound is output is generated. Such a store opening dedicated period can be continued until a timing tr2 at which a predetermined time (for example, 1 hour) has passed since the occurrence of the period, and when the period ends at the time tr2, When the change of the setting value or the luminance setting value is accepted, a period (normal business period) during which the volume adjustment confirmation sound and the luminance adjustment confirmation sound can be output is generated. In the effect display device 1600, even after the timing tr2 arrives, the state in which the stopped symbol is displayed (the state of waiting for the variation of the symbol) is maintained, and the decorative symbol in the stopped state and behind it. Various background images displayed on the side (static display or dynamic display) (images with lower priority in the layer than the decorative design) are displayed when the period from the store opening period is shifted to the normal business period There will be no change.

  According to such a configuration, even after the state where the stop symbol is displayed (standby screen) appears and enters the game start waiting state, until the timing tr2 arrives (until the opening-only period ends) Since the adjustment confirmation sound is not output during the period (b), it is possible to preferably avoid the adjustment sound reverberating immediately after opening the store. On the other hand, when the timing tr2 arrives (when the time required for various adjustments by a new customer has elapsed), it is automatically shifted to a state in which an adjustment confirmation sound can be output. When various adjustments by new customers are settled, finer adjustments can be allowed while checking the adjustment sound according to the volume setting value. In addition, while maintaining the state that the stop symbol is displayed (standby screen), the system automatically shifts to the normal business period during which the adjustment confirmation sound can be output. Until this time, the player can hardly notice that the control is performed during the opening-only period in which the adjustment sound is not output.

  After the predetermined condition is satisfied and the game starts waiting state (after timing tr1), when the change of the volume setting value or the luminance setting value is accepted, the setting according to the changed setting value in the effect display device 1600 is accepted. Parameter display (volume side parameter display, luminance side parameter display) is performed. Therefore, by confirming such parameter display, it is possible to adjust the setting value according to one's preference.

  However, during the period immediately after the opening of the store (opening-only period), even if the output related to the adjustment confirmation sound is not performed in this way, changes in the volume setting value and brightness setting value are reflected as volume and light intensity Eventually, there is a concern that the atmosphere in the hall may be dyed in a single color, and that the atmosphere will be spoiled and become a mess. Therefore, as long as the game start waiting state is maintained, even if the change of the volume setting value is received before the timing tr2 arrives, the changed volume setting value is reflected as the effect sound. It is desirable not to have. Similarly, regarding the luminance, as long as the game start waiting state is maintained, even if the change of the luminance setting value is accepted before the timing tr2 arrives, the changed luminance setting value is used as the light amount. It is desirable not to be reflected. In such a configuration, during the period immediately after the opening of the store (opening-dedicated period), each player adjusts the setting value according to his / her preference while confirming the parameter display on the effect display device 1600. In other words, in this case, while giving an opportunity to adjust the set value according to his / her preference, there is no influence of sound or light around the pachinko machine 1, so the atmosphere in the hall is It can be suitably maintained.

  Note that only the luminance of the volume and the luminance may be maintained such that the changed luminance setting value is not reflected as the amount of light after the timing tr2 has arrived. That is, it should be avoided to reflect the adjustment to the side where the power consumption increases due to the operation by the mischief while the game is not started, and the brightness with the higher power consumption compared to the volume is not changed while the game is not started. It is desirable to prevent adjustments from being reflected. Also, the brightness adjustment sound is not necessarily output because the degree of adjustment cannot be confirmed unlike the volume adjustment sound.

  However, even when the timing tr2 has not yet arrived (when the time for opening the store is not fully consumed), the symbol variation (decoration display with decorative symbols) starts based on the winning prize. Thereafter, the player completes volume adjustment and brightness adjustment, and the frequency of those adjustments is expected to be greatly reduced. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, when the start winning is detected after the timing tr1 and before the timing tr2 arrives, the opening-only period is prematurely terminated based on the detection It is possible to execute the process of shifting to the normal business period.

  However, during the decorative symbol variation display period due to the start winning that ended the store opening period early, changes in the volume setting value and brightness setting value are accepted, and an adjustment confirmation sound accompanying the change is output If this happens, it is assumed that many players will perform volume adjustment and brightness adjustment after the opening-only period ends early, which may result in a fall.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, when the start winning is detected after the timing tr1 and before the timing tr2 arrives, the opening-only period is ended early and the normal business period However, the output of various adjustment confirmation sounds is not allowed at least until the variation state of the decorative symbol generated thereby is terminated (in-fluctuation suppression process).

  FIG. 384 is a time chart showing an example of processing when a game is started when the store opening dedicated period (special period) is set.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 384, it is assumed that the start winning is detected at timing tr3 when the time as the special period has not yet been consumed. Then, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, the processing related to the store opening dedicated period is terminated and shifted to the normal business period, and the fluctuation suppressing process is started in the normal business period. This variation suppression processing is performed while the variation display on the decorative design is being performed. “Allowing to accept the change of the volume setting value and the luminance setting value and changing the setting value to the effect sound in the output state” Can be performed to reflect the volume of the lamp or the amount of light from the production lamp in the lighting state, but the volume adjustment confirmation sound and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound are not output even if the volume setting value or the brightness setting value is changed. The difference from “processing for the opening-only period” is whether or not the decorative display is in a state where the variable display is being performed, and the change in the setting value is reflected as the volume and the amount of light. The suppression content for various adjustment confirmation sounds remains the same.

  Note that in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, such a during-fluctuation suppression process is changed to a non-game state (a state in which the number of holds is 0 and the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed). As long as it is not migrated, it will continue to run.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 384, only the shortest time that can be selected as the symbol variation time is controlled to the game execution state (the symbol variation with a short variation time is executed only once), and at the timing tr4, the non-game state When it is immediately returned to (the state in which the number of holds is 0 and the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed) (for example, 1 hour has not passed since the occurrence of the opening-only period ended early) Even in the state immediately after opening, the special period (opening-dedicated period) is not generated again.

  That is, in this case, in the non-game state after the timing tr4, a period (normal business period) during which the volume adjustment confirmation sound and the luminance adjustment confirmation sound can be output when a change in the volume setting value or the luminance setting value is accepted. Will be controlled. In the normal business period when fluctuation suppression processing is not executed, the changed volume setting value is reflected at least as a volume adjustment confirmation sound, and the changed luminance setting value is also the light amount of the effect lamp in the light emitting state. It has come to be reflected as. Further, in the effect display device 1600, the stop symbol (standby screen) is displayed, and it is possible to recognize that the symbol is waiting for the symbol variation.

  A player who creates a situation such as “the game execution state will be ended immediately after the opening-only period (special period) ends early” cannot be convinced with the adjustments made while the adjustment sound was not output, and once started Because it is assumed that the person who has a desire to adjust more finely until the game is interrupted, a special period (open-only period) ) Is not generated again, and it is desirable to allow the output of the volume adjustment confirmation sound and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound.

  In the example described above, the time (timing tr1 to tr2) during which the opening dedicated period (special period) is continued may be a fixed time after the opening dedicated period (special period) occurs. The time until the specific process in the peripheral control MPU 1511a is completed may be used.

  The timing for setting the volume setting value and the luminance setting value to each “predetermined specific value” may be the timing tr1, or may be a predetermined timing before the timing tr1. .

  In addition, in the above-described example, there is a technical feature in the configuration related to the store opening dedicated period (special period) that occurs after timing tr1, and the processing in the period before timing tr1 is the above-described content. It may be realized as a different process.

  In the example described above, at the timing tr2, the decoration design and the background image in the effect display device 1600 are not changed. However, the display change is such that an image different from the decoration design and the background image is additionally displayed. If so, it may be performed.

  In addition, in the above example, as a method for not outputting the volume adjustment confirmation sound or the brightness adjustment confirmation sound, in addition to not assigning the volume adjustment confirmation sound or the brightness adjustment confirmation sound to the channel, A confirmation sound or a brightness adjustment confirmation sound is assigned to a channel, but it can also be realized by setting the volume value to “0”.

  Note that the volume adjustment confirmation sound and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound are output as the same sound, and it is not possible to confirm which "confirmation sound" has been output, but some "confirmation sound" has been output. It is desirable to make it recognizable. In other words, if various sounds are adopted as confirmation sounds, there is a concern that the possibility of being an expected production sound that suggests the degree of expectation may occur, and the entertainment amusement may be reduced. Because.

  In the example described above, only one of the set values of volume and brightness may be changed.

[Control on volume adjustment confirmation sound according to production importance]
As described with reference to FIG. 118, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, an effect pattern determination as to which of a plurality of effect patterns is executed based on the result of the jackpot determination is executed. It is possible. When one effect pattern is selected as a result of the effect pattern determination, any one of a plurality of expected effects (notice effects, etc.) prepared corresponding to the type of the selected effect pattern is selected. It is possible to execute the notice effect determination as to whether or not the expected effect (s) are selectively made to appear. Depending on the result of the notice effect determination, all of a plurality of expected effects (notice effect etc.) prepared corresponding to the type of the selected effect pattern may be sequentially executed. Any of a plurality of expected effects (notice effects, etc.) may not be executed.

  Then, when such effect determination (effect pattern determination, notice effect determination) is performed, the effect display according to the result of the effect determination is displayed on the effect display device 1600, so as to correspond to the result of the jackpot determination. The variation effect by the decorative design is executed together with the expected effect (notice effect) related to the background depiction (background notice), the movable body operation (function effect effect), and the like. As a result, when the variation effect by the decorative design is executed together with the expected effect related to the background depiction and the movable body operation, etc., when the bonus display is stopped and displayed, the bonus game as a bonus is executed for the player. Become possible.

  In such a configuration, the fluctuating effect by the decorative design is provided as an effect having “a function for definitively indicating whether or not a big hit is obtained as a result of the big hit determination”. The expected effect relating to the body movement or the like is provided as an effect having “a function that suggests the degree of expectation (including 0% and 100%) that a big hit is obtained”. That is, the player will enjoy the game through these effects.

  Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the player sets a setting value (volume setting value) for the volume by operating the volume adjustment buttons (the effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332). The process to be changed is executable (peripheral control MPU 1511a). Normally, when the volume setting value is changed in this way, the peripheral control MPU 1511a adjusts the volume applied to the effect sound based on the changed volume setting value (processing for reflecting the volume setting value as the volume). Will be executed. At this time, a volume adjustment confirmation sound can be output at the adjusted volume.

  Although this is also described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, although not shown, the pachinko machine 1 is separate from the volume adjustment buttons (effect selection left button 331 and effect selection right button 332). A brightness adjustment button is provided for various effect lamps (lamps to be controlled by the peripheral control MPU 1511a). When it is determined that the brightness adjustment button is operated, the brightness applied to the various effect lamps is determined. A process for changing a setting value (luminance setting value) by the player can be executed (peripheral control MPU 1511a). Normally, when the luminance setting value is changed in this way, the peripheral control MPU 1511a executes a process of adjusting the emission luminance based on the changed luminance setting value (a process of reflecting the luminance setting value as a light amount). It will be. At this time, the brightness adjustment confirmation sound can be output at the “volume according to the volume setting value” when the player setting value (brightness setting value) related to the brightness is lowered or raised.

  It should be noted that with regard to the change acceptance for such setting values (volume setting value, luminance setting value) and the adjustment processing according to the changed setting value, the design has changed and the design has changed. In any of the states, the player can execute the game by an operation by the player.

  Also, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the first hit determination is made according to the game ball being received in the first start port 2002, and in the second start port 2004. Regardless of whether or not the second hit determination is made according to the fact that the game ball has been accepted, the symbol variation (the first symbol variation, the second symbol variation) according to the hit determination is performed. After that, a privilege (big hit game) advantageous to the player can be given. However, the expected value for these benefits is set so that the second hit determination (second symbol variation) is higher than the first hit determination (first symbol variation).

  In the above-described example, a maximum of about 1 game ball is paid out by repeating the opening / closing pattern that opens the winning prize opening 2103 for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) at maximum for the big hit related to the first special symbol 8 times. On the other hand, in the big hits related to the second special symbol, it is possible to pay out approximately 2000 game balls by repeating the open / close pattern that opens the winning prize opening 2103 for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) for a maximum of 16 times. ing.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the change of the sound volume setting value is accepted as “a game start waiting state in which neither the first symbol variation nor the second symbol variation is executed”, “ The first side execution state in which the first symbol variation is executed and the second symbol variation is not executed, and “the first symbol variation is not executed and the second symbol variation is executed. In any of the “second-side execution states”, the numerical value range in which the change of the sound volume setting value is allowed to be the same in any of these states.

  According to such a configuration, regardless of the state (game start waiting state, first side execution state, second side execution state), the sound can be adjusted without being restricted by the setting range or the like. As a result, it is possible to suitably maintain the game entertainment through sound adjustments tailored to each state.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the setting value (volume setting value) for the output volume of the effect sound is changed in the above-described “game start waiting state” and “first side execution state”. Then, the volume adjustment confirmation sound is output. However, in the “second side execution state” described above, control is performed so that the volume adjustment confirmation sound is not output even when the volume setting value is changed.

  In other words, in the “waiting for game start” state, there is no production sound because the game is not being executed, and the volume adjustment confirmation sound is not output when the volume setting value is changed. The volume of the volume afterwards cannot be confirmed as an audible sound. For this reason, when in the “game start waiting state”, it is desirable to output a volume adjustment confirmation sound when the setting value (volume setting value) related to the output volume of the effect sound is changed.

  In the “first side execution state”, although there is a situation in which a production sound according to the first hit determination is output, this situation is a low-probability game in which the probability of obtaining a big hit is relatively low It is often controlled to the state (low-probability non-short game state), and there is not much expectation for the production. In recent years, it has been confirmed that when in such a low-expected gaming state, a player plays a game while paying attention to a portable device such as a smartphone. Therefore, when the volume setting value is changed in the “first side execution state”, the volume adjustment confirmation sound is surely notified to the player about the change and the volume level after the change. It is desirable to output.

  On the other hand, in the “second side execution state”, there is a situation in which an effect sound according to the second hit determination is being output, and a high-probability gaming state (high-probability short-time gaming state) in which the probability of obtaining a big hit is relatively high ) Is often controlled. In such a situation, since the degree of expectation for the production is high, there is a tendency that the volume adjustment for enjoying the production tends to be performed. Therefore, if the volume adjustment confirmation sound is output when the volume setting value is changed, Amusement interest may be lowered by making it difficult to hear the production sound and BGM according to the two-hit determination. Therefore, in the “second-side execution state”, control is performed so that the volume adjustment confirmation sound is not output even when the volume setting value is changed, thereby clearing the production sound or BGM according to the second hit determination. It is desirable to favorably maintain the game entertainment by providing an opportunity for volume adjustment in an environment where listening is possible.

  However, in the “second side execution state”, the expectation for the performance is increasing, and after the second symbol variation is stopped and displayed in the lost mode, the player may be able to change the jackpot mode again. It can be said that it is important to secure the time (reverberation) for making the player aware of the game in order to maintain the game entertainment interest. In this regard, if the normal process in the “game start waiting state” is performed immediately after the transition to the “game start wait state”, the process in the “second side execution state” may be performed. It is possible for the player side to easily detect that the game has been finished in a lost state and has been shifted to the “game start waiting state”, and there is a concern that the game interest will be lowered.

  Therefore, when the process related to the “second side execution state” is finished and the process shifts to the “game start wait state”, a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) after the shift to the “game start wait state” Over time, control is performed so that normal processing (processing that allows changing the volume setting value and outputting a volume adjustment confirmation sound when the volume setting value is changed) when in the “game start waiting state” is not performed. It is desirable to do. For example, for a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) after the transition from the “second-side execution state” to the “game start waiting state”, the “volume setting value is allowed to change, but the volume setting value has been changed. However, it is desirable to perform a process that does not output the volume adjustment confirmation sound and a process that does not allow the change of the volume setting value itself. However, the possibility that the “second side execution state” is still continued for a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) after the transition from the “second side execution state” to the “game start waiting state” is more aggressive. As in the case of the “second side execution state”, “a process that does not output a volume adjustment confirmation sound even if the volume setting value is changed” is allowed. It is more desirable to do so.

  On the other hand, in the “first side execution state”, the degree of expectation for the performance is not increased, and basically the first symbol variation is stopped and displayed in a lost manner. Therefore, when the processing relating to the “first side execution state” is completed and the process shifts to the “game start waiting state”, the “first side execution state” is different from the case of the “second side execution state” described above. The above-described normal process (a process for allowing a change in the volume setting value and outputting a volume adjustment confirmation sound when the volume setting value is changed), which is performed even when in the “state”, is continuously performed as it is. It is desirable to make it.

  By the way, in the situation controlled to the “first side execution state”, a mischievous operation is performed in which operations on a plurality of operation means are disturbed and performed within a relatively short time due to stress that is not easily won by big hit. There is concern. In other words, as a result of miscellaneous handling, if an abnormality or failure occurs in any one of these operation means, the operability and performance will be remarkably lowered, and a further decline in game entertainment is inevitable.

  Therefore, there is a possibility that operation detection has occurred in a plurality of operation means and not only in the case of being controlled to the “first side execution state” but also when being controlled to the “game start waiting state” If the situation becomes high, the production restriction period (function restriction period) in the above-described example of “preventing mischief for a plurality of operation means (see FIGS. 381 and 382)” may be generated.

In other words, in this case, some predetermined operations among a plurality of operation means provided in the pachinko machine 1 in either of the “game start waiting state (non-game state)” and the “first side execution state” are provided. When an operation on the means (here, the operation button 410 and the sword unit 5010) is detected within a predetermined continuous operation detection time,
In the effect display device 1600, in a state of displaying (reproducing) a specific video (warning video) that cannot appear in a state where the game effect according to the big hit determination is being executed,
-Even if there is an operation on the volume adjustment button, changes in the volume setting value for the output volume of the production sound are not accepted, the current volume setting value is not displayed,
・ Even if there is an operation on the brightness adjustment button, a change in the brightness setting value related to the brightness of the effect lamp is not accepted, and the current brightness setting value is not displayed. (Period) is generated over a predetermined time (for example, 5 minutes). The specific moving image in the effect display device 1600 is displayed even if an image related to the “first side execution state” has appeared before that. In addition, when a predetermined time (for example, 5 minutes) has elapsed since the production restriction period (function restriction period) has occurred, the specific moving image is hidden, and operation reception relating to the volume is permitted and the volume is permitted. Normal state as a “game start waiting state” or “first side execution state” such that the adjustment confirmation sound is also output, and the operation reception regarding the brightness is allowed and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound is also output. It will be returned to.

  As for the detailed contents and other examples regarding such an effect restriction period (function restriction period), it is possible to appropriately adopt the contents in the explanation example of “preventing mischief with respect to a plurality of operation means”. However, in this case, even if the “game start waiting state” is shifted to the “first side execution state” during the production restriction period (function restriction period), the production restriction period (function restriction period) is not terminated early, Various processes related to the production restriction period are continued as they are under the same conditions as in the “game start waiting state”. As a result, it is expected to suppress the mischief operation when being controlled to the “first side execution state” with low expectation.

  On the other hand, when the “game start waiting state” is shifted to the “second side execution state” during the production restriction period (function restriction period), the “production restriction period ( The processing for the early termination of the function restriction period) and its modified examples are appropriately adopted and executed. As a result, the atmosphere when the “second-side execution state” with high expectation is finally executed is maintained, and it is expected that the game entertainment will be suitably maintained.

  In addition, in the above example, as a method for not outputting the volume adjustment confirmation sound or the brightness adjustment confirmation sound, in addition to not assigning the volume adjustment confirmation sound or the brightness adjustment confirmation sound to the channel, A confirmation sound or a brightness adjustment confirmation sound is assigned to a channel, but it can also be realized by setting the volume value to “0”.

  Note that the volume adjustment confirmation sound and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound are output as the same sound, and it is not possible to confirm which "confirmation sound" has been output, but some "confirmation sound" has been output. It is desirable to make it recognizable. In other words, if various sounds are adopted as confirmation sounds, there is a concern that the possibility of being an expected production sound that suggests the degree of expectation may occur, and the entertainment amusement may be reduced. Because.

  In the example described above, only one of the set values of volume and brightness may be changed.

[Period of operation acceptance period (valid period) itself]
As described with reference to FIG. 118, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to execute a variation pattern determination as to which of a plurality of variation patterns is executed based on the result of the jackpot determination. When one variation pattern is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination, the peripheral control MPU 1511a selects a plurality of expected effects (notification effects) prepared for the selected variation pattern type. Etc.), it is possible to execute an effect determination (notice determination, etc.) regarding which expected effect (s) to selectively appear. Depending on the result of this effect determination, all of the plurality of expected effects (notice effects, etc.) prepared corresponding to the selected variation pattern type may be sequentially executed. Any of a plurality of expected effects (notice effects, etc.) may not be executed.

  Then, when such effect determination (effect pattern determination, notice determination, etc.) is performed, the effect display according to the result of the effect determination is displayed on the effect display device 1600, so that the result of the jackpot determination is obtained. The variation effect by the corresponding decorative design is executed together with the expected effect (notice effect) related to the background depiction (background notice), the movable body operation (function effect effect), and the like. As a result, when the variation effect by the decorative design is executed together with the expected effect related to the background depiction and the movable body operation, etc., when the bonus display is stopped and displayed, the bonus game as a bonus is executed for the player. Become possible.

  In such a configuration, the fluctuating effect by the decorative design is provided as an effect having “a function indicating whether or not a big hit is obtained as a result of the big hit determination”, such as background depiction or movable body operation The expected production related to is provided as a production having “a function that suggests the degree of expectation (including 0% and 100%) that a big hit is obtained”. That is, the player will enjoy the game through these effects.

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the first variation pattern is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination, the first variation pattern is displayed regardless of the result of the notice effect determination. It is possible to generate an operation reception effect (an “internal reception effect” described later) that is permitted to be received when the base symbol effect has progressed to a specific timing. Further, even when the second variation pattern is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination, when the special result is obtained in the notice effect determination corresponding to the second variation pattern, the second variation pattern is selected. It is possible to generate an operation reception effect (“additional reception effect”, which will be described later) that is permitted to be received when the design effect based on the second variation pattern has progressed to a predetermined timing. However, in the second variation pattern, if a special result is not obtained in the notice effect determination, an operation reception effect (effective) in which the effect reception is permitted even if the symbol effect based on the second variation pattern is advanced to a predetermined timing. Period) does not occur. A plurality of first fluctuation patterns that generate “internal reception effects” and second fluctuation patterns that can generate “additional reception effects” may be prepared. Alternatively, the first variation pattern may be prepared so that an “internal reception effect” and an “additional reception effect” can be sequentially generated.

  However, an operation reception effect (valid period) that can occur under these conditions or the like is a change (rendering) that is predetermined with respect to the effect member to be effected as long as an operation is detected within the effective period. Since the post-operation effect that generates a display change in the display device 1600, a change in the effect sound in the speaker, a light emission change by the lamp, and an effect operation by the movable decorative body) is only executed, the operation reception effect (effective) (Period) The performance itself is poor, and there is a concern that the game entertainment will be reduced until the post-operation effect is executed.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment,
A first operation effect means capable of executing a post-operation effect in which the execution state is continued until a predetermined timing in the symbol effect based on the variation pattern arrives when an operation by the player is detected;
A second operation effect means capable of executing a post-operation effect in such a manner that when an operation by the player is detected, the elapsed time from the detected timing is continued until a predetermined time value is reached; We are going to prepare.

  According to such a configuration, the operation reception effect (effective period) itself when the operation reception effect by the first operation effect means is executed and when the operation reception effect by the second operation effect means is executed. Therefore, it is expected that the game entertainment will be improved until the post-operation effect is executed.

  That is, the post-operation effect is executed until the predetermined timing regardless of whether the operation reception effect by the first operation effect means is operated early or late within the effective period. Therefore, it can be said that performing the operation immediately after the effective period occurs is advantageous in enjoying the performance while the execution state as the post-operation effect is maintained for a long time.

  On the other hand, in the operation reception effect by the second operation effect means, no matter which timing is operated within the effective period, the elapsed time from the operation timing is continued until it reaches a predetermined time value. A post-operation effect is executed. Therefore, it is possible to maintain the overall performance time from the start of the effective period to the end of the post-operation effect by operating at a later time rather than operating for a while after the effective period occurs. It can be said that it is advantageous to enjoy the production.

  In this case, the effect generation conditions of the operation reception effect by the first operation effect means and the operation reception effect by the second operation effect means are different. For example, in the operation acceptance effect by the first operation effect means, the first variation pattern is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination, and the symbol effect (effect pattern) based on the first variation pattern progresses to a specific timing. The operation acceptance effect by the second operation effect means is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination, and the second variation pattern is selected and the notice effect determination corresponding to the second variation pattern is performed. A special result is obtained, and it can be realized that the symbol effect (effect pattern) based on the second variation pattern is generated up to a predetermined timing. Alternatively, the operation acceptance effect by the first operation effect means occurs when the first variation pattern is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination and the symbol effect based on the first variation pattern has progressed to a specific timing. In the operation acceptance effect by the second operation effect means, the first variation pattern is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination, and the symbol effect based on the first variation pattern is different from the specific timing. You may make it implement | achieve as what generate | occur | produces when progressing to timing.

  FIG. 385 shows a first example in which the post-operation effect is executed in such a manner that it continues until a predetermined timing in the effect pattern arrives regardless of the length of time required from the occurrence of the effective period to the detection. It is a time chart which shows the example about operation reception production.

  Now, suppose that the design effect (effect pattern) based on the variation pattern has progressed to the timing tr1 while the first effect condition required for the occurrence of the “first operation reception effect that is allowed to receive the effect” is satisfied. A first operation reception effect (valid period) is generated based on the progress to the timing tr1. The first operation reception effect (valid period) ends without performing the post-operation effect when a timing tr3 has arrived when a predetermined set time has elapsed without receiving the effect. During the execution period of the first operation reception effect that is permitted to receive the performance, an image display imitating the operation means to be operated and a gauge display of how much effective time remains are displayed to prompt the player to perform the operation. Operation promotion effects are performed.

  When the first operation reception effect (valid period) is started, an acceptable reception sound indicating that the production reception is permitted (or that the production reception is permitted) is output. . However, as will be described later, the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to the present embodiment does not continue the output state of the acceptance allowable sound over the predetermined set time, and is in the middle stage where the predetermined set time has not yet elapsed. At a certain timing tr2, a non-output state is set so that it cannot be audible.

  Here, “acceptable sound is output” means that “sound data including acceptable sound” is newly allocated to the channel at timing tr1 and is already allocated to the channel. This is also a concept including the arrival of the “acceptable sound reproduction period” in the sound data in accordance with the timing tr1. Alternatively, the “acceptable sound” may be output from before the timing tr1 to after that so as to straddle the timing tr1. In addition, “to set to a non-output state” here means that the assignment state of the sound data to the channel is maintained in addition to releasing the assignment state of the sound data including the acceptable sound to be accepted. However, the “acceptable sound reproduction period” in the sound data is a concept that includes a transition to a period in which the subsequent sound (including silence data) is reproduced after the end.

  As described above, in such a first operation reception effect, the “operation-induced processing using the first effect member” is performed as a post-operation effect based on the fact that the player's operation has been detected and the effect has been received. The post-operation effect thus started (operation-induced processing using the first effect member) is based on the variation pattern even if the effect is accepted at any timing within the valid period. When a predetermined timing tr4 in the symbol effect (effect pattern) arrives, the process is ended. The “operation-causing process using the first effect member” can be executed, for example, as a process of causing the first decorative movable body to perform an effect operation based on the reception of the effect.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 385, if an effect is received at a relatively early timing tr1a within the effective period (timing tr1 to tr3), the post-operation effect (operation-induced processing using the first effect member) is: It is executed over a relatively long time from the timing tr1a to the timing tr4. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 385, if an effect is accepted at a relatively late timing tr2a within the effective period (timing tr1 to tr3), an effect after operation (operation-caused process using the first effect member) Is executed only for a relatively short time from the timing tr2a to the timing tr4.

  According to such a first operation reception effect, it is possible to perform an operation immediately after the effective period occurs, as an execution state as a post-operation effect (execution state of operation-induced processing using the first effect member). Is maintained for a long time, which is advantageous in enjoying the production.

  As will be described later, in the first operation acceptance effect, the effect is accepted when the reception allowable sound is in the output state, and the post-operation effect (operation-caused process using the first effect member) is executed based on the effect acceptance. Even if it is done, the output state of the acceptable reception sound is not canceled, and the output state is maintained until a predetermined timing tr2.

  FIG. 386 is a time chart showing an example of the second operation reception effect in which the post-operation effect is executed in such a manner that the elapsed time from the detection timing reaches a predetermined time value.

  Now, suppose that the design effect (effect pattern) based on the variation pattern has progressed to the timing tr11 while the second effect condition required for the occurrence of the “second operation reception effect that is allowed to be accepted” is satisfied. A second operation reception effect (valid period) is generated based on the progress to the timing tr11. As in the case of the first operation reception effect, the second operation reception effect (valid period) is also executed without performing the post-operation effect when the timing tr13 when a predetermined set time elapses without receiving the effect. It is supposed to end. A time value different from a predetermined set time in the first operation reception effect and a predetermined set time in the second operation reception effect may be set. Even during the execution period of the second operation acceptance effect where the effect acceptance is allowed, an image display imitating the operation means to be operated and a gauge display of how much effective time remains are displayed to prompt the player to operate. Operation promotion effects are performed.

  Even when the second operation reception effect (valid period) is started, an acceptance allowable sound indicating that the effect reception is allowed (or that the effect reception is allowed) is output. The However, as will be described later, the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment does not continue the output state of the acceptable sound for the predetermined set time, and the predetermined set time has not yet elapsed. At a timing tr12, a non-output state is set so that it cannot be audible.

  Note that “acceptable sound is output” here also means that “sound data including acceptable sound” is newly assigned to the channel at timing tr11, and is already assigned to the channel. This is a concept that also includes the “acceptable sound reproduction period” in the received sound data in accordance with the timing tr11. Alternatively, the “acceptable sound” may be output from before the timing tr11 to after that so as to straddle the timing tr11. In addition to “removing the sound data including the acceptable sound”, the assignment state of the sound data to the channel is maintained in addition to releasing the assignment state of the sound data to the channel. The “acceptable sound reproduction period” in the sound data is a concept including a transition to a period in which a subsequent sound (including silent data) is reproduced.

  As described above, in such a second operation reception effect, the “operation-induced processing using the second effect member” as the post-operation effect is performed based on the fact that the operation by the player is detected and the effect is received. For the post-operation effect thus started (operation-caused processing using the second effect member), even if the effect is accepted at any timing within the effective period, the effect acceptance is The elapsed time from when it was made is continued until a predetermined time value (for example, a set time longer than the predetermined set time as the valid period) is reached. The “operation-causing process using the second effect member” can be executed, for example, as a process of causing the second decorative movable body to perform an effect operation based on the reception of the effect.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 386, if an effect is accepted at a relatively early timing tr11a within the effective period (timing tr11 to tr13), the post-operation effect (operation-induced processing using the second effect member) is: The process is executed from the timing tr11a to a timing tr14 at which a predetermined time value elapses. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 386, if an effect is accepted at a relatively late timing tr12a within the effective period (timing tr11 to tr13), an effect after operation (operation-caused processing using the second effect member). Is executed from the timing tr12a to a timing tr15 (a timing that comes after the timing tr14) when a predetermined time value has elapsed.

  According to such a second operation reception effect, it is possible to operate at a later time without operating for a while after the effective period occurs until the post-operation effect ends after the effective period starts. It is possible to provide a performance such that it is advantageous in enjoying the performance while maintaining the production time as a whole.

  As will be described later, also in the second operation acceptance effect, the effect is accepted when the reception allowable sound is in the output state, and the post-operation effect (operation-caused processing using the second effect member) is performed based on the effect acceptance. Even when it is executed, the output state of the acceptable reception sound is not canceled, and the output state is maintained until a predetermined timing tr12.

  As described with reference to FIGS. 385 and 386, the first and second operation reception effects (valid period) have different effects, and the operation reception effects (valid periods) are different from each other. Since it is generated based on the establishment of the condition, it is expected that the game entertainment from the occurrence of the operation reception effect (valid period) to the post-operation effect is suitably maintained.

  However, the following problems remain only by adopting the configuration relating to the first and second operation reception effects (valid period). That is, in these operation reception effects (effective period), it is advantageous to enjoy the effect when operating early in the effective period, or it is advantageous to enjoy the effect when operating late in the effective period. For example, there is still a poor aspect of the performance within the effective period, and there is a concern that the game entertainment will deteriorate. Therefore, it is more desirable to execute the operation reception effect as a special operation reception effect having the following aspect.

FIG. 387 is a time chart showing an example of the special operation reception effect.
Now, assuming that the symbol effect (effect pattern) based on the variation pattern has progressed to the timing tr21 while the special effect condition required for the generation of the special operation reception effect is satisfied, the special effect is based on the progress to the timing tr21. An operation reception effect (valid period) is generated. As will be described later, this special operation reception effect (valid period) is different from the case of the first and second operation reception effects, and the timing tr23 arrives after a predetermined set time has passed without effect reception. Even if there is no operation, the reception of the production always occurs within the effective period, and the post-operation production described later is executed. As will be described later, the predetermined setting time in the special operation reception effect is set to a time value longer than the predetermined setting time in the first operation reception effect and the predetermined setting time in the second operation reception effect.

  In addition, when the special operation reception effect (valid period) is started, an acceptable reception sound indicating that the production reception is permitted (or that the production reception is permitted) is output. Is done. However, as will be described later, the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment uses the permissible reception sound (FIG. 387) as the permissible reception sound (FIGS. 385 and 386) generated in response to the first and second operation reception effects. The output state is continued for a longer time. In this example, the acceptable sound shown in FIG. 387 is also made non-audible at timing tr22, which is the middle stage where the predetermined set time has not yet passed, so that it cannot be audible. However, the acceptable reception sound shown in FIG. 387 may be one in which the output state can be continued until the timing tr23 arrives.

  Note that “acceptable sound is output” here also means that “sound data including acceptable sound” is newly allocated to the channel at timing tr21, and is already assigned to the channel. This is a concept that also includes the “acceptable sound reproduction period” within the sound data that is received in accordance with the timing tr21. Alternatively, the “acceptable sound” may be output from before the timing tr21 to after that so as to straddle the timing tr21. In addition to “removing the sound data including the acceptable sound”, the assignment state of the sound data to the channel is maintained in addition to releasing the assignment state of the sound data to the channel. The “acceptable sound reproduction period” in the sound data is a concept including a transition to a period in which a subsequent sound (including silent data) is reproduced.

  In this regard, in the special operation reception effect, when an operation by the player is detected within the valid period and the effect is received, the “first movable” shown in FIG. The operation-induced process using the decorative body (first effect member) and the “operation-based process using the second movable decorative body (second effect member)” shown in FIG. 386 are started in parallel. It is supposed to be. Therefore, the “operation-based process using the first effect member” is started, but the “operation-based process using the first effect member” thus started is at any timing within the effective period. Even when an effect is accepted, the event is terminated when a predetermined timing tr24 in the symbol effect (effect pattern) based on the variation pattern arrives, and “operation using the second effect member” The “cause process” is started. However, the “operation-caused process using the second effect member” started in this way can be accepted regardless of the timing of the effect received within the valid period. The elapsed time from the time when the event was made can be continued until a predetermined time value (for example, a set time longer than the predetermined set time as the valid period) is reached. To become.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 387, assuming that an effect is received at a relatively early timing tr21a within the effective period (timing tr21 to tr23), “operation-based processing using the first effect member” among the post-operation effects. Is executed over a relatively long period from the timing tr21a to the timing tr24. Among the post-operation effects, the “operation-induced processing using the second effect member” has a predetermined time value from the timing tr21a. The process ends at the elapsed timing tr25. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 387, if the presentation is accepted at a relatively late timing tr22a within the effective period (timing tr21 to tr23), the “posted operation using the first presentation member” of the post-operation presentation. The “process” is executed only for a relatively short time from the timing tr22a to the timing tr24. Of the post-operation effects, the “operation-induced process using the second effect member” is determined in advance from the timing tr22a. The process is executed until the timing tr26 (time arrived after the timing tr25) when the time value has elapsed.

  As described above, the special operation reception effect according to this embodiment is generated when a specific effect pattern is executed based on the result of the jackpot determination, and the effect content as the specific effect pattern progresses to a specific timing. When an effect is received within the special operation reception effect (valid period), “the first effect member whose execution state is continued until a predetermined timing in the effect pattern arrives is used. “Operation-based processing” and “operation-based processing using the second performance member that is continued until the elapsed time from the reception timing of the production reaches a predetermined time value” are executed.

  According to such a special operation reception effect, if an operation is performed immediately after the effective period occurs, the execution state of the “operation-caused process using the first effect member” among the post-operation effects can be maintained for a long time. As a price to become, the end timing of the “operation-induced processing using the second effect member” of the post-operation effects comes at a relatively early stage. However, if the operation is performed at a later time without operating for a while after the effective period has occurred, the end timing of the “operation-caused processing using the second effect member” of the post-operation effects is set as follows. Although it becomes possible to arrive at a relatively late stage, there is a disadvantage that the execution state of the “operation-caused process using the first effect member” among the post-operation effects cannot be maintained for a long time.

In other words, in the special operation reception production, there is no operation timing that is most desirable for exciting production,
・ Enjoying this by lengthening the execution state of the “operation-caused process using the first effect member” in exchange for shortening the time until the “operation-caused process using the second effect member” is completed. (Operating at an early stage within the validity period), or
· Do you enjoy this by extending the time until the “operation-caused processing using the second effect member” is completed in exchange for shortening the execution state of the “operation-caused processing using the first effect member”? (Do you operate at a late stage within the validity period), or
・ Slightly sacrifices the time during which the “operation-based processing using the first performance member” is maintained as an execution state and the time until the “operation-based processing using the second performance member” is completed, As a balance (operating at a timing that is not early or late within the validity period)
The special operation reception effect itself can be given to the strategic operation effect such as this, so that it is possible to select the operation timing according to the player's mood and to provide the operation reception effect that is hard to get tired of Will be able to.

  As will be described later, in the special operation reception effect, when an effect is received when the reception allowable sound is in the output state, the post-operation effect (the operation-induced process using the first effect member, The operation-induced process using the second effect member) is executed, and the output state of the acceptable reception sound is canceled at this point.

  Here, in the above explanation example, when the effect is received in the special operation reception effect (FIG. 387), “the first effect member whose execution state is continued until a predetermined timing in the effect pattern arrives”. The operation-induced process used "and the" operation-induced process using the second effect member that is continued until the elapsed time from the reception timing of the effect reaches a predetermined time value "are executed. . However, even when a special operation acceptance effect occurs, when a predetermined effect condition is not satisfied (for example, when the player is defeated in the jackpot determination or when the player is defeated in the predetermined effect determination) However, even if an effect is received within the special operation reception effect, the “operation-causing process using the first effect member” is not performed, as compared with the case where a predetermined effect condition is satisfied (FIG. 387). It is more preferable that the “operation-induced processing using the second effect member” in which the “predetermined time value” is set relatively short is performed in different effect modes.

  According to such a configuration, even when a special operation reception effect occurs, if the predetermined effect condition is not satisfied, “the execution state continues until a predetermined timing in the effect pattern arrives” “Operation-based processing using the first performance member” and “Operation-based processing using the second performance member that is continued until the elapsed time from the timing of reception of the rendering reaches a predetermined time value” Since the content of the performance is equivalent to the operation reception effect (first and second operation reception effects) that is executed only in one of these, the tension when the special operation reception effect occurs by giving such a production risk A feeling can be maintained suitably. In this sense, in the special operation reception effect, “operation-caused processing using the first effect member in which the execution state is continued until a predetermined timing in the effect pattern arrives” and “the timing at which the effect is received” When the post-operation effect is executed in parallel with the “operation-caused process using the second effect member that is continued until the elapsed time reaches a predetermined time value”, the first operation reception effect and the second operation are performed. It is desirable that the rate at which the jackpot symbol appears is higher than when the post-operation effect appears in the reception effect.

  However, this may not be detected well (detection error) in spite of the operation within the special operation reception effect, and the production reception may not be performed. As a result, the valid period ends without the production reception being made. In such a case, the player who saw the state where the “operation-induced processing using the first effect member” was not performed, but misunderstood as having become an operation reception effect that is executed only on one side. Therefore, there is a concern that the interest in gaming will decline. Therefore, as described above, regarding the special operation reception effect, even if there is no operation by the player within the effective period, the operation reception is automatically generated (automatic reception) within the effective period, The operation-induced process using the first effect member whose execution state is continued until the given timing has arrived, and “the elapsed time from the timing at which the effect is accepted” is continued until a predetermined time value is reached. It is desirable that the “operation-based process using the two effect members” is executed. As a method for automatically generating operation reception (automatic reception) and a production mode related thereto, any of the examples described with reference to FIGS. Can be used.

  In the above-described explanation example, when the first operation reception effect, the second operation reception effect, and the special operation reception effect are generated, an acceptable reception sound suggesting that the effect reception is permitted is output. In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 385 to 387, the reception allowable sound output when the special operation reception effect is generated is displayed as the first operation reception effect or the second operation reception. It is used as a production sound whose reproduction state can be continued for a longer time than the acceptable reception sound output at the time of production.

  According to such a configuration, when the production reception is allowed (when an image display imitating the operation means to be operated or a gauge display indicating how much effective time remains) By confirming how long the permissible reception sound that is in the output state is continued, the operation reception effect is “the execution state is continued until a predetermined timing in the effect pattern arrives. “Operation-induced processing using a production member” and “operation-caused processing using a second production member that is continued until the elapsed time from the timing at which the production is received reaches a predetermined time value” are executed. It becomes possible to recognize whether or not it is a special operation reception effect. However, this can be done in exchange for reducing the remaining time during which the “operation-causing process using the first effect member” can be maintained in the execution state (delaying the timing at which the effect is accepted). Thus, when it is recognized whether or not the operation reception effect is a “special operation reception effect”, there is a demerit that the production strategy that can be selected by the player is narrowed.

  However, even when it is recognized whether or not the operation is a special operation reception effect, it is important that the staging strategy remains to some extent. Therefore, regarding the output time of the acceptable reception sound (timing tr1 to tr2, tr11 to tr12) that is output when the first operation reception effect and the second operation reception effect are generated, the “predetermined special operation reception effect (valid period)” is set. It is desirable to execute it as a non-output state when a specific time that is less than half of the set time (timing tr21 to tr23) of elapses. According to such a configuration, when the specific time less than half of the “predetermined set time (timing tr21 to tr23) as the special operation reception effect (valid period)” has elapsed, the reception allowable sound is set to the non-output state. As long as the output state is maintained, it is possible to recognize that the special operation reception effect is being executed. Therefore, a “predetermined set time as a special operation reception effect (valid period) ( It is possible to provide staging strategy in a state in which more than half of the timings tr21 to tr23) ”are left.

  In addition, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the reception acceptance sound that is output when the first operation reception effect or the second operation reception effect is generated is accepted when in the output state. Even though the output state is maintained, the acceptance sound that is output when the special operation reception effect is generated is forcibly terminated when the effect is received in the output state. I have to. That is, in this case, when an effect is received in a situation in which it is not recognized whether or not it is a special operation acceptance effect (a situation where the specific time has not elapsed since the reception allowable sound is output), the operation reception effect Is a “special operation reception effect” and whether a more highly anticipated aspect appears as a post-operation effect is an important concern, but one of them (the operation reception effect is “special operation reception effect” It can be easily recognized just by confirming whether or not the output state of the acceptable sound for acceptance has been terminated with the acceptance of the production. For example, even if it is recognized that the output state of the acceptable reception sound is not ended and the first operation reception effect or the second operation reception effect is generated as a result, the feeling is switched and the “post-operation effect is more expected. It is expected to concentrate on “whether a high-level aspect has appeared”. In this case, the design is made so that, when a mode with a higher expectation appears as a post-operation effect, there is a relationship in which the rate at which a special operation reception effect is newly generated is increased until the design is stopped. It is desirable.

  In addition, as described above, in the first operation reception effect, the second operation reception effect, and the special operation reception effect, the image display imitating the operation means used as the operation target in each operation reception effect and how much the effective time is An indication of whether or not there is a remaining gauge is displayed, and an operation promotion effect that prompts the player to perform an operation is performed. In this regard, at least in the special operation reception effect, when the effect is received, the gauge display remains (displayed) and “the execution state is continued until a predetermined timing in the effect pattern arrives. “Operation-induced processing using a production member” and “operation-caused processing using a second production member that is continued until the elapsed time from the timing at which the production is received reaches a predetermined time value” are started. It is desirable. According to such a configuration, it is possible to recognize which timing within the effective period is the timing at which the production is accepted based on the remaining gauge remaining as a display after the production is accepted. Thus, it is possible to predict whether or not the execution state related to the operation-induced process using the first effect member will be finished immediately. As a method of starting the post-operation effect while leaving the gauge display (bar display) in this way, any one of the examples described with reference to FIGS. 292 to 296 or an appropriate combination may be used. Is possible.

  In special operation reception effects, if an operation-related display (prediction effect) that suggests the occurrence is performed before the reception of the effect is permitted, it is possible to operate immediately after the occurrence of the special operation reception effect. It is desirable to tighten. According to such a configuration, it is expected that the player suitably enjoys the staging strategy over the entire period within the special operation reception effect (effective period). On the other hand, in the first operation reception effect and the second operation reception effect, it is desirable to execute the operation related display (prediction effect) that suggests the occurrence before the reception of the effect is permitted. As for the operation-related display, it is assumed that this is executed as “a short-time precursor effect that is inferior to the timing suggestion function”. It is desirable to prevent it from being held.

  Here, as the operation-related display (a short time indication effect lacking in the timing suggestion function) performed in the effect display device 1600 before the effective period of the first operation reception effect and the second operation reception effect occurs, For example, it can be realized as an image displayed in a fade-in state (such as a white image) when “image display imitating an operation means” is caused to appear in a fade-in manner.

  FIG. 388 is a time chart showing an example of processing related to operation-related display when the first operation reception effect and the second operation reception effect are performed, and processing related to channel assignment of sound data including allowable reception sound. is there.

  That is, from an ergonomic point of view, when the effective period is generated, the suggestion image (operation-related display) is displayed only for several frames (for example, 0.2 seconds) before the effective period is generated. It is known that an operation can be performed so that an effect is received at an unexpected timing. However, although it is a few frames, if the "image display imitating the operation means" is displayed in the normal mode even though the valid period has not occurred, the "operation means Even if the operation is performed in a state in which “image display imitating” is displayed, there is a possibility that the presentation is not accepted, and there is a concern that the entertainment amusement will deteriorate.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 388, the timing trA several frames before the effective period of the first operation reception effect and the second operation reception effect occurs. The operation-related display is started based on the above, but “image display imitating operation means” is not displayed in the normal mode in a situation where the effective period has not occurred.

  More specifically, at the timing trA, the “allowable” that can be realized as a fade-in image in which the “image display imitating the operation means” is displayed in a fade-in manner, a predetermined effect image, or the like. “Pre-operation related display” is started. Then, when the timing tr1 (or the timing tr11) arrives in a state where the “pre-permission operation-related display” is displayed in this way, from the state where the “pre-permission operation-related display” is displayed, the “image imitating the operation means” The “display” is shifted to the state displayed in the normal mode.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as described above, an acceptable reception sound is output that suggests that the production reception is permitted when the effective period occurs. As shown in FIG. 388, the output of the acceptable reception sound is not started at the timing trA but is started at the timing tr1 (or the timing tr11).

  In other words, in order to make it possible to perform operations so that presentations can be received at the timing immediately after the effective period occurs, the acceptable sound is output several frames before the effective period occurs. It seems that it may be desirable to make it. However, if the permissible reception sound is output several frames before the effective period occurs, the output timing will deviate from the appearance timing of “image display imitating operating means”. As a result, there may be a sense of incongruity as if a sound misalignment has occurred, and there is a concern about a decline in the interest in gaming. On the other hand, it is possible to output a pre-permissible operation related sound different from the permissible reception sound during the period from timing trA to tr1 (timing trA to tr11). However, if the pre-permissible operation-related sound is output in such a short period, the pre-permissible operation-related sound may not be an independent production sound, but may be heard integrally with the reception allowable sound, Eventually, there is a concern that it may cause a sense of incongruity as if sound deviation has occurred.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, prior to the occurrence of the valid period of the first operation reception effect and the second operation reception effect, the operation related display (pre-allowable operation related display) is displayed for several frames. While starting from the front, the operation-related sound (pre-allowance operation-related sound) is not executed intentionally, and only the acceptance allowable sound is output when the effective period occurs. In other words, in this case, as shown in FIG. 388, the acceptable sound is output by assigning “sound data including the acceptable sound” to the channel based on the arrival of the timing tr1.

  In the example shown in FIG. 388, when the timing tr2 arrives, the assignment state of the “accepted sound including the acceptable sound” to the channel is terminated, so that the acceptable sound is set to the non-output state. Yes. However, the “sound data including the acceptable reception sound” itself may continue to be assigned to the channel after the timing tr2, for example, the assignment state to the channel may be continued until the timing tr3 arrives. It may be. That is, in this case, the sound data itself remains assigned to the channel, but the “acceptable sound reproduction period” in the sound data ends at the timing tr2.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 388, when an effect is accepted between timings tr1 and tr2 (timing tr11 to tr12), the state in which the effect is accepted is terminated and “image display imitating operation means” is displayed. "Is hidden. On the other hand, with respect to “sound data including acceptable reception sound”, the allocation state to the channel is maintained, and as described above, the acceptable reception sound is not forcibly terminated.

  FIG. 389 is a time chart illustrating an example of processing related to operation-related display when a special operation reception effect is performed and processing related to channel assignment of sound data including acceptable reception sound.

  As shown in FIG. 389, also in the special operation reception effect, the operation related display (pre-allowance related operation display) is performed when the timing trB before the timing tr21 at which the valid period occurs is reached. However, the “period of timing trB to tr21” has a length exceeding twice (more preferably 10 times) the “period of timing trA to tr1” shown in FIG. In the pre-permissible operation-related display displayed within, the “expectation degree regarding whether the post-operation presentation performed when the presentation is accepted is performed in a highly expected manner” or “expectation degree at which the jackpot symbol appears” As suggested, one of a plurality of production modes can be selectively made to appear. Note that “image display imitating operation means” is not displayed in the normal mode in a situation where the valid period has not occurred, as in the example shown in FIG.

  For example, the “pre-permission operation-related display” started at the timing trB is different from the “pre-permission operation-related display” shown in FIG. 388, and the “image display imitating the operation means” is later ( A plurality of effect images are repeatedly moved and displayed toward the location displayed at timing tr21), and a slightly stunning sign effect such as non-display at the location (explained with reference to FIGS. 241 to 259) Any aspect of “specific operation-related effects” may be applied). At this time, any of a plurality of modes can be displayed as an effect image, and the degree of expectation is suggested depending on which of the modes is displayed. Then, when the timing tr21 arrives in the state where the “pre-permission operation-related display” is displayed in this way, the “image display imitating the operation means” is displayed in the normal mode from the state where the “pre-permission operation-related display” is displayed. It will move to the state displayed.

  In this regard, also in the special operation reception effect, as described above, when the effective period occurs, an acceptance allowable sound indicating that the effect reception is permitted is output. As shown in FIG. 389, the sound is output from the timing tr21 as an effect sound reproduced in a partial section in the sound data assigned to the channel at the timing trB.

  That is, as described above, the special operation reception effect is much larger than the “minimum time required for ergonomics to enable the operation immediately after the effective period occurs” before the effective period occurs. The “pre-allowance operation display” with high performance is performed using a long time (timing trB to tr21). Therefore, in order to further enhance the performance in such an effect period (timing trB to tr21), an effect sound (pre-permissible operation related sound) corresponding to the “pre-permissible operation related display” displayed within the same period is output. It is desirable to make it. In addition, since the production period (timing trB to tr21) has a sufficient length for production, even if the production sound (pre-permissible operation-related sound) is output within the period, acceptance is permitted. There can be no inconvenience that the sound can be heard as an integrated sound.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the timing trB arrives, the pre-permissible operation related display is displayed on the effect display device 1600, and the pre-permissible operation related sound is output, and these output states are set to the timing tr21. To continue. When the timing tr21 arrives, the state where the “pre-permission operation related display” is displayed is shifted to the state where the “image display imitating the operation means” is displayed in the normal mode, and the “pre-permission operation related display” is displayed. The state is shifted from the state where “sound” is output to the state where “acceptable sound” is output.

  In this regard, in the example shown in FIG. 389, one sound data including a reproduction section of “pre-permission operation-related sound” and a reproduction section of “acceptance acceptable sound” based on the arrival of timing trB is used as a channel. By assigning them, the above-described effect sound output in the period from timing trB to tr22 is realized.

  According to such a configuration, in the special operation reception effect, the acceptable reception sound that is output when the effective period is generated is part of the sound data that is assigned to the channel in a form extending from the predation effect to the special operation reception effect. It will be output as a production sound played back during the period. That is, in this case, only one sound data is assigned to the channel before the occurrence of the special operation reception effect (eg, when the precursor effect is generated), and the first half is an effect corresponding to the precursor effect (permissible pre-operation related display). The sound (pre-allowable operation-related sound) can flow to indicate when the special operation reception effect occurs, and after the effective period occurs, the channel assignment is based on the reception of the effect. Since it can be canceled as appropriate, the player can be made aware that the special operation acceptance effect has been executed even after the effect has been accepted. As an output method for “one sound data” including the playback section of “pre-allowance-related sound” and the playback section of “acceptable sound”, first, the expectation level (when symbol variation is stopped) After preparing multiple sound data with different ratios of jackpot symbols), any one of the sound data (one sound data) is used as the result of the jackpot determination (or performance determination (notice determination etc.)) It is desirable to realize the above-described production sound output in the period from timing trB to tr22 by selectively assigning to the channel based on the above. In this case, the same effect sound is output to the plurality of sound data in the playback section of “pre-allowable operation-related sound (prediction effect)”, but different in the playback section of “acceptable sound (operation reception effect)”. It is more desirable to include the first sound data and the second sound data configured to output the effect sound.

  That is, in the special operation acceptance effect, when the effect is accepted between the timings tr21 to tr22, the state where the effect acceptance is permitted is terminated and “image display imitating the operation means” is not displayed. In addition to this, the assignment state for the channel is also terminated for “sound data including acceptable sound”, and the output related to the acceptable sound is forcibly terminated midway. As described above. Therefore, the player can confirm that the special operation acceptance effect has been executed even after the effect is accepted by confirming whether the allowable sound is forcibly set to the non-output state when the effect is accepted. Can be recognized.

  Even in the case of one piece of sound data (timing trB to tr22), the section (first half part) of the effect sound (pre-allowance operation related sound) corresponding to the precursor effect (pre-allowance operation related display) is in the playback state. In this situation (timing trB to tr21), even if an operation by the player is performed, this is not forcibly terminated. Only in the situation (timing tr21 to tr22) of the effect sound (acceptable sound) corresponding to the valid period is the playback state (timing tr21 to tr22), the assignment state to the channel is released based on the operation by the player. It becomes.

  The one sound data (sound data including the pre-permissible operation-related sound and the permissible reception sound) is assigned before the timing trB and is already assigned at the timing trB. Also good. Further, as described above, the channel assignment state may be continued after timing tr22. For example, the channel assignment state may be continued until timing tr23 arrives. That is, in this case, the sound data itself remains assigned to the channel, but the “acceptable sound reproduction period” in the sound data ends at timing tr22.

  In the example shown in FIG. 388, when the timing tr2 arrives, the assignment state of the “accepted sound including the acceptable sound” to the channel is terminated, so that the acceptable sound is set to the non-output state. Yes. However, the “sound data including the acceptable reception sound” itself may continue to be assigned to the channel after the timing tr2, for example, the assignment state to the channel may be continued until the timing tr3 arrives. It may be. That is, in this case, the sound data itself remains assigned to the channel, but the “acceptable sound reproduction period” in the sound data ends at the timing tr2.

  In the configurations shown in FIGS. 385 to 389, “acceptance sounds having different lengths that are maintained in the output state” are prepared as acceptance acceptance sounds accompanying the occurrence of the operation acceptance effect, and the acceptance of the effect is made. Different permissible reception sounds are generated between the special operation reception effect and the first operation reception effect (or the second operation reception effect) with different post-operation effects. Therefore, if it is confirmed how long the output state of the allowable reception sound is continued, the special operation reception effect and the first operation reception effect (or the first operation reception effect) (or the first operation reception effect) are provided although there is a demerit that the above-described staging strategy is reduced. 2 operation reception effect) can be recognized.

  In addition, the plurality of allowable reception sounds continue to be the first reception allowable sound (special operation reception effect) whose output state is terminated when an operation by the player is received, and the output state continues. Second acceptable sound (first and second operation acceptance effects) is included. Therefore, when an operation is performed so that a production reception is performed while the reception permission sound is in the output state, a special operation reception is performed by confirming whether the output state of the reception permission sound is terminated when the production reception is performed. It becomes possible to immediately recognize which of the effect and the first operation reception effect (or the second operation reception effect) has occurred.

  However, the acceptable reception sound is supposed to be in a non-output state when the effective period ends, and the output state is maintained when the post-operation effect is started. Doing so can interfere with the production. In this regard, in the above explanation example, the reception effect sound whose output state is ended when the effect reception is made is the first reception allowable sound on the side where the time set value for maintaining the output state is relatively long ( Special operation reception effect).

  That is, in this case, when an effect is received in the output state of the “second reception permission sound on the side where the time setting value for which the output state is maintained is relatively short”, the output state is maintained. However, since the time set value at which the output state is maintained is originally shortened, the second acceptable sound will soon become a non-output state, and it can be said that it is difficult to interfere with the production. On the other hand, when the production is accepted in the output state of the “first acceptable sound on the side where the time setting value for which the output state is maintained is relatively long”, the original time setting for which the output state is maintained. Even if the value remains, since the output state is terminated, there is no hindrance to the production.

  In addition, by confirming how long the reception allowable sound output state continues, it is recognized whether the special operation reception effect or the first operation reception effect (or the second operation reception effect) is occurring. Even if there is a player to be used, if the output state of the acceptable reception sound is maintained after the time set value for the second acceptable sound has passed, the first acceptable sound is not the second acceptable sound but the second acceptable sound. It is possible to predict that is in a situation where is output. In this regard, without confirming that the output state of the first acceptable sound is terminated, by confirming that the first acceptable sound is set to the non-output state when the production reception is generated, It becomes possible to confirm at an early stage whether the prediction that the special operation reception effect has occurred is correct.

  In the configurations shown in FIGS. 385 to 389, when the valid period of the operation reception effect is generated, the pre-permissible operation related display indicating that the valid period will soon occur is performed. The operation-related display includes a first pre-permissible operation-related display with a short display time (see FIG. 388) and a second pre-permissible operation-related display with a long display time (see FIG. 389). In this regard, when the first pre-permissible operation-related display with a short display time is performed, the “sound data including the permissible reception sound” is unassigned to the channel, and “ By assigning “sound data including acceptable reception sound” to a channel, the acceptable reception sound is set in an output state. That is, in this case, the production sound corresponding to the first pre-permissible operation related display is not output, but the operation from the occurrence of the effective period is urged without causing a sense of incongruity as if a sound shift has occurred. become able to.

  On the other hand, when the second pre-permissible operation related display having a long display time is performed, the “sound data including the permissible reception sound” is transmitted to the channel from the time when the second pre-permissible operation related display is performed. In the allocation state, the acceptable sound is set to the output state by allowing the reproduction period of the acceptable sound to arrive in accordance with the timing when the valid period occurs. According to such a configuration, only one sound data is assigned to the channel before the occurrence of the special operation reception effect (eg, when the precursor effect is generated), and the first half is the precursor effect (display related to allowable pre-operation). In addition to being able to suggest the timing at which the special operation reception effect occurs due to the production sound (pre-allowable operation related sound) flowing according to the Since the channel assignment can be canceled as appropriate, the player can be made aware that the special operation acceptance effect has been executed even after the effect has been accepted.

  That is, in the pre-permissible operation related display shown in FIG. 389, the pre-permissible operation related sound corresponding to the pre-permissible operation related output is output and the acceptance allowable sound is further output when the valid period occurs. In the display, the permissible pre-permission operation related sound is not output and the permissible reception sound is output when the valid period occurs.

  In the above-described explanation example shown in FIGS. 385 to 389, as the “effect member”, an effect display device 1600, a speaker, an effect lamp, a movable decorative body, and the like can be used. In addition, as the “first effect member”, any one of the effect display device 1600, the speaker, the effect lamp, and the movable decorative body can be adopted. As the “second effect member”, Of the effect display device 1600, the speaker, the effect lamp, and the movable decorative body, any one different from the “first effect member” can be employed.

  In the above-described example, the operation means to be operated may not necessarily be the same between the special operation reception effect and the first operation reception effect (or the second operation reception effect). When the operation means to be operated are different, the haze images displayed in each effective period are different.

  In the first operation reception effect, “the operation-induced process using the first effect member in which the execution state is continued until a predetermined timing in the effect pattern arrives” is executed as the post-operation effect. “The operation-induced process using the first effect member whose execution state is continued until a predetermined timing in the effect pattern arrives” and “The execution state continues until a predetermined timing in the effect pattern arrives” The operation-induced processing using the second effect member ”may be executed as the post-operation effect. Still further, an operation-induced process using an effect member different from the first effect member and the second effect member may be further executed. However, in the post-operation effect according to the first operation reception effect, any operation is performed. The cause process is also executed on the assumption that the execution state is continued until a predetermined timing in the effect pattern arrives.

  In the second operation reception effect, “the operation-induced process using the second effect member that is continued until the elapsed time from the reception timing of the effect reaches a predetermined time value” is executed as the post-operation effect. However, “the operation-caused process using the first effect member that is continued until the elapsed time from the reception timing of the effect reaches a predetermined time value” and “the predetermined timing in the effect pattern has arrived. The operation-induced process using the second effect member whose execution state is continued until it is performed ”may be executed as the post-operation effect. Still further, an operation-induced process using an effect member different from the first effect member and the second effect member may be further executed. However, in the post-operation effect according to the second operation reception effect, any operation is performed. The cause process is also executed as being continued until the elapsed time from the timing of receiving the presentation reaches a predetermined time value.

  In the special operation reception effect, “the operation-caused process using the first effect member whose execution state is continued until a predetermined timing in the effect pattern arrives” and “the elapsed time from the timing when the effect is received” The operation-induced processing using the second effect member that is continued until the predetermined time value is reached ”is executed as the post-operation effect, but an effect member different from the first effect member and the second effect member is used. The operation-caused process used may be further executed. In the special operation reception effect, an operation-induced process that is executed as if the execution state is continued until a predetermined timing in the effect pattern arrives, and an elapsed time from the timing at which the effect is received is a predetermined time What is necessary is just to be mixed with the operation-induced process executed as being continued until the value is reached.

  Further, in the above-described example illustrated in FIGS. 385 to 389, the valid period of the special operation reception effect is set as a time value longer than the valid period of the first operation reception effect (or the second operation reception effect). I try to do it. By setting such a long time, it becomes possible to enjoy the effective period with the staging strategy described above.

  In the first pre-permissible operation related display with a short display time (see FIG. 388), “expectation as to whether the post-operation effect performed when the effect is accepted is performed in a highly expected manner” or “big hit” In the second pre-permission operation-related display (see FIG. 389) with a long display time, the “post-operation effect that is performed when an effect is accepted is expected. It is desirable to be able to suggest an “expectation as to whether it is performed in a high manner” or “an expectation that a jackpot symbol appears”.

  In the “effective period of special operation reception effect” set as a relatively long time value, by causing one of a plurality of display modes having different expectations to appear, “after the operation performed when the effect is accepted” It is desirable to be able to suggest the “expectation as to whether or not the performance is performed in a highly anticipated manner” or “the expectation that a jackpot symbol appears”.

  In addition, in the special operation reception effect, even if an effect is received at any timing within the valid period, “the effect by the first effect member generated due to the effect reception” is “because of the effect reception In order to make the player recognize that the execution content is the same as the post-operation effect, so that the execution state is terminated earlier than the “production by the second effect member that occurs”. desirable.

  In the above description example shown in FIGS. 385 to 389, the pachinko machine 1 can generate the first operation reception effect, the second operation reception effect, and the special operation reception effect based on the establishment of different production conditions. However, the first operation reception effect is not generated as non-installation, and the second operation reception effect and the special operation reception effect may be generated based on establishment of different effect conditions. Alternatively, the second operation reception effect may not be generated as being not mounted, and the first operation reception effect and the special operation reception effect may be generated based on establishment of different effect conditions. Alternatively, the first operation reception effect and the second operation reception effect are not mounted, and they do not occur, and the special operation reception effect may be generated based on establishment of a predetermined effect condition. .

  The special operation reception effects shown in the above-described explanation examples shown in FIGS. 385 to 389 output specific effect sound data (for example, BGM effect sound data) assigned to the channel in a suppression manner or silence. In particular, a state in which the reception of the production is permitted may be generated.

[More detailed performance for acceptable sound]
As described with reference to FIG. 118, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to execute a variation pattern determination as to which of a plurality of variation patterns is executed based on the result of the jackpot determination. When one variation pattern is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination, the peripheral control MPU 1511a provides a plurality of expected effects (notice effects, etc.) prepared corresponding to the selected variation pattern. Among them, it is possible to execute an effect determination (notice determination or the like) regarding which expected effect (notice effect or the like) to selectively appear. Depending on the result of this effect determination, all of the plurality of expected effects (notification effects, etc.) prepared corresponding to the selected variation pattern may be sequentially executed. It is possible that none of the expected effects (notice effects, etc.) will be executed.

  Then, when such an effect determination (effect pattern determination, notice determination, etc.) is made, the effect display device 1600 is controlled to display the contents of the effect according to the result of the effect determination, so as to respond to the result of the jackpot determination. The variation effect by the decorative design is executed together with the expected effect (notice effect) related to the background depiction (background notice), the movable body operation (function effect effect), and the like. As a result, when the variation effect by the decorative design is executed together with the expected effect related to the background depiction and the movable body operation, etc., when the bonus display is stopped and displayed, the bonus game as a bonus is executed for the player. Become possible.

  In such a configuration, the fluctuating effect by the decorative design is provided as an effect having “a function indicating whether or not a big hit is obtained as a result of the big hit determination”, such as background depiction or movable body operation The expected production related to is provided as a production having “a function that suggests the degree of expectation (including 0% and 100%) that a big hit is obtained”. That is, the player will enjoy the game through these effects.

  For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the identification of the highly expected variation pattern (SP reach variation pattern) that develops to SP reach (such as reach production with background change) as a result of the variation pattern determination. No matter which result is obtained as an effect determination (notice determination, etc.), if the design effect based on the specific change pattern progresses to a specific timing during SP reach, the effect acceptance Is allowed to generate an operation reception effect (valid period). However, as will be described later, the acceptable sound output when the operation reception effect is generated has a different aspect according to the result of the effect determination, and thereby the post-operation effect is executed in a highly expected manner. It is suggested to indicate the rate of being played and the rate at which the jackpot symbol is stopped.

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when a predetermined variation pattern is selected from low expected variation patterns (non-reach variation patterns) that are not formed even in the reach state as a result of the variation pattern determination. Even if there is a special result in the effect determination (notice determination, etc.) corresponding to the predetermined variation pattern, the operation that permits the acceptance of the effect is made when the symbol effect based on the predetermined variation pattern progresses to the predetermined timing. The reception effect (valid period) can be generated. However, when a predetermined variation pattern is selected, an operation reception effect (effective period) does not occur even if the symbol effect based on the predetermined variation pattern is advanced to a predetermined timing unless a special result is obtained in the effect determination. .

  Regardless of the “specific variation pattern” described above, the variation pattern that generates the operation reception effect (valid period) at the predetermined timing during the SP reach, regardless of which result is obtained as the notice effect determination. May also be provided. However, even if any result is obtained as a notice effect determination, a fluctuation pattern that generates an operation reception effect (valid period) at a predetermined timing is included in the low expectation fluctuation pattern (non-reach fluctuation pattern) It is desirable to avoid this or to lower the selection ratio.

  By the way, an operation reception effect (effective period) that can occur under these conditions and the like is determined in advance for an effect member to be effected as long as an operation is detected within the set time (effective period). Only the post-operation effect that causes a change (at least one of the display change in the effect display device 1600, the effect sound change in the speaker, the light emission change by the lamp, and the effect operation by the movable decorative body) is executed. The reception performance (valid period) itself has poor performance, and there is a concern that the game entertainment will be reduced until the post-operation performance is executed.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, as an operation reception effect,
-During the execution period of the symbol effect (effect pattern) based on the low expected change pattern (predetermined change pattern), “BGM playback (specific type effect sound)” corresponding to the change pattern (effect pattern) is not suppressed. During the execution period of low-expectation non-suppression reception effects that give operation opportunities in the output, and / or symbol effects (effect patterns) based on high-expected fluctuation patterns (specific fluctuation patterns) The corresponding “BGM playback (specific type of production sound)” is output in a suppression mode or silence, or is not output (the playback period in which audible sound is recorded in the sound data has expired, channel assignment) In other words, it is possible to generate at least a high-expected suppression reception effect that gives an opportunity to operate.

  In such a configuration, when the operation opportunity is given, the output in the non-suppression mode of “BGM playback (specific type of effect sound)” is maintained (low expected non-suppression reception effect), and “BGM playback” “(Specific type of production sound)” may be output in a suppression mode or silence, or may be in a non-output state (suppression operation reception effect), and modes related to these operation reception effects (low expectation non-suppression reception) The ratio of winning the jackpot (expectation) varies depending on the production and the high expectation suppression reception production), so the performance when the operation opportunity is given (when the operation opportunity is given “ Amusement entertainment can be improved by the performance of whether or not “BGM playback (specific type of production sound)” is suppressed.

  However, in the high expectation suppression reception effect, since “BGM playback (specific type effect sound)” is output in a suppression mode or in silence when an operation opportunity is given, compared to the low expectation non-suppression reception effect There is a concern that the performance will be poor.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as will be described later, when a high expectation suppression reception effect is generated, a specific sound that is not output when a low expectation non-suppression reception effect is generated is a permissible reception sound. Can be output as. As a result, it is possible to suitably suppress a decrease in performance when a high expectation suppression reception effect occurs.

  Moreover, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as will be described later, the acceptable reception sound that is output when the high expectation suppression reception effect is generated is greater than the acceptable reception sound that is output when the low expectation non-suppression reception effect is generated. This is used as a sound whose output state is maintained over a long period of time, and this also suitably suppresses that the presentation performance when the high expectation suppression reception effect is generated becomes poor.

  On the other hand, in the high expectation suppression reception effect, “BGM playback (specific type effect sound)” is output in a suppression mode, silence, or in a non-output state when an operation opportunity is given. There is also an aspect that it becomes possible to make a production sound according to this when the post-production occurs, and in this respect, it can be said that it is useful for improving the game entertainment. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as will be described later, with regard to the acceptable reception sound that is output when the high anticipation suppression reception effect is generated, the production is accepted when the acceptable reception sound is in the output state. Then, the output state is terminated based on the fact that the presentation is accepted. As a result, the production sound according to the post-operation production can be made to stand out without being disturbed by the acceptable reception sound.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the operation reception effect is “when the operation is not detected within the set time in which the effect reception is allowed, the post-operation effect is not generated and the set time ends. "Non-automatic reception mode that can be generated", as well as "automatic reception mode capable of generating post-operation effects even if no operation is detected within a set time for which the reception of the performance is allowed" Can also be generated.

  That is, when the operation reception effect is generated by the automatic reception mode, the same post-operation effect as when the operation is detected is executed even if the operation is not detected within the set time in which the effect reception is allowed. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which an operation by the player is not performed, and as a result, the post-operation effect cannot be confirmed. However, as will be described later, more precisely, the output time for the production sound in the post-operation effect is the same as when the operation is detected, but the operation detects the output time for the liquid crystal display in the post-operation effect. It is designed to be shorter than when it was done.

  Moreover, in the automatic reception mode (operation reception effect) according to this embodiment, as will be described later, when no operation is detected, an effect reception is automatically generated at a specific timing within a set time (the automatic button function is enabled). The post-operation effect is executed based on the automatically generated effect reception. In other words, in this case, since the reception of the production always occurs before the specific timing within the set time arrives at the latest, the reception of the production may be made within the set time within the time after the specific timing. As a result, the length of the valid period during which the production reception is permitted is substantially shortened. Thus, unlike the case where the post-operation production is started after the set time has expired, the automatic button function is activated in such a way that the production tempo is accelerated rather than causing a production delay. Can be realized.

  Also, if the automatic button function is enabled within the set time in this way, the operation opportunity will be substantially lost despite the fact that the set time has not passed. The player side is also afraid of this, and is expected to actively operate at an earlier stage within the set time, or to play with a sense of tension with respect to the production.

  In order to obtain such an effect, the “gauge display of how much effective time remains” displayed on the effect display device 1600 is displayed until a specific timing at which the automatic button function is activated. It is desirable not to indicate the remaining time, but to display it as indicating the remaining time until the set time has elapsed. When such a display method is employed, in the operation reception effect executed in the automatic reception mode, the effect reception is always performed at a time point before the remaining time of the gauge display becomes “0”.

  Moreover, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as will be described later, not only in the operation reception effect executed in the non-automatic reception mode, but also in the operation reception effect executed in the automatic reception mode, An acceptable reception sound suggesting that the stage reception is allowed or the stage reception is allowed can be output. As a result, it is possible to suitably suppress a situation in which the production reception is automatically generated when the user forgets to operate, and the production reception cannot be generated by his own operation.

  Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when an operation reception effect executed in the automatic reception mode is generated, a specification that is not output when an operation reception effect executed in the non-automatic reception mode is generated. Since the sound can be output as the above acceptable reception sound, the operation reception effect that is executed in the automatic reception mode is generated instead of the non-automatic reception mode by checking the type of the allowable reception sound. You will be able to recognize that

  On the other hand, in the post-operation effect, there is usually an effect risk that is executed in a mode with low expectation. Therefore, it is not always necessary to improve the game entertainment by operating the post-operation effect. There is also an aspect that is not limited. Therefore, in the non-automatic reception mode according to this embodiment, as will be described later, if the reception allowable sound is output for a sufficient time to indicate that the production reception is permitted, the reception allowable sound in the output state is displayed. By completing the process relatively early, “a time during which it is possible to think about whether or not to produce an effect is generated” is created while no acceptable sound is output.

  However, even in the operation reception effect executed in the automatic reception mode, if the reception allowable sound is ended early, there is a concern that it may cause a misunderstanding that “the production reception is no longer allowed due to the automatic button functioning”. Arise. Therefore, in the automatic reception mode according to this embodiment, the output state of the reception allowable sound is maintained for a relatively long time, so that the automatic button is not yet functioning and the production reception is permitted. This suggests that the player is in a state, and as a result, the player can be prompted to perform an operation with a sense of security that “the automatic button has not yet functioned”.

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as the operation reception effect, “BGM playback (specific type effect sound)” is output in a suppression manner or silence, or is in a non-output state. An operation opportunity is given while a suppression reception effect (in this case, a high expectation suppression reception effect) or “BGM playback (a specific type of effect sound)” is output in a non-suppression mode. A non-suppression reception effect (here, a low expectation non-suppression reception effect) can be generated in an automatic reception mode or a non-automatic reception mode, or a production reception is permitted, or a production reception The technical feature is that each of the allowable reception sounds suggesting that the sound is allowed is generated in a manner that further enhances its original performance.

  In the following, such technical features will be described. In explaining the technical features, the “acceptable sound” will be described again. It suggests that the output has been started within the set time and the reception of the production is allowed, or the output is started before the set time when the production reception is allowed and the production reception is allowed. For example, it is output as a production sound such as “Pikine”. However, in the case where the output state is set before the set time in which the production reception is allowed occurs, the output state of the “acceptable sound” is maintained in a manner that crosses the timing at which the set time occurs ( Within the set time (within the period during which production reception is allowed) is required), and more than the time from when the "acceptable sound" is set to the output state until the set time occurs, It is desirable to set so that the time from when the set time occurs until the output state of the “acceptable sound” ends is longer. In this sense, the “acceptable sound” is output only when a set time (valid period) occurs, and is in an output state within the set time (valid period). On the other hand, it can be said that it is an output sound within a set time that can be shifted to a non-output state (inaudible state) in response to an operation by the player or as the output time elapses.

  Further, the “acceptable sound” may be output as a single effect sound data assigned to a channel (see FIG. 388) or another effect sound (for example, a set time (effective period) ) That is assigned to a channel and output as a single effect sound data that is combined with a prelude effect that is executed before the occurrence of), or an effect sound that is output in accordance with the above-mentioned “specific operation-related effect”, etc. (Refer to FIG. 389), and a method for realizing it may be adopted as appropriate.

  FIG. 390 is a time chart showing an example of the effect contents when the low expectation non-suppression reception effect is executed in the non-automatic reception mode.

  Now, in the normal gaming state (non-probability change / non-short time), the start condition is established (holding digestion), and the change pattern determination is performed. As a result, the “predetermined change” If “pattern” is selected, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first performs an effect determination (notice determination or the like) corresponding to the predetermined variation pattern. After that, a decorative effect variation effect (such as an effect depiction according to a predetermined variation pattern or a sound output of BGM reproduction according to a predetermined variation pattern) is started, and a notice effect is performed within the execution period of the variation effect. An effect (notice effect) according to the result of the determination is additionally executed on the effect (effect pattern) related to the selected “predetermined variation pattern”. In addition, including each effect example described below, the effect pattern determination (sub control side) is performed based on the result of the variation pattern determination (main control side), and the notice determination (sub) is performed based on the result of the effect pattern determination. When the control side) is performed, regarding the process related to the notice effect, “fluctuation pattern determination” may be replaced with “effect pattern determination”, and “variation pattern” may be replaced with “effect pattern”.

Then, as described above, when a special result is obtained in the effect determination (notice determination or the like) corresponding to the predetermined change pattern, the peripheral control MPU 1511a displays the change effect of the decorative symbol as shown in FIG. 390 (b). An operation reception effect (effective period) in which the effect reception is allowed is generated when a timing tr32 at which a predetermined time has elapsed since the start is reached. However, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the operation reception effect (effective period) that is generated during the execution period of the effect related to the low expected variation pattern (predetermined variation pattern)
-Set a set time during which the reception of the production is allowed while the “BGM playback sound” corresponding to the fluctuation pattern (the production pattern) maintains the output state in the non-suppression mode. 390 (a), (b)) ”and if no operation is detected within the set time (timing tr32 to tr33) in which the reception of the production is permitted, the post-operation production does not occur and “Non-automatic reception mode (see FIG. 390 (j))” where the set time is ended
Is generated as a “non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect”.

  According to such a configuration, during the execution period of the effect (effect pattern) related to the low expectation variation pattern (predetermined variation pattern), the operation reception effect is generated by the “BGM playback sound” being in the suppression mode. Because the set time (valid period) for which the stage reception is allowed without suddenly appearing, such as suggesting, is suddenly set (non-suppression reception stage), it is surprising from the player side. As a result, a delay is likely to occur at the beginning of movement when attempting to operate. Nevertheless, if no operation is detected within the set time (timing tr32 to tr33), the set time ends without any post-operation effects (non-automatic reception). Aspect), by making the user aware of the risk of missing the opportunity for the production after the operation, it is preferable to feel tension when the production (production pattern) for the low-expected fluctuation pattern (predetermined fluctuation pattern) is being executed. Will be able to maintain.

  However, although it is executed as such a “non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect”, the set time (timing tr32 to tr33) is ended without generating a post-operation effect contrary to the player's intention. If such a thing happens frequently, there is a concern that the entertainment interest of the game will decline. Therefore, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 390 (b), (c), and (g), a set time (timing tr32 to tr33) in which the effect reception is allowed is generated. However, when the timing tr31 comes a little before, the output of the “acceptable sound” is started, and the output state is maintained in a manner straddling the timing tr32. As a result, it becomes possible to recognize that the production acceptance is permitted at the timing tr31 slightly before the set time (timing tr32 to tr33) occurs. It is expected that it is difficult to frequently generate that the set time (timing tr32 to tr33) is ended without producing an effect. However, as described above, the “acceptable sound” does not necessarily have to be generated before the set time (timing tr32 to tr33) occurs. For example, according to the generation timing of the set time tr32 May be generated.

  As will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, the first allowable sound output as a sound effect such as “Pickin!” And “Press!” The second allowable sound that is output as a message sound is prepared. However, as shown in FIGS. 390 (d) and (h), in the operation reception effect (effective period) generated during the execution period of the effect (effect pattern) related to the low expected change pattern (predetermined change pattern), The second allowable sound (message sound) is not output, and only the first allowable sound (sound effect) is output. A delay is likely to occur at the beginning of movement when a person tries to operate.

  By the way, during the execution period of the production (production pattern) related to the low expectation fluctuation pattern (predetermined fluctuation pattern), as a countermeasure against the setting time (effective period) being suddenly set or executed as a non-automatic reception mode, A player who tries to not miss the opportunity to produce post-operation effects by repeatedly hitting the operation means (in this case, the operation button 410) from when the stage reception is not permitted may appear. It is done. However, in this case, since the post-operation effect is started immediately after the acceptance of the effect, the started effect is “what is performed in response to the effect reception (post-operation effect)”. However, it is difficult to recognize whether it is “automatically generated as a notice effect that has nothing to do with the reception of the production”, and there is a concern that the entertainment interest of the game will be reduced.

  Therefore, as shown in FIG. 390 (particularly, FIG. 390 (c)), in the low expectation non-suppression reception effect, the “acceptable sound (first allowable sound)” after the set time (valid period) occurs. When the production is accepted at the timing tr32a in the output state, the set time (valid period) itself ends, while the “acceptable sound (first allowable sound)” is not terminated halfway. The output state is maintained until the timing when the output is completed as one permissible sound (the same timing as when there is no operation (FIG. 390 (g)). It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which it is difficult to recognize whether it is “what is being performed (post-operation effect)” or “automatically generated as a mere notice effect unrelated to the effect reception” Kill as to become.

  In the effect example shown in FIG. 390, when the effect is received within the set time (valid period) (in the figure, timing tr32a), the effect display device 1600 (the first display) is used as the post-operation effect corresponding to the effect reception. The post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) in the first effect member) and the post-operation effect sound output (effect sound) by the speaker (second effect member) are generated at least. In the figure, the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) and the post-operation effect sound output (effect sound) by the speaker are maintained in the execution state for the same time, but this is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) is not displayed at a predetermined timing that comes after the timing tr33, even if the effect is received at any timing within the set time (effective period). In contrast, the post-operation effect sound output (effect sound) may be maintained in an output state for a predetermined time from the timing when the effect is accepted. However, in any state where the stage is accepted at any timing, both the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) and the post-operation effect sound output (effect sound) are obtained when the timing tr33 has not elapsed. It is required to maintain the output state.

  In the effect example shown in FIG. 390, when the timing tr32 at which the set time (valid period) is set arrives, the effect display device 1600 displays the operation means that is the operation target in the low expectation non-suppression reception effect. A simulated soot image is displayed, and gauge display indicating the remaining time until the set time has elapsed is performed. For example, the method shown in FIG. 208 (J2) can be adopted as the display method for the heel image or gauge display. Based on this, they are hidden (both are not displayed at the same timing).

  However, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment is equipped with a “special effect mode (automatic button effect state)” that activates the automatic button function for all operation reception effects for which operation instructions are given. The player may be able to set and cancel the “special effect mode” by an operation by the player. That is, in this case, even in the operation reception effect that occurs during the execution period of the effect (effect pattern) related to the low expected variation pattern (predetermined variation pattern), in the state that is set to the “special effect mode” "Non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect" only when the "non-suppression reception effect" is executed in the above-described "automatic reception mode" and is not set to the "special effect mode". Will occur. However, in the description (especially “detailed performance characteristics regarding acceptable reception sound” and related descriptions) and unless otherwise specified, the “special performance mode” is not set. In some cases, the pachinko machine 1 is described as an example of production when the “special production mode” is not installed.

  FIG. 391 and FIG. 392 are time charts showing an example of the effect contents when the high expectation suppression reception effect is executed in the automatic reception mode.

  Now, in the normal gaming state (non-probability change / non-short time), the start condition is established (holding digestion), and as a result of the variation pattern determination, “high reach expectation to develop into SP reach (reach production with background change, etc.) Assuming that a “specific variation pattern” is selected from among the “variation patterns”, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first performs an effect determination (such as a notice determination) corresponding to the specific variation pattern. After that, the decorative design variation effect (such as the rendering of the effect according to the specific variation pattern and the sound output of the BGM playback according to the specific variation pattern) is started, and the effect determination is performed within the execution period of the variation effect. An effect corresponding to the result (notice effect) is additionally executed on the effect (effect pattern) related to the selected “specific variation pattern”.

  However, as described above, in the effect (effect pattern) related to the “specific variation pattern”, as shown in FIG. 391 (b), no matter which result is obtained as the effect determination (notice determination). In addition, an operation reception effect (effective period) in which the effect reception is allowed is generated when a timing tr42 (a timing in the SP reach state) at which a specific time has elapsed since the start of the decorative symbol variation effect is generated.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the operation reception effect (valid period) generated at the timing tr42 in the specific fluctuation pattern is as follows.
-“Suppression acceptance effect” (FIG. 391 (a)) is set for setting a set time during which the acceptance of the effect is permitted while the “BGM playback sound” corresponding to the fluctuation pattern (effect pattern) is output in a suppression manner or silence. , (See (b)) ”, and even if no operation is detected for the operation means that is the operation target within the set time (timing tr42 to tr43) in which the reception of the production is permitted, When the timing tr42A within the set time arrives, the production reception is automatically generated internally (the automatic button function is activated), and the post-operation production is started based on the reception of the production “automatic reception” Aspect (see FIG. 391 (j)) ”
It is generated as a “suppression / automatic reception effect” executed by. In addition, as a technique for outputting the “BGM playback sound” in a suppression manner or silence, a method of setting a silent section (suppression section) in advance in the data of the “BGM playback sound” itself, A method of changing the setting of a volume value for a channel to which “BGM playback sound” is assigned to a suppression value (for example, “0”), or a combination thereof may be employed. As will be described later, this “suppression / automatic reception effect” is also referred to as “second suppression operation reception effect”, and the suppression mode here is also referred to as “strong suppression mode”.

  According to such a configuration, during the execution period of the effect (effect pattern) related to the highly expected variation pattern (SP reach state in the effect (effect pattern) related to the specific variation pattern), the “BGM playback sound” is suppressed. Since a set time (valid period) in which the production reception is allowed is set with a production such as suggesting the occurrence of the operation reception production by outputting in a mode or silence (suppression reception) From the viewpoint of the player), the player can easily perform the operation immediately after the operation reception effect is generated. In addition, even if the operation is not detected within the set time (timing tr42 to tr43), the post-operation effect is automatically generated when the timing tr42A within the set time arrives at the latest. (Automatic reception mode), it is possible to enjoy the operation with a sense of security that does not miss the post-operation effect that occurs in the operation reception effect at the time of high expectation.

  Moreover, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, in the “suppression / automatic reception effect”, as in the above-mentioned “non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect”, FIGS. 391 (b), (c), (g) As shown in FIG. 5, when the timing tr41 slightly before the set time (timing tr42 to tr43) in which the production reception is permitted occurs, the output of the “acceptable sound” is started, and the timing tr42 is straddled. So that the output state is maintained. As a result, even if the player does not recognize that the “BGM playback sound” is being output in a suppressed manner or in a silent state, a state in which the stage reception is allowed will soon occur at the timing tr41. It is expected that it will be difficult to often say that the reception of the production is made by enabling the automatic button function instead of the player's own operation against the player's intention. Become so. However, as described above, the “acceptable sound” does not necessarily have to be generated before the set time (timing tr42 to tr43) occurs. For example, the “acceptable sound” is generated in accordance with the set time generation timing tr42. You may do it.

  However, the timing tr40 at which the “BGM playback sound” is shifted from the state of being output in the non-suppressed mode to the state of being output in the suppressed mode or silence (or the non-output state) is described above. In order to obtain the effect (suppression acceptance effect) suitably, as shown in FIGS. 391 (a) to (c), the relationship "the length of timing tr40 to tr41> the length of timing tr41 to tr42". Therefore, it can be said that it is important to set so that it arrives much before the “acceptance start timing tr41 of the above-mentioned acceptable reception sound that precedes the set time”.

  Further, in the “suppression / automatic reception effect” according to this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 391 (c), (d), (g), (h), the “non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect” described above. Unlike the case of “,” as the “acceptable sound”, not only the first allowable sound that is output as a sound effect such as “Pickin!”, But also the second allowable sound that is output as a message sound such as “Press!” Also, when the timing tr41 arrives, the output is also started, and the output state is maintained in a manner straddling the timing tr42.

  According to such a configuration, in the effect display device 1600, which one of the plurality of operation means (such as the operation button 410 and the sword decorative body 5001) provided in the pachinko machine 1 should be operated. Since there is a possibility that it can be recognized when the eyelid image of the operation means to be operated is not yet displayed (timing tr41 to tr42), the operation reception effect is generated immediately. It becomes easy to operate. That is, as will be described later, in the “suppression / automatic reception effect” according to this embodiment, “when the operation button 410 is selected as the operation target” and “the sword ornament 5001 as the operation target” based on the result of the notice effect determination. When the operation button 410 is set as the operation target, a message sound such as “Press!” Is output as the second allowable sound (message sound), and the sword decorative body 5001 is set as the operation target. In this case, a message sound such as “Say me!” Is output as the second allowable sound (message sound).

  In the production example shown in FIG. 391, the first allowable sound and the second allowable sound are started to be output at the same time. However, the timings at which the first allowable sound and the second allowable sound are started to be output are different from each other. The output state may be sequentially set. In this case, output of only one of the first allowable sound and the second allowable sound may be started from a state where the set time (effective period) has not yet occurred.

  In this effect example, as shown in FIGS. 391 (g) and (h), the "first permissible sound" is adopted as the effect sound that is output for a relatively short time, and the "second permissible sound" is used. Is used as a production sound output over a relatively long time, but the length relationship between these allowable sounds may be reversed.

However, for the “first permissible sound” and the “second permissible sound”, as shown in FIGS. 391 (g) and (h), the output states are maintained over different times, and the outputs are maintained. It is desirable that the time when the state is ended (the time when the state is made inaudible) is made to arrive at different timings before the timing tr42A at which the automatic button function is activated. According to such a configuration, it is estimated how much time is left until the timing tr42A at which the automatic button function is activated depends on whether the “acceptable sound” is in the following situation. As a result, it is expected that it will be difficult to frequently produce “acceptance of production by the activation of the automatic button function, not the player's own operation, contrary to the player's intention”.
The first situation where both the “first permissible sound” and the “second permissible sound” maintain the output state. • The output state of one of the “first permissible sound” and the “second permissible sound” is maintained. However, the other has finished the output state (the state has been made inaudible) The second situation ・ "First permissible sound" and "second permissible sound" both have finished the output state Third situation (being inaudible)

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the “non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect” in the effect example shown in FIG. 390 and the “suppression / automatic reception effect” in the effect example shown in FIG. The same production sound (for example, “Pikkin!”) Is output as the “first allowable sound”. That is, in this case, the message sound (second allowable sound) among the acceptable reception sounds is output as an effect sound that is not output in the “non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect”, while the sound effect ( The first permissible sound) can be output as an effect sound that is output even in the “non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect”, so that the “BGM playback sound” is in a state of being suppressed. While maintaining the stage performance suitably (second allowable sound), it is possible to more easily recognize that the reception of the stage is allowed (first allowable sound).

  In addition, the timing tr41-tr42 (or timing tr31-tr32) in the case where the reception allowable sound (first allowable sound, second allowable sound) is output prior to the set time (effective period) or the haze image display. This time may be a minimum time (for example, one frame) in a control (processing) unit, or may be a time of two frames or more. That is, if the player can output the set time (valid period) or the spear image display as much as possible, the player is in a state where the stage reception is permitted or the operation means that is the operation target. Is likely to be recognized earlier by the amount of time that precedes it, so the time until the set time ends or when the automatic button function is activated It is expected to suppress forgetting to perform an operation within the period until it arrives.

  By the way, in the operation reception effect executed in the automatic button mode, the operation opportunity can be lost by enabling the automatic button function (timing tr42A) even within the set time (effective period) as described above. It is. Therefore, in the effect example shown in FIGS. 391 (c) and (d), unlike the case of the effect example shown in FIG. 390 (c), the acceptable sound (at least one of the first allowable sound and the second allowable sound). When an effect is received when the device is in the output state, the output state is terminated based on the reception of the effect. In other words, in this case, when an operation by the player is performed, the output of the allowable sound (first allowable sound, second allowable sound) is interrupted at that time, and thereby the reception of the effect is permitted ( It becomes possible to recognize that the (valid period) has ended, so “the reception of the stage has not yet occurred and the automatic button function can be activated (the state where the operation opportunity can be lost)” It is possible to avoid the misunderstanding that it is in In addition, in the set time (valid period), when the operation is performed at a timing before the timing tr42A at which the automatic button function is activated and the performance is accepted, the performance is performed at the time when the performance is accepted. It goes without saying that the automatic button function is not activated even when the timing tr42A arrives, since the state where the acceptance is permitted ends.

  Also, in the effect example shown in FIG. 391, when the effect is received within the set time (effective period) (in the figure, timing tr42a), the effect display device 1600 ( The post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) in the first effect member) and the post-operation effect sound output (effect sound) by the speaker (second effect member) are generated at least. More specifically, for the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display), at any timing within the set time (effective period), the effect is received at a specific timing that comes after the timing tr43. In contrast to the non-display (not visible), the post-operation effect sound output (effect sound) maintains the output state for a predetermined time from the timing of receiving the effect. ing.

  However, as shown in FIG. 391, the effect sound output after the operation (effect sound) is “BGM playback sound” even if the effect is received at any timing within the set time (effective period). It is desirable to set so that the output state is maintained at the time when the timing tr44 is returned from the suppression state (silence state) to the output in the non-suppression mode. On the other hand, with regard to the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display), in the effect example shown in FIG. 391, the output state is terminated at the timing tr44 when the “BGM playback sound” is returned to the output in the non-suppressed mode. ing. That is, in this case, at the timing tr44, both “BGM playback sound” is returned to the output in the non-suppressed mode and the content related to the display effect is switched. It is expected to be greatly changed and improve the game entertainment. Note that the “BGM playback sound” may be gradually returned by a technique such as fade-in when returning to the output in the non-suppressed mode. Further, for the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display), the output state may be terminated not at the timing tr44 but at a specific timing after the timing tr44.

  In the effect example shown in FIG. 391, when the timing tr42 at which the set time (effective period) is set arrives, the effect display device 1600 displays the operation means that is the operation target in the high expectation suppression reception effect. A simulated soot image is displayed, and gauge display indicating the remaining time until the set time has elapsed is performed. In this regard, in the operation reception effect executed in the automatic reception mode, in view of the fact that a message sound (for example, “Press!”) Is output as the second allowable sound, the display device 1600 also has a non-automatic reception mode. A message display (for example, “Press!”) That does not appear in the operation reception effect executed in the above is displayed. In addition, as a display method of a cocoon image, a gauge display, and a message display, for example, the method shown in FIG. 206 (Z3) or 220 (R2) can be adopted, and these display images (a cocoon image, The gauge display and the message display) are hidden (they are not displayed at the same timing) when the set time has not yet elapsed based on the fact that the production acceptance has occurred. The message display may not necessarily completely match the content of the message sound, and may be anything that prompts the operation.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 391 (g) to (i), the timing before the timing tr42A at which the automatic button function within the set time (valid period) is activated. In contrast, the output state of the message sound is terminated (inaudible), while the message display is maintained at the timing tr42A when the automatic button function is enabled, After the automatic button function is activated, it is not hidden (not visible) until at least the timing tr43 at which the set time ends is reached. After that, the display state may be maintained. Note that the set time (valid period) ends when the presentation is accepted, so in fact, it ends at the latest when the timing tr42A at which the automatic button is activated arrives. Therefore, strictly speaking, the “timing tr43 at which the set time ends” means the timing to be ended when the set time continues, and the time set at the timing tr42. This is the timing that arrives after the timing tr42.

  According to such a configuration, when the production is accepted due to the activation of the automatic button function, the output state of the message sound (second allowable sound) may be terminated halfway (inaudible state). Since the message display is not hidden in the middle of the set time, the production is accepted by detecting the message sound (second allowable sound) or the operation target prompted by the message display. It will be possible to suggest to the player that the situation is not in place. That is, in this case, even if the operation means on the side that is not prompted to operate by a message sound or a message display is erroneously operated, it may indicate that the production reception due to the operation has not occurred. become able to.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, both the operation reception effect (FIG. 390) that is not executed in the automatic button mode and the operation reception effect (FIG. 391) that is executed in the automatic button mode. Within the set time (valid period), the remaining time display (gauge display) that suggests the remaining time until the state where the reception of the effect is allowed is completed can be performed. In the operation reception effect (FIG. 390) that is not executed in the automatic button mode, the remaining time display (gauge display) is dynamically displayed based on the time until the set time has elapsed. That is, in this case, the gauge amount decreases as the time until the set time elapses, and when this time becomes “0”, the gauge amount is dynamically displayed so that it becomes “0”.

  On the other hand, in the operation reception effect (FIG. 391) executed in the automatic button mode, when the specific timing tr42A within the set time arrives without detecting the operation, the automatic button function is activated and the effect reception is automatically performed. As described above, after the arrival of the specific timing tr42A, even if the set time has not yet passed, the stage reception is not allowed. Therefore, if the “remaining time display (gauge display) indicating the remaining time until the state where the effect reception is allowed to end” is performed within the set time of the operation reception effect (FIG. 391), it is normal. It is conceivable that the remaining time display (gauge display) is dynamically displayed based on the time until the specific timing tr42A arrives.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, the operation reception effect (FIG. 391) executed in the automatic button mode is permitted after the specific timing tr42A has arrived. Despite the disappearance, the remaining time display (gauge display) is dynamically displayed based on the time until the set time has elapsed, not the time until the specific timing tr42A arrives. It is trying to display. That is, in this case, the gauge amount decreases as the time until the set time elapses, and when the set time becomes “0”, the gauge amount is dynamically displayed so that it becomes “0”. However, here, since the stage is always shifted to the state where the stage reception is not allowed before the set time becomes “0”, the stage reception is not allowed with the gauge amount remaining. It will be transferred to the state.

  According to such a configuration, when an effect is accepted when the automatic button function is enabled, the amount of gauge in the remaining time display (gauge display) is left unintentionally. On the other hand, it is possible to suggest that there is a risk of “losing the operation opportunity”, which makes it possible to operate at an early stage regardless of the gauge remaining amount in the set time (valid period) from the next time. Can be encouraged to do.

  Moreover, in the operation reception effect (FIG. 391) executed in the automatic button mode according to this embodiment, when the effect reception is generated by the operation detection, the remaining time is displayed before the set time has elapsed ( Gauge display) can be hidden (not visible). On the other hand, when the production reception occurs due to the activation of the automatic button function (specific timing tr42A), the remaining time display (gauge display) is not hidden in a state where the set time has not elapsed, and at least the setting is performed. Until the time has elapsed, the "dynamic display mode in which the suggested remaining time (gauge amount) gradually decreases" is maintained.

  According to such a configuration, when the presentation is accepted by enabling the automatic button function, the remaining time display (gauge display) continues to be dynamic until at least the set time has elapsed. Therefore, it is possible to indicate to the player that there is no situation in which an effect has been received by detecting an operation on an operation target that is prompted by a message sound or a message display. That is, in this case, even if the operation means on the side that is not prompted to operate by a message sound or a message display is erroneously operated, it may indicate that the production reception due to the operation has not occurred. become able to.

  Note that, as described above, in the operation reception effect generated at the timing tr42 in FIG. 391, “when the operation button 410 is selected as the operation target” and “the sword ornament 5001 is selected as the operation target based on the result of the notice effect determination. There are cases. That is, in this case, since there is a possibility of confusion depending on which operation means is the operation target after the set time (valid period) in which the reception of the production is permitted occurs, the set time is 5 seconds, etc. It is desirable to set a relatively long time. On the other hand, in the operation reception effect generated at the timing tr32 in FIG. 390, there is no “when the sword decorative body 5001 is selected as the operation target”, and the operation button 410 is always used as the operation target. It is desirable to set a relatively short time such as 3 seconds as the set time. At this time, the timing tr42A at which the automatic button function is activated may be set after the timing when 3 seconds have elapsed since the set time (valid period) has occurred. It is desirable to suppress the occurrence of a situation where opportunities are lost.

  Further, in the operation reception effect generated at the timing tr42 in FIG. 391, when the operation means on the side that is not the operation target is operated, the side that is the operation target while maintaining the erroneous operation state. Even when the operating means is operated, it is desirable to receive the presentation and execute the post-operation presentation. In other words, the player may be confused if there is a situation in which the stage is not accepted despite operating the operating means. Since it is harsh to seek further operations on the operation means on the side, even if an incorrect operation state is maintained, the production reception is made when the operation means on the side that is the operation target is operated It is desirable to do.

  Further, in the effect example shown in FIG. 391, the matters described in the “suppressed operation sound output process (FIG. 178)” described above and other examples thereof can be appropriately adopted. In other words, in this case, the timings tr40, tr42, tr42a, tr43, tr44 in the effect example shown in FIG. 391 correspond to the timings ts12, ts13, ts14, ts15, ts16 in the effect example shown in FIG. Become.

  However, as described above, in the suppression operation reception effect, when the operation opportunity is given, a specific type of effect sound is output in a suppression mode or silence, so that the performance is poor compared to the non-suppression operation reception effect. Is concerned. In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, the allowable reception sound that is output when the suppression operation reception effect is generated is greater than the allowable reception sound that is output when the non-suppression operation reception effect is generated. The sound can be output as a sound whose output state is maintained for a long time.

  That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as the first allowable sound, a plurality of modes (for example, a plurality of modes including the first mode, the second mode, and the third mode) in which the output state is maintained are different. One of the plurality of modes is selectively output as the first permissible sound based on the result of the notice effect determination. Here, the “first mode” as the first permissible sound is the mode shown in FIGS. 390 (c) and (g) and FIGS. 391 (c) and (g). "Is set as the shortest mode among the plurality of modes. Further, it is desirable that the ratio (expected degree) at which the big hit symbol appears when the symbol variation is stopped depends on which of the above-described plurality of modes is used to output the first allowable sound.

  It should be noted that “which one of a plurality of modes is output as the first allowable sound” and “which one of a plurality of operation means is used as the operation target” are obtained as separate determination results within the above-mentioned notice effect determination. Alternatively, it may be obtained within the notice effect determination as one determination result. However, for at least the first aspect of the plurality of aspects, the first permissible case is either the case where the “operation button 410” is the operation target or the case where the “sword decorative body 5001” is the operation target. It is desirable that the sound can be selected. In addition, the second mode and the third mode can be selected regardless of whether the “operation button 410” is an operation target or the “sword ornament 5001” is an operation target. You may do it.

  FIG. 392 is a time chart illustrating an example of the effect contents when the second aspect is used as the first acceptable sound when the high expectation suppression reception effect is executed in the automatic reception mode.

  As shown in FIG. 392, this effect example is basically the same as the case of the effect example described above with reference to FIG. 391, including the generation conditions and the contents of the effect (and other examples). Is the same. However, in this effect example, as a result of the notice effect determination, at the timing tr41, the first permissible sound is output in a second mode longer than the first mode instead of the first mode. Here, the output state of the first allowable sound is maintained for a longer time than the second allowable sound.

  According to such a configuration, the output permission sound output when the suppression operation reception effect is generated is output over a longer time than the reception permission sound (first mode) output when the non-suppression operation reception effect is generated. Since it can be output as a maintained sound, it is possible to suitably maintain the performance even in a situation where “BGM playback (specific type of production sound)” is output in a suppressed manner or silence when an operation opportunity is given Will be able to.

  In order to improve the performance in the suppression operation reception effect, the sound that is not output as the reception allowable sound in the operation reception effect shown in FIG. 390 is used for the first allowable sound output in the second mode. It is desirable to do.

  In contrast, in FIGS. 391 and 392, there are “when the operation button 410 is selected as the operation target” and “when the sword ornament 5001 is selected as the operation target” based on the result of the notice effect determination. It is assumed that the same operation means (operation button 410) is the operation target. Accordingly, also in this effect example, the second allowable sound is output in the same manner (for example, “Press!”) As in the case of the effect example shown in FIG. In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 392 (c) and (g), the first allowable sound is output in the second mode. However, the output state of the first permissible sound is terminated (non-audible state) before the timing tr42A at which the automatic button function is activated. It is possible to estimate how much time is left until the activated timing tr42A arrives from the output status of the acceptable sound to be accepted.

  In particular, in this effect example, the output state of the first allowable sound is maintained even after the output state of the “second allowable sound” output in the effect example shown in FIG. By confirming the above, it is possible to estimate in more detail how much time is left until the timing tr42A at which the automatic button function is activated is reached than in the case of the production example in FIG. become. In addition, since only the first permissible sound of the first permissible sound and the second permissible sound is output in a longer different mode (second mode), the player side first uses the first permissible sound in common. 2 Estimate the “remaining time until the arrival of timing tr42A” with reference to the timing when the output state of the allowable sound is terminated, and thus the first allowable sound is obtained with a sense of security that is normally estimated. Since it becomes possible to make a more detailed guess as a challenge, it is expected that the game entertainment will be suitably maintained.

  In the effect example shown in FIG. 392, other matters are the same as those in the effect example shown in FIG. 391. The point that the state is terminated halfway is the same as in the case of the production example shown in FIG.

  When the high expectation suppression reception effect (FIGS. 391 and 392) occurs in the state set to the “special effect mode” described above, the timing at which the automatic button function is activated is set within the set time. It is desirable to set the timing earlier than the timing tr42A. However, in this case, since the automatic button function can be activated by the player's intention, the message display of the message display is possible even when the production is accepted by the automatic button function being activated. It is desirable that the output state is not maintained until the timing tr43, and is not displayed before the timing tr43 (the timing when the presentation is accepted or the timing delayed by the above-mentioned time). At this time, when the automatic button function is activated, when the first allowable sound is output in the first mode, it does not arrive in the output state, but the first allowable sound is output in the second mode. It is desirable to function so that the first allowable sound that arrives in the output state and is output in the second mode is terminated halfway.

  Further, when the first allowable sound (sound effect as an acceptable reception sound) is output in the first mode and when the first allowable sound (sound effect as an acceptable reception sound) is output in the second mode. In addition to the different times during which the output state is maintained, different production sounds may be used. For example, when outputting the first allowable sound (sound effect as an acceptable reception sound) in the first mode, an effect sound such as “Pikine” is output, and the first allowable sound (sound effect as an acceptable reception sound) is the second. When outputting in a mode, it is possible to output a production sound such as “Gaogao”.

  In the example described above, the low expected fluctuation pattern is defined as “a fluctuation pattern in which even the reach state is not formed”. The effect example shown in FIG. 390 may be performed when a predetermined variation pattern is selected from among the variation patterns.

  In addition, it is desirable that the “suppression / automatic reception effect” exemplified in the above explanation example cannot appear in the low expectation variation pattern (corresponding effect pattern) when in the normal gaming state. The “non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect” illustrated in the explanation example can also appear in a highly expected variation pattern (corresponding effect pattern) including the above-mentioned “specific variation pattern” in the normal gaming state. . In other words, even in the case of a high-expected fluctuation pattern (corresponding to the production pattern), the low-expectation fluctuation pattern (corresponding to the low-expectation fluctuation pattern (basically) before the production progress to the SP reach state such as a non-reach state. Since the effect that appears also in the effect pattern) is executed, the “non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect” illustrated in FIG. 390 can also appear within the period. Even in such a configuration, when “suppression / automatic reception effect” appears (high expectation variation pattern), when “non-suppression / nonautomatic acceptance effect” appears (low expectation variation pattern or high expectation variation pattern) It can be said that the ratio (expectation) of the big hit symbol appearing higher when the symbol variation is stopped than the pattern).

  In addition, in the low expectation variation pattern (corresponding production pattern) that occurs when in the normal gaming state, “BGM playback (specific type production sound)” is output in a suppressed manner or silence when an operation opportunity is given. It is desirable that the low-expectation non-suppression reception effect is not executed in the automatic reception mode. This is a state where the “special effect mode” is not set, or when the “special effect mode” is not installed as the pachinko machine 1.

  Further, regarding the length of time from “timing tr42A at which the automatic button function is activated” to “timing tr43 when the set time elapses after the reception of the presentation is permitted”, the minimum time in the control (processing) unit ( For example, it may be 1 frame) or may be a time of 2 frames or more. For example, the message display can be visually recognized at “timing tr42A when the automatic button function is activated”, and such a visible state is at least “timing tr43 when the set time elapses after the reception of the production is permitted”. If it continues until it arrives, it will be possible to suggest the original length as the set time (valid period), and there is a possibility of recognizing that no operation by the player was performed Will be able to. In the operation reception effect executed in the automatic reception mode, in any operation reception effect, a message sound (second allowable sound) and a message display are displayed for “timing when the automatic button function is activated” within the set time. It is desirable to output in the relationship described above (see FIGS. 391 (h) and (i) and FIGS. 392 (h) and (i)).

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in FIG. 391 (i) and FIG. 392 (i), “the amount of time for which the message display remains after the reception of the effect is received (in the example in the figure, the timings tr42A to tr43 ”) Is also shown when an effect is received at another timing (FIG. 390 (e), FIG. 391 (e), etc.) due to program sharing. This program may be used only when the automatic button function is activated. That is, in this case, in the example shown in FIG. 390 (e), the operation-related display is hidden at timing tr32a, and in the example shown in FIG. 391 (e), the operation-related display is hidden at timing tr42a. Become.

  In the example described above (FIGS. 390 to 392), the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) in the effect display device 1600 (first effect member) and the post-operation effect sound output (effect) by the speaker (second effect member). Sound) is started at the same time, but post-operation effects may be performed so as to shift the start time of these effects. For example, in a situation where a post-operation effect sound output (effect sound) by a speaker (second effect member) is started at timing tr42, the effect display device 1600 (first effect member) has a post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display). The post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) is displayed at the timing when the operation-related display shown in FIGS. 390 to 392 is not displayed yet (or the timing when the fade-out process is started). If it is started, the display effects can be switched smoothly.

  As described in the above “suppressed operation sound output process (FIG. 178)”, also in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 391 and 392, a sign is given in a period before the set time (effective period) in which the effect reception is allowed. An effect (for example, the above-mentioned “specific operation-related effect”) may be performed. In this case, it is desirable to prepare a plurality of modes with different expectations for the appearance of the jackpot symbol as the warning effect, and perform the warning effect in any of these modes. Also, in this case, a plurality of modes are prepared as the warning effect sound output during the period in which the warning effect is performed, and whether to output the warning effect sound in a plurality of modes depends on the execution mode of the warning effect. It is desirable to select them. On the other hand, for the first permissible sound, the first mode and the second mode are displayed while the hail image to be operated, the gauge display that suggests the remaining time, and the message display of “Press!” It is output in any of a plurality of modes including modes.

  In the production examples shown in FIGS. 390 to 392, when the operation reception production shown in FIG. 391 or FIG. 392 occurs, the specific sound (second sound) that is not output when the operation reception production shown in FIG. 390 occurs. Since the first permissible sound or the second permissible sound of the aspect can be output as the permissible reception sound, it is preferable to suitably suppress the presentation performance when the suppression operation reception effect is generated. Will be able to. Also, by confirming the type of acceptable reception sound, it is possible to recognize that the operation reception effect is occurring in the automatic reception mode, not the non-automatic reception mode.

  Further, regarding the acceptable sound for the non-suppression operation reception effect (FIG. 390), a first allowable sound that outputs the acceptable sound as a sound effect and a second allowable sound that outputs the acceptable sound as a message sound. Among them, the second permissible sound is not prepared and only the first permissible sound is output, while the acceptance permissible sound of the suppression operation acceptance effect (FIGS. 391 and 392) is the first permissible sound and the first permissible sound. Both two allowable sounds are output. This makes it possible to favorably maintain the performance when the suppression operation reception effect is being performed.

  Further, in the above-described effect example, in the non-suppression operation reception effect (FIG. 390) and the suppression operation reception effect (FIGS. 391 and 392), the same effect sound is output as the first allowable sound (FIGS. 390 and 391). ) And a case where a different effect sound is output as the first allowable sound (FIGS. 390 and 392).

  In other words, if an acceptable reception sound different from the normal time is output, it becomes difficult to recognize that the production reception is permitted, and the operation opportunity may be lost. Therefore, the second permissible sound (message sound) is output as a sound that is not normally output, while the first permissible sound (sound effect) is output as a sound that is also output during normal time. It is desirable. Then, while the acceptance allowable sound is output in such a manner, the first allowable sound (sound effect) is output as a production sound (second aspect) that is not normally output with a predetermined probability. If the ratio (expectation) at which the jackpot symbol appears higher than when it was output in the first mode, it is possible to recognize that the stage reception is permitted, and “BGM playback (specification) It is possible to favorably maintain the performance when the “type of effect sound)” is in the state of being output in the suppression mode or in silence. In obtaining such an operation effect, when a suppression operation reception effect is generated (a specific variation pattern is generated), the first mode is output as the first acceptable sound in an effect determination such as a notice effect determination. It is desirable that the ratio for determining the effect is higher than the ratio for determining the output of the second mode.

  In the effects shown in FIGS. 390 to 392, not only the operation reception effects (FIG. 390) executed in the non-automatic reception mode but also the operation reception effects (FIGS. 391 and 392) executed in the automatic reception mode. In the event of the occurrence, a reception acceptance sound suggesting that the reception of the production is allowed or that the reception of the production is allowed can be output. As a result, it is possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of a situation in which one's own operation opportunity is lost.

  In the example of production shown in FIGS. 391 and 392, a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) is set when the timing tr41 arrives, and the specific timing tr42A arrives within the set time (valid period). It is determined that the reception of the effect is automatically generated when the specific timing tr42A arrives without receiving the effect according to the operation detection. According to such a configuration, the post-operation effect can be started within a preset period (set time) regardless of whether or not there is an operation. It becomes possible to make it an automatic button without making the flow of the subsequent production different from the case where there is no, or causing the production delay.

  Further, in the above-described production example, “message sound that prompts to be operated (second allowable sound)” may be output as the allowable sound, and the message sound (second allowable sound) must be operated. It is not output in the “operation reception effect executed in the non-automatic reception mode” that is not received, but can be output only in the “operation reception effect executed in the automatic reception mode” that is received without operation. Yes.

  That is, it is possible to output a message sound (second allowable sound) that directly expresses that the operation should be performed, or to allow many types of acceptable reception sounds (first allowable sound, It is considered that the second permissible sound) should be output. However, in the post-operation effect, there is usually an effect risk that is executed in a mode with low expectation, so that the post-operation effect is performed. It is not always good to operate it in order to improve the game entertainment. In this regard, the “operation reception effect executed in a non-automatic reception mode” is an effect that allows selection such as “do not generate a post-operation effect”. “Automatic reception” that does not output the message sound (second permissible sound) directly and avoids outputting the message sound (second permissible sound) and does not have the right to generate a post-operation effect. It is desirable to output a message sound (second allowable sound) only at the “operation reception effect executed in the mode” or to output more types of allowable reception sound. In addition, in the “operation reception effect executed in the non-automatic reception mode”, if the set time ends without receiving the effect, the post-operation effect and the related effect will not be performed. The production will progress without suggesting the degree. In the non-moving reception effect, a message sound is not output in any operation reception effect, but in the “operation reception effect executed in the automatic reception mode”, a message sound is not output. An operation reception effect may be included.

  In addition, as described above, the pachinko machine 1 has a plurality of modes (“press!” And “sword!”) As the message sound (second allowable sound), and the effects shown in FIGS. 391 and 392 In the example, depending on whether the operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410 or the sword ornament 5001 (based on the result of the notice effect determination), any one of the plurality of modes is selectively selected. I am trying to output. In this case, when an operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410 and a message sound corresponding to the operation button 410 (“Press!”) Is output, the operation opportunity is given to the sword decorative body 5001. This suggests that a jackpot symbol appears when the symbol variation is stopped in the post-operation production according to the production reception, as compared to when the message sound corresponding to the message (“Say me!”) Is output. The ratio (expectation) in which the production mode appears is set low. The ratio (expected degree) at which the effect mode appears may be 0% or 100%.

  On the other hand, in the effect example shown in FIG. 390, the message sound (second allowable sound) is not output, and when the message sound (second allowable sound) is not output, the operation target Is not a sword decorative body 5001, and the operation button 410 is used as the operation target, and an operation reception effect executed in a non-automatic reception mode is generated. In addition, at least in the normal gaming state, it is suggested that a post-operation effect that is executed when an effect is received with an operation reception effect that does not output a message sound, "a jackpot symbol appears when the symbol variation is stopped" The ratio (expectation) of the effect mode to appear is the post-operation effect that is executed when the effect is received in the operation reception effect in which the message sound is output. “A big hit symbol appears when the symbol variation is stopped” It is made to be lower than the ratio (expectation) in which the production mode suggesting “appears” appears. In addition, 0% may be sufficient as the ratio (expectation degree) where the said production | presentation aspect appears, and 100% may be sufficient as it.

  According to such a configuration, when the operation reception effect is generated, first, “whether the message sound (second allowable sound) is output” becomes a branch point for knowing the level of expectation, and the message sound ( When the second allowable sound) is output, it is possible to know the level of expectation according to the mode. Further, even when the operation button 410 is used as an operation target, when the message sound (second allowable sound) is output, the post-operation effect can be enjoyed with relatively high expectation. become. Therefore, when a message sound (second permissible sound) is output, it is desirable to prevent the post-operation effect from being overlooked by executing the post-operation effect in the automatic reception mode. On the other hand, when the message sound (second permissible sound) is not output, the expectation level is relatively low, and the “sword ornament 5001” that is used only when the expectation level is high is an operation target. Will disappear. That is, in this case, it is desirable to give the player the right to select whether to generate the post-operation effect by performing the post-operation effect in a non-automatic reception mode.

  In the operation acceptance effects executed in FIGS. 391 and 392, a message sound is output and a message display is displayed when a set time (valid period) occurs. In this regard, as shown in FIGS. 391 (g) to (i) and FIGS. 392 (g) to (i), for the message sound, the timing at which the automatic button function is activated within the set time (valid period). The output state is ended (inaudible) before tr42A, while the message display is maintained at the timing tr42A when the automatic button function is activated, Furthermore, after the automatic button function is activated, it is not hidden (not visible) until at least the timing tr43 when the set time ends. In other words, in this case, when an effect is received by an operation by the player within the set time, the message display may be hidden when the set time has not elapsed in accordance with the effect received. When the automatic button function is activated, the message display (“Press!” Or “Say me!”) Is continuously displayed at least until the set time is over.

  According to such a configuration, when the production is accepted due to the activation of the automatic button function, the output state of the message sound (second allowable sound) may be terminated halfway (inaudible state). Since the message display is not hidden in the middle of the set time, the production is accepted by detecting the message sound (second allowable sound) or the operation target prompted by the message display. It will be possible to suggest to the player that the situation is not in place. That is, in this case, even if the operation means on the side that is not prompted to operate by a message sound or a message display is erroneously operated, it may indicate that the production reception due to the operation has not occurred. become able to.

  Further, in the operation reception effect (FIGS. 391 and 392) in which the automatic button function is activated, the remaining time is displayed (gauge display) when the production is accepted by the automatic button function being activated at the timing tr42A. Since the amount of gauge in the game will be left unintentionally, it is possible to suggest that there is a risk of `` losing the opportunity to operate '' against the intention of the player. In the set time (valid period), it becomes possible to prompt the user to perform an operation at an early stage regardless of the gauge remaining amount.

  In the operation reception effect (FIGS. 391 and 392) in which the automatic button function is enabled, when the automatic button function is enabled and the effect is received, the remaining time display (gauge display) is set at least. The dynamic display is continued until the time has passed. Therefore, it is possible to suggest to the player that there is no situation in which an effect has been received by detecting an operation on an operation target whose operation is prompted by a message sound or a message display. That is, in this case, even if the operation means on the side that is not prompted to operate by a message sound or a message display is erroneously operated, it may indicate that the production reception due to the operation has not occurred. become able to.

  In addition, the operation reception effect shown in FIG. 390 and the operation reception effect shown in FIG. 391 output the same effect sound (the first allowable sound in the first mode) as the reception allowable sound. Even when the operation reception effect is generated, it is possible to appropriately convey to the player that the operation opportunity is being given. In addition, in the operation reception effect shown in FIG. 391, since the second allowable sound that is not output in the operation reception effect shown in FIG. 390 is also output, which of these operation reception effects is generated? Can also be recognized. Furthermore, in the operation reception effect executed in the automatic reception mode in the specific variation pattern (corresponding production pattern), the ratio executed in the mode shown in FIG. 391 is relatively high, and FIG. The rate executed in the mode shown is relatively low, and when executed in the mode shown in FIG. 392, the rate of being stopped by the big hit symbol is relatively high. In other words, in this case, the first allowed sound is not the “first mode” and the “second mode” that is not used in the operation reception effect shown in FIG. Since it will be output in the game, it will be possible to improve the game entertainment.

  Further, in the effect example shown in FIG. 391 and FIG. 392, compared to the case of the effect example shown in FIG. 390, the effect sound (the first allowable sound) whose output state is maintained for a long time (first allowable sound) 392) may be used, and thus it is possible to suitably maintain the performance when “BGM playback (specific type of production sound)” is in a suppression mode or in a situation where it is output in silence. become able to.

  Further, in the effect example (suppression operation reception effect) shown in FIGS. 391 and 392, the acceptable reception sound (first allowable sound) is not necessarily used as the effect sound (second mode) in which the output state is maintained for a long time. In addition, it is assumed that the same acceptable reception sound (first acceptable sound of the first aspect) as that when the non-suppression operation reception effect (FIG. 390) occurs can also be generated. In addition, when the first permissible sound is output with the effect sound (second mode) in which the output state is maintained for a long time (FIG. 392), the effect sound (first output is maintained for only a short time). In the aspect), a new performance is added by increasing the proportion of symbols to be stopped with the big hit symbol than when the first permissible sound is output in (Aspect) (FIG. 391). This makes it possible to recognize that the reception of the production is permitted, while providing the performance when “BGM playback (specific type of production sound)” is being output in a suppression mode or in silence. It can be suitably maintained.

  Further, in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 390 to 392, when the first permissible sound is output with the effect sound (second mode) in which the output state is maintained for a long time (FIG. 392), the first permissible sound is output. If the production is accepted during the period in which the sound is being output, it is set to a non-output (non-audible) state even during the output stage (see FIG. 392 (c)). . On the other hand, when the first permissible sound is output as the effect sound (first mode) in which the output state is maintained for a short time (FIGS. 390 and 391), the first permissible sound is “suppression operation reception effect”. ”Or“ operation reception effect executed in automatic reception mode ”(FIG. 391), and when an effect is received during the output, this is not output (non-audible) at that time (See FIGS. 390 (c) and 391 (c)). That is, in this case, in the operation acceptance effect shown in FIG. 390, even if the effect is accepted when the first allowable sound is in the output state, the output state is maintained until the end of the reproduction data as the first allowable sound. The Rukoto. Note that the first permissible sound is in the output state even during the period of the timings tr41 to tr42. However, since the operation is not detected during the period, the first permissible sound is not received. Needless to say, the output state is not interrupted.

  That is, as described above, in the non-suppression operation reception effect, unlike the suppression operation reception effect, the operation reception effect is generated without suppressing “BGM playback (specific type effect sound)”, so the post-operation effect is missed. The possibility is relatively high, and when the operation reception mode is executed in the non-automatic reception mode, the post-operation effect may not be generated unlike the case where the operation reception mode is executed in the automatic reception mode. Therefore, when these operation reception effects occur, it is assumed that some players repeatedly hit before the set time occurs. However, in this case, if the operation is detected by repeated hitting, there is a concern that it may be difficult to understand whether it is an effect that has occurred as a post-operation effect or a notice effect that has nothing to do with the operation. It is desirable to eliminate such a concern by maintaining the output state until the end of the reproduced data (FIG. 390). On the other hand, in the suppression operation reception effect and the non-automatic reception effect, there is no need for repeated hits. Therefore, in order to suppress games due to such repeated hits, the first allowable sound is the first and second modes. It is desirable to make it difficult to recognize whether or not the output was made (stopping the output in the middle).

  Even if the presentation is accepted by the player's operation within the set time, the message display will be within the set time only when the operation detection is slow, such as immediately before the automatic button function is activated. It may be displayed continuously until the timing of ending, or the dynamic display may be continued until the timing when the remaining time display (gauge display) ends within the set time (described above). Shared programs).

  In addition, as described above, in the post-operation effects, there is usually an effect risk that is executed in a low-expected aspect, so that the operation so that the post-operation effects are performed is performed in order to improve game entertainment. It is not always good. In this regard, in the effect example (non-automatic reception effect) shown in FIG. 390, it is relatively early if the acceptable reception sound (first allowable sound) is output for a sufficient time to suggest that the effect reception is permitted. By using the mode (first mode) that is terminated at the same time, “time for determining whether or not to generate the production reception” is created while the acceptable reception sound is not output. On the other hand, in the automatic reception effect (FIGS. 391 and 392), since it is not necessary to create such a time, the allowable reception sound (first allowable sound) is output in the same aspect (first aspect). In addition, there is a case where the allowable sound (first allowable sound) is output in a longer mode (second mode) than this, and it is suggested that the degree of expectation varies depending on the mode. . In addition, by maintaining the output state of the acceptable sound for a relatively long time, it is possible to suggest that the automatic button function has not been activated yet, and there is a sense of security. In particular, the player can be prompted to perform an operation.

  In the automatic reception effect (FIGS. 391 and 392), the automatic button function is activated even when the allowable reception sound (first allowable sound) is output in a long mode (second mode) (FIG. 392). The reception permission sound (first permission sound) is made inaudible before the arrival timing tr42A, and the two reception permission sounds (first permission sound and second permission sound) are set at different timings. I try to end it.

  As a result, it is possible to recognize that the timing tr42 at which the automatic button function is activated does not arrive until the acceptable reception sound (first allowable sound, second allowable sound) becomes inaudible. In the non-audible state, it becomes possible to indicate that the automatic button function can be activated soon if it is not operated quickly. At this time, at least the long side mode (second mode) and the second permissible sound whose output state is maintained longer than the first permissible sound of the first mode, the volume and pitch of the sound as time passes. It is desirable to change at least one of them in order to easily recognize how much time has passed.

  In the operation reception effects shown in FIGS. 391 and 392, “BGM playback (specific type effect sound)” is output in a suppressed manner or silence when an operation opportunity is given, thereby generating a post-operation effect. When it is done, it is decided to make a stunning design so that the production sound corresponding to this is noticeable. In this regard, regarding the acceptable reception sound that is output when such a suppression operation reception effect is generated, if the reception is performed when the reception allowable sound is in the output state, the reception of the effect is performed. Since the output state is terminated, it is possible to make the production sound according to the post-operation production stand out without being disturbed by the acceptable reception sound.

  In addition, in the above production example, when the “non-suppression / non-automatic reception production” occurs, even if the production acceptance is made when the reception permission sound is in the output state, this is not interrupted and the output state is maintained. It was. However, instead of this, the “non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect” is relatively high in expectation, for example, when it occurs in the SP reach state in the high-expectation fluctuation pattern (corresponding effect pattern). Only when it is in the situation, in order to urge the concentration to the production, the production is performed when the acceptable reception sound (even if the same production sound (first mode) is output as the first allowable sound) is in the output state. You may make it interrupt this, if reception is made.

  In the production examples shown in FIGS. 391 and 392, the case where the “suppression / automatic reception effect” is generated has been described. However, the “non-suppression / automatic reception effect”, the “suppression / non-automatic reception effect”, etc. are also generated. In other words, it is also possible to make the production progress in the same manner when the “non-suppression / automatic reception effect” or the “suppression / non-automatic reception effect” occurs.

  Further, when the high expectation suppression reception effect is generated, the third mode in which the output time is maintained for a longer time than the first mode (FIG. 391) or the second mode (FIG. 392) can be output as the first allowable sound. When the third mode is output, it is desirable that the rate at which the big hit symbol appears when the symbol variation is stopped is higher than when the first mode and the second mode are output. According to such a configuration, it is possible to recognize the expectation level by paying attention to how long the output time of the first permissible sound lasts, and the set time (validation in which the production reception is permitted) It is possible to more suitably maintain the gaming interest within (period).

  At this time, as for the third mode, it is desirable to maintain the output state until the timing tr42A at which the automatic button function is activated arrives. That is, in this case, when paying attention to how long the output time of the first permissible sound lasts, it is necessary to confirm that the output is in the third mode instead of the first mode or the second mode. The longer the time it takes, the higher the risk that the automatic button function will be activated, so it is possible to favorably maintain a sense of tension within the set time (valid period) during which production reception is permitted. It becomes like this. Other matters when the third mode is output are the same as the contents described with reference to FIGS. 391 and 392, such as the fact that the presentation is interrupted when the third mode is in the output state. is there.

  Note that the automatic button function may be enabled whenever the timing tr42A within a specific fluctuation pattern (corresponding effect pattern) arrives, or a specific fluctuation when a big hit is obtained. It is activated when the timing tr42A in the pattern (effect pattern corresponding to) arrives, but when the big hit is not obtained, the timing tr42A in the specific fluctuation pattern (corresponding effect pattern) arrives It may not be activated.

  A plurality of types of effects are prepared as non-automatic reception effects in which the automatic button is not activated within the set time (valid period), and in some of these effects, an acceptable sound (first) is generated when the set time (valid period) occurs. (Allowable sound, second allowable sound) may not be output. In other words, in this case, when the set time (effective period) during which the production reception is permitted occurs, there are “0” reception allowable sounds and “1” reception allowable sounds (first allowable sound). ) And the case where there are “2” permissible sounds (first permissible sound, second permissible sound), suggesting how much the pachinko machine 1 is “prompt for operation” Will be able to.

  As a method of hiding the message display and the remaining time display (gauge display), a method of starting fade-out when the non-display timing comes may be adopted.

  In the production examples shown in FIG. 391 and FIG. 392, “BGM playback (specific type of production sound)” is output in a suppressed manner or silence during the period of the timing tr40 to tr44. You may make it the state of an output (The reproduction | regeneration period in which the audible sound is recorded among sound data is complete | finished, or channel assignment is complete | finished). That is, in this case, “BGM playback (specific type of effect sound)” as new data is assigned to the channel at the timing tr44, and an output state is set.

By the way, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the above-described effect example, as described above, as a result of the change pattern determination, a high expectation change pattern (SP reach change pattern) that develops into SP reach (reach effect with background change, etc.) When a specific variation pattern is selected, regardless of which result is obtained as an effect determination (notice determination, etc.), if the effect of the specific variation pattern progresses to a specific timing during SP reach, the effect acceptance The operation reception effect (valid period) that is allowed
-“Suppression reception effect (FIGS. 391 (a) and (b)”) is set to set a set time during which the acceptance of the effect is permitted while the “BGM playback sound” corresponding to the variation pattern is output in a suppression mode or silence. Or (see FIGS. 392 (a) and (b)), and no operation is detected for the operation means that is the operation target within the set time (timing tr42 to tr43) in which the reception of the production is permitted. Even when the timing tr42A within the set time arrives, the production reception is automatically generated internally (the automatic button function is activated), and the post-operation production is performed based on the production reception. "Automatic reception mode (see FIG. 391 (j) and FIG. 392 (j))”
It is generated as a “suppression / automatic reception effect” executed by.

  At this time, based on the result of the effect determination (notice effect determination), whether the sound effect (first allowable sound) among the acceptable reception sounds is output in a plurality of modes including the first mode and the second mode. , It is determined whether the message sound (second allowable sound) among the allowable reception sounds is to be output as “Press!” Or “Now!”, And the allowable reception sound (first 1) in a manner corresponding to the determination result. As described above, the allowable sound and the second allowable sound are output (FIGS. 391 and 392). As described above, when the second mode is output as the first permissible sound, the degree of expectation is higher than when the first mode is output. Is output, the degree of expectation is higher than when “Press!” Is output. At this time, as the order of high expectation, “second mode & sword!”, “Second mode & sword!”, “First mode & sword!”, “First mode & sword!” It is desirable to maintain the game entertainment when the operation button 410 is selected as the operation means.

  Also, as described above, in the “suppression / automatic reception effect” according to the above-described effect example, the first permissible sound is in an output state even when any one of a plurality of modes is output as the first permissible sound. When the production is accepted, it is interrupted (see FIGS. 391 and 392). In addition, for the second permissible sound, regardless of whether it is output with “Press!” Or “Shoot the sword!”, If the production is accepted when the second permissible sound is in the output state, Was decided to be interrupted.

  However, instead of this, when an effect is received when the first allowable sound is in an output state in a mode different from the first mode among a plurality of modes, the output state is changed based on the reception of the effect. However, when an effect is received when the first permissible sound is in the output state in the first mode, the output state may be maintained without ending. That is, in this case, in the “suppression / automatic reception effect”, even if the output state of the first allowable sound is interrupted in the middle and the expectation level cannot be recognized, the first aspect having the lowest expectation degree among the plural aspects Since it is possible to recognize that this is not the case, it is expected to suppress a decrease in the entertainment interest of the game. Further, even if a mode with a low expectation level appears in the post-operation effect, if the output state of the first allowable sound with the lowest expectation level is maintained among the plurality of modes, the post-operation effect is displayed. In the first place, re-recognizing that the production state is difficult to expect, it becomes easier to accept the result appearing as the post-operation production, and it is expected that the game entertainment will be significantly reduced.

  Even in the case of adopting such a modified example, when the “non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect” occurs within the predetermined variation pattern, it is as described with reference to FIG. The case where the first allowable sound is output in the second mode in the “suppression / automatic reception effect” within the specific variation pattern is as described with reference to FIG. 392. That is, among the above-described example effects, the “effect mode shown in FIG. 391” when the first allowable sound is output in the first mode by the “suppression / automatic reception effect” that appears in a specific variation pattern is “ It will be executed instead of the “effect mode shown in 393”.

  As shown in FIG. 393, “the effect mode shown in FIG. 393” is basically the same as the content described in “the effect mode shown in FIG. 391” and the contents described in other examples. is there. However, in “the production mode shown in FIG. 393”, even when the production is accepted at timing tr <b> 42 a in which the first allowable sound is in the output state in the first mode, the output state is interrupted by the production acceptance. In other words, the output state is maintained until the end of the reproduction data as the first allowable sound. On the other hand, even when the “suppression / automatic reception effect” occurs within a specific variation pattern, the first allowable sound is different from the first aspect with the lowest expectation among the plurality of aspects (for example, As described above, when the output is received in the second mode (for example, FIG. 392 (c)), when the effect is received at the timing tr42a, the output state is interrupted based on the reception of the effect.

  According to such a configuration, when the “suppression / automatic reception effect” occurs within a specific variation pattern, the effect reception is performed at an early timing that makes it difficult to confirm which aspect is the first allowable sound. Even if it is made, it is possible to recognize the degree of expectation by confirming whether or not the output state of the first permissible sound is terminated with this as an opportunity. In particular, in this production example (FIG. 391, FIG. 393, etc.), the first allowable sound is output in a manner extending from the timing tr41 before the set time (effective period) occurs to the timing tr42 at which the set time is set. Since the first allowable sound is not interrupted regardless of the mode from the time when the output state is reached at timing tr41 until the timing tr42 arrives, the first allowable sound is It becomes possible to function as time for “discriminating” which mode is.

  In this regard, in the modification shown in FIG. 393, the first mode in which the output state is not interrupted is prepared as that the output state is maintained for a shorter time than any other mode in which the output state is interrupted. It is said. Thus, even if the post-operation effect is started when the first permissible sound is output in the first mode, the effect sound as the post-operation effect and the first permissible sound It becomes possible to shorten the time when each output state overlaps, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the game entertainment interest.

  Further, in the modification shown in FIG. 393, the first allowable sound output in the first mode can also be output in the effect example shown in FIG. 390 (see FIG. 390 (c)). In the production example, since the reception of the production is not interrupted and the output state is maintained until the end of the reproduction data as the first acceptable sound, the first allowable sound is Even if a situation that is not interrupted by the production reception appears, it can be provided as a production without any sense of incongruity.

  However, regarding the second permissible sound, if an effect is received when it is in the output state, it is based on the fact that the effect is received regardless of which aspect is output as the first allowable sound. The output state is interrupted (see FIGS. 392 (d) and 393 (d)). That is, in this case, for the first permissible sound, a function suggesting the degree of expectation when the stage reception is made early is performed, whereas for the second permissible sound, the stage reception is performed by operation detection ( When the operation reception effect is generated by providing a function that suggests whether the automatic button function is in a situation where the operation opportunity can be lost or not) It becomes possible to suitably maintain the gaming interests of the game.

  On the other hand, the acceptable reception sound output when the operation reception effect shown in FIG. 390 may be output in the first mode, or may be output in the special mode. However, it is desirable to maintain the output state without ending the output state even if an effect is received when the output is performed in a special mode. In addition, when outputting in a special mode, it is desirable to make the ratio of jackpot symbols appearing higher when the symbol is stopped than when outputting in the first mode. This percentage may be 100%. The output may be performed in a different mode from the first mode and the special mode.

  That is, in the operation reception effect shown in FIG. 390, “BGM playback (specific type of effect sound)” is maintained in an output state in a non-suppressed manner, and there are problems such as lack of performance. Therefore, it can be said that it is more desirable to be able to confirm the aspect as the first allowable sound and recognize the degree of expectation even in the situation where the post-operation effect is started.

  In addition, in the “suppression operation reception effect that gives an operation opportunity while the specific type of production sound is output in a suppression mode or silence, or in a non-output state”, the specific type of production sound is suppressed or It goes without saying that other sounds can be output in a non-suppressing manner even in a non-audible state.

  Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the above-described production example, “suppression that gives an operation opportunity while a specific type of production sound is output in a suppression mode or silence, or in a non-output state” In the “operation reception effect (FIGS. 391 to 393)”, the acceptable reception sound that is output when the set time (effective period) is generated is any one of “a plurality of modes in which the length of time that is maintained as an output state is different”. In the non-suppressed mode, output is possible, and the degree of expectation (the ratio at which the jackpot symbol appears) differs depending on the output mode. In this regard, even in the “non-suppression operation reception effect that gives an operation opportunity while a specific type of effect sound (for example, BGM reproduction) is output in an unsuppressed manner”, the reception allowable sound (first allowable sound) is used. In addition to the case where the first mode is output in the non-suppressed mode (FIG. 390), the acceptable sound (first permitted sound) in a mode different from the first mode (length is different, production sound itself is different, etc.) ) May be output in a non-suppressed manner, and the degree of expectation (the rate at which jackpot symbols appear) may differ depending on the outputted manner. According to such a configuration, the acceptable reception sound that is output when the “non-suppression operation reception effect” occurs and the acceptable reception sound that is output when the “suppression operation reception effect” occurs are both “output state” Since the output can be performed in any one of “a plurality of modes with different lengths of time to be maintained”, and further, the degree of expectation varies depending on the output modes, so “non-suppression operation reception effect” And the “suppression operation reception effect”, it is possible to favorably maintain the game entertainment interest until the effect is received.

  FIG. 394 is a time chart illustrating an effect example in which the first allowable sound is output in a specific manner upon occurrence of a “non-suppression operation reception effect (here, non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect)”.

  As shown in FIG. 394, also in this effect example, the portions that are not particularly described are basically the same as those in the effect example shown in FIG. However, in the non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect (timing tr31 to tr33) according to this effect example, when it occurs, an effect determination as to which of the plurality of modes is used to output the first allowable sound (for example, at the start of symbol variation) As shown in FIGS. 394 (c) and 394 (g), as a result of the performance determination, “specific mode” is used instead of “first mode”. When the symbol variation is stopped, the ratio of the big hit symbol appearing is higher than when the symbol is output in the “first mode”. The specific mode is output over a longer time than the first mode.

  Here, in both the “non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect” and the “suppression / automatic reception effect”, the first permissible sound can be output by the first mode when these operation reception effects occur. As described above (see FIG. 390 and FIG. 391 (or FIG. 393)). That is, in this case, in both the “non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect” and the “suppression / automatic reception effect”, when the operation reception effect is generated, the same effect sound is output over the same time as the first allowable sound. The Rukoto.

  On the other hand, when the first allowable sound is output in a specific manner when the “non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect” is generated (FIG. 394), the first allowable sound is generated when the “suppression / automatic reception effect” is generated. In the case of being output in two modes (FIG. 392), different effect sounds are output as different first allowable sounds over different times. In this effect example, when the first allowable sound is output in the second mode, it is output over a longer time than when the first allowable sound is output in the specific mode.

  However, on the other hand, when the same effect sound is output as the first permissible sound over the same period of time (see the first aspect (see FIG. 390 and FIG. 391 (or FIG. 393)), the degree of expectation (the ratio at which the jackpot symbol appears) The “first mode” is output upon occurrence of “non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect (FIG. 390)” or “suppression / automatic reception effect (FIG. 391 (or FIG. 393)”). In this case, when the “first mode” appears when the “non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect (FIG. 390)” occurs, the reception of the effect is performed. As for the degree of expectation (proportion) that suggests that a jackpot symbol will appear in the post-operation presentation according to the “first mode” when the “suppression / automatic reception presentation (FIG. 391 (or FIG. 393))” occurs Directing reception in case The big hit symbol appears in effect after corresponding operation is lower than the expected level suggested (percentage). The expectation (percentage) may be 0% and 100%.

  On the other hand, the expectation level (when the “second mode (FIG. 392)” or the “specific mode (FIG. 394)” appears) when different production sounds are output as the first allowable sound for different times ( The ratio at which the jackpot symbol appears) is the same as the predetermined value regardless of whether the “non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect” or “suppression / automatic reception effect” is output. The degree of expectation (ratio) may also be 0% or 100%.

  According to such a configuration, even if the same effect sound is output as the first permissible sound for the same time, either “non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect” or “suppression / automatic reception effect” occurs. The expectation does not necessarily become the same depending on whether or not. Further, even when the “non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect” occurs, when the specific mode is output as the first permissible sound, The same expectation level as the “automatic reception effect” is suggested.

  In other words, in this case, the “non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect” and the “suppression / automatic reception effect” are made different from each other even if the first allowable sound is output in the same mode (first mode). In addition, since the first allowable sound may be output in different modes (second mode, specific mode), it becomes possible to make it appear that there is no production relationship with each other. . However, in reality, when the first permissible sound is output in the second mode or the specific mode, the expectation level is set to be the same regardless of the different output sound and different output time. It becomes possible to have a secret relationship. For example, when “BGM playback” is suppressed and “BGM playback” is not suppressed at the occurrence of a set time (valid period) during which production reception is permitted, normal (acceptable sound is the first mode). When the production is accepted, by starting a different post-operation production (different expectation), the productions appear to have no production relationship with each other. However, when the acceptance allowable sound is output as the second mode or the specific mode, the operation when the stage is accepted while the stage is displayed as if the stage is different depending on whether or not “BGM playback” is suppressed. As a post-production, the same content (the same expectation) can be made to appear, and it is expected to provide a surprise-like production by providing a production relationship in secret.

  In this case, in both of the “non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect” and the “suppression / automatic reception effect”, a plurality of modes are prepared as the first permissible sound. "Is preferably set as a mode with the shortest output time among a plurality of modes for any operation reception effect. In addition, the “second mode” as the first allowable sound is set as the mode with the longest output time among the plurality of modes that can be output when the “suppression / automatic reception effect” occurs, and The “specific mode” as the first allowable sound is set as the mode with the longest output time among the multiple modes that can be output when the “non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect” occurs. It is desirable that the output times are different from each other (for example, “the output time of the specific mode” <“the output time of the second mode”) so that there is no production relationship with each other.

  In addition, in the “non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect”, the output is not finished midway regardless of whether or not the effect is received, regardless of whether the first allowable sound is output in the first mode or the specific mode. It is desirable to be able to maintain the output state. That is, in this case, since the output of the first permissible sound can be left after the post-operation effect is started, the “non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect” having a relatively low expectation is executed. Even if the first allowable sound is output in the “specific mode” that pushes it up to the same expected level as the “suppression / automatic reception effect” that has a relatively high expectation, It becomes possible to eliminate the possibility of end. On the other hand, whether or not the output state of the first permissible sound is interrupted when an effect is received by the “suppression / automatic reception effect” is as described with reference to FIGS. 391 to 393.

  In the above-described effect example, when the second mode is output as the first allowable sound in the “suppression / automatic reception effect” (FIG. 392), and as the first allowable sound in the “non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect”. The expected degree is the same as when the specific mode is output (FIG. 394). However, in the “suppression / automatic reception effect”, the output time is maintained as a first allowable sound over a longer time than the “first mode (FIG. 391)” or the “second mode (FIG. 392)”. When the “third mode” is output, the “third mode” is output instead of the “second mode” as the first allowable sound in the “suppression / automatic reception effect”. In the case of “non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect”, “expectation” is set to be the same as when “specific mode” is output as the first allowable sound. The “third aspect” is as described above.

  Also, in the effect example shown in FIG. 394, when an effect is received within the set time (valid period) (in the figure, timing tr32a), an effect display device 1600 (first display) is provided as an effect after operation corresponding to the effect received. The post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) in the first effect member) and the post-operation effect sound output (effect sound) by the speaker (second effect member) are generated at least. In the figure, the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) and the post-operation effect sound output (effect sound) by the speaker are maintained in the execution state for the same time, but this is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) is not displayed at a predetermined timing that comes after the timing tr33, even if the effect is received at any timing within the set time (effective period). In contrast, the post-operation effect sound output (effect sound) may be maintained in an output state for a predetermined time from the timing when the effect is accepted. However, in any state where the stage is accepted at any timing, both the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) and the post-operation effect sound output (effect sound) are obtained when the timing tr33 has not elapsed. It is required to maintain the output state.

  Further, in the above-described production example, the length of the “time when the acceptable sound is output” is not the length of the “time when the sound data of the acceptable sound is assigned to the channel”. It means the length of time required for “time output as audible sound”.

  Further, in the above-described production example, in order to show that there is no production relationship between the “non-suppression / non-automatic reception production” and the “suppression / automatic reception production”, the “second mode” or “third” As for “Aspect”, “Suppression / automatic reception effect” and “Non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect” can be output only by “Suppression / automatic reception effect”. It is desirable that output is possible only with “non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect” among “automatic reception effect” and “non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect”. In addition, when the “second mode” and the “third mode” are prepared as output candidates in the “suppression / automatic reception effect”, respectively, the “acceptance / automatic reception effect” specific acceptance allowable sound (second Even if the mode, the third mode) is output, the “non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect” will not necessarily have the same degree of expectation as when this specific acceptable sound (specific mode) is output. It is possible to more suitably improve the performance as an acceptable reception sound that is output when the “suppression / automatic reception effect” occurs.

  Further, the non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect (timing tr31 to tr33) does not have to be generated as an effect related to the low expected fluctuation pattern (non-reach fluctuation pattern). As described above, the production may occur within the production period before the development to the SP reach state among the productions related to the expected fluctuation pattern (for example, a specific fluctuation pattern).

  By the way, in the above effect example, the “suppression operation reception effect” that can suppress a specific type of effect sound (for example, an effect sound of BGM playback) has a relatively low suppression degree “weak suppression mode (first A plurality of modes including at least a “suppression operation reception effect” and a “strong suppression mode (second suppression operation reception effect)” that is set to a relatively high or non-output state. Also good. When a specific type of effect sound is output with a relatively high degree of suppression, the volume may be set to “0”.

  According to such a configuration, when a set time (valid period) in which the reception of the production is permitted is generated, it is possible to provide the production performance as to how much the specific type of the production sound is suppressed. Become.

  Here, in order to suitably obtain the above-described effects, the degree of expectation depends on which of the “weak suppression mode (first suppression operation reception effect)” and “strong suppression mode (second suppression operation reception effect)” has occurred. It is desirable that the (ratio at which jackpot symbols appear) be different. Here, when the “weak suppression mode (first suppression operation reception effect)” occurs, the expectation degree (ratio) that suggests that a big hit symbol appears in the “post-operation effect according to the effect reception” is “ When the “strong suppression mode (second suppression operation reception effect)” occurs, it is lower than the expectation level (ratio) that suggests that a big hit symbol appears in the “post-operation effect according to the effect reception”. The degree of expectation (ratio) may be 0% or 100%.

  In addition, with respect to the “weak suppression mode (first suppression operation reception effect)”, an effect corresponding to a highly expected variation pattern that develops into SP reach (such as a reach effect with a background change) and a reach state are not formed (or While the reach state can be formed, it can appear in any of the effects according to the low expected fluctuation pattern (which does not develop into SP reach), whereas “strong suppression mode (second suppression operation reception effect) ")" May not be generated in the low expectation effect pattern, but may be generated as an effect corresponding to the high expectation variation pattern. Even in such a configuration, the expectation when the “weak suppression mode (first suppression operation reception effect)” occurs is the expectation when the “strong suppression mode (second suppression operation reception effect)” occurs. It can be said that it is lower than the degree.

  In order to obtain the above-mentioned effects more suitably, it is possible to generate a “special effect state” that can be shifted based on the fact that the special effect condition is satisfied, and in the “special effect state”, the player Each time an effect is received during a set time (valid period) during which an operation promotion image (such as a bag image or gauge display) that prompts an operation is displayed, a specific type of effect sound (for example, an effect sound for BGM playback) ) Is suppressed, it is desirable that the post-operation effect corresponding to the effect reception is executed (started). According to such a “special effect state”, each time a set time (valid period) in which the effect acceptance is allowed occurs, how much the specific type effect sound (for example, the effect sound of BGM playback) is suppressed. In addition to the degree of expectation suggested by post-operation presentation, the degree of expectation is also suggested by such degree of presentation (how much it is suppressed). As a result, it is expected to further improve the game entertainment when the reception of the production is permitted.

  In addition, an effect pattern (for example, high expectation fluctuation) in which “weak suppression mode (first suppression operation reception effect)” and “strong suppression mode (second suppression operation reception effect)” can be executed in sequence within the pattern variation. You may make it prepare the production | generation corresponding to a specific fluctuation pattern among patterns. That is, in this case, even if the “weak suppression mode (first suppression operation reception effect)” on the side with relatively low expectation occurs, the “strong suppression mode (second suppression operation on the side with relatively high expectation). Since the possibility that the “acceptance effect” will occur will be left, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the gaming interest when the player recognizes that the degree of suppression of the specific type of effect sound is small (weak suppression mode) Will be able to.

In addition, in order to more suitably suppress the decrease in the gaming interest when the “weak suppression mode (first suppression operation reception effect)” occurs, the “strong suppression mode (second suppression operation reception effect)”
-When a specific variation pattern is selected from the highly anticipated variation patterns (SP reach variation patterns) that develop into SP reach (reach performance with background change, etc.) as a result of the above variation pattern determination, the performance determination Regardless of which result is obtained (e.g., advance notice determination), the effect of the specific variation pattern occurs when it reaches a specific timing during SP reach. About the “Operation Reception Direction”)
Even if the specific variation pattern is selected, if a special result is not obtained in the production determination (notice determination, etc.), it does not occur even if the production of the specific variation pattern progresses to a predetermined timing. When a special result is obtained in the effect determination (notice determination, etc.), it occurs when the effect of the specific variation pattern has progressed to a predetermined timing. Then, when the “weak suppression mode (first suppression operation reception effect)” occurs in the production according to the specific fluctuation pattern, the “weak suppression mode (first suppression operation reception production) in the production according to the specific fluctuation pattern” occurs. Compared to the time when "" did not occur, the proportion of the post-operation effect being executed in a highly expected manner when the effect is accepted in the "strong suppression mode (second suppression operation reception effect)" It is desirable to make it.

  In such a configuration, in the effect according to the specific variation pattern, the “strong suppression mode (second suppression operation reception effect)” always occurs, whereas the “weak suppression mode (first suppression operation reception effect)”. "Does not necessarily occur, and when the" weak suppression mode (first suppression operation reception effect) "occurs, the post-operation effect with high expectation in the" strong suppression mode (second suppression operation reception effect) " Since the rate at which “I” is executed becomes high, it is possible to attract attention whether or not the “weak suppression mode (first suppression operation reception effect)” occurs, and the “weak suppression mode ( It is possible to improve the game entertainment when the “first suppression operation reception effect” ”occurs.

  FIGS. 395 to 397 show “weak suppression mode (first suppression operation reception effect)” and “strong suppression mode (second suppression operation reception effect) in the production according to the high expectation fluctuation pattern (for example, a specific fluctuation pattern). It is a time chart which shows the example of an effect in the case where " FIG. 395 shows an effect example when an operation is detected at a relatively early stage after the set time (effective period) occurs. FIG. 396 shows a comparison after the set time (effective period) occurs. FIG. 397 shows an effect example when no operation is detected within the set time (effective period).

  As a result of the establishment of the start condition (digestion on hold) and the determination of the variation pattern, “specific variation pattern” among “high-expected variation patterns that develop into SP reach (reach production with background change, etc.)” Is selected, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first performs an effect determination (notice determination or the like) corresponding to the specific variation pattern. After that, the decorative design variation effect (such as the rendering of the effect according to the specific variation pattern and the sound output of the BGM playback according to the specific variation pattern) is started, and the effect determination is performed within the execution period of the variation effect. An effect (notice effect, etc.) according to the result (notice determination, etc.) is additionally executed on the selected “specific variation pattern” itself (effect pattern).

  However, in the “specific variation pattern”, the content of the effect that appears after the timing tr40 (the timing in the SP reach state) has arrived after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the decorative design variation effect. Is the same as in the case of the production example described with reference to FIGS. 391 and 392. That is, first, when the timing tr40 arrives, regardless of which result is obtained as the notice effect determination, “a state in which a specific type of effect sound (BGM playback sound) is output in a suppression manner or silence” Here, the state related to the suppression is referred to as a “strong suppression mode”, and the timing tr42 (decorative pattern of the decorative design is displayed while the “strong suppression mode” appears in this way. When a specific time has elapsed since the start of the fluctuating effect, the timing within the SP reach state) has arrived, regardless of which result is obtained as the notice effect determination. A production (effective period) is generated. Here, the operation reception effect that occurs while the “strong suppression mode” appears is referred to as a “second suppression operation reception effect”.

  On the other hand, in the “specific variation pattern”, when the timing tr51 (timing before the development of the SP reach state) arrives after the predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation design of the decorative symbol, On the condition that a special result is obtained, an operation reception effect (effective period) in which the effect reception is allowed is additionally generated with respect to the symbol effect (effect pattern) based on the variation pattern. However, as will be described later, the operation reception effect (valid period) generated at the timing tr51 is different from the operation reception effect (non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect) shown in FIG. Although the degree of suppression is lower than the “production (strong suppression mode)”, a process of suppressing the volume of the “specific type of production sound (BGM playback sound)” can be performed under a predetermined condition.

  According to such a configuration, even if there is a situation in which an effect corresponding to the “specific variation pattern” is being executed, when a special result is not obtained as an effect determination (notice determination or the like), FIG. The production example shown in FIG. 392 appears, that is, the “weak suppression mode (first suppression operation reception production)” does not occur in the production according to the variation pattern, and the “strong suppression mode (second suppression) Operation reception effect) ”only occurs. On the other hand, when a special result is obtained as the effect determination (notice determination, etc.), as shown in FIGS. 395 to 397, “weak suppression mode (first suppression operation) Reception effect) ”first occurs, and thereafter, the second suppression operation reception effect (strong suppression mode) shown in FIGS. 391 and 392 further occurs.

  In the effect examples shown in FIGS. 395 to 397, the effect contents after the timing tr40 arrives are the same as described with reference to FIG. 391, and thus the description thereof is omitted here. In this case, for the second suppression operation reception effect (strong suppression mode), the first allowable sound is not the first mode shown in FIG. 391 or FIGS. 392, the contents related to the effects shown in FIG. 391, such as being output in the second mode shown in FIG. Needless to say, the present invention is appropriately applied to the contents of the effects after the timing tr40 (strong suppression mode (second suppression operation reception effect)) among the examples of effects to be performed.

  As described above, in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 395 to 397, the timing tr51 (development to the SP reach state) after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the decorative effect change effect (the effect corresponding to the specific change pattern). When the timing (before timing) arrives, the operation reception effect (effective period) in which the reception of the effect is allowed is generated as a “weak suppression mode (first suppression operation reception effect)”.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the “weak suppression mode (first suppression operation reception effect)” that is generated at the timing tr51 in the change effect according to the specific change pattern is as follows.
A set time (valid period) during which presentation is allowed is set while “BGM playback sound” corresponding to the fluctuation pattern is output in a non-suppressed manner, but within the set time (valid period) When an effect is accepted, the “conditional suppression acceptance effect (FIG. 395) changes the“ BGM playback sound ”from a non-suppressed mode to a weakly suppressed mode (a mode with a relatively low degree of suppression). (See (a), (b)) ”, and when no operation is detected with respect to the operation means that is the operation target within the set time (timing tr51 to tr52) in which the reception of the production is permitted, As a result, each process ("BGM playback sound" is changed from a non-suppression mode to a weak suppression mode, and post-operation effects (liquid crystal display, effects are not received). Sound) The setting time without the (time) has finished elapsed "non-automatic reception mode (FIG. 397 (a), (b), see (f))"
Is generated as “conditional suppression (weak suppression mode) / non-automatic reception effect”. As a method of outputting “BGM playback sound” in a weakly suppressed manner, the volume value for the channel to which the “BGM playback sound” is assigned is set to a volume value (audible volume, for example). ) Is lower than “0”), and a method of changing the setting to a weak suppression value (for example, the volume value (audible volume) is “10”) can be employed.

  According to such “conditional suppression (weak suppression mode) / non-automatic reception effect (first suppression operation reception effect)”, unless an effect is received by an operation by the player, “specific effect sound ( BGM playback sound) is not shifted to a state where it is output in a suppression mode, so that it can appear as if the “non-suppression reception effect” shown in FIGS. 390 and 394 occurs. It becomes like this. That is, in this case, when the player operates, it is recognized for the first time that it is not a “suppression acceptance effect” by changing to “a state in which a specific type of effect sound (BGM playback sound) is output in a suppression mode”. As a result, it will be possible to improve the game entertainment through surprise effects.

  In order to obtain such an effect, “conditional suppression (weak suppression mode) / non-automatic reception effect (FIGS. 395 to 397)” can be generated depending on the result of the performance determination (notice determination, etc.). The variation pattern is selected only when it is in a special performance state (for example, a pre-reading performance zone), and when it is in the special performance state, “non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect ( As shown in FIG. 390, FIG. 394), a big hit symbol appears when the symbol variation is stopped rather than when the normal variation state in which the variation pattern that can be generated depending on the result of the effect determination (notice determination, etc.) is selected. It is desirable to increase the ratio (expectation). According to such a configuration, when “conditional suppression / non-automatic reception effect” appears, the degree of expectation is higher than when “non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect (FIGS. 390, 394)” appears. As a result, the above-mentioned surprise effect elements can be combined to improve the game entertainment.

  Furthermore, in order to obtain the above-described effects more suitably, the “strong suppression mode (second suppression operation reception effect)” can be generated in either “normal effect state” or “special effect state”. In the “normal production state”, the “non-suppression / non-automatic reception production (figure)” is created within the production according to one fluctuation pattern (one fluctuation pattern that is paired at the time). 390, FIG. 394) ”and“ suppression (strong suppression mode) / automatic reception effect (FIGS. 391, 392) ”can be generated in sequence, and in the“ special effect state ”, one fluctuation pattern (winning effect) In the production according to the one variation pattern paired in), “conditional suppression (weak suppression mode) / non-automatic reception effect (FIGS. 395 to 397)” and “suppression (strong suppression mode) / automatic reception” Production (FIGS. 391 and 392) ”will occur sequentially. It is desirable that way.

  In addition, in the “conditional suppression (weak suppression mode) / non-automatic reception effect”, when the set time (valid period) has elapsed without receiving the effect, “specific effect sound (BGM playback sound) ) Is not shifted to the “state of output in a weakly suppressed manner”, and progresses to the subsequent production (FIG. 397). In other words, in this case, whether “non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect” or “conditional suppression / non-automatic reception effect” occurred, and therefore, “normal effect state” and “special effect state” Since it is difficult to recognize which situation is present, the production after that will be advanced, so the expectation level is relatively low. Even when the “operation reception effect (effective period)” occurs, it is possible to more actively encourage the player to perform the operation.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when “conditional suppression (weak suppression mode) / non-automatic reception effect (FIGS. 395 to 397)” occurs, “non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect ( 390) ”occurs, the same effect sound (first mode) is output as the above-described acceptable reception sound (first allowable sound) over the same period of time. Suppression mode) / non-automatic reception effect (FIGS. 395 to 397) ”and“ non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect (FIG. 390) ”are made difficult to recognize.

In addition, in the “conditional suppression (weak suppression mode) / non-automatic reception effect (FIGS. 395 to 397)”, as in the case where the “non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect (FIG. 390)” occurs,
The output of the “acceptable sound (first allowable sound)” is started when the timing tr50 slightly before the set time occurs, and the output state is maintained across the timing tr51. point,
・ The second allowable sound (for example, message sound) is not output, and only the first allowable sound (for example, sound effect) is output. ・ Set time (valid period) is set. When the timing tr51 arrives, the effect display device 1600 displays a habit image imitating the operation means that is the operation target in the operation reception effect, and suggests the remaining time until the set time has elapsed. Each configuration such as the point where gauge display is performed, etc. is also adopted, and this also makes “conditional suppression (weak suppression mode) / non-automatic reception effect (FIGS. 395 to 397)” and “non-suppression / It is difficult to recognize which of the “non-automatic reception effect (FIG. 390)” is occurring. Therefore, for example, the method shown in FIG. 208 (J2) is adopted as the display method for the haze image or gauge display, as in the case where the “non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect (FIG. 390)” occurs. It is desirable that the same aspect as the example of the effect shown in FIG. 390 can be adopted for the timing at which these display images (the haze image and the gauge display) are hidden based on the fact that the effect is received. desirable.

  Moreover, in the “conditional suppression (weak suppression mode) / non-automatic reception effect (FIGS. 395 to 397)” according to this embodiment, this is also the set time (valid) as in the case of the effect example shown in FIG. When the production is accepted at the timings tr51a and tr52a (FIGS. 395 (c) and 396 (c)) in which the “acceptable sound (first allowable sound)” is in the output state after the (period) is generated, the setting is made. While the time (valid period) itself ends, the “acceptable sound (first allowable sound)” does not end halfway and ends as the first allowable sound (the same as when there was no operation) The output state is maintained until the timing (FIG. 397 (c)).

  According to such a configuration, even after the presentation is accepted by the player's operation, simply listening to the acceptable sound (first acceptable sound), “conditional suppression (weak suppression mode) / non-automatic reception” It is possible to make it difficult to recognize which of the “production (FIGS. 395 to 397)” and the “non-suppression / non-automatic reception production (FIG. 390)” is occurring. That is, while the output state (non-suppression mode) of the acceptable reception sound (first permissible sound) is maintained, the state is changed to “a state where a specific type of effect sound (BGM playback sound) is output in a weak suppression mode”. Since it becomes necessary to distinguish whether or not the transition has been made, it is expected that a sense of tension is suitably maintained every time a performance is accepted.

  Also, in the “conditional suppression (weak suppression mode) / non-automatic reception effect (FIGS. 395 to 397)”, if the effect is received within the set time (valid period) (in the figure, timings tr51a and 51b). ), Post-operation display effects (liquid crystal display) in the effect display device 1600 (first effect member) and post-operation effect sound output (effect sound) by the speaker (second effect member) And at least occur. In the figure, the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) and the post-operation effect sound output (effect sound) by the speaker are maintained in the execution state for the same time, but this is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) is not displayed at a predetermined timing that comes after the timing tr52, even if the effect is accepted at any timing within the set time (effective period). In contrast, the post-operation effect sound output (effect sound) may be maintained in an output state for a predetermined time from the timing when the effect is accepted. However, in any state where the stage is accepted at any timing, both the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) and the post-operation effect sound output (effect sound) are obtained when the timing tr52 has not elapsed. It is required to set so as to maintain the output state.

  In addition, for the acceptable reception sound and operation-related display that appear in the “conditional suppression / non-automatic reception effect (FIGS. 395 to 397)”, other examples or modifications to the effect example shown in FIG. It is desirable to use the same method.

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the “first suppression operation reception effect (conditional suppression / non-automatic reception effect)” generated at the timing tr51 in the effect corresponding to the specific variation pattern is the effect. A process of outputting “BGM playback sound” in a weakly suppressed manner (a mode in which the degree of suppression is relatively low) is performed over a predetermined time from the timing of acceptance.

  According to such a configuration, when an effect is received at a relatively early timing tr51a after the set time (valid period) has occurred (FIG. 395), the “BGM playback sound” is weakly suppressed (the degree of suppression is The timing tr53a returned from the relatively low mode to the non-suppressed mode also arrives relatively early. As a result, the period during which the “BGM playback sound” is set to the weakly suppressed mode and the “BGM playback sound” A relatively long interval (timing tr53a to tr40) is provided between the period in which the strong suppression mode is set. On the other hand, when an effect is received at a relatively late timing tr51b after the set time (valid period) occurs (FIG. 396), the timing at which the “BGM playback sound” is returned from the weakly suppressed mode to the non-suppressed mode. tr53b also arrives relatively late. As a result, there is a comparison between the period when the “BGM playback sound” is set to the weak suppression mode and the period when the “BGM playback sound” is set to the strong suppression mode. Only short intervals (timing tr53b to tr40).

  In other words, in this case, the later the timing when the operation by the player is performed in the first suppression operation reception effect (the closer the timing tr52 is), the “BGM playback sound” is set to the weak suppression mode after the end of the period. The time until the period in which the “BGM playback sound” is in the strong suppression mode is started is shortened. As a result, the timing at which the strong suppression mode appears is relatively early after the weak suppression mode ends depending on whether the timing of the player's operation in the first suppression operation reception effect is early or late, and is continuous. The suppression effect (weak suppression mode → strong suppression mode) can be shown as being executed, or the timing of the strong suppression mode comes relatively late after the weak suppression mode is terminated. This makes it possible to make people feel uneasy, such as “may not appear,” so that it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

  In this example, the length of time during which “BGM playback sound” is output in a weakly suppressed manner (a predetermined period of time) is set as the post-operation effect (liquid crystal display, effect sound). Although it is set to be the same as the execution time, it is not necessarily limited to this. However, the length of time for which “BGM playback sound” is output in a weakly suppressed manner is set to be the same as or longer than the execution time of the post-operation effect (liquid crystal display, effect sound). It is desirable to make the post-operation effect stand out when the effect is accepted. Furthermore, even when the presentation is accepted at the latest timing tr52 in the set time (effective period) of the “first suppression operation acceptance presentation (conditional suppression / non-automatic reception presentation)”, the weak suppression mode is set. It is desirable to set the length of time that the “BGM playback sound” is output in the weak suppression mode so that the end timing comes before the timing tr40 at which the strong suppression mode is started. In this example, the time at timings tr51a to 53a and the time at timings tr51b to 53b are the same.

As shown in FIGS. 395 to 397, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, within the production according to one variation pattern,
A first suppression operation reception effect (a period from the timing tr50 to the end of the post-operation effect) that suppresses a specific type of effect sound (for example, an effect sound of BGM playback) with a relatively low suppression degree (weak suppression mode) ), And a second suppression operation reception effect (the post-operation effect is ended from timing tr40) that suppresses a specific type of effect sound (for example, an effect sound of BGM playback) with a relatively high suppression degree (strong suppression mode). Period)
Can be generated sequentially. As described above, the second suppression operation acceptance effect is “a variation pattern that is not executed even if the effect mode (the type of allowable sound to be accepted, the operation target, etc.) changes depending on the result of the effect determination. The first suppression operation acceptance effect can be generated on the condition that a special result is obtained in the effect determination (notice determination, etc.). ing.

  In addition, as described above, the first suppression operation reception effect is also determined by the effect determination (notice determination, etc.) even in the effect according to the low expected variation pattern (predetermined variation pattern) that does not generate the second suppression operation reception effect. Since it is possible to appear when a special result is obtained, during the symbol variation, when only one of the first suppression operation reception effect and the second suppression operation reception effect occurs, the first suppression operation reception effect and the first 2 In some cases, the suppression operation reception effects are sequentially generated.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the stage reception from the “timing when the weak suppression mode is ended” to the “timing when the strong suppression mode is started” is received in the first suppression operation reception effect. Since the variable period is set to be variable according to the timing made, after the first suppression operation reception effect (weak suppression mode) ends, the second suppression operation reception effect (strong suppression mode) further It is possible to provide a performance as to whether or not it occurs, thereby improving the game entertainment. In addition, when the 1st suppression operation reception effect (weak suppression aspect) and the 2nd suppression operation reception effect (strong suppression aspect) generate | occur | produce sequentially, this 2nd suppression operation reception effect (strong suppression aspect) does not generate | occur | produce. The degree of expectation (the ratio of being stopped with a big hit symbol) is higher than when only the first suppression operation reception effect (weak suppression mode) occurs. Moreover, in the fluctuation pattern that generates the second suppression operation reception effect (strong suppression mode), the first suppression operation reception effect (weak suppression mode) is present before the second suppression operation reception effect (strong suppression mode). When it occurs, the second suppression operation reception effect has a higher expectation than the case where the first suppression operation reception effect (weak suppression mode) does not occur (for example, the first allowable sound is output in the second mode). Etc.) is executed at a higher rate.

  By the way, when the operation reception effect which can suppress a specific type effect sound (for example, the effect sound of BGM reproduction) generate | occur | produces, the suppression degree is high (2nd suppression operation reception effect of a strong suppression aspect) or low (weak suppression). As described above, the degree of expectation varies depending on whether the first suppression operation reception effect of the aspect. However, when a specific type of effect sound (for example, an effect sound of BGM playback) is suppressed, an attempt is made to guess whether the degree of suppression is high or low (whether it is a strong suppression mode or a weak suppression mode). Actually, it is difficult to estimate whether the degree of suppression is high (strong suppression mode) or low (weak suppression mode) without comparison. This is especially true when there is no significant difference in the volume value when suppressed between the strong suppression mode and the weak suppression mode, and this creates a sense of tension when an operation acceptance effect occurs. Can be suitably maintained, and the player can be attracted to the performance.

  In this regard, in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 395 to 397, the first suppression operation reception effect and the second suppression operation reception effect are output when a set time (effective period) during which the effect reception is allowed is generated. The first allowable sound is output as the same production sound for the same time (in the figure, “first mode” is output). That is, in this case, even if the first permissible sound is confirmed, it can be difficult to guess whether the degree of suppression is high or low (whether it is a strong suppression mode or a weak suppression mode) This makes it possible to more appropriately maintain a sense of tension with respect to the performance, and to attract more and more players to the performance.

  However, in actuality, there is a concern that the gaming interest will be reduced if it is impossible to estimate whether the mode is a strong suppression mode or a weak suppression mode. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the production elements that are useful for estimating whether the mode is the strong suppression mode or the weak suppression mode are within the period from when the operation reception effect is started until it is ended. The following preparations will be made in a time-series manner.

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, when the above-described situation appears in which the first permissible sound can be output as the same production sound for the same time (output in the “first mode” in the drawing). Even if it exists, it can be estimated now whether it is a strong suppression aspect or a weak suppression aspect based on this 1st permissible sound.

  That is, the first allowable sound that is output when the first suppression operation reception effect is generated is output for a predetermined time without ending the output even if the effect is received when in the output state. On the other hand, when the first acceptance sound that is output when the second suppression operation acceptance effect is generated is in the output state and the effect is accepted, The output is terminated halfway (see FIGS. 395 and 396). In such a configuration, the same mode can be output as the first allowable sound in both the first suppression operation reception effect and the second suppression operation reception effect, which is a strong suppression mode or a weak suppression mode. The first permissible sound itself has a function useful for estimating whether it is a strong suppression mode or a weak suppression mode, while making it difficult to estimate such a situation. As a result, it is possible to suppress a decline in the game interest without being able to make the guess.

  In addition to the first mode, the first allowable sound that is output when the second suppression operation reception effect is generated cannot be output when the first suppression operation reception effect is generated (such as the second mode and the third mode). ) Is also possible. That is, in this case, depending on the mode when the first permissible sound is output, it is a strong suppression mode or a weak suppression mode without receiving the presentation when the first permissible sound is in the output state. Thus, it is possible to easily estimate whether the game is interesting, and it is expected that the game entertainment will be suitably maintained. However, in maintaining a sense of tension with respect to the production, the output in a mode (such as the second mode or the third mode) that cannot be output when the first suppression operation acceptance production occurs is more than the output in the first mode. It is desirable to make the execution rate low.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the second suppression operation reception effect is generated, the second allowable sound is output in addition to the first allowable sound. By confirming whether or not the permissible sound is output, it is possible to estimate whether it is a strong suppression mode or a weak suppression mode. However, the second allowable sound may not necessarily be prepared, and only the first allowable sound may be output in both the first suppression operation reception effect and the second suppression operation reception effect.

  Moreover, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the first suppression operation reception effect and the second suppression are also performed for the operation-related display (display for prompting the operation) that appears within the set time (effective period) in which the reception of the effect is allowed. Since there is a difference between the operation reception effect and the operation-related display, it is possible to estimate whether it is a strong suppression mode or a weak suppression mode. However, regarding the operation-related display, in addition to appearing late with respect to the acceptable reception sound, there is only a difference between the first suppression operation reception effect and the second suppression operation reception effect. Therefore, some difficulty is left in the estimation of whether the mode is a strong suppression mode or a weak suppression mode, and a sense of tension with respect to the performance is maintained.

  In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is assumed that the strong suppression mode or the weak suppression mode has not been estimated when the acceptance allowable sound and the operation-related display are output. In addition, by checking the execution mode of the post-operation effect, it is possible to estimate whether it is a strong suppression mode or a weak suppression mode. That is, in the post-operation effect according to the first suppression operation reception effect, both “the effect by the liquid crystal display” and “the effect by the effect sound” are “performed for a certain period of time from when the effect is received”. On the other hand, in the post-operation effect according to the second suppression operation reception effect, “the effect by the effect sound” is “a thing that is performed for a certain period of time from when the effect is received”, but “liquid crystal display "Production by" is "finished when a predetermined timing tr44 arrives". That is, in this case, in the post-operation effect according to the second suppression operation reception effect, the time from the “effect by the liquid crystal display” to the “effect effect by the effect sound” being ended at the timing when the effect is received. Since it becomes variable and a large deviation occurs, it is possible to infer whether it is a strong suppression mode or a weak suppression mode by confirming such a shift. .

  However, even if production elements that are useful for guessing are prepared in such a manner that they are scattered in time series, some players do not notice them, and as a result, they are strong suppression modes or weak suppression modes. If there is something that can't be guessed, the game entertainment will eventually decline.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in the first suppression operation reception effect (weak suppression mode), the effect sound of BGM playback is based on the reception of the effect within the set time (valid period). Is set to a weak suppression mode. On the other hand, in the second suppression operation reception effect (strong suppression mode), the BGM playback effect sound is changed to the strong suppression mode from the time when the set time (effective period) has not yet occurred. A set time (valid period) is generated and the reception of the production can be made. According to such a configuration, a specific type of effect sound (for example, an effect sound of BGM playback) is suppressed by the first suppression operation reception effect (weak suppression mode) and the second suppression operation reception effect (strong suppression mode). Since the timing to be changed becomes different, it is possible to estimate whether the mode is the strong suppression mode or the weak suppression mode by checking the timing.

  In addition, in the first suppression operation reception effect (weak suppression mode) according to this embodiment, unlike the second suppression operation reception effect (strong suppression mode), no operation is detected within the set time (effective period). When this happens, the set time has passed without automatic reception of the production (see FIG. 397). That is, in this case, if no operation is detected within the set time (valid period), the suppression process (weak suppression mode) itself triggered by the reception of an effect for a specific type of effect sound (for example, an effect sound of BGM playback) is also performed. Since there is a price that the post-operation effect cannot be confirmed, it is possible to recognize that it is not a strong suppression mode but a weak suppression mode.

  Further, in the second suppression operation reception effect (strong suppression mode) according to this embodiment, the timing at which the process of changing the “BGM playback effect sound” to the strong suppression mode is ended is the same as the end timing of the post-operation effect. Or, it is set as the timing before that. Accordingly, in the first suppression operation reception effect (weak suppression mode), the timing at which the process of changing the “BGM playback effect sound” to the weak suppression mode is ended after the end timing of the post-operation effect. For example, by checking the timing when the “BGM playback effect sound” is returned to the non-suppression mode, it is possible to estimate whether it is the strong suppression mode or the weak suppression mode.

  Further, as described above, in the first suppression operation reception effect according to the above-described effect example, the effect display device 1600 (first effect member) in the effect display apparatus 1600 (first effect member) regardless of which timing is received within the set time (effective period). The length of the period in which the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) and the post-operation effect sound output (effect sound) by the speaker (second effect member) are performed in parallel is unchanged (see FIGS. 395 and 396). ). On the other hand, in the second suppression operation reception effect, the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) in the effect display device 1600 (first effect member) depending on at which timing the effect is received within the set time (effective period). And the length of the period in which the post-operation effect sound output (effect sound) by the speaker (second effect member) is performed in parallel is changed (see FIGS. 395 and 396).

  According to such a configuration, production performance is generated in “when to perform the production reception (operation)”, and it is possible to favorably maintain the game entertainment until the production reception (operation) is performed. Become.

  Further, in the above configuration, the first tolerance is set so that it is difficult to distinguish between the first suppression operation reception effect and the second suppression operation reception effect that are different in the execution mode of the post-operation effect. Sounds are output as the same production sound over the same time, or production elements useful for distinguishing them are arranged in time series. As a result, it is expected to suppress a decrease in the game entertainment interest while maintaining a sense of tension with respect to the performance.

  Further, in the above configuration, the first suppression operation reception effect and the second suppression operation reception effect having different execution modes of the post-operation effect can be mixed within the effect according to one variation pattern. Thus, every time an operation reception effect is generated, it is possible to suitably maintain a sense of tension about “when to perform an effect reception (operation)”. In order to obtain such an effect, in addition to the aspect in which the first suppression operation reception effect and the second suppression operation reception effect are mixed in the effect according to the one variation pattern, the effect according to the one variation pattern. It is desirable that an aspect in which only the second suppression operation reception effect (or the first suppression operation reception effect) appears within a plurality of times is executable.

  In addition, if the purpose is to obtain only the effect by the effect on “when to perform the production reception (operation)”, a specific type of production in the first suppression operation reception production and the second suppression operation reception production. You may make it maintain the output in a non-suppression mode, without suppressing sound (effect sound of BGM reproduction).

  In addition, the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) in the effect display device 1600 (first effect member) and the speaker (second effect member), regardless of at which timing within the set time (effective period) the effect is accepted. ) For the operation reception effect where the length of the period during which the post-operation effect sound output (effect sound) is performed in parallel is made unchanged, a special result is obtained in the effect determination (e.g. notice determination) It is desirable that it cannot occur as a symbol effect (effect pattern) based on the variation pattern.

  That is, in this case, by checking the execution mode of the post-operation effect, it can be estimated that the special result is obtained in the notice effect determination (the expectation is relatively high). Unlike the fluctuation pattern itself (symbol effect) that always occurs regardless of the result of the notice effect determination, it is expected to improve the game entertainment when recognizing that it was additionally performed. It becomes like this. It should be noted that, depending on at which timing within the set time (effective period) the effect is received, the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) in the effect display device 1600 (first effect member) and the speaker (second effect member) The second suppression operation reception effect in which the length of the period in which the post-operation effect sound output (effect sound) is performed in parallel is changed only as an effect (symbol effect) of the fluctuation pattern itself. Alternatively, there may be both a case where the variation pattern itself is generated as an effect (symbol effect) and a case where the change pattern is generated under a condition that a special result is obtained in the effect determination (notice determination, etc.).

  It should be noted that the weak suppression mode in which the “BGM playback effect sound” is output at a level of suppression lower than that of the strong suppression mode may appear even when an operation opportunity is not given (when the first suppression operation reception effect does not occur). It may be. That is, in this case, after the “BGM playback effect sound” is set to the weakly suppressed mode for a predetermined time, the operation mode is returned from the weakly suppressed mode to the non-suppressed mode without being given an operation opportunity. And the ratio (in which the suppression degree is further increased until the symbol fluctuation is stopped) as the number of times the weak suppression mode appears including the first suppression operation reception effect in the effect corresponding to the one fluctuation pattern increases. If the second suppression operation reception effect is further executed), the performance can be further improved through the suppression status for the “BGM playback effect sound”. In addition, when an effect is received within a set time (valid period) that occurs while the “BGM playback effect sound” is not in the suppression mode, “whether or not the number of times the weak suppression mode appears increases (see FIG. The aspect shown in 390 or the aspect shown in FIG.

  Further, the strong suppression mode for the “BGM playback effect sound” may also appear even when the operation opportunity is not given (when the second suppression operation reception effect does not occur). That is, in this case, after the “BGM playback effect sound” is set to the strong suppression mode for a predetermined time, the strong suppression mode is returned to the non-suppression mode without being given an operation opportunity. According to such a configuration, it is possible to provide a presentation as to whether or not an operation opportunity is given when a strong suppression mode appears.

  In the example of production shown in FIGS. 395 to 397, when the first suppression operation acceptance effect occurs, the “BGM playback effect sound” is generated based on the fact that the effect is accepted within the set time (valid period). The suppression mode (weak suppression mode) was used. However, instead of this, even when the first suppression operation reception effect is generated, the “BGM playback effect sound” is generated before the set time is generated, similarly to the case where the second suppression operation reception effect is generated. May be set to a suppression mode (weak suppression mode), and a set time (valid period) during which production reception is permitted is generated in the suppression mode (weak suppression mode). In this case, even if the same variation pattern is selected, the “BGM playback effect sound” is generated when a predetermined timing comes depending on whether or not a special result is obtained in the effect determination (notice determination or the like). Since the suppression mode (weak suppression mode) is set or the suppression mode (weak suppression mode) is not set, the range of performance can be widened. In the first suppression operation reception effect, the timing at which the “BGM playback effect sound” is returned from the suppression mode (weak suppression mode) to the non-inhibition mode is the same as or later than the timing at which the post-operation effect ends. It is desirable to make it come.

  Moreover, in the production examples shown in FIGS. 391 to 393 and 395 to 397, in the second suppression operation reception production (strong suppression mode), the “BGM playback effect sound” is set to the strong suppression mode (suppression mode or The process of making the output silent or non-output) ends at the same timing as the end timing of the post-operation effect or before it, but the end timing of the post-operation effect has arrived You may make it complete | finish later. Also, in this case, at least as long as the special symbol (decoration symbol) is changing (unless the symbol variation is stopped), the “bGM playback effect sound” may not be returned from the strong suppression mode to the non-inhibition mode. Good.

  As described above, the acceptable reception sound may not be generated a little before the set time (effective period), and may be output based on the occurrence of the set time (effective period).

  In the operation reception effect (second suppression operation reception effect) in the strong suppression mode shown in FIGS. 391 to 393 and 395 to 397, a post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) in the effect display device 1600 (first effect member). ) Is ended at a predetermined timing tr44 in the production according to the variation pattern, while the production reception of the post-operation production sound (production sound) by the speaker (second production member) has been received. It was supposed to be terminated when a certain amount of time passed. However, instead of this, both the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) in the effect display device 1600 (first effect member) and the post-operation effect sound output (effect sound) by the speaker (second effect member) vary. It is good also as what each ends at the predetermined timing in the production | presentation according to a pattern, the display display after operation (liquid crystal display) in the production | presentation display apparatus 1600 (1st production member), and a speaker (2nd production member). Both the post-operation production sound output (production sound) according to the above may be terminated when a certain time has elapsed since the production was accepted.

  Note that the specific type of effect sound (BGM playback effect sound) to be suppressed is the timing at which the effect is switched at the start of symbol variation or within the effect corresponding to the variation pattern (for example, the SP reach effect is started). It is output when the timing etc. arrives. On the other hand, the post-operation effect is started at an indefinite timing (ming to be operated) within the set time.

  The specific variation pattern described in the production examples shown in FIGS. 391 and 392 and the specific variation pattern described in the production examples shown in FIGS. 395 to 397 may be different or the same. It may be a variation pattern. Further, the special effect state may be an effect state when the big hit probability for the big hit determination is relatively high instead of the pre-reading effect zone.

  In the weak suppression mode, the volume value (audible volume) of the “specific type of effect sound” is set to a specific suppression value (a number greater than 0) lower than that in the non-suppression mode and output in an audible state. Even if the strong suppression mode is to make the “specific type effect sound” non-audible (silent (audible volume is 0) or non-output (channel assignment is terminated)). Good.

  In the production examples shown in FIGS. 395 to 397, it is assumed that the same operation means (operation button 410) is an operation target and an operation opportunity is given in the same operation mode. In this regard, in the “first suppression operation reception effect”, only the operation button 410 is used as the operation target (first operation mode), but in the “second suppression operation reception effect”, refer to FIGS. 391 and 392. However, as described above, “when the operation button 410 is selected as the operation target (first operation mode)” and “when the sword ornament 5001 is selected as the operation target (second operation mode) based on the result of the preliminary announcement determination. ) ”. Therefore, when the sword ornament 5001 is selected as the operation target (second operation mode), it is possible to easily recognize that it is not the weak suppression mode but the strong suppression mode. It should be noted that the presentation has been received for “when the operation button 410 is selected as the operation target (first operation mode)” and “when the sword ornament 5001 is selected as the operation target (second operation mode)”. The corresponding post-operation effects have the same content.

That is, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the operation means to be operated is
A first operation mode in which the operation receiving portion (the portion touched when the player operates) when the set time (effective period) is generated, and the operation receiving portion by the driving force when the set time (effective period) is generated An operation opportunity can be given in any of a plurality of modes including the second operation mode for moving to a specific position. Here, the “first operation mode” assumes a case where an operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410, and the “second operation mode” gives an operation opportunity to the sword ornament 5001. Referring to FIG. 198 (A3) and the like that the sword decorative body 5001 is “thing that can give an operation opportunity to the player in a state where the sword ornament 5001 has moved to a specific position”. However, as described above. However, one operation means (one operation receiving unit) may have a “first operation mode” and a “second operation mode”, and an operation opportunity may be given according to any of these modes.

And as this was also mentioned above, in the pachinko machine 1 concerning this embodiment, as an operation reception effect,
A non-suppressed operation reception effect in which a set time (valid period) is generated and a post-operation effect is executed while a specific type of effect sound (effect sound of BGM playback) is output in an uninhibited manner; and・ A suppression operation reception effect is provided in which a specific type of production sound (BGM playback production sound) is output in a suppression mode or in a silent state, or in a non-output state.
A first suppression operation reception effect (for example, the above-described “conditional suppression / non-automatic reception effect” described above) that suppresses a specific type of effect sound (for example, an effect sound of BGM playback) with a relatively low suppression degree (weak suppression mode). )) And a second suppression operation reception effect (for example, “suppression / automatic reception” described above) that suppresses a specific type of effect sound (for example, a BGM playback effect sound) with a relatively high degree of suppression (strong suppression mode). Direction ")
Is prepared.

However, here, as the second suppression operation reception effect,
-While the specific type of production sound is suppressed in the strong suppression mode (in the suppression mode, being output in silence or in the non-output state), the first operation mode with respect to the operating means (Here, the operation button 410) is given a non-moving reception effect with suppression and an effect sound of a specific type is suppressed in a strong suppression mode (output in suppression mode or silence) Or in a non-output state), a controlled movement reception effect is provided in which an operation opportunity is given to the operation means in the second operation mode (here, the sword decorative body 5001 is extracted). By preparing, the presentation performance when the operation opportunity is given is further improved.

  FIG. 398 shows an effect example (moving reception effect under suppression) that appears in “when the sword decorative body 5001 is selected as the operation target (second operation mode)” in the second suppression operation reception effect (suppression / automatic reception effect). It is a time chart which shows. In addition, in the second suppression operation reception effect (suppression / automatic reception effect), for an effect example (suppressed non-moving reception effect) that appears in “when operation button 410 is selected as an operation target (first operation mode)”, This is as described with reference to FIG. 391 and FIG. 395 (period from the timing tr40 to the end of the post-operation effect).

  As shown in FIG. 398, in the second suppression operation reception effect (suppression / automatic reception effect), “when the sword decorative body 5001 is selected as the operation target (second operation mode)” is also received. In the production (suppression / automatic reception production), “the operation button 410 is selected as the operation target (first operation mode)” is basically the same as the portion not particularly described (FIGS. 391 and 392). 395 to 397), the related effects described above, other examples, and modified examples can be employed as appropriate.

  However, when the second suppression operation reception effect (suppression / automatic reception effect) is executed in the second operation mode, a process of moving the operation receiving portion to the specific position by the driving force when the set time (effective period) occurs. Although it is required to be performed, there is a problem as to when the process is performed.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 398 (c) and (h), first, at least in a specific gaming state (normal gaming state or probability variation short gaming state) As long as the timing tr40 at which the specific type of effect sound (effect sound of BGM reproduction) is set to the strong suppression mode does not arrive, the process of moving the operation receiving unit to the specific position is not performed. Therefore, for example, when a specific type of effect sound (effect sound of BGM playback) is in a non-suppression mode or a weak suppression mode, an operation opportunity in the second operation mode even if a set time in which the effect reception is allowed occurs. Is not given, and the operation opportunity in the first operation mode is only given. That is, in this case, unless the specific type of effect sound (BGM playback effect sound) is in the strong suppression mode, even if the operation opportunity is given, this will not be the second operation mode. However, it is possible to suppress the operation in the operation mode on the wrong side.

  On the other hand, when a specific type of effect sound (effect sound of BGM playback) is set to a strong suppression mode (timing tr40), an operation opportunity is given in the first operation mode under the strong suppression mode. There is a possibility of both the case where the operation opportunity is given in the second operation mode. However, the player is given the opportunity to give an operation opportunity in either the first operation mode or the second operation mode when the specific type of effect sound (BGM playback effect sound) has become a strong suppression aspect. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an operation error between them.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, from the timing tr40 by concealing which of the first operation mode and the second operation mode is granted until immediately before the operation opportunity is given. The tension and the game entertainment are suitably maintained until the production is accepted and the post-operation production is started. More specifically, as shown in FIGS. 398 (c) and (h), when the timing tr42 when the set time (effective period) occurs, the operation receiving unit starts moving to a specific position. I am going to let you. Here, when the operation opportunity is given in the second operation mode, the expectation level (the ratio that the jackpot symbol appears when the symbol variation is stopped) is higher than when the operation opportunity is given in the first operation mode. The notice effect determination is performed so as to be.

  However, in this case, the production reception itself is allowed for a short time after the set time (valid period) occurs (until the movement to the specific position by the operation receiving unit is completed). Nevertheless, since it is difficult to properly operate the operation receiving portion, the length of the set time (valid period) is substantially reduced, and the game entertainment may be reduced. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 398 (c) and (d), the time required to move the operation receiving unit from the original position to the specific position is determined as the allowable sound. It is set as a time shorter than the time until the first mode having the shortest output time out of (first permissible sound) is output. Thereby, even if any aspect (in addition to the first aspect, the above-described second aspect, third aspect, etc.) is output as the allowable reception sound (first allowable sound), the production reception is performed in the middle of the output state. It is possible to perform the operation (the output can be terminated in the middle), and even if the second operation mode appears, it is difficult for the production inconvenience to occur.

  As will be described later, in this embodiment, with respect to the time required to move the operation receiving portion from the original position to the specific position by the driving force, there is no operation on the operation receiving portion, and the operation receiving portion is moved to the specific position by the driving force. Therefore, it is moved at a higher speed so as to have a shorter time than the time required for moving from the original position to the original position (see FIG. 398 (h)). According to such a movement mode, it is possible to appeal a state where efforts are made to reduce the time that is substantially reduced as the set time (valid period), and a game caused by the reduction of the time. It is expected to suppress the dissatisfaction of the person.

  In order to more appropriately suppress such dissatisfaction, when the second suppression operation reception effect (suppression / automatic reception effect) is generated, the non-suppression shown in FIG. 390 is set as the set time (effective period). The operation reception effect of the mode (from the timing tr31 to the post-operation effect) and the set time (effective period) of the operation reception effect of the weak suppression mode (from the timing tr50 to the post-operation effect) shown in FIG. It is desirable to set a time value having a length longer than the sum of the time required to move the part from the original position to the specific position. According to such a configuration, when the second suppression operation reception effect (suppression / automatic reception effect) is executed in the second operation mode, a longer time value that is more than compensated for the time to be substantially trimmed is obtained. Since the set time (valid period) is generated, the game entertainment can be suitably maintained. In this case, in order to make the program common, a set time having the same length may be set even when the second suppression operation reception effect (suppression / automatic reception effect) is executed in the first operation mode. desirable.

  However, as described above, the presentation time is not substantially received at the times tr42A to tr43 after the automatic button function is activated, and the set time (effective period) is substantially reduced. In view of this, when generating the second suppression operation reception effect (suppression / automatic reception effect), as the set time (valid period), the operation reception effect in the non-suppression mode shown in FIG. 390 (from timing tr31 to post-operation effect) ) Or the set time (valid period) of the operation reception effect (from the timing tr50 to the post-operation effect) in the weak suppression mode shown in FIG. 395, “required when moving the operation receiving portion from the original position to the specific position. A time value having a length longer than the sum of “time” and “time at times tr42A to tr43 after the automatic button function is activated” is set. Rukoto can be said to be more desirable. In this case as well, in order to make the program common, a setting time having the same length is set even when the second suppression operation reception effect (suppression / automatic reception effect) is executed in the first operation mode. Is desirable.

  As described above, when the second suppression operation reception effect (suppression / automatic reception effect) is being executed in the second operation mode and there is no operation on the operation receiving unit within the set time, As shown in 398 (a), (h) to (l), an effect reception is automatically generated at timing tr42A, and the post-operation display effect in the effect display device 1600 (first effect member) is based on the effect reception. (Liquid crystal display) and post-operation effect sound output (effect sound) by the speaker (second effect member) are executed at least as post-operation effects, respectively. However, in this case, as is apparent from comparison with FIGS. 398 (g) and (l), the execution time of the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) in the effect display device 1600 (first effect member) is shortened. Therefore, there is a concern that the entertainment interest will be reduced.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 398 (h), the second suppression operation reception effect (suppression / automatic reception effect) is being executed in the second operation mode. If there is no operation on the operation receiving part within the set time, the "speed when the operation receiving part is moved from the specific position to the original position by the driving force" is moved from the original position to the specific position. It is slower than the “speed of time”, so that the moving state is maintained for a relatively long time. According to such a configuration, the operation receiving unit can move the movable effect (post-operation effect) in exchange for a shorter execution time of the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) in the effect display device 1600 (first effect member). Since it can be expected to function as a part of (1), the game entertainment can be suitably maintained.

  It should be noted that in the effect example shown in FIG. 398 (h), the “movement effect from the specific position to the original position” by the operation receiving unit is after the operation corresponding to the fact that the effect reception is automatically generated (automatic button function). Although it is started when a predetermined timing arrives in the middle of the execution of the effect, it may be started at the timing tr42A at which the reception of the effect is automatically generated as in the case of the post-operation effect.

  However, no matter how slow the “movement from the specific position to the original position” is, it is not possible to earn enough time as a movable effect by this alone, and there is a concern that it is difficult to maintain the game entertainment. Therefore, in the production example shown in FIG. 398 (h), after the operation receiving portion is moved from the specific position to the original position (or a position near the original position), the vibration production is performed to vibrate the operation receiving portion. Thus, the period from the start of the movement from the specific position to the original position (or its neighboring position) to the end of the vibration of the operation receiving portion is determined by the “operation receiving portion not operated by the player”. It is made to function as a movable production period. As a result, a movable effect using the “operation receiving unit not operated by the player” can be suitably realized, and the effect display device 1600 (first effect member) as a result of the effect reception being automatically generated. It is expected that the rendering performance when the execution time of the post-operation display rendering (liquid crystal display) is shortened is suitably maintained. In this case, it is more preferable that the operation receiving unit is used as a movable effect if the operation receiving unit is caused to emit light in a state where the operation receiving unit is moved from the specific position to the original position. It is possible to appeal to.

  Here, regarding the movable effect period (movement time from the specific position to the original position, vibration time) by the “operation receiving portion not operated by the player”, is the timing tr44 when the strong suppression mode ends? It is desirable that the timing be terminated before the timing tr44. As a result, the specific type of effect sound is returned from the strong suppression mode to the non-inhibition mode, and it is possible to smoothly promote progress (production switching) in the production content corresponding to this.

  In addition, a difference from the case where the second suppression operation reception effect (suppression / automatic reception effect) is executed in the first operation mode is that a message sound such as “Say me!” Is used as the second allowable sound (message sound). A message display such as “push-in” and a spear image based on the “sword decoration image SYG” may be displayed as output and operation-related display, respectively, so that an operation error is less likely to occur. become.

  In addition, as described above, in the first suppression operation reception effect (weak suppression mode), an operation opportunity is not given in such a second operation mode, but the “specific type effect sound” is set to the weak suppression mode. If the operation opportunity is originally given, an operation error may be promoted when the recognition of which one of the weak suppression mode and the strong suppression mode is erroneous is made. In this regard, in the production examples shown in FIGS. 395 to 397, when the first suppression operation reception production (weak suppression mode) occurs, an operation opportunity is created with the “specific type of production sound” in the low suppression mode. Since the weak suppression mode appears based on the fact that the presentation was accepted without giving it, there was a useless tension and expectation that “the operation opportunity in the second operation mode may be granted” The production can be provided without having it.

  In the above-described effect example (second operation mode), even when there is an operation on the operation receiving portion within the set time, as in the case where there is no operation on the operation receiving portion within the set time, FIG. As shown in c), when a predetermined timing (same timing) within the period in which the post-operation effect is being executed, a vibration effect that vibrates the operation receiving portion is performed. According to such a configuration, regardless of at which timing the post-operation effect has occurred, the vibration effect is performed when a predetermined timing before the timing tr44 at which the strong suppression mode ends is reached. Therefore, it can be suggested that the strong suppression mode will soon be terminated and a new stage of development will appear.

  However, when there is an operation on the operation receiving unit within the set time, the vibration effect is started early based on the fact that the effect is accepted by the operation, so that the post-operation effect is being performed. You may make it aim at the further improvement of game entertainment. That is, in this case, if there is an operation on the operation receiving unit within the set time, the vibration effect is performed for a longer time than when there is no operation on the operation receiving unit within the set time.

  Further, in the above-described effect example, unless the specific type effect sound (effect sound for BGM reproduction) is in a strong suppression mode, the process of moving the operation receiving unit to the specific position is not performed. However, instead of this, when the effect acceptance is permitted when the specific type of effect sound (BGM playback effect sound) is in the strong suppression mode, the specific type of effect sound (BGM playback effect sound) is not suppressed. The rate at which an operation opportunity in the second operation mode is given (0) than when the reception of the production is allowed when the production sound of the specific type (the production sound of BGM playback) is in the weak suppression mode. Or may be 100).

  It should be noted that, in each of the above-described effects examples (FIGS. 192 to 398), in the operation reception effects in which the automatic button function can be activated, the operation reception effects in which the automatic button function is not activated as the set time (effective period). It is desirable to set a time value that is longer than the sum of the time until the set time has elapsed after the automatic button function is enabled for the set time (valid period). . According to such a configuration, a set time (valid period) having a longer time value that more than compensates for the time that is substantially cut off as a period during which the production reception is allowed is generated. The game entertainment can be suitably maintained.

By the way, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as an operation reception effect that can occur when in the normal gaming state,
・ The operation reception effect (internal reception effect) executed as the effect (symbol effect) of the fluctuation pattern itself based on the result of the fluctuation pattern determination, and that the special result was obtained in the effect determination (notice determination etc.) An operation reception effect (additional reception effect) that is executed as an effect that is additionally performed on the condition (effect pattern) of the fluctuation pattern itself.
At least.

  That is, the “internal reception effect” is obtained when a special result is obtained in the variation pattern determination based on the result of the jackpot determination (determination as to which variation pattern is used to execute the symbol effect) (a special variation pattern is selected). Then, it is determined that the execution is performed within the effect according to the determined variation pattern. On the other hand, the “additional reception effect” is obtained even if the “predetermined result capable of generating the additional reception effect” is obtained in the variation pattern determination (even if the predetermined variation pattern is selected). This is not necessarily executed unless a result indicating that an “additional reception effect” is generated is obtained in the effect determination (notice determination or the like) according to the selected variation pattern. Therefore, after the production according to the variation pattern is once started, the production determination is made rather than the occurrence of the “internal reception production” that is associated with the variation pattern (production pattern) and the occurrence of the production is confirmed. It can be said that it is more beneficial for the player to generate an “additional reception effect” that can be generated depending on the result of (preliminary judgment, etc.), and is more important in enhancing the game entertainment. Even if the same effect content (effect pattern) appears as an effect corresponding to the variation pattern, if an “additional reception effect” occurs in the effect, the “additional reception effect” The percentage (expected degree) in which the big hit symbol appears when the symbol variation is stopped is higher than the case where “” does not occur.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in the inherent reception effect that can occur when in the normal gaming state, a specific type effect sound (effect sound of “BGM playback”) is suppressed or In the case where production acceptance is allowed while being output in silence or in a non-output state, and in the case where a specific type of production sound (the production sound of “BGM playback”) is output in a non-suppressing manner In some cases, production reception is allowed. On the other hand, in the additional reception effect that can occur when in the normal gaming state, the reception of the effect is not allowed while being output in the suppression mode or silence, or in the non-output state, Production reception is allowed while a specific type of production sound is output in a non-suppressing manner. That is, in this case, in the normal gaming state, when the acceptance of the production is permitted, it is possible to add an additional effect by paying attention to whether the specific type of production sound is output in a suppression mode, silence, or in a non-output state. It becomes possible to recognize the possibility that the reception effect will occur, and it is expected to maintain the game entertainment interest.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the internal reception effect that can occur when in the normal gaming state is operated even if the operation is not detected within the set time in which the effect reception is allowed. When it is executed in an automatic reception mode capable of generating a post-production, and when an operation is not detected within a set time in which the reception of the production is permitted, the post-operation production is not generated and the set time is terminated. There are cases where it is executed in a reception mode. On the other hand, the additional reception effects that can occur when in the normal gaming state are not executed in the automatic reception mode, but are executed in the non-automatic reception mode. That is, in this case, in the normal gaming state, it is possible to recognize the possibility that an additional reception effect has occurred by paying attention to whether or not the effect reception is automatically (automatic button function) within the set time. As a result, it is expected to maintain the game entertainment until the stage reception is made.

  FIG. 399 is a time chart showing the contents of effects that appear when the variation pattern 1 is selected in the variation pattern determination.

  As shown in FIG. 399, when the variation pattern 1 is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination, first, in the effect determination (such as the notification determination according to the variation pattern 1) performed at the start of symbol variation, the notification effect At least a determination of whether to execute A is performed. If it is determined that the notice effect A is to be executed as a result of the effect determination, the notice effect A is applied to the symbol effect (effect pattern) when the timing tr61 in the symbol effect based on the variation pattern 1 arrives. If it is not determined that the notice effect A is executed, the notice effect A does not appear even if the timing tr61 in the symbol effect based on the variation pattern 1 arrives. The symbol effect (effect pattern) based on the variation pattern 1 is only executed.

  Here, when it is determined that the notice effect A is to be executed as a result of the effect determination, when the timing tr61 arrives, not only the display effect but also the effect sound and the lamp effect are the variation pattern 1 itself (design) It is executed in addition to (production). Note that “additionally executing” can be realized, for example, by displaying the notice effect A on a layer having a higher priority than the layer in which the display effect of the variation pattern 1 itself appears. is there. At this time, all of the symbol effects based on the variation pattern 1 may be covered and the notice effect A may be displayed in such a manner that it cannot be viewed, or only a part of the symbol effects based on the variation pattern 1 may be covered. The notice effect A may be displayed. On the other hand, in the case of the lamp effect, the “ramp effect in response to the occurrence of the notice effect A” is output with priority over the “lamp effect based on the variation pattern 1 (effect pattern)”. Also, in the case of a production sound, by assigning a “production sound according to the notice effect A” to a channel different from the “production sound based on the variation pattern 1”, it is based on the “variation pattern 1 (production pattern)”. The “effect sound corresponding to the notice effect A” is additionally output with respect to the “effect sound”.

  FIG. 400 is a time chart showing the contents of effects that appear when the variation pattern 2 is selected in the variation pattern determination.

  As shown in FIG. 400, when the variation pattern 2 is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination, first, in the performance determination performed at the start of symbol variation (such as a notice determination according to the variation pattern 2), “additional” It is at least determined whether or not to execute the “general reception effect”. Here, the variation pattern 2 according to this effect example is the same as the “predetermined variation pattern shown in FIG. 390”. Therefore, if it is determined that the “additional reception effect” is to be executed as a result of this effect determination, the “additional reception effect” is determined based on the variation pattern 2 (the predetermined variation pattern shown in FIG. 390). When the internal timing tr31 arrives, the symbol effect (effect pattern) is additionally executed (from the timing tr31 until the post-operation effect ends), and the "additional reception effect" is executed. If it is not determined, even if the timing tr31 in the symbol effect based on the variation pattern 2 arrives, the “additional reception effect” does not appear, and the symbol effect (effect pattern) based on the variation pattern 2 is only executed. Become.

  Here, for the operation reception effect (additional reception effect) shown in FIG. 400, the effect sound of “BGM playback” based on the fluctuation pattern 2 (predetermined fluctuation pattern) is maintained in the output state in the non-suppressed mode. Among them, the first allowable sound is output at timing tr31, a set time (valid period) is generated at timing tr32, and the set time ends without the automatic button function being enabled at timing tr33. Since these are as described above with reference to FIG. 390 and the like, description thereof will be omitted. That is, the operation reception effect (additional reception effect) shown in FIG. 400 is not particularly remarked as “the contents of the effect when the low-expected non-suppression reception effect is executed in a non-automatic reception mode” shown in FIG. The portions are basically the same, and the related effects described above, other examples, and modified examples can be adopted as appropriate.

However, in the operation reception effect (additional reception effect) according to this effect example, as shown in FIG. 400, an example of executing the post-operation effect corresponding to the effect reception in the above-described example in FIG. It is described as. Therefore, in the operation reception effect (additional reception effect) shown in FIG. 400, when an effect is received within the set time (valid period) (in the figure, timing tr32a), the effect is received. Then, “post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) in the effect display device 1600 (first effect member)” and “post-operation effect sound output (effect sound) by the speaker (second effect member)” are used as post-operation effects. At least for the post-operation effects,
The “post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) in the effect display device 1600 (first effect member)” is terminated at a predetermined timing that comes after the timing tr33, regardless of the timing at which the effect is accepted. ,
“Post-operation effect sound output (effect sound) by the speaker (second effect member)” is executed in such a manner that it is terminated when a predetermined time has elapsed from the timing when the effect is accepted. It will be.

  FIG. 401 is a time chart showing effect contents that appear when the variation pattern 3 is selected in the variation pattern determination.

  As shown in FIG. 401, when the variation pattern 3 is selected as the variation pattern determination result, any result is obtained in the effect determination (such as the advance notice determination according to the variation pattern 3) performed at the start of the symbol variation. Regardless of whether or not it is performed, at the timing tr40 within the symbol effect based on the variation pattern 3, the effect sound of “BGM playback” is changed to the “strong suppression mode” described above, and the “strong suppression mode” At the timing tr41 when the symbol appears, an “internal reception effect” is generated as a symbol effect based on the variation pattern 3 (from the timing tr41 until the post-operation effect ends).

  Here, the variation pattern 3 according to this effect example is the same as the “specific variation pattern shown in FIG. 391 to FIG. 393 or FIG. 395 to FIG. 398”. Therefore, for the operation reception effect (internal reception effect) shown in FIG. 401, the “BGM playback” effect sound based on the fluctuation pattern 3 (specific fluctuation pattern) is strongly suppressed (for example, silence (volume 0)). In the output state or the non-audible state such as the non-output state), when the timing tr41 arrives, a first allowable sound is output, and a set time (effective period) is generated at the timing tr42. When the “timing tr42A” before the timing tr43 at which the lapse of time arrives without receiving the production, the above-described automatic button function is activated, but these are described in “FIGS. 391 to 393 or FIG. Since it is as having mentioned above, referring 395-398 "etc., suppose that description is omitted. That is, the operation reception effect (internal reception effect) shown in FIG. 401 is the same as the effect content of the “suppression / automatic reception effect” shown in FIG. 391. FIG. 393, FIG. 395 to FIG. 398, etc.) can be employed as appropriate.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, at least in the normal gaming state, during the period in which the effect sound of “BGM playback” is in a strong suppression mode, Although “effect” may occur, “additional reception effect” that is executed in addition to the symbol effect based on the variation pattern is not generated, whereas “BGM playback” During the period in which the production sound is in a non-suppressing manner, an “internal reception effect” that is a design effect based on the variation pattern may occur, or in addition to the design effect based on the variation pattern An “additional reception effect” to be executed may occur.

  That is, in this case, when the operation reception effect is generated while the effect sound of “BGM playback” based on the variation pattern is in a strong suppression mode, the possibility that the operation reception effect is an “additional reception effect” is excluded. Therefore, it is possible to generate a set time (valid period) in which the reception of the production is allowed in an environment in which the operation reception production is concentrated in which mode is performed. . On the other hand, when the operation reception effect is generated while the “BGM playback” effect sound is output in a non-suppressed manner, it can be recognized that an additional reception effect may be generated. As a result, it is expected to maintain the amusement interest.

  In order to suitably obtain such an effect, in addition to the case where the “additional reception effect” and the “intrinsic reception effect” appear in separate variation patterns 2, 3, etc., one variation pattern (for example, In addition, it is desirable that the “additional reception effect” and the “internal reception effect” can be made to appear sequentially even within the effect according to the specific variation pattern (variation pattern 3). It is desirable that the “additional reception effect” occurs at a timing before the “internal reception effect”.

  More preferably, within the production according to one fluctuation pattern (specific fluctuation pattern), the “additional reception production” and the “internal reception production” are performed while the production sound of “BGM playback” is in a non-suppressing manner. ”Are allowed to appear in sequence, and the“ internal reception effect ”is further allowed to appear while the effect sound of“ BGM playback ”is in the strong suppression mode. According to such a configuration, when it is possible to grasp which of the “additional reception effect” and the “internal reception effect” is generated according to the situation of the suppression mode (strong suppression mode) When it is difficult to determine which of the “additional reception effect” and the “internal reception effect” is occurring (non-suppression mode), the suppression mode for the “BGM playback” effect sound appears. Through this, you will be able to improve your game entertainment.

  Furthermore, if an operation reception effect (internal reception effect) occurs in the design effect corresponding to a specific variation pattern, the effect sound of “BGM playback” is in a strong suppression mode, It is desirable to prevent the “additional reception effect” from occurring within the period from the end of the reception effect until the symbol variation is stopped. According to such a configuration, there is a possibility that the operation reception effect is an “additional reception effect” at the time when the operation reception effect is generated while the effect sound of “BGM playback” is in the strong suppression mode. In addition to being excluded, even the possibility of an “additional reception effect” appearing before the symbol fluctuation is stopped is also excluded, so that the “additional reception effect” occurs. On the other hand, the generated “internal reception effect” is executed in any manner (acceptable reception sound, type of operation means, aspect of post-operation effect, etc.) without giving a sense of expectation to the user. You will be able to concentrate.

  In addition, when the “additional reception effect” occurs, the “internal reception effect (both non-suppression mode and strong suppression mode)” occurs after the “additional reception effect” does not occur. However, as described above, it is desirable to increase the proportion that is executed in a mode with a high degree of expectation (acceptable sound, type of operation means, mode of post-operation effect, etc.).

  Also, as described above, when the effect sound of “BGM playback” is set to the strong suppression mode, the operation reception effect (internal reception effect) is always generated during the period of the strong suppression mode. May be. In this case, among the plurality of variation patterns that are candidates for selection in the variation pattern determination, “the strong suppression mode is selected, but the operation reception effect (internal reception effect) is performed during the strong suppression mode”. The variation pattern that does not occur ”is not included, and“ the variation pattern that generates the operation reception effect (internal reception effect) during the strong suppression mode when included in the strong suppression mode ”is included. . Or, even if the production sound of “BGM playback” is set to the strong suppression mode, the period of the strong suppression mode may be ended without generating the operation reception effect (internal reception effect). It may be. In this case, among the plurality of variation patterns that are candidates for selection in the variation pattern determination, “the strong suppression mode is selected, but the operation reception effect (internal reception effect) is performed during the strong suppression mode”. “A variation pattern that does not occur” and “a variation pattern that generates an operation reception effect (internal reception effect) during the strong suppression mode” when included in the strong suppression mode. .

  Also, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the operation reception effect (internal reception effect) occurs while the effect sound of “BGM playback” is in the “strong suppression mode”, the “strong Even if the player does not notice that it is in the “suppression mode”, it is possible to recognize that the possibility that the “additional reception effect” has occurred is excluded based on the following effect elements.

  That is, when the “internal reception effect” occurs while the “BGM playback” effect sound is in the “strong suppression mode”, first, even when the first allowable sound is the “additional reception effect” Even in the case where the effect sound that can be output is output over the same time (in the figure, output in the “first mode”), instead of the “additional reception effect” based on the first allowable sound, It is possible to recognize that the "internal reception effect" has occurred. More specifically, the first permissible sound (see FIG. 400) output upon occurrence of the “additional reception effect” ends the output halfway even if the effect is received in the output state. The output sound is output for a predetermined period of time, while the “BGM playback” effect sound is in the “strong suppression mode” and is output when the “internal reception effect” occurs. The first permissible sound (see FIG. 401), when an effect is accepted when in the output state, ends the output halfway based on the effect acceptance.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the “intrinsic reception effect” is generated while the “BGM playback” effect sound is in the “strong suppression mode”, in addition to the first allowable sound, Since the second permissible sound is also output, by confirming whether or not the second permissible sound is output, the possibility that the “additional reception effect” has occurred is eliminated. It is also possible to recognize that However, as described above, the second permissible sound need not necessarily be prepared.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 400 and 401, the operation related display (display for prompting the operation) that appears within the set time (effective period) in which the reception of the production is allowed is also provided. , "Internal reception effect" occurs when "Internal reception effect" occurs while the "BGM playback" effect sound is in the "strong suppression mode", and "Additional reception effect" occurs It is possible to recognize that the possibility that the “additional reception effect” has occurred is also excluded.

  In addition, in the “internal reception effect” that occurs while the “BGM playback” effect sound is in the “strong suppression mode”, the automatic button function described above can be activated, In the “additional reception effect”, the automatic button function described above is not activated, and this also excludes the possibility that the “additional reception effect” has occurred. It is possible to recognize.

  As described above, when the “intrinsic reception effect” occurs while the “BGM playback” effect sound is in the “strong suppression mode”, various effects other than the effect elements related to the “suppression mode” are generated. The fact that the “additional reception effect” is occurring in the element is different from the case where the “additional reception effect” is occurring, the possibility that the “additional reception effect” has occurred is relatively excluded. It is possible to easily recognize and to concentrate on the “internal reception effect”.

  On the other hand, when the “intrinsic reception effect” occurs while the “BGM playback” effect sound is in the “non-suppressed mode”, the “additional reception effect” and the various effect elements have common points. By making it difficult to recognize which of the “internal reception effect” or “additional reception effect” is occurring, the “additional reception effect” has occurred. We are trying to provide a performance that makes people aware of the possibility of being.

  FIG. 402 is a time chart showing the contents of effects that appear when the “internal reception effect” as the symbol effect based on the variation pattern is generated while the “BGM playback” effect sound is in the “non-suppression mode”. It is. The “internal reception effect” shown in FIG. 402 corresponds to the variation pattern when a variation pattern different from “the variation pattern that can generate the operation reception effect shown in FIGS. 400 and 401” is selected. It may be generated as a symbol effect. However, here, it is assumed that when the same variation pattern (specific variation pattern) as the operation acceptance effect shown in FIGS. 400 and 401 is selected, a symbol effect corresponding to the specific variation pattern occurs. .

  As shown in FIG. 402, the “internal reception effect” that occurs in the “non-suppression mode” is also the “internal reception effect” shown in FIG. 401 that occurs in the “strong suppression mode”. Similar to “Regular reception effect”, even if any result is obtained in the effect determination (notice determination), it always occurs when a predetermined timing (here, timing tr71) in the symbol effect arrives. It has become a thing.

  However, the first permissible sound (first mode) output when the “internal reception effect” shown in FIG. 402 is generated is the first permissible sound output when the “additional reception effect” shown in FIG. 400 is generated. Similar to the sound (first mode), even if an effect is received when in the output state, the output is not terminated midway, but is output for a predetermined time (timing tr72a). . Therefore, when the first permissible sound is output in the first mode, it is difficult to distinguish between “internal reception effect” and “additional reception effect” based on this. .

  In addition, in the “internal reception effect” shown in FIG. 402, the second allowable sound is not output together with the output of the first allowable sound (first aspect), and this point is also shown in FIG. 400. It is the same as “Additional reception effect”.

  In addition, in the “internal reception effect” shown in FIG. 402, the operation means to be operated is displayed as an operation related display (display for prompting an operation) that appears within a set time (effective period) in which the effect reception is allowed. The imitation image and the gauge display suggesting the remaining time are only displayed, the message display is not displayed, and this is the same as the “additional reception effect” shown in FIG. It has become.

  Further, in the “internal reception effect” shown in FIG. 402, the operation opportunity is given only to the “operation button 410”, and the “sword decorative body 5001” is not set as the operation target. This is also the same as the “additional reception effect” shown in FIG.

  In addition, in the “internal reception effect” shown in FIG. 402, when the operation is not detected within the set time (effective period), the above-described automatic button function is not activated, and the post-operation effect is performed. The timing tr73 at which the set time (valid period) ends without occurring has arrived, and this is also the same as the “additional reception effect” shown in FIG.

  In this way, when the “internal reception effect” occurs while the “BGM playback” effect sound is in the “non-suppression mode”, the “BGM playback” effect sound becomes the “strong suppression mode”. Unlike the case where an “internal reception effect” occurs, various effect elements are common with the occurrence of an “additional reception effect”, and an “additional reception effect” may occur. You can be conscious of sex.

  However, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, while the production sound of “BGM playback” is in the “non-suppression mode”, “internal reception production (internal reception production in which the automatic button function is not activated)” ”Occurs, there is a case where an allowable reception sound (first allowable sound) is output and a case where a set time is generated without outputting the allowable reception sound (first allowable sound) itself. . On the other hand, when the “additional reception effect” occurs while the “BGM playback” effect sound is in the “non-suppression mode”, the acceptable reception sound (first acceptable sound) itself is not output. A set time is not generated, and an acceptable sound (first allowable sound) is always output.

  According to such a configuration, when the effect reception is permitted while the effect sound of “BGM playback” is in the “non-suppression mode”, when the reception permission sound is output, the “internal reception effect” Or “additional reception effect” is difficult to recognize, but when the acceptable reception sound is not output, “internal reception effect” instead of “additional reception effect” It becomes possible to recognize that it is occurring. Whether or not an acceptable reception sound (first allowable sound) is output when the “internal reception effect” is generated while the “BGM playback” effect sound is in the “non-suppression mode”. It is desirable that it is determined according to the type of variation pattern, not the production determination. “Internal reception effect” in a non-suppression mode in which an acceptable reception sound (first allowable sound) is output, and “Internal reception effect” in a non-inhibition mode in which an acceptable reception sound (first allowable sound) is not output May be sequentially executed within the same symbol effect (for example, a symbol effect based on a specific variation pattern).

  Also, according to the above configuration, when an operation reception effect in which the automatic button function is not activated appears, when an acceptable reception sound (first allowable sound) is output, an “internal reception effect” and an “additional reception effect” It is difficult to recognize which of the above is occurring, but when the allowable reception sound (first allowable sound) is not output, it can be recognized that the operation reception effect is an “internal reception effect” It becomes like this.

  As described above, in the “additional reception effect”, the first permissible sound can be output in a mode different from the first mode based on the result of the performance determination (notice determination). When the “internal reception effect” occurs while the “BGM playback” effect sound is in the “non-suppression mode”, the sound may not be output (for example, “specific” shown in FIG. 394). Embodiment "). However, with respect to the different modes, it is desirable that the generation rate of the first permissible sound is lower than that in the first mode.

  With respect to the “internal reception effect” shown in FIG. 402, other examples and modifications relating to the operation reception effect shown in FIG.

  In the production examples shown in FIG. 399 and FIG. 400, for the convenience of explanation, it is illustrated as if the production judgment is performed while the design production is being performed. Is performed at the start of symbol variation.

  In addition, in the example of production shown in FIGS. 390 to 402, with respect to the aspect of the post-operation production according to the production acceptance, when the big hit is obtained by the big hit determination and when the big hit is lost by the big hit judgment And may be different. For example, when a big hit is obtained in the big hit determination, the production examples are as shown in FIG. 390 to FIG. 402. On the other hand, when a big hit is lost in the big hit determination, FIG. The post-operation effect may be performed in a manner different from the effect example shown in 402.

  The present invention has been described with reference to some embodiments. However, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and various modifications can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention as described below. Improvement and design changes are possible.

  For example, there is a case where a display such as “auto button is being set” is performed in each of the above-described effects related to the automatic effect function, but this display is not necessarily performed. In particular, when it is realized as a pachinko machine 1 that is not in the pachinko machine 1 that is set to the automatic production mode but is always in a state in which the automatic production function can be activated and the processing itself such as “setting to the production state” is not installed, It is desirable not to display such as “auto button is being set”. In the pachinko machine 1 in which the processing itself such as “setting to the production state” is not installed, the effective period in which the automatic production function is played and the automatic production function are provided according to the type of the operation reception production that is allowed to be operated by the player. An effective period that is not played may be generated.

  In addition, when the automatic production function is adopted in each production example described above, the timing for automatically generating operation reception (automatic reception) within the operation effective period is set to any timing within the operation effective period. It may be. In order to suitably give an operation opportunity to a player, an operation is performed when an operation is not detected until a predetermined timing after the operation effective period has elapsed and more than half the time has elapsed. It is desirable that the reception is automatically generated (automatic reception) and the post-operation effect is started based on the automatically generated operation reception. In this sense, an operation reception is automatically generated (automatic reception) when no operation is detected until the remaining time within the operation valid period reaches one frame, and a post-operation effect is generated based on the automatically generated operation reception. It is most desirable to get started. Further, in each of the above-described effect examples related to the automatic effect function, when the bar display is not hidden after the effective period ends and is maintained, the operation to be operated according to the timing at which the effective period ends. It is desirable to perform an effect that changes the mode of the means (for example, vibration or turning off the LED). As a result, even if the bar display is not hidden and is continuously displayed, it is expected to prevent misrecognition by the player such as “Why does the validity period continue?” Become so.

  In addition, in each production example described with reference to FIGS. 285 to 303 and the production example described with reference to FIG. 387, after the operation with the haze image (or bar display) maintained without being hidden. In the case where the production is started, “time from the timing at which the operation is detected to the timing at which the haze image (or bar display) is not displayed (the period from timing tf2 to tf4, the period from timing tg3 to tg5, the timing As for “the period from th3 to th4, etc.”, there may be at least several frames (for example, two frames). Alternatively, there may be only one frame. Even if there is only such time, the period during which the spear image (or bar display) is displayed overlaps with the period after the start of the post-operation effect, and may be recognized by some players. In some cases.

  In the example of production related to the above-described “improving production using the automatic production function (see FIG. 300)”, the automatic production function is not activated in the state where the hold display on the production display device 1600 is hidden. An automatic reception effect and an automatic reception effect that enables the automatic effect function may be generated. According to such a configuration, it is possible to generate a reception effect in a state where the number of holdings is large or small, that is, in a state where it is difficult to grasp the ease of enabling the automatic performance function. Become. Furthermore, for example, when a non-automatic reception effect occurs with the hold display hidden, the subsequent symbol fluctuations stop more than when a non-automatic reception effect occurs with the hold display displayed. If the ratio of the automatic reception effects to be further increased until it is released, it will be effective when the hold display is hidden and it is difficult to grasp the ease of enabling the automatic effect function. Interestingness can be added.

  The discrete component is an electronic component in which only a single function element (an element having one electrical function (such as a resistance element)) is encapsulated. For example, the number of elements having a specific function is two or three. It is a concept that includes components that are enclosed in one package.

  In addition, in the explanation example of “help image for prompting understanding of production”, a ruler is exemplified as “a guide image showing a unit of length in the horizontal direction”, but other images are used. May be. In short, it is sufficient if the player operates a display image that is drawn without being affected by the special effect. For example, it is not an image intended to promote understanding of the effect, but has other functions. A display image intended to be played (for example, an image that suggests the degree of expectation, an image that suggests the current production state, an image that suggests a state related to production settings, etc.) is drawn to extend in the horizontal direction. It may be displayed as an image. In addition, such an image does not necessarily need to be drawn by one, but may be drawn so as to extend in the horizontal direction as a whole by arranging a plurality of images side by side.

  Also, in the example of “Preventing Mischief against Multiple Operating Means”, mischief acts are very different from fraudulent acts such as magnet goto. It can lead to profit. Therefore, the images that appear based on the detection of the operation by the player (including images that appear in the process until the specific video appears) should be realized as having nothing to do with prank prevention. Also good. In short, when an operation by a player is performed on a plurality of operation means in a predetermined pattern (predetermined procedure), a “game effect corresponding to the big hit determination is executed in the effect display device 1600. Display (playback) a specific video that cannot appear in the current state (it may be a video that has nothing to do with prevention of mischief (for example, a transition to a state in which a predetermined movie is played) ) ”,“ Even if there is an operation on the volume adjustment button, changes in the volume setting value for the output volume of the production sound will not be accepted, and the current volume setting value will not be displayed. ” Even if there is an operation on the button, the change of the brightness setting value related to the brightness of the effect lamp is not accepted, and the current brightness setting value is not displayed. As long as it performs control to generate me. Note that in this case, the player can generate a function restriction period during which the above-mentioned specific moving image is played by his / her own intention by operating a plurality of operation means with a predetermined pattern (procedure). It is.

  In the example of “preventing mischief with respect to a plurality of operation means”, in the state where the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner, the partial restriction period may be controlled.

  In addition, for the explanation example of “Preventing noise caused by the adjustment confirmation sound when opening a store”, in short, control to a normal state in which the volume adjustment confirmation sound and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound can be output immediately after the power is turned on. It is a gaming machine that is controlled to the normal state after passing through the restricted state where the volume adjustment confirmation sound and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound cannot be output, and if the game is started in the restricted state, the restricted state is terminated early. It is only necessary to be able to be controlled in a normal state, and the length of time that is maintained as a restricted state may be set appropriately (set from a few seconds to a few hours). Good. If the length of time that is maintained as a restricted state is set too short, the above-mentioned effects in the game period immediately after opening the store will not be achieved, but noise when the hall side sets the volume immediately after turning on the power It is possible to suppress this.

  Further, in the example of “control according to the volume adjustment confirmation sound according to the production importance level”, an advantageous condition exists when the first special symbol is changing and when the second special symbol is changing. While the change of the second special symbol on the side where the game is allowed is not output, the volume adjustment confirmation sound and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound are not output, but during the change of the first special symbol on the side where the game is allowed to be performed under disadvantageous conditions The case where a volume adjustment confirmation sound and a brightness adjustment confirmation sound are output is exemplified. However, it is also possible to adopt the technology for gaming machines in which the second special symbol is not mounted, for example, preparing a specific symbol that will be drawn in a condition that is less favorable than the first special symbol However, the volume adjustment confirmation sound and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound are not output during the fluctuation of the first special symbol (special symbol) on the side that can be played under advantageous conditions, but the side that can be played under disadvantageous conditions The sound volume adjustment confirmation sound and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound may be output during the change of the specific symbol.

  In addition, in the explanation example of “Performance of Operation Acceptance Period (Effective Period) itself”, Acceptable Sound Accompanied with Generation of Special Operation Reception Effect and Accompanying Generation of First and Second Operation Reception Effects An effect sound different from the acceptable reception sound may be used. In FIG. 388, the acceptable sound is output from the timing tr1 (tr11). However, as “one sound data” straddling the timing tr1 (tr11), for example, it is assigned to the channel from the timing trA. You may make it output.

  That is, in the embodiment, the gaming machine applied to the pachinko machine 1 is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and is applied to a pachislot machine or a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine are fused. Even in this case, the same effect can be obtained.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 Pachinko machine 2 Outer frame 3 Door frame 4 Main body frame 5 Game board 5a Game area 1402 Normal symbol display 1403 First special symbol display 1404 First special reservation number display 1405 Second special symbol display 1406 Second special reservation Number display 1407 Round display 1500 Peripheral control unit 1510 Peripheral control board 2001 General winning opening 2002 First starting opening 2003 Gate part 2004 Second starting opening 2005 Large winning opening

Claims (1)

A determination means for performing determination;
Privilege granting means for granting a privilege to a player based on a predetermined result obtained by the determination by the determination unit;
A reception effect generating means capable of generating a reception effect to which an operation opportunity is given and capable of executing a post-operation effect when the reception is received in the reception effect;
A pre-permission related display means for performing a pre-permission operation related display that suggests that the stage reception is allowed upon occurrence of the reception effect,
The reception effect includes at least a first reception effect and a second reception effect having different contents as the post-operation effect, the pre-permission operation-related display performed when the first reception effect is generated, The pre-permission operation-related display performed when the second reception effect is generated is different in the length of time from when the pre-permission operation-related display is started until the production reception is permitted.
further,
A specific period setting means for setting a specific effective period in which an operation by a player can be accepted multiple times;
Within the specific effective period set by the specific period setting means, the player's operation state is maintained multiple times as a single operation mode in which only a relatively short time is maintained, or the player's operation state is relatively long When it is performed in a mode of long operation that is maintained over time, it comprises a specific effect control means that can advance the contents of the specific effect in a predetermined manner,
A game machine comprising: a moving image display unit capable of displaying, on a display device, a spear image simulating an operation means to be received as a moving image by sequentially displaying a plurality of spear images.